FSTU Arabic

First Steps to Understanding
Arabic
Hashim Mohamed
Al-Qalam Institute
First Steps to Understanding Arabic
First Edition 2022 (Third Print)
ISBN: 978-0-9576534-4-3
Compiler Hashim Mohamed
Contact: Al-Qalam Institute

6 Sylvan Avenue,
Leicester, LE5 3SN,
United Kingdom
Email info@alqalaminstitute.org
Website www.alqalaminstitute.org
YouTube www.youtube.com/alqalaminstitute
Telegram https://t.me/AlQalamLeicester
If you see any mistakes in this book, have any comments or

suggestions, please feel free to contact us. Jazakallah.
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be

reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,
photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior
written permission of the author.
Contents
Contents ......................................................................................3
Foreword ...................................................................................11
UNIT 1 ........................................................................................ 15
Introduction: Words ..................................................................16
Part 1: Nouns .............................................................................17
Characteristic 1: Definite and Indefinite ................................17
Characteristic 2: Gender ........................................................21
Characteristic 3: Number .......................................................23
Characteristic 4: Irab .............................................................27
Part 2: Verbs ..............................................................................32
Characteristic 1: Tense ..........................................................33
Characteristic 3: Affirmative – Negative ................................37
Characteristic 4: Gender ........................................................40
Characteristic 5: Voice ...........................................................41
Part 3: Particles .........................................................................46
Characteristic 2: Governance.................................................46
Supplement ...............................................................................48
‫ َم ْصدَ ر‬........................................................................................48
ُ ‫ ا ْل ُم ْش َت َّق‬....................................................................................49
‫ات‬
Summary ...................................................................................56
Key Terms ..............................................................................56
Vocabulary.............................................................................57
UNIT 2 Section 1......................................................................... 61
Introduction: Sentences ............................................................62
ِ ْ ‫ َا ْلجم َل ُة‬.......................................................................63
Part 1: ‫اْل ْس ِم َّی ُة‬ ْ ُ
3
ِ ْ ‫ ا ْلجم َل ُة‬.........................................66
Part 2: Additional Rules of ‫اْل ْس ِم َّی ُة‬ ْ ُ
‫ فِ ْعل نَاقِص‬....................................................................................67
‫ َح ْرف ُم َش َّبه بِا ْل ِف ْع ِل‬............................................................................74
The ‫ َخ َبر‬as a Noun ...................................................................78
The ‫ َخ َبر‬as a Participle .............................................................80
Summary ...................................................................................81
UNIT 2 Section 2......................................................................... 83
Introduction: ‫ ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة‬.............................................................84
Part 1: ‫ ا ْل ُج ْم َل ُة ا ْل ِف ْعلِ َّی ُة‬.........................................................................85
Subject...................................................................................85
Object ....................................................................................88
Direct and Indirect Object .....................................................90
Deputy Subject ......................................................................93
Adverbs of Time and Place ....................................................96
Adverbs of Degree and Frequency.........................................99
Adverbs of Reason ...............................................................102
State ....................................................................................104
Clarification .........................................................................106
Exclusion..............................................................................108
Part 2: Additional Rules of ‫ ا ْل ُج ْم َل ُة ا ْل ِف ْعلِ َّی ُة‬........................................111
Tense ...................................................................................111
Emphasising the Verb ..........................................................112
Emphasising Parts of a Sentence .........................................117
Summary .................................................................................125
Key Terms ............................................................................130
Vocabulary...........................................................................131
UNIT 3 Section 1....................................................................... 135
Introduction: Phrases ..............................................................136
4
Part 1: Descriptive Phrases ......................................................137
A Descriptive Phrase in a Sentence ......................................139
Non-Human and Broken Human Plurals ..............................141
Removing the ‫ َمنْ ُع ْوت‬..............................................................143
Differentiating Between ‫ َخ َبر‬and ‫ َن ْعت‬.....................................146
Part 2: Demonstrative Phrases ................................................147
A Demonstrative Phrase in a Sentence ................................150
Differentiating Between ‫ َخ َبر‬and ‫ ُم َشار إِ َل ْی ِه‬.................................151
Part 3: Conjunction Phrases ....................................................153
A Conjunctive Phrase in a Sentence.....................................155
Other Conjunctions .............................................................156
Multiple ‫ َم ْع ُط ْوف‬......................................................................164
The Separated and Intertwined ‫ َم ْع ُط ْوف َع َل ْی ِه‬and ‫ َم ْع ُط ْوف‬.............165
‫ َم ْع ُط ْوف‬vs ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه َثان‬..................................................................167
‫ َخ َبر َثان‬and ‫ َن ْعت َثان‬....................................................................168
‫ َم ْف ُع ْول َم َع ُه‬.................................................................................170
‫ف َع ْطف‬ ُ ‫ َح ْر‬Between Sentences ................................................171
Part 4: Appositive Phrases .......................................................174
Part 5: Possessive Phrases .......................................................176
A Possessive Phrase in a Sentence .......................................178
Nested ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬.....................................................................181
ُ ‫ َا ْل ُم َض‬as ‫ ْا ْل ُم َثنَّی‬and ‫السال ِ ُم‬
‫اف‬ َّ ‫ َج ْم ُع ا ْل ُم َذك َِّر‬.............................................182
‫اف‬ُ ‫ َا ْل ُم َض‬as ‫ َا ْْلَ ْس َما ُء ا ْل َخ ْم َس ُة‬..............................................................183
Possessive Phrases with Adjective Meanings ......................184
Part 6: Number Phrases ...........................................................196
Cardinal Numbers ................................................................196
Ordinal Numbers .................................................................217
Supplement: Nested Phrases...................................................221
Completion of Irab Table .....................................................230
5
Summary .................................................................................234
Key Terms ............................................................................234
Vocabulary...........................................................................235
UNIT 3 Section 2....................................................................... 241
Introduction: Prepositional Phrase ..........................................242
Part 1: ‫ ِش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬in a Sentence ...................................................246
‫ ِش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬in ‫اْل ْس ِم َّی ُة‬ ِ ْ ‫ َا ْلجم َل ُة‬.............................................................246
ْ ُ
‫ ِش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬in ‫ َا ْل ُج ْم َل ُة ا ْل ِف ْعلِ َّی ُة‬..............................................................253
Part 2: ‫ ِش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬as a Phrase .......................................................273
Supplement: ‫ َح ْرف َجار‬as a ‫ َح ْر ُف ِص َلة‬..............................................283
Summary .................................................................................290
Key Terms ............................................................................294
Vocabulary...........................................................................294
UNIT 4 Section 1....................................................................... 297
Introduction: Personal Pronouns .............................................298
Part 1: ‫ َض ِم ْیر َم ْر ُف ْوع‬........................................................................299
ِ‫ َض ِم ْی ُر ا ْل ُم ْبتَدَ إ‬...............................................................................299
‫اع ِل‬ ِ ‫ َض ِمیر ا ْل َف‬...............................................................................301
ُْ
Part 2: ‫ َض ِم ْیر َمن ُْص ْوب‬......................................................................326
‫ اِ ْس ُم إِ َّن‬.....................................................................................327
‫ َض ِم ْی ُر ا ْل َم ْف ُع ْو ِل بِ ِه‬...........................................................................328
Part 3: ‫ َض ِم ْیر َم ْج ُر ْور‬.......................................................................334
‫اف إِ َل ْی ِه‬
ِ ‫ َض ِمیر ا ْلم َض‬.........................................................................335
ُ ُْ
‫ َض ِم ْی ُر ا ْل َم ْج ُر ْو ِر‬.............................................................................336
Overview of Pronouns .........................................................338
Supplement: Additional Rules of Pronouns .............................340
Additional Rules of Demonstrative Pronouns ......................340
6
The ‫ َخ َبر‬of Pronouns .............................................................341
Reflexive Pronouns ..............................................................344
Reciprocal Pronouns ............................................................345
ِ ‫ َف‬with a Pronoun .................................................347
The ‫اعل ُمؤَ َّخر‬
Summary .................................................................................348
Key Terms ............................................................................348
Vocabulary...........................................................................349
UNIT 4 Section 2....................................................................... 351
Part 1: Interrogative Pronouns ................................................352
Polar Questions ...................................................................353
Non-Polar Questions ...........................................................358
Supplement: Rhetorical Questions ......................................380
Part 2: Emphatic Phrases .........................................................383
Introduction to ‫ َت ْأكِ ْید‬..............................................................383
‫ َت ْأكِ ْید َل ْفظِي‬.................................................................................385
‫ َت ْأكِ ْید َم ْعن َِوي‬................................................................................390
Additional Rules of ‫ َت ْأكِ ْید‬........................................................405
Summary .................................................................................413
Key Terms ............................................................................413
Vocabulary...........................................................................415
UNIT 5 Section 1....................................................................... 417
Introduction: ‫ ُج ْم َلة ُصغ َْری‬.............................................................418
Part 1: ‫ َخ َبر‬as a ‫ ُج ْم َلة ُصغ َْری‬............................................................421
The ‫ َخ َبر‬as a ‫ ُج ْم َلة اِ ْس ِم َّیة‬..............................................................421
The ‫ َخ َبر‬as a ‫ ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة‬...............................................................423
Supplement .........................................................................425
Part 2: ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬as a ‫ ُج ْم َلة ُصغ َْری‬.......................................................430
Quotation Without ‫ َأ ْن‬...........................................................430
7
Quotations with ‫ َأ ْن‬...............................................................431
Part 3: ‫ َحال‬as a ‫ ُج ْم َلة ُصغ َْری‬...........................................................433
‫ َحال‬as a ‫ ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة‬.....................................................................433
‫ َحال‬as ‫اس ِم َّیة‬
ْ ‫ ُج ْم َلة‬.......................................................................437
Part 4: ‫ َم ْع ُط ْوف‬as a ‫ ُج ْم َلة ُصغ َْری‬........................................................439
Part 5: ‫ َبدَ ل‬as a ‫ ُج ْم َلة ُصغ َْری‬............................................................440
Part 6: ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬as a ‫ ُج ْم َلة ُصغ َْری‬.....................................................441
‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬as a Sentence with Regular Adverbs ........................441
‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬as a Sentence with Special Adverbs .........................444
Part 7: ‫ َن ْعت‬as a ‫ ُج ْم َلة ُصغ َْری‬...........................................................459
Summary .................................................................................470
Key Terms ............................................................................470
Vocabulary...........................................................................470
UNIT 5 Section 2....................................................................... 473
Introduction: ‫ اِسم ُمؤَ َّول‬with ‫ اِ ْسم َم ْو ُص ْول‬..........................................474
‫ اِ ْسم َم ْو ُص ْول‬and its ‫ ِص َلة‬...............................................................475
Part 1: ‫ اِ ْسم َمؤَ َّول‬in a Sentence ....................................................484
Part 2: ‫ اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول‬in a Phrase ........................................................486
Supplement: ‫ َالنَّكِ َر ُة ا ْل َم ْو ُص ْو َف ُة‬..........................................................491
Summary .................................................................................495
Key Terms ............................................................................495
UNIT 5 Section 3....................................................................... 497
Introduction: ‫ اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول‬with ‫ َح ْرف َم ْو ُص ْول‬.........................................498
The ‫ ُح ُر ْوف َم ْو ُص ْو َلة‬.....................................................................498
Part 1: ‫ ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬and ‫ ُم ْبتَدَ أ ُمؤَ َّخر‬as an ‫ اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول‬.........................................506
8
Part 2: ‫ َخ َبر‬as an ‫اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول‬.............................................................509
ِ ‫ َف‬as an ‫ اِسم مؤَ ول‬...........................................................510
Part 3: ‫اعل‬ َّ ُ ْ
Part 4: ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬as an ‫ اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول‬.......................................................512
‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬with ‫ َأ ْن‬........................................................................512
‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬with ‫ َأ َّن‬........................................................................514
Part 5: ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه‬as an ‫ اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول‬......................................................516
‫ َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه‬as an ‫ اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول‬..............................................................516
‫ َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح‬as an ‫ اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول‬...................................................520
Part 6: ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول َل ُه‬as an ‫ اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول‬.......................................................522
‫ َم ْف ُع ْول َل ُه‬as an ‫ اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول‬...............................................................522
‫ َم ْف ُع ْول َل ُه َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح‬with an ‫ اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول‬................................................524
Part 7: ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق‬as an ‫اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول‬....................................................528
Part 8: ‫ ُم ْس َت ْثنًی‬as an ‫ اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول‬.........................................................529
An ‫ اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول‬after ‫ إِ َّْل‬for Emphasis ...........................................530
Part 9: ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬as an ‫ اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول‬......................................................531
Supplement: Verbal Phrases....................................................534
Introduction ........................................................................534
The ‫ َم ْصدَ ر‬Verbal Phrase ........................................................535
The ‫اع ِل‬ِ ‫ اِسم ا ْل َف‬Verbal Phrase ...................................................541
ُ ْ
ِ
The ‫ ال ِّص َف ُة ا ْل ُم َش َّب َه ُة بِ ْاس ِم ا ْل َفاع ِل‬Verbal Phrase ...................................548
The ‫ اِ ْس ُم ا ْل َم ْف ُع ْو ِل‬Verbal Phrase .................................................551
The ‫ اِ ْس ُم ا ْل َت ْف ِض ْی ِل‬Verbal Phrase..................................................552
Summary .................................................................................558
Key Terms ............................................................................558
Vocabulary...........................................................................559
UNIT 6 ...................................................................................... 561
Introduction: Joining Sentences Together ...............................562
9
Part 1: Vocative Expressions ....................................................563
Part 2: Oaths............................................................................568
Part 3: Conditional Sentences..................................................571
Real Conditionals .................................................................573
Unreal Conditionals .............................................................582
Part 4: Sentences after ‫ َا ْْلَ ْم ُر‬and ‫ َالن َّْه ُي‬.........................................589
‫اب ْاْلَ ْم ِر‬
ُ ‫ َج َو‬................................................................................589
‫اب الن َّْه ِي‬
ُ ‫ َج َو‬................................................................................590
Part 5: ‫ ُج ْم َلة َت ْعلِ ْیلِ َّیة‬........................................................................593
Part 6: ‫ ُج ْم َلة ْاستِدْ َراكِ َّیة‬.....................................................................598
Summary .................................................................................601
Key Terms ............................................................................601
Vocabulary...........................................................................601
10
Foreword
All praise is due to Allah ▐, without whose help nothing is

possible.
Alhamdulillah, through His grace and bounty, we present ‘First
Steps to Understanding Arabic’.
The Journey
In the year 2000, I started my journey in the Islamic Sciences,
commencing with the study of various primers in Arabic language,
written in Urdu, primarily for an Urdu speaking audience. Some of
these books were exercise-based, which I greatly enjoyed, while
others were merely rote memorised.
After graduating in 2005, one of the first books I taught was ‫ملعم ال شإنإء‬.
I enjoyed teaching this text as it involved practical application of
Arabic. I liked the approach of introducing rules followed by
exercises to help reinforce learning.
Teaching this book gave me an impetus to embark on my own
journey of developing learner-friendly materials for my students.
For approximately seven years I compiled notes and exercises,
along with translation tips, taking on board students’ feedback.
In 2012, I began teaching English speaking students who did not
know Urdu. This posed a new challenge all together as it forced me
to transfer all my work into English.
This led to the publication of the first two parts of ‘Arabic a Step by
Step Guide’ in 2014, through the grace and mercy of Allah
▐. It was intended as a multiple part series. However, due
to shortcomings in the structure and layout, I decided to start
again.
After two years of numerous drafts, a new, easy-to-understand
format was developed and published in 2016 as ‘First Steps to
11
Understanding Nahw’. It covers the essentials of the Arabic
language, in a simple, brief style.
Given the encouraging reception of ‘First Steps to Understanding
Nahw’, over the next five years this project was expanded to
encompass further explanation and many more concepts.
After a decade and a half of countless revisions, through the mercy
of Allah ▐, I humbly present, ‘First Steps to Understanding
Arabic’. I ask Allah ▐ and I also request you all to ask Him,
that he accepts this work, overlooks its shortcomings, and makes it
a means of reward in the hereafter.
Who is this book for?
This book is primarily aimed at students who wish to learn classical
Arabic, in view of studying the Quran, Hadith and other Islamic
material. Thus, the vocabulary used is largely from Quran, Hadith
and classical Arabic.
‘First Steps to Understanding Arabic’ is not designed to teach
students to converse in Arabic, nor to prepare students for
Modern Standard Arabic.
Basic skills in reading and writing Arabic are required before
studying this book.
Guidelines for Teachers
The concepts discussed in this book have been clearly explained
for students to be able to practically apply them. Both the rules
and vocabulary are reinforced, revisited, and built upon across
units to support learning.
Exercises are, ideally, all completed verbally, as a class, so that
rules can be implemented with ease. It is recommended that
students then write out the tarkib of at least one sentence from
each exercise.
We have adopted the concept of tarkib, popular within the Indian
subcontinent, in a colour coded, diagrammatic form. When
understood as an equivalent of classical irab its flaws are clear,
12
(such as labelling a ‫ َم ْج ُر ْور‬word as part of a ‫اعل‬ ِ ‫) َف‬, however, our intent
is in line with parsing; grouping words together to understand their
role in translation, and not irab.
Exercises in translating from English to Arabic have not been
included in this book as this can be incredibly challenging and time-
consuming for beginners. However, as a supplementary exercise,
students may write a few sentences of their own, using the
vocabulary already used in the book.
Abundant written practice is useful not only to reinforce the
acquired concepts, but also to develop handwriting and spelling.
Note that some Arabic rules that are easier for beginners to
understand, despite being non-mainstream, are adopted.
Examples of this approach include the irab of ‫ْس‬ ِ ‫جن‬ ِ ‫ َْل لِنَ ْف ِي ا ْل‬and ‫فِ ْع ُل امر‬,
further labelling of the ‫ َجار‬and ‫ َم ْج ُر ْور‬as ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح‬, assessing the ‫ِش ْب ُه‬
‫ ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬after a ‫ َم ْع ِر َفة‬etc.
Regardless of these extensions and slight variations, this textbook
is a very comprehensive study of Arabic.
Institutions with time constraints may use our ‘First Steps to
Understanding Arabic Abridged’, which covers the core material,
without the exercises.
Acknowledgments
There are many people without whom this project would not have
been possible.
May Allah ▐ reward them all in this world and the hereafter
for their contributions and help. Ameen.
13
14
WORDS
Introduction: Words
Part 1: Nouns
Part 2: Verbs
Part 3: Particles
Supplement
Summary
15
Introduction: Words
In Arabic a word is called ‫كَلِ َمة‬. Arabic words are divided into three
categories: nouns, verbs, and particles.
Nouns
A noun is a name or a thing, e.g. man, pen, paper.
A noun is called an ‫اِ ْسم‬.
Nouns usually have an ‫ َا ْل‬at the beginning or a ‫ َتنْ ِو ْين‬at the end.
‫َق َلم‬ ‫َا ْل َق َل ُم‬
Verbs
A verb is an action, e.g. run, sit.
A verb is called a ‫فِ ْعل‬.
Verbs come in the following patterns:
‫اِ ْفت َْح‬ ‫َي ْفت َُح‬ ‫َفت ََح‬
Particles
A particle is usually a one- or two-letter word e.g. on, at.
A particle is called a ‫ َح ْرف‬.
‫فِ ْي‬ ‫لِـ‬
Key Words
In vocab lists, the letter ‫ ج‬indicates ‫ َج ْمع‬, plural.
English Arabic English Arabic
verb ‫ فِ ْعل ج َأ ْف َعال‬word ‫كَلِ َمة ج كَلِ َمات‬
particle ‫َح ْرف ج ُح ُر ْوف‬ noun ‫اِ ْسم ج َأ ْس َماء‬
Summary
Words (‫)كَلِ َمات‬
Noun (‫)اِ ْسم‬ Verb (‫)فِ ْعل‬ Particle (‫) َح ْرف‬
One- or two-Letter
Name, Thing Action Words
‫َق َلم‬ ‫َا ْل َق َل ُم‬ ‫اِ ْفت َْح‬ ‫َي ْفت َُح‬ ‫َفت ََح‬ ‫ فِ ْي‬،‫ِل‬
16
Part 1: Nouns
Nouns have four important characteristics. These are:
1. Definite – Indefinite 3. Number
2. Gender 4. I‘rab
DING is a mnemonic for remembering these characteristics.
D efinite - Indefinite
I ‘rab
N umber
G ender
Characteristic 1: Definite and Indefinite

Definite
A definite noun is either:
1. A proper noun (name) e.g. Muhammad.
2. A noun with the before it e.g. the pen.
The ‫ َا ْل‬at the beginning of an Arabic noun is equivalent to the
word the in English.
In Arabic, a definite noun is called ‫ َم ْع ِر َفة‬.
‫َال َّر ُس ْو ُل‬ ‫ُم َح َّمد‬
the messenger Muhammad
Adding ‫ َا ْل‬to a Noun
When ‫ َا ْل‬is added to a noun, sometimes the ‫ َْلم‬is pronounced, and
sometimes it is not.
‫َال َّر ُج ُل‬ ‫َا ْل َما ُء‬
The letters before which the ‫ َْلم‬is pronounced are called ‫ ُح ُر ْوف َق َم ِر َّية‬,
moon letters; letters which resemble the moon. Just as other stars
are seen next to the moon, the ‫ َْلم‬is pronounced next to these
letters.
The letters before which the ‫ َْلم‬is not pronounced are called ‫ُح ُر ْوف‬
‫ َش ْم ِس َّیة‬, sun letters; letters which resemble the sun. Just as other
stars are not seen next to the sun, the ‫ َْلم‬is not pronounced next to
17
these letters. When the ‫ َْلم‬is not pronounced, it is absorbed into
the first letter of the noun.
Remember, irrespective of whether the ‫ َْلم‬is pronounced or not, it
must be written in all cases.
The following table presents the ‫ ُح ُر ْوف َق َم ِر َّية‬and ‫ ُح ُر ْوف َش ْم ِس َّیة‬.
‫ُح ُر ْوف َش ْم ِس َّیة‬ ‫ُح ُر ْوف َق َم ِر َّية‬
َّ ‫َا‬
‫لش ْم ُس‬ ‫ش‬ ِ ‫َالت‬
‫َّاج ُر‬ ‫ت‬ ‫َا ْل َف ُم‬ ‫ف‬ ‫َا ْْلَ ُب‬ ‫أ‬
‫لصدْ ُر‬َّ ‫َا‬ ‫ص‬ ‫َال َّث ْو ُب‬ ‫ث‬ ‫َا ْل َق َم ُر‬ ‫ق‬ ُ ‫َا ْل َب‬
‫اب‬ ‫ب‬
‫ف‬ُ ‫لض ْی‬ َّ ‫َا‬ ‫ض‬ ‫َالدُّ ْن َیا‬ ‫د‬ ُ ‫َا ْل َك ْل‬
‫ب‬ ‫ك‬ ‫َا ْل َجنَّ ُة‬ ‫ج‬
ِ ‫َا ْل َما ُء‬ ِ ‫َا ْل‬
‫ب‬ ُ ‫َال َّطال‬ ‫ط‬ ‫ب‬ َّ ‫َا‬
ُ ‫لذ َه‬ ‫ذ‬ ‫م‬ ‫ح َم ُار‬ ‫ح‬
‫َال ُّظ ْه ُر‬ ‫ظ‬ ‫َا َّلر ُج ُل‬ ‫ر‬ ُ‫َا ْل َو َلد‬ ‫و‬ ُ‫َا ْل ُخ ْبز‬ ‫خ‬
‫َال َّل ْح ُم‬ ‫ل‬ ‫َالزَّ ْه َر ُة‬ ‫ز‬ ‫َا ْل َه َوا ُء‬ ‫ه‬ ‫َا ْل َع ْی ُن‬ ‫ع‬
‫َالن َّْج ُم‬ ‫ن‬ َّ ‫َا‬
‫لس َم ُك‬ ‫س‬ ُ‫َا ْل َید‬ ‫ي‬ ‫َا ْل َغدَ ا ُء‬ ‫غ‬
Translation of ‫َا ْل‬

The Arabic definite article, ‫ َا ْل‬, is usually translated as the English
definite article, the.
‫َالنَّبِ ُّي‬ ‫َال َّر ُس ْو ُل‬
the prophet the messenger
However, there are a few exceptions:
1. If the noun after ‫ َا ْل‬refers to something tangible in the general
sense, ‫ َا ْل‬can be translated as a or omitted altogether.
ُ‫َا ْل َو َلد‬ ‫َا ْْلَ ْو َْل ُد‬
a child children
2. If the noun after ‫ َا ْل‬refers to something intangible.
‫َا ْل ِع ْل ُم‬
knowledge
3. The word ‫ا ْل َم ْر ُء‬. This is translated as a person.
‫َا ْل َم ْر ُء‬
a person
18
Indefinite
An indefinite noun is a noun with the letter a/an before it.
a pen an angel
In Arabic, an indefinite noun is called ‫نَكِ َرة‬. A ‫ نَكِ َرة‬word will have a
‫ َتنْ ِو ْين‬at the end.
‫َر ُس ْول‬
a messenger
Translation of ‫َتن ِْو ْين‬
Nouns with ‫ َتن ِْو ْين‬are translated as follows:
1. Singular words are translated as a.
‫َر ُس ْول‬
a messenger
2. Plural words are translated as some or a few.
‫ُط ََّّلب‬ ‫ُط ََّّلب‬
some students a few students
19
Vocab
Below is a list of new vocabulary. In the right column the Arabic
word is given followed by its plural which is represented by a ‫ج‬.
The table reads from right to left in Arabic alphabetical order.
child ‫ طِ ْفل ج َأ ْط َفال‬imam, leader ‫إِ َمام ج َأئِ َّمة‬
pen ‫ َق َلم ج َأ ْق ََّلم‬woman ‫ نِ ْس َوة‬،‫اِ ْم َرأة ج نِ َساء‬
book ‫كِتَاب ج ُكتُب‬ garden, heaven ‫َجنَّة ج َجنَّات‬

‫اس ُّي‬ِ ‫كُر ِسي ج كَر‬ ‫َرب َج َأ ْر َباب‬
chair َ ْ lord, nourisher
teacher (male) ‫ ُم َع ِّلم ج ُم َع ِّل ُم ْو َن‬man ‫َر ُجل ج ِر َجال‬
teacher (female) ‫ ُم َع ِّل َمة ج ُم َع ِّل َمات‬messenger ‫َر ُس ْول ج ُر ُسل‬

ِ ‫َطالِب ج ُط ََّّلب‬
desk ‫ب‬ُ ‫ َم ْكتَب ج َم َكات‬student (male)
prophet ‫ َنبِ ُّی ْو َن‬،‫ َنبِي َج َأ ْنبِ َیا ُء‬student (female) ‫َطال ِ َبة ج َطال ِ َبات‬
Exercise 1
Translate the following and state whether the words are ‫ َم ْع ِر َفة‬or
‫ َنكِ َرة‬.
‫) َا ْل ُك ْر ِس ُّي‬17 ‫) َطال ِ َبة‬13 ‫) َجنَّة‬9 ‫) َالنَّبِ ُّي‬5 ‫) َا َّلر ُّب‬1
‫) ُم َع ِّلم‬18 ‫) َا ْل َم ْر َأ ُة‬14 ِ ‫) َا‬10
‫إل َما ُم‬ ‫) َنبِي‬6 ‫) َرب‬2
‫) َا ْل ُم َع ِّل َم ُة‬19 ‫) َال ِّط ْف ُل‬15 ‫) َر ُجل‬11 ُ ‫) َا ْل ُكت‬7
‫ُب‬ ‫) َا َّلر ُس ْو ُل‬3
ِ ‫) َق َلم‬16 ِ
‫ب‬ ُ ‫) َم َكات‬20 ُ ‫) َال َّطال‬12
‫ب‬ ‫) ُكتُب‬8 ‫) َر ُس ْول‬4
Summary
Word – ‫َكلِ َمة‬
Noun - ‫اِ ْسم‬
Definite ‫َم ْع ِر َفة‬ The Name ،‫َا ْل‬
Indefinite ‫نَكِ َرة‬ A/An ‫َتن ِْو ْين‬
20
Characteristic 2: Gender
In Arabic, all nouns, living and non-living, have a grammatical
gender; they are categorized as either masculine or feminine for
grammatical purposes, even though they are neither male nor
female.
Feminine Nouns
The Arabic term for feminine is ‫ ُمؤَ نَّث‬.
There are three types of feminine nouns.
Natural Gender
A noun is considered ‫ ُمؤَ نَّث‬if it is feminine by natural gender.
‫ُأم‬ ‫َم ْر َي ُم‬
mother Maryam
Word with a Grammatical Sign
A word is also considered ‫ ُمؤَ نَّث‬if it has an Arabic symbol for ‫ ُمؤَ نَّث‬at
the end of the word. One such symbol is ‫التَّا ُء ا ْل َم ْر ُب ْو َط ُة‬, (‫)ة‬.
‫السنَ ُة‬
َّ ‫َجنَّة‬
the year a garden
Arab Usage
A word is also considered ‫ ُمؤَ نَّث‬if the Arabs have used it as feminine
in their grammar. These will be marked with the symbol (‫ )مث‬to
represent ‫ ُمؤَ نَّث‬. Most body parts that occur in pairs and names of
tribes fall under this category.
sun )‫َش ْمس ج ُش ُم ْوس (مث‬ earth َ ‫َأ ْرض ج َأ ْر ُض ْو‬
)‫ن (مث‬
eye, spring )‫ ُعیُ ْون (مث‬،‫َع ْین ج َأ ْعیُن‬ world )‫ُد ْن َیا (مث‬
ِ
fire )‫نَار ج ن ْی َران (مث‬ foot ُ ‫ِر ْجل ج َأ ْر‬
)‫جل (مث‬
soul )‫ َأن ُْفس (مث‬،‫َن ْفس ج ن ُُف ْوس‬ wind )‫ِر ْيح ج ِر َياح (مث‬
hand )‫ َأ َياد (مث‬،‫َيد ج َأ ْيد‬ sky َ ‫َس َماء ج َس َم‬

)‫اوات (مث‬
21
Masculine Nouns
Aside from these three types of feminine nouns, all other nouns
are masculine. The Arabic name for masculine is ‫ ُم َذكَّر‬.
Vocab
aunt (mother’s sister) ‫ َخا َلة ج َخ َاْلت‬sister ‫ُأ ْخت ج َأ َخ َوات‬
year ‫ ِسن ُْو َن‬،‫ َسنَة ج َسن ََوات‬mother ‫ُأم ج ُأ َّم َهات‬
child ‫طِ ْف َلة ج َأ ْط َفال‬ daughter ‫بِنْت ج َبنَات‬
uncle (father’s brother) ‫ عَم ج َأع َْمام‬grandfather ‫َجد ج َأ ْجدَ اد‬
night ‫ َل ْیل ج َل َیال‬،‫َل ْی َلة‬ grandmother ‫َجدَّ ة ج َجدَّ ات‬
Exercise 2
Translate the following and state whether the words are ‫ ُم َذ َّكر‬or
‫ ُمؤَ َّنث‬.
‫) ُن ُف ْوس‬17 ‫) َا ْل َجنَّ ُة‬13 ‫) َبنَات‬9 ‫) ُأم‬5 ‫) ُأ ْخت‬1
‫) َال ِّط ْف َل ُة‬18 ‫) َأ ْرض‬14 ‫) َطال ِ َبة‬10 ‫) َخا َلة‬6 ‫) َا ْل َجدَّ ُة‬2
‫) َال َّل ْی َل ُة‬19 ُّ‫) َا ْل َجد‬15 ‫) نَار‬11 ‫) ُم َع ِّلم‬7 ‫) َس َماء‬3
‫) نِ َساء‬20 ‫) َال َّسنَ ُة‬16 ‫) َالبِن ُْت‬12 ُ ‫) َاْلُ َّم َه‬8
‫ات‬ ‫) َا ْل َع ُّم‬4
Summary
Noun - ‫ْاسم‬
Masculine ‫ُم َذكَّر‬ ‫َر ُجل‬
Natural Gender ‫ُأم‬
Feminine ‫ُمؤَ نَّث‬ Grammatical Sign ‫َجنَّة‬
Arab Usage ‫َأ ْرض‬
22
Characteristic 3: Number
Nouns can be singular (boy) or plural (boys). In Arabic, nouns can
also be dual i.e. referring to two items or units.
Singular
A singular noun is called ‫ ُم ْف َرد‬.
Dual
A dual noun is called ‫ ُم َثنًّی‬. In Arabic, there is a distinct way to show
the dual form.
Forming the Dual
Duals are made from the ‫ ُم ْف َرد‬by
1. Placing a ‫ َفت َْحة‬on the last letter of the word,
ِ ‫ـ‬.
2. Adding ‫ان‬
‫َر ُج ََّل ِن‬ ِ َ‫ ـ‬+ ‫رجل‬
‫ان‬ ُ َ

two men a man
If ‫ان‬ ِ ‫ ـ‬is added after a round ‫ة‬, it will be written like a normal ‫ت‬, ‫التَّاء‬
ُ
‫ا ْل َم ْفت ُْو َح ُة‬.
ِ ‫جنَّ َت‬
‫ان‬ ِ َ‫ ـ‬+ ‫جنَّة‬
‫ان‬
َ َ

two heavens heaven
Dual as ‫ َم ْع ِر َفة‬and ‫نَكِ َرة‬
A dual word will never have a ‫ َتن ِْو ْين‬. It can, however, have an ‫ َا ْل‬.
Therefore, if it has an ‫ َا ْل‬it will be ‫ َم ْع ِر َفة‬and if it does not have an ‫ َا ْل‬it
will be ‫نَكِ َرة‬, even though it does not have a ‫ َتن ِْو ْين‬.
‫َنكِ َرة‬ ‫َم ْع ِر َفة‬
‫َر ُج ََّل ِن‬ ‫الر ُج ََّل ِن‬
َّ
two men the two men
23
Exercise 3
Translate the following.
ِ ‫) َال َّلی َلت‬16
‫َان‬ ِ ‫) َال ِّط ْف َلت‬13
‫َان‬ ِ ‫) َا ْلمع ِّلم‬10
‫ان‬ ِ ‫) اِمرأ َت‬7
‫ان‬ ِ ‫) َا ْل َخا َلت‬4
‫َان‬ ِ َّ‫) جد‬1
‫ان‬
ْ َ َ ُ َْ َ
ِ ‫) ُأ ْخ َت‬17
‫ان‬ ِ ‫) َا ْل َق َلم‬14
‫ان‬ ِ ‫) ُأم‬11
‫ان‬ ِ ‫) إِمام‬8
‫ان‬ ِ ‫) جنَّت‬5
‫َان‬ ِ ‫) َا ْلعم‬2
‫ان‬
َ َّ َ َ َ َّ َ
‫) ِر ْيح‬18 ِ ‫) سنَت‬15
‫َان‬ ِ ‫) َالبِنْت‬12
‫َان‬ ِ ‫) َا ْلعین‬9
‫َان‬ ‫) َا ِّلر ْج ََّل ِن‬6 ِ َ‫) يد‬3
‫ان‬
َ َْ َ
Exercise 4
Make the following words ‫ ُم َثنًّی‬.
‫) َا َّلر ُج ُل‬16 ‫) َجنَّة‬13 ‫) َخا َلة‬10 ‫) إِ َمام‬7 ‫) َيد‬4 ‫) َال َّسنَ ُة‬1
‫) اِ ْم َرأة‬17 ‫) َا ْل َجنَّ ُة‬14 ‫) َا ْل َع ُّم‬11 ‫) َم ْكتَب‬8 ‫) َال ِّط ْف َل ُة‬5 ‫) كِتَاب‬2
‫) َا ْل َم ْر َأ ُة‬18 ‫) َع ْین‬15 ‫) ُأ ْخت‬12 ‫) َال َّل ْی َل ُة‬9 ‫) ُم َع ِّل َمة‬6 ‫) َأ ْرض‬3
Plural
A plural noun is called ‫ َج ْمع‬. There are two types of plurals in Arabic:
regular and irregular.
Regular Plural
A regular plural is one that follows a fixed pattern. This type of
plural is called ‫السال ِ ُم‬
َّ ‫ َا ْل َج ْم ُع‬. This is used for both ‫ ُم َذ َّكر‬and ‫ ُمؤَ َّنث‬words.
‫السال ِ ُم‬
َّ ‫َج ْم ُع ا ْل ُم َذك َِّر‬
The regular plural of a masculine noun, ‫السال ِ ُم‬ َّ ‫ َج ْم ُع ا ْل ُم َذ َّك ِر‬, is made by
placing a ‫ َض َّمة‬on the last letter of the ‫ ; ُم ْف َرد‬and then adding ‫ـ ْو َن‬.
‫ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن‬ ‫ ـُ ْو َن‬+ ‫ُم ْسلِم‬

believers a believer
‫السال ِ ُم‬ ِ
َّ ‫َج ْم ُع ا ْل ُمؤَ نَّث‬
The regular plural of a feminine noun, ‫السال ِ ُم‬ ِ
َّ ‫ َج ْم ُع ا ْل ُمؤَ َّنث‬, is made by
removing the ‫ة‬, placing a ‫ َف ْت َحة‬on the last letter, and then adding ‫ـات‬.
‫ُم ْسلِ َمات‬ ‫ ـَات‬+ ‫ُم ْسلِ َمة‬

believing women a believing woman
Remember, the round ‫ ة‬/ ‫ لة‬is a sign of a singular word being ‫ ُمؤَ َّنث‬,
and the ‫ ـات‬is a sign of a plural word being ‫ ُمؤَ نَّث‬.
24
‫‪Note‬‬
‫‪The words one(s) or person/people may need to be added to the‬‬
‫‪translation of some nouns.‬‬
‫الص ِ‬
‫اد ُق ْو َن‬ ‫َّ‬
‫‪The truthful ones‬‬
‫‪The truthful people‬‬
‫‪Vocab‬‬
‫السال ِ ُم ‪The‬‬ ‫ِ‬
‫السال ُم ‪ْ , and the‬و َن ‪َ is denoted with‬ج ْم ُع ا ْل ُم َذك َِّر َّ‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪.‬ات ‪َ with‬ج ْم ُع ا ْل ُمؤَ نَّث َّ‬
‫‪English‬‬ ‫‪Arabic English‬‬ ‫‪Arabic‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪َ sitting‬فاسق ج ْو َن‬ ‫َجالِس ج ْو َن‬
‫‪transgressor‬‬
‫‪hardworking‬‬ ‫ُم ْجت َِهد ج ْو َن‬ ‫‪thankful‬‬ ‫َشاكِر ج ْو َن‬
‫‪sincere‬‬ ‫ُم ْخلِص ج ْو َن‬ ‫‪patient‬‬ ‫َصابِر ج ْو َن‬

‫ُم ْسلِم ج ْو َن‬ ‫ص ِ‬
‫ادق ج ْو َن‬
‫‪Muslim‬‬ ‫‪truthful‬‬ ‫َ‬
‫‪believer‬‬ ‫ُمؤْ مِن ج ْو َن‬ ‫‪pious‬‬ ‫َصالِح ج ْو َن‬
‫‪Exercise 5‬‬
‫‪Translate the following.‬‬
‫‪ُ )13‬م ْجت َِهدُ ْو َن‬ ‫‪ُ )9‬م ْخلِ ُص ْو َن‬ ‫ان‬‫صابِر ِ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬ ‫َا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫َ َ‬
‫‪َ )14‬ال َّصال ِ ُح ْو َن‬ ‫‪َ )10‬صال ِ ُح ْو َن‬ ‫َجال ِ ُس ْو َن‬ ‫‪)6‬‬ ‫ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫‪َ )15‬النَّبِ ُّی ْو َن‬ ‫اس ُق ْو َن‬‫‪َ )11‬ا ْل َف ِ‬ ‫ُمؤْ مِن ُْو َن‬ ‫‪)7‬‬ ‫ادق‬ ‫ص ِ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫َ‬
‫‪َ )16‬صابِ ُر ْو َن‬ ‫‪َ )12‬ا ْل ُم َع ِّل ُم ْو َن‬ ‫َال َّشاكِ ُر ْو َن‬ ‫‪)8‬‬ ‫قو َن‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َال َّصاد ُ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫‪ُ )13‬مؤْ مِنَات‬ ‫‪َ )9‬جال ِ َسات‬ ‫‪َ )5‬ا ْل َبن ُ‬
‫َات‬ ‫‪َ )1‬ال َجن ُ‬
‫َّات‬
‫‪َ )14‬ال َّشاكِ َر ُ‬
‫ات‬ ‫‪َ )10‬ال َّطال ِ َب ُ‬
‫ات‬ ‫‪َ )6‬سن ََوات‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ا ْل ُم ْجت َِهدَ ُ‬
‫ات‬
‫‪َ )15‬ا ْل َف ِ‬
‫اس َق ُة‬ ‫‪َ )7‬أ َخ َوات‬ ‫لصابِ َر ُ‬
‫‪َ )11‬خ َاْلت‬ ‫ات‬ ‫‪َ )3‬ا َّ‬
‫‪َ )16‬ال َّصال ِ َح ُ‬
‫ات‬ ‫‪َ )12‬ا ْلم ْخلِصت ِ‬
‫َان‬ ‫ُ َ‬ ‫ات‬ ‫‪َ )8‬الص ِ‬
‫اد َق ُ‬ ‫َّ‬ ‫‪َ )4‬ا ْل ُم ْسلِ َم ُ‬
‫ات‬
‫‪25‬‬
Irregular Plural
An irregular plural does not follow a fixed pattern. This is called
‫ َا ْل َج ْم ُع ا ْل ُم َك َّس ُر‬.
‫ ُر ُسل‬ ‫َر ُس ْول‬ ‫ َأنْهار‬ ‫ن َْهر‬
There is no rule to these plurals; they must be learnt.
Vocab
servant ‫ َع ْبد ج ِع َباد‬father ‫َأب ج آ َباء‬
nation ‫َق ْوم ج َأ ْق َوام‬ brother ‫ إِ ْخ َوة‬،‫َأخ ج إِ ْخ َوان‬
people ‫نَاس ج ُأنَاس‬ mountain ‫َج َبل ج ِج َبال‬
star ‫ن َْجم ج ن ُُج ْوم‬ chapter ‫ُس ْو َرة ج ُس َور‬
child, son ‫ َو َلد ج َأ ْو َْلد‬guest ‫َض ْیف ج ُض ُی ْوف‬
Exercise 7
‫) َجنَّات‬16 ُ ‫) َا ْْلَ ْر َب‬13
‫اب‬ ‫) َأ ْق َوام‬10 ‫) إِ ْخ َوة‬7 ِ ‫) َا‬4
ُ ‫إل ْخ َو‬
‫ان‬ ‫) آ َباء‬1
‫) َال ِّر َج ُال‬17 ‫) َا ْْلَ ْنبِ َیا ُء‬14 ‫) َا ْل ِع َبا ُد‬11 ُ ‫) َا ْل ُكت‬8
‫ُب‬ ِ ‫) َا ْل‬5
‫ج َب ُال‬ ُّ ‫) َا‬2
‫لس َو ُر‬
‫) َالنِّ َسا ُء‬18 ‫) ُر ُسل‬15 ‫) َا ْْلَ ْط َفا ُل‬12 ‫) َا ْْلَ ْق ََّل ُم‬9 ‫) َالن ُُّج ْو ُم‬6 ‫ف‬ ُّ ‫) َا‬3
ُ ‫لض ُی ْو‬
Summary
Singular ‫ُم ْف َرد‬ ‫ ُم ْسلِ َمة‬،‫ُم ْسلِم‬
‫ُم َثنَّی‬ ِ ‫ مسلِمت‬،‫ان‬
‫َان‬ ِ ِ
Dual َ ْ ُ ‫ُم ْسل َم‬
‫ُم َذكَّر‬ ‫ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن‬
‫َسالم‬
Plural ‫َج ْمع‬ ‫ُمؤَ نَّث‬ ‫ُم ْسلِ َمات‬
‫ُم َك َّسر‬ ‫ نِ َساء‬،‫ِر َجال‬
26
Characteristic 4: Irab
In Arabic, nouns occur in three states according to their
grammatical function, irab, in the sentence. These three states are:
1. ‫َم ْر ُف ْوع‬
2. ‫َمن ُْص ْوب‬
3. ‫َم ْج ُر ْور‬
This is like the English pronouns I, me and my: they all have similar
meanings, but each is used for a different grammatical function.
Subject Object Possession
I am a student. You heard me. This is my book.
The different grammatical functions will be discussed in the next
unit.
Declinable and Non-Declinable Nouns
Nouns are of two types according to changes in their endings:
1. Non-Declinable Nouns: These are nouns whose endings do not
change to reflect their grammatical state. In Arabic, these are
called ‫ َم ْبنِي‬.
2. Declinable Nouns: These are nouns whose endings change to
reflect their grammatical state. In Arabic, these are called ‫ ُم ْع َرب‬.
Five types of ‫ ُم ْع َرب‬nouns have already been discussed:
1. ‫ا ْل ُم ْف َر ُد‬ 4. ‫السال ِ ُم‬
َّ ‫َج ْم ُع ا ْل ُم َذك َِّر‬
2. ‫ا ْل َج ْم ُع ا ْل ُم َك َّس ُر‬ 5. ‫السال ِ ُم‬ ِ
َّ ‫َج ْم ُع ا ْل ُمؤَ نَّث‬
3. ‫ا ْل ُم َثنّٰی‬
There is a sixth type called ‫ َغ ْی ُر ُمن َْص ِرف‬.
‫ َغ ْی ُر ُمن َْص ِرف‬words do not have ‫ َتن ِْو ْين‬or ‫ك َْس َرة‬.
Some names and some ‫ ا ْل َج ْم ُع ا ْل ُم َك َّس ُر‬fall under this category.
27
‫َغ ْی ُر ُمن َْص ِرف‬
There are some special Arabic words called ‫ َغ ْی ُر ُمن َْص ِرف‬. These words
do not have ‫ َتن ِْو ْين‬nor ‫ك َْس َرة‬.
There are three types of ‫ َغ ْی ُر ُمن َْص ِرف‬words:
1. Names
2. Plurals
3. Adjectives
Names
The following five types of names are ‫ َغ ْی ُر ُمن َْص ِرف‬words:
1. Non-Arabic names
ِ ‫إِبر‬
‫اه ْی ُم‬ َْ
2. Feminine names
‫آمِنَ ُة‬
This also includes masculine names that end in a ‫ة‬
‫َح ْمزَ ُة‬
3. Names in a pattern of a verb
ُ‫َأ ْح َمد‬
4. Names in the pattern of ‫ُف َع ُل‬
‫ع َُم ُر‬
5. Names ending with ‫ـان‬
ُ ‫ُع ْث َم‬
‫ان‬
Notes
1. A key to remember these five is as follows:
The great grandfather of the Prophet ‫)إِ ْب َر ِاه ْی ُم( ﷺ‬,
his mother (‫)آمِنَ ُة‬, his name ( ُ‫) َأ ْح َمد‬,
his second (‫ )ع َُم ُر‬and third Khalif (‫ان‬ ُ ‫) ُع ْث َم‬.
2. All names of the prophets are ‫ َغ ْی ُر ُمنْ َص ِرف‬apart from the following:
‫ ُم َح َّمد‬،‫ ُل ْوط‬،‫ َصالِح‬،‫ ُه ْود‬،‫ ُش َع ْیب‬،‫ن ُْوح‬
28
In the following table, some commonly used names from the
Quran and Ahadith are mentioned.
Male Names Female Names
‫ُمن َْص ِرف‬ ‫َغ ْی ُر ُمن َْص ِرف‬ ‫َغ ْی ُر ُمن َْص ِرف‬
‫َس ِع ْید ع ََّمار‬‫َه ُار ْو ُن بِ ََّلل‬ ‫ع َُم ُر‬ ‫زَ ْمزَ ُم‬ ‫آ َد ُم‬ ‫َأ ْس َما ُء َخ ِد ْي َج ُة َس ْو َد ُة إِ ْبلِ ْی ُس‬
‫َج ْع َفر ُش َع ْیب ع َْمرو‬ ‫ان‬ُ ‫َها َم‬ ُ ‫ِع ْم َر‬
‫ان‬ ُ ‫َخ ْو َل ُة َفاطِ َم ُة إِ ْد ِر ْي ُس ِج ْب ِر ْي ُل َس ْل َم‬
‫ان‬ ‫ُأ َما َم ُة‬
‫ُل ْوط‬ ‫ان فِ ْرع َْو ُن َي ْع ُق ْو ُب َخالِد عَامِر‬ ُ ‫ُح َذ ْي َف ُة ُس َل ْی َم‬ ‫ار َي ُة ُأ َسا َم ُة‬ ِ ‫َم‬ ‫ُر َق َّی ُة‬ ‫ُج َو ْي ِر َّي ُة‬
‫ف َخ َّباب َع ّباس ُم ْص َعب‬ ُ ‫ُل ْق َم‬
ُ ‫ان ُي ْو ُس‬ ‫َط ْل َح ُة‬ ‫َح ْمزَ ُة‬ ‫اس‬ ُ ‫َم ْر َي ُم إ ْل َی‬ ‫َب‬ ُ ‫َح ْف َص ُة زَ ْين‬
‫ن ُْوح‬ ‫ُع َب ْیدَ ُة مِ ْی َكائِ ْی ُل ُي ْون ُُس زُ َب ْیر عُزَ ْير‬ ‫َد ُاو ْو ُد‬ ‫ُس َم َّی ُة ن َُس ْی َب ُة َأ ُّي ْو ُب‬ ‫َح ْمنَ ُة‬
Plurals
Broken plurals in the patterns below are ‫ َغ ْی ُر ُمن َْص ِرف‬. They only have
one ‫ َض َّمة‬.
‫َق َراطِ ْی ُس‬ ‫َمدَ ِار ُس‬ ‫َأ ْش َیا ُء‬ ‫ُع َل َما ُء‬ ‫َأ ْنبِ َیا ُء‬
papers schools things learned prophet
A key to remember these five is as follows:
The ‫( َأ ْنبِ َیا ُء‬prophets) passed on knowledge to the ‫ُع َل َما ُء‬
(learned) who taught ‫( َأ ْش َیا ُء‬things) in ‫( َمدَ ِار ُس‬schools)
using ‫( َق َراطِ ْی ُس‬papers).
Vocab
paper (sheet of) ‫ قِ ْر َطاس ج َق َراطِ ْی ُس‬thing ‫َش ْيء ج َأ ْش َیا ُء‬
school, place of study ‫َمدْ َر َسة ج َمدَ ِار ُس‬ scholar ‫عَالِم ج ُع َل َما ُء‬
Adjectives
Some adjectives are ‫ ; َغ ْی ُر ُمن َْص ِرف‬namely those in the pattern of ‫َأ ْف َع ُل‬
and ‫ َف ْع ََّل ُن‬.
ُ ‫غ َْض َب‬
‫ان‬ ‫َأ ْح َم ُر‬
angry red
A key to remember these two is as follows:
ُ ‫( غ َْض َب‬angry) and my face turned ‫( َأ ْح َم ُر‬red).
This list made me ‫ان‬
29
‫‪Irab Table of Nouns‬‬
‫‪The following table summarises the types of nouns and the way‬‬
‫‪they express each state.‬‬
‫َم ْر ُف ْوع‬ ‫َمنْ ُص ْوب‬ ‫َم ْج ُر ْور‬
‫َض َّمة‬ ‫َفت َْحة‬ ‫ك َْس َرة‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ا ْل ُم ْف َر ُد‬
‫كتاب‬ ‫كِ َتا ًبا‬ ‫كِ َتاب‬

‫‪2‬‬ ‫ا ْل َج ْم ُع ا ْل ُم َك َّس ُر‬
‫ُك ُتب‬ ‫ُك ُت ًبا‬ ‫ُك ُتب‬
‫( ـَ ِ‬
‫ان )‬ ‫( ـَـ ْی ِن )‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َثنَّی‬
‫مسلِم ِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫ُم ْسلِ َم ْی ِن‬
‫ُ ْ َ‬
‫( ـُـ ْو َن )‬ ‫( ــِ ْی َن )‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫السال ِ ُم‬
‫َج ْم ُع ا ْل ُم َذ َّك ِر َّ‬
‫ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن‬ ‫ُم ْسلِ ِم ْی َن‬
‫َض َّمة ( ـَـات )‬ ‫ك َْس َرة ( ـَـات )‬

‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َج ْم ُع ا ْل ُمؤَ َّنث َّ‬
‫السال ُم ‪5‬‬
‫ُم ْسلِ َمات‬ ‫ُم ْسلِ َمات‬
‫َض َّمة‬ ‫َفت َْحة‬

‫‪6‬‬ ‫َغ ْی ُر ُمن َْص ِرف‬
‫إِبر ِ‬
‫اه ْی ُم‪َ ،‬أ ْنبِ َیا ُء‬ ‫إِبر ِ‬
‫اه ْی َم‪َ ،‬أ ْنبِ َیا َء‬
‫َْ‬ ‫َْ‬
‫َم ْبنِي‬
‫‪Unchanged‬‬
‫*‬ ‫ٰه َذا‬ ‫ٰه َذا‬ ‫ٰه َذا‬
‫‪Translate the following and state the irab of the word and its sign.‬‬
‫‪ )13‬إِبر ِ‬
‫اه ْی ُم‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫‪ُ )9‬م ْسلِ ُم ْو َن‬ ‫‪ِ )5‬ع َبا ًدا‬ ‫‪َ )1‬ع ْبد‬
‫‪ )14‬إِسم ِ‬
‫اع ْی َل‬ ‫‪ )10‬ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ِم ْی َن‬ ‫‪ )6‬ا ْل ِعب ِ‬
‫اد‬ ‫‪ )2‬ا ْل َع ْبدَ‬
‫ْ َ‬ ‫َ‬
‫‪َ )15‬أ ْنبِ َیا ُء‬ ‫‪ُ )11‬مؤْ مِنَات‬ ‫‪َ )7‬عبدَ ِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫‪َ )3‬ع ْبد‬
‫‪َ )16‬أ ْنبِ َیا َء‬ ‫‪ )12‬ا ْلمؤْ مِن ِ‬
‫َات‬ ‫‪ )8‬ا ْل َع ْبدَ ْي ِن‬ ‫‪ )4‬ا ْل ِع َبا ُد‬
‫ُ‬
‫‪30‬‬
Summary
Definite ‫َم ْع ِر َفة‬ The Name ،‫َا ْل‬
Indefinite ‫َنكِ َرة‬ A ‫َتنْ ِو ْين‬
Masculine ‫ُم َذكَّر‬ ‫َر ُجل‬
Natural Gender ‫ُأم‬
Feminine ‫ُمؤَ نَّث‬ Grammatical Sign (‫)ة‬ ‫َجنَّة‬

Arabic Usage ‫َأ ْرض‬
Singular ‫ُم ْف َرد‬ ‫ ُم ْسلِ َمة‬،‫ُم ْسلِم‬
‫ُم َثنًّی‬ ِ ‫ مسلِمت‬،‫ان‬
‫َان‬ ِ ِ
Dual َ ْ ُ ‫ُم ْسل َم‬
‫ُم َذكَّر‬ ‫ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن‬
‫َسالم‬
Plural ‫َج ْمع‬ ‫ُمؤَ نَّث‬ ‫ُم ْسلِ َمات‬
‫ُم َك َّسر‬ ‫ نِ َساء‬،‫ِر َجال‬
Characteristic 4: Grammatical States
‫ُم ْع َرب‬ ‫َم ْبنِي‬
(Declinable Nouns) (Non-
‫َج ْم ُع‬ ‫َج ْم ُع‬ Declinable
‫ا ْل َج ْم ُع‬ ‫َغ ْی ُر‬
‫ُم ْف َرد‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َثنَّی‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َذك َِّر‬ ِ ‫ا ْلمؤَ ن‬
‫َّث‬ Nouns)
ُ
‫ا ْل ُم َك َّس ِر‬ ‫ُمن َْص ِرف‬
‫السال ِ ُم‬
َّ
ِ‫السالم‬
ُ َّ
‫َم ْر ُف ْوع‬ ‫ـــــ‬ ‫ـــــ‬ ِ ‫ـ‬

‫َان‬ ‫ـُ ْو َن‬ ‫ـَات‬ ‫ـــُــ‬
‫َمن ُْص ْوب‬ ‫ـــًــ‬ ‫ـــًــ‬ Unchanged
‫ـَ ْی ِن‬ ‫ـِ ْی َن‬ ‫ـَات‬ ‫ـــَــ‬
‫َم ْج ُر ْور‬ ‫ـــــ‬ ‫ـــــ‬
31
Part 2: Verbs
A verb, ‫فِ ْعل‬, is a word that shows an action:
hit, run, read
Verbs have five important characteristics.
1. Tense 4. Gender
2. Irab 5. Voice
3. Affirmative and Negative
VoTING is a mnemonic for remembering these characteristics.
Vo ice
T ense
I rab
N egative and Affirmative
G ender
32
Characteristic 1: Tense
In Arabic, a verb can come in three tenses:
ِ ‫َا ْلم‬
‫اض ْي‬ َ
ِ
‫ َا ْل َماض ْي‬is the past tense. It shows that the action took place in the
past.
َ ‫َذ َه‬
‫ب زَ ْيد‬
Zaid went.
ِ ‫َا ْل ُم َض‬
‫ار ُع‬
ِ ‫ َا ْل ُم َض‬shows three tenses:
‫ار ُع‬
1. Present habitual: the action takes place regularly.
Zaid goes.
2. Present continuous: the action is taking place right now.
Zaid is going.
3. Future: The action will take place in the future.
Zaid will go.
The context of the sentence or paragraph will help determine
which tense is being referred to.
ُ ‫َي ْذ َه‬
Zaid goes. Zaid is going. Zaid will go.
‫َا ْْلَ ْم ُر‬
‫ َا ْْلَ ْم ُر‬is the imperative tense, i.e. command.
ِ
‫ب‬ْ ‫ا ْذ َه‬
Go.
33
‫‪Vocab‬‬
‫ارع ‪,‬ا ْلم ِ‬
‫اض ْي ‪Below is a list of new verbs. In the right column‬‬ ‫‪, and‬ا ْل ُم َض ِ ُ َ‬
‫‪ will be explained later.‬ا ْل َم ْصدَ ُر ‪ of the verb is given.‬ا ْل َم ْصدَ ُر‬
‫‪to go‬‬ ‫ب َذ َها ًبا‬
‫ب َي ْذ َه ُ‬
‫‪َ to wake up‬ذ َه َ‬ ‫استِیْ َقا ًظا‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫اِ ْس َت ْی َق َ‬
‫ظ َي ْستَیْق ُظ ْ‬
‫‪to fall‬‬ ‫‪َ to believe‬س َق َط َي ْس ُق ُط ُس ُق ْو ًطا‬ ‫آ َم َن ُيؤْ مِ ُن إِ ْي َمانًا‬
‫‪to fast‬‬ ‫ص ْو ُم َص ْو ًما‪ِ ،‬صیَا ًما‬

‫َصا َم َي ُ‬ ‫‪to‬‬ ‫‪break,‬‬ ‫‪become‬‬ ‫ا ْن َك َس َر َينْ َك ِس ُر انْكِ َس ًارا‬
‫‪broken‬‬
‫‪to stand‬‬ ‫َقا َم َي ُق ْو ُم قِ َیا ًما‬ ‫‪to come‬‬ ‫جي ُء َم ِ‬

‫ج ْیئًا‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َجا َء َي ْ‬
‫‪to sleep‬‬ ‫نَا َم َينَا ُم ن َْو ًما‬ ‫‪to sit‬‬ ‫َج َل َس َي ْجلِ ُس ُج ُل ْو ًسا‬
‫‪Translate the following, mentioning all the tenses.‬‬
‫ِ‬ ‫‪ )4‬يجلِس إِبر ِ‬
‫‪َ )10‬ي ْس ُق ُط ا ْلكت ُ‬
‫َاب‬ ‫‪َ )7‬قا َم ُم َح َّمد‬ ‫اه ْی ُم‬ ‫َ ْ ُ َْ‬ ‫‪ )1‬آ َم َن زَ ْيد‬
‫‪ )11‬ا ْن َك َس َر ا ْل ُك ْر ِس ُّي‬ ‫‪َ )8‬ي ُق ْو ُم ُم َح َّمد‬ ‫ب َأ ْح َمدُ‬
‫‪َ )5‬ي ْذ َه ُ‬ ‫‪ُ )2‬يؤْ مِ ُن زَ ْيد‬
‫‪َ )12‬ينْ َك ِس ُر ا ْل ُك ْر ِس ُّي‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )9‬س َق َط ا ْلكت ُ‬
‫َاب‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ي ُص ْو ُم ُم ْو َسی‬ ‫ج ْي ُء َخالِد‬ ‫‪َ )3‬ي ِ‬
‫‪ُ .‬م َض ِارع ‪ in the following sentences to‬فِ ْعل َماض ‪Change the‬‬
‫‪َ )10‬قا َم ْاْلَ ُخ‬ ‫‪َ )7‬صا َم ُم ْو َسی‬ ‫‪ )4‬ج َلس إِبر ِ‬
‫اه ْی ُم‬ ‫‪ )1‬آ َم َن َأ ْح َمدُ‬
‫َ َ َْ‬
‫‪ )11‬نَا َم ا ْل َع ُّم‬ ‫‪َ )8‬س َق َط زَ ْيد‬ ‫ب َأ ْح َمدُ‬
‫‪َ )5‬ذ َه َ‬ ‫‪ )2‬اِ ْن َك َس َر ا ْل َق َل ُم‬
‫‪َ )12‬صا َم ا ْل ِع َبا ُد‬ ‫‪ )9‬نَا َم ْاْلَ ُب‬ ‫‪ )6‬اِ ْس َت ْی َق َظ َخالِد‬ ‫‪َ )3‬جا َء َأ ْح َمدُ‬
‫‪Summary‬‬
‫َكلِ َمة – ‪Word‬‬
‫فِ ْعل – ‪Verb‬‬
‫‪Characteristic 1: Tense‬‬
‫َا ْلم ِ‬
‫اض ْي‬ ‫َ‬ ‫‪Past‬‬ ‫‪Zaid went‬‬ ‫َذ َه َ‬
‫‪Present Habitual‬‬ ‫‪Zaid goes‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫َا ْل ُم َضار ُع‬ ‫‪Present Continuous‬‬ ‫‪Zaid is going‬‬ ‫َي ْذ َه ُ‬
‫‪Future‬‬ ‫‪Zaid will go‬‬
‫َا ْْلَ ْم ُر‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪Imperative‬‬ ‫‪Go‬‬ ‫ا ْذ َه ْ‬
‫ب‬
‫‪34‬‬
In Arabic, verbs can either be ‫ َم ْبنِي‬or ‫ ُم ْع َرب‬.
Irab of ‫اض ْي‬ ِ ‫َا ْل ِفع ُل ا ْلم‬
َ ْ
ِ ْ ُ ِ ْ ِ
‫ َالف ْعل ال َماض ْي‬is ‫ َم ْبني‬, non-declinable, and does not occur in any state.
Irab of ‫َا ْل ِف ْع ُل ا ْل ُم َض ِار ُع‬
ِ ‫ ا ْل ِف ْع ُل ا ْل ُم َض‬is ‫ ُم ْع َرب‬, declinable, and can occur in three states. These
‫ار ُع‬
three states are:
1. ‫َم ْر ُف ْوع‬
2. ‫َمن ُْص ْوب‬
3. ‫َم ْجزُ ْوم‬
Irab of ‫فِ ْع ُل ْاْلَ ْم ِر‬

‫ فِ ْع ُل ْاْلَ ْم ِر‬only occurs in the ‫ َم ْجزُ ْوم‬state.
Irab Table of Verbs

The following table summarises the irab of verbs.
‫َم ْر ُف ْوع‬ ‫َمنْ ُص ْوب‬ ‫َم ْجزُ ْوم‬
* * *
ِ ‫ا ْل ِفع ُل ا ْلم‬
‫اض ْي‬
1 َ ْ
* * *
‫َض َّمة‬ ‫َفت َْحة‬ ‫ُس ُك ْون‬

2 ِ ‫ا ْل ِف ْع ُل ا ْل ُم َض‬
‫ار ُع‬
‫َي ْف َع ُل‬ ‫َي ْف َع َل‬ ‫َي ْف َع ْل‬
* * ‫ُس ُك ْون‬
3 ‫فِ ْع ُل ْاْلَ ْم ِر‬
* * ‫اِ ْف َع ْل‬
35
‫‪Notes‬‬
‫‪َ , it will drop in‬ياء ‪َ or‬واو ‪َ ,‬ألِف ‪ is an‬فِ ْعل ُم َض ِارع ‪1. If the middle letter of a‬‬
‫‪َ state.‬م ْجزُ ْوم ‪the‬‬
‫َل ْم َي ُق ْم‬
‫َل ْم َي ُق ْو ْم ‪‬‬
‫‪َ ,‬ياء ‪َ or‬واو ‪َ ,‬ألِف ‪ is an‬فِ ْعل ُم َض ِارع ‪2. If the last letter of a‬‬
‫‪َ state.‬م ْجزُ ْوم ‪a) it will drop in the‬‬
‫َلم يع ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َل ْم ُي ْعط ْي ‪‬‬
‫ط‬ ‫ْ ُْ‬
‫‪َ state.‬م ْر ُف ْوع ‪َ will drop in the‬ض َّمة ‪b) its‬‬
‫َي ٰری‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫َي َر ُي‬ ‫ُي ْعطِ ْي‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ُي ْعطِ ُي‬
‫‪Vocab‬‬
‫‪to ask‬‬ ‫‪َ to give‬س َأ َل َي ْس َأ ُل ُسؤَ ًاْل‬ ‫َأ ْع َطی ُي ْعطِ ْي إِ ْع َطا ًء‬
‫‪to hear, listen‬‬ ‫‪َ to make‬س ِم َع َي ْس َم ُع َس ْم ًعا‬ ‫َج َع َل َي ْج َع ُل َج ْع ًَّل‬
‫‪to oppress‬‬ ‫‪َ to see‬ظ َل َم َي ْظلِ ُم ُظ ْل ًما‬ ‫َر َأی َي َری ُرؤْ َي ًة‬
‫‪to die‬‬ ‫ت َم ْو ًتا‬

‫ات َي ُم ْو ُ‬
‫َم َ‬ ‫‪to travel‬‬ ‫َسا َف َر ُي َسافِ ُر ُم َسا َف َر ًة‬
‫‪ُ verbs.‬م َض ِارع ‪State the irab of the following‬‬
‫‪َ )11‬ي ُق ْو َم‬ ‫‪ُ )9‬يؤْ مِ ُن‬ ‫‪َ )7‬ي ْج َع ْل‬ ‫‪َ )5‬ي ِ‬
‫ج ْي ُء‬ ‫‪َ )3‬ي ْس َأ ُل‬ ‫‪ُ )1‬ي َسافِ ْر‬
‫‪َ )12‬ي ُم ْت‬ ‫‪َ )10‬ي ْظلِ ْم‬ ‫‪َ )8‬ي ْذ َه ْ‬
‫ب‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ي ْجلِ َس‬ ‫‪َ )4‬ي ْس َم َع‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ي ُق ْم‬
‫‪Summary‬‬
‫‪Characteristic 2: Irab‬‬
‫َا ْلم ِ‬
‫اض ْي‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َم ْبنِي‬
‫َم ْر ُف ْوع‬ ‫ـــُــ‬
‫َا ْل ُم َض ِ‬
‫ار ُع‬ ‫َمن ُْص ْوب‬ ‫ـــَــ‬
‫ُم ْع َرب‬
‫َم ْجزُ ْوم‬ ‫ـــْــ‬
‫‪36‬‬
Characteristic 3: Affirmative – Negative
Verbs are either affirmative or negative.
An affirmative verb is one that shows that the action took place.
This is called ‫ ُم ْث َبت‬.
Zaid sat.
A negative verb is one that shows that the action did not take
place. This is called ‫ َمن ِْفي‬.
Zaid did not sit.
ِ
A verb is ‫ َمنْفي‬when it is preceded by a ‫ َح ْر ُف َن ْفي‬, a negative particle. A
verb without such a particle will be ‫ ُم ْث َبت‬.
Negative Particles
There are various particles to make a verb negative. We will
discuss each one in detail. However, the following table
summarises them.
Verb that Tense of The Verb After
Particle Adding the ‫َح ْر ُف َن ْفي‬ Translation Example
follows
‫َل ْم‬ ِ ‫َا ْل ُم َض‬
‫ار ُع‬ Past Zaid did not go. ْ ‫َل ْم َي ْذ َه‬
ِ ‫َا ْلم‬
‫اض ْي‬ َ Past Zaid did not go. َ ‫َما َذ َه‬
‫ما‬ Zaid is not going.
Present ُ ‫َما َي ْذ َه‬
Zaid does not go.
ِ ‫َا ْل ُم َض‬ Zaid does not go.
‫ار ُع‬
‫َْل‬ Present/ Future Zaid is not going. ُ ‫َْل َي ْذ َه‬
Zaid will not go.
‫َل ْن‬ Future Zaid will not go. َ ‫َلن َّي ْذ َه‬
37
Negative Particles for ‫اض ْي‬ ِ ‫ا ْلم‬
َ
ِ ْ
‫ ال َماض ْي‬is made negative by adding the particle ‫ َما‬at the beginning.
َ ‫َما َذ َه‬
Zaid did not go.
Negative Particles for ‫ا ْل ُم َض ِار ُع‬
ِ ‫ ا ْل ُم َض‬is made ‫ َمن ِْفي‬by adding any of the following particles:
‫ار ُع‬
1. ‫ َل ْم‬: This gives ‫ ا ْل ُم َض ِار ُع‬a negative meaning in the past tense.
ْ ‫َل ْم َي ْذ َه‬
Zaid did not go.
The ‫ فِ ْعل ُم َض ِارع‬after ‫ َل ْم‬will be in the ‫ َم ْجزُ ْوم‬state.
2. ‫ َما‬: This gives ‫ ا ْل ُم َض ِار ُع‬a negative meaning in the present tense,
habitual or continuous.
ُ ‫َما َي ْذ َه‬
Zaid does not go. Zaid is not going.
3. ‫ َْل‬: This gives ‫ ا ْل ُم َض ِار ُع‬a negative meaning which can be either the
present, (habitual or continuous), or future tense.
ُ ‫َْل َي ْذ َه‬
Zaid does not go. Zaid is not going. Zaid will not go.
ِ
4. ‫ َل ْن‬: This gives ‫ ا ْل ُم َضار ُع‬an emphatic negative meaning in the future
tense.
َ ‫َل ْن َي ْذ َه‬
Zaid will not go.
The ‫ فِ ْعل ُم َض ِارع‬after it will be in the ‫ َمن ُْص ْوب‬state.
38
Summary of the Negative Particles
The following table summarises all the negative particles.
Future Present Past
‫َل ْن‬ ‫َْل‬ ‫َما‬ ‫َل ْم‬
‫ب زَ ْيد‬ ُ ‫َْل َي ْذ َه‬
‫ب زَ ْيد‬ ُ ‫َما َي ْذ َه‬
‫ب زَ ْيد‬ َ ‫َما َذ َه‬
‫ب زَ ْيد‬ ْ ‫َل ْم َي ْذ َه‬
Zaid is not going.
Zaid will not go. Zaid will not go. Zaid did not go.
Zaid does not go.
Exercise 4
Translate the following. Ensure you translate the tense correctly.
Where it is possible to have more than one tense, mention all of
them.
‫) َل ْم َي ْظلِ ْم ُم َح َّمد‬16 ‫اه ْی ُم‬ِ ‫) ما يعطِي إِبر‬11 ‫) َل ْم َي ْس َت ْی ِق ْظ َخالِد‬6 ‫) َْل َي ْس َم ُع زَ ْيد‬1
َْ ْ ْ ُ َ
‫) َلن َّي ْظلِ َم ُم َح َّمد‬17 ِ ‫) ما َأ ْع َطی إِبر‬12
‫اه ْی ُم‬ َْ َ ‫اس َت ْی َق َظ َخالِد‬ ْ ‫) َما‬7 ‫) َلن َّي ْس َم َع زَ ْيد‬2
‫) َْل َي ْظلِ ُم ُم َح َّمد‬18 ‫اه ْی ُم‬ِ ‫) َلن يعطِي إِبر‬13 ‫) َما َي ْس َت ْی ِق ُظ َخالِد‬8 ‫) َما َس ِم َع زَ ْيد‬3
َْ َ ْ ُ
‫) َما َي ْظلِ ُم ُم َح َّمد‬19 ِ ‫ط إِبر‬ ِ ‫) َلن َّي ْس ُق َط َخالِد‬9
‫اه ْی ُم‬ َ ْ ‫) َل ْم ُي ْع‬14 ‫) َل ْم َي ْس َم ْع زَ ْيد‬4
‫) َما َظ َل َم ُم َح َّمد‬20 ‫اه ْی ُم‬ ِ ‫) َْل يعطِي إِبر‬15 ‫) َْل َي ْس ُق ُط َخالِد‬10 ‫) َما َي ْس َم ُع زَ ْيد‬5
َْ ْ ْ ُ
Summary
Verb – ‫فِ ْعل‬
Characteristic 3: Affirmative and Negative
Affirmative ‫ُم ْث َبت‬ َ ‫َذ َه‬
‫َل ْم‬ ِ ‫ا ْل ُم َض‬
)‫ار ُع ( َم ْجزُ ْوم‬ Past ْ ‫َل ْم َي ْذ َه‬
ِ ‫ا ْلم‬
‫اض ْي‬ َ Past َ ‫َما َذ َه‬
‫ما‬
Negative ‫َمن ِْفي‬ ِ ‫ا ْل ُم َض‬
‫ار ُع‬ Present ُ ‫َما َي ْذ َه‬
‫َْل‬ ِ ‫ا ْل ُم َض‬
‫ار ُع‬ Present / Future ُ ‫َْل َي ْذ َه‬
‫َل ْن‬ ِ ‫ا ْل ُم َض‬
)‫ار ُع ( َمن ُْص ْوب‬ Future َ ‫َلن َّي ْذ َه‬
39
Verbs are classified as masculine, ‫ ُم َذكَّر‬, or feminine, ‫ ُمؤَ نَّث‬for
grammatical purposes.
The verbs given in the vocabulary lists are ‫ َف َع َل ; ُم َذكَّر‬and ‫ َي ْف َع ُل‬.
ِ ‫ َا ْل ِفع ُل ا ْلم‬is made ‫ مؤَ نَّث‬by adding a ‫ت‬
‫اض ْي‬ ْ , ‫التَّا ُء ا ْل َم ْفت ُْو َح ُة‬, at the end.
َ ْ ُ
‫َف َع َل ْت‬
 ‫َف َع َل‬
ِ ‫ ا ْل ِف ْع ُل ا ْل ُم َض‬is made ‫ ُمؤَ نَّث‬by changing the ‫ ي‬at the beginning to a ‫ت‬.
‫ار ُع‬
‫َت ْف َع ُل‬  ‫َي ْف َع ُل‬
Exercise 5
Make the following verbs ‫ ُمؤَ نَّث‬.
‫) نَا َم‬17 ‫اس َت ْی َق َظ‬ْ )13 ‫) َظ َل َم‬9 ‫) َسا َف َر‬5 ‫) َج َع َل‬1
‫) َينَا ُم‬18 ‫) َي ْس َت ْی ِق ُظ‬14 ‫) َي ْظلِ ُم‬10 ‫) ُي َسافِ ُر‬6 ‫) َي ْج َع ُل‬2
‫) ا ْن َك َس َر‬19 ‫) َس َق َط‬15 ‫) َس ِم َع‬11 ‫ات‬
َ ‫) َم‬7 ‫) َس َأ َل‬3
‫) َينْ َك ِس ُر‬20 ‫) َي ْس ُق ُط‬16 ‫) َي ْس َم ُع‬12 ‫ت‬
ُ ‫) َي ُم ْو‬8 ‫) َي ْس َأ ُل‬4
Summary
Verb – ‫فِ ْعل‬
‫ُم َذكَّر‬ ِ ‫ا ْلم‬
‫اض ْي‬ ‫َف َع َل‬ ِ ‫ا ْل ُم َض‬
‫ار ُع‬ ‫َي ْف َع ُل‬
َ
‫ُمؤَ نَّث‬ ِ ‫ا ْلم‬
‫اض ْي‬ ‫َف َع َل ْت‬ ِ ‫ا ْل ُم َض‬
‫ار ُع‬ ‫َت ْف َع ُل‬
َ
40
Characteristic 5: Voice
Verbs can be divided into two categories according to their voice:
1. Active voice
2. Passive voice
Active Voice
A verb in the active voice is a verb in which the subject carries out
the action upon the object.
َ‫الر ُج ُل ا ْل َو َلد‬
َّ ‫ف‬َ ‫ع ََر‬
The man recognised the boy.
In this sentence, the man is doing the recognising.
This is called ‫فِ ْعل َم ْع ُل ْوم‬.
Passive Voice
A verb in the passive voice is a verb in which the subject is the
recipient of the verb’s action.
َ ‫ع ُِر‬
ُ‫ف ا ْل َو َلد‬
The boy was recognised.
In this sentence, the boy is the recipient of the verb recognising.
The passive voice is called ‫فِ ْعل َم ْج ُه ْول‬.
The active voice of the verb is given in the vocabulary list. The
passive voice is formed from the active voice.
Vocab
to drink ‫ َش ِر َب َي ْش َر ُب ُش ْر ًبا‬to eat ‫َأك ََل َي ْأك ُُل َأك ًَّْل‬
to worship ‫ َع َبدَ َي ْع ُبدُ ِع َبا َد ًة‬to send down ‫َأنْزَ َل ُين ِْز ُل إِنْزَ ًاْل‬
to recognise ‫ف َم ْع ِر َف ًة‬ ُ ‫ف َي ْع ِر‬ َ ‫عَر‬ َ to send, resurrect ‫َب َع َث َي ْب َع ُث َب ْع ًثا‬
to read ‫ َق َر َأ َي ْق َر ُأ قِ َرا َء ًة‬to create ‫َخ َل َق َي ْخ ُل ُق َخ ْل ًقا‬
to help ‫ن ََص َر َين ُْص ُر ن َْص ًرا‬ to provide ‫َرزَ َق َي ْرزُ ُق ِرزْ ًقا‬
41
‫ا ْلم ِ‬
‫اضي ا ْل َم ْج ُه ْو ُل ‪Forming‬‬ ‫َ‬
‫‪ is formed by:‬ا ْلم ِ‬
‫اض ْي ‪, of‬ا ْل َم ْج ُه ْو ُل ‪The passive,‬‬ ‫َ‬
‫‪1. Leaving the harakah of the last letter as it is.‬‬
‫‪.‬ك َْس َرة ‪2. Giving the second last letter a‬‬
‫‪َ .‬ض َّمة ‪3. Giving the remaining letters a‬‬
‫اض ْي‬ ‫ا ْلم ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ا ْل َم ْع ُل ْو ُم‬
‫ُب ِع َث‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ب ِع َث‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫بع َث‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫َب َع َث‬
‫ُأن ِْز َل‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫أ ْن ِز َل‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫أنْز َل‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫َأنْزَ َل‬
‫ُا ْس ُتغ ِْف َر‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫است ْغ ِف َر‬

‫ْ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫استغْف َر‬
‫ْ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫اِ ْس َت ْغ َف َر‬
‫‪َ .‬م ْع ُل ْوم ‪َ or‬م ْج ُه ْول ‪State whether the following verbs are‬‬
‫‪َ )16‬س ِم َع‬ ‫‪ُ )13‬سئِ َل‬ ‫‪ )10‬ن ََص َر‬ ‫‪َ )7‬ع َبدَ‬ ‫‪َ )4‬خ َل َق‬ ‫‪َ )1‬أك ََل‬
‫‪ُ )17‬ظلِ َم‬ ‫‪ُ )14‬أعْطِ َي‬ ‫‪ُ )11‬ج ِع َل‬ ‫‪ُ )8‬ع ِر َ‬
‫ف‬ ‫‪َ )5‬رزَ َق‬ ‫‪ُ )2‬أن ِْز َل‬
‫ات‬
‫‪َ )18‬م َ‬ ‫‪ُ )15‬رئِ َي‬ ‫‪َ )12‬سا َف َر‬ ‫‪ُ )9‬ق ِرئَ‬ ‫‪ُ )6‬ش ِر َب‬ ‫‪ُ )3‬ب ِع َث‬
‫‪َ form.‬م ْج ُه ْول ‪Change the following verbs into the‬‬
‫‪َ )13‬ظ َل َم ْت‬ ‫‪َ )10‬ش ِر َب ْت‬ ‫‪َ )7‬رزَ َق ْت‬ ‫‪َ )4‬س َأ َل‬ ‫‪َ )1‬ظ َل َم‬
‫‪ )14‬ن ََص َر‬ ‫‪َ )11‬أ ْع َطی‬ ‫ف‬
‫عَر َ‬
‫‪َ )8‬‬ ‫‪َ )5‬ب َع َث‬ ‫‪َ )2‬س ِم َع ْت‬
‫‪َ )15‬أك ََل‬ ‫‪َ )12‬أنْزَ َل‬ ‫‪َ )9‬ق َر َأ‬ ‫‪َ )6‬خ َل َق ْت‬ ‫‪َ )3‬ج َع َل ْت‬
‫‪42‬‬
‫ا ْل ُم َض ِار ُع ا ْل َم ْج ُه ْو ُل ‪Forming‬‬
‫‪ is formed by:‬ا ْل ُم َض ِار ُع ‪, of‬ا ْل َم ْج ُه ْو ُل ‪The passive,‬‬
‫; َض َّمة ‪1. Giving the first letter a‬‬
‫; َف ْت َحة ‪2. Giving the second last letter a‬‬
‫‪3. Leaving the harakah of the remaining letters as they are.‬‬
‫ا ْل ُم َض ِ‬
‫ار ُع‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ا ْل َم ْع ُل ْو ُم‬
‫ُي ْب َع ُث‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ُي ْب َعث‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ُي ْبعث‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫َي ْب َع ُث‬
‫ُينْزَ ُل‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ُينْزَ ل‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ُينْزل‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ُين ِْز ُل‬
‫َي ْس َتغ ِْف ُر‬

‫ُُ‬
‫ُي ْس َت ْغ َف ُر‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ُي ْست ْغ َفر‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ُي ْستغْفر‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪َ .‬م ْع ُل ْوم ‪َ or‬م ْج ُه ْول ‪State whether the following verbs are‬‬
‫ت‬
‫‪َ )16‬ي ُم ْو ُ‬ ‫‪ُ )13‬ي ْس َأ ُل‬ ‫‪ُ )10‬ين َْص ُر‬ ‫‪ُ )7‬ي ْع َبدُ‬ ‫‪َ )4‬ي ْخ ُل ُق‬ ‫‪ُ )1‬يؤْ َك ُل‬
‫‪ُ )17‬ي ْع ٰطی‬ ‫‪ُ )14‬ي ْس َم ُع‬ ‫‪ُ )11‬ي ْج َع ُل‬ ‫ف‬
‫‪ُ )8‬ي ْع َر ُ‬ ‫‪ُ )5‬ي ْرزَ ُق‬ ‫‪ُ )2‬ين ِْز ُل‬
‫‪ُ )18‬ي ٰری‬ ‫‪َ )15‬ي ْظلِ ُم‬ ‫‪ُ )12‬ي َسافِ ُر‬ ‫‪َ )9‬ي ْق َر ُأ‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ي ْش َر ُب‬ ‫‪ُ )3‬ي ْب َع ُث‬
‫‪َ form.‬م ْج ُه ْول ‪Change the following verbs into the‬‬
‫‪َ )13‬ت ْس َأ ُل‬ ‫‪َ )10‬ي ْع ِر ُ‬
‫ف‬ ‫‪َ )7‬ي ْخ ُل ُق‬ ‫‪َ )4‬ين ُْص ُر‬ ‫‪ُ )1‬ت ْعطِ ْي‬
‫‪َ )14‬ي ْظلِ ُم‬ ‫‪َ )11‬ت ْق َر ُأ‬ ‫‪َ )8‬ت ْرزُ ُق‬ ‫‪ُ )5‬ين ِْز ُل‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ي ْأك ُُل‬
‫‪َ )15‬ت ْس َم ُع‬ ‫‪َ )12‬ي ْج َع ُل‬ ‫‪َ )9‬ي ْش َر ُب‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ي ْب َع ُث‬ ‫‪َ )3‬ي ْع ُبدُ‬
‫‪43‬‬
Translation of ‫ا ْل ِف ْع ُل ا ْل َم ْج ُه ْو ُل‬
The passive voice is translated by adding the auxiliary verb to be
(was, is, is being, will be) to the past participle of the main verb.
The bike was [auxiliary verb] stolen [past tense of the main verb].
The tense is shown in the auxiliary verb, not the main verb, as this
remains the same in all tenses.
Tense Active Voice Passive Voice
ِ ‫ا ْلم‬
‫اض ْي‬ The thief stole the
َ Past The bike was stolen.
bike.
Present The thief steals the
The bike is stolen.
Habitual bike.
ِ ‫ ا ْل ُم َض‬Present
‫ار ُع‬ The thief is stealing the The bike is being
Continuous bike. stolen.
The thief will steal the
Future The bike will be stolen.
bike.
In these examples, the past participle of the verb to steal, stolen, is
used with all the tenses. The auxiliary verb is used in its different
tenses to show the tense of the main verb.
Vocab
moon ‫ َق َمر ج َأ ْق َمار‬drink ‫َش َراب ج َأ ْش ِر َبة‬
water ‫َماء ج مِ َیاه‬ food ‫َط َعام ج َأ ْط ِع َمة‬
king ‫َملِك ج ُم ُل ْوك‬ destitute ‫َف ِق ْیر ج ُف َق َرا ُء‬
Exercise 10
Translate the following. Ensure you differentiate between the ‫َم ْع ُل ْوم‬
form and the ‫ َم ْج ُه ْول‬form.
ُ ‫) َْل َي ْع ِر‬13
ُ‫ف ا ْل َو َلد‬ ‫) َما ُش ِر َب ا ْل َما ُء‬9 ُ ‫) َأنْزَ َل‬5
‫الل‬ ‫َأ ْع َطی زَ ْيد‬ )1
‫الر ُج ُل‬
ّ ‫ف‬ َ ‫) َما ع ُِر‬14 ‫) ُأكِ َل ال َّط َعا ُم‬10 ُ ‫) ُأن ِْز َل ا ْل ُق‬6
‫رآن‬ ‫ُأعْطِ َي زَ ْيد‬ )2
‫) َلن َّي ْظلِ َم ا ْل َملِ ُك‬15 ‫) ُرئِ َي ا ْل َق َم ُر‬11 ‫َّاس‬
ُ ‫ف الن‬
َ ‫) ع ََر‬7 ُ ‫َي ْب َع ُث‬
‫الل‬ )3
ُ ‫) َلن ُّي ْظ َل َم الن‬16

‫َّاس‬ ‫) ن ُِص َر ا ْل ُف َق َرا ُء‬12 ‫) َما َش ِر َب اْلَ ُخ‬8 ‫ُي ْب َع ُث ا ْل ِع َبا ُد‬ )4
44
‫‪Summary‬‬
‫‪Characteristic 1: Tense‬‬
‫ا ْلم ِ‬
‫اض ْي‬ ‫َ‬ ‫‪Past‬‬ ‫‪Zaid went‬‬ ‫َذ َه َ‬
‫‪Present Habitual‬‬ ‫‪Zaid goes‬‬ ‫َي ْذ َه ُ‬

‫ار ُع‬ ‫‪Present Continuous‬‬ ‫‪Zaid is going‬‬ ‫َي ْذ َه ُ‬
‫‪Future‬‬ ‫‪Zaid will go‬‬ ‫َي ْذ َه ُ‬

‫ْاْلَ ْم ُر‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪Imperative‬‬ ‫‪Go‬‬ ‫ا ْذ َه ْ‬
‫ب‬
‫اض ْي‬ ‫ا ْلم ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫َم ْبنِي‬
‫ار ُع‪ْ /‬اْلَ ْم ُر‬ ‫ُم ْع َرب‬ ‫َم ْر ُف ْوع‬ ‫ـُ‬ ‫َمن ُْص ْوب‬ ‫ـَ‬ ‫َم ْجزُ ْوم‬ ‫ـْ‬
‫‪Characteristic 3: Affirmative and Negative‬‬
‫ُم ْث َبت ‪Affirmative‬‬ ‫َذ َه َ‬
‫َل ْم‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َض ِ‬
‫ار ُع ( َم ْجزُ ْوم)‬ ‫‪Past‬‬ ‫َل ْم َي ْذ َه ْ‬
‫ا ْلم ِ‬
‫اض ْي‬ ‫َ‬ ‫‪Past‬‬ ‫َما َذ َه َ‬
‫ما‬
‫‪Negative‬‬ ‫َمن ِْفي‬ ‫ارع‬‫ا ْل ُم َض ِ‬ ‫‪Present‬‬ ‫َما َي ْذ َه ُ‬
‫َْل‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َض ِ‬
‫ار ُع‬ ‫‪Present / Future‬‬ ‫َْل َي ْذ َه ُ‬
‫َل ْن‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َض ِ‬
‫ار ُع ( َمن ُْص ْوب)‬ ‫‪Future‬‬ ‫َلن َّي ْذ َه َ‬
‫‪Characteristic 4: Gender‬‬
‫ُم َذكَّر‬ ‫ا ْلم ِ‬
‫اض ْي‬ ‫َف َع َل‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َض ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُمؤَ نَّث‬ ‫ا ْلم ِ‬
‫اض ْي‬ ‫َف َع َل ْت‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َض ِ‬
‫ار ُع‬ ‫َت ْف َع ُل‬
‫َ‬
‫‪Characteristic 5: Voice‬‬
‫فِ ْعل َم ْع ُل ْوم‬ ‫ا ْلم ِ‬
‫اض ْي‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َف َع َل‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َض ِ‬
‫فِ ْعل َم ْج ُه ْول‬ ‫ا ْلم ِ‬
‫اض ْي‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ُف ِع َل‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َض ِ‬
‫ار ُع‬ ‫ُي ْف َع ُل‬
‫‪45‬‬
Part 3: Particles
A particle has two important different characteristics.
1. Irab
2. Governance
All particles are ‫ َم ْبنِي‬: they remain unchanged in all circumstances.
Characteristic 2: Governance
Particles are of two types according to whether they cause the irab
of the subsequent noun or verb to change:
1. ‫عَامِل‬: A governing particle
2. ‫ َغ ْی ُر عَامِل‬: A non-governing particle
‫َح ْرف عَامِل‬

A ‫ َح ْرف عَامِل‬, is a particle which causes the irab of the following
word(s) to change. For example, the particle ‫ َل ْم‬causes the following
verb to be ‫ َم ْجزُ ْوم‬.
ْ ‫َل ْم َي ْذ َه‬
‫َح ْرف َغ ْی ُر عَامِل‬

A ‫ َح ْرف َغ ْی ُر عَامِل‬is a particle which does not cause the irab of the
following word(s) to change. For example, the particle ‫ َما‬makes the
past tense negative, but it does not cause the irab of the words
after it to change.
َ ‫َما َذ َه‬
46
‫َغ ْی ُر ‪ or‬عَامِل ‪State whether the negative particles before the verbs are‬‬
‫‪.‬عَامِل‬
‫‪َْ )13‬ل َي ْظلِ ُم ُم َح َّمد‬ ‫‪َ )9‬لم يجلِس إِبر ِ‬
‫اه ْی ُم‬ ‫‪َ )5‬ما َي ْس َم ُع زَ ْيد‬ ‫‪َْ )1‬ل َي ْس َم ُع زَ ْيد‬
‫ْ َ ْ ْ َْ‬
‫‪َ )14‬ما َي ْظلِ ُم ُم َح َّمد‬ ‫‪َْ )10‬ل يجلِس إِبر ِ‬
‫اه ْی ُم‬ ‫‪ )6‬ما يجلِس إِبر ِ‬
‫اه ْی ُم‬ ‫‪َ )2‬لن َّي ْس َم َع زَ ْيد‬
‫َ ْ ُ َْ‬ ‫َ َ ْ ُ َْ‬
‫‪َ )15‬ما َظ َل َم ُم َح َّمد‬ ‫‪َ )11‬ل ْم َي ْظلِ ْم ُم َح َّمد‬ ‫‪ )7‬ما ج َلس إِبر ِ‬
‫اه ْی ُم‬ ‫َ َ َ َْ‬ ‫‪َ )3‬ما َس ِم َع زَ ْيد‬
‫‪َ )16‬ل ْم َي ْس َم ْع ُم ْو َسی‬ ‫‪َ )12‬لن َّي ْظلِ َم ُم َح َّمد‬ ‫‪َ )8‬لن يجلِس إِبر ِ‬
‫اه ْی ُم‬ ‫‪َ )4‬ل ْم َي ْس َم ْع زَ ْيد‬
‫َّ ْ َ ْ َ‬
‫‪Summary‬‬
‫َكلِ َمة ‪Word -‬‬
‫َح ْرف ‪Particle -‬‬
‫َم ْبنِي‬ ‫‪Remains Unchanged‬‬
‫‪Characteristic 2: Governance‬‬
‫عَ امِل‬ ‫‪Governing Particle‬‬
‫َغ ْی ُر عَ امِل‬ ‫‪Non-Governing Particle‬‬
‫‪47‬‬
Supplement
In this section, we will be discussing a few more rules regarding
nouns based on their derivation.
‫َم ْصدَ ر‬
ِ ‫ا ْلم‬,
In the vocabulary lists, three words are written for verbs: ‫اض ْي‬ َ
ِ ْ ْ
‫ ال ُم َضار ُع‬and ‫ال َم ْصدَ ُر‬.
‫ا ْل َم ْصدَ ُر‬ ِ ‫ا ْل ُم َض‬
‫ار ُع‬ ‫اض ْي‬ِ ‫ا ْلم‬
َ
 
‫ُسؤَ ًاْل‬ ‫َي ْس َأ ُل‬ ‫َس َأ َل‬
ِ ‫ ا ْلم‬and ‫ارع‬
‫اض ْي‬ َ ُ ِ ‫ ا ْل ُم َض‬are verbs; and the ‫ َم ْصدَ ر‬is a noun.
The English equivalents of a ‫ َم ْصدَ ر‬are:
1. An infinitive, i.e. a noun with to before it.
A gerund, i.e. a noun ending in -ing.
to ask asking
A tip for remembering this is an infinitive is translated as to, and
a gerund is translated as -ing
2. A verbal noun, i.e. a noun without any element of action to it.
question
When a ‫ َم ْصدَ ر‬is used as a verbal noun, it can have its own plural.
‫ُسؤَ ال ج َأ ْسئِ َلة‬
Exercise 1
Translate the following ‫ َم ْصدَ ر‬as infinitives, gerunds, and verbal
nouns.
‫) َم ْوت‬13 ‫) ِع َبا َدة‬10 ‫) ُش ْرب‬7 ‫) َخ ْلق‬4 ‫) إِنْزَ ال‬1
‫) ن َْصر‬14 ‫) قِ َرا َءة‬11 ‫) َص ْوم‬8 ‫) ِرزْ ق‬5 ‫) إِ ْي َمان‬2
‫) ن َْوم‬15 ‫) َم ْع ِر َفة‬12 ‫) ُظ ْلم‬9 ‫) ُس ُق ْوط‬6 ‫) َب ْعث‬3
48
ُ ‫ا ْل ُم ْش َت َّق‬
‫ات‬
Some ‫ َأ ْس َماء‬are made by placing the letters of the ‫ َم ْصدَ ر‬in different
forms. These are called ‫ ; ُم ْشتَق‬a derived noun.
In this section we are going to discuss four of the ‫ ُم ْش َت َّقات‬:
1. ‫اع ِل‬ِ ‫اِسم ا ْل َف‬
ُ ْ
2. ‫اِ ْس ُم ا ْل َم ْف ُع ْول‬
ِ
3. ‫اع ِل‬ ِ ‫الص َف ُة ا ْلم َشبه ُة بِاس ِم ا ْل َف‬
ْ َ َّ ُ ِّ
ِ
4. ‫ا ْس ُم ال َّت ْفض ْی ِل‬ِ
ِ ‫اِسم ا ْل َف‬
‫اع ِل‬ ُ ْ
The active participle, ‫اع ِل‬ ِ ‫اِسم ا ْل َف‬, represents the one who is carrying
ُ ْ
out the verb. It is made from the same letters as its ‫اض ْي‬ ِ ‫ا ْلم‬.
َ
ِ ِ ْ ِ ِ
For example, the word ‫ َرازق‬is the ‫ ا ْس ُم ال َفاع ِل‬of ‫ ; َرزَ َق َي ْرزُ ُق رزْ ًقا‬it means a
person who provides. This can be translated by adding -er after the
meaning of the verb, or one who or that which before it.
Constructing the ‫اع ِل‬ ِ ‫اِسم ا ْل َف‬
ُ ْ
ِ ِ
The ‫ ا ْس ُم ا ْل َفاع ِل‬is formed by placing the letters in the pattern of ‫اعل‬ ِ ‫ َف‬if
ِ ‫ ا ْلم‬has three letters.
its ‫اض ْي‬ َ
If a verb’s ‫اض ْي‬ ِ ‫ ا ْلم‬has more than three letter, its ‫اع ِل‬ ِ ‫ اِسم ا ْل َف‬is formed by
َ ُ ْ
1. Changing the ‫ ي‬in the ‫ ُم َضارع‬to a ‫; ُم‬ ِ
2. Placing a ‫ ك َْس َرة‬on the penultimate letter.
‫َرزَ َق َي ْرزُ ُق ِرزْ ًقا‬ ‫َأن َْذ َر ُين ِْذ ُر إِن َْذ ًارا‬
‫َر ِازق‬ ‫ُمنْ ِذر‬
provider warner
one who provides one who warns
Exercise 2
ُ‫) َا ْل َعابِد‬10 ‫) ُمن ِْزل‬7 ‫) ُم َسافِر‬4 ‫) ُمؤْ مِن‬1
‫َاصر‬ِ ‫) ن‬11 ‫) َا ْل َخال ِ ُق‬8 ‫لسائِ ُل‬
َّ ‫) َا‬5 ‫) َال َّصائِ ُم‬2
ِ ‫) َا ْل َق‬12
ُ‫ارئ‬ ‫) َر ِازق‬9 ‫) َظالِم‬6 ‫) نَائِم‬3
49
‫اِ ْس ُم ا ْل َم ْف ُع ْو ِل‬
The passive participle, ‫اِ ْس ُم ا ْل َم ْف ُع ْو ِل‬, represents the one upon whom
the action is carried out. It is made from the same letters as its
ِ ‫ا ْلم‬.
‫اض ْي‬ َ
For example, the word ‫ َم ْرزُ ْوق‬is the ‫ اِ ْس ُم ا ْل َم ْف ُع ْو ِل‬of ‫ ; َرزَ َق َي ْرزُ ُق ِرزْ ًقا‬it means
one who is provided. This can be translated by adding -ed after the
meaning of the verb, or one who is or that which is before it.
Constructing the ‫اِ ْس ُم ا ْل َم ْف ُع ْو ِل‬
The ‫ ْاس ُم ا ْل َم ْف ُع ْو ِل‬is formed by placing the letters in the pattern of ‫َم ْف ُع ْول‬
if its ‫اض ْي‬ِ ‫ ا ْلم‬has three letters.
َ
If a verb’s ‫اض ْي‬ ِ ‫ ا ْلم‬has more than three-letter, its ‫ اِسم ا ْلم ْفعو ِل‬is formed
َ ُْ َ ُ ْ
by:
1. Changing the ‫ َي‬in the ‫ ُم َض ِارع‬to a ‫; ُم‬
2. Placing a ‫ َفت َْحة‬on the penultimate letter.
‫َرزَ َق َي ْرزُ ُق ِرزْ ًقا‬ ‫َأن َْذ َر ُين ِْذ ُر إِن َْذ ًارا‬
‫َم ْرزُ ْوق‬ ‫ُمنْ َذر‬

provided warned
one who is provided one who is warned
Exercise 3
‫) َم ْق ُر ْوء‬7 ‫) َم ْرزُ ْو َقة‬5 ‫) َم ْب ُع ْو ُث ْو َن‬3 ‫) َا ْل َم ْسئ ُْو ُل‬1
‫) َمن ُْص ْور‬8 ‫) َا ْل َم ْع ُب ْو ُد‬6 ِ ‫) َا ْلم ْخ ُلو َق‬4
‫ان‬ ‫) َم ْأك ُْول‬2
ْ َ
50
ِ ‫الص َف ُة ا ْلم َشبه ُة بِاس ِم ا ْل َف‬
‫اع ِل‬ ْ َ َّ ُ ِّ
ِ
The ‫الص َف ُة ا ْل ُم َش َّب َه ُة بِ ْاس ِم ا ْل َفاع ِل‬
ِّ depicts the one who is carrying out the verb,
ِ
like the ‫ ْاس ُم ا ْل َفاع ِل‬. However, the meaning of the ‫اع ِل‬ ِ ‫ الص َف ُة ا ْلم َشبه ُة بِاس ِم ا ْل َف‬is
ْ َ َّ ُ ِّ
usually more long term or intense compared to an ‫ا ْس ُم ا ْل َفاع ِل‬. For ِ ِ
example, the word ‫ كَثِ ْیر‬is the ‫اع ِل‬ ِ ‫ الص َف ُة ا ْلم َشبه ُة بِاس ِم ا ْل َف‬of ‫ َك ُثر ي ْك ُثر َك ْثر ًة‬: it
ْ َ َّ ُ ِّ َ ُ َ َ
depicts the meaning of abundance.
ِ ‫ الص َف ُة ا ْلم َشبه ُة بِاس ِم ا ْل َف‬are:
Some common patterns for ‫اع ِل‬ ْ َ َّ ُ ِّ
1. ‫ َف ِع ْیل‬:
‫َك ُث َر َي ْك ُث ُر َك ْث َر ًة‬
‫كَثِ ْیر‬
abundant
The plurals of these adjectives will usually be a ‫ َج ْمع ُم َك َّسر‬. Some
common patterns for these are:
‫فِ َعال‬ ‫ُف َع ََّل ُء‬ ‫َأ ْف ِع ََّل ُء‬
‫َص ِغ ْیر ج ِصغَار‬ ‫َف ِق ْیر ج ُف َق َرا ُء‬ ‫غَنِي ج َأغْن ِ َیا ُء‬
2. ‫ َف ُع ْول‬:
‫َص َب َر َي ْصبِ ُر َص ْب ًرا‬
‫َص ُب ْور‬
patient
3. ‫ َف ْع ََّل ُن‬: The feminine of this adjective occurs on the pattern of ‫ َف ْع َلی‬.
‫ب غ ََض ًبا‬ ِ
ُ ‫ب َيغ َْض‬
َ ‫غَض‬
ُ ‫غ َْض َب‬
‫ غ َْض َبی‬- ‫ان‬
angry
4. ‫ َف َّعال‬:
‫َص َب َر َي ْصبِ ُر َص ْب ًرا‬
‫َص َّبار‬
extremely patient
51
Usage of the ‫اع ِل‬ ِ ‫اِسم ا ْل َف‬, ‫ اِسم ا ْلم ْفعو ِل‬and ‫اع ِل‬ ِ ‫َالص َف ُة ا ْلم َشبه ُة بِاس ِم ا ْل َف‬
ُ ْ ُْ َ ُ ْ ْ َ َّ ُ ِّ
ِ ِ
The ‫ ْاس ُم ا ْل َفاع ِل‬, ‫ ْاس ُم ا ْل َم ْف ُع ْو ِل‬and ‫الص َف ُة ا ْل ُم َش َّب َه ُة بِ ْاس ِم ا ْل َفاع ِل‬
ِّ can be used as both
nouns and adjectives.
‫ُم ْجت َِهد‬ ‫غَنِي‬
Adjective hardworking rich

Noun one who works hard rich person
Sometimes, there is no English equivalent for the Arabic noun. In
such a case, it can be translated by adding one who before the
noun or person after it.
If the ‫اع ِل‬ ِ ‫ اسم ا ْل َف‬is an adjective, its plural will be a ‫ جمع سالِم‬with ‫ـُو َن‬.
ُ ْ َ ْ َ ْ
However, if it is in the meaning of a noun, its plural will also be a
‫ َج ْمع ُم َك َّسر‬. Some common patterns for these are:
‫ُف َع ََّل ُء‬ ‫ُف َّعال‬ ‫َف َع َلة‬
‫عَاقِل ج ُع َق ََّل ُء‬ ‫كَافِر ج ُك َّفار‬ ‫عَابِد ج َع َبدَ ة‬
Note
In vocabulary lists, some adjectives will be written along with their
plural, and some will not be written, but will have to be deduced
from the verb.
52
‫‪Vocab‬‬
‫‪to be patient‬‬ ‫‪َ to smile‬ص َب َر َي ْصبِ ُر َص ْب ًرا‬ ‫اِ ْبت ََس َم َي ْبت َِس ُم ا ْبتِ َسا ًما‬
‫‪to tell the truth‬‬ ‫َصدَ َق َي ْصدُ ُق ِصدْ ًقا‬ ‫‪to work hard‬‬ ‫اجتِ َها ًدا‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ا ْجت ََهدَ َي ْجت َِهدُ ْ‬
‫‪to be thirsty‬‬ ‫‪ to hasten‬عَطِ َش َي ْع َط ُش َع َط ًشا‬ ‫َأ ْس َر َع ُي ْس ِر ُع إِ ْس َراعًا‬
‫‪to teach‬‬ ‫‪َ to warn‬ع َّل َم ُي َع ِّل ُم َت ْعلِ ْی ًما‬ ‫َأن َْذ َر ُين ِْذ ُر إِن َْذ ًارا‬
‫ِ‬
‫َاب َيغیْ ُ‬
‫ب َغیْبًا‪َ ،‬غیْبُو َب ًة‬ ‫غ َ‬ ‫اع َي ُج ْو ُع َج ْوعًا‬
‫َج َ‬
‫‪to be absent, hidden,‬‬
‫‪unseen, vanish,‬‬ ‫‪to be hungry‬‬
‫ب غ ََض ًبا‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫َج ِه َل َي ْج َه ُل َج ْه ًَّل‬
‫‪to be angry‬‬ ‫ب َيغ َْض ُ‬
‫غَض َ‬ ‫‪to be unaware‬‬
‫‪ignorant, not know‬‬
‫‪of,‬‬
‫‪to forgive‬‬ ‫‪َ to be sad, grieve‬غ َف َر َيغ ِْف ُر َمغ ِْف َر ًة‬ ‫َح ِز َن َي ْحزَ ُن ُحزْ نًا‬
‫‪to be abundant‬‬ ‫َك ُث َر َي ْك ُث ُر َك ْث َر ًة‬ ‫‪to attend‬‬ ‫َح َض َر َي ْح ُض ُر ُح ُض ْو ًرا‬
‫‪to lie, be dishonest‬‬ ‫ك ََذ َب َي ْك ِذ ُب كِ ْذ ًبا ك َِذ ًبا‬ ‫‪to make a loss‬‬ ‫َخ ِس َر َي ْخ َس ُر ُخ ْس َرانًا‬
‫‪to‬‬ ‫‪disbelieve,‬‬ ‫‪be‬‬ ‫َك َف َر َي ْك ُف ُر ُك ْف ًرا‬ ‫‪to be sated‬‬ ‫َشبِ َع َي ْش َب ُع ِشـ ْب ًعا‪َ ،‬ش ْب ًعا‬
‫‪ungrateful‬‬
‫‪to be sick‬‬ ‫َم ِر َض َي ْم َر ُض َم َر ًضا‬ ‫‪to thank‬‬ ‫َش َك َر َي ْش ُك ُر ُش ْك ًرا‬
‫‪Translate the following and mention the type of adjective.‬‬
‫‪ُ )21‬م ْبت َِسم‬ ‫‪ )16‬ع َََّّلم‬ ‫‪ )11‬ص ِ‬
‫ادق‬ ‫َ‬ ‫‪َ )6‬خالِق‬ ‫‪ )1‬ج ِ‬
‫اهل‬ ‫َ‬
‫َم ِر ْيض‬ ‫‪)22‬‬ ‫‪َ )17‬ع ْط َش ُ‬
‫ان‬ ‫‪َ )12‬صائِم‬ ‫‪َ )7‬خ ََّّلق‬ ‫‪َ )2‬جائِع‬
‫ُم َسافِر‬ ‫‪)23‬‬ ‫‪ )18‬غ َْض َب ُ‬
‫ان‬ ‫‪َ )13‬ظالِم‬ ‫‪َ )8‬ر ِازق‬ ‫‪َ )3‬ج ْوع ُ‬
‫َان‬
‫ُم ْس َت ْی ِقظ‬ ‫‪)24‬‬ ‫ارئ‬ ‫‪َ )19‬ق ِ‬ ‫‪َ )14‬ظ ََّّلم‬ ‫‪َ )9‬رزَّ اق‬ ‫‪َ )4‬ح ِز ْين‬
‫ُمؤْ مِن‬ ‫‪)25‬‬ ‫‪ )20‬كَثِ ْیر‬ ‫‪ )15‬عَالِم‬ ‫‪َ )10‬سائِل‬ ‫اسر‬‫‪َ )5‬خ ِ‬
‫‪53‬‬
ِ ‫اِ ْس ُم ال َّت ْف ِض ْی‬
‫ل‬
The comparative and superlative nouns, ‫اِ ْس ُم ال َّت ْف ِض ْی ِل‬, depict the
ِ ‫ اِسم ا ْل َف‬in a comparative or superlative context.
meaning of an ‫اع ِل‬ ُ ْ
For example, the word ‫ َأ ْصدَ ُق‬is the ‫ اِ ْس ُم ال َّت ْف ِض ْی ِل‬of ‫ ; َصدَ َق َي ْصدُ ُق ِصدْ ًقا‬it shows
a person who possesses the quality of truthfulness more or the
most. This can be translated as either:
1. The comparative (i.e. by adding -er or more after it)
2. The superlative (i.e. by adding -est or most before it)
Constructing the ‫ْاس ُم ال َّت ْف ِض ْی ِل‬
The ‫ اِ ْس ُم ال َّت ْف ِض ْی ِل‬is formed by placing the three letters of ‫اض ْي‬
ِ ‫ ا ْلم‬in the
َ
ُ ْ َ
pattern of ‫أف َعل‬. The feminine form comes on the pattern of ‫ ُف ْع َلی‬.
‫َصدَ َق َي ْصدُ ُق ِصدْ ًقا‬ ‫ب غ ََض ًبا‬
ُ ‫ب َيغ َْض‬
ِ
َ ‫غَض‬
‫َأ ْصدَ ُق‬ ُ ‫َأ ْغ َض‬
‫ب‬
more truthful angrier
most truthful angriest
Exercise 5
Translate the following as both the comparative and superlative.
ُ ‫) َأع َْر‬10
‫ف‬ ‫) َأ ْم َر ُض‬7 ‫) َأ ْصدَ ُق‬4 ‫) َأ ْظ َل ُم‬1
‫) َأ ْق َر ُأ‬11 ‫) َأ ْش َك ُر‬8 ‫) َأ ْج َه ُل‬5 ‫) َأ ْص َب ُر‬2
‫) َأن َْص ُر‬12 ُ‫) َأ ْع َبد‬9 ‫) َأ ْس َم ُع‬6 ‫) َأ ْع َل ُم‬3
54
Summary
Types of Nouns
Infinitive to ask ‫ُسؤَ ال‬
‫َم ْصدَ ر‬ Gerund asking
Verbal Noun question ‫ُسؤَ ال ج َأ ْسئِ َلة‬
ُ ‫ا ْل ُم ْش َت َّق‬
‫ات‬
Three-Letter ‫َر ِازق‬

‫اِ ْس ُم ا ْل َفاِع ِل‬
Four- Five- Letter ‫ُمن ِْذر‬
Three-Letter ‫َم ْرزُ ْوق‬

‫اِ ْس ُم ا ْل َم ْف ُع ْو ِل‬ Nouns
Four- Five- Letter Adjectives ‫ُمن َْذر‬
ِ ‫الص َف ُة ا ْلم َشبه ُة بِاس ِم ا ْل َف‬
‫اع ِل‬ ‫ َف َّعال‬،‫ َف ْع ََّل ُن‬،‫ َف ُع ْول‬،‫َف ِع ْیل‬
ْ َ َّ ُ ِّ
‫اِ ْس ُم ال َّت ْف ِض ْی ِل‬ Comparative -er ‫َأ ْف َع ُل‬

Superlative -est
55
Summary
Key Terms
Below are the key terms discussed in this section. They are listed
according to the order of occurrence.
state ‫ إِع َْراب‬word ‫كَلِ َمة ج كَلِ َمات‬
a state of a noun and ‫ َم ْر ُف ْوع‬noun ‫اِ ْسم ج َأ ْس َماء‬
verb
a state of a noun and ‫ َمن ُْص ْوب‬verb ‫فِ ْعل ج َأ ْف َعال‬
verb
a state of a noun ‫ َم ْج ُر ْور‬particle ‫َح ْرف ج ُح ُر ْوف‬
a state of a verb ‫َم ْجزُ ْوم‬ ‫ف‬ ِ ‫َم ْع ِر َفة ج َم َع‬

ُ ‫ار‬
definite noun
non-declinable ‫َم ْبنِي‬ ‫نَكِ َرة ج نَكِ َرات‬
indefinite noun
declinable ‫ُم ْع َرب‬ ‫َتن ِْو ْين‬
double harakah
noun without ‫ َا ْل‬or ‫َتن ِْو ْين‬ ‫َغ ْی ُر ُمن َْص ِرف‬
masculine ‫ُم َذكَّر‬
past tense ‫َماض‬ ‫ُمؤَ نَّث‬
feminine
ِ ‫ُم َض‬
‫ارع‬
present or future round taa ‫التَّا ُء ا ْل َم ْر ُب ْو َط ُة‬
imperative ‫َأ ْمر‬ ‫التَّا ُء ا ْل َم ْفت ُْو َح ُة‬
open taa
affirmative ‫ُم ْث َبت‬
singular ‫ُم ْف َرد‬
negative ‫َمن ِْفي‬
dual ‫ُم َثنًّی‬
negative particle ‫ف َن ْفي‬
ُ ‫َح ْر‬
plural ‫َج ْمع‬
active voice ‫فِ ْعل َم ْع ُل ْوم‬ ‫َج ْمع َسالِم‬
regular plural
passive voice ‫فِ ْعل َم ْج ُه ْول‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َك َّسر‬
irregular plural
governing particle ‫عَامِل‬
non-governing particle ‫َغ ْی ُر عَامِل‬
56
‫‪Vocabulary‬‬
‫َأ ْس َماء‬
‫‪year‬‬ ‫‪َ father‬سنَة ج َسن ََوات‪ِ ،‬سن ُْو َن‬ ‫َأب ج آ َباء‬
‫‪chapter‬‬ ‫‪ُ brother‬س ْو َرة ج ُس َور‬ ‫َأخ ج إِ ْخ َوان‪ ،‬إِ ْخ َوة‬
‫‪thankful‬‬ ‫‪َ sister‬شاكِر ج ْو َن‬ ‫ُأ ْخت ج َأ َخ َوات‬
‫‪drink‬‬ ‫‪َ earth‬ش َراب ج َأ ْش ِر َبة‬ ‫َأ ْرض ج َأ ْر ُض ْو َن (مث)‬
‫‪sun‬‬ ‫‪َ mother‬ش ْمس ج ُش ُم ْوس (مث)‬ ‫ُأم ج ُأ َّم َهات‬
‫‪thing‬‬ ‫‪َ imam, leader‬ش ْيء ج َأ ْش َیا ُء‬ ‫إِ َمام ج َأئِ َّمة‬
‫‪patient‬‬ ‫‪َ woman‬صابِر ج ْو َن‬ ‫اِ ْم َرأة ج نِ َساء‪ ،‬نِ ْس َوة‬

‫ادق ج ْو َن‬ ‫ص ِ‬ ‫بِنْت ج َبنَات‬
‫‪truthful‬‬ ‫‪َ daughter‬‬
‫‪pious‬‬ ‫‪َ sitting‬صالِح ج ْو َن‬ ‫َجالِس ج ْو َن‬
‫‪guest‬‬ ‫‪َ mountain‬ض ْیف ج ُض ُی ْوف‬ ‫َج َبل ج ِج َبال‬
‫‪student‬‬ ‫َطالِب ج ُط ََّّلب‬ ‫‪grandfather‬‬ ‫َجد ج َأ ْجدَ اد‬
‫‪student‬‬ ‫‪َ grandmother‬طال ِ َبة ج َطال ِ َبات‬ ‫َجدَّ ة ج َجدَّ ات‬
‫‪food‬‬ ‫‪َ garden, heaven‬ط َعام ج َأ ْط ِع َمة‬ ‫َجنَّة ج َجنَّات‬
‫‪child‬‬ ‫طِ ْفل ج َأ ْط َفال‬ ‫)‪aunt (mother’s sister‬‬ ‫َخا َلة ج َخ َاْلت‬
‫‪child‬‬ ‫‪ world‬طِ ْف َلة ج َأ ْط َفال‬ ‫ُد ْن َیا (مث)‬
‫‪scholar‬‬ ‫‪ lord, nourisher‬عَالِم ج ُع َل َما ُء‬ ‫َرب َج َأ ْر َباب‬
‫‪servant‬‬ ‫‪َ foot‬ع ْبد ج ِع َباد‬ ‫ِر ْجل ج َأ ْر ُجل ( ُمث)‬

‫‪uncle‬‬ ‫‪(father’s‬‬ ‫‪ man‬عَم ج َأع َْمام‬ ‫َر ُجل ج ِر َجال‬
‫)‪brother‬‬
‫‪eye, spring‬‬ ‫َع ْین ج َأ ْعیُن‪ُ ،‬عیُ ْون (مث)‬ ‫‪messenger‬‬ ‫َر ُس ْول ج ُر ُسل‬
‫اسق ج ْو َن‬ ‫َف ِ‬ ‫ِر ْيح ج ِر َياح (مث)‬
‫‪transgressor‬‬ ‫‪wind‬‬
‫‪destitute‬‬ ‫‪َ sky‬ف ِق ْیر ج ُف َق َرا ُء‬ ‫َس َماء ج َس َم َ‬
‫اوات (مث)‬
‫‪57‬‬
‫‪teacher‬‬ ‫)‪ُ paper (sheet of‬م َع ِّلم ج ُم َع ِّل ُم ْو َن‬ ‫قِ ْر َطاس ج َق َراطِ ْی ُس‬
‫‪teacher‬‬ ‫‪ُ pen‬م َع ِّل َمة ج ُم َع ِّل َمات‬ ‫َق َلم ج َأ ْق ََّلم‬
‫ِ‬ ‫َق َمر ج َأ ْق َمار‬
‫‪desk‬‬ ‫‪َ moon‬م ْكتَب ج َم َكات ُ‬
‫ب‬
‫‪king‬‬ ‫‪َ nation‬ملِك ج ُم ُل ْوك‬ ‫َق ْوم ج َأ ْق َوام‬
‫‪believer‬‬ ‫‪ُ book‬مؤْ مِن ج ْو َن‬ ‫كِتَاب ج ُكتُب‬
‫‪fire‬‬ ‫‪ chair‬نَار ج نِ ْی َران (مث)‬ ‫كُر ِسي ج كَر ِ‬

‫اس ُّي‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ْ‬
‫‪people‬‬ ‫‪ night‬نَاس ج ُأنَاس‬ ‫َل ْی َلة‪َ ،‬ل ْیل ج َل َیال‬
‫‪prophet‬‬ ‫‪َ water‬نبِي َج َأ ْنبِ َیا ُء‪َ ،‬نبِ ُّی ْو َن‬ ‫َماء ج مِ َیاه‬
‫‪star‬‬ ‫‪ hardworking‬ن َْجم ج ن ُُج ْوم‬ ‫ُم ْجت َِهد ج ْو َن‬
‫‪soul‬‬ ‫َن ْفس ج ن ُُف ْوس‪َ ،‬أن ُْفس (مث)‬ ‫‪sincere‬‬ ‫ُم ْخلِص ج ْو َن‬
‫‪child, son‬‬ ‫َو َلد ج َأ ْو َْلد‬ ‫‪school, place of study‬‬ ‫َمدْ َر َسة ج َمدَ ِار ُس‬
‫‪hand‬‬ ‫‪َ Muslim‬يد ج َأ ْيد‪َ ،‬أ َياد (مث)‬ ‫ُم ْسلِم ج ْو َن‬
‫َأ ْف َعال‬
‫‪to‬‬ ‫‪break,‬‬ ‫‪become‬‬ ‫‪ to smile‬اِ ْن َك َس َر َينْ َك ِس ُر انْكِ َس ًارا‬ ‫اِ ْبت ََس َم َي ْبت َِس ُم ا ْبتِ َسا ًما‬
‫‪broken‬‬
‫‪to send, resurrect‬‬ ‫َب َع َث َي ْب َع ُث َب ْع ًثا‬ ‫‪to work hard‬‬ ‫اجتِ َها ًدا‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ا ْجت ََهدَ َي ْجت َِهدُ ْ‬
‫جي ُء َم ِ‬
‫ج ْیئًا‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫استِیْ َقا ًظا‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫اِ ْس َت ْی َق َ‬
‫‪to come‬‬ ‫َجا َء َي ْ‬ ‫‪to wake up‬‬ ‫ظ َي ْستَیْق ُظ ْ‬
‫‪to be hungry‬‬ ‫اع َي ُج ْو ُع َج ْوعًا‬

‫َج َ‬ ‫‪to hasten‬‬ ‫َأ ْس َر َع ُي ْس ِر ُع إِ ْس َراعًا‬
‫‪to make‬‬ ‫َج َع َل َي ْج َع ُل َج ْع ًَّل‬ ‫‪to give‬‬ ‫َأ ْع َطی ُي ْعطِ ْي إِ ْع َطا ًء‬
‫‪to sit‬‬ ‫َج َل َس َي ْجلِ ُس ُج ُل ْو ًسا‬ ‫‪to eat‬‬ ‫َأك ََل َي ْأك ُُل َأك ًَّْل‬
‫‪to be unaware‬‬ ‫‪of,‬‬ ‫َج ِه َل َي ْج َه ُل َج ْه ًَّل‬ ‫‪to believe‬‬ ‫آ َم َن ُيؤْ مِ ُن إِ ْي َمانًا‬
‫‪ignorant, not know‬‬
‫‪to be sad, grieve‬‬ ‫َح ِز َن َي ْحزَ ُن ُحزْ نًا‬ ‫‪to warn‬‬ ‫َأن َْذ َر ُين ِْذ ُر إِن َْذ ًارا‬
‫‪to attend‬‬ ‫َح َض َر َي ْح ُض ُر ُح ُض ْو ًرا‬ ‫‪to send down‬‬ ‫َأنْزَ َل ُين ِْز ُل إِنْزَ ًاْل‬
‫‪58‬‬
‫‪to worship‬‬ ‫‪َ to make a loss‬ع َبدَ َي ْع ُبدُ ِع َبا َد ًة‬ ‫َخ ِس َر َي ْخ َس ُر ُخ ْس َرانًا‬
‫‪to recognise‬‬ ‫ف َم ْع ِر َف ًة‬ ‫ف َي ْع ِر ُ‬ ‫عَر َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫‪to create‬‬ ‫َخ َل َق َي ْخ ُل ُق َخ ْل ًقا‬
‫‪to be thirsty‬‬ ‫‪ to go‬عَطِ َش َي ْع َط ُش َع َط ًشا‬ ‫ب َذ َها ًبا‬

‫ب َي ْذ َه ُ‬
‫َذ َه َ‬
‫‪to teach‬‬ ‫‪َ to see‬ع َّل َم ُي َع ِّل ُم َت ْعلِ ْی ًما‬ ‫َر َأی َي ٰری ُرؤْ َي ًة‬
‫ِ‬ ‫َرزَ َق َي ْرزُ ُق ِرزْ ًقا‬
‫َاب َيغیْ ُ‬
‫ب َغیْبًا‪َ ،‬غیْبُو َب ًة‬ ‫غ َ‬
‫‪to be absent, hidden,‬‬
‫‪unseen, vanish,‬‬ ‫‪to provide‬‬
‫‪to be angry‬‬ ‫ب غ ََض ًبا‬ ‫ب َيغ َْض ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪ to travel‬غَض َ‬ ‫َسا َف َر ُي َسافِ ُر ُم َسا َف َر ًة‬
‫‪to forgive‬‬ ‫‪َ to ask‬غ َف َر َيغ ِْف ُر َمغ ِْف َر ًة‬ ‫َس َأ َل َي ْس َأ ُل ُسؤَ ًاْل‬
‫‪to stand‬‬ ‫‪َ to fall‬قا َم َي ُق ْو ُم قِ َیا ًما‬ ‫َس َق َط َي ْس ُق ُط ُس ُق ْو ًطا‬
‫‪to read‬‬ ‫‪َ to hear, listen‬ق َر َأ َي ْق َر ُأ قِ َرا َء ًة‬ ‫َس ِم َع َي ْس َم ُع َس ْم ًعا‬
‫‪to be abundant‬‬ ‫َك ُث َر َي ْك ُث ُر َك ْث َر ًة‬ ‫‪to be sated‬‬ ‫َشبِ َع َي ْش َب ُع ِشـ ْب ًعا‪َ ،‬ش ْب ًعا‬
‫‪to lie, be dishonest‬‬ ‫ك ََذ َب َي ْك ِذ ُب كِ ْذ ًبا ك َِذ ًبا‬ ‫‪to drink‬‬ ‫َش ِر َب َي ْش َر ُب ُش ْر ًبا‬
‫‪to‬‬ ‫‪disbelieve,‬‬ ‫‪be‬‬ ‫َك َف َر َي ْك ُف ُر ُك ْف ًرا‬ ‫‪to thank‬‬ ‫َش َك َر َي ْش ُك ُر ُش ْك ًرا‬
‫‪ungrateful‬‬
‫‪to die‬‬ ‫ت َم ْو ًتا‬

‫ات َي ُم ْو ُ‬
‫َم َ‬ ‫‪to fast‬‬ ‫ص ْو ُم َص ْو ًما‪ِ ،‬ص َیا ًما‬
‫َصا َم َي ُ‬
‫‪to be sick‬‬ ‫َم ِر َض َي ْم َر ُض َم َر ًضا‬ ‫‪to be patient‬‬ ‫َص َب َر َي ْصبِ ُر َص ْب ًرا‬
‫‪to sleep‬‬ ‫نَا َم َينَا ُم ن َْو ًما‬ ‫‪to tell the truth‬‬ ‫َصدَ َق َي ْصدُ ُق ِصدْ ًقا‬
‫‪to help‬‬ ‫ن ََص َر َين ُْص ُر ن َْص ًرا‬ ‫‪to oppress‬‬ ‫َظ َل َم َي ْظلِ ُم ُظ ْل ًما‬
‫‪59‬‬
60
SENTENCES
Introduction: Sentences
Part 1: ‫َا ْل ُج ْم َل ُة ِاْل ْس ِم َّی ُة‬
Part 2: Additional Rules of ‫َا ْل ُج ْم َل ُة ِاْل ْس ِم َّی ُة‬
Summary
61
Introduction: Sentences
In Unit 1, nouns, verbs, and particles were discussed. In this unit,
we are going to learn how to put the different types of words
together to form sentences.
In Arabic, a sentence is called a ‫ ُج ْم َلة‬. The plural of this is ‫ ُج َمل‬.
There are two types of sentences:
1. ‫اإل ْس ِم َّی ُة‬
ِ ْ ‫َا ْل ُج ْم َل ُة‬
2. ‫َا ْل ُج ْم َل ُة ا ْل ِف ْعلِ َّی ُة‬
62
ِ ْ ‫َا ْلجم َل ُة‬
Part 1: ‫اْل ْس ِم َّی ُة‬ ْ ُ
‫ َا ْل ُج ْم َل ُة ْاْل ْس ِم َّی ُة‬is a sentence which is made up of two parts or slots:
1. ‫ ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬: the subject, i.e. the thing you are talking about.
2. ‫ َخ َبر‬: the information regarding the ‫ ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬.
The man is truthful.
In the above example, the man is the subject, ‫ ; ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬and truthful is
the information, ‫ َخ َبر‬.
Rules of ‫ ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬and ‫َخ َبر‬
1. The ‫ ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬is given first, followed by the ‫ َخ َبر‬.
2. The ‫ ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬must be a noun in the ‫ َم ْر ُف ْوع‬state.
3. The ‫ َخ َبر‬must match the ‫ ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬in Irab, Number and Gender (ING),
but not Definite and Indefinite; the ‫ ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬is definite and the ‫ َخ َبر‬is
indefinite.
‫َج ْمع‬ ‫ُم َثنًّی‬ ‫ُم ْف َرد‬
ِ ‫الرج ُال ص‬
‫اد ُق ْو َن‬ ِ ‫اد َق‬
‫ان‬ ِ ‫الرج ََّل ِن ص‬ ِ ‫الرج ُل ص‬
‫ادق‬ ‫ُم َذكَّر‬
َ َ ِّ َ ُ َّ َ ُ َّ
ِ ‫ات ص‬ ِ ‫اد َقت‬
ِ ‫َان ص‬
ِ ِ ‫ْاْلُ ْخ ُت ص‬
‫اد َقات‬ َ ُ ‫ْاْلَ َخ َو‬ ‫َان‬ َ ‫ْاْلُ ْخت‬ ‫اد َقة‬ َ ‫ُمؤَ نَّث‬
Translation of the ‫ ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬and ‫َخ َبر‬

In Arabic, there is no word for is or are, however they must be
added to the English translation.
The man is truthful. The men are truthful.
Exercise 1
Translate the following sentences into English. Notice how the ‫َخ َبر‬
changes to match the ‫ ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬. The irab has been removed from the last
few questions. Ensure you and write them correctly.
‫) ْاْلُ ّم َصائِ َمة‬9 ِ ‫اد َقت‬
‫َان‬ ِ ‫َان ص‬ِ
َ ‫ا ْلبِنْت‬ )5 ‫ادق‬ِ ‫النَّبِي ص‬
َ ُّ )1
‫) ا ْل ُمؤْ مِنَات َشاكِرات‬10 ِ ‫َات ص‬
‫اد َقات‬ َ ُ ‫ا ْل َبن‬ )6 ِ ‫اد َق‬
‫ان‬ ِ ‫النَّبِیا ِن ص‬
َ َّ )2
‫) ال ِّط ْف َلتان َصابِ َرتان‬11 ‫ْاْلَ ُخ َصالِح‬ )7 ِ ‫ْاْلَ ْنبِیاء ص‬
‫اد ُق ْو َن‬ َ ُ َ )3
‫) ْاْلَ ْو َْلد ُم ْجت َِهدون‬12 ِ ‫ان مؤْ مِن‬
ِ ِ ‫ا ْلبِن ُْت ص‬
‫َان‬ ُ َ‫ا ْل َع ْبد‬ )8 ‫اد َقة‬ َ )4
63
Grammatical Analysis
In Arabic grammar, we analyse sentences by breaking them down
word by word to understand the meaning and function of each
word. This is called ‫( َت ْركِ ْیب‬parsing). In this book, the tarkib will be
written as follows:
‫َخ َبر‬ ‫ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬
‫ان‬ ِ ‫ص‬
ِ ‫اد َق‬ ِ ‫النَّبِی‬
‫ان‬
َ َّ
This diagram can be written up in an exercise book as follows:
The text is written in black ink and the label of the main parts of
the sentence in blue above it.
Vocab
old ‫ َق ِد ْيم ج ُقدَ َما ُء‬cold ِ ‫َب‬
‫ارد‬
strong ‫َق ِوي ج َأ ْق ِو َيا ُء‬ house ‫َب ْیت ج ُب ُی ْوت‬
big ‫َكبِ ْیر ج كِ َبار‬ new ‫َج ِد ْيد ج ُجدُ د‬
school ‫َمدْ َر َسة ج َمدَ ِار ُس‬ small ‫َص ِغ ْیر ج ِصغَار‬
mosque ِ ‫جد ج َم َس‬

ُ‫اجد‬ ِ ‫َم ْس‬
weak ‫َض ِع ْیف ج ُض َع َفا ُء‬
Exercise 2
‫) ا ْل َبنَات ُض َع َفاء‬13 ‫) ا ْل َجدَّ ُة َم ِر ْي َضة‬7 ‫الل َر ِح ْیم‬
ُ )1
‫ْاْلُ َّمهات ُم ْسلِمات‬ ِ ‫ان صابِر‬ ِ ِ ‫) محمد ص‬2
)14 ‫ان‬ َ َ ‫) ا ْل َع َّم‬8 ‫ادق‬ َ َّ َ ُ
‫جدان َق ِد ْيمان‬ِ ‫ا ْل َم ْس‬ )15 ‫جدُ َج ِد ْيد‬ ِ ‫) ا ْل َم ْس‬9 ِ ‫) ا ْل َما ُء َب‬3
‫ارد‬
‫َاذ َبتان‬ِ ‫ا ْلمر َأتان ك‬ )16 ِ ‫) الرج ََّل ِن جالِس‬10
‫ان‬ ‫) ا ْل َق َل ُم َكبِ ْیر‬4
َْ َ َ ُ َّ
‫ا ْل ُم َع ِّلمون ُم ْخلِصون‬ )17 ‫الر َج ُال َصائِ ُم ْو َن‬ ِّ )11 ‫الر ُج ُل َق ِوي‬ َّ )5
‫ال َّطالِبات ُم ْجت َِهدات‬ )18 ِ ‫ان َشاكِر َت‬
‫ان‬ َ
ِ ‫) ْاْلُم‬12
َّ ‫) ا ْل َب ْی ُت َق ِد ْيم‬6
64
‫‪Complete the sentences below by making the word in brackets the‬‬
‫‪َ . Ensure you adjust its number and gender as required.‬خ َبر‬
‫‪ )9‬ا ْل َج َبل ‪َ ( ..........‬كبِ ْیر)‬ ‫الل ‪َ ( ..........‬ر ِح ْیم)‬
‫‪ُ )1‬‬
‫(شاكِر)‬
‫‪ْ )10‬اْلُ ّمان ‪َ ..........‬‬ ‫الر ُس ُل‪َ ( ..........‬ع ْبد)‬ ‫ُّ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫(صالِح)‬
‫‪ )11‬الن َِّساء ‪َ ..........‬‬ ‫َان‪َ ( ..........‬ق ِد ْيم)‬
‫ا ْلبیت ِ‬
‫َْ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫الن َّْجمان ‪َ ( ..........‬كبِ ْیر)‬ ‫‪)12‬‬ ‫َخالِد ‪( ..........‬غ َْض َب ُ‬
‫ان)‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫ا ْل َیدان ‪َ ( ..........‬ص ِغ ْیر)‬ ‫‪)13‬‬ ‫َفاطِ َم ُة ‪َ ( ..........‬ح ِز ْين)‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫ْاْلَ َخ َوات ‪َ ( ..........‬ف ِق ْیر)‬ ‫‪)14‬‬ ‫ْاْلُ ُّم ‪ُ ( ..........‬م ْخلِص)‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫(ض ِع ْیف)‬ ‫الض ْیفان ‪َ ..........‬‬
‫َ‬ ‫‪)15‬‬ ‫ْاْلَ ْو َْل ُد ‪َ ( ..........‬ق ِوي)‬ ‫‪)7‬‬
‫(ج ِد ْيد)‬
‫جدان ‪َ ..........‬‬ ‫ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬ ‫‪)16‬‬ ‫ان ‪( ..........‬ص ِ‬
‫ادق)‬ ‫َ‬
‫‪ )8‬النَّبِی ِ‬
‫َّ‬
‫‪Summary‬‬
‫ُج ْم َلة ‪Sentence:‬‬
‫ُج ْم َلة ا ْس ِم َّیة‬
‫ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬ ‫‪Subject‬‬ ‫َم ْع ِر َفة‬ ‫َم ْر ُف ْوع‬

‫‪Agree‬‬ ‫‪in‬‬ ‫‪irab,‬‬
‫َخ ْبر‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫َم ْر ُف ْوع‬
‫نَك َرة ‪Information‬‬ ‫‪number, and gender‬‬
‫‪65‬‬
ِ ْ ‫ا ْلجم َل ُة‬
Part 2: Additional Rules of ‫اْل ْس ِم َّی ُة‬ ْ ُ
ِ
Additional words can be added to a ‫ ُج ْم َلة ْاسم َّیة‬to create specific
meanings. Two such words are:
1. ‫فِ ْعل نَاقِص‬
2. ‫َح ْرف ُم َش َّبه بِا ْل ِف ْع ِل‬
66
‫فِ ْعل نَاقِص‬
A ‫ فِ ْعل نَاقِص‬is an auxiliary verb which precedes a ‫ ُج ْم َلة ْاس ِم َّیة‬. In this
section we will be discussing two of the ‫ َأ ْف َعال نَاقِ َصة‬:
َ ‫ك‬
1. ‫َان‬
2. ‫َل ْی َس‬
َ ‫ك‬
‫َان‬
َ ‫ ك‬changes the ‫اس ِم َّیة‬
‫َان‬ ْ ‫ ُج ْم َلة‬to the past tense.
‫َان زَ ْيد َم ِر ْي ًضا‬
َ ‫ك‬ ‫زَ ْيد َم ِر ْيض‬

Zaid was ill. Zaid is ill.
Grammatical Changes to a Sentence with a ‫فِعل نَاقِص‬
When a ‫ فِ ْعل نَاقِص‬precedes a ‫ ُج ْم َلة ْاس ِم َّیة‬:
1. The ‫ ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬is called the ‫ اِ ْسم‬of that ‫ فِ ْعل نَاقِص‬and remains ‫ َم ْر ُف ْوع‬.
2. The ‫ َخ ْبر‬is called the ‫ َخ َبر‬of that ‫ فِ ْعل نَاقِص‬and becomes ‫ َمن ُْص ْوب‬.
َ ‫َخ َب ُر ك‬
‫َان‬ َ ‫اِ ْس ُم ك‬
‫َان‬ ‫فِ ْعل نَاقِص‬ ‫َخ َبر‬ ‫ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬

‫َم ِر ْي ًضا‬ ‫زَ ْيد‬ َ ‫ك‬
‫َان‬ ‫َم ِر ْيض‬ ‫زَ ْيد‬
Vocab
punishment ‫ ع ََذاب‬date ‫َت ْم َرة ج َت َم َرات‬
short ‫َق ِص ْیر ج قِ َصار‬ sweet ‫ُح ْلو‬
lazy ‫ك َْس ََّل ُن ج ك َُسا َلی‬ friend ‫َخلِ ْیل ج َأ ِخ ََّّل ُء‬
tasty ‫َل ِذ ْيذ‬ healthy, sound, intact ‫َسالِم‬
tired ‫ُم ْت َعب ج ْو َن‬ severe ‫َش ِد ْيد ج ِشدَ اد‬
sick ‫َم ِر ْيض َم ْر َضی‬ friend ‫َص ِد ْيق ج َأ ْص ِد َقا ُء‬
active, energetic ‫ن َِش ْیط ج ن َُش َطا ُء‬ long, tall ‫َط ِو ْيل ج طِ َوال‬
easy ‫َي ِس ْیر‬ enemy ‫عَدُ و ج َأعْدَ اء‬
67
‫الر ُجل َض ِع ْیفا‬
‫َان َّ‬ ‫‪ )7‬ك َ‬ ‫الر ُج ُل َم ِر ْي ًضا‬ ‫‪ )5‬ك َ‬
‫َان َّ‬ ‫َان ا ْل َما ُء َب ِ‬
‫ار ًدا‬ ‫‪ )3‬ك َ‬ ‫‪ )1‬ا ْل َب ْی ُت َق ِد ْيم‬
‫ان ا ْل ُم ْس ِلمون َشا ِكرين‬
‫‪ )8‬كَ َ‬ ‫َان ْاْلَ ُخ َص ِغ ْی ًرا‬
‫‪ )6‬ك َ‬ ‫َان ُم َح َّمد َر ِح ْی ًما‬ ‫‪ )4‬ك َ‬ ‫ان ا ْل َب ْی ُت َق ِد ْي ًما‬
‫‪َ )2‬ك َ‬
‫‪Change the following sentences into the past tense.‬‬
‫الر ُجَّلن َق ِص ْیران‬ ‫‪ْ )5‬اْلَو َْلد ك ِ‬
‫َاذ ُب ْو َن‬ ‫ان كِ َبار‬
‫اإل ْخ َو ُ‬‫‪ِ ْ )3‬‬ ‫‪ )1‬ا ْلعدُ و ك ِ‬
‫‪َّ )7‬‬ ‫ْ ُ‬ ‫َاذب‬ ‫َ ُّ‬
‫‪ْ )8‬اْلَ َخ َوات ِصغَار‬ ‫‪ْ )6‬اْلَ ِخ ََّّلء ص ِ‬
‫اد ُق ْو َن‬ ‫الص ِد ْي ُق َم ِر ْيض‬ ‫‪ )2‬ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬
‫جدُ َكبِ ْیر‬
‫ُ َ‬ ‫‪َّ )4‬‬
‫َما ك َ‬
‫َان‬
‫‪ to give a negative past‬ك َ‬
‫َان ‪َ can be added to‬ما ‪The negative particle‬‬
‫‪tense meaning. This will be translated as was not.‬‬
‫الر ُج ُل َم ِر ْي ًضا‬ ‫َما ك َ‬
‫َان َّ‬
‫‪The man was not ill.‬‬
‫‪ُ which‬ح ُر ْوف ‪َ . This, and all other‬ح ْر ُف َن ْفي ‪َ is labelled as‬ما ‪In tarkib, this‬‬
‫‪do not become one of the main parts of a sentence, should be‬‬
‫‪labelled in black ink.‬‬
‫َخربُ ك َ‬
‫َان‬ ‫اِ ْس ُم ك َ‬
‫َان‬ ‫فِ ْعل نَاقِص‬ ‫ف نَ ْفي‬
‫َح ْر ُ‬
‫َم ِر ْي ًضا‬ ‫الر ُج ُل‬

‫َّ‬ ‫ك َ‬
‫َان‬ ‫َما‬
‫‪Translate the following and write out the tarkib.‬‬
‫الر ُجَّلن َط ِو ْيلین‬ ‫‪َ )5‬ما ك َ‬ ‫َان ْاْلَ ْنبِیاء ك ِ‬
‫َاذبِ ْی َن‬ ‫‪َ )3‬ما ك َ‬ ‫َان ا ْل َما ُء َب ِ‬
‫‪َ )1‬ما ك َ‬
‫َان َّ‬ ‫َ ُ‬ ‫ار ًدا‬
‫َان ا ْل ُم ْسلِمون َصائِمین‬
‫‪َ )6‬ما ك َ‬ ‫َان ْاْل َبا ُء كَافِ ِر ْي َن‬
‫‪َ )4‬ما ك َ‬ ‫َّاس َأ ْق ِو َيا َء‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ما ك َ‬
‫َان الن ُ‬
‫‪Change the following sentences into the negative past tense.‬‬
‫‪ْ )5‬اْلَ ْو َْل ُد ُط ََّّلب‬ ‫‪ )3‬ا ْل َملِ ُك َصائِم‬ ‫‪ْ )1‬اْلَ ُب َم ِر ْيض‬
‫‪ْ )6‬اْلَ ْص ِد َقا ُء ُم ْت َعبون‬ ‫‪ )4‬ال َّط َعا ُم َل ِذ ْيذ‬ ‫الر ُج ُل َصالِح‬
‫‪َّ )2‬‬
‫‪68‬‬
‫َْل َي ُك ْو َن ‪َ and‬ي ُك ْون‬
‫ارع ‪َ is the‬ي ُك ْو ُن‬ ‫َان ‪ُ of‬م َض ِ‬
‫اسم ‪. It will also have an‬ك َ‬ ‫‪َ and will change‬خ َبر ‪ْ and‬‬
‫‪ُ to the future tense. This will be translated as will be.‬ج ْم َلة ْاس ِم َّیة ‪the‬‬
‫َي ُك ْو ُن زَ ْيد َق ِو ًيا‬
‫‪Zaid will be strong.‬‬
‫‪The tarkib of this is written as follows:‬‬
‫َخربُ ك َ‬
‫َان‬ ‫فِ ْعل نَاقِص‬
‫َق ِو ًّيا‬ ‫زَ ْيد‬ ‫َي ُك ْو ُن‬

‫‪َْ before it. This will be‬ل ‪The negative of this is made by adding a‬‬
‫‪translated as will not be.‬‬
‫َْل َي ُك ْو ُن زَ ْيد َم ِر ْي ًضا‬
‫‪Zaid will not be ill.‬‬
‫َخ َب ُر ك َ‬
‫َان‬ ‫فِ ْعل نَاقِص‬ ‫ف نَ ْفي‬
‫َح ْر ُ‬
‫َم ِر ْي ًضا‬ ‫زَ ْيد‬ ‫َي ُك ْو ُن‬ ‫َْل‬
‫‪َ )7‬ي ُك ْو ُن ال َّطالِب ُم ْجت َِهدا‬ ‫‪َ )4‬ي ُك ْو ُن ْاْل َبا ُء َصابِ ِر ْي َن‬ ‫‪َ )1‬ي ُك ْو ُن ا ْل َع ُّم َق ِو ًّيا‬
‫‪َ )8‬ي ُك ْو ُن ا ْل َو َلدان ُم ْجت َِهدين‬ ‫ان َط ِو ْي َل ْی ِن‬‫‪ )5‬ي ُكو ُن ا ْلم ْك َتب ِ‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ي ُك ْو ُن ا ْل َما ُء َب ِ‬
‫ار ًدا‬
‫َ َ‬ ‫َ ْ‬
‫‪َ )9‬ي ُك ْو ُن ا ْل ُم َع ِّلمان َشاكِرين‬ ‫ادقِ ْی َن‬‫‪ )6‬ي ُكو ُن ْاْلَو َْلد ص ِ‬
‫ْ ُ َ‬ ‫َ ْ‬
‫‪ )3‬ي ُكو ُن ْاْلَعْدَ اء ك ِ‬
‫َاذبِ ْی َن‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫َ ْ‬
‫‪Change the following sentences into the future tense.‬‬
‫‪ )7‬النَّاس ُم ْت َعبون‬ ‫َب َق ِص ْیر‬ ‫‪ )4‬ا ْل َم ْكت ُ‬ ‫اب َش ِد ْيد‬ ‫‪ )1‬ا ْل َع َذ ُ‬
‫‪ْ )8‬اْلَ ْو َْلد َم ْرضی‬ ‫َان َط ِو ْي ََّل ِن‬
‫‪ )5‬ا ْلبیت ِ‬
‫َْ‬
‫‪ )2‬ا ْل َقوم ك ِ‬
‫َاذ ُب ْو َن‬ ‫ْ ُ‬
‫اإل َمامان َصائِمان‬‫‪ِ ْ )9‬‬ ‫‪ْ )6‬اْلَع َْما ُم ُف َق َرا ُء‬ ‫‪ )3‬ال ِّط ْف ََّل ِن َط ِو ْي ََّل ِن‬
‫‪69‬‬
‫َل ْی َس‬
‫اس ِم َّیة ‪. It changes the meaning of‬فِ ْعل نَاقِص ‪َ is another‬ل ْی َس‬
‫‪ُ into the‬ج ْم َلة ْ‬
‫‪present negative. This will be translated as not.‬‬
‫َل ْی َس زَ ْيد َم ِر ْي ًضا‬
‫‪Zaid is not ill.‬‬
‫َخبَ ُر َلیْ َس‬ ‫اِ ْس ُم َلیْ َس‬ ‫فِ ْعل نَاقِص‬
‫َم ِر ْي ًضا‬ ‫زَ ْيد‬ ‫َل ْی َس‬

‫ارع ‪, not‬ا ْل ِفع ُل ا ْلم ِ‬
‫اض ْي ‪َ only occurs as‬ل ْی َس‬ ‫‪.‬ا ْل ُم َض ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫ْ‬
‫‪Vocab‬‬
‫‪close‬‬ ‫‪َ god, deity‬ق ِر ْيب‬ ‫إِ ٰله ج آل ِ َهة‬
‫‪Christian‬‬ ‫ن َْص َرانِي ج ن ََص َاری‬ ‫‪far‬‬ ‫َب ِع ْید ج ُب َعدَ ا ُء‬
‫‪Jew‬‬ ‫َي ُه ْو ِدي ج َي ُه ْود‬ ‫‪idol‬‬ ‫َصنَم ج َأ ْصنَام‬
‫‪َ )9‬ل ْی َس ْاْلَ ْنبِ َیاء َظالِمین‬ ‫‪َ )5‬ل ْی َس ْ ِ‬
‫اإل َما ُم َم ِر ْي ًضا‬ ‫‪ )1‬ا ْل َب ْی ُت َق ِد ْيم‬
‫‪َ )10‬ل ْی َس ال َّطالِبان َصابِرين‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ل ْی َس ْاْلَ ُخ َق ِص ْی ًرا‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ل ْی َس ا ْل َب ْی ُت َق ِد ْي ًما‬
‫‪َ )11‬ل ْی َس ا ْل َق َلمان َج ِد ْيدين‬ ‫‪َ )7‬ل ْی َس ا ْل َق ْو ُم كَافِ ِر ْي َن‬ ‫‪ )3‬ا ْل َما ُء َب ِ‬
‫ارد‬
‫‪َ )12‬لیس ا ْلمع ِّلمون َف ِ‬
‫اسقین‬ ‫‪َ )8‬ل ْی َس ا ْل ِع َبا ُد َم ْظ ُل ْومِ ْی َن‬ ‫‪َ )4‬ل ْی َس ا ْل َما ُء َب ِ‬
‫ار ًدا‬
‫ْ َ ُ َ‬
‫‪َ .‬ل ْی َس ‪Change the following sentences into the negative using‬‬
‫‪ )9‬ا ْل َع ّمان ن َْص َرانِ ّیان‬ ‫َاب َج ِد ْيد‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ا ْلكت ُ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬ ‫الش ْي ُء َج ِد ْيد‬
‫‪َّ )1‬‬
‫‪ )10‬ا ْل ُم َع ِّلمون غَائِبون‬ ‫ا ْل َجدُّ َي ُه ْو ِدي‬ ‫‪)6‬‬ ‫‪ )2‬ا ْل َق َم ُر َق ِر ْيب‬
‫اضرون‬‫‪ )11‬ال ُّط ََّّلب ح ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫اْلَ ْصنَا ُم آل ِ َهة‬ ‫‪)7‬‬ ‫‪ )3‬الن َّْج ُم َكبِ ْیر‬
‫الض ُی ْوف ُم ْخلِصون‬ ‫‪ُّ )12‬‬ ‫ا ْلجب ََّل ِن ص ِغیر ِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫‪)8‬‬ ‫‪ )4‬ا ْل َق َل ُم َق ِص ْیر‬
‫َ َْ‬ ‫ََ‬
‫‪70‬‬
‫فِ ْعل نَاقِص ‪The Gender of the‬‬
‫‪ must be given in‬فِ ْعل نَاقِص ‪ُ , the‬مؤَ نَّث ‪ is feminine,‬فِ ْعل نَاقِص ‪ْ of a‬اسم ‪If the‬‬
‫‪its feminine form.‬‬
‫‪Feminine Form‬‬ ‫‪Masculine Form‬‬
‫كَان َْت‬ ‫ك َ‬
‫َان‬
‫‪‬‬
‫كَان َْت َفاطِ َم ُة َصائِ َم ًة‬ ‫َان زَ ْيد َصائِ ًما‬
‫ك َ‬
‫َت ُك ْو ُن‬ ‫َي ُك ْو ُن‬

‫‪‬‬
‫َت ُك ْو ُن َفاطِ َم ُة َصائِ َم ًة‬ ‫َي ُك ْو ُن زَ ْيد َصائِ ًما‬
‫َل ْی َس ْت‬ ‫َل ْی َس‬

‫‪‬‬
‫َل ْی َس ْت َفاطِ َم ُة َصائِ َم ًة‬ ‫َل ْی َس زَ ْيد َصائِ ًما‬
‫‪َْ )9‬ل ي ُكو ُن الرجال ك ِ‬
‫َاذبین‬ ‫َب َشاكِ َر ًة‬ ‫َان َأ ْح َمدُ ك َْس ََّل َن‬
‫‪ )1‬ك َ‬
‫َ ْ ِّ َ‬ ‫َت زَ ْين ُ‬
‫‪ )5‬كَان ْ‬
‫‪ )10‬ي ُكو ُن ا ْلمسلِمون ص ِ‬
‫ادقین‬ ‫‪َْ )6‬ل َت ُك ْو ُن الن َِّسا ُء َأعْدَ ا ًء‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ي ُك ْو ُن ا ْل َما ُء َب ِ‬
‫ار ًدا‬
‫َ‬ ‫ُ ْ‬ ‫َ ْ‬
‫‪َ )11‬ت ُك ْو ُن ْاْلَ َخ َوات َصالِحات‬ ‫‪َ )7‬ت ُك ْو ُن ا ْل َبن ُ‬
‫َات ُم ْت َع َبات‬ ‫َت َفاطِ َم ُة َجال ِ َس ًة‬ ‫‪ )3‬كَان ْ‬
‫‪َْ )12‬ل َت ُك ْو ُن ْاْلُ َّمهات َصالِحات‬ ‫‪َْ )8‬ل َي ُك ْو ُن ا ْل ُم ْبتَدَ ُأ َم ْج ُر ْو ًرا‬ ‫‪َ )4‬ي ُك ْو ُن ا ْل ُم ْبتَدَ ُأ َم ْر ُف ْوعًا‬
‫‪Joining Two Words Together‬‬

‫ْت ‪, the‬ال ‪ has an‬فِ ْعل نَاقِص ‪If the word after the feminine form of the‬‬
‫‪ِ for pronunciation purposes.‬ت ‪will change to a‬‬
‫ت ا ْلبِن ُْت ن َِش ْی َط ًة‬
‫كَا َن ِ‬ ‫كَا َن ْت َفاطِ َم ُة ن َِش ْی َط ًة‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪The girl was active.‬‬ ‫‪Fatima was active.‬‬
‫َت ا ْل َخا َلة َب ِع ْیدَ ة‬
‫‪ )7‬كَان ِ‬ ‫‪َ )4‬لیس ِ‬
‫ت ال ِّط ْف َل ُة َكبِ ْی َر ًة‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫ت ْاْلُ ُّم ن َِش ْی َط ًة‬
‫‪َ )1‬لیس ِ‬
‫َْ‬
‫ادقات‬ ‫َت النِّساء ص ِ‬ ‫‪ )8‬كَان ِ‬ ‫َت ْاْلُ ْخ ُت ك َْس َلی‬ ‫‪ )5‬كَان ِ‬ ‫‪ )2‬كَان َْت َفاطِ َم ُة َم ِر ْي َض ًة‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َت ا ْلبِنْتان َصال ِ َحتین‬ ‫‪ )9‬كَان ِ‬ ‫َت ال ِّط ْف َل ُة َق ِص ْی َر ًة‬ ‫‪ )6‬كَان ِ‬ ‫َب َط ِو ْي َل ًة‬ ‫‪َ )3‬ل ْی َس ْت زَ ْين ُ‬
‫‪71‬‬
‫َما ا ْل ُم َش َّب َه ُة بِ َل ْی َس‬
‫‪َ ; it makes‬ل ْی َس ‪ُ . It resembles‬ج ْم َلة اِ ْس ِم َّیة ‪َ can be added to a‬ما ‪The particle‬‬
‫‪َ state.‬من ُْص ْوب ‪َ into the‬خ َبر ‪the sentence negative and changes its‬‬
‫َما زَ ْيد َم ِر ْي ًضا‬
‫‪Zaid is not ill.‬‬
‫‪َ .‬ل ْی َس ‪َ which resembles‬ما ‪َ :‬ما ا ْل ُم َش َّب َه ُة بِ َل ْی َس ‪َ is labelled as‬ما ‪In tarkib, this‬‬
‫َخبَ ُر َما‬ ‫اِ ْس ُم َما‬ ‫َما ا ْل ُم َشبَّ َه ُة بِ َل ْی َس‬
‫َم ِر ْي ًضا‬ ‫زَ ْيد‬ ‫َما‬
‫‪َ )13‬ما ْاْلُ ْخت َر ِح ْی َمة‬ ‫‪َ )9‬ما ا ْل ُم ُل ْو ُك ُر َح َما َء‬ ‫‪َ )5‬ما ا ْل َما ُء َب ِ‬
‫ار ًدا‬ ‫‪ )1‬ا ْل َما ُء َب ِ‬
‫ارد‬
‫‪َ )14‬ما ا ْل َو َلدان َشاكِرين‬ ‫‪ )10‬ما محمد َك ِ‬
‫اذ ًبا‬ ‫َ ُ َ َّ‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ما ْاْلَ ُخ َم ْظ ُل ْو ًما‬ ‫َان ا ْل َما ُء َب ِ‬
‫ار ًدا‬ ‫‪ )2‬ك َ‬
‫‪َ )15‬ما ا ْل َخاْلت َط ِو ْيَّلت‬ ‫‪ )11‬ما َفاطِم ُة ك ِ‬
‫َاذ َب ًة‬ ‫‪َ )7‬ما ْاْلَ ُب َظال ِ ًما‬ ‫‪َ )3‬ل ْی َس ا ْل َما ُء َب ِ‬
‫ار ًدا‬
‫َ‬ ‫َ‬
‫‪َ )16‬ما ْاْلَ َخ َوات ُم ْجت َِهدات‬ ‫جدُ َق ِد ْي ًما‬ ‫‪َ )12‬ما ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬ ‫‪َ )8‬ما ا ْل َب ْی ُت َج ِد ْيدً ا‬ ‫َان ا ْل َما ُء َب ِ‬
‫ار ًدا‬ ‫‪َ )4‬ما ك َ‬
‫‪72‬‬
Summary
The following table summarises the negative ‫ ُج ْم َلة ْاس ِم َّیة‬.
‫اس ِم َّیة‬
ْ ‫ُج ْم َلة‬
Future Present Past
‫َْل َي ُك ْو ُن‬ ‫َما‬ ‫َل ْی َس‬ َ ‫َما ك‬
‫َان‬
‫َْل َي ُك ْو ُن زَ ْيد َم ِر ْي ًضا‬ ‫َما زَ ْيد َم ِر ْي ًضا‬ ‫َل ْی َس زَ ْيد َم ِر ْي ًضا‬ ‫َما كَا َن زَ ْيد َم ِر ْي ًضا‬
Zaid will not Zaid is not Zaid is not Zaid was not
be sick. sick. sick. sick.
Summary
Sentence: ‫ُج ْم َلة‬
‫ ُج ْم َلة ا ْس ِم َّیة‬with a ‫فِ ْعل نَاقِص‬

َ ‫ك‬
‫َان‬ was َ ‫َما ك‬
‫َان‬ was not
‫َي ُك ْو ُن‬ will be ‫َْل َي ُك ْو ُن‬ will not be
‫َل ْی َس‬ is/are not ‫َما‬ is/are not
َ ‫اِ ْس ُم ك‬
‫ َما‬/ ‫ َل ْی َس‬/ ‫َان‬ subject ‫َم ْع ِر َفة‬ ‫َم ْر ُف ْوع‬ agree in number
‫ َما‬/ ‫ َل ْی َس‬/ ‫َان‬
َ ‫َخ َب ُر ك‬ ِ
information ‫نَك َرة‬ ‫َمن ُْص ْوب‬ and gender
73
‫َح ْرف ُم َش َّبه بِا ْل ِف ْع ِل‬
‫‪ُ .‬ج ْم َلة ْاس ِم َّیة ‪َ is a particle which precedes a‬ح ْرف ُم َش َّبه بِا ْل ِف ْع ِل ‪A‬‬
‫‪َ which creates emphasis in the sentence. It can‬ح ْرف ُم َش َّبه بِا ْل ِف ْع ِل ‪َّ is a‬‬
‫إن‬
‫‪be translated as indeed or certainly.‬‬
‫إِ َّن زَ يدً ا ص ِ‬
‫ادق‬ ‫ْ َ‬
‫‪Indeed, Zaid is truthful.‬‬
‫‪The word indeed or certainly is followed by a comma.‬‬
‫إِ َّن ‪Grammatical Changes to a Sentence with‬‬
‫‪ُ :‬ج ْم َلة ْاس ِم َّیة ‪َ precedes a‬ح ْرف ُم َش َّبه بِا ْل ِف ْع ِل ‪When a‬‬
‫‪َ .‬من ُْص ْوب ‪َ and becomes‬ح ْرف ُم َش َّبه بِا ْل ِف ْع ِل ‪ of that‬اِ ْسم ‪ُ is called the‬م ْب َتدَ أ ‪1. The‬‬
‫‪َ .‬م ْر ُف ْوع ‪َ and remains‬ح ْرف ُم َش َّبه بِا ْل ِف ْع ِل ‪َ of that‬خ َبر ‪َ is called the‬خ َبر ‪2. The‬‬
‫َخ َب ُر إِ َّن‬ ‫اِ ْس ُم إِ َّن‬ ‫َح ْرف ُم َش َّبه بِا ْل ِف ْع ِل‬
‫َغ ُف ْور‬ ‫الل‬

‫َ‬ ‫َّ‬
‫إن‬
‫‪ )9‬إِ َّن ا ْلبِنْتین َض ِع ْی َفتان‬ ‫ادق‬ ‫رآن ص ِ‬
‫إِ َّن ا ْل ُق َ َ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬ ‫إن ن ُْو ًحا َنبِي‬
‫‪َّ )1‬‬
‫‪ )10‬إِ َّن الت َّْم َرتین ُح ْل َوتان‬ ‫ان ك ِ‬
‫َاذب‬ ‫الش ْی َط َ‬‫إِ َّن َّ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬ ‫‪ )2‬إِ َّن ا ْل َی ْو َم َط ِو ْيل‬
‫‪ )11‬إِ َّن ا ْلمسلِمین ص ِ‬ ‫اب َش ِد ْيد‬
‫ادقون‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ُ ْ‬ ‫إِ َّن ا ْل َع َذ َ‬ ‫‪)7‬‬ ‫السنَ َة َط ِو ْي َلة‬
‫‪ )3‬إِ َّن َّ‬
‫‪ )12‬إِ َّن ا ْلمسلِمات ص ِ‬
‫ادقات‬ ‫إن ا ْل َخا َل َة َق ِص ْی َرة‬
‫َّ‬ ‫‪)8‬‬ ‫‪ )4‬إِ َّن ا ْل َق ْو َم كَافِ ُر ْو َن‬
‫َ‬ ‫ُ ْ‬
‫‪ to the following sentences, making the necessary changes to‬إِ َّن ‪Add‬‬
‫‪the irab. Then, translate into English.‬‬
‫‪ )9‬ال َّل ْی َلتان َق ِص ْی َرتان‬ ‫َاب َب ِع ْید‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ )5‬ا ْلكت ُ‬ ‫‪ )1‬ا ْل َما ُء َب ِ‬
‫ارد‬
‫‪ْ )10‬اْلَعْدَ اء ِض َعاف‬ ‫‪ )6‬ا ْل َمدْ َر َس ُة َق ِر ْي َبة‬ ‫‪ )2‬ا ْل َخا َل ُة َق ِو َّية‬
‫‪ )11‬الت َّْم َرتان َكبِ ْی َرتان‬ ‫َات َط ِو ْي ََّلت‬
‫‪ )7‬ا ْل َبن ُ‬ ‫َاذب ِ‬ ‫ِ ِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫‪ )3‬ا ْل َع َّمان ك َ‬
‫‪ْ )12‬اْلَ َخ َوات َصابِرات‬ ‫اضر ِ‬
‫ِ ِ‬ ‫‪ْ )4‬اْلَئِ َّم ُة غَائِ ُب ْو َن‬
‫ان‬ ‫‪ )8‬ال ِّط ْف ََّلن َح َ‬
‫‪74‬‬
ِ ‫َْلم‬
‫اْل ْبتِدَ ِاء‬ ُ
Sometimes, a ‫ َل‬can be given at the beginning of a sentence. This is
ِ ‫ َْلم‬.
called ‫اْل ْبتِدَ ِاء‬ ُ
ِ ‫َلزَ يد ص‬
‫ادق‬ َ ْ
This creates emphasis which is not always reflected in the
translation. However, it can be shown using underlining or italics.
Zaid is truthful.
This ‫ َح ْرف‬does not cause the irab of the following word(s) to
change: it is ‫ َغ ْی ُر عَامِل‬.
In tarkib, ‫ َْل ُم ِاْل ْبتِدَ ِاء‬does not become a main part of the sentence.
‫َخبَر‬ ‫ُمبْتَدَ أ‬ ِ ‫َْلم‬
‫اْلبْتِدَ ِاء‬ ُ
ِ ‫ص‬
‫ادق‬ ‫زَ ْيد‬ ‫َل‬
َ
Note
If the word after ‫ َْل ُم اْل ْبتِدَ ِاء‬has ‫ َا ْل‬, the ‫ ا‬is not written.
ُ‫َل ْل َو َلد‬  ُ‫لـ ا ْل َو َلد‬
Exercise 14
ِ ‫) َل ْل َماء َب‬7
‫ارد‬ ‫) َل َخالِد َم ِر ْيض‬5 ‫) َْلَ ْح َمدُ َص ِغ ْیر‬3 ‫) َلزَ ْيد َط ِو ْيل‬1
ِ ‫) َل ْلو َلد ك‬8 ‫ل ُب َصائِم‬ َ ْ ‫) َل‬6 ‫َب َط ِو ْي َلة‬ ‫) َل َفاطِ َم ُة َق ِو َّية‬2
‫َاذب‬ َ ُ ‫) َلزَ ْين‬4
Vocab
to forgive, overlook ‫ َع َفا َي ْع ُف ْو َع ْف ًوا‬Most-Relenting ‫َت َّواب‬
Oft-Pardoning ‫ َع ُفو‬to have mercy ‫َر ِح َم َي ْر َح ُم َر ْح َم ًة‬
All-Knowing ‫عَلِ ْیم‬ Merciful ‫َر ِح ْیم ج ُر َح َما ُء‬
Forgiving ‫ َغ ُف ْور‬All-Hearing ‫َس ِم ْیع‬
The Grantor ‫ َو َّهاب‬All-Mighty ‫ع َِز ْيز‬
75
‫الَّل ُم ا ْل ُمزَ ْح َل َق ُة‬
‫َّ‬
‫إن ‪َ of‬خ َبر ‪َ can be added to the‬ل ‪Sometimes a‬‬
‫‪َّ . In this case, it is called‬‬
‫‪َّ .‬‬
‫إِ َّن زَ يدً ا َلص ِ‬
‫ادق‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ْ‬
‫‪َْ , this creates additional emphasis which is not always‬لم ْ ِ‬
‫اْل ْبتِدَ ِاء ‪Like‬‬ ‫ُ‬
‫‪reflected in the translation.‬‬
‫‪Indeed, Zaid is truthful.‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪َ and does not become one of the main parts of a‬غ ْی ُر عَامل ‪َ is‬ح ْرف ‪This‬‬
‫‪sentence.‬‬
‫َخ َب ُر إِ َّن‬ ‫َْلم ُمزَ ْح َل َقة‬ ‫اِ ْس ُم إِ َّن‬ ‫َح ْرف ُم َش َّبه بِا ْل ِف ْع ِل‬
‫ـ َغ ُف ْور‬ ‫َلـ‬ ‫الل‬

‫َ‬ ‫َّ‬
‫إن‬
‫الل َل َعلِیم﴾‬
‫‪﴿ )9‬إِ َّن َ‬ ‫‪ )5‬إِ َّن َّ‬
‫الش ْی َطان عَدُ ّو‬ ‫الل َر ِح ْیم‬
‫‪ُ )1‬‬
‫‪﴿ )10‬إِ َّن َ‬
‫الل َل َع ُفو﴾‬ ‫‪ )6‬إِ َّن َّ‬
‫الش ْی َطان َل َعدُ ّو‬ ‫الل َر ِح ْیم‬ ‫‪ )2‬إِ َّن َ‬
‫الل َل َق ِوي﴾‬
‫‪﴿ )11‬إِ َّن َ‬ ‫‪﴿ )7‬إِ َّن َ‬
‫الل َل َغ ُف ْور﴾‬ ‫الل َل َر ِح ْیم‬
‫‪ )3‬إِ َّن َ‬
‫إن الع َذاب َل ِ‬ ‫الل َل َس ِم ْیع﴾‬
‫شد ْيد‬ ‫‪َ َّ )12‬‬ ‫‪﴿ )8‬إِ َّن َ‬ ‫الش ْی َط ُ‬
‫ان عَدُ و‬ ‫‪َّ )4‬‬
‫‪ to the sentences below, as has been done in‬إِ َّن ‪ and‬فِ ْعل نَاقِص ‪Add a‬‬
‫‪the example below.‬‬
‫إِ َّن ا ْل َما َء بَ ِ‬
‫ارد‬ ‫َما ا ْل َما ُء بَ ِ‬
‫ار ًدا‬ ‫َلیْ َس ا ْل َما ُء بَ ِ‬
‫ار ًدا‬ ‫َْل َي ُك ْو ُن ا ْل َما ُء بَ ِ‬
‫ار ًدا‬ ‫َي ُك ْو ُن ا ْل َما ُء بَ ِ‬
‫ار ًدا‬ ‫َان ا ْل َما ُء بَ ِ‬
‫ار ًدا‬ ‫َما ك َ‬ ‫َان ا ْل َما ُء بَ ِ‬
‫ار ًدا‬ ‫ك َ‬ ‫َا ْل َما ُء بَ ِ‬
‫ارد‬
‫‪Indeed, the‬‬ ‫‪The water‬‬ ‫‪The water is‬‬ ‫‪The water will‬‬ ‫‪The water‬‬ ‫‪The water‬‬ ‫‪The water‬‬ ‫‪The water‬‬
‫‪water is cold.‬‬ ‫‪is not cold.‬‬ ‫‪not cold.‬‬ ‫‪not be cold.‬‬ ‫‪will be cold.‬‬ ‫‪was not cold.‬‬ ‫‪was cold.‬‬ ‫‪is cold.‬‬
‫‪ )9‬ال َّت ْم َرتان ُح ْل َوتان‬ ‫اب َل ِذ ْيذ‬ ‫‪َّ )5‬‬

‫الش َر ُ‬ ‫ال َّل ْی َل ُة َط ِو ْي َلة‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫الر َجال َصالِحون‬ ‫‪ِّ )10‬‬ ‫ف ك َْس ََّل ُن‬ ‫الض ْی ُ‬
‫‪َّ )6‬‬ ‫اب َش ِد ْيد‬ ‫ال َع َذ ُ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫‪ْ )11‬اْلَ َخ َوات َشاكِرات‬ ‫‪ْ )7‬اْلَعْدَ اء ك ِ‬
‫َاذ ُب ْو َن‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫ادق‬ ‫الرج ُل ص ِ‬
‫َّ ُ َ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫‪ )12‬ا ْل ُم ْسلِمات َصائِمات‬ ‫َان ن َِشی َطت ِ‬
‫َان‬ ‫ْ‬
‫‪ْ )8‬اْلُ ْخت ِ‬ ‫الس ْو َر ُة َق ِص ْی َرة‬ ‫ُّ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫‪76‬‬
‫‪ )21‬ا ْل َع َذاب َش ِد ْيد‬ ‫‪ )11‬ا ْلمس ِ‬
‫جدُ َكبِ ْیر‬ ‫َ ْ‬ ‫‪ )1‬الت َّْم َر ُة ُح ْل َوة‬
‫‪َ )22‬ل َّ‬
‫لش ْی َطان عَدُ ّو‬ ‫‪َ )12‬ل ْلمس ِ‬
‫جدُ َكبِ ْیر‬ ‫‪َ )2‬للت َّْم َر ُة ُح ْل َوة‬
‫َ ْ‬
‫الض ْیف ُم ْسلِم‬ ‫‪ )23‬إِ َّن َّ‬ ‫‪ )13‬إِ َّن ا ْلمس ِ‬
‫جدَ َط ِو ْيل‬ ‫َ ْ‬ ‫‪ )3‬إِ َّن الت َّْم َر َة َل ِذ ْي َذة‬
‫‪ )24‬إِ َّن ا ْل َم ْر َأة َل ُمؤْ مِنَة‬ ‫‪ )14‬إِ َّن ا ْلمس ِ‬
‫جدَ َل َط ِو ْيل‬ ‫َ ْ‬ ‫‪ )4‬إِ َّن الت َّْم َر َة َل َل ِذ ْي َذة‬
‫‪َ )25‬ما ْاْلُ ْخت َم ِر ْي َضة‬ ‫جدُ َق ِص ْی ًرا‬
‫َان ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬
‫‪ )15‬ك َ‬ ‫َت الت ّْم َر ُة َق ِر ْي َب ًة‬ ‫‪ )5‬كَان ِ‬
‫ت ْاْلُ ّم َصائِ َمة‬

‫‪َ )26‬لیس ِ‬
‫َْ‬ ‫جدُ َق ِص ْی ًرا‬ ‫‪َ )16‬ي ُك ْو ُن ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ت ُك ْو ُن ال َّت ْم َر ُة َق ِر ْي َب ًة‬
‫‪َ )27‬ي ُك ْو ُن ْاْلَ ْو َْلد ُم ْجت َِهدين‬ ‫جدُ َق ِد ْي ًما‬‫‪َ )17‬ما ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬ ‫‪َ )7‬ما الت َّْم َر ُة َب ِع ْیدَ ًة‬
‫َت ا ْل َخاْلت َصابِرات‬ ‫‪ )28‬كَان ِ‬ ‫جدُ َق ِد ْي ًما‬ ‫‪َ )18‬ل ْی َس ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬ ‫ت الت َّْم َر ُة َب ِع ْیدَ ًة‬ ‫‪َ )8‬لیس ِ‬
‫َْ‬
‫‪ )29‬ما كَان ِ‬
‫َت ا ْل َبنَات ُض َع َفاء‬ ‫جدُ َج ِد ْيدً ا‬ ‫َان ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬
‫‪َ )19‬ما ك َ‬ ‫َت الت َّْم َر ُة َص ِغ ْی َر ًة‬ ‫‪ )9‬ما كَان ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫َ‬
‫‪َْ )30‬ل َي ُك ْو ُن ْاْلَ ْو َْلد ُض ُی ْوفا‬ ‫جدُ َج ِد ْيدً ا‬ ‫‪َْ )20‬ل َي ُك ْو ُن ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬ ‫‪َْ )10‬ل َت ُك ْو ُن الت َّْم َر ُة َص ِغ ْی َر ًة‬
‫‪Summary‬‬
‫‪The following table summarises the different particles that can be‬‬
‫‪ُ to create emphasis.‬ج ْم َلة ْاس ِم َّیة ‪added to a‬‬
‫اس ِم َّیة ‪Emphasised‬‬
‫ُج ْم َلة ْ‬
‫َّ‬ ‫َْل ُم ْاْل ْبتِدَ ِاء‬ ‫إِ َّن‬
‫إِ َّن زَ يدً ا َلص ِ‬ ‫َلزَ يد ص ِ‬ ‫إِ َّن زَ يدً ا ص ِ‬
‫ادق‬
‫ادق‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫ادق‬ ‫ْ َ‬ ‫ْ َ‬
‫‪Indeed, Zaid‬‬ ‫‪Zaid is‬‬ ‫‪Indeed, Zaid is‬‬
‫‪is truthful.‬‬ ‫‪truthful.‬‬ ‫‪truthful.‬‬
‫‪77‬‬
The ‫ َخ َبر‬as a Noun
If the ‫ َخ َبر‬is an adjective, it must agree with the ‫ ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬in both number
and gender.
However, if the ‫ َخ َبر‬is a noun, not an adjective, it does not need to
agree in either number or gender.
ِ ‫ف قِسم‬
‫الصدْ ُق ن ََجاة‬
ِّ ‫ان‬ َ ْ ُ ‫ا ْل َح ْر‬
Truth is salvation. Harf is two types.
In this example, the ‫ َخ َبر‬is a In this example, the ‫ َخ َبر‬is a
noun, ‫ ;ن ََجاة‬therefore, it does noun, ‫ان‬ ِ ‫ ;قِسم‬therefore, it
َ ْ
not have to agree in gender does not have to agree in
with the ‫ ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬. number with the ‫ ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬.
The following table summarises the difference between the two:
‫َخ َبر‬
Adjective Noun
Must agree with the ‫ ُم ْبتَدأ‬in number Does not have to agree with ‫ ُم ْبتَدأ‬in
and gender number and gender
‫ْاْلَ ْو َْل ُد َصال ِ ُح ْو َن‬ ‫ْاْلَ ْو َْل ُد نِ ْع َمة‬
Vocab
Eid ‫ ِع ْید ج أ ْع َیاد‬legend, tale, myth ‫ُأ ْس ُط ْو َرة ج َأ َساطِ ْی ُر‬
trial, test ‫فِ ْتنَة ج فِتَن‬ nation ‫ُأ َّمة ج ُأ َمم‬

religious duty, ‫َف ِر ْي َضة ج َف َرائِ ُض‬ verse, sign ‫آ َية ج آ َيات‬
obligation
type ‫قِ ْسم ج َأ ْق َسام‬ blessing ‫َب َركَة ج ات‬

‫َمال ج َأ ْم َوال‬ ِ ‫بر َهان ج بر‬
‫اه ْی ُن‬
wealth proof ََ ُْ
‫ب‬ ِ ِ
calamity ُ ‫ُمص ْی َبة ج َم َصائ‬ Friday ‫ُج ُم َعة ج ات‬
gift ‫نِ ْع َمة ج نِ َعم‬ shield ‫ُجنَّة ج ُجنَن‬
light ‫ن ُْور ج َأن َْوار‬ darkness ‫ُظ ْل َمة ج ات‬
78
‫‪ )13‬ال ُّظ ْلم ُظ ُلمات‬ ‫‪ )7‬ا ْل ُج ُم َع ُة ِع ْید‬ ‫‪ )1‬ا ْل َق َم ُر آ َية‬
‫‪ )14‬ا ْل َح ْرف قِ ْسمان‬ ‫«الص ََّل ُة ن ُْور»‬
‫َّ‬ ‫‪)8‬‬ ‫‪ْ )2‬اْلَ ْر ُض آ َية‬
‫َان إِبر ِ‬
‫اه ْیم ُأ َّمة‬ ‫الص ْو ُم َف ِر ْي َضة‬ ‫‪ )3‬ا ْل ُق ْر ُ‬
‫‪ )15‬ك َ ْ َ‬ ‫‪َّ )9‬‬ ‫آن َب َركَة‬
‫«الصدَ َق ُة ُب ْر َهان»‬
‫َّ‬ ‫‪)16‬‬ ‫الص ْو ُم ُجنَّة»‬
‫‪َّ « )10‬‬ ‫آن نِ ْع َمة‬
‫‪ )4‬ا ْل ُق ْر ُ‬
‫‪﴿ )17‬ا ْل ُمؤْ مِن َ‬
‫ُون إِ ْخ َوة﴾‬ ‫‪ )11‬ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن ُأ َّمة‬ ‫َّاس َأ ْق َسام‬ ‫‪ )5‬الن ُ‬
‫‪َ )18‬ل ْی َس ا ْل ُقرآن ُأ ْس ُط ْو َرة‬ ‫‪ْ )12‬اْلَ ْو َْل ُد فِ ْتنَة‬ ‫‪ )6‬إِ َّن ا ْل َم َال فِ ْتنَة‬
‫‪79‬‬
The ‫ َخ َبر‬as a Participle
We have previously learnt that the ‫اع ِل‬ ِ ‫ اِسم ا ْل َف‬and ‫ اِسم ا ْلم ْفعو ِل‬can be
ُ ْ ُْ َ ُ ْ
used as adjectives.
Another usage of the ‫اع ِل‬ ِ ‫ اِسم ا ْل َف‬and ‫ اِسم ا ْلم ْفعو ِل‬is as a participle: a noun
ُ ْ ُْ َ ُ ْ
that represents a meaning of a verb.
When the ‫اع ِل‬ ِ ‫ اِسم ا ْل َف‬and ‫ اِسم ا ْلم ْفعو ِل‬function as a participle, it expresses
ُ ْ ُْ َ ُ ْ
the present continuous or near future tense.
The ‫اع ِل‬ ِ ‫ اِسم ا ْل َف‬gives a ‫ فِعل مع ُلوم‬meaning and the ‫ اِسم ا ْلم ْفعو ِل‬gives a ‫فِعل‬
ُ ْ ْ َْ ْ ُْ َ ُ ْ ْ
‫ َم ْج ُه ْول‬meaning.
They will be translated as follows:
Present Near Future
ِ ‫َش‬
‫ارب‬
ِ ‫اِسم ا ْل َف‬
‫اع ِل‬ ُ ْ … ing going to …
drinking going to drink
‫َم ْش ُر ْوب‬
‫اِ ْس ُم ا ْل َم ْف ُع ْو ِل‬
being … will be …
being drunk will be drunk
Exercise 19
Translate the following sentences. Notice how the participles are
used.
‫إِ َّن النَّاس َل َم ْب ُع ْوثون‬ ِ ‫) ْاْلُ ْخ ُت َذ‬1
)11 َ ‫) إِ َّن ا ْل َخا َل َة َق‬6
‫ائمة‬ ‫اه َبة‬
‫َان ْاْلَع َْمام نَائِمین‬ َ ‫ك‬ )12 ‫) إِ َّن ا ْل َق ْو َم َم ْظ َل ْو ُم ْو َن‬7 ‫اإل َما ُم ُم ْبت َِسم‬
ِ ْ )2
‫َل ْی َس ا ْل َو َلدان َغائِبین‬ )13 ‫اس ًرا‬ِ ‫) َلیس الرج ُل َخ‬8

ُ َّ َ ْ ‫َّاس َم ْسئ ُْو ُل ْو َن‬
ُ ‫) الن‬3
‫َل ْی َس ال َّصائِمون آكِلین‬ )14 ‫َت ال َّطال ِ َب ُة ُم ْس ِر َع ًة‬ ِ ‫) كَان‬9 ‫ب آكِل‬ ِ
َ ‫) إِ َّن ال َّطال‬4
‫ت ا ْل ُم َع ِّل َمتان َجال ِ َستین‬
ِ ‫َلیس‬
َْ )15 ‫) ْاْلَ ْط َف ُال ُم ْس َت ْی ِق ُظ ْو َن‬10 ‫) إِ َّن ا ْل َجدَّ ُم َسافِر‬5
80
Summary
‫ ُج ْم َلة ا ْس ِم َّیة‬on its Own
‫ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬ subject ‫َم ْع ِر َفة‬ ‫َم ْر ُف ْوع‬

agree in irab,
‫َخ َبر‬ ِ ‫َم ْر ُف ْوع‬
information ‫نَك َرة‬ number, and gender
‫ ُج ْم َلة ا ْس ِم َّیة‬with a ‫فِ ْعل نَاقِص‬

َ ‫ك‬
‫َان‬ was َ ‫َما ك‬
‫َان‬ was not
‫َي ُك ْو ُن‬ will be ‫َْل َي ُك ْو ُن‬ will not be
‫َل ْی َس‬ is/are not ‫َما‬ is/are not
‫ َما‬/ ‫ َل ْی َس‬/ ‫َان‬ subject ‫َم ْع ِر َفة‬ ‫َم ْر ُف ْوع‬
agree in irab,
‫ َما‬/ ‫ َل ْی َس‬/ ‫َان‬
َ ‫َخ َب ُر ك‬ ِ
information ‫نَك َرة‬ ‫َمن ُْص ْوب‬ number, and gender
‫ ُج ْم َلة اِ ْس ِم َّیة‬with a ‫َح ْرف ُم َش َّبه بِا ْل ِف ْع ِل‬

َّ
‫إن‬ indeed
َّ ‫اِ ْس ُم‬
‫إن‬ subject ‫َم ْع ِر َفة‬ ‫َمن ُْص ْوب‬
agree in irab,
َّ ‫َخ َب ُر‬
‫إن‬ ِ ‫َم ْر ُف ْوع‬
information ‫نَك َرة‬ number, and gender
‫َْل ُم اْل ْبتِدَ ِاء‬ comes on the ‫ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬

emphasis
‫لَّل ُم ا ْل ُمزَ ْح َل َق ُة‬
َّ ‫َا‬ َّ ‫َخ َبر‬
comes on the ‫إن‬
81
82
SENTENCES
Introduction: ‫ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة‬
Part 1: ‫َا ْل ُج ْم َل ُة ا ْل ِف ْعلِ َّی ُة‬
Part 2: Additions Rules of ‫َا ْل ُج ْم َل ُة ا ْل ِف ْعلِ َّی ُة‬
Summary
83
Introduction: ‫ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة‬
‫ ا ْل ُج ْم َل ُة ا ْل ِف ْعلِ َّی ُة‬is a sentence which starts with a verb.
It is comprised of two essential slots which are found in every ‫ُج ْم َلة‬
‫فِ ْعلِ َّیة‬:
1. Verb
2. Subject/Deputy Subject
The remaining slots are non-essential: a sentence does not have to

include them:
3. Object
4. Indirect Object
5. Adverbs of Time and Place
6. Adverbs of Degree and Frequency
7. Adverbs of Reason
8. State
9. Clarification
10. Exclusion
84
Part 1: ‫ا ْل ُج ْم َل ُة ا ْل ِف ْعلِ َّی ُة‬
Subject
The subject is the one who is carrying out the action.
The boy sat.
In this example, the boy is the subject.
In Arabic, the subject of a ‫ ا ْل ُج ْم َل ُة ا ْل ِف ْعلِ َّی ُة‬is called ‫اعل‬
ِ ‫ َف‬. The ‫اعل‬
ِ ‫ َف‬is ‫مر ُفوع‬.
ْ َْ
ِ ِ
In Arabic, the ‫ َفاعل‬comes after the ‫ف ْعل‬. However, when translating,
ِ ‫ َف‬should be written first.
the ‫اعل‬
َ ‫َذ َه‬
Zaid went.
The tarkib is written as follows:
ِ ‫َف‬
‫اعل‬ ‫فِ ْعل‬
‫زَ ْيد‬ َ ‫َذ َه‬

‫ب‬
If the verb is ‫ َمن ِْفي‬, the negative particle will be labelled as ‫ َح ْر ُف َن ْفي‬.
ِ ‫َف‬
‫اعل‬ ‫فِ ْعل‬ ‫ف نَ ْفي‬
ُ ‫َح ْر‬
‫الر ُج ُل‬
َّ ‫َجا َء‬ ‫َما‬
Remember, in a ‫ ُج ْم َلة ْاس ِم َّیة‬the subject is called ‫ ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬, and in a ‫ ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة‬it
ِ ‫ َف‬. In English, they are both called the subject.
is called ‫اعل‬
Vocab
to enter ‫ َد َخ َل َيدْ ُخ ُل ُد ُخ ْو ًْل‬to come ‫َأ َتی َي ْأتِ ْي إِ ْت َیانًا‬
to disobey ‫َصی َي ْع ِص ْي َم ْع ِص َی ًة‬ َ ‫ ع‬to misguide ‫َأ َض َّل ُي ِض ُّل إِ ْض ََّل ًْل‬
to do, work ‫ ع َِم َل َي ْع َم ُل ع ََم ًَّل‬to obey ‫ َطا َع ًة‬،ً‫اع ُيطِ ْی ُع إِ َطا َعة‬
َ ‫َأ َط‬
to sit down ‫َق َعدَ َي ْق ُعدُ َق ُع ُو ًدا‬ to collect, gather ‫َج َم َع َي ْج َم ُع َج ْم ًعا‬
ِ
to earn ُ ‫ب َي ْكس‬
‫ب ك َْس ًبا‬ َ ‫ك ََس‬ to fear ‫اف َخ ْو ًفا‬
ُ ‫اف َي َخ‬
َ ‫َخ‬
to guide ‫ ُهدً ی‬،ً‫َهدَ ی َي ْه ِد ْي ِهدَ ا َية‬ to come out, leave ‫َخ َر َج َي ْخ ُر ُج ُخ ُر ْو ًجا‬
85
‫ِ‬
‫‪َْ )16‬ل َي ْظل ُم َّ‬
‫الر ُجل‬ ‫‪َ )11‬لن ُّي َسافِ َر اْلَ ُب‬ ‫‪ )6‬ما َأ َطاع ا ْلو َلدَ ِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫َ َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫الل‬
‫‪َ )1‬هدَ ی ُ‬
‫‪َ )17‬ل ْم َي ْس َأ ِل النَّاس‬ ‫الر َج ُال‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )12‬يج ْي ُء ِّ‬ ‫‪َ )7‬ما ك ََذ َب ال ِّط ْف ُل‬ ‫‪َ )2‬جا َء ْاْلَ ْنبِ َیا ُء‬
‫‪َ )18‬ما َد َخ َل ا ْل َعدُ ّوان‬ ‫‪َ )13‬خ ِس َر ال َّظال ِ ُم ْو َن‬ ‫‪َ )8‬ل ْم َي ُق ِم ْاْلَع َْما ُم‬ ‫‪َ )3‬خ َر َج ا ْل َما ُء‬
‫‪َ )19‬ما َي ُص ْو ُم ا ْل َم ِر ْيض‬ ‫‪ )14‬اِ ْن َك َس َر ا ْل ُك ْر ِس ُّي‬ ‫‪َ )9‬صدَ َق ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن‬ ‫الص ِد ْي ُق‬‫ات َّ‬ ‫‪َ )4‬م َ‬
‫ب ْاْلَ ْو َْلد‬
‫‪َ )20‬لن َّي ْذ َه َ‬ ‫ب ْاْلَ ُب‬
‫‪َْ )15‬ل َي ْذ َه ُ‬ ‫س ْاْلَ ُخ‬ ‫‪َ )10‬ل ْم َي ْجلِ ِ‬ ‫اف ا ْل ِع َبا ُد‬
‫‪َ )5‬خ َ‬
‫‪Feminine Subjects‬‬
‫‪, the verb must be in its feminine form.‬مؤَ ّنث ‪َ is feminine,‬ف ِ‬
‫اعل ‪If the‬‬ ‫ُ‬
‫َت ْجلِ ُس َفاطِ َم ُة‬ ‫َج َل َس ْت َفاطِ َم ُة‬
‫‪Fatima sits/is sitting/will sit.‬‬ ‫‪Fatima sat.‬‬
‫‪َ )16‬ت ْجلِ ُس ْاْلَ َخ َوات‬ ‫َما َي ُق ْو ُم ْاْلَ ْو َْل ُد‬ ‫‪)11‬‬ ‫‪ )6‬نَام ِ‬
‫ت ا ْل َجدَّ ُة‬ ‫الر ُج ُل‬
‫َ‬ ‫ب َّ‬ ‫‪ )1‬ك ََس َ‬
‫َْل َت ْس َأ ُل ا ْل ُم َع ِّل َمة‬ ‫‪)17‬‬ ‫ت ْاْلُ ُّم‬‫ما ج َلس ِ‬ ‫‪)12‬‬ ‫‪َ )7‬ل ْم َت ُق ِم ا ْل َبن ُ‬
‫َات‬ ‫‪ )2‬كَسب ِ‬
‫ت ا ْل َم ْر َأ ُة‬
‫َ َ َ‬ ‫َ َ‬
‫َما ُت َسافِ ُر ا ْل َخاْلت‬ ‫‪)18‬‬ ‫ت ا ْلبِن ُْت‬ ‫اِس َتی َق َظ ِ‬
‫ْ ْ‬ ‫‪)13‬‬ ‫‪َ )8‬صا َم ْت َفاطِ َم ُة‬ ‫الر َج ُال‬
‫‪َ )3‬يدْ ُخ ُل ِّ‬
‫َْل َت ْس َت ْی ِق ُظ ال ِّط ْف َلة‬ ‫‪)19‬‬ ‫َل ْن َت ْظلِ َم ْاْلُ َّم َه ُ‬
‫ات‬ ‫‪)14‬‬ ‫ت الن َِّسا ُء‬ ‫‪َ )9‬لم َت ْأ ِ‬
‫ْ‬ ‫‪َ )4‬ت ْع َم ُل ا ْل َخ َاْل ُ‬
‫ت‬
‫ج ْي ُء ا ْل ُم ْسلِمات‬ ‫َت ِ‬ ‫‪)20‬‬ ‫ت ال َّطال ِ َب ُ‬
‫ات‬ ‫س ِمع ِ‬
‫َ َ‬ ‫‪)15‬‬ ‫ت ال َّطال ِ َب ُة‬ ‫‪ )10‬ما َقرء ِ‬
‫َ َ َ‬ ‫‪َ )5‬تدْ ُخ ُل ا ْل ُم َع ِّل َم ُ‬
‫ات‬
‫‪Complete the sentences below by adding the verb in brackets. If‬‬
‫‪there is a negative particle, add this and adjust as necessary.‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫ت)‬ ‫‪ْ .......... )6‬اْلَ ْصد َقا ُء ْ‬
‫(لم ‪َ +‬ي ُم ْو ُ‬ ‫الل ( َهدَ ی)‬
‫‪ُ .......... )1‬‬
‫‪ْ .......... )7‬اْلُ ُّم ( َل ْن ‪ُ +‬ي َسافِ ُر)‬ ‫‪ .......... )2‬ا ْل َعدُ ُّو (ك ََذ َب)‬
‫‪ْ .......... )8‬اْلَ ُب ( َل ْم ‪َ +‬ي ْظلِ ُم)‬ ‫‪ْ .......... )3‬اْلُ ْخ ُت ( َق َر َأ)‬
‫‪ .......... )9‬ا ْل َو َلدُ ( َما ‪َ +‬صدَ َق)‬ ‫‪ْ .......... )4‬اْلَ ُخ ( َما ‪َ +‬س َق َط)‬
‫‪ .......... )10‬ا ْل َكافِ ُر ( َل ْم‪ُ +‬يؤْ مِ ُن)‬ ‫َات ( َما ‪َ +‬أ َتی)‬
‫‪ .......... )5‬ا ْل َبن ُ‬
‫‪86‬‬
Stative and Dynamic Verbs
Regular verbs show the occurrence of an action. These are known
as dynamic verbs, e.g. to eat, to walk.
Some verbs show a state. These are usually verbs with to be, e.g.
to be sick. These are known as stative verbs.
A stative verb is translated with an auxiliary verb (is, was, will be)
which shows the tense, followed by the state, like a ‫ ُج ْم َلة ْاس ِم َّیة‬.
‫ا ْل ِف ْع ُل‬ Tense Translation
‫َف ِر َح‬ ِ ‫ا ْلم‬

‫اض ْي‬ The man was happy.
َ Past
The man became happy.
Present Habitual The man is happy.
‫َي ْف َر ُح‬ ِ ‫ ا ْل ُم َض‬Present Continuous
‫ار ُع‬ The man is happy.
Future The man will be happy.
Vocab
to be happy with, ‫َر ِض َي َي ْر َضی ِر ْض َوانًا‬ to be successful ‫َأ ْف َل َح ُي ْفلِ ُح إِ ْف ََّل ًحا‬
approve of
to be quiet ‫َس َك َت َي ْس ُك ُت ُس ُك ْو ًتا‬ to be guided, find the ‫اِ ْهتَدَ ی َي ْهت َِد ْي اِ ْهتِدَ ا ًء‬
right way
to be mislead ‫َض َّل َي ِض ُّل َض ََّل ًْل‬ to be impatient (opposite of

‫) َصبْر‬
‫َج ِز َع َي ْجزَ ُع َجزَ عًا‬
to be just ‫ عَدَ َل َي ْع ِد ُل عَدْ ًْل‬to be humble ‫َخ َش َع َي ْخ َش ُع ُخ ُش ْوعًا‬
Exercise 4
‫) َلن َّي ْس ُك َت ا ْل َم ْظ ُل ْوم‬16 ِ ‫صبر ا ْلم ْظ ُلوم‬
‫ان‬ )11 ‫ب َخالِد‬ ِ ُ‫) َح ِز َن ا ْل َع ْبد‬1
َ ْ َ ََ َ ُ ‫) َيغ ْی‬6
‫) اِ ْهتَدَ ی ا ْل ُم ْسلِمون‬17 ‫َي ِض ُّل ال َّظال ِ ُم ْو َن‬ )12 ‫) َي ْجزَ ُع ا ْل َم ِر ْي ُض‬7 ‫َص َب َر النَّبِ ُّي‬ )2
‫الش ْی َطان‬ َّ ‫) َلن َّي ْهت َِد َي‬18 ‫َي ْخ َس ُر ا ْل َكافِ ُر ْو َن‬ )13 ‫ت ال ِّط ْف َل ُة‬ِ ‫) َف ِرح‬8
َ ُ ‫َي ْف َر ُح الن‬
‫َّاس‬ )3
‫) َي ْجزَ ُع ا ْل َم ْظ ُل ْومون‬19 ‫الصال ِ ُح ْو َن‬ َّ ‫َخ َش َع‬ )14 ‫) َأ ْف َل َح ا ْل ُمؤْ مِن ُْو َن‬9 ‫غَا َب ْت َفاطِ َم ُة‬ )4
ِ ‫) َلن يحزَ َن الص‬20
‫ادقون‬ ‫َت ا ْل َم ْر َأ ُة‬ ِ ‫ما س َكت‬ )15 ‫) َل ْم َت ْف َرحِ ْاْلُ ْخ ُت‬10 ‫َي ْع ِد ُل ا ْل ُم ُل ْو ُك‬ )5
َّ ْ َّ َ َ
87
‫‪Object‬‬
‫‪The object is the one upon whom the action is carried out.‬‬
‫‪The boy ate the apple.‬‬
‫‪In this example, the apple is the object.‬‬
‫‪َ .‬منْ ُص ْوب ‪َ is‬م ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه ‪َ . The‬م ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه ‪In Arabic, the object is called‬‬
‫‪َ in both English and Arabic.‬ف ِ‬
‫اعل ‪َ comes after the‬م ْف ُع ْول بِه ‪The‬‬
‫َش ِر َب َّ‬
‫الر ُج ُل ا ْل َما َء‬
‫‪The man drank the water.‬‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ ‫َف ِ‬
‫ا ْل َما َء‬ ‫الر ُج ُل‬

‫َّ‬ ‫َش ِر َب‬
‫‪Vocab‬‬
‫‪devil‬‬ ‫‪َ container‬ش ْی َطان ج َش َیاطِ ْی ُن‬ ‫إِنَاء ج آنِ َیة‬
‫‪path‬‬ ‫ِص َراط ج ُص ُرط‬ ‫‪businessman‬‬ ‫َت ِ‬

‫اجر ج ُت َّجار‬
‫‪honey‬‬ ‫ع ََسل‬ ‫‪Haji (one who‬‬ ‫‪has‬‬ ‫َحاج ج ُح َّجاج‬

‫)‪performed Hajj‬‬
‫‪knowledge‬‬ ‫‪ِ religion, retribution‬ع ْلم ج ُع ُل ْوم‬ ‫ِد ْين ج َأ ْد َيان‬
‫‪meat‬‬ ‫َل ْحم ج ُل ُح ْوم‬ ‫‪sins‬‬ ‫َذنْب ج ُذن ُْوب‬
‫ف َفاطِ َمة زَ ْينَب‬ ‫‪َ )13‬ما َت ْع ِر ُ‬ ‫ات‬‫‪َ )7‬خ َل َق الل السماو ِ‬
‫ُ َّ َ َ‬ ‫الل ا ْل ِع َبا َد‬
‫‪َ )1‬ي ْرزُ ُق ُ‬
‫ت ا ْلبِنْتان ا ْل ُق ْرآن‬‫‪ )14‬ما َقرء ِ‬ ‫‪ُ )8‬تطِ ْی ُع ا ْل ُم ْسلِ َم ُ‬ ‫الل النَّبِ ِّی ْی َن‬
‫َ َ َ‬ ‫الل‬
‫ات َ‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ب َع َث ُ‬
‫‪َ )15‬ل ْم َت ْس َم ِع ا ْل َبنات ا ْل ُقرآن‬ ‫ِ‬
‫اف ا ْل َكاف ُر َ‬
‫الل‬ ‫‪َْ )9‬ل َي َخ ُ‬ ‫‪َ )3‬ج َع َل ُ‬
‫الل الن ُّْو َر‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪َ )10‬ي ْع ِصي َّ‬ ‫‪َ )4‬أك ََل ا ْل َو َلدُ ال َّل ْح َم‬
‫‪ُ )16‬يط ْی ُع ا ْل ُمؤْ منون َّ‬
‫الر ُس ْول‬ ‫الل‬
‫ان َ‬ ‫الش ْی َط ُ‬
‫‪َ )17‬ما َر َأی ال ُّط ََّّلب ا ْل ُم َع ِّلم‬ ‫ت ْاْلُ ْخ ُت ْاْلَ َب‬ ‫‪ )11‬نَصر ِ‬ ‫‪َ )5‬أ َض َّل فِ ْرع َْو ُن ا ْل َق ْو َم‬
‫َ َ‬
‫‪َ )18‬ل ْن َت ْق َر َأ َخ ِد ْي َجة ا ْلكِتَابین‬ ‫‪َْ )12‬ل َي ْظلِ ُم ا ْل ُم ُل ْو ُك الن َ‬
‫َّاس‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ت ْش َر ُب ال ِّط ْف َل ُة ع ََس ًَّل‬
‫‪88‬‬
Translation of Negative Sentences with ‫ نَكِ َرة‬Words
In a negative sentence, if the ‫اعل‬ ِ ‫ َف‬is ‫نَكِرة‬, the word no will be added
َ
ِ
to the ‫ َفاعل‬, instead of a, and the negative particle will be omitted.
‫َما َجا َء َر ُجل‬
No man came. ✓
A man did not come. 
If the ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬is ‫نَكِ َرة‬, the word any will be added to the ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬, and the
negative particle will be added to the verb as normal.
‫َما َش ِر َب ا ْل َو َلدُ َما ًء‬
The child did not drink any water.
Note
The words ‫( َأ َحد‬translated as one or anyone) and ‫( َش ْيء‬translated as
anything) are commonly used in negative sentences.
‫َما َس َق َط َش ْيء‬ ‫َما َس َأ َل ا ْل َو َلدُ َأ َحدً ا‬
Nothing fell. The child did not ask anyone.
Exercise 6
‫) َما َظ َل َم ْاْلَ ْنبِ َیاء كَافِرا‬15 ‫اس َت ْی َق َظ َأ َحد‬
ْ ‫) َما‬8
ِ ‫) َلم ي ْأ‬1
‫ت ُم َع ِّلم‬ َ ْ
‫) َما َخ َل َق النَّاس َش ْیئا‬16 ‫اس َت ْی َق َظ َو َلد‬
ْ ‫) َما‬9 ‫) َل ْم َي ْحزَ ْن َأ َحد‬2
‫) َما َر َأی ا ْل ُم َع ِّلم َأ َحدا‬17 َ ‫ص َنبِي‬
‫الل‬ ِ ‫) َل ْم َي ْع‬10 ‫) َْل ُي َسافِ ُر َأ َحد‬3
‫الش ْی َطان َنبِ ّیا‬
َّ ‫أض َّل‬
َ ‫) َما‬18 ‫) َل ْم َي ْع ُبدْ َنبِي َصن ًَما‬11 ‫) َل ْم َي ْك ِذ ْب َو َلد‬4
‫الر ُجل َماء‬ َّ ‫ب‬ ِ ‫) َل ْم َي ْش َر‬19 ‫) َما ن ََص َر َأ َحد َخالِدً ا‬12 ‫) َما َي ْق ُعدُ َأ َحد‬5
‫ب ا ْل َف ِق ْیر َماْل‬ َ ‫) َما ك ََس‬20 ‫) َل ْم َي ْأك ُْل َأ ْح َمدُ َش ْیئًا‬13 ‫) َل ْم َي ْهت َِد كَافِر‬6
‫) َما َت ْس َأ ُل ا ْل ُم َع ِّل َمة َطال ِ َبة‬21 ‫َان َأ َحد َصائِ ًما‬ َ ‫) َما ك‬14 ‫َت بِنْت‬
ْ ‫) َما َس َكت‬7
89
Direct and Indirect Object
Some verbs can have two objects.
I gave you a pen.
In this example, you is the first object and a pen is the second.
The first object, the indirect object, is called the ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬, and the
second object, the direct object, is called the ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه َثان‬.
The ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه َثان‬is also ‫ َمنْ ُص ْوب‬and usually comes after the ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬.
‫الل ُم َح َّمدً ا ﷺ َنبِ ًّیا‬
ُ ‫َج َع َل‬
Allah made Muhammad ‫ ﷺ‬a prophet.
The tarkib of this is written as follows:
‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه َثان‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ ِ ‫َف‬
‫َنبِ ًّیا‬ ‫ُم َح َّمدً ا‬ ‫الل‬

ُ ‫َج َع َل‬
Notes
1. Sometimes, the English translation of the ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه َثان‬will have to
be adjusted to suit the English style.
َ ‫َّاس ا ْل َع َذ‬
‫اب‬ َ ‫الر ُس ْو ُل الن‬
َّ ‫َأن َْذ َر‬
The Prophet warned the people of/about the punishment.
2. If the ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه َثان‬is an adjective, it must agree with the ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬in
number and gender. If it is a noun, it does not have to.
‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه َثان‬
Adjective Noun
‫الش ْم َس َكبِ ْی َر ًة‬ ُ ‫َج َع َل‬
َّ ‫الل‬ ‫الش ْم َس ِض َیا ًء‬ ُ ‫َج َع َل‬
َّ ‫الل‬
Must agree with the ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬in Does not have to agree with
number and gender ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬in number nor gender
90
‫‪3. If an Arabic verb is translated as multiple English words, it is‬‬
‫‪َ between the two words,‬م ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه ‪usually better to translate the‬‬
‫‪e.g. to give to drink.‬‬
‫َس َقی َأ ْح َمدُ َفاطِ َم َة َما ًء‬
‫‪Ahmad gave Fatima water to drink.‬‬ ‫✓‬
‫‪Ahmad gave to drink Fatima water.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪Vocab‬‬
‫‪to kill, murder‬‬ ‫‪َ to take as‬قت ََل َي ْقت ُُل َقت ًَّْل‬ ‫َّخ ُذ اِ ِّت َخا ًذا‬
‫اِ َّت َخ َذ يت ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪to reject‬‬ ‫ك ََّذ َب ُي َك ِّذ ُب َت ْك ِذ ْي ًبا‬ ‫‪to give‬‬ ‫آ َتی ُيؤْ تِ ْي إِ ْيتَا ًء‬
‫‪to clothe‬‬ ‫ك ََسا َي ْك ُس ْو ك َْس ًوا‬ ‫‪to show‬‬ ‫َأ َری ُي ِر ْي إِ َرا َء ًة‬
‫‪to fill‬‬ ‫ل َم ْ ً‬
‫ل‬ ‫ل َي ْم َ ُ‬
‫َم َ َ‬ ‫‪to feed‬‬ ‫َأ ْط َع َم ُي ْط ِع ُم إِ ْط َعا ًما‬
‫‪to promise‬‬ ‫‪َ to spend‬وعَدَ َي ِعدُ َوعْدً ا‬ ‫َأ ْن َف َق ُين ِْف ُق إِ ْن َفا ًقا‬
‫‪to give, grant‬‬ ‫ب ِه َب ًة‬ ‫ب َي َه ُ‬‫‪َ to give to drink‬و َه َ‬ ‫َس َقی َي ْس ِق ْي َس ْق ًیا‬
‫‪َ )15‬س َقی ْاْلَب ا ْلبِنْت ع ََسَّل‬ ‫‪َ )8‬أن َْذ َر ْاْلَ ْنبِ َیا ُء ْاْلَ ْق َوا َم الن ََّار‬ ‫‪َ )1‬س َأ َل ا ْل َو َلدُ َ‬
‫الل َم ًاْل‬
‫‪ُ )16‬ت ْط ِع ُم ا ْل َخا َلة ْاْلَ ْط َفال ع ََسَّل‬ ‫ت ا ْل َخا َل ُة ا ْلبِن َْت َما ًء‬ ‫‪ )9‬س َق ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫‪َ )2‬س َقی ا ْل َو َلدُ ْاْلُ َّم َما ًء‬
‫اهیم إِسم ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫اع ْیل‬ ‫ب الل إِ ْب َر ْ ْ َ‬ ‫‪َ )17‬و َه َ‬ ‫الر ُج ُل ْاْلُ َّم َم ًاْل‬
‫ب َّ‬‫‪َ )10‬و َه َ‬ ‫الل ا ْل ُق َ‬
‫رآن ن ُْو ًرا‬ ‫‪َ )3‬ج َع َل ُ‬
‫‪ )18‬عَ َّل َم ِت ا ْل ُم َع ِّل َمة ال ُّط ََّّلب ا ْل ُق ْرآن‬ ‫‪َ )11‬هدَ ی ْاْلَ ْنبِ َیا ُء الن َ‬
‫َّاس الدِّ ْي َن‬ ‫ِ‬
‫الل ا ْلع َبا َد ِّ‬
‫الرزْ َق‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ُ )4‬ي ْعطي ُ‬
‫‪ِ )19‬ا َّت َخ َذ ا ْل َك ِافرون َّ‬
‫الش ْی َطان َخ ِل ْیَّل‬ ‫َّاس ا ْل َع َذ َ‬
‫اب‬ ‫‪َ )12‬أن َْذ َر ُّ‬
‫الر ُس ُل الن َ‬ ‫الل ُم َح َّمدً ا ا ْل ُق َ‬
‫رآن‬ ‫‪ )5‬آ َتی ُ‬
‫ت ْاْلُ ّم ْاْلَ ْو َْلد َت َمرات‬ ‫‪َ )20‬أ ْطعم ِ‬ ‫اإلن ِ‬
‫یسی ْ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ََ‬ ‫‪َ )13‬ما َأ ْع َطی َّ‬
‫الر ُج ُل ا ْل َو َلدَ َما ًء‬ ‫ْج ْی َل‬ ‫الل ع َ‬ ‫‪ )6‬آ َتی ُ‬
‫الص ِائمات َت َمرات‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )21‬أعْ َطت ا ْل ِبنْت َّ‬ ‫‪َ )14‬أ ْط َع َم الت َُّّج ُار ا ْل ُف َق َرا َء َل ْح ًما‬ ‫الل ا ْل ُمؤْ مِن ِ ْی َن ا ْل َجنَّ َة‬
‫‪َ )7‬وعَدَ ُ‬
‫‪91‬‬
‫‪Complete the following sentences by filling in the blanks with an‬‬
‫‪appropriate word. Use a different word for each question.‬‬
‫‪َ )9‬ج َع َل ُ‬
‫الل ُم َح َّمدً ا ‪.........‬‬ ‫‪َ )1‬لن ‪ُ .........‬مؤْ مِن‬
‫‪َ )10‬ج َع َل الل ْ ِ‬
‫اإل ْس ََّل َم ‪.........‬‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ر َأ ْ‬
‫ت ‪ .........‬ن ُُج ْو ًما‬
‫ُ‬
‫َّٓاس زَ ْمزَ َم‬ ‫‪ ......... )11‬ا ْل َح ُّ‬
‫اج النَّ َ‬ ‫ف ‪.........‬‬ ‫‪َ )3‬ي ْأك ُُل ُّ‬
‫الض ُی ْو ُ‬
‫‪َ )12‬أ ْع َط ِ‬
‫ت ا ْل َمر َأ ُة ‪َ .........‬ت ْم َر َت ْی ِن‬ ‫ب ‪َ .........‬أ ْم َو ًاْل‬‫‪ )4‬ك ََس َ‬
‫‪َ )13‬ل ْم ‪ .........‬ال َّطال ِ َب ُة ‪.........‬‬ ‫لما‬ ‫ِ‬
‫الل ‪ .........‬ع ً‬ ‫ب ُ‬ ‫‪َ )5‬و َه َ‬
‫‪َ )14‬أ ْط َع َم ْت ‪ .........‬ا ْل ُف َق َرا َء ‪.........‬‬ ‫الل ِع ْل ًما‬
‫الر ُج ُل َ‬ ‫‪َّ ......... )6‬‬
‫ف ‪.........‬‬
‫‪.........‬الض ُی ْو َ‬
‫ُّ‬ ‫‪َ )15‬أ ْط َع َم‬ ‫الل‬
‫ان َ‬ ‫‪َ )7‬ل ْم ‪َّ .........‬‬
‫الش ْی َط ُ‬
‫‪ ......... )16‬ا ْل ُم َع ِّل َم ُة ‪ُ .........‬س ْو َر َت ْی ِن‬ ‫الل ‪ .........‬الت َّْو َرا َة‬
‫‪ )8‬آتی ُ‬
‫‪92‬‬
Deputy Subject
If the verb is in the passive form, ‫فِ ْعل َم ْج ُه ْول‬, the ‫اعل‬ ِ ‫ َف‬is removed and
the ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬takes the place of the ‫اعل‬ِ ‫ َف‬.
In this case, the ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬is now called ‫اع ِل‬ِ ‫ ;نَائِب ا ْل َف‬the deputy subject.
ُ
ِ ْ ِ
The ‫ نَائ ُب ال َفاع ِل‬follows the same rules as the ‫اعل‬ ِ ‫ َف‬: it is ‫ مر ُفوع‬and the
ْ َْ
gender of the verb will agree with it.
In tarkib, if the verb is ‫ َم ْج ُه ْول‬, it must be labelled as such. If it is ‫ َم ْع ُل ْوم‬,
it is not necessary to label it as ‫ َم ْع ُل ْوم‬as this is the default state.
‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ ِ ‫َف‬
َ ‫ا ْل ُق ْر‬
‫آن‬ ‫ا ْلبِن ُْت‬ ِ ‫س ِمع‬
‫ت‬ َ َ
ِ ‫نَائِب ا ْل َف‬
‫اع ِل‬ ‫فِ ْعل َم ْج ُه ْول‬
ُ
ُ ‫ا ْل ُق ْر‬
‫آن‬ ‫ُس ِم َع‬
The ‫ فِ ْعل َم ْج ُه ْول‬is translated as follows:
‫ا ْل ِف ْع ُل‬ Tense Translation
ُ ‫ُس ِم َع ا ْل ُق ْر‬
‫آن‬ ِ ‫ا ْلم‬
‫اض ْي‬ َ Past The Quran was heard.
Present Habitual The Quran is heard.
‫آن‬ ِ ‫ ا ْل ُم َض‬Present Continuous
ُ ‫ار ُع ُي ْس َم ُع ا ْل ُق ْر‬ The Quran is being heard.
Future The Quran will be heard.
Vocab
God-fearing ‫ ُمتَّق ج ْو َن‬part ‫ُجزْ ء ج َأ ْجزَ اء‬
happy ‫َم ْس ُر ْور ج ْو َن‬ lesson ‫َد ْرس ج ُد ُر ْوس‬
angel ‫َم َلك ج َم ََّلئِ َكة‬ polytheism ‫ِش ْرك‬
migrant ِ ‫ُم َه‬

‫اجر ج ْو َن‬ rich ‫غَنِي ج َأغْن ِ َیا ُء‬
ِ ‫ن‬
‫َاصر ج َأن َْصار‬ ‫ُم َب َارك‬
helper blessed
93
‫‪َ )13‬ل ْم ُي ْظ َل ِم النَّاس‬ ‫ت ا ْل َجنَّ ُة‬ ‫‪ُ )7‬خلِ َق ِ‬ ‫‪ )1‬يع ِر ُ ِ‬
‫ف ا ْلع َبا ُد َ‬
‫الل‬ ‫َْ‬
‫‪ )14‬ك ُِّذ َب ُّ‬
‫الر ُسل‬ ‫ل ِْ‬
‫اإلنَا ُء‬ ‫‪ُ )8‬م ِ َ‬ ‫الل‬
‫ف ُ‬ ‫‪ُ )2‬ي ْع َر ُ‬
‫‪ُ )15‬ين َْص ُر ا ْل ُم ْسلِمون‬ ‫‪َ )9‬لن ُّي ْع َبدَ َّ‬
‫الصن َُم‬ ‫الل آ َد َم‬‫َخ َلق ُ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫‪َ )16‬لن ُّي ْظ َل َم ا ْل ُم ُل ْوك‬ ‫ِ ِ‬ ‫ُخلِ َق آ َد ُم‬
‫‪ُ )10‬خل َقت َّ‬
‫الس َما ُء‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫﴿سئِ َل ُم ْو ٰسی﴾‬ ‫‪ُ )17‬‬ ‫ت ْاْلَ ْر ُض‬‫‪ُ )11‬خلِ َق ِ‬ ‫ُص ِد َق ا ْل ُمؤْ مِن ُْو َن‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫‪ُ ﴿ )18‬أن ِْز َل ‪ ...‬ا ْل ُق ْر ُ‬
‫آن﴾‬ ‫‪َ )12‬ما ُش ِر َب ا ْل َما ُء‬ ‫ُب ِع َث ْاْلَ ْنبِ َیا ُء‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫‪.‬فِ ْعل َم ْج ُه ْول ‪Rewrite the following sentences by changing the verb to a‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫الر ُسل‬ ‫‪ )11‬ن ََص َر ا ْل ُمؤْ منون ُّ‬ ‫اس‬‫‪َ )6‬أ ْن َذ َر ْاْلَ ْنبِ َیا ُء النَّ َ‬ ‫ْب‬ ‫الل َّ‬
‫الذن َ‬ ‫‪َ )1‬غ َف َر ُ‬
‫‪ )12‬ك ََّذ َب ا ْل َكافِرون النَّبِ ّي‬ ‫ت ال ِّط ْف َل ُة ْاْلَ َب‬ ‫‪ )7‬ك ََذب ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫‪َ )2‬س َأ َل ا ْل َو َلدُ ْاْلَ َب‬
‫‪َ )13‬صدَ َق ْاْلَخ ْاْلَ َخ َوات‬ ‫ف ا ْل َع ُّم ْاْلَ ْو َْل َد‬
‫‪ )8‬ع ََر َ‬ ‫َّاس‬
‫الل الن َ‬
‫‪َ )3‬هدَ ی ُ‬
‫‪َ )14‬ج َم َع ْاْلَب ْاْلَ َخ َوات‬ ‫‪َ )9‬ظ َل َم ا ْل َملِ ُك ا ْل ُف َق َرا َء‬ ‫‪َ )4‬ج َم َع ْاْلَ ُخ ا ْل َم َال‬
‫الش ْی َطان ا ْل َكافِرين‬
‫‪ )15‬ك ََذ َب َّ‬ ‫ِ ِ‬
‫‪َ )10‬سم َعت ا ْل َم ْر َأ ُة الن َ‬
‫َّاس‬ ‫الل ا ْل ِع َبا َد‬
‫‪appropriate word. Use a different word for each question.‬‬
‫‪ُ )11‬ي ْع َبدُ ‪.........‬‬ ‫‪ُ )6‬تؤْ ك َُل ‪.........‬‬ ‫‪ُ )1‬سئِ َل ‪.........‬‬
‫‪ُ )12‬أكِ َل ‪.........‬‬ ‫‪ُ )7‬ش ِر َب ‪.........‬‬ ‫‪ُ )2‬ت ْس َأ ُل ‪.........‬‬
‫‪ُ )13‬أن ِْز َل ‪.........‬‬ ‫‪ُ )8‬قتِ َل ‪.........‬‬ ‫‪ُ )3‬ي ْس َم ُع ‪.........‬‬
‫ب ‪.........‬‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪ )9‬ك ُِّذ َب ‪.........‬‬ ‫‪ُ )4‬ملِ َئ ‪.........‬‬
‫‪ )14‬كُس َ‬
‫‪ )15‬ع ُِر َف ْت ‪.........‬‬ ‫‪ )10‬ن ُِص َر ْ‬
‫ت ‪.........‬‬ ‫‪ُ )5‬ي ْظ َل ُم ‪.........‬‬
‫‪94‬‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه ‪ of a Verb with Two‬فِ ْعل َم ْج ُه ْول ‪The‬‬
‫اع ِل ‪َ , the first will become the‬م ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه ‪If a verb has two‬‬
‫‪ and will‬نَائِب ا ْل َف ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ْ‬
‫‪َ .‬منْ ُص ْوب ‪َ and will remain‬مف ُع ْول به ‪َ . The second will become the‬م ْرف ْوع ‪be‬‬
‫ُأعْطِ َي زَ ْيد َم ًاْل‬ ‫َأ ْع َطی ُ‬
‫الل زَ ْيدً ا َم ًاْل‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪Zaid was given wealth.‬‬ ‫‪Allah gave Zaid wealth.‬‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ ‫نَائِب ا ْل َف ِ‬
‫اع ِل‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫فِ ْعل َم ْج ُه ْول‬
‫َم ًاْل‬ ‫زَ ْيد‬ ‫ُأعْ طِ َي‬
‫الر ُجل ِع ْلما‬ ‫َل ْم ُي ْع َط َّ‬ ‫‪)11‬‬ ‫‪ُ )6‬ج ِع َل ا ْل ُق ُ‬
‫رآن ن ُْو ًرا‬ ‫الل ن ُْو ًحا َنبِ ًّیا‬‫َج َع َل ُ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫ُأ ْوتِ َي ُموسی الت َّْو َراة‬ ‫‪)12‬‬ ‫ت َم ْر َي ُم إِ ٰل ًها‬
‫خ َذ ْ‬‫‪ُ )7‬ا ُّت ِ‬ ‫ُج ِع َل ن ُْوح َنبِ ًّیا‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫ُو ِعدَ ا ْل ُمؤْ مِنون ا ْل َجنَّة‬ ‫‪)13‬‬ ‫‪ُ )8‬أ ْوتِي النَّبِي ا ْل ُق َ‬
‫رآن‬ ‫ُّ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫اِ َّت َخ َذ الن ََّص َاری ِع ْی َسی إِ ٰل ًها‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫ُأن ِْذ َر ا ْل َكافِرون ا ْل َع َذاب‬ ‫‪)14‬‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )9‬ما ُأعْط َي ا ْل َو َلدُ َما ًء‬ ‫خ َذ ِع ْی َسی إِ ٰل ًها‬ ‫ُا ُّت ِ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫ت ا ْلبِنْتان َت َمرات‬ ‫ُأعْطِی ِ‬ ‫‪ُ )10‬أن ِْذ َر ا ْل َكافِ ُر ْو َن الن ََّار‬ ‫الل ا ْل ُق َ‬
‫َ‬ ‫‪)15‬‬ ‫رآن ن ُْو ًرا‬ ‫‪َ )5‬ج َع َل ُ‬
‫‪.‬فِ ْعل َم ْج ُه ْول ‪Rewrite the following sentences by changing the verb to a‬‬
‫الصنَم إِ ٰلها‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫الل ا ْل َك ْع َب َة ُم َب َار َك ًة‬ ‫الل ا ْل ِع َبا َد ِرزْ ًقا‬
‫‪ )9‬ا َّت َخ َذ النَّاس َّ‬ ‫‪َ )5‬ج َع َل ُ‬ ‫‪َ )1‬ي ْرزُ ُق ُ‬
‫ت ْاْلُ ّم ْاْلَ ْو َْلد ا ْل ُق ْرآن‬ ‫‪َ )10‬ع َّلم ِ‬ ‫اه ْی َم َخلِ ْی ًَّل‬‫‪ )6‬ا َّت َخ َذ الل إِبر ِ‬ ‫‪َ )2‬س َقی ْاْلَ ُخ ْاْلَ َب َش َرا ًبا‬
‫َ‬ ‫ُ َْ‬
‫ت ا ْل ُم َع ِّل َم ُة ال َّطال ِ َب َة َم ْك َت ًبا‬
‫‪َ )11‬أر ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫الل ا ْل ُمؤْ مِن ِ ْی َن ا ْل َجنَّ َة‬
‫‪َ )7‬و َعدَ ُ‬ ‫‪َ )3‬س َأ َل ال ِّط ْف ُل ْاْلُ َّم ع ََس ًَّل‬
‫ف َط َعا ًما‬ ‫الض ُی ْو َ‬ ‫اْلغْنِ َیا ُء ُّ‬
‫‪َ )12‬أ ْط َع َم ْ َ‬ ‫ت ا ْل َخا َل ُة ا ْلبِن َْت َق َل ًما‬ ‫‪َ )8‬أ ْع َط ِ‬ ‫الص َر َ‬
‫اط‬ ‫َّاس ِّ‬ ‫الل الن َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )4‬ي ْهدي ُ‬
‫‪95‬‬
Adverbs of Time and Place
An adverb gives more information regarding the verb.
Some adverbs show the time or place in which the action takes
place.
Last night, the boy slept on the sofa.
In this example, last night and on the sofa are the adverbs of time
and place respectively.
In Arabic, this is called ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه‬. The ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه‬is ‫ َمنْ ُص ْوب‬.
The ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه‬can come at the beginning or at the end of the
sentence in both Arabic and English.
‫ف‬
ُ ‫الض ُی ْو‬ ِ ‫ا ْل َب‬
ُّ ‫ار َح َة َجا َء‬ ِ ‫ف ا ْل َب‬
‫ار َح َة‬ ُ ‫الض ُی ْو‬
ُّ ‫َجا َء‬
Last night, the guests came. The guests came last night.
‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِیْ ِه‬ ِ ‫َف‬
ِ ‫ا ْل َب‬
‫ار َح َة‬ ‫ف‬
ُ ‫الض ُی ْو‬
ُّ ‫َجا َء‬
Translation of the ‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه‬

1. Words like at, on, in, etc. may need to be added to the
translation of a ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه‬.
‫الر ُج ُل َل ْی ًَّل‬
َّ ‫َص َّلی‬
The man prayed at night
2. The word ‫ َي ْوم‬on its own means day. However, when it has an ‫ال‬,
‫ا ْل َی ْو َم‬, it means today.
3. ‫ َأ ْح َیان‬, the plural of ‫( ِح ْین‬time), is translated as sometimes.
4. The word ‫ َق ُّط‬is used with a negative ‫فِ ْعل َماض‬.
‫َما َع َبدَ ْاْلَ ْنبِ َیا ُء َصنَ ًما َق ُّط‬
The prophets did not ever worship an idol.
96
‫‪Vocab‬‬
‫‪minute‬‬ ‫‪َ always, ever‬دقِ ْی َقة ج َد َقائِ ُق‬ ‫َأ َبد‬
‫‪time, while, hour,‬‬ ‫‪َ week‬ساعَة ج ات‬ ‫ُأ ْس ُب ْوع ج َأ َسابِ ْی ُع‬
‫‪Day of Judgement‬‬
‫‪month‬‬ ‫‪َ yesterday‬ش ْهر ج ُش ُه ْور‪َ ،‬أ ْش ُهر‬ ‫س ( َم ْبنِي)‬

‫َأ ْم ِ‬
‫‪morning‬‬ ‫َص َباح‬ ‫‪time‬‬ ‫آن‬
‫‪tomorrow‬‬ ‫‪ now, just now‬غَد‬ ‫ْاْل ُن‬
‫‪ever‬‬ ‫َق ُّط ( َم ْبنِي)‬ ‫‪last night‬‬ ‫ا ْل َب ِ‬

‫ار َح ُة‬
‫‪evening‬‬ ‫َم َساء‬ ‫‪yet, until now‬‬ ‫َب ْعدُ ( َم ْبنِي)‬
‫‪day/daytime‬‬ ‫ن ََهار‬ ‫‪time‬‬ ‫ِح ْین ج َأ ْح َیان‬
‫‪day‬‬ ‫َي ْوم ج َأ َّيام‬ ‫‪always‬‬ ‫َدائِم‬
‫ت ا ْل َبنَات َي ْومین‬‫‪ )13‬صام ِ‬
‫َ َ‬ ‫َّاس ن ََه ًارا‬ ‫‪َ )7‬ي ْع َم ُل الن ُ‬ ‫َّاس َل ْی ًَّل‬
‫‪َ )1‬ينَا ُم الن ُ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫‪َ )8‬غا َب ْت َفاطِ َم ُة َأ َّيا ًما‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ق َعدَ ا ْل َجدُّ َد َقائِ َق‬
‫الر ُجل‬‫‪ )14‬ا ْل َی ْوم َلن ُّي َساف َر َّ‬
‫‪َ )15‬ي ُص ْو ُم ا ْل ُم ْسلِمون َش ْهرا‬ ‫ان َش ْه ًرا‬ ‫‪ )9‬صام ا ْلو َلدَ ِ‬ ‫احا‬ ‫‪ُ )3‬ي ْق َر ُأ ا ْل ُق ْر ُ‬
‫َ َ َ‬ ‫آن َص َب ً‬
‫‪َ )16‬ين ُْص ُر ْاْلَ ْط َفال ْاْلُ ّم َأ ْح َیانا‬ ‫اس َت ْی َق َظ ال ِّط ْف ُل َل ْی ًَّل‬
‫‪ْ )10‬‬ ‫َب‬
‫َت زَ ْين ُ‬‫س َح ِزن ْ‬‫‪َ )4‬أ ْم ِ‬
‫ت َخ ِد ْي َجة َأ ْمس‬ ‫‪َ )17‬ما َسا َف َر ْ‬ ‫ب الت ِ‬

‫َّاج ُر َب ْعدُ‬ ‫ذه ِ‬ ‫‪َ )11‬ل ْم َي َ‬ ‫َاب َخالِد َق ُّط‬ ‫‪َ )5‬ما غ َ‬
‫‪َ )18‬ي ْق َر ُأ ال ُّط ََّّلب ا ْل ُكتُب َساعات‬ ‫‪َ )12‬ل ْم ُت َسافِ ِر النِّ َسا ُء ا ْل َی ْو َم‬ ‫الر َج ُال َغدً ا‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ُ )6‬ي َساف ُر ِّ‬
‫‪َ from the brackets and translate.‬م ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه ‪Add a suitable‬‬
‫‪َ )5‬ت ْصدُ ُق ا ْلبِنْت ‪َ ( .........‬دائِم‪َ /‬ساعَة)‬ ‫(اْل َن‪َ /‬دقِ ْی َقة)‬
‫َي ْق َر ُأ َأ ْح ُمدُ ‪ْ .........‬‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫‪َ )6‬ي ْك ِذ ُب الت ِ‬
‫َّاجر ‪ُ ( .........‬أ ْس ُب ْوع‪َ /‬أ ْح َیان)‬ ‫َل ْم َي ْك ِذ ْب َنبِي ‪َ ( .........‬ب ْعدُ ‪َ /‬ق ُّط)‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫س‪َ /‬غدً ا)‬ ‫الر ُجل ْ ِ‬
‫اإلنَاء ‪َ ( .........‬أ ْم ِ‬ ‫ل َّ‬ ‫‪َ )7‬م َ َ‬ ‫ُت َسافِ ُر َخ ِد ْي َج ُة ‪َ ( .........‬ي ْوم‪َ /‬أ َبد)‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫‪َ )8‬ت ْس َت ْی ِق ُظ ا ْل َخا َلة ‪َ ( .........‬ش ْهر‪َ /‬ص َباح)‬ ‫َي ُص ْو ُم ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن ‪َ ( .........‬أ َّيام‪َ /‬ق ُّط)‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫‪97‬‬
‫‪َ :‬م ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه ‪Multiple‬‬
‫‪َ .‬م ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه ‪One sentence may have multiple‬‬
‫ت َفاطِ َم ُة َسا َع ًة‬
‫ا ْل َی ْو َم َق َر َء ْ‬
‫‪Today, Fatima read for an hour.‬‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه‬ ‫َف ِ‬
‫اعل‬ ‫فِ ْعل‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه‬
‫َساعَ ًة‬ ‫َفاطِ َم ُة‬ ‫َق َر َء ْت‬ ‫ا ْل َی ْو َم‬
‫اس ِم َّیة ‪َ in a‬م ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه‬

‫‪َ .‬م ْف ُع ْول فِ ْیه ‪ can also have a‬فِ ْعل نَاقِص ‪ُ with a‬ج ْم َلة ْاسم َّیة ‪A‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫َان زَ ْيد َم ِر ْي ًضا ا ْل َب ِ‬
‫ار َح َة‬ ‫ك َ‬
‫‪Zaid was sick last night.‬‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه‬ ‫َخ َب ُر ك َ‬
‫َان‬ ‫فِ ْعل نَاقِص‬
‫ا ْل َب ِ‬
‫ار َح َة‬ ‫َم ِر ْي ًضا‬ ‫زَ ْيد‬ ‫ك َ‬
‫َان‬
‫‪َ )11‬لیس ِ‬
‫ت ال ِّط ْف َلة َم ِر ْي َضة ا ْل َی ْوم‬ ‫َان ا ْل َملِ ُك َظال ِ ًما َق ُّط‬‫َما ك َ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬ ‫‪َ )1‬ي ُك ْو ُن ْاْلَ ُخ ُم ْت َع ًبا َم َسا ًء‬
‫َْ‬
‫‪َ )12‬ت ُك ْو ُن َفاطِ َمة ن َِش ْی َطة َص َباحا‬ ‫َت ال ِّط ْف َل ُة َح ِز ْينَ ًة َسا َع ًة‬‫كَان ِ‬ ‫‪)7‬‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ل ْی َس ا ْل َو َلدُ َجائِ ًعا ْاْل َن‬
‫ار َحة‬ ‫َان ال ِّط ْفل َم ْس ُر ْورا ا ْل َب ِ‬
‫‪ )13‬ك َ‬ ‫َان َخالِد غَائِ ًبا ُأ ْس ُب ْو ًعا‬ ‫َما ك َ‬ ‫‪)8‬‬ ‫َان زَ ْيد َم ِر ْي ًضا َش ْه ًرا‬
‫‪ )3‬ك َ‬
‫الر َجال َصائِمین غَدا‬ ‫‪َ )14‬ي ُك ْو ُن ِّ‬ ‫اب َش ِد ْيدً ا َغدً ا‬ ‫َي ُك ْو ُن ا ْل َع َذ ُ‬ ‫‪)9‬‬ ‫ار ًدا َأ ْم ِ‬
‫س‬ ‫َان ا ْل َما ُء َب ِ‬
‫‪َ )4‬ما ك َ‬
‫َت ال ِّط ْف َلتان َجالِ َستین َد َق ِائق‬ ‫‪ )15‬كَان ِ‬ ‫ان َأ ْح َیا ًنا‬
‫‪َ )10‬ي ُك ْو ُن ْاْلَ ُب غ َْض َب َ‬ ‫َان ا ْل َجدُّ ُم ْبت َِس ًما َدائِ ًما‬
‫‪ )5‬ك َ‬
‫‪98‬‬
Adverbs of Degree and Frequency
Some adverbs show the degree to which an action occurs, or the
frequency with which it takes place.
The boy was extremely patient.
The man performed Hajj twice.
In these examples, extremely and twice are adverbs of degree and
frequency respectively.
In Arabic, this is called ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق‬. The ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق‬is ‫ َمن ُْص ْوب‬and ‫نَكِ َرة‬.
Adverbs of Degree
The ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق‬which shows the degree is usually the ‫ َم ْصدَ ر‬of the
main verb or the ‫ َم ْصدَ ر‬of a synonym of the main verb.
‫الر ُج ُل ُق ُع ْو ًدا‬
َّ ‫َج َل َس‬
‫الر ُج ُل ُج ُل ْو ًسا‬
َّ ‫َج َل َس‬
The ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق‬usually comes after the ‫اعل‬ِ ‫ َف‬, and ‫ م ْفعول بِ ِه‬if there is one.
ُْ َ
The ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق‬of stative verbs can be translated as so, very,
extremely, etc.
‫َص َب َر َي ْع ُق ْو ُب ڠ َص ْب ًرا‬
Yaqub was very patient.
The ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق‬of dynamic verbs can be translated in different ways.
Sometimes it simply cannot be reflected in translation.
‫َم ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق‬ ِ ‫َف‬
‫َص ْب ًرا‬ ‫َي ْع ُق ْو ُب‬ ‫َص َب َر‬
Vocab
Translation Arabic Translation Arabic
to recite clearly ‫َر َّت َل ُي َر ِّت ُل َت ْرتِ ْی ًَّل‬
to love ‫ ُح ًّبا‬،‫ب إِ ْح َبا ًبا‬ ِ
َّ ‫َأ َح‬
ُّ ‫ب ُيح‬
to bow ‫َرك ََع َي ْرك َُع ُرك ُْوعًا‬ to perform Umrah ‫اِ ْعت ََم َر َي ْعت َِم ُر اِعْتِ َم ًارا‬
to prostrate ‫ َس َجدَ َي ْس ُجدُ ُس ُج ْو ًدا‬to recite ‫َت ََّل َي ْت ُل ْو ِت ََّل َو ًة‬
to hit ‫ َض َر َب َي ْض ِر ُب َض ْر ًبا‬to call, supplicate ‫َدعَا َيدْ ع ُْو َدع َْو ًة ُدعَا ًء‬
99
‫ب ا ْل ُم ْسلِمون الل ُح ّبا‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫َّاس ا ْل َم َال ُح ًّبا‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪ُ )1‬ي ْج َم ُع ا ْل ِع َبا ُد َج ْم ًعا‬
‫‪ُ )13‬يح ُّ‬ ‫ب الن ُ‬
‫‪ُ )7‬يح ُّ‬
‫‪ُ )14‬أن ِْذ َر النَّاس ا ْل َع َذاب إِن َْذارا‬ ‫‪ )8‬آم َن ا ْلم َه ِ‬
‫اج ُر ْو َن إِ ْي َمانًا‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ظ َلم فِ ْرع َْو ُن ُظ ْل ًما‬
‫كَذ َب ا ْل َق ْوم ن ُْوحا ڠ َت ْك ِذ ْيبا‬‫‪َّ )15‬‬ ‫‪َ )9‬ش َك َر َداؤُ ْو ُد ڠ ُش ْك ًرا‬ ‫‪َ )3‬ف ِر َح ْاْلَ ْو َْل ُد َف َر ًحا‬
‫اط َمة ْاس ِت ْی َقاظا‬
‫‪ )16‬ما اس َتی َق َظ ْت َف ِ‬
‫َ ْ ْ‬ ‫‪َ )10‬ح ِز َن َي ْع ُق ْو ُب ڠ ُحزْ نًا‬ ‫‪َ )4‬ت ْس ُك ُت ا ْل َبن ُ‬
‫َات ُس ُك ْو ًتا‬
‫‪ )17‬ن ََص َر ْاْلَن َْصار النَّبِ ّي ﷺ ن َْصرا‬ ‫ف ڠ َص ْب ًرا‬
‫‪َ )11‬ص َب َر ُي ْو ُس ُ‬ ‫‪َ )5‬ض َر َب زَ ْيد َخالِدً ا َض ْر ًبا‬
‫‪ُ )18‬ي َر ِّت ُل ا ْل ُق َّراء ا ْل ُق ْرآن َل ْیَّل َت ْر ِت ْیَّل‬ ‫َّاس النَّبِ َّي ﷺ َم ْع ِر َف ًة‬
‫ف الن ُ‬
‫‪ )12‬ع ََر َ‬ ‫‪َ )6‬خ ِس َر ال َّظال ِ ُم ْو َن ُخ ْس َرانًا‬
‫‪َ of degree to the following sentences then translate.‬م ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق ‪Add a‬‬
‫‪ )7‬وعَدَ ِ‬
‫ت ا ْل َخا َلة ‪.........‬‬ ‫َ‬ ‫‪َ )1‬ت ْف َر ُح زَ ْين ُ‬
‫َب ‪.........‬‬
‫‪َ )8‬هدَ ی الل النَّاس ‪.........‬‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ف ِر َح الن ُ‬
‫َّاس ‪.........‬‬
‫اإلنَاء ‪.........‬‬ ‫الص ِد ْيق ْ ِ‬‫ل َّ‬ ‫‪َ )9‬م َ َ‬ ‫َات ‪.........‬‬‫‪َ )3‬ت ْس ُك ُت ا ْل َبن ُ‬
‫‪ُ )10‬ي ْط ِع ُم ال َّتا ِجر ْاْلَ ْو َْلد ‪.........‬‬ ‫‪َ )4‬ض َّل ا ْل َكافِ ُر ْو َن ‪.........‬‬
‫‪ُ )11‬ت َع ِّل ُم ْاْلُ ْخت ْاْلَخ ‪.........‬‬ ‫‪ )5‬ك ََذب ِ‬
‫ت ا ْل َم ْر َأ ُة ‪.........‬‬ ‫َ‬
‫‪ُ )12‬يطِ ْی ُع ْاْلَ ْو َْلد ْاْلُ َّم َهات ‪.........‬‬ ‫الر ُج ُل ‪.........‬‬
‫‪َ )6‬ي ْصدُ ُق َّ‬
‫‪100‬‬
Adverbs of Frequency
When the ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق‬is used to show the frequency of an action, it
can be:
1. A ‫ َم ْصدَ ر‬in the pattern of ‫ َف ْع َلة‬.
‫َج َلس ا ْل َو َلدُ َج ْل َس ًة‬
The boy sat once.
This ‫ َم ْصدَ ر‬can be made dual and plural.
‫َج َلس ا ْل َو َلدُ َج ْل َس َت ْی ِن‬ ‫َج َلس ا ْل َو َلدُ َج ْل َسات‬
The boy sat twice. The boy sat a few times.
2. A normal noun. The word ‫( َم َّرة‬plural ‫ ) َم َّرات‬is commonly used for
this.
ِ ‫غَاب‬
‫ت ا ْل ُم َع ِّل َم ُة َم َّر َت ْی ِن‬ َ
The teacher was absent twice.
Exercise 19
‫ت ا ْل َجدَّ ة َم ّرات‬ ِ ‫) اِ ْعتَمر‬6 ِ ْ ‫) َرك ََع‬1
‫اإل َما ُم َر ْك َع ًة‬
ََ
‫الصائِمون َف ْر َحتین‬ َّ ‫) َي ْف َر ُح‬7 ‫َّاس َس ْجدَ َت ْی ِن‬ ُ ‫) َس َجدَ الن‬2
ُ ‫) َش ِر َب‬8
‫الح َّجاج زَ ْمزَ م َش ْر َبة‬ ‫دت ال َّطال ِ َب ُة َق ْعدَ َت ْی ِن‬
ِ ‫) َقع‬3
َ
‫) َد َخ َل الت َُّّجار ا ْل َمدْ َر َسة َم َّرة‬9 ‫ف َأك َََّلت‬ ُّ ‫) َأك ََل‬4
‫) َأ َری ْاْلَب ا ْل َو َلد ا ْل َج َبل َم َّر َت ْین‬10 ‫الص ِد ْي ُق َس ْك َت ًة‬
َّ ‫) َس َك َت‬5
101
‫‪Adverbs of Reason‬‬
‫‪Some adverbs show the reason why the subject carries out the‬‬
‫‪verb.‬‬
‫‪The man fasts in hope of reward.‬‬
‫‪In this example, in hope of reward is the adverb of reason.‬‬
‫‪َ which is‬م ْصدَ ر ‪َ is usually a‬م ْف ُع ْول َل ُه ‪َ . The‬م ْف ُع ْول َل ُه ‪In Arabic, this is called‬‬
‫‪.‬نَكِ َر ًة ‪َ and‬من ُْص ْوب‬
‫‪This can be translated as because of, due to, in, etc.‬‬
‫احتِسا ًبا‬
‫الر ُج ُل ْ‬
‫َي ُص ْو ُم َّ‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول َل ُه‬ ‫َف ِ‬
‫احتِسا ًبا‬
‫ْ‬ ‫الر ُج ُل‬
‫َّ‬ ‫َي ُص ْو ُم‬
‫‪Vocab‬‬
‫ِ‬ ‫احتِ َرا ًما‬
‫‪to hope, desire‬‬ ‫ب َي ْر ُ‬
‫غَب َرغْ َبةً‪َ ،‬رغَ ًبا‬ ‫َرغ َ‬ ‫‪to respect, honour‬‬ ‫احت ََر َم َي ْحت َِر ُم ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪to fear‬‬ ‫َر ِه َب َي ْر َه ُب َر ْه َبةً‪َ ،‬ر َه ًبا‬ ‫‪to hope for reward‬‬ ‫ِا ْحت ََس َب َي ْحت َِس ُب ِا ْح ِت َسا ًبا‬
‫‪show‬‬ ‫‪ُ to seek forgiveness‬س ْم َعة‬ ‫ِا ْس َت ْغ َف َر َي ْس َتغ ِْف ُر ِا ْس ِت ْغ َف ًارا‬
‫طم ُع َط َم ًعا‬ ‫ِ‬

‫‪to desire‬‬ ‫‪َ to envy‬طم َع َي َ‬ ‫َح َسدَ َي ْح ُسدُ َح َسدً ا‬
‫‪to perform salah‬‬ ‫َص َّلی ُي َص ِّل ْي َص ََّل ًة‬ ‫‪to show off‬‬ ‫َر َاءى ُي َر ِائي ِر َي ًاء ِر َئا ًء ُم َر َاءا ًة‬
‫‪َْ )7‬ل َي ْع ُبدُ ا ْل ُمؤْ مِنون الل ُس ْم َعة‬ ‫َّاس ِر َيا ًء‬‫َص َّلی الن ُ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫‪َ )8‬ت ْع ُبدُ ا ْل ُم ْسلِمات الل َخ ْوفا‬ ‫َس َجدَ ا ْل ِع َبا ُد ُش ْك ًرا‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫‪َ )9‬ت ْع ُبدُ ا ْل ُمؤْ مِنات الل َط َمعا‬ ‫َت ْس َتغ ِْف ُر ا ْل َجدَّ ُة َر َه ًبا‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫‪ )10‬ك ََّذ َب ا ْل َكافِرون ْاْلَ ْنبِ َیاء َح َسدا‬ ‫ُي ْط ِع ُم ْاْلَ ُب ْاْلَ ْو َْل َد ُح ًّبا‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫‪َ )11‬ت ُق ْو ُم ا ْل ُمؤْ مِنات َر َم َضان إِ ْي َمانا‬ ‫احتِ َرا ًما‬ ‫ات ْ‬ ‫ت ال َّطال ِ َب ُ‬ ‫َقام ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫احتِ َسابا‬
‫‪َ )12‬صا َم ا ْل ُم ْسلِمون َر َم َضان ْ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َيدْ عُو ا ْل ُم ْسل ُم ْو َن َ‬
‫الل َر َغ ًبا‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫‪102‬‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول َل ُه ‪َ and‬م ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق ‪Differentiating Between‬‬
‫َم ْصدَ ر ‪َ is a‬م ْف ُع ْول َل ُه ‪َ of the main verb, whilst the‬م ْصدَ ر ‪َ is the‬م ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق ‪The‬‬
‫‪of another verb.‬‬
‫‪َ  Emphasis‬مف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق ‪ of the main verb ‬‬
‫َم ْصدَ ر‬
‫‪ of another verb‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫َمف ُع ْول َل ُه‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪Reason‬‬
‫‪Look at the two examples below.‬‬
‫[مفعول مطلق]‬ ‫َص َب َر َي ْع ُق ْو ُب ڠ َص ْب ًرا‬ ‫[مفعول َل ُه]‬ ‫َص َب َر َي ْع ُق ْو ُب ڠ َر ْغ َب ًة‬
‫‪Yaqub was very patient.‬‬ ‫‪Yaqub was patient in hope.‬‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول ‪Translate the following. Ensure you differentiate between the‬‬
‫‪َ .‬م ْف ُع ْول َل ُه ‪ُ and‬م ْط َلق‬
‫الر ُس ْول إِ ْي َمانا‬ ‫اجرون َّ‬ ‫‪ )8‬ن ََص َر ا ْل ُم َه ِ‬ ‫الر ُج ُل ُب َكا ًء‬
‫‪َ )1‬ب َكی َّ‬
‫‪ )9‬ك ََّذ َب النَّاس ْاْلَ ْنبِ َیاء َت ْك ِذ ْيبا‬ ‫الر ُج ُل ُحزْ نًا‬‫َب َكی َّ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫ِ‬ ‫احتِ َسا ًبا‬
‫الر ُسل َح َسدا‬ ‫‪ )10‬ك ََّذ َب ال َكافرون ُّ‬ ‫ف ْ‬ ‫َص َب َر ُي ْو ُس ُ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫َت ْس َتغ ِْف ُر ا ْل ُمؤْ مِن ُ‬
‫الر ُس ْول َرغَبا‬ ‫‪ُ )11‬يط ْی ُع ا ْل ُم ْسلمون َّ‬ ‫الل َر َه ًبا‬ ‫َات َ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫الر ُس ْول إِ َطاعَة‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫الل ِع َبا َد ًة‬ ‫َت ْع ُبدُ ا ْل ُم ْسلِ َم ُ‬
‫‪ُ )12‬يط ْی ُع ا ْل ُم ْسلمون َّ‬ ‫ات َ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫‪َ )13‬لن َّي ُص ْو َم ا ْل ِع َباد َر َم َضان ِر َياء‬ ‫الل َطا َع ًة‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َي ْع ُبدُ ا ْل ُم ْسل ُم ْو َن َ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫‪َْ )14‬ل َي ْت ُلو ا ْل ُم ْخلِصون ا ْل ُق ْرآن ُس ْم َعة‬ ‫َات النَّبِ َّي ن َْص ًرا‬ ‫ت ا ْل ُمؤْ مِن ُ‬ ‫نَصر ِ‬
‫َ َ‬ ‫‪)7‬‬
‫‪Translate the following sentences into English.‬‬
‫‪ )6‬ن ََص َر ْاْلَ ْص ِد َقاء ْاْلَع َْمام َطاعَة‬ ‫َاب َأ ْح َمدُ ُأ ْس ُب ْوعًا‬
‫‪َ )1‬ما غ َ‬
‫‪ْ )7‬اْل َن َض َر َب ْاْلَخ ْاْلُ ْخت غ ََضبا‬ ‫‪َْ )2‬ل َي ْعت َِم ُر َخالِد ِرئَا ًء َأ َبدً ا‬
‫‪َْ )8‬ل َت ْحت َِر ُم ا ْلبِنْت ْاْلَ ْص ِد َقاء َح َسدا‬ ‫‪َ )3‬ت ْصدُ ُق َفاطِ َم ُة َدائِ ًما َر َغ ًبا‬
‫احتِ َراما‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )9‬دائما َي ْحت َِر ُم ْاْلَ ْو َْلد ْاْلُ َّم َهات ْ‬ ‫‪َ )4‬ل ْم َين ُْص ِر ْاْلَعْدَ ا ُء َق ُّط َح َسدً ا‬
‫احتِ َسابا‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )10‬أ ْط َع َم ْاْلَغْن َیاء ا ْل ُف َق َراء َط َعاما ْ‬ ‫س ا ْن َك َس َر ا ْل ُك ْر ِس ُّي انْكِ َس ًارا‬
‫‪َ )5‬أ ْم ِ‬
‫‪103‬‬
State
Some adverbs describe the condition of the subject or object at
the time of the verb.
The man came riding.
In this example, riding shows the state of the man when he came.
In Arabic, this is called ‫ َحال‬. The ‫ َحال‬is ‫ َمن ُْص ْوب‬and ‫نَكِ َرة‬.
The ‫ َحال‬is usually translated by adding -ing or -ly to the verb e.g.
crying, riding, quietly, patiently.
‫الر ُج ُل َراكِ ًبا‬
َّ ‫َجا َء‬
The man came riding.
ِ ‫ اسم ا ْل َف‬or ‫اسم ا ْلم ْفعو ِل‬.
The ‫ َحال‬comes in the pattern of ‫اع ِل‬ ُ ْ ُْ َ ُ ْ
‫َحال‬ ِ ‫َف‬
‫َراكِ ًبا‬ ‫الر ُج ُل‬

َّ ‫َجا َء‬
The ‫ َحال‬agrees with the noun it is describing in number and gender.
‫َج ْمع‬ ‫ُم َثنًّی‬ ‫ُم ْف َرد‬
‫الر َج ُال َراكِبِ ْی َن‬

ِّ ‫َجا َء‬ ‫الر ُج ََّل ِن َراكِ َب ْی ِن‬
َّ ‫َجا َء‬ ‫الر ُج ُل َراكِ ًبا‬
َّ ‫َجا َء‬ ‫ُم َذكَّر‬
‫ت الن َِّسا ُء َراكِ َبات‬

ِ ‫جاء‬
َ َ ‫ان َراكِ َب َت ْی ِن‬
ِ ‫ت ا ْلمر َأ َت‬
َْ
ِ ‫جاء‬
َ َ ‫ت ا ْل َم ْر َأ ُة َراكِ َب ًة‬
ِ ‫جاء‬
َ َ ‫ُمؤَ نَّث‬
Vocab
to give a lecture ‫ب ُخ ْط َب ًة‬
ُ ‫ب َي ْخ ُط‬
َ ‫ َخ َط‬to take, seize ‫َأ َخ َذ َي ْأ ُخ ُذ َأ ْخ ًذا‬
to hope ‫َر َجا َي ْر ُج ْو َر َجا ًء‬ to send ‫َأ ْر َس َل ُي ْر ِس ُل إِ ْر َس ًاْل‬

‫َب ُرك ُْو ًبا‬ ِ ‫اِزْ َدا َد َيزْ َدا ُد اِزْ ِد َيا ًدا‬
to ride ُ ‫ب َي ْرك‬ َ ‫َرك‬ to increase
to increase ‫زَ ا َد َي ِز ْيدُ ِز َيا َد ًة‬ to buy ‫اِ ْشت ََری َي ْشت َِري اِ ْشتِ َرا ًء‬
‫ك ِض ْح ًكا‬ ِ ‫َض‬
ُ ‫ح َك َي ْض َح‬ ‫اع َيبِ ْی ُع َب ْی ًعا‬
to laugh to sell َ ‫َب‬
to walk ‫َم َشی َي ْم ِش ْي َم ْش ًیا‬ to cry ‫َب َكی َي ْبكِ ْي ُب َكا ًء‬
to forget ‫ن َِس َي َين َْسی نِ ْس َیانًا‬ to leave ‫َت َر َك َيت ُْر ُك َت ْركًا‬
104
‫اج ْین‬‫‪َ )13‬ي ْع ُبدُ ا ْلمسلِمون الل ر ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫ُ ْ‬ ‫ت ْاْلُ ُّم ال ِّط ْف َل َة نَائِ َم ًة‬ ‫‪ )7‬ر َأ ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫َان َباكِ َی َت ْی ِن‬
‫ت ا ْلبِنْت ِ‬ ‫رئِی ِ‬
‫ُ َ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫ت ا ْل َم ْر َأتان َساكِتَتین‬ ‫‪ )14‬ج َلس ِ‬
‫َ َ‬ ‫َاس َیات‬ ‫َت النِّساء ن ِ‬
‫َ ُ‬
‫‪َ )8‬ترك ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫َّاس َسامِ ِع ْی َن‬ ‫َج َل َس الن ُ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫‪َ )15‬ر َأی ا ْل َو َلد ا ْل ُم ْس ِلمین َص ِائمین‬ ‫َّاس َجال ِ ِس ْی َن‬ ‫‪َْ )9‬ل َي ْع َم ُل الن ُ‬ ‫ت الن َِّسا ُء َراكِ َبات‬ ‫َذ َهب ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫اشعات‬ ‫‪َ )16‬ت ُقوم ا ْلمؤْ مِنات َخ ِ‬ ‫ت ْاْلُ ُّم ال ِّط ْف َل َباكِ ًیا‬ ‫‪ )10‬س ِمع ِ‬ ‫اش َی ْی ِن‬‫جاء الرج ََّل ِن م ِ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫ْ ُ ُ‬ ‫َ َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ َ َّ ُ‬
‫اإل َمام َجالِسا َق ّط‬
‫ب ِْ‬ ‫‪َ )17‬ما َخ َط َ‬ ‫اإل َما ُم َقائِ ًما َدائِ ًما‬ ‫ب ِْ‬ ‫‪َ )11‬ي ْخ ُط ُ‬ ‫ت ال ِّط ْف َل ُة َباكِ َی ًة‬ ‫د َخ َل ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫اشعین َد ِائما‬
‫‪ )18‬يص ِّلي ا ْلمس ِلمون َخ ِ‬
‫ُ ْ‬ ‫ُ َ‬ ‫‪َ )12‬صا َم ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن َصابِ ِر ْي َن‬ ‫ت ا ْلبِن ُْت َساكِ َت ًة‬ ‫ما ج َلس ِ‬
‫َ َ َ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫‪َ to the following sentences using the words in brackets.‬حال ‪Add a‬‬
‫‪َ )8‬ق َر َأ ا ْل ُم َع ِّلمان ‪َ ( .........‬م ْس ُر ْور)‬ ‫(شاكِر)‬
‫‪َ )1‬ت ْأك ُُل ال َّطال ِ َب ُة ‪َ .........‬‬
‫‪ُ )9‬ت َص ِّلي ا ْل َخا َلتان ‪َ ( .........‬قائِم)‬ ‫ارئُ ‪َ ( .........‬ح ِز ْين)‬ ‫َي ْت ُلو ا ْل َق ِ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫‪َ )10‬رأی ْاْلَب ا ْل َبنَات ‪( .........‬نَائِم)‬ ‫ان ‪ُ ( .........‬م ْس ِرع)‬‫سجدَ ا ْلو َلدَ ِ‬
‫َ َ َ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫(سالِم)‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )11‬ر َأت ا ْلبِنْت ا ْل َجدّ ‪َ .........‬‬ ‫ات ‪ُ ( .........‬م ْت َعب)‬ ‫ت ْاْلَ َخ َو ُ‬ ‫َأ َت ِ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫احك)‬ ‫(ض ِ‬ ‫‪َ )12‬ج َل َس ْاْلَعْدَ اء ‪َ .........‬‬ ‫ف ‪ُ ( .........‬م ْبت َِسم)‬ ‫َق َعدَ ُّ‬
‫الض ُی ْو ُ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫ت ا ْل َجدَّ ة ْاْلَخ ‪( .........‬غ َْض َب ُ‬
‫ان)‬ ‫‪َ )13‬ر َأ ْ‬ ‫(جائِع)‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َي ْس َت ْیق ُظ ُم َح َّمد ‪َ .........‬‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫‪َ )14‬ي ْعت َِم ُر ا ْل ُح َّجاج ‪ُ ( .........‬م ْح َت ِسب)‬ ‫َجا َء ْاْلَ ْص ِد َقا ُء ‪ُ ( .........‬م ْس ِرع)‬ ‫‪)7‬‬
‫َم ًعا‬
‫‪, it becomes the‬نَكِ َرة ‪َ on its own means with. When it is‬م َع ‪The word‬‬
‫‪َ and is translated as together, all together or at the same time.‬حال‬
‫وف َم ًعا‬
‫الض ُی ُ‬
‫َجا َء ُّ‬
‫‪The guests came together.‬‬
‫‪105‬‬
Clarification
Some adverbs clarify any ambiguity that may occur in a sentence.
Allah increased the Prophet in knowledge.
In this example, in knowledge is clarifying what was increased.
In Arabic, this is called ‫ َت ْمیِ ْیز‬. The ‫ َت ْمیِ ْیز‬is ‫ َمن ُْص ْوب‬and ‫نَكِ َرة‬.
The ‫ َت ْمیِ ْیز‬is translated as with, in, of, etc.
‫الل النَّبِ َّي ﷺ ِع ْل ًما‬
ُ ‫زَ ا َد‬
Allah increased the Prophet ‫ ﷺ‬in knowledge.
‫َت ْمیِ ْیز‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ ِ ‫َف‬
‫ِع ْل ًما‬ ‫النَّبِ َّي‬ ‫الل‬

Vocab
pound (weight) ‫ َر ْطل ج َأ ْر َطال‬reward, wage ‫َأ ْجر ج ُأ ُج ْور‬
evil deed ‫ َس ِّیئَة ج ات‬better ‫َأ ْح َس ُن‬
worse, worst, evil ‫ َشر ج ِش َرار‬reward, recompense ‫َث َواب‬
milk ‫َل َبن ج َأ ْل َبان‬ good deed ‫َح َسنَة ج ات‬
litre ‫لِتْر ج لِت َْرات‬ bag

ِ ِ
ُ ‫َحق ْی َبة ج َح َقائ‬
‫ب‬
scale ‫مِ ْیزَ ان ج َم َو ِاز ْي ُن‬ better, best, goodness ‫َخ ْیر ج ِخ َیار‬
Exercise 25
‫) َي ِز ْيدُ ا ْل ُق ْرآن ا ْل ُمؤْ مِنین َر ْغ َبة‬11 ‫ت ا ْل َخا َل ُة لِت ًْرا َما ًء‬ ِ ‫َش ِرب‬
َ )6 ‫الل النَّبِ َّي ِع ْل ًما‬
ُ ‫) زَ ا َد‬1
‫الض ُی ْوف َأ ْر َطاْل َل ْحما‬ ُّ ‫) َأك ََل‬12 ‫اِزْ َدا َد ا ْل ُمؤْ مِن ُْو َن إِ ْي َمانًا‬ )7 ‫) اِزْ َدا َد ا ْل َكافِ ُر ْو َن ُك ْف ًرا‬2
‫اج َر ْط َلین َت ْم َرة‬ ِ ‫الر ُس ْو ُل الدُّ ْن َیا ِع ْل ًما‬ َ َ ‫َم‬ ِ ْ ‫الر ُج ُل‬ َ َ ‫) َم‬3
ّ ‫) ا ْشت ََری ا ْل َح‬13 َّ ‫ل‬ )8 ‫اإلنَا َء َما ًء‬ َّ ‫ل‬
‫ل ا ْل ُمؤْ ِمن ا ْل ِم ْیزَ ان َحسنات‬ُ َ ‫) َي ْم‬14 ‫الل ا ْل ُمؤْ مِن ِ ْی َن إِ ْي َمانًا‬
ُ ُ‫َي ِزيد‬ )9 ‫ت ا ْل َم ْر َأ ُة ُحزْ نًا‬ ِ ‫) اِزْ داد‬4
َ َ
‫ل ال َّظالِم ا ْل ِم ْیزان َس ِّیئات‬ُ َ ‫) َي ْم‬15 ِ ‫اع الت‬
‫َّاج ُر َر ْط ًَّل ع ََس ًَّل‬ َ ‫) َب‬10 ‫) اِ ْشت ََری ا ْل َو َلدُ لِت َْر ْي ِن َل َبنًا‬5
106
‫اس ِم َّیة ‪َ in a‬ت ْمیِ ْیز‬
‫‪َ .‬ت ْمیِ ْیز ‪ُ may also have a‬ج ْم َلة ْاس ِم َّیة ‪A‬‬
‫ِْ‬
‫اإلنَا ُء َم ْم ُل ْوء َما ًء‬
‫‪The container is filled with water.‬‬
‫َت ْمیِ ْیز‬ ‫َخبَر‬ ‫ُمبْتَدَ أ‬
‫َما ًء‬ ‫َم ْم ُل ْوء‬ ‫ِْ‬

‫اإلنَا ُء‬
‫‪َ .‬ت ْمیِ ْیز ‪ْ to have a‬اس ُم ال َّت ْف ِض ْی ِل ‪It is common for an‬‬
‫احتِ َرا ًما‬
‫ال ُّط ََّّل ُب َأ ْك َث ُر ْ‬
‫‪The students are most respectful.‬‬
‫‪The translation of these may have to be adjusted.‬‬
‫‪Vocab‬‬
‫‪severe, severest‬‬ ‫‪َ more, most‬أ َشدُّ‬ ‫َأ ْك َث ُر‬
‫‪better‬‬ ‫َأ ْح َس ُن‬ ‫‪less, least‬‬ ‫َأ َق ُّل‬
‫‪َ )9‬ا ْل ُمنَافِقون َأ َشدّ ع ََذابا‬ ‫‪َ )5‬ا ْل ُم َّت ُق ْو َن َخ ْیر َأ ْج ًرا‬ ‫الل َخ ْیر عَدْ ًْل‬
‫‪ُ )1‬‬
‫‪َ )10‬ا ْل ُمؤْ مِنون َأ ْح َسن ِع َبا َدة‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ا ْل َكافِ ُر ْو َن َشر َث َوا ًبا‬ ‫آن َأ َشدُّ ن ُْو ًرا‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ا ْل ُق ْر ُ‬
‫‪ )11‬كَان ِ‬
‫َت الدُّ نْیا َم ْم ُل ْو َءة ُظ ْلما‬ ‫‪َ )7‬ا ْل َح ِق ْی َب ُة َم ْم ُل ْو َءة كِتَا ًبا‬ ‫‪َ )3‬ا ْل ُع َل َما ُء َأ ْك َث ُر ِع ْل ًما‬
‫‪ )12‬كَان ِ‬
‫َت الدُّ نْیا َم ْم ُل ْو َءة َج ْهَّل‬ ‫‪َ )8‬ا ْْلَعْدَ ا ُء َأ ْك َث ُر َح َسدً ا‬ ‫إلنَا ُء َم ْم ُل ْوء َل َبنًا‬ ‫‪َ )4‬ا ْ ِ‬
‫‪107‬‬
Exclusion
An exclusion is to remove someone or something from a
judgement.
The students came except Zaid.
In this example, Zaid is excluded from the previous judgement.
In Arabic, exclusion is called ‫اِ ْستِ ْثنَاء‬.
The word ‫إِ َّْل‬, except, is used for exclusion. This is called ‫اْل ْستِ ْثن َِاء‬ ِْ ‫ف‬ ُ ‫ َح ْر‬,
the particle of exclusion.
The word after ‫ إِ َّْل‬is called ‫ ُم ْس َت ْثنًی‬, the excluded. The ‫ ُم ْس َت ْثنًی‬is ‫ َمن ُْص ْوب‬.
‫َجا َء ال ُّط ََّّل ُب إِ َّْل زَ ْيدً ا‬
In tarkib, the element from which the exclusion is taking place,
‫ ُم ْس َت ْثنًی مِنْ ُه‬, must be mentioned.
ِ ‫مستَثْنًی مِن ا ْل َف‬
‫اع ِل‬ ِ ‫ف اْلستِثْن‬
‫َاء‬ ِ ‫َف‬ ‫فِ ْعل‬
َ ْ ُ ْ ُ ‫َح ْر‬ ‫اعل‬
‫زَ ْيدً ا‬ ‫َّإْل‬ ‫ال ُّط ََّّل ُب‬ ‫َجا َء‬
‫ ُم ْس َت ْثنًی‬in a ‫اس ِم َّیة‬

ِ
A ‫ ُج ْم َلة ْاسم َّیة‬may also have a ‫ ُم ْس َت ْثنًی‬.
‫ال ُّط ََّّل ُب ُم ْجت َِهدُ ْو َن إِ َّْل زَ ْيدً ا‬
The students are hardworking except Zaid.
ِ‫ُم ْستَثْنًی مِ َن ا ْل ُم ْبتَدَ إ‬ ِ ‫ف اْلستِثْن‬
‫َاء‬ ‫َخ َبر‬
ْ ُ ‫َح ْر‬ ‫ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬
‫زَ ْيدً ا‬ ‫َّإْل‬ ‫ُم ْجت َِهدُ ْو َن‬ ‫ال ُّط ََّّل ُب‬
Vocab
to open ‫ َفت ََح َي ْفت َُح َفت ًْحا‬to favour ‫َأ ْن َع َم ُين ِْع ُم إِ ْن َعا ًما‬
to understand ‫َف ِه َم َي ْف َه ُم َف ْه ًما‬ to memorise, protect ‫َح ِف َظ َي ْح َف ُظ ِح ْف ًظا‬
to say ‫َق َال َي ُق ْو ُل َق ْو ًْل‬ to return ‫َر َج َع َي ْر ِج ُع ُر ُج ْوعًا‬
to write, prescribe ‫ُب كِتَا َب ًة‬

ُ ‫َب َي ْكت‬
َ ‫َكت‬ to make, manufacture, ‫َصن ََع َي ْصن َُع َصنْ ًعا‬
do
to put ‫ َو َض َع َي َض ُع َو ْض ًعا‬to know ‫عَلِ َم َي ْع َل ُم ِع ْل ًما‬
108
‫‪َ )9‬ت ْصدُ ُق ا ْل َبنَات َدائِما إِ َّْل بِنْتین‬ ‫َّاس إِ َّْل ا ْل َملِ َك‬
‫‪ )1‬عَدَ َل الن ُ‬
‫َو َض َع ال ُّط ََّّلب ا ْل ُكتُب إِ َّْل ع َُمر‬ ‫‪)10‬‬ ‫اإل َما َم‬‫َّاس إِ َّْل ْ ِ‬
‫س الن ُ‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ل ْم َي ْجلِ ِ‬
‫﴿س َجدَ ا ْل َم ََّلئِ َك ُة ‪ ...‬إِ َّْل إِ ْبلِ ْی َس﴾‬‫َ‬ ‫‪)11‬‬ ‫‪ )3‬الرج ُال ك ِ‬
‫َاذ ُب ْو َن إِ َّْل َر ُج َل ْی ِن‬ ‫ِّ َ‬
‫ت ال َّطالِبات الدَّ ْرس إِ َّْل بِنْتا‬ ‫َف ِهم ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫‪)12‬‬ ‫‪ )4‬ال ُّط ََّّل ُب ُم ْجت َِهدُ ْو َن إِ َّْل زَ ْيدً ا‬
‫َصا َم ْاْلَ ْو َْلد َصابِرين إِ َّْل زَ ْينَب‬ ‫‪)13‬‬ ‫َّاس ا ْل َی ْو َم إِ َّْل َر ُج َل ْی ِن‬
‫‪َ )5‬جا َء الن ُ‬
‫‪َ )14‬ح ِف َظ ْت َفاطِ َمة ا ْل ُق ْرآن إِ َّْل ُجزْ َءين‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ما غَا َب ْت َفاطِ َم ُة َق ُّط إِ َّْل َي ْو ًما‬
‫َب ْاْلَ ْو َْلد الدُّ ُروس َص َباحا إِ َّْل َط ْل َحة‬ ‫الش ْر َك‬ ‫الذن ُْو َب إِ َّْل ِّ‬ ‫الل ُّ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )15‬كت َ‬ ‫‪َ )7‬يغْف ُر ُ‬
‫اعدين إِ َّْل ا ْل َم ْرضی‬ ‫‪ )16‬ما ص َّلی ا ْلمسلِمون َق ِ‬ ‫‪َ )8‬صا َم ْاْلَ ْو َْل ُد َش ْه ًرا إِ َّْل َي ْو َم ْی ِن‬
‫ُ ْ‬ ‫َ َ‬
‫‪appropriate word. Use a different word in each sentence.‬‬
‫َات ْاْلنِ َی َة إِ َّْل ‪.......‬‬ ‫َْل َت َض ُع ا ْل َبن ُ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬ ‫الل إِ َّْل ‪.......‬‬ ‫‪َ )1‬ي ْش ُك ُر الن ُ‬
‫َّاس َ‬
‫َْل َتبِیع ا ْلمر َأ ُة ال َّتمر ِ‬ ‫َّاس ‪.......‬إِ َّْل ْ ِ‬
‫ات َّإْل ‪.......‬‬ ‫ََ‬ ‫ُْ َْ‬ ‫‪)7‬‬ ‫اإل َما َم‬ ‫‪َ )2‬د َخ َل الن ُ‬
‫َي ْحت َِر ُم ‪.......‬ا ْل ُم َع ِّل ِم ْی َن َّإْل ‪.......‬‬ ‫‪)8‬‬ ‫‪َ )3‬غدً ا َي ْر ِج ُع ‪ .......‬إِ َّْل َأ ْح َمدَ‬
‫اب إِ َّْل ‪.......‬‬ ‫ف َّ‬
‫الش َر َ‬ ‫َما َش ِر َب ُّ‬
‫الض ُی ْو ُ‬ ‫‪)9‬‬ ‫َّاج ُر ‪ .......‬إِ َّْل لِت ًْرا‬‫‪ )4‬اِ ْشت ََری الت ِ‬
‫‪َ )10‬ح َض َرت ‪ .......‬الدَّ ْر َس إِ َّْل َفاطِ َم َة‬ ‫‪َ )5‬ما َف ِه َم ‪ .......‬الدَّ ْر َس إِ َّْل زُ َب ْی ًرا‬
‫‪َ )4‬أ ْمس َصا َم َأ ْح َمد َصابِرا َطاعَة‬ ‫‪َ )1‬صا َم ا ْل َو َلدُ َص ْو ًما‬
‫ت ْاْلَ ْصنَام َج ْهَّل‬‫‪ُ )5‬عبِدَ ِ‬ ‫احتِ َسا ًبا‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )2‬صا َمت الن َِّسا ُء ْ‬
‫اهلین َّإْل ا ْل ُمؤْ مِنین‬ ‫‪َ )6‬عبدَ النَّاس ْاْلَصنَام ج ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫‪َ )3‬صا َم ْاْلَ ْو َْل ُد َي ْو َم ْی ِن إِ ََّّْٓل زَ ْيدً ا‬
‫‪109‬‬
Summary
‫ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة‬
Verb
agrees with the ‫اعل‬ ِ ‫ َف‬or
‫فِ ْعل‬ ‫َماض‬ ‫َم ْع ُل ْوم‬
Verb ِ ‫ُم َض‬ ِ ‫ نَائِب ا ْل َف‬in gender
‫اع ِل‬
‫ارع‬ ‫َم ْج ُه ْول‬ ُ
‫ َم ْر ُف ْوع‬Slots
ِ ‫َف‬
‫اعل‬ Subject
‫اع ِل‬ ُ Deputy Subject
‫ َمن ُْص ْوب‬Slots
‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ Object
‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه َثان‬Object
‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه‬ Adverb of Time/Place
‫ َم ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق‬Adverb of very, extremely, x times
Degree/Frequency ‫َم ْصدَ ر‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول َل ُه‬ Adverb of Reason because of, due to ‫نَكِ َرة‬
‫َحال‬ State -ing, -ly
‫َت ْمیِ ْیز‬ Clarification with, in, etc.
‫ُم ْس َت ْثنًی‬ Exclusion except After ‫َّإْل‬
110
Part 2: Additional Rules of ‫ا ْل ُج ْم َل ُة ا ْل ِف ْعلِ َّی ُة‬
Tense
As mentioned before, ‫ فِ ْعل ُم َض ِارع‬can have three tenses:
1. Present Habitual
2. Present Continuous
3. Future
However, there are two particles which can be prefixed to a ‫فِ ْعل‬
ِ ‫ ُم َض‬to specify its meaning to the future.
‫ارع‬
These are:
1. ‫ َس‬: This specifies the ‫ ُم َض ِارع‬to the near future.
This is translated as soon.
‫َس َی ْذ َه ُب َز ْيد‬
Zaid will soon go.
2. ‫ َس ْو َف‬: This specifies the ‫ ُم َض ِارع‬to the distant future.
This is best left untranslated.
ُ ‫ف َي ْذ َه‬
‫ب َز ْيد‬ َ ‫َس ْو‬
Zaid will go.
Exercise 1
Translate the following. Ensure you translate the tenses correctly.
‫ف َي ْح َف ُظ َأ ْح َمد ُجزْ ء‬ َ ‫) َس ْو‬9 ِْ ‫ب‬
‫اإل َما ُم‬ ُ ‫ف َي ْخ ُط‬
َ ‫) َس ْو‬5 ُ ‫) َس َی ْر ِج ُع ا ْل ُّح َّج‬1
‫اج‬
‫) َست َْشت َِري ْاْلُ ّم لِت َْرين َل َبنا‬10 ‫ُب ا ْل َو َلدُ الدَّ ْر َس‬
ُ ‫) َس َی ْكت‬6 ‫) َس َی ْح ُسدُ ْاْلَعْدَ ا ُء‬2
‫ف َت َض ُع ال َّطال ِ َبة ا ْلكِتَاب‬ َ ‫) َس ْو‬11 ‫) َس َی ْف َه ُم ال ُّط ََّّل ُب الدَّ ْر َس‬7 ‫ف َي ْع ِد ُل ا ْل َملِ ُك‬ َ ‫) َس ْو‬3
‫) َس َی ُك ْو ُن ا ْل ِم ْیزان َم ْم ُل ْوء َح َسنات‬12 َ ‫ف ُي َر ِّت ُل ا ْل ُق َّرا ُء ا ْل ُق‬
‫رآن‬ َ ‫) َس ْو‬8 ‫ف َت ْعت َِم ُر ا ْل َخا َل ُة‬َ ‫) َس ْو‬4
111
Emphasising the Verb
Certain particles can be added to sentences to create emphasis.
ْ‫َقد‬
The particle ْ‫ َقد‬can be added before a verb to emphasise it.
ْ‫ َقد‬is called ‫ف َت ْح ِق ْیق‬
ُ ‫ َح ْر‬and is ‫ َغ ْی ُر عَامِل‬.
ِ ‫َف‬
‫اعل‬ ‫فِ ْعل‬ ‫ف َت ْح ِقیْق‬
ُ ‫َح ْر‬
‫زَ ْيد‬ َ ‫َذ َه‬

‫ب‬ ْ‫َقد‬
Translation of ْ‫َقد‬
The particle ْ‫ َقد‬can be translated in different ways.
1. If ْ‫ َقد‬comes before ‫اض ْي‬ ِ ‫ ا ْلم‬it can be translated:
َ
a. By adding indeed or certainly at the beginning of the
sentence, followed by a comma.
Indeed, Zaid went.
b. By adding the emphatic do before the verb.
Zaid did go.
c. By adding has/have followed by the past participle of the
verb.
Indeed, Zaid has gone.
2. If ْ‫ َقد‬comes before ‫ ا ْل ُم َض ِار ُع‬it can be translated:
a. By adding indeed or certainly.
ُ ‫َقدْ َي ْع َل ُم‬
‫الل‬
Indeed, Allah knows.
b. As sometimes or maybe. This ْ‫ َقد‬is known as ‫ َح ْر ُف َت ْقلِ ْیل‬.
‫َقدْ َي ْصدُ ُق ا ْل َك ُذ ْو ُب‬
Sometimes, a liar speaks the truth.
The context will help determine the meaning.
112
Note
َ ‫ ك‬is also a verb, ‫فِ ْعل نَاقِص‬, so it can also have the particle ْ‫ َقد‬or ْ‫َل َقد‬
‫َان‬
before it.
ِ ‫َان محمد ص‬
‫اد ًقا‬ َ َّ َ ُ َ ‫َقدْ ك‬
Indeed, Muhammad was honest.
Vocab
clear, clear proof ‫ َب ِّینَة ج َب ِّینَات‬wisdom ‫ِح ْك َمة ج ِح َكم‬
truth ‫َحق‬ bearer of glad tidings ‫َب ِش ْیر‬

ِ ‫مو ِع َظة ج مو‬
‫اع ُظ‬ ‫َب ِص ْی َرة ج َب َصائِ ُر‬
admonition ََ َْ enlightenment, insight
Exercise 2
﴾‫ ُب ْر َهان‬... ‫) ﴿ َقدْ َجا َء‬9 ﴾‫ ُر ُسل‬...‫) ﴿ َقدْ َجا َء‬5 ُ ‫) ﴿ َقدْ َأ ْن َع َم‬1
﴾‫الل‬
﴾‫ُون‬َ ‫) ﴿ َقدْ َأ ْف َل َح ا ْل ُمؤْ مِن‬10 ﴾‫ َب َصائِ ُر‬... ‫) ﴿ َقدْ َجا َء‬6 ُ ‫) ﴿ َقدْ َي ْع َل ُم‬2
﴾‫الل‬
َ ‫) َقدْ َح ِف َظ ا ْل َو َلدُ ا ْل ُق‬11
‫رآن‬ ْ ‫) ﴿ َقدْ َجا َء‬7
﴾‫ َب ِّینَة‬...‫ت‬ ﴾‫ نُور‬... ‫) ﴿ َقدْ َجا َء‬3
﴾‫ َم ْو ِع َظة‬...‫ت‬ ْ ‫) ﴿ َقدْ َجا َء‬12 ﴾‫ ا ْل َح ُّق‬... ‫) ﴿ َقدْ َجا َء‬8 ﴾‫ َب ِشیر‬... ‫) ﴿ َقدْ َجا َء‬4
113
Adding ‫ َْل ُم اْل ْبتِدَ ِاء‬Before ْ‫َقد‬
A ‫ َْل ُم اْل ْبتِدَ ِاء‬can also come before ْ‫ َقد‬to create extra emphasis. This
will not be reflected in the translation.
ِ
ُ ‫﴿ َل َقدْ َسم َع‬
﴾‫الل‬
Indeed, Allah has heard.
ِ ‫َف‬
‫اعل‬ ‫فِ ْعل‬ ‫ف َت ْح ِقیْق‬
ُ ‫َح ْر‬ ‫َْل ُم اْلبْتِدَ ِاء‬
‫الل‬
ُ ‫َس ِم َع‬ ْ‫َقد‬ ‫َل‬
Adding ‫ َْل ُم ِاْل ْبتِدَ ِاء‬to a ‫فِ ْعل ُم َض ِارع‬

A ‫ َْل ُم ِاْل ْبتِدَ ِاء‬can be added to a ‫فِ ْعل ُم َض ِارع‬. This creates emphasis and
specifies the ‫ ُم َض ِارع‬to the present tense, unless there is context
denoting otherwise.
َ ‫الر ُج ُل ا ْل َب‬
‫اب‬ َّ ‫َل َی ْفت َُح‬
Indeed, the man is opening the door.
114
‫ن ُْو ُن الت َّْأكِ ْی ِد‬
‫‪ to create emphasis. This is‬فِ ْعل ُم َض ِارع ‪َّ can be added to a‬ن ‪The particle‬‬
‫‪ of emphasis.‬ن ‪, the‬ن ُْو ُن ال َّت ْأكِ ْی ِد ‪called‬‬
‫فِ ْعل ُم َض ِارع ‪ to a‬ن ُْو ُن الت َّْأكِ ْی ِد ‪Adding‬‬
‫‪ by:‬فِ ْعل ُم َض ِارع ‪ is added to a‬ن ُْو ُن ال َّت ْأكِ ْی ِد ‪A‬‬
‫اْل ْبتِدَ ِاء ‪1. Placing a‬‬ ‫ارع ‪َْ before the‬لم ْ ِ‬ ‫;فِ ْعل ُم َض ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫; َفت َْحة ‪َ with a‬م ْبنِي ‪ُ to‬م َض ِارع ‪2. Changing the‬‬
‫‪.‬فِ ْعل ُم َض ِارع ‪َّ to the end of the‬ن ‪3. Adding the particle‬‬
‫َل ‪َ +‬ين ُْص َر ‪َّ +‬ن‬
‫الل ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ِم ْی َن‬
‫َل َین ُْص َر َّن ُ‬
‫ن ُْو ُن الت َّْأكِ ْی ِد ‪Translation of‬‬

‫‪ is translated as most certainly or most definitely.‬ن ُْو ُن ال َّت ْأكِ ْی ِد ‪The‬‬
‫‪ will be translated‬فِ ْعل ُم َض ِارع ‪, the‬فِ ْعل ُم َض ِارع ‪ comes on a‬ن َْو ُن ال َّت ْأكِ ْی ِد ‪When a‬‬
‫‪in the future tense.‬‬
‫‪Allah will most definitely help the Muslims.‬‬
‫‪The tarkib is written as follows:‬‬
‫اعل‬ ‫ن ُْو ُن التَّ ْأ ِك ْی ِد‬ ‫فِ ْعل‬ ‫َْل ُم اْل ْبتِدَ ِاء‬
‫ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ِم ْی َن‬ ‫الل‬

‫ُ‬ ‫َّن‬ ‫َين ُْص َر‬ ‫َل‬
‫‪َ )11‬ل َی ِز ْيدَ َّن الل ا ْل ُمؤْ مِنین إِ ْي َمانا‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ل َی ْع ِد َل َّن ا ْل َملِ ُك عَدْ ًْل‬ ‫‪َ )1‬ل َی ُم ْو َت َّن الن ُ‬
‫َّاس‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫الر ُس ْول‬ ‫‪َ )12‬ل ُیط ْی َع َّن ا ْل ُم ْسلمون َّ‬ ‫الر ُج ُل َغدً ا‬ ‫‪َ )7‬ل ُی َساف َر َّن َّ‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ل ُی ْح َف َظ َّن ا ْل ُق ُ‬
‫رآن‬
‫الذن ُْوب إِ َّْل ِّ‬
‫الش ْرك‬ ‫‪َ )13‬ل َیغ ِْف َر َّن الل ُ‬ ‫الل ا ْل ُمؤْ مِن ِ ْی َن‬
‫‪َ )8‬ل َین ُْص َر َّن ُ‬ ‫‪َ )3‬ل ُی ْفلِ َح َّن ا ْل ُم َّت ُق ْو َن‬
‫‪َ )14‬ل َی ْح َف َظ َّن ْاْلَ ْو َْلد ا ْل ُق ْرآن إِ َّْل َو َلدَ ين‬ ‫الل ا ْل ِع َبا َد َج ْم ًعا‬ ‫‪َ )9‬ل َی ْج َم َع َّن ُ‬ ‫الل ا ْل ِع َبا َد‬
‫‪َ )4‬ل َی ْب َع َث َّن ُ‬
‫اح ِت َسابا‬
‫‪َ )15‬ل َی ُص ْو َم َّن ا ْل ُم ْس ِلمون َر َم َضان ْ‬ ‫الل ا ْل ُمؤْ مِن ِ ْی َن ا ْل َجنَّ َة‬
‫‪َ )10‬ل َی ْرزُ َق َّن ُ‬ ‫الل ا ْل ِع َبا َد‬‫‪َ )5‬ل َی ْس َأ َل َّن ُ‬
‫‪115‬‬
‫ا ْل ِف ْع ُل ا ْل ُم َض ِار ُع ‪َ to‬ل ْن ‪Adding‬‬
‫‪ to give an‬فِ ْعل ُم َض ِارع ‪َ can be brought before a‬ل ْن ‪The negative particle‬‬
‫‪emphatic negative meaning in the future tense and rendering it‬‬
‫‪َ .‬من ُْص ْوب‬
‫َل ْن َي ْذ َه َ‬
‫‪Zaid will not go.‬‬
‫‪َ )11‬ل ْن َت ْض ِر َب ْاْلُ ّم َأ َحدا ُظ ْلما‬ ‫الر َج ُال َغدً ا‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪َ )1‬لن ُّي ْفلِ َح َظالِم‬
‫‪َ )6‬لن ُّي َساف َر ِّ‬
‫‪َ )12‬ل ْن َت ْفت ََح ا ْل ُم َع ِّل َمة ْاْلَ ْب َواب‬ ‫الش ْی َط َ‬
‫ان‬ ‫‪َ )7‬لن ُتطِیِ َع َفاطِ َم ُة َّ‬ ‫‪َ )2‬لن َّي ْك ِذ َب ُمؤْ مِن‬
‫‪َ )13‬لن َّي ْل َقی ُم َح َّمد َخالِدا غَدا‬ ‫اإل َما ُم َجال ِ ًسا‬
‫ب ِْ‬ ‫‪َ )8‬لن َّي ْخ ُط َ‬ ‫‪َ )3‬لن َّي ْخ َس َر ا ْل ُم َّت ُق ْو َن‬
‫‪َ )14‬لن يت ِ‬
‫َّخ َذ ا ْل ُم ْسلِمون َنبِ ّیا إِ ٰله‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫الش ْر َك‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫‪َ )9‬لن َّي ْعص َي ا ْل َم ََّلئ َك ُة َ‬
‫الل‬ ‫الل ِّ‬ ‫‪َ )4‬لن َّيغْف َر ُ‬
‫ل ال َّظالِم ا ْل ِم ْیزان َحسنات‬ ‫‪َ )15‬لن َي ْم َ َ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )10‬لن َّي ْس َتغْف َر ا ْل َكاف ُر ْو َن َ‬
‫الل‬ ‫‪َ )5‬لن َّي ْع ُبدَ ا ْل ُم َّت ُق ْو َن ِر َيا ًء‬
‫‪Summary of Verb Emphasis‬‬

‫‪Affirmative‬‬ ‫‪Negative‬‬
‫َقدْ‬ ‫َق ُّط‬
‫‪Past‬‬
‫َقدْ َصدَ َق ا ْل َو َلدُ‬ ‫َما ك ََذ َب ا ْل َو َلدُ َق ُّط‬
‫َْل ُم ِاْل ْبتِدَ ِاء‬
‫‪Present‬‬
‫َل َی ْصدُ ُق ا ْل َو َلدُ‬
‫َْل ُم ِاْل ْبتِدَ ِاء ‪ +‬ن ُْو ُن ال َّت ْأكِ ْی ِد‬ ‫َل ْن‬
‫َلن َّي ْك ِذ َب ا ْل َو َلدُ‬
‫‪Future‬‬
‫َل َی ْصدُ َق َّن ا ْل َو َلدُ‬
‫‪116‬‬
Emphasising Parts of a Sentence
Order of a Sentence
In Arabic, sentence structure is very flexible; the words in a
sentence can be changed around for various reasons.
Bringing any part of a sentence before its usual place creates
emphasis. For example, the ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬can be brought before the ‫اعل‬
ِ ‫ َف‬or
even the ‫ فِ ْعل‬to create emphasis.
‫الل َي ْع ُبدُ ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن‬
َ  ‫الل ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن‬
َ ُ‫َي ْع ُبد‬  ‫الل‬ ِ
َ ‫َي ْع ُبدُ ا ْل ُم ْسل ُم ْو َن‬
In this case, the fronted element is labelled as ‫ ُم َقدَّ م‬.
In tarkib, the emphasised part can be underlined in red.
ِ ‫َف‬
‫اعل‬ ‫فِ ْعل‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه ُم َقدَّ م‬
‫ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن‬ ُ‫َي ْع ُبد‬ ‫الل‬

َ
Creating Emphasis in Translation

This emphasis can be translated in three ways:
1. Underlining or using italics.
Muslims worship Allah.
2. Using the word only before the emphasised element.
The Muslims worship only Allah.
3. Changing the sentence structure.
It is Allah who the Muslims worship.
Vocab
to cure ‫ َش َفی َي ْش ِف ْي ِش َفا ًء‬hereafter ِ
‫آخ َرة‬
thing ‫ َش ْيء ج َأ ْش َیا ُء‬door ‫َباب ج َأ ْب َواب‬
world ‫ عَا َلم ج ْو َن‬human being ‫َب َشر‬
room ‫ ات‬،‫ غ ُْر َفة ج غ َُرف‬apple َ ‫احة ج ُت َّف‬

‫احات‬ َ ‫ُت َّف‬
window ‫ نَافِ َذة ج ن ََوافِ ُذ‬stone ‫ ِح َج َارة‬،‫جر ج َأ ْح َجار‬

َ ‫َح‬
‫احد‬ ِ ‫و‬ ‫ُح ْج َرة ج ات‬
one َ room
117
‫‪ْ )9‬اْل ِخ َر َة َي ْر ُجو ا ْل ُم َّت ُق ْو َن‬ ‫س ْاْلُ ُّم‬
‫‪َ )5‬صا َم ْت َأ ْم ِ‬ ‫الل ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن‬
‫‪َ )1‬يدْ عُو َ‬
‫َات‬‫اب َت ْر ُجو ا ْل ُمؤْ مِن ُ‬ ‫‪ )10‬ال َّث َو َ‬ ‫‪ْ )6‬اْلَ ْج َر َت ْر ُجو ا ْل َم ْر َأ ُة‬ ‫الل ا ْل ُم َّت ُق ْو َن‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ي َخ ُ‬
‫اف َ‬
‫الر ُس ْو َل ُيطِ ْی ُع ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن‬ ‫‪َّ )11‬‬ ‫الر ُس ْو َل ك ََّذ َب ا ْل َق ْو ُم‬
‫‪َّ )7‬‬ ‫ت ْاْلُ ُّم‬ ‫‪ )3‬ا ْلباب َفتَح ِ‬
‫َ َ َ‬
‫الل ا ْل َجنَّ َة‬ ‫ِِ‬ ‫ت ال َّطال ِ َب ُة‬ ‫‪ )8‬الدَّ رس َك َتب ِ‬ ‫‪ )4‬ا ْل َح ِق ْی َب َة َصن ََع الت ِ‬
‫‪ )12‬ا ْل ُمؤْ من ْی َن َوعَدَ ُ‬ ‫ْ َ َ‬ ‫َّاج ُر‬
‫‪Note‬‬
‫‪َ and not‬م ْف ُع ْول ُم َقدَّ م ‪َ word, it will be a‬من ُْص ْوب ‪If a sentence starts with a‬‬
‫‪ُ .‬م ْبتَدَ أ ‪the‬‬
‫ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة‬ ‫اس ِم َّیة‬
‫الل َي ْع ُبدُ ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن‬
‫َ‬ ‫الل َرب‬
‫ُ‬
‫‪Rewrite the following sentences by fronting the underlined words.‬‬
‫الل ْاْلَ ْنبِ َیا َء‬
‫‪َ )9‬أ ْر َس َل ُ‬ ‫‪َ )5‬صا َم ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن َر َم َض َ‬
‫ان‬ ‫اإل َما ُم َقائِ ًما‬
‫ب ِْ‬ ‫َخ َط َ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫‪َ )10‬ح ِف َظ َط ْل َح ُة ُجزْ َئ ْی ِن‬ ‫‪َ )6‬صا َم ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن َر َم َض َ‬
‫ان‬ ‫اإل َما ُم َقائِ ًما‬
‫ب ِْ‬ ‫َخ َط َ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫الش ْر َك‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪َ )7‬ي ْر َح ُم ْاْلَغْن ِ َیا ُء ُّ‬
‫الض َع َفا َء‬ ‫ب ا ْل َی ْو َم‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫الل ِّ‬ ‫‪ْ )11‬ل َيغْف ُر ُ‬ ‫ب ال َّطال ُ‬ ‫َيغ ْی ُ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫َب ا ْل َح ِق ْی َب َة‬
‫‪َ )12‬ل ْم َت َض ْع زَ ْين ُ‬ ‫الص ََّل َة‬ ‫‪َْ )8‬ل َتت ُْر ُك زَ ْين ُ‬
‫َب َّ‬ ‫ب ا ْل َی ْو َم‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ب ال َّطال ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َيغ ْی ُ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫‪118‬‬
‫ إِ َّْل‬for Emphasis
If ‫ َّإْل‬occurs in a negative sentence and the ‫ ُم ْس َت ْثنًی مِنْ ُه‬is omitted, it will
not be for exclusion. Instead, it will be for emphasis.
If ‫ إِ َّْل‬is for emphasis, the negative particle and ‫ إِ َّْل‬can be translated
as only. This will be placed before the point of emphasis.
Muslims do not worship except Allah.
Muslims worship only Allah.
In the tarkib, ‫ َّإْل‬is labelled as ‫ ; َح ْر ُف َح ْصر‬a particle of emphasis.
Likewise, the word after it will not be the ‫ ُم ْس َت ْثنًی‬. Instead, it will be
the ‫اعل‬ ِ ‫ َف‬, ‫ م ْفعول بِ ِه‬etc., depending on its role in the sentence.
ُْ َ
‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ ‫ف َح ْصر‬
ُ ‫َح ْر‬ ِ ‫َف‬
ُ ‫َح ْر‬
‫الل‬
َ ‫َّإْل‬ ‫ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن‬ ُ‫َي ْع ُبد‬ ‫َْل‬
The table below summarises the uses of ‫ إِ َّْل‬in a negative sentence.
Negative Sentence
‫ ُم ْستَثْنًی مِنْ ُه‬Mentioned ‫ ُم ْستَثْنًی مِنْ ُه‬not Mentioned
Exclusion Emphasis
ِ ِ
َ ‫َْل َي ْع ُبدُ ا ْل ُم ْسل ُم ْو َن َأ َحدً ا إِ َّْل‬
‫الل‬ َ ‫َْل َي ْع ُبدُ ا ْل ُم ْسل ُم ْو َن إِ َّْل‬
‫الل‬
The Muslims do not worship anyone The Muslims do not worship … except
except Allah. Allah.
Note
The ‫ َخ َبر‬of ‫ َما ا ْل ُم َش َّب َه ُة بِ َل ْی َس‬will be ‫ َم ْر ُف ْوع‬if it is preceded by ‫إِ َّْل‬.
‫َما ُم َح َّمد ﷺ إِ َّْل َر ُس ْول‬
Muhammad ‫ ﷺ‬is only a Messenger.
Exercise 7
‫) َما ازْ َدا َد ا ْل َكافِ ُر ْو َن إِ َّْل ُك ْف ًرا‬9 ‫َب إِ َّْل َي ْو َم ْی ِن‬ ُ ‫) َما غَا َب ْت زَ ْين‬5 ‫) َما ُم َح َّمد إِ َّْل َع ْبد‬1
‫ت ا ْلبِن ُْت إِ َّْل النَّافِ َذ َة‬ ِ ‫) ما َفتَح‬10
َ َ ‫ت ال ِّط ْف َل ُة إِ َّْل َي ْو ًما‬ ِ ‫) ما صام‬6
َ َ َ ُ‫اس َت ْی َق َظ إِ َّْل ا ْل َو َلد‬
ْ ‫) َما‬2
‫احتِ َسا ًبا‬ ْ ‫َات إِ َّْل‬ ُ ‫) َْل ُت َص ِّلي ا ْل َبن‬11 ‫اإل َما ُم إِ َّْل َقائِ ًما‬ ِْ ‫ب‬ ُ ‫) َْل َي ْخ ُط‬7 َ ‫َّاس إِ َّْل‬
‫الل‬ ُ ‫) َْل َي ْس َأ ُل الن‬3
‫الل ُم َح َّمدً ا إِ َّْل َر ُس ْو ًْل‬ ِ ‫) ما ص َّلی الرسو ُل إِ َّْل َخ‬8 ‫الر ُج ُل إِ َّْل َل ْی ًَّل‬
ُ ‫) َما َج َع َل‬12 ‫اش ًعا‬ ْ ُ َّ َ َ َّ ‫) َما نَام‬4
119
‫اعل ‪Emphasising the‬‬ ‫إِ َّْل ‪َ with‬ف ِ‬
‫اعل ‪When the point of emphasis is the‬‬ ‫‪َّ and is‬إْل ‪َ , it occurs after‬ف ِ‬
‫اعل ‪َ , the delayed‬ف ِ‬
‫اعل ُمؤَ َّخر ‪labelled as‬‬ ‫‪َ .‬ف ِ‬
‫الل إِ َّْل ُمؤْ مِن‬
‫َْل َي ْع ُبدُ َ‬
‫‪Only a believer worships Allah.‬‬
‫َف ِ‬
‫اعل ُمؤَ َّخر‬ ‫ف َح ْصر‬
‫َح ْر ُ‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ ‫فِ ْعل‬ ‫ف نَ ْفي‬
‫َح ْر ُ‬
‫ُمؤْ مِن‬ ‫َّإْل‬ ‫الل‬

‫َ‬ ‫َي ْع ُبدُ‬ ‫َْل‬
‫الر ُج ََّل ِن‬
‫س إِ َّْل َّ‬
‫‪َ )8‬ما َسا َف َر َأ ْم ِ‬ ‫الذن ُْو َب إِ َّْل ُ‬
‫الل‬ ‫‪َْ )1‬ل َيغ ِْف ُر ُّ‬
‫‪َْ )9‬ل َي ْظلِ ُم الن َ‬

‫َّاس إِ َّْل ا ْل ُم ُل ْو ُك‬ ‫السا َع َة إِ َّْل ُ‬
‫الل‬ ‫‪َْ )2‬ل َي ْع َل ُم َّ‬
‫‪َ )10‬ما َص َّلی َجال ِ ًسا إِ َّْل ا ْل َم ِر ْي ُض‬ ‫‪َ )3‬ما َح ِف َظ ا ْل َو َلدُ إِ َّْل ُجزْ ًءا‬
‫ان ِإ َّْل ا ْل ُم ْس ِل ُم ْو َن‬
‫‪َْ )11‬ل َي ُص ْو ُم َر َم َض َ‬ ‫ب إِ َّْل ُ‬
‫الل‬ ‫‪َْ )4‬ل َي ْع َل ُم ا ْل َغ ْی َ‬
‫رآن َت ْرتِ ْی ًَّل إِ َّْل ا ْل ُق َّرا ُء‬
‫‪َْ )12‬ل ُي َر ِّت ُل ا ْل ُق َ‬ ‫الصائِ ُم ْو َن إِ َّْل َل ْی ًَّل‬
‫‪َ )5‬لن َّي ْأك َُل َّ‬
‫َت الدُّ ْن َیا َم ْم ُل ْو َء ًة إِ َّْل َج ْه ًَّل‬ ‫‪ )13‬ما كَان ِ‬ ‫ت إِ َّْل ُمؤْ مِن‬ ‫ب ا ْل َم ْو َ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫‪َ )6‬لن ُّيح َّ‬
‫ان إِ َّْل َس ِّیئَات‬ ‫ل ال َّظال ِ ُم ا ْل ِم ْیزَ َ‬‫‪َ )14‬لم يم َ ِ‬
‫ْ َْ‬ ‫الل إِ َّْل ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن‬
‫ف َ‬ ‫‪َْ )7‬ل َي ْع ِر ُ‬
‫‪120‬‬
The Gender of the ‫ فِ ْعل‬When it is Followed by ‫إِ َّْل‬
ِ ‫ َف‬is the point of emphasis after ‫ َّإْل‬, the verb will
If a feminine ‫اعل‬
remain masculine.
ِ ‫َما َقا َم إِ َّْل َفاطِ َم ُة‬
 ‫َما َقا َم ْت إِ َّْل َفاط َم ُة‬ ✓
Exercise 9
ُ ُ‫رآن إِ َّْل ْاْل‬
‫خت‬ َ ‫) َْل َي ْح َف ُظ ا ْل ُق‬4 ‫ات إِ َّْل ال ِّط ْف َل ُة‬
َ ‫) َما َم‬1
ُ ‫الل إِ َّْل ا ْل ُم ْسلِ َم‬
‫ات‬ َ ‫اف‬ُ ‫) َْل َي َخ‬5 ُ ‫) َْل ُي ْفلِ ُح إِ َّْل ا ْل ُمؤْ مِن‬2
‫َات‬
ُ ‫الصائِ َم‬
‫ات‬ َّ ‫واب إِ َّْل‬َ ‫) َْل َي ْر ُجو ال َّث‬6 ‫) َما َأك ََل ال َّل ْح َم إِ َّْل ا ْلبِن ُْت‬3
Differentiating Between ‫ إِ َّْل‬for Exclusion and Emphasis

If ‫ إِ َّْل‬comes in an affirmative sentence, or a negative sentence with
a ‫ ُم ْس َت ْثنًی مِنْ ُه‬, it will be ‫ َح ْر ُف ْاستِ ْثنَاء‬and translated as except or other than.
If ‫ إِ َّْل‬comes in a negative sentence and there is no ‫ ُم ْس َت ْثنًی مِنْ ُه‬, it will be
a ‫ َح ْر ُف َح ْصر‬and will be translated as only.
‫إ ِ َاّل‬
Affirmative Sentence Negative Sentence
‫ُم ْستَثْنًی مِنْ ُه‬ ‫ُم ْستَثْنًی مِنْ ُه‬ ‫ُم ْستَثْنًی مِنْ ُه‬
Mentioned Mentioned Not Mentioned
Label ‫استِثْنَاء‬
ْ ‫ف‬ُ ‫َح ْر‬ ‫ف َح ْصر‬
ُ ‫َح ْر‬
Purpose Exclusion Emphasis
Translation Except Only
Governance ‫عَامِل‬ ‫َغیْ ُر عَامِل‬
Following ‫ُم ْستَثْنًی – َمن ُْص ْوب‬ Varies

Word
‫الر َج ُال إِ َّْل زَ ْيدً ا‬
ِّ ‫َجا َء‬ ‫الر َج ُال إِ َّْل زَ ْيدً ا‬
ِّ ‫َما َجا َء‬ ‫َما َجا َء َّإْل زَ ْيد‬
Example The men came The men did not Only Zaid came.
except Zaid. come except Zaid.
121
‫‪ when‬إِ َّْل ‪Translate the following. Ensure you differentiate between‬‬
‫‪َ .‬ح ْر ُف َح ْصر ‪َ and when it is‬ح ْر ُف ْاستِ ْثنَاء ‪it is‬‬
‫‪َ )7‬ما َح ِف َظ ا ْل ُق ْر َ‬
‫آن إِ َّْل ا ْلبِن ُْت‬ ‫َما َأك ََل إِ َّْل َأ ْح َمدُ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫آن إِ َّْل ُجزْ ًءا‬
‫ت ا ْلبِن ُْت ا ْل ُق ْر َ‬ ‫‪ )8‬ح ِف َظ ِ‬ ‫الصائِ ُم ْو َن إِ َّْل َأ ْح َمدَ‬
‫َ‬ ‫َما َأك ََل َّ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫اس َت ْی َق َظ إِ َّْل َفاطِ َم ُة‬
‫‪َ )9‬ما ْ‬ ‫الذن ُْو َب إِ َّْل ُ‬
‫الل‬ ‫َْل َيغ ِْف ُر ُّ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫َات إِ َّْل َفاطِ َم َة‬
‫ت ا ْل َبن ُ‬ ‫‪ )10‬ما اس َتی َق َظ ِ‬
‫َ ْ ْ‬ ‫الذن َْو َب إِ َّْل ِّ‬
‫الش ْر َك‬ ‫الل ُّ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َيغْف ُر ُ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫‪َْ )11‬ل َي ُص ْو ُم ا ْل َم ِر ْي ُض إِ َّْل َر َم َض َ‬
‫ان‬ ‫‪ْ )5‬اْلَ ْو َْل ُد َقائِ ُم ْو َن إِ َّْل َأ ْح َمدَ‬
‫ان إِ َّْل َي ْو َم ْی ِن‬
‫‪َ )12‬صا َم ا ْل َم ِر ْي ُض َر َم َض َ‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ما ْاْلَ ْو َْل ُد إِ َّْل َقائِ ُم ْو َن‬
‫‪122‬‬
‫إِ ْن النَّافِ َی ُة‬
‫ف َح ْصر ‪ as a‬إِ َّْل ‪ is a negative particle which is used with‬إِ ْن‬ ‫‪َ to‬ح ْر ُ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ُ .‬ج ْم َلة ف ْعل َّیة ‪ُ and‬ج ْم َلة ْاسم َّیة ‪emphasise both a‬‬
‫‪َ , therefore there will be no change to the noun or‬غ ْی ُر عَامِل ‪ is‬إِ ْن النَّافِ َی ُة‬
‫‪verb after it.‬‬
‫‪It is translated as only or surely.‬‬
‫الر ُج ُل إِ َّْل َقائِم‬ ‫ِ‬
‫إِن َّ‬
‫‪The man is surely standing.‬‬
‫َخبَر‬ ‫ف َح ْصر‬
‫َح ْر ُ‬ ‫ُمبْتَدَ أ‬ ‫ف نَ ْفي‬
‫َح ْر ُ‬
‫َقائِم‬ ‫إِ َّْل‬ ‫الر ُج ُل‬

‫َّ‬ ‫إِ ِن‬
‫‪, it is translated in the present tense.‬فِ ْعل ُم َض ِارع ‪When it precedes a‬‬
‫إِ ْن َي ْر ُجو ا ْل ُمؤْ مِن ُْو َن إِ َّْل ا ْل َجنَّ َة‬
‫‪The believers hope only for Jannah.‬‬
‫‪ )9‬إِ ِن ْاْلَ ْط َف ُال إِ َّْل َجال ِ ُس ْو َن‬ ‫آن إِ َّْل َب َصائِ ُر‬ ‫‪ )5‬إِ ِن ا ْل ُق ْر ُ‬ ‫إِ ْن زَ ْيد إِ َّْل َع ْبد‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫‪ )10‬إِ ِن ا ْلم َّت ُقو َن إِ َّْل ص ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫إِ ِن ْاْلَ ْنبِ َیا ُء إِ َّْل َب َشر‬
‫اد ُق ْو َن‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ُ ْ‬ ‫‪ )6‬إِن َّي ْرزُ ُق ا ْلع َبا َد إِ َّْل ُ‬
‫الل‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫اذ ُب ْو َن إِ َّْل ك َِذ ًبا‬
‫‪ )11‬إِ ْن ي ُقو ُل ا ْل َك ِ‬
‫َّ ْ‬ ‫‪ )7‬إِ ْن َأ َك َل ْت َفاطِ َم ُة إِ َّْل َت ْم َر ًة‬ ‫إِ ِن ا ْل َك ْع َب ُة إِ َّْل َب ْیت‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫َاب َم ْم ُل ْوء إِ َّْل ِح ْك َم ًة‬ ‫ِ ِ‬
‫‪ )12‬إِن ا ْلكت ُ‬ ‫‪ )8‬إِن َّي ُص ْو ُم ا ْل َی ْو َم إِ َّْل َأ ْح َمدُ‬ ‫إِ ْن َخالِد إِ ّْل ُم َع ِّلم‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫‪ with the underlined word‬إِ ْن النَّافِ َی ُة ‪Rewrite the following by adding‬‬
‫‪َّ . Thereafter, translate.‬إْل ‪after‬‬
‫الر ُج ُل النَّافِ َذ َة‬
‫‪َ )6‬فت ََح َّ‬ ‫‪ُ )1‬ي َرائِي ا ْل ُمنَافِ ُق ْو َن‬
‫ات ُم ْخلِ َصات‬
‫‪َ )7‬ا ْل َجدَّ ُ‬ ‫َال ُّط ََّّل ُب ُم ْت َع ُب ْو َن‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫‪َ )8‬ا ْْلَع َْما ُم ُم ْجت َِهدُ ْو َن‬ ‫ان َشاكِر ِ‬ ‫لضی َف ِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َا َّ ْ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫‪ )9‬عَطِ َش ا ْل َجدُّ ْاْل َن‬ ‫ف‬ ‫الض ْی ُ‬ ‫اِ ْبت ََس َم َّ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫‪ )10‬غَا َب ْت َفاطِ َم ُة ا ْل َی ْو َم‬ ‫ت ال ِّط ْف َل ُة َل ْی ًَّل‬ ‫نَام ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫‪123‬‬
‫إِن ََّما‬
‫ إِن ََّما‬is a particle of emphasis, ‫ف َح ْصر‬ ُ ‫ َح ْر‬. It can precede both a ‫اس ِم َّیة‬
ِ ِ
and ‫ ُج ْم َلة ف ْعل َّیة‬. It is translated as only or surely.
This particle is ‫ ; َغ ْی ُر عَامِل‬it does not affect the irab of subsequent
words.
ِ ‫إِنَّما الرج ُل ك‬
‫َاذب‬ ُ َّ َ
The man is only a liar.
The man is surely a liar.
The point of emphasis in a sentence with ‫ إِن ََّما‬comes at the end of
the sentence. Therefore, the order of the sentence changes to
have the emphasised word at the end.
‫إِن ََّما َينَا ُم ن ََه ًارا ال ِّط ْف ُل‬ ‫إِن ََّما َينَا ُم ال ِّط ْف ُل ن ََه ًارا‬
Only the child sleeps The child sleeps only
during the day. during the day.
The tarkib of this sentence is written as follows:
‫َخبَر‬ ‫ُمبْتَدَ أ‬ ‫ف َح ْصر‬
ُ ‫َح ْر‬
ِ ‫ك‬
‫َاذب‬ ‫الر ُج ُل‬ ‫إِن ََّما‬
َّ
Exercise 13
‫الل ا ْل ُمؤْ مِن ُْو َن‬َ ‫ف‬ ُ ‫) إِن ََّما َي ْع ِر‬13 ِ
ِّ ‫) إِن ََّما ُي َساف ُر‬7
‫الر َج ُال‬ ِ
ُ ‫) إِن ََّما َي ْشفي‬1
‫الل‬
‫) إِن ََّما غَا َب ْت َخ ِد ْي َج ُة َي ْو َم ْی ِن‬14 ‫) إِن ََّما ِع ْی َسی َر ُس ْول‬8 ‫احد‬ ِ ‫اإل ٰله و‬
َ ُ ِ ْ ‫) إِن ََّما‬2
‫الل ِع ْل ًما‬
َ ‫الر ُج ُل‬ َّ ‫) إِن ََّما َي ْس َأ ُل‬15 ‫ان عَدُ و‬ َّ ‫) إِن ََّما‬9
ُ ‫الش ْی َط‬ ‫) إِن ََّما َب َكی ال ِّط ْف ُل‬3
‫الل َر ْغ َب ًة‬َ ‫َات‬ ُ ‫) إِن ََّما َت ْع ُبدُ ا ْل ُمؤْ مِن‬16 ‫الل‬ ِ
ُ ‫) إِن ََّما َي ْرزُ ُق ا ْلع َبا َد‬10 ‫ت ْاْلُ ُّم‬ ِ ‫) إِنَّما صبر‬4
ََ َ َ
‫ان ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن‬ َ ‫) إِن ََّما َي ُص ْو ُم َر َم َض‬17 ‫) إِن ََّما ْاْلَ ْصنَا ُم ِح َج َارة‬11 ‫الر ُس ْو ُل َب َشر‬ َّ ‫) إِن ََّما‬5
َ َ‫ل ال َّظال ِ ُم ا ْل ِم ْیز‬
‫ان َس ِّیئَات‬ ُ َ ‫) إِن ََّما َي ْم‬18 ِ
َ ‫) إِن ََّما َي ْع ُبدُ ا ْل ُم ْسل ُم ْو َن‬12
‫الل‬ ‫) إِن ََّما ْاْلَ ْنبِ َیا ُء ِع َباد‬6
124
Summary
Summary of Emphasis
Emphasis
Entire Sentence Verb Single Part of A Sentence
Past Future
Affirmative Negative
َّ
‫إن‬ ‫الَّل ُم ا ْل ُمزَ ْح َل َق ُة َْل ُم اْل ْبتِدَ ِاء‬
َّ ‫ف َت ْح ِق ْیق‬
ُ ‫َح ْر‬ ‫ ـَ َّن‬... ‫َل‬ ‫َل ْن‬ Fronting ‫ف َح ْصر‬
ُ ‫َح ْر‬ ‫إِن ََّما‬
‫َقدْ َصا َم زَ ْيد‬ ‫َلیَ ُص ْو َم َّن زَ ْيد‬ ‫س َصا َم زَ ْيد َلن َّي ُص ْو َم زَ ْيد‬ ِ ‫س َما َصا َم زَ ْيد إِ َّْل َأ ْم‬
ِ ‫س َأ ْم‬ ِ ‫إِن ََّما َصا َم زَ ْيد َأ ْم‬
‫إِ َّن زَ ْيدً ا َقائِم‬ ‫َلزَ ْيد َقائِم‬ ‫إِ َّن زَ ْيدً ا َل َقائِم‬ ‫َما زَ ْيد إِ َّْل َصائِم‬ ‫إِن ََّما زَ ْيد َصائِم‬
Summary of Negative Particles

Future Present Past
‫َْل َي ُك ْو ُن‬ ‫إِ ْن‬ ‫َما‬ ‫َل ْی َس‬ َ ‫َما ك‬
‫َان‬
‫َْل َي ُك ْو ُن زَ ْيد َم ِر ْي ًضا‬ ‫إِ ْن زَ ْيد إِ َّْل َم ِر ْيض‬ ‫َما زَ ْيد َم ِر ْي ًضا‬ ‫َلیْ َس زَ ْيد َم ِر ْي ًضا‬ ‫َما كَا َن زَ ْيد َم ِر ْي ًضا‬
Zaid will not be sick Zaid is only sick Zaid is not sick. Zaid is not sick Zaid was not sick

Future Present Past
‫َل ْن‬ ‫َْل‬ ‫َما‬ ‫َل ْم‬
‫ب زَ ْيد‬ ُ ‫َْل َي ْذ َه‬
‫ب زَ ْيد‬ ُ ‫َما َي ْذ َه‬
‫ب زَ ْيد‬ َ ‫َما َذ َه‬
‫ب زَ ْيد‬ ْ ‫َل ْم َي ْذ َه‬
Zaid is not going
Zaid will not go Zaid will not go Zaid did not go
Zaid does not go
‫إِ ْن‬
‫ب إِ َّْل زَ ْيد‬
ُ ‫إِ ْن َي ْذ َه‬ ‫ب إِ َّْل زَ ْيد‬
َ ‫إِ ْن َذ َه‬
Only Zaid goes
Only Zaid went
Only Zaid is going
125
‫ا ْل ْج َم َل ُة ا ْل ِف ْعلِ َّی ُة ‪Parts of‬‬
‫‪126‬‬
‫ا ْل ُج ْم َل ُة ِاْل ْس ِم َّی ُة ‪Parts of‬‬
‫َنكِ َرة‬
‫‪Agree in‬‬ ‫َم ْع ِر َفة‬
‫‪Number,‬‬
‫‪Gender‬‬
‫‪Is/are‬‬ ‫َخ َبر‬ ‫ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬
‫‪Is/are‬‬ ‫( َم ْر ُف ْوع)‬ ‫( َم ْر ُف ْوع)‬ ‫َْل ُم اْل ْبتِدَ ِاء‬
‫‪Was/were‬‬ ‫كان‬
‫‪Was/were not‬‬ ‫َخبَر‬ ‫اسم‬

‫ْ‬ ‫ما ك َ‬
‫َان‬
‫‪Will be‬‬ ‫( َم ْر ُف ْوع)‬ ‫( َم ْر ُف ْوع)‬ ‫َي ُك ْو ُن‬
‫‪Will not be‬‬ ‫َْل َي ُك ْو ُن‬
‫‪Is/are not‬‬ ‫َخبَر‬ ‫اسم‬

‫ْ‬ ‫َل ْی َس‬
‫‪Is/are not‬‬ ‫( َمن ُْص ْوب)‬ ‫( َم ْر ُف ْوع)‬ ‫َما‬

‫‪Is/are not‬‬ ‫َّإْل‬ ‫إِ ْن‬
‫( َم ْر ُف ْوع)‬ ‫( َم ْر ُف ْوع)‬
‫‪Indeed‬‬ ‫َخبَر‬ ‫اسم‬

‫ْ‬ ‫َّ‬
‫إن‬
‫‪Indeed‬‬ ‫( َم ْر ُف ْوع)‬ ‫َْلم ُمزَ ْح َل َقة‬ ‫( َمن ُْص ْوب)‬ ‫َّ‬

‫إن‬
‫َخ َبر‬ ‫ُمبْتَدَ أ‬

‫‪Only‬‬ ‫إِن ََّما‬
‫( َم ْر ُف ْوع)‬ ‫( َم ْر ُف ْوع)‬
‫َت ْمیِ ْیز‬

‫‪In, with‬‬
‫( َمن ُْص ْوب)‬
‫ُم ْستَثْنًی‬
‫‪Except‬‬
‫( َمن ُْص ْوب)‬
‫‪127‬‬
‫‪Revision Exercises‬‬
‫‪Translate the following. Ensure you translate the emphasis‬‬
‫‪correctly.‬‬
‫‪ )7‬إِ ْن َي ْش َر ُب َماء إِ َّْل َفاطِ َمة‬ ‫‪َ )4‬ما َش ِر َب ْت َفاطِ َم ُة إِ َّْل َما ًء‬ ‫‪َ )1‬ش ِر َب ْت َما ًء َفاطِم ُة‬
‫‪ )8‬إِن ََّما َت ْش َر ُب َفاطِ َمة َماء‬ ‫‪َ )5‬ما َش ِر َب َما ًء إِ َّْل َفاطِ َم ُة‬ ‫‪َ )2‬لت َْش َر َب َّن َفاطِ َم ُة َما ًء‬
‫‪ )9‬إِن ََّما َت ْش َر ُب َماء َفاطِ َمة‬ ‫‪ )6‬إِ ْن َت ْش َر ُب َفاطِ َم ُة إِ َّْل َما ًء‬ ‫‪َ )3‬ل َقدْ َش ِر َب ْت َفاطِ َم ُة َما ًء‬
‫‪Translate the following. Ensure you differentiate between the‬‬
‫‪different structures and translate accordingly. Underline any extra‬‬
‫‪emphasis.‬‬
‫الر َجال إِ َّْل زَ ْيدا‬
‫‪َ )17‬صا َم ِّ‬ ‫‪ )9‬ا ْل َی ْو َم َت ُص ْو ُم َفاطِ َم ُة‬ ‫‪َ )1‬خالِد َصائِم‬
‫ت َفاطِ َمة َص ْوما‬ ‫‪ )18‬اِزْ َدا َد ْ‬ ‫‪ )10‬إِن ََّما َصا َم زَ ْيد ا ْل َی ْو َم‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )2‬ل َفاط َم ُة َص َ‬
‫ائمة‬
‫‪َ )19‬ل ْی َس ْت َفاطِ َمة َصائِ َمة‬ ‫‪ )11‬إِن ََّما َصا َم ا ْل َی ْو َم زَ ْيد‬ ‫‪َ )3‬صا َم زَ ْيد َصابِ ًرا‬
‫س إِ َّْل زَ ْيد‬‫‪َ )20‬ما َصا َم َأ ْم ِ‬ ‫‪َ )12‬ل ْی َس زَ ْيد إِ َّْل َصائِ ًما‬ ‫‪َ )4‬صا َم زَ ْيد َص ْو ًما‬
‫‪َ )21‬صا َم ْت َفاط َمة ْ‬ ‫‪َ )13‬غدً ا َلت َُص ْو َم َّن َفاطِ َم ُة‬ ‫‪ )5‬إِ َّن َخالِدً ا َل َصائِم‬
‫‪ )22‬إِن َّي ُص ْو ُم زَ ْيد إِ َّْل َر َم َضان‬ ‫َت َفاطِ َم ُة َصائِ َم ًة‬ ‫‪ )14‬كَان ْ‬ ‫‪ )6‬إِ َّن َفاطِ َم َة َصائِ َمة‬
‫ت ا ْل َی ْو َم َفاطِ َمة‬ ‫‪ )23‬إِنَّما صام ِ‬
‫َ َ َ‬ ‫‪َ )15‬لت َُص ْو َم َّن َفاطِ َم ُة ا ْل َی ْو َم‬ ‫‪َ )7‬قدْ َصا َم زَ ْيد َأ ْم ِ‬
‫س‬
‫‪ِ )24‬إ ْن صام ْت َف ِ‬
‫اط َمة ِإ َّْل َر َم َضان‬ ‫‪َ )16‬لن َي ُص ْو َم زَ ْيد إِ َّْل َغدً ا‬ ‫‪َ )8‬ل َقدْ َصا َم زَ ْيد َأ ْم ِ‬
‫س‬
‫َ َ‬
‫‪َ )9‬ل ْم َي ُص ْم زَ ْيد َأ ْم ِ‬
‫س‬ ‫‪َ )5‬ل ْن َت ْك ِذ َب َص ِف َّی ُة‬ ‫‪ )1‬ما زَ يد ك ِ‬
‫َاذ ًبا‬ ‫َ ْ‬
‫‪َ )10‬لن َي ُص ْو َم زَ ْيد َغدً ا‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ما َت ُص ْو ُم َفاطِ َم ُة‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ما ك ََذ َب َأ ْح َمدُ‬
‫َان َخالِد َصائِما‬ ‫‪َ )11‬ما ك َ‬ ‫‪َ )7‬ل ْم َي ْك ِذ ْب َفاطِ َم ُة‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )3‬ما َت ْكذ ُب زَ ْين ُ‬
‫َب‬
‫ت ا ْلبِنْت ك ِ‬
‫َاذ َبة‬ ‫‪َ )12‬لیس ِ‬ ‫‪َ )8‬ما َصا َم زَ ْيد َأ ْم ِ‬
‫س‬ ‫‪ْ )4‬ل َي ْك ِذ ُب ُم َح َّمد‬
‫َْ‬
‫‪128‬‬
‫‪Rewrite the following sentences by emphasising the verb.‬‬
‫الر ُجل الل ِع ْلما‬ ‫‪َ )9‬ي ْس َأ ُل َّ‬ ‫‪ُ )5‬ين َْص ُر ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن‬ ‫ُخلِ َق ِ‬
‫ت ا ْل َجنَّ ُة‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫‪َ )10‬خ ِس َر ال َّظالِمون ُخ ْس َرانا‬ ‫َّاس َل ْی ًَّل‬
‫‪َْ )6‬ل َي ْع َم ُل الن ُ‬ ‫َْل ُي َسافِ ُر اْلَ ُب‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫َت الدُّ نْیا َم ْم ُل ْو َءة ُظ ْلما‬‫‪ )11‬كَان ِ‬ ‫‪ُ )7‬ي ْج َم ُع ا ْل ِع َبا ُد َج ْم ًعا‬ ‫نَا َم ْت َخ ِد ْي َج ُة‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫‪َ )12‬ي ِز ْيدُ ا ْل ُق ْرآن ا ْل ُمؤْ مِنِین َر ْغ َبة‬ ‫‪َ )8‬خ َل َق الل السماو ِ‬
‫ات‬ ‫ُ َّ َ َ‬ ‫َْل َي ْظلِ ُم ا ْل َملِ ُك‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫‪Rewrite the following sentences twice creating emphasis on the‬‬
‫‪ and once by using a negative‬إِن ََّما ‪underlined word, once by using‬‬
‫‪.‬إِ َّْل ‪particle and‬‬
‫ب ال َّطالِب ا ْل َی ْو َم‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )7‬يغ ْی ُ‬ ‫ت ا ْلبِن ُْت ْاْل َن‬ ‫دخ َل ِ‬‫‪َ )4‬‬ ‫اإل َما ُم َقائِ ًما‬
‫ب ِْ‬ ‫‪َ )1‬خ َط َ‬
‫‪َ )8‬صا َم ا ْل ُم ْسلِمون َر َم َضان‬ ‫‪َ )5‬قت ََل ال َّظال ِ ُم ا ْل َم ْظ ُل ْو َم‬ ‫اإل َما ُم َقائِ ًما‬
‫ب ِْ‬ ‫‪َ )2‬خ َط َ‬
‫‪َ )9‬صا َم ا ْل ُم ْسلِمون َر َم َضان‬ ‫ب ا ْل َی ْو َم‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫دخ َل ِ‬
‫ت ا ْلبِن ُْت ا ْْل َن‬
‫ب ال َّطال ُ‬ ‫‪َ )6‬يغ ْی ُ‬ ‫‪َ )3‬‬
‫‪َ ,‬قدْ ‪Emphasise the verbs in the following sentences by either adding‬‬
‫‪َ .‬ل ْن ‪ or‬ن ُْو ُن التَّأكِ ْید ‪َ ,‬ق ُّط‬
‫‪َ )7‬أ َطاع ِ‬
‫َت ا ْل َبنات ا ْل ُم َع ِّلمات‬ ‫‪َ )1‬ت ْر َح ُم اْلُ ُّم َر ْح َم ًة‬
‫اف ا ْل ُم ْسلِمون الل َر ْغ َبة‬
‫‪َ )8‬ي َخ ُ‬ ‫الذن ُْو َب‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ت َر َك ا ْلغَنِي ُّ‬
‫ُّ‬
‫‪َ )9‬قت ََل ا ْل َملِك ا ْل ُم ْسلِمین ُظ ْلما‬ ‫الر ُج ُل َل ْی ًَّل‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )3‬ما عَم َل َّ‬
‫‪َ )10‬ت ْصدُ ُق ال َّطالِبات إِ َّْل َطال ِ َبتین‬ ‫‪َْ )4‬ل َي ْأ ُخ ُذ ا ْل َو َلدُ ال ُّت َّف َ‬
‫اح َة‬
‫الش ْی َطان النَّاس إِ ْض ََّلْل‬
‫‪َ )11‬أ َض َّل َّ‬ ‫‪َْ )5‬ل َت ْع ِص ْي َخ ِد ْي َج ُة اْلُ َّم‬
‫ِ‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ي ْخ َس ُر ال َّظال ِ ُم ْو َن ُخ ْس َرانًا‬
‫رسة َم َساء‬‫‪َ )12‬خ َر َج ْت َفاط َمة ا ْل َمدْ َ‬
‫‪129‬‬
Key Terms
a sentence that begins with
a ‫فِ ْعل‬ ‫ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة‬ a sentence comprised of a
‫ ُمبْتَدَ أ‬and ‫َخبَر‬
‫اعل‬ ِ ‫َف‬ ‫ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬
subject subject
‫اع ِل‬ ‫َخ َبر‬
substitute subject ُ information
object ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬grammatical analysis ‫َت ْركِ ْیب‬
of a sentence
ِ
‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِه َثان‬auxiliary verb ‫فِ ْعل نَاقِص‬
indirect object
adverb of time/place ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه‬was َ ‫ك‬
‫َان‬
adverb of degree ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق‬will be ‫َي ُك ْو ُن‬
adverb of reason ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول َل ُه‬is not ‫َل ْی َس‬
state ‫ َحال‬was not َ ‫َما ك‬

‫َان‬
clarification ‫ َت ْمیِ ْیز‬will not be ‫َْل َي ُك ْو ُن‬
exclusion ‫ُم ْس َت ْثنًی‬ the subject of a sentence

with َ‫ كَان‬or َّ‫إِن‬
‫ إِ َّن‬/ ‫َان‬
a particle of emphasis ‫ف َت ْح ِق ْیق‬

ُ ‫َح ْر‬
the information of
sentence with َ‫ كَان‬or َّ‫إِن‬
a
‫ إِ َّن‬/ ‫َان‬
َ ‫َخ َب ُر ك‬
a particle of emphasis ‫ ن ُْو ُن ال َّت ْأكِ ْی ِد‬not ‫َما النَّافِ َی ُة‬
a particle of restriction ‫ف َح ْصر‬

ُ ‫ َح ْر‬a negative particle ‫إِ ْن النَّافِ َی ُة‬
a particle of emphasis ‫* إِن ََّما‬ ‫َح ْرف ُم َش َّبه بِا ْل ِف ْع ِل‬

a ‫ َْلم‬for emphasis ِ ‫َْلم‬
‫اْل ْبتِدَ ِاء‬ ُ
a ‫ َْلم‬for emphasis ‫َْلم ُمزَ ْح َل َقة‬
130
Vocabulary
reward, recompense ‫ َث َواب‬always, ever ‫َأ َبد‬
part ‫ ُجزْ ء ج َأ ْجزَ اء‬reward, wage ‫َأ ْجر ج ُأ ُج ْور‬

Haji (one who has ‫ َحاج ج ُح َّجاج‬better ‫َأ ْح َس ُن‬
performed Hajj)
‫ ِح َج َارة‬،‫جر ج َأ ْح َجار‬ ِ
stone َ ‫َح‬ hereafter ‫آخ َرة‬
room ‫ ُح ْج َرة ج ات‬week ‫ُأ ْس ُب ْوع ج َأ َسابِ ْی ُع‬
good deed ‫ َح َسنَة ج ات‬severe, severest ُّ‫َأ َشد‬
truth ‫ َحق‬less, least ‫َأ َق ُّل‬

ِ ِ ‫َأ ْك َث ُر‬
bag ُ ‫ َحق ْی َبة ج َح َقائ‬more, most
‫ب‬
wisdom ‫ ِح ْك َمة ج ِح َكم‬yesterday )‫س ( َم ْبنِي‬

ِ ‫َأ ْم‬
time ‫ ِح ْین ج َأ ْح َیان‬time ‫آن‬
better, best, goodness ‫ َخ ْیر ج ِخ َیار‬now, just now ‫ْاْل ُن‬
always ‫ َدائِم‬container ‫إِنَاء ج آنِ َیة‬
lesson ‫ َد ْرس ج ُد ُر ْوس‬door ‫َباب ج َأ ْب َواب‬
minute ‫ َدقِ ْی َقة ج َد َقائِ ُق‬last night ِ ‫ا ْل َب‬

‫ار َح ُة‬
religion, retribution ‫ ِد ْين ج َأ ْد َيان‬human being ‫َب َشر‬
sins ‫َذنْب ج ُذن ُْوب‬ bearer of glad tidings ‫َب ِش ْیر‬
pound (weight) ‫َر ْطل ج َأ ْر َطال‬ enlightenment, insight ‫َب ِص ْی َرة ج َب َصائِ ُر‬
time, while, hour, ‫ َساعَة ج ات‬yet, until now )‫َب ْعدُ ( َم ْبنِي‬
Day of Judgement
show ‫ ُس ْم َعة‬clear, clear proof ‫َب ِّینَة ج َب ِّینَات‬

‫ َس ِّیئَة ج ات‬businessman ِ ‫َت‬
‫اجر ج ُت َّجار‬
evil deed
worse, worst, evil ‫ َشر ج ِش َرار‬apple َ ‫احة ج ُت َّف‬
‫احات‬ َ ‫ُت َّف‬
131
‫‪meat‬‬ ‫‪َ polytheism‬ل ْحم ج ُل ُح ْوم‬ ‫ِش ْرك‬
‫‪blessed‬‬ ‫‪ُ month‬م َب َارك‬ ‫َش ْهر ج ُش ُه ْور‪َ ،‬أ ْش ُهر‬
‫‪God-fearing‬‬ ‫‪ُ thing‬متَّق ج ْو َن‬ ‫َش ْيء ج َأ ْش َیا ُء‬
‫‪evening‬‬ ‫‪َ devil‬م َساء‬ ‫َش ْی َطان ج َش َیاطِ ْی ُن‬
‫‪happy‬‬ ‫‪َ morning‬م ْس ُر ْور ج ْو َن‬ ‫َص َباح‬
‫‪angel‬‬ ‫‪َ path‬م َلك ج َم ََّلئِ َكة‬ ‫ِص َراط ج ُص ُرط‬

‫اجر ج ْو َن‬‫ُم َه ِ‬ ‫عَا َلم ج ْو َن‬
‫‪migrant‬‬ ‫‪world‬‬
‫اع ُظ‬‫مو ِع َظة ج مو ِ‬ ‫ع ََسل‬
‫‪admonition‬‬ ‫ََ‬ ‫‪ْ َ honey‬‬
‫‪scale‬‬ ‫‪ knowledge‬مِ ْیزَ ان ج َم َو ِاز ْي ُن‬ ‫ِع ْلم ج ُع ُل ْوم‬

‫َاصر ج َأن َْصار‬ ‫ن ِ‬ ‫غَد‬
‫‪helper‬‬ ‫‪tomorrow‬‬
‫‪window‬‬ ‫‪ room‬نَافِ َذة ج ن ََوافِ ُذ‬ ‫غ ُْر َفة ج غ َُرف‪ ،‬ات‬
‫‪day/daytime‬‬ ‫‪ rich‬ن ََهار‬ ‫غَنِي ج َأغْن ِ َیا ُء‬

‫و ِ‬
‫احد‬ ‫َق ُّط ( َم ْبنِي)‬
‫‪one‬‬ ‫‪َ ever‬‬
‫‪day‬‬ ‫‪َ milk‬ي ْوم ج َأ َّيام‬ ‫َل َبن ج َأ ْل َبان‬
‫‪litre‬‬ ‫لِتْر ج لِت َْرات‬
‫‪132‬‬
‫‪to leave, let‬‬ ‫‪َ to take as‬ت َر َك َيت ُْر ُك َت ْركًا‬ ‫َّخ ُذ اِ ِّت َخا ًذا‬
‫اِ َّت َخ َذ يت ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪to recite‬‬ ‫َت ََّل َي ْت ُل ْو ِت ََّل َو ًة‬ ‫‪to come‬‬ ‫َأ َتی َي ْأتِ ْي إِ ْت َیانًا‬
‫‪to be impatient (opposite of‬‬
‫) َصبْر‬
‫َج ِز َع َي ْجزَ ُع َجزَ عًا‬ ‫‪to give‬‬ ‫آ َتی ُيؤْ تِ ْي إِ ْيتَا ًء‬
‫ب إِ ْح َبا ًبا‪ُ ،‬ح ًّبا‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪to collect, gather‬‬ ‫َج َم َع َي ْج َم ُع َج ْم ًعا‬ ‫‪to love‬‬ ‫َأ َح َّ‬
‫ب ُيح ُّ‬
‫‪to envy‬‬ ‫َح َسدَ َي ْح ُسدُ َح َسدً ا‬ ‫‪to respect, honour‬‬ ‫احتِ َرا ًما‬
‫احت ََر َم َي ْحت َِر ُم ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪to memorise, protect‬‬ ‫َح ِف َظ َي ْح َف ُظ ِح ْف ًظا‬ ‫‪to hope for reward‬‬ ‫ِا ْحت ََس َب َي ْحت َِس ُب ِا ْح ِت َسا ًبا‬
‫‪to fear‬‬ ‫اف َخ ْو ًفا‬

‫اف َي َخ ُ‬
‫َخ َ‬ ‫‪to take, seize‬‬ ‫َأ َخ َذ َي ْأ ُخ ُذ َأ ْخ ًذا‬
‫‪to come out, leave‬‬ ‫َخ َر َج َي ْخ ُر ُج ُخ ُر ْو ًجا‬ ‫‪to send‬‬ ‫َأ ْر َس َل ُي ْر ِس ُل إِ ْر َس ًاْل‬
‫‪to be humble‬‬ ‫َخ َش َع َي ْخ َش ُع ُخ ُش ْوعًا‬ ‫‪to show‬‬ ‫َأ َری ُي ِر ْي إِ َرا َء ًة‬
‫‪to give a lecture‬‬ ‫ب ُخ ْط َب ًة‬

‫ب َي ْخ ُط ُ‬
‫َخ َط َ‬ ‫‪to increase‬‬ ‫اِزْ َدا َد َيزْ َدا ُد اِزْ ِد َيا ًدا‬
‫‪to enter‬‬ ‫َد َخ َل َيدْ ُخ ُل ُد ُخ ْو ًْل‬ ‫‪to seek forgiveness‬‬ ‫ِا ْس َت ْغ َف َر َي ْس َتغ ِْف ُر ِا ْس ِت ْغ َف ًارا‬
‫‪to call, supplicate‬‬ ‫َدعَا َيدْ ع ُْو َدع َْو ًة ُدعَا ًء‬ ‫‪to buy‬‬ ‫اِ ْشت ََری َي ْشت َِري اِ ْشتِ َرا ًء‬
‫‪to show off‬‬ ‫َر َاءى ُي َر ِائي ِر َيا ًء ِر َئا ًء ُم َرا َءا ًة‬ ‫‪to misguide‬‬ ‫َأ َض َّل ُي ِض ُّل إِ ْض ََّل ًْل‬
‫‪to recite clearly‬‬ ‫َر َّت َل ُي َر ِّت ُل َت ْرتِ ْی ًَّل‬ ‫‪to obey‬‬ ‫اع ُيطِ ْی ُع إِ َطا َعةً‪َ ،‬طا َع ًة‬ ‫َأ َط َ‬
‫‪to hope‬‬ ‫َر َجا َي ْر ُج ْو َر َجا ًء‬ ‫‪to feed‬‬ ‫َأ ْط َع َم ُي ْط ِع ُم إِ ْط َعا ًما‬
‫‪to return‬‬ ‫َر َج َع َي ْر ِج ُع ُر ُج ْوعًا‬ ‫‪to perform Umrah‬‬ ‫اِ ْعت ََم َر َي ْعت َِم ُر اِعْتِ َم ًارا‬
‫‪to be happy with,‬‬ ‫َر ِض َي َي ْر ٰضی ِر ْض َوانًا‬ ‫‪to be successful‬‬ ‫َأ ْف َل َح ُي ْفلِ ُح إِ ْف ََّل ًحا‬
‫‪approve of‬‬
‫ِ‬ ‫َأ ْن َع َم ُين ِْع ُم إِ ْن َعا ًما‬
‫‪to hope, desire‬‬ ‫ب َي ْر ُ‬
‫غَب َرغْ َبةً‪َ ،‬رغَ ًبا‬ ‫َرغ َ‬ ‫‪to favour‬‬
‫َب ُرك ُْو ًبا‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫َأ ْن َف َق ُين ِْف ُق إِ ْن َفا ًقا‬
‫‪to ride‬‬ ‫ب َي ْرك ُ‬
‫َرك َ‬ ‫‪to spend‬‬
‫‪to bow‬‬ ‫َرك ََع َي ْرك َُع ُرك ُْوعًا‬ ‫‪to be guided, find the‬‬ ‫اِ ْهتَدَ ی َي ْهت َِد ْي اِ ْهتِدَ ا ًء‬
‫‪right way‬‬
‫‪to fear‬‬ ‫َر ِه َب َي ْر َه ُب َر ْه َبةً‪َ ،‬ر َه ًبا‬ ‫‪to sell‬‬ ‫اع َيبِ ْی ُع َب ْی ًعا‬
‫َب َ‬
‫‪to increase‬‬ ‫زَ ا َد َي ِز ْيدُ ِز َيا َد ًة‬ ‫‪to cry‬‬ ‫َب َكی َي ْبكِ ْي ُب َكا ًء‬
‫‪133‬‬
‫‪to understand‬‬ ‫‪َ to prostrate‬ف ِه َم َي ْف َه ُم َف ْه ًما‬ ‫َس َجدَ َي ْس ُجدُ ُس ُج ْو ًدا‬
‫‪to say‬‬ ‫َق َال َي ُق ْو ُل َق ْو ًْل‬ ‫‪to give to drink‬‬ ‫َس َقی َي ْس ِق ْي َس ْق ًیا‬
‫‪to kill murder‬‬ ‫َقت ََل َي ْقت ُُل َقت ًَّْل‬ ‫‪to be quiet‬‬ ‫َس َك َت َي ْس ُك ُت ُس ُك ْو ًتا‬
‫‪to sit‬‬ ‫َق َعدَ َي ْق ُعدُ َق ُع ُو ًدا‬ ‫‪to cure‬‬ ‫َش َفی َي ْش ِف ْي ِش َفا ًء‬
‫‪to write, prescribe‬‬ ‫ُب كِتَا َب ًة‬

‫َب َي ْكت ُ‬
‫َكت َ‬ ‫‪to perform salah‬‬ ‫َص َّلی ُي َص ِّل ْي َص ََّل ًة‬
‫‪to reject‬‬ ‫ك ََّذ َب ُي َك ِّذ ُب َت ْك ِذ ْي ًبا‬ ‫‪to make, manufacture,‬‬ ‫َصن ََع َي ْصن َُع َصنْ ًعا‬
‫‪do‬‬
‫ك ََسا َي ْك ُس ْو ك َْس ًوا‬ ‫ك ِض ْح ًكا‬ ‫َض ِ‬
‫ح َك َي ْض َح ُ‬
‫‪to clothe‬‬ ‫‪to laugh‬‬
‫ِ‬ ‫َض َر َب َي ْض ِر ُب َض ْر ًبا‬
‫‪to earn‬‬ ‫ب َي ْكس ُ‬
‫ب ك َْس ًبا‬ ‫ك ََس َ‬ ‫‪to hit‬‬
‫‪to walk‬‬ ‫َم َشی َي ْم ِش ْي َم ْش ًیا‬ ‫‪to be mislead‬‬ ‫َض َّل َي ِض ُّل َض ََّل ًْل‬
‫‪to fill‬‬ ‫ل َم ْ ً‬
‫ل‬ ‫ل َي ْم َ ُ‬
‫َم َ َ‬ ‫‪to desire‬‬ ‫طم ُع َط َم ًعا‬
‫َط َم َع َي َ‬
‫‪to forget‬‬ ‫ن َِس َي َين َْسی نِ ْس َیانًا‬ ‫‪to be just‬‬ ‫عَدَ َل َي ْع ِد ُل عَدْ ًْل‬
‫‪to guide‬‬ ‫َهدَ ی َي ْه ِد ْي ِهدَ ا َيةً‪ُ ،‬هدً ی‬ ‫‪to disobey‬‬ ‫َصی َي ْع ِص ْي َم ْع ِص َی ًة‬
‫ع َ‬
‫‪to put‬‬ ‫‪َ to know‬و َض َع َي َض ُع َو ْض ًعا‬ ‫عَلِ َم َي ْع َل ُم ِع ْل ًما‬
‫‪to promise‬‬ ‫‪َ to do, work‬وعَدَ َي ِعدُ َوعْدً ا‬ ‫ع َِم َل َي ْع َم ُل ع ََم ًَّل‬
‫‪to give, grant‬‬ ‫ب ِه َب ًة‬ ‫ب َي َه ُ‬‫‪َ to open‬و َه َ‬ ‫َفت ََح َي ْفت َُح َفت ًْحا‬
‫‪134‬‬
PHRASES
Introduction: Phrases
Part 1: Descriptive Phrases
Part 2: Demonstrative Phrases
Part 3: Conjunction Phrases
Part 4: Appositive Phrases
Part 5: Possessive Phrases
Part 6: Number Phrases
Supplement: Nested Phrases
Summary
135
Introduction: Phrases
In this unit, we are going to learn how nouns can be joined
together to form phrases.
Look at the following example:
[The boy] ate [the apple] on [Friday].
If we wanted to give more information regarding any noun in this
sentence, we could join another noun to it as follows.
[This boy and girl] ate [the fresh apple] on [the day of Friday].
In this sentence, the group of words, this boy and girl, the fresh
apple, and the day of Friday are all phrases.
In Arabic, there are seven types of phrases:

1. Descriptive Phrases
2. Demonstrative Phrases
3. Conjunction Phrases
4. Appositive Phrases
5. Possessive Phrases
6. Number Phrases
7. Prepositional Phrases
We will discuss the first six in this section.
136
Part 1: Descriptive Phrases
A descriptive phrase is made up of an adjective and a noun.
small house
The noun being described is called the ‫ َمنْ ُع ْوت‬.
The adjective is called the ‫ َن ْعت‬.
Rules of Descriptive Phrases
1. In English, the adjective precedes the noun. In Arabic, however,
the noun being described, ‫ َمنْ ُع ْوت‬, precedes the adjective, ‫ َن ْعت‬.
 
ِ
‫ُمؤْ من‬ ‫عَ ْبد‬
a believing servant
‫َن ْعت‬ ‫َمنْ ُع ْوت‬ ‫َن ْعت‬ ‫َمنْ ُع ْوت‬
Adjective Noun Adjective Noun

2. The ‫ َن ْعت‬must agree with the ‫ َمنْ ُع ْوت‬in four characteristics:
Definite – Indefinite: ‫ َنكِ َرة‬-‫َم ْع ِر َفة‬
Irab: ‫ َم ْج ُر ْور‬-‫ َمنْ ُص ْوب‬-‫َم ْر ُف ْوع‬
Number: ‫ َج ْمع‬-‫ ُم َثنًّی‬-‫ُم ْف َرد‬
Gender: ‫ ُمؤَ َّنث‬-‫ُم َذ َّكر‬
Look at the examples below and notice how the ‫ َن ْعت‬agrees with
the ‫ َمنْ ُع ْوت‬.
‫عَ ْبد ُمؤْ مِن‬ ُ ‫الصال ِ َح‬
‫ات‬ ُ ‫ْاْل َخ َو‬
َّ ‫ات‬
D ‫َنكِ َرة‬ ‫َم ْع ِر َفة‬
I ‫َم ْر ُف ْوع‬ ‫َم ْر ُف ْوع‬
N ‫ُم ْف َرد‬ ‫َج ْمع‬
G ‫ُم َذ َّكر‬ ‫ُمؤَ نَّث‬

In tarkib, the parts of a phrase are labelled under the word in
green ink.
‫َصالِح‬ ‫عَ ْبد‬
‫َن ْعت‬ ‫َمنْ ُع ْوت‬
137
‫‪Vocab‬‬
‫‪great‬‬ ‫‪ heavy‬عَظِ ْیم‬ ‫َث ِق ْیل ج ثِ َقال‬
‫‪ugly, unsightly‬‬ ‫َقبِ ْیح‬ ‫‪beautiful‬‬ ‫َج ِم ْیل‬
‫‪few, a little‬‬ ‫َقلِ ْیل‬ ‫‪beautiful, good, nice,‬‬ ‫َح َسن‬

‫‪pleasant‬‬
‫‪many,‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪lot,‬‬ ‫‪an‬‬ ‫كَثِ ْیر‬ ‫‪pure‬‬ ‫َخالِص‬
‫‪abundance‬‬
‫‪noble‬‬ ‫ك َِر ْيم ج كِ َرام‬ ‫‪light‬‬ ‫َخ ِف ْیف ج ِخ َفاف‬
‫‪closed‬‬ ‫ُم ْغ َلق‬ ‫‪palatable‬‬ ‫ع َْذب‬
‫‪ )13‬ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬
‫جد ا ْل َكبِ ْیر‬ ‫اذبت ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ا ْلو َلدُ ا ْل َك ِ‬
‫َان‬ ‫‪ )9‬ا ْلبِنْتَان ا ْل َك َ‬ ‫اذ ُب‬ ‫َ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬ ‫‪َ )1‬ق َلم َقبِ ْیح‬
‫‪ْ )14‬اْلَ ْو َْلد ُّ‬
‫الض َع َفاء‬ ‫ان ب ِعیدَ ِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫‪ )10‬مس ِ ِ‬ ‫ع ََذاب َش ِد ْيد‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ش ْيء َح َسن‬
‫جدَ َ ْ‬ ‫َ ْ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫ادقات‬ ‫‪َ )15‬أ َخوات ص ِ‬ ‫الر َج ُال ْاْلَ ْق ِو َيا ُء‬ ‫ان ص ِغیر ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪َ )3‬ل ْی َلة َط ِو ْي َلة‬
‫َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫‪ِّ )11‬‬ ‫ان‬ ‫َب ْی َت َ ْ َ‬ ‫‪)7‬‬
‫الصالِحتان‬ ‫‪ )16‬ا ْل َم ْر َأتان َّ‬ ‫ان َط ِو ْي ََّل ِن‬
‫‪ )12‬يوم ِ‬
‫َْ َ‬ ‫الص ِغ ْی ُر‬‫ا ْل َق َم ُر َّ‬ ‫‪)8‬‬ ‫َب ال َكبِ ْی ُر‬
‫‪ )4‬ا ْل َم ْكت ُ‬
‫‪َ . Use‬منْ ُع ْوت‪َ -‬ن ْعت ‪Fill in the blanks with an appropriate word to make a‬‬
‫‪each word only once.‬‬
‫اس َقت ِ‬
‫َان‬ ‫‪ .......... )9‬ا ْل َف ِ‬ ‫‪َ .......... )5‬ب ِع ْیدَ ة‬ ‫‪ُ .......... )1‬م َّت ُق ْو َن‬
‫الصابِ َر ُ‬
‫ات‬ ‫‪َ .......... )6‬ق ِريبت ِ‬ ‫‪ .......... )2‬مبارك ِ‬
‫‪َّ .......... )10‬‬ ‫َان‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫َان‬ ‫َُ َ‬
‫الض ِعی َف ِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫‪ُ .......... )7‬م ْجت َِهدَ ات‬ ‫‪َ .......... )3‬غ ُف ْور‬
‫‪ْ َّ .......... )11‬‬
‫‪ْ .......... )12‬اْلَ ْق ِو َيا ُء‬ ‫‪ .......... )8‬ا ْل ُم ْخلِ َص ُة‬ ‫‪ .......... )4‬ا ْل َق ِد ْي ُم‬
‫‪138‬‬
A Descriptive Phrase in a Sentence
A descriptive phrase occurs as any of the main parts of a sentence.
‫الصال ِ ُح َل ْی ًَّل‬
َّ ‫الر ُج ُل‬
َّ ‫ُي َص ِّلي‬
The pious man prays (salah) during the night.
The tarkib of a descriptive phrase in a sentence is written as
follows:
‫َل ْی ًَّل‬ ‫الصال ِ ُح‬

َّ ‫ُي َص ِّل ْي‬
‫نَ ْعت‬ ‫َمنْ ُع ْوت‬
This diagram can be written up in an exercise book as follows:
The parts of the phrase are written in green below the text.
Vocab
scholar ‫ ُع َل َما ُء‬،‫ عَالِم ج ْو َن‬teacher, professor ‫ُأ ْستَاذ ج َأ َساتِ َذة‬
deed, action ‫ ع ََمل ج َأع َْمال‬spouse ‫زَ ْوج ج َأزْ َواج‬
poor ‫ مِ ْسكِ ْین ج َم َساكِ ْی ُن‬young man ‫ َش َباب‬،‫َشاب ج ُش َّبان‬
river ‫ن َْهر ج َأن َْهار‬ witness, martyr ‫َش ِه ْید ج ُش َهدَ ا ُء‬
orphan ‫َيتِ ْیم ج َيتَا ٰمی‬ shaykh, old man ‫َش ْیخ ج ُش ُی ْوخ‬
Exercise 3
َ ‫) َك‬9
‫ان َر َم َضان َش ْهرا ُم َب َاركا‬ ‫) َل ْی َس َخالِد َر ُج ًَّل َق ِو ًّيا‬5 ِ ‫) ما َخالِد رج ًَّل ك‬1
‫َاذ ًبا‬ ُ َ َ
‫َت َخ ِد ْي َجة بِنْتا َط ِو ْي َلة‬ْ ‫) َما كَان‬10 ‫) إِ ْن َأ ْح َمدُ إِ َّْل َع ْبد َشاكِر‬6 ‫) َفاطِ َم ُة بِنْت َض ِع ْی َفة‬2
﴾‫الش ْر َك َل ُظ ْلم عَظِ ْیم‬ ِّ ‫) ﴿إِ َّن‬11 ِ ‫) إِ َّن زَ ينَب مع ِّلمة ص‬7
‫اد َقة‬ َ َ َُ َ ْ ‫آن كِتَاب ك َِر ْيم‬ُ ‫) َل ْل ُق ْر‬3
‫الصالِحون َأئِ َّمة‬
َّ ‫) َي ُك ْو ُن ا ْل ُق َّراء‬12 ‫َار َل ُض َع َفا ُء‬
َ ‫الصغ‬
ِّ ‫َات‬ َ ‫) إِ َّن ا ْل َبن‬8 ﴾‫احد‬ ِ ‫) ﴿إِنَّما الل إِ ٰله و‬4
َ ُ َ
139
‫‪ )9‬إِ ْن ن ََص َر ا ْل َق ْوم ا ْل َم ْظ ُل ْوم إِ َّْل ا ْل َملِك‬ ‫َّاس َي ْو ًما َط ِو ْي ًَّل‬ ‫َصا َم الن ُ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫الر ُجل ا ْل َم ِر ْيض َجالِسا‬ ‫إِن ََّما ُي َص ِّلي َّ‬ ‫‪)10‬‬ ‫َح ِز َن َي ْع ُق ْو ُب ُحزْ نًا َش ِد ْيدً ا‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫ُت َع ِّل ُم ا ْل ُم َع ِّل َمة ال َّطالِبات َت ْعلِ ْیما َح َسنا‬ ‫‪)11‬‬ ‫َقدْ َأ ْف َل َح ا ْل ُمؤْ مِن ُْو َن ا ْل ُم َّت ُق ْو َن‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫َل َقدْ َظ َل َم فِ ْرع َْون النَّاس ُظ ْلما عَظِ ْیما‬ ‫‪)12‬‬ ‫َّاس ِرزْ ًقا َح َسنًا‬ ‫الل الن َ‬ ‫َي ْرزُ ُق ُ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪ُ )5‬و ِعدُ ا ْل ُمؤْ مِن ُْو َن َوعْدً ا َح َسنًا‬
‫الصغَار الدَّ ْرس‬ ‫َا ْل َی ْو َم َح َض َرت ال َّطالبات ِّ‬ ‫‪)13‬‬
‫ت ا ْلبِنْت الص ِ‬
‫اد َقة ا ْل ُق ْرآن ا ْل َك ِر ْيم ا ْل َب ِ‬
‫ار َح َة‬ ‫َقر َأ ِ‬ ‫‪)14‬‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ض َّل ا ْل َكافِ ُر ْو َن َض ََّل ًْل َب ِع ْیدً ا‬
‫َّ‬ ‫َ‬
‫الصغَار إِ َّْل ا ْلبِنْت ا ْل َم ِر ْي َضة‬ ‫َل َی ُص ْو َم َّن ْاْلَ ْو َْلد ِّ‬ ‫‪)15‬‬ ‫الصابِ ُر‬‫‪َْ )7‬ل َي ُص ْو ُم ا ْل َی ْو َم إِ َّْل ا ْل َع ْبدُ َّ‬
‫الض َع َفاء َّإْل ا ْل ُم ُل ْوك ال َّظالِمون‬
‫‪َ )16‬لن َي ْظلِ َم النَّاس ُّ‬ ‫‪ُ )8‬ج ِع َل ُم َح َّمد ﷺ َر ُس ْو ًْل عَظِ ْی ًما‬
‫‪َ .‬منْ ُع ْوت ‪َ or‬ن ْعت ‪Complete the following sentences by adding a suitable‬‬
‫ت ‪ ..........‬ا ْلكِ َرا ُم َب ْعدُ‬
‫‪َ )9‬لم ي ْأ ِ‬
‫ْ َ‬ ‫احد‬‫إِنَّما الل ‪ ..........‬و ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫َ ُ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫‪َ )10‬ما ك ََذ َب ا ْل َو َلدُ ‪َ ..........‬ق ُّط‬ ‫اإلنَا ُء ‪َ ..........‬خ ِف ْی ًفا‬ ‫َان ْ ِ‬
‫ك َ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫‪ )11‬إِن ََّما ُي ْفلِ ُح ا ْل ُمؤْ مِن ُْو َن ‪..........‬‬ ‫َما ‪ ..........‬ال َّظال ِ ُم ْو َن ُمت َِّق ْی َن‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫َل َقدْ َف ِر َح ْاْلَ ْو َْل ُد َف َر ًحا ‪..........‬‬ ‫‪)12‬‬ ‫ب ‪َ ..........‬فائِزً ا‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َْل َي ُك ْو ُن ال َّطال ُ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫ت ْاْلُ ُّم إِ َّْل‪َ ..........‬ل ِذ ْي ًذا‬
‫ما صنَع ِ‬
‫َ َ َ‬ ‫‪)13‬‬ ‫ون َر َم َض ُ‬
‫ان َش ْه ًرا ‪..........‬‬ ‫‪َ )5‬ي ُك ُ‬
‫َفتَح ا ْلعم ْاْلَبواب إِ َّْل ‪ ..........‬و ِ‬
‫احدً ا‬ ‫‪)14‬‬ ‫َان ا ْل َع ُّم ‪َ ..........‬م ْس ُر ْو ًرا‬
‫‪َ )6‬ما ك َ‬
‫َ‬ ‫َ َ ُّ ْ َ َ‬
‫َل َیغ ِْف َر َّن ‪ ..........‬ا ْل َغ ُف ْو ُر ‪ ..........‬كَثِ ْی َر ًة‬ ‫‪)15‬‬ ‫‪َ )7‬ل ْی َس ْت ‪ ..........‬ا ْل َح ِز ْينَ ُة ُم ْت َع َب ًة‬
‫‪َ )16‬ل ْن َت ْع ُبدَ الن َِّسا ُء ‪َ ..........‬صن ًَما ‪..........‬‬ ‫‪ )8‬إِ َّن ال ُف َق َرا َء ‪َ ..........‬ل َم ْظ ُل ْو ُم ْو َن‬
‫‪Note‬‬
‫‪َ can be translated after it.‬ن ْعت ‪َ is a proper noun, the‬منْ ُع ْوت ‪If the‬‬
‫الصدِّ ْي َق ُة‬ ‫ِ‬
‫عَائ َش ُة ِّ‬
‫‪, the most truthful‬ڤ ‪Aisha‬‬
‫‪140‬‬
‫‪Non-Human and Broken Human Plurals‬‬
‫‪Non-Human Plurals‬‬
‫‪َ , i.e. things‬ج ْم ُع َغ ْی ِر ا ْل ُع َق ََّل ِء ‪In Arabic, the plurals of non-human nouns,‬‬
‫‪or animals, can be treated as singular and feminine. This will affect‬‬
‫‪ in that they will be in the singular feminine form.‬فِ ْعل ‪َ or‬ن ْعت ‪َ ,‬خ َبر ‪the‬‬
‫ت َأ َّيام ُم َب َار َكة‬
‫َجا َء ْ‬ ‫اْلَن َْه ُار َكبِ ْی َرة‬
‫‪Blessed days have come.‬‬ ‫‪The rivers are big.‬‬
‫َت ْاْلَن َْهار َكبِ ْی َرة‬ ‫كَان ِ‬ ‫‪)11‬‬ ‫اجدُ َق ِد ْي َمة‬
‫‪ )6‬ا ْل َم َس ِ‬ ‫‪َ )1‬أ َّيام ُم َب َاركَة‬
‫اجد َج ِم ْی َلة‬ ‫إن ا ْل َم َس ِ‬
‫َّ‬ ‫‪)12‬‬ ‫ات َط ِو ْي َلة‬ ‫‪َ )7‬ا َّ‬
‫لسن ََو ُ‬ ‫‪َ )2‬أ ْع َیاد ُم َب َاركَة‬
‫ْاْلنِ َیة َم ْم ُل ْوءة زَ ْمزَ م‬ ‫‪)13‬‬ ‫َّات َج ِم ْی َلة‬
‫‪ )8‬ا ْل َجن ُ‬ ‫‪َ )3‬أ ْم َوال كَثِ ْی َرة‬
‫جاء ِ‬
‫ت ْاْلَ َّيام ا ْل ُم َب َاركَة‬ ‫‪)14‬‬ ‫ت َب َصائِ ُر‬‫‪َ )9‬ل َقدْ َجا َء ْ‬ ‫‪ُ )4‬ت ْغ َف ُر ُّ‬
‫الذن ُْو ُب‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ت ا ْل ُب ُی ْوت َج ِد ْيدَ ة‬ ‫َلیس ِ‬
‫َْ‬ ‫‪)15‬‬ ‫‪َ )10‬ذ َه َب ْت ُش ُه ْور كَثِ ْی َرة‬ ‫ات ا ْل ُح ْل َو ُة‬
‫‪ )5‬الت ََّم َر ُ‬
‫‪Complete the descriptive phrase below using the word in brackets.‬‬
‫الس َو ُر ‪َ ( ..........‬ق ِص ْیر)‬
‫‪ُّ )11‬‬ ‫‪َ )6‬أ ْجزَ اء ‪َ ( ..........‬قلِ ْیل)‬ ‫‪َ )1‬أ ْط ِع َمة ‪َ ( ..........‬ل ِذ ْيذ)‬
‫‪ )12‬ع ََسل ‪َ ( ..........‬خالِص)‬ ‫‪ )7‬اْلْ ْش َیا ُء ‪( ..........‬كَثِ ْیر)‬ ‫ُكتُب ‪َ ( ..........‬ط ِو ْيل)‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫ات ‪ُ ( ..........‬ح ْلو)‬‫‪ )13‬الت ََّم َر ُ‬ ‫اجدُ ‪َ ( ..........‬ج ِد ْيد)‬ ‫‪َ )8‬م َس ِ‬ ‫ْاْلَ ْق َسا ُم ‪( ..........‬كَثِ ْیر)‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫(ج ِم ْیل)‬
‫‪ )14‬الدُّ ُر ْو ُس ‪َ ..........‬‬ ‫‪َ )9‬م َو ِاز ْي ُن ‪َ ( ..........‬ص ِغ ْیر)‬ ‫(خ ِف ْیف)‬ ‫ْاْلنِ َی ُة ‪َ ..........‬‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫‪ْ )15‬اْلَ ْصنَا ُم ‪َ ( ..........‬ض ِع ْیف)‬ ‫‪ )10‬ا ْل َمدَ ِار ُس ‪َ ( ..........‬ق ِد ْيم)‬ ‫َأ ْح َجار ‪َ ( ..........‬ث ِق ْیل)‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫‪Note‬‬
‫‪َ of non-human plurals can also occur in the‬ن ْعت ‪Sometimes, the‬‬
‫‪plural form.‬‬
‫آ َيات َب ِّینَات‬ ‫آ َيات َب ِّینَة‬
‫‪clear signs‬‬
‫‪141‬‬
Broken Plurals of Humans
Broken plurals of humans can also be treated either as singular
feminine or singular masculine.
This will affect the ‫ َخ َبر‬, ‫ َن ْعت‬or ‫فِ ْعل‬.
‫َجاء الن َِّسا ُء‬ ‫الر َج ُال‬
ِّ ‫َجا َء‬
‫ت الن َِّسا ُء‬ ِ ‫جاء‬ ‫الر َج ُال‬ ِ
َ َ ِّ ‫َجاءت‬
The women came. The men came.
Vocab
to be healthy, correct ‫َص َّح َي ِص ُّح ِص َّح ًة‬ to call (to prayers) ‫َأ َّذ َن ُيؤَ ِّذ ُن َت ْأ ِذ ْينًا‬
to harm ‫َض َّر َي ُض ُّر َض ًّرا‬ to ascribe partners ْ ‫َأ ْش َر َك ُي ْش ِر ُك‬

‫إش َراكًا‬
to punish ‫ ع ََّذ َب ُي َع ِّذ ُب َت ْع ِذ ْي ًبا‬to avail, be of use ‫َأ ْغنَی ُيغْن ِ ْي إِ ْغنَا ًء‬
to be successful ‫َفازَ َي ُف ْوزُ َف ْوزً ا‬ to account ‫ب ُي َح ِاس ُب ِح َسا ًبا‬ َ ‫اس‬َ ‫َح‬
to act hypocritically ‫نَا َف َق ُينَافِ ُق ُمنَا َف َق ًة نِ َفا ًقا‬ to perform Hajj ‫َح َّج َي ُح ُّج َح ًّجا‬
Exercise 8
ِ ‫الش ُی ْوخ َأ ْم‬
‫س‬ ُّ ‫ت‬ِ ‫) جاء‬11 ‫ات‬ُ ‫) َف ِر َح ْاْلُ َّم َه‬6 ‫) َح ِز َن ْاْل َبا ُء‬1
َ َ
ِ ‫) آ َم َن ا ْل ُم َه‬12
‫اجرون‬ ﴾‫) ﴿ َق َال نِ ْس َوة‬7 ‫َت ْاْل َبا ُء‬ ِ ‫) ح ِزن‬2
َ
﴾‫) ﴿ َل َقدْ ك ُِّذ َب ْت ُر ُسل‬13 ُّ ‫ت‬
‫الش َهدَ ا ُء‬ ِ ‫) ما َت‬8 ‫) َجا َء ُر ُسل‬3
َ
‫ت ْاْلَن َْصار النَّبِ ّي ﷺ‬ ِ ‫) نَصر‬14 ‫ت ْاْلَ ْو َْل ُد‬ ِ ‫) اِس َتی َق َظ‬9 ‫ت ُر ُسل‬ ْ ‫) َجا َء‬4
َ َ ْ ْ
‫ت ْاْلَغْن ِ َیاء ا ْل َم َساكین‬ِ ‫) َأ ْع َط‬15 ‫اج َغدً ا‬ ُ ‫) َي ْر ِج ُع ا ْل ُح َّج‬10
ِ ‫) َف ِرح‬5
ُ ‫ت ْاْلُ َّم َه‬
‫ات‬ َ
142
Removing the ‫َمنْ ُع ْوت‬
The ‫ َمنْ ُع ْوت‬can be removed, leaving the ‫ َن ْعت‬to take its place.
Look at the following example.
‫َأع َْمال َصال ِ َحات‬
righteous deeds
In the example above, the word ‫ َصال ِ َحات‬, pious/righteous, is the ‫َن ْعت‬
of ‫ َأع َْمال‬, i.e. righteous deeds. However, the ‫ َمنْ ُع ْوت‬, ‫ َأع َْمال‬, is removed
and the word ‫ َصال ِ َحات‬takes its place. Both the ‫ َن ْعت‬and ‫ َمنْ ُع ْوت‬are
reflected in the translation, i.e. righteous deeds.
The tarkib of this is written as follows. It is not necessary to
indicate the hidden ‫ َمنْ ُع ْوت‬,
‫َخ َبر‬ ‫ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ ِ ‫َف‬
‫َصالِح‬ ‫َا ْل َف ِق ْی ُر‬ ‫َصال ِ َحات‬ ‫ا ْل ُمؤْ مِن ُْو َن‬ ‫عَ ِم َل‬
The poor man is pious. The believers did good deeds.
Exercise 9
Translate the following sentences into English.
‫) َين ُْص ُر الل ا ْل ُم ْجت َِهدين‬11 ‫الص َل َحا ُء‬
ُّ ‫) َي ْصدُ ُق‬6 ‫اع ا ْل ُف َق َرا ُء‬
َ ‫) َج‬1
‫الصائِمون ال َّط َعام‬ َّ ‫) َيت ُْر ُك‬12 ُ ‫َدت ا ْل ُمؤْ مِن‬
‫َات‬ ِ ‫) اِ ْهت‬7 ‫) َجا َء ا ْل ُب َعدَ ا ُء‬2
ُّ ‫) َين ُْص ُر ْاْلَ ْق ِو َياء‬13
‫الض َع َفاء‬ ‫) َأ ْف َل َح ا ْل ُم ْخلِ ُص ْو َن‬8 ‫) َخ ِس َر ال َّظال ِ ُم‬3
‫ب ا ْل َكافِرون َس ِّیئات‬ َ ‫) ك ََس‬14 ‫الل ا ْل َم ْظ ُل ْو َم‬
ُ ‫) َي ْر َح ُم‬9 ‫) َف ِر َح ا ْل َح ِز ْي ُن‬4
‫ت ا ْل ُم ْسلِمات َح َسنات‬ ِ ‫) كَسب‬15 ‫) ُين ِْف ُق ْاْلَغْن ِ َیا ُء ْاْلَ ْم َو َال‬10 ‫) َب َكی ا ْل َم ْس ُر ْو ُر ْو َن‬5
َ َ
143
‫َم ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق ‪َ as‬ن ْعت‬
‫‪َ to be removed and for the‬منْ ُع ْوت ‪َ , it is common for the‬م ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق ‪In a‬‬
‫‪َ to take its place.‬ن ْعت‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫الل كَثِ ْی ًرا‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫َي ْذك ُُر ا ْل ُم ْسل ُم ْو َن َ‬
‫الل ذك ًْرا كَث ْی ًرا ‪‬‬
‫َي ْذك ُُر ا ْل ُم ْسل ُم ْو َن َ‬
‫‪Muslims remember Allah abundantly.‬‬
‫‪َ .‬م ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق ‪َ , takes the place of the‬ن ْعت ‪In this example, the adjective,‬‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ ‫َف ِ‬
‫كَثِ ْی ًرا‬ ‫الل‬

‫َ‬ ‫ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن‬ ‫َي ْذك ُُر‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق ‪َ as a‬ش ْیئًا ‪Using‬‬

‫‪َ is not an adjective, it can have the‬ش ْیئًا ‪Even though the word‬‬
‫‪meaning of an adjective, e.g. slightest, at all, etc.‬‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َّاس ُظ ْل ًما َقل ْی ًَّل ≈‬
‫َّاس َش ْیئًا‬ ‫َما َي ْظل ُم ُ‬
‫َما َي ْظل ُم ُ‬
‫‪َ .‬م ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق ‪Therefore, it can also take the place of a‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫َّاس َش ْیئًا‬ ‫َما َي ْظل ُم ُ‬
‫‪Allah does not oppress people in the slightest.‬‬
‫َح ْر ُ‬
‫َش ْیئًا‬ ‫َّاس‬

‫الن َ‬ ‫الل‬
‫ُ‬ ‫َي ْظلِ ُم‬ ‫َما‬
‫‪َ )7‬لن َّي ُض َّر ا ْل َكافِرون الل َش ْیئا‬ ‫الل َقلِ ْی ًَّل‬ ‫‪َ )1‬ي ْش ُك ُر الن ُ‬
‫َّاس َ‬
‫‪َ )8‬ل ُی َع ِّذ َب َّن الل ال َّظالِمین َش ِد ْيدا‬ ‫َّاس َش ْیئًا‬‫الل الن َ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َْل َي ْظل ُم ُ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫اس َب َّن الل ا ْل ُمؤْ مِنین َي ِس ْیرا‬
‫‪َ )9‬لیح ِ‬
‫ُ َ‬ ‫َّاس ا ْل َم َال كَثِ ْی ًرا‬
‫ب الن ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُيح ُّ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫‪َ )10‬دعَا ن ُْوح ا ْل َق ْوم ا ْل َكافِرين كَثِ ْیرا‬ ‫َغدً ا َل ْن ُتغْن ِ َي ْاْلَ ْو َْل ُد َش ْیئًا‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫الصالِحون َط ِو ْيَّل‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )11‬ي ُق ْو ُم ا ْلع َباد َّ‬ ‫َل َقدْ َض َّل ا ْل ُم ْش ِرك ُْو َن َب ِع ْیدً ا‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫‪َ )12‬ي ْذك ُُر ا ْل ُمؤْ مِنون ا ْل ُمتَّقون الل كَثِ ْیرا‬ ‫َار كَثِ ْی ًرا‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ف ِر َح ْاْلَ ْو َْل ُد ِّ‬
‫الصغ ُ‬
‫‪144‬‬
Recap of ‫َم ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق‬
‫ َم ْصدَ ر‬on its Own ‫ َم ْصدَ ر‬with a ‫َن ْعت‬

Emphasis Description of the verb
‫الر ُج ُل ُش ْك ًرا كَثِ ْی ًرا‬
َّ ‫َش َك َر‬
‫الر ُج ُل ُش ْك ًرا‬
‫الر ُج ُل كَثِ ْی ًرا‬
Summary
Phrases
Descriptive Phrases
‫َمنْ ُع ْوت‬ Noun Agree in DING (Non-
human plurals =
‫َن ْعت‬ Adjective feminine singular)
145
‫َن ْعت ‪َ and‬خ َبر ‪Differentiating Between‬‬
‫َمنْ ُع ْوت ‪َ agree in three characteristics, i.e. ING, whilst‬خ َبر ‪ُ and‬م ْبتَدَ أ ‪The‬‬
‫‪َ agree in all four characteristics, i.e. DING.‬ن ْعت ‪and‬‬
‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪I‬‬ ‫‪N‬‬ ‫‪G‬‬
‫ُم ْف َرد‬
‫َم ْع ِر َفة‬ ‫ُم َذكَّر‬
‫إِع َْراب‬ ‫ُمثَنًّی‬
‫نَكِ َرة‬ ‫ُمؤَ نَّث‬
‫َج ْمع‬
‫َا ْلو َلدُ الص ِ‬

‫اد ُق‬ ‫‪the truthful‬‬
‫َّ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫✓‬ ‫✓‬ ‫✓‬ ‫✓‬ ‫َمنْ ُع ْوت – نَ ْعت‬ ‫‪boy‬‬
‫و َلد ص ِ‬
‫ادق‬ ‫)‪(Phrase‬‬
‫َ َ‬ ‫✓‬ ‫✓‬ ‫✓‬ ‫✓‬ ‫‪a truthful boy‬‬
‫ا ْلو َلدُ ص ِ‬
‫ادق‬ ‫‪The boy is‬‬
‫َ َ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫✓‬ ‫✓‬ ‫✓‬ ‫ُمبْتَدَ أ – َخبَر‬ ‫‪truthful.‬‬
‫ْاْلَو َْلد ص ِ‬
‫اد ُق ْو َن‬ ‫)‪(Sentence‬‬ ‫‪The boys are‬‬
‫ْ ُ َ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫✓‬ ‫✓‬ ‫✓‬ ‫‪truthful.‬‬
‫ُم ْبتَدَ أ ‪َ -‬خ َبر ‪Translate the following. Ensure you differentiate between‬‬
‫‪َ structures.‬منْ ُع ْوت ‪َ -‬ن ْعت ‪and‬‬
‫‪ )9‬ا ْل َی ْومان ال َّط ِو ْيَّلن‬ ‫الر ُب ا ْل َغ ُف ْو ُر‬
‫‪َّ )5‬‬ ‫الر ُج ُل َق ِوي‬
‫‪َّ )1‬‬
‫‪ )10‬نِ َساء َصالِحات‬ ‫الر ُّب َغ ُف ْور‬‫‪َّ )6‬‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ر ُجل َق ِوي‬
‫‪ )11‬النِّ َساء َصالِحات‬ ‫ان َط ِو ْي ََّل ِن‬ ‫‪ )7‬ا ْلیوم ِ‬
‫َْ َ‬ ‫الر ُج ُل ا ْل َق ِو ُّي‬
‫‪َّ )3‬‬
‫الصالِحات‬ ‫‪ )12‬النِّ َساء َّ‬ ‫ان َط ِو ْي ََّل ِن‬‫‪ ) 8‬يو م ِ‬
‫َْ َ‬ ‫‪َ )4‬رب َغ ُف ْور‬
‫‪َ structures.‬منْ ُع ْوت‪َ -‬ن ْعت ‪Change the following sentences into‬‬
‫‪ )9‬النَّ ْهران َص ِغ ْیران‬ ‫َّ‬
‫الش ْه ُر ُم َب َارك‬ ‫‪)5‬‬ ‫النَّافِ َذ ُة ُم ْغ َل َقة‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫َان ا ْل َم ْكتَب َث ِق ْیَّل‬
‫‪ )10‬ك َ‬ ‫ْاْلُ ْستَا ُذ َصالِح‬ ‫‪)6‬‬ ‫اسق‬ ‫الشاب َف ِ‬
‫َّ ُّ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫‪ )11‬ا ْل َجدَّ تان َم ْس ُر ْو َرتان‬ ‫ا ْل ُف َق َرا ُء َشاكِ ُر ْو َن‬ ‫‪)7‬‬ ‫ا ْل ُك ْر ِس ُّي َقبِ ْیح‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫‪ )12‬ا ْل ُم ْسلِمون ُم ْخلِصون‬ ‫َان ج ِمی َلت ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫الش ُی ْو ُخ كِ َرام‬
‫َان‬ ‫ا ْل َجنَّت َ ْ‬ ‫‪)8‬‬ ‫ُّ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫‪146‬‬
Part 2: Demonstrative Phrases
A demonstrative phrase is made up of a demonstrative pronoun
followed by a noun.
this man that man
ِ
The demonstrative pronoun is called ‫اإل َش َارة‬ ِ ْ ‫اسم‬. ِ
ُ ْ
ِ ِ
The thing being pointed at is called ‫ ُم َشار إ َل ْیه‬.
The Demonstrative Pronouns
There are twelve ‫اإل َش َار ِة‬ ِ ْ ‫ َأ ْس َما ُء‬:
• Six are for indicating things which are close. These are called
ِ ‫اإل َش َار ِة ل ِ ْل َق ِر ْي‬
‫ب‬ ِ ْ ‫ َأ ْس َما ُء‬.
• Six are for indicating things which are far away. These are
called ‫اإل َش َار ِة ل ِ ْل َب ِع ْی ِد‬ ِ ْ ‫ َأ ْس َما ُء‬.
All twelve are listed below. Notice that some of the ‫اإل َش َار ِة‬ ِ ْ ‫ َأ ْس َما ُء‬are
pronounced differently to how they are written.
‫اإل َش َار ِة‬
ِ ْ ‫َأسماء‬
ُ َ ْ ‫اإل َش َار ِة‬
ِ ْ ‫َأسماء‬
ُ َ ْ
‫ل ِ ْل َب ِع ْی ِد‬ ‫ب‬ ِ ‫ل ِ ْل َق ِر ْي‬
‫ٰذل ِ َك‬ ‫ٰه َذا‬

That This
‫َذانِ َك‬ ِ ‫ٰه َذ‬
‫ان‬
‫ُم َثنًّی‬ ‫َا ْل ُم َذك َُّر‬
Those These
‫ُأو ٰلئِ َك‬ ‫ٰهؤُ َْل ِء‬
‫َج ْمع‬
Those These
‫تِ ْل َك‬ ‫ٰه ِذ ِه‬

That This
‫َتانِ َك‬ ِ ‫َها َت‬
‫ان‬
‫ُم َثنًّی‬ ُ ‫َا ْل ُمؤَ ن‬
‫َّث‬
Those These
‫ُأو ٰلئِ َك‬ ‫ٰهؤُ َْل ِء‬
‫َج ْمع‬
Those These
147
Rules of Demonstrative Phrases
Rules of the ِ‫اإل َش َارة‬ ِ ْ ‫اِسم‬
ُ ْ
ِ ِ
1. The ‫ َأ ْس َما ُء ْاإل َش َارة‬are ‫ َم ْع ِر َفة‬by nature and therefore do not need ‫ َا ْل‬to
make them ‫ َم ْع ِر َفة‬.
2. The ‫اإل َش َار ِة‬
ِ ْ ‫ َأسماء‬are ‫م ْبنِي‬, except the ‫ م َثنًّی‬forms which are ‫ م ْعرب‬and
ُ َ ْ َ ُ َ ُ
change as normal ‫ ُمثنًّی‬nouns. َ
‫َها َت ْی ِن‬ ِ ‫ها َت‬
‫ان‬ ‫ٰه َذ ْي ِن‬ ِ ‫ٰه َذ‬
‫ان‬
 
‫َت ْین ِ َك‬
 ‫َتان َك‬
ِ
‫َذ ْين َك‬  ‫َذانك‬
ِ ِ
3. The demonstrative pronoun comes before the noun.

ُ ‫ٰهذا ال ُق‬
‫رآن‬
this Quran
ُ ‫ا ْل ُق‬
‫رآن‬ ‫َه َذا‬
‫ُم َشار إِ َلیْ ِه‬ ‫اإل َش َار ِة‬

ِ ْ ‫اِسم‬
ُ ْ
4. If the ‫ ُم َشار إِ َل ْی ِه‬is a non-human plural, the ‫اإل َش َار ِة‬
ِ ْ ‫ اِ ْس ُم‬will be singular
and feminine.
ِِ
ُ ‫ٰهذه ْاْلَ َب َو‬
‫اب‬
5. If the ‫ ُم َشار إِ َل ْی ِه‬is a broken human plural, the ‫اإل َش َار ِة‬
ِ ْ ‫ اِ ْس ُم‬can also be
singular and feminine.
ِ ِ
‫الر ُس ُل‬
ُّ ‫ت ْل َك‬ ُّ ‫ُأو ٰلئ َك‬
‫الر ُس ُل‬
Rules of the ‫ُم َشار إِ َل ْی ِه‬

1. The ‫ ُم َشار إِ َل ْی ِه‬must always have an ‫ َا ْل‬. A name cannot be the ‫ ُم َشار إِ َل ْی ِه‬.
2. The ‫اإل َش َار ِة‬ِ ْ ‫ اِ ْس ُم‬and its ‫ ُم َشار إِ َل ْی ِه‬must agree in all four characteristics,
i.e. DING.
However, because the ‫اإل َش َار ِة‬ ِ ْ ‫ َأ ْس َما ُء‬are ‫ َم ْبنِي‬, we will not notice the
change in its irab.
148
‫ٰذل ِ َك ا ْلكِتَاب‬ ‫‪)16‬‬ ‫‪ٰ )11‬ذل ِ َك ا ْل َخلِ ْی ُل‬ ‫ان ْاْلُ ْخت ِ‬
‫َان‬ ‫‪ٰ )6‬ها َت ِ‬ ‫‪ٰ )1‬هذا ْاْلُ ْستَا ُذ‬
‫ٰه ِذ ِه ْاْلَن َْهار‬ ‫‪)17‬‬ ‫ٰه َذا ْاْلُ ُس ُب ْو ُع‬ ‫‪)12‬‬ ‫‪ٰ )7‬هؤُ َْل ِء الن َِّسا ُء‬ ‫‪ )2‬ت ْل َك ْاْلَ ْب َو ُ‬
‫اب‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ُأو َلئِ َك ا ْل ِع َبا ُد‬ ‫‪ٰ )8‬ذل ِ َك الدِّ ْي ُن‬ ‫یخ ِ‬ ‫‪ٰ )3‬ه ِ‬
‫الساعَة‬ ‫ت ْل َك َّ‬ ‫‪)18‬‬ ‫‪)13‬‬ ‫ان‬ ‫الش َ‬ ‫ذان َّ‬
‫الش ْهران‬ ‫ٰذانِ َك َّ‬ ‫‪)19‬‬ ‫الر ُس ُل‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ت ْل َك ُّ‬ ‫‪)14‬‬ ‫‪َ )9‬ذانِ َك ا ْل َق َلم ِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫َ‬ ‫‪ٰ )4‬هؤُ َْل ِء ا ْل ُم ُل ْو ُك‬
‫ُأو َلئِ َك ْاْلَ َخ َوات‬ ‫‪)20‬‬ ‫َتانِ َك السنَت ِ‬
‫َان‬ ‫َّ‬ ‫‪)15‬‬ ‫‪ٰ )10‬ه َذا ا ْل ُك ْر ِس ُّي‬ ‫‪ٰ )5‬ه ِذ ِه الت َّْم َر ُة‬
‫اإل َش َارة ل ِ ْل َق ِر ْي ِب ‪Add an appropriate‬‬
‫اس ُم ْ ِ‬
‫‪ْ to the following and translate.‬‬
‫‪ ....... )16‬ال ُّس ْو َرتان‬ ‫‪ ....... )11‬ا ْل َجدَّ ُة‬ ‫‪ْ ....... )6‬اْلَئِ َّم ُة‬ ‫ات‬
‫‪ ....... )1‬الت ََّم َر ُ‬
‫‪ ....... )17‬ال َّش َراب‬ ‫‪ ....... )12‬ا ْل َجنَّ ُة‬ ‫‪ْ ....... )7‬اْلل ِ َه ُة‬ ‫‪ِ ْ ....... )2‬‬
‫اإل ْخ َو ُة‬
‫‪ ....... )18‬ال ُّض ُی ْوف‬ ‫‪ ....... )13‬ا ْل َخ َاْل ُ‬
‫ت‬ ‫‪ ....... )8‬الصنَم ِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫‪ْ ....... )3‬اْلَعْدَ ا ُء‬
‫َّ َ‬
‫‪ْ ....... )19‬اْلَ ْط ِع َمة‬ ‫ات‬
‫او ُ‬‫‪ ....... )14‬ال َّس َم َ‬ ‫‪ ....... )9‬ا ْل َج َب ََّل ِن‬ ‫‪ْ ....... )4‬اْلَ ْر ُض‬
‫‪ ....... )20‬ال ِّط ْفَّلن‬ ‫‪ ....... )15‬السنَت ِ‬
‫َان‬ ‫‪ْ ....... )10‬اْلَ ْجدَ ا ُد‬ ‫‪ْ ....... )5‬اْلُم ِ‬
‫ان‬
‫َّ‬ ‫َّ‬
‫اإل َش َارة ل ِ ْل َب ِع ْی ِد ‪Add an appropriate‬‬
‫اس ُم ْ ِ‬
‫‪ْ to the following and translate.‬‬
‫‪ ....... )16‬النَّاس‬ ‫‪ ....... )11‬ال َّل ْی َل ُة‬ ‫‪ْ ....... )6‬اْلَ ْق ََّل ُم‬ ‫‪ ....... )1‬ال ِّط ْف َل ُة‬
‫‪ ....... )17‬ا ْل ِع ْلم‬ ‫‪ْ ....... )12‬اْلَ ْص ِد َقا ُء‬ ‫‪ ....... )7‬ا ْل َق َم ُر‬ ‫‪ ....... )2‬اْلَ ْط َف ُال‬
‫‪ِ ْ ....... )18‬‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫َّاجر ِ‬
‫اإلنَاء‬ ‫ب‬‫‪ ....... )13‬ا ْل َم َكات ُ‬ ‫‪ ....... )8‬ا ْل َق ْو ُم‬ ‫ان‬ ‫‪ ....... )3‬الت ِ َ‬
‫‪ ....... )19‬النَّ ْجم‬ ‫‪ ....... )14‬ا ْل ُم ُل ْو ُك‬ ‫‪ ....... )9‬ا ْل ُكت ُ‬
‫ُب‬ ‫‪ْ ....... )4‬اْلَع َْما ُم‬
‫‪ ....... )20‬النَّ ْفس‬ ‫‪ ....... )15‬النَّ ُار‬ ‫‪ ....... )10‬ا ْل َكر ِ‬
‫اس ُّي‬ ‫‪ ....... )5‬ا ْل ُف َق َرا ُء‬
‫َ‬
‫‪149‬‬
‫‪A Demonstrative Phrase in a Sentence‬‬
‫‪A demonstrative phrase occurs as any of the main parts of a‬‬
‫الر ُج ُل َل ْی ًَّل‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ُي َص ِّل ْي َذل َك َّ‬
‫‪That man prays at night.‬‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِیْ ِه‬ ‫َف ِ‬
‫َل ْی ًَّل‬ ‫الر ُج ُل‬

‫َّ‬ ‫َذل ِ َك‬ ‫ُي َص ِّلي‬
‫ُم َشار إِ َل ْی ِه‬ ‫اإل َش َار ِة‬

‫اِسم ْ ِ‬
‫ْ ُ‬
‫‪ )7‬إِ َّن ٰهؤُ َْل ِء النَّاس َل َم َساكین‬ ‫‪ٰ )1‬ه ِذ ِه ْاْلَ ْق ََّل ُم َج ِد ْيدَ ة‬
‫ان ا ْل َو َلدان َشاكِرين‬ ‫َان ٰه َذ ِ‬‫‪ )8‬ك َ‬ ‫الش ْی ُخ ُأ ْستَا ًذا‬
‫َما ٰه َذا َّ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫الر ُجَّلن إِ َّْل َف ِق ْیران‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ )9‬إِ ْن ٰه َذان َّ‬ ‫ٰذل ِ َك ْ ِ‬
‫اإلنَا ُء َم ْم ُل ْوء َل َبنًا‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫ادقات‬ ‫‪َ )10‬ت ُكو ُن ٰهؤُ َْل ِء ا ْلبنَات ص ِ‬ ‫َي ُك ْو ُن ٰذل ِ َك ْاْلَ ْج ُر َكبِ ْی ًرا‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ْ‬
‫الر َجال َأ ْق ِو َياء َّإْل زَ ْيدا‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪َّ )11‬‬ ‫َل ْی َس ٰه َذا ا ْل ُك ْر ِس ُّي َق ِد ْي ًما‬
‫إن ٰهؤُ َْلء ِّ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫‪ِ )12‬إن ََّما ُأو ٰل ِئ َك ا ْل ُم َع ِّلمات ِن َساء ِض َعاف‬ ‫َت تِ ْل َك ال َّت ْم َر ُة ُح ْل َو ًة‬ ‫َما كَان ْ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫َاب ُم َح َّمد إِ َّْل َذ ْين ِ َك ا ْل َی ْومین‬
‫‪َ )7‬ما غ َ‬ ‫الل ٰه َذا ا ْل ُم َع ِّل َم ِش َفا ًء‬
‫‪َ )1‬ش َفی ُ‬
‫‪َ )8‬ش ِر َب َه َذا ا ْل َو َلد َذل ِ َك ال َّل َبن َجالِسا‬ ‫الر ُج ُل ِت ْل َك ال َّل ْی َل َة‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ص َّلی ٰه َذا ّ‬
‫‪ِ )9‬ا َّت َخ َذ ُأو ٰل ِئ َك النَّاس تِ ْل َك ْاْلَ ْصنَام آل ِ َهة‬ ‫ت ٰه ِذ ِه ا ْلبِن ُْت ٰذل ِ َك ال َی ْو َم‬ ‫‪َ )3‬سا َف َر ْ‬
‫ت تِ ْل َك ا ْل ُم َع ِّل َمة ٰذل ِ َك ا ْلكِتَاب َقائِ َمة‬ ‫‪َ )10‬ق َر َأ ْ‬ ‫احتِ َسا ًبا‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )4‬ل َقدْ َصا َم ٰهؤُ َْلء ْاْلَ ْو َْل ُد ْ‬
‫ت ٰه ِذ ِه ْاْلُ ّم ٰهؤُ َْل ِء ا ْل َبنَات إِ َّْل َخ ِد ْي َجة‬ ‫‪ )11‬ن ََص َر ْ‬ ‫الر ُج ُل‬ ‫ِ ِ‬
‫‪ )5‬إِن ََّما َين ُْص ُر ٰه َذا ا ْل َفق ْی َر ٰذل َك َّ‬
‫‪َ )12‬ت ْح َف ُظ ُأو ٰلئ َك ا ْل َبنَات ا ْل ُقرآن ا ْل َك ِر ْيم ْ‬ ‫اش َع َت ْی ِن‬ ‫َان َخ ِ‬ ‫ان ا ْلبِنْت ِ‬‫‪َْ )6‬ل ُتص ِّلي َها َت ِ‬
‫َ ْ‬
‫‪150‬‬
Differentiating Between ‫ َخ َبر‬and ‫ُم َشار إِ َل ْی ِه‬
The ‫ ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬and ‫ َخ َبر‬agree in three characteristics, i.e. ING.
The ‫اإل َش َار ِة‬
ِ ْ ‫ اِسم‬and ‫ م َشار إِ َل ْی ِه‬agree in all four characteristics, i.e. DING.
ُ ْ ُ
Therefore, if the word after the ‫اإل َش َار ِة‬ ِ ْ ‫ اسم‬has an ‫ َا ْل‬, it will be ‫م َشار إِ َل ْی ِه‬.
ُ ْ ُ
ِ ِ
However, if the word after the ‫ ْاس ُم ْاإل َش َارة‬does not have ‫ َال‬, it will ْ
become the ‫ َخ َبر‬.
In this case, the ‫اإل َش َار ِة‬ ِ ْ ‫ اِسم‬will not have a ‫م َشار إِ َل ْی ِه‬.
ُ ْ ُ
The flow chart below summarises the above rule.
ِ
Word  has an ‫َا ْل‬  ‫ ُم َشار إِ َل ْیه‬ ُ‫َه َذا ا ْل َو َلد‬
after an ‫َه َذا َو َلد‬
does not have an
ِ ْ ‫اِ ْس ُم‬
 ‫َا ْل‬  ‫َخ َبر‬ 
‫َه َذا زَ ْيد‬
Look at the examples below.
‫ َخ َبر‬- ‫ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬ ‫اإل َش َار ِة – ُم َشار إِ َل ْی ِه‬
‫َه َذا َو َلد‬ ُ‫َه َذا ا ْل َو َلد‬

This is a boy. this boy
‫َو َلد‬ ‫َه َذا‬ ُ‫ا ْل َو َلد‬ ‫َه َذا‬

1
The word after the ‫اإل َش َار ِة‬

ِ ْ ‫ اِ ْس ُم‬will be the ‫ َخ َبر‬even if it is a name.
‫َه َذا زَ ْيد‬

‫زَ ْيد‬ ‫َه َذا‬
151
‫ان ا ْم َر َأتان‬ ‫‪َ )11‬ها َت ِ‬ ‫‪ٰ )6‬هؤُ َْل ِء َأ ْو َْلد‬ ‫ٰه َذا َباب‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫ان ا ْل ُك ْر ِس ّیان‬
‫‪ٰ )12‬ه َذ ِ‬ ‫‪ٰ )7‬ذل ِ َك َّ‬
‫الش ْه ُر‬ ‫ٰه ِذ ِه ال َّل ْی َل ُة‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫‪ُ )13‬أو َلئِ َك ْاْلَ َخ َوات‬ ‫‪َ )8‬ذانِ َك كِتَاب ِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ٰذل ِ َك ا ْل َم ُال‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫‪َ ﴿ )14‬ما َه َذا إِ َّْل َب َشر﴾‬ ‫‪ٰ )9‬ه ِذ ِه ْاْلَ ْرض‬ ‫ٰذل ِ َك ن َْهر‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫‪﴿ )15‬إِ ْن َه َذا إِ َّْل َم َلك ك َِريم﴾‬ ‫‪ُ )10‬أو َلئِ َك الن َِّساء‬ ‫تِ ْل َك ا ْل َم ْر َأ ُة‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫‪Summary‬‬
‫‪Phrases‬‬
‫‪Demonstrative Phrases‬‬
‫اإل َش َار ِة‬‫اِسم ْ ِ‬
‫ْ ُ‬ ‫‪Demonstrative Pronoun‬‬
‫‪Agree in DING‬‬
‫ُم َشار إِ َل ْی ِه‬ ‫َا ْل ‪Must have an‬‬
‫‪152‬‬
Part 3: Conjunction Phrases
A conjunctive phrase comprises two or more words joined with a
conjunction, like and, or, etc.
Muhammad ‫ ﷺ‬and Nooh‫ڠ‬
In Arabic, a conjunction is called ‫ َح ْر ُف َع ْطف‬.
ِ ‫ف ا ْلع ْط‬ ِ
The word before the ‫ف‬ َ ُ ‫ َح ْر‬is called ‫ َم ْع ُط ْوف َع َل ْیه‬.
ِ ‫ف ا ْلع ْط‬
The word after the ‫ف‬ َ ُ ‫ َح ْر‬is called ‫ َم ْع ُط ْوف‬.
Rules of Conjunctions
The ‫ َم ْع ُط ْوف‬will have the same ‫ إِع َْراب‬as the ‫ َم ْع ُطوف َع َل ْی ِه‬.
ُ‫ُم َح َّمد َو َأ ْح َمد‬
ُ‫َأ ْح َمد‬ ‫َو‬ ‫ُم َح َّمد‬
‫َم ْع ُط ْوف‬ ‫ف َع ْطف‬

ُ ‫َح ْر‬ ‫َم ْع ُطوف َع َلیْ ِه‬
Common Arabic Conjunctions

1. ‫ َو‬: and
ُ‫ُم َح َّمد َو َأ ْح َمد‬
Muhammad and Ahmad
2. ‫ َف‬: then (immediate)
ِ
ُ ‫َفاط َم ُة َفزَ ْين‬
‫َب‬
Fatima then Zainab
3. ‫ ُث َّم‬: then (delayed)
‫ا ْل ِع ْل ُم ُث َّم ا ْل َع َم ُل‬
knowledge then practice
4. ‫ َأ ْو‬: or
‫ُمؤْ مِن َأ ْو كَافِر‬
a believer or disbeliever
If ‫ َأ ْو‬is followed by a word with an ‫ َا ْل‬, the ‫ و‬will be given a ‫ َك ْس َرة‬to
aid pronunciation.
ِ ‫َا ْل َم ْس‬
‫جدُ َأ ِو ا ْل َب ْی ُت‬
153
‫‪ُ )10‬م َح َّمد ُث َّم َخالِد‬ ‫‪َ )7‬تمرة َأو َتمر َت ِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫َْ ْ َْ‬
‫‪ )4‬سنَة و َشهر ِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫َ َ َْ‬ ‫‪َ )1‬ي ْوم َو َل ْی َلة‬
‫‪ْ )11‬اْلَ ْرض َو َّ‬

‫الس َماء‬ ‫الش ْم ُس َوا ْل َق َم ُر‬
‫‪َّ )8‬‬ ‫‪ْ )5‬اْلَ ُب َأ ِو ْاْلُ ُّم‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ماء َأ ْو َل َبن‬
‫‪ )12‬ا ْل ُم ْسلِمون َوا ْل ُم ْسلِمات‬ ‫ان و َلی َلت ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪ْ )3‬اْلَ ُخ َف ْاْلُ ْخ َت ِ‬
‫‪ْ )9‬اْلَ ْنبِ َیا ُء ُّ‬
‫والر ُس ُل‬ ‫َان‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ي ْو َم َ ْ‬ ‫ان‬
‫‪Vocab‬‬
‫‪well-being‬‬ ‫‪ son‬عَافِ َیة‬ ‫ا ْبن ج َأ ْبنَاء‪ْ ،‬و َن‬
‫‪village‬‬ ‫َق ْر َية ج ُق ًری‬ ‫‪hot‬‬ ‫حار‬
‫‪resurrection‬‬ ‫قِ َیا َمة‬ ‫‪living‬‬ ‫َحي ج َأ ْح َیاء‬
‫‪city‬‬ ‫َم ِد ْينَة ج ُمدُ ن‬ ‫‪bread‬‬ ‫ُخ ْبز ج َأ ْخ َباز‬
‫‪straight‬‬ ‫ُم ْست َِق ْیم‬ ‫‪alcohol‬‬ ‫َخ ْمر‬
‫‪dead‬‬ ‫َم ِّیت ج َأ ْم َوات‬ ‫‪pomegranate‬‬ ‫ُر َّمانَة ج ات‬

‫َو ِ‬
‫اجب‬ ‫َص َحابِي ج َص َحا َبة‬
‫‪compulsory‬‬ ‫‪companion‬‬
‫‪َ an antonym of the‬م ْع ُط ْوف ‪Complete the phrase below by making the‬‬
‫‪َ .‬م ْع ُط ْوف َع َل ْی ِه‬
‫‪َ )9‬ص ِد ْيقان َو ‪..........‬‬ ‫‪َ )5‬قائِ َمة َو ‪..........‬‬ ‫‪ )1‬عَالِم َو ‪..........‬‬
‫‪ْ )10‬اْلَغْن ِ َیاء َو ‪..........‬‬ ‫‪ )6‬كَافِر َت ِ‬

‫ان َو ‪..........‬‬ ‫َ‬ ‫‪ْ )2‬اْلَ ْح َیا ُء َو ‪..........‬‬
‫‪َ )11‬ح ِز ْينَة َو ‪..........‬‬ ‫ات َو ‪..........‬‬ ‫‪ )7‬ا ْلح ِ‬

‫اض َر ُ‬ ‫‪ )3‬مجت َِهدَ ِ‬
‫ان َو ‪..........‬‬
‫َ‬ ‫ُ ْ‬
‫‪َ )12‬خ ِف ْی َفتان َو ‪..........‬‬ ‫‪ )8‬ال َّظال ِ ُم َو ‪..........‬‬ ‫‪ )4‬ا ْل ُم ْخلِ ُ‬

‫ص َو ‪..........‬‬
‫‪154‬‬
‫‪A Conjunctive Phrase in a Sentence‬‬
‫‪A conjunctive phrase occurs as any of the main parts of a sentence.‬‬
‫َسا َف َر َخالِد َو َحامِد‬
‫‪Khalid and Hamid travelled.‬‬
‫َفاعَل‬ ‫فِ ْعل‬
‫َحامِد‬ ‫َو‬ ‫َخالِد‬ ‫َسا َف َر‬

‫َح ْر ُ‬ ‫َم ْع ُطوف َع َلیْ ِه‬
‫سجد َوا ْل َب ْیت َب ِع ْیدين‬ ‫‪َ )7‬ل ْی َس ا ْل َم ِ‬ ‫الشمس وا ْل َقمر آيت ِ‬
‫َان‬ ‫َّ ْ ُ َ َ ُ َ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫الش ْیخ َو ْاْلَ َساتِ َذة َل َصالِحون‬ ‫‪ )8‬إِ َّن َّ‬ ‫َما ِع ْی َسی َو َم ْر َي ُم إِ ٰله ْی ِن‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫َت الدُّ نْیا َم ْم ُل ْو َءة َج ْهَّل َو ُظ ْلما‬‫‪ )9‬كَان ِ‬ ‫َل ْلكِتَاب وا ْل َق َلم ج ِديدَ ِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫ُ َ ْ‬ ‫ُ َ‬
‫إن محمدا ونُوحا رسوْلن ص ِ‬ ‫اإلنَا ُء َم ْم ُل ْوء َما ًء َو َل َبنًا‬‫إِن ََّما ْ ِ‬
‫ادقان‬ ‫َ‬ ‫‪ْ ُ َ ْ َ َّ َ ُ َّ )10‬‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫‪ )11‬إِ ْن ِع ْیسی َو َم ْر َيم إِ َّْل َع ْبدان َصالِحان‬ ‫‪َ )5‬ي ُك ْو ُن ا ْل َی ْو ُم َوال َّل ْی ُل َط ِو ْي َل ْی ِن‬
‫واْلَن َْصار َص َحا َبة‬
‫اجرون ْ‬ ‫‪ )12‬كَان ِ‬
‫َت ا ْل ُم َه ِ‬ ‫َان ْاْلَ ُب َو ْاْلُ ُّم َصائِ َم ْی ِن‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ما ك َ‬
‫‪َ )8‬ص َّلی ٰهؤُ َْل ِء النَّاس إِ َّْل َخالِدا وزَ ْينَب‬ ‫الل ا ْل َجنَّ َة والن ََّار‬
‫‪َ )1‬خ َل َق ُ‬
‫‪َ )9‬يدْ عُو ُأو ٰلئِ َك ا ْل ُم ْسلِمون الل َرغَبا َو َر َهبا‬ ‫خ َذ ِع ْی َسی َو َم ْر َي ُم إِ ٰل َه ْی ِن‬
‫‪ُ )2‬ا ُّت ِ‬
‫ت ْاْلُ ّم تِ ْل َك ال ِّط ْف َلة َساكِتَة َو َجال ِ َسة‬ ‫‪ )10‬ر َأ ِ‬

‫َ‬ ‫‪َ )3‬ش ِر َب ٰه َذا ا ْل َو َلدُ َما ًء ُث َّم َل َبنًا‬
‫‪َ )11‬ج َع َل الل ال َّل ْیل َوالن ََّهار آ َيتین عَظِ ْی َمتین‬ ‫ت ا ْل ُم َع ِّل َم ُة ا ْل َی ْو َم َو َأ ْم ِ‬
‫س‬ ‫‪ )4‬صام ِ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫‪َ )12‬ل َی ُص ْو َم َّن ا ْل ُم ْسلِمون َوا ْل ُم ْسلِمات َر َم َضان‬ ‫الل َل ْی ًَّل َون ََه ًارا‬‫ون َ‬ ‫‪َ )5‬ي ْذك ُُر ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم َ‬
‫‪َ )13‬ل َی ِز ْيدَ َّن ا ْل ُق ْرآن ا ْل َك ِر ْيم ا ْل ُم ْسلِمین ِع ْلما َوإِ ْي َمانا‬ ‫‪ )6‬ن ََص َر ْاْلَ ُخ َو ْاْلُ ْخ ُت ْاْلُ َّم َو ْاْلَ َب‬
‫اح ِت َسابا‬
‫‪َ )14‬ي ُق ْو ُم ا ْل ُم ْس ِلمون َوا ْل ُم ْس ِلمات َر َم َضان ِإ ْي َمانا َو ْ‬ ‫‪َْ )7‬ل ُي َسافِ ُر َغدً ا إِ َّْل َأ ْح َمدُ َو َخ ِد ْي َج ُة‬
‫‪155‬‬
‫‪Other Conjunctions‬‬
‫)إِ َّما( ‪Either‬‬
‫ف ا ْلع ْط ِ‬
‫ف ‪The‬‬ ‫‪َ .‬أ ْو ‪ is used to convey the meaning of either, like‬إِ َّما ‪َ of‬ح ْر ُ َ‬
‫‪َ and is repeated‬م ْع ُط ْوف َع َل ْی ِه ‪ is brought before the‬إِ َّما ‪The particle‬‬
‫‪.‬و ‪َ along with the particle‬م ْع ُط ْوف ‪before the‬‬
‫‪This is translated as either … or.‬‬
‫ا ْل ِف ْع ُل إِ َّما ُم ْث َبت َوإِ َّما َمن ِْفي‬
‫‪A verb is either affirmative or negative.‬‬
‫َخبَر‬ ‫ُمبْتَدَ أ‬
‫َمن ِْفي‬ ‫َوإِ َّما‬ ‫ُم ْث َبت‬ ‫إِ َّما‬ ‫ا ْل ِف ْع ُل‬

‫َح ْر ُ‬ ‫مع ُطوف َع َل ِ‬
‫یه‬ ‫ف َع ْطف‬
‫َح ْر ُ‬
‫َْ ْ‬
‫‪َ .‬أ ْو ‪َ can be replaced by‬وإِ َّما ‪The second‬‬
‫ِْ‬
‫اْل ْس ُم إِ َّما ُم َذكَّر َأ ْو ُمؤَ نَّث‬
‫‪A noun is either masculine or feminine.‬‬
‫ِْ‬
‫ُمؤَ نَّث‬ ‫َأ ْو‬ ‫ُم َذكَّر‬ ‫إِ َّما‬ ‫اْل ْس ُم‬

‫یه‬ ‫ف َع ْطف‬
‫َح ْر ُ‬
‫َْ ْ‬
‫‪َ )6‬ي ْر ِج ُع ا ْل ُح َّجاج إِ َّما ال َی ْو َم َوإِ َّما َغدً ا‬ ‫َأك ََل زَ ْيد إِ َّما َل ْح ًما َوإِ َّما ُخ ْبزً ا‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫‪َ )7‬ي ِز ْيدُ ا ْل ُق ْرآن النَّاس إِ َّما إِ ْي َمانا َأ ْو ُك ْفرا‬ ‫َّاس إِ َّما ُمؤْ مِن ُْو َن َوإِ َّما كَافِ ُر ْو َن‬‫الن ُ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫‪َ )8‬ي ْع ُبدُ ا ْل ُم ْسلِمون الل إِ َّما َرغَبا َوإِ َّما َر َهبا‬ ‫الل َوإِ َّما َّ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫الش ْی َط َ‬
‫ان‬ ‫َّاس إِ َّما َ‬ ‫ُيط ْی ُع الن ُ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫‪َ )9‬ل ُی َص ِّل َی َّن ا ْل َم ِر ْيض إِ َّما َقائِما َوإِ َّما َجالِسا‬ ‫الصائِ ُم ْو َن إِ َّما َما ًء َأ ْو َل َبنًا‬
‫َي ْش َر ُب َّ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫ل َّن النَّاس ا ْل َم َوازين ِإ َّما َح َسنات َو ِإ َّما َس ِّیئات‬
‫‪َ )10‬ل َی ْم َ َ‬ ‫الش ْم َس َوإِ َّما ال َق َم َر‬
‫‪َ )5‬ر َأی ا ْل َو َلدُ إِ َّما َّ‬
‫‪156‬‬
‫) َْل( ‪Not‬‬
‫‪َ is made negative by using the‬م ْع ُط ْوف ‪In an affirmative sentence, the‬‬
‫ف‬ ‫‪َْ .‬ل ‪َ of‬ح ْر ُ َ‬
‫‪This is translated as not.‬‬
‫َجا َء زَ ْيد َْل َخالِد‬
‫‪Zaid came, not Khalid.‬‬
‫َف ِ‬
‫َخالِد‬ ‫َْل‬ ‫زَ ْيد‬ ‫َجاء‬

‫یه‬ ‫َْ ْ‬
‫‪Negative‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪Affirmative‬‬

‫َخالِد‬ ‫َْل‬ ‫زَ ْيد‬ ‫َجاء‬
‫الشیخ ا ْل َكبِیر عَالِم َْل ج ِ‬ ‫ٰه َذا ال َّل ْح ُم َحار َْل َب ِ‬
‫اهل‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫َّ ْ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬ ‫ارد‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫َاذب‬‫ادق َْل ك ِ‬ ‫إِ َّن ٰه َذا ا ْلو َلد َلص ِ‬ ‫‪)7‬‬ ‫َان َخالِد َف ِق ْی ًرا َْل غَن ِ ًّیا‬
‫ك َ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫َ‬ ‫َ‬
‫الش ْمس َوا ْل َق َمر َب ِع ْیدان َْل َق ِر ْيبان‬
‫إِ َّن َّ‬ ‫‪)8‬‬ ‫إِ َّن ْاْلُ َّم َر ِح ْی َمة َْل َظال ِ َمة‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫جد َوا ْل َب ْیت َج ِد ْيدان َْل َق ِد ْيمان‬ ‫ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬ ‫‪)9‬‬ ‫َت ُك ْو ُن الن َُّار َح َّار ًة َْل َب ِ‬
‫ار َد ًة‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫‪ )10‬إِ َّن ْاْلَخ َو ْاْلُ ْخت َل ُمؤْ مِنان َْل كَافِران‬ ‫‪ )5‬إِن ََّما ْاْلَ ْنبِ َیا ُء َب َشر َْل َم ََّلئِ َكة‬
‫الصالِح َخ ْوفا َْل ِر َياء‬‫اإل َمام َّ‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ل َقدْ َب َكی ْ ِ‬ ‫الش ْی ُخ ُس ْو َر ًة َْل ُس ْو َر َت ْی ِن‬‫‪َ )1‬ق َر َأ ٰه َذا َّ‬
‫‪َ )7‬ي ْر ُجو ٰهؤُ َْل ِء ا ْل ُمؤْ مِنون ْاْل ِخ َرة َْل الدُّ نْیا‬ ‫الصال ِ َح ُة َغدً ا َْل ا ْل َی ْو َم‬‫‪َ )2‬ت ُص ْو ُم ْاْلُ ُّم َّ‬
‫ت ْاْلُ ْخت ا ْل َم ِر ْي َضة ُحزْ نا َْل َف َرحا‬ ‫‪ )8‬اِزْ داد ِ‬ ‫‪َ )3‬ش ِر َب ْت َفاطِ َم ُة ٰه َذا ا ْل َما َء َْل ال َّل َب َن‬
‫َ َ‬
‫اس َب َّن الل ال َّظالِمین َش ِد ْيدا َْل َي ِس ْیرا‬ ‫‪َ )9‬لیح ِ‬
‫ُ َ‬ ‫‪َ )4‬أك ََل َأ ْح َمدُ َوزَ ْين ُ‬
‫َب ا ْل ُخ ْبزَ َْل ال َّل ْح َم‬
‫احتِ َسابا َْل نِ َفاقا‬ ‫اش ْی َن َْل َراكِبِ ْی َن‬ ‫‪ )5‬جاء ٰهؤُ َْل ِء الرج ُال م ِ‬
‫‪َ )10‬صا َم ا ْل ُم ْسلِمون َوا ْل ُم ْسلِمات ْ‬ ‫ِّ َ َ‬ ‫َ َ‬
‫‪157‬‬
‫) َو َْل( ‪Nor‬‬
‫َح ْر ُف ‪َ is made negative by using the‬م ْع ُط ْوف ‪In a negative sentence, the‬‬
‫‪. In English, this will usually be translated as nor.‬و َْل ‪ of‬ا ْلع ْط ِ‬
‫ف‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ‬
‫َما َجا َء زَ ْيد َو َْل َخالِد‬
‫‪Neither Zaid nor Khalid came.‬‬
‫َف ِ‬
‫َح ْر ُ‬
‫َخالِد‬ ‫َو َْل‬ ‫زَ ْيد‬ ‫َجا َء‬ ‫َما‬

‫‪Negative‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪Negative‬‬

‫َخالِد‬ ‫َو َْل‬ ‫زَ ْيد‬ ‫َما َجاء‬
‫ف ا ْل َكافِرون الل َ‬
‫وْل الدِّ ْين‬ ‫‪َْ )9‬ل َي ْع ِر ُ‬ ‫‪َ )1‬ما ال َّش ْم ُس إِ ٰل ًها َو َْل َر ًّبا‬
‫الش ْمس َو َْل ا ْل َق َمر‬
‫َما َخ َل َق النَّاس َّ‬ ‫‪)10‬‬ ‫الر ُج ُل َو َْل ا ْل َو َلدُ‬ ‫َما َب َكی َّ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫َما ن ََص َر َأ ْح َمد َفاطِ َمة َو َْل زَ ْينَب َق ُّط‬ ‫‪)11‬‬ ‫ار ًدا َو َْل َح ًّارا‬ ‫ت الت َّْم َر ُة َب ِ‬ ‫َلیس ِ‬
‫َْ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫اذبون ُع َل َماء َو َْل ُق َّراء َأ َبدً ا‬ ‫َْل ي ُكو ُن ا ْل َك ِ‬ ‫‪)12‬‬ ‫اإلنَا ُء َم ْم ُل ْو ًء َل َبنًا َو َْل َما ًء‬ ‫َان ْ ِ‬ ‫َما ك َ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫َ ْ‬
‫َما َص َّلی ا ْل ُمنَافقون إِ ْي َمانا َوْل ْ‬ ‫‪)13‬‬ ‫ت َفاطِ َم ُة َي ْو ًما َو َْل َل ْی َل ًة‬ ‫َما َسا َف َر ْ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫َّخ َذ ا ْل ُم ْسلِمون ُم َح َّمدا َر ّبا َو َْل إِ ٰله‬ ‫‪َ )14‬لن يت ِ‬ ‫الر ُج ُل َقائِ ًما َو َْل َجال ِ ًسا‬
‫َّ‬ ‫َل ْم ُي َص ِّل َّ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫ود ًّيا َو َْل ن َْص َرانِ ًّیا﴾‬
‫اهیم يه ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َان إِ ْب َر ُ َ ُ‬ ‫‪َ ﴿ )15‬ما ك َ‬ ‫اإلنَا َء َما ًء َّو َْل َل َبنًا‬ ‫الر ُج ُل ْ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َل ْم َي ْم َل َّ‬ ‫‪)7‬‬
‫‪َ )16‬غدً ا َل ْن ُتغْن ِ َي ْاْلَ ْو َْلد َو َْل ْاْلَ ْم َوال َش ْیئا‬ ‫جدَ‬ ‫َما َر َأی ا ْل َو َلدُ ا ْل َب ْی َت َو َْل ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬ ‫‪)8‬‬
‫‪158‬‬
‫) َْل ‪َ ...‬و َْل( ‪Neither … Nor‬‬
‫‪َ are‬م ْع ُط ْوف ‪َ and the‬م ْع ُط ْوف َع َل ْی ِه ‪In an affirmative sentence, both the‬‬
‫‪َ and‬م ْع ُط ْوف َع َل ْی ِه ‪َْ before the‬ل ‪َ of‬ح ْر ُف النَّ ْف ِي ‪made negative by placing the‬‬
‫‪َ .‬م ْع ُط ْوف ‪َ before the‬و َْل ‪َ of‬ح ْر ُف َع ْطف ‪the‬‬
‫زَ ْيد َْل َف ِق ْیر َو َْل غَنِي‬
‫‪Zaid is neither poor nor rich.‬‬
‫َخبَر‬ ‫ف نَ ْفي‬
‫َح ْر ُ‬ ‫ُمبْتَدَ أ‬
‫َغنِي‬ ‫َو َْل‬ ‫َف ِق ْیر‬ ‫َْل‬ ‫زَ ْيد‬

‫‪Negative‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪Negative‬‬
‫َغنِي‬ ‫َو َْل‬ ‫َْل َف ِق ْیر‬ ‫زَ ْيد‬
‫‪ )6‬ا ْلكِتَاب َْل َق ِد ْيم َو َْل َج ِد ْيد‬ ‫‪ )1‬زَ ْيد َْل َف ِق ْیر َو َْل غَنِي‬
‫‪ )7‬ا ْل َبنَات َْل َأ ْق ِو َياء َو َْل ُض َع َفاء‬ ‫ارد‬‫‪ )2‬ال َّل َب ُن َْل َحار َو َْل َب ِ‬
‫‪ )8‬فاطِ َمة َْل ن َْص َرانِ َّیة َو َْل َي ُه ْو ِد َّية‬ ‫‪َ )3‬أ ْح َمدُ َْل ُمنَافِق َو َْل كَافِر‬
‫‪ٰ )9‬هؤُ َْل ِء النَّاس َْل َي ُه ْود َو َْل ن ََصاری‬ ‫‪ )4‬الرج ُل َْل عَالِم و َْل ج ِ‬
‫اهل‬ ‫َ َ‬ ‫َّ ُ‬
‫‪ )10‬تِ ْل َك ال ِّط ْف َلة َْل َم ِر ْي َضة َو َْل َض ِع ْی َفة‬ ‫ف َْل َش ْیخ َو َْل ُم َع ِّلم‬
‫‪ُ )5‬ي ْو ُس ُ‬
‫‪159‬‬
‫) َب ْل( ‪Rather‬‬
‫‪َ is made affirmative by using the‬م ْع ُط ْوف ‪In a negative sentence, the‬‬
‫ف‬ ‫‪َ . This can be translated as rather or instead.‬ب ْل ‪َ of‬ح ْر ُ َ‬
‫َما َجا َء زَ ْيد َب ْل َخالِد‬
‫‪Zaid did not come, rather Khalid.‬‬
‫َف ِ‬
‫َخالِد‬ ‫َب ْل‬ ‫زَ ْيد‬ ‫َما َجاء‬

‫‪Affirmative‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪Negative‬‬

‫َخالِد‬ ‫َب ْل‬ ‫زَ ْيد‬ ‫َما َجاء‬
‫‪َ to create a‬ب ْل ‪It is usually better to add appropriate words after‬‬
‫‪more fluent English translation. It is best to place these in brackets.‬‬
‫‪Zaid did not come, rather Khalid (came).‬‬
‫الصائِ َمة َل ْحما َب ْل َت ْم َرة‬‫‪َ )8‬ل ْم َت ْأ ُك ِل َّ‬ ‫َان ا ْل َب ْی ُت َب ِع ْیدً ا َب ْل َق ِر ْي ًبا‬
‫‪َ )1‬ما ك َ‬
‫اإل َمام َجالِسا َب ْل َقائِما‬ ‫ب ِْ‬‫‪َ )9‬ما َخ َط َ‬ ‫اع َظ‬ ‫رآن َأساطِیر ب ْل مو ِ‬
‫‪َ )2‬ما ال ُق ُ َ ْ َ َ َ َ‬
‫‪َْ )10‬ل َي ُك ْو ُن ْ ِ‬
‫اإلنَاء َم ْم ُل ْوء َماء َب ْل َل َبنا‬ ‫الش َهدَ ا ُء َأ ْم َوا ًتا َب ْل َأ ْح َیا ًء‬
‫‪َ )3‬ل ْی َس ُّ‬
‫‪َ )11‬لن َي ْش َر َب َخالِد َخ ْمرا َأ َبدً ا َب ْل َماء‬ ‫‪َْ )4‬ل َت ُص ْو ُم َفاطِ َم ُة ا ْل َی ْو َم َب ْل َغدً ا‬
‫الح َّجاج الل الدُّ نْیا َب ِل ْاْل ِخ َرة‬
‫‪َ )12‬ما َس َأ َل ُ‬ ‫‪َ )5‬ما َسا َف َر َحامِد َأ ْم ِ‬
‫س َب ِل ال َی ْو َم‬
‫ت ا ْل ُمنَافِقات ا ْحتِ َسابا َب ْل ِر َياء‬‫‪ )13‬ما ص َّل ِ‬
‫َ َ‬ ‫الر ُج ُل ُحزْ نًا َب ْل َف َر ًحا‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ما َب َكی َّ‬
‫الر َياء ا ْل ِم ْیزان َح َسنات َب ْل َس ِّیئات‬ ‫ل ِّ‬‫‪َْ )14‬ل َي ْم َ ُ‬ ‫َان فِ ْر َع ْو ُن َر ِح ْی ًما َب ْل َظال ِ ًما‬
‫‪َ )7‬ما ك َ‬
‫‪160‬‬
‫) ٰلكِ ْن( ‪Rather‬‬
‫‪َ is made affirmative by using the‬م ْع ُط ْوف ‪In a negative sentence, the‬‬
‫ف ا ْلع ْط ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ف‬ ‫‪ٰ . This can be translated as rather or instead.‬لك ْن ‪َ of‬ح ْر ُ َ‬
‫َما َجا َء زَ ْيد ٰلكِ ْن َخالِد‬
‫َف ِ‬
‫َخالِد‬ ‫ٰلكِ ْن‬ ‫زَ ْيد‬ ‫َما َجاء‬

‫‪Affirmative‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪Negative‬‬

‫َخالِد‬
‫زَ ْيد‬ ‫َما َجاء‬ ‫ٰلكِ ْن‬
‫َو ‪َ . This‬و ٰلكِ ْن ‪ٰ and it becomes‬لكِ ْن ‪َ comes with‬و ‪Sometimes the particle‬‬
‫‪is not translated in English.‬‬
‫َما َجا َء زَ ْيد َو ٰلكِ ْن َخالِد‬
‫َف ِ‬
‫َخالِد‬ ‫َو ٰلكِ ْن‬ ‫زَ ْيد‬ ‫َما َجاء‬

‫‪َ )6‬ما َخ ِس َر ا ْل ُمتَّقون َو ٰلكِ ِن ال َّظالِمون‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َّاس ٰلك ِن َ‬
‫الل‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َْل ُتط ْی ُع َفاط َم ُة الن َ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫َان ْاْلَ ْنبِ َیاء َم ََّلئِ َكة َو ٰلكِ ْن ِع َبادا‬
‫‪َ )7‬ما ك َ‬ ‫ت الرج ُل و ٰلكِ ِن امر َأ َت ِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫َّ ُ َ‬
‫َلم يم ِ‬
‫ْ َُ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫اف ا ْل ُمتَّقون ا ْل َم ْوت ٰلكِ ِن الل‬ ‫‪َْ )8‬ل َي َخ ُ‬ ‫َات َو ٰلكِ ِن ْاْلَ ْط َف ُال‬
‫ت ا ْل َبن ُ‬ ‫ما نَام ِ‬
‫َ َ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫‪َ )9‬ما َيزْ َدا ُد ا ْل ُمؤْ مِنون َج ْهَّل ٰلكِ ْن إِ ْي َمانا‬ ‫َل ْم َت ْس َت ْی ِق ْظ َأ ْس َما ُء ٰلكِ ْن َخ ِد ْي َج ُة‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫ب ا ْل ُم ْسلِمون الدُّ نْیا ٰلكِ ِن ْاْل ِخ َرة‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َْ )10‬ل ُيح ُّ‬ ‫ارئُ‬ ‫الو َلدُ ٰلكِ ِن ا ْل َق ِ‬
‫آن َ‬ ‫َْل ُي َرتِ ُّل ال ُق ْر َ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫‪161‬‬
Recap
The following chart summarises the difference between the ‫ُح ُر ْو ُف‬
ِ ‫ا ْلع ْط‬.
‫ف‬ َ
Affirmative  Affirmative
and ‫َخالِد‬ ‫َو‬ ‫زَ ْيد‬ ‫َجا َء‬
then ‫َخالِد‬ ‫ف‬

َ ‫زَ ْيد‬ ‫َجا َء‬
then ‫َخالِد‬ ‫ُث َّم‬ ‫زَ ْيد‬ ‫َجا َء‬
either … or ‫َخالِد‬ ‫َأ ْو‬ ‫زَ ْيد‬ ‫َجا َء‬
either … or ‫َخالِد‬ ‫َوأِ َّما‬ ‫إِ َّما زَ ْيد‬ ‫َجا َء‬
Negative  Affirmative
not ‫َخالِد‬ ‫َْل‬ ‫زَ ْيد‬ ‫َجا َء‬
Negative  Negative
neither … nor ‫َخالِد‬ ‫َو َْل‬ ‫زَ ْيد‬ ‫َما َجا َء‬
Negative  Negative
neither … nor ‫َجالِس‬ ‫َو َْل‬ ‫َْل َقائِم‬ ‫زَ ْيد‬
Affirmative  Negative
rather, but ‫َخالِد‬ ‫َب ْل‬ ‫زَ ْيد‬ ‫َما َجا َء‬
Affirmative  Negative
rather, but ‫َخالِد‬ ‫(و) ٰلكِ ْن‬

َ ‫زَ ْيد‬ ‫َما َجا َء‬
162
‫‪َ )8‬لن ُّي ْفلِ َح ال َّظالِمون َو َْل ا ْل ُمنَافِقون‬ ‫الر ُج ُل َحي َأ ْو َم ِّیت‬ ‫‪َّ )1‬‬
‫َت الدُّ نْیا َم ْم ُل ْو َءة َج ْهَّل َْل ِع ْلما‬
‫‪ )9‬كَان ِ‬ ‫‪ْ )2‬اْلَ ْنبِ َیا ُء َب َشر َْل َم ََّلئِ َكة‬
‫الص َحا َبة ُمنَافِقین َب ْل ُمؤْ مِین‬ ‫َان َّ‬ ‫‪َ )10‬ما ك َ‬ ‫الش َهدَ ا ُء َأ ْح َیاء َْل َأ ْم َوات‬ ‫‪ُّ )3‬‬
‫الصائِمون إِ َّما ُخ ْبزا َوإِ َّما َل ْحما‬ ‫‪َ )11‬ي ْأك ُُل َّ‬ ‫اإل َما ُم ُجزْ ًءا ٰلكِ ْن ُجزْ َئ ْی ِن‬ ‫‪ )4‬ما َقر َأ ْ ِ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫اف الل ا ْل َكافِرون َب ِل ا ْل ُمؤْ مِنون‬ ‫‪َْ )12‬ل َي َخ ُ‬ ‫‪َ )5‬أ ْف َل َح ا ْل ُمؤْ مِن ُْو َن َْل ال َّظال ِ ُم ْو َن‬
‫‪َْ )13‬ل َت ْع ُبدُ ا ْل ُمنَافِقات الل َخ ْوفا َو َْل َر ْغ َبة‬ ‫َّاس َأ ْم ِ‬
‫س َو َْل ا ْل َی ْو َم‬ ‫لم َي ُص ِم الن ُ‬
‫‪ْ )6‬‬
‫‪َ )14‬ي ْر ُجو ا ْل ُمؤْ مِنون َوا ْل ُمؤْ مِنات ْاْل ِخ َرة َْل الدُّ نْیا‬ ‫الصائِ َم ُة َت ْم َر ًة َو َْل َل ْح ًما‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )7‬ما َأ َك َلت َّ‬
‫ف ‪different types of‬‬ ‫‪ُ .‬ح ُر ْو ُ َ‬
‫َأ َك َل ْت َفاطِمة َل ْحما َف ُخ ْبزا‬ ‫‪)6‬‬ ‫‪ٰ )1‬ه َذا َق َلم َْل كِتَاب‬
‫الر ُجل ُر َّمانَة ُث َّم ِعنَ َبة‬‫َأك ََل َّ‬ ‫‪)7‬‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ل ْی َس ٰه َذا غَن ِ ًّیا َب ْل َف ِق ْی ًرا‬
‫َان ا ْل َب ْیت َق ِر ْيبا ٰلكِ ْن َب ِع ْیدا‬ ‫َما ك َ‬ ‫‪)8‬‬ ‫‪َ )3‬أك ََل َأ ْح َمدُ َل ْح ًما َو ُخ ْبزً ا‬
‫َش ِر َب ا ْل َو َلد إِ َّما ع ََسَّل َوإِ َّما َل َبنا‬ ‫‪)9‬‬ ‫‪َ )4‬ما ٰه َذا كِتَا ًبا َو َْل ك ُْر ِس ًّیا‬
‫‪ُ )10‬أو ٰلئِ َك الن َِّساء َْل َصابِرات َو َْل َشاكِرات‬ ‫‪َ )5‬ش ِر َب ْت َفاطِم ُة َما ًء َأ ْو َل َبنًا‬
‫‪163‬‬
‫َم ْع ُط ْوف ‪Multiple‬‬
‫‪َ is‬م ْع ُط ْوف ‪َ . In Arabic, each‬م ْع ُط ْوف ‪A single phrase may have multiple‬‬
‫‪َ .‬و ‪preceded by the conjunction‬‬
‫‪In English, the word and is only mentioned once before the last‬‬
‫‪َ are substituted with commas.‬و ‪َ . The other‬م ْع ُط ْوف‬
‫َجا َء زَ ْيد َو َخالِد َو َأ ْح َمدُ‬
‫‪Zaid, Khalid and Ahmad came.‬‬
‫َف ِ‬
‫َأ ْح َمدُ‬ ‫َو‬ ‫َخالِد‬ ‫َو‬ ‫زَ ْيد‬ ‫َجا َء‬

‫َح ْر ُ‬ ‫َم ْع ُط ْوف‬ ‫ف َع ْطف‬
‫َح ْر ُ‬ ‫َم ْع ُطوف َع َل ْی ِه‬
‫‪ )7‬ا ْل ِف ْع ُل إِ َّما َم ْر ُف ْوع َوإِ َّما َمن ُْص ْوب َوإِ َّما َم ْجزُ ْوم‬ ‫آن ُهدً ی َو َر ْح َمة َو َم ْو ِع َظة‬
‫‪ )1‬ا ْل ُق ْر ُ‬
‫والر ُس ْول‬ ‫‪َ )8‬ما ُيطِ ْی ُع ا ْل ُم ْسلِمون َّ‬
‫الش ْی َطان َب ِل الل َّ‬ ‫الر ُج ُل َسنَ ًة َو َش ْه َر ْي ِن َو َي ْو َم ْی ِن‬‫‪َ )2‬سا َف َر َّ‬
‫اهیم وإِسم ِ‬
‫اع ْیل َوإِ ْس َحاق َأ ْنبِ َیاء‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫خ َذ ِع ْی َسی َو َم ْر َي ُم َوا ْل َم ََّلئِ َك ُة آل ِ َه ًة‬‫‪ُ )3‬أ ُّت ِ‬
‫‪َ )9‬ج َع َل الل إِ ْب َر ْ َ ْ َ‬
‫‪َ )10‬ما كَان َْت َفاطِ َمة َو َْل َم ْر َيم َو َْل َخ ِد ْي َجة َم ْرضی‬ ‫اْلس ُم إِ َّما ُم ْف َرد َوإِ َّما ُم َثنًّی َوإِ َّما َج ْمع‬
‫‪ْ )4‬‬
‫الش ْمس َوا ْل َق َمر آيات‬ ‫‪َ )11‬ج َعل الل ال َّل ْیل َوالن ََّهار َو َّ‬ ‫‪َ )5‬ح ِز َن ْاْلَ ُب َو ْاْلُ ُّم َْل ْاْلَ ُخ َو َْل ْاْلُ ْخ ُت‬
‫‪َ )12‬قدْ َأ ْف َل َح ا ْل ُمؤْ ِمنون َوا ْل ُمتَّقون َْل ال َّظ ِالمون َو َْل ا ْل ُمن َِافقون‬ ‫ان َصائِ ِم ْی َن‬
‫َان زَ ْيد َو َْل َخالِد َو َْل ُع ْث َم ُ‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ما ك َ‬
‫‪164‬‬
‫َم ْع ُط ْوف ‪َ and‬م ْع ُط ْوف َع َل ْی ِه ‪The Separated and Intertwined‬‬
‫َم ْع ُط ْوف ‪َ and‬م ْع ُط ْوف َع َل ْی ِه ‪The Separated‬‬
‫‪َ may be separated by another part of the‬م ْع ُط ْوف ‪َ and‬م ْع ُط ْوف َع َل ْی ِه ‪The‬‬
‫ن ََص َر َأ ْح َمدُ َفاطِ َم َة َْل ُع ْث َم ُ‬
‫ان‬
‫‪Ahmad, not Uthman, helped Fatima.‬‬
‫‪It was Ahmad who helped Fatima, not Uthman.‬‬
‫‪َ are separated, in tarkib it is not‬م ْع ُط ْوف ‪َ and‬م ْع ُط ْوف َع َل ْی ِه ‪Because the‬‬
‫‪possible to place them under one slot. Instead, the first part of the‬‬
‫‪َ , will be followed by an ellipsis‬م ْع ُط ْوف َع َل ْی ِه ‪slot, which is becoming the‬‬
‫‪َ ,‬م ْع ُط ْوف ‪(…) and the second part of the slot, which is becoming the‬‬
‫‪will be preceded by an ellipsis.‬‬
‫‪َ ...‬ف ِ‬
‫اعل‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ ‫َف ِ‬
‫اعل ‪...‬‬ ‫فِ ْعل‬
‫عُ ْث َم ُ‬
‫ان‬ ‫َْل‬ ‫َفاطِ َم َة‬ ‫َأ ْح َمدُ‬ ‫ن ََص َر‬

‫‪َ )8‬س ِم َع ْت َفاطِ َمة ا ْل ُق ْرآن َْل زَ ْينَب‬ ‫‪َ )1‬ي ُص ْو ُم َأ ْح َمدُ ا ْل َی ْو َم َْل َخالِد‬
‫اْلخ َرة َي ْر ُجو ا ْل ُمؤْ مِنون َْل الدُّ نْیا‬ ‫‪ِ )9‬‬ ‫الل ا ْل ِع َبا َد َْل ْاْلَ ْصنَا ُم‬
‫‪َ )10‬ما كَان َْت زَ ْينَب َجال ِ َسة َو َْل َفاطِ َمة‬ ‫‪َ )3‬خ ْم ًرا َش ِر َب َّ‬
‫الر ُج ُل َْل َما ًء‬
‫ظ ْاْلَخ ا ْل ُقرآن َو َْل ْاْلُ ْخت‬ ‫‪َ )11‬لم يح َف ِ‬ ‫َق ِص ْی ًرا ك َ‬
‫َان ا ْل َی ْو ُم َْل َط ِو ْي ًَّل‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫ْ َ ْ‬
‫‪َ )12‬وعَدَ الل ا ْل ُمؤْ مِنین ا ْل َجنَّة َْل ا ْل ُمنَافِقین‬ ‫َاب َْل ا ْل َو َلدُ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َق َر َأت ا ْلبِن ُْت ا ْلكت َ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫خ َذ ِعیسی إِ ٰله َْل موسی و َْل إِبر ِ‬ ‫‪ُ )13‬ا ُّت ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫اه ْیم‬ ‫َ َْ‬ ‫ُْ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫َب‬‫َما َت ُص ْو ُم َفاط َم ُة ا ْل َی ْو َم َب ْل زَ ْين ُ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫‪َ )14‬ل َی ُص ْو َم َّن ا ْل ُم ْس ِلمون َر َم َضان َْل ا ْل َی ُه ْود َو َْل الن ََّصاری‬ ‫َين ُْص ُر ْاْلَ ُب ا ْل َو َلدَ َْل ْاْلَ ْص ِد َقا ُء‬ ‫‪)7‬‬
‫‪165‬‬
‫َم ْع ُط ْوف ‪َ and‬م ْع ُط ْوف َع َل ْی ِه ‪The Intertwined‬‬
‫َم ْع ُط ْوف َع َل ْی ِه ‪َ may be intertwined with another‬م ْع ُط ْوف ‪َ and‬م ْع ُط ْوف َع َل ْی ِه ‪The‬‬
‫‪َ .‬م ْع ُط ْوف ‪and‬‬
‫اإل ْس ََّل َم ِد ْينًا‬
‫َج َع َل الل م َحمدً ا ﷺ َنبِ ًّیا َو ْ ِ‬
‫ُ ُ َّ‬
‫‪ a prophet‬ﷺ ‪Allah made Muhammad‬‬
‫‪and Islam a religion.‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪) and‬أ‪ ،‬ب( ‪َ should be labelled with a letter‬م ْع ُط ْوف َع َل ْیه ‪In tarkib, each‬‬
‫‪َ with the same letter.‬م ْع ُط ْوف ‪the corresponding‬‬
‫‪َ ...‬م ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه َثان‬ ‫‪َ ...‬م ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه َثان ‪...‬‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه ‪...‬‬ ‫َف ِ‬
‫ِد ْينًا‬ ‫ِْ‬

‫اإل ْس ََّل َم‬ ‫َو‬ ‫َنبِ ًّیا‬ ‫ُم َح َّمدً ا‬ ‫الل‬
‫ُ‬ ‫َج َع َل‬
‫َم ْع ُط ْوف (ب)‬ ‫َم ْع ُط ْوف (أ)‬ ‫ف َع ْطف‬

‫یه (ب)‬ ‫مع ُطوف َع َل ِ‬
‫یه (أ)‬
‫َْ ْ‬ ‫َْ ْ‬
‫‪َ )6‬أ ْع َطی ْاْلَب ا ْل َو َلد َماء و ْاْلُ ّم ا ْلبِنْت َل َبنا‬ ‫آن ُأس ُطور ًة و َْل النَّبِي ك ِ‬
‫َاذ ًبا‬ ‫ُّ‬ ‫َما ا ْل ُق ْر ُ ْ ْ َ َ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫اإل ْس ََّلم ِد ْينا‬
‫‪َ )7‬ج َع َل الل ُم َح َّمدا ﷺ َر ُس ْوْل َو ْ ِ‬ ‫َب َي ْو َم ْی ِن‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َصا َم ْت َفاط َم ُة َي ْو ًما َوزَ ْين ُ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫اإلن ِ‬
‫ْج ْیل‬ ‫وع ْیسی ْ ِ‬ ‫‪ )8‬آ َتی الل موسی التَّوراة ِ‬ ‫واْلَغْن ِ َیا ُء َم ًاْل‬‫ُأعْطِ َي ا ْل ُع َل َما ُء ا ْل ِع ْل َم ْ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫َْ‬ ‫ُْ‬
‫احتِ َسابا َوا ْل ُمنَافِقون ِر َياء‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )9‬ص َّلی ا ْل ُمؤْ منون ْ‬ ‫الص ْو َم ُجنَّ ًة‬ ‫الص ََّل َة ن ُْو ًرا َو َّ‬ ‫الل َّ‬‫َج َع َل ُ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫ل ا ْل ِم ْیزان ا ْل ُمؤْ ِمنون َح َسنات َوال َّظالِمون َس ِّیئات‬ ‫‪َ )10‬ي ْم َ ُ‬ ‫‪َ )5‬ش ِر َب ِّ‬
‫الر َج ُال ا ْل َخ ْم َر َو ْاْلَ ْو َْل ُد ال َّل َب َن‬
‫‪166‬‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه َثان ‪َ vs‬م ْع ُط ْوف‬
‫‪َ in a conjunction phrase is‬م ْع ُط ْوف ‪It is important to remember that a‬‬
‫‪َ . The following examples will help clarify the‬م ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه َثان ‪not a‬‬
‫‪difference between them.‬‬
‫َم ْع ُط ْوف َع َل ْی ِه ‪َ -‬م ْع ُط ْوف‬
‫َع َّل َم ا ْل ُم َع ِّل ُم زَ ْيدً ا َو َخالِدً ا‬
‫‪The teacher taught Zaid and Khalid.‬‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه ‪َ ; rather it is part of the‬م ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه َثان ‪َ is not the‬خال ِد ‪In this example,‬‬
‫‪َ structure.‬م ْع ُط ْوف ‪َ and‬م ْع ُط ْوف َع َل ْی ِه ‪in a‬‬
‫َخالِدً ا‬ ‫َو‬ ‫زَ ْيدً ا‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َع ِّل ُم‬ ‫عَ َّل َم‬

‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه َثان‬

‫َع َّل َم ا ْل ُم َع ِّل ُم َز ْيدً ا ا ْل ُق ْر َ‬
‫آن‬
‫‪The teacher taught Zaid the Quran.‬‬
‫‪َ .‬م ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه َثان ‪ becomes the‬ا ْل ُق ْرآن ‪In this example,‬‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه َثان‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ ‫َف ِ‬
‫ا ْل ُق ْر َ‬
‫آن‬ ‫زَ ْيدً ا‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َع ِّل ُم‬ ‫عَ َّل َم‬
‫‪َ )6‬أن َْذ َر ْاْلَ ْنبِ َیاء ْاْلَ ْق َوام النَّار َوا ْل َع َذاب‬ ‫‪َ )1‬أك ََل ا ْل َو َلدُ ال َّل ْح َم َوا ْل ُخ ْبزَ‬
‫الص َراط ا ْل ُم ْست َِق ْیم‬
‫‪َ )7‬ي ْهدي الل النَّاس ِّ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫الل َم ًاْل َو ِع ْل ًما‬ ‫‪َ )2‬س َأ َل ا ْل َو َلدُ َ‬
‫الر ُجل ا ْل َو َلد َو َْل ا ْلبِنْت َماء‬
‫‪َ )8‬ما َأ ْع َطی َّ‬ ‫الل ْاْلُ َّم ِص َّح ًة َّوعَافِ َی ًة‬ ‫‪َ )3‬رزَ َق ُ‬
‫‪َ )9‬أ ْط َع َمت ا ْل َمر َأة ا ْلبِنْت َوا ْل َو َلد َل ْحما َو ُخ ْبزا‬ ‫الل ا ْل ُق َ‬
‫رآن ن ُْو ًرا َّو ُهدً ی‬ ‫‪َ )4‬ج َع َل ُ‬
‫‪َ )10‬وعَدَ الل ا ْل ُمؤْ مِنین َوا ْل ُمؤْ مِنات ا ْل َجنَّة َوا ْل َمغ ِْف َرة‬ ‫الل ِع ْل ًما َو ِهدَ ا َي ًة‬
‫الر ُج ُل َ‬ ‫‪َ )5‬ي ْس َأ ُل َّ‬
‫‪167‬‬
‫ َخ َبر َثان‬and ‫َن ْعت َثان‬
‫َخ َبر َثان‬

َ ‫ َك‬, etc.) can have two ‫ َخ َبر‬without a ‫ف َع ْطف‬
One ‫( ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬or ‫ ْاسم‬of ‫ان‬ ُ ‫َح ْر‬
between them. The second ‫ َخ َبر‬is called ‫ َخ َبر َثان‬.
In Arabic, the word and (‫ ) َو‬is not mentioned between the multiple
‫ َخ َبر‬. However, it can be added in the English translation.
﴾‫الل َل َعلِیم َحلِیم‬
َ ‫﴿إِ َّن‬
Indeed, Allah is All-Knowing and Forbearing.
Indeed, Allah is All-Knowing, Forbearing.
The tarkib of this is written as follows
‫َخ َب ُر إِ َّن َثان‬ ‫َخ َب ُر إِ َّن‬ ‫َْلم ُمزَ ْح َل َقة‬ ‫اِ ْس ُم إِ َّن‬ ‫َح ْرف ُم َش َّبه بِا ْل ِف ْع ِل‬
‫َحلِ ْیم‬ ‫عَ لِ ْیم‬ ‫َل‬ ‫الل‬
َ َّ
‫إن‬
Note
It is not possible for an adjective to be a ‫ َمنْ ُع ْوت‬. Therefore, in the
above sentences, it is not possible to assume that the words ‫عَلِ ْیم‬
‫ َحلِ ْیم‬are a ‫ َمنْ ُع ْوت – َن ْعت‬structure, since both are adjectives.
‫َخ َبر َثان‬ ‫َخ َبر‬ ‫ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬ ‫َخ َبر‬ ‫ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬
‫َر ِح ْیم‬ ‫َغ ُف ْور‬ ‫الل‬
ُ ‫َر ِح ْیم‬ ‫َرب‬ ‫الل‬
ُ
Vocab
Appreciative ‫ َشاكِر‬All-Wise ‫َحكِ ْیم‬
All-Powerful ‫َق ِوي‬ Forbearing ‫َحلِ ْیم‬
All-Subtle ‫َلطِ ْیف‬ All-Aware ‫َخبِ ْیر‬

ِ ‫و‬
‫اسع‬ ‫َر ُء ْوف‬
All-Encompassing َ Most Kind
168
Exercise 18
﴾‫الل َلطِیف َخبِیر‬َ ‫) ﴿إِ َّن‬9 ﴾‫الل َل َغ ُفور َر ِحیم‬
َ ‫) ﴿إِ َّن‬5 ﴾‫الل غَنِي َحلِیم‬ ُ ﴿ )1
﴾‫الل َشاكِر عَلِیم‬
َ ‫) ﴿إِ َّن‬10 ﴾‫الل َل َق ِوي ع َِزيز‬
َ ‫) ﴿إِ َّن‬6 ﴾‫اسع عَلِیم‬ ِ ‫﴿الل و‬
َ ُ )2
﴾‫الل ع َِزيز َحكِیم‬
َ ‫) ﴿إِ َّن‬11 ﴾‫الل َل َعلِیم َحلِیم‬
َ ‫) ﴿إِ َّن‬7 ﴾‫الل َس ِمیع عَلِیم‬ ُ ﴿ )3
﴾‫ َل َر ُءوف َر ِحیم‬... ‫الل‬
َ ‫) ﴿إِ َّن‬12
ِ ‫) ﴿إِ َّن الل‬8
﴾‫واسع عَلِیم‬ َ َ ‫﴿إِ َّن‬
﴾‫الل َل َع ُفو َغ ُفور‬ )4
‫ن ْعت َثان‬
Just as a ‫ ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬can have two ‫ َخ َبر‬without a ‫ َح ْر ُف َع ْطف‬in between them,
one ‫ َمنْ ُع ْوت‬can also have two ‫ َن ْعت‬without a ‫ َح ْر ُف َع ْطف‬in between
them. The second ‫ َن ْعت‬is called ‫ َن ْعت َثان‬.
In Arabic, the ‫ف‬ ِ ‫ف ا ْلع ْط‬
َ ُ ‫ َح ْر‬of ‫ َو‬will not be mentioned between the
multiple ‫ َن ْعت‬. However, it can be added in the English translation.
‫الر ِح ْی َم‬
َّ ‫الر ْح َم َن‬
َّ ‫الل‬
َ ‫َّاس‬
ُ ‫َي ْع ُبدُ الن‬
People worship Allah, the All-Merciful, the Compassionate.
People worship Allah, the All-Merciful, and the Compassionate.
‫الر ِح ْیم‬
َّ ‫الر ْح َمن‬
َّ ‫الل‬
َ ‫َّاس‬
ُ ‫الن‬ ُ‫َي ْع ُبد‬
‫نَ ْعت َثان‬ ‫نَ ْعت‬ ‫َمنْ ُع ْوت‬
169
‫َم ْف ُع ْول َم َع ُه‬
The ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول َم َع ُه‬is a noun which occurs after a ‫ َواو‬called ‫ َو ُاو ا ْل َم ِع َّی ِة‬, and
shows the person or thing with which the action took place.
Zaid came with Khalid.
In this example, Khalid is the ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول َم َع ُه‬.
The ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول َم َع ُه‬is ‫ َمن ُْص ْوب‬. This is translated as with or along with.
‫َجاء ز ْيد َو َخالِدً ا‬
Differentiating Between the ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول َم َع ُه‬and ‫َم ْع ُط ْوف‬
The ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول َم َع ُه‬and ‫ َم ْع ُط ْوف‬are similar as they both occur after ‫ َو‬.
However, there are two major differences:
1. The ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول َم َع ُه‬is always in the ‫ َمن ُْص ْوب‬state, while the ‫ َم ْع ُط ْوف‬can be in
any of the three states.
2. The ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول َم َع ُه‬carries out the action simultaneously with the
subject. Look at the example below.
‫َجاء ز ْيد َو َخالِدً ا‬
This sentence explicitly states that both Zaid and Khalid came at
the same time. On the contrary, if Khalid were ‫ َم ْع ُط ْوف‬, not ‫َم ْف ُع ْول‬
‫ َم َع ُه‬, it could mean either that they came at the same time or
separately.
‫َجاء زَ ْيد َو َخالِد‬
Zaid and Khalid came.
Exercise 19
‫ت َفاطِ َمة َو َخ ِد ْي َجة ا ْل َی ْو َم‬
ْ ‫) َجا َء‬5 ‫) َح َّج ُم َح َّمد َوزَ ْيدً ا‬1
‫) َأك ََل ْاْلُ ْستَاذ َوال ُّط ََّّلب ال َّل ْحم‬6 ِ ْ ‫الش ْی ُخ َو‬
‫اإل َما َم‬ َّ ‫) َر َج َع‬2
‫الص ِغ ْیر ْاْل َن‬
َّ ‫الر ُجل َوا ْل َو َلد‬
ِ
َّ ‫) ُي َساف ُر‬7 َّ‫ت ا ْل َجدَّ ُة َوا ْل َجد‬ ِ ‫) إِ ْعتَمر‬3
ََ
‫) َي ْج َم ُع الل ا ْل ُمؤْ مِنین َوا ْل َكافِرين َي ْوم ا ْل ِق َیا َمة‬8 ِ ‫) َأرس َل الل الرس َل و ْاْلي‬4
‫ات‬ َ َ ُ ُّ ُ َ ْ
170
‫ف َع ْطف‬
‫‪َ Between Sentences‬ح ْر ُ‬
‫‪َ can occur between two sentences.‬ح ْر ُف َع ْطف ‪A‬‬
‫َجا َء زَ ْيد َو َذ َه َ‬
‫ب ع َْمرو‬
‫‪Zaid came and Amr went.‬‬
‫‪In tarkib, each sentence will be labelled independently.‬‬
‫َف ِ‬
‫اعل‬ ‫فِ ْعل‬ ‫ف َع ْطف‬
‫َح ْر ُ‬ ‫َف ِ‬
‫عَ ْمرو‬ ‫َذ َه َ‬

‫ب‬ ‫َو‬ ‫زَ ْيد‬ ‫َجا َء‬
‫‪َ .‬و ‪In Arabic, it is not uncommon to start a sentence with‬‬

‫﴿ َو َق َال ُم ْو َسی‪﴾...‬‬
‫‪and Musa said‬‬
‫‪َ )8‬ت ْع ُبدُ ا ْل ُم ْسلِمات الل َو َت ْع ُبدُ ا ْل ُم ْش ِركات ْاْلَ ْصنَام‬ ‫ان ن ُْور َوا ْل ُك ْف ُر ُظ ُل َمات‬ ‫ِْ‬
‫اإل ْي َم ُ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫‪َ )9‬ل َیدْ ُخ َل َّن ا ْل ُم ْس ِلمون ا ْل َجنَّة َو َل َیدْ ُخ َل َّن ال َّظالِمون النَّار‬ ‫ت ا ْل َجدَّ ُة َو َقا َم ْاْلَ ْو َْل ُد‬‫ج َلس ِ‬
‫َ َ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫‪َ )10‬س َی ْف َر ُح ال َّطالِب ا ْل ُم ْجت َِهد َو َس َی ْحزَ ُن ال َّطالِب ا ْل َك ْس ََّلن‬ ‫اش ًیا َو َجا َء ا ْل َوالِدُ َراكِ ًبا‬ ‫جاء ا ْلو َلدُ م ِ‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫س َو ُي َس ِاف ُر ُأو ٰل ِئ َك ا ْل َی ْو َم‬ ‫‪َ )11‬ر َج َع ٰهؤُ َْل ِء ا ْل ُم َس ِافرون َأ ْم ِ‬ ‫ح ْی ُح‬‫الشاب ويمر ُض الص ِ‬
‫َّ‬ ‫ت َّ ُّ َ َ ْ َ‬ ‫َقدْ َي ُم ْو ُ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫اع ا ْل ُم َع ِّلم َم ْكتَبا َق ِد ْيما‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ت ا ْلمع ِّلمة ِ‬
‫‪ْ )12‬اشت ََر ُ َ َ ْ‬
‫كُرس ّیا َجد ْيدا َو َب َ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫اب‬‫ان َو َض َّل ا ْل َخ َّط ُ‬ ‫اِ ْهتَدَ ی ع َُم ُر َو ُع ْث َم ُ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫‪َ )13‬ي ْأك ُُل َأ ْح َمد الت ََّمرات َص َباحا َو َت ْش َر ُب ا ْل ِبنْت َل َبنا َل ْیَّل‬ ‫َأ َخ َذ َخالِد ا ْل َق َل َم َو َت َر َك َأ ْح َمدُ ا ْل ُك ْر ِس َّي‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫‪َ )14‬أ ْر َس َل الل اْلَ ْنبِ َیاء َو ٰلكِ ْن َل ْم ُيؤْ مِ ِن ا ْل َكافِرون َب ْل ك ََّذ ُب ْوا‬ ‫ت ْاْلُ ُّم ا ْل َب ِ‬
‫ار َح َة‬ ‫اِس َتی َق َظ ْاْلَب ْاْل َن ونَام ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫ْ ْ‬ ‫‪)7‬‬
‫‪171‬‬
Notes
1. If the subject of the second sentence is the same as the first, it
ِ ‫ َف‬in the
will not be repeated. Instead, there will be a hidden ‫اعل‬
second verb.
َ ‫َجا َء ُم َح َّمد ُث َّم َذ َه‬
‫ب‬
Muhammad came and (he) left.
ِ ‫فِعل و َف‬
‫اعل‬ ‫ف َع ْطف‬
َ ْ
َ ‫َذ َه‬
‫ب‬ ‫ُث َّم‬ ‫ُم َح َّمد‬ ‫َجا َء‬
2. The ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه‬of the first sentence may also apply to the meaning
of the second sentence.
ُ‫َاب َأ ْح َمد‬
َ ‫َا ْل َی ْو َم َح َض َر ُم َح َّمد َوغ‬
Today, Muhammad was present, and Ahmad was absent.
In this sentence, ‫ ا ْل َی ْو َم‬is technically the ‫ َم ْف ُعول فِ ْی ِه‬of ‫ َح َض َر‬, but the
meaning also applies to the second verb, ‫َاب‬ َ ‫غ‬.
3. The particle ‫ َف‬can show that the first sentence is the cause of
the second. This is translated as so.
‫ان َف َی ُص ْو ُم ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن‬
ُ ‫َقدْ َجا َء َر َم َض‬
Ramadhan has come so the Muslims are fasting.
Exercise 21
ِ ِ ِ ِ ْ )1
َ ‫ب ا ْل َع ْبدُ ا ْل ُمؤْ م ُن ُث َّم َي ْس َتغْف ُر‬
‫الل‬ ُ ‫) ُي ْذن‬7 ‫ان ن ُْور َوا ْل ُك ْف ُر ُظ ُل َمات‬
ُ ‫اإل ْي َم‬
ِْ ‫ل‬ َ َ ‫اج إِنَا ًء َو َم‬ ِ ‫الر ُج ُل َف َح ِز َن ْاْلَ ْو َْل ُد‬
‫اإلنَا َء زَ ْمزَ َم‬ ُّ ‫) ا ْشت ََری ا ْل َح‬8 َّ ‫ات‬ َ ‫) َم‬2
‫ارئًا َف َف ِر َح ْت َوا ْبت ََس َم ْت‬ِ ‫ت ْاْلُ ُّم ال ِّط ْف َل َق‬ِ ‫) ر َأ‬9 ِ ‫الش ْی ُخ َف َش ِر َب َما ًء َب‬
‫ار ًدا‬ َّ ‫) عَطِ َش‬3
َ
‫ب ُث َّم َص َّلی‬
َ ‫جدَ َف َقا َم َو َخ َط‬ ِ ‫اإل َما ُم ا ْل َم ْس‬
ِ ْ ‫) َد َخ َل‬10 ‫ت ا ْلبِن ُْت َو ٰلكِ ْن َل ْم َت ْصبِ ْر‬ ِ ‫) م ِر َض‬4
َ
‫الل كَثِ ْی ًرا‬ ِ
َ ‫الر ُج ُل َم ًاْل كَث ْی ًرا َف َی ْش ُك ُر‬
ِ
َّ ‫) ُر ِز َق ٰذل َك‬11
ِ ‫) َفت ََح الت‬5
ُ ‫َّاج ُر ا ْل َب ْی َت َفدَ َخ َل الن‬
‫َّاس‬
‫َت ا ْل َم ْر َأ ُة َصائِ َم ًة َف َل ْم َت ْأك ُْل َط َعا ًما َو َل ْم َت ْش َر ْب َش َرا ًبا‬
ِ ‫) كَان‬12 ُّ ‫الل‬
‫الذن ُْو َب‬ ِ ِ ِ
ُ ‫) َي ْس َتغْف ُر ا ْلع َبا ُد َف َیغْف ُر‬6
172
Summary
Phrases
Conjunction Phrases
‫ف عَ ْطف‬
ُ ‫َح ْر‬ Conjunction ‫ ٰلكِ ْن‬،‫ َب ْل‬،‫ َو َْل‬،‫ َْل‬،‫ إِ َّما‬،‫ َأ ْو‬،‫ ُث َّم‬،‫ف‬
َ ،‫َو‬
‫ َم ْع ُط ْوف عَ َل ْی ِه‬The word before the conjunction
The word after the conjunction Agree in Irab
‫َم ْع ُط ْوف‬
Multiple ‫َم ْع ُط ْوف‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول َم َع ُه‬
Simultaneously with the subject ‫َمن ُْص ْوب‬
Separated ‫ َم ْع ُط ْوف َع َل ْی ِه‬and ‫َم ْع ُط ْوف‬ ‫ َخ َبر َثان‬and ‫َن ْعت َثان‬
173
Part 4: Appositive Phrases
An appositive phrase is made up of two nouns, where the second
explains or gives more information regarding the first.
Your brother, Ahmad, is very clever.
The first word, the one being explained, is called ‫ ُم ْبدَ ل مِنْ ُه‬and the
second the ‫ َبدَ ل‬.
Rules of Appositive Phrases
The ‫ َبدَ ل‬will have the same ‫ إِ ْع َراب‬as the ‫ ُم ْبدَ ل مِنْ ُه‬.
The appositive phrase is usually punctuated with a comma.
‫الل النَّبِ َّي ُم َح َّمدً ا ﷺ‬
ُ ‫َأ ْر َس َل‬
Allah sent the Prophet, Muhammad ‫ﷺ‬.
An appositive phrase occurs as any of the main parts of a sentence.
‫ُم َح َّمدً ا‬ ‫النَّبِ َّي‬ ‫الل‬

‫َبدَ ل‬ ‫ُم ْبدَ ل مِنْ ُه‬
Exercise 1
‫الش ْیخ َخالِدا َر َأی ْاْلَخ َأ ْح َمد‬ َّ )8 ‫) كَان النَّبِ ُّي ن ُْوح َصابِ ًرا‬1
ِ ‫) ا ْلیوم إِنَّما صام‬9 ِ ‫اهیم َلص‬ ِ
‫ت ْاْلُ ْخت زَ ْينَب‬ َ َ َ َ َْ ‫ادق‬ َ َ ْ ‫إن النّبِ َّي إِ ْب َر‬
َّ )2
‫) َجا َء ا ْل ُم َع ِّلمون إِ َّْل ا ْل ُم َع ِّلم زَ ْيدا‬10 ‫) َص َّلی اْلَ ُخ َأ ْح َمدُ َجال ِ ًسا‬3
‫) َما ن ََص َر َفاطِ َمة إِ َّْل ا ْل ُم َع ِّل َمة زَ ْينَب‬11 ‫) إِ ِن اْلُ ْستَا ُذ ُم َح َّمد إِ َّْل َصالِح‬4
‫) َس َأ َل ٰهؤُ َْل ِء ْاْلَ ْو َْلد ا ْل ُم َع ِّل َمة َخ ِد ْي َجة‬12 ِ ‫) ما جاء ا ْلمع ِّلم زَ يد َّإْل م‬5
‫اش ًیا‬ َ ْ ُ َ ُ َ َ َ
‫) َل ُی َسافِ َر َّن ا ْل ُم َع ِّلم َأ ْح َمد َش ْهرا َو َي ْو َمین‬13 ‫) إِ َّن ا ْل َملِ َك َخالِدً ا َل َملِك َشاكِر‬6
‫) َل ْم َتنْ ُص ِر ا ْل ُم َع ِّل َمة زَ ْينَب إِ َّْل ْاْلُ ْخت َفاطِ َمة‬14 ‫) ْاْل ِخ َر َة ا ْل َجنَّ َة َي ْر ُج ْو ا ْل ُمؤْ مِن ُْو َن‬7
174
Summary
Phrases
Appositive Phrases
‫ُم ْبدَ ل مِنْ ُه‬ Noun
Agree in Irab
‫َبدَ ل‬ Noun
Recap
We have now studied four types of phrases which are summarised
in the chart below.
Agree in DING Agree Only in Irab
Descriptive Demonstrative Conjunctive Appositive
Phrase Phrase Phrase Phrase
‫َم ْع ُط ْوف َع َل ْی ِه‬
‫َمنْ ُع ْوت‬ ‫اإل َش َار ِة‬ ِ ْ ‫اِ ْس ُم‬ ‫ُم ْبدَ ل مِنْ ُه‬
ُ ‫َح ْر‬
‫َن ْعت‬ ‫ُم َشار إِ َل ْی ِه‬ ‫َبدَ ل‬
The chart below can be used to help determine the type of phrase.
Contains a ‫َح ْر ُف َع ْطف‬ ‫ َم ْع ُط ْوف‬،‫َم ْع ُط ْوف َع َل ْی ِه‬
The first word is an ‫اإل َش َار ِة‬ ‫ ُم َشار إِ َل ْی ِه‬،‫اإل َش َار ِة‬
1
ِ ْ ‫اس ُم‬
PHRASE
The second word is an adjective ‫ َن ْعت‬،‫َمنْ ُع ْوت‬
The second word is a noun ‫ َبدَ ل‬،‫ُم ْبدَ ل مِنْ ُه‬
Exercise 2
Translate the following and identify which kind of phrases they are.
‫) َفاطِ َمة َوزَ ْينَب بِنْتان َصال ِ َحتان‬9 ‫ت ال ِّط ْف َل ُة َفاطِ َم ُة‬
ِ ‫) ب َك‬5
َ ‫) َجا َء ٰه َذا ا ْل ُم َع ِّل ُم‬1
ِ ‫) ر َأ‬10
‫ت ْاْلُ ْخت َأ ِو ْاْلُ ّم ٰه َذا ا ْل َق َلم‬ ‫) َر َأی ا ْل َو َلدُ زَ ْيدً ا َو َخالِدً ا‬6 ‫) َجا َء ا ْل ُم َع ِّل ُم زَ ْيد‬2
َ
ِ ‫) جع َل الل النَّبِي محمدا َنبِیا ص‬11 ‫) تِ ْل َك ا ْلبِن ُْت َفاطِ َم ُة‬7 ‫الصال ِ ُح‬
‫ادقا‬ َ ّ َّ َ ُ ّ َ َ َّ ‫) َجا َء ا ْل ُم َع ِّل ُم‬3
ِ ‫) َش ِر َب ْت تِ ْل َك ْاْلُ ْخت ا ْل َماء ا ْل َب‬12
‫ارد‬ ِ ‫) ْاْلُ ْخ ُت َفاطِم ُة ُأ ْخت ص‬8
‫اد َقة‬ َ َ َّ ‫) َجا َء ا ْل ُم َع ِّل ُم ُث َّم‬4
‫الش ْی ُخ‬
175
Part 5: Possessive Phrases
A possessive phrase indicates ownership or a relationship between
two nouns.
the man’s house the house of the man
In Arabic, the possessed comes first, followed by the possessor.
‫الر ُج ِل‬
َّ ‫َب ْی ُت‬
The first word, the possessed, is called ‫ ُم َضاف‬.
The second word, the possessor, is called ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬.
‫اف إِ َلیْ ِه‬

ُ ‫ا ْل ُم َض‬ ُ ‫ا ْل ُم َض‬
‫اف‬
Rules of Possessive Phrases

1. ‫اف‬ ُ ‫ َا ْل ُم َض‬will not have an ‫ َا ْل‬nor a ‫ َتنْ ِو ْين‬.
2. ‫اف إِ َل ْی ِه‬
ُ ‫ ا ْل ُم َض‬will always be ‫ َم ْج ُر ْور‬.
3. As ‫اف‬ ُ ‫ ا ْل ُم َض‬does not have an ‫ َا ْل‬nor a ‫ َتن ِْو ْين‬, it will be ‫ َم ْع ِر َفة‬or ‫نَكِ َرة‬
based on the ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬:
If the ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬is ‫ َم ْع ِر َفة‬the ‫ ُم َضاف‬will also be ‫ َم ْع ِر َفة‬,
the man’s house
the house of the man
If the ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬is ‫نَكِ َرة‬, the ‫ ُم َضاف‬will also be ‫نَكِ َرة‬.
‫َب ْی ُت َر ُجل‬
a man’s house
house of a man
Note
ُ ‫ ا ْل ُم َض‬does not have to agree with ‫اف إِ َل ْیه‬
‫اف‬ ُ ‫ ا ْل ُم َض‬in any of the four
characteristics (DING).
ِ ‫كِتَاب ْاْلُ ْخ‬
َّ ‫بِن ُْت‬
‫الر ُج ِل‬ ‫ت‬ ُ
the daughter of the man the book of the sister
176
Translation of Possessive Phrases
The possessive phrase is translated using ’s or of.
If the ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬is ‫ َم ْع ِر َفة‬, it will be translated as follows:
the man’s house house of the man
If the ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬is ‫نَكِ َرة‬, it will be translated as follows:
‫َب ْی ُت َر ُجل‬
a man’s house house of a man
Vocab
bird ‫ َط ْیر ج ُط ُی ْور‬camel ‫إِبل‬
horse ‫َف َرس ج َأ ْف َراس‬ lion ‫ ُأ ُسد‬،‫َأ َسد ج ُأ ْسد‬
elephant ‫ َأ ْف َیال‬،‫فِ ْیل ج فِ َی َلة‬ cow ‫َب َق َرة ج َب َق َرات‬
power ‫َقدْ ر‬ donkey ‫ ُح ُمر‬،‫ِح َمار ج َح ِم ْیر‬
ram ‫َك ْبش‬ fly ‫ُذ َباب ج ِذ َّبان‬
dog ‫َك ْلب ج كِ ََّلب‬ sheep ‫ َشاء‬،‫َشاة ج ِش َیاه‬
Exercise 1
‫) َأ ْب َواب َب ْیت‬13 ‫) َل ْی َل ُة ا ْل َقدْ ِر‬9 ‫) َق َل ُم َو َلد‬5 ِ‫) بی ُت الل‬1
َْ
ِ ْ ‫) ِد ْين‬14
‫اإل ْس ََّلم‬ ‫) ُأ ُّم ْاْلَ ْو َْل ِد‬10 ‫) َأ َّيا ُم ا ْل َح ِّج‬6 ِ‫) عَدُ و الل‬2
ُّ
‫جد‬ِ ‫) َباب ا ْل َم ْس‬15 ِ ‫) َملِ ُك الن‬11
‫َّاس‬ ‫) َص ِد ْي ُق ُم َح َّمد‬7 ِ‫) كِتَاب الل‬3
ُ
‫) ك ُْر ِس ّي ُأ ْستَاذ‬16 ‫) ُأ ْخ ُت ا ْل ُم َع ِّل ِم‬12 ‫) َي ْو ُم ا ْل ُج ُم َع ِة‬8 ِ‫) رسو ُل الل‬4
ْ ُ َ
177
‫‪A Possessive Phrase in a Sentence‬‬
‫‪A possessive phrase can occur as any of the main parts of a‬‬
‫الر ُج ُل َي ْو َم ا ْل ُج ُم َع ِة‬
‫َصا َم َّ‬
‫‪The man fasted on Friday/the day of Friday.‬‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه‬ ‫َف ِ‬
‫ا ْل ُج ُم َع ِة‬ ‫َي ْو َم‬ ‫الر ُج ُل‬

‫َّ‬ ‫ام‬
‫َص َ‬
‫اف إِ َلیْ ِه‬
‫ا ْل ُم َض ُ‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َض ُ‬
‫اف‬
‫‪ُ does not have its own irab; the irab is dependent on‬م َضاف ‪The‬‬
‫‪where it occurs within the sentence.‬‬
‫‪Vocab‬‬
‫‪yellow‬‬ ‫‪َ white‬أ ْص َف ُر َ‬
‫(ص ْف َرا ُء) ج ُص ْفر‬ ‫َأ ْب َی ُض ( َب ْی َضا ُء) ج بِ ْیض‬
‫)‪family, people (of‬‬ ‫َأ ْهل ج ْو َن‬ ‫‪red‬‬ ‫َأ ْح َم ُر َ‬

‫(ح ْم َرا ُء) ج ُح ْمر‬
‫‪first, beginning‬‬ ‫َأ َّول ج ْو َن‪َ ،‬أ َوائِ ُل‬ ‫‪last, ending‬‬
‫آخر ج و َن‪َ ،‬أو ِ‬
‫اخ ُر‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ُ ْ‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪recompense, reward‬‬ ‫َجزَ اء‬ ‫‪green‬‬ ‫َأ ْخ َض ُر َ‬

‫(خ ْض َرا ُء) ج ُخ ْضر‬
‫‪those who do good‬‬ ‫ُم ْح ِسن ج ْو َن‬ ‫‪blue‬‬ ‫َأزْ َر ُق (زَ ْر َقا ُء) ج زُ ْرق‬
‫‪face‬‬ ‫‪َ black‬و ْجه ج ُو ُج ْوه‬ ‫َأ ْس َو ُد ج ُس ْود‬
‫إِ َّن َل ْی َلة ا ْل َقدْ ر َل َل ْی َلة ُم َب َاركَة‬ ‫‪)11‬‬ ‫‪ )6‬محمد ﷺ رسو ُل اللِ‬ ‫َل ْل َكعب ُة بی ُت اللِ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫َ ُ ْ‬ ‫ُ َ َّ‬ ‫َْ َْ‬
‫ِ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫َو ْج ُه ا ْل َب َق َر ِة َط ِو ْيل‬
‫ین﴾‬ ‫﴿ َذل َك َجزَ ا ُء ا ْل ُم ْحسن َ‬ ‫‪)12‬‬ ‫‪َّ )7‬‬
‫إن َما َء زَ ْمزَ َم َماء ُم َب َارك‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫َي ُك ْو ُن َي ْوم ا ْل ِع ْید َي ْوما ُم َب َاركا‬ ‫‪)13‬‬ ‫آخر ْاْلُ َمم‬‫‪ )8‬ما ُأمة موسی ِ‬
‫َ َّ ُ ْ‬ ‫اة َص ِغ ْی َرة‬‫الش ِ‬
‫ِر ْج ُل َّ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫‪َ )9‬ل ْی َس َص ِد ْيق ُم َح َّمد َقائِما‬ ‫رآن َأه ُل اللِ‬
‫إِ ْن َأ َّيام َر َم َضان إِ َّْل َأ َّيام ُم َب َاركَة‬ ‫‪)14‬‬ ‫َأ ْه ُل ا ْل ُق ِ ْ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪َ )5‬ما َأ ْه ُل َخالِد َأغْن ِ َیا َء‬
‫‪﴿ )15‬إِ ْن َه َذا إِ َّْل َأ َساط ُیر ْاْلَ َّول َ‬
‫ین﴾‬ ‫‪َ ﴿ )10‬ذل َك َجزَ ا ُء ال َّظالم َ‬
‫ین﴾‬
‫‪178‬‬
‫‪َ )7‬ي ْح َف ُظ َص ِد ْيق َخالِد كِتَاب الل‬ ‫‪ )1‬يغ ِْفر الل ُذنُوب ا ْل ِعب ِ‬
‫اد‬ ‫َ ُ ُ ْ َ َ‬
‫‪َ )8‬ج َع َل الل َي ْوم ا ْل ُج ُم َعة َي ْوم ِع ْید‬ ‫‪َْ )2‬ل ُت َسافِ ُر ُأ ُّم ُم َح َّمد َغدً ا‬
‫‪َ )9‬لن َّي ُص ْو َم ا ْل ُم ْسلِمون َأ َّيام ا ْل ِع ْید‬ ‫‪َ )3‬ي ْف َر ُح ْاْلَ ْط َف ُال َي ْو َم ا ْل ِع ْی ِد‬
‫قرة‬ ‫ِ ِ‬
‫‪َ )10‬ما َحف َظت ا ْلبِنْت إِ َّْل َس ْو َرة ال َب َ‬ ‫‪َ )4‬ل ُی ْب َع َث َّن ِع َبا ُد اللِ َي ْو َم ا ْل ِق َیا َم ِة‬
‫الر ُجل َو َلد ْاْلُ ّم َباكِیا‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )11‬ر َأی َصد ْيق َّ‬ ‫‪َ )5‬ف ِر َح ْاْلَ ْو َْل ُد إِ َّْل بِن َْت َفاطِ َم َة‬
‫الر ُس ْول ﷺ‬ ‫جد َّ‬ ‫ت ُأ ْخت َخالِد َم ْس ِ‬ ‫‪َ )12‬ر َأ ْ‬ ‫الر ْح ٰم ِن َل ْی ًَّل َر ْغ َب ًة‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )6‬ي ُق ْو ُم ع َبا ُد َّ‬
‫ُم َضاف‪ُ -‬م َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪ُ as a‬م ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق ‪The‬‬
‫‪ُ in a possessive phrase shows a comparison between‬م ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق ‪The‬‬
‫اعل ‪the action of the‬‬ ‫‪.‬م ْفعول م ْط َلق ‪ of the‬م َضاف إِ َلی ِه ‪َ and the‬ف ِ‬
‫ْ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫َ ُْ ُ‬
‫‪This can be translated as like.‬‬
‫الل ُدعَا َء ا ْل ِم ْسكِ ْین‬
‫َيدْ ع ُْو ا ْل َع ْبدُ َ‬
‫‪The servant supplicates to Allah like a poor person.‬‬
‫اعل ‪َ compares the supplication of the‬م ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق ‪In this example, the‬‬ ‫‪َ ,‬ف ِ‬
‫‪َ ,‬م ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق ‪ُ of the‬م َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪ (the servant), to the supplication of the‬ا ْل َع ْبدُ‬
‫‪ (a poor person).‬ا ْل ِم ْسكِ ْی ِن‬
‫ا ْل ِم ْسكِ ْین‬ ‫ُدعَ ا َء‬ ‫الل‬

‫َ‬ ‫ا ْل َع ْبدُ‬ ‫َيدْ عُ ْو‬
‫ُم َضاف إِ َلیْ ِه‬ ‫ُم َضاف‬
‫‪َ structure commonly‬م ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق ‪ُ in the‬م َضاف ‪َ which is the‬م ْصدَ ر ‪The‬‬
‫‪.‬فِ ْع َلة ‪comes in the pattern of‬‬
‫َج َلس ا ْل َو َلدُ ِج ْل َس َة َق ِ‬
‫ارئ‬
‫‪The boy sat like a reciter.‬‬
‫‪179‬‬
‫‪ )6‬صبر ِ‬
‫ت ا ْل َم ْر َأة َص ْبر َي ْع ُق ْوب‬ ‫‪َ )1‬قا َم َأ ُب ْو َب ْكر قِ َیا َم َنبِي‬
‫َ ََ‬
‫‪َ )7‬ظ َل َم ٰه َذا ا ْل َملِك ُظ ْلم فِ ْرع َْون‬ ‫‪ )2‬عَدَ َل ع َُم ُر عَدْ َل َنبِي‬
‫الر ُجل َص ْوم َداؤُ ْود‬ ‫‪َ )8‬ي ُص ْو ُم ٰه َذا َّ‬ ‫‪َ )3‬ج َلس ا ْل َو َلدُ ِج ْل َس َة َق ِ‬
‫ارئ‬
‫الص َحا َبة ا ْلكِ َرام إِ ْي َمان َم َلك‬
‫‪ )9‬آ َم َن َّ‬ ‫ان ُش ْر َب إِبِل‬ ‫‪َ )4‬ش ِر َب ا ْل َع ْط َش ُ‬
‫‪َ )10‬ما َت ْت ٰهؤُ َْل ِء الن َِّساء َم ْوت ُّ‬
‫الش َهدَ اء‬ ‫‪َ )5‬أك ََل ا ْل َو َلدُ ا ْل َجائِ ُع َأك َْل َب َق َرة‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق ‪Recap of‬‬

‫‪َ on its Own‬م ْصدَ ر‬ ‫َن ْعت ‪َ with a‬م ْصدَ ر‬ ‫ُم َضاف ِإ َل ْی ِه ‪َ with a‬م ْصدَ ر‬
‫‪Emphasis‬‬ ‫‪Description of the verb‬‬ ‫‪Comparison‬‬
‫َش َك َر َّ‬ ‫َش َكر الرج ُل ُش ْكر ْاْلَ ْنبِی ِ‬
‫َش َك َر َّ‬ ‫اء‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ َّ ُ‬
‫َش َك َر َّ‬
‫‪Vocab‬‬
‫‪Rabi al-Awal‬‬ ‫‪َ Sunday‬ربِ ْیع اْلَ ّو ُل‬ ‫َي ْو ُم ْاْلَ َح ِد‬
‫‪Rabi at-Thani‬‬ ‫َربِ ْیع ال َّثانِ ْي‬ ‫‪Monday‬‬ ‫َي ْو ُم ْ ِ‬

‫اإل ْثنَ ْی ِن‬
‫ُج َما َدى ْاْلُ ْو َلى‬ ‫يوم ال ُّث ََّل َث ِ‬
‫اء‬
‫‪Jumada al-Awal‬‬ ‫‪Tuesday‬‬ ‫َْ ُ‬
‫ُج َما َدى ْاْل ِخ َر ِة‬ ‫يوم اْلَربِع ِ‬
‫اء‬
‫‪Jumada at-Thani‬‬ ‫‪Wednesday‬‬ ‫َْ ُ ْ َ‬
‫‪Rajab‬‬ ‫َر َجب‬ ‫‪Thursday‬‬ ‫الخ ِم ْی ِ‬

‫س‬ ‫َي ْو ُم َ‬
‫‪Shaban‬‬ ‫‪َ Friday‬ش ْع َب ُ‬

‫ان‬ ‫الج ُم َع ِة‬
‫َي ْو ُم ُ‬
‫َر َم َض ُ‬
‫ان‬ ‫يوم السب ِ‬
‫ت‬
‫‪Ramadhan‬‬ ‫‪Saturday‬‬ ‫َ ْ ُ َّ ْ‬
‫‪Shawwal‬‬ ‫َش َّوال‬
‫‪Zul Qadah‬‬ ‫ُذو ا ْل َق ْعدَ ِة‬ ‫‪Muharram‬‬ ‫ُم َح َّرم‬
‫‪Zul Hijjah‬‬ ‫ح َّج ِة‬

‫ُذو ا ْل ِ‬
‫‪Safar‬‬ ‫َص َفر‬
‫‪180‬‬
‫ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪Nested‬‬
‫‪One possessive phrase may have multiple possessive phrases‬‬
‫‪nested within it.‬‬
‫َب ْی ُت ُأ ِّم َص ِد ْي ِق َحامِد‬
‫‪Hamid’s friend’s mother’s house‬‬
‫‪The house of the mother of the friend of Hamid‬‬
‫‪ُ . The middle‬م َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪ُ , and the last a‬م َضاف ‪The first word becomes‬‬
‫‪ُ to the‬م َضاف ‪ُ to the previous word, as well as‬م َضاف إِل ْی ِه ‪words become‬‬
‫‪word after them.‬‬
‫‪ُ and‬م َضاف ‪Therefore, the middle word will follow the rules of both‬‬
‫‪َ .‬تن ِْو ْين ‪َ nor a‬ا ْل ‪َ , and do not carry an‬م ْج ُر ْور ‪ُ : they are‬م َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬
‫َحامِد‬ ‫َص ِد ْي ِق‬ ‫ُأ ِّم‬ ‫َب ْی ُت‬
‫ُم َضاف إلیه‬ ‫‪ُ ...‬م َضاف إلیه ‪ُ /‬م َضاف ‪...‬‬ ‫‪ُ ...‬م َضاف إلیه ‪ُ /‬م َضاف ‪...‬‬ ‫ُم َضاف ‪...‬‬
‫‪ُ )11‬أ َّمة َر ُس ْول الل ﷺ‬ ‫‪َ )6‬أعْدَ اء رسو ِل اللِ‬ ‫َاب اللِ‬ ‫‪ )1‬ن ُْو ُر كِت ِ‬
‫ُ َ ُ ْ‬
‫‪َ )12‬ص ََّلة َي ْوم ا ْل ُج ُم َعة‬ ‫ب‬‫‪َ )7‬ق َل ُم ُم َع ِّل ِم ال ُّط ََّل ِ‬ ‫اد اللِ‬
‫‪ُ )2‬ذنُوب ِعب ِ‬
‫ْ ُ َ‬
‫الر ُس ْول‬ ‫‪َ )13‬باب َم ْس ِ‬ ‫ت ْاْلُ ِّم‬ ‫‪ )8‬ص ِدي ُق ُأ ْخ ِ‬ ‫‪َ )3‬ب َر َك ُة َل ْی َل ِة ا ْل َقدْ ِر‬
‫جد َّ‬ ‫َ ْ‬
‫‪ )14‬ك ُْر ِسي إِ َمام ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َاء ا ْلملِ ِ‬ ‫‪َ )4‬أ َّيا ُم َش ْه ِر َص َفر‬
‫جد‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ك‬ ‫‪ُ )9‬م َع ِّل ُم َأ ْبن َ‬
‫‪َ )15‬م ْكتَب ُم َع ِّلم ا ْل َمدْ َر َسة‬ ‫‪َ )10‬ص ْو ُم َأ َّيا ِم َر َم َض َ‬
‫ان‬ ‫‪ )5‬كُر ِسي ُأم ا ْلبن ِ‬
‫َات‬ ‫ْ ُّ ِّ َ‬
‫‪ُ .‬م َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪Complete the following phrases by adding an appropriate‬‬
‫‪َ )9‬ر ْح َمة ‪ .......‬ا ْل َعا َلمین‬ ‫ات ‪ .......‬ا ْل َفاتِ َح ِة‬ ‫آ َي ُ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬ ‫‪َ )1‬و ْج ُه ‪َ .......‬خالِد‬
‫‪ِ )10‬ح َساب ‪ .......‬ا ْل ِق َیا َمة‬ ‫ت ‪.......‬‬ ‫حج بی ِ‬
‫َ ُّ َ ْ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬ ‫اب َأ ْه ِل ‪.......‬‬‫‪ )2‬ع ََذ ُ‬
‫‪َ )11‬ط َعام ‪ .......‬ا ْل َجنَّة‬ ‫َاء ‪.......‬‬ ‫َفهم َأبن ِ‬ ‫‪)7‬‬ ‫‪ِ )3‬ص َّح ُة ‪َ .......‬حامِد‬
‫ْ ُ ْ‬
‫‪َ ....... )12‬ش ْهر َر َم َضان‬ ‫ُد ُر ْو ُس َأ َساتِ َذ ِة ‪.......‬‬ ‫‪)8‬‬ ‫‪ُ )4‬أ َّم ُة َر ُس ْو ِل ‪.......‬‬
‫‪181‬‬
‫السال ِ ُم ‪ْ and‬ا ْل ُم َثنَّی ‪َ as‬ا ْل ُم َض ُ‬
‫اف‬ ‫َج ْم ُع ا ْل ُم َذ َّك ِر َّ‬
‫السال ِ ُم ‪ and‬ا ْل ُم َثنَّی ‪ at the end of‬ن ‪The‬‬ ‫‪َ are semi-equivalent to a‬ج ْم ُع ا ْل ُم َذك َِّر َّ‬
‫السال ِ ُم ‪ and‬ا ْل ُم َثنَّی ‪َ . Therefore, when‬تن ِْو ْين‬ ‫ن ‪ُ , their‬م َضاف ‪َ occur as a‬ج ْم ُع ا ْل ُم َذك َِّر َّ‬
‫‪ُ .‬م َضاف ‪َ drops from a singular word when it is‬تن ِْو ْين ‪will drop just as the‬‬
‫ُم َع ِّل ُمو ْاْلَ ْو َْل ِد‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ُم َع ِّل ُم ْو َن‬ ‫ُأ ْختَا ُم َح َّمد‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ُأ ْخت ِ‬
‫َان‬
‫‪the teachers of the children‬‬ ‫‪Muhammad’s two sisters‬‬
‫‪ِ )10‬ع ْیدا ا ْل ُم ْسلِمین‬ ‫‪ )7‬كَافِ ُرو ا ْل َم ِد ْين َِة‬ ‫‪ )4‬بِنْتَا ُم َح َّمد‬ ‫‪َ )1‬ق َل َما ا ْل َو َل ِد‬
‫‪ُ )11‬م َع ِّلمو ْاْلَ ْو َْلد‬ ‫‪ )8‬قِ ْس َما ا ْل ِف ْع ِل‬ ‫‪ُ )5‬م ْسلِ ُم ْو ا ْل َق ْر َي ِة‬ ‫‪ )2‬ن َْه َرا ا ْل َق ْر َي ِة‬
‫جدا ا ْل َم ِد ْينَة‬
‫‪َ )12‬م ْس ِ‬ ‫‪َ )9‬ص ِد ْي َقا َأ ْح َمدَ‬ ‫ج ِد‬‫‪َ )6‬با َبا ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬ ‫‪َ )3‬ي ْو َما ا ْل ِع ْی ِد‬
‫‪ُ in the following sentences into the dual and‬م َضاف ‪Change the‬‬
‫‪translate.‬‬
‫‪َ )10‬ح ِق ْی َبة ال َّطالِب‬ ‫‪ )7‬نَجم السم ِ‬
‫اء‬ ‫‪َ )4‬ر ْط ُل َل ْحم‬ ‫‪ )1‬لِت ُْر َخ ْمر‬
‫ْ ُ َّ َ‬
‫‪َ )11‬م ْكتَب ا ْل ُم َع ِّل َمة‬ ‫‪َ )8‬ج َب ُل ا ْل َم ِد ْين َِة‬ ‫‪ُ )5‬خ ْط َب ُة ا ْل ِع ْی ِد‬ ‫‪ )2‬ا ْب ُن اْلُ ِّم‬
‫الضی ِ‬ ‫‪ِ )6‬ر ْج ُل ْاْلَ َس ِد‬ ‫‪َ )3‬يدُ ال ِّط ْف َل ِة‬
‫‪َ )12‬ر ُس ْول َر ّب ا ْل َعا َلمین‬ ‫ف‬ ‫‪َ )9‬خلِ ْی ُل َّ ْ‬
‫‪ُ in the following sentences into the plural and‬م َضاف ‪Change the‬‬
‫‪translate.‬‬
‫اجر ا ْل َم ِد ْينَة‬
‫‪ُ )7‬م َه ِ‬ ‫‪َ )4‬ت ْم َر ُة الت ِ‬
‫َّاج ِر‬ ‫آخ ُر ْاْلُ َّم ِة‬
‫‪ِ )1‬‬
‫‪ُ )8‬ر َّمانَة ا ْل َح ِد ْي َقة‬ ‫‪ )5‬اِ ْب ُن إِ ْس َرائِ ْی َل‬ ‫‪َ )2‬أ َّو ُل ْاْلُ َّم ِة‬
‫‪َ )9‬ب َركَة َي ْوم ا ْل ُج ُم َعة‬ ‫‪ُ )6‬منَافِ ُق ا ْل َم ِد ْين َِة‬ ‫‪ُ )3‬ظ ْل َم ُة ال َّل ْی ِل‬
‫‪182‬‬
‫َا ْْلَ ْس َما ُء ا ْل َخ ْم َس ُة ‪َ as‬ا ْل ُم َض ُ‬
‫اف‬
‫‪ْ , express their irab differently‬اْلَ ْس َما ُء ا ْل َخ ْم َس ُة ‪Five two-letter nouns,‬‬
‫‪َ .‬حم ‪ُ and‬ذ ْو ‪َ ,‬فم ‪َ ,‬أخ ‪َ ,‬أب ‪ُ . These words are‬م َضاف ‪when they are‬‬
‫َم ْر ُف ْوع‬ ‫َمن ُْص ْوب‬ ‫َم ْج ُر ْور‬
‫َواو‬ ‫َألِف‬ ‫َياء‬
‫‪7‬‬ ‫ْاْلَ ْس َما ُء ا ْل َخ ْم َس ُة‬
‫َأ ُب ْو َب ْكر‬ ‫َأ َبا َب ْكر‬ ‫َأبِ ْي َب ْكر‬
‫‪َ to make‬ياء ‪َ and‬ألِف ‪َ ,‬واو ‪ are replaced by‬ك َْس َرة ‪َ and‬فت َْحة ‪َ ,‬ض َّمة ‪The regular‬‬
‫‪pronunciation easier.‬‬
‫ب َب ْكر ‪َ ‬أبِ ْي َب ْكر‬
‫َأ ِ‬ ‫َأ َبا َب ْكر‬ ‫َأ َب َب ْكر ‪‬‬ ‫َأ ُب ْو َب ْكر‬ ‫َأ ُب َب ْكر ‪‬‬
‫‪Vocab‬‬
‫‪brother-in-law‬‬ ‫‪َ mouth‬حم ج َأ ْح َماء‬ ‫َفم ج َأ ْف َواه‬
‫َان َأ ُبو َج ْهل عَدُ ّو َر ُس ْول الل ﷺ‬
‫‪ )7‬ك َ‬ ‫َان َج ْع َفر َأ َخا عَلِي‬
‫‪ )1‬ك َ‬
‫‪ )8‬ن ََص َر ع َُمر َو ُع ْث َمان َوعَلِ ّي َأبا َب ْكر‬ ‫َان َح ْمزَ ُة َأ َخا َأبِي َطالِب‬ ‫ك َ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫َانت َأ ْس َماء َوعَائِ َشة بِنْتي َأبِي َب ْكر‬ ‫‪ )9‬ك ْ‬ ‫كَان اسم َأبِي ب ْكر َعبدَ اللِ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫ْ‬ ‫ْ ُ ْ َ‬
‫‪ )10‬كَان َأ ُبو َب ْكر َخلِ ْی َفة َر ُس ْول الل ﷺ‬ ‫ب َأبِ ْي َب ْكر‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ك َ‬
‫َان ع َُم ُر َصاح َ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫‪َ )11‬ل َقدْ ن ََص َر َأ ُبو َطالِب النَّبِ ّي ُم َح َّمدا ﷺ َْل َأ ُبو َل َهب‬ ‫َأ ْط َع َم َأ ُب ْو َب ْكر ُف َق َرا َء ا ْل َم ِد ْين َِة‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫‪َ )12‬أ ْط َع َم َأ ُبو ُم َح َّمد َأخا َخالِد َت ْم َر َتین َو َأخا زَ ْينَب َت ْم َرة‬ ‫ف َص ْب ًرا َج ِم ْی ًَّل‬ ‫َص َب َر َأ ُبو ُي ْو ُس َ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫‪Note‬‬
‫‪َ can be used in two ways:‬فم ‪The word‬‬
‫‪ to denote its state.‬ك َْس َرة ‪َ or‬فت َْحة ‪َ ,‬ض َّمة ‪1. As a normal noun with a‬‬
‫‪ to‬م ‪َ replacing the‬ياء ‪َ or‬ألِف ‪َ ,‬واو ‪ْ with‬اْلَ ْس َما ُء ا ْل َخ ْم َس ُة ‪2. As one of the‬‬
‫‪denote its state.‬‬
‫ُف ْو َخالِد ‪َ /‬ف ُم َخالِد‬ ‫َفا َخالِد ‪َ /‬ف َم َخالِد‬ ‫فِ ْي َخالِد ‪َ /‬ف ِم َخالِد‬
‫‪183‬‬
Possessive Phrases with Adjective Meanings
Some structures are grammatically ‫ ُم َضاف‬and ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬, but they have
an adjective meaning. These are:
1. ‫ ُذ ْو‬and its sisters
2. ‫مِ ْث ُل‬
3. ‫ َغ ْی ُر‬and ‫ِس َوی‬
‫ُذ ْو‬
‫ ُذ ْو‬and its sisters are used as ‫ ُم َضاف‬, and their ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬is always a noun
with a general meaning. They are translated as a possessive phrase
or an adjective phrase.
‫ُذ ْو َمال‬ ‫ُذ ْو َث َمر‬
wealthy fruitful, full of fruit
The dual, plural, and feminine forms of ‫ ُذ ْو‬are as given as follows:
‫َم ْج ُر ْور‬ ‫َمن ُْص ْوب‬ ‫َم ْر ُف ْوع‬
‫ِذ ْي‬ ‫َذا‬ ‫ُذ ْو‬ ‫ُم ْف َرد‬

‫َذ َو ْي‬ ‫َذ َوا‬ ‫ُم َثنًّی‬
‫َا ْل ُم َذك َُّر‬
‫َذ ِو ْي‬ ‫َذ ُو ْو‬
‫َج ْمع‬
‫ُأول ِ ْي‬ ‫ُأو ُل ْو‬
ِ ‫َذ‬
‫ات‬ َ ‫َذ‬
‫ات‬ ُ ‫َذ‬
‫ات‬ ‫ُم ْف َرد‬
‫َذ َوا َت ْي‬ ‫َذ َوا َتا‬ ‫ُم َثنًّی‬
ُ ‫َا ْل ُمؤَ ن‬
‫َّث‬
ِ ‫َذو‬
‫ات‬ ُ ‫َذ َو‬
‫ات‬
َ
‫َج ْمع‬
ِ ‫وْل‬
‫ت‬ َ ‫ُأ‬ َ ‫ُأ‬
‫وْل ُت‬
The ‫ و‬in ‫ ُأو ُل ْوا‬and ‫وْلت‬

َ ‫ ُأ‬is written but not pronounced.
Usage of ‫ُذ ْو‬

The word ‫ ُذ ْو‬can be used in two ways:
1. In a descriptive phrase as a ‫ َن ْعت‬.
2. In a sentence as a direct slot.
184
‫ ُذ ْو‬as a ‫َن ْعت‬
After a ‫ نَكِ َرة‬word, ‫ ُذ ْو‬and its ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬become the ‫ َن ْعت‬.
‫َر ُجل ُذ ْو َمال‬
a wealthy man
a possessor of wealth
a man who has wealth
ِ ‫َف‬
‫ِع ْلم‬ ‫ُذ ْو‬ ‫َر ُجل‬ ‫َجا َء‬
Vocab
tree ‫ َش َج َرة ج َأ ْش َجار‬last ‫َأ ِخ ْیر‬
nobility, high rank ‫ َش َرف‬trustworthy ‫َأمِ ْین‬
page ‫َص ْف َحة ج ات‬ ocean ‫ َأ ْب ُحر‬،‫َب ْحر ج بِ َحار‬
throne ‫ ع َْرش ج ع ُُر ْوش‬fruit ‫َث َمر ج َأ ْث َمار‬
grace, virtue ‫َف ْضل‬ answer ‫َج َواب ج َأ ْج ِو َبة‬
strength ‫ُق َّوة ج ات‬ need ‫اجة ج ات‬

َ ‫َح‬
name of a river in ‫ا ْل َك ْو َث ُر‬ garden ‫َح ِد ْي َقة ج َحدَ ائِ ُق‬
paradise
accepted ‫َم ْق ُب ْول‬ sword ‫َس ْیف ج ُس ُی ْوف‬
Exercise 11
Translate the following sentences.
‫) َر ُجل ُذو َس ْیف َكبِ ْیر‬7 ‫) ُع َل َما ُء ُأو ُل ْو ِع ْلم‬4 ‫ت ُق َّوة‬ ُ ‫وْل‬َ ‫) نِ َساء ُأ‬1
‫) ُمتَّقون َذوو ع ََمل َصالِح‬8 ِ ‫) ح ِدي َقت‬5
‫َان َذ َوا َتا َأ ْث َمار‬ ْ َ ‫) ُمنَافِق ُذ ْو َو ْج َه ْی ِن‬2
‫) ُكتُب َذات َص َفحات كَثِ ْیرة‬9 ُ ‫) ُم َع ِّل َمات َذ َو‬6
‫ات َمال‬ ‫) َر ُج ََّل ِن َذ َوا َش َرف‬3
185
‫ ُذ ْو‬as a Direct Slot
If a ‫ نَكِ َرة‬word does not precede ‫ ُذ ْو‬and its ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬, it becomes one of
the main parts of a sentence directly.
‫زَ ْيد ُذ ْو َمال‬
Zaid is wealthy.
‫َمال‬ ‫ُذ ْو‬ ‫زَ ْيد‬
The following table shows the difference between its two forms.
‫ُذ ْو‬
Preceded by a ‫ نَكِ َرة‬and agree in irab Not preceded by a ‫نَكِ َرة‬
‫َن ْعت‬ Direct Slot

‫َجا َء َر ُجل ُذ ْو ِع ْلم‬ ‫َجا َء ُذ ْو ِع ْلم‬
Vocab
to name, call ‫َس َّمی ُي َس ِّم ْي َت ْس ِم َی ًة‬ to exceed bounds, be ‫ف إِ ْس َرا ًفا‬
ُ ‫ف ُي ْس ِر‬
َ ‫َأ ْس َر‬
extravagant
to scream ‫اح َي ِص ْی ُح َص ْی َح ًة‬

َ ‫َص‬ to make grow ‫َأ ْن َب َت ُينْبِ ُت إِ ْن َبا ًتا‬
to seek ‫ب َط َل ًبا‬
ُ ‫ب َي ْط ُل‬
َ ‫َط َل‬ to destroy ‫َأ ْه َل َك ُي ْهلِ ُك إِ ْه ََّلكًا‬
to make compulsory ‫َف َر َض َي ْف ِر ُض َف ْر ًضا‬ to build, construct ‫َبنَی َي ْبن ِ ْي بِنَا ًء‬
to cut ‫َق َط َع َي ْق َط ُع َق ْط ًعا‬ to perform ablution ‫َت َو َّض َأ َيت ََو َّض ُأ َت َو ُّض ًأ‬
to descend, come down ‫نَزَ َل َين ِْز ُل نُزُ ْو ًْل‬ to be permissible ‫َجازَ َي ُج ْوزُ َج َوازً ا‬
ِ ِ
to marry ً ‫َن َك َح َينْك ُح ن َك‬
‫احا‬ to gather ‫َح َش َر َي ْح ُش ُر َح ْش ًرا‬
‫ ُو ُج ْو ًدا‬،‫ِو ْجدَ انًا‬ ِ ‫َو َجدَ َي‬
ُ‫جد‬ ‫َذ َاق َي ُذ ْو ُق َذ ْو ًقا‬
to find to taste
186
‫‪ )8‬إِ َّن ا ْل ُم َع ِّلم َأ ْح َمد َلذو ِع ْلم‬ ‫‪ )1‬إِ َّن َ‬
‫الل َل ُذ ْو ُق َّوة‬
‫یم﴾‬ ‫الل ُذو ا ْل َف ْض ِل ا ْل َعظِ ِ‬
‫‪ُ ﴿ )9‬‬ ‫ش‬ ‫‪ )2‬إِ َّن َ‬
‫الل ُذ ْو ا ْل َع ْر ِ‬
‫ُس ِّم َي ُع ْث َمان ﭬ َذا الن ُّْورين‬ ‫‪)10‬‬ ‫الر ُج ُل ُذ ْو َمال‬

‫‪ٰ )3‬ه َذا َّ‬
‫إِ َّن ٰه َذا َر ُجل ُذو ع ََمل َصالِح‬ ‫‪)11‬‬ ‫الل ﴿ َل ُذو َمغ ِْف َرة﴾‬ ‫‪ )4‬إِ َّن َ‬
‫َسا َف َر ا ْل ُح َّجاج َأ َّول ِذي ا ْل َق ْعدَ ة‬ ‫‪)12‬‬ ‫‪ )5‬إِ َّن ا ْل ُمنَافِ َق ُذو َو ْج َه ْی ِن‬
‫آخر ِذي ا ْل ِ‬‫رجع ا ْلحجاج ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ح َّجة‬ ‫َ َ َ ُ َّ‬ ‫‪)13‬‬ ‫َان ٰه َذا ا ْل َفق ْی ُر َذا َح َ‬
‫اجة‬ ‫‪ )6‬ك َ‬
‫الل ﴿ َبا ًبا َذا ع ََذاب َش ِديد﴾‬ ‫َفت ََح ُ‬ ‫‪)14‬‬ ‫اس َعة﴾‬ ‫‪ )7‬الل ﴿ ُذو رحمة و ِ‬
‫َ ْ َ َ‬ ‫ُ‬
‫َان ٰهؤُ َْل ِء ال ُّط ََّّلب َذوي َف ْضل‬
‫‪ )7‬ك َ‬ ‫ان ا ْلمر َأ َت ِ‬
‫ان َذ َوا َتا ُق َّوة‬ ‫َْ‬
‫‪َ )1‬ها َت ِ‬
‫اجة‬‫الر ُجلین َذ َوا َح َ‬ ‫‪ )8‬إِ َّن ٰه َذ ْي ِن َّ‬ ‫ت َف ْضل‬ ‫وْل ُ‬ ‫َات َأ ْح َمدَ ُأ َ‬‫‪َ )2‬بن ُ‬
‫الص َحا َبة ا ْلكِ َرام ُأول ِ ْي ِع ْلم‬
‫َان َّ‬ ‫‪ )9‬ك َ‬ ‫ات َث َمر‬
‫الش َج َر ُة َذ َ‬‫‪َ )3‬ما ٰه ِذ ِه َّ‬
‫ات ِد ْين‬
‫‪َْ )10‬ل َينْكِ ُح َأ ْح َمد إِ َّْل ا ْم َرأة َذ َ‬ ‫‪ )4‬إِ َّن ٰهؤُ َْل ِء َْلُو ُلو ِع ْلم َوع ََمل‬
‫الص َحابِ ّي ع َُمر ﭬ َذا عَدْ ل‬ ‫َان َّ‬‫‪ )11‬ك َ‬ ‫‪ )5‬إِ َّن ْاْلُ ْخ َت َفاطِ َم َة َذ ُ‬
‫ات َأ ْو َْلد‬
‫ات َش َرف َو َمال‬‫‪ )12‬كَان َْت َخ ِد ْي َجة ا ْم َر َأة َذ َ‬ ‫ات َش َرف‬ ‫‪ )6‬إِ َّن ٰهؤُ َْل ِء الن َِّسا َء َذ َو ُ‬
‫‪187‬‬
‫مِ ْثل‬
‫‪ is used to give the meaning of like or similar. It is used‬مِ ْثل ‪The word‬‬
‫‪in two ways:‬‬
‫‪َ .‬ن ْعت ‪1. In a descriptive phrase as a‬‬
‫‪2. In a sentence as a direct slot.‬‬
‫َن ْعت ‪ as a‬مِ ْثل‬
‫ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪ and its‬مِ ْث ُل ‪ noun agree in irab,‬نَكِ َرة ‪ and the preceding‬مِ ْث ُل ‪If‬‬
‫‪َ .‬ن ْعت ‪become the‬‬
‫زَ ْيد َر ُجل مِ ْث ُل َخالِد‬
‫‪Zaid is a man like Khalid.‬‬
‫‪َ .‬أ ْم َثال ‪ is plural, it will change to its plural form,‬مِ ْث ُل ‪َ of‬منْ ُع ْوت ‪If the‬‬
‫ج َب ِ‬
‫ال‬ ‫ُب ُی ْوت َأ ْم َث ُال ا ْل ِ‬
‫‪houses like mountains‬‬

‫َخالِد‬ ‫مِ ْث ُل‬ ‫َر ُجل‬ ‫زَ ْيد‬
‫‪Translate the following phrases into English.‬‬
‫‪ِ ...‬د ْين مِ ْث ُل ِد ْين ا ْل َی ُه ْود‬ ‫‪)13‬‬ ‫‪ُ ... )7‬ش َّبان َأ ْم َث ُال ُّ‬
‫الش ُی ْوخِ‬ ‫‪َ ...‬ساعَة مِ ْث ُل َي ْوم‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫‪َ ...‬ل ْحم مِ ْث ُل َل ْحم ا ْل َب َق َرة‬ ‫‪)14‬‬ ‫‪ ... )8‬كِ ََّلب َأ ْم َث ُال ْاْلُ ْس ِد‬ ‫‪َ ...‬ش ْهر مِ ْث ُل َسنَة‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫ج َبال‬ ‫‪َ ...‬م َصائِب َأ ْم َث ُال ا ْل ِ‬ ‫‪)15‬‬ ‫‪َ ... )9‬ش ْهر مِ ْث ُل َش ْه ِر َر َجب‬ ‫‪َ ...‬ماء مِ ْث ُل ع ََسل‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫اجة َف ِق ْیر‬ ‫ِ‬
‫اجة م ْث ُل َح َ‬ ‫‪َ ...‬ح َ‬ ‫‪)16‬‬ ‫ج َب ِ‬
‫ال‬ ‫‪َ ... )10‬أ ْش َجار َأ ْم َث ُال ا ْل ِ‬ ‫‪َ ...‬ق ْر َية مِ ْث ُل َب َلد‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫‪َ ...‬ش َرف مِ ْث ُل َش َرف ا ْل ِع ْلم‬ ‫‪)17‬‬ ‫‪َ ... )11‬أحیاء َأم َث ُال ْاْلَمو ِ‬
‫ات‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫َْ ْ‬ ‫‪َ ...‬و ْجه مِ ْث ُل ا ْل َق َم ِر‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫‪َ ...‬ص ِد ْيق مِ ْث ُل َص ِد ْيق َخالِد‬ ‫‪)18‬‬ ‫‪َ ... )12‬أ ْب َواب َأ ْم َث ُال ْاْلَ ْح َج ِ‬
‫ار‬ ‫‪ِ ...‬ح َمار مِ ْث ُل َف َرس‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫‪188‬‬
‫‪َ )7‬ما َأ ْر َس َل الل َنبِ ّیا مِ ْث َل ُم َح َّمد ﷺ‬ ‫الل َب ْیتًا مِ ْث َل ا ْل َك ْع َب ِة‬
‫َما َج َع َل ُ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫‪َ )8‬ما َخ َل َق الل َي ْوما مِ ْث َل َي ْوم ا ْل ُج ُم َعة‬ ‫ج َب ِ‬
‫ال‬ ‫َيغ ِْفر الل ُذن ُْو ًبا َأم َث َال ا ْل ِ‬
‫ْ‬ ‫ُ ُ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫‪َ )9‬لن َّي ْش َر َب النَّاس َماء مِ ْث َل َماء ا ْل َك ْو َثر‬ ‫اء زَ ْمزَ َم‬ ‫ما َخ َل َق الل ماء مِ ْث َل م ِ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫َ‬ ‫ُ َ ً‬ ‫َ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ ِ‬ ‫الل َق ْو ًما مِ ْث َل ْاْلَن َْص ِ‬
‫الر ُس ْول ﷺ‬ ‫‪َ )10‬ما َخ َل َق الل َمد ْينَة م ْث َل َمد ْينَة َّ‬ ‫ار‬ ‫َما َخ َل َق ُ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫ِِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ما َأنْزَ َل الل كِتَابا مِ ْث َل ا ْل ُقر ِ‬
‫احة م ْث َل ٰهذه ال ُّت َّف َ‬
‫احة‬ ‫‪َ )11‬ما َذا َقت ا ْلبِنْت ُت َّف َ‬ ‫آن‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫ُ ً‬ ‫َ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫جد ا ْل َق ْر َية‬‫جدا مِ ْث َل َم ْس ِ‬ ‫‪َ )12‬ل َی ْبن ِ َی َّن َأ ْهل ا ْل َم ِد ْينَة َم ْس ِ‬ ‫الل َل ْی َل ًة مِ ْث َل َل ْی َل ِة ا ْل َقدْ ِر‬
‫‪ as a Direct Slot‬مِ ْثل‬
‫‪ُ become one of‬م َضاف إِ َل ْیه ‪ and its‬مِ ْث ُل ‪,‬مِ ْثل ‪ noun does not precede‬نَكِ َرة ‪If a‬‬
‫‪the main slots of a sentence directly.‬‬
‫زَ ْيد مِ ْث ُل َخالِد‬
‫‪Zaid is like Khalid‬‬
‫‪َ ,‬منْ ُع ْوت ‪Sometimes, you will need to add a word to show the implied‬‬
‫‪e.g. something.‬‬
‫َر َأی زَ ْيد مِ ْث َل َطائِ َرة‬
‫‪Zaid saw (something) like/resembling a plane.‬‬
‫َخالِد‬ ‫مِ ْث ُل‬ ‫زَ ْيد‬
‫‪189‬‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق ‪ as a‬مِ ْثل‬
‫‪َ .‬م ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق ‪ُ describe the verb, they become the‬م َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪ and its‬مِ ْثل ‪If‬‬
‫عَدَ َل ع َُم ُر مِ ْث َل َأبِ ْي َب ْكر ﭭ‬
‫‪Omar was fair like/as Abu Bakr.‬‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق‬ ‫َف ِ‬
‫َب ْكر‬ ‫َأبِ ْي‬ ‫مِ ْث َل‬ ‫عُ َم ُر‬ ‫عَ دَ َل‬
‫ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬ ‫ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬ ‫ُم َضاف‬
‫اْلخ َرة مِ ْث َل َجنَّات الدُّ نْیا‬‫‪َ )6‬لیس ْت جنَّة ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫‪ )1‬ك ََّذ َب ْت ُق َر ْيش النَ ِّب َّي مِ ْث َل عَاد‬
‫‪ )7‬إِن ََّما ُي َص ِّلي ا ْل ُم ْسلِمون مِ ْث َل النَّبِ ّي ﷺ‬ ‫ت َأ َحد مِ ْث َل َم ِ‬
‫ال َق ُار ْو َن‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ل ْم ُيؤْ َ‬
‫‪َ )8‬لن ُّيؤْ َتی َأ َحد مِ ْث َل ُم ْلك ُس َل ْی َمان ڠ‬ ‫الصال ِ ُح مِ ْث َل طِ ْفل‬ ‫الر ُج ُل َّ‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )3‬ي ْبكي َّ‬
‫‪َ )9‬ل ْم َين ُْص ْر َأ َحد َر ُس ْول الل ﷺ مِ ْث َل ْاْلَن َْصار‬ ‫اْلخ َر ِة مِ ْث َل ن ِ‬
‫َار الدُّ ْن َیا‬ ‫‪َ )4‬لیس ْت نَار ِ‬
‫ُ‬ ‫َْ‬
‫‪َ )10‬ل ْم َي ْف َه ْم ٰه َذا ا ْل َو َلد الدَّ ْرس مِ ْث َل تِ ْل َك ا ْلبِنْت‬ ‫وب ڠ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )5‬ل ْم َي ْصبِ ْر َأ َحد م ْث َل َي ْع ُق َ‬
‫‪Summary‬‬
‫‪The table below summarises the difference between the two‬‬
‫‪forms.‬‬
‫مِ ْثل‬
‫– نَكِ َرة ‪Preceded by a‬‬ ‫– نَكِ َرة ‪Preceded by a‬‬
‫نَكِ َرة ‪Not preceded by a‬‬
‫‪agree in irab‬‬ ‫‪do not agree in irab‬‬
‫َن ْعت‬ ‫‪Direct Slot‬‬
‫زَ ْيد َر ُجل مِ ْث ُل َخالِد‬ ‫زَ ْيد مِ ْث ُل َخالِد‬ ‫َج َل َس َر ُجل مِ ْث َل َخالِد‬
‫‪190‬‬
‫ َغ ْی ُر‬and ‫ِس َوی‬
The words ‫ َغ ْی ُر‬and ‫ ِس َوی‬can be used in two ways:
1. In a descriptive phrase as a ‫ َن ْعت‬.
2. In a sentence as a direct slot.
‫ َغ ْی ُر‬and ‫ ِس َوی‬as a ‫َن ْعت‬
The words ‫ َغ ْی ُر‬and ‫ ِس َوی‬become the ‫ َن ْعت‬of the preceding ‫ نَكِ َرة‬noun if
they agree in irab.
‫زَ ْيد‬ ‫ِس َوی‬ ‫َر ُجل‬ ِ ‫ص‬
‫ح ْیح‬ َ ‫َغ ْی ُر‬ ‫َج َواب‬
‫ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬ ‫ُم َضاف‬ ‫ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬ ‫ُم َضاف‬
‫نَ ْعت‬ ‫َمنْ ُع ْوت‬ ‫نَ ْعت‬ ‫َمنْ ُع ْوت‬
Translation of ‫َغ ْی ُر‬

When ‫ َغ ْی ُر‬is used as a ‫ َن ْعت‬, it can give two meanings depending on
its ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬:
1. If its ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬is an adjective, it will function as a negative prefix
such as un-, dis-, etc.; i.e. it will give the opposite meaning.
ِ ‫َغیر ص‬
‫ح ْیح‬ ِ ‫ص‬
‫ح ْیح‬
َ ُْ َ

incorrect correct
Sometimes, it is easier to translate ‫ َغ ْی ُر‬as a negative particle.
ِ ‫الرج ُل َغیر ص‬
‫ادق‬ َ ُْ ُ َّ
The man is untruthful. The man is not truthful.
ِ ِ
2. If its ‫ ُم َضاف إ َل ْیه‬is a noun, it will give the meaning of other than,
apart from, etc.
ِ‫إِ َله َغیر الل‬
ُْ
a deity other than Allah
The table below explains the difference between the two usages.
‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬is an adjective negative prefix
ِ ‫َغیر ص‬
‫ح ْیح‬ َ ُْ
‫َغ ْیر‬
‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬is a noun ِ‫إِ َله َغیر الل‬
other than ُْ
191
‫ِس َوی ‪Translation of‬‬
‫‪ِ is always a noun and gives the meaning of other‬س َوی ‪ُ of‬م َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪The‬‬
‫‪than, apart from, etc.‬‬
‫َأحد ِسوی اللِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫َ‬
‫‪anyone other than Allah‬‬
‫‪َ ...‬غ ْی ُر غ َْض َبان‬ ‫‪)13‬‬ ‫‪َ ... )9‬غ ْی ُر ُم َب َارك‬ ‫‪َ ... )5‬غ ْی ُر ُم ْسلِم‬ ‫‪َ ... )1‬غ ْی ُر غَنِي‬
‫‪ِ ...‬س َوی ا ْل َع َسل‬ ‫‪)14‬‬ ‫‪َ ... )10‬غ ْی ُر َر ِح ْیم‬ ‫‪َ ... )6‬غ ْی ُر َسالِم‬ ‫‪َ ... )2‬غ ْی ُر ُت َّف َ‬
‫احة‬
‫‪ ...‬غَ ْی ُر ٰذلِ َك ا ْل َباب‬ ‫‪)15‬‬ ‫الش ْر ِك‬
‫‪ِ ... )11‬س َوی ِّ‬ ‫‪َ ... )7‬غ ْی ُر َم ْس ُر ْور‬ ‫‪َ ... )3‬غیر و ِ‬
‫احد‬ ‫ُْ َ‬
‫‪َ ...‬غ ْی ُر ِص َراط الل‬ ‫‪)16‬‬ ‫‪َ ... )12‬غ ْی ُر ا ْل ُح َّجاجِ‬ ‫‪َ ... )8‬غ ْی ُر ا ْل ُمت َِّق ْی َن‬ ‫‪َ ... )4‬غ ْی ُر َح َجر‬
‫‪ )7‬إِ َّن ع ََذاب ْاْل ِخ َرة ع ََذاب َغ ْی ُر َي ِس ْیر‬ ‫َّاس َي ْو ًما َغ ْی َر َط ِو ْيل‬
‫‪َ )1‬صا َم الن ُ‬
‫‪ )8‬إِ َّن ٰه ِذ ِه ْاْلَ ْو َْلد َل ِف ْتنَة َغ ْی ُر فِ ْتنَة ا ْل َمال‬ ‫‪َْ )2‬ل يعبدُ ا ْلمسلِمو َن إِ ٰلها َغیر اللِ‬
‫ً َْ‬ ‫َُْ ُ ْ ُ ْ‬
‫ب ال ُّط ََّّلب َد ْرسا َغ ْی َر ٰه َذا الدَّ ْرس‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪ )3‬إِ َّن ٰه َذا ا ْل َو َلدَ ُم ْجت َِهد َغ ْی ُر ك َْس ََّل َن‬
‫‪َْ )9‬ل ُيح ُّ‬
‫َیر َه َذا ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬
‫جد‬ ‫جدا غ َ‬ ‫‪َ )10‬ما َو َجدَ النَّاس َم ْس ِ‬ ‫‪َ )4‬لن َي ْق َب َل الل ِد ْينًا َغ ْی َر ِد ْي ِن ْ ِ‬
‫اإل ْس ََّل ِم‬ ‫ُ‬
‫‪َْ )11‬ل َي ْر َضی ا ْل ُم ْسلِمون ِص َراطا َغ ْی َر ِص َراط الل‬ ‫اج َب ْیتًا َغ ْی َر ا ْل َك ْع َب ِة‬
‫ف ا ْل ُح َّج ُ‬
‫‪َْ )5‬ل َي ُط ْو ُ‬
‫الر ُجل كِتَابا َغ ْی َر ا ْل ُقرآن َأ َّيام َر َم َضان‬
‫‪َْ )12‬ل َي ْق َر ُأ َه َذا َّ‬ ‫َاذب‬ ‫الشی ُخ َأحمدُ َشی ًخا َغیر ك ِ‬
‫َْ‬ ‫َان َّ ْ ْ َ ْ‬ ‫‪ )6‬ك َ‬
‫‪192‬‬
‫‪ِ as a Slot‬س َوی ‪َ and‬غ ْی ُر‬
‫‪ُ , it becomes‬م َضاف إِ َل ْیه ‪ِ and its‬س َوی ‪َ or‬غ ْیر ‪ noun does not precede‬نَكِ َرة ‪If a‬‬
‫‪one of the slots of a sentence directly.‬‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫ٰه َذا ا ْل َما ُء َغ ْی ُر كَثِ ْیر‬
‫ٰه َذا ا ْل َما ُء َماء َغ ْی ُر كَث ْیر‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪This water is not a lot.‬‬

‫كَثِ ْیر‬ ‫َغ ْی ُر‬ ‫ا ْل َما ُء‬
‫ادقین‬ ‫‪ُ )8‬أو َلئِ َك ْاْلَو َْلد َغیر ص ِ‬ ‫اِ ْس َت ْی َق َظ َغ ْی ُر َأ ْح َمدَ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫ُْ َ‬ ‫ْ‬
‫جد َج ِد ْيد َغ ْی ُر َق ِد ْيم‬ ‫‪َ )9‬ه َذا ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬ ‫الر ُج ُل َغ ْی ُر َف ِق ْیر‬‫ٰه َذا َّ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫‪ )10‬ما ٰه َذا ا ْلجواب إِ َّْل َغیر ص ِ‬
‫ح ْیح‬ ‫اإلنَا ُء َم ْم ُل ْوء َغ ْی َر َماء‬ ‫ٰه َذا ْ ِ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫ُْ َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ‬
‫اس َب َّن الل ال َّظالِمین َغ ْی َر َي ِس ْیر‬ ‫َلیح ِ‬
‫ُ َ‬ ‫‪)11‬‬ ‫َه ِذ ِه ْاْلَع َْم ُال َغ ْی ُر َم ْق ُب ْو َلة‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫ُي ْط ِع ُم ٰه َذا ا ْلغَن ِ ّي ا ْل ُف َق َراء َغ ْی َر ُم َراء‬ ‫‪)12‬‬ ‫الش َهدَ ا ُء َأ ْح َیاء َغ ْی ُر َأ ْم َوات‬ ‫‪ُّ )5‬‬
‫َما َأ َّيام َغ ْی ِر َر َم َضان مِ ْث َل َأ َّيام َر َم َضان‬ ‫‪)13‬‬ ‫ت َل َق ِر ْيب َغ ْی ُر َب ِع ْید‬
‫‪ )6‬إِ َّن ا ْل َم ْو َ‬
‫ُين ِْف ُق ٰهؤُ َْل ِء النَّاس ْاْلَ ْم َوال َغ ْی َر ُم ْس ِرفین‬ ‫‪)14‬‬ ‫َات َغ ْی ُر َصائِ َمات‬ ‫‪َ )7‬هؤُ َْل ِء ا ْل َبن ُ‬
‫‪193‬‬
‫ َغ ْی ُر‬and ‫ ِس َوی‬as Particles of Exclusion and Emphasis
The words ‫ َغ ْی ُر‬and ‫ ِس َوی‬can also be used in the same way as ‫ ;إِ َّْل‬as
particles of exclusion and emphasis.
As Particles of Exclusion
When ‫ َغ ْی ُر‬and ‫ ِس َوی‬are used for exclusion, they are translated as
except.
‫َجا َء ْاْلَ ْو َْل ُد َغ ْی َر زَ ْيد‬
The children came except Zaid.
‫ َغ ْی ُر‬will have the same irab as the word after ‫ َّإْل‬, i.e. it will usually be
‫ َمن ُْص ْوب‬. The irab of ‫ ِس َوی‬will not be visible, it will remain as ‫ ِس َوی‬in all
cases. This will be discussed later.
In tarkib, ‫ َغ ْی َر‬and ‫ ِس َوی‬are labelled as ‫ َأ َدا ُة ِاْل ْستِثْن َِاء‬, and the word after
them as the ‫ ُم ْس َت ْثنًی‬. However, because they are also ‫ ُم َضاف‬and ‫ُم َضاف‬
‫إ َل ْی ِه‬, they will also be labelled as phrases.
‫ُم ْستَثْنًی‬ ِ ‫َأدا ُة ِاْلستِثْن‬
‫َاء‬ ِ ‫َف‬
ْ َ
‫زَ ْيد‬ ‫َغ ْی َر‬ ‫ْاْلَ ْو َْل ُد‬ ‫َجا َء‬
‫ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬ ‫ُم َضاف‬
As Particles of Emphasis
‫ َغ ْی ُر‬and ‫ ِس َوی‬function as ‫ف َح ْصر‬ ُ ‫ َح ْر‬if there is a ‫ف َن ْفي‬
ُ ‫ َح ْر‬before them and
ِ
the ‫ ُم ْس َت ْثنًی منْ ُه‬is omitted. They will be translated as only.
‫َما َجا َء َغ ْی ُر زَ ْيد‬
No one other than Zaid came.
Only Zaid came.
The tarkib of this will be written as follows:
ِ ‫َف‬
‫اعل‬ ‫ف َح ْصر‬
ُ ‫َح ْر‬ ‫فِ ْعل‬ ‫ف نَ ْفي‬
ُ ‫َح ْر‬
‫زَ ْيد‬ ‫َغ ْی ُر‬ ‫َجا َء‬ ‫َما‬
194
‫‪َ .‬غ ْی ُر ‪The table below summarises the different uses of‬‬
‫َغ ْی ُر‬
‫َنكِ َرة ‪Preceded by a‬‬ ‫َنكِ َرة ‪Not preceded by a‬‬

‫َن ْعت‬ ‫‪Direct Slot‬‬
‫ٰهذا َش ْهر َغ ْی ُر َر َم َض َ‬
‫ان‬ ‫َّاس َغ ْی َر ا ْل َم ِر ْي ِ‬
‫ض‬ ‫َصا َم الن ُ‬ ‫َیر زَ ْيد‬
‫َما َصا َم غ ُ‬
‫استِ ْثنَاء‬
‫ْ‬ ‫َح ْصر‬
‫‪َْ )8‬ل َي ْر ٰضی الل ِد ْينا َغ ْی َر ِد ْين ْ ِ‬
‫اإل ْس ََّلم‬ ‫َب‬‫نَا َم ْاْلَ ْو َْل ُد َغ ْی َر زَ ْين َ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫‪َْ )9‬ل َي ْق َر ُأ ال ُّط ََّّلب ا ْل ُكتُب َغ ْی َر ُمت ََو ِّضئین‬ ‫اإل َما ُم َغ ْی َر َقائِم‬ ‫ب ِْ‬ ‫َما َي ْخ ُط ُ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫‪َ )10‬ق َر َأ ٰهؤُ َْل ِء ال ُّط َّّلب َغ ْی َر ُس ْو َرة ا ْل َب َق َرة‬ ‫الص ْو ُم َغ ْی َر َأ َّيا ِم ا ْل ِع ْی ِد‬
‫َي ُج ْوزُ َّ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫‪َْ )11‬ل َي ُذ ْو ُق ع ََذاب النَّار َغ ْی ُر ال َّظالِمین‬ ‫ت َفاطِ َم ُة َغ ْی َر َت ْم َرة‬ ‫َما َو َجدَ ْ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫الر ُجل َأ َّيام َر َم َضان َغ َیر ا ْل ُق ْرآن‬ ‫‪َْ )12‬ل َي ْق َر ُأ ٰه َذا َّ‬ ‫َْل َي ِز ْيدُ ا ْل َكافِ ُر ْو َن َغ ْی َر َض ََّلل‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫الص ْف َحة ْاْلَ ِخ ْی َرة‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )13‬ق َر َأ ال ُّط ََّّلب ا ْلكتَاب َغ ْی َر َّ‬ ‫َذ َاق ْاْلَ ْو َْل ُد ال َّط َعا َم َغ ْی َر َفاطِ َم َة‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫‪َْ )14‬ل َت ُص ْو ُم ٰه ِذ ِه ا ْلبِنْت ا ْل َم ِر ْي َضة َغ ْی َر َش ْهر َر َم َضان‬ ‫ف ال َّط َعا َم َغ ْی َر ال َّل ْح ِم‬ ‫‪َ )7‬أك ََل ُّ‬
‫‪Note‬‬
‫‪ُ . However, it can also be‬م َضاف ‪َ (most) is used as a‬أ ْك َث ُر ‪The word‬‬
‫‪translated as an adjective.‬‬
‫َْل َي ْش ُك ُر َأ ْك َث ُر الن ِ‬
‫َّاس‬
‫‪Most people are not grateful.‬‬
‫‪Summary‬‬
‫‪Phrases‬‬
‫‪Possessive Phrase‬‬
‫ُم َضاف‬ ‫‪Owned‬‬ ‫َتن ِْو ْين ‪َ , no‬ا ْل ‪No‬‬
‫ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬ ‫‪Owner‬‬ ‫)‪َ (Don’t agree‬م ْج ُر ْور‬
‫‪195‬‬
Part 6: Number Phrases
A phrase with a number is called a number phrase.
six books
There are two types of numbers:
1. Cardinal Number: This number shows how many things there
are, e.g. one, two, three.
2. Ordinal Number: This shows the position of something, e.g.
first, second, third.
We will discuss both in detail.
Cardinal Numbers
A cardinal number phrase is comprised of a number, ‫عَدَ د‬, and the
item being quantified, the ‫ َم ْعدُ ْود‬.
six books
‫عَدَ د‬ ‫َم ْعدُ ْود‬
There are six types of Arabic cardinal numbers according to their

grammatical function:
1. 1–2
2. 3–10
3. 11–19
4. Tens
5. Tens and Units
6. 100s and 1,000s
196
Numbers 1–2
Below are the numbers one and two.
ِ
‫ ا ْثنَتَان‬/ ‫ ا ْثنَان‬one ِ ِ
‫ َواحدَ ة‬/ ‫َواحد‬ِ ِ ِ
two
The meaning of one and two is understood from the ‫ ُم ْف َرد‬and ‫ُم َثنًّی‬
forms themselves. Therefore, the numbers one and two are not
usually required. However, it can be added to create emphasis.
ِ ‫﴿إِ ٰله و‬
﴾‫احد‬ َ
one God/only one God
In tarkib, the numbers one and two will become the ‫ َن ْعت‬of the ‫ َم ْعدُ ْود‬.
ِ ‫َان ا ْثنَت‬
‫َان‬ ِ ‫بِنْت‬ ِ ‫رج ََّل ِن ا ْثن‬
‫َان‬ ُ َ
two girls two men
ِ ‫و‬
‫احد‬ ‫إِ ٰله‬
َ
However, along with the tarkib, it is important to identify the ‫عَدَ د‬

and ‫ َم ْعدُ ْود‬.
Exercise 1
Add the number in brackets to the nouns given below.
)1( ....... ‫) َم ِد ْينَة‬5 )2( ....... ‫) نِ ْع َمة‬3 )2( ....... ‫) ُج ُم َعة‬1
)2( ....... ‫) َق ْر َية‬6 )1( ....... ‫) ُأ َّمة‬4 )1( ....... ‫) قِ ْسم‬2
Summary of Numbers 1–2
Number
Structure of Gender of
Number of the Example
the ‫ َم ْعدُ ْود‬- ‫عَدَ د‬ the ‫عَدَ د‬
‫َم ْعدُ ْود‬
‫َمنْ ُع ْوت‬ ‫احد‬ِ ‫و َلد و‬

َ َ
1–2 agree agree ِ ‫بِنْت و‬
‫َن ْعت‬ ‫احدَ ة‬ َ
197
Numbers 3–10
Below are the numbers three to ten.
seven )7( ‫ َس ْب َعة‬/ ‫ َس ْبع‬three )3( ‫ َث ََّل َثة‬/ ‫َث ََّلث‬
eight )8( ‫ َث َمانِ َیة‬/ ‫ َث َمان‬four )4( ‫ َأ ْر َب َعة‬/ ‫َأ ْر َبع‬
nine )9( ‫ تِ ْس َعة‬/ ‫ تِ ْسع‬five )5( ‫ َخ ْم َسة‬/ ‫َخ ْمس‬
ten )10( ‫ َع َش َرة‬/ ‫ َع ْشر‬six )6( ‫ ِستَّة‬/ ‫ِست‬

In the numbers three to ten:
1. the ‫ عَدَ د‬will become ‫ ُم َضاف‬to the ‫ َم ْعدُ ْود‬.
2. the ‫ َم ْعدُ ْود‬will be in the plural form.
‫َس ْب َع ُة َأ ْب َواب‬
seven doors
‫َأ ْب َواب‬ ‫َس ْب َع ُة‬
Notes
1. The numbers three to ten have the opposite gender to their
‫ َم ْعدُ ْود‬. This is called chiastic concord.
‫ث نِ َساء‬
ُ ‫َث ََّل‬ ‫َث ََّل َث ُة ِر َجال‬
2. The chiastic concord is based on the singular of the word, not
the plural.
ُ ‫َث ََّل‬
‫ث ُس َور‬
three chapters
In this example, the ‫ عَدَ د‬has chiastic concord with the singular
form of the word, ‫ ُس ْو َرة‬, not the plural, ‫ ُس َور‬.
198
‫‪Vocab‬‬
‫‪charity‬‬ ‫‪َ call to prayer‬صدَ َقة ج ات‬ ‫َأ َذان‬
‫‪prayer, salutation‬‬ ‫َص ََّلة ج َص َل َوات‬ ‫‪wing‬‬ ‫َجنَاح ج َأ ْجن ِ َحة‬
‫‪pure‬‬ ‫َط ِّیب (ة) ج ْو َن (ات)‬ ‫)‪pound (£‬‬ ‫ُجنَ ْیه ج ات‬
‫‪room‬‬ ‫‪ status‬غ ُْر َفة ج غ َُرف‬ ‫َد َر َجة ج ات‬
‫‪farmer‬‬ ‫َف ََّّلح ج ْو َن‬ ‫‪shop‬‬ ‫ُدكَّان ج َدكَاكِ ْی َن‬
‫‪drop‬‬ ‫َق ْط َرة ج ات‬ ‫‪dinar‬‬ ‫ِد ْينَار ج َدنَانِ ْی ُر‬
‫‪mile‬‬ ‫ِم ْیل ج َأ ْم َیال‬ ‫‪ship‬‬ ‫َس ِف ْینَة ج ُس ُفن‬
‫‪time‬‬ ‫‪َ knife‬و ْقت ج َأ ْو َقات‬ ‫ِس ِّك ْین ج َس َكاكِ ْی ُن‬
‫‪﴿ )13‬زَ ْو َج ْی ِن ا ْثنَ ْی ِن﴾‬ ‫‪َ ﴿ )7‬أ ْر َب َع ِة َأ ْش ُهر﴾‬ ‫‪ِ ﴿ )1‬ست َِّة َأ َّيام﴾‬
‫‪﴿ )14‬صیح ًة و ِ‬
‫احدَ ًة﴾‬ ‫‪َ ﴿ )8‬س ْب ِع َب َق َرات﴾‬ ‫﴿ماء و ِ‬
‫احد﴾‬
‫َ ْ َ َ‬ ‫‪َ َ ِ )2‬‬
‫اوات﴾‬ ‫﴿ َس ْب َع َس َم َ‬ ‫‪)15‬‬ ‫‪َ ﴿ )9‬س ْب َع ُة َأ ْب َواب﴾‬ ‫‪َ ﴿ )3‬س ْب َع ُة َأ ْب ُحر﴾‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪َ ﴿ )10‬أ ْر َب َع ِة ُش َهدَ ا َء﴾‬ ‫‪﴿ )4‬ع َْش ِر ُس َور﴾‬
‫﴿ع ََش َرة َم َساك َ‬
‫ین﴾‬ ‫‪)16‬‬
‫﴿ ِص َیا ُم َث ََّل َث ِة َأ َّيام﴾‬ ‫‪)17‬‬ ‫احد﴾‬ ‫‪َ ﴿ )11‬طعام و ِ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫‪﴿ )5‬باب و ِ‬
‫احد﴾‬ ‫َ َ‬
‫﴿تِ ْس َع آ َيات َب ِّینَات﴾‬ ‫‪)18‬‬ ‫احدَ ة﴾‬ ‫‪َ ﴿ )12‬ن ْفس و ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫ین﴾‬ ‫ِ ِ‬
‫‪َ ﴿ )6‬س ْب َع سن َ‬
‫‪Summary‬‬
‫‪Number‬‬
‫‪Structure of‬‬ ‫‪Gender of‬‬
‫‪Number‬‬ ‫‪of the‬‬ ‫‪Example‬‬
‫عَدَ د ‪َ -‬م ْعدُ ْود ‪the‬‬ ‫عَدَ د ‪the‬‬
‫َمنْ ُع ْوت‬ ‫احد‬‫و َلد و ِ‬

‫َ َ‬
‫‪1–2‬‬ ‫‪agree‬‬ ‫‪agree‬‬ ‫بِنْت و ِ‬
‫َن ْعت‬ ‫احدَ ة‬ ‫َ‬
‫ُم َضاف‬ ‫‪chiastic‬‬ ‫َث ََّل َث ُة َأ ْو َْلد‬

‫‪3–10‬‬ ‫‪plural‬‬
‫ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬ ‫‪concord‬‬ ‫َث ََّل ُ‬
‫ث َبنَات‬
‫‪199‬‬
‫‪َ in Sentences‬م ْعدُ ْود ‪ and‬عَدَ د‬
‫‪A number phrase occurs as a main part of the sentence. If it‬‬
‫‪.‬معدُ ود ‪َ , the verb will agree in gender with the‬ف ِ‬
‫اعل ‪becomes the‬‬ ‫َْ ْ‬
‫ت َث ََّل ُ‬
‫ث َبنَات‬ ‫َجا َء ْ‬ ‫َجا َء َث ََّل َث ُة ِر َجال‬
‫‪The tarkib of this will be written as follows:‬‬
‫َف ِ‬
‫ِر َجال‬ ‫َث ََّل َث ُة‬ ‫َجا َء‬
‫‪ Definite‬عَ دَ د‪َ -‬م ْعدُ ْود ‪Making the‬‬

‫‪َ .‬م ْعدُ ْود ‪َ to the‬ا ْل ‪َ by adding‬م ْع ِر َفة ‪The number phrase is made‬‬
‫َجا َء َث ََّل َث ُة ال ِّر َج ِ‬
‫ال‬ ‫َجا َء َث ََّل َث ُة ِر َجال‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪the three men came‬‬ ‫‪three men came‬‬
‫‪َ )9‬ي ْوم ا ْل ِع ْید َذ َب َح النَّاس َأ ْر َبع َب َقرات‬ ‫احد﴾‬ ‫﴿إِنَّما الل إِ َله و ِ‬
‫َ ُ َ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫ت ا ْل َم ْر َأة إِ َّْل َخ ْم َسة َأ ْش َیاء‬ ‫‪ )10‬ما ْاشتَر ِ‬ ‫إِ ْن َأ َّيا ُم ا ْل َح ِّج إِ َّْل ِس َّت ُة َأ َّيام‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫َ‬ ‫َ‬
‫الصائِمات ِس ّت َت َمرات‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )11‬أ َك َل ْت س ّت َّ‬ ‫َقدْ َس َق َط ْت تِ ْس َع ُة ْاْلَ ْق ََّل ِم‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫ت ر َقیة ع ََشرة ا ْل ُكتُب و ْاْلَخ كِتَابا و ِ‬ ‫جاء َخمس ُة ْاْلَئِم ِة م ِ‬
‫احدا‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫‪َ )12‬ق َر َأ ْ ُ َّ‬ ‫اش ْی َن‬ ‫َّ َ‬ ‫َ َ ْ َ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫الصغ ْی َرة َث ََّلث ُس َور ْ‬ ‫‪َ )13‬حف َظت ا ْلبِنْت َّ‬
‫ِ ِ‬ ‫احدَ ًة﴾‬ ‫َان النَّاس ُأم ًة و ِ‬
‫ُ َّ َ‬ ‫﴿ك َ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫‪َ )14‬ل ُی َسافِ َر َّن تِ ْس َعة ْاْلَ ْص ِد َقاء َي ْوم ا ْل ُج ُم َعة َراكِبین‬ ‫اوات‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ل َقدْ َخ َل َق ُ‬
‫الل َس ْب َع َس َم َ‬
‫‪َ )15‬سا َف َر َأ ُبو زَ ْيد َس ْبعة َأ َّيام َو َأ ُبو َأ ْح َمد َث ََّل َثة َأ ْش ُهر‬ ‫‪َ )7‬بنَی َأ ْر َب َع ُة ا ْل ُم ُل ْو ِك ِس َّت ا ْل ُق َری‬
‫كُل َي ْوم ُي ْع ِطی ٰه َذا ا ْلغَنِ ّي ٰذلِ َك ا ْل َف ِق ْیر َث ََّل َثة ُج َن ْیهات‬
‫‪ّ )16‬‬ ‫الل َخ ْم َس َص َل َوات َف ْر ًضا‬
‫‪َ )8‬ف َر َض ُ‬
‫‪200‬‬
‫‪Add the number in brackets to the nouns given below to form a‬‬
‫‪noun phrase and make the necessary grammatical changes.‬‬
‫‪َ ....... )16‬م َّرة (‪)6‬‬ ‫‪َ ....... )11‬ش ِه ْید (‪)5‬‬ ‫‪َ ....... )6‬دقِ ْی َقة (‪)3‬‬ ‫‪ ....... )1‬اِ ْبن (‪)3‬‬
‫‪ ...... )17‬مِ ْسكِ ْین (‪)7‬‬ ‫‪َ ...... )12‬ص ْف َحة (‪)9‬‬ ‫‪ُ ....... )7‬ر َّمانَة (‪)1‬‬ ‫‪ ....... )2‬آ َية (‪)2‬‬
‫‪ ....... )18‬ن َْهر (‪)10‬‬ ‫‪ ....... )13‬عَالِم (‪)6‬‬ ‫‪َ ....... )8‬ساعَة (‪)4‬‬ ‫‪ُ ....... )3‬ت َّف َ‬
‫احة (‪)5‬‬
‫‪ ....... )19‬غ ُْر َفة (‪)2‬‬ ‫‪ ....... )14‬ع ََمل (‪)9‬‬ ‫‪َ ....... )9‬ش َج َرة (‪)4‬‬ ‫اجة (‪)7‬‬ ‫‪َ ....... )4‬ح َ‬
‫‪َ ....... )20‬يتِ ْیم (‪)8‬‬ ‫‪ِ ....... )15‬ع ْید (‪)1‬‬ ‫‪َ ....... )10‬شاب (‪)8‬‬ ‫‪َ ....... )5‬ح ِد ْي َقة (‪)10‬‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق ‪ as a‬عَدَ د ‪An‬‬

‫‪َ .‬م ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق ‪َ can be used as a‬م َّرة ‪The word‬‬
‫َح َّج زَ ْيد َث ََّل َ‬
‫ث َم َّرات‬
‫‪Zaid performed Hajj three times.‬‬
‫‪َ is removed.‬م َّرة ‪Sometimes, the word‬‬
‫َح َّج زَ ْيد َث ََّل ًثا‬
‫‪ )4‬حج النَّبِي محمد ﷺ مرة و ِ‬
‫احدَ ة‬ ‫ت ا ْلبِن ُْت ِس َّت َم َّرات‬
‫‪ )1‬اِس َتی َق َظ ِ‬
‫َ َّ َ‬ ‫ّ ُ َ َّ‬ ‫َ َّ‬ ‫ْ ْ‬
‫‪ )5‬اِ ْعت ََم َر النَّبِ ّي ُم َح َّمد ﷺ َأ ْر َبع َم ّرات‬ ‫ت َم َّر َت ْی ِن‬
‫أحد ا ْل َم ْو َ‬
‫‪َ )2‬لن َّي ُذ ْو َق َ‬
‫‪َ )6‬أ ْط َع َم ْت َفاطِ َمة َّ‬
‫الض ْیف َث ََّلث َم ّرات‬ ‫‪ُ )3‬ي َص ِّلي ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن َخ ْم َس َم َّرات‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق ‪Recap of‬‬

‫‪On Its Own‬‬ ‫نَ ْعت ‪With a‬‬ ‫ُم َضاف إِ َلیْ ِه ‪With a‬‬ ‫عَدَ د ‪With an‬‬
‫‪Emphasis‬‬ ‫‪Description‬‬ ‫‪Comparison‬‬ ‫‪Quantity‬‬
‫َش َك َر َّ‬ ‫َش َكر الرج ُل ُش ْكر ْاْلَ ْنبِی ِ‬
‫َش َك َر َّ‬ ‫اء‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ َّ ُ‬ ‫الر ُج ُل َث ََّل َ‬
‫ث َم َّرات‬ ‫َش َك َر َّ‬
‫َش َك َر َّ‬
‫‪201‬‬
‫‪Notes‬‬
‫‪َ from numbers three to ten are also‬م ْعدُ ْود ‪ and‬عَدَ د ‪1. Sometimes the‬‬
‫‪َ structure. They will also have chiastic‬منْ ُع ْوت ‪َ -‬ن ْعت ‪used in a‬‬
‫‪concord.‬‬
‫الس ْب ِع﴾‬ ‫﴿السم ِ‬ ‫﴿ ُظ ُل َمات َثَّلث﴾‬
‫اوات َّ‬
‫َّ َ َ‬
‫‪the seven heavens‬‬ ‫‪three darknesses‬‬
‫‪َ if it can be understood from‬م ْعدُ ْود ‪ may be used without a‬عَدَ د ‪2. An‬‬
‫‪the context of the sentence.‬‬
‫ث َت َم َرات َو َخالِد َأ ْر َب ًعا‬ ‫َأك ََل َ‬
‫أح َمدُ َث ََّل َ‬
‫)‪Ahmad ate three dates, and Khalid ate four (dates‬‬
‫‪َ )6‬ر ِض َي ْاْلَ ْو َْلد إِ َّْل ْاْلَ َخوات ْاْلَ ْر َبع‬ ‫‪َ )1‬قدْ س َق َط ِ‬
‫ت ْاْلَ ْق ََّل ُم الت ِّْس َع ُة‬ ‫َ‬
‫ت ا ْل َم ْر َأة إِ َّْل َأ ْش َیاء َخ ْم َسة‬ ‫‪ )7‬ما ْاشتَر ِ‬ ‫اش ْی َن‬‫‪ )2‬جاء ْاْلَئِم ُة ا ْل َخمس ُة م ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ْ َ َ‬ ‫َّ‬ ‫َ َ‬
‫الس ّت َت َمرات ِستّا‬ ‫الصائمات ِّ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )8‬أ َك َلت َّ‬ ‫الس ْب َع‬
‫اوات َّ‬
‫‪َ )3‬ل َقدْ َخ َل َق الل السم ِ‬
‫ُ َّ َ َ‬
‫الصغ ْی َرة ُس َورا َث ََّلثا ْ‬ ‫‪َ )9‬حف َظت ا ْلبِنْت َّ‬
‫ِ ِ‬ ‫الس َّت‬‫‪َ )4‬بنَی ا ْل ُم ُل ْو ُك اْلَ ْر َب َع ُة ال ُق َری ِّ‬
‫ت ر َقیة ال ُكتُب ا ْلع ْشرة و ْاْلَخ كِتَابا و ِ‬ ‫ت ْاْلَج ِوب ُة ا ْلع ْشر ُة ص ِ‬ ‫‪ )5‬ما كَا َن ِ‬
‫احدا‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ َ َ‬ ‫‪َ )10‬ق َر َأ ْ ُ َّ‬ ‫ح ْی َح ًة‬ ‫ْ َ َ َ َ‬ ‫َ‬
‫‪َ using the number from the brackets.‬ن ْعت ‪Fill in the blanks with a‬‬
‫ب ا ْل ُم َع ِّلم إِ َّْل ُكتُبا ‪)8( .......‬‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ )5‬إِن َي ْط ُل ُ‬ ‫سر ا ْل ُع ُر ْو ُش ‪)5( .......‬‬
‫‪َ )1‬ل َقد ا ْن َك َ‬
‫‪َ )6‬ل ْم َي ْق َط ِع ا ْل َف ََّّلح َّ‬
‫الش َجرات ‪)4( .......‬‬ ‫‪ )2‬إِ ْن َت َو َّض َأ إِ َّْل ِّ‬
‫الر َج ُال ‪)9( .......‬‬
‫الر َّمانات ‪)10( .......‬‬ ‫‪َ )7‬ل َی ُذ ْو َق َّن ُّ‬
‫الض ُی ْوف ُّ‬ ‫ف ‪)6( .......‬‬ ‫‪َ )3‬لن َتبِ ْی ُع ا ْل َم ْر َأ ُة ُّ‬
‫الس ُی ْو َ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ت إِ َّْل ا ْل ُمؤْ مِن ُ‬
‫‪َ )4‬ما َت َو َّض َأ ْ‬
‫‪َ )8‬ما َق َر َأت ال َّطالبات َّ‬
‫الص ْفحات ‪)7( .......‬‬ ‫َات ‪)3( .......‬‬
‫‪202‬‬
Numbers 11–19
Below are the numbers eleven to nineteen.
sixteen َ ‫ ِس َّت َة‬/ ‫عَش َر َة‬
‫عَش َر‬ ْ ‫ ِس َّت‬eleven ْ ‫ ِإ ْحدَ ی‬/ ‫عَش َر‬
‫عَش َر َة‬ َ َ‫َأ َحد‬
seventeen َ ‫ َس ْب َع َة‬/ ‫عَش َر َة‬

‫عَش َر‬ ْ ‫ َس ْب َع‬twelve ْ ‫ ِا ْث َنتَا‬/ ‫عَش َر‬
‫عَش َر َة‬ َ ‫ِا ْثنَا‬
eighteen َ ‫ َث َم ِان َی َة‬/ ‫عَش َر َة‬

‫عَش َر‬ ْ ‫ َث َم ِان َي‬thirteen َ ‫ َث ََّل َث َة‬/ ‫عَش َر َة‬
‫عَش َر‬ ْ ‫َث ََّل َث‬
nineteen َ ‫ ِت ْس َع َة‬/ ‫عَش َر َة‬

‫عَش َر‬ ْ ‫ ِت ْس َع‬fourteen َ ‫ َأ ْر َب َع َة‬/ ‫عَش َر َة‬
‫عَش َر‬ ْ ‫َأ ْر َب َع‬
fifteen َ ‫ َخ ْم َس َة‬/ َ‫عَش َرة‬

‫عَش َر‬ ْ ‫َخ ْم َس‬
These numbers were initially ‫ َم ْع ُط ْوف َع َل ْی ِه‬and ‫ َم ْع ُط ْوف‬. Then, the ‫ َو‬was
removed, and they are now one word.
The ‫ َم ْعدُ ْود‬of these numbers are singular and become ‫ َت ْمیِ ْیز‬.
‫ف ڠ َأ َحدَ ع ََش َر ك َْو َك ًبا‬
ُ ‫َر َأی ُي ْو ُس‬
Yusuf ‫ ڠ‬saw eleven stars.
In tarkib, the number is labelled as ‫ ُم َم َّیز‬.
‫ك َْو َك ًبا‬ ‫َأ َحدَ عَ َش َر‬ ‫ف‬

ُ ‫ُي ْو ُس‬ ‫َر َأی‬
‫َت ْمیِ ْیز‬ ‫ُم َمیَّز‬
11–12
The numbers eleven and twelve agree in gender with the ‫ َم ْعدُ ْود‬, and
both parts of the ‫ عَدَ د‬have the same gender.
ِ ‫َأ ْطعم‬
‫ت ْاْلُ ُّم إِ ْحدَ ی ع َْش َر َة بِنْتًا‬ ‫ف َأ َحدَ ع ََش َر ك َْو َك ًبا‬
ُ ‫َر َأی ُي ْو ُس‬
ََ
13–19
In the numbers thirteen to nineteen, the ten will match with the
‫ َم ْعدُ ْود‬, and the unit will have chiastic concord with the ‫ َم ْعدُ ْود‬.
‫َّلث ع َْش َر َة ا ْم َر َأ ًة‬
َ ‫ت َث‬
ْ ‫َجا َء‬ ‫َجا َء َثَّل َث َة ع ََش َر َر ُج ًَّل‬
203
‫‪Notes‬‬
‫‪َ .‬م ْبنِي ‪1. The numbers eleven to nineteen, except for twelve, are‬‬
‫َر َأی زَ ْيد َأ َحدَ ع ََش َر َر ُج ًَّل‬ ‫َجا َء َأ َحدَ ع ََش َر َر ُج ًَّل‬
‫‪Zaid saw eleven men.‬‬ ‫‪Eleven men came.‬‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ُ and have the same irab‬م ْع َرب ‪, are‬ا ْثنَا ‪ /‬ا ْثنَتَا ‪The numbers for twelve,‬‬
‫‪ُ word.‬م َثنًّی ‪as a‬‬
‫َق َر َأ َأ ْح َمدُ ا ْثن َْي ع ََش َر كِتَا ًبا‬ ‫َجا َء ا ْثنَا ع ََش َر ِر َج ًاْل‬
‫‪Ahmad read twelve books.‬‬ ‫‪Twelve men came.‬‬
‫َا ْل ‪َ by placing an‬م ْع ِر َفة ‪2. The numbers eleven to nineteen are made‬‬
‫‪.‬عَدَ د ‪on both parts of the‬‬
‫ث ا ْل َع ْش َر َة كِتَا ًبا‬
‫ال َّث ََّل َ‬
‫‪The thirteen books‬‬
‫‪ )16‬تِ ْسع ع َْش َرة َش َج َرة‬ ‫َس ْب َع َة ع ََش َر َب ْح ًرا‬ ‫‪)11‬‬ ‫ث ع َْش َر َة َق ْط َر ًة‬
‫‪َ )6‬ث ََّل َ‬ ‫اِ ْثنَا ع ََش َر ِد ْين ًَارا‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫‪َ )17‬خ ْم َسة ع ََشر َجنَاحا‬ ‫تِ ْس َع َة ع ََش َر َأ َسدً ا‬ ‫‪)12‬‬ ‫‪َ )7‬ث ََّل َث َة ع ََش َر َف ََّّل ًحا‬ ‫َأ ْر َب َع َة ع ََش َر ِم ْی ًَّل‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫‪َ )18‬س ْبع ع َْش َرة َص ْف َحة‬ ‫َث ََّل َث َة ع ََش َر َف ِق ْی ًرا‬ ‫‪)13‬‬ ‫‪َ )8‬أ ْر َب َع ع َْش َر َة َص ََّل ًة‬ ‫ِس َّت ع َْش َر َة َشا ًة‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫‪َ )19‬ث َمانِ ْي ع ََش َرة َدقِ ْی َقة‬ ‫َث َمانِ َي ع َْش َر َة ُر َّما َن ًة‬ ‫‪)14‬‬ ‫‪َ )9‬خ ْم َس ع َْش َر َة َب َق َر ًة‬ ‫اِ ْثنَتَا ع َْش َر َة غ ُْر َف ًة‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫‪ )20‬إِ ْحدَ ی ع َْش َرة َس ِف ْینَة‬ ‫َث َمانِ َی َة ع ََش َر َج َوا ًبا‬ ‫‪)15‬‬ ‫‪ِ )10‬س َّت َة ع ََش َر ِس ِّك ْینًا‬ ‫‪َ )5‬أ َحدَ ع ََش َر ُدكَّانًا‬
‫‪Fill in the blanks with the number from the brackets.‬‬
‫‪ .... )16‬كِتَاب (‪)15‬‬ ‫‪ .... )11‬طِ ْفل (‪)17‬‬ ‫‪َ .... )6‬ج َبل (‪)11‬‬ ‫‪ .... )1‬آ َية (‪)15‬‬
‫‪ُ .... )17‬س ْو َرة (‪)16‬‬ ‫‪َ .... )12‬ل ْی َلة (‪)14‬‬ ‫‪َ .... )7‬جدَّ ة (‪)19‬‬ ‫‪َ .... )2‬جد (‪)12‬‬
‫‪َ .... )18‬ساعَة (‪)13‬‬ ‫‪َ .... )13‬ملِك (‪)18‬‬ ‫‪َ .... )8‬س ْیف (‪)18‬‬ ‫‪َ .... )3‬ف ِق ْیر (‪)13‬‬
‫‪ .... )19‬ك ُْر ِسي (‪)16‬‬ ‫‪ .... )14‬ن َْجم (‪)19‬‬ ‫‪َ .... )9‬سنَة (‪)17‬‬ ‫‪َ .... )4‬ق َلم (‪)14‬‬
‫‪َ .... )20‬م ْكتَب (‪)17‬‬ ‫‪ .... )15‬نِ ْع َمة (‪)12‬‬ ‫‪ .... )10‬عَم (‪)11‬‬ ‫‪َ .... )5‬ب َق َرة (‪)11‬‬
‫‪204‬‬
‫‪َ )10‬صا َم ْت ٰه ِذ ِه ال ِّط ْف َلة َر َم َضان َغ ْی َر َأ َحد ع ََشر َي ْوما‬ ‫َّاس ال َّث َمانِ َی َة ا ْل َع َش َر َبا ًبا‬
‫‪ )1‬إِن ََّما َفت ََح الن ُ‬
‫الستَّة ا ْل َع َشر َض ْیفا‬ ‫‪َ )11‬لی ْط ِعمن الرجل ا ْل َك ِريم ِ‬ ‫ما َت ََّل ْ ِ‬
‫اإل َما ُم زَ ْيد إِ َّْل َس ْب َع ع ََش َر َة آ َي ًة‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫ْ‬ ‫ُ َ َّ َّ ُ‬ ‫َ‬
‫احتِ َسابا‬
‫ْ‬ ‫دت ُأ ُّم َفاطِ َم َة َث ََّل َث َة ع ََش َر َش ْیئًا َق ِد ْي ًما‬ ‫َو َج ْ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫الش ْهر‬ ‫‪َ )12‬ح ِف َظ َأ ُخو َأ ْح َمد أِ ْحدٰ ی ْ‬
‫عَش َرة ُس ْو َرة ٰه َذا َّ‬ ‫عَش َر َة ِد ْين ًَارا‬ ‫َقدْ َأ ْن َف َق ْاْلَغْن ِ َیا ُء ا ْلكِ َرا ُم تِ ْس َع ْ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫َو َأ ْر َبع ُس َور ٰذل ِ َك َّ‬
‫الش ْهر‬ ‫َّاس َّإْل َخ ْم َس َة َع َش َر مِ ْی ًَّل‬ ‫ال َی ْو َم َما َم َشی الن ُ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫‪َ )13‬بنَی ا ْل َملِك َأ ْح َمد َأ ْر َب َعة ع ََشر َم ْس َجدا َوا ْل َملِك‬ ‫اج إِ َّْل ا ْثنَي ع ََش َر َي ْو ًما‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َما َسا َف َر ٰهؤُ َْلء ا ْل ُح َّج ُ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫َخالِد َخ ْم َسة ع ََشر‬ ‫َار ا ْثنَت َْي عَ ْش َر َة َص ْف َح ًة‬ ‫الصغ ُ‬ ‫‪َ )7‬ل َقدْ َق َر َأ ال ُّط ََّّل ُب ِّ‬
‫واْلُ ْخت ِس ّت ع َْش َرة َر ْك َعة‬ ‫ت ا ْلبِنْت ْ‬ ‫‪ )14‬ا ْلیوم ص َّل ِ‬
‫َْ َ َ‬ ‫عَش َر َة َب َق َر ًة‬‫الر ُج ََّل ِن إِ َّْل َخ ْم َس ْ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )8‬ما َذ َب َح ٰه َذان َّ‬
‫َقائِ َمتین َو َأ ْر َبع َركَعات َجال ِ َستین‬ ‫عَش َر َة ا ْم َر َأ ًة َأ ْم ِ‬
‫س‬ ‫ات ِت ْس َع َة َ‬
‫عَش َر َر ُج ًَّل ا ْل َی ْو َم َو َس ْب َع ْ‬ ‫‪َ )9‬م َ‬
‫‪Summary‬‬
‫‪Number‬‬

‫َ َ‬

‫‪3–10‬‬ ‫‪plural‬‬
‫َأ َحدَ ع ََش َر َو َلدً ا‬

‫‪11–12‬‬ ‫َت ْمیِ ْیز‬ ‫‪singular‬‬ ‫‪agree‬‬
‫إِ ْحدٰ ی ع َْش َر َة بِنْتًا‬
‫‪chiastic‬‬ ‫َث ََّل َث َة ع ََش َر َو َلدً ا‬

‫‪13–19‬‬ ‫َت ْمیِ ْیز‬ ‫‪singular‬‬
‫‪concord‬‬ ‫ث ع َْش َر َة بِنْتًا‬
‫َث ََّل َ‬
‫‪205‬‬
Tens
Below are the tens.
sixty ‫ ِست ُّْو َن‬twenty ‫ِع ْش ُر ْو َن‬
seventy ‫ َس ْب ُع ْو َن‬thirty ‫َث ََّل ُث ْو َن‬
eighty ‫َث َمان ُْو َن‬ forty ‫َأ ْر َب ُع ْو َن‬
ninety ‫ ِت ْس ُع ْو َن‬fifty ‫َخ ْم ُس ْو َن‬

These words have the same irab as ‫السال ِ ُم‬ َّ ‫ َج ْم ُع ا ْل ُم َذك َِّر‬, i.e. in the ‫َمن ُْص ْوب‬
and ‫ َم ْج ُر ْور‬state, ‫ ِع ْش ُر ْو َن‬become ‫ ِع ْش ِر ْي َن‬, etc.
Their ‫ َم ْعدُ ْود‬are singular and become ‫ َت ْمیِ ْیز‬.
‫الر ُج ُل َأ ْر َب ِع ْی َن َسنَ ًة‬
َّ َ‫َبلَغ‬
The man reached forty years.
‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه‬ ِ ‫َف‬
‫َسنَ ًة‬ ‫َأ ْر َب ِع ْی َن‬ ‫الر ُج ُل‬

َّ ‫َب َل َغ‬
Vocab
to remain, stay, spend (time) ‫ ُل ْب ًثا‬،‫ َلبِ َث َي ْل َب ُث َل ْب ًثا‬to pass, spend ‫َم َضی َي ْم ِض ْي ُم ِض ًّیا‬
to acquire ‫َح َص َل َي ْح ُص ُل ُح ُص ْو ًْل‬ to remain ‫َب ِق َي َي ْب َقی َب َقا ًء‬
to gather ‫اجتِ َماعًا‬ ِ

ْ ‫اجت ََم َع َي ْجتَم ُع‬
ْ to reach ‫َبلَغَ َي ْبلُغُ ُب ُل ْوغًا‬
to accept ‫ َق ُب ْو ًْل‬،‫َقبِ َل َي ْق َب ُل ُق ُب ْو ًْل‬ to fly ‫َط َار َيطِ ْی ُر َط ْی ًرا‬
206
‫‪Fill in the blanks with the number from the brackets and make the‬‬
‫‪necessary grammatical changes.‬‬
‫‪ ....... )13‬ع ََمل (‪)70‬‬ ‫‪َ ....... )7‬ر ْطل (‪)70‬‬ ‫‪ُ ....... )1‬أ ْس ُب ْوع (‪)50‬‬
‫‪ ....... )14‬غَائب (‪)20‬‬ ‫‪َ ....... )8‬ش ْهر (‪)60‬‬ ‫‪َ ....... )2‬أ َسد (‪)90‬‬
‫‪ ....... )15‬غَنِي (‪)80‬‬ ‫‪َ ....... )9‬ش ْيء (‪)50‬‬ ‫‪ُ ....... )3‬جزْ ء (‪)40‬‬
‫‪َ ....... )16‬ف َرس (‪)80‬‬ ‫‪َ ....... )10‬ص ِد ْيق (‪)40‬‬ ‫‪َ ....... )4‬ح ِق ْی َبة (‪)30‬‬
‫‪َ ....... )17‬ك ْبش (‪)20‬‬ ‫‪َ ....... )11‬صنَم (‪)30‬‬ ‫‪َ ....... )5‬خلِ ْیل (‪)20‬‬
‫‪ ....... )18‬ن َْهر (‪)60‬‬ ‫‪َ ....... )12‬ط ْیر (‪)30‬‬ ‫‪َ ....... )6‬د ْرس (‪)90‬‬
‫‪ Definite‬عَ دَ د‪َ -‬م ْعدُ ْود ‪Making the‬‬

‫‪.‬عَدَ د ‪َ to the‬ا ْل ‪َ by adding‬م ْع ِر َفة ‪A number phrase with a ten is made‬‬
‫ا ْل ِع ْش ُر ْو َن َر ُج ًَّل‬
‫‪the twenty men‬‬
‫َل ُت ْعطِ َی َّن ا ْلغَن ِ َّیة ا ْل َف ِق ْی َرة تِ ْس ِع ْی َن ُجنَ ْیها‬ ‫‪)10‬‬ ‫َم َضی َخ ْم ُس ْو َن َي ْو ًما‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫ُت ْط ِع ُم ٰهؤُ َْل ِء الن َِّساء ِع ْش ِر ْي َن مِ ْسكِ ْینا‬ ‫‪)11‬‬ ‫َما َب ِق َي إِ َّْل ِع ْش ُر ْو َن َي ْو ًما‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫َح َض َر ال َّطالِب ا ْل ُم ْجت َِهد َس ْب ِع ْی َن َد ْرسا‬ ‫‪)12‬‬ ‫ال َّس ْب ُع ْو َن َصن ًَما ِح َج َارة‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫َما َق َر َأ َحامِد َو َخ ِد ْي َجة إِ َّْل َخ ْم ِس ْی َن كِتَابا‬ ‫‪)13‬‬ ‫ا ْل ِع ْش ُر ْو َن ِس ِّك ْینًا ِصغَار‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫ث ُمدُ ن‬ ‫َأ ْه َل َك ا ْل َملِك ال َّظالِم ِس ِّت ْی َن َق ْر َية َو َث ََّل َ‬ ‫‪)14‬‬ ‫السنَ ُة إِ َّْل ِس ِّت ْی َن َي ْو ًما‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َم َضت َّ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫وخ ْم َسة ا ْل ُم َع ِّلمین‬ ‫ا ْل َی ْو َم َجا َء ال َّث َمان ُْو َن َطالِبا َ‬ ‫‪)15‬‬ ‫‪ُ )6‬ش ُی ْو ُخ ْ ِ‬
‫اإل َما ِم َث ََّل ُث ْو َن َش ْی ًخا‬
‫َأ ْط َع َم ٰذل ِ َك ا ْلغَن ِ ّي تِ ْس ِع ْی َن َف ِق ْیرا َْل تِ ْل َك ا ْلغَن ِ َّیة‬ ‫‪)16‬‬ ‫‪ْ )7‬اْلَ ْر َب ُع ْو َن إِنَا ًء َم ْم ُل ْو َءة َما ًء َْل َل َبنًا‬
‫الص ِغ ْیر َث ََّلثِ ْی َن ُجزْ ءا َْل ِع ْش ِر ْي َن‬ ‫َل َقدْ َحف َظ ا ْل َو َلد َّ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫‪)17‬‬ ‫اجا َراكِبِ ْی َن‬ ‫‪ )8‬ا ْل َی ْو َم َر َجع َث َمان ُْو َن َح ًّ‬
‫‪َ )18‬ما َجاء ا ْل َی ْو َم ال ِع ْش ُر ْو َن ُم َع ِّلما َو َْل الت ِّْس ُع ْو َن َطالِبا‬ ‫َت ا ْل َم ْر َأ ُة َأ ْر َب ِع ْی َن َسنَ ًة َْل َث ََّلثِ ْی َن‬
‫‪ )9‬ب َلغ ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪207‬‬
Summary
Number
Structure of Gender of
Number of the Example
the ‫ َم ْعدُ ْود‬- ‫عَدَ د‬ the ‫عَدَ د‬
‫َمنْ ُع ْوت‬ ‫احد‬ِ ‫و َلد و‬

َ َ
1–2 agree agree ِ ‫بِنْت و‬
‫َن ْعت‬ ‫احدَ ة‬ َ
‫ُم َضاف‬ chiastic ‫َث ََّل َث ُة َأ ْو َْلد‬

3–10 plural
‫ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬ concord ُ ‫َث ََّل‬

11–12 ‫َت ْمیِ ْیز‬ singular agree
chiastic ‫َث ََّل َث َة ع ََش َر َو َلدً ا‬

13–19 ‫َت ْمیِ ْیز‬ singular
concord ‫ث ع َْش َر َة بِنْتًا‬
َ ‫َث ََّل‬
‫ِع ْش ُر ْو َن َو َلدً ا‬
Tens ‫َت ْمیِ ْیز‬ singular unchanged
‫ِع ْش ُر ْو َن بِنْتًا‬
208
Tens and Units
In Arabic, the units precede the tens in written form. The ‫َح ْر ُف َع ْطف‬
of ‫ َو‬is used to join the tens to the units.
‫َم َضی َخ ْم َسة َو َث ََّل ُث ْو َن َي ْو ًما‬
Thirty-five days have passed.
(Five and thirty days have passed.)
ِ ‫َف‬
‫َي ْو ًما‬ ‫َث ََّل ُث ْو َن‬ ‫َو‬ ‫َخ ْم َسة‬ ‫َم َضی‬
‫َت ْمیِ ْیز‬ ‫َم ْع ُط ْوف‬ ‫ف َع ْطف‬

ُ ‫َح ْر‬ ِ ‫مع ُطوف َع َل‬
‫یه‬ ْ َْ
‫َم ْعدُ ْود‬ ‫عَدَ د‬
The unit in the numbers twenty-one and twenty-two, thirty-one

and thirty-two etc. agree in gender with the ‫ َم ْعدُ ْود‬.
ِ ‫ت ا ْثنَت‬
‫َان َو َث ََّل ُث ْو َن ا ْم َر َأ ًة‬ ِ ‫جاء‬ ِ ‫جاء و‬
‫احد َّو َث ََّل ُث ْو َن َر ُج ًَّل‬
َ َ َ َ َ
The unit in the numbers twenty-three to twenty-nine, thirty-three
to thirty-nine etc. have chiastic concord.
‫ت َأ ْر َبع َّو َث ََّل ُث ْو َن ا ْم َر َأ ًة‬
ْ ‫َجا َء‬ ‫َجا َء َث ََّل َثة َّو َث ََّل ُث ْو َن َر ُج ًَّل‬
Exercise 13
Fill in the blanks with the number from the brackets and make the
necessary grammatical changes.
)41( ‫ غ ُْر َفة‬....... )13 )36( ‫ ِر ْجل‬....... )7 )28( ‫ َب ْحر‬....... )1
)73( ‫ َف ََّّلح‬....... )14 )82( ‫ ِس ِّك ْین‬....... )8 )99( ‫ َب َق َرة‬....... )2
)62( ‫ َق ْط َرة‬....... )15 )57( ‫ َشاة‬....... )9 )55( ‫ َجنَاح‬....... )3
)24( ‫ َن ْفس‬....... )16 )25( ‫ َش ْمس‬....... )10 )37( ‫ ُجنَ ْیه‬....... )4
)46( ‫ َو ْقت‬....... )17 )78( ‫ َص ْف َحة‬....... )11 )64( ‫ ِح َمار‬....... )5
)83( ‫ َيد‬....... )18 )19( ‫ ع َْرش‬....... )12 )91( ‫ ُدكَّان‬....... )6
209
‫الر َجال ا ْثنَ ْی ِن َوتِ ْس ِع ْی َن َش ْیئا‬ ‫‪ْ )1‬اشتَری ِّ‬
‫الخ ْم َس ُة َّوال ِّت ْس ُع ْو َن َص ِد ْيقا‬ ‫س َجا َء َ‬ ‫‪َ )2‬أ ْم ِ‬
‫احتِ َسابا‬ ‫ِ ِ‬
‫‪َ )3‬أ ْن َف َق اْلَب ا ْثنَ ْی ِن َو َث َمان ْی َن د ْينَارا ْ‬
‫الر َجال ْاْلَ ْر َب َع ُة َث ََّل ًثا َّو َخ ْم ِس ْی َن َب َق َرة‬ ‫‪َ )4‬ذ َب َح ِّ‬
‫احدً ا َّو ِع ْش ِر ْي َن ُجنَ ْیها ا ْل َی ْو َم‬ ‫‪ )5‬وجدَ ال ِّط ْفل و ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫َ َ‬
‫‪َ )6‬ل َقدْ َق َط َع ْت ٰهؤُ َْل ِء النِّ َساء َخ ْم ًسا َّو َث ََّلثِ ْی َن َش َج َرة‬
‫احدَ َو ْاْلَ ْر َب ِع ْی َن َج َوابا‬ ‫‪َ )7‬لی ْك ُتبن ال ُّط ََّّلب ا ْلع ْشر ُة ا ْلو ِ‬
‫َ َ َ‬ ‫َ َ َّ‬
‫‪َ )8‬ص َّلی ِستَّة َّو َث ََّل ُث ْو َن ُم ْسلِما َو َأ ْر َبع َو ِع ْش ُر ْو َن ُم ْسلِ َمة‬
‫ت ْاْلُ ّم َس ْب ًعا َّو َس ْب ِع ْی َن آنِ َیة َماء َو َأ ْر َب َع إِنَاء َماء زَ ْمزَ م‬ ‫ل ِ‬ ‫‪َ )9‬م َ َ‬
‫َّاجر َس ْب َع ًة َّو َأ ْر َب ِع ْی َن َس ْیفا َو َخ ْم َس َة ع ََش َر ِس ِّك ْینا‬ ‫اع ٰه َذا الت ِ‬ ‫‪َ )10‬ب َ‬
‫ت ال َّطال ِ َبة ِستًّا َّو َث َمانِ ْی َن آ َية َوال َّطالِب َخ ْم ًسا َو َث ََّلثِ ْی َن‬ ‫ح ِف َظ ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫‪)11‬‬
‫الس ْو َرة َأ ْر َب ًعا َّو ِع ْش ِر ْي َن َم َّرة َي ْو َمین‬ ‫ِِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َق َر َأت ا ْلبِنْت َفاط َمة ٰهذه ُّ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫‪)12‬‬
‫الر ُجل ال َّظالِم‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫الر ُجل ا ْل َك ِر ْيم َث َمان َی ًة َّو َخ ْمس ْی َن َض ْیفا َْل َّ‬ ‫َأ ْط َع َم َّ‬ ‫‪)13‬‬
‫وخ ْم ًسا َّو ِع ْش ِر ْي َن َأ ْم ِ‬
‫س‬ ‫َق َر َأ ٰه َذا ا ْل ُم َع ِّلم تِ ْس ًعا َّو ِس ِّت ْی َن َص ْف َحة ا ْل َی ْو َم َ‬ ‫‪)14‬‬
‫ٰه َذا ْاْلُ ْس ُب ْوع َت ََّل ْاْلَخ زُ َب ْیر َث ََّل ًثا َّو َس ْب ِع ْی َن ُس ْو َرة َو ْاْلُ ْخت ا ْل َم ِر ْي َضة َث ََّل َث َة َأ ْجزَ اء‬ ‫‪)15‬‬
‫السنَة َخ ْم ًسا َّوتِ ْس ِع ْی َن َص ْوما‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫السنَة َأ ْر َب َع ًة َّوس ِّت ْی َن َص ْوما َوت ْل َك َّ‬
‫ِِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َصا َمت ا ْل َم ْر َأة ٰهذه َّ‬ ‫‪)16‬‬
‫‪210‬‬
‫‪Summary‬‬
‫‪Number‬‬

‫َ َ‬

‫‪3–10‬‬ ‫‪plural‬‬


‫‪Tens‬‬ ‫َت ْمیِ ْیز‬ ‫‪singular‬‬ ‫‪unchanged‬‬
‫‪Tens +‬‬ ‫( َم ْع ُط ْوف َع َل ْی ِه –‬ ‫احد َو َث ََّل ُث ْو َن َو َلدً ا‬ ‫و ِ‬

‫َ‬
‫‪singular‬‬ ‫‪agree‬‬ ‫و ِ‬
‫‪1–2‬‬ ‫َم ْع ُط ْوف) ‪َ -‬ت ْمیِ ْیز‬ ‫احدَ ة ََّو َث ََّل ُث ْو َن بِنْتًا‬ ‫َ‬
‫‪Tens +‬‬ ‫( َم ْع ُط ْوف َع َل ْی ِه –‬ ‫‪chiastic‬‬ ‫َث ََّل َثة َو َأ ْر َب ُع ْو َن َو َلدً ا‬

‫‪singular‬‬
‫‪3–9‬‬ ‫َم ْع ُط ْوف) ‪َ -‬ت ْمیِ ْیز‬ ‫‪concord‬‬ ‫ون بِنْتًا‬
‫َث ََّلث َّو َأ ْر َب ُع َ‬
‫‪211‬‬
Numbers 100 and 1,000
one thousand ‫ ُأ ُل ْوف‬،‫ َأ ْلف ج َآْلف‬one hundred ‫مِائَة ج مِئَات‬
The numbers one hundred and one thousand become ‫ ُم َضاف‬to the
‫ َم ْعدُ ْود‬, which will be in its singular form.
ِ ‫﴿أ ْل‬
﴾‫﴿مِا َئ َة عَام‬ ﴾‫ف َش ْهر‬
one hundred years one thousand months
ِ ‫أ ْل‬
‫عَ ام‬ ‫مِا َئ َة‬ ‫َش ْهر‬ ‫ف‬
‫ُم َضاف إِ َلیْ ِه‬ ‫ُم َضاف‬ ‫ُم َضاف إِ َلیْ ِه‬ ‫ُم َضاف‬
‫َم ْعدُ ْود‬ ‫عَدَ د‬ ‫َم ْعدُ ْود‬ ‫عَدَ د‬
Note
The ‫ ا‬in ‫ مِائَة‬is silent. In some scripts it is also written as ‫مِئَة‬.
Vocab
house, (land) )‫ ُد ْور (مث‬،‫ َدار ج ِد َيار‬leader ‫َأمِ ْیر ج ُأ َم َرا ُء‬
‫ عَام ج َأع َْوام‬stingy ‫خ ْیل ج ُب َخ ََّل ُء‬ ِ ‫ب‬
year َ
dirty ‫ َو ِسخ‬city ‫َب َلد َج بِ ََّلد‬
Exercise 15
‫) مِائَة عَام‬5 ‫) مِا َئ ُة َب َلد‬3 ‫) مِا َئ ُة َأمِ ْیر‬1
‫) َأ ْلف ِس ِّك ْین‬6 ُ ‫) َأ ْل‬4
‫ف َدار‬ ِ ‫فب‬
‫خ ْیل‬ َ ُ ‫) َأ ْل‬2
Exercise 16
Fill in the blanks with the number from the brackets and make the
necessary grammatical changes.
)۱٠٠( ‫ َأ َسد‬....... )5 )۱٠٠٠( ‫ َص ْی َحة‬....... )3 )100( ‫ َس ِف ْینَة‬....... )1
)۱٠٠٠( ‫ ِح َمار‬....... )6 )۱٠٠( ‫ َف َرس‬....... )4 )۱٠٠٠ ( ‫ َد َر َجة‬....... )2
212
‫الر ُجل مِا َئ َة َف ِق ْیر َب ْل َأ ْل ًفا‬
‫‪َ )5‬ما َأ ْط َع َم ٰه َذا َّ‬ ‫‪َ )1‬سا َف َر ا ْل ُم َسافِ ُر ْو َن مِا َئ َة مِ ْیل‬
‫ف َسنَة إِ َّْل َخ ْم ِس ْی َن عَاما‬ ‫‪َ )6‬لبِ َث ن ُْوح َأ ْل َ‬ ‫ات َأ ْل َفا ُم َسافِر ومِا َئتَا ِح َمار‬ ‫‪َ )2‬م َ‬
‫ار َح َة َق َر َأ ال َّطالِب مِائت َْي َص ْف َحة َقائِما‬ ‫‪ )7‬ا ْل َب ِ‬ ‫َان ُم ْش ِرك ُْو َم َّك َة َأ ْل ًفا‬
‫‪َ )3‬ي ْو َم َبدْ ر ك َ‬
‫‪َ )8‬بنَی ُم ْس ِلمو ا ْل َب َلد ِما َئ َة َم ْس ِجد َْل َم ْس ِجدا َأو َم ْس ِجدَ ْين‬ ‫َار َأ ْل َ‬
‫ف َن ْجم‬ ‫‪َ )4‬ر َأی ْاْلَ ْو َْل ُد ِّ‬
‫الصغ ُ‬
‫‪َ of other numbers‬م ْعدُ ْود ‪َ as‬أ ْلف ‪ and‬مِائَة‬

‫‪َ of other numbers.‬م ْعدُ ْود ‪َ can also become the‬أ ْلف ‪ and‬مِائَة‬
‫‪ُ of a number between three and ten it‬م ْعدُ ْود ‪ becomes the‬مِائَة ‪When‬‬
‫‪remains singular, unlike the other numbers which become plural.‬‬
‫َأربع ُة َآْل ِ‬
‫ف َر ُجل‬ ‫ََْ‬ ‫َث مِائ َِة َر ُجل‬
‫َث ََّل ُ‬
‫‪four thousand men‬‬ ‫‪three hundred men‬‬
‫رجل‬
‫ُ‬
‫َآْل ِ‬
‫ف‬ ‫َأ ْر َب َع ُة‬ ‫رجل‬
‫ُ‬ ‫مِا َئ ِة‬ ‫َث ََّل ُ‬
‫َث‬
‫ُم َضاف إِ َلیْه‬ ‫ُم َضاف إِ َلیْ ِه ‪ُ /‬م َضاف‬ ‫ُم َضاف‬ ‫ُم َضاف إِ َلیْ ِه‬ ‫ُم َضاف إِ َلیْ ِه ‪ُ /‬م َضاف‬ ‫ُم َضاف‬
‫‪َ )9‬ث َمانِ ْي مِائ َِة َم ِر ْيض‬ ‫ف ِع َباد‬ ‫تِسع ُة َآْل ِ‬
‫ْ َ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬ ‫مِا َئتَا آ َية‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫ف َض ْیف‬ ‫‪َ )10‬أربع ُة َآْل ِ‬ ‫ف َصنَم‬ ‫َث ََّل َث ُة َآْل ِ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬ ‫ِس ُّت مِائ َِة َت ْم َرة‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫َْ‬
‫‪َ )11‬خ ْم ُس مِائ َِة َمدْ َر َسة‬ ‫ف عَدُ و‬ ‫سبع ُة َآْل ِ‬
‫َ َْ‬ ‫‪)7‬‬ ‫ف ن َْجم‬ ‫ِس َّت ُة َآْل ِ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫ف ن َْص َرانِ ّي‬ ‫‪َ )12‬خمس ُة َآْل ِ‬
‫ْ َ‬ ‫َأ ْر َب ُع مِائ َِة َي ُه ْو ِدي‬ ‫‪)8‬‬ ‫ث مِائ َِة َف ِق ْیر‬ ‫َث ََّل ُ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫‪Fill in the blanks with the number from the brackets and make the‬‬
‫‪necessary grammatical changes.‬‬
‫‪ ....... ....... )7‬مِ ْیل (‪)9000‬‬ ‫‪َ ....... ....... )4‬ح ِد ْي َقة (‪)500‬‬ ‫‪َ ...... ....... )1‬ص ََّلة (‪)200‬‬
‫‪ُ ....... ....... )8‬جنَ ْیه (‪)700‬‬ ‫‪َ ...... ....... )5‬ك ْبش (‪)6000‬‬ ‫‪ ....... ....... )2‬غ ُْر َفة (‪)100‬‬
‫‪َ ....... ....... )9‬ط ْیر (‪)5000‬‬ ‫‪َ ....... ...... )6‬ك ْلب (‪)7000‬‬ ‫اجة (‪)400‬‬
‫‪َ ....... ....... )3‬ح َ‬
‫‪213‬‬
‫ِِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫َر َج َع تِ ْس ُع مِائ َِة َحاج ا ْل َی ْو َم‬
‫‪َ )6‬ق َط َع النَّاس َأ ْر َب َع َة َآْلف َش َج َرة ٰهذه َّ‬
‫السنَة‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫ف ُجنَ ْیه َو َْل َخ ْم َس مِائَة‬ ‫الر ُجل ا ْل َف ِق ْیر َأ ْل َ‬
‫‪َ )7‬ما َأ ْع َطی َّ‬ ‫َّاج ُر ا ْلغَن ِ ُّي تِ ْس َع مِائ َِة َت ْم َرة‬
‫اع الت ِ‬
‫َب َ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫السنَة َث ََّلث مِائ َِة َر ُجل َو َخ ْم ُس مِائ َِة ا ْم َرأة‬ ‫‪ِ ِ َ )8‬‬
‫مات ٰهذه َّ‬ ‫ث مِائَة‬ ‫الص َحا َب ُة َث ََّل َ‬
‫َان َّ‬ ‫َي ْو َم َبدْ ر ك َ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫جدين‬ ‫جدا َأو مس ِ‬ ‫جد َْل مس ِ‬ ‫‪َ )9‬بنَی مسلِمو ا ْل َب َلد مِا َئ َة مس ِ‬ ‫ف َسنَة إِ َّْل َخ ْم ِس ْی َن عَا ًما‬ ‫َلبِ َث ن ُْوح َأ ْل َ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫َ ْ‬ ‫َ ْ‬ ‫َ ْ‬ ‫ُ ْ‬
‫ف َر ُجل َْل مِا َئ ًة َأو مِا َئ َت ْی ِن‬ ‫‪َ )10‬قت ََل ا ْلملِك ال َّظالِم َأربع َة َآْل ِ‬
‫ََْ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ف َض ْیف‬ ‫َأ ْطعم الرج ُل ا ْل َك ِريم َث ََّل َث َة َآْل ِ‬
‫ُْ‬ ‫َ َ َّ ُ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫‪Joining Thousands, Hundreds, Tens, and Units‬‬

‫‪َ in the‬و ‪Thousands, hundreds, tens, and units are joined with‬‬
‫‪following order:‬‬
‫‪3,525‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪Tens‬‬ ‫‪Units‬‬ ‫‪Hundreds‬‬ ‫‪Thousands‬‬
‫َو ِع ْش ُر ْو َن‬ ‫َخ ْمس‬ ‫َو‬ ‫َخ ْم ُس مِائة‬ ‫َو‬ ‫َث ََّل َث ُة َآْلف‬
‫الص َحا َبة َي ْوم َفتْح َم َّكة ع ََش َر َة َآْلف‬ ‫‪ )7‬ك َ‬ ‫يری النَّاس نَحو َأ ْل ِ‬
‫َان َّ‬ ‫ف ن َْجم‬ ‫ُ ْ َ‬ ‫ََ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫الص َحا َبة َي ْوم ا ْل ُحدَ ْيبِ َّیة َأ ْل ًفا َو َأ ْر َب َع مِائَة‬‫َان َّ‬‫‪ )8‬ك َ‬ ‫ان َومِا َئتَا َص ْف َحة‬ ‫ٰه َذا ا ْلكِتَاب َأ ْل َف ِ‬
‫ُ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫اجت ََم َع َأ ْر َب َع ُة َآْلف َو َخ ْم ُس مِائ َِة َر ُجل‬ ‫ار َح َة ْ‬‫‪ )9‬ا ْل َب ِ‬ ‫َم َضی َأ ْر َب َع ُة َآْلف َو ِس ُّت مِائ َِة َي ْوم‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫الض ُی ْوف ن َْح َو ِس ِّت مِائ َِة مِ ْیل‬ ‫‪َ )10‬ل َقدْ َسا َف َر ٰهؤُ َْل ِء ُّ‬ ‫َما َب ِق َي إِ َّْل تِ ْس ُع مِائَة َو ِع ْش ُر ْو َن َق َل ًما‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫ث مِائَة َوبِ ْضعا َو ِع ْش ِر ْي َن آ َي ًة‬ ‫ت ا ْلبِنْت َث ََّل َ‬ ‫‪َ )11‬قدْ ح ِف َظ ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫ف ُم ْسلِم‬ ‫ا ْلیوم ا ْعتَمر نَحو تِسع ِة َآْل ِ‬
‫َْ َ ََ ْ ُ ْ َ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫اع الت َُّّجار َأ ْر َب َع َة َآْلف َوتِ ْس َع مِائ َِة كِ َتاب‬ ‫عَدَ د ْاْلَ ْنبِی ِ‬
‫اء ن َْح ُو مِائَة َو ِع ْش ِر ْي َن َأ ْل ًفا‬
‫‪ٰ )12‬ه َذا ْاْلُ ْس ُب ْوع َب َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫‪214‬‬
‫‪Summary‬‬
‫‪Number‬‬

‫َ َ‬

‫‪3–10‬‬ ‫‪plural‬‬


‫‪Tens‬‬ ‫َت ْمیِ ْیز‬ ‫‪singular‬‬ ‫‪unchanged‬‬
‫‪Tens +‬‬ ‫( َم ْع ُط ْوف َع َل ْی ِه –‬ ‫احد َو َث ََّل ُث ْو َن َو َلدً ا‬ ‫و ِ‬

‫َ‬
‫‪singular‬‬ ‫‪agree‬‬ ‫و ِ‬
‫‪1–2‬‬ ‫َم ْع ُط ْوف) ‪َ -‬ت ْمیِ ْیز‬ ‫احدَ ة ََّو َث ََّل ُث ْو َن بِنْتًا‬ ‫َ‬
‫‪Tens +‬‬ ‫( َم ْع ُط ْوف َع َل ْی ِه –‬ ‫‪chiastic‬‬ ‫َث ََّل َثة َو َأ ْر َب ُع ْو َن َو َلدً ا‬

‫‪singular‬‬
‫‪3–9‬‬ ‫َم ْع ُط ْوف) ‪َ -‬ت ْمیِ ْیز‬ ‫‪concord‬‬ ‫ون بِنْتًا‬
‫َث ََّلث َّو َأ ْر َب ُع َ‬
‫ُم َضاف‬ ‫مِا َئ ُة َو َلد‬

‫‪100‬‬ ‫‪singular‬‬ ‫‪unchanged‬‬
‫ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬ ‫مِا َئ ُة بِنْت‬
‫ُم َضاف‬ ‫َأ ْل ُ‬

‫ف َو َلد‬
‫‪1,000‬‬ ‫‪singular‬‬ ‫‪unchanged‬‬
‫ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬ ‫ف بِنْت‬
‫َأ ْل ُ‬
‫‪215‬‬
Supplementary Numbers
The word ‫ بِ ْضع‬and its feminine ‫بِ ْض َعة‬, are used to express the
meaning of few or -odd, referring to a quantity between three and
nine.
It can be used in two ways:
1. On its own
ِ ِ
َ ‫ف ﴿بِ ْض َع سن‬
﴾‫ین‬ ُ ‫﴿ َلبِ َث﴾ ُي‬
ُ ‫وس‬
Yusuf remained for a few years.
2. Together with a ten
َ ‫ان بِ ْضع َّو َس ْب ُع‬
»‫ون ُش ْع َب ًة‬ ِ «
ُ ‫اإل ْي َم‬
Faith is seventy-odd branches.
The rules of ‫ بِ ْضع‬and ‫ بِ ْض َعة‬are the same as the numbers three to ten;
they have chiastic concord with the ‫ َم ْعدُ ْود‬.
‫بِ ْض ُع نِ َساء‬ ‫بِ ْض َع ُة ِر َجال‬
Exercise 22
‫) بِ ْضع َق َطرات‬5 ‫) بِ ْض َع ُة َأ ْم َیال‬1
‫) بِ ْض َعة ُجنَ ْیهات‬6 ‫) بِ ْض ُع َد َر َجة‬2
‫) بِ ْضع َص َلوات‬7 ‫) بِ ْض ُع ُس ُفن‬3
‫) بِ ْض َعة َس َكاكین‬8 ‫) بِ ْض َع ُة َأع َْوام‬4
216
Ordinal Numbers
Ordinal Numbers 1st–10th
The ordinal numbers first to tenth are listed below.
ِ ‫الس‬/ ‫ادس‬
‫اد َس ُة‬ ِ ‫ ْاْلُ ْو َلی‬/ ‫ْاْلَ َّو ُل‬
sixth َّ ُ ‫الس‬
َّ first
seventh ‫السابِ َع ُة‬
َّ / ‫السابِ ُع‬
َّ second ‫ ال َّثانِ َی ُة‬/ ‫ال َّثانِ ْي‬
eighth ‫ ال َّثامِنَ ُة‬/ ‫ال َّثامِ ُن‬ third ‫ ال َّثال ِ َث ُة‬/ ‫ال َّثال ِ ُث‬
ِ ‫ الت‬/ ‫َّاسع‬
ِ ‫الرابِ َع ُة‬
ninth ‫َّاس َع ُة‬ ُ ‫الت‬ fourth َّ / ‫الرابِ ُع‬
َّ
ِ
‫ا ْل َعاش َر ُة‬/ ‫ ا ْل َعاش ُر‬fifth ِ
‫ ا ْل َخام َس ُة‬/ ‫ا ْل َخام ُس‬ ِ ِ
tenth
The ordinal numbers first to tenth come in the pattern of the ‫اِ ْس ُم‬
ِ ‫ا ْل َف‬.
‫اع ِل‬
The ordinal numbers become the ‫ َن ْعت‬of the item they are
describing.
Ordinal Cardinal
Number Number
‫ا ْل َی ْو ُم ال َّثال ِ ُث‬ ‫َث ََّل َث ُة َأ َّيام‬

‫السنَ ُة ال َّثال ِ َث ُة‬
َّ ‫َاوات‬ ُ ‫َث ََّل‬
َ ‫ث َسن‬
In tarkib, the ordinal numbers become the ‫ َن ْعت‬.
‫ال َّثال ِ َث ُة‬ ‫السنَ ُة‬
َّ
Note
The ordinal numbers first and sixth are irregular: they are not
formed from the same letters as the cardinal numbers.
ِ ‫ادس – الس‬
‫اد َس ُة‬ ِ ‫ ْاْلُ ْو َلی‬- ‫ْاْلَ َّو ُل‬
َّ ُ ‫الس‬
َّ
sixth first
217
‫‪ )16‬ا ْل َع ْرش ا ْل َخامِس‬ ‫الش َج َر ُة ا ْل َخامِ َس ُة‬ ‫َّ‬ ‫‪)11‬‬ ‫ا ْل َح ِد ْي َق ُة ال َّثال ِ َث ُة‬ ‫‪)6‬‬ ‫‪ )1‬ا ْل َب ْح ُر ال َّثال ِ ُث‬
‫السابِ َعة‬
‫‪ )17‬ا ْلغ ُْر َفة َّ‬ ‫الص ْف َح ُة ال َّثانِ َی ُة‬ ‫َّ‬ ‫‪)12‬‬ ‫اش َر ُة‬ ‫الدَّ رج ُة ا ْلع ِ‬
‫َ َ َ‬ ‫‪)7‬‬ ‫الرابِ َع ُة‬ ‫‪ )2‬ا ْل َب َ‬
‫قر ُة َّ‬
‫ادس‬ ‫‪ )18‬ا ْل ِمیل الس ِ‬ ‫الص ََّل ُة ال َّثامِنَ ُة‬ ‫‪)13‬‬ ‫َّاس ُع‬ ‫َّان الت ِ‬ ‫الدُّ ك ُ‬ ‫‪)8‬‬ ‫‪ )3‬ا ْلب َلدُ ا ْلع ِ‬
‫اش ُر‬
‫َّ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫َّ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ‬
‫‪ )19‬ا ْل َق ْط َرة ال َّثانِیة‬ ‫ال َّط ْی ُر ال َّثامِ ُن‬ ‫‪)14‬‬ ‫َّاس َع ُة‬ ‫الس ِفینَ ُة الت ِ‬
‫َّ ْ‬ ‫‪)9‬‬ ‫‪ )4‬ا ْلجواب الس ِ‬
‫اد ُس‬ ‫َ َ ُ َّ‬
‫السابِع‬
‫‪ )20‬ا ْل َو ْجه َّ‬ ‫‪ )15‬ا ْل َعا ُم ْاْلَ َّو ُل‬ ‫الرابِ ُع‬
‫ف َّ‬‫الس ْی ُ‬
‫‪َّ )10‬‬ ‫اج ُة ْاْلُ ْو َلی‬
‫‪ )5‬ا ْل َح َ‬
‫‪Fill in the blanks with the corresponding ordinal number.‬‬
‫السا َع ُة ‪)4( .....‬‬
‫‪َّ )16‬‬ ‫‪ )11‬ا ْل َح ِق ْی َب ُة ‪)8( .....‬‬ ‫‪ )6‬الت َّْم َر ُة ‪)5( .....‬‬ ‫‪ْ )1‬اْل َي ُة ‪)6( .....‬‬
‫‪َّ )17‬‬
‫الش ْي ُء ‪)3( .....‬‬ ‫‪ )12‬الدَّ ْر ُس ‪)5( .....‬‬ ‫‪ )7‬ا ْل ُجزْ ُء ‪)4( .....‬‬ ‫‪ )2‬ا ْل َب ُ‬
‫اب‪)6( .....‬‬
‫‪ )18‬ال ِّلت ُْر ‪)7( .....‬‬ ‫‪ )13‬ا ْل َح َج ُر‪)3( .....‬‬ ‫‪ )8‬ا ْل َح َج ُر ‪)1( .....‬‬ ‫‪ )3‬ا ْل ُب ْر َه ُ‬
‫ان ‪)10( ....‬‬
‫‪ )19‬ا ْل ُم ِ‬
‫هاج ُر ‪)9( .....‬‬ ‫الر ْط ُل ‪)8( .....‬‬
‫‪َّ )14‬‬ ‫‪ )9‬الدَّ قِ ْی َق ُة ‪)2( .....‬‬ ‫‪ )4‬ا ْل َب ِّینَ ُة ‪)10( .....‬‬
‫‪ )20‬النِّ ْع َم ُة ‪)9( .....‬‬ ‫الر َّما َن ُة ‪)7( .....‬‬
‫‪ُّ )15‬‬ ‫‪ )10‬ا ْل َح َسنَ ُة ‪)2( .....‬‬ ‫‪ )5‬ال ُّت َّف َ‬
‫اح ُة‪)1( .....‬‬
‫‪218‬‬
‫‪Ordinal Number: 11-19‬‬
‫‪The ordinal numbers eleventh to nineteenth agree in gender.‬‬
‫‪, not the ten.‬ال ‪However, only the unit will have an‬‬
‫ا ْل َی ْو ُم ال َّثال ِ ُث ع ََش َر‬
‫السنَ ُة ال َّثال ِ َث ُة ع ََش َر‬
‫َّ‬
‫‪Below are the numbers eleven to nineteen. Notice the pattern of‬‬
‫‪eleventh.‬‬
‫ادس ع ََشر ‪/‬الس ِ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ادي ع ََشر‪/‬ا ْلح ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪sixteenth‬‬ ‫اد َس َة ع َْش َر َة‬ ‫َّ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫الس َ‬
‫َّ‬ ‫‪eleventh‬‬ ‫اد َي َة ع َْش َر َة‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ا ْل َح َ‬
‫‪seventeenth‬‬ ‫‪/‬السابِ َع َة ع َْش َر َة‬

‫السابِ َع ع ََش َر َّ‬
‫َّ‬ ‫‪twelfth‬‬ ‫الثَّانِ َي ع ََش َر‪/‬الثَّانِیَ َة ع َْش َر َة‬
‫‪eighteenth‬‬ ‫الثَّامِ َن ع ََش َر‪/‬الثَّامِنَ َة ع َْش َر َة‬ ‫‪thirteenth‬‬ ‫الثَّال ِ َث ع ََش َر‪/‬الثَّالِثَ َة ع َْش َر َة‬
‫َّاسع ع ََشر‪/‬الت ِ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫‪/‬الرابِ َع َة ع َْش َر َة‬
‫‪nineteenth‬‬ ‫َّاس َع َة ع َْش َر َة‬ ‫الت َ َ‬ ‫‪fourteenth‬‬ ‫الرابِ َع ع ََش َر َّ‬
‫َّ‬
‫‪fifteenth‬‬ ‫الْخَ امِ َس ع ََش َر‪/‬الْخَ امِ َس َة ع َْش َر َة‬
‫‪ )13‬ا ْلغ ُْر َفة ال َّثانِ َیة ع َْش َرة‬ ‫الرابِ َع َة ع َْش َر َة‬ ‫ِ‬
‫السف ْینَ ُة َّ‬
‫‪َّ )7‬‬ ‫َاح ال َّثال ِ َث ع ََش َر‬
‫‪ )1‬ا ْل َجن ُ‬
‫‪ )14‬ا ْل َف ََّّلح ا ْل َخامِس ع ََشر‬ ‫الرابِ َع ع ََش َر‬
‫الس ِّك ْی ُن َّ‬ ‫‪ِّ )8‬‬ ‫السابِ َع ع ََش َر‬ ‫ا ْل ُجنَ ْی ُه َّ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫‪ )15‬ا ْل َق ْطرة ا ْلح ِ‬
‫اد َية ع َْش َرة‬ ‫السؤَ ُال ال َّثامِ َن ع ََش َر‬ ‫اد َس ع ََش َر‬ ‫ا ْلجواب الس ِ‬
‫َ َ‬ ‫‪ُّ )9‬‬ ‫َ َ ُ َّ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫َّاسع َع َشر‬ ‫‪ )16‬ا ْل ُكر ِسي الت ِ‬ ‫الص ْف َح ُة ا ْل َخامِ َس َة ع َْش َر َة‬ ‫اد َس َة ع َْش َر َة‬ ‫ا ْلح ِدي َق ُة الس ِ‬
‫ْ ّ‬ ‫‪َّ )10‬‬ ‫َّ‬ ‫َ ْ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫السابِ َعة ع َْش َرة‬ ‫‪ )11‬ال َّطالِب ُة الت ِ‬ ‫الدَّ َر َج ُة ال َّثال ِ َث َة ع َْش َر َة‬
‫‪ )17‬ال َّلی َلة َّ‬ ‫َّاس َع َة ع َْش َر َة‬ ‫َ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫‪ )18‬النَّار ال َّثامِنَة ع َْش َرة‬ ‫اد َي ع ََش َر‬ ‫‪ )12‬ا ْلعام ا ْلح ِ‬
‫َ ُ َ‬ ‫َّان ال َّثانِ َي ع ََش َر‬ ‫الدُّ ك ُ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫‪219‬‬
‫‪Ordinals Numbers 21-99‬‬
‫‪The unit of the ordinal numbers twenty-first to ninety-ninth agree‬‬
‫‪in gender, whilst the ten remains unchanged. Both the ten and unit‬‬
‫‪.‬ال ‪will have an‬‬
‫ا ْل َی ْو ُم ال َّثال ِ ُث َوا ْل ِع ْش ُر ْو َن‬
‫السنَ ُة ال َّثال ِ َث ُة َوال َّث ََّل ُث ْو َن‬
‫َّ‬
‫‪ )15‬ا ْل ُم َع ِّل َمة ال َّثامِنَة َوال َّث ََّلثون‬ ‫الرابِ َع ُة َو َّ‬
‫الس ْب ُع ْو َن‬ ‫‪ )8‬ا ْلغ ُْر َف ُة َّ‬ ‫ْاْل َي ُة ال َّثال ِ َث ُة َوال َّث َمان ُْو َن‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫َّاس َعة َوا ْل ِع ْشرون‬ ‫‪ )16‬ال َّلی َلة الت ِ‬
‫ْ‬ ‫اد ْي َوال َّث ََّل ُث ْو َن‬ ‫‪ )9‬ا ْلملِ ُك ا ْلح ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫اد َس ُة َوا ْل َخ ْم ُس ْو َن‬ ‫ال َّلی َل ُة الس ِ‬
‫َّ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫ا ْلح ِ‬
‫اد َية‬ ‫‪ )17‬ا ْل َمدْ َر َسة‬ ‫‪ )10‬ا ْل َج َب ُل ال َّثال ِ ُث َوا ْل َخ ْم ُس ْو َن‬ ‫َّاس ُع َوا ْل ِع ْش ُر ْو َن‬ ‫ا ْلیوم الت ِ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫َ‬ ‫َْ ُ‬
‫َوا ْل ِع ْشرون‬ ‫الس ُّت ْو َن‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ )11‬الدَّ ْر ُس ا ْل َخام ُس َو ِّ‬ ‫الن َّْج ُم ال َّثانِ ْي َواْلَر َب ُع ْو َن‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫السابِع َواْلَر َبعون‬ ‫‪ )18‬ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫الس ْو َر ُة ال َّثانِ َی ُة َوالت ِّْس ُع ْو َن‬
‫جد َّ‬ ‫الس ُّت ْو َن‬‫اج ُة ا ْل َخام َس ُة َو ِّ‬ ‫الح َّ‬
‫‪َ )12‬‬ ‫ُّ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫ِ‬ ‫السابِ ُع َوال َّث َمان ُْو َن‬
‫الس ْبعون‬ ‫السادس َو َّ‬ ‫الش ْهر َّ‬ ‫‪َّ )13‬‬ ‫‪ )6‬ا ْل َب ُ‬
‫اب َّ‬
‫‪ )14‬ا ْلكِتَاب ال َّثامِن َوالت ِّْسعون‬ ‫الرابِ ُع َو ِّ‬
‫الس ُّت ْو َن‬ ‫ف َّ‬‫الض ْی ُ‬
‫‪َّ )7‬‬
‫‪Ordinal Numbers: Tens, Hundreds and Thousands‬‬

‫‪The ordinals with tens from twenty to ninety, and hundreds and‬‬
‫‪thousands without a unit, remain the same as the cardinal‬‬
‫‪numbers.‬‬
‫الص ْف َح ُة ْاْلَ ْل ُ‬
‫ف‬ ‫َّ‬ ‫السنَ ُة ا ْل ِما َئ ُة‬
‫َّ‬ ‫ا ْل َی ْو ُم ا ْل ِع ْش ُر ْو َن‬
‫‪1,000th page‬‬ ‫‪100th year‬‬ ‫‪20th day‬‬
‫‪220‬‬
Supplement: Nested Phrases
One phrase may be nested within another.
ِ ‫َه َذا ا ْلو َلدُ الصالِح ص‬
‫ادق‬ َ ُ َّ َ
This pious boy is truthful.
In this sentence, the demonstrative phrase, this pious boy, consists
of a descriptive phrase, pious boy, creating a descriptive phrase
nested within the demonstrative phrase.
ِ ‫ص‬
‫ادق‬ ‫الصال ِ ُح‬ ُ‫ا ْل َو َلد‬ ‫َه َذا‬
َ َّ

ُ ْ
Below is a more complex structure.
ِ ‫[ص ِدي ُق َخالِد] و [ ٰه َذا الرج ُل] َق ِوي‬
‫ان‬ َّ ُ َّ َ ْ َ
[Khalid’s friend] and [this man] are strong.
‫َخ َبر‬ ‫ُم ْب َتدَ أ‬
ِ ‫َق ِوي‬
‫ان‬ َّ ‫الر ُج ُل‬
ّ ‫ٰه َذا‬ ‫و‬ ‫َخالِد‬ ‫َص ِد ْي ُق‬

ِ ْ ‫اِ ْس ُم‬ ‫ُم َضاف إِ َلیْ ِه‬ ‫ُم َضاف‬

ُ ‫َح ْر‬ ‫َم ْع ُط ْوف َع َل ْی ِه‬
221
‫‪ )8‬ك ََّذ َب فِ ْرع َْون النَّبِ ّیین ُم ْوسی َو َه ُار ْون‬ ‫ان ُم ْع َرب َو َم ْبنِي‬ ‫اْلسم قِسم ِ‬
‫ْ ُ ْ َ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫اد َقة َشاكِران‬ ‫واْلُم الص ِ‬
‫الصادق ْ ّ َّ‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪ْ )9‬اْلَب َّ‬ ‫تِ ْل َك ا ْلبِن ُْت ا ْل َم ِر ْي َض ُة َض ِع ْی َفة‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫الذن ُْوب ا ْل َكثِ ْی َرة‬‫الر ّب ا ْل َغ ُف ْور ٰه ِذ ِه ُ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )10‬يغْف ُر َّ‬ ‫ان َم ْع ُل ْوم َو َم ْج ُه ْول‬ ‫ا ْل ِفع ُل قِسم ِ‬
‫ْ ْ َ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫الصائِم ال َّل ْح َم ا ْل َح ّار َوا ْل ُخ ْبز‬
‫‪َ )11‬أك ََل ال ِّط ْفل َّ‬ ‫إن ٰه ِذ ِه ْاْلَ ْق ََّل َم ا ْل َج ِد ْيدَ َة َكبِ ْی َرة‬
‫َّ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫ان ا ْل َمر َأتان ال َّط ِو ْي َلتان َراكِ َبتین‬ ‫ت َها َت ِ‬ ‫‪َ )12‬جا َء ْ‬ ‫‪َ )5‬ل َقدْ م َضی َث ََّل َث ُة َأعْوام و َشهر ِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫َ َ َْ‬ ‫َ‬
‫‪َ )13‬ش ِر َب ْت َفاطِ َمة بِنْت َخالِد َذل ِ َك ا ْل َماء ا ْل َب ِ‬
‫ارد‬ ‫‪َ )6‬لیس َه َذا ا ْلو َلدُ ا ْل َق ِوي و َلدً ا ك ِ‬
‫َاذ ًبا‬ ‫ُّ َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ْ َ‬
‫‪َ )14‬ما َق َر َأ َص ِد ْيق ُم َح َّمد وبِنْت َخالِد ا ْلكِتَاب ا ْل َكبِ ْی َر‬ ‫ان عَامِل َو َغ ْی ُر عَامِل‬‫ف قِسم ِ‬
‫‪ )7‬ا ْل َح ْر ُ ْ َ‬
‫‪ )1‬جع َل الرب ال َغ ُفور ا ْلعبدَ الصالِح موسی َنبِیا ص ِ‬
‫اد ًقا‬ ‫ًّ َ‬ ‫ْ ُ َ ْ َّ َ ُ ْ َ‬ ‫َ َ َّ ُّ‬
‫‪َ )2‬جا َء ُم َع ِّل ُمو ْاْلَ ْو َْل ِد َي ْو َم ا ْل ُج ُم َع ِة إِ َّْل ا ْل ُم َع ِّل َم ا ْل َج ِد ْيدَ َخالِدً ا‬
‫الر ُج ُل َخالِد َض ِع ْی َف ْی ِن‬ ‫ِ‬
‫الصال ُح َأ ْح َمدُ َو ٰذل َك َّ‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )3‬ل ْی َس َه َذا ا ْل َو َلدُ َّ‬
‫‪ )4‬جاء ه َذا ا ْلو َلدُ الص ِغیر َعبدُ الرحم ِن ُثم ٰذل ِ َك ا ْلو َلدُ ا ْل َكبِیر َعبدُ اللِ‬
‫ُْ ْ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َّ ْ ُ ْ َّ ْ ٰ َّ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ َ ٰ‬
‫َب َما ًء َب ِ‬ ‫ِ ِ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ار ًدا ُث َّم َل َبنًا َح ًّارا‬ ‫الصائ َمتَان َفاط َم ُة َوزَ ْين ُ‬ ‫‪َ )5‬ش ِر َب ْت َها َتان ا ْلبِنْتَان َّ‬
‫ادقات‬ ‫إن َهؤُ َْل ِء ْاْلُمهات ا ْلمؤْ مِنات و ُأو ٰلئِ َك ْاْلَ َخوات ا ْلمسلِمات ص ِ‬ ‫‪َّ )6‬‬
‫َ‬ ‫ُ ْ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫َّ‬
‫والش ْیخ ُم َح َّمدا َي ْوم ا ْل ِع ْید َساكِتین‬ ‫‪َ )7‬ر َأی َأ ْح َمد َص ِد ْيق َحامِد ا ْل ُم َع ِّلم زُ َب ْیرا َّ‬
‫الصالِحات َخ ِد ْي َجة َو َم ْر َيم َوآمِنَة َصائِمات‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ ِ‬
‫‪ )8‬إِ َّن ُأ ْخت َخالد عَائ َشة َو ُأو ٰلئ َك ا ْل َبنَات َّ‬
‫اشدون َأ ْر َبع َأ ُبو َب ْكر َوع َُمر َو ُع ْث َمان َوعَلِ ّي ﭫ‬ ‫‪ُ )9‬خ َل َفاء رسول الل ﷺ ا ْل ُخ َل َفاء الر ِ‬
‫َّ‬ ‫َ ُ ْ‬
‫الص ِغ ْی َرة زَ ْينَب‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫س َي ْوم ا ْل ُج ُم َعة إِ َّْل ُم َح َّمد َو َلد ٰذل َك ا ْل ُم َع ِّلم ا ْل َجد ْيد َوت ْل َك ا ْلبِنْت َّ‬ ‫‪َ )10‬ما َجا َء َأ ْم ِ‬
‫‪َ )11‬ي ْق َر ُأ ا ْل ُم ْسلِمون ُس ْو َرة ْ ِ‬
‫اإل ْخ ََّلص َوا ْل ُم َع ِّو َذتین ُس ْو َرة ا ْل َف َلق َو ُس ْو َرة النَّاس َث ََّل َ‬
‫ث َم ّرات َص َباحا َو َم َساء‬
‫‪222‬‬
Possessive Phrases with Other Phrases
The ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬and ‫ ُم َضاف‬cannot be separated. Therefore, when they
are given with any other phrase, they remain together, and the
other phrases are adjusted accordingly.
Possessive Phrases with a Descriptive Phrase
The ‫ َن ْعت‬of the ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬comes after it.
‫الر ُج ِل ا ْل َف ِق ْی ِر‬
َّ ‫َاب‬
ِ
ُ ‫كت‬
the poor man’s book
‫ا ْل َف ِق ْی ِر‬ ‫الر ُج ِل‬
َّ ‫َاب‬
ُ ‫كت‬
ِ
The ‫ َن ْعت‬of the ‫ ُم َضاف‬also comes after the ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬.

‫الر ُج ِل ا ْل َكبِ ْی ُر‬ ِ
َّ ‫َاب‬
ُ ‫كت‬
the man’s big book
‫ا ْل َكبِ ْی ُر‬ ‫الر ُج ِل‬ ‫َاب‬ ِ
َّ ُ ‫كت‬
If the ‫ ُم َضاف‬is in the ‫ َم ْج ُر ْور‬state, context will help determine whether

the ‫ َن ْعت‬is linked to the ‫ ُم َضاف‬or the ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬.
If there is no context, it will not be possible to determine which
word it is becoming the ‫ َن ْعت‬of.
‫الص ِغ ْی ِر‬ ِ ِ ‫َاح َب‬
َّ ‫اب ا ْل َب ْیت‬
ِ
ُ ‫م ْفت‬
the key of the door of the small house
the key of the small door of the house
223
‫‪Note‬‬
‫‪ُ does‬م َضاف ‪َ , even though the‬م ْع ِر َفة ‪َ may both be‬ن ْعت ‪ُ and its‬م َضاف ‪The‬‬
‫‪.‬ال ‪not have an‬‬
‫ا ْل َكبِ ْی ُر‬ ‫الر ُج ِل‬ ‫َاب‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َّ‬ ‫كت ُ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫اد ا ْل ُم ْخلِ ِص ْی َن‬ ‫‪ )1‬ي ْقب ُل الل َأعْم َال ا ْل ِعب ِ‬
‫اس َعة‬ ‫‪َ )9‬ما َي ْر ُجو ا ْل ُمؤْ منون إِ َّْل َر ْح َمة الل ا ْل َو َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ُ َ‬ ‫َ َ‬
‫الر ِح ْیم‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )10‬ما َي ْر ُجو ا ْل ُمؤْ منون إِ َّْل َر ْح َمة الل َّ‬ ‫‪َ )2‬أك ََل َأ ْص ِد َقا ُء َأ ْح َمدَ َط َعا َم ْاْلُ ِّم ا َّل ِذ ْي َذ‬
‫‪َ )11‬ما َج َع َل الل َل ْی َلة مِ ْثل َل ْی َلة ا ْل َقدْ ر ا ْل ُم َب َاركَة‬ ‫اط اللِ ا ْل ُم ْست َِق ْی ُم‬ ‫‪ )3‬إِ َّن ِد ْي َن ْ ِ‬
‫اإل ْس ََّل ِم َل ِص َر ُ‬
‫‪َْ )12‬ل َت ُص ْو ُم ُأ ْخت َأ ْح َمد ا ْل َم ِر ْي َضة َغ ْیر َر َم َضان‬ ‫اد ا ْل َخال ِ َص َة‬ ‫‪َْ )4‬ل ي ْقب ُل الل إِ َّْل َأعْم َال ا ْل ِعب ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫َ َ‬
‫الر َجال إِ َّْل َأكْل َب َق َرة َجائِ َعة‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ادقِ ْی َن َها ُد ْو َن ُم ْهتَدُ ْو َن‬ ‫‪ )5‬إِ َّن َأ ْنبِیاء اللِ الص ِ‬
‫‪ )13‬إِن َّي ْأك ُُل ٰهؤُ َْلء ِّ‬ ‫َّ‬ ‫َ َ‬
‫ت ا ْلبِنْت إِ َّْل َص ْف َحة ا ْلكِتَاب ْاْلَ ِخ ْی َرة‬ ‫‪ )14‬ما َقر َأ ِ‬
‫َ َ‬ ‫جد ُم َب َارك‬ ‫جدُ النَّبِي ا ْل َك ِر ْي ِم ﷺ َم ْس ِ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫‪َ )6‬م ْس ِ‬
‫‪َ )15‬ي ْوم ا ْل ُج ُم َعة ا ْل ُم َب َاركَة َي ْخ ُط ُب ِإ َمام ا ْل َم ْس ِجد ا ْل َج ِديد‬ ‫آن ا ْل ِق َص َار‬
‫‪َ )7‬أو ًْل يح َف ُظ ْاْلَو َْلد سور ا ْل ُقر ِ‬
‫ْ ُ ُ ََ ْ‬ ‫َّ َ ْ‬
‫ب ِإ َمام ا ْل َم ْس ِجد ا ْل َج ِديد غَ ْیر َي ْوم ا ْل ُج ُم َعة‬ ‫‪َْ )16‬ل َي ْخ ُط ُ‬ ‫الر ُس ْو ِل ا ْل ُمن ََّو َر َة َل ِم ِد ْينَة ُم َب َاركَة‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ )8‬إِ َّن َمد ْينَ َة َّ‬
‫‪Note‬‬
‫‪َ of a possessive‬ن ْعت ‪Although uncommon, it is possible to have a‬‬
‫‪.‬نَكِ َرة ‪ُ is‬م َضاف ‪phrase, wherein the‬‬
‫َاب ن َْحو َكبِ ْیر‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ٰه َذا كت ُ‬
‫‪This is a large book of Nahw.‬‬
‫‪224‬‬
Possessive Phrases with a Demonstrative Phrase
When an ‫اإل َش َار ِة‬
ِ ْ ‫ اِسم‬comes with a possessive phrase, the ‫ م َشار إِ َل ْی ِه‬can
ُ ْ ُ
ِ ِ
either be the ‫ ُم َضاف‬or the ‫ ُم َضاف إ َل ْیه‬.
The ‫ ُم َشار إِ َل ْی ِه‬as the ‫ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬
If the ‫ ُم َشار إِ َل ْی ِه‬is the ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬, there are no significant changes to the
structure.
ِ
َّ ‫َاب ٰه َذا‬
‫الر ُج ِل‬ ُ ‫كت‬
this man’s book
‫الر ُج ِل‬ ‫ٰه َذا‬ ‫َاب‬ ِ
َّ ُ ‫كت‬
ُ ْ
The ‫ ُم َشار إِ َل ْی ِه‬as the ‫ُم َضاف‬

If the ‫ ُم َشار إِ َل ْی ِه‬is the ‫ ُم َضاف‬, the ‫اإل َش َار ِة‬
ِ ْ ‫ اِ ْس ُم‬must come after the ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬.
‫الر ُج ِل ٰه َذا‬ ِ
َّ ‫َاب‬
ُ ‫كت‬
this book of the man
‫ٰه َذا‬ ‫الر ُج ِل‬ ‫َاب‬ ِ
َّ ُ ‫كت‬
‫اإل َش َار ِة ا ْل ُمؤَ َّخ ُر‬

ِ ْ ‫اِ ْس ُم‬ ‫ُم َشار إِ َل ْی ِه ُم َقدَّ م‬
225
‫‪ُ as a Name‬م َشار إِ َل ْی ِه ‪The‬‬
‫اإل َش َار ِة ‪ُ is a name, the‬م َشار إِ َل ْی ِه ‪If the‬‬
‫‪.‬م َشار إِ َل ْی ِه ‪ must come after the‬اِسم ْ ِ‬
‫ْ ُ‬ ‫ُ‬
‫زَ ْيد ٰه َذا‬
‫‪this Zaid‬‬
‫ٰه َذا‬ ‫زَ ْيد‬
‫اإل َش َار ِة ا ْل ُمؤَ َّخ ُر‬

‫اِسم ْ ِ‬
‫ْ ُ‬ ‫ُم َشار إِ َلیْ ِه ُم َقدَّ م‬
‫اإل َش َار ِة ‪In these examples, the‬‬ ‫ُم َشار ‪ cannot be brought before the‬اِ ْس ُم ْ ِ‬
‫‪.‬خرب ‪ and‬مبتدأ ‪, as it would become‬إِ َل ْی ِه‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ٰه َذا زَ ْيد‬
‫الر ُج ِل‬ ‫ٰه َذا كت ُ‬
‫َاب َّ‬
‫‪This is the man’s book‬‬ ‫‪This is Zaid.‬‬
‫س‬‫َجا َء ُض ُی ْوف َأ ْح َمدَ ٰهؤُ َْل ِء َأ ْم ِ‬ ‫‪)10‬‬ ‫‪ )1‬ع َُم ُر ٰذل ِ َك َأ ُب ْو َحامِد‬
‫إِ َّن ُتجار البِ ََّل ِد ُأو ٰلئِ َك َلص ِ‬
‫اد ُق ْو َن‬ ‫‪)11‬‬ ‫آن ٰه ِذ ِه طِ َوال‬ ‫‪ )2‬سور ا ْل ُقر ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫َّ َ‬ ‫ُ َُ ْ‬
‫ان َذ َوا ِع ْلم َو َش َرف‬ ‫ابنَا حامِد ٰه َذ ِ‬
‫ْ َ‬ ‫‪)12‬‬ ‫‪ )3‬إِ َّن َأ ْر َض اللِ ٰه ِذ ِه فِ َراش‬
‫َينْ ُك ُح ا ْب ُن َخالِد ٰه َذا بِن َْت َع ْب ِد اللِ تِ ْل َك‬ ‫‪)13‬‬ ‫‪ )4‬إِ َّن َيدَ ال ِّط ْف ِل ٰه ِذ ِه َو ِس َخة‬
‫إِ َّن ُع َل َما َء ا ْل َمدْ َر َس ِة ٰهؤُ َْل ِء َل َصال ِ ُح ْو َن ُم َّت ُق ْو َن‬ ‫‪)14‬‬ ‫اء ٰه ِذ ِه َج ِم ْی َلة‬‫‪ )5‬نُجوم السم ِ‬
‫ُ ْ ُ َّ َ‬
‫ان َش َج َر َة ا ْل َح ِد ْي َق ِة ٰه ِذ ِه‬
‫ان الرج ََّل ِن ا ْل َق ِوي ِ‬
‫َّ‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )15‬ي ْق َط ُع ٰه َذ َّ ُ‬ ‫رآن تِ ْل َك َل ِق َصار‬ ‫‪ )6‬إِ َّن سور ا ْل ُق ِ‬
‫ُ ََ‬
‫الر ْح ٰم ِن َوبِن َْت‬ ‫ِ ِ‬ ‫اء تِ ْل َك َلن ِ‬ ‫ات ا ْلم ِ‬ ‫‪ )7‬إِ َّن َق َطر ِ‬
‫‪َ )16‬س َّمی ا ْل َجدُّ ا ْب َن َخالد ٰذل َك َع ْبدَ َّ‬ ‫َجس‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ‬
‫الر ْح ٰم ِن‬ ‫زَ ين ِ‬ ‫‪ )8‬إِ َّن نُجوم السم ِ‬
‫اء ٰه ِذ ِه َل َج ِم ْی َلة‬
‫َب ت ْل َك َأ َم َة َّ‬
‫ْ َ‬ ‫ُ ْ َ َّ َ‬
‫اضي ا ْل َم ِد ْين َِة ٰه َذا َظال ِ ًما‬
‫‪َ )9‬لیس َق ِ‬
‫ْ َ‬
‫‪226‬‬
Possessive Phrases with an Appositive Phrase
Appositive phrases are commonly used with possessive phrases in
Arabic names.
ِ‫محمدُ بن عب ِد الل‬
ْ َ ُ ْ َّ َ ُ
Muhammad, son of Abdullah
ِ‫الل‬ ‫عَ ْب ِد‬ ‫ْب ُن‬ ُ‫ُم َح َّمد‬
‫ُم َضاف إِ َلیْ ِه‬ ‫ ُم َضاف‬/ ‫ُم َضاف إلیه‬ ‫ُم َضاف‬
‫بَدَ ل‬ ‫ُمبْدَ ل مِنْ ُه‬
Rules of the Word ‫ ا ْبن‬in a ‫ َبدَ ل‬-‫ ُم ْبدَ ل‬Structure

Name After ‫ا ْبن‬
The name after ‫ اِ ْبن‬can either be:
1. The father. In this case, the letter ‫ ا‬is dropped from the
beginning of ‫ا ْبن‬.
‫ُم َح َّمدُ ْب ُن َع ْب ِد اللِ ﷺ‬
In this example, because ِ‫ َع ْبدُ الل‬is the father of ‫ ُم َح َّمد‬, the ‫ ا‬from ‫ا ْبن‬
is dropped.
2. Someone other than the father. In this case, the ‫ ا‬must remain
intact.
‫یسى ا ْب َن َم ْر َي َم ڠ‬ ِ
َ ‫ع‬
In this example, because ‫ َم ْر َي ُم‬is not the father of ‫ ِع ْی َسی‬, the ‫ ا‬from
‫ ا ْبن‬is not dropped.
In both cases, it remains silent, and is not pronounced.
227
‫ا ْبن ‪Name Before‬‬
‫‪َ , it will be read‬تن ِْو ْين ‪َ , i.e. it has a‬غ ْی ُر ُمن َْص ِرف ‪ is not‬ا ْبن ‪If the name before‬‬
‫‪َ to make pronunciation easier.‬تن ِْو ْين ‪and written without‬‬
‫بي َطالب ﭬ‬ ‫َ‬
‫َلي ْب ُن أ ْ‬
‫ع ُّ‬
‫‪.‬عَلِي ‪َ drops from‬تن ِْو ْين ‪In this example, the‬‬
‫‪The tarkib of complex names is written as follows:‬‬
‫ا ْل ُق َر ِش ُّي‬ ‫ا ْل َخ َّط ِ‬
‫اب‬ ‫بن‬
‫ُ‬ ‫عُ َم ُر‬ ‫ا ْل ُمؤْ مِن ِ ْی َن‬ ‫َأمِ ْی ُر‬
‫َبدَ ل‬ ‫ُم ْبدَ ل مِنْ ُه‬
‫َن ْعت‬ ‫َمنْ ُع ْوت‬ ‫ُم َضاف إلیه‬ ‫ُم َضاف‬
‫‪Notes‬‬
‫‪ُ to a number to show age.‬م َضاف ‪ are used as‬بِنْت ‪ and‬ا ْبن ‪1. The words‬‬
‫َأنَا ا ْب ُن ع َْش ِر ْي َن َسنَ ًة‬
‫‪I am twenty years old.‬‬
‫]‪[I am the son of twenty years.‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪َ of attribution can be added to a noun. This then‬ياء ‪َ , the‬يا ُء الن ِّْس َبة ‪2. A‬‬
‫‪َ of the name.‬ن ْعت ‪becomes the‬‬
‫ان ا ْل َف ِ‬
‫ار ِّس ُّي ﭬ‬ ‫َس ْل َم ُ‬
‫‪Salman, the Persian‬‬
‫‪ُ )6‬م َح َّمدُ ْب ُن َع ْب ِد اللِ َع ْبدُ اللِ َو َر ُس ْو ُل ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ِم ْی َن ﷺ‬ ‫ان ﭬ َذا الن ُّْو َر ْي ِن‬ ‫ان ْب ُن َع َّف َ‬
‫َان ُع ْث َم ُ‬
‫ك َ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫الل بن ُقحا َف َة َخ ِلی َف َة رسو ِل ِ‬‫َان َأبو ب ْكر عَ بدُ ِ‬ ‫اإل َما ُم َمال ِ ُك ْب ُن َأنَس إِ َما َم ا ْل َم ِد ْينَ ِة‬
‫َان ِ‬
‫الل ﷺ‬ ‫ْ َ ُ ْ‬ ‫ُ َ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫‪ )7‬ك َ ُ ْ َ‬ ‫ك َ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫ات ال ِّن َطا َق ْی ِن‬ ‫‪ )8‬سمی رسو ُل ِ‬
‫الل َأ ْس َم َاء ِبن َْت َأ ِب ْي َب ْكر ﭭ َذ َ‬ ‫اب ﭬ َأمِ ْی َر ا ْل ُمؤْ مِن ِ ْی َن‬ ‫بن ا ْل َخ َّط ِ‬ ‫ك َ‬
‫َ َّ َ ُ ْ‬ ‫َان ع َُم ُر ُ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫َان َأ ُب ْو ُع َب ْیدَ َة َعامِ ُر ْب ُن َع ْب ِد اللِ ْب ِن ا ْل َج َّراحِ ﭬ‬ ‫‪ )9‬ك َ‬ ‫َلیس ِعیسی ابن مريم ڠ إِ ٰلها ب ْل َعبدَ اللِ‬
‫ً َ ْ‬ ‫ْ َ ْ َ ْ ُ ََْ َ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫َأمِ ْی َن ٰه ِذ ِه ْاْلُ َّم ِة‬ ‫ان ڠ َنبِ َّي َبن ِ ْي إِ ْس َرائِ ْی َل‬
‫َان ُم ْو َسی ْب ُن ِع ْم َر َ‬
‫‪ )5‬ك َ‬
‫‪228‬‬
‫َتن ِْو ْين ‪Rules of‬‬
‫‪َ or‬ض َّمة ‪َ ,‬ف ْت َحة ‪ْ written in the form of a double‬ن ‪َ is originally a‬تن ِْو ْين ‪1. A‬‬
‫‪َ .‬ك ْس َرة‬
‫َر ُجل ‪َ ‬ر ُجلِ ْن‬ ‫َر ُج ًَّل ‪َ ‬ر ُج َل ْن‬ ‫َر ُجل ‪َ ‬ر ُج ُل ْن‬
‫ن ‪َ will be written as a‬تن ِْو ْين ‪َ , the‬تن ِْو ْين ‪َ follows a word with a‬ا ْل ‪2. If an‬‬
‫‪.‬ك َْس َرة ‪in subscript and it will be given a‬‬
‫ك ََّذب ْت َقوم ُلو ِ‬
‫ط ِن ا ْل ُم ْر َسلِ ْی َن‬ ‫ْ ُ ْ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫﴿ك ََّذ َب ْت َق ْو ُم ُلوط ا ْل ُم ْر َسلِ َ‬
‫ین﴾‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َق َر َأ زَ ْيدُ ِن ا ْلكت َ‬
‫َاب‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫َق َر َأ زَ ْيد ا ْلكت َ‬
‫َاب‬
‫َجا َء َصال ِ ُح ِن ا ْل َم ِر ْي ُض‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫َجا َء َصالِح ا ْل َم ِر ْي ُض‬
‫‪Summary‬‬
‫‪The following table shows how phrases are joined to other‬‬
‫‪phrases.‬‬
‫إِ َضا َفة‬ ‫َبدَ ل‬ ‫َع ْطف‬ ‫إِ َش َارة‬ ‫َن ْعت‬
‫الصالِحِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ُأ ُّم ا ْل َو َلد َّ‬ ‫الصالِ ُح َأ ْح َمدُ‬
‫ا ْل َو َلدُ َّ‬ ‫َو َلد َصالِح َوبِنْت َصالِ َحة‬
‫الصالِ ُح‬
‫الو َلدُ َّ‬
‫هذَ ا َ‬ ‫َن ْعت‬
‫الصالِ َح ُة‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ُأ ُّم ا ْل َو َلد َّ‬ ‫الصالِ َح ُة‬
‫َّ‬ ‫ْت‬
‫ُ‬ ‫َب ا ْلبِن‬
‫زَ ْين ُ‬ ‫َو َلد َصالِح َو ُم ْجتَ ِهد‬
‫كِتَاب هذَ ا ا ْلو َلدِ‬ ‫هذَ ا ا ْل َو َلدُ َوتِ ْل َك ا ْلبِنْ ُت‬
‫إِ َش َارة‬
‫َ‬ ‫ُ‬
‫هذَ ا ا ْل َو َلدُ زَ ْيد‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫الصالِ ُح‬
‫الو َلدُ َّ‬
‫هذَ ا َ‬
‫اب ا ْل َو َل ِد هذَ ا‬ ‫ِ‬
‫كتَ ُ‬ ‫الر َج ُال َوالن َِّسا ُء‬
‫هؤُ َْلء ِّ‬
‫ان َحامِد َو َخالِد‬ ‫ا ْلو َلدَ ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫هذَ ا ا ْل َو َلدُ َوتِ ْل َك ا ْلبِنْ ُت‬ ‫َو َلد َصالِح َوبِنْت َصالِ َحة‬
‫كِتَاب ا ْلو َل ِد وا ْلبِنْ ِ‬
‫ت‬ ‫ُ َ َ‬ ‫فَاطِم ُة و َخ ِديج ُة ْاْلُ ْختَانِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫َع ْطف‬
‫َ َ ْ َ‬ ‫الر َج ُال َوالن َِّسا ُء‬
‫هؤُ َْلء ِّ‬ ‫َو َلد َصالِح َو ُم ْجتَ ِهد‬
‫ان َحامِد َو َخالِد‬ ‫ا ْلو َلدَ ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫الصالِ ُح َأ ْح َمدُ‬
‫ا ْل َو َلدُ َّ‬
‫محمدُ بن َعب ِد اللِ‬
‫ُ َ َّ ْ ُ ْ‬ ‫َاطم ُة و َخ ِديج ُة ْاْلُ ْخت ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫هذَ ا ا ْل َو َلدُ زَ ْيد‬ ‫َبدَ ل‬
‫َان‬ ‫ف َ َ ْ َ‬ ‫الصالِ َح ُة‬ ‫َب ا ْلبِن ُْت َّ‬ ‫زَ ْين ُ‬
‫اب هذَ ا ا ْل َو َل ِد‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ُأم ا ْلو َل ِد الصالحِِ‬
‫إِ َضا َفة‬
‫محمدُ بن َعب ِد اللِ‬ ‫كِتَاب ا ْلو َل ِد وا ْلبِنْ ِ‬ ‫كتَ ُ‬ ‫َّ‬ ‫ُّ َ‬
‫ُ َ َّ ْ ُ ْ‬ ‫ت‬ ‫ُ َ َ‬
‫اب ا ْل َو َل ِد هذَ ا‬
‫كتَ ُ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫الصال َح ُة‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ُأ ُّم ا ْل َو َلد َّ‬
‫‪229‬‬
Completion of Irab Table
In Unit 1, we discussed the irab of six types of ‫ ُم ْع َرب‬words (page
27). In Unit 3 we discussed the irab of ‫( ْاْلَ ْس َما ُء ا ْل َخ ْم َس ِة‬page 183). In this
section, we are going to discuss the irab of two more types of
words, thereby completing the irab table.
ِ
‫ص‬ُ ‫اْل ْس ُم ا ْل َمنْ ُق ْو‬
An ‫ ْاسم َمنْ ُق ْوص‬is a word which ends in a ‫ َياء‬, and is preceded by a ‫ك َْس َرة‬.
ِ ‫ا ْله‬
‫اد ْي‬ َ
The irab of an ‫ ْاسم َمنْ ُق ْوص‬is depicted in the table below. It should be
noted that when it has a ‫ َتن ِْو ْين‬, its irab is different.
‫َض َّمة ُم َقدَّ َرة‬ ‫َفت َْحة‬ ‫ك َْس َرة ُم َقدَّ َرة‬
ِ ‫ا ْله‬
‫اد ْي‬ ‫اد َي‬ ِ ‫ا ْله‬ ِ ‫ا ْله‬
‫اد ْي‬
ِ َ َ َ
8 ُ ‫ْاْل ْس ُم ا ْل َمنْ ُق ْو‬
‫ص‬
ِ ‫َه‬ ِ ‫َه‬ ِ ‫َه‬
ِ ‫ادي الن‬
‫َّاس‬ ِ ‫اد َي الن‬
‫َّاس‬ ِ ‫ادي الن‬
‫َّاس‬
‫َهاد‬ ِ ‫َه‬
‫اد ًيا‬ ‫َهاد‬
‫ ُم َقدَّ َرة‬means hidden, i.e. the ‫ َض َّمة‬and ‫ ك َْس َرة‬are hidden and cannot be
seen.
‫اْلس ُم ا ْل َم ْق ُص ْو ُر‬
ْ
An ‫ اِ ْسم َم ْق ُص ْور‬is a noun which ends in a ‫ َياء‬with a standing ‫ َأل ِف‬.
‫ ُهدً ی‬،‫ ا ْل ُهدٰ ی‬،‫ُم ْو ٰسی‬
The irab of an ‫ ْاسم َم ْق ُص ْور‬is depicted in the following table. It should
be noted that when it has a ‫ َتن ِْو ْين‬, its irab is different.
‫َض َّمة ُم َقدَّ َرة‬ ‫َفت َْحة ُم َقدَّ َرة‬ ‫ك َْس َرة ُم َقدَّ َرة‬
‫ا ْل ُهدٰ ی‬ ‫ا ْل ُهدٰ ی‬ ‫ا ْل ُهدٰ ی‬
9 ‫ْاْل ْس ُم ا ْل َم ْق ُص ْو ُر‬ ِ‫هدَ ی الل‬ ِ‫هدَ ی الل‬ ِ‫هدَ ی الل‬
ُ ُ ُ
‫ُهدً ی‬ ‫ُهدً ی‬ ‫ُهدً ی‬
230
‫‪Note‬‬
‫‪َ , Arabic grammarians‬م ْبنِي ‪Even though these words appear to be‬‬
‫‪have put these words into a separate category.‬‬
‫‪Vocab‬‬
‫ن ِ‬
‫َجس‬ ‫َداع ج ُدعَاة‪ْ ،‬و َن‬
‫‪impure‬‬ ‫‪caller‬‬
‫‪guide‬‬ ‫َهاد ج ُهدَ اة‪ْ ،‬و َن‬ ‫‪judge‬‬ ‫َقاض ج ُق َضاة‪ْ ،‬و َن‬
‫‪valley‬‬ ‫‪َ guided‬واد ج ُو ْد َيان‪َ ،‬أ ْو ِد َية‬ ‫ُم ْهتَد ج ْو َن‬
‫اض َي َم ْبنِي‬ ‫إِ َّن ا ْل ِفع َل ا ْلم ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫‪)15‬‬ ‫ٰه َذا َخ َبر َثان‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫ٰه ِذه ا ْل َكلِ َم ُة َم ْف ُع ْول َثان‬ ‫‪)16‬‬ ‫ٰه َذا و ِ‬
‫اد ْي َم َّك َة‬ ‫َ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫ن َِس َی ْت َفاطِ َم ُة َث َمانِ َي ُس َور‬ ‫‪)17‬‬ ‫ٰه َذا فِ ْعل َماض‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫النَّبِ ُّي ُم َح َّمد ﷺ َهاد ُمهتَد‬ ‫‪)18‬‬ ‫َادل‬‫ٰه َذا َقاض ع ِ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫َلیس ا ْل ِفع ُل ا ْلم ِ‬
‫اض ْي ُم ْع َر ًبا‬ ‫‪)19‬‬ ‫اضي ع ِ‬
‫َادل‬ ‫ِ َّ ْ َ ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫ْ َ‬ ‫إن الق َ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫َّاس ْاْلَ ْي ِد َي ا ْل َو ِس َخ َة‬‫غ ََس َل الن ُ‬ ‫‪)20‬‬ ‫ا ْل َخ َب ُر ال َّثانِ ْي َم ْر ُف ْوع‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫َان َه ُار ْو ُن َأ َخا ُم ْو ٰسی ڠ‬ ‫ك َ‬ ‫‪)21‬‬ ‫اض ْي َص ِغ ْیر‬ ‫بی ُت ا ْل َق ِ‬
‫َْ‬ ‫‪)7‬‬
‫ما الدُّ ْنیا إِ َّْل مِ ْث ُل َق ْطر ِة م ِ‬
‫اء ا ْل َب ْح ِر‬ ‫‪)22‬‬ ‫اضي ع ِ‬
‫َاد ًْل‬ ‫َ َْ ِ‬
‫َ َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫كَان الق ْ‬ ‫‪)8‬‬
‫ادي م َّك َة و ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫َما َت ْت َث َمانِ ْي َب َق َرات‬
‫اد ًيا ُم َب َاركًا‬ ‫الل َو َ َ َ‬ ‫َج َع َل ُ‬ ‫‪)23‬‬ ‫‪)9‬‬
‫اد ْي َن َو ُم ْهت َِد ْي َن‬
‫جع َل الل ْاْلَ ْنبِیاء َه ِ‬
‫َ َ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫َ َ‬ ‫‪)24‬‬ ‫‪ )10‬إِ َّن ُم ْو َسی ڠ َنبِي‬
‫َّاج ُر ا ْلغَن ِ ُّي َث َمانِ َي َحدَ ائِ َق‬‫اِ ْشت ََری الت ِ‬ ‫‪)25‬‬ ‫الر ُج ُل َهاد َو ُم ْهتَد‬
‫‪ٰ )11‬ه َذا َّ‬
‫ادي م َّك َة مِ ْث َل َغی ِر و ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫َان ُم ْو َسی ڠ َنبِ ًّیا‬
‫اد ْي َم َّك َة‬ ‫ْ َ‬ ‫َل ْی َس َو ْ َ‬ ‫‪)26‬‬ ‫‪ )12‬ك َ‬
‫ال إِ َّْل ْاْلُ َّم َه ُ‬ ‫‪َْ )27‬ل َي ْغ ِس ُل َأ ْي ِد َي ْاْلَ ْط َف ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫وسى ا ْلكت َ‬
‫ات‬ ‫َاب‬ ‫‪ )13‬آ َتی ُ‬
‫الل ُم َ‬
‫ج ِد‬
‫الش ْی ُخ ا ْل ُمت َِّقي َص ِد ْي َق إِ َما ِم ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬
‫ْ‬ ‫َان َّ‬ ‫‪ )28‬ك َ‬ ‫آن َل ُهدً ی َو ِش َفاء‬
‫‪ )14‬إِ َّن ا ْل ُق ْر َ‬
‫‪231‬‬
‫‪Complete Irab Table‬‬
‫َم ْر ُف ْوع‬ ‫َمنْ ُص ْوب‬ ‫َم ْج ُر ْور‬

‫‪1‬‬ ‫ا ْل ُم ْف َر ُد‬
‫كتاب‬ ‫كِتَا ًبا‬ ‫كِتَاب‬

‫‪2‬‬ ‫ا ْل َج ْم ُع ا ْل ُم َك َّس ُر‬
‫ُكتُب‬ ‫ُكتُ ًبا‬ ‫ُكتُب‬
‫(ـ ِ‬
‫َان )‬ ‫( ـَـ ْی ِن )‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َثنَّی‬
‫مسلِم ِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫ُم ْسلِ َم ْی ِن‬
‫ُ ْ َ‬
‫( ـ ُْـو َن )‬ ‫( ــِ ْی َن )‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫السال ِ ُم‬
‫َج ْم ُع ا ْل ُم َذك َِّر َّ‬
‫ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن‬ ‫ُم ْسلِ ِم ْی َن‬
‫َض َّمة ( ـَـات )‬ ‫ك َْس َرة ( ـَـات )‬

‫‪5‬‬ ‫السال ِ ُم‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َج ْم ُع ا ْل ُمؤَ نَّث َّ‬
‫ُم ْسلِ َمات‬ ‫ُم ْسلِ َمات‬
‫َض َّمة‬ ‫َفت َْحة‬

‫‪6‬‬ ‫غَ ْی ُر ُمن َْص ِرف‬
‫إِبر ِ‬
‫اهیْ ُم‪َ ،‬أنْبِیَا ُء‬ ‫إِبر ِ‬
‫اهیْ َم‪َ ،‬أنْبِیَا َء‬
‫َْ‬ ‫َْ‬
‫َواو‬ ‫َألِف‬ ‫َياء‬
‫‪7‬‬ ‫ْاْلَ ْس َما ُء ا ْل َخ ْم َس ُة‬
‫َأ ُب ْو َب ْكر‬ ‫َأ َبا َب ْكر‬ ‫َأبِ ْي َب ْكر‬
‫َض َّمة ُم َقدَّ َرة‬ ‫َفت َْحة‬ ‫ك َْس َرة ُم َقدَّ َرة‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ا ْله ِ‬ ‫ا ْله ِ‬ ‫ا ْله ِ‬
‫‪8‬‬ ‫ْاْل ْس ُم ا ْل َمنْ ُق ْو ُ‬
‫ص‬ ‫اد ْي‬ ‫َ‬ ‫اد َي‬ ‫َ‬ ‫اد ْي‬ ‫َ‬
‫َهاد‬ ‫َه ِ‬
‫اد ًيا‬ ‫َهاد‬
‫َض َّمة ُم َقدَّ َرة‬ ‫َفت َْحة ُم َقدَّ َرة‬ ‫ك َْس َرة ُم َقدَّ َرة‬
‫‪9‬‬ ‫ْاْل ْس ُم ا ْل َم ْق ُص ْو ُر‬ ‫ا ْل ُهدٰ ی‬ ‫ا ْل ُهدٰ ی‬ ‫ا ْل ُهدٰ ی‬

‫ُهدً ی‬ ‫ُهدً ی‬ ‫ُهدً ی‬
‫‪Unchanged‬‬
‫*‬ ‫َم ْبنِي‬
‫ٰه َذا‬ ‫ٰه َذا‬ ‫ٰه َذا‬
‫‪232‬‬
Summary
Phrases
Descriptive Phrases
‫َمنْ ُع ْوت‬ Noun
Agree in DING
‫َن ْعت‬ Adjective
ِ
ُ ‫ ا ْل َج ْم ُع ا ْل ُم َّك‬،‫َج ْم ُع َغ ْی ِر ا ْل ُع َق ََّلء‬
‫ َن ْعت َثان‬،‫سر‬
Demonstrative Phrases
‫اإل َش َار ِة‬ِ ْ ‫اِسم‬
ُ ْ Demonstrative Pronoun
Agree in DING
‫ُم َشار إِ َل ْی ِه‬ Must have ‫ال‬
Conjunction Phrases
،‫ َوإِ َّما‬،‫ َأ ْو‬،‫ ُث َّم‬،‫ف‬
َ ،‫َو‬
ُ ‫َح ْر‬ Conjunction
‫(و) ٰلكِ ْن‬ َ ،‫ َب ْل‬،‫ َو َْل‬،‫َْل‬
Agree in Irab
‫َم ْع ُط ْوف‬ The word after the conjunction
Multiple ‫ َم ْع ُطوف‬, ‫ َخ َبر َثان‬, separated
Appositive Phrases
‫ُم ْبدَ ل مِنْ ُه‬ Noun
Agree in Irab
‫َبدَ ل‬ Noun
Possessive Phrases
‫ُم َضاف‬ ،‫ ُذ ْو‬،‫ َغ ْی ُر‬،‫مِ ْثل‬
Owned No ‫ َا ْل‬, no ‫َتنْ ِو ْين‬
‫ َأ ْلف‬،‫ مِائَة‬،‫َثَّلَ َثة – ع ََشر‬
‫ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬ Owner ‫َم ْج ُر ْور‬
233
Summary
Key Terms
the five (special) nouns ‫ْاْلَ ْس َما ُء ا ْل َخ ْم َس ُة‬ the noun being ‫َمنْ ُع ْوت‬
described
like, similar ‫ مِ ْثل‬the adjective ‫َن ْعت‬
like, similar ‫َأ ْم َثال‬ plural of non-humans ‫َج ْم ُع َغ ْی ِر ا ْل ُع َق ََّل ِء‬
un-, other than ‫َغ ْی ُر‬ demonstrative ‫اإل َش َار ِة‬

pronoun
un-, other than ‫ِس َوی‬ what is being pointed ‫ُم َشار إِ َل ْی ِه‬
at
possessor of ‫ ُذ ْو‬conjunction ‫ف َع ْطف‬
ُ ‫َح ْر‬
number ‫عَدَ د‬ ِ ‫ف ا ْلعط‬

the word before the ‫ْف‬ َ ُ ‫َح ْر‬ ‫َم ْع ُطوف َع َل ْی ِه‬
the item being ‫َم ْعدُ ْود‬ ِ ‫ف ا ْلعط‬
the word after the ‫ْف‬ َ ُ ‫َح ْر‬ ‫َم ْع ُط ْوف‬
quantified
few, -odd ‫ بِ ْضع‬the second ‫َخبَر‬ ‫َخ َبر َثان‬
few, -odd ‫ َن ِّیف‬the second ‫نَ ْعت‬ ‫َن ْعت َثان‬

a word which ends in a the second word of an ‫ُم ْبدَ ل مِنْ ُه‬
‫ َياء‬which is preceded ‫اسم َمنْ ُق ْوص‬
ْ
appositive
by a ‫ك َْس َرة‬
the first word of an ‫َبدَ ل‬
appositive phrase
‫ اِ ْسم َم ْق ُص ْور‬the possessed ‫ُم َضاف‬
a noun which ends in a ‫ َياء‬with a
standing ‫َألِف‬
the possessor ‫ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬
234
Vocabulary
Days of the Week
Thursday ِ ‫الخ ِم ْی‬
‫س‬ َ ‫ َي ْو ُم‬Sunday ‫َي ْو ُم ْاْلَ َح ِد‬
Friday ‫الج ُم َع ِة‬

ُ ‫ َي ْو ُم‬Monday ِ ْ ‫َي ْوم‬
‫اإل ْثنَ ْی ِن‬ ُ
‫ت‬ ِ ‫يوم السب‬ ِ ‫يوم ال ُّث ََّل َث‬
‫اء‬
Saturday ْ َّ ُ ْ َ Tuesday ُ َْ
ِ ‫يوم اْلَربِع‬
‫اء‬
Wednesday َ ْ ُ َْ
Months of the Year

Rajab ‫ َر َجب‬Muharram ‫ُم َح َّرم‬
Shaban ُ ‫ َش ْع َب‬Safar
‫ان‬ ‫َص َفر‬
Ramadhan ُ ‫ َر َم َض‬Rabi al-Awal

‫ان‬ ‫َربِ ْیع اْلَ ّو ُل‬
Shawwal ‫ َش َّوال‬Rabi at-Thani ‫َربِ ْیع ال َّثانِ ْي‬
Zul Qadah ‫ ُذو ا ْل ِق ْعدَ ِة‬Jumada al-Awal ‫ُج َما َدى ْاْلُ ْو َلى‬
Zul Hijjah ‫ح َّج ِة‬ ِ ‫ُذو ا ْل‬

Jumada at-Thani ‫ُج َما َدى ْاْل ِخ َر ِة‬
Conjunctions
either or ‫ َأ ْو‬... ‫ إِ َّما‬and ‫َو‬
not ‫ َْل‬then ‫ف‬

َ
neither nor ‫ َو َْل‬then ‫ُث ّم‬
rather, but ‫ َب ْل‬either or ‫َأ ْو‬
rather, but ‫ ٰلكِ ْن‬either or ‫ َوإِ َّما‬... ‫إِ َّما‬
235
‫‪Numbers‬‬
‫عَش َر َة ‪َ /‬س ْب َع َة َ‬
‫عَش َر‬ ‫‪َ one‬س ْب َع ْ‬ ‫احد ‪ /‬و ِ‬
‫احدَ ة‬ ‫و ِ‬
‫‪seventeen‬‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ‬
‫‪eighteen‬‬ ‫عَش َر َة ‪َ /‬ث َم ِان َی َة َ‬

‫عَش َر‬ ‫‪َ two‬ث َم ِان ْي ْ‬ ‫َان ‪ /‬اِ ْثنَت ِ‬
‫َان‬ ‫اِ ْثن ِ‬
‫‪nineteen‬‬ ‫عَش َر َة ‪ِ /‬ت ْس َع َة َ‬

‫عَش َر‬ ‫‪ِ three‬ت ْس َع ْ‬ ‫َث ََّلث ‪َ /‬ث ََّل َثة‬
‫‪twenty‬‬ ‫‪ِ four‬ع ْش ُر ْو َن‬ ‫َأ ْر َبع ‪َ /‬أ ْر َب َعة‬
‫‪thirty‬‬ ‫‪َ five‬ث ََّل ُث ْو َن‬ ‫َخ ْمس ‪َ /‬خ ْم َسة‬
‫‪forty‬‬ ‫‪َ six‬أ ْر َب ُع ْو َن‬ ‫ِست ‪ِ /‬ستَّة‬
‫‪fifty‬‬ ‫‪َ seven‬خ ْم ُس ْو َن‬ ‫َس ْبع ‪َ /‬س ْب َعة‬
‫‪sixty‬‬ ‫‪ِ eight‬ست ُّْو َن‬ ‫َث َمان ‪َ /‬ث َمانِ َیة‬
‫‪seventy‬‬ ‫‪َ nine‬س ْب ُع ْو َن‬ ‫تِ ْسع ‪ /‬تِ ْس َعة‬
‫‪eighty‬‬ ‫‪َ ten‬ث َمان ُْو َن‬ ‫َع ْشر ‪َ /‬ع َش َرة‬
‫‪ninety‬‬ ‫‪ِ eleven‬ت ْس ُع ْو َن‬ ‫عَش َر ‪ِ /‬إ ْحدَ ی ْ‬

‫عَش َر َة‬ ‫َأ َحدَ َ‬
‫‪hundred‬‬ ‫مِائَة ج مِئَات‬ ‫‪twelve‬‬ ‫عَش َر ‪ِ /‬ا ْث َنتَا ْ‬

‫عَش َر َة‬ ‫ِا ْثنَا َ‬
‫‪thousand‬‬ ‫َأ ْلف ج َآْلف‪ُ ،‬أ ُل ْوف‬ ‫‪thirteen‬‬ ‫عَش َر َة ‪َ /‬ث ََّل َث َة َ‬
‫عَش َر‬ ‫َث ََّل َث ْ‬
‫‪approximately‬‬ ‫‪ fourteen‬ن َْح ُو‬ ‫عَش َر َة ‪َ /‬أ ْر َب َع َة َ‬

‫عَش َر‬ ‫َأ ْر َب َع ْ‬
‫‪approximately‬‬ ‫‪َ fifteen‬ح َوا َلي‬ ‫عَش َرةَ ‪َ /‬خ ْم َس َة َ‬

‫عَش َر‬ ‫َخ ْم َس ْ‬
‫‪sixteen‬‬ ‫عَش َر َة ‪ِ /‬س َّت َة َ‬

‫عَش َر‬ ‫ِس َّت ْ‬
‫‪236‬‬
‫‪fruit‬‬ ‫‪َ camel‬ث َمر ج َأ ْث َمار‬ ‫إِبل‬
‫‪recompense, reward‬‬ ‫‪َ son‬جزَ اء‬ ‫ا ْبن ج َأ ْبنَاء‪ْ ،‬و َن‬
‫‪beautiful‬‬ ‫‪َ white‬ج ِم ْیل‬ ‫َأ ْب َی ُض ( َب ْی َضا ُء) ج بِ ْیض‬
‫‪wing‬‬ ‫‪َ red‬جنَاح ج َأ ْجن ِ َحة‬ ‫َأ ْح َم ُر َ‬

‫(ح ْم َرا ُء) ج ُح ْمر‬
‫‪ُ last, ending‬جنَ ْیه ج ات‬ ‫آخر ج و َن‪َ ،‬أو ِ‬
‫اخ ُر‬ ‫ِ‬
‫)‪pound (£‬‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ُ ْ‬
‫‪answer‬‬ ‫‪َ green‬ج َواب ج َأ ْج ِو َبة‬ ‫َأ ْخ َض ُر َ‬

‫(خ ْض َرا ُء) ج ُخ ْضر‬
‫‪need‬‬ ‫اجة ج ات‬

‫‪َ last‬ح َ‬ ‫َأ ِخ ْیر‬
‫‪hot‬‬ ‫‪ call to prayer‬حار‬ ‫َأ َذان‬
‫‪garden‬‬ ‫‪َ blue‬ح ِد ْي َقة ج َحدَ ائِ ُق‬ ‫َأزْ َر ُق (زَ ْر َقا ُء) ج زُ ْرق‬
‫‪beautiful, good, nice,‬‬ ‫‪َ teacher, professor‬ح َسن‬ ‫ُأ ْستَاذ ج َأ َساتِ َذة‬
‫‪pleasant‬‬
‫‪All-Wise‬‬ ‫‪َ lion‬حكِ ْیم‬ ‫َأ َسد ج ُأ ْسد‪ُ ،‬أ ُسد‬
‫‪Forbearing‬‬ ‫َحلِ ْیم‬ ‫‪black‬‬ ‫َأ ْس َو ُد ج ُس ْود‬
‫‪brother-in-law‬‬ ‫‪َ yellow‬حم ج َأ ْح َماء‬ ‫َأ ْص َف ُر َ‬

‫(ص ْف َرا ُء) ج ُص ْفر‬
‫‪donkey‬‬ ‫‪ِ leader‬ح َمار ج َح ِم ْیر‪ُ ،‬ح ُمر‬ ‫َأمِ ْیر ج ُأ َم َرا ُء‬
‫‪living‬‬ ‫‪َ trustworthy‬حي ج َأ ْح َیاء‬ ‫َأمِ ْین‬
‫‪pure‬‬ ‫َخالِص‬‫)‪family, people (of‬‬ ‫َأ ْهل ج ْو َن‬
‫‪bread‬‬ ‫‪ُ first, beginning‬خ ْبز ج َأ ْخ َباز‬ ‫َأ َّول ج ْو َن‪َ ،‬أ َوائِ ُل‬
‫‪All-Aware‬‬ ‫‪َ ocean‬خبِ ْیر‬ ‫َب ْحر ج بِ َحار‪َ ،‬أ ْب ُحر‬
‫‪light‬‬ ‫‪َ stingy‬خ ِف ْیف ج ِخ َفاف‬ ‫ب ِ‬

‫خ ْیل ج ُب َخ ََّل ُء‬ ‫َ‬
‫‪alcohol‬‬ ‫‪َ cow‬خ ْمر‬ ‫َب َق َرة ج َب َق َرات‬
‫)‪house, (land‬‬ ‫‪َ city‬دار ج ِد َيار‪ُ ،‬د ْور (مث)‬ ‫َب َلد َج بِ ََّلد‬
‫‪caller‬‬ ‫‪َ heavy‬داع ج ُدعَاة‪ْ ،‬و َن‬ ‫َث ِق ْیل ج ثِ َقال‬
‫‪237‬‬
scholar ‫ ُع َل َما ُء‬،‫ عَالِم ج ْو َن‬status ‫َد َر َجة ج ات‬
year ‫ عَام ج َأع َْوام‬shop ‫ُدكَّان ج َدكَاكِ ْی َن‬
palatable ‫ ع َْذب‬dinar ‫ِد ْينَار ج َدنَانِ ْی ُر‬
throne ‫ ع َْرش ج ع ُُر ْوش‬fly ‫ُذ َباب ج ِذ َّبان‬
great ‫ عَظِ ْیم‬Most Kind ‫َر ُء ْوف‬
deed, action ‫ ع ََمل ج َأع َْمال‬pomegranate ‫ُر َّمانَة ج ات‬
room ‫ غ ُْر َفة ج غ َُرف‬spouse ‫زَ ْوج ج َأزْ َواج‬
horse ‫ َف َرس ج َأ ْف َراس‬ship ‫َس ِف ْینَة ج ُس ُفن‬
grace, virtue ‫ َف ْضل‬knife ‫ِس ِّك ْین ج َس َكاكِ ْی ُن‬
farmer ‫ َف ََّّلح ج ْو َن‬sword ‫َس ْیف ج ُس ُی ْوف‬
mouth ‫ َفم ج َأ ْف َواه‬young man ‫ َش َباب‬،‫َشاب ج ُش َّبان‬
elephant ‫ َأ ْف َیال‬،‫ فِ ْیل ج فِ َی َلة‬sheep ‫ َشاء‬،‫َشاة ج ِش َیاه‬
judge ‫ ْو َن‬،‫ َقاض ج ُق َضاة‬Appreciative ‫َشاكِر‬
ugly, unsightly ‫ َقبِ ْیح‬tree ‫َش َج َرة ج َأ ْش َجار‬
power ‫ َقدْ ر‬nobility, high rank ‫َش َرف‬
village ‫ َق ْر َية ج ُق ًری‬witness, martyr ‫َش ِه ْید ج ُش َهدَ ا ُء‬
drop ‫ َق ْط َرة ج ات‬shaykh, old man ‫َش ْیخ ج ُش ُی ْوخ‬
few, a little ‫َقلِ ْیل‬ companion ‫َص َحابِي ج َص َحا َبة‬
strength ‫ ُق َّوة ج ات‬page ‫َص ْف َحة ج ات‬
All-Powerful ‫ َق ِوي‬prayer ‫َص ََّلة ج َص َل َوات‬
resurrection ‫ قِ َیا َمة‬pure )‫َط ِّیب (ة) ج ْو َن (ات‬
ram ‫ َك ْبش‬bird ‫َط ْیر ج ُط ُی ْور‬

many, a lot, an ‫ كَثِ ْیر‬well-being ‫عَافِ َیة‬
abundance
238
mile ‫ ِم ْیل ج َأ ْم َیال‬noble ‫ك َِر ْيم ج كِ َرام‬
impure ِ ‫ن‬
‫َجس‬ dog ‫َك ْلب ج كِ ََّلب‬
river ‫ن َْهر ج َأن َْهار‬ name of a river in ‫ا ْل َك ْو َث ُر‬

paradise
guide ‫ ْو َن‬،‫ َهاد ج ُهدَ اة‬All-Subtle ‫َلطِ ْیف‬
compulsory ِ ‫ َو‬those who do good

‫اجب‬ ‫ُم ْح ِسن ج ْو َن‬
valley ‫ َأ ْو ِد َية‬،‫ َواد ج ُو ْد َيان‬city ‫َم ِد ْينَة ج ُمدُ ن‬

ِ ‫و‬
‫اسع‬ ‫ُم ْست َِق ْیم‬
All-Encompassing َ straight
face ‫ َو ْجه ج ُو ُج ْوه‬poor ‫مِ ْسكِ ْین ج َم َساكِ ْی ُن‬
dirty ‫ َو ِسخ‬accepted ‫َم ْق ُب ْول‬
time ‫ َو ْقت ج َأ ْو َقات‬guided ‫ُم ْهتَد ج ْو َن‬
orphan ‫ َيتِ ْیم ج َيتَا ٰمی‬dead ‫َم ِّیت ج َأ ْم َوات‬
239
‫‪to name, call‬‬ ‫‪َ to gather‬س َّمی ُي َس ِّم ْي َت ْس ِم َی ًة‬ ‫اجتِ َماعًا‬ ‫ِ‬
‫اجت ََم َع َي ْجتَم ُع ْ‬ ‫ْ‬
‫‪to scream‬‬ ‫اح َي ِص ْی ُح َص ْی َح ًة‬ ‫)‪َ to call (to prayers‬ص َ‬ ‫َأ َّذ َن ُيؤَ ِّذ ُن َت ْأ ِذ ْينًا‬
‫‪to be healthy, correct‬‬ ‫َص َّح َي ِص ُّح ِص َّح ًة‬ ‫‪to exceed bounds, be‬‬ ‫ف إِ ْس َرا ًفا‬
‫ف ُي ْس ِر ُ‬
‫َأ ْس َر َ‬
‫‪extravagant‬‬
‫‪to harm‬‬ ‫َض َّر َي ُض ُّر َض ًّرا‬ ‫‪to ascribe partners‬‬ ‫َأ ْش َر َك ُي ْش ِر ُك ْ‬
‫إش َراكًا‬
‫‪to fly‬‬ ‫َط َار َيطِ ْی ُر َط ْی ًرا‬ ‫‪to avail, be of use‬‬ ‫َأ ْغنَی ُيغْن ِ ْي إِ ْغنَا ًء‬
‫‪to seek‬‬ ‫ب َط َل ًبا‬

‫ب َي ْط ُل ُ‬
‫َط َل َ‬ ‫‪to make grow‬‬ ‫َأ ْن َب َت ُينْبِ ُت إِ ْن َبا ًتا‬
‫‪to punish‬‬ ‫‪ to destroy‬ع ََّذ َب ُي َع ِّذ ُب َت ْع ِذ ْي ًبا‬ ‫َأ ْه َل َك ُي ْهلِ ُك إِ ْه ََّلكًا‬
‫‪to be successful‬‬ ‫َفازَ َي ُف ْوزُ َف ْوزً‬ ‫‪to remain‬‬ ‫َب ِق َي َي ْب َقی َب َقا ًء‬
‫‪to make compulsory‬‬ ‫َف َر َض َي ْف ِر ُض َف ْر ًضا‬ ‫‪to reach‬‬ ‫َبلَغَ َي ْبلُغُ ُب ُل ْوغًا‬
‫‪to accept‬‬ ‫َقبِ َل َي ْق َب ُل ق ُب ْو ًْل َق ُب ْو ًْل‬ ‫‪to build, construct‬‬ ‫َبنَی َي ْبن ِ ْي بِنَا ًء‬
‫‪to cut‬‬ ‫َق َط َع َي ْق َط ُع َق ْط ًعا‬ ‫‪to perform ablution‬‬ ‫َت َو َّض َأ َيت ََو َّض ُأ َت َو ُّض ًأ‬
‫)‪to remain, stay, spend (time‬‬ ‫َلبِ َث َي ْل َب ُث َل ْب ًثا و ُل ْب ًثا‬ ‫‪to be permissible‬‬ ‫َجازَ َي ُج ْوزُ َج َوازً ا‬
‫‪to past, spend‬‬ ‫َم َضی َي ْم ِض ْي ُم ِض ًّیا‬ ‫‪to account‬‬ ‫ب ُي َح ِاس ُب ِح َسا ًبا‬ ‫اس َ‬‫َح َ‬
‫‪to act hypocritically‬‬ ‫نَا َف َق ُينَافِ ُق ُمنَا َف َق ًة نِ َفا ًقا‬ ‫‪to perform hajj‬‬ ‫َح َّج َي ُح ُّج َح ًّجا‬
‫‪to descend, come down,‬‬ ‫نَزَ َل َين ِْز ُل نُزُ ْو ًْل‬ ‫‪to gather‬‬ ‫َح َش َر َي ْح ُش ُر َح ْش ًرا‬
‫ِ ِ‬ ‫َح َص َل َي ْح ُص ُل ُح ُص ْو ًْل‬
‫‪to marry‬‬ ‫َن َك َح َينْك ُح ن َك ً‬
‫احا‬ ‫‪to acquire‬‬
‫ِو ْجدَ انًا‪ُ ،‬و ُج ْو ًدا‬ ‫َو َجدَ َي ِ‬
‫جدُ‬ ‫َذ َاق َي ُذ ْو ُق َذ ْو ًقا‬
‫‪to find‬‬ ‫‪to taste‬‬
‫‪240‬‬
PHRASES
Introduction: ‫ِش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬
Part 1: ‫ ِش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬in a Sentence
Part 2: ‫ ِش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬in a Phrase
Supplement: ‫ َح ْرف َجار‬and ‫َح ْر ُف ِص َلة‬
Summary
241
Introduction: Prepositional Phrase
A prepositional phrase is made up of a preposition followed by a
noun.
in the masjid before the prayer
In Arabic, a prepositional phrase is called ‫ ِش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬.
There are two types of prepositions:
1. Noun prepositions: prepositions which are ‫اِ ْسم‬. These are called
‫ َظ ْرف‬.
2. Particle prepositions: prepositions which are ‫ َح ْرف‬. These are
called ‫ َح ْرف َجار‬.
Noun Prepositions
during, in between ‫ِخ ََّل َل‬ during ‫َأ ْثنَا َء‬
behind َ ‫َخ ْل‬

‫ف‬ in front of ‫َأ َما َم‬
by, at the time of, in the
َ‫ِعنْد‬ after َ‫َب ْعد‬
eyes of, according to
above ‫َف ْو َق‬ between, amongst ‫َب ْی َن‬
before, ago ‫َق ْب َل‬ under ‫َت ْح َت‬
with ‫َم َع‬ around ‫َح ْو َل‬
Particle Prepositions
for, belongs to ‫ِل‬ in ‫فِ ْي‬
until, even ‫َحتّٰی‬ on ‫َع َلی‬
regarding, from ‫َن‬

ْ ‫ع‬ to, towards, until ‫إِ ٰلی‬
like ‫َك‬ from ‫مِ ْن‬
with ِ
‫ب‬
242
‫‪Prepositional Phrases‬‬
‫‪ِ :‬ش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة ‪There are two types of‬‬
‫َظ ْرف ‪ِ comprising a‬ش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة ‪1. A‬‬
‫َح ْرف َجار ‪ِ comprising a‬ش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة ‪2. A‬‬
‫َظ ْرف ‪ِ Phrase Comprising a‬ش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة ‪A‬‬
‫‪ُ to the noun that follows.‬م َضاف ‪َ becomes‬ظ ْرف ‪The‬‬
‫‪َ .‬من ُْص ْوب ‪ُ is usually‬م َضاف ‪The‬‬
‫ج ِد‬
‫َأ َما َم ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬
‫‪in front of the masjid‬‬

‫‪ُ , as follows:‬م َضاف – ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪The tarkib of this is written as a‬‬
‫ج ِد‬
‫ا ْلمس ِ‬
‫َ ْ‬ ‫َأ َم َ‬
‫ام‬
‫ُم َضاف إِل ْیه‬ ‫ُم َضاف‬
‫‪Vocab‬‬
‫‪voice‬‬ ‫َص ْوت ج َأ ْص َوات‬ ‫‪sacred, impermissible‬‬ ‫َحرام‬
‫‪fruit‬‬ ‫َفاكِ َهة ج َف َواكِ ُه‬ ‫‪doubt‬‬ ‫َر ْيب‬
‫‪classroom‬‬ ‫َف ْصل ج ُف ُص ْول‬ ‫‪noble‬‬ ‫َش ِر ْيف ج ُش َر َفا ُء‬
‫‪grave‬‬ ‫َق ْبر ج ُق ُب ْور‬ ‫‪partner‬‬ ‫َش ِر ْيك ج ُش َركَا ُء‬

‫َك ْأس ج ُكؤُ ْوس (مث)‬ ‫احب ج َأ ْص َحاب‬ ‫ص ِ‬
‫‪cup‬‬ ‫‪people (of), companion‬‬ ‫َ‬
‫ِِ‬ ‫الش َج َر ِة‬ ‫‪َ )5‬ق ْب َل ا ْل ِع ْیدَ ْي ِن‬ ‫‪ِ )1‬عنْدَ اللِ‬
‫َم َع ا ْل َق ْو ِم ال َّظالم َ‬
‫ین‬ ‫‪)13‬‬ ‫‪َ )9‬ت ْح َت َّ‬
‫ِ ِ‬ ‫ت النَّبِ ِّي‬ ‫‪َ )10‬فو َق صو ِ‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ب ْی َن ا ْل َب ْح َر ْي ِن‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ب ْی َن َذل ِ َك‬
‫ین‬
‫الصالح َ‬ ‫َم َع ا ْل َق ْو ِم َّ‬ ‫‪)14‬‬ ‫ْ َ ْ‬
‫ج ِد ا ْل َح َرا ِم‬‫ِعنْدَ ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬ ‫‪)15‬‬ ‫َاذ َخالِد‬ ‫‪َ )11‬أمام ْاْلُست ِ‬
‫َ َ ْ‬ ‫ج ِد‬
‫‪َ )7‬ح ْو َل ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬ ‫‪َ )3‬ب ْعدَ ا ْل َف ْج ِر‬
‫اض ْي ٰذل ِ َك‬ ‫ت ا ْل َق ِ‬‫َفو َق بی ِ‬
‫ْ َْ‬ ‫‪)16‬‬ ‫ح َم ِ‬
‫ار‬ ‫ب وا ْل ِ‬
‫‪َ )12‬ب ْی َن ا ْل َك ْل ِ َ‬ ‫الصابِ ِر َ‬
‫ين‬ ‫‪َ )8‬م َع َّ‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )4‬م َع ا ْل ُمتَّق َ‬
‫ین‬
‫‪243‬‬
Notes
1. The word َ‫ ِعنْد‬is translated as at the time of, if it is followed by a
‫ َم ْصدَ ر‬or an abstract noun.
‫ِعنْدَ ْاْلَ ْك ِل‬ ‫ِعنْدَ ا ْل ُم ِص ْی َب ِة‬
at the time of eating at the time of difficulty
َ ‫ َذ‬can become the ‫ ُم َضاف‬of words which denote a
2. The word ‫ات‬
meaning of time or place.
ِ ‫الش َم‬
‫ال‬ َ ‫َذ‬
ِّ ‫ات‬ َ ‫َذ‬
‫ات َي ْوم‬
towards the left one day
‫ات ا ْل َی ِم ْی ِن‬
َ ‫َذ‬ ‫ات َل ْی َلة‬
َ ‫َذ‬
towards the right one night
3. The words ‫ َب ْی َن َيدَ ْي‬literally mean between the two hands.
However, this is translated as in front of or before.
‫اح َب ْی َن َيدَ ِي ا ْل َم َط ِر‬ ِ
َ ‫الر َي‬ ُ ‫ُي ْرس ُل‬
ِّ ‫الل‬
Allah sends winds before rain.
ِ
ُ ‫َي ْجلِ ُس ال َّطال‬
‫ب َب ْی َن َيدَ ِي ا ْل ُم َع ِّل ِم‬
The student sits in front of the teacher.
A ‫ ِش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬Phrase Comprising a ‫َح ْرف َجار‬

The ‫ ُح ُر ْوف َج َّارة‬are labelled as ‫ َح ْرف َجار‬, and the following word
becomes ‫ َم ْج ُر ْور‬.
The ‫ ُح ُر ْوف َج َّارة‬are ‫ ; َم ْبن ِي‬they remain unchanged.
‫ج ِد‬
ِ ‫فِي ا ْل َم ْس‬
ْ
in the masjid
‫ج ِد‬
ِ ‫ا ْلمس‬
ْ َ ‫فِي‬
‫َم ْج ُر ْور‬ ‫َجار‬
244
Notes
Some ‫ ُح ُر ْوف َج َّارة‬undergo changes to make pronunciation easier:
1. ‫ مِ ْن‬becomes ‫ مِ َن‬if the word after it has an ‫ َا ْل‬.
‫ج ِد‬
ِ ‫مِ َن ا ْلمس‬
ْ َ
2. ‫ ع َْن‬becomes ‫ َع ِن‬if the word after it has an ‫ َا ْل‬.
ِ ‫ع‬
ِ ‫َن الدَّ ْر‬
‫س‬
3. When ‫ ِل‬comes before a word with an ‫ َا ْل‬, the ‫ ا‬is dropped from
that word.
‫ل ِ َّلر ُج ِل‬  ‫الر ُج ُل‬
َّ
4. When ‫ ِل‬is placed before the word ‫الل‬ ُ , it is written as follows:
ٰ
ّ‫لِل‬
ِّ
5. When ‫ فِ ْي‬is followed by a word with an ‫ َا ْل‬, the ‫ ي‬is not
pronounced.
‫ت‬ِ ‫فِي ا ْلبی‬ ‫ت‬ِ ‫فِي ا ْلبی‬
َْ  َْ ْ
6. The ‫ ي‬at the end of ‫ إِ َلی‬and ‫ َحتَّی‬are pronounced as an ‫ َألِف‬.
Exercise 2
‫للِ َر ِّب ا ْل َعا َل ِم ْی َن‬ )13 ‫) إِ َلی ٰذل ِ َك الن َّْج ِم‬9 ‫) مِ َن ا ْل َم ِدين َِة‬5 ِ ‫) لِلن‬1
‫َّاس‬
ِ ‫إِ َلی ص ََّل ِة ا ْل ِع َش‬
‫اء‬ )14 ِ ‫) بِا ْل َق َل ِم َوا ْلكِت‬10
‫َاب‬ ‫) َحتَّی ا ْل َف ْج ِر‬6 ‫َّاج ِر‬ ِ ‫) لِلت‬2
َ
‫خ ْی ِل‬ِ ‫مِن الرج ِل ا ْلب‬ )15 ‫) َع َلی َث ََّل َث ِة ُب ُی ْوت‬11 ِ‫) عَن ِدي ِن الل‬7 ‫ف‬ِ ‫لضیو‬ ِ
َ ُ َّ َ ْ ْ ُ ُّ ‫) ل‬3
‫ت اللِ ا ْل َح َرا ِم‬ ِ ‫فِي بی‬
َْ ْ )16 ‫) إِ َلی َص ََّل ِة ال ُّظ ْه ِر‬12 ‫) َع َلی ا ْل ُك ْر ِس ِّي‬8 ‫الس ْو َر ِة‬
ُّ ‫) في‬4
ِ
245
Part 1: ‫ ِش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬in a Sentence
A ‫ ِش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َلة‬occurs in a sentence, either ‫ اِ ْس ِم َّیة‬or ‫فِ ْعلِ َّیة‬.
The ‫ ِش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬can occur in any of the slots other than the subject slot
i.e. the ‫ ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬or ‫اعل‬ ِ ‫ َف‬.
ِ ْ ‫َا ْلجم َل ُة‬

‫ ِش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬in ‫اْل ْس ِم َّی ُة‬ ْ ُ
In a ‫ ُج ْم َلة ْاس ِم َّیة‬a ‫ ِش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬can occur in three ways:
1. as a ‫َخ َبر‬
2. as a ‫َخ َبر ُم َقدَّ م‬
3. as a ‫ َخ َبر‬of ‫ْس‬ ِ ‫جن‬ ِ ‫َْل لِنَ ْف ِي ا ْل‬
We will discuss each of these individually.
‫ ِش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬as a ‫َخ َبر‬
In a ‫ ُج ْم َلة اِ ْس ِم َّیة‬the ‫ ِش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬can only become the ‫ ; َخ َبر‬and not the ‫ ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬.
ِ ‫َا َّلر ُج ُل ِعنْدَ ا ْل َب‬
‫اب‬
The man is by the door.
‫اب‬ َ‫ِعنْد‬ ‫َا َّلر ُج ُل‬
The ‫ ُم َضاف‬in the ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬-‫ ُم َضاف‬form of a ‫ ِش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬will be ‫ َمنْ ُص ْوب‬even

when it is ‫ َخ َبر‬.
‫ج ِد‬
ِ ‫َا َّلر ُج ُل فِي ا ْل َم ْس‬
The man is in the masjid.

‫َخ َبر‬ ‫مبتدأ‬
‫ج ِد‬
ْ َ ‫فِي‬ ‫َا َّلر ُج ُل‬
246
‫ب‬‫‪َ )8‬ص ََّل ُة ا ْل َع ْص ِر َب ْی َن ال ُّظ ْه ِر َوا ْل َمغ ِْر ِ‬ ‫الل َم َع ا ْل ُمت َِّق ْی َن﴾‬
‫﴿إن َ‬ ‫َّ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫الش َج َر ِة ا ْل َكبِ ْی َر ِة‬
‫ب َخالِد َت ْح َت َّ‬ ‫‪َ )9‬ل ْی َس َك ْل ُ‬ ‫‪﴿ )2‬إِن ََّما ا ْل ِع ْل ُم ِعنْدَ اللِ﴾‬
‫الص ِغ ْی ِر‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫جدُ ا ْل َكبِ ْی ُر َأ َما َم َذل َك ا ْل َب ْیت َّ‬ ‫‪ )10‬ا ْلمس ِ‬
‫َ ْ‬ ‫ات ِعنْدَ اللِ﴾‬ ‫‪﴿ )3‬إِن ََّما ْاْل َي ُ‬
‫ت ٰذل ِ َك‬ ‫اب ا ْلبی ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫الر َّما َن ُة ا ْل َكبِ ْی َر ُة عنْدَ َب ِ َ ْ‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪ )11‬كَا َنت ُّ‬ ‫ب َو ْاْلُ ِّم‬ ‫الص ِغ ْی ُر َب ْی َن ْاْلَ ِ‬
‫‪َ )4‬ا ْل َو َلدُ َّ‬
‫ت ا ْل َج ِد ْي ِد‬ ‫‪ )12‬اْلَ ْشجار ا ْل َكبِیر ُة حو َل ٰذل ِ َك ا ْلبی ِ‬
‫َْ‬ ‫َْ َ ْ‬ ‫َ ُ‬ ‫الش َج َر ِة‬
‫َان ال َّط ْی ُر َف ْو َق تِ ْل َك َّ‬ ‫‪ )5‬ك َ‬
‫ج ِد ا ْل َج ِد ْي ِد‬ ‫ف ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬ ‫الر ُج ِل ا ْل َق ِد ْي َم َخ ْل َ‬
‫إن َب ْی َت َّ‬ ‫‪َّ )13‬‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ص ََّل ُة ال ُّظ ْه ِر َق ْب َل َصَّل َِة ا ْل َع ْص ِر‬
‫َان َص ِد ْي ُق ُم َح َّمد زُ َب ْیر َم َع َص ِد ْي ِق َخالِد َأ ْح َمدَ‬ ‫‪ )14‬ك َ‬ ‫اء َب ْعدَ َص ََّل ِة ا ْل َمغ ِْر ِ‬
‫ب‬ ‫‪ )7‬ص ََّل ُة ا ْل ِع َش ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫الصائِ ِم‬ ‫ِ ِ‬
‫ار ُد والت َّْم َر ُة ا ْل ُح ْل َو ُة ل ْل َو َلد َّ‬‫‪ )7‬ا ْل َما ُء ال َب ِ‬ ‫إن ا ْل َجنَّ َة ل ِ ْل ُم ْسلِ ِم ْی َن ا ْل ُمت َِّق ْی َن‬
‫َّ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫ان مِ َن ا ْل َق ْر َي ِة ا ْل َب ِع ْیدَ ِة‬
‫ان الص ِغیر ِ‬ ‫ان ا ْل َك ْلب ِ‬‫‪َ )8‬ه َذ ِ‬ ‫الشمس وا ْل َقمر فِي السم ِ‬
‫َّ ْ َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫اء‬ ‫َّ َ‬ ‫إِن ََّما َّ ْ ُ َ َ ُ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫‪َ )9‬ما ال َّل ْح ُم َوا ْل ُخ ْبزُ وا ْل َف َواكِ ُه مِ ْن ٰه ِذ ِه ال َق ْر َي ِة‬ ‫ُد ُر ْو ُس َه َذا ا ْل ُم َع ِّل ِم إِ َلی َص ََّل ِة ال ُّظ ْه ِر‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫الش َج َر ِة ا ْل َكبِ ْی َر ِة‬ ‫َات ا ْل ُح ْل َو ُة َع َلی تِ ْل َك َّ‬ ‫الر َّمان ُ‬ ‫‪ُّ )10‬‬ ‫إِ ِن ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن إِ َّْل َع َلی ِص َراط ُم ْست َِق ْیم‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫ت ا ْل َق ِد ْي ِم‬ ‫َان ذل ِ َك الرج ُل ا ْلم ِري ُض فِي ا ْلبی ِ‬
‫َْ‬ ‫َ ْ‬ ‫َّ ُ‬ ‫‪ )11‬ك َ‬ ‫ج ِد ا ْل َح َرا ِم‬ ‫إِن ََّما ا ْل َك ْع َب ُة َب ْی ُت اللِ فِي ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫الص ِغ ْی َر ُة ِم َن ا ْل َم ِد ْين َِة ا ْل ُمن ََّو َر ِة‬ ‫‪َ )12‬ل ْی َس ْت ٰه ِذ ِه الت ََّم َر ُ‬
‫ات َّ‬ ‫الر ُس ْو ِل‬ ‫الش ِري ُ ِ ِ ِ‬
‫ف في َمد ْينَة َّ‬ ‫َق ْب ُر النَّبِ ِّي ﷺ َّ ْ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫‪247‬‬
‫َخ َبر ُم َقدَّ م ‪ِ as a‬ش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬
‫‪.‬نَكِ َرة ‪ُ which is‬م ْبتَدَ أ ‪َ , it can come before a‬خ َبر ‪ِ is the‬ش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة ‪When the‬‬
‫‪َ .‬خ َبر ‪ُ and‬م ْبتَدَ أ ‪When translating, there is/are is added before the‬‬
‫فِي ا ْل ُقر ِ‬
‫آن آ َيات‬ ‫ْ‬
‫‪There are signs in the Quran.‬‬
‫‪ُ is‬م ْبتَدَ أ ‪, the fronted khabr. The‬ا ْل َخ َب ُر ا ْل ُم َقدَّ ُم ‪َ is called‬خ َبر ‪In tarkib, the‬‬
‫‪ُ .‬م ْبتَدَ أ ‪, the delayed‬ا ْل ُم ْبتَدَ ُأ ا ْل ُمؤَ َّخ ُر ‪called‬‬
‫ُم ْبتَدَ أ ُمؤَ َّخر‬ ‫َخ َبر ُم َقدَّ م‬
‫آ َيات‬ ‫ا ْل ُقر ِ‬
‫آن‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫فِي‬
‫ان َكبِیر ِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫ج ِد الص ِغی ِر باب ِ‬ ‫‪ )8‬فِي َه َذا ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬ ‫فِي ا ْل َی ْو ِم َخ ْم ُس َص َل َوات‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫َْ‬ ‫َّ ْ َ َ‬
‫‪ )9‬فِ ْي َه ِذ ِه ا ْل َمدْ َر َس ِة َطال ِ َبات َصال ِ َحات‬ ‫ل ِ ْل ُمت َِّق ْی َن َف َواكِ ُه َو َل ْح ُم َط ْیر‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫جد َكبِ ْیر‬ ‫ت َحامِد و ُم َح َّمد َم ْس ِ‬ ‫ف بی ِ‬ ‫َات ُم َع ِّل َمة َج ِد ْيدَ ة‬‫َأمام َهؤُ َْل ِء ا ْلبن ِ‬
‫‪َ )10‬خ ْل َ َ ْ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ َ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫‪ )11‬فِي ا ْل َجن َِّة َأن َْه ُار َماء َو َل َبن َو َخ ْمر َوع ََسل‬ ‫ض آ َيات َب ِّینَات‬ ‫اء َو ْاْلَ ْر ِ‬ ‫فِي السم ِ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫ْ َّ َ‬
‫‪ )12‬فِي تِ ْل َك ا ْل َقري ِة الص ِغیر ِة َقاض ومع ِّلم ِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫آن مِائَة َو َأ ْر َب َع ع َْش َر َة ُس ْو َر ًة‬ ‫فِي ا ْل ُقر ِ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫َ َُ َ‬ ‫ْ َ َّ ْ َ‬ ‫ْ‬
‫َان و َثمانُو َن ِ‬ ‫ِ ِ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ت ا ْل َق ِد ْي ِم ك ُْر ِسي َكبِ ْیر‬ ‫اب ا ْلبی ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫وس ُّت آ َيات‬ ‫‪ )13‬في ُس ْو َرة ا ْل َب َق َرة ما َئت َ َ ْ‬ ‫عنْدَ َب ِ َ ْ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫الش َج َر ِة ُط ُی ْور َج ِم ْی َلة مِ ْث ُل ٰذل ِ َك ال َّط ْی ِر‬
‫‪َ )14‬ع َلی تِ ْل َك َّ‬ ‫ف تِ ْل َك ا ْل َم ِد ْين َِة َأ ْر َب ُع ُق ًری َص ِغ ْی َرة‬‫َخ ْل َ‬ ‫‪)7‬‬
‫‪248‬‬
‫َح ْرف ُم َش َّبه بِا ْل ِف ْع ِل ‪ and‬فِ ْعل نَاقِص ‪َ of a‬خ َبر ُم َقدَّ م ‪The‬‬
‫‪ can also be fronted.‬فِ ْعل َناقِص ‪َ of a‬خ َبر ‪The‬‬
‫َان فِي ا ْلبی ِ‬
‫ت َر ُجل‬ ‫ك َ‬
‫َْ‬
‫‪There was a man in the house.‬‬
‫اِ ْس ُم َك َ‬
‫ان ا ْل ُمؤَ َّخ ُر‬ ‫ان ا ْل ُم َقدَّ ُم‬
‫َخبَ ُر َك َ‬ ‫فِ ْعل نَاقِص‬
‫َر ُجل‬ ‫ا ْلبی ِ‬

‫ت‬ ‫فِي‬ ‫َ‬
‫كان‬
‫َْ‬
‫‪َ can also be fronted.‬ح ْرف ُم َش َّبه بِا ْل ِف ْع ِل ‪َ of a‬خ َبر ‪Likewise, the‬‬
‫إِ َّن فِي ا ْلبی ِ‬
‫ت َر ُج ًَّل‬ ‫َْ‬
‫‪Indeed, there is a man in the house.‬‬
‫اِ ْس ُم إِ َّن ا ْل ُمؤَ َّخ ُر‬ ‫َخ َب ُر إِ َّن ا ْل ُم َقدَّ ُم‬ ‫َح ْرف ُم َش َّبه بِا ْل ِف ْع ِل‬
‫َر ُج ًَّل‬ ‫ا ْلبی ِ‬

‫ت‬ ‫فِي‬ ‫إِ َّن‬
‫َْ‬
‫‪.‬اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّخر ‪َْ will precede the‬لم ُمزَ ْح َل َقة ‪ُ , the‬م َقدَّ م ‪ is‬إِ َّن ‪َ of‬خ َبر ‪When the‬‬
‫آن َلـ ِع ْب َر ًة‬
‫إِ َّن فِي ا ْل ُقر ِ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪Indeed, there are signs in the Quran.‬‬
‫‪َ )7‬ما َت ْح َت ٰه َذا ا ْل ُك ْر ِس ِّي َك ْلب َص ِغ ْیر‬ ‫إن فِي ا ْل ُكؤُ ْو ِ‬
‫س ع ََس ًَّل َو َل َبنًا‬ ‫‪َّ )1‬‬
‫ف َل ْح ًما َو ُخ ْبزً ا َو َما ًء َو َف َواكِ َه‬ ‫‪ )8‬إِ َّن لِل َّضی ِ‬
‫ْ‬ ‫إن َب ْعدَ ال ُّظ ْه ِر َد ْر ًسا َط ِو ْي ًَّل‬‫‪َّ )2‬‬
‫ض َْل َيات‬ ‫ات َو ْاْلَ ْر ِ‬ ‫‪ )9‬إِ َّن فِي َخ ْل ِق السماو ِ‬
‫َّ َ َ‬ ‫‪ )3‬إِ َّن فِ ْي كِتَاب اللِ آ َيات َب ِّینَات‬
‫ج ِد كِتَاب َق ِد ْيم‬ ‫َان َع َلی مِنْ َب ِر ٰذل ِ َك ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬
‫‪ )10‬ك َ‬ ‫س َماء َب ِ‬
‫ارد‬ ‫‪َ )4‬ل ْی َس فِي تِ ْل َك ا ْل َك ْأ ِ‬
‫‪ )11‬إِ َّن فِي السم ِ‬
‫اء ن ُُج ْو ًما كَثِ ْی َر ًة َغ ْی َر ٰه ِذ ِه الن ُُّج ْو ِم‬ ‫َان َع َلی ٰذل ِ َك ا ْلجب ِل ب َقرة و َشا َت ِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫‪ )5‬ك َ‬
‫َّ َ‬ ‫ََ َ َ َ‬
‫ت ا ْل َج ِد ْي ِد َأ ْش َجار كَثِ ْی َرة‬
‫‪َ )12‬لیس ْت حو َل ٰذلِك ا ْلبی ِ‬
‫َْ‬ ‫َ ْ‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫ج ِد ا ْل َح َرا ِم نَاس كَثِ ْیر‬ ‫َان فِي ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬ ‫‪ )6‬ك َ‬
‫‪249‬‬
‫ِل ‪ِ and‬عنْدَ‬
‫‪َ , they can‬خ َبر ُم َقدَّ م ‪ِ become the‬ل ‪َ of‬جار ‪ِ and the‬عنْدَ ‪َ of‬ظ ْرف ‪When the‬‬
‫‪give the meaning to have.‬‬
‫َّاج ِر َمال كَثِ ْیر‬
‫ِعنْدَ الت ِ‬ ‫ث َأ َخ َوات‬
‫َب َث ََّل ُ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫لزَ ْين َ‬
‫‪The merchant has a lot of wealth.‬‬ ‫‪Zainab has three sisters.‬‬
‫‪ِ is used for temporary possessions, e.g. wealth and‬عنْدَ ‪The particle‬‬
‫‪َ is used for permanent possessions or attributions‬ل ‪items; whereas‬‬
‫‪e.g. family members.‬‬
‫‪Translate the following sentences.‬‬
‫الش ْیخِ ا ْل َكبِ ْی ِر َأ ْو َْلد كَثِ ْیر‬
‫‪ )7‬ل ِ ٰه َذا َّ‬ ‫َل ْی َس ل ِ ْل َیتِ ْی ِم َأب‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫َاب َخالِد ٰذل ِ َك مِا َئ ُة َص ْف َحة‬ ‫‪ )8‬لِكِت ِ‬ ‫ان َكبِیر ِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫َْ‬
‫ل ِ ْلم ِدين َِة باب ِ‬
‫َ ْ َ َ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫َان زَ ر َقاو ِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫ْ َ‬
‫ب ْاْلَسو ِد َعین ِ‬
‫‪ )9‬ل ْل َك ْل ِ ْ َ ْ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫َما ِْلُو ٰلئِ َك ا ْل َم َساكِ ْی ِن َمال‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫ف ُخ ْبز َو َل ْحم َْل َخ ْمر‬ ‫الضی ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ان ج ِديدَ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ )10‬عنْدَ َّ ْ‬ ‫ان‬ ‫عنْدَ ال َّطال َبة َق َل َم َ ْ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫ان َأحمر ِ‬ ‫‪ )11‬ل ِ َطی ِر َأحمدَ ا ْلج ِمی ِل جنَاح ِ‬ ‫َّ ِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫ْ ََ‬ ‫َ ْ َ َ‬ ‫ْ ْ َ‬ ‫َب ع ََس ًَّل َو َل َبنًا‬ ‫إن عنْدَ ُأ ِّم زَ ْين َ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫ض ِرج ََّل ِن َكبِیر َت ِ‬ ‫‪ )12‬ل ِ ٰه َذا ا ْل َك ْب ِ‬ ‫ِعنْدَ َأبِ ْي َفاطِ َم َة ِس ِّك ْین َق ِد ْيم‬
‫ان‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫ش ْاْلَ ْب َی ِ ْ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫‪250‬‬
‫ ِش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬as a ‫س‬ ِ ‫َخ َبر َْل لِنَفْيِ ا ْل‬
ِ ْ ‫جن‬ ُ
A ‫ َْل‬can be added to a ‫ ُج ْم َلة ا ْس ِم َّیة‬to create an emphatic negative
ِ ‫ َْل لِنَ ْف ِي ا ْل‬. This is translated as there is no.
ِ ‫جن‬
meaning. This is called ‫ْس‬
ِ ‫َْل و َلدَ فِي ا ْلبی‬
‫ت‬ َْ َ
There is no boy in the house.
When a ‫ْس‬ ِ ‫جن‬ ِ ‫ َْل لِنَ ْف ِي ا ْل‬precedes a ‫ ُجم َلة اس ِم َّیة‬:
ْ ْ
1. The ‫ ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬is called the ‫ ا ْسم‬of the ‫ْس‬ ِ ِ ‫جن‬ ِ ‫ َْل لِنَ ْف ِي ا ْل‬and is ‫من ُْص ْوب‬. Unlike
َ
regular nouns, it will only have one ‫ َفت َْحة‬, and no ‫ َا ْل‬nor ‫ َتنْو ْين‬. ِ
2. The ‫ َخ ْبر‬is called the ‫ َخ َبر‬of the ‫ْس‬ ِ ‫جن‬ ِ ‫ َْل لِنَ ْف ِي ا ْل‬. This is usually a ‫ ِش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬.
‫َخبَ ُر َْل‬ ‫اِ ْس ُم َْل‬ ِ ‫َْل ل ِنَ ْف ِي ا ْل‬
ِ ْ‫جن‬
‫س‬
ِ ‫ا ْلبی‬
‫ت‬ ‫فِي‬ َ‫َو َلد‬ ‫َْل‬
َْ
If the ‫ َخ َبر‬is not a ‫ ِش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬, it will be ‫ َم ْر ُف ْوع‬.

‫َْل َو َلدَ َم ِر ْيض‬
No child is sick.
Vocab
to change ‫َبدَّ َل ُي َبدِّ ُل َت ْب ِد ْي ًَّل‬
to be kind ‫َأ ْح َس َن ُي ْح ِس ُن إِ ْح َسانًا‬
to transgress ‫َبغَی َي ْب ِغ ْي َب ْغ ًیا‬ to grant permission ‫َأ ِذ َن َي ْأ َذ ُن إِ ْذنًا‬
to forbid, make sacred ‫َح َّر َم ُي َح ِّر ُم َت ْح ِر ْي ًما‬ to answer a prayer, ‫ب اِ ْستِ َجا َب ًة‬ ِ ‫اب َي ْست‬
ُ ‫َج ْی‬ َ ‫است ََج‬
ْ
respond to a call
to resolve, make a firm
decision
‫ عَزَ َم َي ْع ِز ُم عَزْ ًما‬to get by without ‫استِ ْغنَا ًء‬ ِ
ْ ‫اس َت ْغنَی َي ْس َتغْن ْي‬
ْ
to give virtue ‫َف َّض َل ُي َف ِّض ُل َت ْف ِض ْی ًَّل‬ to make aware, show, ‫َأ ْظ َه َر ُي ْظ ِه ُر إِ ْظ َه ًارا‬
make apparent
to save, grant salvation
ِ ‫ن ََّجی ُين َِّجي َتن‬
‫ْج َی ًة‬ ْ to fabricate ‫اِ ْفت ََری َي ْفت َِر ْي ا ْفتِ َرا ًء‬
to look ‫َن َظ َر َينْ ُظ ُر َن ْظ ًرا‬ to feel safe from, trust ‫َأمِ َن َي ْأ َم ُن َأ ْمنًا‬
251
‫‪َْ )9‬ل َش ِر ْي َك للِ َر ِّب ا ْل َعا َل ِم ْی َن‬ ‫جدَ فِي ٰه ِذ ِه ا ْل َق ْر َي ِة‬ ‫َْل مس ِ‬
‫َ ْ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬ ‫ت‬ ‫َْل َقبر ِعنْدَ ا ْلبی ِ‬
‫َْ‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫ص ال ِّط ْف ِل‬ ‫اب َع َلی َق ِم ْی ِ‬ ‫‪َْ )10‬ل ُت َر َ‬‫َْل ُم َع ِّل َم فِي ٰذل ِ َك ا ْل َف ْص ِل‬ ‫‪)6‬‬ ‫ْل ريب فِي ا ْل ُقر ِ‬
‫آن‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫َْ َ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫‪َْ )11‬ل َق ْب َر َأ َم َام َم ْس ِج ِد ا ْل َقر َي ِة ٰذلِ َك‬
‫ف ا ْلكِ َرا ِم‬ ‫َْل َشراب لِل ُّضیو ِ‬ ‫‪)7‬‬ ‫َْل نَجم فِي السم ِ‬
‫اء‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫ُْ‬ ‫َ َ‬ ‫َّ َ‬ ‫ْ َ‬
‫‪َْ )12‬ل َنبِ َّي َب ْعدَ النَّبِ ِّي ُم َح َّمد ﷺ‬ ‫ْت ا ْل َف ِق ْی َر ِة‬ ‫َْل م َال لِتِ ْل َك ا ْلبِن ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫‪)8‬‬ ‫﴿ َْل َت ْب ِد َيل ل ِ َخ ْل ِق اللِ﴾‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫ُج ْم َلة ْاس ِم َّیة ‪ِ in a‬ش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة ‪Summary of‬‬
‫ِش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬
‫ْس‬ ‫َخ َب ُر َْل لِنَ ْف ِي ا ْل ِ‬

‫جن ِ‬ ‫َخ َبر ُم َقدَّ م‬ ‫َخ َبر‬
‫َْل رج َل فِي ا ْلبی ِ‬
‫ت‬ ‫فِي ا ْلبی ِ‬
‫ت َر ُجل‬ ‫الرج ُل فِي ا ْلبی ِ‬
‫ت‬
‫َْ‬ ‫َ ُ‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫َّ ُ‬
‫]شبْ ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة[ ]اسم[ ‪There is no‬‬
‫ِ‬ ‫]شبْ ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة[ ]مبتدأ[ ‪There is a‬‬
‫ِ‬ ‫]شبْ ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة[ ‪] is‬مبتدأ[ ‪The‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫ف َط َعام‬ ‫لضیو ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪َْ )8‬ل ِح َم َار فِي ا ْل َب َل ِد‬ ‫ت َقاض‬ ‫‪ )1‬فِي ا ْلبی ِ‬
‫ل ُّ ُ ْ‬ ‫‪)15‬‬ ‫َْ‬
‫لضی ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ح َم َار فِي ا ْل َب َل ِد‬ ‫‪ )9‬إِ َّن ا ْل ِ‬ ‫ت َق ِ‬ ‫‪ )2‬إِ َّن فِي ا ْلبی ِ‬
‫ف َط َعا ًما‬ ‫إِ َّن ل َّ ْ‬ ‫‪)16‬‬ ‫اض ًیا‬ ‫َْ‬
‫ف َط َعام‬ ‫لضیو ِ‬ ‫ك َ ِ‬ ‫ح َم ُار فِي ٰه َذا ا ْل َب َل ِد‬ ‫‪ )10‬ا ْل ِ‬ ‫ت ُق َضاة‬ ‫َان فِي ا ْلبی ِ‬ ‫‪ )3‬ك َ‬
‫َان ل ُّ ُ ْ‬ ‫‪)17‬‬ ‫َْ‬
‫لضی ِ‬ ‫والشر ِ‬ ‫َان فِي ا ْل َب َل ِد ِح َمار‬ ‫اضي فِي ا ْلبی ِ‬ ‫َ ِ‬
‫ف‬ ‫اب ل َّ ْ‬ ‫ال َّط َعا ُم َّ َ ُ‬ ‫‪)18‬‬ ‫‪ )11‬ك َ‬ ‫ت‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫‪َْ )4‬ل ق َ‬
‫لضیو ِ‬ ‫ِ ِ‬ ‫‪ )12‬إِ َّن فِي ا ْل َب َل ِد ُح ُم ًرا كِ َب ًارا‬ ‫اد ُل فِي ا ْلبی ِ‬ ‫اضي ا ْلع ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ف‬ ‫إِ َّن ال َّط َعا َم ال َّلذ ْي َذ ل ُّ ُ ْ‬ ‫‪)19‬‬ ‫ت‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫‪ )5‬ا ْل َق ْ َ‬
‫لضی ِ‬ ‫َْل َطعام و َْل َشر ِ‬ ‫ح َم ُار فِي ا ْل َق ْر َي ِة‬ ‫َان ٰذل ِ َك ا ْل ِ‬ ‫اضي وا ْلمع ِّلم فِي ا ْلبی ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ف‬ ‫اب ل َّ ْ‬ ‫َ َ‬ ‫َ َ َ‬ ‫‪)20‬‬ ‫ت ‪ )13‬ك َ‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫‪ )6‬إِ َّن ا ْل َق َ َ ُ َ َ‬
‫ف ا ْل َك ِر ْي ِم‬ ‫لضی ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ت ال َب ِار َح َة ‪ )14‬فِي ا ْل َب َل ِد ُح ُمر َوكِ ََّلب كَثِ ْی َرة‬ ‫َان ا ْل ُق َضا ُة ِفي ا ْلبی ِ‬
‫َان ال َّط َعا ُم ل َّ ْ‬ ‫ك َ‬ ‫‪)21‬‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫‪ )7‬ك َ‬
‫‪252‬‬
‫َا ْل ُج ْم َل ُة ا ْل ِف ْعلِ َّی ُة ‪ِ in‬ش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬
‫‪ِ can come in nine slots:‬ش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة ‪ُ a‬ج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة ‪In a‬‬
‫َم َف ُع ْول بِ ِه ‪1.‬‬
‫نَائِب ا ْل َف ِ‬
‫اع ِل ‪2.‬‬ ‫ُ‬
‫َم َف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه ‪3.‬‬
‫َم َف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق ‪4.‬‬
‫َم َف ُع ْول َل ُه ‪5.‬‬
‫َت ْمیِ ْیز ‪6.‬‬
‫ُم ْس َت ْثنًی ‪7.‬‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول َم َع ُه ‪8.‬‬
‫آ َلة ‪9.‬‬
‫‪We will discuss each of these slots individually.‬‬
‫‪253‬‬
‫ ِش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬as a ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬
The object of most verbs occurs as a single noun or a phrase.
The man drank water.
The man drank cold water.
However, the object of some verbs occurs with a preposition.
The man cared for his mother.
In this example, the object of the verb care comes with the
preposition for.
Verbs like apply for, approve of, add to, result in, count
on, and deal with also behave in the same way.
Verbs used with a preposition are called prepositional verbs.
In Arabic, the ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬of prepositional verbs occurs as a ‫ َم ْج ُر ْور‬-‫ َجار‬.
ِ ِ ‫ن ََص َح ْاْلُ ْستَا ُذ لِل َّطال‬
‫ب‬
The teacher advised the student.
In this case, the ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬is labelled as ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح‬, the indirect ‫َم َف ُع ْول‬
‫ بِ ِه‬which occurs with a ‫ َح ْرف َجار‬.
‫َیر َص ِر ْيح‬ ِ ِ ‫َف‬ ‫فِ ْعل‬
ُ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِه غ‬ ‫اعل‬
ِ ِ ‫ال َّطال‬
‫ب‬ ‫ِل‬ ‫ْاْلُ ْستَا ُذ‬ ‫ن ََص َح‬
254
‫‪Notes‬‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول ‪1. Prepositional verbs have their own way of expressing their‬‬
‫إِ َلی ‪َ (to be kind) comes with‬أ ْح َس َن ‪. For example, the verb‬بِ ِه َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح‬
‫‪َ .‬ع َلی ‪ (to be angry) comes with‬غ َِض َب ‪whilst the verb‬‬
‫َأ َح َس َن ا ْل َو َلدُ إِ َلی ْاْلَ ِ‬
‫ب‬ ‫ت ْاْلُ ُّم َع َلی ا ْل َو َل ِد‬
‫َضب ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫غ َ‬
‫‪The child was kind‬‬ ‫‪The mother became angry‬‬
‫‪to the father.‬‬ ‫‪at the child.‬‬
‫‪َ which comes with a prepositional verb is not always‬ح ْرف َجار ‪2. The‬‬
‫‪translated directly into English. Instead, the intended meaning‬‬
‫‪should be understood and translated accordingly.‬‬
‫آمن النَّاس بِاللِ‬
‫ُ‬ ‫َ َ‬
‫✓ ‪The people believed in Allah.‬‬
‫‪The people believed with Allah. ‬‬
‫َبغَی فِ ْرع َْو ُن َع َلی َبن ِ ْي إِ ْس َرائِ ْی َل‬
‫✓ ‪Firawn transgressed against the Children of Israel.‬‬
‫‪Firawn transgressed on the Children of Israel. ‬‬
‫ب ْاْلَ ْصنَا ُم ل ِ ْل ُم ْش ِركِ ْی َن َش ْیئًا‬ ‫‪َْ )9‬ل َت ْست ِ‬
‫َج ْی ُ‬ ‫الل ل ِ ْل ُمؤْ مِن ِ ْی َن‬
‫ب ُ‬
‫َي ْست ِ‬
‫َج ْی ُ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫ت ُم َس ِّب ِح ْی َن ُم َك ِّب ِر ْي َن‬ ‫ف ا ْلحجاج بالبی ِ‬
‫‪َ )10‬ي ُط ْو ُ ُ َّ ُ َ ْ‬ ‫الص َحا َب ِة ا ْلكِ َرا ِم‬ ‫َن َّ‬ ‫الل ع ِ‬
‫َرض َي ُ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫ُب َوال ُّر ُس ِل‬ ‫‪ )11‬يؤْ ِمن المؤْ ِمن ِب ِ‬
‫الل َوا ْل َم ََّل ِئ َك ِة َوا ْل ُكت ِ‬ ‫ات كَثِ ْی ًرا‬ ‫يحزَ ُن النَّاس َع َلی ْاْلَمو ِ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫ُ ُ ُ ُ‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫َ ْ‬
‫ض َوالن ُُّج ْو ِم‬ ‫واْلَ ْر ِ‬ ‫والس َم ِاء ْ‬‫ال َّ‬
‫‪َ )12‬ت ْن ُظ ُر ْاْلُ ُّم ِإ َلی ا ْل ِج َب ِ‬ ‫ب ِع ْلم َع ِن ا ْل ُكت ِ‬
‫ُب‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َلن َّي ْس َتغْن َي َطال ُ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫اء و ْاْلُمه ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫الس ِف ْینَ ِة َف ِر ِح ْی َن‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ات‬ ‫الصال ُح ْو َن إِ َلی ْاْل َب َ َّ َ‬ ‫‪ُ )13‬ي ْحس ُن ْاْلَ ْو َْل ُد َّ‬ ‫ب ْاْلَ ْو َْل ُد في َّ‬ ‫َرك َ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫اط ِ‬
‫الل ا ْل ُم ْس َت ِق ْی ِم َض ََّل ًْل َب ِع ْیدً ا‬ ‫‪َ )14‬ض َّل ا ْل َك ِافرو َن عَن ِصر ِ‬ ‫الل َع َلی ال َّظال ِ ِم ْی َن َش ِد ْيدً ا‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫ُ ْ‬ ‫ب ُ‬ ‫غَض َ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫اْل ْم َو ُال عَ ِن ا ْل َك ِاف ِر ْي َن َش ْیئًا‬ ‫‪َ )15‬ي ْو َم ا ْل ِق َیا َمة َْل ُيغْنِي ْ َ‬
‫اْل ْو َْل ُد َو َْل ْ َ‬ ‫ات اللِ ا ْلبین ِ‬
‫َات‬ ‫ي ْك ُفر ا ْلم ْش ِركُو َن بِآي ِ‬ ‫‪)7‬‬
‫َ ِّ‬ ‫ْ َ‬ ‫َ ُ ُ‬
‫‪َ )16‬بغَی فِ ْرع َْو ُن َع َلی َق ْو ِم ُم ْو َسی َبن ِ ْي إِ ْس َرائِ ْی َل ُظ ْل ًما َش ِد ْيدً ا‬ ‫‪ )8‬ك ََّذ َب ا ْل ُم ْش ِرك ُْو َن بِ َی ْو ِم الدِّ ْي ِن َت ْك ِذ ْي ًبا‬
‫‪255‬‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه َثان َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح‬
‫‪َ .‬م ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه َثان َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح ‪ِ can become the‬ش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة ‪The‬‬
‫الل النَّبِ َّي ﷺ َع َلی ا ْل ُمنَافِ ِق ْی َن‬
‫َأ ْظ َه َر ُ‬
‫‪Allah made the Prophet aware of the hypocrites.‬‬
‫َیر َص ِر ْيح‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ ‫َف ِ‬ ‫فِ ْعل‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِه َثان غ ُ‬ ‫اعل‬
‫ا ْل ُمنَافِ ِق ْی َن‬ ‫عَ َلی‬ ‫النَّبِ َّي‬ ‫الل‬

‫ُ‬ ‫َأ ْظ َه َر‬
‫‪Vocab‬‬
‫‪child‬‬ ‫‪َ soil‬صبِي ج ِص ْب َیة‪ِ ،‬ص ْب َیان‬ ‫ُت َراب ج َأ ْت ِر َبة‬
‫‪intelligent‬‬ ‫‪ cloth‬عَاقِل ج ُع َق ََّل ُء‬ ‫َث ْوب ج ثِ َیاب‬
‫‪grapes‬‬ ‫ِعنَب ج َأ ْعنَاب‬ ‫‪swine, pig‬‬ ‫ِخن ِْزير‬
‫‪honoured, revered‬‬ ‫ُم َك َّر َمة‬ ‫‪blood‬‬ ‫َدم ج ِد َماء‬
‫‪pulpit‬‬ ‫مِنْ َبر ج َمنَابِ ُر‬ ‫‪time, period‬‬ ‫زَ َمن‪ ،‬زَ َمان‬
‫‪carrion, dead‬‬ ‫َم ْیتَة‬ ‫‪olive‬‬ ‫زَ ْيت ُْون‬
‫‪migration‬‬ ‫ِه ْج َرة‬ ‫‪brave‬‬ ‫ُش َ‬

‫جاع ج َش َج َعة‪ُ ،‬ش ْج َعان‬
‫‪َ )7‬أن َْذ َر النَّبِ ُّي ُه ْود ا ْل َق ْو َم َعا ًدا ع ََذا ًبا َق ِر ْي ًبا‬ ‫الل ال ُّذ ُن ْو َب ل ِ ْل ُم ْسلِ ِم ْی َن‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َيغْف ُر ُ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫الل َخ ْم َس َص َل َوات َع َلی ا ْل ُمؤْ مِن ِ ْی َن‬ ‫اهیم بِبِن ِ‬
‫َاء ا ْل َك ْع َب ِة‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )8‬ف َر َض ُ‬ ‫الل النَّبِ َّي إِ ْب َر ْ َ‬
‫َأ َم َر ُ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫اإلن ِ‬ ‫‪ )9‬نَزَّ َل الل َع َلی النَّبِي ِع ْی َسی ا ْب ِن َم ْر َي َم ْ ِ‬ ‫ان بِن ِ َعم كَثِ ْی َرة‬ ‫اإلنْس ِ‬
‫ْج ْی َل‬ ‫ِّ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫الل َع َلی ْ ِ َ‬ ‫َأ ْن َع َم ُ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫خن ِْز ْي َر َع َلی ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ِم ْی َن‬
‫‪ )10‬حرم الل ا ْل َخمر وا ْل ِ‬
‫َْ َ‬ ‫َ َّ َ ُ‬ ‫َي ْف َت ِري ا ْل ُم ْش ِرك ُْو َن َع َلی اللِ ك َِذ ًبا‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫اب ْاْلَل ِ ْی ِم‬
‫الل ُم ْو َسی َو َبنِي إِ ْس َرائِ ْی َل مِ َن ا ْل َع َذ ِ‬ ‫‪ )11‬ن ََّجی ُ‬ ‫ات إِ َلی ْاْلَ ْو َْل ِد‬ ‫ُي ْح ِس ُن ْاْل َبا ُء َو ْاْلُ َّم َه ُ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫اط ا ْل ُم ْست َِق ْی ِم‬
‫اإلس ََّل ِم الصر ِ‬
‫ِّ َ‬
‫ِِ‬
‫الل ا ْل ُم ْسلم ْی َن إِ َلی ْ ِ ْ‬
‫‪ٰ )12‬هدَ ی ُ‬ ‫ب‬‫َّاس مِ َن ا ْل َم َصائِ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َي ْح َف ُظ ا ْل َم ََّلئ َك ُة الن َ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫‪256‬‬
Notes
Some verbs have different meanings depending on the ‫ َح ْرف َجار‬they
are used with. Therefore, it is important to understand the context
of a sentence before translating.
Below are a few examples of one verb having different meanings
because of the different ‫ َح ْرف َجار‬it is used with.
‫َد َعا َيدْ ع ُْو ُد َعا ًء‬ ‫اب َيت ُْو ُب َت ْو َب ًة‬
َ ‫َت‬
ِ‫َتاب ا ْلعبدُ إِ َلی الل‬
َ ُ‫َدعَا ا ْل َعبْد‬
‫الل‬ َْ َ
The servant supplicated to Allah. The servant repented to Allah.
‫الل َع َلی ا ْل َعبْ ِد‬
ُ ‫اب‬َ ‫َت‬
‫َدعَا ا ْل َم ْظ ُل ْو ُم َع َلی ال ََّّٓظال ِ ِم‬
Allah accepted the repentance of the
The oppressed cursed the oppressor. servant.
ِ ْ ‫َّاس إِ َلی‬
‫اإل ْس ََّل ِم‬ َ ‫الر ُس ْو ُل الن‬
َّ ‫َدعَا‬
The Prophet called the people to
Islam.
‫ف إِ َلی ال َّط َعا ِم‬ ُّ ‫الر ُج ُل‬
َ ‫الضیُ ْو‬ َّ ‫َدعَا‬
The man invited the guests to food.
257
‫اع ِل ‪ِ as a‬ش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬ ‫نَائِب ا ْل َف ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫اع ِل َغ ْی ُر ال َّص ِر ْيحِ ‪َ will become the‬م ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح ‪, the‬ف ْعل َم ْج ُه ْول ‪After a‬‬
‫ِ‬ ‫‪.‬نَائِب ا ْل َف ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ب َع َلی ال َّظال ِ ِم ْی َن‬ ‫ِ‬
‫غُض َ‬ ‫الل َع َلی ال َّظال ِ ِم ْی َن‬
‫ب ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫غَض َ‬
‫‪Anger was shown to the‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪Allah became angry at the‬‬
‫‪oppressors.‬‬ ‫‪oppressors.‬‬
‫الص ِر ْيحِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫فِ ْعل َم ْج ُه ْول‬
‫ب ا ْل َفاع ِل َغ ْی ُر َّ‬
‫نَائ ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ال َّظال ِ ِم ْی َن‬ ‫عَ َلی‬ ‫ُغض َ‬
‫ب‬
‫‪Note‬‬
‫‪ as a‬فِ ْعل َم ْج ُه ْول ‪Sometimes it may be necessary to translate the Arabic‬‬
‫‪ with the subject someone or no one.‬فِ ْعل َم ْع ُل ْوم‬
‫َْل ُي ْس َت ْغنٰی ع ِ‬
‫َن ا ْل ُكت ِ‬
‫ُب‬
‫‪No one is independent of books.‬‬
‫‪َ )8‬ل ُی َك َّذ ُب بِ َی ْو ِم الدِّ ْي ِن‬ ‫الل ل ِ ْل ُمؤْ مِن ِ ْی َن‬
‫اب ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪ )1‬ا ْست ََج َ‬
‫‪ُ )9‬ي َجا ُء بِ َج َهن ََّم َي ْو َم ا ْل ِق َیا َم ِة‬ ‫ب ل ِ ْل ُمؤْ مِن ِ ْی َن‬ ‫‪ُ )2‬ا ْست ِ‬
‫ُج ْی َ‬
‫‪ )10‬ي ْغ َفر ل ِ ْلمؤْ مِنِین وا ْلمؤْ مِن ِ‬
‫َات‬ ‫‪َْ )3‬ل َي ْأ َم ُن عَاقِل َع َلی ا ْل َعدُ ِّو‬
‫ُ ُ ُ ْ َ َ ُ‬
‫ت اللِ ا ْل َح َرا ِم َل ْی ًَّل َون ََه ًارا‬ ‫اف بِا ْل َكعب ِة بی ِ‬
‫َْ َْ‬ ‫‪ُ )11‬ي َط ُ‬ ‫‪َْ )4‬ل ُيؤْ َم ُن َع َلی ا ْل َعدُ ِّو‬
‫‪ )12‬ع ُِز َم َع َلی َق ْت ِل النَّبِ ِّي ُم َح َّمد ﷺ َل ْی َل َة ا ْل ِه ْج َر ِة‬ ‫َن ا ْل ُكت ِ‬
‫ُب‬ ‫‪َْ )5‬ل ُي ْس َت ْغنٰی ع ِ‬
‫وسی زَ َم َن فِ ْر َع ْو َن‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬

‫‪ُ )13‬بغ َي َع َلی َبن ْي إِ ْس َرائ ْی َل َق ْو ِم ُم َ‬
‫ت ا ْلمع ِّلم ُة ل ِ ْلبن ِ‬
‫َات ا ْل َم ْر ٰضی‬ ‫ُ َ َ َ‬
‫‪َ )6‬أ ِذ َن ِ‬
‫‪ )14‬حرم َع َلی ا ْلمسلِ ِمین ا ْلمی َت ُة والدَّ م و َلحم ا ْل ِ‬
‫خن ِْز ِير‬ ‫‪ُ )7‬أ ِذ َن ل ِهؤُ َْل ِء ا ْلبن ِ‬
‫َات ا ْل َم ْر ٰضی‬
‫ُ ْ ْ َ َْ َ ُ َ ْ ُ‬ ‫ُ ِّ َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ٰ‬
‫‪258‬‬
‫ ِش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬as a ‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه‬
The ‫ ُش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬can occur as the ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه‬.
This can be in the ‫ ُم َضاف – ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬form or the ‫ َم ْج ُر ْور‬-‫ َجار‬form of the ‫ِش ْب ُه‬
‫ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬.
‫ َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه‬as a ‫ُم َضاف – ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬
The ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه‬can occur in the ‫ ُم َضاف – ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬form of ‫ ِش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬.
‫الر ُج ُل َق ْب َل ا ْل َف ْج ِر‬
The man performed salah before Fajr.
In tarkib, this will be labelled as a regular ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه‬.
‫ا ْل َف ْج ِر‬ ‫َق ْب َل‬ ‫الر ُج ُل‬

Notes
A sentence can have more than one ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه‬.
While translating such a sentence, it may be better to place one
‫ َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه‬at the beginning of the sentence.
ِ ‫الر ُج ُل َق ْب َل ا ْل َف ْج ِر ِعنْدَ ا ْل َب‬
‫اب‬ َّ ‫َص َّلی‬
Before Fajr, the man performed salah by the door.
‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِیْ ِه‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِیْ ِه‬ ِ ‫َف‬
‫اب‬ َ‫ِعنْد‬ ‫ا ْل َف ْج ِر‬ ‫َق ْب َل‬ ‫الر ُج ُل‬
‫ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬ ‫ُم َضاف‬ ‫ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬ ‫ُم َضاف‬
259
‫‪Vocab‬‬
‫‪to slaughter‬‬ ‫‪َ to test‬ذ َب َح َي ْذ َب ُح َذ ْب ًحا‬ ‫اِ ْب َت َلی َي ْبتَلِ ْي اِ ْبتِ ََّل ًء‬
‫‪to shake‬‬ ‫زَ ْلزَ َل ُيزَ ْل ِز ُل زَ ْلزَ َل ًة‬ ‫‪to grant entry‬‬ ‫َأ ْد َخ َل ُيدْ ِخ ُل إِ ْد َخ ًاْل‬
‫ب إِ َصا َب ًة‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪to do tawaf‬‬ ‫ف َط َوا ًفا‬
‫اف َي ُط ْو ُ‬
‫َط َ‬ ‫‪to afflict‬‬ ‫اب ُيص ْی ُ‬ ‫َأ َص َ‬
‫‪to be pure‬‬ ‫َط ُه َر َي ْط ُه ُر َط َه َار ًة‬ ‫‪to be late‬‬ ‫َت َأ َّخ َر َي َت َأ َّخ ُر َت َأ ُّخ ًرا‬
‫‪to wash‬‬ ‫غ ََس َل َيغ ِْس ُل غ َْس ًَّل‬ ‫‪to maintain good manners‬‬ ‫َت َأ َّد َب َي َت َأ َّد ُب َت َأ ُّد ًبا‬
‫‪to succeed‬‬ ‫احا‬

‫ن ََج َح َين َْج ُح ن ََج ً‬ ‫‪to deprive‬‬ ‫َح َر َم َي ْح ِر ُم ِح ْر َمانًا‬
‫الش ْیخِ ُم َح َّمد ُم َت َأ ِّدبِ ْی َن‬ ‫‪َ )7‬ي ْجلِ ُس ال ُّط ََّّل ُب ِعنْدَ َّ‬ ‫س َقائِ ًما‬‫ب َق ْب َل الدَّ ْر ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َت َو َّض َأ ال َّطال ُ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫س‬‫ح ْی َح َب ْعدَ الدَّ ْر ِ‬ ‫‪ )8‬وجدَ ال َّطالِب ا ْلجواب الص ِ‬ ‫اش َع ًة‬ ‫اب َخ ِ‬ ‫َص َّل ْت َفاطِ َم ُة ِعنْدَ ا ْل َب ِ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫ُ َ َ َ َّ‬ ‫َ َ‬
‫ب‬‫الصائِ ُم ْو َن ا ْل َف َواكِ َه ِعنْدَ َص ََّل ِة ا ْل َمغ ِْر ِ‬ ‫‪َ )9‬ي ْأك ُُل َّ‬ ‫ُرس ِّي ا ْل َجدِّ‬ ‫ي ُقوم ال ِّط ْف ُل الص ِغیر َأمام ك ِ‬
‫َّ ْ ُ َ َ‬ ‫َ ْ ُ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫ج ِد ٰذل ِ َك‬ ‫اب ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬ ‫ف ا ْلكِ َرا ُم ِعنْدَ َب ِ‬ ‫‪َ )10‬ت َو َّض َأ ُّ‬
‫الض ُی ْو ُ‬ ‫َي ْجلِ ُس ال ُّط ََّّل ُب َأ َما َم َهؤُ َْل ِء ا ْل ُم َع ِّل ِم ْی َن‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫ت اللِ َل ْی ًَّل َون ََه ًارا‬ ‫ف النَّاس حو َل ا ْل َكعب ِة بی ِ‬
‫َْ َْ‬ ‫ُ َ ْ‬ ‫‪َ )11‬ي ُط ْو ُ‬ ‫َار ِعنْدَ ْاْلُ ِّم‬ ‫الصغ ُ‬ ‫َي ْجلِ ُس ْاْلَ ْو َْل ُد ِّ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫ج ِد ا ْل َكبِ ْی ِر َساكِتِ ْی َن‬ ‫َّاس َح ْو َل مِنْ َب ِر ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬‫‪َ )12‬ج َل َس الن ُ‬ ‫الصال ِ ُح آ َي َة ا ْل ُك ْر ِس ِّي ِعنْدَ الن َّْو ِم‬ ‫َي ْق َر ُأ ا ْل َو َلدُ َّ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫َجار ‪َ -‬م ْج ُر ْور ‪َ as a‬م ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه‬

‫‪ِ .‬ش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة ‪َ form of‬جار‪َ -‬م ْج ُر ْور ‪َ can occur in the‬م ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه ‪The‬‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه َغ ْی ُر ‪َ are used within a‬حتَّی ‪ِ , and‬ب ‪,‬مِ ْن ‪,‬إِ َلی ‪َ ,‬ع َلی ‪,‬فِ ْي ‪َ of‬ح ْرف َجار ‪The‬‬
‫‪َ structure.‬ص ِر ْيح‬
‫الر ُج ُل فِ ْي ال َّل ْی ِل‬
‫َص َّلی َّ‬
‫‪The man prayed salah at night.‬‬
‫‪َ .‬م ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح ‪َ is labelled as‬جار – َم ْج ُر ْور ‪In tarkib, the‬‬
‫َیر َص ِر ْيح‬ ‫ِ ِ‬ ‫َف ِ‬ ‫فِ ْعل‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول ف ْیه غ ُ‬ ‫اعل‬
‫ال َّل ْی ِل‬ ‫فِ ْي‬ ‫الر ُج ُل‬

‫َّ‬ ‫َص َّلی‬
‫‪260‬‬
‫‪Note‬‬
‫‪َ can also show‬م ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح ‪In addition to time and place, the‬‬
‫‪direction.‬‬
‫ج ِد‬
‫ب الر ُج ُل إِ َلی ا ْلمس ِ‬
‫َ ْ‬ ‫َذ َه َ َّ‬
‫‪The man went to the masjid.‬‬
‫‪ is not showing the place of the‬إِ َلی ا ْل َم ْس ِج ِد ‪In this example, the phrase‬‬
‫‪verb, but rather its direction.‬‬
‫اإل َما ُم َع َلی ا ْل ِمنْ َب ِر َأ َّيا َم ا ْل ُج ُم َع ِة َوا ْل ِع ْی ِد‬
‫‪َ )7‬ي ُق ْو ُم ْ ِ‬ ‫اء َما ًء‬ ‫َأنْزَ َل الل مِن السم ِ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫ُ َ َّ َ‬
‫َاب اللِ يفِ ال َّل ْی ِل َحتَّی ا ْل َف ْج ِر‬ ‫ِ‬
‫الر ُج ُل كت َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )8‬ي ْق َر ُأ ٰذل َك َّ‬ ‫الش َج َر َة مِ َن ْاْلَ ْر ِ‬
‫ض إِ ْن َبا ًتا‬ ‫الل َّ‬‫َأ ْن َب َت ُ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫َب مِ َن الن َّْو ِم َق ْب َل ا ْل َف ْج ِر‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )9‬ت ْس َت ْیق ُظ ُأ ْخ ُت َهاشم زَ ْين ُ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫َذ َهب ا ْلو َلدُ الص ِغیر إِ َلی ا ْل َقري ِة م ِ‬
‫اش ًیا‬ ‫َْ َ‬ ‫َّ ْ ُ‬ ‫َ َ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫َّاس َق ْب َل ا ْل ُج ُم َع ِة ِفي ا ْل َم ْس ِجد َأ َم َام ْ ِ‬
‫اإل َما ِم‬ ‫‪َ )10‬ج َل َس الن ُ‬ ‫ادقِ ْی َن إِ َلی الن ِ‬
‫َّاس‬ ‫بع َث الل اْلَ ْنبِیاء الص ِ‬
‫َ َ َّ‬ ‫ََ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫ْ‬ ‫ُ‬
‫جد ا ْل َح َرا ِم ل ِ َغ ْی ِر اللِ َر ِّب‬ ‫‪َْ )11‬ل ُي ْس َجدُ فِي ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬
‫ْ‬ ‫ت تِ ْل َك ا ْل َمر َأ ُة مِ َن ا ْل َق ْر َي ِة َراكِ َب ًة‬ ‫َل َقدْ َجا َء ْ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫ات َو ْاْلَ ْر ِ‬ ‫السماو ِ‬ ‫اج ا ْلكِ َرا ُم مِ ْن َم َّك َة ٰه َذا ْاْلُ ْس ُب ْو َع‬
‫ض‬ ‫َّ َ َ‬ ‫َر َج َع ا ْل ُح َّج ُ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫َظ ْرف ‪َ Before a‬ح ْرف َجار ‪Adding a‬‬

‫‪ِ to be preceded‬ش ْب ِه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة ‪ُ form of a‬م َضاف ‪ُ -‬م َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪It is common for a‬‬
‫‪. Sometimes, this can be omitted from‬مِ ْن ‪َ of‬ح ْرف َجار ‪by the‬‬
‫‪translation.‬‬
‫الص ََّل ِة‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ن َق ْب ِل َّ‬
‫م ْ‬
‫‪from before salah‬‬
‫‪before salah‬‬
‫َظ ْرف ‪ُ of the‬م َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪Removing the‬‬
‫‪ُ will be‬م َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪َ can be removed. The‬ب ْعدُ ‪َ and‬ق ْب ُل ‪ُ of‬م َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪The‬‬
‫‪understood from the context.‬‬
‫مِ ْن َق ْب ُل‬
‫‪from before‬‬
‫‪َ .‬ضم ‪َ with‬م ْبنِي ‪َ will be‬ب ْعدُ ‪َ and‬ق ْب ُل ‪In this case, the words‬‬
‫‪261‬‬
‫الل ﴿مِ ْن َق ْب ُل﴾‬ ‫ُوحا﴾ َهدَ ی ُ‬ ‫‪ ﴿ )5‬ن ً‬ ‫﴿ ٰه َذا مِ ْن ِعن ِْد اللِ﴾‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫ك‬ ‫‪ )6‬جاء ٰهؤُ َْل ِء النَّاس مِن ِعن ِْد ا ْلملِ ِ‬ ‫﴿ ُسئِ َل ُم ْو َسى مِ ْن َق ْب ُل﴾‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫َ‬ ‫ُ ْ‬ ‫َ َ‬
‫‪َ )7‬جا َء ٰهؤُ َْل ِء ال ُّط ََّّل ُب مِ ْن ِعن ِْد ٰذل ِ َك َّ‬ ‫آن مِن ِعن ِْد اللِ‬
‫الش ْیخِ‬ ‫َجا َء ا ْل ُق ْر ُ ْ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫آن ِم ْن َب ْع ِد َص ََّل ِة ا ْل َف ْج ِر ِإ َلی َص ََّل ِة ال ُّظ ْه ِر‬
‫‪ )8‬درس ا ْل ُقر ِ‬
‫َْ ُ ْ‬ ‫َّاس مِ ْن َب ْع ِد ٰذل ِ َك‬
‫اب الن ُ‬ ‫َت َ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫اإل َش َار ِة‬‫ظرف ‪َ as‬أسماء ْ ِ‬

‫ْ َ ُ‬ ‫َْ‬
‫اإل َش َارة ‪Some‬‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ُم َشار ‪ُ and a‬م َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪َ . They are used without a‬ظ ْرف ‪َ are‬أ ْس َما ُء ْ ِ‬
‫‪.‬إِ َل ْی ِه‬
‫ْاْلُ ُّم ُهنَا‬
‫‪The mother is here.‬‬
‫َظرف ‪َ used as‬أسماء ْ ِ‬
‫ْ َ ُ‬ ‫ْ‬
‫‪there, at that time‬‬ ‫‪ُ here‬هنَال ِ َك‬ ‫ُهنَا‬
‫‪there‬‬ ‫َث َّم‬ ‫‪here‬‬ ‫ٰه ُهنَا‬
‫‪there‬‬ ‫ُهن َ‬
‫َاك‬
‫الر ُج ِل ا ْل َك ِر ْي ِم ٰه ُهنَا‬ ‫ف َّ‬ ‫‪ُ )9‬ض ُی ْو ُ‬ ‫‪ُ )5‬هنَا ِعنَب َوزَ ْيت ُْون‬ ‫‪ )1‬ا ْل ُكت ُ‬
‫ُب ُهنَا‬
‫جدُ ا ْل َم ِد ْين َِة ا ْل َكبِ ْی ُر ُهنَال ِ َك‬
‫‪َ )10‬م ْس ِ‬ ‫‪ )6‬ا ْل ُخ ْبزُ َوال َّل ْح ُم ٰه ُهنَا‬ ‫اض ْي ُهنَال ِ َك‬
‫‪ )2‬ا ْل َق ِ‬
‫‪ُ ﴿ )11‬هنَال ِ َك ا ْبتُلِ َي ا ْل ُمؤْ مِن ُْو َن﴾‬ ‫‪َ )7‬ما ٰه ُهنَا َو َلد َو َْل بِنْت‬ ‫‪« )3‬ال َّت ْق ٰوی ٰه ُهنَا»‬
‫‪ُ )12‬هنَال ِ َك زُ ْل ِز َل ا ْل ُمؤْ مِن ُْون ِز ْلزَ ًاْل َش ِد ْيدً ا‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ُ ﴿ )8‬هنَال َك َدعَا زَ ك َِر َّيا﴾ َ‬
‫الل‬ ‫َاك َج َبل عَظِ ْیم‬
‫‪ُ )4‬هن َ‬
‫‪262‬‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق ‪ِ as a‬ش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬
‫‪َ if it describes the verb.‬م ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح ‪َ will be the‬جار – َم ْج ُر ْور ‪A‬‬
‫الل َك َعبِ ْید‬ ‫َي ْس َأ ُل الن ُ‬
‫َّاس َ‬
‫‪The people ask Allah like slaves.‬‬
‫‪َ structure.‬م ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح ‪َ is used within a‬ك ‪َ of‬ح ْرف َجار ‪The‬‬
‫َیر َص ِر ْيح‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق غ ُ‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ ‫َف ِ‬
‫عَ بِ ْید‬ ‫ك‬ ‫الل‬

‫َ‬ ‫َّاس‬
‫الن ُ‬ ‫َس َأ َل‬
‫رآن كَا ْلكِ َب ِ‬
‫ار‬ ‫الص ِغ ْی ُر ا ْل ُق َ‬ ‫‪َ )7‬ي ْح َف ُظ ا ْل َو َلدُ َّ‬ ‫‪ )1‬نَا َم ْت َفاطِ َم ُة كَطِ ْف َلة َص ِغ ْی َرة‬
‫آن َك ُق َّراء ُح َّذاق‬ ‫‪َ )8‬ي ْت ُل ْو ٰهؤُ َْل ِء ْاْلَ ْو َْل ُد ا ْل ُق ْر َ‬ ‫اع َك َأ َسد‬
‫الش َج ُ‬‫الر ُج ُل ُّ‬ ‫َم َشی َّ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫س َك َطال ِ َبة ُم ْجت َِهدَ ة‬ ‫‪َ )9‬ت ْجلِ ُس َفاطِ َم ُة فِي الدَّ ْر ِ‬ ‫ب ال ِّط ْف َل ُة ك َِف ْیل َجائِع‬ ‫َتغ َْض ُ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫‪ )10‬ك ََّذ َب النَّبِ َّي ﷺ ُم ْش ِرك ُْو َم َّك َة َك َعاد َو َث ُم ْو َد‬ ‫الو َلدُ ا ْل َكبِ ْی ُر ك ََو َلد َص ِغ ْیر‬‫َب َكی َ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫‪َ )11‬ي ْجلِ ُس ال ُّط ََّّل ُب ِعنْدَ ْاْلَ َساتِ َذ ِة َك ُع َل َما َء ُم َّت َأ ِدبِ ْی َن‬ ‫الصال ِ ُح َكنَبِي‬ ‫عَدَ َل ٰه َذا ا ْل َملِ ُك َّ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫كَر َجال َ‬
‫عُق ََّل َء‬ ‫َاب الن َّْح ِو ٰه َذا ِ‬ ‫‪ )12‬ي ْفهم ال ُّط ََّّلب الص ِ‬ ‫ت ا ْل َخا َل ُة كَطِ ْف َلة َص ِغ ْی َرة‬ ‫ح َك ِ‬‫َض ِ‬
‫غَار كت َ‬ ‫ُ ِّ ُ‬ ‫َ َ ُ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫‪263‬‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول َل ُه ‪ِ as a‬ش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬
‫‪َ if it shows the reason,‬م ْف ُع ْول َل ُه َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح ‪َ can become the‬جار – َم ْج ُر ْور ‪A‬‬
‫‪purpose, or goal of the main verb.‬‬
‫‪َ structure.‬م ْف ُع ْول َل ُه َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح ‪ are used within a‬ب ‪, and‬مِ ْن ‪ِ ,‬ل ‪َ of‬ح ْرف َجار ‪The‬‬
‫َّاس ُم ِص ْی َبة بِ ُّ‬
‫الذن ُْو ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ب‬ ‫َأ َصا َبت الن َ‬
‫‪A calamity befell the people because of (their) sins.‬‬
‫َیر َص ِر ْيح‬ ‫َف ِ‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ ‫فِ ْعل‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول َل ُه غ ُ‬ ‫اعل‬
‫الذن ُْو ِ‬
‫ب‬ ‫ُّ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ب‬ ‫ُم ِص ْی َبة‬ ‫َّاس‬ ‫َأصاب ِ‬
‫ت‬
‫الن َ‬ ‫َ َ‬
‫‪Vocab‬‬
‫‪to surpass, excel‬‬ ‫اق َي ُف ْو ُق َفو ًقا‬
‫‪َ to search‬ف َ‬ ‫اِ ْب َتغَی َي ْبت َِغ ْي اِ ْبتِغَا ًء‬
‫‪to do‬‬ ‫َف َع َل َي ْف َع ُل فِ ْع ًَّل‬ ‫‪to seal, complete‬‬ ‫َخت ََم َي ْختِ ُم َخت ًْما‬
‫‪to wear‬‬ ‫َلبِ َس َي ْل َب ُس ُل ْب ًسا‬ ‫‪to remain hidden‬‬ ‫َخ ِف َي َي ْخ َفی َخ َفا ًء‬
‫‪to blow‬‬ ‫َن َف َخ َينْ ُف ُخ َن ْف ًخا‬ ‫‪to flow‬‬ ‫اض َي ِف ْی ُض َف ْی َضانًا‬ ‫َف َ‬
‫ب ِع ْلم ِع ْل ًما بِال َّت ْق َوی‬ ‫ِ‬
‫الل َطال َ‬ ‫‪َ )8‬ل َی ِز ْيدَ َّن ُ‬ ‫ات لِلن ِ‬
‫َّاس‬ ‫يبین الل ْاْلي ِ‬
‫ُ َ ِّ ُ ُ َ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫اإلن َْس إِ َّْل ل ِ ْل ِع َبا َد ِة‬
‫ج َّن َو ْ ِ‬‫‪َ )9‬ما َخ َل َق الل ا ْل ِ‬ ‫الضع َف ِ‬
‫ُ‬ ‫اء‬ ‫َّاس بِ ُّ َ‬ ‫ُي ْرزَ ُق الن ُ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫‪ )10‬ي ْط ِعم َأ ُخو حامِد هؤُ َْل ِء ا ْل ُف َقراء ل ِ ِر َضی اللِ‬ ‫ي ْفرح ا ْلمؤْ مِنُو َن بِنِعم ِة اللِ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫َ َ‬ ‫ٰ‬ ‫ُ ُ ْ َ‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫َ َ ُ ُ ْ‬
‫الصال ِ َح ِة‬‫ال َّ‬ ‫‪ُ )11‬يدْ ِخ ُل الل ا ْل ُمؤْ مِن ِ ْی َن ا ْل َجنَّ َة بِ ْاْلَع َْم ِ‬
‫ُ‬ ‫الل ال َّظال ِ ِم ْی َن بِال ُّظ ْل ِم‬
‫َل ُی َع ِّذ َب َّن ُ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫َّاس إِ َلی َم َّك َة ا ْل ُم َك َّر َم ِة ل ِ ْل َح ِّج وا ْل ُع ْم َر ِة‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ُ )12‬ي َساف ُر الن ُ‬ ‫ب‬ ‫الذن ُْو ِ‬‫الرزْ َق بِ ُّ‬
‫َّاس ِّ‬ ‫‪ُ )5‬ي ْح َر ُم الن ُ‬
‫‪َ )13‬يدْ ُخ ُل ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن ا ْل َجنَّ َة بِ َر ْح َم ِة اللِ ُث َّم ْاْلَع َْم ِ‬
‫ال‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ي ْح ُض ُر ال ُّط ََّّل ُب الدَّ ْر َس ل ِ ْل ِع ْل ِم‬
‫ان َو ْاْلَع َْم ِ‬ ‫اإليم ِ‬ ‫ِِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫الل فِ ْرع َْو َن َو َها َم َ‬
‫ال‬ ‫الل َد َر َجات ا ْل ُمؤْ من ْی َن بِ ْ ِ ْ َ‬ ‫‪َ )14‬ي ْر َف ُع ُ‬ ‫ان بِال ُّظ ْل ِم‬ ‫‪َ )7‬أ ْه َل َك ُ‬
‫‪264‬‬
‫مِ ْن َأ ْج ِل‬
The noun ‫( َأ ْجل‬because of, for the sake of, due to) is commonly
added to after ‫ مِ ْن‬or ‫ ِل‬to show reason.
ِ ‫ت مِ ْن َأ ْج ِل ا ْل َم َر‬
‫ض‬ ِ ‫يص ِّلی النَّاس فِي ا ْلبیو‬
ُُْ ُ َ ُ
People are performing salah in the homes due to illness.
In tarkib ‫ َأ ْجل‬becomes ‫ ُم َضاف‬. This is written as follows:
‫َم ْف ُع ْول َل ُه َغیْ ُر َص ِر ْيح‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِیْ ِه َغیْ ُر َص ِر ْيح‬ ِ ‫َف‬
ِ ‫ا ْل َم َر‬
‫ض‬ ‫َأ ْج ِل‬ ‫مِ ْن‬ ِ ‫ا ْلبیو‬
‫ت‬ ُُْ ‫فِي‬ ‫َّاس‬
ُ ‫الن‬ ‫ُي َص ِّلی‬
‫َم ْج ُر ْور‬ ‫َجار‬ ‫َم ْج ُر ْور‬ ‫َجار‬
265
‫ ِش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬as a ‫َت ْمیِ ْیز‬
A ‫ َجار – َم ْج ُر ْور‬can become the ‫ َت ْمیِ ْیز َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح‬if it clarifies any ambiguity
within the sentence.
The ‫ َح ْرف َجار‬of ‫فِ ْي‬, ‫مِ ْن‬, and ‫ ب‬are used within a ‫ َت ْمیِ ْیز َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح‬structure.
‫الل النَّبِ َّي فِي ا ْل ِع ْل ِم‬
Allah increased the Prophet in knowledge.
ُ ‫َت ْمیِیْز غ‬
‫َیر َص ِر ْيح‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ ِ ‫َف‬
‫ا ْل ِع ْل ِم‬ ‫فِي‬ ‫النَّبِ َّي‬ ‫الل‬

Notes
The particle ‫ مِ ْن‬is often followed by the word ‫ َح ْی ُث‬. This is translated
as in terms of or according to, and becomes the ‫ َت ْمیِ ْیز َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح‬.
‫ا ْل ِف ْع ُل َث ََّل َث ُة َأ ْق َسام مِ ْن َح ْی ُث الزَّ َم ِن‬
The verb has three types according to its tense.
Vocab
ِ ‫اعدَ ة ج َقو‬
ُ‫اعد‬ ِ ‫َق‬ ‫ُأ ُذن ج آ َذان‬
foundation, rule َ ear
peer, fellow ‫قِ ْرن ج َأ ْق َران‬ sight ‫َب َصر ج َأ ْب َصار‬
close relative ‫ار ُب‬ ِ ‫َق ِر ْيب ج َأ َق‬ teardrop ‫َد ْمع ج ُد ُم ْوع‬
prayer niche ‫ب‬ ِ ‫مِ ْح َراب ج َم َح‬

ُ ‫ار ْي‬ market )‫ُس ْوق ج َأ ْس َواق (مث‬
‫ف‬
ُ ‫اح‬ِ ‫م ص حف ج م ص‬ ‫ َأ ْظ ُهر‬،‫َظ ْهر ج ُظ ُه ْور‬
Quran (written copy) َ َ َ ْ ُ back
‫اض ُع‬ِ ‫مو ِضع ج مو‬ ‫ع َْهد‬
place ََ َْ acquaintance,
era
pledge,
266
‫اإليم ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِِ ِ‬ ‫‪ِ ْ )1‬‬
‫اإلنَا ُء َم ْم ُل ْوء بِ َل َبن َب ِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫الل ا ْل ُمؤْ من ْی َن في ا ْلع ْل ِم َو ْ ْ َ‬ ‫‪َ )7‬ي ِزيدُ ُ‬ ‫ارد‬
‫ین بِالدَّ ْم ِع َخ ْو ًفا َو َر ْغ َب ًة‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪ )2‬اِزْ َدا َد ا ْل َكافِ ُر ْو َن فِ ْي ال ُك ْف ِر‬
‫‪َ )8‬تف ْی ُض َأ ْع ُی ُن ا ْل ُمتَّق َ‬
‫ان ِ‬ ‫ِِ‬ ‫اإليم ِ‬ ‫ِ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫احا‬ ‫اجت َها ًدا ُث َّم ن ََج ً‬ ‫‪َ )9‬فا َق ْت ٰهذه ا ْل ِبن ُْت ا ْل ُم ْجت َِهدَ ُة ْاْلَ ْق َر َ ْ‬ ‫ان‬ ‫‪ )3‬ازْ َدا َد ا ْل ُمؤْ من ُْو َن في ْ َ‬
‫اد ُث َّم فِي الن ََّجاحِ‬ ‫ان يف ْاْلجتِه ِ‬
‫ْ َ‬ ‫اق ٰه َذا ا ْل َو َلدُ ْاْلَ ْق َر َ‬ ‫‪َ )10‬ف َ‬ ‫اإلنَا َء با ْل َماء ا ْل َح ِّار‬ ‫ل الر ُج ُل ْ ِ‬
‫‪َ )4‬م َ َ َّ‬
‫َات وا ْل ُمؤْ مِ ُن ا ْل ِم ْیزَ َ‬
‫ان‬ ‫ان بِالسیئ ِ‬
‫َّ ِّ‬ ‫ل ال َّظال ِ ُم ا ْل ِم ْیزَ َ‬ ‫‪َ )11‬ي ْم َ ُ‬ ‫الر ُس ْو ُل الدُّ ْن َیا بِا ْل ِع ْل ِم َوا ْل َعدْ ِل‬ ‫ل َّ‬ ‫‪َ )5‬م َ َ‬
‫بِا ْلحسن ِ‬
‫َات‬ ‫َت الدُّ ْن َیا َم ْم ُل ْو َء ًة بِال ُّظ ْل ِم َوا ْل َج ْه ِل‬ ‫‪ )6‬كَان ِ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫‪267‬‬
‫ُم ْس َت ْثنًی ‪ِ as a‬ش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬
‫‪ُ is usually omitted‬م ْس َت ْثنًی مِنْ ُه ‪ُ . Its‬م ْس َت ْثنًی ‪َ can also become the‬جار – َم ْج ُر ْور ‪A‬‬
‫‪as it can be understood from context.‬‬
‫َّاس إِ َّْل مِ َن ا ْل َق ْر َي ِة‬
‫َجا َء الن ُ‬
‫‪The people came except from the village.‬‬
‫‪ُ would have been:‬م ْس َت ْثنًی مِنْ ُه ‪The original sentence with the‬‬
‫َّاس مِ ْن ك ُِّل َم َكان إِ َّْل مِ َن ا ْل َق ْر َي ِة‬
‫‪The people came (from all places) except from the village.‬‬
‫ُم ْستَثْنًی َغیْ ُر َص ِر ْيح مِ َن ا ْل َم ْف ُع ْو ِل فِیْ ِه‬ ‫استِثْنَاء‬
‫ف ْ‬‫َح ْر ُ‬ ‫َف ِ‬
‫ا ْل َق ْر َي ِة‬ ‫مِ َن‬ ‫إِ َّْل‬ ‫َّاس‬

‫الن ُ‬ ‫َجا َء‬
‫‪ُ structure.‬م ْس َت ْثنًی ‪َ can be used within a‬ح ْرف َجار ‪Any of the‬‬
‫آن إِ َّْل بعدَ ا ْل ِع َش ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫الل إِ َّْل ل ِ ْل ُم ْش ِركِ ْی َن‬ ‫ِ‬
‫اء‬ ‫ب ا ْل ُق ْر َ َ ْ‬ ‫‪َ )7‬ي ْح َف ُظ ال َّطال ُ‬ ‫‪َ )1‬يغْف ُر ُ‬
‫الل ا ْل ُمؤْ مِن ِ ْی َن إِ َّْل َع َلی ا ْل َم ََّلئِ َك ِة‬ ‫‪ )2‬يسجدُ ا ْلم ْش ِركُو َن إِ َّْل للِ‬
‫‪َ )8‬ف َّض َل ُ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫َْ ُ ُ‬
‫والر ُس ْو ِل‬ ‫‪ )9‬يس َتغْنِي ا ْلمؤْ مِنُو َن إِ َّْل ع ِ ِ‬ ‫الص ََّل ِة‬
‫َن الل َّ‬ ‫ُ ْ‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫‪َ )3‬ي َت َأ َّخ ُر زَ ْيد إِ َّْل َع ِن َّ‬
‫‪ )10‬يح ُضر ال ُّط ََّّلب الدَّ رس إِ َّْل فِي ا ْلمس ِ‬
‫اء‬ ‫ت‬ ‫‪ )4‬يح َف ُظ الدُّ َعاء إِ َّْل مِن ا ْلمو ِ‬
‫َ َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫َ ْ ُ‬ ‫َ َْ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫َ ْ‬
‫‪ )11‬يص ِّلی ا ْلمسلِمو َن إِ َّْل فِي مو ِ‬
‫اض َع ن ِ‬
‫َج َسة‬ ‫َّاس إِ َّْل إِ َلی تِ ْل َك ا ْل َق ْر َي ِة‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ََ‬ ‫ُ ْ ُْ‬ ‫ُ َ‬ ‫‪ُ )5‬ي َساف ُر الن ُ‬
‫‪َ )12‬فر َض الل َخمس ص َلوات إِ َّْل َع َلی الصبی ِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫َّاس إِ َّْل إِ َلی ا ْل َح ِّق‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ي ْه ِدي َّ‬
‫ِّ ْ َ‬ ‫ُ ْ َ َ َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ان الن َ‬
‫‪268‬‬
‫َأ َدا ُة َح ْصر ‪ as an‬إِ َّْل ‪ِ After‬ش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬
‫‪َ .‬أ َدا ُة َح ْصر ‪ when it is an‬إِ َّْل ‪ِ can also come after‬ش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة ‪The‬‬
‫ج ِد‬
‫َْل ُي َص ِّلي َخالِد إِ َّْل فِي ا ْلمس ِ‬
‫َ ْ‬ ‫ْ‬
‫‪Khalid only performs salah in the masjid.‬‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح‬ ‫َأ َدا ُة َح ْصر‬ ‫َف ِ‬
‫َح ْر ُ‬
‫ج ِد‬
‫َ ْ‬ ‫فِي‬ ‫إِ َّْل‬ ‫َخالِد‬ ‫ُي َص ِّل ْي‬ ‫َْل‬
‫‪ُ .‬ج ْم َلة اِ ْس ِم َّیة ‪This also applies to a‬‬

‫الصدْ ِق‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َْل ن ََجا َة إِ َّْل في ِّ‬
‫‪Salvation is only in truthfulness.‬‬
‫‪There is no salvation except in truthfulness.‬‬
‫س‬ ‫َخ َبر َْل لِنَ ْف ِي ا ْل ِ‬
‫جنْ ِ‬ ‫ف َح ْصر‬
‫َح ْر ُ‬ ‫اس ُم َْل‬ ‫س‬ ‫َْل لِنَ ْف ِي ا ْل ِ‬
‫جنْ ِ‬
‫ُ‬ ‫ْ‬
‫الصدْ ِق‬
‫ِّ‬ ‫فِي‬ ‫إِ َّْل‬ ‫ن ََجا َة‬ ‫َْل‬
‫یم﴾‬ ‫‪َ ﴿ )8‬ما الن َّْص ُر إِ َّْل مِ ْن ِعن ِْد اللِ ا ْل َع ِز ِيز ا ْل َحكِ ِ‬ ‫اح َة إِ َّْل فِي ْاْل ِخ َر ِة‬
‫‪َْ )1‬ل َر َ‬
‫اهر‬ ‫‪َْ )9‬ل يتَو َّض ُأ ا ْلمسلِمو َن لِلص ََّل ِة إِ َّْل بِماء َط ِ‬ ‫ف ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن إِ َّْل بِا ْل َك ْع َب ِة‬
‫‪َْ )2‬ل َي ُط ْو ُ‬
‫َ‬ ‫َّ‬ ‫ُ ْ ُْ‬ ‫َ َ‬
‫ب إِ َّْل إِ َلی تِ ْل َك ا ْل َق ْر َي ِة‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ ِ‬
‫‪َ )10‬لن ُي َساف َر ٰذل َك ال َّطال ُ‬ ‫َب َأ ْه ُل الدُّ ْن َیا إِ َّْل فِي الدُّ ْن َیا‬ ‫‪َْ )3‬ل َي ْرغ ُ‬
‫اج ِد‬
‫َّاس إِ َّْل فِي تِ ْل َك ا ْل َم َس ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫اع إِ َّْل َك َأ َسد‬
‫‪َْ )11‬ل ُي َص ِّلي ٰهؤُ َْلء الن ُ‬ ‫الر ُج ُل ُّ‬
‫الش َج ُ‬ ‫‪َ )4‬ما َم َشی َّ‬
‫ج ِد‬‫ب َجدُّ َأ ْح َمدَ ا ْل َم ِر ْي ُض إِ َّْل إِ َلی ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬ ‫‪َْ )12‬ل َي ْذ َه ُ‬ ‫ب‬‫الذن ُْو ِ‬‫الرزْ َق إِ َّْل بِ ُّ‬ ‫‪َْ )5‬ل ُي ْح َر ُم الن ُ‬
‫َّاس ِّ‬
‫ب‬‫ان َص ََّل ِة ا ْل َمغ ِْر ِ‬
‫‪َْ )13‬ل ي ْأك ُُل الصائِمو َن إِ َّْل بعدَ َأ َذ ِ‬
‫َْ‬ ‫َّ ُ ْ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ت ا ْل َكبِ ْی ِر إِ َّْل ُأ َم َرا ُء َأغْن ِ َیا ُء‬‫‪ )6‬ما فِي ٰه َذا ا ْلبی ِ‬
‫َْ‬ ‫َ‬
‫ان إِ َّْل بِ ْاْلجتِه ِ‬
‫اد‬ ‫‪َ )14‬ما َفا َق ْت بِن ُْت زُ َب ْیر ا ْل َكبِ ْی َر ُة ْاْلَ ْق َر َ‬ ‫‪َْ )7‬ل َتنْب ُت ْاْلَ ْشجار و َْل ْاْلَ ْثمار إِ َّْل بِا ْلم ِ‬
‫اء‬
‫ْ َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ ُ‬ ‫َ ُ َ‬ ‫ُ‬
‫‪269‬‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول َم َع ُه ‪ِ as a‬ش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬
‫‪ِ can‬ش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة ‪َ form of a‬جار‪َ -‬م ْج ُر ْور ‪ُ form and the‬م َضاف – ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪Both the‬‬
‫‪َ if they show with whom the verb took‬م ْف ُع ْول َم ْع ُه َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح ‪become the‬‬
‫‪place.‬‬
‫ت ْاْلُ ُّم َم َع َو َل ِد َها‬
‫جاء ِ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫‪The mother came with her child.‬‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول َم ْع ُه َغیْ ُر َص ِر ْيح‬ ‫َف ِ‬
‫جاء ِ‬
‫َو َل ِد َها‬ ‫َم َع‬ ‫ْاْلُ ُّم‬ ‫ت‬ ‫َ َ‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول َم ْع ُه َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح ‪ِ are used within a‬ب ‪َ of‬ح ْرف َجار ‪َ and‬م َع ‪َ of‬ظ ْرف ‪The‬‬
‫‪structure.‬‬
‫‪َ )9‬أ ْط َع َم ا ْل َجدُّ َوا ْل َجدَّ ُة ا ْل ُف َق َرا َء َل ْح ًما بِ ُخ ْبز‬ ‫‪ )1‬إِ ْعتَمر ِ‬
‫ت ْاْلُ ُّم َم َع اْلَ ِ‬
‫ب‬ ‫ََ‬
‫الس ْو ِق َم َع ْاْلَ َب َو ْي ِن‬‫ب ْاْلَ ُخ َو ْاْلُ ْخ ُت إِ َلى ُّ‬ ‫‪َ )10‬ذ َه َ‬ ‫الر ُج ِل ا ْل َغن ِ ِّي‬ ‫َجا َء الت ِ‬
‫َّاج ُر َم َع َّ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫ج ِد‬‫الر ْح ٰم ِن َم َع إِ َما ِم ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬ ‫الش ْی ُخ َع ْبدُ َّ‬
‫‪َ )11‬ر َج َع َّ‬ ‫الصبِ ِّي َت ْأ ِد ْي ًبا‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َص َّلى ا ْل َوالدُ َم َع َّ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫ات إِ َلى ا ْل َم ِد ْين َِة‬ ‫‪ )12‬سا َفر الرج ُال ْاْلَ ْق ِوياء مع ْاْلُمه ِ‬
‫َ ُ َ َ َّ َ‬ ‫َ َ ِّ َ‬ ‫ات بِا ْل َف َواكِ ِه‬ ‫ف التَّمر ِ‬
‫الض ُی ْو ُ َ َ‬ ‫َأك ََل ُّ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫ت ال َّطال ِ َب ُة ا ْل َج ِد ْيدَ ُة َم َع ال َّطال ِ َب ِة ا ْل َق ِد ْي َم ِة‬ ‫س ح َضر ِ‬
‫‪َ )13‬أ ْم ِ َ َ‬ ‫ت َفاطِ َم ُة َم َع َخ ِد ْي َج َة‬ ‫ا ْل َی ْو َم َجا َء ْ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫الدَّ ْر َس‬ ‫ُب َو ْاْلَ ْق ََّل ِم‬ ‫ُي َسافِ ُر ال ُّط ََّّل ُب بِا ْل ُكت ِ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫الصابِ ِر َخالِد‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ص زَ ْيد َم َع ا ْل َو َلد َّ‬ ‫‪َ )14‬ما َقا َم ا ْل َو َلدُ ا ْل ُم ْخلِ ُ‬ ‫الص ِغ ْی ِر ْاْل َن‬ ‫ِ‬
‫الر ُج ُل بِا ْل َو َلد َّ‬ ‫َي ْخ ُر ُج َّ‬ ‫‪)7‬‬
‫احتِ َرا ًما‬ ‫ِ‬
‫الصالحِ إِ َّْل ْ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ل ْل ُم َع ِّل ِم َ‬ ‫َس َی ُح ُّج ُم َح َّمد َم َع َأ ِخ ْي َخالِد َأ ْح َمدَ‬ ‫‪)8‬‬
‫‪270‬‬
‫ ِش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬as an ‫آ َلة‬
A ‫ َجار – َم ْج ُر ْور‬can become the ‫ آ َلة‬if it shows the tool or material by
which the action is carried out.
‫َب ا ْل َو َلدُ بِا ْل َق َل ِم‬
َ ‫َكت‬
The boy wrote with the pen.
‫آ َلة‬ ِ ‫َف‬
‫ـا ْل َق َل ِم‬ ‫بِـ‬ ُ‫ا ْل َو َلد‬ َ ‫َكت‬

‫َب‬
The ‫ َح ْرف َجار‬of ‫ ِب‬and ‫ مِ ْن‬are used within an ‫ آ َلة‬structure.

Exercise 21
‫ج َّن مِ ْن نَار‬ِ ‫ان مِ ْن ُت َراب َوا ْل‬ ِ ْ ‫) َخ َل َق الل‬4
َ ‫اإلن َْس‬ ُ ِّ ِ‫الر ُج ُل ال َّل ْح َم ب‬
‫الس ِّك ْی ِن ا ْل َحا ِّد‬ َّ ‫) َي ْق َط ُع‬1
‫الر َج ُال َب َق َر ًة َو َشا ًة بِ ِس ِّك ْی ِن َخالِد‬ ِ ‫لص ََّل ِة‬ ِ ِ
ِّ ‫) َذ َب َح ٰهؤُ َْلء‬5 َّ ‫) َيت ََو َّض ُأ ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن بِ َماء َطاهر ل‬2
‫اد َق ُة الدَّ ْر َس بِ َق َلم َج ِد ْيد‬
ِ ‫) َك َتب ْت ٰه ِذه ا ْلبِن ُْت الص‬6
َّ َ ‫َج َس بِماء َحار‬ ِ ‫الر ُج ُل ال َّث ْو َب الن‬ ِ
َّ ‫) َيغْس ُل‬3
Note
The ‫ آ َلة‬can occur as a ‫ َمن ُْص ْوب‬slot. However, this is seldom used.
ِ ‫َضرب الرج ُل ا ْل‬
‫ح َم َار َس ْو ًطا‬ ُ َّ َ َ
The man hit the donkey with a whip.
Summary
The following table depicts the slots of a ‫ ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة‬within which a ‫ِش ْب ُه‬
‫ ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬can occur.
‫ ِش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬in a ‫ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة‬
Time /
Tool State Exclusion Clarification Reason Description Object
Place
‫َم ْف ُع ْول‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول‬
‫آ َلة‬ ‫حال‬ ‫ُم ْستَثْنًی‬ ‫َت ْمیِ ْیز‬
‫َم َع ُه‬ ‫َل ُه‬ ‫ُم ْط َلق‬ ‫فِ ْی ِه‬ ‫بِ ِه‬
Deputy
Subject
‫ب‬ ِ
ُ ‫نَائ‬
271
‫ا ْل َف ِ‬
‫اع ِل‬
‫‪272‬‬
Part 2: ‫ ِش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬as a Phrase
In a phrase, a ‫ ِش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬can occur in any of four slots:
1. ‫َن ْعت‬
2. ‫ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬
3. ‫َبدَ ل‬
4. ‫َم ْع ُط ْوف َع َل ْی ِه‬
‫ ِش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬as a ‫َن ْعت‬
If the ‫ ِش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬describes a word within the sentence and is not
directly becoming the ‫ َخ َبر‬, nor is it linked directly to the verb, it
becomes the ‫ َن ْعت َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح‬of that word.
‫الش َج َر ِة‬ َّ ‫َر َأی‬
َّ ‫الر ُج ُل َط ْی ًرا َع َلی‬
The man saw a bird on the tree.
In this example, the phrase ‫الش َج َر ِة‬ َّ ‫ َع َلی‬, on the tree, is describing the
location of the ‫ َط ْی ًرا‬, the bird; it is not the place the verb is taking
place. Therefore, it is the ‫ َن ْعت َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح‬and not the ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح‬.
In a ‫ ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة‬, the tarkib of this is written as follows:
‫الش َج َر ِة‬
َّ ‫عَ َلی‬ ‫َط ْی ًرا‬ ‫الر ُج ُل‬
َّ ‫َر َأی‬
‫نَ ْعت َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح‬ ‫َمنْ ُع ْوت‬
This rule applies to a ‫ ُج ْم َلة ْاس ِم َّیة‬as well.

ِ ‫ٰه َذا ُهدً ی لِلن‬
‫َّاس‬
This is guidance for people.
The tarkib of this in a ‫ ُج ْم َلة ْاس ِم َّیة‬is written as follows:
ِ ‫لِلن‬
‫َّاس‬ ‫ُهدً ی‬ ‫ٰه َذا‬
‫ َم ْج ُر ْور‬-‫َجار‬
‫نَ ْعت َغیْ ُر َص ِر ْيح‬ ‫َمنْ ُع ْوت‬
273
‫ِ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪ٰ )1‬ذل ِ َك َف ْضل‬
‫ین َو َر ْح َمة‬ ‫‪ )12‬في ا ْل ُق ْرآن ُهدً ى ل ْل ُمتَّق َ‬
‫‪َ )13‬ي ْأك ُُل ْاْلَ ْو َْل ُد َف َواكِ َه مِ َن ا ْل َح ِد ْي َق ِة‬ ‫‪ٰ ﴿ )2‬ذل ِ َك َف ْض ُل اللِ﴾‬
‫ت َشاب مِ ْن تِ ْل َك ا ْل َق ْر َي ِة‬ ‫‪َ )14‬لیس فِي ا ْلبی ِ‬
‫َْ‬ ‫ْ َ‬ ‫‪ٰ )3‬ذل ِ َك َف ْضل َع َلی الن ِ‬
‫َّاس‬
‫ت ا ْل َخا َل ُة َث ْو ًبا َج ِد ْيدً ا مِ َن ا ْل َم ِد ْين َِة‬ ‫‪ )15‬اِ ْشتَر ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫‪ٰ )4‬ذل ِ َك َف ْض ُل اللِ عَلی الن ِ‬
‫َّاس‬
‫الشاب مِن تِ ْل َك ا ْل َقري ِة فِي ا ْلبی ِ‬ ‫ين ْ ِ‬
‫ت‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫‪َ )16‬ل ْی َس َّ ُّ ْ‬ ‫اإل ْسَّل ُم‬ ‫‪ )5‬إِ َّن الدِّ َ‬
‫ِ ِ‬
‫الل َم ْر َي َم َوع ْی َسی ڠ آ َي ًة ل ْلعا َلم َ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ين ِعنْدَ اللِ ْ ِ‬ ‫‪﴿ )6‬إِ َّن الدِّ َ‬
‫ین‬ ‫‪َ )17‬ج َع َل ُ‬ ‫اإل ْسَّل ُم﴾‬
‫اب‬‫الس ْو ِق َص ْو ًتا مِ َن ا ْل ِم ْح َر ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪ُ )7‬أولئِ َك عَلى هدً ى مِن اللِ‬
‫‪َ )18‬سم َع نَاس في ُّ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ُ‬
‫َار َأعْ نَا ًبا ُح ْل َو ًة ِم َن ا ْل ِج َب ِ‬
‫ال‬ ‫‪َ )19‬أ َك َل ِ‬
‫ت ا ْل َبن ُ‬ ‫رآن ا ْل َك ِريم كِتَاب مِن اللِ‬ ‫‪ )8‬ا ْل ُق ُ‬
‫الصغ ُ‬ ‫َات ِّ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ُْ‬
‫ات َش َرف ِم ْن ُق َر ْيش‬ ‫‪ )20‬كَان َْت َخ ِد ْي َج ُة ڤ ا ْم َر َأ ًة َذ َ‬ ‫‪َ )9‬قدْ جاء َأ ْنبِیاء اللِ بِآيات مِن اللِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ َ َ ُ‬
‫ت مِ َن ا ْل ِم ْح َر ِ‬
‫اب‬ ‫الس ْو ِق َّ‬
‫الص ْو َ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َّاس في ُّ‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )21‬سم َع الن ُ‬ ‫‪َ )10‬جزَ ا ُء ا ْل ُمت َِّق ْی َن ِعنْدَ اللِ َجنَّات‬
‫َاب ا ْل ُح ْل َو َة ِم َن ا ْل ِج َب ِ‬
‫ال‬ ‫َار ْ َ‬
‫اْلعْ ن َ‬ ‫الصغ ُ‬
‫‪َ )22‬أ َك َل ِ‬
‫ت ا ْل َبن ُ‬
‫َات ِّ‬ ‫‪َ )11‬ي ْأك ُُل ْاْلَ ْو َْل ُد ا ْل َف َواكِ َه مِ َن ا ْل َح ِد ْي َق ِة‬
‫‪Notes‬‬
‫‪ِ in a single sentence‬ش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة ‪In some cases, it will be possible for the‬‬
‫‪َ .‬م ْف ُع ْول ‪َ or a‬ن ْعت ‪to be taken as both a‬‬
‫جاء بینَات مِن اللِ‬ ‫جاء بینَات مِن اللِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫َ َ َ ِّ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ َ َ ِّ‬
‫‪Signs from Allah came.‬‬ ‫‪Signs came from Allah.‬‬
‫‪One tarkib of this will be written as follows:‬‬
‫َف ِ‬
‫مِن اللِ‬ ‫َب ِّینَات‬ ‫َجا َء‬
‫َ‬
‫َجار‪َ -‬م ْج ُر ْور‬
‫نَ ْعت َغیْ ُر َص ِر ْيح‬ ‫َمنْ ُع ْوت‬
‫‪274‬‬
‫‪The alternative tarkib of this will be written as follows:‬‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِیْ ِه َغیْ ُر َص ِر ْيح‬ ‫َف ِ‬
‫مِن اللِ‬ ‫َب ِّینَات‬ ‫َجا َء‬
‫َ‬
‫َجار‪َ -‬م ْج ُر ْور‬
‫ب‬ ‫ار ِ‬ ‫ل َق ِ‬ ‫‪ )8‬جاء ا ْلحجاج بِم ِ‬
‫اء زَ ْمزَ َم مِ ْن َم َّك َة ل ِ ْ َ‬ ‫َ َ ُ َّ ُ َ‬ ‫ت َم ْو ِع َظة مِ َن اللِ َو ِش َفاء‬ ‫َقدْ َجا َء ْ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫ان مِ َن ا ْل َمدْ َر َس ِة‬ ‫اق ا ْل َولدُ ا ْل ُم ْجت َِهدُ ْاْلَ ْق َر َ‬
‫‪َ )9‬ف َ‬ ‫َّاس بِ ُم َح َّمد ﷺ‬ ‫الض َع َفا ُء مِ َن الن ِ‬ ‫آ َمن ُّ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫اع ُیل ڠ ا ْل َق َو ِاعدَ ِم َن ا ْل َب ْی ِت‬ ‫‪ )10‬ر َفع ِإبر ِاهیم و ِإسم ِ‬ ‫يع َلم الل ا ْل َقو َل فِي الس ِ‬
‫ماء َو ْاْلَ ْر ِ‬
‫ض‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫َ َ َْ ُ َ ْ َ‬ ‫َّ‬ ‫َْ ُ ُ ْ‬
‫ِ ِ ِ‬ ‫الل ِإ َلى الن ِ‬ ‫َب إِ َّْل َي ْو َم ْی ِن مِ ْن َر َم َض َ‬
‫ین‬ ‫َّاس آيات َب ِّی َنات َو َم ْوع َظ ًة ل ْل ُمتَّق َ‬ ‫‪َ )11‬أنْزَ َل ُ‬ ‫ان‬ ‫َما َصا َم ْت زَ ْين ُ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫اإل َما ُم ال َّث ْو َب ا ْل َج ِد ْيدَ مِ َن ا ْل َم ِد ْين َِة ا ْل ُمن ََّو َر ِة‬
‫‪َ )12‬لبِ َس ْ ِ‬ ‫َّاس بِ ُم َح َّمد ﷺ‬ ‫الض َع َفا ُء مِ َن الن ِ‬‫‪َ )5‬أ َّو ًْل آ َمن ُّ‬
‫ان ا ْل َج ِم ْی َل ِم َن ا ْل َم ْس ِجد ا ْل َح َرا ِم‬ ‫َّاس ْ َ‬
‫اْل َذ َ‬ ‫‪َ )13‬ي ْس َم ُع الن ُ‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ي ْبت َِغ ْي ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن َف ْض ًَّل مِ َن اللِ َو ِر ْضوا ًنا‬
‫اْلغْنِیاء ِمن َقو ِم ال َّن ِبي الصالِ ِح ُشعیب ِ‬ ‫ف مِ َن ا ْل َم ِد ْين َِة‬
‫‪ )7‬إِنَّما َت ْقر ُأ َفاطِم ُة مِن ا ْلمصح ِ‬
‫بالل‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫ِّ َّ‬ ‫‪َ )14‬ما آ َم َن ْ َ َ ُ ْ ْ‬ ‫َ َ ُ ْ َ‬ ‫َ َ‬
‫‪Notes‬‬
‫‪َ , which means below or beneath.‬ظ ْرف ‪ُ is a‬د ْو َن ‪The word‬‬
‫‪. This is translated as apart‬مِ ْن ‪In the Quran, it is often used with‬‬
‫‪َ to the word before or‬حال ‪َ or‬ن ْعت ‪from or besides. It becomes the‬‬
‫‪after it.‬‬
‫يعبدُ ا ْلم ْش ِركُو َن ْاْلَصنَام مِن دو ِن اللِ‬
‫ْ َ ْ ُْ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫َُْ ُ‬
‫‪The polytheists worship idols apart from Allah.‬‬
‫‪275‬‬
‫ ِش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬as a ‫َبدَ ل‬
A ‫ ِش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬can become the ‫ َبدَ ل‬of another ‫ ِش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬.
‫الش ْر ِك مِ ْن ِع َبا َد ِة ْاْلَ ْصنَا ِم‬
ِّ ‫الل ُق َر ْي ًشا مِ َن‬
ُ ‫ن ََّجی‬
Allah saved the Quraish from polytheism:
from worshipping idols.
‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه َثان َغیْ ُر َص ِر ْيح‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ ِ ‫َف‬
‫ِع َبا َد ِة ْاْلَ ْصنَا ِم‬ ‫مِ ْن‬ ‫الش ْر ِك‬

ِّ ‫مِ َن‬ ‫ُق َر ْي ًشا‬ ‫الل‬
Instead of the entire ‫ ِش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬becoming the ‫ ُم ْبدَ ل مِنْ ُه‬, it is more

common for the ‫ َم ْج ُر ْور‬to be the ‫ ُم ْبدَ ل مِنْ ُه‬on its own, followed by
another noun which becomes the ‫ َبدَ ل‬.
‫الش ْر ِك ِع َبا َد ِة ْاْلَ ْصنَا ِم‬
ِّ ‫الل ُق َر ْي ًشا مِ َن‬
Allah saved the Quraish from polytheism,
from worshipping idols.
‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه َثان‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ ِ ‫َف‬
‫ِع َبا َد ِة ْاْلَ ْصنَا ِم‬ ‫الش ْر ِك‬

ِّ ‫مِ َن‬ ‫ُق َر ْي ًشا‬ ‫الل‬
276
‫ ِش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬as a ‫َم ْع ُطوف‬
A ‫ ِش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬can become a ‫ َم ْع ُطوف‬.
ِ ْ ‫َّاس َع َلی‬
‫اإلبِ ِل َو َع َلی ا ْل ُح ُم ِر‬ ُ ‫َب الن‬
ُ ‫َي ْرك‬
People ride camels and donkeys.
‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه َغیْ ُر َص ِر ْيح‬ ِ ‫َف‬
‫ا ْل ُح ُم ِر‬ ‫عَ َلی‬ ‫َو‬ ِْ

‫اإلبِ ِل‬ ‫عَ َلی‬ ‫َّاس‬
ُ ‫الن‬ ‫َب‬

‫یه‬ ْ َْ
However, instead of the entire ‫ ِش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬becoming the ‫ َم ْع ُط ْوف‬, it is
more common for the ‫ َم ْج ُر ْور‬to be the ‫ َم ْع ُط ْوف َع َل ْی ِه‬on its own, with
another noun becoming the ‫ َم ْع ُط ْوف‬.
ِ ْ ‫َّاس َع َلی‬
‫اإلبِ ِل َوا ْل ُح ُم ِر‬ ُ ‫َب الن‬
People ride camels and donkeys.
‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه َغیْ ُر َص ِر ْيح‬ ِ ‫َف‬
‫ا ْل ُح ُم ِر‬ ‫َو‬ ِْ
‫اإلبِ ِل‬ ‫عَ َلی‬ ‫َّاس‬
ُ ‫الن‬ ‫َب‬
‫یه‬ ْ َْ
Note
When a ‫ ِش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬is ‫ َم ْع ُط ْوف‬, it is not necessary for the ‫ َح ْرف‬and ‫ َظ ْرف‬to
be the same.
‫َّاس فِي الدُّ ْن َیا َو َي ْو َم ا ْل ِق َیا َم ِة‬
ِ ‫النَّبِي ُم َح َّمد ﷺ َس ِّیدُ الن‬
ُّ
The Prophet Muhammad ‫ ﷺ‬is the leader of people in
the world and on the day of Resurrection.
In this example, the ‫ َم ْع ُط ْوف َع َل ْی ِه‬is a ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح‬, and the ‫ َم ْع ُط ْوف‬is in
the ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬-‫ ُم َضاف‬form of ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه‬.
277
‫َّاس ل ِ َص ََّل ِة ا ْل ُج ُم َع ِة فِي ا ْل ُمدُ ِن َْل فِي ا ْل ُق َری‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َي ْجتَم ُع الن ُ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫فِي ا ْل ُق ُب ْو ِر َو َي ْو َم ا ْل ِق َیا َم ِة ُي َع َّذ ُب ال َّظال ِ ُم ْو َن ع ََذا ًبا َش ِد ْيدً ا‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫اج ِد‬ ‫ت َوفِي ا ْلمس ِ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫يتَو َّض ُأ ا ْلمسلِمو َن َقب َل الص ََّل ِة فِي ا ْلبیو ِ‬
‫ُُْ‬ ‫َّ‬ ‫ُ ْ ُْ ْ‬ ‫َ َ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫الص ََّل ِة َو َق ْب َل الن َّْو ِم‬ ‫ِ ِ‬
‫الصغ ْی ُر آ َي َة ا ْل ُك ْرس ِّي في َّ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َي ْق َر ُأ ٰه َذا ال ِّط ْف ُل َّ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫اب ول ِ ْل َجزَ ِاء‬ ‫ح َس ِ‬ ‫َلیح ُشر َّن الل النَّاس يوم ا ْل ِقیام ِة مِن ا ْل ُقبو ِر ل ِ ْل ِ‬
‫َ َْ َ َ َ َ ُْ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫َ ْ َ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫الصالِحِ ُش َع ْیب باللِ َو َْل بِا ْل َی ْو ِم ْاْل ِخ ِر‬ ‫ِ ِ‬
‫‪َ )6‬ما آ َم َن ْاْلَغْن َیا ُء م ْن َق ْو ِم النَّبِ ِّي َّ‬
‫ب‬ ‫الذن ُْو ِ‬‫ار مِ ْن َأ ْج ِل ُّ‬ ‫ان َو َع َلی ْاْلَ ْب َص ِ‬ ‫ب و َع َلی ْاْل َذ ِ‬
‫الل َع َلی ا ْل ُق ُل ْو ِ َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )7‬ي ْخت ُم ُ‬
‫اق ڠ‬ ‫‪ )8‬ع ََّذ َب َملِ ُك مِ ْص َر ال َّظال ِ ُم فِ ْرع َْو ُن َأ ْو َْل َد النَّبِي َي ْع ُق ْو َب ْب ِن إِ ْس َح َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ض َأ ْو ِعنْدَ ا ْل َب ِ‬
‫اب‬ ‫‪َ )9‬ي ْجلِ ُس ٰهؤُ َْل ِء ال ُّط ََّّل ُب إِ َّما َع َلی ا ْل ُك ْر ِسي َأ ْو َع َلی ْاْلَ ْر ِ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ب‬ ‫ف ُث َّم َع ْن َظ ْه ِر ا ْل ُق ُل ْو ِ‬ ‫اح ِ‬ ‫رآن ا ْل َك ِريم مِن ا ْلمص ِ‬
‫َ َ‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫َاب اللِ ا ْل ُق َ‬ ‫اظ كت َ‬
‫‪ )10‬ي ْت ُلو ا ْلح َّف ُ ِ‬
‫ُ‬ ‫َ‬
‫الل َع َلی ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ِم ْین ا ْل ُمت َِّق ْی َن َوا ْل ُم ْسلِ ِم ْی َن َغ ْی ِر ا ْل ُمت َِّق ْی َن َو َع َلی ا ْل َكافِ ِر ْي َن‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ُ )11‬ينْع ُم ُ‬
‫َاب ا ْل َی ُه ْو ِد َوالن ََّص َاری‬ ‫خن ِْز ْي ِر َع َلی ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ِم ْی َن َو َع َلی َأ ْه ِل ا ْلكِت ِ‬ ‫‪َ )12‬ل َقدْ حرم الل َلحم ا ْل ِ‬
‫َ َّ َ ُ ْ َ‬
‫اش ِع ْی َن َر َغ ًبا َو َر َه ًبا‬ ‫ف ا ْلحجاج حو َل ا ْل َكعب ِة سبعا وبین الص َفا وا ْلمرو ِة سبعا َخ ِ‬
‫ْ َ َ ْ ً َ َ ْ َ َّ َ َ ْ َ َ ْ ً‬ ‫‪َ )13‬ي ُط ْو ُ ُ َّ ُ َ ْ‬
‫ال َو ِفي ْاْلَ ْو ِد َي ِة‬
‫ت َو ِفي ْاْلَ ْس َو ِاق َوعَ َلی ا ْل ِج َب ِ‬ ‫اجد و ِفي ا ْلبیو ِ‬
‫ُُ ْ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ُ )14‬ي َص ِّلي ا ْل ُم ْس ِل ُم ْو َن َخ ْم َس َم َّرات في ا ْل َی ْو ِم في ا ْل َم َس ِ َ‬
‫‪278‬‬
‫ ِش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬as a ‫ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح‬
The ‫ ُم َضاف‬becomes ‫ َم ْع ِر َفة‬when the ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬is ‫ َم ْع ِر َفة‬even though it does
not have an ‫ َا ْل‬. (see page 176)
The ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح‬structure is used to show that the ‫ ُم َضاف‬is ‫نَكِ َرة‬
whilst the ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬is ‫ َم ْع ِر َفة‬.
The ‫ َح ْرف َجار‬of ‫ مِ ْن‬or ‫ ِل‬are used in the ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح‬structure.
ُ ‫ ا ْل ُم َض‬as a ‫نَكِ َرة‬
‫اف‬ ُ ‫ ا ْل ُم َض‬as a ‫َم ْع ِر َفة‬
‫اف‬
‫اِ ْبن ل ِ َّلر ُج ِل‬ ‫الر ُج ِل‬ ِ

َّ ‫ا ْب ُن‬

a son of the man the son of the man
ِ ‫َص َف َحات مِ َن ا ْلكِت‬
‫َاب‬ ِ ‫ات ا ْلكِت‬
‫َاب‬ ُ ‫َص َف َح‬

a few pages of the book the pages of the book
ِ ‫مِ َن ا ْلكِت‬
‫َاب‬ ‫َص َف َحات‬
‫ َم ْج ُر ْور‬-‫َجار‬
‫ُم َضاف إِ َلیْ ِه َغیْ ُر َص ِر ْيح‬ ‫ُم َضاف‬
Notes
1. The ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح‬structure is commonly comprised of a ‫ُم َضاف‬
and ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬in which the ‫ ُم َضاف‬is the plural of the main ‫ ُم َضاف‬.
ِ ‫ات ا ْل ُقر‬
‫آن‬ ِ ‫آية مِن آي‬ ِ ‫آي ُة ا ْل ُقر‬
‫آن‬
ْ َ ْ َ ْ َ

one verse of the Quran the verse of the Quran
ِ ‫آي‬
ِ ‫ات ا ْل ُقر‬
‫آن‬ ‫مِ َن‬
ْ َ ‫آ َية‬
‫ُم َضاف – ُم َضاف إِ َلیْ ِه‬
‫ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح‬ ‫ُم َضاف‬
279
‫ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه َغ ْی ُر ‪ُ of a‬م َضاف ‪ can become the‬كَثِ ْیر ‪َ and‬قلِ ْیل ‪َ ,‬ش ْيء ‪2. The words‬‬
‫‪َ . These are translated as some, a bit of, a piece of, a few,‬ص ِر ْيح‬
‫‪many, etc.‬‬
‫َشيء مِن ا ْلم ِ‬
‫اء‬ ‫َ َ‬ ‫ْ‬
‫‪a bit of water‬‬
‫اب‬ ‫ات ا ْلكِ َت ِ‬ ‫ت ا ْلبِنْ ُت ا ْلمجت َِهدَ ُة ص َفح ِ‬
‫َ َ‬ ‫ُ ْ‬
‫‪َ )8‬قر َأ ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫َذ َب َح ا ْل َغن ِ ُّي َقلِ ْی ًَّل مِ َن ا ْل َب َق َر ِة‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫اب‬ ‫ت ا ْلبِنْ ُت ا ْل ُم ْجت َِهدَ ُة َص َف َحات مِ َن ا ْلكِ َت ِ‬ ‫‪َ )9‬قر َأ ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫ان َكثِ ْی ًرا مِ َن النَّ ِ‬
‫اس‬ ‫الش ْی َط ُ‬ ‫َأ َض َّل َّ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫ار ِد‬ ‫‪َ )10‬ش ِرب الرج ُل ا ْلم ْتعب َشی ًئا مِن ا ْلم ِ‬
‫اء ا ْل َب ِ‬ ‫السنَ َة إِ ْع َت َم َر َو َلدَ ا ا ْل ُم َع ِّل ِم‬ ‫ِِ‬
‫ُ َ ُ ْ َ َ‬ ‫َ َّ ُ‬ ‫َهذه َّ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫اب ا ْل َم ِد ْين َِة‬‫‪َ )11‬ا ْل َی ْو َم َي ْل َب ُس َأخ ل ِ َفاطِ َم َة َث ْو ًبا مِ ْن ثِ َی ِ‬ ‫ان ل ِ ْل ُم َع ِّل ِم‬ ‫َه ِذ ِه السنَ َة إِ ْع َتمر و َلدَ ِ‬
‫ََ َ‬ ‫َّ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫ج َب ِ‬ ‫اء َوالنُّ ُج ْو ِم َوا ْل ِ‬ ‫‪ )12‬ينْ ُظر إِبن ل ِلرج ِل إِ َلى السم ِ‬ ‫الس ْو َر ِة َت ْرتِ ْی ًَّل‬ ‫ِ ِ‬ ‫‪َ )5‬ر َّت َل ِ‬
‫ال‬ ‫َّ َ‬ ‫َ ُ ْ َّ ُ‬ ‫اإل َما ُم َكث ْی ًرا م َن ُّ‬
‫ب َص ْب ًرا عَظِ ْی ًما‬
‫‪َ )13‬ت ْصبِ ُر بِنْت ل ِ ْْلِ َما ِم َع َلى ا ْل َم َصائِ ِ‬ ‫ات ا ْل ُقر ِ‬
‫آن‬ ‫ْ‬
‫‪ )6‬ما ن َِسي ا ْلو َلدُ الص ِغیر آي ًة مِن آي ِ‬
‫َّ ْ ُ َ ْ َ‬ ‫َ َ‬ ‫َ‬
‫ال ِفي س ِبی ِل ِ‬ ‫ِ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪َ )7‬ما َأ َطا َع النَّبِي ُن ْو ًحا ڠ إِ َّْل َقلِ ْیل مِ َن النَّ ِ‬
‫الل‬ ‫الصال َح ُة كَ ث ْی ًرا م َن ا ْل َم ِ ْ َ ْ‬
‫‪َ )14‬أ ْن َف َقت ا ْل َم ْر َأ ُة َّ‬ ‫اس‬ ‫َّ‬
‫‪280‬‬
‫‪ُ and in Phrases‬ج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة ‪ِ in‬ش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة ‪Summary of‬‬
‫اس ِم َّیة ‪ِ in a‬ش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬
‫ْس‬ ‫َخ َبر َْل لِنَ ْف ِي ا ْل ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ت‬
‫]شبْ ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة[ ]اسم[ ‪There is no‬‬
‫ِ‬ ‫]شبْ ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة[ ]مبتدأ[ ‪There is a‬‬
‫ِ‬ ‫]شبْ ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة[ ‪] is‬مبتدأ[ ‪The‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة ‪ِ in a‬ش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬

‫‪Time /‬‬ ‫‪Object/‬‬
‫‪Tool‬‬ ‫‪State‬‬ ‫‪Exclusion‬‬ ‫‪Clarification‬‬ ‫‪Reason‬‬ ‫‪Description‬‬ ‫‪Deputy‬‬
‫‪Place‬‬
‫‪Subject‬‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول‬ ‫بِ ِه‬
‫آ َلة‬ ‫حال‬ ‫ُم ْستَثْنًی‬ ‫َت ْمیِ ْیز‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َم َع ُه‬ ‫َل ُه‬ ‫ُم ْط َلق‬ ‫فِیْ ِه‬ ‫ب‬‫نَائ ُ‬
‫ا ْل َف ِ‬
‫اع ِل‬
‫ُظ ُر ْوف‬
‫‪Any‬‬ ‫فِي‪َ ،‬ع َلی‪،‬‬ ‫‪Any‬‬

‫بِـ ‪ ،‬مِ ْن‬ ‫بِـ‬ ‫بِـ ‪َ ،‬م َع‬ ‫بِـ ‪ ،‬فِ ْي‪ ،‬مِ ْن‬ ‫لِـ ‪ ،‬مِ ْن‪ ،‬بِـ ‪،‬‬ ‫َك‪ ،‬بِـ ‪ ،‬مِ ْن‬ ‫حرف جار‬
‫حرف جار‬ ‫إ َلی‪ ،‬مِ ْن‪،‬‬
‫َحتّٰی‬
‫‪ِ in a Phrase‬ش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬
‫َم ْع ُط ْوف‬ ‫بَدَ ل‬ ‫نَ ْعت‬

‫‪Appositive‬‬
‫‪Conjunction‬‬ ‫‪Description‬‬
‫‪Phrase‬‬
‫ف ا ْلحجاج إِ َّْل للِ‬ ‫ا ْلهدَ ی فِي ا ْل ُقر ِ‬
‫‪َْ )7‬ل َي ُط ْو ُ ُ َّ ُ‬ ‫آن‬ ‫ْ ْ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫ف ا ْلحجاج ا ْلكِرام للِ‬ ‫َْل ريب فِي ا ْل ُقر ِ‬
‫َ ُ‬ ‫‪َ )8‬ي ُط ْو ُ ُ َّ ُ‬ ‫آن‬ ‫َْ َ ْ ْ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫َّاس إِ َّْل فِي َأ َّيا ِم ا ْل َح ِّج‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )9‬ي ْعتَم ُر الن ُ‬ ‫آن‬‫َْل ُهدٰ ی إِ َّْل فِي ا ْل ُقر ِ‬
‫ْ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫اج فِ ْي َأ َّيا ِم ا ْل َح ِّج‬
‫ف ا ْل ُح َّج ُ‬‫‪َ )10‬ي ُط ْو ُ‬ ‫آن ُهدً ی َو َر ْح َمة‬ ‫فِي ا ْل ُقر ِ‬
‫ْ ْ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫ف َب ْع ُض ا ْل ُح َّجاجِ َم َع ْاْلَ ْو َْل ِد‬ ‫‪َ )11‬ي ُط ْو ُ‬ ‫ت‬ ‫اف بِا ْلبی ِ‬
‫ُي َط ُ َ ْ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫الص َحا َب ِة‬‫اج كالنَّبِ ِّي َو َّ‬ ‫ف ا ْل ُح َّج ُ‬‫‪َ )12‬ي ُط ْو ُ‬ ‫َّاس فِ ْي َم َّك َة‬
‫ف الن ُ‬ ‫َي ُط ْو ُ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫‪281‬‬
‫ت اللِ ا ْل َح َرا ِم‬
‫ف ا ْلحجاج بِا ْل َكعب ِة بِبی ِ‬
‫َْ َْ‬ ‫‪َ )13‬ي ُط ْو ُ ُ َّ ُ‬
‫‪َ )1‬ي ُص ْو ُم ا ْل َو َلدُ مِ َن ا ْل َم ِد ْين َِة َث َمانِ َی َة َأ َّيام مِ َن َّ‬
‫الش ْه ِر‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ ِ‬
‫‪ِ )2‬إ َّن ال َّن ِب َّي ُم َح َّمدَ ْب َن عَ ْبد الل َر ُسول م ْن َر ِّب ا ْل َعا َلم َ‬
‫ین‬
‫وْل اْلَ ْو َْل ِد َب ْل فِ ْي ِد ْين‬ ‫ال َ‬ ‫‪َ )3‬لن َّي ْجزَ َع مؤْ مِن متَّق َع َلی م ِص ْی َبة فِي ا ْلم ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫ُ‬
‫اع ْی ُل َب ْیتًا للِ فِي َواد َغ ْی ِر ِذ ْي زَ ْرع فِي َم َّك َة َب ْی َن َج َب َل ْی ِن‬ ‫اهیم وإِسم ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )4‬بنَی النَّبِ َّیان إِ ْب َر ْ ُ َ ْ َ‬
‫ك ال َّظال ِ ِم فِ ْرع َْو َن‬ ‫‪َ )5‬ل َقدْ ب ِغي َع َلی َأو َْل ِد النَّبِي يع ُقوب ڠ فِي مِصر فِي عَه ِد ا ْلملِ ِ‬
‫ْ َ‬ ‫ْ َ‬ ‫ِّ َ ْ ْ َ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫ُ َ‬
‫الص ِغ ْی ُر َخ ْم َس َة ع ََش َر‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )6‬ي ُص ْو ُم ا ْب ُن َفاط َم َة ال َكبِ ْی ُر َث ََّل َث َة َأ َّيام م َن ال ّش ْه ِر َوا ْب ُن إِ ْس َماع ْی َل َّ‬
‫َاء و َأ ْثنَاء تِ ََّلو ِة ا ْل ُقر ِ‬‫ِ‬ ‫ِ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫آن َخ ْو ًفا َو َر َغ ًبا‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫الص ََّلة َوفي الدُّ ع َ َ َ‬ ‫‪َ )7‬تف ْی ُض َأ ْع ُی ُن ا ْل ُمتَّق ْی َن بِالدُّ ُم ْو ِع في َّ‬
‫الر َج ُال َوالن َِّسا ُء ال َی ْو َم إِ َلی َم َّك َة ا ْل ُم َك َّر َم ِة للِ ُع ْم َر ِة َو َب ْعد ُأ ْس ُب ْوع إلِی ا ْل َم ِد ْين َِة ا ْل ُمن ََّو َر ِة‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )8‬ل ُی َساف َر َّن ٰهؤُ َْلء ِّ‬
‫ِ ِ‬ ‫‪َ )9‬ي ْق َر ُأ َأ ُخ ْو َحامِد َأ ْح َمدُ َخ ْم ًسا َو ِع ْش ِر ْي َن َص ْف َح ًة مِ ْن ٰه َذا ا ْلكِت ِ‬
‫احا‬ ‫َاب َل ْی َل ًة َو َخ ْم َس َة ع ََش َر م ْن ٰذل َك َص َب ً‬
‫ج ِد ل ِ َخ ْمس َّو ِع ْش ِر ْي َن َدقِ ْی َق ًة‬ ‫ج ِد ل ِ َخ ْم َس ع َْش َر َة َدقِ ْی َق ًة وإِ َما ُم ٰذل ِ َك ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬ ‫ب إِ َما ُم ٰه َذا ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )10‬ي ْو َم ا ْل ُج ُم َعة َي ْخ ُط ُ‬
‫جد للِ‬ ‫َاء َم ْس ِ‬‫ار سهل وسهیل ﭭ لِبِن ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ ِ ِ ِ‬ ‫‪ )11‬بعدَ ا ْل ِهجر ِة ْاشتَری النَّبِي ﷺ َأ ً ِ‬
‫رضا في ا ْل َمد ْينَة م ْن َيت ْی َم ْی ِن م َن ْاْلَن َْص ِ َ ْ َ ُ َ ْ‬ ‫ُّ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫َْ‬
‫‪282‬‬
Supplement: ‫ َح ْرف َجار‬as a ‫َح ْر ُف ِص َلة‬
A ‫ َح ْرف َجار‬can be used to create emphasis in a sentence, without its
original translation. In this case, it is called ‫ َح ْر ُف ِص َلة‬.
Two ‫ َح ْرف َجار‬function as ‫ َح ْر ُف ِص َلة‬:
1. ‫ِب‬
2. ‫مِ ْن‬
ِ as a ‫ف ِص َلة‬
‫ب‬ ُ ‫َح ْر‬
The particle ‫ ِب‬can be added to the ‫ َخ َبر‬of ‫ َل ْی َس‬or ‫ َما ا ْل ُم َش َّب َه ُة بِ َل ْی َس‬.
‫َل ْی َس زَ ْيد بِـ َقائِم‬  ‫َل ْی َس زَ ْيد َقائِ ًما‬
 ‫َما زَ ْيد بِـ َقائِم‬

‫َما زَ ْيد َقائ ًما‬ ِ
This creates emphasis but is not reflected in the translation.

Zaid is not standing.
In tarkib, this is labelled as ‫ َح ْر ُف ِص َلة‬and it does not become part of
any of the main slots.
‫َخبَ ُر َلیْ َس‬ ‫ف ِص َلة‬
ُ ‫َح ْر‬ ‫اِ ْس ُم َلیْ َس‬ ‫فِ ْعل نَاقِص‬
‫َقائِم‬ ِ
‫ب‬ ‫زَ ْيد‬ ‫َل ْی َس‬
Exercise 1
‫) َل ْی َس ْت تِ ْل َك ا ْلبِن ُْت بِ َعاقِ َلة‬7 ‫الشا ُة بِ َكبِ ْی َرة‬ َّ ‫ت‬ِ ‫) َلیس‬4
َْ ِ ‫) َل ْی َس ا ْل َما ُء بِ َب‬1
‫ارد‬
‫اط بِ ُم ْست َِق ْیم‬
ُ ‫الص َر‬ ِّ ‫) َل ْی َس َه َذا‬8 ‫الس ْو ُق بِ َب ِع ْیدَ ة‬ ِِ
ُّ ‫) َما ٰهذه‬5 ‫) َل ْی َس ا ْل َی ْو ُم بِ ُج ُم َعة‬2
‫الر ُج ُل بِ َعاقِل َو َْل ُش َجاع‬ َّ ‫) َما َه َذا‬9 ‫الر ُج ُل بِ َش ِر ْيف‬ ِ
َّ ‫) َما ٰذل َك‬6
ِ ‫) َما َه َذا ال َّث ْو ُب بِن‬3
‫َجس‬
283
‫ف ِص َلة ‪ as a‬مِ ْن‬ ‫َح ْر ُ‬
‫‪ word in a negative sentence.‬نَكِ َرة ‪ precedes a‬مِ ْن ‪The particle‬‬
‫‪ُ .‬ج ْم َلة ْاس ِم َّیة ‪ُ and‬ج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة ‪This occurs in both‬‬
‫ف ِص َلة ‪ as a‬مِ ْن‬ ‫ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة ‪َ in a‬ح ْر ُ‬
‫اعل ‪ usually occurs in the‬مِ ْن ‪َ of‬ح ْر ُف ِص َلة ‪The‬‬ ‫‪ slot.‬م ْفعول بِ ِه ‪َ or‬ف ِ‬
‫َ ُْ‬
‫ف ِص َلة ‪َ with a‬م ْف ُع ْول‬ ‫َح ْر ُ‬ ‫ف ِص َلة ‪َ with a‬ف ِ‬
‫اعل‬ ‫َح ْر ُ‬
‫َما َأك ََل ا ْل َو َلدُ َفاكِ َه ًة‬ ‫َما َجا َء َر ُجل‬

‫َما َأك ََل ا ْل َو َلدُ مِ ْن َفاكِ َهة‬ ‫َما َجا َء مِ ْن َر ُجل‬
‫‪The child did not eat any fruit.‬‬ ‫‪No man came.‬‬
‫‪. By bringing bring‬نَكِ َرة ‪َ are‬فاك َهة ‪َ and‬ر ُجل ‪In these examples, the words‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪ before them creates additional emphasis.‬مِ ْن ‪َ of‬ح ْر ُف ِص َلة ‪the‬‬
‫‪َ and it does not become part of any‬ح ْر ُف ِص َلة ‪ is labelled as‬مِ ْن ‪In tarkib,‬‬
‫‪of the main slots.‬‬
‫َف ِ‬
‫اعل‬ ‫ف ِص َلة‬
‫َح ْر ُ‬ ‫فِ ْعل‬ ‫ف نَ ْفي‬
‫َح ْر ُ‬
‫َر ُجل‬ ‫مِ ْن‬ ‫َجا َء‬ ‫َما‬
‫‪َ )7‬ما َس َأ َل ْاْلَ ْنبِ َیا ُء الن َ‬
‫َّاس َأ ْج ًرا‬ ‫‪َ )1‬ما َخ َل َق الن ُ‬
‫َّاس َش ْیئًا‬
‫َّاس مِ ْن َأ ْجر‬ ‫‪َ )8‬ما َس َأ َل ْاْلَ ْنبِ َیا ُء الن َ‬ ‫َّاس مِ ْن َش ْيء‬
‫‪َ )2‬ما َخ َل َق الن ُ‬
‫اء ن َْج ًما‬‫‪ )9‬ما ر َأی ا ْلو َلدُ فِي السم ِ‬ ‫َْل َت ُض ُّر ْاْلَ ْصنَا ُم َش ْیئًا‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫َّ َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ َ‬
‫اء مِ ْن ن َْجم‬ ‫‪ )10‬ما ر َأی ا ْلو َلدُ فِي السم ِ‬ ‫َْل َت ُض ُّر ْاْلَ ْصنَا ُم مِ ْن َش ْيء‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫َّ َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ َ‬
‫‪َْ )11‬ل ُي ْش ِر ُك ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن بِاللِ َش ْیئًا‬ ‫الل ل ِ ْل َكافِ ِر ْي َن ن ُْو ًرا‬
‫‪َْ )12‬ل ُي ْش ِر ُك ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن بِاللِ مِ ْن َش ْيء‬ ‫الل ل ِ ْل َكافِ ِر ْي َن مِ ْن ن ُْور‬
‫‪284‬‬
‫‪َ in a Single Sentence‬ح ْرف َجار ‪Multiple‬‬
‫الص َل ِة ‪ may come in the same sentence as the‬مِ ْن ‪A regular‬‬ ‫‪.‬مِ ْن ‪َ of‬ح ْر ُ‬
‫ف ِّ‬
‫‪.‬نَكِ َرة ‪َ will always be‬ح ْر ُف ِص َلة ‪َ of the‬م ْج ُر ْور ‪Remember, the‬‬
‫َما َس َق َط مِ َن ا ْل ُك ْر ِس ِّي مِ ْن َأ َحد‬
‫‪No one fell from the chair.‬‬
‫َف ِ‬
‫َح ْر ُ‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِیْ ِه َغیْ ُر َص ِر ْيح‬ ‫فِ ْعل‬ ‫ف نَ ْفي‬
‫َح ْر ُ‬
‫َأ َحد‬ ‫مِ ْن‬ ‫ا ْل ُك ْر ِس ِّي‬ ‫مِ ْن‬ ‫َس َق َط‬ ‫َما‬
‫‪Vocab‬‬
‫‪helper‬‬ ‫‪ well‬ن َِص ْیر‬ ‫بِئْر ج آ َبار (مث)‬
‫‪groove of a date-stone‬‬ ‫ن َِق ْیر‬ ‫‪clay‬‬ ‫طِ ْین‬
‫‪guardian, friend‬‬ ‫‪َ cup‬ولِي ج َأ ْول ِ َیا ُء‬ ‫ك ُْوب ج َأك َْواب‬
‫الل مِ ْن ُم َراء مِ ْن َص ََّلة َو َْل َصدَ قة‬ ‫‪َْ )7‬ل َي ْق َب ُل ُ‬ ‫الل مِ ْن َش ْيء‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َلن َّي ُض َّر ا ْل َكاف ُر ْو َن َ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫‪َْ )8‬ل َي ُص ْو ُم َي ْو َم ا ْل ِع ْی ِد مِ ْن َأ َحد مِ َن ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ِم ْی َن‬ ‫َل ْم َي ُك ْن فِي ٰهؤُ َْل ِء مِ ْن َهاد َو َْل ُم ْهتَد‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫ب‬ ‫َّاس مِ ْن ُم ِص ْی َبة إِ َّْل مِ ْن َأ ْج ِل ُّ‬
‫الذن ُْو ِ‬ ‫ب الن َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪َْ )9‬ل ُيص ْی ُ‬ ‫َّاس مِ ْن ن َِق ْیر‬ ‫ِ ِ‬
‫َي ْو َم ا ْلق َیا َمة َْل ُي ْظ َل ُم الن ُ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫الس َن َة َما َس َق َط ِم ْن َق ْط َرة ِم ْن َماء ِفي ِت ْل َك ا ْل َو ِاد ْي‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ )10‬ت ْل َك َّ‬ ‫ج ِد‬
‫الر ُج ُل مِ ْن َأ َحد فِي ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬
‫َما َر َأی َّ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫الس َم ِاء﴾‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫الل ِم ْن َشيء ِفي ْ َ‬ ‫‪﴿ )11‬ما ي ْخ َفى عَ َلى ِ‬ ‫الصائِ ُم ْو َن مِ ْن َل َبن َو َْل َماء‬
‫ض َو َْل في َّ‬ ‫اْل ْر ِ‬
‫ْ‬ ‫َ َ‬ ‫‪َ )5‬ما َش ِر َب َّ‬
‫الص ِائ َم ُة ِم ْن َماء َو َْل َل َبن ِإ َّْل َب ْعدَ ا ْل َمغ ِْر ِب‬
‫‪َ )12‬ما َش ِر َب ْت ا ْل َم ْر َأ ُة َّ‬ ‫‪َْ )6‬ل َي ْع ُبدُ ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن مِ ْن َصنَم َو َْل َش َجر‬
‫‪285‬‬
‫ف ِص َلة ‪ as a‬مِ ْن‬
‫اس ِم َّیة ‪َ in a‬ح ْر ُ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ُ slot.‬م ْبتَدَ أ ُمؤَ َّخر ‪ usually occurs in the‬م ْن ‪َ of‬ح ْر ُف ص َلة ‪The‬‬
‫ف ِص َلة ‪ُ with a‬م ْبتَدَ أ ُمؤَ َّخر‬
‫َح ْر ُ‬
‫ت َر ُجل‬ ‫ما فِي ا ْلبی ِ‬

‫َْ‬ ‫َ‬
‫ت مِ ْن َر ُجل‬‫ما فِي ا ْلبی ِ‬
‫َْ‬ ‫َ‬
‫‪There is no man in the house.‬‬
‫‪َ before them. However, one‬ح ْرف َجار ‪ْ have‬اسم ُمؤَ َّخر ‪َ and‬خ َبر ُم َقدَّ م ‪Both the‬‬
‫‪َ .‬ح ْر ُف ِص َلة ‪َ and the other as‬ح ْرف َجار ‪is labelled as a‬‬
‫اسم ُمؤَ َّخر‬
‫ْ‬ ‫ف ِص َلة‬
‫َح ْر ُ‬ ‫َخ َبر ُم َقدَّ م‬ ‫فِ ْعل نَاقِص‬
‫َر ُجل‬ ‫مِ ْن‬ ‫ا ْلبی ِ‬

‫ت‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫فِ ْي‬ ‫َل ْی َس‬
‫‪َ )8‬ل ْی َس فِي تِ ْل َك ا ْل َق ْر َي ِة مِ ْن َج َبل‬ ‫ب ُت َراب‬ ‫َما َع َلی ال َّث ْو ِ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫‪َ )9‬ل ْی َس فِي ٰهؤُ َْل ِء مِ ْن َهاد َو َْل ُم ْهتَد‬ ‫ب مِ ْن ُت َراب‬ ‫َما َع َلی ال َّث ْو ِ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫‪َ )10‬ما ل ِ ْل ُم ْش ِركِ ْی َن مِ ْن َولِي َو َْل ن َِص ْیر‬ ‫َما لِل َّظال ِ ِم ْی َن َأن َْصار‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫‪َ )11‬ما ل ِ َخالِد مِ ْن َق ِر ْيب فِ ْي ٰه َذا ا ْل َب َل ِد‬ ‫﴿ َما لِل َّظال ِ ِم ْی َن مِ ْن َأن َْصار﴾‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫‪َ )12‬ل ْی َس لِل َّظال ِ ِم ْی َن مِ ْن َأ ْجر فِي ْاْل ِخ َر ِة‬ ‫َما َجا َء مِ ْن ٰه ِذ ِه ا ْل َق ْر َي ِة َر ُجل‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫‪َ )13‬ل ْی َس ِعنْدَ ٰه َذا ا ْل َف ِق ْی ِر مِ ْن ِد ْر َهم َو َْل ِد ْينَار‬ ‫َما َجا َء مِ ْن ٰه ِذ ِه ا ْل َق ْر َي ِة مِ ْن َر ُجل‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫الر َج ُال ِم ْن َش َج َرة ِم ْن ٰه ِذ ِه ا ْل َح ِد ْي َق ِة‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫َل ْی َس فِي تِ ْل َك ا ْل َق ْر َي ِة َج َبل َغ ْی ُر ٰه َذا ا ْل َج َب ِل‬
‫‪َ )14‬ما َق َط َع ٰهؤُ َْلء ِّ‬ ‫‪)7‬‬
‫‪286‬‬
Types of Irab
All nouns carry an irab i.e. they occur in the ‫ َم ْر ُف ْوع‬, ‫ َمن ُْص ْوب‬and ‫َم ْج ُر ْور‬
slots.
Irab occurs in two ways:
1. Apparent
2. Inferred
Apparent Irab
Apparent irab is a change at the end of a word which is visible. This
is called ‫إِع َْراب َل ْفظِي‬.
ِ
َّ ‫ن ََص َرت ا ْل َم ْر َأ ُة‬
‫الر ُج َل‬
The lady helped the man.
In this example, the irab of ‫ ا ْل َم ْر َأ ُة‬and ‫الر ُج َل‬
َّ is apparent in the form of
a ‫ َض َّمة‬and a ‫ َفت َْحة‬respectively.
Inferred Irab
Inferred irab is an assumption that a word has an irab because of
its grammatical function.
This is called ‫إِع َْراب َم َح ِّلي‬.
‫ت ٰه ِذ ِه ٰذل ِ َك‬
ْ ‫ن ََص َر‬
This (lady) helped that (man).
In this example, the irab of ‫ ٰه ِذ ِه‬and ‫ ٰذل ِ َك‬is not apparent because they
are ‫ َم ْبنِي‬. Therefor they are assumed to be in the ‫ َم ْر ُف ْوع‬and ‫نص ْوب‬ ُ ‫َم‬
states respectively.
Instead of classifying these words as ‫ َم ْر ُف ْوع‬, ‫ َمن ُْص ْوب‬and ‫ َم ْج ُر ْور‬, we
ِ ِ ‫ فِي مح ِّل النَّص‬and ‫فِي مح ِّل ا ْلجر‬, i.e. in the slot
classify them as ‫الر ْف ِع‬ َّ ‫ف ْي َم َح ِّل‬, ‫ب‬ ْ َ َ ْ ِّ َ َ َ ْ
ُ
of a ‫ َم ْرف ْوع‬, ‫ َمن ُْص ْوب‬and ‫ َم ْج ُر ْور‬.
287
Inferred Irab After ‫َح ْر ُف ِص َلة‬
Similarly, if a word is preceded by a ‫ َح ْر ُف ِص َلة‬, its ‫ إِع َْراب َل ْفظِي‬will be
governed by the ‫ َح ْرف َجار‬. However, it will also have an ‫إِع َْراب َم َح ِّلي‬
based on the slot it occurs in.
‫َما َجا َء مِ ْن َأ َحد‬
In this example, the word ‫ َأ َحد‬is preceded by ‫مِ ْن‬, therefore its ‫إِع َْراب‬
‫ َل ْفظِي‬will be ‫ َم ْج ُر ْور‬. But as it is becoming the ‫اعل‬
ِ ‫ َف‬, its ‫ إِعْراب مح ِّلي‬will be
َ َ َ
‫ َم ْر ُف ْوع‬.
Consequently, the ‫ َن ْعت‬of a noun after a ‫ َح ْر ُف ِص َلة‬can match in its
‫إِع َْراب َم َح ِّلي‬.
ِ‫َّاس مِن إِ ٰله َغیر الل‬ ِ
ُْ ْ ِ ‫َل ْی َس للن‬
There is absolutely no deity for the people other than Allah.
In this sentence, ِ‫ غ َُیر الل‬becomes the ‫ َن ْعت‬of ‫إِ ٰله‬. Initially, it may seem
that they do not agree in irab. However, the inferred irab of ‫ إِ ٰله‬is
ْ of ‫ َل ْی َس‬. Therefore, the ‫ َن ْعت‬does
‫ َم ْر ُف ْوع‬because it becomes the ‫اسم ُمؤَ َّخر‬
agree with the inferred irab.
‫اِ ْس ُم َلیْ َس‬ ‫ف ِص َلة‬
ُ ‫َح ْر‬ ‫َخبَ ُر َلیْ َس ا ْل ُم َقدَّ ُم‬ ‫فِ ْعل نَاقِص‬
ِ‫الل‬ ‫َغ ْی ُر‬ ‫إِ ٰله‬ ‫مِ ْن‬ ِ ‫لِلن‬
‫َّاس‬ ‫َل ْی َس‬
‫ُم َضاف إِ َلیْ ِه‬ ‫ُم َضاف‬ ‫ َم ْج ُر ْور‬- ‫َجار‬
Summary: Different Types of ‫َح ْرف َجار‬

‫َح ْرف َجار‬
Regular ‫َح ْرف َجار‬ ‫ف ِص َلة‬

ُ ‫َح ْر‬
ِ ،‫ مِ ْن‬،‫ إِ َلی‬،‫ َع َلی‬،‫فِي‬
،‫ َحتّی‬،‫ ِل‬،‫ب‬ ِ before the ‫ خرب‬of ‫َل ْی َس‬
‫ب‬ ‫ مِ ْن‬before a ‫ نَكِ َرة‬word in
‫َع ْن‬ or ‫َما ا ْل ُم َش َّب َه ُة بِ َل ْی َس‬ a negative sentence
288
‫‪Translate the following sentences and write out the tarkib.‬‬
‫ب ا ْل َكبِ ْی ِر‬‫الص ِغ ْی ِر ِعنْدَ ا ْلبِئ ِْر َو َْل فِي ٰذل ِ َك ا ْل ُك ْو ِ‬ ‫‪َْ )1‬ل ماء فِي ه َذا ْ ِ ِ‬
‫اإلنَاء َّ‬ ‫ٰ‬ ‫َ َ‬
‫اعدَ‬ ‫َاب ا ْل َكبِی ِر إِ َّْل َأربِع َقو ِ‬ ‫اعدَ ٰه َذا ا ْلكِت ِ‬ ‫‪ )2‬ح ِف َظ ْت بِن ُْت َأحمدَ ٰه ِذ ِه َقو ِ‬
‫ْ َ َ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ْ َ‬ ‫َ‬
‫َن ا ْل َخ ْم ِر َوا ْل َم ْی ِس ِر‬ ‫اد َق ْاْلَمِ ْی َن ع ِ‬ ‫‪ )3‬س َأ َل الصحاب ُة ا ْلكِرام النَّبِي ﷺ الص ِ‬
‫َّ‬ ‫َ ُ َّ‬ ‫َّ َ َ‬ ‫َ‬
‫ض َأ َبا ا ْل َب َش ِر آ َد َم مِ ْن طِ ْین َوإِ ْبلِ ْی َس مِن َّنار‬ ‫ات َو ْاْلَ ْر ِ‬ ‫‪َ )4‬خ َل َق الل رب السماو ِ‬
‫ُ َ ُّ َّ َ َ‬
‫ان َوتِ ْل َك ا ْل َمر َأ ُة ا ْل َم ِر ْي َض ُة َث ََّل ًثا َو ِع ْش ِر ْي َن َي ْو ًما‬ ‫‪َ )5‬صا َم ٰه َذا ا ْل َو َلدُ َث ََّلثِ ْی َن َي ْو ًما مِ ْن َر َم َض َ‬
‫ان ُم َص ِّل ْی َن‬‫ان َصائِ ِم ْی َن َو َل َیال ِي َر َم َض َ‬ ‫الصال ِ ُح ْو َن ا ْل ُم َّت ُق ْو َن َأ َّيا َم َر َم َض َ‬ ‫‪َ )6‬م َضی ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن َّ‬
‫َ‬
‫َّاس إِ َلی َم َّك َة ا ْل ُم َك َّر َم ِة َو َم ِد ْين َِة النَّبِ ِّي ا ْل ُمن ََّو َر ِة َب ْعدَ َأ ْر َب َع ِة َأ ْش ُهر ل ِ ْل ُع ْم َر ِة‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )7‬ل ُی َساف َر َّن ٰهؤُ َْلء الن ُ‬
‫َات اللِ َج ْه ًَّل‬ ‫‪ )8‬اِ َّت َخ َذ النَّصاری ِعیسی ومريم ڠ إِ ٰلهی ِن مِن دو ِن اللِ وا ْلعرب ا ْلم ََّلئِ َك َة بن ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫َ ََ ُ َ‬ ‫ْ ُْ‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫ََْ َ‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫َ َ‬
‫الر ْغ َب ِة‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫الص ََّلة والدُّ عَاء َو َأ ْثنَا َء ال َّط َواف إِ َّْل م َن ا ْل َخ ْوف َو َّ‬ ‫‪َْ )9‬ل َتف ْی ُض َأ ْع ُی ُن ا ْل ُمتَّق ْی َن بِالدَّ ْم ِع في َّ‬
‫اإل َس ََّل ِم َق ْب َل النَّبِ ِّي ُم َح َّم ِد ْب ِن َع ْب ِد اللِ ﷺ‬ ‫‪َ )10‬ع َبدَ َأ ْه ُل َم َّك َة ُأ ِّم ا ْل ُق ٰری ْاْلَ ْصنَا َم مِ ْن ُد ْو ِن اللِ َق ْب َل ْ ِ‬
‫الص َحا َب َة ا ْلكِ َرا َم ُث َّم ا ْل ُمؤْ مِن ِ ْی َن إِ ْي َمانًا َو َي ِق ْینًا َوا ْل َكافِ ِر ْي َن َض ََّل ًْل َو ُط ْغ َیانًا‬ ‫َات َّ‬ ‫آن ا ْل َب ِّین ُ‬‫ات ا ْل ُقر ِ‬
‫‪ )11‬زَ ا َد آ َي ُ ْ‬
‫الص َباحِ َع َلی ْاْلَ َساتِ َذ ِة فِي ا ْل َمدْ َر َس ِة‬ ‫ِ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )12‬ي ْق َر ُأ ْاْلَ ْو َْل ُد الدُّ ُر ْو َس في ال َّل ْی ِل َع َلی ْاْل َباء َو ْاْلُ َّم َهات َوفي َّ‬
‫الص ِغ ْی َر ُة إِ َلی تِ ْل َك ا ْل َم ِد ْين َِة َو َْل إِ َلی تِ ْل َك ا ْل َق ْر َي ِة ا ْل َب ِع ْیدَ ِة َب ْل إِ َلی ٰه ِذ ِه ا ْل َق ْر َي ِة‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ت بِن ُْت َخالد َ‬ ‫‪َ )13‬أ ْم ِ‬
‫س َما َسا َف َر ْ‬
‫‪289‬‬
Summary
Types of Phrases
Agree in DING Agree Only in Irab
Descriptive Demonstrative Conjunctive Appositive
Phrase Phrase Phrase Phrase
‫َم ْع ُط ْوف َع َل ْی ِه‬
‫َمنْ ُع ْوت‬ ‫اإل َش َار ِة‬ ِ ْ ‫اِ ْس ُم‬ ‫ُم ْبدَ ل مِنْ ُه‬
ُ ‫َح ْر‬
‫َن ْعت‬ ‫ُم َشار إِ َل ْی ِه‬ ‫َبدَ ل‬
Do Not Agree
Possessive Prepositional Phrase
Phrase )‫(ش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬
ِ
‫ُم َضاف‬ )‫ُم َضاف ( َظ ْرف‬ ‫َجار‬

‫ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬ ‫ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬ ‫َم ْج ُر ْور‬
290
Phrases
Normal Phrases
Descriptive Phrases
‫َمنْ ُع ْوت‬ Noun
Agree in DING
‫َن ْعت‬ Adjective
Demonstrative Phrases
‫اإل َش َار ِة‬ِ ْ ‫اِسم‬
ُ ْ Demonstrative Pronoun
Agree in DING
‫ُم َشار إِ َل ْی ِه‬ Must have ‫َا ْل‬
Conjunction Phrases
ُ ‫ َح ْر‬Conjunction ‫ َأ ْو‬،‫ ُث َّم‬،‫ف‬
َ ،‫َو‬
Agree in irab
‫َم ْع ُط ْوف‬ The word after the conjunction
Appositive Phrases
‫ُم ْبدَ ل مِنْ ُه‬ First Noun
Agree in irab
‫َبدَ ل‬ Second Noun
Possessive Phrases
‫ُم َضاف‬ Owned No ‫ َا ْل‬, no ‫َتن ِْو ْين‬
‫ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬
Owner ‫( َم ْج ُر ْور‬Do not Agree)
Prepositional Phrases (‫) ِش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬
‫ُم َضاف‬ Time / Place (‫) َظ ْرف‬ No ‫ َا ْل‬, no ‫ َتنْ ِو ْين‬, ‫َمنْ ُص ْوب‬
‫ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬ Noun ‫َم ْج ُر ْور‬

‫َجار‬ Particle ‫َمبْنِي‬
‫َم ْج ُر ْور‬ Noun ‫َم ْج ُر ْور‬
291
‫ِش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة ‪Summary of‬‬
‫َْل لِنَف ِْي‬ ‫َح ْرف ُم َشبَّه‬ ‫فِ ْعل‬
‫ا ْل ِ‬
‫جن ِ‬
‫ْس‬ ‫بِا ْل ِف ْع ِل‬ ‫نَاقِص‬
‫‪Noun‬‬ ‫‪Noun‬‬
‫‪Phrase‬‬ ‫‪Phrase‬‬
‫‪Particle‬‬ ‫‪Verb‬‬
‫ِشبْ ُه ال ُْج ْمل َِة‬

‫ْس‬ ‫َخ َب ُر َْل لِنَ ْف ِي ا ْل ِ‬
‫ت‬
‫]ش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة[ ]اسم[ ‪There is no‬‬
‫ِ‬ ‫]ش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة[ ]مبتدأ[ ‪There is a‬‬
‫ِ‬ ‫]ش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة[ ‪] is‬مبتدأ[ ‪The‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة ‪ِ in a‬ش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬

‫َم ْف ُع ْول‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول‬ ‫ب‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬
‫نَائ ُ‬
‫ُم ْستَثْنًی‬ ‫ت َْمیِ ْیز‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول َل ُه‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ ‫ف ِ‬
‫َاعل‬ ‫فِ ْعل‬
‫ُم ْط َلق‬ ‫فِیْ ِه‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ا ْلفَاع ِل‬ ‫ثَان‬
‫‪Noun‬‬ ‫‪Noun‬‬ ‫‪Noun‬‬ ‫‪Noun‬‬ ‫‪Noun‬‬ ‫‪Noun‬‬ ‫‪Noun‬‬ ‫‪Noun‬‬ ‫‪Noun‬‬
‫‪Phrase‬‬ ‫‪Phrase‬‬ ‫‪Phrase‬‬ ‫‪Phrase‬‬ ‫‪Phrase‬‬ ‫‪Phrase‬‬ ‫‪Phrase‬‬ ‫‪Phrase‬‬

‫ظ َْرف‬
‫‪Verb‬‬
‫َجار‬ ‫َجار‬ ‫َجار‬ ‫َجار‬ ‫َجار‬ ‫َجار‬ ‫َجار‬ ‫َجار‬
‫َو َم ْج ُر ْور‬ ‫َو َم ْج ُر ْور‬ ‫َو َم ْج ُر ْور‬ ‫َو َم ْج ُر ْور‬ ‫َو َم ْج ُر ْور‬ ‫َو َم ْج ُر ْور‬ ‫َو َم ْج ُر ْور‬ ‫َو َم ْج ُر ْور‬
‫‪292‬‬
‫‪Summary of Sentences‬‬
‫‪ُ .‬ج ْم َلة اِ ْس ِم َّیة ‪The following table illustrates the various forms of a‬‬
‫‪Is/are‬‬ ‫َخبَر‬ ‫ُمبْتَدَ أ‬
‫‪This is/are‬‬ ‫َخبَر ُم َقدَّ م‬ ‫ُمبْتَدَ أ ُمؤَ َّخر‬
‫‪Is/are‬‬ ‫َخبَر‬ ‫ُمبْتَدَ أ‬ ‫َْل ُم اْلبْتِدَ ِاء‬
‫‪Was/were‬‬ ‫َخبَر‬ ‫اسم‬

‫ْ‬ ‫كان‬
‫‪Was/were not‬‬ ‫َخ َبر‬ ‫اسم‬

‫ْ‬ ‫ما ك َ‬
‫َان‬
‫‪Will be‬‬ ‫َخبَر‬ ‫اسم‬

‫ْ‬ ‫َي ُك ْو ُن‬
‫‪Will not be‬‬ ‫َخبَر‬ ‫اسم‬

‫ْ‬ ‫َْل َي ُك ْو ُن‬
‫‪Is/are not‬‬ ‫َخبَر‬ ‫ف ِص َلة (بـ)‬

‫َح ْر ُ‬ ‫اسم‬
‫ْ‬ ‫َل ْی َس‬
‫‪Is/are not‬‬ ‫َخ َبر‬ ‫اسم‬

‫ْ‬ ‫َما‬
‫‪Is/are not‬‬ ‫َخ َبر‬ ‫َّإْل‬ ‫ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬ ‫إِ ْن‬
‫‪Indeed‬‬ ‫َخ َبر‬ ‫اسم‬

‫ْ‬ ‫َّ‬
‫إن‬
‫‪Indeed‬‬ ‫َخ َبر‬ ‫َْلم ُمزَ ْح َل َقة‬ ‫اسم‬

‫ْ‬ ‫َّ‬
‫إن‬
‫‪Only‬‬ ‫َخ َبر‬ ‫ُمبْتَدَ أ‬ ‫إِن ََّما‬
‫َخبَر‬
‫اسم‬
‫ْ‬ ‫س‬ ‫َْل لِنَ ْف ِي ا ْل ِ‬
‫جنْ ِ‬
‫‪There is no‬‬ ‫ِ‬
‫[شبْ ُه ُج ْم َلة]‬
‫‪In, with‬‬ ‫َت ْمیِ ْیز‬
‫‪Except‬‬ ‫ُم ْستَثْنًی‬
‫‪293‬‬
Key Terms
‫َْل‬ to create emphatic ِ ‫ َْل لِنَ ْف ِي ا ْل‬Prepositional Phrase
ِ ‫جن‬
‫ْس‬ ‫ِش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬
negative meaning
Indirect slot ‫ َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح‬Noun Preposition ‫َظ ْرف ج ُظ ُر ْوف‬
Particle of emphasis ‫ف ِص َلة‬ ُ ‫ َح ْر‬Fronted ‫َخ َبر‬ ‫َخ َبر ُم َقدَّ م‬
Vocabulary
Prepositions
‫ُظ ُر ْوف‬
during, in between ‫ ِخ ََّل َل‬during ‫َأ ْثنَا َء‬
behind َ ‫ َخ ْل‬in front of

‫ف‬ ‫َأ َما َم‬
by, at the time of, in the
eyes of, according to
َ‫ِعنْد‬ after َ‫َب ْعد‬
above ‫ َف ْو َق‬between, amongst ‫َب ْی َن‬
before, ago ‫ َق ْب َل‬under ‫َت ْح َت‬
with ‫ َم َع‬around َ ‫َح‬

‫ول‬
‫ُح ُر ْوف َج َّارة‬

for, belongs to ‫ ِل‬in ‫فِ ْي‬
until, even ‫ َحتّٰی‬on ‫َع َلی‬
regarding, from ‫َن‬

ْ ‫ ع‬to, towards, until ‫إِ ٰلی‬
like ‫ َك‬from ‫مِ ْن‬
with ِ
‫ب‬
294
ِ ْ ‫ َأسماء‬used as ‫َظرف‬
ُ َ ْ ْ
there, at that time ‫ ُهنَال ِ َك‬here ‫ُهنَا‬
there ‫َث َّم‬ here ‫ٰه ُهنَا‬
there َ ‫ُهن‬
‫َاك‬
voice ‫ َص ْوت ج َأ ْص َوات‬ear ‫ُأ ُذن ج آ َذان‬
clay ‫ طِ ْین‬sight ‫َب َصر ج َأ ْب َصار‬
back ‫ َأ ْظ ُهر‬،‫ َظ ْهر ج ُظ ُه ْور‬well )‫بِئْر ج آ َبار (مث‬
intelligent ‫ عَاقِل ج ُع َق ََّل ُء‬soil ‫ُت َراب ج َأ ْت ِر َبة‬
grapes ‫ِعنَب ج َأ ْعنَاب‬ cloth ‫َث ْوب ج ثِ َیاب‬

acquaintance, pledge, ‫ع َْهد‬ sacred, impermissible ‫َحرام‬
era
fruit ‫ َفاكِ َهة ج َف َواكِ ُه‬swine, pig ‫ِخن ِْزير‬
classroom ‫ َف ْصل ج ُف ُص ْول‬blood ‫َدم ج ِد َماء‬

ِ ‫اعدَ ة ج َقو‬
ُ‫اعد‬ ِ ‫َق‬ ‫َد ْمع ج ُد ُم ْوع‬
foundation, rule َ teardrop
grave ‫ َق ْبر ج ُق ُب ْور‬doubt ‫َر ْيب‬
peer, fellow ‫ قِ ْرن ج َأ ْق َران‬time, period ‫ زَ َمان‬،‫زَ َمن‬
close relative ِ ‫ َق ِر ْيب ج َأ َق‬olive

‫ار ُب‬ ‫زَ ْيت ُْون‬
cup )‫ َك ْأس ج ُكؤُ ْوس (مث‬market )‫ُس ْوق ج َأ ْس َواق (مث‬
cup ‫ ك ُْوب ج َأك َْواب‬brave َ ‫ُش‬

‫ ُش ْج َعان‬،‫جاع ج َش َج َعة‬
prayer niche ‫ب‬ ِ ‫ مِ ْح َراب ج َم َح‬noble

ُ ‫ار ْي‬ ‫َش ِر ْيف ج ُش َر َفا ُء‬
‫ف‬
ُ ‫اح‬ِ ‫م ص حف ج م ص‬ ‫َش ِر ْيك ج ُش َركَا ُء‬
Quran (written copy) َ َ َ ْ ُ partner
‫ُم َك َّر َمة‬ ‫احب ج َأ ْص َحاب‬ ِ ‫ص‬
َ
people (of),
honoured, revered companion
pulpit ‫ مِنْ َبر ج َمنَابِ ُر‬child ‫ ِص ْب َیان‬،‫َصبِي ج ِص ْب َیة‬
295
groove of a date-stone ‫ ن َِق ْیر‬place ِ ‫مو ِضع ج مو‬
‫اض ُع‬ ََ َْ
migration ‫ ِه ْج َرة‬carrion, dead ‫َم ْیتَة‬
guardian, friend ‫ َولِي ج َأ ْول ِ َیا ُء‬helper ‫ن َِص ْیر‬
to seal, complete ‫ َخت ََم َي ْختِ ُم َخت ًْما‬to search ‫اِ ْب َتغَی َي ْبت َِغ ْي اِ ْبتِغَا ًء‬
to remain hidden ‫ َخ ِف َي َي ْخ َفی َخ َفا ًء‬to test ‫اِ ْب َت َلی َي ْبتَلِ ْي اِ ْبتِ ََّل ًء‬
to slaughter ‫ َذ َب َح َي ْذ َب ُح َذ ْب ًحا‬to be kind ‫َأ ْح َس َن ُي ْح ِس ُن إِ ْح َسانًا‬
to shake ‫ زَ ْلزَ َل ُيزَ ْل ِز ُل زَ ْلزَ َل ًة‬to grant entry ‫َأ ْد َخ َل ُيدْ ِخ ُل إِ ْد َخ ًاْل‬
to do tawaf ‫ف َط َوا ًفا‬

ُ ‫اف َي ُط ْو‬
َ ‫ َط‬to grant permission ‫َأ ِذ َن َي ْأ َذ ُن إِ ْذنًا‬
to be pure ‫َط ُه َر َي ْط ُه ُر َط َه َار ًة‬ to answer a prayer, ‫ب اِ ْستِ َجابَ ًة‬ ِ ‫اب َي ْست‬
ُ ْ‫َجی‬ َ ‫است ََج‬
ْ
respond to a call
to resolve, make a firm
decision
‫ عَزَ َم َي ْع ِز ُم عَزْ ًما‬to get by without ‫استِ ْغنَا ًء‬ ِ
ْ ‫اس َت ْغنَی َي ْس َتغْن ْي‬
ْ
to wash ‫ غ ََس َل َيغ ِْس ُل غ َْس ًَّل‬to afflict ‫ب إِ َصا َب ًة‬ ِ
َ ‫َأ َص‬
ُ ‫اب ُيص ْی‬
to flow ‫اض َي ِف ْی ُض َف ْی َضانًا‬ َ ‫ َف‬to make aware, show, ‫َأ ْظ َه َر ُي ْظ ِه ُر إِ ْظ َه ًارا‬

make apparent
to surpass, excel ‫اق َي ُف ْو ُق َفو ًقا‬

َ ‫ َف‬to fabricate ‫اِ ْفت ََری َي ْفت َِر ْي ا ْفتِ َرا ًء‬
to give virtue ‫َف َّض َل ُي َف ِّض ُل َت ْف ِض ْی ًَّل‬ to feel safe from, trust ‫َأمِ َن َي ْأ َم ُن َأ ْمنًا‬
to do ‫ َف َع َل َي ْف َع ُل فِ ْع ًَّل‬to change ‫َبدَّ َل ُي َبدِّ ُل َت ْب ِد ْي ًَّل‬
to wear ‫ َلبِ َس َي ْل َب ُس ُل ْب ًسا‬to transgress ‫َبغَی َي ْب ِغ ْي َب ْغ ًیا‬
to succeed ‫احا‬ً ‫ ن ََج َح َين َْج ُح ن ََج‬to get late ‫َت َأ َّخ َر َي َت َأ َّخ ُر َت َأ ُّخ ًرا‬
to save, grant ِ ‫ ن ََّجی ُين َِّجي َتن‬to maintain good
‫ْج َی ًة‬ ‫َت َأ َّد َب َي َت َأ َّد ُب َت َأ ُّد ًبا‬
salvation ْ manners
to look ‫ َن َظ َر َينْ ُظ ُر َن ْظ ًرا‬to forbid, make sacred ‫َح َّر َم ُي َح ِّر ُم َت ْح ِر ْي ًما‬
to blow ‫ َن َف َخ َينْ ُف ُخ َن ْف ًخا‬to deprive ‫َح َر َم َي ْح ِر ُم ِح ْر َمانًا‬
296
PRONOUNS
Introduction: Personal Pronouns
Part 1: ‫َض ِم ْیر َم ْر ُف ْوع‬
Part 2: ‫َض ِم ْیر َمن ُْص ْوب‬
Part 3: ‫َض ِم ْیر َم ْج ُر ْور‬
Supplement: Additional Rules of Pronouns
Summary
297
Introduction: Personal Pronouns
A pronoun takes the place of a regular noun.
Ahmad came into the house.
He sat on his chair and I gave him water.
In Arabic, a pronoun is called a ‫ َض ِم ْیر‬. The plural of this is ‫ َض َمائِ ُر‬.
Pronouns are ‫ ; َم ْبنِي‬their endings do not change because of their
grammatical state. Instead, there are separate pronouns for each
grammatical state.
1. ‫َض ِم ْیر َم ْر ُف ْوع‬
2. ‫َض ِم ْیر َمن ُْص ْوب‬
3. ‫َض ِم ْیر َم ْج ُر ْور‬
‫ٰه َذا كِتَابِ ْي‬ ‫َس ِم ْعت ُُم ْونِ ْي‬ ‫َأنَا َطالِب‬
This is my book. You heard me. I am a student.
In these examples, the pronouns ‫( َأنَا‬I), ‫( نِ ْي‬me), and ‫( ـ ِْي‬my)
represent the same pronoun, but in different types grammatical
states.
The Pronouns
Each of the ‫ َض ِم ْیر َم ْر ُف ْوع‬, ‫ َض ِم ْیر َمن ُْص ْوب‬and ‫ َض ِم ْیر َم ْج ُر ْور‬consist of fourteen
pronouns. Each pronoun represents a different number, gender,
and person.
Each of these is called a ‫ ِص ْیغَة‬. The plural of this is ‫ ِص َیغ‬.
Gender and number have been discussed before (see pages 21 and
23) .
In regards to person, there are three types:
1. First person: i.e. I or we. In Arabic this is called ‫ ُم َت َك ِّلم‬: the person
speaking about themselves.
2. Second person: i.e. you. In Arabic, this is called ‫ ُم َخا َطب‬: the
addressee (the person being spoken to).
3. Third person: i.e. he, she or they. In Arabic, this is called ‫غَائِب‬:
the person being spoken about.
298
‫َض ِم ْیر َم ْر ُف ْوع ‪Part 1:‬‬
‫‪َ state, namely the‬م ْر ُف ْوع ‪َ is used to refer to a noun in the‬ض ِم ْیر َم ْر ُف ْوع ‪A‬‬
‫اعل ‪ُ and the‬م ْب َتدَ أ‬ ‫‪َ .‬ف ِ‬
‫‪َ :‬ض ِم ْیر َم ْر ُف ْوع ‪Consequently, there are two sets of‬‬
‫َض ِم ْی ُر ا ْل ُم ْبتَدَ إِ ‪1.‬‬
‫َض ِمیر ا ْل َف ِ‬
‫اع ِل ‪2.‬‬ ‫ُْ‬
‫َض ِم ْی ُر ا ْل ُم ْبتَدَ إِ‬
‫‪.‬ا ْل ُم ْب َتدَ ُأ ‪The following pronouns are used as‬‬
‫‪English‬‬ ‫َض ِم ْی ُر ا ْل ُم ْبتَدَ إِ‬ ‫ِص ْی َغة‬
‫ُه َو‬ ‫ب‬ ‫ِ‬

‫‪M: Masculine‬‬ ‫‪He / It‬‬ ‫الغَائ ُ‬
‫ُه َما‬ ‫ا ْلغَائِب ِ‬
‫ان‬
‫‪F: Feminine‬‬ ‫)‪They (m/d‬‬ ‫َ‬
‫)‪They (m/p‬‬ ‫ُه ْم‬ ‫ا ْلغَائِ ُب ْو َن‬
‫‪S: Singular‬‬ ‫‪She / It‬‬ ‫ِه َي‬ ‫ا ْلغَائِ َب ُة‬

‫ُه َما‬ ‫ا ْلغَائِبت ِ‬
‫َان‬
‫‪D: Dual‬‬ ‫)‪They (f/d‬‬ ‫َ‬
‫‪P: Plural‬‬ ‫)‪They (f/p‬‬ ‫ُه َّن‬ ‫ا ْلغَائِ َب ُ‬
‫ات‬
‫)‪You (m/s‬‬ ‫َأن َ‬

‫ْت‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َخا َط ُ‬
‫ب‬
‫َأ ْنت َُما‬ ‫ا ْلم َخا َطب ِ‬
‫ان‬
‫)‪You (m/d‬‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ُ‬
‫)‪You (m/p‬‬ ‫َأ ْنت ُْم‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َخا َط ُب ْو َن‬
‫َأن ِ‬
‫ْت‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َخا َط َب ُة‬
‫)‪You (f/s‬‬
‫َأ ْنت َُما‬ ‫ا ْلم َخا َطبت ِ‬
‫َان‬
‫)‪You (f/d‬‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ُ‬
‫)‪You (f/p‬‬ ‫َأ ْنت َُّن‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َخا َط َب ُ‬
‫ات‬
‫‪I‬‬ ‫َأنَا‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َت َك ِّل ُم‬
‫‪We‬‬ ‫ن َْح ُن‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َت َك ِّل ُم ْو َن‬
‫‪299‬‬
Notes
1. Number and gender cannot be determined in they and you. The
following abbreviations are used to clarify them.
m (masculine) f (feminine)
s (singular) d (dual) p (plural)
2. In English, the word it is used for inanimate objects or for the
neutral gender.
This is my pen. It is small.
In Arabic, there is no neutral gender. Instead, ‫( ُه َو‬he) is used for
masculine nouns, and ‫( ِه َي‬she) for feminine nouns.
‫ ُه َو َكبِ ْیر‬،‫ٰه َذا َق َلم‬ ‫ ِه َي ُح ْل َوة‬،‫َه ِذ ِه َت ْم َرة‬
This is a pen. It is big. This is a date. It is sweet.
ِ ِ
3. In phrases, a ‫ َضم ْی ُر ا ْل ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬is only used in a conjunctive phrase.
ِ ‫َأنَا و َأن َْت ص ِدي َق‬
‫ان‬ ْ َ َ
You and I are (two) friends.
Exercise 1
‫) َأ ْنت ُْم َأ ْق َران‬13 ‫) ُه َو ُم ْهتَد‬10 ‫) ُه َو ُش َجاع‬7 ِ ‫) ُهما صبِیت‬4
‫َان‬ ‫) ُه ْم َأ ْول ِ َیا ُء‬1
َّ َ َ
‫) َأ ْنت َُّن ُش َر َفا ُء‬14 ِ ‫) ُهما َأمِین‬11
‫َان‬ ‫ْت طِ ْف َلة‬
ِ ‫) َأن‬8 ‫) َأنَا َقاض‬5 ِ ‫) ُهما َشاب‬2
‫ان‬
ْ َ َّ َ
ِ ‫) َأ ْنتُما َأمِیر‬15 ‫ان‬
‫ان‬ ِ ‫) َأ ْنتُما م ْظ ُلوم‬12 ‫) ُه َّن ُع َق ََّل ُء‬9 ‫) ُه ْم َأعْدَ اء‬6 ‫) ِه َي ُم ِص ْی َبة‬3
َْ َ َ ْ َ َ
Exercise 2
‫) ن َْح ُن ِعنْدَ ٰه َذا ا ْل ُم َع ِّل ِم ا ْل َع ِاق ِل‬11 ِ ‫ان َش ِري َف‬
‫ان‬ ْ
ِ َ‫) َأ ْنتُما و َلد‬6
َ َ ِ ‫) ُه َو َر ُّب الن‬1
‫َّاس‬
‫) ُه َو َو َخالِد عَ َلی ِم ْن َب ِر ٰذلِ َك ا ْل َم ْس ِج ِد‬12 ‫َب ُأ ْخ ُت ُم َح َّمد‬ ِ
ُ ‫) ه َي زَ ْين‬7
ِ ‫) ِهي َطالِبة ب‬2
‫خ ْی َلة‬ َ َ َ
‫الر ُج ِل ال َّط ِو ْي ِل‬ ِ ‫ف ا ْل َك ِر ْي ِم‬ِ ‫الضی‬ ِ ِ ِ
َّ ‫) ن َْح ُن َأ ْبنَا ُء َذل َك‬13 ْ َّ ‫) َأن َْت َم َع َه َذا‬8 ‫) َأنْت ط ْف َلة َصغ ْی َرة‬3
‫يد َخالِد‬ ِ ‫) ُهم َأو َْلد ا ْلمع ِّل ِم ا ْلج ِد‬14
َ َ ُ ُ ْ ْ ‫الصالِحِ َف ْی َصل‬ َّ ِ‫الش ْیخ‬ َّ ‫) َأ ْنت ُْم َم َع‬9‫) ُه َّن نِ َساء ُمؤْ مِنَات‬4
‫الش َج َر ِة ا ْل َكبِ ْی َر ِة‬َّ ‫) ُه َما َت ْح َت تِ ْل َك‬15 ‫) ُه َّن عَلی َذل ِ َك ا ْل َج َب ِل ا ْل َكبِ ْی ِر‬10 ‫ْت َو ُه َو ُت َّجار‬
َ ‫) َأنَا َو َأن‬5
300
‫اع ِل‬ ‫ُْ‬
‫اعل ‪There are two types of‬‬ ‫‪َ pronouns.‬ف ِ‬
‫‪ُ : pronouns which are hidden within the verb.‬م ْستَتِر ‪1.‬‬
‫َج َل َس ( ُه َو)‪َ ،‬ج َل َس ْت ( ِه َي)‬
‫‪َ : pronouns which are visible at the end of the verb.‬ب ِارز ‪2.‬‬
‫ت)‪َ ،‬ي ْف َع ََّل ِن (ا)‪ ،‬اِ ْف َعلِ ْي (ي)‬
‫َج َل ْس ُت ( ُ‬
‫‪َ are written in‬ض ِم ْیر َب ِارز ‪َ and‬ض ِم ْیر ُم ْستَتِر ‪In the following table the‬‬
‫‪brackets after the verb.‬‬
‫ار ُع‬ ‫ا ْلم ِ‬
‫اض ْي‬ ‫ِص ْی َغة‬
‫‪English‬‬ ‫َ‬
‫َي ْف َع ُل ( ُه َو)‬ ‫َف َع َل ( ُه َو)‬ ‫ب‬ ‫ِ‬

‫‪He / It‬‬ ‫الغَائ ُ‬
‫)‪They (m/d‬‬ ‫َي ْف َع ََّل ِن (ا)‬ ‫َف َع ََّل (ا)‬ ‫ا ْلغَائِب ِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫َ‬
‫)‪They (m/p‬‬ ‫َي ْف َع ُل ْو َن (و)‬ ‫َف َع ُل ْوا (و)‬ ‫ا ْلغَائِ ُب ْو َن‬
‫‪She / It‬‬ ‫َت ْف َع ُل ( ِه َي)‬ ‫َف َع َل ْت ( ِه َي)‬ ‫ا ْلغَائِ َب ُة‬
‫)‪They (f/d‬‬ ‫َت ْف َع ََّل ِن (ا)‬ ‫َف َع َلتَا (ا)‬ ‫ا ْلغَائِبت ِ‬

‫َان‬ ‫َ‬
‫)‪They (f/p‬‬ ‫َي ْف َع ْل َن َ‬
‫(ن)‬ ‫َف َع ْل َن (ن)‬ ‫ا ْلغَائِ َب ُ‬
‫ات‬
‫)‪You (m/s‬‬ ‫َتف َع ُل ( َأن َْت)‬ ‫َف َع ْل َت َ‬

‫(ت)‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َخا َط ُ‬
‫ب‬
‫)‪You (m/d‬‬ ‫َت ْف َع ََّل ِن (ا)‬ ‫َف َع ْلت َُما ( ُت َما)‬ ‫ا ْلم َخا َطب ِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ُ‬
‫)‪You (m/p‬‬ ‫َت ْف َع ُل ْو َن (و)‬ ‫َف َعلت ُْم ( ُت ْم)‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َخا َط ُب ْو َن‬
‫َت ْف َعلِ ْی َن (ي)‬ ‫ت ِ‬

‫(ت)‬ ‫َفع ْل ِ‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َخا َط َب ُة‬
‫)‪You (f/s‬‬ ‫َ‬
‫)‪You (f/d‬‬ ‫َت ْف َع ََّل ِن (ا)‬ ‫َف َع ْلت َُما ( ُت َما)‬ ‫ا ْلم َخا َطبت ِ‬
‫َان‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ُ‬
‫)‪You (f/p‬‬ ‫َت ْف َع ْل َن َ‬
‫(ن)‬ ‫َف َع ْلت َُّن ( ُت َّن)‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َخا َط َب ُ‬
‫ات‬
‫‪I‬‬ ‫َأ ْف َع ُل ( َأنَا)‬ ‫َف َع ْل ُت ُ‬

‫(ت)‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َت َك ِّل ُم‬
‫‪We‬‬ ‫َن ْف َع ُل (ن َْح ُن)‬ ‫َف َع ْلنَا (نَا)‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َت َك ِّل ُم ْو َن‬
‫‪301‬‬
‫ التَّا ُء ا ْل َم ْفت ُْو َح ُة‬and ‫التَّا ُء ا ْل َم ْربُ ْو َط ُة‬
The ‫ ْت‬at the end of ‫ ا ْلغَائِ َب ُة‬in ‫اض ْي‬ ِ ‫ا ْلم‬, i.e. ‫ َفع َل ْت‬, is called ‫التَّاء ا ْلم ْفتُوح ُة‬: the
َ َ َ ْ َ ُ
open taa. This is not a subject pronoun; it is a sign to indicate the
verb is feminine. It is just like ‫)ة( التَّا ُء ا ْل َم ْر ُب ْو َط ُة‬, which shows that the
noun is feminine.
‫التَّا ُء ا ْل َم ْفت ُْو َح ُة‬ ‫التَّا ُء ا ْل َم ْر ُب ْو َط ُة‬
‫ت‬
ْ ‫ن ََص َر‬ ‫َطالِبـَـة‬
Exercise 3
State whether the following verbs have a ‫ َض ِم ْیر ُم ْستَتِر‬or ‫ َض ِم ْیر َب ِارز‬, and if
it is a ‫ َض ِم ْیر َب ِارز‬, identify which one it is.
‫) عَدَ ْلت َُما‬13 ‫) َأ ْد ُخ ُل‬9 ‫) َت ْظلِ ُم‬5 ‫) ا ْن َك َس َر‬1
‫اس ْبت َُّن‬
َ ‫) َح‬14 ‫) اِ ْحت ََس ْب َن‬10 ‫) َم ِر ْضت ُْم‬6 ‫) َي ْجت َِم ْع َن‬2
‫) َت ْط ُلبِ ْی َن‬15 ‫) َق َعدَ ا‬11 ‫ت‬ ِ ‫) َشبِع‬7 ْ ‫) َأ ْس َرع‬3
‫َت‬
ْ
ِ ‫) ي ْلبس‬16
‫ان‬ ْ ‫) ن‬12
‫َخ َش ُع‬ ‫) َي ْجزَ ُع‬8 َ ‫) َح ِزن‬4
‫ْت‬
ََ َ
302
Using ‫اعل‬ ِ ‫َض ِمیر ا ْل َف‬
ُْ
ِ ‫َض ِمیر ا ْل َف‬
Verbs can be divided into two categories according to the ‫اع ِل‬ ُْ
attached to them:
1. ‫ ا ْلغَائِ ُب‬and ‫ا ْلغَائِ َب ُة‬
2. The other ‫ِص َیغ‬
ِ ِ
ُ ‫ ا ْل َغائ‬and ‫ا ْل َغائ َب ُة‬
‫ب‬
The ‫ َغائِب‬and ‫ َغائِ َبة‬forms of the verb can be used in two ways:
1. If there is a ‫ َم ْر ُف ْوع‬noun after the verb, that noun will be the ‫اعل‬ ِ ‫َف‬
and there will be no hidden pronoun, ‫ َض ِم ْیر ُم ْس َتتِر‬, within the verb.
‫ب ا ْلبِن ُْت‬
ُ ‫َت ْذ َه‬ ‫الر ُج ُل‬
َّ ‫ب‬َ ‫َذ َه‬
The daughter goes. The man went.
َّ and ‫ َا ْلبِن ُْت‬are the subjects, so there are
In these examples, ‫الر ُج ُل‬
no pronouns within the verbs ‫ َذ َه َب‬or ‫ َت ْذ َه ُب‬.
ِ ‫َف‬
‫اعل‬ ‫فِ ْعل‬ ِ ‫َف‬
‫ا ْلبِن ُْت‬ ُ ‫َت ْذ َه‬

‫ب‬ ‫الر ُج ُل‬
َّ َ ‫َذ َه‬
‫ب‬
2. If there is no ‫ َم ْر ُف ْوع‬noun after the ‫ َغائِب‬and ‫ َغائِ َبة‬form of the verb,
the ‫ َض ِم ْیر ُم ْستَتِر‬will be the ‫اعل‬
ِ ‫ َف‬.
)‫(ه َي‬ ِ ‫فِعل و َف‬

ِ ‫اعل‬ )‫(ه َي‬ ِ ‫فِعل و َف‬
ِ ‫اعل‬ )‫(ه َو‬ ِ ‫فِعل و َف‬
ُ ‫اعل‬ )‫(ه َو‬ ِ ‫فِعل و َف‬
ُ ‫اعل‬
َ ْ َ ْ َ ْ َ ْ
ُ ‫َت ْذ َه‬
‫ب‬ ‫َذ َه َب ْت‬ ُ ‫َي ْذ َه‬
‫ب‬ َ ‫َذ َه‬
‫ب‬
She goes. She went. He goes. He went.
Note
When the ‫اعل‬ ِ ‫ َف‬is a noun after the verb, the verb remains in the
ِ ‫ َف‬is plural.
singular form, even if the ‫اعل‬
‫الر َج ُال‬
303
‫‪َ .‬ف ِ‬
‫اعل ‪Translate the following and identify the‬‬
‫ت‬ ‫‪ )13‬اِس َتی َق َظ َخالِد َقب َل ْاْلُ ْخ ِ‬ ‫ت‬ ‫‪َ )7‬تو َّض َأ الرج ُل فِي ا ْلبی ِ‬ ‫‪َ )1‬ذ َب َح ْت َفاطِ َم ُة َب َق َر ًة‬
‫ْ‬ ‫ْ ْ‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫َّ ُ‬ ‫َ‬
‫ْت‬ ‫‪ )14‬اِس َتی َق َظ بعدَ ا ْلبِن ِ‬ ‫ج ِد‬ ‫‪َ )8‬ت َو َّض َأ فِي ا ْلمس ِ‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ذ َب َح ْت َب َق َر ًة‬
‫ْ ْ َْ‬ ‫َ ْ‬
‫‪َ )15‬ن َظر ِ‬
‫ت ا ْل َم ْر َأ ُة إِ َلی ا ْل َق َم ِر‬ ‫الس ْو ِق‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪َ )3‬ف ِه َم ْاْلَ ْو َْل ُد الدَّ ْر َس‬
‫َ‬ ‫‪َ )9‬س َق َط ْت بِنْت في ُّ‬
‫س ا ْل َج ِم ْی َل ِة‬ ‫الش ْم ِ‬ ‫‪َ )16‬ن َظ َر ْت ِإ َلی َّ‬ ‫‪َ )10‬س َق َط ْت فِي ا ْل َح ِد ْي َق ِة‬ ‫‪َ )4‬ف ِه َم الدَّ ْر َس‬
‫اف زَ ْيد َح ْو َل ا ْل َك ْع َب ِة‬ ‫‪َ )17‬ط َ‬ ‫جدَ‬ ‫‪َ )11‬بنَی ا ْل َملِ ُك ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬ ‫‪َ )5‬أ ْط َع َم ْاْلَغْن ِ َیا ُء ا ْل ُف َق َرا َء‬
‫الص َفا َوا ْل َم ْر َو ِة‬ ‫اف َب ْی َن َّ‬‫‪َ )18‬ط َ‬ ‫اجدَ كَثِ ْی َر ًة‬ ‫‪َ )12‬بنَی َم َس ِ‬ ‫‪َ )6‬أ ْط َع َم ا ْل ُف َق َرا َء‬
‫َّاس‬ ‫‪َ )13‬ي ْح ُش ُر ُ‬
‫الل الن َ‬ ‫‪َْ )9‬ل َت ُض ُّر ْاْلَ ْصنَا ُم‬ ‫‪َ )5‬ي ْجت َِهدُ‬ ‫‪َ )1‬تنَا ُم‬
‫‪َ )14‬ي ْح ُش ُر الن َ‬

‫َّاس‬ ‫‪َْ )10‬ل َت ُض ُّر‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ي ْجت َِهدُ ا ْل َو َلدُ‬ ‫‪َ )2‬تنَا ُم ا ْلبِن ُْت‬
‫‪َْ )15‬ل َي ْش َر ُب ا ْل َخ ْم َر‬ ‫‪َ )11‬ي ْبت َِغ ْي‬ ‫‪َ )7‬ت ْل َب ُس ْاْلُ ُّم‬ ‫‪َ )3‬ي ْجزَ ُع‬
‫‪َْ )16‬ل َي ْش َر ُب ُمؤْ ِمن ا ْل َخ ْم َر‬ ‫‪َ )12‬ي ْبت َِغي ا ْل َق ْو ُم‬ ‫‪َ )8‬ت ْل َب ُس‬ ‫‪َ )4‬ي ْجزَ ُع َخالِد‬
‫‪304‬‬
‫ِص َیغ ‪Other‬‬
‫اعل ‪َ forms, the‬غائِ َبة ‪َ and‬غائِب ‪Apart from the‬‬ ‫‪َ of the other forms is‬ف ِ‬
‫‪َ .‬ب ِارز ‪ُ or‬م ْستَتِر ‪َ ; either‬ض ِم ْیر ‪always a‬‬
‫‪When writing the tarkib, the pronoun is written in brackets after‬‬
‫‪the verb, as follows:‬‬
‫فِعل و َف ِ‬
‫اعل ( َأنَا)‬ ‫فِعل و َف ِ‬
‫اعل (و)‬ ‫فِعل و َف ِ‬
‫اعل (ا)‬
‫ْ َ‬ ‫ْ َ‬ ‫ْ َ‬
‫َأ ْذ َه ُ‬
‫ب‬ ‫َي ْذ َه ُب ْو َن‬ ‫َذ َه َبا‬
‫‪I go.‬‬ ‫‪They go.‬‬ ‫‪They (d) went.‬‬
‫‪ )13‬اِ ْشت ََر ْينَا‬ ‫‪َ )9‬غ َف ْرنَا‬ ‫‪َ )5‬رأ ْيت َُما‬ ‫‪َ )1‬ت َأ َّخ ْر ُت ْم‬
‫‪ُ )14‬ط ْفت َُّن‬ ‫‪َ )10‬ن َظ ُر ْوا‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ص َّل ْی َن‬ ‫‪َ )2‬م َش ْی ُت‬
‫‪َ )15‬ت َو َّض ْأ َن‬ ‫‪ُ )11‬ق ْمت ُْم‬ ‫دت‬
‫‪َ )7‬ما َو َج ُّ‬ ‫‪َ )3‬س َك َتتَا‬
‫‪ )16‬آ َمنَّا‬ ‫‪ )12‬ما عَزَ م ِ‬
‫ت‬ ‫‪ )8‬غ ََس ْلت ُْم‬ ‫‪ )4‬اِ ْفت ََر ْوا‬
‫ْ‬ ‫َ‬
‫‪َ )13‬تس َتی ِق َظ ِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫‪َ )9‬ي ْح َف ُظ ْو َن‬ ‫‪َ )5‬أع َْم ُل‬ ‫‪ُ )1‬ت ْح ِسن ُْو َن‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫‪َْ )14‬ل ُي َبدِّ َْل ِن‬ ‫‪َ )10‬ت ْف َر ُح ْو َن‬ ‫‪ُ )6‬يؤْ مِن ُْو َن‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ن ْق َر ُأ‬
‫‪َ )15‬ت ْج َع ُل ْو َن‬ ‫‪ )11‬ن َْذك ُُر‬ ‫‪َ )7‬أ ُق ْو ُم‬ ‫‪َْ )3‬ل َت ْس َم ِع ْی َن‬
‫‪َ )16‬ي ْأ ُك ْل َن‬ ‫‪ )12‬ن َْم ِش ْي‬ ‫‪َْ )8‬ل َيغ َْض ْب َن‬ ‫‪ )4‬يسافِر ِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫َُ َ‬
‫‪Vocab‬‬
‫‪to seek protection‬‬ ‫‪ to seek help‬عَا َذ َي ُع ْو ُذ ع َْو ًذا‬ ‫ان َي ْست َِع ْی ُن ِا ْس ِت َعا َن ًة‬
‫اِ ْس َت َع َ‬
‫‪to speak‬‬ ‫َك َّل َم ُي َك ِّل ُم َت ْك ِل ْی ًما‪ ،‬ك َََّل ًما‬ ‫‪to establish, stay, reside‬‬ ‫َأ َقا َم ُي ِق ْی ُم إِ َقا َم ًة‬
‫‪to curse‬‬ ‫َل َع َن َي ْل َع ُن َل ْعنًا‬ ‫‪to command‬‬ ‫َأ َم َر َي ْأ ُم ُر َأ ْم ًرا‬
‫‪to benefit‬‬ ‫َن َف َع َينْ َف ُع َن ْف ًعا‬ ‫‪to deceive‬‬ ‫َخدَ َع َي ْخدَ ُع َخدْ عًا‬
‫‪305‬‬
‫ج ِد‬ ‫ان مِ َن ا ْلمس ِ‬‫‪َ )13‬س ِم ْعنَا ْاْلَ َذ َ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪ )1‬يبدِّ ُلو َن ك َََّلم اللِ‬
‫َ ْ‬ ‫‪ُ ﴿ )7‬يق ْی ُم ْو َن َّ‬
‫الص ََّل َة﴾‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َُ ْ‬
‫الر ِج ْی ِم‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪َ )14‬نعو ُذ ِب ِ‬
‫الل ِم َن َّ‬ ‫‪ )8‬ع ََر ُف ْوا َر ُس ْو َل اللِ ﷺ‬
‫الش ْی َطان َّ‬ ‫ُْ‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ي ْخدَ ع ُْو َن الن َ‬
‫َّاس‬
‫‪َ )15‬أ ْش َر ُب ال َّل َب َن ا ْل َح َّار َوا ْل َم َاء ا ْل َب ِار َد‬ ‫ون ك َََّل َم اللِ﴾‬
‫‪َ ﴿ )9‬ي ْس َم ُع َ‬ ‫ت‬ ‫‪ )3‬نِم ُت فِي ا ْلبی ِ‬
‫ْ َْ‬ ‫ْ‬
‫س‬‫الش ْم ِ‬ ‫‪َ )16‬ن َظ َر َتا إِ َلی الن ُُّج ْو ِم َو َّ‬ ‫الص ََّل ِة‬
‫‪َ )10‬يت ََو َّض ُئ ْو َن َق ْب َل َّ‬ ‫‪َ )4‬أ َك ْلنَا ُخ ْبزً ا َوع ََس ًَّل‬
‫ت اللِ‬ ‫ف حو َل ا ْل َكعب ِة بی ِ‬ ‫اش ِع ْی َن‬ ‫‪ )11‬ي ُقومو َن ِفي الص ََّل ِة َخ ِ‬
‫َْ َْ‬ ‫‪َ )17‬ن ُط ْو ُ َ ْ‬ ‫َّ‬ ‫َ ُْْ‬ ‫‪ُ ﴿ )5‬يؤْ ُت ْو َن الزَّ كَاةَ﴾‬
‫الر ُس ْو ِل ﷺ‬ ‫ِ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪َ )12‬ذ َب ُح ْوا َشا َت ْی ِن َص ِغ ْی َر َت ْی ِن َو َب َق َر ًة‬ ‫‪ُ ﴿ )6‬يؤْ مِن َ‬
‫‪ُ )18‬ت َساف ُر ْو َن إِ َلی َمد ْينَة َّ‬ ‫ُون بِا ْل َغ ْی ِ‬
‫ب﴾‬
‫اعل ‪Rewrite the following sentences by changing the‬‬ ‫‪َ into a‬ف ِ‬
‫‪pronoun. Thereafter, translate. One has been done for you.‬‬
‫ُب ‪َ ‬أ َخ ُذ ْوا ا ْل ُكت َ‬
‫ُب‬ ‫َأ َخ َذ ال ُّط ََّّل ُب ا ْل ُكت َ‬
‫َّاس ُم ِص ْی َبة عَظِ ْی َمة‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )7‬أ َصا َبت الن َ‬ ‫َض َّل ا ْل َكافِ ُر ْو َن‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫ت ا ْل َف َواكِ ُه مِ َن َّ‬ ‫‪ )8‬س َق َط ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫َخ ِس َر ال َّظال ِ ُم ْو َن‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫ات مِ َن ا ْل َمدْ َر َس ِة‬ ‫ت ال َّطال ِ َب ُ‬ ‫‪ )9‬غَاب ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫َقدْ َأ ْف َل َح ا ْل ُمؤْ مِن ُْو َن‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫ِ ِ ِ‬ ‫َت ا ْلمسلِمت ِ‬ ‫ما ج ِزع ِ‬
‫َّاس‬ ‫‪َْ )10‬ل َي ْس َأ ُل ٰه َذان ا ْل َفق ْی َران الن َ‬ ‫َان‬ ‫ُ ْ َ‬ ‫َ َ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫ان َع َلی ا ْل ُم ِص ْی َب ِة‬ ‫ت ا ْلمر َأ َت ِ‬
‫َْ‬
‫‪ )11‬صبر ِ‬
‫َ ََ‬ ‫ت الدُ ُم ْو ُع َع َلی ا ْل َو ْج ِه‬ ‫س َق َط ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫اج ُر ْو َن النَّبِ َّي ﷺ‬ ‫‪ )12‬ن ََص َر ْاْلَن َْص ُار َوا ْل ُم َه ِ‬ ‫ت‬‫َلم ير ِج ِع ا ْل َك ْلب إِ َلی ا ْلبی ِ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫َْ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫ْ َْ‬
‫‪ُ into a‬م ْبتَدَ أ ‪Rewrite the following sentences by changing the‬‬
‫‪pronoun. Thereafter, translate.‬‬
‫َفاطِ َم ُة َش ِر ْي َفة ‪ِ ‬ه َي َش ِر ْي َفة‬
‫ب َص ِغ ْی َرة‬ ‫ار ْي ُ‬‫‪ )13‬ا ْل َم َح ِ‬ ‫الش ْی ُخ َش ِر ْيف‬ ‫‪ٰ )9‬ه َذا َّ‬ ‫َان غَنِیت ِ‬
‫َان‬ ‫َّ‬
‫ْاْلُ ْخت ِ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬ ‫زَ ْيد ُأ ْستَاذ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫‪ )14‬ا ْل َم ُال َو ْاْلَ ْو َْل ُد فِ ْتنَة‬ ‫ان ُض َع َفا ُء‬
‫الص ْب َی ُ‬
‫‪ِّ )10‬‬ ‫خ ْی ََّل ِن‬
‫ان ب ِ‬
‫الت ِ ِ‬
‫َّاج َر َ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬ ‫ا ْل ُمدُ ُن َب ِع ْیدَ ة‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫ت ‪ )15‬ا ْل َعال ِ ُم ْو َن ُم ْجت َِهدُ ْو َن‬ ‫‪ )11‬ا ْل ُكتُب فِي ا ْلبی ِ‬
‫َْ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫اه َلة‬ ‫تِ ْل َك ا ْلمر َأ ُة ج ِ‬
‫َْ َ‬ ‫‪)7‬‬ ‫ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن ُأ َّمة‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫َات ُف َقراء ‪َ )16‬فاطِم ُة وزَ ينَب جائِعت ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫الس ِف ْین َِة‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ال َّطال ِ َب ُة عَاقِ َلة‬
‫َان‬ ‫َ َ ْ ُ َ َ‬ ‫‪ٰ )12‬هؤُ َْلء ا ْل َبن ُ َ ُ‬ ‫الن َِّسا ُء في َّ‬ ‫‪)8‬‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫‪306‬‬
‫َان ‪ of‬اِ ْس ُم ‪The‬‬
‫َل ْی َس ‪ and‬ك َ‬
‫ان ‪ْ of‬اسم ‪The‬‬ ‫َم ْر ُف ْوع ‪َ . Therefore, like normal verbs, the‬م ْر ُف ْوع ‪َ is‬ل ْی َس ‪َ and‬ك َ‬
‫َان ‪noun after the‬‬ ‫‪َ .‬ض ِم ْیر َم ْر ُف ْوع ‪َ can occur as a‬ل ْی َس ‪ and‬ك َ‬
‫َان ‪The following table illustrates‬‬ ‫اسم ‪َ with their‬ل ْی َس ‪ and‬ك َ‬
‫‪ْ as a‬‬
‫‪pronoun.‬‬
‫‪English‬‬ ‫َل ْی َس‬ ‫َي ُك ْو ُن‬ ‫ك َ‬
‫َان‬ ‫ِص ْی َغة‬
‫َل ْی َس ( ُه َو)‬ ‫َي ُك ْو ُن ( ُه َو)‬ ‫ك َ‬

‫َان ( ُه َو)‬ ‫ب‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪He / It‬‬ ‫الغَائ ُ‬
‫َل ْی َسا (ا)‬ ‫ي ُكون ِ‬
‫َان (ا)‬ ‫كَانَا (ا)‬ ‫ا ْلغَائِب ِ‬
‫ان‬
‫)‪They (m/d‬‬ ‫َ ْ‬ ‫َ‬
‫)‪They (m/p‬‬ ‫َل ْی ُس ْوا (و)‬ ‫َي ُك ْون ُْو َن (و)‬ ‫كَان ُْوا (و)‬ ‫ا ْلغَائِ ُب ْو َن‬
‫‪She / It‬‬ ‫َل ْی َس ْت ( ِه َي)‬ ‫َت ُك ْو ُن ( ِه َي)‬ ‫َت ( ِه َي)‬

‫كَان ْ‬ ‫ا ْلغَائِ َب ُة‬
‫َل ْی َستَا (ا)‬ ‫َت ُكون ِ‬
‫َان (ا)‬ ‫كَا َنتَا (ا)‬ ‫ا ْلغَائِبت ِ‬
‫َان‬
‫)‪They (f/d‬‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫َ‬
‫)‪They (f/p‬‬ ‫َل ْس َن َ‬
‫(ن)‬ ‫َي ُك َّن َ‬
‫(ن)‬ ‫ُن (ن)‬
‫ك َّ‬ ‫ا ْلغَائِ َب ُ‬
‫ات‬
‫)‪You (m/s‬‬ ‫َل ْس َت َ‬

‫(ت)‬ ‫َت ُك ْو ُن ( َأن َْت)‬ ‫ُكن َْت َ‬
‫(ت)‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َخا َط ُ‬
‫ب‬
‫َل ْست َُما ( ُت َما)‬ ‫َت ُكون ِ‬
‫َان (ا)‬ ‫ُكنْت َُما ( ُت َما)‬ ‫ا ْلم َخا َطب ِ‬
‫ان‬
‫)‪You (m/d‬‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ُ‬
‫)‪You (m/p‬‬ ‫َل ْست ُْم ( ُت ْم)‬ ‫َت ُك ْون ُْو َن (و)‬ ‫ُكنْت ُْم ( ُت ْم)‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َخا َط ُب ْو َن‬
‫ت ِ‬
‫(ت)‬ ‫َلس ِ‬ ‫َت ُك ْونِ ْی َن (ي)‬ ‫ْت ِ‬
‫(ت)‬ ‫ُكن ِ‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َخا َط َب ُة‬
‫)‪You (f/s‬‬ ‫ْ‬
‫َل ْست َُما ( ُت َما)‬ ‫َت ُكون ِ‬
‫َان (ا)‬ ‫ُكنْت َُما ( ُت َما)‬ ‫ا ْلم َخا َطبت ِ‬
‫َان‬
‫)‪You (f/d‬‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ُ‬
‫)‪You (f/p‬‬ ‫َل ْست َُّن ( ُت َّن)‬ ‫َت ُك َّن َ‬
‫(ن)‬ ‫ُكنْت َُّن ( ُت َّن)‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َخا َط َب ُ‬
‫ات‬
‫‪I‬‬ ‫َل ْس ُت ُ‬
‫(ت)‬ ‫َأك ُْو ُن ( َأنَا)‬ ‫ُكن ُْت ُ‬
‫(ت)‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َت َك ِّل ُم‬
‫‪We‬‬ ‫َل ْسنَا (نَا)‬ ‫َن ُك ْو ُن (ن َْح ُن)‬ ‫ُكنَّا (نَا)‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َت َك ِّل ُم ْو َن‬
‫‪307‬‬
‫‪Note‬‬
‫‪َ but are‬ض ِمیر َف ِ‬
‫اعل ‪َ take the same form as a‬ل ْی َس ‪ and‬ك َ‬
‫َان ‪ْ of‬اسم ‪The‬‬ ‫ُْ‬
‫‪ْ .‬اسم ‪labelled as‬‬
‫﴿كَا ُن ْوا َظال ِ ِم ْی َن﴾‬
‫‪They were oppressors.‬‬
‫َخبَ ُر َك َ‬
‫ان‬ ‫اس ُم َك َ‬
‫ان (و)‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ف ْعل نَاقص‪ْ ،‬‬
‫َظال ِ ِم ْی َن‬ ‫كَان ُْوا‬
‫َان َص َحابِ ًّیا عَظِ ْی ًما‬
‫‪ )9‬ك َ‬ ‫اج َر َت ْی ِن‬ ‫َل ْی َستَا ُم َه ِ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬ ‫‪َ )1‬ل ْی ُس ْوا كِ َرا ًما‬
‫الش ُی ْوخِ ا ْل ِع َظا ِم‬‫‪َ )10‬ل ْی َسا مِ َن ُّ‬ ‫َل ْس َت مِ َن ْاْلَ َساتِ َذ ِة‬ ‫‪)6‬‬ ‫‪ )2‬كَان ُْوا ُش َهدَ ا َء‬
‫رة الزَّ ْيت ُْو ِن‬
‫‪ )11‬ي ُكونُو َن ِعنْدَ َشج ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫َ ْ ْ‬ ‫ت ا ْم َر َأ ًة َف ِق ْی َر ًة‬
‫َلیس ِ‬
‫َْ‬ ‫‪)7‬‬ ‫‪َ )3‬ل ْسنَا ُمنَافِ ِق ْی َن‬
‫‪ )12‬كَان ُْوا ِر َج ًاْل ُأ ْولِي عَ َمل صالِح‬ ‫ُكنْت ُْم َع َلی ا ْل ُك ْر ِس ِّي‬ ‫‪)8‬‬ ‫‪َ )4‬ل ْست َُّن َأ ْم َوا ًتا‬
‫ادقِ ْی َن﴾‬
‫‪ُ ﴿ )7‬كن َْت مِن الص ِ‬
‫َ َّ‬ ‫‪﴿ )4‬كَانُوا كَافِ ِر ْي َن﴾‬ ‫‪ُ ﴿ )1‬كنْت ُْم َأعْدَ ا ًء﴾‬
‫‪ُ ﴿ )8‬كن ُْت مِ َن ال َّظال ِ ِم ْی َن﴾‬ ‫‪ُ ﴿ )5‬كنْت ُْم ُمؤْ مِن ِ ْی َن﴾‬ ‫‪ُ ﴿ )2‬كنَّا َظال ِ ِم ْی َن﴾‬
‫اس ِق ْی َن﴾‬‫‪ ﴿ )9‬كَانُوا َقوما َف ِ‬
‫ْ ً‬ ‫ادقِ ْی َن﴾‬
‫‪ُ ﴿ )6‬كنْتُم ص ِ‬
‫ْ َ‬ ‫ادقِ ْی َن﴾‬
‫‪ُ ﴿ )3‬كنَّا ص ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َان ‪ of‬اِ ْس ُم ‪Rewrite the following sentences by changing the‬‬
‫َل ْی َس ‪ and‬ك َ‬
‫‪into a pronoun. Thereafter, translate into English.‬‬
‫َت ْاْلَع َْم ُال َخال ِ َص ًة‬ ‫‪ )9‬كَان ِ‬ ‫ان عَدُ ًّوا‬ ‫الش ْی َط ُ‬
‫َان َّ‬ ‫ك َ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬ ‫َان ا ْل َو ْج ُه َج ِم ْی ًَّل‬
‫ك َ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫َت الرما َنت ِ‬
‫َان ُح ْل َو َت ْی ِن‬ ‫‪ )10‬كَان ِ‬ ‫اشا‬ ‫الر َج ُال ِع َط ً‬ ‫َ‬ ‫كَان َْت َي ِد ْي َو ِس َخ ًة‬
‫ُّ َّ‬ ‫كان ِّ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫ان َم ْفت ُْو َح ْی ِن‬ ‫َان ا ْلمصح َف ِ‬ ‫َان ا ْل ُمنَافِ ُق ْو َن َأعْدَ ا ًء‬ ‫ان َق ِر ْي َب ْی ِن‬‫َان النَّجم ِ‬
‫‪ )11‬ك َ ُ ْ َ‬ ‫ك َ‬ ‫‪)7‬‬ ‫ك َ ْ َ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫ان َع َلی ا ْل ُك ْر ِس ِّي‬ ‫َان ا ْلكِتَاب ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫‪ )12‬ك َ‬ ‫َت ْاْلُ ُذن ِ‬
‫َان َكبِ ْی َر َت ْی ِن‬ ‫كَان ِ‬ ‫‪)8‬‬ ‫َت النِّ َع ُم عَظِ ْی َم ًة‬ ‫كَان ِ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫‪308‬‬
‫اع ِل ‪The‬‬‫‪ as a Pronoun‬نَائِب ا ْل َف ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫‪ can be a pronoun.‬نَائِ ُب ا ْل َفاع ِل ‪The‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُه ِد ْيت ُْم‬
‫‪You were guided.‬‬
‫فِعل ونَائِب ال َف ِ‬
‫اع ِل ( ُت ْم)‬ ‫ْ َ ُ‬
‫ُه ِد ْيت ُْم‬
‫ب‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪ُ )10‬ف ِّض ُل ْوا‬ ‫‪ُ )7‬ف ِر َض ْت‬ ‫‪ُ )1‬ي ْط َع ُم ْو َن‬
‫‪ )13‬كُت َ‬ ‫‪ُ )4‬ي ْو َجدُ‬
‫‪َْ )14‬ل ُي ْق َت ُل ْو َن‬ ‫‪ُ )11‬ا ْست ِ‬
‫ُج ْبت ُْم‬ ‫‪َْ )8‬ل يعر َف ِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫‪ُ )5‬أن ِْف َق‬ ‫‪ُ )2‬ا ْبتُلِ ْیت ُْم‬
‫َُْ‬
‫‪ )15‬ن ُِس ْیت ُْم‬ ‫‪َْ )12‬ل ُي ْظ َل ُم ْو َن‬ ‫‪َ )9‬ما ُأك ِْر ْه َن‬ ‫‪ُ )6‬أ ْهلِ ُك ْوا‬ ‫‪ )3‬يهدَ ي ِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫ُْ َ‬
‫‪ُ )8‬ف ِّض ُل ْوا إِ َّْل َع َلی ا ْل َم ََّلئِ َك ِة‬ ‫‪ُ )1‬أ ْهلِ ُك ْوا بِال ُّظ ْل ِم‬
‫ب‬ ‫الرزْ َق بِ ُّ‬
‫الذن ُْو ِ‬ ‫‪ُ )9‬ي ْح َر ُم ْو َن ِّ‬ ‫الرزْ َق‬‫‪ُ )2‬ي ْح َر ُم ْو َن ِّ‬
‫‪َ )10‬ي ْو َم ا ْل ِق َیا َم ِة َْل ُي ْظ َل ُم ْو َن َش ْیئًا‬ ‫‪َ )3‬ما ُسئِ ُل ْوا مِ ْن َأ ْجر‬
‫اط اللِ ا ْل ُم ْست َِق ْی ِم‬
‫اإلس ََّل ِم ِصر ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫‪ُ )11‬ي ْهدَ ْو َن إِ َلی ْ ِ ْ‬
‫الضع َف ِ‬
‫اء‬ ‫‪ُ )4‬ي ْرزَ ُق ْو َن بِ ُّ َ‬
‫‪ )12‬فِي ا ْل ُق ُب ْو ِر َو َي ْو َم ا ْل ِق َیا َم ِة ُي َع َّذ ُب ْو َن ع ََذا ًبا َش ِد ْيدً ا‬ ‫‪َ )5‬ما ُخلِ ُق ْوا إِ َّْل ل ِ ْل ِع َبا َد ِة‬
‫اب ولِ ْل َجزَ ِاء‬ ‫‪ُ )13‬ي ْح َش ُر ْو َن َي ْو َم ا ْل ِق َی َام ِة ِم َن ا ْل ُق ُب ْو ِر لِ ْل ِح َس ِ‬ ‫‪ُ )6‬ي ْهدَ ْو َن إِ َّْل إِ َلی ا ْل َح ِّق‬
‫وسی ڠ َومِ ْن َب ْع ِد ُم ْو َسی ڠ‬ ‫‪ )14‬ع ُِّذ ُب ْوا َق ْب َل ُم َ‬ ‫‪﴿ )7‬زُ ْل ِز ُلوا ِز ْلزَ ًاْل َش ِد ْيدً ا﴾‬
‫‪309‬‬
‫اع ِل ‪ When It Has a‬ا ْل ِف ْع ُل ا ْل ُم َض ِار ُع ‪ of‬إِع َْراب ‪The‬‬
‫ُْ‬
‫ا ْل ِف ْع ُل ا ْل ُم َض ِار ُع ‪ِ of‬ص َیغ ‪The‬‬
‫‪:‬ا ْل ِف ْع ُل ا ْل ُم َض ِار ُع ‪ِ of‬ص َیغ ‪There are three types of‬‬
‫‪.‬ن ُْون ‪ِ which do not end in a‬ص َیغ ‪1. Those‬‬
‫َن ْف َع ُل‬ ‫َأ ْف َع ُل‬ ‫َت ْف َع ُل‬ ‫َي ْف َع ُل‬
‫اإلع َْرا ِب ‪2. Those which end in a‬‬ ‫‪.‬ن ُْو ُن ِ‬
‫اب ‪A‬‬ ‫اإلع َْر ِ‬ ‫‪َ to express the‬ض ِمیر ا ْل َف ِ‬
‫اع ِل ‪ which comes after the‬ن ُْون ‪ is a‬ن ُْو ُن ْ ِ‬ ‫ُْ‬
‫‪َ state.‬م ْر ُف ْوع‬
‫َت ْف َعلِ ْی َن‬ ‫َت ْف َع ُل ْو َن‬ ‫َت ْف َع ََّل ِن‬
‫َي ْف َع ُل ْو َن‬ ‫َي ْف َع ََّل ِن‬
‫ات ‪ and‬ا ْلغَائِ َب ُ‬
‫ات ‪3.‬‬ ‫اع ِل ‪ which have a‬ا ْل ُم َخا َط َب ُ‬ ‫‪ at‬نُون ‪َ in the form of a‬ض ِمیر ا ْل َف ِ‬
‫ُْ‬ ‫ْ‬
‫‪.‬ن ُْو ُن الن ِّْس َوة ‪ is known as‬ن ُْون ‪the end. This‬‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َت ْف َع ْل َن‬ ‫َي ْف َع ْل َن‬
‫ا ْل ِف ْع ُل ا ْل ُم َض ِار ُع ‪Irab of‬‬

‫ات ‪ and‬ا ْل َغائِ َب ُ‬
‫ات ‪The‬‬ ‫‪َ . Therefore, their‬م ْبنِي ‪ُ are‬م َض ِ‬
‫ارع ‪ form of the‬ا ْل ُم َخا َط َب ُ‬
‫‪َ , i.e. inferred.‬م َح ِّلي ‪irab will be‬‬
‫‪ُ .‬م ْع َرب ‪The remaining twelve forms are‬‬
‫‪.‬ا ْل ِف ْع ُل ا ْل ُم َض ِار ُع ‪The following table summarises the irab of‬‬
‫َض َّمة‬ ‫َفت َْحة‬ ‫ُس ُك ْون‬
‫ا ْل ِف ْع ُل ا ْل ُم َض ِ‬
‫ار ُع‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫) َض َّمة ‪(Removal of‬‬
‫اب ‪without‬‬ ‫اإلع َْر ِ‬ ‫ن ُْو ُن ْ ِ‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫َي ْف َع ُل‬ ‫َلن َي ْف َع َل‬ ‫َل ْم َي ْف َع ْل‬
‫ار ُع‬ ‫ن ‪Keeping the‬‬ ‫ن ‪Dropping the‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪B‬‬ ‫اب ‪with‬‬ ‫ن ُْو ُن ْ ِ‬
‫اإل ْع َر ِ‬ ‫َي ْف َع ََّل ِن‬ ‫َلن َي ْف َع ََّل‬ ‫َل ْم َي ْف َع ََّل‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ا ْلغَائِ َب ُ‬
‫ات‬ ‫)‪َ does not drop‬ن( َم ْبنِي‬
‫‪C‬‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َخا َط َب ُ‬
‫ات‬ ‫َي ْف َع ْل َن‬ ‫َلن َّي ْف َع ْل َن‬ ‫َل ْم َي ْف َع ْل َن‬
‫‪310‬‬
Differentiating Between ‫اب‬ ِ ‫عْر‬ ِ ْ ‫ ن ُْو ُن‬and ِ‫ن ُْو ُن النِّس َوة‬
َ ‫اإل‬ ْ
The ‫اب‬ ِ
ِ ‫ ن ُْو ُن ْاإلع َْر‬comes after the pronoun to show that the ‫ارع‬ ِ ‫ فِ ْعل ُم َض‬is
in the ‫ َم ْر ُف ْوع‬state.
The ‫ ن ُْون‬at the end of ‫ات‬ ُ ‫ ا ْلغَائِ َب‬and ‫ات‬ ِ ‫ َض ِمیر ا ْل َف‬. This is
ُ ‫ ا ْل ُم َخا َط َب‬are the ‫اع ِل‬ ُْ
known as ‫الضم ْیر‬ ِ ِ ُ
َّ ‫ ;ن ُْون‬the ‫ ن ُْون‬which is a pronoun, not a sign of irab, or
ِ‫نُو ُن النِّسوة‬, a ‫ نُون‬which shows the feminine pronoun.
َ ْ ْ ْ
Sign of ِ
‫َفاعل‬ ‫ف ْعل‬
َ ِ‫إ‬
‫عْراب‬
‫َن‬ ‫ــو‬
ْ ‫َي ْف َع ُلــ‬
‫َن‬ ‫َي ْف َع ْلـ‬
Exercise 16
Translate the following and state the irab of the verb and how it is
expressed.
‫) َل ْم َتن َْج ْح َن‬16 ‫) َلن َّي ْل َب ُث ْوا‬11 ‫) ُينْ َف ُخ‬6 ‫) َج ِز َع‬1
‫) َما َر َج ُع ْوا‬17 ‫) َل ْم َي ْل َب َثا‬12 ‫) َلن ُّينْ َف َخ‬7 ‫) َت ْجزَ ُع‬2
‫) َْل َي ْر ِج ُع ْو َن‬18 ‫) ن ََج ْح َن‬13 ‫) َل ْم ُينْ َف ْخ‬8 ‫) َل ْن َأ ْجزَ َع‬3
‫) َلن َّي ْر ِج ُع ْوا‬19 ‫) َتن َْج ْح َن‬14 ‫) َلبِ ُس ْوا‬9 ‫) َل ْم ن َْجزَ ْع‬4
‫) َل ْم َت ْر ِج ُع ْوا‬20 ‫) َلن َّين َْج ْح َن‬15 ‫) َت ْل َب ُس ْو َن‬10 ‫) ن ُِف َخ‬5
311
‫ إِع َْراب‬of Verbs with Weak Letters
The letters ‫ َألِف‬, ‫ َواو‬and ‫ َياء‬are known as ‫ َح ْر ُف ا ْل ِع َّل ِة‬, weak letters.
If a verb has ‫ َح ْر ُف ا ْل ِع َّل ِة‬and does not end in a ‫اب‬ ِ ْ ‫ ن ُْو ُن‬or ‫الض ِم ْی ِر‬
ِ ‫اإلع َْر‬ َّ ‫ن ُْو ُن‬, it
will undergo slight changes to make pronunciation easier.
Weak Letters in the Middle
If the ‫ َح ْر ُف ا ْل ِع َّل ِة‬is in the middle, it will drop when the ‫ فِ ْعل ُم َض ِارع‬is in the
‫ َم ْجزُ ْوم‬state.
‫ف‬ْ ‫ َل ْم َي َخ‬ ‫اف‬ ُ ‫َي َخ‬ ‫َل ْم َيبِ ْع‬  ‫َيبِ ْی ُع‬ ‫َل ْم َي ُق ْل‬  ‫َي ُق ْو ُل‬
Weak Letters at the End
In the ‫ َم ْر ُف ْوع‬state, the ‫ َض َّمة‬will not be pronounced, i.e. it will be ‫ ُم َقدَّ َرة‬.
‫َي ْر ٰضی‬  ‫َي ْر َض ُي‬ ‫َي ْرمِ ْي‬ ِ
 ‫َي ْرم ُي‬ ‫َيدْ ُع ْو‬  ‫َيدْ ع ُُو‬
In the ‫ َمن ُْص ْوب‬state, ‫ َفت َْحة‬on the ‫ َواو‬and ‫ َياء‬will be pronounced, but the
‫ َفت َْحة‬on the ‫ َألِف‬will be ‫ ُم َقدَّ َرة‬.
‫َلن َّي ْر ٰضی‬ ‫َلن َّي ْرمِ َي‬ ‫َلن َّيدْ ع َُو‬
In the ‫ َم ْجزُ ْوم‬state, the ‫ َواو( َح ْر ُف ا ْل ِع َّل ِة‬, ‫ َياء‬and ‫ ) َألِف‬will be dropped.
‫ َل ْم َي ْر َض‬ ‫َي ْر َض ُي‬ ‫َل ْم َي ْر ِم‬ ِ ‫َل ْم َيدْ ُع‬
 ‫َي ْرم ُي‬  ‫َيدْ ع ُُو‬
The following table illustrates the ‫ إِع َْراب‬of these verbs.
)‫َض َّمة ( ُم َقدَّ َرة‬ )‫َفت َْحة ( ُم َقدَّ َرة‬ ‫ُس ُك ْون‬
(Removal of ‫َض َّمة‬
or weak letter)
ِ ‫ا ْل ِف ْع ُل ا ْل ُم َض‬
‫ار ُع‬
‫َي ُق ْو ُل‬ ‫َلن َّي ُق ْو َل‬ ‫َل ْم َي ُقـــ ْل‬
with weak ‫ف ا ْل ِع َّل ِة‬
ُ ‫ َح ْر‬in
2 letters and the ‫َيبِ ْی ُع‬ ‫َلن َّيبِ ْی َع‬ ‫َل ْم َيبِـــ ْع‬
without ‫ن ُْو ُن‬
A middle ُ ‫َي َخا‬
‫ف‬ َ ‫َلن َّي َخا‬
‫ف‬ ْ ‫َل ْم َي َخـــ‬
‫ف‬
ِْ
ِ ‫اإل ْع َر‬
‫اب‬
‫َيدْ ُع ْو‬ ‫َلن َّيدْ ُع َو‬ ‫َل ْم َيدْ ُعـــ‬
‫ف ا ْل ِع َّل ِة‬
ُ ‫ َح ْر‬at
‫َي ْرمِ ْي‬ ‫َلن َّي ْرمِ َي‬ ‫َل ْم َي ْرمِـــ‬
the end
‫َي ْر ٰضی‬ ‫َلن َّي ْر ٰضی‬ ‫َل ْم َي ْر َضـــ‬
312
‫‪Translate the following and state the irab of the verb and how it is‬‬
‫‪is expressed.‬‬
‫‪َ )13‬لن َّن ْفت َِر َي َع ٰلی اللِ ك َِذ ًبا‬ ‫‪َ )7‬ل ْم َي ِف ِ‬
‫ض الن َّْه ُر‬ ‫‪ )1‬ن َْر ٰضی‬
‫ب ٰهؤُ َْل ِء ُم ِص ْی َبة‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )14‬ل ْم ُتص ْ‬ ‫الس ْو ِق‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )8‬ل ْم َي ْب َق ْی َن في ُّ‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ل ْم َأ ْر َض‬
‫الل َو َْل ْاْل ِخ َر َة‬‫‪َ )15‬لن َّنن ْٰسی َ‬ ‫َّاج ُر ا ْل َب ْی َت‬‫‪َ )9‬لم َيبِ ِع الت ِ‬
‫ْ‬ ‫‪َ )3‬ل ْن َت ْر ٰضی‬
‫‪َ )16‬ل ْم ن ََر ال ُّط ُی ْو َر َف ْو َق ا ْل َج َب ِل‬ ‫‪َ )10‬ل ْم ُي َص ِّل الن ُ‬
‫َّاس َب ْعدُ‬ ‫الصبِ َّی ُة‬‫‪َ )4‬ل ْم َتن َِم َّ‬
‫‪َ )17‬لن َّي ْبن ُْوا َب ْیتًا َب ْل َم ْس ِجدً ا َج ِم ْی ًَّل‬ ‫ف َحتّٰی ْاْل ِن‬ ‫‪َ )11‬ل ْم َن ُط ْ‬ ‫‪َ )5‬ل ْم َيطِ ِر ال َّط ْی ُر‬
‫عَن ا ْل ُم ْش ِر ِك ْی َن‬
‫اْل ْصن َُام ِ‬ ‫‪َ )18‬ل ْم ُت ِ‬
‫غْن ْ َ‬ ‫‪َ )12‬ي ْفت َُر ْو َن َع َلی اللِ ا ْل َك ِذ َب‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ل ْم َي ُج ِز ا ْل َخ ْم ُر‬
‫‪Complete Irab Table of Verbs‬‬

‫*‬ ‫*‬ ‫*‬
‫ا ْل ِفع ُل ا ْلم ِ‬
‫اض ْي‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ْ‬
‫*‬ ‫*‬ ‫*‬
‫َض َّمة ( ُم َقدَّ َرة)‬ ‫َفت َْحة ( ُم َقدَّ َرة)‬ ‫ُس ُك ْون‬
‫‪َ or‬ض َّمة ‪(Removal of‬‬
‫ار ُع‬
‫)‪weak letter‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫اب ‪without‬‬ ‫اإلع َْر ِ‬ ‫ن ُْو ُن ْ ِ‬ ‫َي ْف َع ُل‬ ‫َلن َي ْف َع َل‬ ‫َل ْم َي ْف َع ْل‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫ف‬‫َي ُق ْو ُل‪َ ،‬يبِ ْی ُع‪َ ،‬ي َخا ُ‬ ‫َلن َي ُق ْو َل‪َ ،‬يبِ ْی َع‪َ ،‬ي َخا َ‬
‫ف‬ ‫َل ْم َي ُق ْل‪َ ،‬يبِ ْع‪َ ،‬ي َخ ْ‬
‫ف‬
‫َيدْ ُع ْو‪َ ،‬ي ْرمِ ْي‪َ ،‬ي ْر ٰضی‬ ‫َلن َّيدْ عُ َو‪َ ،‬ي ْر ِم َي‪َ ،‬ي ْر ٰضی‬ ‫َل ْم َيدْ ُع‪َ ،‬ي ْرمِ‪َ ،‬ي ْر ٰض‬
‫ار ُع‬ ‫ن ‪Keeping the‬‬ ‫ن ‪Dropping the‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪B‬‬ ‫اب ‪with‬‬ ‫ن ُْو ُن ْ ِ‬
‫اإل ْع َر ِ‬ ‫َي ْف َع ََّل ِن‬ ‫َلن َي ْف َع ََّل‬ ‫َل ْم َي ْف َع ََّل‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ا ْلغَائِ َب ُ‬
‫ات‬ ‫)‪َ does not drop‬ن( َم ْبنِي‬
‫‪C‬‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َخا َط َب ُ‬
‫ات‬ ‫َي ْف َع ْل َن‬ ‫َلن َّي ْف َع ْل َن‬ ‫َل ْم َي ْف َع ْل َن‬
‫*‬ ‫*‬ ‫ُس ُك ْون‬

‫‪3‬‬ ‫فِ ْع ُل ْاْلَ ْم ِر‬
‫*‬ ‫*‬ ‫اِ ْف َع ْل‬
‫‪313‬‬
The Imperative and Negative Imperative
The imperative, ‫ ْاْلَ ْم ُر‬, and negative imperative, ‫الن َّْه ُي‬, are used to
issue commands or prohibitions.
These verbs are formed from the ‫ ُم َض ِارع‬and are always in the ‫َم ْجزُ ْوم‬
state.
Since a command or prohibition can only be issued to someone in
front of the speaker, ‫ ْاْلَ ْم ُر‬and ‫ الن َّْه ُي‬are primarily used with the ‫ ِص َیغ‬of
the ‫ ُم َخا َطب‬.
‫َْل َت ْجلِ ْس‬ ‫اِ ْجلِ ْس‬
Do not sit. Sit.
The subject pronouns with the ‫ َأ ْمر‬and ‫ ن َْهي‬are given in the table
below.
English ‫الن َّْه ُي‬ ‫ْاْلَ ْم ُر‬ ‫ِص ْی َغة‬
You (m/s) )‫َْل َت ْف َع ْل ( َأن َْت‬ )‫ْت‬َ ‫اِ ْف َع ْل ( َأن‬ ُ ‫ا ْل ُم َخا َط‬
‫ب‬
You (m/d) )‫َْل َت ْف َع ََّل (ا‬ )‫اِ ْف َع ََّل (ا‬ ِ ‫ا ْلم َخا َطب‬
‫ان‬ َ ُ
You (m/p) )‫َْل َت ْف َع ُل ْوا (و‬ )‫اِ ْف َع ُل ْوا (و‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َخا َط ُب ْو َن‬
You (f/s) )‫َْل َت ْف َعلِ ْي (ي‬ )‫اِ ْف َعلِ ْي (ي‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َخا َط َب ُة‬
You (f/d) )‫َْل َت ْف َع ََّل (ا‬ )‫اِ ْف َع ََّل (ا‬ ِ ‫ا ْلم َخا َطبت‬
‫َان‬ َ ُ
You (f/p) َ ‫َْل َت ْف َع ْل َن‬
)‫(ن‬ َ ‫اِ ْف َع ْل َن‬
)‫(ن‬ ُ ‫ا ْل ُم َخا َط َب‬
‫ات‬
314
‫‪َ state by‬م ْجزُ ْوم ‪ُ in its‬م َخا َطب ‪ْ , is made from the‬اْلَ ْم ُر ‪The imperative,‬‬
‫‪َ at the beginning.‬ت ‪removing the‬‬
‫ِعدْ‬ ‫َيعدُ ‪‬‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ُقـــ ْل‬ ‫َت ُق ْو ُل ‪‬‬ ‫َصدِّ ْق‬ ‫ُت َصدِّ ُق ‪‬‬
‫‪َ will be added at the‬ه ْمزَ ُة ا ْل َو ْص ِل ‪ُ , a‬س ُك ْون ‪َ has a‬ت ‪If the letter after the‬‬
‫‪beginning to aid pronunciation.‬‬
‫ُان ُْص ْر‬ ‫َتن ُْص ُر ‪‬‬ ‫اِ ْفت َْح‬ ‫َت ْفت َُح ‪‬‬
‫َأ ْمر ‪Translation of‬‬
‫‪َ , the subject, you, is not mentioned as the‬أ ْمر ‪When translating an‬‬
‫‪addressee is understood to be the subject.‬‬
‫اِ ْجلِ ْس‬
‫‪Sit.‬‬ ‫✓‬
‫‪You sit.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪When translating, words like kindly, please, etc. can be added.‬‬
‫‪Please sit.‬‬
‫ب‬‫ان َص ََّل ِة ا ْل َمغ ِْر ِ‬ ‫‪ُ )8‬ك ُلوا ال َّلحم وا ْل ُخبزَ بعدَ َأ َذ ِ‬
‫ْ َ َ ْ َْ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫آن َت ْرتِ ْی ًَّل﴾‬
‫‪َ ﴿ )1‬ر ِّت ِل ا ْل ُق ْر َ‬
‫الص َفا َوا ْل َم ْر َو ِة َس ْب ًعا‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ُ )9‬ط ْو ُف ْوا بِا ْل َك ْع َبة َس ْب ًعا َو َب ْی َن َّ‬ ‫ب‬‫‪ )2‬اِ ْصبِ ُر ْوا َع َلی ا ْل َم َصائِ ِ‬
‫الضع َف ِ‬ ‫ات َو ْاْلَ َق ِ‬ ‫واْلُمه ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪َ )3‬أن ِْف ِق ْاْلَمو َال فِي سبِی ِل اللِ‬
‫اء‬ ‫ب َو ُّ َ‬ ‫ار ِ‬ ‫‪َ )10‬أ ْحسنُ ْوا إِ َلی ْاْل َباء ْ َّ َ‬ ‫َ ْ‬ ‫َْ‬
‫ان َو ِفي غَ ْی ِر َأ َّيا ِم َر َم َض َ‬
‫ان‬ ‫‪ُ )11‬ا ْت ُلوا ِكتَاب ِ‬
‫الل ِفي َأ َّيا ِم َر َم َض َ‬ ‫‪ )4‬فِي الص ََّل ِة ُقوموا للِ َخ ِ‬
‫اش ِع ْی َن‬
‫ْ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫ْ ُْ‬ ‫َّ‬
‫وْل َأحدً ا غَ یر ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫الل‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫الل َر َّب ا ْل َعا َلم ْی َن َْل ْاْلَ ْصن ََام َ َ‬ ‫‪ُ )12‬اعْ ُبدُ وا َ‬ ‫الل َر َّب ا ْل َعا َلم ْی َن َْل الن َ‬
‫َّاس‬ ‫‪َ )5‬س ُل ْوا َ‬
‫‪ُ )13‬ص ْو ُم ْوا َث ََّلثِ ْی َن َي ْو ًما َأ ْو تِ ْس َع ًة َّو ِع ْش ِر ْي َن َي ْو ًما فِي َر َم َض َ‬
‫ان‬ ‫‪ )6‬اِغ ِْس ُل ْوا ْاْلَ ْي ِد َي َق ْب َل ال َّط َعا ِم َو َب ْعدَ ال َّط َعا ِم‬
‫َش ْه ِر اللِ ا ْل ُم َب َار ِك‬ ‫اكین ِإ ْطعاما لِوج ِه ِ‬
‫الل‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )7‬أ ْطع َما ا ْل ُف َق َرا َء َوا ْل َم َس ْ َ َ ً َ ْ‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪315‬‬
‫الن َّْه ُي‬
The negative imperative, ‫الن َّْه ُي‬, is made by adding a ‫ َح ْر ُف ن َْهي‬, i.e. ‫َْل‬
before the ‫ ِص َیغ‬of the ‫ ُم َخا َطب‬in its ‫ َم ْجزُ ْوم‬form.
‫ َْل ُت َصدِّ ُق ْوا‬ ‫ُت َصدِّ ُق ْو َن‬ ِ ‫َتنْصر‬
‫ َْل َتن ُْص َرا‬ ‫ان‬ ‫َْل َت ْفت َْح‬
َ ُ  ‫َت ْفت َُح‬
The tarkib is written as follows:
ِ ‫فِع ُل نَهي و َف‬
)‫اعل ( َأن َْت‬ ‫ف ن َْهي‬
ُ ‫َح ْر‬
َ ْ ْ
‫َت ْجلِ ْس‬ ‫َْل‬
Translation of ‫ن َْهي‬
When translating the ‫ن َْهي‬, the subject, you, is not mentioned as the
addressee is understood to be the subject.
‫َْل َت ْجلِ ْس‬
Do not sit. ✓
You do not sit. 
When translating, words like kindly, please etc. can be added.
Please do not sit.
Exercise 19
‫الص ََّل َة ِريا ًء‬ ِ‫َْل َت ْك ُف ِري بِالل‬
َّ ‫) َْل ُت َص ِّل‬7 ْ )1
ِ ‫) َْل َت ْأ ُك ُلوا َلحم ا ْل‬8
‫خن ِْز ْي ِر‬ ‫َْل َت ْظلِ ِم ا ْل ُف َق َرا َء‬ )2
َ ْ ْ
‫) َْل ُتن ِْف ْق َن ا ْل َم َال ُم ْس ِر َفات‬9 ‫َْل َت ُق ْو ُل ْوا ا ْل َك ِذ َب‬ )3
‫) َْل َت ْعت َِم َرا فِ ْي َأ َّيا ِم ا ْل َح ِّج‬10 ‫َّخ ْذ ِع ْی َسى إِ ٰل ًها‬ ِ ‫َْل َتت‬ )4
‫اإل ْذ ِن‬
ِ ْ ‫) َْل َتدْ ُخلِي ا ْلغ ُْر َف َة بِ َغ ْی ِر‬11
ْ ‫) َْل َت ْل َعنَا ْاْلَ َخ ا ْل ُم ْسلِ َم‬5
‫) َْل َت ْش َر ْب َن ا ْل َخ ْم َر َب ِل ا ْل َما َء َأ ِو ال َّل َب َن‬12 ِ‫) َْل َتعبدْ َأحدً ا َغیر الل‬6
َْ َ ُْ
316
‫َح ْصر ‪ with‬الن َّْه ُي‬
‫‪َ , and can be translated‬ح ْر ُف َح ْصر ‪, it will be a‬إِ َّْل ‪ is followed by‬ن َْهي ‪If a‬‬
‫‪َ .‬أ ْمر ‪as an‬‬
‫َْل َت ْع ُبدُ ْوا إِ َّْل َ‬
‫الل‬
‫‪Worship only Allah.‬‬
‫‪Do not worship anyone other than Allah.‬‬
‫‪َْ ﴿ )8‬ل َت ُق ْو ُل ْوا َع َلی اللِ إِ َّْل ا ْل َح َّق﴾‬ ‫‪َْ )1‬ل َت ْقت ُْل َن ْف ًسا‬
‫‪ْ )9‬ل َت ْش َر ُب ْوا ا ْل َخ ْم َر َب ِل ا ْل َما َء وال َّل َب َن‬ ‫‪َْ )2‬ل ُت ْك ِر ُه ْوا الن َ‬
‫َّاس‬
‫‪َْ )10‬ل َت ْعت َِم ْر َأ ََّّٓيا َم ا ْل َح ِّج َب ْل َغ ْی َر َأ َّيا ِم ا ْل َح ِّج‬ ‫‪َْ )3‬ل َت َخا ُف ْوا إِ َّْل َ‬
‫الل‬
‫‪َْ )11‬ل َت ْشرب مِن ماء و َْل َلبن َّإْل بعدَ ْاْلَ َذ ِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫س‬‫‪َْ )4‬ل َت َت َأ َّخ َرا َع ِن الدَّ ْر ِ‬
‫َْ‬ ‫َ ْ ْ َ َ َ‬
‫ان َس ِّیئَات َب ْل َح َسنَات كَثِ ْی َرة‬ ‫ل ا ْل ِم ْیزَ َ‬ ‫‪َْ )12‬ل َتم َ ِ‬
‫ْ‬ ‫اش ِع ْی َن‬
‫‪َْ )5‬ل ُتص ُّلوا إِ َّْل َخ ِ‬
‫َ ْ‬
‫اء َو َْل َب ْعدَ ا ْل َف ْج ِر‬ ‫‪َْ )13‬ل َتنَمن َقب َل ص ََّل ِة ا ْل ِع َش ِ‬ ‫َّخ ُذ ْوا ْاْلَ ْصنَا َم آل ِ َه ًة‬
‫‪َْ )6‬ل َتت ِ‬
‫ْ َ ْ َ‬
‫‪َْ )14‬ل َت ْجزَ ْع َع َلی ُم ِص ْی َبة َص ِغ ْی َرة َو َْل عَظِ ْی َمة‬ ‫‪َْ )7‬ل َتسجدُ وا ِْلَحد َغی ِر اللِ‬
‫ْ ُ ْ َ ْ‬
‫‪Vocab‬‬
‫‪gold‬‬ ‫‪َ another‬ذ َهب‬ ‫آخ ُر ج ْو َن‬
‫َ‬
‫ر ِ‬
‫اشد ج ْو َن‬ ‫َأل ِ ْیم‬
‫‪guided‬‬ ‫َ‬ ‫‪painful‬‬
‫َر ِج ْیم‬ ‫ج ِ‬
‫ح ْیم‬
‫‪rejected‬‬ ‫‪Fire of Hell‬‬ ‫َ‬
‫‪equal‬‬ ‫‪َ silk‬س َواء‬ ‫َح ِر ْير‬
‫‪silver‬‬ ‫فِ َّضة‬ ‫‪good‬‬ ‫َخ ْیر‬
‫‪clear‬‬ ‫ُمبِ ْین‬ ‫‪taste‬‬ ‫َذائِ َقة‬
‫‪317‬‬
ِ ِ‫َا ْْلَ ْم ُر ل ِ ْل َغائ‬
‫ب‬
A third-person imperative, ‫ َا ْْلَ ْم ُر ل ِ ْلغَائِ ِب‬, is used to issue a command to
someone who is not present.
This is formed by placing a ‫ َْل ُم ْاْلَ ْم ِر‬, i.e. ‫ ِل‬, before the ‫ َم ْجزُ ْوم‬form of the
ِ ‫ ُم َض‬.
‫ارع‬
ِ
ْ ‫ل َی ْذ َه‬
‫ب‬
He should go.
Let him go.
ِ ‫ارع و َف‬ ِ
)‫(ه َو‬
ُ ‫اعل‬ َ ِ ‫ف ْعل ُم َض‬ ‫َْل ُم َأ ْمر‬
ْ ‫َي ْذ َه‬
‫ب‬ ‫ِل‬
The same applies to ‫ ;الن َّْه ُي‬a negative command can be issued to
someone who is not present. This formed by adding ‫ َْل‬before the
ِ ‫ ُم َض‬.
‫ َم ْجزُ ْوم‬form of the ‫ارع‬
‫َْل َي ْذ َه َبا‬
They (m/d) should not go.
Do not let them go.
ِ ‫ارع و َف‬ ِ
)‫اعل (ا‬ َ ِ ‫ف ْع ُل ُم َض‬ ‫ف ن َْهي‬
ُ ‫َح ْر‬
‫َي ْذ َه َبا‬ ‫َْل‬
Exercise 21
‫) ل ِ َی ْع َم ُل ْوا ع ََم ًَّل َصال ِ ًحا‬11 ِ‫) َْل يعبدُ وا َأحدً ا َغیر الل‬6 ‫) ل ِ َی ْف َع ُلوا ا ْل َخ ْی َر‬1
َْ َ ْ َُْ
‫َْل َي ْجزَ ع ُْوا َع َلی ُم ِص ْی َبة‬ )12 ‫احا‬
ً ‫آن َص َب‬ َ ‫) ل ِ َی ْق َر ْأ َن ا ْل ُق ْر‬7 ‫الص ََّل َة‬ ِ ِ
َّ ‫) لتُق ْی َما‬2
ِ‫َْل ير َكعا ِْلَحد َغی ِر الل‬ )13 ‫) لِت َْس َت ْی ِق َظا َق ْب َل َص ََّل ِة ا ْل َف ْج ِر‬8 ‫) َْل َي ْخدَ ْع َأ َحدً ا‬3
ْ َ َ َْ
‫ل ِ َیغ ِْس ْل َن َأ ْي ِد َي ُه َّن َق ْب َل ال َّط َعا ِم‬ )14 ِ ‫) َْل َي ِغ ْی ُب ْوا مِ َن الدَّ ْر‬9
‫س ا ْل َی ْو َم‬ ‫) َْل ُي ْش ِرك ُْوا بِ ِه َش ْیئًا‬4
‫جدً ا فِي ٰه ِذ ِه ا ْل َق ْر َي ِة‬ ِ ‫ل ِ َی ْبن ُْوا َم ْس‬ )15 ‫) ل ِ ُی َسافِ ْر إِ َلى َم َّك َة ل ِ ْل َح ِّج‬10 ‫) َْل َي ْظلِ َما ا ْل ُف َقرا َء‬5
318
‫‪Note‬‬
‫ب ‪َ and‬ا ْْلَ ْم ُر ل ِ ْل َغائ ِ‬
‫ب‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫اعل ‪َ can have a‬الن َّْهي ل ِ ْل َغائِ ِ‬
‫‪َ after them.‬ف ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ج ِد‬
‫ب زَ ْيد إِ َلی ا ْلمس ِ‬
‫َ ْ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ل َی ْذ َه ْ‬
‫‪Zaid should go to the masjid.‬‬
‫ف َأحد بِا ْلبی ِ‬ ‫‪ )1‬لِیع ِد ِل ال َق ِ‬
‫ت َغ ْی َر ُمت ََو ِّضئ‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫‪َْ )7‬ل َي ُط ْ َ‬ ‫اض ْي‬ ‫َْ‬
‫ظ ا ْل ُمؤْ مِن ُْو َن َق ْب َل َص ََّل ِة ا ْل َف ْج ِر‬
‫‪ )8‬لِیس َتی ِق ِ‬
‫َْ ْ‬ ‫ب‬ ‫ك ا ْل ِع َبا ُد َع َلی ُّ‬
‫الذن ُْو ِ‬ ‫‪ )2‬لِیب ِ‬
‫َْ‬
‫‪ )9‬ل ِ َی ْح ُض ِر ال ُّط ََّّل ُب الدَّ ْر َس َي ْو َم ا ْل ُج ُم َع ِة‬ ‫َّاس ِعنْدَ ا ْل ُخ ْط َب ِة‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ )3‬ل َی ْس ُكت الن ُ‬
‫ش ا ْبن َو َْل بِنْت َأ َما َم ْاْلَ ِ‬
‫ب َو ْاْلُ ِّم‬ ‫‪َْ )10‬ل َي ْم ِ‬ ‫اإل ْذ ِن‬
‫‪َْ )4‬ل َيدْ ُخ ِل ا ْل َب ْی َت َأ َحد إِ َّْل بِ ْ ِ‬
‫الر َج ُال ا ْل ُمؤْ مِن ُْو َن َذ َه ًبا َو َْل َح ِر ْي ًرا‬

‫س ِّ‬ ‫‪َْ )11‬ل َي ْل َب ِ‬ ‫س‬‫‪ )5‬ل ِ َیت ََو َّضأِ ال ُّط ََّّل ُب َق ْب َل الدُّ ُر ْو ِ‬
‫اج ِد‬
‫ات ا ْل َخ ْم َس ِإ َّْل ِفي ا ْل َم َس ِ‬ ‫‪َْ )12‬ل يص ِّل الرج ُال الص َلو ِ‬
‫َّ َ‬ ‫ُ َ ِّ َ‬ ‫‪ )6‬ل ِ ُین ِْف ِق ْاْلَغْن ِ َیا ُء مِنْ ُك ْم َع َلی ا ْل ُف َق َر ِاء‬
‫‪Note‬‬
‫‪َ .‬ح ْر ُف ن َْهي ‪َ and a‬ح ْر ُف َن ْفي ‪َْ can function as both a‬ل ‪The particle‬‬
‫‪َ is a negative statement:‬ن ْفي ‪A‬‬
‫‪َ .‬خ َبر ‪ُ and‬م ْبتَدَ أ ‪ُ it negates the link between the‬ج ْم َلة ْاس ِم َّیة ‪1. In a‬‬
‫‪ُ it shows that an action did not occur.‬ج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة ‪2. In a‬‬
‫َْل َي ْجلِ ُس ا ْل َو َلدُ‬ ‫َما ا ْل َو َلدُ َجال ِ ًسا‬
‫‪The boy is not sitting.‬‬ ‫‪The boy is not sitting.‬‬
‫‪The boy will not sit.‬‬
‫‪ is a prohibition; a command to the addressee not to do‬ن َْهي ‪A‬‬
‫‪something.‬‬
‫َْل َت ْجلِ ْس‬
‫‪Do not sit.‬‬
‫‪319‬‬
Summary
The following table illustrates the different forms and translations
of the ‫ َض ِم ْیر‬in the ‫ ُم َض ِارع‬, ‫ َأ ْمر‬and ‫ن َْهي‬.
ِ ‫فِ ْعل ُم َض‬
‫ارع ُم ْث َبت‬
Not preceded by
‫َم ْر ُف ْوع‬ ُ ‫َي ْذ َه‬
‫ب‬
any ‫َح ْرف‬
He goes
‫فِ ْع ُل َأ ْمر‬
Not preceded by
‫َم ْجزُ ْوم‬ ِ
any ‫َح ْرف‬ ‫َص ِّل‬ ْ ‫ا ْذ َه‬
‫ب‬
Pray (m/s) Go (m/s)
ِ ِ‫َأ ْمر ل ِ ْلغَائ‬
‫ب‬
ِ ‫الم َض‬
Preceded by ‫ِل‬
ُ
‫َم ْجزُ ْوم‬ ِ

‫ب‬ْ ‫ل َی ْذ َه‬
ْ ‫ار ُع‬
He should go
‫ الن َّْه ُي‬/ ‫اْلَ ْم ُر‬/
‫ارع َمن ِْفي‬

Preceded by ‫َْل النَّافِ َی ُة‬ ‫َم ْر ُف ْوع‬ ُ ‫َْل َت ْذ َه‬
‫ب‬
You (m/s) do not go
‫ن َْهي‬
‫ ُم َخا َطب‬preceded by
‫َم ْجزُ ْوم‬ ْ ‫َْل َت ْذ َه‬
‫ب‬
ِ ‫َْل الن‬
‫َّاه َی ُة‬
Do not go (m/s)
ِ ِ‫ن َْهي ل ِ ْلغَائ‬
‫ب‬
‫ غَائِب‬preceded by ‫َْل‬
‫َم ْجزُ ْوم‬ ْ ‫َْل َي ْذ َه‬
‫ب‬
ِ ‫الن‬
‫َّاه َی ُة‬
He should not go
320
‫الص ََّل َة‬ ‫ِ ِ‬ ‫‪ )13‬ل ِ َی ُط ْف َن‬ ‫‪َ )7‬ي ْل َب ْس َن‬
‫‪ )19‬ل ُیق ْی ُموا َّ‬ ‫‪َ )1‬ي ْرك َُع‬
‫‪َْ )20‬ل َتنْ ُظ ُر ا ْل َم ْر َأ ُة‬ ‫‪َْ )14‬ل َت ُط ْف َن‬ ‫‪ )8‬ل ِ َی ْل َب ْس َن‬ ‫‪ )2‬اِ ْرك َْع‬
‫َْل َتنْ ُظ ِر الن َِّسا ُء‬ ‫‪)21‬‬ ‫‪َْ )15‬ل ي ْخدَ ع ِ‬
‫َان‬ ‫‪َْ )9‬ل َي ْق ُت ُل ْو َن‬ ‫‪ )3‬ل ِ َی ْرك َْع‬
‫َ‬
‫َْل َي ْظلِ ُم ا ْل َملِ ُك‬ ‫‪)22‬‬ ‫‪َْ )16‬ل َي ْخدَ عَا‬ ‫‪َْ )10‬ل َي ْق ُت ُل ْوا‬ ‫‪َْ )4‬ل َي ْرك َُع‬
‫َْل َي ْظلِ ِم ا ْل َملِ ُك‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪َْ )11‬ل َت ْق ُت ُل ْوا‬
‫‪)23‬‬ ‫‪ُ )17‬يق ْی ُم ْو َن َّ‬
‫الص ََّل َة‬ ‫‪َْ )5‬ل َي ْرك َْع‬
‫ِ ِ‬
‫َْل َي ْظلِ ِم الن َ‬
‫َّاس‬ ‫‪)24‬‬ ‫‪َْ )18‬ل ُيق ْی َمان َّ‬
‫الص ََّل َة‬ ‫‪َ )12‬ي ُط ْف َن‬ ‫‪َْ )6‬ل َت ْرك َْع‬
‫‪Note‬‬
‫ف ‪ْ is preceded by a‬اْلَ ْم ُر ل ِ ْلغَائِ ِب ‪When‬‬
‫‪ْ .‬ل ‪ِ changes to a‬ل ‪َ , the‬ح ْر ُ َ‬
‫َو ْل َی ْذ َه ُب ْوا‬ ‫َول ِ َی ْذ َه ُب ْوا‬
‫‪321‬‬
‫اع ِل ‪ with‬ن ُْو ُن ال َّت ْأكِ ْی ِد‬
‫ُْ‬
‫)‪. (see page 115‬فِ ْعل ُم َض ِارع ‪ can be attached to a‬ن ُْو ُن ال َّت ْأك ْید ‪A‬‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪.‬ن َْهي ‪َ and a‬أ ْمر ‪ can also be attached to an‬ن ُْو ُن ال َّت ْأكِ ْی ِد ‪A‬‬
‫‪َ on the last letter of the‬فت َْحة ‪ will have a‬ن َْهي ‪َ and‬أ ْمر ‪In this case, the‬‬
‫‪.‬ن ُْو ُن ال َّت ْأكِ ْی ِد ‪verb before the‬‬
‫اِ ْجلِ َس َّن‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫اِ ْجلِ ْس‬
‫‪This emphasis can be translated by adding words like do, never,‬‬
‫‪ever, etc.‬‬
‫اِ ْجلِ َس َّن‬ ‫َْل َت ْك ِذ َب َّن‬ ‫َْل ُت ْش ِر َكن بِاللِ‬
‫َّ‬
‫‪Please do sit.‬‬ ‫‪Do not ever lie.‬‬ ‫‪Never ascribe partners with Allah.‬‬
‫ِ‬ ‫‪َْ )4‬ل َت َت َأ َّخ َر َّن ع ِ‬ ‫‪ )1‬اِ ْجت َِهدَ َّن فِي الدُّ ُر ْو ِ‬
‫والر ُس ْو َل ﷺ‬
‫الل َّ‬ ‫‪َ )7‬أط ْی َع َّن َ‬ ‫س‬‫َن الدَّ ْر ِ‬ ‫س‬
‫ب‬‫‪ )8‬اِ ْصبِ َر َّن َع َلی ا ْل َم َصائِ ِ‬ ‫َّخ َذ َّن ْاْلَ ْصنَا َم آل ِ َه ًة‬ ‫‪َْ )5‬ل َتت ِ‬ ‫‪َ )2‬أح ِسنَن إِ َلی ْاْلُمه ِ‬
‫ات‬ ‫َّ َ‬ ‫ْ َّ‬
‫‪َْ )9‬ل َتسجدَ َّن ِْلَحد َغی ِر اللِ‬ ‫‪ )6‬اِ ْس َت ْی ِق َظ َّن ل ِ َص ََّل ِة ا ْل َف ْج ِر‬ ‫‪َْ )3‬ل َتغ َْضبن َع َلی ْاْلب ِ‬
‫اء‬
‫َ ْ‬ ‫ْ ُ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ َّ‬
‫‪ to the verb.‬ن ُْو ُن ال َّت ْأكِ ْی ِد ‪Rewrite the following sentences by adding a‬‬
‫‪َْ )7‬ل َت ْذ َهبِي إِ َلى الدُّ ك ِ‬
‫َّان َل ْی ًَّل‬ ‫اِ ْجلِ ْس َع َلى ا ْل ُك ْر ِس ِّي‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪َ )8‬أن ِْف ْقن ْاْلَمو َال ل ِ ِر َضى اللِ‬ ‫َْل َت ُص ْو ُم ْوا َي ْو َم ا ْل ِع ْی ِد‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫َ َْ‬
‫‪َْ )9‬ل َت ْظلِ ِم ا ْل ُف َق َرا َء ُظ ْل ًما َش ِد ْيدً ا‬ ‫اِ ْجت َِه ِد ْي فِي الدُّ ُر ْو ِ‬
‫س‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫‪َْ )10‬ل َت ْحزَ نَا َع َلى ا ْل ُم ِص ْی َب ِة ا ْل َعظِ ْی َم ِة‬ ‫اِ ْصبِ ُر ْوا َع َلى ا ْل َم َصائِ ِ‬
‫ب‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫‪َْ )11‬ل َت ْذبحوا ب َقرات بِ َغی ِر اس ِم اللِ‬ ‫اِح َف َظا سور ًة مِن ا ْل ُقر ِ‬
‫آن‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫ْ ْ‬ ‫َ ُ ْ َ َ‬ ‫ُ َْ َ ْ‬ ‫ْ‬
‫‪َ )12‬ق ْب َل ال َّط َعا ِم َو َب ْعدَ ال َّط َعا ِم اغ ِْس ِل ْاْلَ ْي ِد َي‬ ‫َْل َت ْعت َِم ْر َن فِي َأ َّيا ِم ا ْل َح ِّج‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫‪322‬‬
Different Verbs with ‫ن ُْو ُن الت َّْأكِ ْی ِد‬
Remember the following tips to help differentiate between the
three forms of the verb which can have a ‫ن ُْو ُن ال َّت ْأكِ ْی ِد‬.
‫َل َی ْف َع َل َّن‬
Verb has ‫َْل ُم اْل ْبتِدَ ِاء‬ ِ ‫فِ ْع ُل ُم َض‬
‫ارع‬
He will certainly do
‫َْل َت ْف َع َل َّن‬
Verb has ‫َْل الن َِّاه َی ِة‬ ‫فِ ْع ُل ن َْهي‬
‫ارع َم َع ن ُْو ِن الت َّْأكِ ْی ِد‬
Definitely do not do
ِ ِ‫َأ ْمر ل ِ ْل َغائ‬ ‫ل ِ َی ْف َع َل َّن‬

Verb has ‫َْل ُم ْاْلَ ْم ِر‬ ‫ب‬
He should definitely do
Verb has neither ‫َْل ُم‬ ‫اِ ْف َع َل َّن‬
‫فِ ْع ُل َأ ْمر‬
‫اْل ْبتِدَ ِاء‬, ‫ َْل ُم ْاْلَ ْم ِر‬nor ‫َّاه َی ِة‬
ِ ‫َْل الن‬
Definitely do
Exercise 26
‫) َل َی ْح َف َظ َّن‬10 ‫) َْل َت ْس ُجدَ َّن‬7 ‫) َْل َت ْذ َه َب َّن‬4 ‫) اِ ْذ َه َب َّن‬1
‫) اِ ْح َف َظ َّن‬11 ‫) لِت َْس ُجدَ َّن‬8 ‫) ُا ْس ُجدَ َّن‬5 ‫) َل َی ْذ َه َب َّن‬2
‫) َْل َت ْح َف َظ َّن‬12 ‫) ل ِ َی ْح َف َظ َّن‬9 ‫) َلت َْس ُجدَ َّن‬6 ‫) ل ِ َی ْذ َه َب َّن‬3
323
‫اع ِل ‪ with‬ن ُْو ُن الت َّْأكِ ْی ِد‬
‫ُْ‬
‫‪َ , it is conjugated‬ض ِم ْیر ‪ come with a‬فِ ْع ُل ن َْهي ‪ or‬فِ ْع ُل َأ ْمر ‪,‬فِ ْعل ُم َض ِارع ‪When the‬‬
‫‪slightly differently to the regular form.‬‬
‫الن َّْه ُي‬ ‫ْاْلَ ْم ُر‬ ‫ار ُع‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َض ِ‬
‫ار ُع‬ ‫ِص ْیغَة‬
‫مع نُو ِن الت َّْأكِیدِ‬ ‫َم َع ن ُْو ِن الت َّْأكِ ْی ِد‬ ‫َم َع ن ُْو ِن الت َّْأكِ ْی ِد‬
‫ْ‬ ‫َ َ ْ‬
‫َل َی ْف َع َل َّن ( ُه َو)‬ ‫َي ْف َع ُل ( ُه َو)‬ ‫ب‬ ‫ِ‬

‫الغَائ ُ‬
‫َل َی ْف َع ََّل ِّن (ا)‬ ‫َي ْف َع ََّل ِن (ا)‬ ‫ا ْلغَائِب ِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫َ‬
‫َل َی ْف َع ُل َّن (و ُم َقدَّ َرة)‬ ‫َي ْف َع ُل ْو َن (و)‬ ‫ا ْلغَائِ ُب ْو َن‬
‫َل َت ْف َع َل َّن ( ِه َي)‬ ‫َت ْف َع ُل ( ِه َي)‬ ‫ا ْلغَائِ َب ُة‬

‫َل َت ْف َع ََّل ِّن (ا)‬ ‫َت ْف َع ََّل ِن (ا)‬ ‫ا ْلغَائِبت ِ‬
‫َل َی ْف َع ْلنَ ِّ‬
‫ان َ‬
‫(ن)‬ ‫َي ْف َع ْل َن َ‬
‫(ن)‬ ‫ا ْلغَائِ َب ُ‬
‫ات‬
‫َْل َت ْف َع َل َّن ( َأن َ‬

‫ْت)‬ ‫اِ ْف َع َل َّن ( َأن َْت)‬ ‫َل َت ْف َع َل َّن ( َأن َْت)‬ ‫َت ْف َع ُل ( َأن َ‬
‫ْت)‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َخا َط ُ‬
‫ب‬
‫َْل َت ْف َع ََّل ِّن (ا)‬ ‫اِ ْف َع ََّل ِّن (ا)‬ ‫َل َت ْف َع ََّل ِّن (ا)‬ ‫َت ْف َع ََّل ِن (ا)‬ ‫ا ْلم َخا َطب ِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ُ‬
‫َْل َت ْف َع ُل َّن (و ُم َقدَّ َرة)‬ ‫اِ ْف َع ُل َّن (و ُم َقدَّ َرة)‬ ‫َل َت ْف َع ُل َّن (و ُم َقدَّ َرة)‬ ‫َتف َع ُل ْو َن (و)‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َخا َط ُب ْو َن‬
‫َْل َت ْف َعلِ َّن (ي ُم َقدَّ َرة)‬ ‫اِ ْف َعلِ َّن (ي ُم َقدَّ َرة)‬ ‫َل َت ْف َعلِ َّن (ي ُم َقدَّ َرة)‬ ‫َت ْف َعلِ ْی َن (ي)‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َخا َط َب ُة‬
‫َْل َت ْف َع ََّل ِّن (ا)‬ ‫اِ ْف َع ََّل ِّن (ا)‬ ‫َل َت ْف َع ََّل ِّن (ا)‬ ‫َت ْف َع ََّل ِن (ا)‬ ‫ا ْلم َخا َطبت ِ‬
‫َان‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ُ‬
‫(ن)‬ ‫َْل َت ْف َع ْلنَ ِّ‬
‫ان َ‬ ‫(ن)‬ ‫ان َ‬ ‫اِ ْف َع ْلنَ ِّ‬ ‫َل َت ْف َع ْلنَ ِّ‬
‫ان َ‬
‫(ن)‬ ‫َت ْف َع ْل َن َ‬
‫(ن)‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َخا َط َب ُ‬
‫ات‬
‫َْلَ ْف َع َل َّن ( َأنَا)‬ ‫َأ ْف َع ُل ( َأنَا)‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َت َك ِّل ُم‬

‫َلنَ ْف َع َل َّن (ن َْح ُن)‬ ‫َن ْف َع ُل (ن َْح ُن)‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َت َك ِّل ُم ْو َن‬
‫‪324‬‬
‫‪Notes‬‬
‫اب ‪To make pronunciation easier, the‬‬ ‫‪ is removed before‬ن ُْو ُن ْ ِ‬
‫اإلع َْر ِ‬
‫‪.‬ن ُْو ُن ال َّت ْأكِ ْی ِد ‪adding the‬‬
‫َل َی ْف َع ََّل ِّن‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫َل َی ْف َع ََّلنِ ِّن‬
‫َل ‪َ +‬ي ْف َع ََّل ِن ‪ِّ +‬ن‬
‫‪‬‬
‫اع ِل ‪, the‬ا ْل ُم َخا َط َب ُة ‪ and‬ا ْل ُمخا َط ُب ْون ‪,‬الغَائِ ُب ْو َن ‪ِ of‬ص ْیغَة ‪Similarly, in the‬‬ ‫و ‪َ (the‬ض ِمیر ا ْل َف ِ‬
‫ُْ‬ ‫ْ‬
‫‪, to make‬ن ُْو ُن ْاإلع َْراب ‪ْ respectively) are removed along with the‬ي ‪and‬‬ ‫ِ‬
‫اعل ‪pronunciation easier. The‬‬ ‫‪.‬م َقدَّ رة ‪َ will be deemed to be hidden,‬ف ِ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َل َت ْف َع ُل َّن (و ُم َقدَّ َرة)‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫َل َت ْف َع ُل ْو َّن‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫َل ‪َ +‬ت ْف َع ُل ْو َن ‪َّ +‬ن‬
‫َل َت ْف َعلِ َّن (ي ُم َقدَّ َرة)‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫َل َت ْف َعلِ ْی َّن‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫َل ‪َ +‬ت ْف َعلِ ْی َن ‪َّ +‬ن‬
‫‪َ )9‬ل ُتن ِْف ْقن ِّ‬
‫َان ْاْلَ ْم َو َال َغ ْی َر ُم ْس ِر َفات‬ ‫‪َ )1‬ل َیدْ ُخ َل َّن ا ْل َجنَّ َة‬
‫‪َ )10‬لتُس َئ ُلن يوم ا ْل ِقیام ِة َعن نِع ِم اللِ‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ل َیدْ ُخ ُل َّن ا ْل َجنَّ َة‬
‫ْ َّ َ ْ َ َ َ ْ َ‬
‫ُب ُمت ََو ِّضئِ ْی َن‬ ‫‪ )11‬اِ ْق َر ُأ َّن ا ْل ُق َ‬
‫رآن َوا ْل ُكت َ‬ ‫‪َ )3‬لتَدْ ُخ َل َّن ا ْل َجنَّ َة‬
‫َّار فِي ْاْل ِخ َر ِة‬
‫اب الن ِ‬ ‫‪َ )12‬ل َی ُذ ْو ُق َّن ع ََذ َ‬ ‫‪َ )4‬لتَدْ ُخ ُل َّن ا ْل َجنَّ َة‬
‫ب ابتِغَاء وج ِه اللِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َل َی ْصبِ َر َّن َع َلی ا ْل َم َصائ ِ ْ َ َ ْ‬ ‫‪)13‬‬ ‫‪َْ )5‬ل َت ْل َعن َُّن الن َ‬
‫َّاس‬
‫ح َس ِ‬
‫اب‬ ‫َل ُتبع ُثن يوم ا ْل ِقیام ِة مِن ا ْل ُقبو ِر ل ِ ْل ِ‬ ‫‪)14‬‬ ‫‪َْ )6‬ل َتنْسو َّن نِعم اللِ‬
‫ْ َ َّ َ ْ َ َ َ َ ُ ْ‬ ‫َ ُ َ َ‬
‫اْلخ َر ِة‬
‫َلنَس َأ َلن الل َخیر الدَّ اري ِن الدُّ ْنیا و ِ‬
‫َ َ‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫ْ َّ َ ْ َ‬ ‫‪)15‬‬ ‫ت‬ ‫‪َ )7‬لن َُذ ْو َق َّن ا ْل َم ْو َ‬
‫جدً ا َذا َأ ْب َواب َكبِ ْی َرة‬ ‫َج ِد َّن فِي ٰه ِذ ِه ا ْل َق ْر َي ِة َم ْس ِ‬
‫َلت ِ‬ ‫الر ُس ْو َل ﷺ‬ ‫ِ ِ‬
‫‪)16‬‬ ‫الل َو َّ‬‫‪َ )8‬لتُط ْیع َّن َ‬
‫‪325‬‬
‫َض ِم ْیر َمن ُْص ْوب ‪Part 2:‬‬
‫‪َ state, namely the‬من ُْص ْوب ‪َ is used to replace a noun in the‬ض ِم ْیر َمنْ ُص ْوب ‪A‬‬
‫اس ُم ‪َ and the‬م ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ ‫‪.‬إِ َّن ‪ْ of‬‬
‫‪َ :‬ض ِم ْیر َمن ُْص ْوب ‪Consequently, there are two sets of‬‬
‫َض ِم ْی ُر ا ْل َم ْف ُع ْو ِل بِ ِه ‪1.‬‬
‫َض ِم ْی ُر ْاس ِم إِ َّن ‪2.‬‬
‫‪.‬إِ َّن ‪These pronouns are attached to either the verb or to‬‬
‫ِص ْیغَة‬
‫‪Pronoun as‬‬ ‫‪Pronoun as‬‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬

‫‪Individual‬‬
‫‪English‬‬ ‫اس ُم إِ َّن‬
‫ْ‬ ‫‪Form‬‬
‫‪He / Him‬‬ ‫إِ َّن ُه‬ ‫َس ِم ْع ُت ُه‬ ‫ُه‬ ‫ب‬ ‫ِ‬
‫الغَائ ُ‬
‫)‪They / Them (m/d‬‬ ‫إِ َّن ُه َما‬ ‫َس ِم ْع ُت ُه َما‬ ‫ُه َما‬ ‫ا ْلغَائِب ِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫َ‬
‫)‪They / Them (m/p‬‬ ‫إِ َّن ُه ْم‬ ‫َس ِم ْع ُت ُه ْم‬ ‫ُه ْم‬ ‫ا ْلغَائِ ُب ْو َن‬
‫‪She / Her‬‬ ‫إِ َّن َها‬ ‫َس ِم ْع ُت َها‬ ‫َها‬ ‫ا ْلغَائِ َب ُة‬
‫)‪They / Them (f/d‬‬ ‫إِ َّن ُه َما‬ ‫َس ِم ْع ُت ُه َما‬ ‫ُه َما‬ ‫ا ْلغَائِبت ِ‬
‫)‪They / Them (f/p‬‬ ‫إِ َّن ُه َّن‬ ‫َس ِم ْع ُت ُه َّن‬ ‫ُه َّن‬ ‫ا ْلغَائِ َب ُ‬
‫ات‬
‫)‪You (m/s‬‬ ‫إِ َّن َك‬ ‫َس ِم ْع ُت َك‬ ‫َك‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َخا َط ُ‬

‫ب‬
‫)‪You (m/d‬‬ ‫إِ َّن ُك َما‬ ‫َس ِم ْع ُت ُك َما‬ ‫ك َُما‬ ‫ا ْلم َخا َطب ِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ُ‬
‫)‪You (m/p‬‬ ‫إِ َّن ُك ْم‬ ‫َس ِم ْع ُت ُك ْم‬ ‫ك ُْم‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َخا َط ُب ْو َن‬
‫إِ َّن ِ‬
‫ك‬ ‫س ِمع ُت ِ‬
‫ك‬ ‫ِك‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َخا َط َب ُة‬
‫)‪You (f/s‬‬ ‫َ ْ‬
‫)‪You (f/d‬‬ ‫إِ َّن ُك َما‬ ‫َس ِم ْع ُت ُك َما‬ ‫ك َُما‬ ‫ا ْلم َخا َطبت ِ‬
‫َان‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ُ‬
‫)‪You (f/p‬‬ ‫إِ َّن ُك َّن‬ ‫َس ِم ْع ُت ُك َّن‬ ‫ُن‬
‫ك َّ‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َخا َط َب ُ‬
‫ات‬
‫‪I / Me‬‬ ‫إِ َّنن ِ ْي‬ ‫َس ِم ْع ُتن ِ ْي‬ ‫نِ ْي‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َت َك ِّل ُم‬
‫‪We / Us‬‬ ‫إِ َّننَا‬ ‫َس ِم ْع ُتنَا‬ ‫نَا‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َت َك ِّل ُم ْو َن‬
‫‪326‬‬
‫اِ ْس ُم إِ َّن‬
‫‪.‬إِ َّن ‪ is a pronoun, it is attached to‬إِ َّن ‪ of‬اِ ْسم ‪When the‬‬
‫إِ َّنه ص ِ‬
‫ادق‬ ‫ُ َ‬
‫‪Indeed, he is truthful.‬‬
‫‪, it can be written in‬إِ َّن ‪When the first-person pronoun is used with‬‬
‫‪two ways:‬‬
‫إ َّنا ‪ /‬إِ َّننَا‬ ‫إ ِّن ْي ‪ /‬إِ َّنن ِ ْي‬
‫اد ِق ْی َن﴾‬
‫‪ِ ﴿ )9‬إ َّنه َل ِمن الص ِ‬
‫ُ َ َّ‬ ‫إِن َُّه َّن َأ َخ َوات‬ ‫‪)5‬‬ ‫إِ َّن ُه َخ ْیر‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫‪ِ ﴿ )10‬إ َّن ُه َل ِم َن ال َّظالِ ِم ْی َن﴾‬ ‫ب‬‫إِن َُّه َما مِ َن ا ْل َغ ْی ِ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬ ‫إِنَّن ِ ْي َم ِر ْيض‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫ول ِ‬
‫الل﴾‬ ‫‪ِ ﴿ )11‬إن ََّك َل َر ُس ُ‬ ‫إِ َّن ُك ْم َصال ِ ُح ْو َن‬ ‫‪)7‬‬ ‫إِن ََّها َشاكِ َرة‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫‪﴿ )12‬إِ َّن ُه َل ُق ْرآن ك َِر ْيم﴾‬ ‫إِ َّن ُكما َض ِعی َفت ِ‬
‫َان‬ ‫‪)8‬‬ ‫إِنَّهم َف ِ‬
‫اس ُق ْو َن‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫ْ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ُ ْ‬
‫‪َ .‬ض ِم ْیر ‪ْ with a‬اس ُم إِ َّن ‪Rewrite the following sentences by replacing the‬‬
‫َب ا ْل َق ِد ْي َم َث ِق ْیل‬
‫‪ )9‬إِ َّن ا ْل َم ْكت َ‬ ‫الس ِف ْینَ َة فِي ا ْل َب ْح ِر‬
‫‪ )5‬إِ َّن َّ‬ ‫‪ )1‬إِ َّن ا ْل َیدَ َو ِس َخة‬
‫ان َل َش ْهر ُم َب َارك‬ ‫‪ )10‬إِ َّن َر َم َض َ‬ ‫الش ْر َك َل ُظ ْلم عَظِ ْیم‬ ‫‪ )6‬إِ َّن ِّ‬ ‫‪ )2‬إِ َّن ا ْل َك ْأ َس َم ْم ُل ْوء‬
‫الشیخِ َلص ِ‬ ‫‪ )7‬إِ َّن ا ْل َخا َل َتی ِن صالِحت ِ‬ ‫‪ )3‬إِ َّن ا ْل َقوم َل َف ِ‬
‫اد ُق ْو َن‬ ‫‪ )11‬إِ َّن َأ ْط َف َال َّ ْ َ‬ ‫َان‬ ‫ْ َ َ‬ ‫اس ُق ْو َن‬ ‫ْ َ‬
‫ف مِ َن ا ْل َق ْر َي ِة ا ْل َب ِع ْیدَ ِة‬ ‫‪ )12‬إِ َّن ُّ‬
‫الض ُی ْو َ‬ ‫‪ )8‬إِ َّن ال َّط ْی َر ْي ِن َف ْو َق ا ْل َج َب ِل‬ ‫‪ )4‬إِ َّن الن َِّسا َء ُم ْجت َِهدَ ات‬
‫‪Notes‬‬
‫‪َ , it is changed as‬ض ِمیر ا ْلم ْفعو ِل بِ ِه ‪ُ is followed by a‬تم ‪َ of‬ض ِمیر ا ْل َف ِ‬
‫اع ِل ‪1. If the‬‬ ‫ُْ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫ُْ َ ُ ْ‬
‫‪follows to make pronunciation easier.‬‬
‫َس ِم ْعت ُْم ُه ‪َ ‬س ِم ْعت ُُم ْو ُه‬
‫‪َ when it is followed by an‬ض َّمة ‪َ is given a‬ض ِم ْیر ‪ْ at the end of a‬م ‪2. The‬‬
‫‪َ .‬ا ْل‬
‫َس ِم ْعت ُُم ْاْلَ َذ َ‬
‫ان‬ ‫َس ِم ْعت ُْم ْاْلَ َذ َ‬
‫ان‬
‫‪327‬‬
‫َض ِم ْی ُر ا ْل َم ْف ُع ْو ِل بِ ِه‬
The object pronoun is attached to the verb. Therefore, if the
subject is a regular noun, not a pronoun, the ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬occurs before
ِ ‫ َف‬.
the ‫اعل‬
ُ ‫َخ َل َق َك‬
‫الل‬
Allah created you.
ِ ‫َف‬
‫اعل‬ َ ‫فِ ْعل َو َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬
)‫(ك‬
‫الل‬
ُ ‫َخ َل َق َك‬
Notes
1. An entire sentence can appear as one unit with a ‫ فِ ْعل‬followed
ِ ‫ َف‬and ‫ م ْفعول بِ ِه‬as a ‫ َض ِمیر‬.
by a ‫اعل‬ ُْ َ ْ
‫َس ِم ْع ُت َك‬
I heard you.
َ ‫(ت) َو َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬
)‫(ك‬ ِ ‫فِعل و َف‬
ُ ‫اعل‬ َ ْ
‫َس ِم ْعت َُك‬
2. The following are written similarly, but they have different
meanings.
‫َس ِم َعنَا‬ ‫َس ِم ْعنَا‬
He heard us. We heard.
Exercise 3
﴾‫الل‬
ُ ‫) ﴿ن ََص َرك ُُم‬16 ‫) عَلِ َم ُه ال ُّط ََّّل ُب‬11 ‫الل‬
ُ ‫) ن ََص َرك ُُم‬6 ‫) اِ ْق َر ْأ َها‬1
‫) َت ْظلِ ُم ُه ُم ْاْلُ ْخ ُت‬17 ‫) َع َبدَ ْت ُه ا ْلبِن ُْت‬12 ‫) َْل َت ْظلِ ْم َها‬7 ‫) َْل َت ْس َأ ْل ُه‬2
‫) َل َقدْ َس ِم َعت َْك ْاْلُ ُّم‬18 ُ ‫) ﴿ َرزَ َق ُه ُم‬13
﴾‫الل‬ ‫) ع ََر َفت ُْه ُم ْاْلُ ُّم‬8 ُ ‫) َخ َل َقنَا‬3
‫الل‬
‫) َي ْس َأ ُل َك ال ُّط ََّّل ُب‬19 ُ ‫) ﴿ َي ْب َع ُث ُه ُم‬14
﴾‫الل‬ ‫) َس ِم َع َك ا ْل ُم َع ِّل ُم‬9 ُ ‫) َي ْرزُ ُق ُه ُم‬4
‫الل‬
ُ ‫الش ْی َط‬
‫ان‬ َّ ‫) َخدَ َع ُه ُم‬20 ﴾‫الل‬
ُ ‫) ﴿ َوعَدَ نَا‬15 ‫َّاس‬
ُ ‫) َي َرا ُه ُم الن‬10 ُ‫) َل َی ْش َر َبنَّ ُه ا ْل َو َلد‬5
328
‫‪َ )17‬ت ْظلِ ُم ْون َُه ْم‬ ‫‪ُ )13‬ا ْع ُبدُ َّن ُه‬ ‫‪َ )9‬خدَ ْع ُت ُه ْم‬ ‫‪َ )5‬ت ِ‬
‫جدُ ْو َن ُه‬ ‫‪َ )1‬أ ْس َأ ُل َك‬
‫‪ُ ﴿ )18‬ا ْع ُبدُ ْو ُه﴾‬ ‫‪َ )14‬ل َقدْ َخ َل َقنَا‬ ‫‪ُ )10‬ان ُْص ُر ْو ُه ْم‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ت ْع ُبدُ ْو َن ُه‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ل َت ْع ِر َفنَّ ُه‬
‫‪َ ﴿ )19‬هدَ اك ُْم﴾‬ ‫‪َ )15‬ل َقدْ ن ََص ْر ُتن َُّه ْم‬ ‫‪َ )11‬ي ْع َل ُم ُه ْم‬ ‫‪َ )7‬ما َك َت ْبت ََها‬ ‫‪َ )3‬ي ْفت َُر ْو َن ُه‬
‫‪َ ﴿ )20‬خ َل َق ُك ْم﴾‬ ‫‪َ )16‬ل ْم َي ْخدَ ع ُْه ْم‬ ‫‪َ )12‬ي ْذك ُُر ْو َن ُه‬ ‫‪َْ )8‬ل َت ْظلِ ْم َها‬ ‫‪َ ﴿ )4‬ذ َب ُح ْو َها﴾‬
‫الل َث َو َ‬
‫اب الدُّ ْن َیا﴾‬ ‫‪﴿ )11‬آ َت ُ‬
‫اه ُم ُ‬ ‫‪َْ ﴿ )6‬لَ ِز ْيدَ َّن ُك ْم﴾‬ ‫‪﴿ )1‬إِنَّا للِ﴾‬
‫ج َب ِ‬
‫‪َ ﴿ )12‬ي ْس َأ ُلون ََك َع ِن ا ْل ِ‬
‫ال﴾‬ ‫‪ُ ﴿ )7‬ي َع ِّذ َب ُه ُم ُ‬
‫الل﴾‬ ‫‪َْ ﴿ )2‬ل َي ُض ُّر ُه ْم﴾‬
‫‪َ ﴿ )13‬ي ْس َأ ُلون ََك َع ِن ا ْل َیتَا ٰمى﴾‬ ‫﴿صدَ َق ُك ُم ُ‬
‫الل﴾‬ ‫‪َ )8‬‬ ‫‪َْ ﴿ )3‬ل َينْ َف ُع ُه ْم﴾‬
‫الل ِفي الدُّ ْن َیا َو ْاْل ِخ َر ِة﴾‬
‫‪َ ﴿ )14‬ل َعن َُه ُم ُ‬ ‫‪َْ )9‬ل ُت ْش ِرك ُْوا بِالل َش ْیئًا‬ ‫‪َ ﴿ )4‬ي ْل َعن ُُه ُم ُ‬
‫الل﴾‬
‫عَذا ًبا َش ِديدً ا ِفي الدُّ ْن َیا َو ْاْل ِخ َر ِة﴾‬ ‫‪ُ ﴿ )15‬أ ِّ‬
‫عَذ ُب ُه ْم َ‬ ‫ین﴾‬ ‫ِ ِ‬
‫الصالح َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪َ ﴿ )10‬ج َع َل ُه م َن َّ‬ ‫‪َ ﴿ )5‬أ َم َرك ُُم ُ‬
‫الل﴾‬
‫‪َ with a‬م ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه ‪Rewrite the following sentences by replacing the‬‬
‫الل ال َّظال ِ ِم ْی َن َي ْو َم ا ْل ِق َیا َم ِة‬
‫‪ُ )7‬ي َع ِّذ ُب ُ‬ ‫‪َ )1‬ي ْفت َُح ْو َن النَّافِ َذ َت ْی ِن‬
‫الش ْی ُخ ا ْل َك ْأ َس َب ْعدَ ال َّط َعا ِم‬ ‫‪ )8‬غ ََس َل َّ‬ ‫‪َ )2‬أ َم َر ا ْل َوالِدُ ْاْلَ ْو َْل َد‬
‫‪َ )9‬أ ْط َع َم ْاْلَ ُخ َحامِد ْاْلُ ْخ َت َخ ِد ْي َج َة‬ ‫ف ا ْلجدَّ ُة ال َّطالِب ِ‬
‫ات‬ ‫َ‬ ‫‪َ )3‬ت ْع ِر ُ َ‬
‫ب ا ْل ُم ْجت َِهدُ ا ْل َق َل َم ْاْل َن‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ان فِي ا ْل َح ِد ْي َق ِة‬
‫‪َ )10‬و َجدَ ال َّطال ُ‬ ‫‪َ )4‬ر َأ ْي ُت ِّ‬
‫الص ْب َی َ‬
‫احد‬ ‫‪َ )11‬قر َأ ا ْلعم ا ْلكِتَاب ال َّط ِوي َل فِي يوم و ِ‬ ‫َّاج ُر ا ْلغَن ِ ُّي ا ْل ِم ْسكِ ْی َن‬ ‫‪ )5‬ن ََص َر الت ِ‬
‫ْ ْ َْ َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ َ ُّ‬
‫‪َ )12‬ت ْش َر ُب َفاطِ َم ُة ا ْل َما َء ا ْل َب ِ‬
‫ار َد ُث َّم ال َّل َب َن ا ْل َح َّار‬ ‫ح َم َار‬ ‫ت ا ْلبِن ُْت الص ِغیر ُة ا ْل ِ‬
‫َّ ْ َ‬
‫‪ )6‬ركِب ِ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫‪Note‬‬
‫‪ at the‬ي ‪To maintain rhythm at the end of verses in the Quran, the‬‬
‫‪end of a word is sometimes removed.‬‬
‫ا ْل ُم َت َع ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫﴿ َأ ْن ي ْق ُت ُل ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ال‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َت َعال ْي ‪‬‬ ‫ون﴾‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َأن َي ْق ُت ُل ْون ْي ‪‬‬
‫‪329‬‬
Attached and Detached Pronouns
The ‫ َم ْر ُف ْوع‬and ‫ َمن ُْص ْوب‬pronouns can occur in two ways:
1. Attached, i.e. joined to another word, ‫ ُمت َِّصل‬.
2. Detached, i.e. on its own, ‫ ُمنْ َف ِصل‬.
‫الض ِم ْی ُر ا ْل ُمت َِّص ُل‬
َّ
The ‫ َض ِم ْی ُر ا ْل َفاع ِل‬is always ‫ ; ُمت َِّصل‬it comes joined to the ‫فِ ْعل‬.
ِ
ُ ( ‫َذ َه ْب ُت‬
)‫ت‬
ِ ِ
The ‫نص ْوب‬ ُ ‫ َم‬pronouns mentioned previously, both the ‫َضم ْی ُر ا ْل َم ْف ُع ْو ِل بِه‬
and ‫اِ ْس ُم إِ َّن‬, were also ‫ ُمت َِّصل‬.
‫َس ِم ْع ُت ُه‬ ‫إِ َّن ُه‬
ِ ‫الض ِم ْی ُر ا ْل ُمنْ َف ِص‬

‫ل‬ َّ
The ‫ َض ِم ْی ُر ا ْل ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬is always ‫ ُمنْ َف ِصل‬.
ِ
‫َأنَا َخالِد‬
In the following section, we will be studying the ‫ ُمنْ َف ِصل‬forms of the
‫ َمن ُْص ْوب‬pronouns.
330
‫الض ِم ْی ُر ا ْل َمن ُْص ْو ُب ا ْل ُمنْ َف ِص ُل‬
‫َّ‬
‫‪َ pronoun is the same as the attached form, the‬من ُْص ْوب ‪The detached‬‬
‫‪.‬إِ َّيا ‪only difference is that it is preceded by‬‬
‫نص ْو ُب‬‫ا ْل َم ُ‬
‫ا ْل ُمنْ َف ِص ِل‬
‫‪English‬‬
‫إِ َّيا ُه‬ ‫ب‬ ‫ِ‬

‫‪He / Him‬‬ ‫الغَائ ُ‬
‫إِ َّيا ُه َما‬ ‫ا ْلغَائِب ِ‬
‫ان‬
‫)‪They / Them (m/d‬‬ ‫َ‬
‫)‪They / Them (m/p‬‬ ‫إِ َّيا ُه ْم‬ ‫ا ْلغَائِ ُب ْو َن‬
‫‪She / Her‬‬ ‫إِ َّيا َها‬ ‫ا ْلغَائِ َب ُة‬

‫إِ َّيا ُه َما‬ ‫ا ْلغَائِبت ِ‬
‫َان‬
‫)‪They / Them (f/d‬‬ ‫َ‬
‫)‪They / Them (f/p‬‬ ‫إِ َّيا ُه َّن‬ ‫ا ْلغَائِ َب ُ‬
‫ات‬
‫)‪You (m/s‬‬ ‫إِ َّيا َك‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َخا َط ُ‬

‫ب‬
‫إِ َّياك َُما‬ ‫ا ْلم َخا َطب ِ‬
‫ان‬
‫)‪You (m/d‬‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ُ‬
‫)‪You (m/p‬‬ ‫إِ َّياك ُْم‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َخا َط ُب ْو َن‬
‫)‪You (f/s‬‬ ‫إِ َّيا ِك‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َخا َط َب ُة‬

‫إِ َّياك َُما‬ ‫ا ْلم َخا َطبت ِ‬
‫َان‬
‫)‪You (f/d‬‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ُ‬
‫)‪You (f/p‬‬ ‫إِ َّياك َّ‬
‫ُن‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َخا َط َب ُ‬
‫ات‬
‫‪I / Me‬‬ ‫إِ َّيا َي‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َت َك ِّل ُم‬
‫‪We / Us‬‬ ‫إِ َّيانَا‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َت َك ِّل ُم ْو َن‬
‫‪331‬‬
‫الض ِم ْی ُر ا ْل َمن ُْص ْو ُب ا ْل ُمنْ َف ِص ُل ‪Usage of‬‬
‫َّ‬
‫‪َ pronouns are used in the following ways:‬من ُْص ْوب ‪The detached‬‬
‫‪َ .‬م ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه َثان ‪1. As a‬‬
‫الل إِ َّيا ُه‬
‫َرزَ َق َك ُ‬
‫‪Allah granted it to you.‬‬
‫‪َ .‬ض ِم ْیر ُمت َِّصل ‪This can also be expressed with a‬‬
‫َس َأ ْلتَن ِ ْی ِه‬
‫‪You asked me for it.‬‬
‫‪َ to create emphasis.‬م ُف ُع ْول بِ ِه ُم َقدَّ م ‪2. As a‬‬
‫﴿إِ َّي َ‬
‫اك َن ْع ُبدُ ﴾‬
‫‪It is you who we worship.‬‬
‫‪You alone do we worship.‬‬
‫‪, either for emphasis or exclusion.‬إِ َّْل ‪3. After‬‬
‫َرأ ْي ُت ال ُّط ََّّل َب إِ َّْل إِ َّي َ‬
‫اك‬ ‫َما َر َأ ْي ُت إِ َّْل إِ َّي َ‬
‫اك‬
‫‪I saw the students except‬‬ ‫‪I only saw you.‬‬
‫‪you.‬‬
‫‪َ noun.‬من ُْص ْوب ‪َ to a‬م ْع ُط ْوف ‪4. As a‬‬
‫إِ َّن ُه ْم َوإِ َّياك ُْم ُمؤْ مِن ُْو َن‬ ‫َر َأ ْي ُت َك َوإِ َّيا ُه‬
‫‪Indeed, they and you are‬‬ ‫‪I saw you and him.‬‬
‫‪believers.‬‬
‫‪َ )13‬ما َر َأ ْي ُت إِ َّْل إِ َّي َ‬
‫اك‬ ‫‪َْ )7‬ل نُطِ ْی ُع إِ َّْل إِ َّيا ُه‬ ‫‪ )1‬إِ َّيا ُه َأ َخ ُ‬
‫اف‬
‫اها يتِیم ِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫‪ )14‬إِ َّن ُه َوإِ َّي َ َ ْ َ‬ ‫‪﴿ )8‬إِ َّي َ‬
‫اك َن ْع ُبدُ ﴾‬ ‫‪ )2‬إِ َّي َ‬
‫اك َأ َم ْر ُ‬
‫ت‬
‫‪﴿ )15‬ن َْرزُ ُق ُه ْم َوإِ َّياك ُْم﴾‬ ‫‪﴿ )9‬إِ َّيا ُه َت ْع ُبدُ ْو َن﴾‬ ‫الل إِ َّيا ُه‬
‫‪َ )3‬وعَدَ ك ُُم ُ‬
‫‪َ )16‬ما َصدَ َق َك َو َْل إِ َّي َ‬
‫اي‬ ‫‪﴿ )10‬إِ َّيا ُه َتدْ ُع ْو َن﴾‬ ‫‪ )4‬ع ََر ْف ُت ُه ُث َّم إِ َّي َ‬
‫اك‬
‫﴿ْل َت ْع ُبدُ ْوا إِ َّْل إِ َّيا ُه﴾‬
‫‪َ )17‬‬ ‫‪َ ﴿ )11‬وعَدَ َها إِ َّيا ُه﴾‬ ‫‪ )5‬إِ َّيانَا َت ْخدَ ع ُْو َن‬
‫‪ )18‬إِن َُّه ْم َوإِ َّياك ُْم َل َع َلی ُهدً ی‬ ‫اك ن َْست َِع ْی ُن﴾‬
‫‪﴿ )12‬إِ َّي َ‬ ‫اه ْم َت ْظلِ ُم ْو َن‬
‫‪ )6‬إِ َّي ُ‬
‫‪332‬‬
‫ْاس ُم إِ َّن ‪َ or‬م ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه ‪Rewrite the following sentences by replacing the‬‬
‫‪with a pronoun.‬‬
‫الس ْو ِق‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )7‬ر َأ ْي ُت ا ْل َجدَّ َو ْاْلَ ْو َْل َد في ُّ‬ ‫‪ )1‬ا ْلع ْل َم َن ْط ُل ُ‬
‫ب‬
‫ج ِد‬ ‫ات فِي ا ْلمس ِ‬
‫َ ْ‬
‫‪ )8‬إِ َّن ْاْلباء و ْاْلُمه ِ‬
‫َ َ َ َّ َ‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ما َض َر َب زَ ْيد إِ َّْل َخالِدً ا‬
‫ات َوا ْل ُمؤْ مِن ِ ْی َن َل ُم ْهتَدُ ْو َن‬ ‫‪ )9‬إِ َّن ا ْلمسلِم ِ‬
‫ُ ْ َ‬ ‫إِ َّن َق َل َم ا ْل ُم َع ِّل ِم َم ْك ُس ْور‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫الص ََّل َة مِ ْن ِد ْي ِن ْ ِ‬ ‫‪ )10‬إِ َّن َّ‬ ‫الل إِ َّْل ال َّظال ِ ِم ْی َن‬
‫اإل ْس ََّل ِم‬ ‫الص ْو َم َو َّ‬ ‫َْل ُي َع ِّذ ُب ُ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫الل َي ْو َم ا ْل ِق َیا َم ِة‬
‫ب ُ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِِ‬
‫‪َ )11‬أع َْم َال ا ْل ُمؤْ من ْی َن ُي َحاس ُ‬ ‫الل ُيطِ ْی ُع ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن ا ْل ُم َّت ُق ْو َن‬
‫َ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫َار ُم ْغ َل َقة‬
‫الصغ َ‬ ‫اب ِّ‬ ‫‪ )12‬إِ َّن النَّاف َذ َت ْی ِن ا ْل َكبِ ْی َر َت ْی ِن َواْلَ ْب َو َ‬ ‫َات َل ُم ْجت َِهدُ ْو َن‬ ‫إِ َّن ْاْلَ ْو َْل َد َوا ْل َبن َ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫‪333‬‬
‫َض ِم ْیر َم ْج ُر ْور ‪Part 3:‬‬
‫‪َ state, i.e.‬م ْج ُر ْور ‪َ is used to replace a noun which is in the‬ض ِم ْیر َم ْج ُر ْور ‪A‬‬
‫اف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪the‬‬
‫‪َ .‬ح ْرف َجار ‪َ of a‬م ْج ُر ْور ‪ and the‬ا ْل ُم َض ُ‬
‫ِص ْیغَة‬
‫‪Pronoun as‬‬ ‫‪Pronoun as‬‬
‫ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬

‫‪Individual‬‬
‫‪English‬‬ ‫َم ْج ُر ْور‬ ‫‪Form‬‬
‫َل ُه‬ ‫َر ُّب ُه‬ ‫ُه‬ ‫ب‬ ‫ِ‬

‫‪His / Him‬‬ ‫الغَائ ُ‬
‫َل ُه َما‬ ‫َر ُّب ُه َما‬ ‫ُه َما‬ ‫ا ْلغَائِب ِ‬
‫ان‬
‫)‪Their / Them (m/d‬‬ ‫َ‬
‫)‪Their / Them (m/p‬‬ ‫َل ُه ْم‬ ‫َر ُّب ُه ْم‬ ‫ُه ْم‬ ‫ا ْلغَائِ ُب ْو َن‬
‫‪Hers / Her‬‬ ‫َل َها‬ ‫َر ُّب َها‬ ‫َها‬ ‫ا ْلغَائِ َب ُة‬
‫َل ُه َما‬ ‫َر ُّب ُه َما‬ ‫ُه َما‬ ‫ا ْلغَائِبت ِ‬
‫َان‬
‫)‪Their / Them (f/d‬‬ ‫َ‬
‫)‪Their / Them (f/p‬‬ ‫َل ُه َّن‬ ‫َر ُّب ُه َّن‬ ‫ُه َّن‬ ‫ا ْلغَائِ َب ُ‬
‫ات‬
‫)‪Your (m/s‬‬ ‫َل َك‬ ‫َر ُّب َك‬ ‫َك‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َخا َط ُ‬

‫ب‬
‫َل ُك َما‬ ‫َر ُّب ُك َما‬ ‫ك َُما‬ ‫ا ْلم َخا َطب ِ‬
‫ان‬
‫)‪Your (m/d‬‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ُ‬
‫)‪Your (m/p‬‬ ‫َل ُك ْم‬ ‫َر ُّب ُك ْم‬ ‫ك ُْم‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َخا َط ُب ْو َن‬
‫َل ِ‬
‫ك‬ ‫رب ِ‬
‫ك‬ ‫ِك‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َخا َط َب ُة‬
‫)‪Your (f/s‬‬ ‫َ ُّ‬
‫َل ُك َما‬ ‫َر ُّب ُك َما‬ ‫ك َُما‬ ‫ا ْلم َخا َطبت ِ‬
‫َان‬
‫)‪Your (f/d‬‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ُ‬
‫)‪Your (f/p‬‬ ‫َل ُك َّن‬ ‫َر ُّب ُك َّن‬ ‫ُن‬
‫ك َّ‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َخا َط َب ُ‬
‫ات‬
‫‪My / Me‬‬ ‫ل ِ ْي ‪ /‬ل ِ َي‬ ‫َر ِّب ْي‬ ‫ـِ ْي‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َت َك ِّل ُم‬
‫‪Our / Us‬‬ ‫َلنَا‬ ‫َر ُّبنَا‬ ‫نَا‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َت َك ِّل ُم ْو َن‬
‫‪334‬‬
‫اف إِ َل ْی ِه‬
‫َض ِمیر ا ْلم َض ِ‬
‫ُْ ُ‬
‫اف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪The‬‬
‫‪.‬م َضاف إِ َلی ِه ‪َ functions like a normal‬ض ِمیر ا ْلم َض ِ‬
‫ُْ ُ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫ُ‬
‫َصا َم ْت ُأ ْخ ُتــ َك‬
‫‪Your sister fasted.‬‬
‫َف ِ‬
‫َك‬ ‫ُأ ْخ ُت‬ ‫َصا َم ْت‬
‫‪Changes to Pronouns‬‬
‫‪َ , non-declinable. However, some do change to‬م ْبنِي ‪Pronouns are‬‬
‫‪make pronunciation easier.‬‬
‫ك َْس َرة ‪ُ changes to a‬ه ْم ‪ُ and‬ه َما ‪ُ ,‬ه ‪َ on the pronouns‬ض َّمة ‪For example, the‬‬
‫‪َ .‬ياء ‪ or‬ك َْس َرة ‪if it is preceded by‬‬
‫إِ َلی َر ِّب ِه ْم‬ ‫َم َع ُأ ِّم ِه َما‬ ‫فِ ْي كِتَابِ ِه‬ ‫فِ ْی ِه‬
‫‪ )13‬ل ِ َذ ْنبِ ِ‬
‫ك‬ ‫‪ُ )10‬أ َّم َها ُت ُك ْم‬ ‫‪ )7‬ثِ َیا َب ُك ْم‬ ‫‪ِ )4‬س ِّك ْینُ َك‬ ‫‪َ )1‬ب َق َر ُت ُه ْم‬
‫كُم‬
‫‪ )14‬عَدُ ِّو ْ‬ ‫‪ِ )11‬د ْينِ ُك ْم‬ ‫‪ِ )8‬ص َرا َط َك‬ ‫‪ُ )5‬د ُر ْو ُس ُك ْم‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ث َوا ُب ُه‬
‫‪َ )15‬ق ْر َي ِت ُك ْم‬ ‫‪َ )12‬أ ْق ََّل َم ُه ْم‬ ‫‪َ )9‬ط ِّی َباتِ ُك ْم‬ ‫‪َ )6‬قدْ ِر ِه‬ ‫‪ )3‬ن َْو ُم ُك َّن‬
‫‪ُ with a‬م َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪Rewrite the following sentences by replacing the‬‬
‫ب‬ ‫ُب ُأ ْو َلئِ َك ال ُّط ََّّل ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ )9‬ت ْل َك ُكت ُ‬ ‫ان عَدُ ُّو ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ِم ْی َن‬
‫ال َّش ْی َط ُ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬ ‫‪ٰ )1‬ه ِذ ِه غ ُْر َف ُة زَ ْيد‬
‫ت‬ ‫‪َ )10‬ه ْل َتنَام ُأم َفاطِم َة فِي ا ْلبی ِ‬ ‫َه ْل َت ْل َب ِس ْی َن َث ْو َب عَائِ َش َة‬ ‫‪)6‬‬ ‫‪ٰ )2‬ه َذا َصبِ ُّي ا ْل َع َّم ِة‬
‫َ ْ َْ‬ ‫ُ ُّ‬
‫اب‬ ‫ت َّ‬ ‫‪ )11‬ج َلس ا ْلجدُّ فِي بی ِ‬ ‫ت َم َع ا ْب ِن ال َّص ِد ْي ِق‬ ‫َسا َف ْر ُ‬ ‫‪َ )3‬شا ُة ا ْل َف ََّّلحِ َص ِغ ْی َرة‬
‫الش ِّ‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫َ َ َ‬ ‫‪)7‬‬
‫ب ا ْل َملِ ُك َع َلی َو َل ِد ا ْل َعال ِ ِم‬ ‫‪َ )12‬يغ َْض ُ‬ ‫َان طِ ْف ُل ا ْل ُمؤْ مِ ِن ُم ْجت َِهدً ا‬ ‫ك َ‬ ‫‪)8‬‬ ‫الر ُج ِل َب ِع ْید‬ ‫‪ )4‬إِ َّن َب ْی َت َّ‬
‫‪335‬‬
‫َض ِم ْی ُر ا ْل َم ْج ُر ْو ِر‬
The ‫ َض ِم ْی ُر ا ْل َم ْج ُر ْو ِر‬functions like a normal ‫ َم ْج ُر ْور‬.
‫ب ا ْل َو َلدُ إِ َل ْیـ ِه‬
َ ‫َذ َه‬
The child went towards him.
‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِیْ ِه َغیْ ُر َص ِر ْيح‬ ِ ‫َف‬
‫ِه‬ ‫إِ َل ْیـه‬ ُ‫ا ْل َو َلد‬ َ ‫َذ َه‬

‫ب‬
Note
The ‫ َأل ِف‬at the end of ‫ إِ َلی‬and ‫( عَلی‬which is written as a ‫ )ی‬changes to
a ‫ ي‬when it is joined to a pronoun.
‫ إِ َلی‬with a Pronoun ‫ إِ َلی‬with a Noun
‫إِ َل ْی ِه‬  ‫ت‬ِ ‫إِ َلی ا ْلبی‬
َْ
‫َع َل ْی ِه‬ 
ِ ‫َع َلی ا ْلبی‬
‫ت‬ َْ
Exercise 3
‫) فِ ْی ِه َّن‬13 ‫) َل ُك َما‬10 ‫) َع َل ْی ِه‬7 ‫) إِ َل ْی ُك ْم‬4 ‫) َل ُه‬1
‫) بِ ُك ْم‬14 ‫) إِ َل ْی َها‬11 ‫) َل َك‬8 ‫) َل ُه َّن‬5 ‫) َع َل ْی ِه ْم‬2
‫) َع َل ْی ُك ْم‬15 ‫) ل ِ ْي‬12 ‫) عَ َل ْی ِه َما‬9 ‫) بِنَا‬6 ‫) َل َها‬3
336
‫‪َْ ﴿ )15‬ل ُت ْش ِركُوا بِ ِه َش ْیئًا﴾‬ ‫‪َْ ﴿ )8‬ل َت ْحزَ ْن َع َل ْی ِه ْم﴾‬ ‫‪﴿ )1‬إِنَّا َم َع ُك ْم﴾‬
‫الل ِب ُذن ُْو ِب ِه ْم﴾‬ ‫‪َ ﴿ )16‬أ َخ َذ ُه ُم ُ‬ ‫‪َ ﴿ )9‬خ َل َق َك مِ ْن ُت َراب﴾‬ ‫‪َْ ﴿ )2‬ل ِع ْل َم َلنَا﴾‬
‫ِ‬
‫َاب﴾‬ ‫‪َ ﴿ )17‬أنْزَ ْلنَا َع َل ْی َك ا ْلكت َ‬ ‫الل َو َر ُسو ُل ُه﴾‬
‫‪َ ﴿ )10‬وعَدَ نَا ُ‬ ‫‪ُ ﴿ )3‬ا ْش ُك ُر ْوا َل ُه﴾‬
‫اء َما ًء﴾‬ ‫‪َ ﴿ )18‬أنْزَ َل مِن السم ِ‬ ‫‪َ ﴿ )11‬ي ْت ُل ْو َع َل ْی ِه ْم آ َياتِ َك﴾‬ ‫‪ُ ﴿ )4‬ه ْم فِي َر ْيبِ ِه ْم﴾‬
‫َ َّ َ‬
‫‪َ ﴿ )19‬ما َه َذا إِ َّْل َب َشر مِ ْث ُل ُك ْم﴾‬ ‫‪َ ﴿ )12‬ي ْش َر ُب ْو َن مِ ْن َك ْأس﴾‬ ‫‪﴿ )5‬إِنَّا َر ُس ْو َْل َر ِّب َك﴾‬
‫‪﴿ )20‬آمن ِب ِ‬
‫الل َو َم ََّل ِئ َك ِت ِه َوكُ ُت ِب ِه َو ُر ُس ِل ِه﴾‬ ‫‪َ ﴿ )13‬أنْزَ ْلنَا َع َل ْی َها ا ْل َما َء﴾‬ ‫‪﴿ )6‬اغ ِْف ْر َلنَا ُذن ُْو َبنَا﴾‬
‫َ َ‬
‫‪َ ﴿ )21‬ل ُت ْب َل ُو َّن فِي َأ ْم َوال ِ ُك ْم َو َأ ْن ُف ِس ُك ْم﴾‬ ‫‪َ ﴿ )14‬أ ْه َل ْكن َُاه ْم ِب ُذنُو ِب ِه ْم﴾‬ ‫یه آ َيات َب ِّینَات﴾‬ ‫‪﴿ )7‬فِ ِ‬
‫‪َ with a‬م ْج ُر ْور ‪Rewrite the following sentences by replacing the‬‬
‫ب ا ْلغَن ِ ُّي َع َلى ا ْل ُف َق َر ِاء‬ ‫‪ )1‬آمنُوا بِاللِ‬
‫‪َ )7‬يغ َْض ُ‬ ‫َ ْ‬
‫الس ْو ِق‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )8‬ذ َه َب ْت ُأ ُّم َفاط َم َة إِ َلى ُّ‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ح َض ُر ْوا الدَّ ْر َس‬
‫َات‬‫‪َْ )9‬ل َتغ َْضب ْاْلُم َع َلى ا ْلبن ِ‬ ‫ت ا ْل ُم َع ِّل ِم‬ ‫‪ )3‬ر َأي َته فِي بی ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫ُ ُّ‬ ‫َ ْ ُ ْ َْ‬
‫ت ا ْل َجدَّ ُة إِ َلى ا ْل َق ْر َي ِة ا ْل َب ِع ْیدَ ِة‬‫‪ )10‬سا َفر ِ‬
‫َ َ‬ ‫س‬ ‫اب مِ َن ا ْل َف َر ِ‬ ‫الش ُ‬ ‫‪َ )4‬س َق َط َّ‬
‫ج ِد ُثم إِ َلی الدُّ ك ِ‬ ‫اء ن ُُج ْو ًما َكثِ ْی َر ًة‬ ‫‪ )5‬إِ َّن فِي السم ِ‬
‫َّان‬ ‫‪َ )11‬م َش ْی ُت إِ َلى ا ْل َم ْس ِ َّ‬ ‫َّ َ‬
‫ش ا ْل َعظِ ْی ِم‬
‫‪َ )12‬ج َل َس ا ْل َملِ ُك ال َّظال ِ ُم ع َلى ا ْل َع ْر ِ‬ ‫الش َج َر ِة‬ ‫ت ال ُّط ُی ْو ُر َع َلى َّ‬ ‫‪ )6‬كَا َن ِ‬
‫‪337‬‬
‫‪Overview of Pronouns‬‬
‫‪Summary of the Pronouns‬‬
‫َض ِم ْیر َم ْج ُر ْور‬ ‫َض ِم ْیر َمن ُْص ْوب‬ ‫َض ِم ْیر َم ْر ُف ْوع‬
‫ُمت َِّصل‬ ‫ُمنْ َف ِصل‬ ‫ُمت َِّصل‬ ‫ُمت َِّصل‬ ‫ُمنْ َف ِصل‬
‫َم ْج ُر ْور‬ ‫ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬ ‫اس ُم َّ‬
‫إن‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫ا ْل َم ْف ُع ْو ُل بِ ِه‬ ‫ل‬ ‫ا ْل َف ِ‬
‫اع ِ‬ ‫ا ْل ُمبْتَدَ ُأ‬
‫الن َّْه ُي‬ ‫ْاْلَ ْم ُر‬ ‫ا ْل ُم َض ِ‬
‫ار ُع‬ ‫الم ِ‬
‫اض ْي‬ ‫َ‬
‫َل ُه‬ ‫َر ُّب ُه‬ ‫إِ َّيا ُه‬ ‫إِ َّن ُه‬ ‫َس ِم ْع ُت ُه‬ ‫َْل َي ْف َع ْل ( ُه َو)‬ ‫ل ِ َی ْف َع ْل ( ُه َو)‬ ‫َي ْف َع ُل ( ُه َو)‬ ‫َف َع َل ( ُه َو)‬ ‫ُه َو‬
‫َل ُه َما‬ ‫َر ُّب ُه َما‬ ‫إِ َّيا ُه َما‬ ‫إِ َّن ُه َما‬ ‫َس ِم ْع ُت ُه َما‬ ‫َْل َي ْف َع ََّل (ا)‬ ‫ل ِ َی ْف َع ََّل (ا)‬ ‫َي ْف َع ََّل ِن (ا)‬ ‫َف َع ََّل (ا)‬ ‫ُه َما‬
‫َل ُه ْم‬ ‫َر ُّب ُه ْم‬ ‫إِ َّيا ُه ْم‬ ‫إِ َّن ُه ْم‬ ‫َس ِم ْع ُت ُه ْم‬ ‫َْل َي ْف َع ُل ْوا (و)‬ ‫ل ِ َی ْف َع ُل ْوا (و)‬ ‫َي ْف َع ُل ْو َن (و)‬ ‫َف َع ُل ْوا (و)‬ ‫ُه ْم‬
‫َل َها‬ ‫َر ُّب َها‬ ‫إِ َّيا َها‬ ‫إِ َّن َها‬ ‫َس ِم ْع ُت َها‬ ‫َْل َت ْف َع ْل ( ِه َي)‬ ‫ل ِ َت ْف َع ْل ( ِه َي)‬ ‫َت ْف َع ُل ( ِه َي)‬ ‫َف َع َل ْت ( ِه َي)‬ ‫ِه َي‬
‫َل ُه َما‬ ‫َر ُّب ُه َما‬ ‫إِ َّيا ُه َما‬ ‫إِ َّن ُه َما‬ ‫َس ِم ْع ُت ُه َما‬ ‫َْل َت ْف َع ََّل (ا)‬ ‫ل ِ َت ْف َع ََّل (ا)‬ ‫َت ْف َع ََّل ِن (ا)‬ ‫َف َع َلتَا (ا)‬ ‫ُه َما‬
‫َل ُه َّن‬ ‫َر ُّب ُه َّن‬ ‫إِ َّيا ُه َّن‬ ‫إِ َّن ُه َّن‬ ‫َس ِم ْع ُت ُه َّن‬ ‫َْل َي ْف َع ْل َن َ‬
‫(ن)‬ ‫ل ِ َی ْف َع ْل َن َ‬
‫(ن)‬ ‫َي ْف َع ْل َن َ‬
‫(ن)‬ ‫َف َع ْل َن (ن)‬ ‫ُه َّن‬
‫َل َك‬ ‫َر ُّب َك‬ ‫إِ َّيا َك‬ ‫إِ َّن َك‬ ‫َس ِم ْع ُت َك‬ ‫َْل َت ْف َع ْل ( َأن َْت)‬ ‫اِ ْف َع ْل ( َأن َْت)‬ ‫َتف َع ُل ( َأن َْت)‬ ‫َف َع ْل َت َ‬
‫(ت)‬ ‫َأن َْت‬
‫َل ُك َما‬ ‫َر ُّب ُك َما‬ ‫إِ َّياك َُما‬ ‫إِ َّن ُك َما‬ ‫َس ِم ْع ُت ُك َما‬ ‫َْل َت ْف َع ََّل (ا)‬ ‫اِ ْف َع ََّل (ا)‬ ‫َت ْف َع ََّل ِن (ا)‬ ‫َف َع ْلت َُما ( ُت َما)‬ ‫َأ ْنت َُما‬
‫َل ُك ْم‬ ‫َر ُّب ُك ْم‬ ‫إِ َّياك ُْم‬ ‫إِ َّن ُك ْم‬ ‫َس ِم ْع ُت ُك ْم‬ ‫َْل َت ْف َع ُل ْوا (و)‬ ‫اِ ْف َع ُل ْوا (و)‬ ‫َت ْف َع ُل ْو َن (و)‬ ‫َف َعلت ُْم ( ُت ْم)‬ ‫َأ ْنت ُْم‬
‫َل ِ‬
‫ك‬ ‫رب ِ‬
‫ك‬ ‫إِ َّيا ِك‬ ‫إِ َّن ِ‬
‫ك‬ ‫ك‬‫س ِمع ُت ِ‬ ‫َْل َت ْف َعلِ ْي (ي)‬ ‫اِ ْف َعلِ ْي (ي)‬ ‫َت ْف َعلِ ْی َن (ي)‬ ‫ت ِ‬
‫(ت)‬ ‫َفع ْل ِ‬ ‫َأن ِ‬
‫ْت‬
‫َ ُّ‬ ‫َ ْ‬ ‫َ‬
‫َل ُك َما‬ ‫َر ُّب ُك َما‬ ‫إِ َّياك َُما‬ ‫إِ َّن ُك َما‬ ‫َس ِم ْع ُت ُك َما‬ ‫َْل َت ْف َع ََّل (ا)‬ ‫اِ ْف َع ََّل (ا)‬ ‫َت ْف َع ََّل ِن (ا)‬ ‫َف َع ْلت َُما ( ُت َما)‬ ‫َأ ْنت َُما‬
‫َل ُك َّن‬ ‫َر ُّب ُك َّن‬ ‫إِ َّيا ُك َّن‬ ‫إِ َّن ُك َّن‬ ‫َس ِم ْع ُت ُك َّن‬ ‫َْل َت ْف َع ْل َن َ‬
‫(ن)‬ ‫اِ ْف َع ْل َن َ‬
‫(ن)‬ ‫َت ْف َع ْل َن َ‬
‫(ن)‬ ‫َف َع ْل ُت َّن ( ُت َّن)‬ ‫َأ ْن ُت َّن‬
‫ل ِ ْي‬ ‫َر ِّب ْي‬ ‫إِ َّياِ َي‬ ‫إِ َّنن ِ ْي‬ ‫َس ِم ْع ُتن ِ ْي‬ ‫َْل َأ ْف َع ْل ( َأنَا)‬ ‫ِْلَ ْف َع ْل ( َأنَا)‬ ‫َأ ْف َع ُل ( َأنَا)‬ ‫َف َع ْل ُت ُ‬
‫(ت)‬ ‫َأنَا‬
‫َلنَا‬ ‫َر ُّبنَا‬ ‫إِ َّيانَا‬ ‫إِ َّننَا‬ ‫َس ِم ْع ُتنَا‬ ‫َْل َن ْف َع ْل (ن َْح ُن)‬ ‫ل ِنَ ْف َع ْل (ن َْح ُن)‬ ‫َن ْف َع ُل (ن َْح ُن)‬ ‫َف َع ْلنَا (نَا)‬ ‫ن َْح ُن‬
‫‪338‬‬
Recognising the Pronouns
On its own  ‫َأنَا‬  ‫ُم ْب َتدَ أ‬
After the verb  ‫َس ِم ْع ُت‬ 

ِ ‫َف‬
‫اعل‬
After verb/subject pronoun  ‫َس ِم ْع ُت ُه‬  ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬

Pronoun
Joined to ‫إِ َّن‬  ‫إِ َّن ُه‬  ‫اِ ْس ُم إِ َّن‬
With ‫إِ َّيا‬ ‫إِ َّيا ُه‬ ِ ِ

  ‫ َم ْع ُط ْوف‬،‫ ا ْس ُم إِ َّن‬،‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِه‬
Joined to a noun  ‫َر ُّب ُه‬  ‫ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬
Joined to a ‫َح ْرف َجار‬  ‫إِ َل ْی ِه‬  ‫َم ْج ُر ْور‬
339
Supplement: Additional Rules of Pronouns
Additional Rules of Demonstrative Pronouns
Changes to the ِ‫اإل َش َارة‬
ِ ‫اسم‬
ُ ْ
The ‫ َك‬at the end of the ‫اإل َش َار ِة‬
ِ ْ ‫ َأسماء‬can be changed according to the
ُ َ ْ
addressee. For example, if there are two male addressees, the ‫َك‬
can change to ‫ك َُما‬.
ِ ِ
 ‫ت ْل َك َحد ْي َقة‬ ‫تِ ْلــ ُك َما َح ِد ْي َقة‬
In this example, the ‫ َك‬changes to ‫ ك َُما‬because there are two male
addressees. Note that the gender and number of the ‫ ُم َشار إِ َل ْی ِه‬or ‫َخ َبر‬
do not affect the ‫ َك‬.
Exercise 1
Translate the following. Notice the change to the ‫اإل َش َار ِة‬
ِ ْ ‫اس ُم‬
ْ .
‫) َر َأ ْي ُت َت ْین ِ ُك ُم ْاْلُ ُذ َن ْی ِن مِ ْن َق ْب ُل‬7 ‫) ُأو ٰلئِ ُك ْم ُأ َّم َهات‬4 ‫) ٰذل ِ ُك َما َح ِر ْير‬1
‫) ل ِ َما َذا َسا َف ْر ُت َّن إِ َلی تِ ْل ُك َّن ا ْل َق ْر َي ِة‬8 ِ ‫) تِ ْل ُكم دموع ك‬5
‫َاذ َبة‬ ُُْ ْ ‫) ٰذل ِ ُك َّن َذ َهب‬2
ِ ِ ِ ِ ‫ان َكبِیر َت‬
ِ ‫) َتانِ ُكن سو َق‬6 ‫) تِ ْل ُك ْم فِ َّضة‬3
‫اب‬ َ ‫) َه ْل ُتح َّبان ُأو ٰلئ ُك َما ْاْلَ ْص َح‬9 ‫ان‬ َْ ْ ُ َّ
Usage of ‫ك َٰذل ِ َك‬

The particle ‫ َك‬can come before the ‫ ْاس ُم ْاإل َش َار ِة‬of ‫ ٰذل ِ َك‬to form the word
‫ك َٰذل ِ َك‬. This is used to draw comparison and is translated as like this,
likewise, similarly etc.
In a ‫ ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة‬, this becomes the ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق‬of the verb.
‫الل ا ْل َم ْو َتى‬ ِ
ُ ‫ك ََذل َك ُي ْح ِي‬
Likewise, Allah will resurrect the dead.
In a ‫ ُج ْم َلة ْاس ِم َّیة‬, this becomes a ‫ َخ َبر ُم َقدَّ م‬.
ِ ِ
َ ‫ك ََذل َك َجزَ ا ُء ا ْل َكاف ِر‬
‫ين‬
The recompense of the disbelievers will be like that.
340
The ‫ َخ َبر‬of Pronouns
If the ‫ َخ َبر‬is an adjective, it should have a ‫ َتن ِْو ْين‬. The reason for this is
that, if it were to have an ‫ َا ْل‬, it could easily be misunderstood to be
the ‫ َن ْعت‬.
‫الصال ِ ُح‬
َّ
The man is pious. / the pious man
However, there are some cases where the ‫ َخ َبر‬may have an ‫ َا ْل‬to
create emphasis in the sentence.
The ‫ َخ َبر‬of Pronouns with an ‫َا ْل‬
A pronoun can never be a ‫ َمنْ ُع ْوت‬. Therefore, if the adjective after it
has an ‫ َا ْل‬it cannot be mistaken for a ‫ َمنْ ُع ْوت – َن ْعت‬. In this case, the ‫َخ َبر‬
of a pronoun may have an ‫ ; َا ْل‬this will create emphasis.
‫ُه ُم ال َّصال ِ ُح ْو َن‬
They are the pious ones.
It is they who are the pious.
However, this emphasis is not always reflected in the translation.
They are the pious.
Exercise 2
‫) ُه ُم ا ْل ُمنَافِ ُق ْو َن‬9 ‫) ِه َي النِّ ْع َم ُة‬5 ‫ُه َو ا ْل َول ِ ُّي‬ )1
ِ ‫َّاجر‬ ‫) َأ ْنت ُُم ا ْلكِ َرا ُم‬6
‫ان‬ َ ِ ‫) َأ ْنت َُما الت‬10 ‫ُه َو ا ْل ُم َع ِّل ُم‬ )2
‫) ن َْح ُن ا ْل َم ْظ ُل ْو ُم ْو َن‬11 ‫) ُه ُم ا ْل ُم ْهتَدُ ْو َن‬7 ‫ِه َي ْاْلَمِ ْینَ ُة‬ )3
ِ‫) نَحن ا ْل ُف َقراء إِ َلی الل‬12 ُ ‫) ُه َّن ْاْلَ ْم َو‬8
‫ات‬ ‫ْت ْاْلَمِ ْی ُر‬ َ ‫َأن‬ )4
ُ َ ُ ْ
341
ِ ‫َض ِم ْی ُر ا ْل َف ْص‬
‫ل‬
To avoid misunderstanding a ‫ َخ َبر‬with an ‫ َا ْل‬as a ‫ َن ْعت‬or ‫ ُم َشار إِ َل ْی ِه‬, a
pronoun is placed between the ‫ ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬and ‫ َخ َبر‬which matches the ‫ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬
in number and gender. This is called ‫ ; َض ِم ْی ُر َف ْصل‬a pronoun to
differentiate between ‫ َخ َبر‬and the ‫ َن ْعت‬or ‫ ُم َشار إِ َل ْی ِه‬.
ِ ‫﴿ ُأو ٰلئِ َك ُهم ا ْل َف‬
﴾‫اس ُق ْو َن‬ ُ
The ‫ َض ِم ْی ُر ا ْل َف ْص ِل‬creates emphasis. The translation of a sentence with
a ‫ َض ِم ْی ُر ا ْل َف ْص ِل‬is changed to reflect this emphasis.
They are the ones who are transgressors.
It is these (people) who are the transgressors.
In tarkib, the ‫ َض ِم ْی ُر ا ْل َف ْص ِل‬is not labelled as a main part of the sentence.
‫َخبَر‬ ‫َض ِمیْ ُر ا ْل َف ْص ِل‬ ‫ُمبْتَدَ أ‬
ِ ‫ا ْل‬
َ ‫فاس ُق‬
‫ون‬ ‫ُه ُم‬ ‫ُأولئِ َك‬
A ‫ َض ِم ْی ُر َف ْصل‬can also be added to create emphasis, even when there
is no possibility of the ‫ َخ َبر‬being misunderstood as a ‫ َن ْعت‬.
‫اإل ْس ََّل ُم ُه َو ِد ْين ِ ْي‬
ِْ
Islam is my religion.
The following table summarises the ‫ َخ َبر‬when it has an ‫ َا ْل‬.
 ‫ ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬is a pronoun No ‫َض ِم ْی ُر ا ْل َف ْص ِل‬ ﴾‫﴿ه ُم ا ْل َعدُّ ُّو‬
ُ
‫ َخ َبر‬has ‫ال‬
‫َض ِم ْی ُر ا ْل َف ْص ِل‬ ِ ‫﴿ ُأو ٰلئِ َك ُهم ا ْل َف‬
﴾‫اس ُق ْو َن‬
 ‫ ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬is not a pronoun ُ
Vocab
to climb ‫ َص ِعدَ َي ْص َعدُ ُص ُع ْو ًدا‬to follow ‫اِ َّت َب َع َي َّتبِ ُع اِ ِّت َباعًا‬
to test, trial ‫َفت ََن َي ْفتِ ُن ُفت ُْونًا‬ to give preference ‫آ َث َر ُيؤْ ثِ ُر إِ ْي َث ًارا‬
‫ب َل ْع ًبا‬ ِ ‫َاب اغْتِ َیا ًبا‬ ِ
to play ُ ‫ب َي ْل َع‬
َ ‫َلع‬ to backbite ُ ‫َاب َي ْغت‬
َ ‫ا ْغت‬
to own, control ‫َم َل َك َي ْملِ ُك ُم ْل ًكا‬ to enter ‫َد َخ َل َيدْ ُخ ُل ُد ُخ ْو ًْل‬
to reach ‫ َو َص َل َي ِص ُل ُو ُص ْو ًْل‬to intercede ‫َش َف َع َي ْش َف ُع َش َفا َع ًة‬
342
‫‪ُ ﴿ )9‬أو َلئِ َك ُه ُم ا ْل َكافِ ُر ْو َن﴾‬ ‫﴿ ُأو َلئِ َك ُهم ا ْل َخ ِ‬
‫اس ُر ْو َن﴾‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬ ‫الل ُه َو ا ْلغَن ِ ُّي ﴾‬
‫﴿ إِ َّن َ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫‪ )10‬ا ْلع َلماء ُهم ا ْل َخ ِ‬
‫اش ُع ْو َن‬ ‫﴿ ُأو َلئِ َك ُه ُم ا ْل ُم ْهتَدُ ْو َن﴾‬ ‫‪)6‬‬ ‫اذ ُب ْو َن﴾‬‫﴿إِنَّهم ُهم ا ْل َك ِ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫ُ َ ُ ُ‬ ‫ُ ْ ُ‬
‫اإل ْس ََّل ُم ُه َو ِد ْي ُن اللِ ا ْل َح ُّق‬
‫‪ِ ْ )11‬‬ ‫اس ُق ْو َن﴾‬ ‫﴿ ُأو َلئِ َك ُهم ا ْل َف ِ‬
‫ُ‬ ‫‪)7‬‬ ‫﴿ ُأو َلئِ َك ُه ُم ا ْل ُم َّت ُق ْو َن﴾‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫‪ )12‬إِ َّن ال ُّط ََّّل َب ُه ُم ا ْل ُم ْجت َِهدُ ْو َن‬ ‫اشدُ ْو َن﴾‬ ‫﴿ ُأو َلئِ َك ُهم الر ِ‬ ‫‪)8‬‬ ‫﴿ ُأو َلئِ َك ُه ُم ا ْل ُم ْفلِ ُح ْو َن﴾‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫ُ َّ‬
‫ُم ْبتَدَ أ ‪َ between the‬ض ِم ْی ُر ا ْل َف ْص ِل ‪Join the following together by adding a‬‬
‫‪َ .‬خ َبر ‪and‬‬
‫اشدُ ْو َن‬ ‫‪ )6‬الصحاب ُة ‪ /‬الر ِ‬ ‫الل ‪ /‬ا ْل َخبِ ْی ُر‬
‫َّ‬ ‫َّ َ َ‬ ‫‪ُ )1‬‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ص‬ ‫‪ٰ )7‬ذل ُك ُم ال ّل َب ُن ‪ /‬ا ْل َخال ُ‬ ‫‪ )2‬ال َّت ْق َوی ‪ /‬ا ْل ُجنَّ ُة‬
‫‪ )8‬ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن ‪ /‬ا ْل ُم ْفلِ ُح ْو َن‬ ‫الش ِر ْي َف ُة‬
‫‪َ )3‬أ ْس َما ُء ‪َّ /‬‬
‫اس ُر ْو َن‬‫‪ )9‬ال َّظالِمو َن ‪ /‬ا ْل َخ ِ‬
‫ُْ‬ ‫‪َ )4‬ع ْبدُ اللِ ‪ْ /‬اْلُ ْستَا ُذ‬
‫خ ْی ََّل ِن‬ ‫‪ٰ )10‬ذانِ َك الرج ََّل ِن ‪ /‬ا ْلب ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫َّ ُ‬ ‫الذن ُْو ُب ‪ /‬ا ْل ُم ِص ْی َب ُة‬
‫‪ُّ )5‬‬
‫‪343‬‬
Reflexive Pronouns
A reflexive pronoun is used when there is a pronoun in the
sentence which refers to the subject.
In English, the reflexive pronoun has the suffix -self.
He saw him in the mirror.  He saw himself in the mirror.
In Arabic, the word ‫ َن ْفس‬or its plural, ‫ َأ ْن ُفس‬, is used as the reflexive
pronoun. These words become the ‫ ُم َضاف‬to a pronoun referring to
the subject.
‫الر ُج ُل َن ْف َس ُه‬
The man saw himself.
Note
The word ‫ َن ْفس‬on its own means soul, but it will not be translated as
such.
Exercise 5
﴾‫) ﴿ َأ ْس َر ُفوا َع َلى َأ ْن ُف ِس ِه ْم‬11 ‫) َل ْم َي ْخ ُل ُق ْوا َأ ْن ُف َس ُه ْم‬6 ‫) اِ ْح َف ْظ َن ْف َس َك‬1
﴾‫) ﴿ ُيؤْ ثِ ُر ْو َن َع َلى َأ ْن ُف ِس ِه ْم‬12 ﴾‫) ﴿ ُي ْهلِ ُك ْو َن َأ ْن ُف َس ُه ْم‬7 ‫) َْل ُت َع ِّذ ْب َن ْف َس َك‬2
﴾‫ُون إِ َّْل َأ ْن ُف َس ُه ْم‬
َ ‫) ﴿ َما َي ْخدَ ع‬13 ﴾‫) ﴿ َْل َت ْق ُت ُل ْوا َأ ْن ُف َس ُك ْم‬8 ‫) َي ْخدَ ع ُْو َن َأ ْن ُف َس ُه ْم‬3
‫َان َأ ْن ُف َس ُك َّن فِ ْي ُم ِص ْی َبة‬
ِّ ‫) َْل ُتدْ ِخ ْلن‬14 ‫) إِن ََّما َي ْع َم ُل ْو َن ِْلَ ْن ُف ِس ِه ْم‬9 ‫) َيدْ ع ُْو َن ِْلَ ْن ُف ِس ِه ْم‬4
ِ ‫ب ا ْل ِعباد َأن ُْفسهم َقب َل ا ْلمو‬ ِ ِ ﴾‫) ﴿ك ََذ ُب ْوا َع َلى َأ ْن ُف ِس ِه ْم‬10
‫ت‬ ْ َ ْ ْ ُ َ ُ َ ِ ‫) ل ُی َحاس‬15 ﴾‫) ﴿ َظ َل ُم ْوا َأ ْن ُف َس ُه ْم‬5
Exercise 6
Complete the following sentences by adding a reflexive pronoun.
....... ‫) ُتن ِْف ُق ا ْل َم َال َع َلى‬9 ....... ‫َين ُْص ُر ْو َن‬ )5 .......‫) ُق ْل ُت ِل‬1
‫ ْاْلَ َد َب‬....... ‫) َع ِّل ْم‬10 ....... ‫اس ُب ْو َن‬ِ ‫ُتح‬ )6 ....... ‫) َأ ْه َل ُك ْوا‬2
َ
ِّ ....... ‫) َْل َت ْح ِر ْم‬11
‫الرزْ َق‬ ....... ‫َْل َت ْل َعن ِ ْي‬ )7 ....... ‫) َوعَدْ ُّت ْم‬3
....... ‫) ُيؤْ ثِ ُر ْو َن َأ ْص ِد َقائ َُه ْم َع َلى‬12 ....... ‫َْل ُت َع ِّذ ْب َن‬ )8 ِ ‫) ي ْظلِم‬4
....... ‫ان‬ َ َ
344
Reciprocal Pronouns
A reciprocal pronoun indicates that two or more people are
carrying out the same action upon each other.
In English, this is translated as each other or one another.
The children helped the children.  The children helped each other.
Arabic Reciprocal Pronouns
In Arabic, such a structure is formed per the following steps:
ِ ‫ َف‬in a ‫ م َضاف – م َضاف إِ َلی ِه‬structure.
1. Placing the word ‫ َب ْعض‬as the ‫اعل‬ ْ ُ ُ
ِ ِ
2. Repeating the word ‫ َب ْعض‬as the ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِه‬in ‫ نَك َرة‬form.
‫َب ْع ًضا‬ ‫ْاْلَ ْو َْل ِد‬ ‫َب ْع ُض‬ ‫ن ََص َر‬

Word ‫ َب ْعض‬as ‫ َب ْعض‬as the ‫َاعل‬ ِ ‫ ف‬in a ‫م َضاف – م َضاف‬
ُ ُ
the ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬in ِ‫ إِ َلیه‬structure
ْ
‫ نَكِ َرة‬form
Translation of Reciprocal Pronouns

Reciprocal pronouns are translated as per the following steps:
1. Translate the ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬of the first ‫ َب ْعض‬as the ‫اعل‬
ِ ‫; َف‬
2. Translate the verb;
3. Translate both ‫ َب ْعض‬together as each other.
‫َب ْع ًضا‬ ‫ْاْلَ ْو َْل ِد‬ ‫َب ْع ُض‬ ‫ن ََص َر‬
3 1 3 2
… other The children each … helped
345
‫‪َ )9‬ي ْس َأ ُل َب ْع ُض ال ُّط ََّّل ِ‬
‫ب َب ْع ًضا‬ ‫‪َ )1‬ما َر َأی َب ْع ُضنَا َب ْع ًضا‬
‫‪َْ )10‬ل َي ْر َضی َب ْع ُضنَا ع ْ‬

‫َن َب ْعض‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ي ْع ِر ُ‬
‫ف َب ْع ُض ُك ْم َب ْع ًضا‬
‫‪َ ﴿ )11‬أ ْق َب َل َب ْع ُض ُه ْم َع َلى َب ْعض﴾‬ ‫‪َ )3‬أ ْه َل َك َب ْع ُض ُه ْم َب ْع ًضا‬
‫ِ‬ ‫‪َْ )4‬ل َي ْش ُك ُر َب ْع ُض ُه ْم ل ِ َب ْعض‬
‫‪َْ )12‬ل َت ْس َتغْن ْي َب ْع ُض ُه َّن ع ْ‬
‫َن َب ْعض‬
‫‪َ )13‬ين ُْص ُر َب ْع ُض ال ُّط ََّّل ِ‬
‫ب َب ْع ًضا‬ ‫‪َْ )5‬ل َي ْخدَ ُع َب ْع ُض ُك ْم َب ْع ًضا‬
‫‪َ ﴿ )14‬ي ْل َع ُن َب ْع ُض ُك ْم َب ْع ًضا﴾ َي ْو َم ا ْل ِق َیا َم ِة‬ ‫َب َب ْع ُض ُك ْم َب ْع ًضا﴾‬ ‫‪َْ ﴿ )6‬ل َي ْغت ْ‬
‫‪َ ﴿ )15‬ي ْو َم ا ْل ِق َیا َم ِة َي ْك ُف ُر َب ْع ُض ُك ْم بِ َب ْعض﴾‬ ‫‪َْ )7‬ل يت ِ‬
‫َّخ ْذ َب ْع ُضنَا َب ْع ًضا َأ ْر َبا ًبا‬ ‫َ‬
‫‪﴿ )16‬ا ْل َی ْو َم َْل َي ْملِ ُك َب ْع ُض ُك ْم ل ِ َب ْعض َن ْف ًعا َو َْل َض ًّرا﴾‬ ‫‪َ ﴿ )8‬ن َظ َر َب ْع ُض ُه ْم إِ َلى َب ْعض﴾‬
‫‪Note‬‬
‫‪َ , it may be better to translate as some‬ف ِ‬
‫اعل ‪َ is not the‬ب ْعض ‪If the first‬‬
‫‪and other(s).‬‬
‫الل َب ْع َض ُك ْم َف ْو َق َب ْعض‬
‫َر َف َع ُ‬
‫‪Allah elevated some of you over others.‬‬
‫الل َب ْع َض النَّبِ ِّی ْی َن َع َلى َب ْعض‬
‫‪َ )4‬ل َقدْ َف َّض َل ُ‬ ‫‪َ ﴿ )1‬ف َتنَّا َب ْع َض ُه ْم بِ َب ْعض﴾‬
‫الرزْ ِق‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪َ ﴿ )2‬ج َع ْلنَا َب ْع َض ُك ْم ل ِ َب ْعض فِ ْتنَ ًة﴾‬
‫الل َب ْع َض ُك ْم َع َلى َب ْعض في ِّ‬ ‫‪َ )5‬ف َّض َل ُ‬
‫َّاس َب ْع َض ُه ْم َع َلی َب ْعض فِي ا ْل ِع ْل ِم‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ل َقدْ َف َّض َل ُ‬
‫الل الن َ‬ ‫الل َب ْع َض ُه ْم َع َلى َب ْعض﴾‬
‫‪َ ﴿ )3‬ف َّض َل ُ‬
‫‪346‬‬
The ‫اعل ُمؤَ َّخر‬ ِ ‫ َف‬with a Pronoun
Sometimes a ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه ُم َقدَّ م‬is followed by a ‫اعل‬ ِ ‫ َف‬, which has a ‫م َضاف إِ َلی ِه‬
ْ ُ
ِ ِ
pronoun that refers to the ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول به ُم َقدَّ م‬.
‫ َض ِم ْیر‬+ ‫اعل‬
ِ ‫َف‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه ُم َقدَّ م‬ ‫فِ ْعل‬
Look at the example below:
ِ ‫اب َت َلی إِبر‬
‫اه ْی َم َر ُّب ُه‬ َْ ْ
In the example, the ‫اعل‬ ِ ‫ َف‬comprises a pronoun that refers to the
‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه ُم َقدَّ م‬. This is translated using the normal English sentence
order: subject, verb, object. However, the ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬pronoun is
translated in place of the noun it is referring to, and the noun is
translated as a pronoun.
His Lord tested Ibrahim. 
Ibrahim’s Lord tested him. ✓
Exercise 9
Translate the following and write out the tarkib.
‫) ك ََّذ َب النَّبِ َّي َق ْو ُم ُه‬9 ‫) ع ََّذ َب ا ْل َق ْو َم َملِ ُك ُه ْم‬5 ‫) َجا َء ُأ َّم ًة َر ُس ْو ُل َها‬1
‫ت ْاْلَ ْو َْل َد ُأ ُّم ُه ْم‬ ِ ‫) َع َّلم‬10 ‫ف ا ْل َب ْی َت َأ ْه ُل ُه‬ ُ ‫) َي ْع ِر‬6 ‫ت ا ْلبِن َْت ُّأ ُّم َها‬ ِ ‫) نَصر‬2
َ َ َ
‫اء ۏ َق ْو ُم ُه ْم‬ ِ ‫) َقت ََل بع َض ْاْلَ ْنبِی‬11 ‫الل ِع َبا ُد ُه‬ ِ ‫) َأ ْط َع َم ا ْل َو َلدَ َأ ُب ْو ُه‬3
َ َْ َ ‫) َي ْس َتغْف ُر‬7
‫) َوعَدَ ا ْل ُمؤْ مِن ِ ْی َن َر ُّب ُه ْم َجنَّ ًة َو َح ِر ْي ًرا‬12 َ ‫) َي ْرزُ ُق الن‬8
‫َّاس َر ُّب ُه ْم‬ ‫) َس َّم ْت َأ ْح َمدَ َجدَّ ُت ُه‬4
347
Summary
Key Terms
Imperative ‫ ْاْلَ ْم ُر‬Pronoun ‫َض ِم ْیر ج َض َمائِ ُر‬
Third-person imperative ِ ِ‫ْاْلَ ْم ُر ل ِ ْلغَائ‬

‫ب‬ First person ‫ُم َت َك ِّلم‬
Negative imperative ‫الن َّْه ُي‬ Second person ‫ُم َخا َطب‬
Particle for
imperative (‫) َْل‬
negative
‫ف ن َْهي‬
ُ ‫َح ْر‬ Third person ‫غَائِب‬
‫ َألِف‬, ‫ َواو‬or ‫ َياء‬. ‫ف ا ْل ِع َّل ِة‬
ُ ‫َح ْر‬ Hidden pronoun ‫َض ِم ْیر ُم ْستَتِر‬
A ‫ ن ُْون‬which comes after the ‫َض ِم ْی ُر‬
ِ ‫ ا ْلف‬to express the ‫ مرفُوع‬state ‫اب‬ ِ ‫ن ُْو ُن‬
ِ ‫اإلع َْر‬ Visible pronoun ِ ‫َض ِم ْیر َب‬
‫ارز‬
‫َاع ِل‬ ْ َْ
a ‫ ن ُْون‬for the feminine

‫الض ِم ْی ِر‬
َّ ‫ن ُْو ُن‬/ ‫ن ُْو ُن الن ِّْس َو ِة‬ Attached ‫َض ِم ْیر ُمت َِّصل‬
pronoun
(Pronoun to differentiate
between ‫ َخبَر‬and ‫)نَ ْعت‬ ‫َض ِم ْی ُر ا ْل َف ْص ِل‬
Detached ‫َض ِم ْیر ُمنْ َف ِصل‬
Reflexive pronouns ‫ َم ْر ُف ْوع َن ْفس‬Pronouns ‫َض ِم ْیر َم ْر ُف ْوع‬
Reciprocal pronouns ‫ َب ْع ًضا‬+ ‫َب ْعض‬ ‫ َمن ُْص ْوب‬Pronouns ‫َض ِم ْیر َمن ُْص ْوب‬
‫ َم ْج ُر ْور‬Pronouns ‫َض ِم ْیر َم ْج ُر ْور‬
348
Vocabulary
gold ‫ َذ َهب‬another ‫آخ ُر ج ْو َن‬
َ
ِ ‫ر‬
‫اشد ج ْو َن‬ ‫َأل ِ ْیم‬
guided َ painful
‫َر ِج ْیم‬ ِ ‫ج‬
‫ح ْیم‬
rejected Fire of Hell َ
equal ‫ َس َواء‬silk ‫َح ِر ْير‬
silver ‫فِ َّضة‬ good ‫َخ ْیر‬
clear ‫ُمبِ ْین‬ taste ‫َذائِ َقة‬
to climb ‫ َص ِعدَ َي ْص َعدُ ُص ُع ْو ًدا‬to follow ‫اِ َّت َب َع َي َّتبِ ُع اِ ِّت َباعًا‬
to seek protection ‫ عَا َذ َي ُع ْو ُذ ع َْو ًذا‬to give preference ‫آ َث َر ُيؤْ ثِ ُر إِ ْي َث ًارا‬
to test, trial ‫ َفت ََن َي ْفتِ ُن ُفت ُْونًا‬to seek help ‫ان َي ْست َِع ْی ُن ِا ْس ِت َعا َن ًة‬
َ ‫اِ ْس َت َع‬
to speak ‫ ك َََّل ًما‬،‫ َك َّل َم ُي َك ِّل ُم َت ْك ِل ْی ًما‬to backbite ‫َاب اغْتِ َیا ًبا‬
ُ ‫َاب َي ْغت‬
ِ
َ ‫ا ْغت‬
‫ب َل ْع ًبا‬ ِ ‫َأ َقا َم ُي ِق ْی ُم إِ َقا َم ًة‬
to play ُ ‫ب َي ْل َع‬ َ ‫ َلع‬to establish, stay, reside
to curse ‫َل َع َن َي ْل َع ُن َل ْعنًا‬ to command ‫َأ َم َر َي ْأ ُم ُر َأ ْم ًرا‬
to own, control ‫َم َل َك َي ْملِ ُك ُم ْل ًكا‬ to deceive ‫َخدَ َع َي ْخدَ ُع َخدْ عًا‬
to benefit ‫َن َف َع َينْ َف ُع َن ْف ًعا‬ to enter ‫َد َخ َل َيدْ ُخ ُل ُد ُخ ْو ًْل‬
to reach ‫ َو َص َل َي ِص ُل ُو ُص ْو ًْل‬to intercede ‫َش َف َع َي ْش َف ُع َش َفا َع ًة‬
349
350
INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS
AND
EMPHATIC PHRASES
Part 1: Interrogative Pronouns
Part 2: Emphatic Phrases
Summary
351
Part 1: Interrogative Pronouns
An interrogative pronoun is a word used to ask a question.
Where is the boy?
In Arabic, an interrogative sentence is called ‫ اِ ْستِ ْف َهام‬and the
interrogative pronoun is called ‫اْلستِ ْف َها ِم‬
ْ ‫ َأ َدا ُة‬.
Types of Interrogative Pronouns
There are two types of ‫اْلستِ ْف َها ِم‬ ِ
ْ ‫ َأ َدا ُة‬: particle interrogatives, ‫اْلست ْف َها ِم‬
ْ ‫ف‬ ُ ‫ َح ْر‬,
ِ
and noun interrogatives, ‫اْلست ْف َها ِم‬ ِ
ْ ‫ا ْس ُم‬.
‫اْلستِ ْف َها ِم‬
ْ ‫َأ َدا ُة‬
Interrogatives
ْ ‫ف‬ ُ ‫َح ْر‬ ‫اْلستِ ْف َها ِم‬
ْ ‫اس ُم‬
ْ
particle noun
interrogatives interrogatives
Types of Interrogatives
There are two types of questions:
1. Polar questions: questions which can be answered using yes or
no.
Is it hot today?
Yes.
2. Non-Polar questions: questions which cannot be answered
using yes or no. Instead, it requires specific information.
Where are you going?
I am going to the school.
352
‫‪Polar Questions‬‬
‫َح ْر ُف ‪Polar questions are formed by adding an interrogative particle,‬‬
‫‪ِ , at the beginning of the sentence.‬اْل ْستِ ْف َها ِم‬
‫‪َ .‬ه ْل ‪َ and‬أ ‪َ :‬ح ْر ُف ِاْل ْستِ ْف َها ِم ‪There are two‬‬
‫َأ َجا َء زَ ْيد؟‬ ‫َه ْل َجا َء زَ ْيد؟‬ ‫َه ْل ُه َو َقائِم؟‬ ‫َأ ُه َو َقائِم؟‬
‫‪In tarkib, these do not take the place of any slot.‬‬
‫َخبَر‬ ‫ُمبْتَدَ أ‬ ‫استِ ْف َهام‬
‫ف ْ‬‫َح ْر ُ‬
‫َقائِم‬ ‫ُه َو‬ ‫َه ْل‬
‫اْلستِ ْف َها ِم ‪Translation of‬‬ ‫ف ْ‬ ‫اس ِم َّیة ‪َ in a‬ح ْر ُ‬

‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫اْلست ْف َها ِم ‪ُ with a‬ج ْم َلة ْاسم َّیة ‪A‬‬
‫ف ْ‬ ‫‪َ is translated by moving the is/are/was/‬ح ْر ُ‬
‫‪were to the beginning of the sentence.‬‬
‫‪Zaid is standing.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫?‪Is Zaid standing‬‬
‫‪َ )9‬أ ٰهؤُ َْل ِء الت َُّّج ُار ُأ َمنَا ُء؟‬ ‫َه ْل َأن َْت َجائِع؟‬ ‫‪)5‬‬ ‫‪َ )1‬ه ِل ا ْل ِع ْیدُ َغدً ا؟‬
‫‪َ )10‬أ َه ِذ ِه الت ََّماثِ ْی ُل آل ِ َهة؟‬ ‫ح ْیح؟‬ ‫َأجوابِي ص ِ‬
‫َ َ ْ َ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ه ِل ْاْلَ ْج ُر َكبِ ْیر؟‬
‫َجس؟‬ ‫‪َ )11‬أ َه َذا ال َّث ْو ُب ن ِ‬ ‫َه ِل ال َّل َب ُن َخالِص؟‬ ‫‪)7‬‬ ‫اب َأ ْس َو ُد؟‬
‫‪َ )3‬ه ِل ا ْل َب ُ‬
‫الشجاع ب ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ج َب ُال َج ِم ْی َلة؟‬
‫َه ِل ا ْل ِ‬ ‫‪َ )4‬ه ِل ْاْلُم ُة و ِ‬
‫خ ْیل؟‬ ‫‪َ )12‬أ َذل َك َّ‬
‫الر ُج ُل ُّ َ ُ َ‬ ‫‪)8‬‬ ‫احدَ ة؟‬ ‫َّ َ‬
‫‪Change the following sentences into polar questions and translate.‬‬
‫َّاج ِر َأغْن ِ َیا ُء‬
‫‪َ )9‬أ ْو َْل ُد الت ِ‬ ‫َات َجال ِ َسات‬
‫‪ )5‬ا ْل َبن ُ‬ ‫‪ )1‬ا ْل َما ُء َب ِ‬
‫ارد‬
‫‪ )10‬ال ُّط ََّّل ُب ُم ْج َت ِهدُ ْو َن‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ذل ِ َك ا ْل َو َلدُ َصائِم‬ ‫‪ )2‬النَّافِ َذ ُة ُم ْغ َل َقة‬
‫‪ )11‬ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن َصائِ ُم ْو َن‬ ‫الر َّما َن ُة ُح ْل َوة‬ ‫ِ‬

‫‪ )7‬ت ْل َك ُّ‬
‫‪ )3‬ا ْلمع ِّلم ح ِ‬
‫اضر‬ ‫ُ َ ُ َ‬
‫اإل َما ِم عَاقِل‬ ‫‪ )12‬طِ ْف ُل بِن ِ‬
‫ْت ْ ِ‬ ‫‪ِ ْ )8‬‬
‫اإلنَا ُء َم ْم ُل ْوء بِال َّل َب ِن‬ ‫‪ُ )4‬أ ُّم َخالِد َصال ِ َحة‬
‫‪353‬‬
‫اْلستِ ْف َها ِم ‪Translation of‬‬ ‫ف ْ‬ ‫ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة ‪َ in a‬ح ْر ُ‬
‫اْلستِ ْف َها ِم ‪ُ with a‬ج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة ‪A‬‬
‫ف ْ‬ ‫‪َ is translated by adding the following‬ح ْر ُ‬
‫‪words at the beginning of the sentence:‬‬
‫‪Past Tense‬‬ ‫‪Did‬‬ ‫?‪Did you eat the dates‬‬
‫‪Present Habitual Tense‬‬ ‫‪Do‬‬ ‫?‪Do you eat dates‬‬
‫‪Present Continuous Tense‬‬ ‫‪Is / Are‬‬ ‫?‪Are you eating dates‬‬
‫‪Future Tense‬‬ ‫‪Will‬‬ ‫?‪Will you eat dates‬‬
‫‪َ )7‬أ َت ْجزَ ع ُْو َن َع َلی ُم ِص ْی َبة؟‬ ‫َه ْل َتن ِْق ُم ْو َن مِنَّا؟‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫ان؟‬ ‫‪َ )8‬ه ْل ُص ْم َت َش ْه َر َر َم َض َ‬ ‫َه ْل َأ ِذ َن َل َك َأ ُب ْو َك؟‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫لص ََّل ِة؟‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َّاس ل َّ‬ ‫اجت ََم َع الن ُ‬ ‫‪َ )9‬ه ِل ْ‬ ‫َه ْل ن َِس ْی َت الدَّ ْر َس؟‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫ان َو َأ ْول ِ َیا َئ ُه؟‬ ‫‪َ )10‬ه ْل َت َّتبِ ُع ْو َن َّ‬
‫الش ْی َط َ‬ ‫َه ْل َت ْبت َِغ ْي َو ْج َه اللِ؟‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫‪َ )11‬أغ ََس ْل ُت ْم ُو ُج ْو َه ُك ْم َو َأ ْي ِد َي ُك ْم؟‬ ‫َأ ُت ْح ِسن ُْو َن إِ َلی َأ َب َو ْي َك؟‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫‪َ )12‬ه ْل َت ْع ُبدُ ْو َن َأ ْصنَا ًما ِح َج َارةً؟‬ ‫اك ا ْل ُم ْسلِ َم؟‬
‫ان َأ َخ َ‬ ‫َأ َت ْغتَاب ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫‪Note‬‬
‫اْلستِ ْف َها ِم ‪It is common for‬‬
‫‪َ to be used with a negative particle.‬ه ْمزَ ُة ْ‬
‫َأ َْل ُت ْش ُك ُر َ‬
‫الل‬
‫?‪Will you not be thankful to Allah‬‬
‫‪َ )7‬أ َل ْم َينْ َف ْع ُك ْم ِع ْل ُم ُك ْم؟‬ ‫‪َ )1‬أ َْل َن ْش ُك ُر للِ؟‬
‫‪َ )8‬أ َْل َت َخا ُف ْو َن َ‬

‫الل َر َّب ُك ْم؟‬ ‫‪َ )2‬أ َل ْی َس ُ‬
‫الل َغ ُف ْو ًرا؟‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ ِ‬
‫الل َو َر ُس ْو َل ُه؟‬ ‫‪َ )9‬أ َْل ُتطی ُع ْو َن َ‬ ‫‪َ )3‬أ َْل َت ْستَع ْین ْی َن َ‬
‫الل؟‬
‫آن؟‬‫ات ا ْل ُقر ِ‬ ‫‪َ )10‬أما س ِمع َت آي ِ‬ ‫َك؟‬ ‫‪َ )4‬أ َْل َتنْص ِرين ُأ ْخت ِ‬
‫ْ‬ ‫َ َ ْ َ‬ ‫ُ ْ َ‬
‫الل فِ ْرع َْو َن َو ُجن ُْو َد ُه؟‬ ‫ِ ِ‬
‫‪َ )11‬أ َل ْم ُي ْهلك ُ‬ ‫‪َ )5‬أ َْل َت ْع َم ُل ْو َن ل ِ ْْل ِخ َر ِة؟‬
‫‪َ )12‬أ َلم َت ْفه ِمي ٰه ِذ ِه ْاْلي َة مِن ا ْل ُقر ِ‬
‫آن؟‬ ‫َ َ ْ‬ ‫ْ َ‬ ‫َاب اللِ؟‬ ‫ت كت َ‬
‫‪َ )6‬أما َقر ْأ َ ِ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫‪354‬‬
Answering Polar Questions and Statements
Polar questions are answered in either the affirmative or negative.
Are you hungry?
Yes, I am. No, I am not
Similarly, a statement can be affirmed or rejected.
You are late.
Yes, I am. No, I am not
In Arabic, particles used to reply to a question or affirm a
statement are called ‫ َأ ْح ُر ُف ا ْل َج َوا ِب‬.
Affirmation
ِ ‫ف ا ْل َج َو‬
The following ‫اب‬ ُ ‫ َأ ْح ُر‬are used for affirmation:
1. ‫َن َع ْم‬
2. ‫َأ َج ْل‬
3. ‫َب َلی‬
‫َن َع ْم‬
The particle ‫( َن َع ْم‬yes) is used to reply affirmatively to a question.
‫ َص َّل ْی ُت‬،‫َه ْل َص َّل ْی َت؟ َن َع ْم‬
Have you performed salah? Yes, I have performed salah.
‫َأ َج ْل‬
The particle ‫( َأ َج ْل‬yes) is used to affirm a statement, not a question.
For example, if someone were to say:
‫َجا َء ال ُّط ََّّل ُب‬
The students came.
To affirm this and show your agreement, you would say
‫َأ َج ْل‬
Yes (they have).
‫َب َلی‬
The particle ‫( َب َلی‬certainly) is used to reply affirmatively to a
negative question.
For example, if someone were to ask:
355
‫َأ َْل ُت َص ِّل ْي؟‬
‫?‪Do you not pray‬‬
‫‪َ .‬ن َع ْم ‪َ , not‬ب َلی ‪To affirm this, you would say‬‬
‫َب َلی‬ ‫َن ْع َم‬
‫‪Certainly (I do pray).‬‬ ‫‪Yes (I do not pray).‬‬
‫‪َ )12‬أ َت ْق َر ُء ْو َن آ َي َة ا ْل ُك ْر ِس ِّي َق ْب َل الن َّْومِ؟ َن َع ْم‪َ ،‬ن ْق َر ُأ َها َق ْب َل‬ ‫الل َر َّبنَا َو َر َّب ُك ْم؟ َب َلی‪ ،‬إِ َّن ُه َر ُّبنَا‬‫‪َ )1‬أ َل ْی َس ُ‬
‫الن َّْو ِم‬ ‫اجتِ َها ًدا‬ ‫‪َ )2‬أ َْل َي ْجت َِهدْ َن؟ َب َلی‪َ ،‬ي ْجت َِهدْ َن ْ‬
‫الل ل ِ ُذن ُْوبِ ُك ْم؟ َب َلی‪ ،‬ن َْس َتغ ِْف ُر ُه ل ِ ُذن ُْوبِنَا‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )13‬أ َْل َت ْس َتغْف ُر ْو َن َ‬ ‫الل؟ َب َلی َأ ْش ُك ُر ُه َع َلی نِ َع ِم ِه‬ ‫‪َ )3‬أ َْل َت ْش ُك ُر َ‬
‫ت؟ َب َلی‪َ ،‬نن ُْص ُر َها‬ ‫ال ا ْلبی ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )14‬أ َْل َتن ُْص َران ُأ َّم ُك َما في َأع َْم ِ َ ْ‬ ‫‪َ )4‬أ َْل َت َّتبِ ُع ْو َن َر ُس ْو َل اللِ ﷺ؟ َب َلی‪َ ،‬أ َّتبِ ُع ُه‬
‫ت‬‫و َأبانَا فِي ا ْلبی ِ‬ ‫ت ٰه َذا الدَّ ْر َس؟ َب َلی‪َ ،‬ل َقدْ َف ِه ْم ُت ُه‬ ‫‪َ )5‬أما َف ِهم ِ‬
‫َْ‬ ‫َ َ‬ ‫َ ْ‬
‫‪َ )15‬أ َلم ُتؤْ مِنَا بِاللِ وا ْلیو ِم ْاْل ِخ ِر؟ ب َلی‪ُ ،‬نؤْ مِن بِاللِ‬ ‫الل ال َّظال ِ ِم ْی َن؟ َب َلی‪َ ،‬قدْ َأ ْه َل َك ُه ْم‬ ‫ِ ِ‬
‫ُ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ َْ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫‪َ )6‬أ َل ْم ُي ْهلك ُ‬
‫ورسول ِ ِه ﷺ وا ْلیو ِم ِ‬
‫اْلخ ِر‬ ‫الل َو َر ُس ْو َل ُه ﷺ؟ َب َلی‪ُ ،‬أ ِح ُّب ُه َما كَثِ ْی ًرا‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َ َْ‬ ‫ََ ُ ْ‬ ‫ب َ‬ ‫‪َ )7‬أ َْل ُتح ُّ‬
‫الس َو َر ا ْل َع ْش َر؟ َب َلی‪َ ،‬ح ِف ْظت َُها َق ْب َل‬ ‫ِ ِ ِِ‬
‫‪َ )16‬أ َما َحف ْظت ٰهذه ُّ‬ ‫ان؟ َب َلی‪ ،‬ن َُص ْو ُم َش ْه َر َر َم َض َ‬
‫ان‬ ‫‪َ )8‬أ َْل َت ُص ْم َن َر َم َض َ‬
‫َسن ََوات كَثِ ْی َرة‬ ‫ض؟ َن َع ْم‪ ،‬ن َْح ُن َم َع ُه‬ ‫‪َ )9‬أ َأ ْنت ُْم َم َع َجدِّ ك ُُم ا ْل َم ِر ْي ِ‬
‫ج ِد؟ َن َع ْم‪،‬‬ ‫اء فِي ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬ ‫آن؟ ب َلی‪َ ،‬نعت َِصم ِب ِه ‪ )17‬ه ْل ص َّلیتُم ص ََّل َة ا ْل ِع َش ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ْ‬ ‫َ ْ ْ َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ْ ُ‬ ‫‪َ )10‬أ َْل َت ْعتَص ُم ْو َن ِب َح ْب ِل الل ا ْل ُق ْر َ‬
‫ج ِدنَا‬ ‫ب فِي َم ْس ِ‬ ‫َاها َو َص ََّل َة ا ْل َمغ ِْر ِ‬ ‫َص َّل ْین َ‬ ‫الل َو َر ُس ْو َل ُه‬ ‫ِ‬
‫الل َو َر ُس ْو َل ُه؟ َن َع ْم‪ُ ،‬أح ُّب َ‬ ‫‪َ )11‬أ ُتح ُّب َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫كَث ْی ًرا‬
‫‪356‬‬
‫‪Negation‬‬
‫ف ا ْل َج َو ِ‬
‫اب ‪The following‬‬ ‫‪َ are used for negation:‬أ ْح ُر ُ‬
‫َْل ‪1.‬‬
‫ك َََّّل ‪2.‬‬
‫َْل‬
‫‪َْ (no) is used to reply negatively.‬ل ‪The particle‬‬
‫اس َت ْی َق َظ َحتَّی ْاْل ِن‬
‫اس َت ْی َق َظ ا ْل َو َلدُ ؟ َْل! َما ْ‬
‫َه ِل ْ‬
‫‪Has the child woken up? No, he has not woken yet.‬‬
‫ك َََّّل‬
‫‪ is also used to reply negatively. However, this is‬ك َََّّل ‪The particle‬‬
‫‪َْ . It is translated as never, certainly not, etc.‬ل ‪more emphatic than‬‬
‫َه ْل ك ََذ ْب َت؟ ك َََّّل‪َ ،‬ما ك ََذ ْب ُت‬
‫‪Did you lie? I certainly did not lie.‬‬
‫ان؟ َْل‪َ ،‬لسنَا َظالِمی ِن ب ْل ع ِ‬
‫َاد َل ْی ِن‬ ‫‪َ )1‬أ َأ ْنتُما َظالِم ِ‬
‫َْ َ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ‬
‫‪َ )2‬ه ْل َت ْظلِ ُم ْو َن ا ْل ُف َق َرا َء؟ ك َََّّل‪َْ ،‬ل َن ْظلِ ُم ا ْل ُف َق َرا َء َأ َبدً ا‬
‫‪َ )3‬أ َتعبدُ و َن آلِه ًة َغیر اللِ؟ ك َََّّل‪َ ،‬لن َّنعبدَ َأحدً ا َغیر اللِ‬
‫َْ‬ ‫ُْ َ‬ ‫َ َْ‬ ‫ُْ ْ‬
‫َخدَ ُع ُك ْم َو َْل َأ َحدً ا َغ ْی َرك ُْم‬
‫‪َ )4‬ه ْل َت ْخدَ ع ُْو َننَا؟ ك َََّّل‪َْ ،‬ل ن ْ‬
‫‪َ )5‬ه ْل لِل َّظال ِ ِم ْی َن مِ ْن َأن َْصار؟ َْل‪َْ ،‬ل َي ُك ْو ُن َل ُه ْم مِ ْن َأن َْصار‬
‫اج مِ ْن ع ََر َفةَ؟ َْل‪َ ،‬ل ْم َي ْر ِج ُع ْوا َح َّتی ْاْل ِن‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ه ْل َر َج َع ا ْل ُح َّج ُ‬
‫َان فِي ا ْل َح ِد ْي َق ِة َشاة‬
‫َان فِي ا ْل َح ِد ْي َق ِة ِح َمار؟ َْل‪ ،‬ك َ‬
‫‪َ )7‬أك َ‬
‫‪َ )8‬ه ْل ُي ْظ َل ُم ْو َن َي ْو َم ا ْل ِق َیا َم ِة مِ ْن ن َِق ْیر؟ َْل‪َْ ،‬ل ُي ْظ َل ُم ْو َن ن َِق ْی ًرا‬

‫‪َ )9‬ه ْل ُت َسافِ ُر إِ َلى تِ ْل َك ا ْل َق ْر َي ِة ا ْل َب ِع ْیدَ ِة؟ َْل‪ُ ،‬أ َسافِ ُر إِ َلى تِ ْل َك ا ْل َق ْر َي ِة ا ْل َق ِر ْي َب ِة‬
‫ت َجدَّ تِ ْي َم َسا ًء‬

‫ت َخا َلتِي صباحا وإِ َلى بی ِ‬
‫َْ‬ ‫ْ َ َ ً َ‬
‫ك مساء؟ َْل‪َ ،‬أ ْذ َهب إِ َلى بی ِ‬
‫َْ‬ ‫ُ‬
‫ِ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )10‬ه ْل َت ْذ َهبِ ْی َن إِ َلى َب ْیت َخا َلت َ َ ً‬
‫‪357‬‬
Non-Polar Questions
There are two types of non-polar questions:
1. Non-polar questions with a ‫اْلستِ ْف َها ِم‬
ْ ‫ف‬ ُ ‫َح ْر‬
ِ
2. Non-polar questions with an ‫اْلست ْف َها ِم‬
ْ ‫اس ُم‬ ْ
Non-Polar Questions with ‫اْلستِ ْف َها ِم‬ ْ ‫ف‬ُ ‫َح ْر‬
ِ
The ‫اْلست ْف َها ِم‬ ُ ‫ َح ْر‬of ‫ َه ْل‬and ‫ َأ‬can also be used for non-polar questions.
ْ ‫ف‬
ْ ‫َه ْمزَ ُة‬
The focal point of a question with ‫اْلستِ ْف َها ِم‬ ْ ‫ َه ْمزَ ُة‬must come
immediately after ‫ َأ‬. For example, if the question is regarding the
‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬, the ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬must be brought after the ‫ َأ‬.
ِ ‫َأزَ ْيدً ا َر َأ ْي َت َأ ْم‬
‫س؟‬
Did you see Zaid yesterday?
Was it Zaid who you saw yesterday?
In this same example, if the focal point were the ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه‬, the ‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه‬
would be brought immediately after the ‫اْلستِ ْف َها ِم‬
ْ ‫ َه ْمزَ ُة‬.
‫س َر َأ ْي َت زَ ْيدً ا؟‬
ِ ‫َأ َأ ْم‬
Did you see Zaid yesterday?
Was it yesterday you saw Zaid?
This focal point may also have a ‫ َم ْع ُط ْوف‬, which will follow the ‫َح ْر ُف‬
‫ َع ْطف‬of ‫ َأ ْم‬and come separated from its ‫ َم ْع ُط ْوف َع َل ْی ِه‬.
‫َأزَ ْيدً ا َر َأ ْي َت َأ ْم َخالِدً ا؟‬
Did you see Zaid or Khalid?
Was it Zaid who you saw, or Khalid?
It would not be correct to phrase these as follows:
ِ
 ‫َأ َر َأ ْي َت زَ ًيدً ا َأ ْم َخالدً ا؟‬
ِ
 ‫َأزَ ْيدً ا َأ ْم َخالدً ا َر َأ ْي َت؟‬
‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬... )‫(ت‬ ِ ‫فِعل و َف‬
َ ‫اعل‬ َ ْ ... ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ ‫اْلستِ ْف َها ِم‬
‫َخالِدً ا؟‬ ‫َأ ْم‬ ‫َر َأ ْي َت‬ ‫زَ ْيدً ا‬ ‫َأ‬

‫یه‬ ْ َْ
358
‫‪Notes‬‬
‫‪َ , it is no longer a polar question.‬أ ْم ‪َ comes with‬ه ْمزَ ُة ِاْل ْستِ ْف َها ِم ‪1. When‬‬
‫‪َ can be understood from the context or tone, and‬ح ْر ُف ْاْل ْستِ ْف َها ِم ‪2. The‬‬
‫‪therefore omitted.‬‬
‫زَ يد فِي ا ْلب ِ‬
‫یت َأ ْم ع َْمرو؟‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ْ‬
‫?‪Is Zaid in the house or Amr‬‬
‫‪ to‬آ ‪َ , it will change to‬ا ْل ‪َ is used before a word with an‬أ ‪3. If the‬‬
‫‪make pronunciation easier.‬‬
‫لل َخ ْیر‬ ‫َأ ُ‬
‫‪+‬الل َخ ْیر ‪ ‬آ ُ‬
‫اْلستِ ْف َها ِم ‪4. The‬‬
‫ف ا ْل َع ْطف ‪َ is brought before the‬ه ْمزَ ُة ْ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫‪َ , unlike all other‬ح ْر ُ‬
‫ف ‪interrogatives which come after the‬‬ ‫ف ا ْلع ْط ِ‬
‫‪َ .‬ح ْر ُ َ‬
‫َأ َف َأن َْت َذ ِ‬ ‫اهب‬‫َفه ْل َأن َْت َذ ِ‬
‫اهب‬ ‫َ‬
‫ت ا ْل ُك ْو َب َأ ْم ع ََس ًَّل؟‬ ‫ل َ‬‫‪َ )8‬أ َل َبنًا َم َ ْ‬ ‫‪َ )1‬أ َغ ْی َر اللِ َت ْع ُبدُ ْو َن؟‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )9‬م َسا ًء َو َص َل ْاْلَم ْی ُر َأ ْم َص َب ً‬
‫احا؟‬ ‫َأ َشا ًة َذ َب ُح ْوا َأ ْم َب َق َرةً؟‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫الل ا ْل ُمت َِّق ْی َن َأ ِم ْاْل ِخ َرةَ؟‬
‫‪ )10‬آلدُّ ْن َیا َوعَدَ ُ‬ ‫ك؟‬ ‫َوض َئ ًة َت ْقرئِین كِتَاب ِ‬
‫َ ْ َ َ‬ ‫َأ ُمت ِّ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫‪َ )11‬أمنْصوبا ي ُكو ُن ا ْل َف ِ‬
‫اع ُل َأ ْم َم ْر ُف ْوعًا؟‬ ‫َان َخالِد َأ ْم َش ْی ًخا؟‬ ‫َأ َشا ًّبا ك َ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫َ ُ ًْ َ ْ‬
‫‪ )12‬ا ْل َب ِ‬
‫ار َح َة َبلَغَ الت َُّّج ُار َأ ْم َص َب َ‬
‫اح ا ْل َی ْومِ؟‬ ‫اِ ْحتِ َسا ًبا َت ْعت َِم ُر ْو َن َأ ْم ِر َيا ًء؟‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫‪َ )13‬أفِي ا ْلح ِدي َق ِة َل ِعب ْاْلَو َْلد َأم فِي ا ْلبی ِ‬ ‫الر ُج ُل َأ ْم ك َِر ْيم؟‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ت؟‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫َ ْ ُ ْ‬ ‫َ ْ‬ ‫َأ َبخیل َه َذا َّ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫‪َ )14‬أ ُأ ْس ُب ْوعًا َلبِ َث ْاْلُ ْستَا ُذ فِي ٰذل ِ َك ا ْل َب َل ِد َأ ْم َش ْه ًرا؟‬ ‫ت َأ ْم مِا َئ َت ْی ِن؟‬
‫مِا َئ َة َص ْف َحة َق َر ْأ َ‬ ‫‪)7‬‬
‫‪َ to the following sentences.‬م ْع ُط ْوف ‪Add a‬‬
‫ت َأ ْم ‪ .......‬؟‬ ‫‪َ )4‬أ َص َب ً‬
‫احا َسا َف ْر َ‬ ‫‪َ )1‬أ َب ِع ْیدَ ة ا ْل َق ْر َي ُة َأ ْم ‪.....‬؟‬
‫َان زَ ْيد َأ ْم ‪ .......‬؟‬ ‫‪َ )5‬أ ُم ْجت َِهدً ا ك َ‬ ‫‪ )2‬آ ْلباب َت ْفت ِ‬
‫َح ْی َن َأ ِم ‪ .......‬؟‬ ‫َ َ‬
‫َب َو َض ْع َت ا ْل َح ِق ْی َب َة َأ ْم َع َلى ‪ .......‬؟‬
‫‪َ )6‬أ َع َلى ا ْل َم ْكت ِ‬ ‫َّاس َأ ْم ‪.....‬؟‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ )3‬ا ْل َی ْو َم َي ْجتَم ُع الن ُ‬
‫‪359‬‬
Non-Polar Questions with ‫اْلستِ ْف َها ِم‬ ْ ‫َأ ْس َما ُء‬
There are eight ‫اْلستِ ْف َهام‬
ْ ‫ َأ ْس َما ُء‬:
1. ‫َم ْن‬
2. ‫ َما‬and ‫َما َذا‬
3. ‫َأ ْي َن‬
4. ‫َمتَی‬
5. ‫ف‬ َ ‫َك ْی‬
6. ‫َأنَّی‬
7. ‫ك َْم‬
8. ‫َأ ُّي‬
‫ َم ْن‬and ‫َم ْن َذا‬
The interrogatives ‫ َم ْن‬and ‫ َم ْن َذا‬are translated as who.
‫َم ْن َر ُّب َك؟‬
Who is your Lord?
The Tarkib of ‫اْلستِ ْف َها ِم‬ْ ‫َأ ْس َما ُء‬
ِ
In tarkib, the ‫اْلست ْف َها ِم‬ ْ ‫ َأ ْس َما ُء‬takes the place of a slot in the sentence,
unlike the ‫اْلستِ ْف َها ِم‬
ْ ‫ َح ْر َفا‬.
Its grammatical slot depends on the word that it is replacing. For
example, if the answer to the ‫ ْاستِ ْف َهام‬is the ‫ َخ َبر‬, the ‫ ْاستِ ْف َهام‬will also be
‫ َخ َبر‬.
Look at the example below.
Question Answer
‫َم ْن َخالِد؟‬ ‫َخالِد َص ِد ْي ِق ْي‬
Who is Khalid? Khalid is my friend.
ِ ِ
Because the ‫ ْاس ُم اْل ْست ْف َها ِم‬is replaced by a ‫ َخ َبر‬, it will be the ‫ َخ َبر‬in the
question.
‫َخالِد‬ ‫َم ْن‬
360
‫اس ِم َّیة ‪َ in a‬م ْن‬‫ُج ْم َلة ْ‬
‫‪َ is either:‬م ْن ‪ُ , the word‬ج ْم َلة ْاس ِم َّیة ‪In a‬‬
‫‪ِ after it.‬ش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َلة ‪ word or‬نَكِ َرة ‪ُ if there is a‬م ْبتَدَ أ ‪1.‬‬
‫َم ْن َقائِم؟‬ ‫من فِي ا ْلبی ِ‬
‫ت؟‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫َ ْ‬
‫?‪Who is standing‬‬ ‫?‪Who is in the house‬‬
‫َخبَر‬ ‫ُمبْتَدَ أ‬ ‫َخبَر‬ ‫ُمبْتَدَ أ‬
‫َقائِم‬ ‫َم ْن‬ ‫فِي ا ْلبی ِ‬

‫ت‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫َم ْن‬
‫‪َ word after it.‬م ْع ِر َفة ‪َ if there is a‬خ َبر ُم َقدَّ م ‪2.‬‬
‫َم ْن َخالِد؟‬
‫?‪Who is Khalid‬‬
‫ُمبْتَدَ أ ُمؤَ َّخر‬ ‫َخبَر ُم َقدَّ م‬
‫َخالِد‬ ‫َم ْن‬

‫‪َ .‬م ْن ‪The following table summarises the use of‬‬
‫اس ِم َّیة ‪َ in a‬م ْن‬
‫‪ word‬نَكِ َرة ‪Followed by a‬‬ ‫ِشبْ ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة ‪Followed by a‬‬ ‫‪َ word‬م ْع ِر َفة ‪Followed by a‬‬
‫َم ْن َقائِم؟‬ ‫من فِي ا ْلبی ِ‬

‫ت؟‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫َ ْ‬ ‫َم ْن َخالِد؟‬
‫ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬ ‫َخ َبر ُم َقدَّ م‬
‫‪َ )16‬م ِن ا ْل َم ْق ُب ْو ُل ْو َن؟‬ ‫‪َ )11‬م ْن ُض ُی ْو ُفنَا؟‬ ‫‪َ )6‬م ْن َأ ُخ ْو َها؟‬ ‫‪َ )1‬م ِن ا ْل ُهدَ اةُ؟‬
‫‪َ )17‬م ِن ا ْل َم َساكِ ْی ُن؟‬ ‫‪ )12‬من ك ِ‬
‫َاذ ُب ْو َن؟‬ ‫َ ْ‬
‫‪ )7‬من َف ِ‬
‫اس ُق ْو َن؟‬ ‫َ ْ‬ ‫‪َ )2‬م ْن َو َلدُ ِك؟‬
‫‪َ )18‬م ْن ُم َع ِّل ُم ْو ُه َما؟‬ ‫‪َ )13‬م ْن َع َلی ُهدً ی؟‬ ‫‪َ )8‬م ْن ُأ ْستَا ُذ ُه ْم؟‬ ‫‪َ )3‬م ْن إِ ٰل ُه ُك ْم؟‬
‫ف ا ْل َب ِ‬
‫اب؟‬ ‫‪َ )19‬م ْن َخ ْل َ‬ ‫‪َ )14‬م ِن ا ْل ُم ْهتَدُ ْو َن؟‬ ‫الش َهدَ ا ُء؟‬‫‪َ )9‬م ِن ُّ‬ ‫‪َ )4‬م ْن عَدُ ُّو ُه؟‬
‫‪َ )20‬م ِن ا ْل ُم ْجت َِهدُ ْون؟‬ ‫‪َ )15‬م ِن ا ْل ُمنَافِ ُق ْو َن؟‬ ‫‪َ )10‬م ْن مِ ْن َم َّك َة؟‬ ‫‪َ )5‬م ْن َم َع ُك َما؟‬
‫‪361‬‬
‫ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة ‪َ in a‬م ْن‬
‫‪َ .‬م ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه ُم َقدَّ م ‪َ becomes the‬م ْن ‪ُ , the word‬ج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة ‪In a‬‬
‫َم ْن َر َأ ْي َت؟‬
‫?‪Who did you see‬‬
‫(ت)‬ ‫فِعل و َف ِ‬
‫اعل َ‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه ُم َقدَّ م‬
‫ْ َ‬
‫َر َأ ْي َت؟‬ ‫َم ْن‬
‫آن إِ ْي َمانًا؟‬
‫‪َ )10‬م ْن زَ ا َد ا ْل ُق ْر ُ‬ ‫‪َ )7‬م ْن ع ََّذ َب فِ ْرع َْو ُن؟‬ ‫‪ )4‬من ُت ِ‬
‫ح ُّب ْو َن؟‬ ‫َ ْ‬ ‫َخدَ ُع؟‬ ‫‪َ )1‬م ْن ن ْ‬
‫الس ْو ِق؟‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )11‬م ْن َر َأ ْيت ُْم في ُّ‬ ‫‪َ )8‬م ْن ُت ْش ِرك ُْو َن بِاللِ؟‬ ‫‪َ )5‬م ْن َأ ْط َع ْمت ُْم؟‬ ‫‪َ )2‬م ْن ن َِس ْیت ُْم؟‬
‫‪َ )12‬م ْن َأ ْع َطی َّ‬

‫الر ُج ُل َما ًء؟‬ ‫الل ا ْل َجنَّةَ؟‬
‫‪َ )9‬م ْن َوعَدَ ُ‬ ‫‪َ )6‬م ْن َأن َْذ َر ْاْلَ ْنبِ َیا ُء؟‬ ‫‪َ )3‬م ْن َت ْل َعن ُْو َن؟‬
‫‪َ in a Phrase‬م ْن‬

‫‪ُ . This is translated as whose.‬م َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪َ becomes the‬م ْن ‪In a phrase,‬‬
‫َاب َم ْن ٰه َذا؟‬ ‫ِ‬
‫كت ُ‬
‫?‪Whose book is this‬‬
‫ٰه َذا‬ ‫َم ْن‬ ‫َاب‬ ‫ِ‬

‫كت ُ‬
‫‪ُ )9‬خ ْط َب َة َم ْن َس ِم ْعت َُما؟‬ ‫َأ ْو َْل ُد َم ْن َأ ْنت ُْم؟‬ ‫‪)5‬‬ ‫‪َ )1‬ع ْبدُ َم ْن َأن َ‬
‫ْت؟‬
‫‪َ )10‬ح ِق ْی َب َة َم ْن َت ْح ِم ََّل ِن؟‬ ‫ِد ْي َن َم ْن َت َّتبِ ُع ْو َن؟‬ ‫‪)6‬‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ب ْی َت َم ْن َر َأ ْي َت؟‬
‫‪ُ )11‬د ُر ْو َس َم ْن َت ْح ُض ِر ْي َن؟‬ ‫َم َال َم ْن ُت ْس ِرفِ ْی َن؟‬ ‫‪)7‬‬ ‫‪ُ )3‬أ ْخ ُت َم ْن ٰه ِذ ِه؟‬
‫ل ُتما بِا ْلم ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫اء؟‬ ‫َ‬ ‫‪ )12‬إِنَا َء َم ْن َم َ ْ َ‬ ‫ت؟‬ ‫َاب َم ْن َق َر ْأ َ‬ ‫كت َ‬ ‫‪)8‬‬ ‫‪َ )4‬ت ْم َر َة َم ْن َأ َك ْل َت؟‬
‫‪362‬‬
‫َما َذا ‪َ and‬ما‬
‫‪َ are translated as what.‬ما َذا ‪َ and‬ما ‪The interrogatives‬‬
‫اس ِم َّیة ‪َ in a‬ما َذا ‪َ and‬ما‬ ‫ُج ْم َلة ْ‬
‫‪َ .‬م ْن ‪َ will follow the same rules as‬ما َذا ‪َ and‬ما ‪ُ , the words‬ج ْم َلة ْاس ِم َّیة ‪In a‬‬
‫‪It will either be:‬‬
‫‪ِ after it.‬ش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة ‪ُ if there is a‬م ْبتَدَ أ ‪1.‬‬
‫ما فِي ا ْلبی ِ‬
‫ت؟‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫َ‬
‫?‪What is in the house‬‬
‫فِي ا ْلبی ِ‬
‫ت‬ ‫َما‬
‫َْ‬
‫‪َ word after it.‬م ْع ِر َفة ‪َ if there is a‬خ َبر ُم َقدَّ م ‪2.‬‬
‫َما ٰه َذا؟‬
‫?‪What is this‬‬
‫ٰه َذا‬ ‫َما‬

‫‪َ .‬ما ‪The following table summarises the use of‬‬
‫اس ِم َّیة ‪َ in a‬ما‬
‫ِشبْ ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة ‪Followed by a‬‬ ‫‪َ word‬م ْع ِر َفة ‪Followed by a‬‬
‫ما فِي ا ْلبی ِ‬
‫ت؟‬ ‫َما ٰه َذا؟‬
‫َْ‬ ‫َ‬
‫س؟‬ ‫‪َ )9‬ما َق ْب َل ٰذل ِ َك الدَّ ْر ِ‬ ‫َما َت ْح َت ا ْل َب ْح ِر؟‬ ‫‪)5‬‬ ‫‪َ )1‬ما ُه َو؟‬
‫‪َ )10‬ما َح ْو َل ٰه ِذ ِه الت ََّماثِ ْیلِ؟‬ ‫هذ ِه ْاْلَ ْش َیا ُء؟‬ ‫ما ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ما َم َع ال َّث َم ِر؟‬
‫ف ٰه َذا ا ْل َب َل ِد ا ْل َب ِع ْی ِد؟‬
‫‪َ )11‬ما َخ ْل َ‬ ‫َما َب ْعدَ ٰه ِذ ِه ا ْل ِفت َِن؟‬ ‫‪)7‬‬ ‫‪َ )3‬ما َف ْو َق ا ْلبِئ ِْر؟‬
‫اب ا ْل ُم ْغ َل ِق؟‬ ‫‪َ )12‬ما ِعنْدَ ٰذل ِ َك ا ْل َب ِ‬ ‫ما فِي ٰه ِذ ِه ْاْل ِ‬
‫يات؟‬ ‫َ‬ ‫‪)8‬‬ ‫الس ْو ِق؟‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )4‬ما م َن ُّ‬
‫‪363‬‬
‫ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة ‪َ in a‬ما َذا ‪َ and‬ما‬
‫‪َ .‬م ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه ُم َقدَّ م ‪َ become the‬ما َذا ‪َ and‬ما ‪ُ , the words‬ج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة ‪In a‬‬
‫َما َر َأ ْي َت؟‬
‫?‪What did you see‬‬
‫ْ َ‬
‫َر َأ ْي َت؟‬ ‫َما‬
‫‪َ )11‬ما َت ْق َرئِ ْی َن؟‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ما َذا َأ َك ْلت ُْم؟‬ ‫‪َ )1‬ما َت ْب َتغ ُْو َن؟‬
‫‪َ )12‬ما َت ْس َأ ُل َ‬
‫الل؟‬ ‫‪َ )7‬ما َت ْش َر ُب؟‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ما َي ْبن ُْو َن؟‬
‫‪َ )13‬ما َذا َح َّر َم َر ُّب ُك ْم؟‬ ‫‪َ )8‬ما َذا َت َخ ُ‬
‫اف؟‬ ‫‪َ )3‬ما َتغ ِْس ُل؟‬
‫‪ )14‬ما َذا َتت ِ‬
‫َّخ ُذ ْو َن إِ ٰل ًها؟‬ ‫‪َ )9‬ما َت ْس َم ُع ْو َن؟‬ ‫‪َ )4‬ما َوعَدَ َك؟‬
‫َ‬
‫‪َ )15‬ما َذا َخ َل َق ْت ٰه ِذ ِه الت ََّماثِ ْی ُل؟‬ ‫‪َ )10‬ما َأ ْع َط ْی َت َأ َب َ‬
‫اك؟‬ ‫‪َ )5‬ما َذا َت ْكت ُ‬
‫ُب؟‬
‫‪Note‬‬
‫اْلستِ ْف َها ِم ‪َ can be brought between the‬ض ِم ْی ُر َف ْصل ‪A‬‬
‫اس ُم ْ‬
‫‪َ , and the‬ما ‪َ or‬م ْن ‪ْ of‬‬
‫‪word after it.‬‬
‫َخ َبر‬ ‫َض ِم ْی ُر ا ْل َف ْص ِل‬ ‫ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬
‫ون‬ ‫ا ْل ِ‬
‫فاس ُق َ‬ ‫ُه ُم‬ ‫َم ْن‬
‫‪ )9‬من ُهما ا ْلم ْفلِح ِ‬
‫ان؟‬ ‫‪ )5‬ما ِهي ا ْلج ِ‬
‫ح ْی ُم؟‬ ‫َّقوی؟‬
‫َ ْ َ ُ َ‬ ‫َ َ َ‬ ‫‪َ )1‬ما ُه َو الت َ‬
‫‪ )10‬من ُهن ا ْل َخ ِ‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ما ُه َو ا ْل ِع ْل ُم؟‬
‫ات؟‬
‫اس َر ُ‬ ‫َ ْ َّ‬ ‫‪َ )6‬م ْن ُه َو ا ْل َّو َّه ُ‬
‫اب؟‬
‫اشدُ ْو َن؟‬ ‫‪ )11‬من ُهم الر ِ‬ ‫‪َ )7‬م ْن ِه َي ا ْل ُم َع ِّل َمةُ؟‬ ‫اب؟‬ ‫‪َ )3‬م ْن ُه َو َّ‬
‫َ ْ ُ َّ‬ ‫الش ُّ‬
‫‪َ )12‬م ْن ُه ُم ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن؟‬ ‫‪َ )8‬م ْن ُه ُم ال َّظال ِ ُم ْو َن؟‬ ‫‪َ )4‬م ْن ُه ُم ا ْل َیتَا َمی؟‬
‫‪364‬‬
‫َأ ْي َن‬
‫‪َ is translated as where.‬أ ْي َن ‪The interrogative‬‬
‫اس ِم َّیة ‪َ in a‬أ ْي َن‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪َ .‬خ َبر ُم َقدَّ م ‪َ becomes the‬أ ْي َن ‪ُ , the word‬ج ْم َلة ْاسم َّیة ‪In a‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫َأ ْي َن ا ْلكت ُ‬
‫َاب؟‬
‫?‪Where is the book‬‬
‫ِ‬ ‫َأ ْي َن‬
‫ا ْلكت ُ‬
‫َاب‬
‫‪َ )10‬أ ْي َن ْاْلنِ َیةُ؟‬ ‫‪َ )7‬أ ْي َن الدِّ َي ُار؟‬ ‫‪َ )4‬أين ا ْل ِ‬
‫ح َم ُار؟‬ ‫ْ َ‬ ‫‪َ )1‬أ ْي َن ا ْل َب ْح ُر؟‬
‫‪َ )11‬أ ْي َن ُّ‬

‫الر َّما َنةُ؟‬ ‫‪َ )8‬أ ْي َن الدَّ نَانِ ْی ُر؟‬ ‫‪َ )5‬أ ْي َن ا ْل ُخ ْبزُ ؟‬ ‫‪َ )2‬أ ْي َن ا ْلبِئ ُْر؟‬
‫الس َكاكِ ْی ُن؟‬
‫‪َ )12‬أ ْي َن َّ‬ ‫‪َ )9‬أ ْي َن الدَّ ُم؟‬ ‫‪َ )6‬أ ْي َن َع ْق ُل َك؟‬ ‫‪َ )3‬أ ْي َن ال ِّث َی ُ‬
‫اب؟‬
‫ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة ‪َ in a‬أ ْي َن‬

‫‪َ .‬م ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه ُم َقدَّ م ‪َ becomes the‬أ ْي َن ‪ُ , the word‬ج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة ‪In a‬‬
‫َأ ْي َن َت ْذ َه ُ‬
‫ب؟‬
‫?‪Where will you go‬‬
‫اعل ( َأن َْت)‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِیْ ِه ُم َقدَّ م‬
‫ْ َ‬
‫َت ْذ َه ُ‬
‫ب‬ ‫َأ ْي َن‬
‫اب؟‬ ‫‪َ )9‬أ ْي َن َك َت ْب َت ا ْل َج َو َ‬ ‫‪َ )5‬أ ْي َن َت ْجت َِم ُع ْو َن َغدً ا؟‬ ‫الر ُج ُل؟‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )1‬أ ْي َن ُقت َل َّ‬
‫‪َ )10‬أين ُتن ِْف َق ِ‬
‫ان َأ ْم َوا َل ُك َما؟‬ ‫‪َ )6‬أ ْي َن َأ َقا َم ال ُّط ََّّل ُب؟‬ ‫‪َ )2‬أ ْي َن ُنن ِْف ُق َأ ْم َوا َلنَا؟‬
‫ْ َ‬
‫‪َ )11‬أ ْي َن َج َم ْع َت ْاْلَ ْق ََّل َم؟‬ ‫‪َ )7‬أ ْي َن َأ َق ْم َت فِ ْي َم َّك َة؟‬ ‫ف؟‬ ‫‪َ )3‬أ ْي َن َس َق َط َّ‬
‫الس ْی ُ‬
‫‪َ )12‬أين ما َت ِ‬
‫ت ا ْل َم ْر َأ ُة َأ ْم ِ‬ ‫‪َ )8‬أ ْي َن َو َجد ُّت ُم ا ْل َب َق َرةَ؟‬ ‫ب ِْ‬
‫س؟‬ ‫ْ َ َ‬ ‫اإل َما ُم؟‬ ‫‪َ )4‬أ ْي َن َخ َط َ‬
‫‪365‬‬
‫َمتَی‬
‫‪َ is translated as when.‬متَی ‪The interrogative‬‬
‫اس ِم َّیة ‪َ in a‬م َتی‬ ‫ُج ْم َلة ْ‬
‫‪َ .‬خ َبر ُم َقدَّ م ‪َ becomes the‬م َتی ‪ُ , the word‬ج ْم َلة ْاس ِم َّیة ‪In a‬‬
‫الص ََّلةُ؟‬
‫َمتَی َّ‬
‫?‪When is salah‬‬
‫الص ََّل ُة‬

‫َّ‬ ‫َمتَی‬
‫‪Vocab‬‬
‫‪intellect‬‬ ‫‪َ gift, bounty‬ع ْقل ج ُع ُق ْول‬ ‫َأ ًلی ج َآْلء‬
‫‪breakfast, lunch‬‬ ‫َغدَ اء ج َأغ ِْد َية‬ ‫‪discourse, Prophetic‬‬ ‫ح ِديث ج َأح ِ‬
‫اد ْي ُث‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ ْ‬
‫‪narration‬‬
‫‪messenger‬‬ ‫ُم ْر َسل ج ْو َن‬ ‫‪left‬‬ ‫ِش َمال‬
‫‪time‬‬ ‫‪َ round, course‬و ْقت ج َأ ْو َقات‬ ‫َش ْوط ج َأ ْش َواط‬
‫‪right‬‬ ‫‪َ dinner‬ي ِم ْین ج َأ ْي َمان‬ ‫ع ََشاء ج َأع ِْش َیة‬
‫‪ )10‬متَی نَصر اللِ‬ ‫‪َ )7‬متَی الدَّ ْر ُس؟‬ ‫‪َ )4‬متَی ال َّل ْی ُل؟‬ ‫‪َ )1‬متَی َي ْو ُم ا ْل ِع ْی ِد؟‬
‫ْ ُ‬ ‫َ‬
‫السا َعةُ؟‬
‫‪َ )11‬متَی َّ‬ ‫الح ُّج؟‬
‫‪َ )8‬متَی َ‬ ‫اح؟‬
‫الص َب ُ‬
‫‪َ )5‬متَی َّ‬ ‫الص ََّلةُ؟‬
‫‪َ )2‬متَی َّ‬
‫‪َ )12‬متَی ٰه َذا ا ْل َوعْدُ ؟‬ ‫‪َ )9‬متَی ا ْل َغدَ ا ُء؟‬ ‫‪َ )6‬متَی ْاْلَ َذ ُ‬
‫ان؟‬ ‫‪َ )3‬متَی ٰه َذا ا ْل َفت ُْح؟‬
‫‪366‬‬
‫ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة ‪َ in a‬متَی‬
‫‪َ .‬م ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه ُم َقدَّ م ‪َ becomes the‬م َتی ‪ُ , the word‬ج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة ‪In a‬‬
‫َمتَی َت ْذ َه ُ‬
‫ب؟‬
‫?‪When will you go‬‬
‫اعل َ‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِیْ ِه ُم َقدَّ م‬
‫ْ َ‬
‫ب‬ ‫َمتَی‬
‫‪Vocab‬‬
‫اج َع ًة‬ ‫اج َع ُي َر ِ‬
‫اج ُع ُم َر َ‬ ‫َر َ‬ ‫َأ ْح ٰیی ُي ْحیِ ْي إِ ْح َیا ًء‬
‫‪to go over, recap‬‬ ‫‪to give life‬‬
‫‪to change‬‬ ‫ف َت ْص ِر ْي ًفا‬
‫ف ُي َص ِّر ُ‬
‫َص َّر َ‬ ‫‪to complain‬‬ ‫اِ ْش َت َكی َي ْشتَكِ ْي اِ ْشتِ َكا ًء‬
‫‪to waste‬‬ ‫َض َّی َع ُي َض ِّی ُع َت ْضیِ ْی ًعا‬ ‫‪to adhere to‬‬ ‫اِ ْعت ََص َم َي ْعت َِص ُم اِعْتِ َصا ًما‬
‫‪to rise‬‬ ‫َط َل َع َي ْط ُل ُع ُط ُل ْوعًا‬ ‫‪to drown‬‬ ‫َأغ َْر َق ُيغ ِْر ُق إِغ َْرا ًقا‬
‫‪to set‬‬ ‫‪ to initiate, start‬غ ََر َب َيغ ُْر ُب غ ُُر ْو ًبا‬ ‫َبدَ َأ َي ْبدَ ُأ َبدْ ًأ‬
‫‪ )5‬متَی غَرب ِ‬ ‫‪ )1‬متَی ب َك ِ‬
‫اج َم َّكةَ؟‬ ‫‪َ )9‬متَی َو َص َل ا ْل ُح َّج ُ‬ ‫ت َّ‬
‫الش ْم ُس؟‬ ‫ََ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ت ال ِّط ْف َلةُ؟‬ ‫َ َ‬
‫لح ِّج؟‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪َ )6‬متَی َينَا ُم ْاْلَ ْو َْل ُد َل ْی ًَّل؟‬ ‫‪َ )2‬متَی َي ْط ُل ُع ا ْل َق َم ُر؟‬
‫َّاس ل َ‬ ‫‪َ )10‬متَی ُي َساف ُر الن ُ‬
‫الس ْو ِق ال َی ْو َم؟‬ ‫‪َ )11‬متَی َذ َه َب الت َُّّج ُار ِإ َلی ُّ‬ ‫اج ُع الدُّ ُر ْو َس؟‬ ‫‪َ )7‬متَی ُت َر ِ‬ ‫‪َ )3‬متَی َأ ِذ َن َل َك َأ َب َو َ‬
‫اك؟‬
‫‪َ )12‬متَی َي ْجت َِم ُع ا ْل ُم ْس ِل ُم ْو َن لِ َص ََّل ِة ا ْل ِع ْی ِد؟‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )8‬متَی َت ْس َت ْیق ُظ ْاْلُ ُّم َص َب ً‬
‫احا؟‬ ‫‪َ )4‬متَی َد َخ ْل َت ا ْل َم ِ‬
‫سجدَ ؟‬
‫‪Note‬‬
‫‪َ is also used to mean when. However, it is only‬أ َّي َ‬
‫ان ‪The interrogative‬‬
‫‪used to ask about incredibly important things. In the Quran, it is‬‬
‫‪only used to ask about the Day of Judgement.‬‬
‫ان َي ْو ُم ا ْل ِق َیا َم ِة﴾‬
‫﴿ َأ َّي َ‬
‫?‪When is the Day of Judgement‬‬
‫‪367‬‬
‫َك ْی َ‬
‫ف‬
‫‪َ is translated as how.‬ك ْی َ‬
‫ف ‪The interrogative‬‬
‫ف‬‫اس ِم َّیة ‪َ in a‬ك ْی َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ف ‪ُ , the word‬ج ْم َلة ْاسم َّیة ‪In a‬‬
‫‪َ .‬خ َبر ُم َقدَّ م ‪َ becomes the‬ك ْی َ‬
‫ف َحا ُل َك؟‬
‫َك ْی َ‬
‫)?‪How is your condition? (How are you‬‬
‫َحا ُل َك‬ ‫َك ْی َ‬

‫ف‬
‫ف َي ُك ْو ُن الدَّ ْر ُس؟‬
‫‪َ )10‬ك ْی َ‬ ‫ف ا ْل َم ْر َضی؟‬
‫‪َ )7‬ك ْی َ‬ ‫ف ا ْل َع َس ُل؟‬
‫‪َ )4‬ك ْی َ‬ ‫ف َّ‬
‫الشاةُ؟‬ ‫‪َ )1‬ك ْی َ‬
‫ف كَان ِ‬
‫َت ْاْلَ ْج ِو َبةُ؟‬ ‫‪َ )11‬ك ْی َ‬ ‫َان ال َّط َعا ُم؟‬
‫فك َ‬‫‪َ )8‬ك ْی َ‬ ‫ف ا ْل َق ِ‬
‫اض ْي؟‬ ‫‪َ )5‬ك ْی َ‬ ‫ف ا ْل ُق َّرا ُء؟‬
‫‪َ )2‬ك ْی َ‬
‫ف َي ُك ْو ُن ا ْل َع َذ ُ‬
‫اب؟‬ ‫‪َ )12‬ك ْی َ‬ ‫فك َ‬
‫َان الدَّ ْر ُس؟‬ ‫‪َ )9‬ك ْی َ‬ ‫ف ْاْلَ ْو َْل ُد؟‬
‫‪َ )6‬ك ْی َ‬ ‫الش ْی ُخ؟‬
‫ف َّ‬‫‪َ )3‬ك ْی َ‬
‫ف‬‫ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة ‪َ in a‬ك ْی َ‬

‫ف ‪ُ , the word‬ج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة ‪In a‬‬
‫‪َ .‬حال ُم َقدَّ م ‪َ becomes the‬ك ْی َ‬
‫ف َت ْذ َه ُ‬
‫ب؟‬ ‫َك ْی َ‬
‫?‪How do/will you go‬‬
‫اعل َ‬ ‫َحال ُم َقدَّ م‬
‫ْ َ‬
‫ب‬ ‫َك ْی َ‬
‫ف‬
‫ف َت ْم ِش ْي ِإ َلی ٰه ِذ ِه ا ْل ُق َری ا ْل َب ِع ْیدَ ِة؟‬ ‫‪ )9‬كَ ْی َ‬ ‫ف ن َِسی َت ٰه ِذ ِه ا ْل َقو ِ‬
‫اعدَ ؟‬ ‫َ‬ ‫‪َ )5‬ك ْی َ ْ‬ ‫ف َت ْخدَ ُع الن َ‬
‫َّاس؟‬ ‫‪َ )1‬ك ْی َ‬
‫ُب ا ْل َق ِد ْي َم ُة؟‬ ‫الكت ُ‬‫ف َس َق َط ْت ٰه ِذ ِه ُ‬ ‫‪ )10‬كَ ْی َ‬ ‫َب َأ ْق َران ََها؟‬
‫ف َفا َق ْت زَ ْين ُ‬
‫‪َ )6‬ك ْی َ‬ ‫دت ال َّط َعا َم؟‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ك ْی َ‬
‫ف َو َج َّ‬
‫ف َْل ُتن ِْف ُق ِمن م ِال َك عَ َلی ا ْلمس ِ‬
‫اك ْی ِن؟‬ ‫‪ )11‬كَ ْی َ‬ ‫س؟‬ ‫ف َي ْغتَا ُب ْو َن ِإ ْخ َوان َُه ْم؟ ‪َ )7‬ك ْی َ‬
‫ف َت َت َأ َّخ ُر ْو َن َع ِن الدَّ ْر ِ‬ ‫‪َ )3‬ك ْی َ‬
‫َ َ‬ ‫ْ َ‬
‫ف ان َْك َس َر ْت ٰه ِذ ِه الن َِّاف َذ ُة ا ْل َق ِد ْي َمةُ؟‬ ‫‪ )12‬كَ ْی َ‬ ‫الل َع ِن ا ْل ُمنَافِ ِق ْی َن؟‬
‫ف َي ْر َضی ُ‬ ‫ف َي ْق َب ُل ٰه ِذ ِه ْ َ‬
‫اْلعْ َم َال؟ ‪َ )8‬ك ْی َ‬ ‫‪َ )4‬ك ْی َ‬
‫‪368‬‬
‫َأنَّی‬
The interrogative ‫ َأنَّی‬can be translated in two ways:
1. From where
‫َأنَّی ٰه َذا؟‬
Where is this from?
In this case it will have the same grammatical function as ‫ َأ ْي َن‬.
2. How
﴾‫الل َب ْعدَ َم ْوتِ َها‬ ِِ
ُ ‫﴿ َأنَّى ُي ْحیِي َهذه‬
How will Allah give life to this after its death?
َ ‫ َك ْی‬.
In this case it will have the same grammatical function as ‫ف‬
The context will help determine the meaning of ‫ َأنَّی‬.
369
‫ك َْم‬
The interrogative ‫ ك َْم‬is translated as how many.
‫ ك َْم‬is followed by a ‫ َت ْمیِ ْیز‬. The ‫ َت ْمیِ ْیز‬will be singular, but it will be
translated as plural.
‫ك َْم َر ُج ًَّل‬
How many men?
‫ ك َْم‬in a ‫اس ِم َّیة‬ْ ‫ُج ْم َلة‬
In a ‫ ُج ْم َلة ْاس ِم َّیة‬, the word ‫ ك َْم‬and its ‫ َت ْمیِ ْیز‬occur in two slots:
1. If there is a ‫ نَكِ َرة‬word or ‫ ِش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬after ‫ ك َْم‬and its ‫ك َْم َت ْمیِ ْیز‬, this will be
the ‫ ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬.
‫ك َْم َو َلدً ا غَائِب؟‬
How many children are absent?
‫َغائِب‬ ‫َو َلدً ا‬ ‫ك َْم‬
‫َت ْمیِ ْیز‬ ‫ُم َم َّیز‬
‫ك َْم َو َلدً ا فِي ا ْل َمدْ َر َس ِة؟‬

How many children are there in the school?
2. If there is a ‫ َم ْع ِر َفة‬word after ‫ ك َْم‬and its ‫ك َْم َت ْمیِ ْیز‬,, this will be the ‫َخ َبر‬
‫ ُم َقدَّ م‬.
‫ك َْم َسنَ ًة ع ُُم ُر َك؟‬
How old are you?
(How many years is your age?)
‫عُ ُم ُر َك‬ ‫َسنَ ًة‬ ‫ك َْم‬
370
‫‪.‬ك َْم ‪The following table summarises the use of‬‬
‫اس ِم َّیة ‪ in a‬ك َْم‬
‫‪ word‬نَكِ َرة ‪Followed by a‬‬ ‫ِشبْ ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة ‪Followed by a‬‬ ‫‪َ word‬م ْع ِر َفة ‪Followed by a‬‬
‫ك َْم َو َلدً ا غَائِب؟‬ ‫ك َْم َو َلدً ا فِي ا ْل َمدْ َر َس ِة؟‬ ‫ك َْم َسنَ ًة ع ُُم ُر َك؟‬
‫‪ )11‬ك َْم َطال ِ ًبا ُم ْج َت ِهدُ ْو َن؟‬ ‫ك َْم َك ْل ًبا فِ ْي ا ْل َح ِد ْي َق ِة؟‬ ‫‪)6‬‬ ‫‪ )1‬ك َْم بِنْتًا َشاكِ َرة؟‬
‫الش َج َر ِة؟‬ ‫ك َْم َط ْی ًرا َع َلی َّ‬ ‫‪)12‬‬ ‫ك َْم َض ْی ًفا فِي ا ْلغ ُْر َف ِة؟‬ ‫‪)7‬‬ ‫‪ )2‬ك َْم َي ْو ًما ا ْل َح ُّج؟‬
‫الس ْو َر ِة؟‬ ‫ِ ِِ‬

‫ك َْم آ َي ًة في ٰهذه ُّ‬ ‫‪)13‬‬ ‫ك َْم َي ْو ًما فِي ْاْلُ ْس ُب ْو ِع؟‬ ‫‪)8‬‬ ‫‪ )3‬ك َْم َبا ًبا ل ِ ٰه ِذ ِه الدَّ ِار؟‬
‫ك َْم ُأ ْستَا ًذا فِي ا ْل َمدْ َر َس ِة؟‬ ‫‪)14‬‬ ‫ك َْم َو ْقتًا ِعنْدَ َك ا ْل َی ْو َم؟‬ ‫‪)9‬‬ ‫‪ )4‬ك َْم َش ْو ًطا ال َّط َو ُ‬
‫اف؟‬
‫ك َْم مِ ْی ًَّل َب ْی َن َم َّك َة َوا ْل َم ِد ْين َِة؟‬ ‫‪)15‬‬ ‫‪ )10‬ك َْم َو َلدً ا ل ِ َه ِذ ِه ْاْلُ ِّم؟‬ ‫‪ )5‬ك َْم َي ْو ًما َأ َّيا ُم ا ْل ِع ْی ِد؟‬
‫‪371‬‬
‫ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة ‪ in a‬ك َْم‬
‫‪َ or‬م ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه ‪َ ,‬م ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه ‪َ occur as the‬ت ْمیِ ْیز ‪ and its‬ك َْم ‪ُ , the word‬ج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة ‪In a‬‬
‫‪َ . An example of each is given below.‬م ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه ُم َقدَّ م‬
‫ك َْم َت ْم َر ًة َأ َك ْل َت؟‬
‫?‪How many dates did you eat‬‬
‫ْ َ‬
‫َأ َك ْل َت‬ ‫َت ْم َر ًة‬ ‫ك َْم‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه‬

‫َاب؟‬
‫ك َْم َي ْو ًما غ َ‬
‫?‪How many days was he absent‬‬
‫ِفعل و َف ِ‬
‫اعل ( ُه َو)‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه ُم َقدَّ م‬
‫ْ َ‬
‫َغ َ‬
‫اب‬ ‫َي ْو ًما‬ ‫ك َْم‬

‫ك َْم َم َّر ًة ُص ْم َت؟‬
‫?‪How many times did you fast‬‬
‫اعل َ‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق ُم َقدَّ م‬
‫ْ َ‬
‫ُص ْم َت‬ ‫َم َّر ًة‬ ‫ك َْم‬
‫‪372‬‬
‫السنَةَ؟‬ ‫‪ )8‬كَم كِتَابا َقر ْأ َ ِ ِ‬ ‫كَم َشهرا ُتسافِر ِ‬
‫ت ٰهذه َّ‬ ‫ْ ً َ‬ ‫ان؟‬ ‫ْ ًْ َ َ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫ت َما ًء َوع ََس ًَّل؟‬ ‫‪ )9‬ك َْم ك ُْو ًبا َم َ ْ‬
‫ل َ‬ ‫ك َْم َح ِد ْي ًثا َح ِف ْظت ُْم؟‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫ك َْم َد ْر ًسا َت ْح ُض ُر ك َُّل ُأ ْس ُب ْوع؟‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪)10‬‬ ‫ك َْم ن ْع َم ًة َأ ْن َع َم ُ‬
‫الل َع َل ْی َك؟‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫ت فِ ْي َح َیاتِ َك؟‬ ‫ك َْم َم َّر ًة اِ ْعت ََم ْر َ‬ ‫‪)11‬‬ ‫ك َْم َي ْو ًما غَا َب ْت َفاطِ َمةُ؟‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫ك َْم َي ْو ًما َأ َق ْم َت فِي ٰذل ِ َك ا ْل َب َل ِد؟‬ ‫‪)12‬‬ ‫‪ )5‬ك َْم َت ْم َر ًة َأ ْع َطت َْك ُأ ُّم َك؟‬
‫ك َْم َش ْو ًطا َت ُط ْوفِ ْی َن َح ْو َل ا ْل َك ْع َبة؟‬ ‫‪)13‬‬ ‫‪ )6‬ك َْم َو ْقتًا ُت َض ِّی ُع ك َُّل َي ْوم؟‬
‫آن فِي َر َم َض َ‬
‫ان؟‬ ‫ك َْم َم َّر ًة َت ْختِ ِم ْی َن ا ْل ُق ْر َ‬ ‫‪)14‬‬ ‫‪ )7‬ك َْم َو ْقتًا َت ْل َعبِ ْی َن ك َُّل َي ْوم؟‬
‫َأ ُّي‬
‫‪َ is translated as which.‬أي ‪The interrogative‬‬
‫‪َ along with its‬أي ‪ُ , and the grammatical function of‬م َضاف ‪َ becomes‬أي‬
‫‪ُ .‬م َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪ُ will depend on the meaning of the‬م َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬
‫َأ َّي كِتَاب َق َر ْأ َ‬
‫ت؟‬ ‫َأ َّي َي ْوم ُص ْم َت؟‬
‫?‪Which book did you read‬‬ ‫?‪Which day did you fast‬‬
‫اعل‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه ُم َقدَّ م‬ ‫فِعل و َف ِ‬
‫اعل‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِیْ ِه ُم َقدَّ م‬
‫ْ َ‬ ‫ْ َ‬
‫َق َر ْأ َت‬ ‫كِتَاب‬ ‫َأ َّي‬ ‫ُص ْم َت‬ ‫َي ْوم‬ ‫َأ َّي‬
‫ُم َضاف إِ َلیْ ِه‬ ‫ُم َضاف‬ ‫ُم َضاف إِ َلیْ ِه‬ ‫ُم َضاف‬
‫ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪َ and its‬أي ‪In this sentence‬‬ ‫ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪َ and its‬أي ‪In this sentence‬‬
‫‪َ .‬م ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه ُم َقدَّ م ‪take the slot of‬‬ ‫‪َ .‬م ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه ُم َقدَّ م ‪take the slot of‬‬
‫‪َ )9‬أ َّي َطالِب َن َف َع ا ْل ِع ْل ُم؟‬ ‫‪َ )5‬أ َّي ُج ُم َعة ُت َسافِ ُر ْو َن؟‬ ‫‪َ )1‬أ َّي َب ْی َت ْی َك َتبِ ْی ُع؟‬
‫ت ا ْل َب ِ‬
‫‪َ )10‬أ َّي آ َية َق َر ْأ َ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪َ )2‬أ ُّي ُه ْم ُم ْفلِ ُح ْو َن؟‬
‫ار َحةَ؟‬ ‫ب ُح ًّبا؟‬ ‫‪َ )6‬أ َّي َش ْيء ُتح ُّ‬
‫‪َ )11‬أ ُّي الت ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪َ )3‬أ َّي ُر َّمانَة َت ْأك ََُّل ِن؟‬
‫َّاج َر ْي ِن ٰه َذا؟‬ ‫ب؟‬‫‪ )7‬ت ََّل َو َة َأ ِّي إِ َمام ُتح ُّ‬
‫‪َ )12‬أ َّي َث ْوب َت ْل َب ُس َي ْو َم ا ْل ِع ْی ِد؟‬ ‫‪َ )8‬أ ُّي َك ْأس َم ْم ُل ْوء َل َبنًا؟‬ ‫‪َ )4‬أ َّي عَام َح َّج َجدُّ َك؟‬
‫‪373‬‬
‫اْلستِ ْف َها ِم‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َلة ‪َ in a‬أ ْس َما ُء ْ‬
‫ِش ْب ُه ‪َ and become part of a‬ح ْرف َجار ‪ may be preceded by a‬اِ ْس ُم ِاْل ْستِ ْف َها ِم ‪An‬‬
‫‪.‬ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬
‫إِ َلی َم ْن َت ْذ َه ُ‬
‫ب؟‬
‫?‪Who are you going towards‬‬
‫اعل َ‬ ‫َمف ُع ْول فِیْ ِه َغیْ ُر َص ِر ْيح‬
‫ْ َ‬
‫ب‬ ‫َم ْن‬ ‫إِ َلی‬
‫‪Notes‬‬
‫ا ‪َ , the‬ح ْرف َجار ‪َ , is preceded by a‬ما ِاْل ْستِ ْف َهامِ َّی ُة ‪َ ,‬ما ‪When the interrogative‬‬
‫‪َ .‬م ‪is dropped and it becomes‬‬
‫بِ َم َي ُط ْو ُ‬
‫ف ا ْل ُح َّج ُ‬
‫اج؟‬
‫?‪What do the pilgrims circumambulate‬‬
‫‪َ and are written as one word.‬ما ‪ُ merge with the‬ح ُر ْوف َج َّارة ‪Some‬‬
‫مِ َّم‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫مِ ْن َما‬ ‫ع ََّم‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫َن َما‬
‫ع ْ‬
‫َّاس؟‬ ‫‪ )8‬إِ َلی َمتَی َت ْخدَ ُع الن َ‬ ‫‪﴿ )1‬مِ َّم ُخلِ َق﴾‬
‫‪ )9‬بِ َأ ِّي ِس ِّك ْین َت ْق َط ُع ا ْل ُخ ْبزَ ؟‬ ‫‪ )2‬فِي َأ ِّي بِئْر َماء؟‬
‫‪ )10‬مِ ْن َأ ِّي َب َلد َأن َْت َو َأ ُخ ْو َك؟‬ ‫إِ َلی َأ ْي َن َي ْذ َه ْب َن؟‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫‪ )11‬فِ ْي َأ ِّي َم ْو ِضع َت َض ُع ُك ُت َب َك؟‬ ‫ان؟‬‫ل ِ َكم يوما ُتسافِر ِ‬
‫ْ َْ ً َ َ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫‪ )12‬بِ َكم ِدر َهما َتبِیع ٰه َذا ا ْل ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ح َم َار؟‬ ‫ْ ْ ً ُْ‬ ‫َب؟‬ ‫ف ْي َأ ِّي َسف ْینَة َت ْرك ُ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫اْلستِ ْف َهامِ؟‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )13‬ع َلی َأ ِّي َص ْف َحة َق َواعدُ ْ‬ ‫َفي َأ ِّي َو ْقت َت ِص ُل ْو َن؟‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫اإل َما ُم َي ْو َم ا ْل ُج ُم َع ِة؟‬
‫ب ِْ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ )14‬م ْن َأ ِّي منْ َبر َي ْخ ُط ُ‬ ‫‪ )7‬إِ َلی َم ْن ن َْشتَكِ ْي ُحزْ َننَا؟‬
‫‪374‬‬
‫ل ِ َما َذا ‪ and‬ل ِ َم‬
‫‪ are translated as why. These are the‬ل ِ َما َذا ‪ and‬ل ِ َم ‪The interrogatives‬‬
‫‪َ .‬ما َذا ‪َ and‬ما ‪ِ along with‬ل ‪َ of‬ح ْرف َجار‬
‫‪َ .‬م ْف ُع ْول َل ُه َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح ‪ُ as the‬ج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة ‪These usually occur in a‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫ل َم َت ْذ َه ُ‬
‫ب؟‬
‫?‪Why are you going‬‬
‫اعل َ‬ ‫َمف ُع ْول َل ُه َغیْ ُر َص ِر ْيح‬
‫ْ َ‬
‫ب‬ ‫َـم‬ ‫لِـ‬
‫س؟‬ ‫‪ )7‬ل ِ َما َذا َْل َت ْجت َِهدُ ْو َن فِي الدَّ ْر ِ‬ ‫‪﴿ )1‬ل ِ َم َق َت ْلت ُُم ْو ُه ْم﴾‬
‫َاب إِ ْخ َوا َننَا ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ِم ْی َن؟‬
‫‪ )8‬ل َما َذا َن ْغت ُ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ت َق َل ِم ْي؟‬
‫‪ )2‬ل ِ َم َأ َخ ْذ َ‬
‫‪ )9‬ل ِ َما َذا ُت َض ِّی ُع ْو َن َأ ْو َقا َت ُك ْم فِي ال َّل ْه ِو؟‬ ‫ل ِ َم ُت ْهلِ ُك ْو َن َأ ْن ُف َس ُك ْم؟‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫‪ )10‬ل ِ َما َذا َت ْفت َِر ْي َع َلى اللِ ا ْل َك ِذ َب؟‬ ‫ل ِ َما َذا َل ْم َت ْص َع ِد ا ْل َج َب َل؟‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫ِِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ث؟‬ ‫‪ )11‬ل َما َذا َل ْم َت ْح َف ْظ َن ٰهذه ُّ‬
‫الس َو َر ال َّث ََّل َ‬ ‫آيات اللِ﴾‬‫﴿لِم َت ْك ُفرو َن بِ ِ‬
‫ُ ْ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫ب ا ْل َو َلدُ َو َأ ُخ ْو ُه َم َع ْاْلَ ْو َْل ِد؟‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ )12‬ل َما َذا َْل َي ْل َع ُ‬ ‫اجع ِ‬
‫ان ُد ُر ْو َس ُك َما؟‬ ‫ل َم َْل ُت َر ِ َ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫‪375‬‬
‫ل ِ َم ْن‬
‫‪ is translated as whose, whose … is this or who‬ل ِ َم ْن ‪The interrogative‬‬
‫‪َ .‬م ْن ‪ِ along with‬ل ‪َ of‬ح ْرف َجار ‪does … belong to. This is the‬‬
‫ل ِ َم ْن ٰه َذا؟‬
‫?‪Who does this belong to‬‬
‫ُمبَتَدَ أ ُمؤَ َّخر‬ ‫َخبَر ُم َقدَّ م‬
‫ٰه َذا‬ ‫َم ْن‬ ‫ِل‬
‫ف؟‬ ‫‪ )9‬ل ِ َم ْن ٰه َذا ا ْل ُم ْص َح ُ‬ ‫ل ِ َم ْن ٰذل ِ َك ا ْل َك ََّل ُم؟‬ ‫‪)5‬‬ ‫ل ِ َم ِن ال َّل َب ُن؟‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ل ِ َم ْن ٰه َذا ا ْل َك ْب ُش؟‬ ‫ل ِ َم ِن ا ْل َف َواكِ ُه؟‬
‫اب؟‬ ‫‪ )10‬ل َم ْن ٰه َذا ا ْلم ْح َر ُ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫‪ )11‬ل ِ َم ْن ٰذل ِ َك ا ْل ُك ْر ِس ُّي؟‬ ‫ح َب ُال؟‬ ‫لِمن ٰه ِذ ِه ا ْل ِ‬
‫َ ْ‬ ‫‪)7‬‬ ‫ب؟‬ ‫الذ َه ُ‬‫ل ِ َم ِن َّ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫ات فِي ْاْل ِخ َر ِة؟‬ ‫‪ )12‬ل ِ َم ِن ال َّط ِّی َب ُ‬ ‫ل ِ َم ْن ٰه َذا ا ْل َك ْأ ُس؟‬ ‫‪)8‬‬ ‫ل ِ َم ِن ا ْل َح ِر ْي ُر؟‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫‪376‬‬
‫‪Summary of Interrogatives‬‬
‫ُج ْم َلة ْاس ِم َّیة ‪Interrogatives in a‬‬
‫‪who, whom‬‬ ‫َم ْن‪َ ،‬م ْن َذا‬ ‫َم ْن‪َ ،‬م ْن َذا‬
‫‪what‬‬ ‫َما‪َ ،‬ما َذا‬ ‫َما‪َ ،‬ما َذا‬
‫‪where‬‬ ‫َأ ْي َن‬

‫َأ‬
‫‪when‬‬ ‫َمتَی‬
‫َه ْل‬
‫‪how‬‬ ‫َك ْی َ‬
‫ف‬
‫‪how, from where‬‬ ‫َأنَّی‬
‫‪how many‬‬ ‫ك َْم‬ ‫ك َْم‬
‫ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة ‪Interrogatives in a‬‬

‫‪َ can come in which‬أ ْس َما ُء ِاْل ْستِ ْف َها ِم ‪The following table shows which‬‬
‫‪ُ .‬ج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة ‪slots in a‬‬
‫َحال‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول َل ُه‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِه‬
‫ل ِ َم‬ ‫َأ ْي َن‬ ‫َم ْن‪َ ،‬م ْن َذا‬
‫ل ِ َما َذا‬ ‫َما‪َ ،‬ما َذا‬
‫َمتَی‬ ‫َأ‬
‫َك ْی َ‬
‫ف‬ ‫َه ْل‬
‫َأنَّی‬ ‫َأنَّی‬
‫ك َْم‬ ‫ك َْم‬ ‫ك َْم‬
‫َأي‬
‫‪377‬‬
‫‪Interrogatives in a Phrase‬‬
‫َم ْج ُر ْور‬ ‫ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬ ‫ُم َضاف‬
‫َأي‬
‫َم ْن‪َ ،‬م ْن َذا‬ ‫َم ْن‬
‫َما‪َ ،‬ما َذا‬
‫ك َْم‬
‫َأ ْي َن‬
‫َأي‬
‫اب‬ ‫َأ ْح ُر ُ‬
‫اب‬ ‫َأ ْح ُر ُ‬
‫‪Affirmative‬‬ ‫‪Negative‬‬
‫َن َع ْم‬ ‫َأ َج ْل‬ ‫َب َلی‬ ‫َْل‬ ‫ك َََّّل‬
‫ب كَثِ ْی ًرا؟‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ )17‬ل َما َذا َتغ َْض ُ‬ ‫ف؟‬ ‫الض ُی ْو ُ‬
‫ف ُّ‬ ‫‪َ )9‬ك ْی َ‬ ‫‪َ )1‬م ْن َر ُّب ُك ْم؟‬
‫ف َت ْم ِض ْي َو ْقت ََك؟‬ ‫‪َ )18‬ك ْی َ‬ ‫الس ِف ْین َِة؟‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )10‬ما عنْدَ َّ‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ما ْاشت ََر ْي َت؟‬
‫‪ )19‬ل ِ َم ُت ْس ِر ُف ْو َن َأ ْم َوا َل ُك ْم؟‬ ‫‪ )11‬ك َْم ُخ ْبزً ا َت ْأك ُُل؟‬ ‫‪َ )3‬أ ْي َن َنت ََو َّض ُأ؟‬
‫ان؟‬‫الش ْج َع ُ‬ ‫الر َج ُال ُّ‬ ‫َأ ْي َن ِّ‬ ‫‪)20‬‬ ‫‪َ )12‬أ َّي َط َعام َأ َك ْل َت؟‬ ‫‪َ )4‬م َتی َت ْل َعبِ ْی َن؟‬
‫ل ِ َم َق َط ْع َت ٰه ِذ ِه ْاْلَ ْش َج َار؟‬ ‫‪)21‬‬ ‫الر َّما َنةُ؟‬ ‫ِِ‬
‫‪ )13‬بِ َك ْم ٰهذه ُّ‬ ‫‪َ )5‬ما َذا َح َّر َم ُ‬
‫الل؟‬
‫ِ‬ ‫‪َ )14‬ما َذا َع َلی ال َّث ْو ِ‬
‫ب؟‬ ‫ل َما َذا َق َت ْل َت ٰه َذا ا ْل َك ْل َ‬ ‫‪)22‬‬ ‫ب؟‬ ‫‪َ )6‬م ْن َت ْك َر ُه ْو َن؟‬
‫ب ِْ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫الس ْو ِق؟‬ ‫ِ‬
‫اإل َما ُم؟‬ ‫في َأ ِّي َو ْقت َي ْخ ُط ُ‬ ‫‪)23‬‬ ‫‪َ )15‬م ْن َذا في ُّ‬ ‫‪َ )7‬م َتی الدَّ ْر ُس؟‬
‫‪ )24‬ك َْم ُد ُم ْوعًا َر َأ ْي ُت َع َلی َو ْج ِه َها؟‬ ‫‪ )16‬ل ِ َم ْن ٰه ِذ ِه الدَّ نَانِ ْی ُر؟‬ ‫‪َ )8‬ما َت ْشتَكِ ْي؟‬
‫‪378‬‬
‫‪ْ and‬اس ُم ِاْل ْستِ ْف َها ِم ‪Replace the underlined words with an appropriate‬‬
‫‪then translate. If the entire sentence is underlined, change it to a‬‬
‫‪polar question.‬‬
‫ا ْلع َشاء َقب َل ص ََّل ِة ا ْل ِع َش ِ‬
‫اء‬ ‫‪)15‬‬ ‫‪َ )8‬أ ُب ْو َك عَلی ا ْل َی ِم ْی ِن‬ ‫َلبِ ْثنَا َي ْو ًما‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫َ ُ ْ َ‬
‫ٰهؤُ َْل ِء ال ُّط ََّّل ُب ُم ْجت َِهدُ ْو َن‬ ‫‪)16‬‬ ‫الشم ِ‬
‫ال‬ ‫‪َ )9‬أ ُب ْو َك عَلی ِّ َ‬ ‫اس َم َك‬ ‫نَس ْی ُت ْ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫ٰهؤُ َْل ِء ال ُّط ََّّل ُب ُم ْجت َِهدُ ْو َن‬ ‫‪)17‬‬ ‫‪َ )10‬ح ِف ْظ ُت ُد ُر ْو ِس ْي‬ ‫اس َم َك‬ ‫نَس ْی ُت ْ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫ٰهؤُ َْل ِء ال ُّط ََّّل ُب ُم ْجت َِهدُ ْو َن‬ ‫‪)18‬‬ ‫الس ْو ِق‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )11‬ر َأ ْينَا ُأ َّم َك في ُّ‬ ‫ن َِس ْی ُت َفاطِ َم َة‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫اإل َما ُم َق ْب َل ا ْل ُج ُم َع ِة‬
‫َو َص َل ْ ِ‬ ‫‪)19‬‬ ‫ث َساعَات‬ ‫‪ )12‬الدُّ ُر ْو ُس َث ََّل ُ‬ ‫‪َ )5‬ل ْم َأ ْف َه ْم َد ْر َس َك‬
‫اب‬‫َر َأ ْينَا َأ ْر َب َع َة كِ ََّلب ِعنْدَ ا ْل َب ِ‬ ‫‪)20‬‬ ‫احتِ َسا ًبا‬‫‪ُ )13‬ي َص ِّلي ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن ْ‬
‫‪ )6‬ر َأي ُت الو َلدَ م ِ‬
‫اش ًیا‬ ‫َ َ‬ ‫َ ْ‬
‫ُأ َص ِّل ْي َخ ْم َس َم َّرات فِي ا ْل َی ْو ِم‬ ‫‪)21‬‬ ‫الش ِد ْيدُ لِل َّظال ِ ِم ْی َن‬
‫اب َّ‬ ‫‪ )14‬ا ْل َع َذ ُ‬
‫‪ )7‬ر َأي ُت الو َلدَ م ِ‬
‫اش ًیا‬ ‫َ َ‬ ‫َ ْ‬
‫‪379‬‬
Supplement: Rhetorical Questions
ْ ‫ َأ ْس َما ُء‬can also be used rhetorically; to make a statement
rather than to elicit information.
﴾ِ‫﴿ َأإِ ٰله َم َع الل‬
Is there a God with Allah?
(There is not another God with Allah.)
The meaning can be understood from the tone of the speaker and
the context of the sentence.
ِ ‫ بِ َأي َآْل ِء رب ُكما ُت َك ِّذب‬...﴿
﴾‫ان‬ َ َ ِّ َ ِّ
Which of the blessings of your lord will you deny?
Rhetorical Questions with ‫إِ َّْل‬
When an ‫ ْاستِ ْف َهام‬is used rhetorically to convey a negative meaning,
the particle ‫ إِ َّْل‬can be brought after it to create emphasis, just as ‫إِ َّْل‬
comes after a negative particle to create emphasis. (see page 116)
ِ
َ ‫َه ْل َي ْع ُبدُ ا ْل ُم ْسل ُم ْو َن إِ َّْل‬
‫الل‬
Do the Muslims worship anyone other than Allah?
The Muslims do not worship anyone other than Allah.
‫اعل‬ ‫فِ ْعل‬ ‫استِ ْف َهام‬
ْ ‫ف‬ُ ‫َح ْر‬
‫الل‬
َ ‫َّإْل‬ ‫ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن‬ ُ‫َي ْع ُبد‬ ‫َه ْل‬
Exercise 29
ِ
ُ ‫) َه ْل َي ْهد ْي ُك ْم إِ َّْل‬7
‫الل؟‬ ‫) َه ْل ن َْجت َِم ُع إِ َّْل للِ؟‬1
ِ ‫) َه ْل َي ْست‬8
ُ ‫ب ُدعَا َء َك إِ َّْل‬
‫الل؟‬ ُ ‫َج ْی‬ ‫) َه ْل َي ْب َقی إِ َّْل ع ََم ُل َك؟‬2
‫) َه ْل ُت ْق َب ُل إِ َّْل ْاْلَع َْم ُال ا ْل َخال ِ َص ُة؟‬9 ‫) َه ْل َي ْظلِ ُم ْو َن إِ َّْل َأ ْن ُف َس ُه ْم؟‬3
‫) َه ْل ُت ِص ْی ُب ُك ْم ُم ِص ْی َبة إِ َّْل بِ ُذن ُْوبِ ُك ْم؟‬10 ‫) َه ْل ُي ْه َل ُك ْو َن إِ َّْل بِ ُذن ُْوبِ ِه ْم؟‬4
‫) َه ْل َينْ َف ُع ُك ْم فِي ْاْل ِخ َر ِة إِ َّْل َأع َْما ُل ُك ُم؟‬11 ‫) َه ْل َت ْخدَ ع ُْو َن إِ َّْل َأ ْن ُف َس ُك ْم؟‬5
‫الر ْح َم ِة؟‬ ِ
َّ ‫ب ا ْلع َبا َد ِإ َّْل َر ُّب ُه ُم ا ْل َغ ُف ْو ُر ُذو‬
ِ
ُ ‫) َه ْل ُي َحاس‬12 ‫) َه ْل ن ََج َح إِ َّْل ا ْل ُم ْجت َِهدُ ْو َن؟‬6
380
The Rhetorical ‫ك َْم‬
When the interrogative ‫ ك َْم‬is used rhetorically, its ‫ إِع َْراب‬changes to
reflect that the question is rhetorical. The ‫ َت ْمیِ ْیز‬of the rhetorical ‫ك َْم‬,
‫ك َْم ا ْل َخ َب ِر َّي ُة‬, will be ‫ َم ْج ُر ْور‬.
‫ك َْم َت ْم َرة َأ َك ْل َت؟‬
How many dates did you eat?
)‫(ت‬ ِ ‫فِعل و َف‬
َ ‫اعل‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه ُم َقدَّ م‬
َ ْ
‫َأ َك ْل َت‬ ‫َت ْم َرة‬ ‫ك َْم‬
‫َت ْمیِ ْیز‬ ‫كَم ا ْل َخ َب ِر َّي ُة‬
Similarly, the ‫ َت ْمیِ ْیز‬of ‫ ك َْم ا ْل َخ َب ِر َّي ُة‬can also be plural.

‫ك َْم َت َم َرات َأ َك ْل َت؟‬
The ‫ َت ْمیِ ْیز‬of ‫ ك َْم ا ْل َخ َب ِر َّي ُة‬can also be preceded by a ‫ مِ ْن‬which will be a ‫َح ْر ُف‬
‫ ِص َلة‬.
‫ك َْم مِ ْن َت ْم َرة َأ َك ْل َت؟‬
َ ‫اعل‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه ُم َقدَّ م‬
َ ْ
‫َأ َك ْل َت‬ ‫َت ْم َرة‬ ‫مِ ْن‬ ‫ك َْم‬
‫َت ْمیِ ْیز‬ ‫ف ِص َلة‬

ُ ‫َح ْر‬ ‫كَم ا ْل َخبَ ِر َّي ُة‬
When ‫ ك َْم ا ْل َخ َب ِر َّي ُة‬occurs with ‫مِ ْن‬, the ‫ َت ْمیِ ْیز‬does not have to come
immediately after ‫ك َْم‬.
‫ك َْم َأ ْك ْل َت مِ ْن َت ْم َرة‬
‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه ُم َقدَّ م‬... )‫(ت‬ ِ ‫فِعل و َف‬
َ ‫اعل‬ َ ْ ... ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه ُم َقدَّ م‬
‫َت ْم َرة‬ ‫مِ ْن‬ ‫َأ َك ْل َت‬ ‫ك َْم‬
‫َت ْمیِ ْیز‬ ‫ف ِص َلة‬

ُ ‫َح ْر‬ ‫كَم ا ْل َخ َب ِر َّي ُة‬
381
‫‪The following table summarises the differences between the two‬‬
‫‪.‬ك َْم ‪types of‬‬
‫ك َْم ‪Type of‬‬ ‫اْلستِ ْف َهامِ َّی ُة‬
‫ك َْم ْ‬ ‫ك َْم ا ْل َخ َب ِر َّي ُة‬
‫َت ْمیِ ْیزُ ‪Irab of‬‬ ‫َمن ُْص ْوب‬ ‫َم ْج ُر ْور‬
‫َت ْمیِ ْیزُ ‪Number of‬‬ ‫ُم ْف َرد‬ ‫ُم ْف َرد‪َ ،‬ج ْمع‬
‫ف ِص َلة‬
‫َح ْر ُ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫مِ ْن‬
‫ك َْم َت ْم َرة ‪َ /‬ت َم َرات َأ َك ْل َت!‬

‫ك َْم َت ْم َر ًة َأ َك ْل َت؟‬
‫ك َْم مِ ْن َت ْم َرة ‪َ /‬ت َم َرات َأ َك ْل َت!‬
‫‪Example‬‬
‫‪Meaning‬‬ ‫?‪How many dates did you eat‬‬

‫‪Translate the following. Ensure you differentiate between the two‬‬
‫‪.‬ك َْم ‪types of‬‬
‫الصبِ ُّي‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪ )6‬ك َْم ِعنْدَ َك مِ ْن َق َلم‬ ‫ك َْم َق َل ًما ِعنْدَ َك‬
‫ك َْم ُس ْو َرة َحف َظ ٰه َذا َّ‬ ‫‪)11‬‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪ )7‬ك َْم إِ ٰل ًها َي ْع ُبدُ ْو َن‬ ‫ك َْم َق َلم ِعنْدَ َك‬
‫ب‬ ‫ك َْم ُس َور نَس َي ٰه َذا ال َّطال ُ‬ ‫‪)12‬‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫ب مِ ْن ُكتُب‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ك َْم َق َر َأ ٰه َذا ال َّطال ُ‬ ‫‪)13‬‬ ‫‪ )8‬ك َْم مِ ْن آل ِ َهة َي ْع ُبدُ ْو َن‬ ‫ك َْم َأ ْق ََّلم ِعنْدَ َك‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫ك َْم كِتَا ًبا َح ِف َظ ْت ٰه ِذ ِه ا ْل َم ْر َأ ُة‬ ‫‪)14‬‬ ‫الس ْو َر ِة‬ ‫ِ ِِ‬
‫‪ )9‬ك َْم آ َي ًة في ٰهذه ُّ‬ ‫ك َْم مِ ْن َأ ْق ََّلم ِعنْدَ َك‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫ك َْم مِ ْن كِتَاب َح ِف َظ ْت ٰه ِذ ِه ا ْل َم ْر َأ ُة‬ ‫‪)15‬‬ ‫‪ )10‬ك َْم آ َي ًة َح ِف َظ ٰه َذا ال ِّط ْف ُل‬ ‫ك َْم مِ ْن َق َلم ِعنْدَ َك‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫ج ِد!‬ ‫‪ )7‬ك َْم ِر َجال فِي ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬ ‫‪ )1‬ك َْم ُمنَافِق فِ ْینَا!‬
‫‪ )8‬ك َْم مِ ْن َو َلد َقت ََل فِ ْرع َْو ُن!‬ ‫ك َْم َماء َت ْش َر ُب!‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫‪ )9‬ك َْم َص ْف َحة َت ْق َرئِ ْی َن ك َُّل َي ْوم!‬ ‫ك َْم مِ ْن َمال َأ ْس َر ُف ْوا!‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫‪ )10‬ك َْم َأ َری فِي َب ْیتِ َك مِ ْن ُض ُی ْوف!‬ ‫ب ا ْل ِع ْل ِم!‬‫ك َْم َأ ْجر ل ِ َطال ِ ِ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫ان ا ْل ُم َب َار ِك!‬‫‪ )11‬ك َْم مِن َب َركَة فِي َش ْه ِر َر َم َض َ‬ ‫ك َْم ْاشت ََر ْي َت مِ ْن ُكتُب!‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫الر ُج ُل ا ْل َك ِر ْي ُم!‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ك َْم مِ ْن َج َبل َص ِعد ُّت َما!‬
‫‪ )12‬ك َْم م ْن ُض َع َفا َء ن ََص َر ٰه َذا َّ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫‪382‬‬
Part 2: Emphatic Phrases
In a sentence, to emphasise a certain point, the speaker may add
stress or importance using emphatic phrases.
I wrote it myself. Hurry! Hurry! All the students came.
Introduction to ‫َت ْأكِ ْید‬
In Arabic, emphasis is called ‫ َت ْأكِ ْید‬.
Nouns, adjectives, verbs and particles can all be emphasised for
various reasons.
Emphasising the Noun
A noun can be emphasised for two reasons:
1. To specify that the noun itself is intended.
Ahmad built the desks.
This sentence carries two possibilities:
a) He built the desks himself using a saw, screws, and paint.
b) He had them built by a carpenter.
Adding an emphatic pronoun removes the second possibility.
Ahmad built the desks himself.
2. To quantify parts or members of a noun.
I saw all the students.
I read the rest of the book.
Emphasising the Adjective
An adjective is emphasised to intensify its meaning.
The water is extremely hot.
Emphasising the Verb
A verb is emphasised to show the certainty of its occurrence.
Zaid definitely went.
Emphasising the Particle
A particle is emphasised to intensify its meaning.
I will definitely not backbite anyone.
383
The table below summarises the different purposes of ‫ َت ْأكِ ْید‬.
Type of
Noun Adjective Verb Particle
Word
Purpose Emphatic-
of Pronoun Intensifier Certainty Intensifier
Emphasis Quantifier
Arabic Structures of Emphasis

Two Arabic structures are used to create ‫ َت ْأكِ ْید‬:
1. ‫ َت ْأكِ ْید َل ْفظِي‬: repeating the word to be emphasised,
2. ‫ َت ْأكِ ْید َم ْعن َِوي‬: using words specifically created for emphasis.
384
‫َت ْأكِ ْید َل ْفظِي‬
‫ َت ْأكِ ْید َل ْفظِي‬is a word which has been repeated to create emphasis.
‫َجا َء زَ ْيد زَ ْيد‬
In this example, repeating the word ‫ زَ ْيد‬emphasises the point that
‫ زَ ْيد‬came, not anyone else.
Rules of Emphasis Phrases
The word being emphasised is called ‫ ُمؤَ كَّد‬, and the word creating
the emphasis is called ‫ َت ْأكِ ْید‬.
The ‫ ُمؤَ كَّد‬and ‫ َت ْأكِ ْید‬must agree in irab. Together, they form a phrase
which becomes a slot in the main sentence.
ِ ‫َف‬
‫زَ ْيد‬ ‫زَ ْيد‬ ‫َجا َء‬
‫َت ْأ ِك ْید‬ ‫ُمؤَ كَّد‬
385
‫ َت ْأكِ ْید َل ْفظِي‬of a Noun
If the ‫ َت ْأكِ ْید َل ْفظِي‬is a noun, it will function as an emphatic pronoun, i.e.
himself, myself, yourself, etc.
Translation of the ‫ َت ْأكِ ْید َل ْفظِي‬of a Noun
In Arabic, a ‫ َت ْأكِ ْید َل ْفظِي‬is formed by repetition. However, in English,
the ‫ َت ْأكِ ْید َل ْفظِي‬can be translated in various ways:
1. Using an emphatic pronoun.
Zaid himself came.
2. Using words such as only and alone.
Only Zaid came.
3. Adding an adjective before the noun.
Zaid is a great scholar.
4. Using other structures which show emphasis.
It was Zaid who came.
5. Underlining the emphasised word.
Zaid came.
Exercise 1
‫اِ ْر َح ُم َّن ا ْل َیتَا ٰمی ا ْل َیتَا ٰمی‬ )6 ‫) اِ ْف َع ُلوا ا ْل َخ ْی َر ا ْل َخ ْی َر‬1
‫َن ْبت َِغي َأ ْج َر ْاْل ِخ َر ِة ْاْل ِخ َر ِة‬ )7 ُ ‫) ا ْل ُق ْر‬2
‫آن ُب ْر َهان ُب ْر َهان‬
‫الل َي ْس َت ِع ْی ُن ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن‬
َ ‫الل‬َ )8 ُ ‫الش ْی َط‬
‫ان عَدُ و عَدُ و‬ َّ )3
‫الر ُج ُل‬ ِ ِ ‫ار َح َة ا ْل َب‬ِ ‫ا ْل َب‬
َّ ‫ار َح َة ُقت َل‬ )9 ‫) ا ْل َخ ْم ُر َح َرام َح َرام‬4
ِ ‫) ال َّظالِمون ال َّظالِمو َن َخ‬10
‫اس ُر ْو َن‬ ‫) ر َأ ْي ُت َفاطِ َم َة َفاطِ َم َة‬5
ُْ ُْ
Exercise 2
Add a ‫ َت ْأكِ ْید َل ْفظِي‬to the underlined noun.
ِ ‫) ُت‬7
‫ح ِّب ْی َن ال َّل ْح َم‬ ‫) فِي ا ْلغ ُْر َف ِة َأ َسد‬4 ‫الل ن َِص ْیر‬
ُ )1
‫َب ِح َم ًارا‬ ُ ‫) َسن َْرك‬8 َّ ‫) َْل َتت ُْركُوا‬5
‫الص ََّل َة‬ ‫) اِغ ِْسلِ ْي ا ْل َو ْج َه‬2
‫ب مِ َن النَّافِ َذ ِة‬ ُ ‫) َد َخ َل ا ْل َك ْل‬9 َ ‫) َه ْل َس ِم ْعت ُُم ْاْلَ َذ‬6
‫ان‬ ِ ‫اف ا ْلج‬
‫ح ْی َم‬ َ ُ ‫َخ‬ َ ‫) ن‬3
386
‫‪َ of an Adjective‬ت ْأكِ ْید َل ْفظِي‬
‫‪َ is an adjective, it functions as an intensifier. This can‬ت ْأكِ ْید َل ْفظِي ‪If the‬‬
‫‪be translated using words such as very, extremely, etc. It can also‬‬
‫‪be translated as a word with an intensive meaning.‬‬
‫َا ْل َما ُء َحار َحار‬
‫‪The water is extremely hot.‬‬
‫‪The water is scalding.‬‬
‫اب ْاْل ِخ َر ِة َأل ِ ْیم َأل ِ ْیم‬ ‫‪َ )7‬ل َع َذ ُ‬ ‫‪َ )1‬أع َْما ُلنَا َقلِ ْی َلة َقلِ ْی َلة‬
‫‪ٰ )8‬هؤُ َْل ِء ْاْلَ ْو َْل ُد ُع َق ََّل ُء ُع َق ََّل ُء‬ ‫ت َق ِر ْيب َق ِر ْيب‬ ‫‪ )2‬ا ْل َم ْو ُ‬
‫اس ُر ْو َن‬ ‫اسرو َن َخ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ات ا ْل ُقر ِ‬
‫آن ُمبِ ْینَة ُمبِ ْینَة‬
‫‪ )9‬ال َّظال ُم ْو َن َخ ُ ْ‬ ‫‪ )3‬آ َي ُ ْ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ان َل َر ِج ْیم َر ِج ْیم‬ ‫‪ )4‬إِ َّن َّ‬
‫ص‬ ‫ص ا ْل َخال َ‬ ‫‪َ )10‬ش ِر ْبنَا َل َب َن ا ْل َب َق َرة ا ْل َخال َ‬ ‫الش ْی َط َ‬
‫َان ُم َح َّمد َر ُس ْو ُل اللِ ﷺ َأمِ ْینًا َأمِ ْینًا‬ ‫‪ )11‬ك َ‬ ‫اهل ج ِ‬
‫اهل‬ ‫َ‬
‫‪ٰ )5‬ه َذا الرج ُل ج ِ‬
‫َّ ُ َ‬
‫ج َب َال َح ْو َل ا ْل َق ْر َي ِة َج ِم ْی َلة َج ِم ْی َلة‬ ‫‪ )12‬إِ َّن ا ْل ِ‬ ‫‪ )6‬ا ْل ُم َّت ُق ْو َن ُم ْفلِ ُح ْو َن ُم ْفلِ ُح ْو َن‬
‫‪َ to the underlined adjective.‬ت ْأكِ ْید َل ْفظِي ‪Add a‬‬
‫‪ )9‬اِ ْشت ََر ْيت َُّن َث ْو ًبا َج ِد ْيدً ا‬ ‫ب َأ ْس َو ُد‬
‫‪َ )5‬ا ْل َك ْل ُ‬ ‫رآن ُمبِ ْین‬
‫‪َ )1‬ا ْل ُق ُ‬
‫اب ْاْل ِخ َر ِة َأل ِ ْیم‬ ‫‪ )10‬إِ َّن ع ََذ َ‬ ‫‪ْ )6‬اْلَ ْعن ُ‬
‫َاب ُح ْل َوة‬ ‫‪ )2‬ا ْل َم ْی َت ُة َح َرام‬
‫َادل ِ ْی َن‬
‫‪ )11‬ر َأينَا ُق َضا ًة ع ِ‬
‫َ ْ‬ ‫‪َ )7‬ا ْْلَع َْم ُال َم ْق ُب ْو َلة‬ ‫ت َق ِر ْيب‬‫‪َ )3‬ا ْل َم ْو ُ‬
‫الر ِج ْی ِم‬ ‫ِ‬
‫الش ْی َطان َّ‬ ‫‪َ )12‬ن ُع ْو ُذ بِاللِ مِ َن َّ‬ ‫اشدُ ْو َن‬ ‫‪َ )8‬الصحاب ُة ر ِ‬
‫َّ َ َ َ‬ ‫ف َو ِسخ‬ ‫لس ْی ُ‬‫‪َ )4‬ا َّ‬
‫‪387‬‬
‫‪َ of a Verb‬ت ْأكِ ْید َل ْفظِي‬
‫‪َ is a verb, it is translated using the emphatic do,‬ت ْأكِ ْید َل ْفظِي ‪If the‬‬
‫)‪certainly, indeed, etc. (see page 112‬‬
‫ب َذ َه َ‬
‫ب زَ ْيد‬ ‫َذ َه َ‬
‫‪Zaid did go.‬‬ ‫‪Indeed, Zaid went. Certainly, Zaid went.‬‬
‫‪َ is written as follows:‬ت ْأكِ ْید َل ْفظي ‪The tarkib of such a‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫َف ِ‬
‫زَ ْيد‬ ‫َذ َه َ‬

‫ب‬ ‫َذ َه َ‬
‫ب‬
‫َت ْأكِ ْید‬ ‫ُمؤَ كَّد‬
‫َّاس؟‬ ‫‪َ )7‬أ َت ْخدَ ع ُْو َن َت ْخدَ ع ُْو َن الن َ‬ ‫‪ )1‬ك ََذ َب ك ََذ َب َخالِد‬
‫الل ا ْل ِع َبا َد‬
‫ب ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ب ُي َحاس ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪ُ )8‬ي َحاس ُ‬ ‫‪ )2‬اِ ْس َت ْی ِق ْظ اِ ْس َت ْی ِق ْظ َق ْب َل ا ْل َف ْج ِر‬
‫ان َول ِ ًّیا‬ ‫َّخ ِذ َّ‬
‫الش ْی َط َ‬ ‫َّخ ْذ َْل َتت ِ‬
‫‪َْ )9‬ل َتت ِ‬ ‫اجت َِهدْ فِي ا ْل ِع ْل ِم‬ ‫اجت َِهدْ ْ‬ ‫‪ْ )3‬‬
‫الل الن ََّار َع َلی ا ْل ُمت َِّق ْی َن‬
‫‪َ )10‬ح َّر َم َح َّر َم ُ‬ ‫دت َق َل َم َك‬ ‫دت َو َج ُّ‬ ‫‪َ )4‬و َج ُّ‬
‫‪َ )11‬أ ْس ِر ْع َأ ْس ِر ْع إِ َلی ا ْل َخ ْی ِر َْل إِ َلی َّ‬
‫الش ِّر‬ ‫الل ال َّظال ِ ِم ْی َن‬
‫‪َ )5‬ي ْل َع ُن َي ْل َع ُن ُ‬
‫الل َع َلی نِ َع ِم ِه ا ْل َعظِ ْی َم ِة‬
‫‪ )12‬ن َْش ُك ُر ن َْش ُك ُر َ‬ ‫اك َع َلی َن ْف ِس َك‬ ‫‪ )6‬آثِ ْر آثِ ْر َأ َخ َ‬
‫‪َ to the underlined verb.‬ت ْأكِ ْید َل ْفظِي ‪Add a‬‬
‫‪ )7‬اِ ْن َك َس َر ك ُْر ِس ُّي ا ْل ُم َع ِّل ِم‬ ‫‪َْ )4‬ل َت ْظلِ ْم َأ َحدً ا‬ ‫‪َ )1‬ح ِز َن ا ْل َجدُّ‬
‫‪َ )8‬ص ِعدُ ْوا ٰه َذا ا ْل َج َب َل ا ْل َعظِ ْی َم‬ ‫‪ُ )5‬ا ْصدُ ُق ْوا ا ْل َح ِد ْي َث‬ ‫ت ا ْل ِفت َُن‬‫‪َ )2‬ك ُثر ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫الر َج ِ‬
‫ال‬ ‫ب َع َلی ِّ‬ ‫الل َّ‬
‫الذ َه َ‬ ‫‪َ )9‬ح َّر َم ُ‬ ‫‪َْ )6‬ل ُت ْس ِر ْع فِي ا ْل َك ََّل ِم‬ ‫‪َ )3‬ي ُج ْو ُع ا ْل ُف َق َرا ُء‬
‫‪Note‬‬
‫‪We have previously studied ways in which verbs can be‬‬
‫‪َ .‬ل ْن ‪َْ and‬ل ُم اْل ْبتِدَ ِاء ‪َ ,‬ل َقدْ ‪َ ,‬قدْ ‪emphasised, such as‬‬
‫‪388‬‬
‫ َت ْأكِ ْید َل ْفظِي‬of a Particle
A particle can also have a ‫ َت ْأكِ ْید َل ْفظِي‬.
‫َاب َأ َحدً ا‬
ُ ‫َْل َْل َأ ْغت‬
I will definitely not backbite anyone
‫إِ َّن إِ َّن زَ ْيدً ا َقائِم‬
Surely, Zaid is standing.
Summary
Type of
Noun Adjective Verb Particle
Word
‫َاب َأ َحدً ا‬
ُ ‫َْل َْل َأ ْغت‬
‫َجا َء زَ ْيد زَ ْيد‬ ‫َا ْل َما ُء َحار َحار‬ َ ‫ب َذ َه‬
‫ب زَ ْيد‬ َ ‫َذ َه‬
‫إِ َّن إِ َّن زَ ْيدً ا َقائِم‬
Example
389
‫َت ْأكِ ْید َم ْعن َِوي‬
‫‪َ are specific Arabic words coined to create emphasis.‬ت ْأكِ ْید َم ْعن َِوي‬
‫‪َ :‬ت ْأكِ ْید َم ْعن َِوي ‪There are two types of‬‬
‫‪1. Emphatic pronoun‬‬
‫‪2. Quantifier‬‬
‫‪َ as an Emphatic Pronoun‬ت ْأكِ ْید َم ْعن َِوي‬
‫‪َ are used as emphatic pronouns:‬ت ْأكِ ْید ‪The following two words of‬‬
‫َن ْفس ‪1.‬‬
‫َع ْین ‪2.‬‬
‫‪ُ .‬مؤَ كَّد ‪ُ to the pronoun of the‬م َضاف ‪These words become‬‬
‫َجا َء ا ْل َملِ ُك َع ْینُ ُه‬ ‫َجا َء ا ْل َملِ ُك َن ْف ُس ُه‬
‫‪The king himself came.‬‬
‫َف ِ‬
‫ـ ُه‬ ‫َن ْف ُسـ‬ ‫ا ْل َملِ ُك‬ ‫َجا َء‬

‫‪Note‬‬
‫‪َ is used as an emphatic pronoun, it serves the‬ت ْأكِ ْید َم ْعن َِوي ‪When a‬‬
‫‪َ .‬ت ْأكِ ْید َل ْفظِي ‪same purpose as a‬‬
‫َجا َء ا ْل َملِ ُك ا ْل َملِ ُك‬ ‫َجا َء ا ْل َملِ ُك َن ْف ُس ُه‬
‫‪َ )6‬بنَی النَّبِ ُّي ن ُْوح َع ْینُ ُه َس ِف ْینَ ًة ل ِ ْل ُمؤْ مِن ِ ْی َن‬ ‫‪ٰ )1‬ه َذا َما ُء زَ ْمزَ َم َن ْف ِس ِه‬
‫ت ا ْل َب ِ‬ ‫َان ا ْلمی ُت َعینُه فِي ا ْلبی ِ‬ ‫‪َ )2‬أ َه َذا َأ ُخ ْو َك َن ْف ُس ُه؟‬
‫ار َح َة‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫ْ ُ‬ ‫‪ )7‬ك َ َ ِّ‬
‫الض َع َفا َء َوا ْل َم َساكِ ْی َن‬ ‫‪َ )8‬ين ُْص ُر ا ْل َملِ ُك َع ْینُ ُه ُّ‬ ‫‪َ )3‬ي ْس َم ُع ا ْل ُم َع ِّل ُم َع ْینُ ُه الدَّ ْر َس‬
‫‪ُ )9‬ي ْعطِ ْي ٰه َذا ا ْلغَن ِ ُّي َن ْف ُس ُه ا ْل ُف َق َرا َء َم ًاْل َو َط َعا ًما‬ ‫اج َأ ْن ُف ُس ُه ْم‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ٰ )4‬هؤُ َْلء ُه ُم ا ْل ُح َّج ُ‬
‫ج ِد ٰه ِذ ِه ا ْل ُج ُم َع َة‬ ‫‪َ )10‬جا َء ا ْل َملِ ُك َن ْف ُس ُه إِ َلی ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬ ‫ج ِد ا ْل َح َرا ِم َن ْف َس ُه‬‫‪َ )5‬ر َأ ْي ُت إِ َما َم ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬
‫‪390‬‬
‫‪Note‬‬
‫‪If the word being emphasised is dual or plural, the plural forms of‬‬
‫‪َ , are used.‬أ ْع ُین ‪َ , i.e.‬ع ْین ‪َ , and‬أ ْن ُفس ‪َ , i.e.‬ن ْفس‬
‫َجا َء ا ْل ُم ُل ْو ُك َأ ْن ُف ُس ُه ْم‬ ‫جاء ْالملِ َك ِ‬
‫ان َأ ْن ُف ُس ُه َما‬ ‫َ َ َ‬
‫َجا َء ا ْل ُم ُل ْو ُك َأ ْع ُینُ ُه ْم‬ ‫جاء ْالملِ َك ِ‬
‫ان َأ ْع ُینُ ُه َما‬ ‫َ َ َ‬
‫َْل ُينْبِ ُت ا ْل َف ََّّل ُح ْو َن َأ ْن ُف ُس ُه ُم ْاْلَ ْث َم َار‬ ‫‪)5‬‬ ‫ت ْاْلَمِیر ِ‬
‫ان َأ ْن ُف ُس ُه َما‬ ‫‪َ )1‬لم ي ْأ ِ‬
‫َْ‬ ‫ْ َ‬
‫ان َأ ْن ُف ُس ُه َما ُف َق َرا َء ا ْل َق ْر َي ِة‬
‫َّاجر ِ‬
‫ُي ْطع ُم الت ِ َ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬ ‫ف‬ ‫‪َ )2‬أ َخ َذ ْاْلَ ْط َف ُال َأ ْن ُف ُس ُه ُم ُّ‬
‫الس ُی ْو َ‬
‫الشیو ُخ َأ ْن ُفسهم ا ْلكِتَاب مِن ا ْل ُق َض ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫اة‬ ‫َ َ‬ ‫ُ ُ ْ‬ ‫ب ُّ ُ ْ‬ ‫َط َل َ‬ ‫‪)7‬‬ ‫َب ا ْل ُق َضا ُة َأ ْن ُف ُس ُه ْم ٰه َذا ا ْلكت َ‬
‫َاب‬ ‫‪َ )3‬كت َ‬
‫جدَ النَّبِ ِّي ﷺ‬ ‫الر ُس ْو ُل ﷺ َو َأ ْص َحا ُب ُه َأ ْن ُف ُس ُه ْم َم ْس ِ‬ ‫َبنَی َّ‬ ‫‪)8‬‬ ‫اب َأ ْن ُف ُس ُه ْم تِ ْل َك َّ‬
‫الش َج َر َة‬ ‫‪َ )4‬ق َط َع َّ‬
‫الش َب ُ‬
‫‪391‬‬
‫ َن ْفس‬as a ‫ َت ْأكِ ْید َم ْعن َِوي‬and a Reflexive Pronoun
The word ‫ َن ْفس‬can be used as a reflexive pronoun or emphatic
pronoun, i.e. ‫ َت ْأكِ ْید َم ْعن َِوي‬.
1. When ‫ َن ْفس‬agrees with the irab of the word it is emphasising, it is
an emphatic phrase.
2. When ‫ َن ْفس‬is the ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬while its ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬refers to the ‫اعل‬
ِ ‫ َف‬, it is a
reflexive pronoun.
َّ ‫َر َأ ْي ُت‬
‫الر ُج َل َن ْف َس ُه‬
I saw the man himself.
In this example, the word ‫ َن ْفس‬emphasises the word before it,
because in irab it agrees with that word.
The man saw himself.
In this example, the word ‫ َن ْفس‬is a reflexive pronoun because it is
the ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬, while its ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬refers to the ‫اعل‬
ِ ‫ َف‬.
Exercise 9
ِ ‫) عَدَ َل ا ْل َق‬5
‫اض ْي َع ْینُ ُه‬ ِ ْ ‫) َس ِم َع‬1
‫اإل َما ُم َن ْف ُس ُه‬
‫اب َن ْف ُس َها ِر ْجس‬
ُ ‫) ْاْلَن َْص‬6 ِ ْ ‫) َر َأ ْي ُت‬2
‫اإل َما َم َن ْف َس ُه‬
‫الصن ََم َن ْف َس ُه‬
َّ ‫َّاس َه َذا‬ ُ ‫) َي ْع ُبدُ الن‬7 ِ ْ ‫) َجا َء‬3
‫اإل َما ُم َن ْف ُس ُه‬
‫) َْل َت ْملِ ُك ٰه ِذ ِه ْاْلَ ْصنَا ُم ِْلَ ْن ُف ِس َها َش ْیئًا‬8 ‫اض ْي َن ْف َس ُه‬ ِ ‫) َظ َلم ا ْل َق‬4
َ
Different Uses of ‫َن ْفس‬

‫َن ْفس‬
Agree in Irab with ‫ َمن ُْص ْوب‬, and ‫ ُم َضاف‬to

pronoun of the ‫اعل‬ ِ ‫َف‬
previous word
َّ ‫َر َأ ْي ُت‬
‫الر ُج َل َن ْف َس ُه‬ َّ ‫َر َأی‬
392
‫ َت ْأكِ ْید َم ْعن َِوي‬as a Quantifier
A quantifier indicates the amount or quantity of a noun. When a
‫ َت ْأكِ ْید َم ْعن َِوي‬is used as a quantifier, it indicates the number of members
or parts of something.
I saw all the students.
I read the rest of the book.
There are two types of quantifiers:
1. Inclusive quantifiers: these emphasise the inclusion of every
member or part of something, e.g. all, both, etc.
2. Non-Inclusive quantifiers: these denote quantities that do not
include every member or part of something, e.g some, rest of,
remainder, etc.
Inclusive Quantifiers
The following four words are used as inclusive quantifiers:
1. ‫ كِ ََّل‬and ‫كِ ْلتَا‬
2. ‫كُل‬
3. ‫َج ِم ْیع‬
4. ‫َأ ْج َم ُع‬
These words can be used in ‫ َت َأكِ ْید‬-‫ ُمؤَ كَّد‬structures, or they can be
direct slots.
393
‫‪ُ Structure:‬مؤَ كَّد‪َ -‬ت ْأكِ ْید ‪Quantifiers In a‬‬
‫كِ ْلتَا ‪ and‬كِ ََّل‬
‫‪ُ . These‬م َثنًّی ‪, are used to quantify duals,‬كِ ْلتَا ‪ and its feminine form,‬كِ ََّل‬
‫‪are translated as both.‬‬
‫‪ُ .‬مؤَ كَّد ‪ُ to the pronoun of the‬م َضاف ‪They become‬‬
‫َان كِ ْلتَا ُه َما‬
‫ت ا ْلبِنْت ِ‬
‫جاء ِ‬
‫َ َ‬ ‫ان كِ ََّل ُه َما‬
‫جاء ا ْلو َلدَ ِ‬
‫َ َ َ‬
‫‪Both the girls came.‬‬ ‫‪Both the boys came.‬‬
‫‪The tarkib of these are written as follows:‬‬
‫َف ِ‬
‫ُه َما‬ ‫كِ ََّل‬ ‫ا ْلو َلدَ ِ‬

‫ان‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َجا َء‬
‫‪Note‬‬
‫َم ْج ُر ْور ‪َ and‬من ُْص ْوب ‪ُ noun, i.e. in the‬م َثنًّی ‪These words have the irab of a‬‬
‫‪.‬كِ ْلت َْي ‪ and‬كِ َل ْي ‪state they will become‬‬
‫ت إِ َلی ا ْلبِنْ َت ْی ِن كِ ْل َت ْی ِه َما‬
‫َن َظ ْر ُ‬ ‫َر َأ ْي ُت ا ْل َو َلدَ ْي ِن كِ َل ْی ِه َما‬
‫‪I looked at both the girls.‬‬ ‫‪I saw both the boys.‬‬
‫‪ )8‬إِ َّن ا ْل ُكوبی ِن كِ َلی ِهما مم ُلوء ِ‬
‫ان َما ًء‬ ‫ان كِ ََّل ُه َما‬ ‫جاء ْاْلَمِیر ِ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫ْ َ َْ ْ َ‬ ‫ْ َْ‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫َ َ‬
‫‪ )9‬درسا َه َذا ا ْلم ِع ِّل ِم كِ ََّل ُهما ي ِسیر ِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫َر َأ ْينَا ْاْلَ َسدَ ْي ِن كِ َل ْی ِه َما‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫َ َ َْ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫َْ َ‬
‫ض‬‫َان كِ ََّل ُه َما َع َلی ْاْلَ ْر ِ‬ ‫‪ )10‬س َق َط الس ِّكین ِ‬
‫ِّ ْ‬ ‫َ‬
‫ان كِ ََّل ُهما م ْغ َل َق ِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫َ ُ‬
‫ا ْلباب ِ‬
‫َ َ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫‪َ )11‬ي ُك ْو ُن ا ْل ُم ْبتَدَ ُأ َوا ْل َخ َب ُر كِ ََّل ُه َما َم ْر ُف ْو َع ْی ِن‬ ‫الر َّما َن َت ْی ِن كِ ْل َت ْی ِه َما‬
‫َأ َك ْل َن ُّ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫ان َشاكِر ِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫‪ )12‬إِ َّن َأبا َخالِد و ُأمه كِ َلی ِهما َشاكِر ِ‬ ‫َت ْص َعدْ َن ا ْل َج َب َل ْی ِن كِ َل ْی ِه َما‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ َّ ْ َ‬ ‫َ‬
‫احد‬‫ات الرج ُل وزَ وج ُته كِ ََّل ُهما فِي يوم و ِ‬ ‫َلن ُْح ِسنَ َّن إِ َلی ْاْلَ َب َو ْي ِن كِ َل ْی ِه َما‬
‫َْ َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫‪َ )13‬م َ َّ ُ َ ْ َ ُ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫الس ْو َر َت ْی ِن ال َّط ِو ْي َل َت ْی ِن ِك ْل َت ْی ِه َما ِفي ِع ْش ِر ْي َن َي ْو ًما‬ ‫ِ ِ‬
‫‪َ )14‬حف َظت ال ِبن ُْت ُّ‬ ‫َّاج ُر َب ْی َت ُه َو َأ ْر َض ُه كِ َل ْی ِه َما‬ ‫اع الت ِ‬ ‫َب َ‬ ‫‪)7‬‬
‫‪394‬‬
‫كُل‬
‫‪ is used to quantify singular or plural nouns.‬كُل ‪The word‬‬
‫‪It can be translated as all, every, each or entire, depending on the‬‬
‫‪context.‬‬
‫‪ُ , the word it is‬مؤَ كَّد ‪ُ to the pronoun of the‬م َضاف ‪It becomes‬‬
‫‪quantifying.‬‬
‫َاب ُك ِّل ِه﴾‬
‫ُون بِا ْلكِت ِ‬
‫﴿ ُتؤْ مِن َ‬ ‫﴿ َس َجدَ ا ْل َم ََّلئِ َك ُة ُك ُّل ُه ْم﴾‬
‫‪You believe in the entire book.‬‬ ‫‪All the angels prostrated.‬‬
‫َف ِ‬
‫ُه ْم‬ ‫ك ُُّل‬ ‫ا ْل َم ََّلئِ َك ُة‬ ‫َس َجدَ‬

‫‪ )9‬إِ َّن َّ‬
‫الص َحا َب َة ُك َّل ُه ْم َل ُم ْهتَدُ ْو َن‬ ‫اج ُك ُّل ُه ْم‬
‫‪َ )5‬ل َقدْ َر َج َع ا ْل ُح َّج ُ‬ ‫َاب ال ُّط ََّّل ُب ُك ُّل ُه ْم‬‫غ َ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫َان ا ْل َك ْأ ُس ُك ُّل ُه َم ْم ُل ْو ًء َما ًء‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ان ُك َّل ُه‬
‫‪َْ )10‬ل َي ُص ْو ُم ا ْل َم ْر َضی َر َم َض َ‬ ‫‪ )6‬ك َ‬ ‫الص َحا َب َة ُك َّل ُه ْم‬‫ب َّ‬ ‫ُأح ُّ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫اْلن َْص ُار كُ ُّل ُه ْم َر ِاشدُ ْو َن‬ ‫‪َ )11‬ا ْل ُم َه ِ‬
‫اج ُر ْو َن َو ْ َ‬ ‫‪َ )7‬ل َی ْح ُض َر َّن ا ْل ُم َع ِّل ُم ْو َن ُك ُّل ُه ْم‬ ‫َات ُك ُّل ُه َّن‬ ‫ت ا ْل َبن ُ‬ ‫م ِر َض ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫الر َج ُال َل ْی َل َة ا ْل َقدْ ِر كُ َّل َها َذ ِاك ِر ْي َن‬
‫‪َ )12‬م َضی ِّ‬ ‫اس ُر ْو َن‬ ‫‪ )8‬ا ْلمنَافِ ُقو َن ُك ُّلهم َخ ِ‬
‫ُ ْ‬ ‫ُ ْ‬ ‫َاب ُك َّل ُه‬ ‫َل َقدْ َقر ْأ ُ ِ‬
‫ت ا ْلكت َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫‪ to‬ك ُُّل ‪ or‬كِ ْلتَا ‪,‬كِ ََّل ‪Rewrite the following sentences by adding either‬‬
‫‪emphasise the underlined words.‬‬
‫ات‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ذبح ا ْل َف ََّّلحو َن ا ْلب َقر ِ‬ ‫‪ )1‬ن َْحت َِر ُم َأ َساتِ َذ َتنَا‬
‫ُ ْ َ َ‬ ‫ََ‬
‫ح ْی َح ًة‬ ‫ت ْاْلَج ِوب ُة ص ِ‬ ‫‪َ )7‬لیس ِ‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ر َأ ْينَا ا ْلغ ُْر َف َت ْی ِن‬
‫ْ َ َ‬ ‫َْ‬
‫َت ا ْلح ِدي َقت ِ‬
‫َان َكبِ ْی َر َت ْی ِن‬ ‫‪ )8‬كَان ِ‬ ‫‪ )3‬س َق َط الس ِّكین ِ‬
‫َان‬
‫َ ْ‬ ‫ِّ ْ‬ ‫َ‬
‫الص ِغ ْی َر ُة ا ْل ُخ ْبزَ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )9‬ل َقدْ َأ َك َلت ال ِّط ْف َل ُة َّ‬
‫‪ )4‬إِ َّن ا ْلب َلدَ ي ِن ب ِعیدَ ِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫َ ْ َ ْ‬
‫‪ )10‬يص ِّلي ٰهؤُ َْل ِء ا ْلیتَامی الص َلو ِ‬
‫ات ا ْل َخ ْم َس‬ ‫الس ْی َف ْی ِن‬ ‫‪َ )5‬أ َخ َذ َّ‬
‫َّ َ‬ ‫َ َ‬ ‫ُ َ‬ ‫اب َّ‬
‫الش ُّ‬
‫‪395‬‬
‫َج ِم ْیع‬
‫‪َ is used to quantify singular and plural nouns.‬ج ِم ْیع ‪The word‬‬
‫‪ُ , the word it is‬مؤَ كَّد ‪ُ to the pronoun of the‬م َضاف ‪This becomes‬‬
‫‪quantifying.‬‬
‫‪When the noun being quantified is singular, it can be translated as‬‬
‫‪entire.‬‬
‫آن َج ِم ْی َع ُه فِي َش ْه ِر َر َم َض َ‬
‫ان‬ ‫َق َر ْأ ُ‬
‫ت ا ْل ُق ْر َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪I read the entire Quran in Ramadhan.‬‬
‫‪When the noun being quantified is plural, it can be translated as‬‬
‫‪all.‬‬
‫الر َج ُال َج ِم ْی ُع ُه ْم‬
‫َجا َء ِّ‬
‫‪All the men came.‬‬
‫َف ِ‬
‫ُه ْم‬ ‫َج ِم ْی ُع‬ ‫الر َج ُال‬

‫ِّ‬ ‫َجا َء‬
‫‪َ )7‬ي ْجت َِهدُ َهؤُ َْل ِء ال ُّط ََّّل ُب َج ِم ْی ُع ُه ْم‬ ‫َاب َج ِم ْی َع ُه‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َحف ْظ ُت ا ْلكت َ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫اب ٰه َذ ْي ِن ال ِّط ْف َل ْی ِن َج ِم ْی ُع َها َو ِس َخة‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ )8‬ث َی ُ‬ ‫ٰه ِذ ِه ْاْلَ َّيا ُم َج ِم ْی ُع َها ُم َب َاركَة‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫اجدُ كَثِ ْی َرة كَثِ ْی َرة‬‫‪ )9‬فِي ٰه ِذ ِه ا ْل ُق َری َج ِم ْی ِع َها َم َس ِ‬ ‫اح َش َج ِم ْی َع َها‬ ‫حرم الل ا ْل َفو ِ‬
‫َ َّ َ ُ َ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫الشباب ج ِمیعهم الص َلو ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫َفا َق ْت عَائِ َش ُة َأ ْق َران ََها َج ِم ْی َع ُه َّن‬
‫ات ا ْل َخ ْم َس‬ ‫‪ُ )10‬ي َص ِّل ْي ُأو َلئ َك َّ َ ُ َ ْ ُ ُ ُ َّ َ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫َّاس ٰه ِذ ِه ا ْل َم َصا ِئ ُب َج ِم ْی ُع َها ِم ْن َأ ْجلِ ُذن ُْو ِب ِه ْم‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )11‬أ َصا َبت الن َ‬ ‫ٰه ِذ ِه الت ََّماثِ ْی ُل َج ِم ْی ُع َها ِح َج َارة‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫‪ )12‬آ َم َن َأ ْه ُل َأبِ ْي َب ْكر َج ِم ْی ُع ُه ْم َأ َب َوا ُه َوزَ ْو ُج ُه َو َأ ْو َْل ُد ُه‬ ‫َّاس َج ِم ْی َع ُه ْم َس َوا ًء‬ ‫َخ َل َق َر ُّبنَا الن َ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫‪396‬‬
‫َأ ْج َم ُع‬
The word ‫ َأ ْج َم ُع‬is used to quantify singular and plural nouns.
However, ‫ َأ ْج َم ُع‬differs from the other quantifiers in three ways:
1. It has feminine and plural forms, as follows:
‫ُمؤَ نَّث‬ ‫ُم َذكَّر‬
‫َج ْم َعا ُء‬ ‫َأ ْج َم ُع‬ ‫ُم ْف َرد‬
‫ُج َم ُع‬ ‫َأ ْج َم ُع ْو َن‬ ‫َج ْمع‬
The masculine plural form, ‫ َأ ْج َم ُع ْو َن‬, is the most common form.
This is a ‫السال ِ ُم‬ ِ
َّ ‫ َج ْم ُع ا ْل ُم َذك َِّر‬and becomes ‫ َأ ْج َمع ْی َن‬in the ‫ َمن ُْص ْوب‬and ‫َم ْج ُر ْور‬
states.
2. It does not usually become ‫ ُم َضاف‬to the pronoun of the ‫ ُمؤَ كَّد‬.
‫الل فِ ْرع َْو َن َو ُجن ُْو َد ُه َأ ْج َم ِع ْی َن‬
ُ ‫َأ ْه َل َك‬
Allah destroyed Firawn and his entire army.
‫َأ ْج َم ِع ْی َن‬ ‫ُجن ُْو َد ُه‬ ‫َو‬ ‫فِ ْرعَ ْو َن‬ ‫الل‬
ُ ‫َأ َه َل َك‬

‫یه‬ ْ َْ
3. It can also be used as additional emphasis, ‫ َت ْأكِ ْید َثان‬, for ‫ك ُُّل‬.
َ ‫﴿ َس َجدَ ا ْل َم ََّلئِ َك ُة ُك ُّل ُه ْم َأ ْج َم ُع‬
﴾‫ون‬
Every single one of the angels prostrated.
ِ ‫َف‬
َ ‫َأ ْج َم ُع‬
‫ون‬ ‫ُك ُّل ُه ْم‬ ‫ا ْل َم ََّلئِ َك ُة‬ َ‫َس َجد‬
‫َت ْأكِیْد َثان‬ ‫َت ْأكِ ْید‬ ‫ُمؤَ كَّد‬
397
‫الل ا ْل ِع َبا َد ُك َّل ُه ْم َأ ْج َم ِع ْی َن‬
‫‪َ )3‬ل َی ْح ُش َر َّن ُ‬ ‫‪ )1‬اِغ ِْف ْر َلنَا َأ ْج َم ِع ْی َن‬
‫الص َحا َب ِة َأ ْج َم ِع ْی َن‬ ‫َن َّ‬ ‫الل ع ِ‬
‫‪َ )4‬رض َي ُ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫الل ا ْل ِع َبا َد َأ ْج َم ِع ْی َن‬
‫‪َ )2‬ل َی ْس َأ َل َّن ُ‬
‫ف ِص َلة ‪َ with a‬ت ْأكِ ْید َم ْعن َِوي‬ ‫َح ْر ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َح ْر ُف ِص َلة ‪َ , are often preceded by a‬أ ْج َم ُع ‪َ and‬ن ْفس ‪َ , such as‬ت ْأك ْید َم ْعن َِوي ‪Some‬‬
‫‪ِ .‬ب ‪of‬‬
‫َذ َب َح َر ُس ْو ُل اللِ ﷺ َك ْب ًشا بِنَ ْف ِس ِه‬
‫‪The Prophet of Allah slaughtered a lamb himself.‬‬
‫‪َ ...‬ف ِ‬
‫َح ْر ُ‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ ‫َف ِ‬
‫اعل ‪...‬‬ ‫فِ ْعل‬
‫َن ْف ِس ِه‬ ‫ِ‬

‫ب‬ ‫َك ْب ًشا‬ ‫اللِ‬ ‫َر ُس ْو ُل‬ ‫َذ َب َح‬
‫‪َْ )4‬ل ُت َسافِ ُر َهؤُ َْل ِء ا ْل َبن ُ‬
‫َات بِ َأ ْن ُف ِس ِه َّن‬ ‫الصبِ َّی ُة بِنَ ْف ِس َها‬ ‫ِِ‬
‫‪َْ )1‬ل َت ْأك ُُل ٰهذه َّ‬
‫الر َج ُال ْاْلُ ْسدَ بِ َأ ْج َم ِع َها‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫الش ْی ُخ بِنَ ْف ِس ِه‬‫‪َْ )2‬ل َي ْم ِش ْي َه َذا َّ‬
‫‪َ )5‬قت ََل ٰهؤُ َْلء ِّ‬
‫ت َجدِّ ِه بِنَ ْف ِس ِه‬‫ت والِدَ ي ِه إِ َلی بی ِ‬
‫َْ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )6‬جا َء ا ْل َو َلدُ م ْن َب ْی َ ْ‬ ‫آن بِنَ ْف ِس ِه‬‫‪َ )3‬ي ْق َر ُأ ٰه َذا ال ِّط ْف ُل ا ْل ُق ْر َ‬
‫‪Summary‬‬
‫‪َ .‬ت ْأكِ ْید ‪The following table summarises the types of‬‬
‫َت ْأكِ ْید َم ْعن َِوي‬ ‫َت ْأكِ ْید َل ْفظِي‬
‫كِ ََّل‬ ‫نَ ْفس‬

‫َأ ْج َم ُع ْو َن‬ ‫َج ِمیْع‬ ‫كُل‬ ‫‪Noun‬‬ ‫‪Verb‬‬ ‫‪Adjective‬‬
‫كِ ْلتَا‬ ‫عَین‬
‫‪Emphatic‬‬
‫‪Quantifier‬‬ ‫‪Intensifier‬‬
‫‪Pronoun‬‬
‫‪398‬‬
‫‪Quantifiers as Direct Slots:‬‬
‫‪َ can be part of a slot directly.‬ج ِم ْیع ‪ and‬كُل ‪,‬كِ ْلتَا ‪,‬كِ ََّل ‪The quantifiers‬‬
‫‪ُ directly to the noun they are‬م َضاف ‪This occurs when they become‬‬
‫‪ُ to its pronoun.‬م َضاف ‪quantifying, and not‬‬
‫‪Direct Slot‬‬ ‫ُمؤَ كَّد َت ْأكِ ْید‬
‫الر ُج َل ْی ِن‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫الر ُج ََّل ِن كِ ََّل ُه َما‬
‫َجا َء ك ََّل َّ‬ ‫َجا َء َّ‬
‫َجا َء ك ُُّل الن ِ‬
‫َّاس‬ ‫َّاس ُك ُّل ُه ْم‬
‫َجا َء َج ِم ْی ُع الن ِ‬
‫َّاس‬ ‫َّاس َج ِم ْی ُع ُه ْم‬
‫‪ )6‬إِ َّن ك َُّل ْاْلَ ْش َج ِ‬
‫ار َكبِ ْی َرة‬ ‫ف ُك ُّل ُه ْم‬ ‫الض ُی ْو ُ‬
‫‪َ )1‬جا َء ُّ‬
‫ان كِ ََّل ُهما و ِس َخ ِ‬ ‫‪َ )7‬ا ْلوجه ِ‬ ‫الضیو ِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫َ َ‬ ‫َ ْ َ‬ ‫ف‬ ‫‪َ )2‬جا َء ك ُُّل ُّ ُ ْ‬
‫‪ )8‬كِ ََّل ا ْلوجهی ِن و ِس َخ ِ‬ ‫الل ا ْلبِ َح َار ُك َّل َها‬
‫ان‬ ‫َ ْ َْ َ‬ ‫‪َ )3‬خ َل َق ُ‬
‫َت ا ْل َحدَ ائِ ُق َج ِم ْی ُع َها َج ِم ْی َل ًة‬‫‪ )9‬كَان ِ‬ ‫الل َج ِم ْی َع ا ْلبِ َح ِ‬
‫ار‬ ‫‪َ )4‬خ َل َق ُ‬
‫َت َج ِم ْی ُع ا ْل َحدَ ائِ ِق َج ِم ْی َل ًة‬
‫‪ )10‬كَان ْ‬ ‫‪ )5‬إِ َّن ْاْلَ ْش َج َار ُك َّل َها َكبِ ْی َرة‬
‫‪399‬‬
‫‪ in a Direct Slot‬كِ ْلتَا ‪ and‬كِ ََّل ‪Rules of‬‬
‫‪َ .‬م ْبنِي ‪ become a slot directly, they are‬كِ ْلتَا ‪ and‬كِ ََّل ‪When‬‬
‫ت إِ َلی كِ ْلتَا ا ْلبِنْ َت ْی ِن‬
‫َن َظ ْر ُ‬ ‫الر ُج َل ْی ِن‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َر َأ ْي ُت ك ََّل َّ‬
‫‪I looked at both girls.‬‬ ‫‪I saw both men.‬‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ ‫(ت)‬ ‫فِعل و َف ِ‬
‫اعل ُ‬ ‫ْ َ‬
‫الر ُج َل ْی ِن‬
‫َّ‬ ‫كِ ََّل‬ ‫َر َأ ْي ُت‬
‫‪The following table shows the difference between the two‬‬

‫‪.‬كِ ْلتَا ‪ and‬كِ ََّل ‪different uses of the words‬‬
‫كِ ْلتَا ‪ and‬كِ ََّل‬
‫‪Type of‬‬ ‫‪Emphasis Phrase‬‬

‫‪Structure‬‬ ‫ُمؤَ كَّد – َت ْأكِ ْید‬ ‫‪Direct Slot‬‬
‫ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬ ‫‪Pronoun‬‬ ‫‪Noun‬‬

‫إِع َْراب‬ ‫ُم ْع َرب‬ ‫َم ْبنِي‬
‫الر ُج ََّل ِن كِ ََّل ُه َما‬‫َجا َء َّ‬ ‫الر ُج َل ْی ِن‬ ‫ِ‬

‫َجا َء ك ََّل َّ‬
‫‪Examples‬‬ ‫الر ُج َل ْی ِن كِ َل ْی ِه َما‬
‫َر َأ ْي ُت َّ‬ ‫الر ُج َل ْی ِن‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َر َأ ْي ُت ك ََّل َّ‬
‫الر ُج َل ْی ِن كِ َل ْی ِه َما‬
‫ت إِ َلی َّ‬‫َن َظ ْر ُ‬ ‫الر ُج َل ْی ِن‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ت إِ َلی ك ََّل َّ‬ ‫َن َظ ْر ُ‬
‫الضی ُ ِ‬ ‫الس ْی َف ْی ِن َغ ْی ُر َخ ِف ْی َف ْی ِن‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫كِ ََّل ا ْلبابی ِن م ْفتُوح ِ‬
‫الر َّما َن َت ْی ِن‬
‫ف ك ََّل ُّ‬ ‫َأك ََل َّ ْ‬ ‫‪)11‬‬ ‫‪ )6‬إِ َّن ك ََّل َّ‬ ‫ان‬ ‫َ َْ َ ْ َ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫َّاس فِي كِ ْلتَا ا ْل َح ِد ْي َق َت ْی ِن‬ ‫ان كِ ََّل ُه َما ُش َجا َع ْی ِن ‪)12‬‬
‫َج َل َس الن ُ‬
‫الشاب ِ‬ ‫ان ‪ )7‬ك َ‬
‫َان َّ َّ‬
‫ان كِ ََّل ُهما م ْفتُوح ِ‬
‫َ َ ْ َ‬
‫َا ْلباب ِ‬
‫َ َ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫ج ِد‬ ‫َر َأ ْي ُت كِ ََّل ا ْل ُم َع ِّل َم ْی ِن فِي ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬
‫‪)13‬‬ ‫الشا َّب ْی ِن َذ َو ْي ِع ْلم‬ ‫َان كِ ََّل َّ‬‫ان ‪ )8‬ك َ‬ ‫الشا َتی ِن ب ِعیدَ َت ِ‬
‫إِ َّن ك ْلتَا َّ ْ َ ْ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫آن ا ْل َك ِر ْي َم‬ ‫َح ِف َظ كِ ََّل ا ْل َیتِ ْی َم ْی ِن ا ْل ُق ْر َ‬
‫َان ‪ )9‬إِ َّن ال َّطالِب َتی ِن كِ ْل َتی ِهما َش ِري َفت ِ‬
‫َان ‪)14‬‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫ْ َ‬ ‫َ ْ‬
‫إِ َّن كِ ْلتَا ا ْلب َقر َتی ِن جائِعت ِ‬
‫َ َ ْ َ َ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫َّاج ُر كِ ََّل ال َّث ْو َب ْی ِن‬
‫س ْاشت ََری الت ِ‬
‫َان ‪َ )15‬أ ْم ِ‬ ‫إِ َّن السی َفی ِن كِ َلی ِهما َث ِقی ََّل ِن ‪ )10‬إِ َّن كِ ْلتَا ال َّطالِب َتی ِن َش ِري َفت ِ‬
‫ْ‬ ‫َ ْ‬ ‫ْ َ ْ‬ ‫َّ ْ ْ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫‪400‬‬
‫‪ in a Direct Slot‬كُل ‪Rules of‬‬
‫اعل ‪ is a‬كُل ‪When‬‬‫‪َ in a direct slot, the verb before it usually agrees in‬ف ِ‬
‫‪ُ .‬م َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪gender with its‬‬
‫اإل ْخو ِ‬ ‫ج َلس ْت ك ُُّل ْاْلَ َخو ِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫َج َل َس ك ُُّل ْ ِ َ‬ ‫ات‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ َ‬
‫اعل ‪ُ of the‬م َضاف ‪ agrees with the‬فِ ْعل ‪Usually, the gender of the‬‬
‫‪َ .‬ف ِ‬
‫َج َل َس َأ ُب ْو َفاطِ َم َة‬ ‫َج َل َس ْت ُأ ُّم َأ ْح َمدَ‬
‫‪َ )7‬ي ْظلِ ُم ك ُُّل ا ْل ُم ُل ْو ِك إِ َّْل ا ْل ُمت َِّق ْی َن‬ ‫‪ )1‬ك ُُّل َبنِي آ َد َم إِ ْخ َوان‬
‫اش ِع ْی َن‬ ‫َّاس َخ ِ‬ ‫‪َ )8‬ل ْم ُي َص ِّل ك ُُّل الن ِ‬ ‫جع َل الل ك َُّل َنبِي ص ِ‬
‫اد ًقا‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫َ َ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫الش ْر َك‬‫الل ك َُّل َذنْب إِ َّْل ِّ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫َل ُی ْب َع َث َّن ك ُُّل َع ْبد َي ْو َم ا ْل ِق َیا َم ِة‬
‫‪َ )9‬يغْف ُر ُ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫ت‬ ‫‪َ )10‬لت َُذ ْو َق َّن ك ُُّل َن ْفس ا ْل َم ْو َ‬ ‫َل َقدْ آ َم َن ك ُُّل َأ ْو َْل ِد َأبِ ْي َب ْكر‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫‪َ )11‬ف ِه َم الدَّ ْر َس ك ُُّل َطالِب إِ َّْل ٰذل ِ َك ا ْل َو َلدَ‬ ‫إِ َّن ك َُّل َأ ْو َْل ِد َخالِد َشاكِ ُر ْو َن‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫رآن ك َُّل َل ْی َلة َو ُأ ُّم زَ ْين َ‬

‫َب ك َُّل َص َباح‬ ‫‪َ )12‬ي ْق َر ُأ َأ ُب ْو َأ ْح َمدَ ا ْل ُق َ‬ ‫َم َض ْینَا ك َُّل ا ْل َی ْو ِم فِي ا ْل َمدْ َر َس ِة‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫َتن ِْو ْي ُن ا ْل ِع َو ِ‬
‫ض‬
‫ض ‪َ called‬تن ِْو ْين ‪ can be substituted by a‬كُل ‪ُ of‬مضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪The‬‬
‫‪َ , the‬تن ِْو ْي ُن ا ْل ِع َو ِ‬
‫‪ُ .‬م َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪tanween which replaces the‬‬
‫‪ُ .‬م َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪The context will help determine the meaning of the‬‬
‫﴿ك ًَُّّل َهدَ ْينَا﴾‬
‫)‪We guided all (of them‬‬
‫‪.‬نَكِ َرة ‪ُ can be‬م ْبتَدَ أ ‪In this case, the‬‬
‫كُل ‪َ ...‬قانِت ُْو َن‬
‫‪Every (thing) is submissive.‬‬
‫‪401‬‬
Rules of ‫ َج ِم ْیع‬in a Direct Slot
As mentioned before, the word ‫ َج ِم ْیع‬can be used as a ‫ ُم َضاف‬to a
noun to become a slot in a sentence directly. However, it can also
come on its own, as a ‫ نَكِ َرة‬word in the ‫ َمن ُْص ْوب‬state.
﴾‫الل َج ِمی ًعا‬
ُ ‫﴿ َي ْب َع ُث ُه ُم‬
Allah will resurrect them all.
Even though this quantifies the noun and gives a meaning of ‫ َت ْأكِ ْید‬, it
is labelled as ‫ َحال‬.
‫َحال مِ ْن ا ْل َم ْف ُع ْو ِل بِ ِه‬ ِ ‫َف‬
‫اعل‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ ‫فِ ْعل‬
‫َج ِمی ًعا‬ ‫الل‬

ُ ‫ُه ُم‬ ‫َي ْب َع ُث‬
The table summarises the three different ways ‫ َج ِم ْیع‬can be used.
‫َحال‬ Direct Slot ‫ُمؤَ كَّد – َت ْأكِ ْید‬
‫الر َج ُال َج ِم ْی ًعا‬
ِّ ‫َجا َء‬ ِ ‫الر َج‬
‫ال‬ ِ
ِّ ‫َجا َء َجم ْی ُع‬ ‫الر َج ُال َج ِم ْی ُع ُه ْم‬
Vocab
leader ‫ َس ِّید‬family, followers ‫آل‬
(form of a verb) ‫ ِص ْیغَة‬rope ‫َح ْبل ج ِح َبال‬
honour ‫ِعزَّ ة‬ peace ‫َس ََّلم‬
Exercise 19
﴾‫) ﴿إِ َّن ا ْل ِعزَّ َة ل ِ َّل ِه َج ِم ْی ًعا‬5 ﴾‫﴿ل ِ َّل ِه ْاْلَ ْم ُر َج ِم ْی ًعا‬ )1
﴾‫) ﴿ ُتو ُبوا إِ َلى اللِ َج ِم ْی ًعا‬6 ﴾‫﴿ن َْح ُش ُر ُه ْم َج ِم ْی ًعا‬ )2
﴾‫) ﴿ َي ْح ُش ُر ُه ْم إِ َل ْی ِه َج ِم ْی ًعا‬7 ﴾‫الل َج ِم ْی ًعا‬ ُ ‫﴿ َي ْب َع ُث ُه ُم‬ )3
﴾‫) ﴿ا ْعت َِص ُموا بِ َح ْب ِل اللِ َج ِم ْی ًعا‬8 ﴾‫﴿إِ َّن ا ْل ُق َّو َة ل ِ َّل ِه َج ِم ْی ًعا‬ )4
402
Summary
The chart below summarises the different uses of quantifiers.
403
‫‪Non-Inclusive Quantifiers‬‬
‫‪ُ to the noun‬م َضاف ‪There are also some other quantifiers which are‬‬
‫‪they are quantifying and become a slot directly.‬‬
‫َق َال َب ْع ُض الن ِ‬
‫َّاس‬
‫‪Some people/someone said‬‬
‫‪Some of these quantifiers are given below.‬‬
‫‪some, one‬‬ ‫‪َ remaining, rest of, all‬ب ْعض‬ ‫َسائِر‬
‫‪remainder, rest‬‬ ‫َب ِّق َّیة‬
‫َان َو َب ِق َّی ُة ِص َی ِغ‬
‫ات مبنِیت ِ‬
‫َ ْ َّ‬
‫ات وا ْلغَائِب ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫َ‬
‫‪ِ )8‬صی َغتَا ا ْلم َخا َطب ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫ات ُح ْل َوة‬ ‫إِ َّن بع َض التَّمر ِ‬
‫ََ‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫ار ِع ُم ْع َر َبة‬ ‫ت ا ْل َق ْر َي ِة َق ِد ْي َم ًة‬
‫كَا َن ْت بع ُض بیو ِ‬
‫َ ْ ُُْ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫الس ََّل ُم عَ َلی َس ِّی ِد ا ْل ُم ْر َس ِل ْی َن َخا َت ِم ال َّن ِب ِّی ْی َن‬
‫الص ََّل ُة َو َّ‬ ‫‪َّ )9‬‬ ‫اضي َم ْبن ِ َّیة‬ ‫ِصی َغ ُة َفع َل وسائِر ِصی ِغ ا ْلم ِ‬
‫ْ َ َ َ ُ َ َ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫اج ِه َو َس ِائ ِر َأ ْو َْل ِد ِه َوا ْل ُخ َل َف ِاء‬ ‫ُم َح َّمد ﷺ َو عَ َلی َأزْ َو ِ‬ ‫اج ِد ا ْل َق ْر َي ِة َج ِد ْيدَ ًة َب ْل َب ْع ُض َها‬‫َما ك ُُّل َم َس ِ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫عَلي و َب ِق َّی ِة‬ ‫ان َو ِ‬ ‫الر ِاش ِد ْي َن َأ ِبي َب ْكر َوعُ َم َر َوعُ ْث َم َ‬
‫ْ‬ ‫َّ‬ ‫ار‬‫‪َ )5‬ل ْی َس ا ْل َح َج ُر ْاْلَ ْس َو ُد مِ ْث َل َسائِ ِر ْاْلَ ْح َج ِ‬
‫ال َّص َحا َب ِة َأ ْج ِم ِع ْی َن ﭫ‬ ‫السن َِة‬ ‫ِ‬

‫السنَة َْل ك َُّل َّ‬
‫ِِ‬
‫‪َ )6‬ت ُص ْو ُم ٰهذه ْا ْل َمر َأ ُة َب ْع َض َّ‬
‫َّاس َل َك ِاف ُر ْو َن‬
‫اك ُر ْو َن َو َب ْع َض الن ِ‬ ‫َّاس َل َش ِ‬
‫‪ِ )7‬إ َّن َب ْع َض الن ِ‬
‫‪404‬‬
Additional Rules of ‫َت ْأكِ ْید‬
ِ ‫ َض ِمیر ا ْل َف‬as a ‫مع ُطوف َع َلی ِه‬
‫اع ِل‬ ُْ ْ ْ َْ
When the ‫ َضم ْی ُر ا ْل َفاع ِل‬is the ‫ َم ْع ُط ْوف َع َل ْی ِه‬, it is necessary to repeat the
ِ ِ
corresponding ‫ ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬pronoun, i.e. ‫ َض ِم ْیر َم ْر ُف ْوع ُمنْ َف ِصل‬before the ‫ف‬ِ ‫ف ا ْلع ْط‬
َ ُ ‫َح ْر‬
ِ
in a ‫ َت ْأك ْید‬-‫ ُمؤَ كَد‬structure before adding the ‫ َم ْع ُط ْوف‬, as follows:
‫َذ َه ْب ُت َأنَا َوزَ ْيد‬
In this example, the pronoun ‫ َأنَا‬has been brought before the ‫َح ْر ُف‬
‫ف‬ِ ‫ ا ْلع ْط‬to emphasise the ‫اع ِل‬
ِ ‫ َض ِمیر ا ْل َف‬, i.e. ‫ت‬
ُ .
َ ُْ
It would not be correct to simply say:
‫َذ َه ْب ُت َوزَ ْيد‬
In translation, the ‫ ُم َت َك ِّلم‬pronoun is usually given at the end.
Zaid and I went. ✓ I and Zaid went. 
ِ ‫َف‬
‫زَ ْيد‬ ‫َو‬ ‫َأنَا‬ ‫ل ُت‬ ‫َذ َه ْبا‬

ُ ‫َح ْر‬ ‫َم ْع ُط ْوف َع َلیْ ِه‬
The following is an example of a more complex tarkib.

ِ ‫ َف‬...
‫اعل‬ ‫ن ُْو ُن التَّ ْأ ِكیْ ِد‬ ِ ‫َف‬
... ‫اعل‬ ‫فِ ْعل‬ ‫ْلم اْلبتداء‬
‫بِنْت َُها‬ ‫َو‬ ‫ِه َي‬ ‫َّن‬ ِ

)‫(ه َي‬ ‫َت ْس َم َع‬ ‫َل‬

ُ ‫َح ْر‬ ِ ‫ مع ُطوف َع َل‬...
‫یه‬ ِ ‫مع ُطوف َع َل‬
... ‫یه‬
ْ َْ ْ َْ
405
‫‪َْ )7‬ل َن ْع ُبدُ ن َْح ُن َو َْل َأ ْبنَا ُئنَا مِ ْن َصنَم َو َْل َح َجر‬ ‫‪َ )1‬ل ْسنَا ن َْح ُن َو َْل َأ ْنت ُْم كَافِ ِر ْي َن‬
‫الر ُس ْو ِل ﷺ‬ ‫ِ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َْ )8‬لُ َساف َر َّن َأنَا َو َأبِ ْي َو ُأ ِّم ْي إِ َلی َمد ْينَة َّ‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ل َی ْح َف َظ َّن ُه َو َو َأ ُخ ْو ُه ا ْل ُق ْر َ‬
‫آن‬
‫ت ِه َي َو ُأ ُّم َها مِ َن ا ْل َق ْر َي ِة إِ َلی ا ْل َم ِد ْين َِة‬‫‪ )9‬ا ْل َی ْو َم َسا َف َر ْ‬ ‫كَان ُْوا ُه ْم َو َأ ْص َحا ُب ُه ْم َع َلی ُهدً ی‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫اْلصنَام ِإ ٰلها ِمن دو ِن ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫َت ْم ُش ْو َن َأ ْنت ُْم َو َأ ْص ِد َقا ُئ ُك ْم َك َأ َسد‬
‫الل َج ْه ًَّل‬ ‫‪ )10‬ا َّت َخ ُذ ْوا ُه ْم َوآ َبائ ُُه ُم ْ َ ْ َ ً ْ ُ ْ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫ْت َو ٰه َذا ا ْل َو َلدُ َث ََّلثِ ْی َن َي ْو ًما مِ ْن َر َم َض َ‬
‫ان‬ ‫‪ُ )11‬ص ْم َت َأن َ‬ ‫َما َخ َل ُق ْوا ُه ْم َو َْل آل ِ َهت ُُه ْم مِ ْن َش ْيء‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫َو ِع ْش ِر ْي َن َي ْو ًما مِ ْن َغ ْی ِر َر َم َض َ‬
‫ان‬ ‫إِ َّيا ُه ن َْست َِع ْی ُن ن َْح ُن َوإِ ْخ َوا ُننَا ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫‪Note‬‬
‫‪َ , it is not‬م ْع ُط ْوف ‪َ and‬ح ْر ُف َع ْطف ‪If there is another word between the‬‬
‫‪َ .‬ض ِم ْیر َم ْر ُف ْوع ُمنْ َف ِصل ‪necessary to add a‬‬
‫َما َذ َه ْب ُت َو َْل زَ ْيد‬
‫‪Neither Zaid nor I went.‬‬
‫‪َ and‬م ْع ُط ْوف َع َل ْی ِه ‪َْ comes between the‬ل ‪In this example, the particle‬‬
‫‪َ .‬أنَا ‪َ , therefore, there is no need to bring the pronoun‬م ْع ُط ْوف‬
‫‪Rewrite the following sentences by making the words in brackets‬‬
‫‪َ .‬ف ِ‬
‫اعل ‪َ of the‬م ْع ُط ْوف ‪the‬‬
‫لص ََّل ِة ( َأ ِخ ْي)‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ف َأبِ ْي ل َّ‬ ‫‪ُ )7‬ق ْم ُت َخ ْل َ‬ ‫َات)‬ ‫َل ِع ُب ْوا فِي ا ْل َح ِد ْي َق ِة (ا ْل َبن ُ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫‪َ )8‬ب ِق ْینَا فِ ْي ا ْل َمدْ َر َس ِة (ال ُّط ََّّل ُب ُك ُّل ُه ْم)‬ ‫اِ َّت َخ ُذوا ْاْلَ ْصنَا َم إِ ٰل ًها (آ َبائ ُُه ْم)‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫(ص ِد ْي ُق َك)‬ ‫‪َ )9‬ه ِل ْاش َت َك ْی َت إِ َلی ا ْل ُم َع ِّل ِم َ‬ ‫ك)‬ ‫َأ َتحجین ٰه َذا ا ْلعام (زَ وج ِ‬
‫َ َ ْ ُ‬ ‫ُ ِّ ْ َ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫اج ُع الدُّ ُر ْو َس ُك َّل َها فِي ال َّل ْی ِل ( َأ ْح َمدُ )‬ ‫‪ُ )10‬أ َر ِ‬ ‫ُكنْ ُت ْم فِي َض ََّلل ُمبِ ْین (آ َبا ُئ ُك ْم)‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫السن َِّة ( َأ ْص َحا ُب ُك ْم)‬ ‫َاب َو ُّ‬ ‫‪َ )11‬أ َت ْعت َِص ُم ْو َن بِا ْلكِت ِ‬ ‫َْل ُت ِض ِّی ُع ْوا َأ ْو َقا َت ُك ْم ( َأ ْص ِد َقا ُئ ُك ْم)‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫‪َْ )12‬ل ُتغْن ِ ْي َأ ْم َوا ُل ُه ْم َعن ُْه ْم َي ْو َم ا ْل ِق َیا َم ِة ( َأ ْو َْل ُد ُه ْم)‬ ‫َص ِعد ُّت َّن ٰذل ِ َك ا ْل َج َب َل ( ُأ َّم َها ُت ُك َّن)‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫‪406‬‬
‫ َت ْأكِ ْید َل ْفظِي‬of a ‫َض ِم ْیر‬
The ‫ ُمؤَ كَّد‬can be a ‫ َض ِم ْیر‬, either:
1. ‫َض ِم ْیر ُمنْ َف ِصل‬
2. ‫َض ِم ْیر ُمت َِّصل‬
‫ َت ْأكِ ْید َل ْفظِي‬of a ‫َض ِم ْیر ُمنْ َف ِصل‬
When the ‫ ُمؤَ كَّد‬is a ‫ َض ِم ْیر ُمنْ َف ِصل‬, its ‫ َت ْأكِ ْید َل ْفظِي‬must also be a ‫َض ِم ْیر ُمنْ َف ِصل‬
with the same irab.
‫َأن َْت أن َْت َقائِم‬ ُ‫إِ َّيا ُه إِ َّيا ُه َأ ْع ُبد‬
You are standing. It is He who I worship.
It is you who is standing.
‫ َت ْأكِ ْید َل ْفظِي‬of a ‫َض ِم ْیر ُمت َِّصل‬
If the ‫ ُمؤَ كَّد‬is a ‫ َض ِم ْیر ُمت َِّصل‬, its ‫ َت ْأكِ ْید‬will be ‫ َض ِم ْیر ُمنْ َف ِصل‬. It would not be
correct to use a ‫ َض ِم ْیر ُمت َِّصل‬.
‫َذ َه ْب ُت َأنَا‬ ✓ ‫ْت‬َ ‫َرأ ْي ُت َك َأن‬ ✓
ُ ‫َذ َه ْب ُت‬
‫ت‬  ‫َرأ ْي ُت َك َك‬ 
I went. I saw you.
It was I who went. It was you whom I saw.
ِ ‫َف‬
‫اعل‬ ‫فِ ْعل‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ ِ ‫فِعل و َف‬
)‫اعل (ت‬ َ ْ
‫َأنَا‬ ‫ـ ُت‬ ‫َذ َه ْبـ‬ َ ‫إِ َّي‬

‫اك‬ ‫َك‬ ‫َر َأ ْيتُـ‬
‫َت ْأ ِك ْید‬ ‫ُمؤَ كَّد‬ ‫َت ْأ ِك ْید‬ ‫ُمؤَ كَّد‬

ِ ‫ َف‬pronoun is a ‫ َض ِمیر مستَتِر‬, it must be written after the verb in
If the ‫اعل‬ ْ ُ ْ
brackets.
ِ ‫َف‬
‫ُه َو‬ )‫(ه َو‬

ُ َ ‫َذ َه‬
‫ب‬
407
‫‪َ )13‬فا َق ْت ِه َي َأ ْق َران ََها‬ ‫‪َْ )7‬ل َي ْر َك ُع ْو َن ُه ْم‬ ‫‪َ )1‬ف َتنَّا ن َْح ُن‬
‫اس ُر ْو َن‬ ‫‪ُ )14‬هم ُهم َخ ِ‬ ‫‪ِ )8‬ه َي ِه َي َخا َلتِ ْي‬ ‫‪ُ )2‬ه َو ُه َو َر ِّب ْي‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫‪َ )15‬ل َقدْ َخدَ ْع َتنَا إِ َّيانَا‬ ‫اشد‬ ‫‪َ )9‬أن َْت َأن َْت ر ِ‬ ‫‪َ )3‬ج ِز ْعت ُْم َأ ْنت ُْم‬
‫َ‬
‫‪ )16‬ي ْش ِركُو َن هم بِاللِ‬ ‫‪َ )10‬ل ْم َي ْل َعنَّ ُك ْم إِ َّياك ُْم‬ ‫‪َْ )4‬ل َت ْملِ ُك َأن َ‬
‫ْت‬
‫ْ ُ ْ‬ ‫ُ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫اك إِ َّي َ‬ ‫‪ )11‬إِ َّي َ‬
‫‪َ )17‬لنُق ْی َم َّن ن َْح ُن َّ‬
‫الص ََّل َة‬ ‫ت‬ ‫اك ن ََص ْر ُ‬ ‫َاب ن َْح ُن‬ ‫‪َ )5‬ل ْن َن ْغت َ‬
‫آن فِ ْي َسنَة‬‫‪َ )18‬ح ِف َظ ْت ِهي ا ْل ُق ْر َ‬
‫َ‬ ‫‪َ )12‬أن َْت َأن َْت َص ِد ْي ِق ْي‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ت ْست َِع ْین ُْو َن َأ ْن ُت ْم‬
‫‪Notes‬‬
‫َض ِم ْیر َم ْر ُف ْوع ‪َ will be a‬ت ْأكِ ْید ‪َ , the‬ح ْرف َجار ‪َ with a‬ض ِم ْیر َم ْج ُر ْور ‪ُ is a‬مؤَ كَّد ‪1. If the‬‬
‫‪ِ will be repeated.‬ش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة ‪or the entire‬‬
‫َأ ْن ُظ ُر إِ َل ْی َك إِ َل ْی َك‬ ‫َأ ْن ُظ ُر إِ َل ْی َك َأن َ‬
‫ْت‬
‫‪It is you who I am looking at.‬‬
‫‪َ is formed‬ض ِم ْیر َم ْج ُر ْور ُمت َِّصل ‪َ and a‬ض ِم ْیر َمن ُْص ْوب ُمت َِّصل ‪َ of a‬ت ْأكِ ْید َل ْفظِي ‪2. The‬‬
‫‪َ .‬ض ِم ْیر َم ْر ُف ْوع ُمت َِّصل ‪with the‬‬
‫َه َذا كِتَابِي َأنَا‬ ‫إِ َّن ُه ُه َو ُ‬
‫الل‬
‫‪َ of a‬ت ْأكِ ْید ‪The table below summarises the different forms of‬‬
‫َأنَا َأنَا َقائِم‬ ‫َم ْر ُف ْوع‬ ‫َم ْر ُف ْوع‬

‫ُمنْ َف ِصل‬
‫اك َس ِم ْع ُت‬
‫اك إِ َّي َ‬
‫إِ َّي َ‬ ‫َمن ُْص ْوب‬ ‫َمن ُْص ْوب‬
‫َس ِم ْع ُت َأنَا‬ ‫َم ْر ُف ْوع‬ ‫َم ْر ُف ْوع‬

‫ُمنْ َف ِصل‬
‫إِ ِّن ْي َأنَا َقائِم‬ ‫َم ْر ُف ْوع‬
‫َمن ُْص ْوب‬ ‫ُمت َِّصل‬
‫َس ِم ْع ُت َك َأن َ‬
‫ْت‬ ‫َمن ُْص ْوب‬
‫كِتَابِ ْي َأنَا‬ ‫َم ْر ُف ْوع‬ ‫َم ْج ُر ْور‬
‫‪408‬‬
‫‪ٰ )9‬ه ِذ ِه مِ ْن َب َركَتِ ِه ُه َو‬ ‫‪ )5‬ن َْش ُك ُرك ُْم َأ ْنت ُْم‬ ‫‪َ )1‬أ ْع ُبدُ َك َأن َ‬
‫ْت‬
‫اإل ْس ََّل ُم ِد ْينُنَا ن َْح ُن‬
‫‪ِ ْ )10‬‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ل ْن َأ ْغتَا َب َك َأن َْت‬ ‫‪َ )2‬أ ْع ُبدُ َك إِ َّي َ‬
‫اك‬
‫الل َل ُه ْم َل ُه ْم‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫الل ُهو َر ِّبي َأنَا‬
‫‪َ )11‬ل َیغْف َر َّن ُ‬ ‫‪َ )7‬ل ْم َي ْخدَ ْعنَا ن َْح ُن‬ ‫‪ُ )3‬‬
‫‪َْ )12‬ل َْل ُأ ْوثِ ُر َأ َحدً ا َع َل ْی َك َأن َْت‬ ‫ك َأن ِ‬
‫ْت‬ ‫‪ِ )8‬هي ص ِدي ُق ِ‬
‫َ َ ْ‬ ‫‪ )4‬إِن ََّك َأن َ‬
‫ْت َأ َسد‬
‫‪َ of the‬ت ْأكِ ْید َل ْفظِي ‪Rewrite the following sentences by bringing a‬‬
‫‪underlined words.‬‬
‫‪َ )7‬بدَ َأ ا ْل ُم َع ِّل ُم الدَّ ْر َس‬ ‫‪َ )4‬بدَ َأ ُه ا ْل ُم َع ِّل ُم‬ ‫‪ُ )1‬ه َو عَاقِل‬
‫‪َ )8‬بدَ َأ ا ْل ُم َع ِّل ُم الدَّ ْر َس‬ ‫‪َ )5‬بدَ ْأ َ‬
‫ت الدَّ ْر َس‬ ‫‪ُ )2‬ه َو عَاقِل‬
‫‪َ )9‬بدَ َأ ا ْل ُم َع ِّل ُم الدَّ ْر َس‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ل ْن َأ ْخدَ َع َأحدً ا‬ ‫‪َ )3‬أ ْست َِع ْی ُن بِ ِه‬
‫‪409‬‬
Irregular ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق‬For Emphasis
There are some words which are not the ‫ َم ْصدَ ر‬of the main verb but
still occur as a ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق‬. They create the meaning of ‫ َت ْأكِ ْید‬. They are:
1. ‫ ِجدًّ ا‬: this intensifies the meaning of an adjective.
‫زَ ْيد ك َِر ْيم ِجدًّ ا‬
Zaid is very noble.
‫َم ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق‬ ‫َخبَر‬ ‫ُمبْتَدَ أ‬
‫ِجدًّ ا‬ ‫ك َِر ْيم‬ ‫زَ ْيد‬
2. ‫ َح ًّقا‬: this emphasises the content of a sentence. This can be

translated as in fact, truly, indeed, etc.
َ ‫﴿ ُأو َلئِ َك ُه ُم ا ْل ُمؤْ مِن‬
﴾‫ُون َح ًّقا‬
It is they who are the true believers.
‫َم ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق‬ ‫َخ َبر‬ ‫َض ِم ْی ُر ا ْل َف ْص ِل‬ ‫ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬
‫َح ًّقا‬ َ ‫ا ْل ُمؤْ مِن‬

‫ُون‬ ‫ُه ُم‬ ‫ُأو َلئِ َك‬
3. ‫ َي ِق ْینًا‬: this emphasises the degree of certainty in a sentence. This

can be translated as surely, definitely, indeed, etc.
﴾‫﴿ َما َق َت ُل ْو ُه َي ِقینًا‬
They certainly did not kill him.
‫َم ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ ِ ‫فِعل و َف‬
)‫اعل (و‬ َ ْ ‫ف نَ ْفي‬
ُ ‫َح ْر‬
‫َي ِقینًا‬ ‫ُه‬ ‫َق َت ُل ْو‬ ‫َما‬
Exercise 26
ِ ‫اضي ص‬
‫ادق ِجدًّ ا‬ ِ
َ ْ ‫) ٰه َذا ا ْل َق‬4 ‫ول اللِ َح ًّقا‬ ُ ‫) إِ َّن ُه َل َر ُس‬1
‫َاب اللِ آ َيات كَثِ ْی َر ًة ِجدًّ ا‬
ِ ‫) إِ َّن فِي كِت‬5 ‫) ٰه َذا ا ْل َج َب ُل عَظِ ْیم ِجدًّ ا‬2
ِ ‫) إِ َّن ُتجار ا ْلم ِدين َِة ْاْلُمنَاء ص‬6
‫اد ُق ْو َن ِجدًّ ا‬ ‫) ٰه ِذ ِه الدَّ نَانِ ْی ُر كَثِ ْی َرة ِجدًّ ا‬3
َ َ َ ْ َ َ َّ
410
Overview of Emphasis
We have studied various ways to emphasise different parts of a
sentence. Now we will review them all.
Emphasis of Nouns
The table below summarises the different ways a noun may be
emphasised.
Noun
Emphasis Quantity
‫إِ َّْل‬ Fronting ‫َت ْأ ِكیْد َل ْفظِي‬ ‫َت ْأ ِكیْد َم ْعن َِوي‬ ‫َت ْأ ِكیْد َم ْعن َِوي‬
،‫ كُل‬،‫ ِك ْلتَا‬،‫ِك ََّل‬

‫ نَ ْفس‬،‫َع ْین‬
‫ َأ ْج َم ُع‬،‫َج ِمیْع‬
‫ َت ْأ ِك ْید‬- ‫ُمؤَ كَّد‬ ‫ُم َضاف – ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬

Structure Structure
Exercise 27
Translate the following. Notice the different ways the nouns have
been emphasised.
ُ‫َاب ا ْل َی ْو َم إِ َّْل َأ ْح َمد‬
َ ‫) َما غ‬11 ‫ان كِ ََّل ُه َما‬
ِ ‫) جاء ْاْلَ َخو‬6
َ َ َ ‫) َأ ْح َمدَ َما َر َأ ْي ُت‬1
ِ ‫) ح َض‬12
‫رت ا ْل ُم َع ِّل َم ُة َع ْین َُها‬ ُ ‫َان كِ ْلت‬
‫َاه َما‬ ِ ‫ت ا ْلبِنْت‬
ِ ‫) َذ َهب‬7 ‫) إِ َّيا ُه إِ َّيا ُه ن َْست َِع ْی ُن‬2
َ َ
ِ ‫ب ك َُّل َص َحابِي‬ ِ
ْ ‫) َأ َّذ َّن ا ْل ُمؤَ ِّذن ُْو َن َجم ْی ُع‬13
‫هم‬ ‫) َأ َّذ َن ا ْل ُمؤَ ِّذن ُْو َن ُك ُّل ُه ْم‬8 ُّ ‫) نُح‬3
‫) َأ َّذ َّن ا ْل ُمؤَ ِّذن ُْو َن َأ ْج َم ُع ْو َن‬14 ِ ‫الر َج‬ ِ ُ‫َاب َأ ْح َمدُ َأ ْح َمد‬
‫ال‬ ِّ ‫) َو َص َل َجم ْی ُع‬9 َ ‫) غ‬4
‫الش ْه َر ْي ِن فِي َم َّك َة‬ َّ ‫) َم َض ْینَا كِ ََّل‬15 ‫ت كِ ْلتَا ْاْلُ ْخ َت ْی ِن‬ ْ ‫) اِ ْعت ََم َر‬10 ‫) َح َض َر ْاْلُ ْستَا ُذ َن ْف ُس ُه‬5
411
Emphasis of Adjectives
The table below summarises the different ways an adjective may
be emphasised.
Adjective
Intensifier
‫َت ْأ ِكیْد َل ْفظِي‬ ‫ِجدًّ ا‬
Exercise 28
Translate the following. Notice the different ways the adjectives
have been emphasised.
‫ت َق ِر ْيب َق ِر ْيب‬
ُ ‫) ا ْل َم ْو‬4 ‫) ا ْل ِف ْی ُل َكبِ ْیر َكبِ ْیر‬1
‫ان َر ِج ْیم َر ِج ْیم‬
ُ ‫الش ْی َط‬
َّ )5 ‫) الدَّ ُم َأ ْح َم ُر َأ ْح َم ُر‬2
‫الش َج َر ُة َخ ْض َرا ُء ِجدًّ ا‬
َّ )6 ‫) ا ْل َخ ْم ُر َح َرام َح َرام‬3
Emphasis of Verbs
The table below summarises the different ways a verb may be
emphasised.
Past Present Future
Affirmative Negative
ْ‫ َل َقد‬، ْ‫َقد‬ ‫َْل ُم اْل ْبتِدَ ِاء‬ ‫ن ُْو ُن التَّ ْأ ِك ْی ِد‬ ‫َل ْن‬
‫َت ْأ ِكیْد َل ْفظِي‬
Exercise 29
Translate the following. Notice the different ways the verbs have
been emphasised.
‫الل فِ ْرع َْو َن‬
ُ ‫) َل َقدْ َأغ َْر َق‬5 ُّ ‫) َلنَت ُْو َب َّن مِ َن‬3
ِ ‫الذن ُْو‬
‫ب‬ ‫) َل ْن ن َُض ِّی َع َّن َأ ْو َقا َتنَا‬1
ِ ‫) َنعت َِصم َنعت َِصم بِا ْل ُقر‬6 ‫الل فِ ْرع َْو َن‬ ِ‫َاب الل‬ ِ ‫) َلنَ ْعت َِص ُم بِكِت‬2
‫آن‬ ْ ُ ْ ُ ْ ُ ‫) َقدْ َأغ َْر َق‬4
412
Summary
Key Terms
Rhetorical ‫ك َْم‬ ‫ك َْم ا ْل َخ َب ِر َّي ُة‬ Question ‫اِ ْستِ ْف َهام‬
Emphasis (with ‫َت ْأكِ ْید َل ْفظِي‬ Interrogative Pronoun ‫اْلستِ ْف َها ِم‬
ْ ‫َأ َدا ُة‬
repeated word)
Emphasis (with specific ‫َت ْأكِ ْید َم ْعن َِوي‬ Particle Interrogative ‫اْلستِ ْف َها ِم‬
word)
Quantifier - Noun Interrogative ‫اْلستِ ْف َها ِم‬ ِ
ْ ‫ا ْس ُم‬
Emphatic pronoun - Particles for ِ ‫ف ا ْل َج َو‬
‫اب‬ ُ ‫َأ ْح ُر‬
affirmation/negation
Intensifier - Polar Question -
Non-Polar Question -
413
Interrogatives
when َ ‫َأ َّي‬
‫ان‬ ‫َأ‬
how َ ‫َك ْی‬

‫ف‬ ‫َه ْل‬
from where, how ‫َأنَّی‬ who ‫َم ْن‬
how many ‫ك َْم‬ who ‫َم ْن َذا‬
which ‫َأي‬ what ‫َما‬
why ‫ل ِ َم‬ what ‫َما َذا‬
why ‫ل ِ َما َذا‬ where ‫َأ ْي َن‬
who does it belong to ‫ل ِ َم ْن‬ when ‫َمتَی‬
Non-Inclusive Quantifiers
some, one ‫ َب ْعض‬remaining, rest of, all ‫َسائِر‬
remainder, rest ‫َب ِّق َّیة‬
414
Vocabulary
(form of a verb) ‫ِص ْیغَة‬ family, followers ‫آل‬
honour ‫ ِعزَّ ة‬gift, bounty ‫َأ ًلی ج َآْلء‬
dinner ‫ ع ََشاء ج َأع ِْش َیة‬rope ‫َح ْبل ج ِح َبال‬

‫َع ْقل ج ُع ُق ْول‬ ِ ‫ح ِديث ج َأح‬
‫اد ْي ُث‬ َ ْ َ
discourse, Prophetic
intellect narration
breakfast, lunch ‫ َغدَ اء ج َأغ ِْد َية‬peace ‫َس ََّلم‬
messenger ‫ُم ْر َسل ج ْو َن‬ leader ‫َس ِّید‬
time ‫ َو ْقت ج َأ ْو َقات‬left ‫ِش َمال‬
right ‫ َي ِم ْین ج َأ ْي َمان‬round, course ‫َش ْوط ج َأ ْش َواط‬
‫اج َع ًة‬ ِ ‫اج َع ُي َر‬
َ ‫اج ُع ُم َر‬ َ ‫َر‬ ‫َأ ْح ٰیی ُي ْحیِ ْي إِ ْح َیا ًء‬
to go over, recap to give life
to change ‫ف َت ْص ِر ْي ًفا‬
ُ ‫ف ُي َص ِّر‬
َ ‫َص َّر‬ to complain ‫اِ ْش َت َكی َي ْشتَكِ ْي اِ ْشتِ َكا ًء‬
to waste ‫َض َّی َع ُي َض ِّی ُع َت ْضیِ ْی ًعا‬ to adhere to ‫اِ ْعت ََص َم َي ْعت َِص ُم اِعْتِ َصا ًما‬
to rise ‫َط َل َع َي ْط ُل ُع ُط ُل ْوعًا‬ to drown ‫َأغ َْر َق ُيغ ِْر ُق إِغ َْرا ًقا‬
to set ‫ غ ََر َب َيغ ُْر ُب غ ُُر ْو ًبا‬to initiate, start ‫َبدَ َأ َي ْبدَ ُأ َبدْ ًأ‬
415
416
‫‪NESTED SENTENCES‬‬
‫ُج ْم َلة ُص ْغ َری ‪Introduction:‬‬
‫ُج ْم َلة ُص ْغ َری ‪َ as a‬خ َبر ‪Part 1:‬‬
‫ُج ْم َلة ُص ْغ َری ‪َ as a‬م ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه ‪Part 2:‬‬
‫ُج ْم َلة ُص ْغ َری ‪َ as a‬حال ‪Part 3:‬‬
‫ُج ْم َلة ُص ْغ َری ‪َ as a‬م ْع ُط ْوف ‪Part 4:‬‬
‫ُج ْم َلة ُص ْغ َری ‪َ as a‬بدَ ل ‪Part 5:‬‬
‫ُج ْم َلة ُص ْغ َری ‪ُ as a‬م َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪Part 6:‬‬
‫ُج ْم َلة ُص ْغ َری ‪َ as a‬ن ْعت ‪Part 7:‬‬
‫‪Summary‬‬
‫‪417‬‬
Introduction: ‫ُج ْم َلة ُص ْغ َری‬
The slots of a sentence can be a noun, a pronoun or a phrase.
I love the Prophet.
I love him.
I like his way.
In these examples, the noun, Prophet, the pronoun, him, and the
phrase, his way, become the ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬.
Similarly, a sentence can take the place of a slot within another
sentence, i.e. one sentence can be nested within another.
The nested sentence can occur in two ways:
1. Directly
2. Indirectly
Directly Nested Sentence
He said: I wrote a book.
In this example, the sentence I wrote a book fits into the slot of the
‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬directly, without any additions.
A directly nested sentence is called a ‫ ُج ْم َلة ُصغ َْری‬.
Indirectly Nested Sentence
I like what he wrote.
I like that he wrote it properly.
In these examples, the sentences he wrote and he wrote it
properly are preceded by the words what and that, which then
allow them to fit into the slot of the ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬.
An indirectly nested sentence is called an ‫اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول‬.
Summary of Nested Sentences
Nested Sentence
‫ُج ْم َلة ُصغ َْری‬ ‫اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول‬
Directly Nested Indirectly Nested
(Section 1) (Sections 2 and 3)
418
ُّ ‫ا ْل ُج ْم َل ُة‬
‫الص ْغ َری‬
A directly nested sentence is called ‫الصغ َْری‬ ُّ ‫ا ْل ُج ْم َل ُة‬. The main sentence
in which the ‫ ُج ْم َلة ُصغ َْری‬is nested is called ‫ا ْل ُج ْم َل ُة ا ْل ُك ْب َری‬.
ِ ‫ َب َكی ا ْل َو َلدُ ا ْل َب‬:‫ُق ْل ُت‬
‫ار َح َة‬
I said: The boy cried last night.
In this example, the sentence ‫ َب َكی ا ْل َو َلدُ ا ْل َب ِار َح َة‬is the ‫ ُج ْم َلة ُصغ َْری‬of the
main sentence.
‫ا ْل ُج ْم َل ُة ا ْل ُك ْب َری‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ ِ ‫فِعل و َف‬

‫اعل‬ َ ْ
‫ار َح َة‬ ُ‫ا ْل َو َلد‬ ‫َب َكی‬ ‫ُق ْل ُت‬

ُّ ‫ا ْل ُج ْم َل ُة‬
‫الصغ َْری‬
Rules of a ‫ُج ْم َلة ُص ْغ َری‬

The entire ‫ ُج ْم َلة ُصغ َْری‬becomes a part of the ‫ ُج ْم َلة ُك ْب َری‬. However, the
slots of the ‫ ُج ْم َلة ُصغ َْری‬remain independent; the irab of each word is
based on its slot within the ‫ ُج ْم َلة ُصغ َْری‬.
In the above example, the irab of the words ‫ َب َكی‬, ُ‫ َا ْل َو َلد‬and ‫ ا ْل َب ِار َح َة‬are
due to them being the ‫فِ ْعل‬, ‫اعل‬ ِ ‫ َف‬and ‫ م ْفعول فِی ِه‬of the ‫جم َلة صغْری‬.
ْ ُْ َ َ ُ ْ ُ
]‫[و َلدُ ُه َم ِر ْيض‬
َ ‫الر ُج ُل‬ َ ‫ك‬
َّ ‫َان‬ ]‫الر ُج ُل [ َم ِر ْي ًضا‬
َّ ‫كَان‬
‫ َم ِر ْيض‬becomes the ‫ َخبَر‬of ‫ َولد‬, therefore it is ‫ َم ْر ُف ْوع‬. ‫ َم ِر ْي ًضا‬is governed by ‫َان‬
َ ‫ ك‬because it is a single
َ ‫ك‬.
The entire sentence then becomes the ‫ َخبَر‬of ‫َان‬ word which become the ‫ َخبَر‬directly.
Summary
Nested Sentences
‫ُج ْم َلة ُك ْب َری‬ Main Sentence
‫ُج ْم َلة ُص ْغ َری‬ Directly Nested Sentence
‫اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول‬ Indirectly Nested Sentence
419
‫الص ْغ َری ‪Uses of a‬‬ ‫ا ْل ُج ْم َل ُة ُّ‬
‫‪ُ or in a phrase.‬ج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة ‪ُ , a‬ج ْم َلة ْاس ِم َّیة ‪ُ occurs in a‬ج ْم َلة ُصغ َْری ‪A‬‬
‫‪ُ occurs as:‬ج ْم َلة ُصغ َْری ‪ُ , a‬ج ْم َلة ْاس ِم َّیة ‪In a‬‬
‫َخ َبر ‪1.‬‬
‫‪ُ occurs as:‬ج ْم َلة ُصغ َْری ‪ُ , a‬ج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة ‪In a‬‬
‫َق َال َي ُق ْو ُل َق ْو ًْل ‪َ of the verb‬م ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه ‪1.‬‬
‫َحال ‪2.‬‬
‫‪ُ occurs as:‬ج ْم َلة ُصغ َْری ‪In a phrase, a‬‬

‫َم ْع ُط ْوف ‪1.‬‬
‫َبدَ ل ‪2.‬‬
‫‪ُ of some words‬م َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪3.‬‬
‫‪ word‬نَكِ َرة ‪َ of a‬ن ْعت ‪4.‬‬
‫‪420‬‬
Part 1: ‫ َخ َبر‬as a ‫ُج ْم َلة ُص ْغ َری‬
The ‫ َخ َبر‬can occur as a ‫ ُج ْم َلة ُصغ َْری‬, either an ‫ ْاس ِم َّیة‬or ‫فِ ْعلِ َّیة‬.
In both cases, the ‫ ُصغ َْری‬must contain a pronoun which refers to the
‫ ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬. This pronoun is called the ‫عَائِد‬.
ِ ‫الل رحم ُتـه و‬
‫اس َعة‬ َ ُ َ ْ َ ُ
In this example, the pronoun (‫ ) ُه‬which refers to the ‫ ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬, is the ‫عَائِد‬.
The ‫ َخ َبر‬as a ‫ُج ْم َلة اِ ْس ِم َّیة‬
In the following example, a ‫ ُج ْم َلة ْاس ِم َّیة‬is becoming the ‫ َخ َبر‬of the ‫ُج ْم َلة‬
‫ ُك ْب َری‬.
ِ ‫الل رحم ُته و‬
‫اس َعة‬ َ ُ َ ْ َ ُ
In tarkib, the slots of the ‫ ُج ْم َلة ُصغ َْری‬are written at the very bottom in
blue ink. The phrases of the ‫ ُج ْم َلة ُصغ َْری‬are written above its main
slots. The ‫ عَائِد‬is underlined.
ِ ‫و‬
‫اس َعة‬ ‫َر ْح َم ُت ُه‬ ‫الل‬
َ ُ
‫ ُم َضاف إِ َلیْ ِه‬،‫ُم َضاف‬
This can be written up in an exercise book as follows:
421
‫‪Translation‬‬
‫‪ُ , it is translated as per the following‬ج ْم َلة ُصغ َْری ‪َ is a‬خ َبر ‪When the‬‬
‫‪steps:‬‬
‫الل رحم ُتـه و ِ‬
‫اس َعة‬ ‫ُ َ ْ َ ُ َ‬
‫;‪َ on its own‬خ َبر ‪1. Translate the‬‬
‫‪His mercy is vast.‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪ُ .‬م ْبتَدَ أ ‪َ with the‬خ َبر ‪ in the‬عَائد ‪2. Replace the‬‬
‫‪Allah’s mercy is vast.‬‬
‫‪Be sure not to repeat the noun and the pronoun.‬‬
‫‪Allah’s mercy is vast.‬‬ ‫✓‬
‫‪Allah his mercy is vast. ‬‬
‫‪ )11‬ا ْل َب ْی ُت َح ْو َل ُه َأ ْش َجار كَثِ ْی َرة‬ ‫الر ُج ُل ك َََّل ُم ُه ُح ْلو‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ه َذا َّ‬ ‫‪ )1‬الن َّْه ُر َما ُء ُه َب ِ‬
‫ارد‬
‫ان ُأ ُّم ُه َما َم ِر ْي َضة‬ ‫ان ا ْلو َلدَ ِ‬
‫‪َ )12‬ه َذ ِ‬ ‫‪ )7‬إِ َّن ا ْلبِن َْت ثِ َیا ُب َها َج ِد ْيدَ ة‬ ‫رآن آ َيا ُت ُه َب ِّینَات‬ ‫‪ )2‬ا ْل ُق ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ذه ا ْل َم ِد ْين َِة َمنَا ِب ُر َها كَ ِب ْی َرة‬
‫اجدَ ٰه ِ‬‫‪ِ )13‬إ َّن َم َس ِ‬ ‫ان َك ْیدُ ُه َض ِع ْیف‬ ‫الش ْی َط َ‬‫‪ )8‬إِ َّن َّ‬ ‫الر ُج ُل َما ُل ُه ك َِث ْیر‬ ‫‪ )3‬ك َ‬
‫َان َّ‬
‫كَث ْیر َو ِن َساء‬ ‫‪ )14‬ا ْلمس ِجدُ ا ْلحرام ِفی ِه ِرجال ِ‬
‫ََ ُ ْ َ‬ ‫َ ْ‬ ‫‪َ )9‬ه ِذ ِه َّ‬
‫الش َج َر ُة َت َم َرا ُت َها ُح ْل َوة‬ ‫الل َأ ْول ِ َیا ُئ ُه ا ْل ُم َّت ُق ْو َن‬‫إن َ‬‫‪َّ )4‬‬
‫اْلعْم َال الص ِالح َة َثوابها م ِ‬ ‫‪ )10‬ا ْل ُك ْر ِس ُّي َت ْح َت ُه َك ْلب َص ِغ ْیر‬ ‫‪ٰ )5‬ه َذا ا ْل َیتِ ْی ُم ُأ ُّم ُه َصال ِ َحة‬
‫غْف َرة َو َجنَّة‬ ‫َّ َ َ ُ َ َ‬ ‫‪ِ )15‬إ َّن ْ َ َ‬
‫‪ُ , and‬م ْبتَدَ أ ‪Rewrite the following by making the underlined words a‬‬
‫‪َ a sentence.‬خ َبر ‪the‬‬
‫ان َأ َّيا ُم ُه ُم َب َاركَة‬ ‫َأ َّيا ُم َر َم َض َ‬
‫ان ُم َب َاركَة ‪َ ‬ر َم َض ُ‬
‫الس ْو َر ِة َق ِص ْی َرة‬ ‫‪ ) 9‬آي ُ ِ ِ‬
‫ات ٰهذه ُ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ت ا ْل ُمؤَ ِّذ ِن عَال‬ ‫‪َ )5‬ص ْو ُ‬ ‫‪َ )1‬ح ِق ْی َب ُة ا ْل َو َل ِد َث ِق ْی َلة‬
‫ج ِد ع َِم ْیق‬ ‫‪ِ )10‬ع ْل ُم إِ َما ِم ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬ ‫‪ )6‬يدَ ا ال ِّط ْف ِل و ِس َخت ِ‬
‫َان‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ط ْع ُم ال َّل َب ِن َط ِّیب‬
‫الش َج َر ِة‬‫ات ِعنْدَ َّ‬ ‫‪ُ )11‬قبور ا ْلجدَّ ِ‬
‫ُْ ُ َ‬ ‫َاحا ال َّط ْی ِر َط ِو ْي ََّل ِن‬
‫‪َ )7‬جن َ‬
‫‪ )3‬دمع التَّائِبی ِن ص ِ‬
‫ادق‬ ‫َْ َ‬ ‫َْ ُ‬
‫‪ُ )12‬م َع ِّل ُمو ا ْل َمدْ َر َس ِة ُم ْخلِ ُص ْو َن‬ ‫‪ )8‬آل ِ َه ُة ا ْل ُم ْش ِركِ ْی َن َأ ْصنَام‬ ‫اء ص ِ‬‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ادق‬ ‫‪َ )4‬حد ْي ُث ْاْلَ ْنبِ َی َ‬
‫‪422‬‬
The ‫ َخ َبر‬as a ‫ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة‬
In the following example, a ‫ ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة‬is becoming the ‫ َخ َبر‬of the ‫ُج ْم َلة‬
‫ ُك ْب َری‬.
‫الس َما َء َو ْاْلَ ْر َض‬
َّ ‫الل َخ َل َق‬
ُ
In this example, the ‫ ُج ْم َلة ُصغ َْری‬, i.e. ‫الس َما َء َو ْاْلَ ْر َض‬
َّ ‫ َخ َل َق‬, becomes the ‫ َخ َبر‬of
the ‫ ُج ْم َلة ُك ْب َری‬.
‫ْاْلَ ْر َض‬ ‫َو‬ ‫الس َما َء‬

َّ ‫َخ َل َق‬ ‫الل‬
ُ
ُ ‫َح ْر‬ ‫َم ْع ُط ْوف َع َلیْ ِه‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ )‫(ه َو‬ ِ ‫ِفعل و َف‬

Translation
When the ‫ َخ َبر‬is a ‫ ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة‬, it will be translated in the same manner
as when the ‫ َخ َبر‬is a ‫ ُج ْم َلة ْاس ِم َّیة‬, as per the following steps:
‫الس َما َء َو ْاْلَ ْر َض‬
َّ ‫الل َخ َلق‬
ُ)‫(هُ َو‬
1. Translate the ‫ َخ َبر‬on its own;

He created the skies and the earth.
ِ
2. Replace the ‫ عَائد‬in the ‫ َخ َبر‬with the ‫ ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬.
The ‫ عَائِد‬in this sentence is the ‫ َض ِم ْیر ُم ْستَتِر‬within ‫ َخ َل َق‬.
Allah created the skies and the earth.
Be sure not to repeat the noun and the pronoun.
Allah created the skies and the earth. ✓
Allah is he created the skies and the earth. 
Vocab
to repent ‫اب َيت ُْو ُب َت ْو َب ًة‬
َ ‫ َت‬to take out ً ‫َأ ْخ َر َج ُي ْخ ِر ُج إِ ْخ َر‬
‫اجا‬
‫َد َر َس َيدْ ُر ُس َد ْر ًسا‬ ‫اح ًة‬ ِ ‫اِستَراح يست َِريح‬
to study to rest َ ‫است َر‬
ْ ُ ْ َْ َ َ ْ
to read, study ‫َطا َل َع ُي َطال ِ ُع ُم َطا َل َع ًة‬ to act proudly ‫اِ ْس َت ْك َب َر َي ْست َْك ِب ُر ْاس ِت ْك َب ًارا‬
to clean ‫َط َّه َر ُي َط ِّه ُر َت ْط ِه ْی ًرا‬ to wait ‫اِ ْن َت َظ َر َينْتَظِ ُر انْتِ َظ ًارا‬
423
‫الذن ُْو َب َج ِم ْی ًعا﴾‬
‫الل َيغ ِْف ُر ُّ‬
‫‪ِ ﴿ )9‬إ َّن َ‬ ‫‪ُ ﴿ )5‬ه ْم َي ْك ُف ُر ْو َن ِب َّ‬
‫الر ْح ٰم ِن﴾‬ ‫‪ُ ﴿ )1‬أو َل ِئ َك ُيؤْ مِن ُْو َن بِ ِه﴾‬
‫عُو ُه ْم ِإ َلى ِص َراط ُم ْست َِق ْیم﴾‬ ‫‪ِ ﴿ )10‬إن ََّك َلتَدْ ْ‬ ‫َّار﴾‬‫عُو َن إِ َلى الن ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ُ ﴿ )6‬أو َلئ َك َيدْ ْ‬ ‫لل َي ْرزُ ُق َها َوإِ َّياك ُْم﴾‬
‫‪َ ﴿ )2‬ا ُ‬
‫ین َأ ْول ِ َیا َء﴾‬ ‫‪﴿ )11‬إِنَّهم ا َّت َخ ُذوا َّ ِ‬
‫الش َیاط َ‬ ‫ُ ُ‬ ‫اد ِه﴾‬
‫‪ُ ﴿ )7‬هو ي ْقب ُل التَّوب َة عَ ن ِعب ِ‬
‫َْ ْ َ‬ ‫َ َ َ‬ ‫لل َي ْع َل ُم َأع َْما َل ُك ْم﴾‬
‫‪َ ﴿ )3‬ا ُ‬
‫الل َيدْ ع ُْو إِ َلى ا ْل َجن َِّة َوا ْل َمغ ِْف َر ِة﴾‬ ‫‪ ﴿ )8‬إِنَّهم َك َفروا بِ ِ‬
‫الل َو َر ُسولِ ِه﴾‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ُ ﴿ )12‬‬ ‫ُ ْ ُ ْ‬ ‫‪َ ﴿ )4‬أ ْنت ُْم َت ْت ُل ْو َن ا ْلكت َ‬
‫َاب﴾‬
‫‪ُ by making the‬ج ْم َلة ْاس ِم َّیة ‪Rewrite the following sentences as a‬‬
‫‪ُ .‬م ْبتَدَ أ ‪underlined words the‬‬
‫ِ‬ ‫اِس َتی َق َظ ِ‬
‫اإلن ِ‬
‫ْج ْی َل‬ ‫یسی ْ ِ‬
‫‪ )13‬آ َتی ُ‬
‫الل ع َ‬ ‫َّاس‬ ‫‪َْ )7‬ل َي ْظلِ ُم ا ْل ُم ُل ْو ُك الن َ‬ ‫ت ا ْلبِن ُْت‬ ‫ْ ْ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫‪َ )14‬ج َع َل ُ‬
‫الل ُم َح َّمدً ا َر ُس ْو ًْل‬ ‫َّاس‬ ‫‪َْ )8‬ل َي ْظلِ ُم ا ْل ُم ُل ْو ُك الن َ‬ ‫َل ْن َت ْظلِ َم ْاْلُ َّم َه ُ‬
‫ات‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫الل ُم َح َّمدً ا َر ُس ْو ًْل‬ ‫‪َ )15‬ج َع َل ُ‬ ‫‪َ )9‬ل ْن َت ْق َر َأ َخ ِد ْي َج ُة ا ْلكِتَا َب ْی ِن‬ ‫ت ْاْلُ ْخت ِ‬
‫َان‬ ‫س ِمع ِ‬
‫َ َ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫الل ا ْل ُمؤْ مِن ِ ْی َن ا ْل َجنَّ َة‬
‫‪َ )16‬وعَدَ ُ‬ ‫َب‬ ‫‪ )10‬ما َتع ِر ُ ِ‬
‫ف َفاط َم ُة زَ ْين َ‬ ‫َ ْ‬ ‫َت ْجلِ ُس ْاْلَ َخ َو ُ‬
‫ات‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫‪َ )17‬خ ِس َر ال َّظال ِ ُم ْو َن ُخ ْس َرانًا‬ ‫ت ا ْلبِنْت ِ‬
‫َان ا ْل ُق ْر َ‬
‫آن‬ ‫‪ )11‬ما َقرء ِ‬
‫َ َ َ‬
‫‪َ )5‬خ َل َق الل السماو ِ‬
‫ات‬ ‫ُ َّ َ َ‬
‫الر ُس ْو َل َرغَ ًبا‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫اإل ْس ََّل َم ِد ْينًا‬
‫‪َ )12‬ج َع َل الل ْ ِ‬ ‫‪َ )6‬خ َل َق الل السماو ِ‬
‫‪ُ )18‬يط ْی ُع ا ْل ُم ْسل ُم ْو َن َّ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫ات‬ ‫ُ َّ َ َ‬
‫‪Summary‬‬
‫‪Nested Sentences‬‬
‫ُج ْم َلة ُص ْغ َری‬
‫ُج ْم َلة ْ‬ ‫زَ ْيد َو َلدُ ُه َقائِم‬
‫َخ َبر‬ ‫َماض‬ ‫زَ ْيد َقا َم‬
‫ُم َض ِ‬
‫ارع‬ ‫زَ ْيد َي ُق ْو ُم‬
‫‪424‬‬
‫‪Supplement‬‬
‫فِ ْعل ُم َض ِارع ‪Past Tense with a‬‬
‫‪, they denote the‬فِ ْعل ُم َض ِارع ‪When the past tense is coupled with a‬‬
‫‪past continuous or past habitual tense.‬‬
‫‪Past Tense‬‬ ‫فِ ْعل ُم َض ِ‬
‫ارع‬ ‫‪Past Continuous Tense‬‬
‫‪+‬‬ ‫=‬
‫)‪(Verb, Noun, Context‬‬ ‫)‪(Word or Meaning‬‬ ‫‪Past Habitual tense‬‬
‫َان ‪ of‬فِ ْعل نَاقِص ‪The‬‬
‫ارع ‪ is commonly used with a‬ك َ‬ ‫‪ to give this‬فِ ْعل ُم َض ِ‬
‫‪tense.‬‬
‫[ ُم َض ِ‬
‫ارع]‬ ‫َان [‪ ]past‬زَ ْيد َي ْق َر ُأ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫‪Past Habitual‬‬ ‫‪Zaid used to read.‬‬

‫‪Past Continuous‬‬ ‫‪Zaid was reading.‬‬
‫‪The tarkib of this written as follows:‬‬
‫َخبَ ُر ك َ‬
‫َان‬ ‫اس ُم ك َ‬
‫َان‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫فِ ْعل نَاقِص‬
‫ْاْلَ ْصن َ‬
‫َام‬ ‫َي ْع ُبدُ ْو َن‬ ‫َّاس‬
‫الن ُ‬ ‫ك َ‬
‫َان‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ ‫فِعل و َف ِ‬

‫اعل (و)‬ ‫ْ َ‬
‫‪Some verbs will be translated as the simple past tense even if they‬‬
‫‪.‬ك َ‬
‫َان ‪are preceded by‬‬
‫كَان ُْوا َي ْع َل ُم ْو َن‬
‫‪They knew.‬‬ ‫✓‬
‫‪They used to know. ‬‬
‫َان ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن َي ُص ْو ُم ْو َن فِي َر َم َض َ‬
‫ان‬ ‫‪ )7‬ك َ‬ ‫‪ )1‬كَان ُْوا َي ْظلِ ُم ْو َن َأ ْن ُف َس ُه ْم‬
‫ْ‬
‫ار َحةَ؟‬ ‫َان ال ُّط ََّّل ُب ُك ُّل ُه ْم َيدْ ُر ُس ْو َن ا ْل َب ِ‬
‫‪َ )8‬أك َ‬ ‫ات اللِ﴾‬ ‫‪﴿ )2‬كَانُوا ي ْك ُفرو َن بِآي ِ‬
‫َ ُ ْ َ‬
‫اإلبِ ِل و َع َلی ا ْل ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ب َقائِ ًما‬ ‫َان رس ُ ِ‬
‫ار‬‫ح َم ِ‬ ‫َّاس ُي َساف ُر ْو َن َع َلی ْ ِ َ‬ ‫َان الن ُ‬‫‪ )9‬ك َ‬ ‫ول الل ﷺ َي ْخ ُط ُ‬ ‫‪ )3‬ك َ َ ُ‬
‫ول اللِ ﷺ ي ْذ َهب لِص ََّل ِة ا ْل ِعی ِد م ِ‬
‫اش ًیا‬ ‫َان َر ُس ُ‬ ‫‪ )10‬ك َ‬ ‫ض﴾‬ ‫‪ُ ﴿ )4‬كنْت ُْم َت ْس َت ْكبِ ُر ْو َن فِي ْاْلَ ْر ِ‬
‫ْ َ‬ ‫َ ُ َ‬
‫عَاش ْو َر َاء‬ ‫ان َن ِب ُّینَا َم َح َّمد ﷺ َي ُص ْو ُم َي ْو َم َ‬
‫عَر َف َة َو َي ْو َم ُ‬ ‫‪ )11‬كَ َ‬ ‫‪ُ ﴿ )5‬كنْت ُْم ُتؤْ مِن ُْو َن بِاللِ َوا ْل َی ْو ِم ْاْل ِخ ِر﴾‬
‫عَو ُن َي ْظ ِل ُم َق ْو َم ُم ْو َسی َب ِن ْي ِإ ْس َر ِائ ْی َل‬ ‫ِ ِ‬
‫كَان ْال َم ِل ُك ال َّظال ُم ف ْر ْ‬
‫‪َ )12‬‬ ‫َان َث ُم ْو ُد َق ْو ُم َصالِح َي ْع ُبدُ ْو َن َأ ْصنَا ًما‬ ‫‪ )6‬ك َ‬
‫‪425‬‬
‫‪Note‬‬
‫َان ‪ and‬إِ َّن ‪Sometimes, a sentence may have both‬‬
‫‪.‬ك َ‬
‫ج ِد‬
‫ب إِ َلی ا ْلمس ِ‬
‫َ ْ‬ ‫إِ َّن زَ ْيدً ا ك َ‬
‫َان َي ْذ َه ُ‬
‫‪Indeed, Zaid used to go to the masjid.‬‬
‫َخبَ ُر إِ َّن‬ ‫اس ُم إِ َّن‬
‫ْ‬ ‫َح ْرف ُم َشبَّه بِ ْا ِلف ْع ِل‬
‫ج ِد‬
‫إِ َلی ا ْلمس ِ‬
‫َ ْ‬ ‫َي ْذ َه ُ‬
‫ب‬ ‫ك َ‬
‫َان‬ ‫زَ ْيدً ا‬ ‫إِ َّن‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح‬ ‫(ه َو)‬ ‫فِعل‪َ ،‬ف ِ‬

‫اعل ُ‬ ‫ْ‬
‫َان‬ ‫فِ ْعل نَاقِص ‪ ،‬اِ ْس ُم ك َ‬
‫َان (هو)‬
‫ان َب ْعدَ ال ُّظ ْه ِر‬ ‫َان َي ْست َِر ْي ُح فِي َر َم َض َ‬ ‫‪ )7‬إِ َّن َجدِّ ْي ك َ‬ ‫َان َنبِ ًّیا‬
‫اه ْی َم ك َ‬‫إِ َّن إِبر ِ‬
‫َْ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫‪ )8‬إِ َّن َعا ًدا َو َث ُم ْو َد َكا ُن ْوا َي ْس َت ْكبِ ُر ْو َن فِي ْاْلَ ْر ِ‬
‫ض‬ ‫ين‬ ‫ِ ِ‬
‫َان م َن ا ْل ُم ْفسد َ‬
‫إِ َّن فِرعَو َن ك َ ِ‬
‫ْ ْ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫ار َح َة‬ ‫‪ )9‬إِ َّن ْاْلَ ْو َْل َد َكا ُن ْوا َي ْل َع ُب ْو َن فِي ا ْل َح ِد ْي َق ِة ا ْل َب ِ‬ ‫إِ ِّن ْي ُكن ُْت َأ ْن َتظِ ُر َل َك فِ ْي ٰذل ِ َك ا ْل َم ْو ِض ِع‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫الص َحا َب َة َكا ُن ْوا ُيؤْ ثِ ُر ْو َن إِ ْخ َوا َن ُه ْم َع َلى َأ ْن ُف ِس ِه ْم‬ ‫‪ )10‬إِ َّن َّ‬ ‫الص َحا َب َة كَان ُْوا َي ْعت َِص ُم ْو َن بِاللِ َج ِم ْی ًعا‬‫إِ َّن َّ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫‪ )11‬إِ َّن ال ُّط ََّّل َب ا ْل ُم ْج َت ِه ِد ْي َن َكا ُن ْوا ُي َطال ِ ُع ْو َن ُك ُت َب ُه ْم َل ْی ًَّل‬ ‫ض‬‫إِ َّن ا ْل ُم ْف ِس ِد ْي َن كَان ُْوا ُي ْف ِسدُ ْو َن فِي ْاْلَ ْر ِ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫اس كَ ا ُن ْوا َيدْ ُخ ُل ْو َن ْال َم ْس ِجدَ َي ْو َم ْال ُج ُم َع ِة ِم ْن ٰذ ِل َك ْال َب ِ‬ ‫إِ َّن ا ْلمرسلِین ُك َّلهم كَانُوا يدْ عُو َن إِ َلی اللِ‬
‫اب‬ ‫‪ِ )12‬إ َّن ال َّن َ‬ ‫ُْ َ ْ َ ُ ْ ْ َ ْ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫‪426‬‬
The Anticipatory Pronoun – ‫الش ْأ ِن‬ َّ ‫َض ِم ْی ُر‬
In English, we sometimes use the word it to introduce or anticipate
the subject or object of a sentence.
It is good that she is studying more.
In this sentence, the pronoun it has no subject to which it is
referring.
This is known as an anticipatory it; one which introduces or
anticipates the subject or object.
Similarly, in Arabic, the pronoun ‫ ُه َو‬or ‫ ِه َي‬, or their ‫ َمن ُْصوب‬equivalent
‫ إِ َّن ُه‬or ‫إِن ََّها‬, can be used as anticipatory pronouns.
The masculine anticipatory pronoun is called ‫الش ْأ ِن‬ َّ ‫ َض ِم ْی ُر‬. The
feminine anticipatory pronoun is called ‫ َض ِم ْی ُر ا ْل ِق َّص ِة‬.
In Arabic, the anticipatory pronouns allude to the importance of
the subsequent statement. This is translated in various ways, and
sometimes it is left untranslated.
‫الل َأ َحد‬
ُ ‫ُه َو‬
[The truth] is that Allah is One.
‫َأ َحد‬ ‫الل‬

ُ ‫ُه َو‬
Exercise 7
Translate the following. Notice how the ‫الش ْأ ِن‬
َّ ‫ َض ِم ْی ُر‬and ‫ َض ِم ْی ُر ا ْل ِق َّص ِة‬are
used.
‫) إِ َّن ُه َي ْو ُم ا ْل ُج ُم َع ِة َي ْو ُم ا ْل ِع ْی ِد‬3 ‫السا َع ُة َي ْوم عَظِ ْیم‬
َّ ‫) ه َي‬1
ِ
َ ‫) إِ َّن ُه َش ْه ُر َر َم َض‬4
‫ان َش ْهر ُم َب َارك‬ ‫رآن َم ْو ِع َظة َو ِش َفاء‬
ُ ‫) ُه َو ا ْل ُق‬2
427
Differentiating Between ‫ ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬and ‫ ُم َقدَّ م‬Slots
If an ‫ اِ ْسم‬comes at the beginning of a sentence, it could either be a
‫ ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬or a ‫ ُم َقدَّ م‬slot.
‫زَ ْيدً ا َر َأ ْي ُت‬
In this example, ‫ زَ ْيدً ا‬is ‫ َمن ُْص ْوب‬and becomes the ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه ُم َقدَّ م‬.
‫زَ ْيد َر َأ ْي ُت ُه‬
In this example, ‫ زَ ْيد‬is ‫ َم ْر ُف ْوع‬and becomes the ‫ ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬. It cannot be the
‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه ُم َقدَّ م‬as the verb after it already has its own ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬, i.e. ‫ـ ُه‬.
In these examples, the first word is ‫ ُم ْع َرب‬, therefore the irab shows
its function.
However, if the first word is ‫ َم ْبنِي‬, the irab will not be apparent.
Therefore, to determine whether the first word is a ‫ ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬or a ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬
‫ ُم َقدَّ م‬we will need to analyse the sentence in more detail.
If the verb after the noun has an ‫ عَائِد‬referring to the ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬, the first
word will be the ‫ ; ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬if it does not have an ‫عَائِد‬, it will become a ‫ُم َقدَّ م‬
slot.
‫ُم ْو َسی َر َأ ْي ُت‬
In this example, the sentence after ‫ ُم ْو ٰسی‬does not consist of an ‫عَائِد‬,
therefore ‫ ُم ْو َسی‬is the ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه ُم َقدَّ م‬, and is deemed to be ‫مِن ُْص ْوب‬.
‫ُم ْو َسی َر َأ ْي ُت ُه‬
In this example, the sentence after ‫ ُم ْو ٰسی‬consists of an ‫عَائِد‬,
therefore ‫ ُم ْو َسی‬is the ‫ ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬and is deemed to be ‫ َم ْر ُف ْوع‬.
This rule is used to determine the grammatical function of other
‫ َم ْبنِي‬nouns such as ‫ َأ ْس َما ُء ِاْل ْستِ ْف َها ِم‬.
‫َم ْن َر َأ ْي َت؟‬ ‫َم ْن َر َأ ْي َت ُه؟‬
Who did you see?
428
‫‪Translate the following and identify the role of the words at the‬‬
‫‪beginning of the sentence.‬‬
‫‪ُ )19‬م ْو َسى ا َّت َب َع ال َّت ْو َرا َة‬ ‫‪ٰ )10‬ذل ِ َك َر َأ ْي ُت‬ ‫‪َ )1‬ما غ ََر َب ْت؟‬
‫‪ُ )20‬م ْو َسى ا َّت َب َع ُه َبنُ ْو إِ ْس َرائِ ْی َل‬ ‫‪َ )11‬م ْن َت ْخدَ ِع ْی َن؟‬ ‫‪َ )2‬م ْن َت ْغت ُ‬
‫َاب؟‬
‫‪ُ )21‬م ْو َسى ا َّت َب َع َبنُ ْو إِ ْس َرائِ ْی َل‬ ‫‪َ )12‬ما َف َع ْل َت؟‬ ‫‪َ )3‬م ْن َت ْغتَا ُب ُه؟‬
‫‪َ )22‬م ْن ن ََّجی َبنِي إِ ْس َرائِ ْی َل؟‬ ‫‪َ )13‬م ْن َف َع َل ٰه َذا؟‬ ‫‪َ )4‬من َّي ْغتَا ُب َك؟‬
‫الل مِ ْن فِ ْرع َْو َن؟‬ ‫اه ُم ُ‬ ‫‪َ )23‬م ْن ن ََّج ُ‬ ‫‪َ )14‬م ْن َف ِه َم الدَّ ْر َس؟‬ ‫‪َ )5‬م ْن َت ْأ ُم ُر ْو َن؟‬
‫الل مِ ْن فِ ْرع َْو َن؟‬ ‫‪َ )24‬م ْن ن ََّجی ُ‬ ‫ب؟‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )15‬ما َف ِه َم ال َّطال ُ‬ ‫‪َ )6‬م ْن َت ْأ ُم ُر ْو َن ُه؟‬
‫‪ )25‬ك َْم َطال ِ ًبا َح َض َر الدَّ ْر َس؟‬ ‫‪ )16‬ك َْم َك ْب ًشا َذ َب ْح َت؟‬ ‫‪َ )7‬من َّي ْأ ُم ُر َك بِ َه َذا؟‬
‫‪ )26‬ك َْم َطال ِ ًبا َر َأ ْي َت فِي الدَّ ْر َس؟‬ ‫‪ )17‬ك َْم مِ ْن َك ْبش َذ َب ْح َت ُه!‬ ‫‪َ )8‬م ْن َت ْأ ُم ُر بِ َه َذا؟‬
‫‪ِ )27‬ع ْی َسی َأ ْنزَ َل الل َع َل ْی ِه ْ ِ‬
‫اإل ْن ِ‬
‫ج ْی َل‬ ‫‪َ )18‬م ْن َأغ َْر َق فِ ْر َع ْو َن؟‬ ‫‪ٰ )9‬ه َذا َْل َينْ َف ُع َك‬
‫ُ‬
‫َأ ْس َما ُء ِاْل ْستِ ْف َها ِم ‪Summary: Tarkib of‬‬

‫‪Not followed by‬‬
‫َم ْن‬ ‫‪ referring to‬عَائِد ‪an‬‬ ‫‪ُ slot of the sentence‬م َقدَّ م ‪Becomes a‬‬ ‫َم ْن َس ِم ْع َت؟‬
‫َما‬ ‫اِ ْس ُم ِاْل ْستِ ْف َها ِم ‪the‬‬
‫َما َذا‬ ‫‪Followed by an‬‬ ‫‪ُ , and the sentence‬م ْبتَدَ أ ‪Becomes the‬‬
‫‪ referring to‬عَائِد‬ ‫َم ْن َس ِم ْعتَ ُه؟‬
‫ك َْم‬ ‫َخ َبر ‪after it becomes the‬‬
‫اِ ْس ُم ِاْل ْستِ ْف َها ِم ‪the‬‬
‫‪429‬‬
Part 2: ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬as a ‫ُج ْم َلة ُص ْغ َری‬
The ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬can occur as a ‫ ُج ْم َلة ُصغ َْری‬when it is a quotation.
There are two types of quotations:
1. Quotations without ‫َأ ْن‬
2. Quotations with ‫َأ ْن‬
Quotation Without ‫َأ ْن‬
The quotation of the verbs ‫ َق َال‬, ‫ َي ُق ْو ُل‬, ‫( ُق ْل‬to say), and ‫ َس َأ َل‬, ‫ َي ْس َأ ُل‬, ‫( َس ْل‬to
ask) occur without the particle ‫ َأ ْن‬.
The quotation can be a ‫ ُج ْم َلة ْاس ِم َّیة‬.
‫لل َر ِح ْیم‬
ُ ‫ َا‬:‫الر ُج ُل‬
َّ ‫َق َال‬
The man said: Allah is merciful.
‫َر ِح ْیم‬ ‫الل‬

ُ ‫الر ُج ُل‬
َّ ‫َقا َل‬
The quotation can also be a ‫ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة‬

‫الس َما َء‬ ُ ‫ َخ َل َق َا‬:‫الر ُج ُل‬
َّ ‫لل‬ َّ ‫َق َال‬
The man said: Allah created the sky.
‫الس َما َء‬

َّ ‫الل‬
ُ ‫َخ َل َق‬ ‫الر ُج ُل‬
َّ ‫َق َال‬

Note
The addressee is given as a ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح‬with the ‫ َح ْرف َجار‬of ‫ ِل‬.
‫ اِ ْجلِ ْس ُهنَا‬:‫ُق ْلنَا َل َك‬
We said to you: Sit here.
430
‫‪ )10‬ي ُقو ُل ا ْلم مِنُو َن‪ :‬ما َلنَا مِن إِ ٰله َغیر اللِ‬ ‫‪َ ﴿ )1‬قا ُل ْوا َن ْع ُبدُ َأ ْصنَا ًما﴾‬
‫ُْ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫ُ ؤْ ْ َ‬ ‫َ ْ‬
‫‪َ )11‬ق َال ْاْلَ ْنبِ َیا ُء ل ِ َق ْومِ ِه ْم‪َْ :‬ل ن َْس َأ ُل ُك ْم مِ ْن َأ ْجر‬ ‫الل َو َلدً ا﴾‬
‫﴿ َقا ُل ْوا ا َّت َخ َذ ُ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫الس ْب َع‬ ‫‪ )12‬يس َأ ُلو َن من َخ َل َق ْاْلَر َض والسم ِ‬ ‫﴿ َقا ُل ْوا إِنَّا ُكنَّا َظال ِ ِم ْی َن﴾‬
‫اوات َّ‬ ‫َ َّ َ َ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫َْ ْ َ ْ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫َّخ ُذ ْوا ْاْلَ ْصنَا َم آل ِ َه ًة‬
‫‪َ )13‬ق َال الرس ُل ل ِ َقومِ ِهم‪َْ :‬ل َتت ِ‬
‫ْ ْ‬ ‫ُّ ُ‬ ‫﴿ َقا ُل ْوا آ َمنَّا بِ َر ِّب ا ْل َعا َل ِم ْی َن﴾‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫وسى ل ِ َق ْومِ ِه ‪ ...‬إِ َّن ُك ْم َظ َل ْمت ُْم َأ ْن ُف َس ُك ْم﴾‬ ‫‪َ ﴿ )14‬ق َال ُم َ‬ ‫ان ِْل ْبن ِ ِه‪ُ ﴿ :‬ا ْش ُك ْر ل ِ َّل ِه﴾‬
‫َق َال ُل ْق َم ُ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫ارع َو َأ ْمر‬‫‪َ )15‬ق َال ْاْلُ ْستَا ُذ‪ :‬ا ْل ِف ْع ُل َث ََّل َث ُة َأ ْق َسام َماض َو ُم َض ِ‬ ‫اس ُجدُ ْوا ِْل َد َم﴾‬ ‫ِ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫﴿ ُق ْلنَا ل ْل َم ََّلئ َكة ْ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫‪َ )16‬س َأ َل َي ْع ُق ْو ُب ڠ َأ ْبنَا َئ ُه ﴿ َما َت ْع ُبدُ ْو َن مِ ْن َب ْع ِد ْي﴾؟‬ ‫وسى﴾‬ ‫‪َ ﴿ )7‬قا ُل ْوا آ َمنَّا بِ َر ِّب َه ُار ْو َن َو ُم َ‬
‫اهیم وإِسم ِ‬
‫اع ْی َل‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َف َقا ُل ْوا‪َ ﴿ :‬ن ْع ُبدُ إِ َل َه َك َوإِ َل َه آ َبائ َك إِ ْب َر ْ َ َ ْ َ‬ ‫‪ُ ﴿ )8‬كنْت ُْم َت ُق ْو ُل ْو َن َع َلى اللِ َغ ْی َر ا ْل َح ِّق﴾‬
‫اق إِ َلها و ِ‬ ‫‪َ )9‬أ َل ْم َأ ْس َئ ْل َك ل ِ َما َذا َل ْم َت ْح َف ْظ ُد ُر ْو َس َك‬
‫احدً ا﴾‬ ‫َوإِ ْس َح َ ً َ‬
‫َأ ْن ‪Quotations with‬‬

‫‪َ . This is‬أ ْن ‪The quotation of all other verbs is usually preceded by‬‬
‫‪َ and is not translated.‬غ ْی ُر عَامِل ‪َ . It is‬أ ْن ال َّت ْف ِس ْی ِر َّي ُة ‪known as‬‬
‫﴿ َأ ْو َح ْی ُت إِ َلى ا ْل َح َو ِار ِّي ْی َن َأ ْن آمِن ُْوا بِ ْي َوبِ َر ُس ْولِي﴾‬
‫‪I inspired the helpers (of Isa): Believe in me and my messenger.‬‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ ‫َأ ْن التَّ ْف ِس ْی ِر َّي ُة‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه َثان َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح‬ ‫فِعل و َف ِ‬
‫اعل (ت)‬ ‫ْ َ‬
‫بِ ْي َوبِ َر ُس ْولِي‬ ‫آمِن ُْوا‬ ‫َأ ْن‬ ‫إِ َلى ا ْل َح َو ِار ِّي ْی َن‬ ‫َأ ْو َح ْی ُت‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه َغیْ ُر َص ِر ْيح‬ ‫فِعل و َف ِ‬

‫‪َ are listed below.‬أ ْن َت ْف ِس ْی ِر َّية ‪Some verbs which require an‬‬
‫ِ‬ ‫َأ ْر َس َل ُي ْر ِس ُل إِ ْر َس ًاْل‬
‫‪to write, enjoin‬‬ ‫َب َي ْكت ُ‬
‫ُب كتَا َب ًة‬ ‫‪َ to send‬كت َ‬
‫نَادی ين ِ‬
‫َاد ْي ُمنَا َدا ًة‬ ‫َأ ْو َحی ُي ْو ِح ْي إِ ْي َحا ًء‬
‫‪to call out‬‬ ‫َ ُ‬ ‫‪to inspire, reveal‬‬
‫‪to advise, order‬‬ ‫‪َ to make a covenant‬و َّصی ُي َو ِّص ْي َت ْو ِص َی ًة‬ ‫ع َِهدَ َي ْع َهدُ ع َْهدً ا‬
‫‪431‬‬
‫‪Vocab‬‬
‫‪stomach‬‬ ‫‪َ name‬ب ْطن ج ُب ُط ْون‬ ‫اِ ْسم ج َأ ْس َماء‬
‫‪misguided‬‬ ‫َضال ج ْو َن‬ ‫‪finger‬‬ ‫إِ ْص َبع ج َأ َصابِ ُع (مث)‬
‫‪evening‬‬ ‫‪ِ exam‬ع َشاء‬ ‫ا ْمتِ َحان ج ات‬
‫‪religion, creed‬‬ ‫مِ َّلة ج مِ َلل‬ ‫‪people‬‬ ‫َأ ْهل‬
‫ان بِ َوالِدَ ْي ِه ‪َ ...‬أ ِن ْاش ُك ْر لِي‬ ‫‪َ ﴿ )8‬و َّص ْینَا ْ ِ‬
‫اإلن َْس َ‬ ‫اه ْی َم﴾‬ ‫﴿ َأوحینَا إِ َلی َك َأ ِن ا َّتبِع مِ َّل َة إِبر ِ‬
‫َْ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫ْ َْ ْ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫َول ِ َوالِدَ ْي َك﴾‬ ‫الل﴾‬ ‫ِ‬
‫﴿ َو َّص ْینَا﴾ ُه ْم ﴿ َوإِ َّياك ُْم َأن ا َّت ُقوا َ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫یسى َأ ْن َأقِ ْی ُموا‬ ‫ِ‬
‫وسى َوع َ‬
‫یم َو ُم َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪َ ﴿ )9‬و َّص ْینَا ‪ ...‬إِ ْب َراه َ‬ ‫َّاس﴾‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫﴿ َأ ْو َح ْینَا إِلى َر ُجل من ُْه ْم َأ ْن َأنْذ ِر الن َ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫الدِّ ْي َن﴾‬ ‫﴿ َل َقدْ َب َع ْثنَا في ك ُِّل ُأ َّمة َر ُس ْو ًْل َأن ا ْع ُبدُ وا َ‬
‫الل﴾‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫وسى بِآ َياتِنَا َأ ْن َأ ْخ ِر ْج َق ْو َم َك مِ َن‬
‫‪َ ﴿ )10‬ل َقدْ َأ ْر َس ْلنَا ُم َ‬ ‫﴿إِنَّا َأ ْر َس ْلنَا ن ُْو ًحا إِلى َق ْومِ ِه َأ ْن َأن ِْذ ْر َق ْو َم َك﴾‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫ات إِ َلى الن ِ‬
‫ُّور﴾‬ ‫ال ُّظ ُلم ِ‬ ‫ان﴾‬ ‫الش ْی َط َ‬ ‫‪َ ﴿ )6‬أ َل ْم َأع َْهدْ إِ َل ْی ُك ْم ‪َ ...‬أ ْن َْل َت ْع ُبدُ وا َّ‬
‫َ‬
‫اع َیل َأ ْن َط ِّه َرا َب ْیتِ َي﴾‬
‫اهیم وإِسم ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪﴿ )7‬ع َِهدْ نَا إِ َلى إِ ْب َر َ َ ْ َ‬
‫‪Different Types of Verbs with Quotations‬‬

‫‪The following table explains the difference between types of verbs‬‬
‫‪which have quotations.‬‬
‫‪/‬س َأ َل‬
‫َق َال َ‬ ‫‪No Additions‬‬ ‫ُق ْل ُت‪ُ :‬أن ُْص ْرنِي‬
‫‪Verbs with‬‬
‫‪Quotations‬‬ ‫‪Other Verbs‬‬ ‫َأ ْن ال َّت ْف ِس ْی ِر َّي ُة‬ ‫نَا َد ْي ُت َأ ِن ان ُْص ْرنِي‬
‫‪Summary‬‬
‫َق َال َي ُق ْو ُل ُق ْل‪َ ،‬س َأ َل َي ْس َأ ُل ُسؤَ ًاْل‬ ‫َأ ْن ‪Without‬‬ ‫َق َال زَ ْيد‪ُ :‬ان ُْص ْرن ِ ْي‬
‫‪Other Verbs‬‬ ‫َأن ‪With‬‬ ‫نَا َدی زَ ْيد َأ ِن ُان ُْص ْرن ِ ْي‬
‫‪432‬‬
Part 3: ‫ َحال‬as a ‫ُج ْم َلة ُص ْغ َری‬
The ‫ َحال‬can occur as a ‫ ُج ْم َلة ُصغ َْری‬, either an ‫ ْاس ِم َّیة‬or ‫فِ ْعلِ َّیة‬.
‫ َحال‬as a ‫ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة‬
When the ‫ َحال‬is a ‫ ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة‬, the verb in the ‫ َحال‬is either a ‫ فِ ْعل َماض‬or a
ِ ‫فِ ْعل ُم َض‬.
‫ارع‬
The ‫ َحال‬as a ‫ ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة‬with a ‫فِ ْعل ُم َض ِارع‬
If the ‫ َحال‬occurs as a sentence with a ‫فِ ْعل ُم َض ِارع‬, it comes after the
main sentence without any additions.
This type of ‫ َحال‬represents an action which occurs simultaneously
with the main verb.
This is translated using the present tense of the verb, without the
subject.
‫َر َأ ْي ُت زَ ْيدً ا ُي َص ِّل ْي‬
I saw Zaid praying. ✓
(I saw Zaid, he is praying.) 
‫َحال مِ َن ا ْل َم ْف َع ْو ِل بِ ِه‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ )‫(ت‬ ِ ‫فِعل و َف‬
‫ُي َص ِّلي‬ ‫زَ ْيدً ا‬ ‫َر َأ ْي ُت‬
)‫(ه َو‬ ِ ‫فِعل و َف‬

Note
ِ ‫ف ا ْلع ْط‬
One sentence can have two ‫ َحال‬without a ‫ف‬ َ ُ ‫ َح ْر‬between them.
The word and can be added in the translation.
ِ
َ ‫َر َأ ْي ُت زَ ْيدً ا َساجدً ا َيدْ عُو‬
‫الل‬
I saw Zaid prostrating and praying to Allah.
‫َحال‬ ‫َحال‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ )‫(ت‬ ِ ‫فِعل و َف‬
‫الل‬ ‫َيدْ عُ و‬ ِ ‫س‬

‫اجدً ا‬ ‫زَ ْيدً ا‬ ‫َر َأ ْي ُت‬
َ َ
‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ )‫(ه َو‬ ِ ‫فِعل و َف‬
433
‫آن َب ْعدَ َص ََّل ِة ا ْل َف ْج ِر‬ ‫‪َ )10‬س ِم ْع ُت زَ ْيدً ا َي ْق َر ُأ ا ْل ُق ْر َ‬ ‫الل َر َّبنَا َن ْس َت ِع ْینُ ُه‬
‫‪َ )1‬ندْ ُعو َ‬
‫ان َي ْختِ ُم ْو َن ا ْل ُق ْر َ‬
‫آن ُك َّل ُه‬ ‫‪َ )11‬ي ُق ْو ُم ا ْل ُم َّت ُق ْو َن َل َیال ِي َر َم َض َ‬ ‫َّاس َي ْذك ُُر ْو َن َ‬
‫الل‬ ‫اف الن ُ‬ ‫َط َ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫َ‬
‫آن‬‫َّاس ِفي ا ْل َم ْس ِج ِد َق ْب َل ا ْل َمغ ِْر ِب َي ْت ُل ْو َن ا ْل ُق ْر َ‬ ‫‪َ )12‬ر َأ ْينَا الن َ‬ ‫اس؟‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َه ْل َسم ْع ُت ُم ْو ُه ْم َي ْغ َتا ُب ْو َن النَّ َ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫‪َ )13‬لبِ َث النَّبِ ُّي ُم َح َّمد ﷺ فِ ْي َم َّك َة ِسن ِ ْی َن َيدْ ع ُْو َق ْو َم ُه‬ ‫ب‬‫جد َي ْخ ُط ُ‬
‫اإلمام فِي ا ْلمس ِ ِ‬
‫َ ْ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َر َأ ْي ُت ْ َ َ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫اب ا ْل َمدْ َر َس ِة ُت َك ِّل ُم ُأ َّم َفاطِ َم َة‬ ‫‪َ )14‬قام ِ‬
‫ت ا ْل ُم َع ِّل َم ُة َأ َما َم َب ِ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ت ْاْلُ ُّم َأ َّيا ًما َت ْحزُ ُن َع َلی َو َل ِد َها‬ ‫َلبِ َث ِ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫ان َي ْب َت ُغ ْو َن َأ ْج َر ْاْل ِخ َر ِة‬ ‫‪َ )15‬ي ُص ْو ُم ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن َأ َّيا َم َر َم َض َ‬ ‫َّاس َي ُط ْو ُف ْو َن َح ْو َل ا ْل َك ْع َب ِة‬
‫‪َ )6‬ر َأ ْي ُت الن َ‬
‫ون ُأ َّم َه ِات ُك ْم َْل َت ْع َل ُم َ‬ ‫‪﴿ )16‬الل َأ ْخرج ُكم ِمن ب ُط ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ون َش ْیئًا﴾‬ ‫ُ َ َ ْ ْ ُ‬ ‫اس‬ ‫دت ٰهؤُ َْلء ال ُّت َّج َار َي ْخدَ عُ ْو َن ال َّن َ‬‫‪َ )7‬و َج ُّ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫‪َ )8‬ر َأ ْينَا ُأو ٰلئِ َك َّ‬
‫الص ََّل َة‬ ‫اب ُيق ْی ُم ْو َن َّ‬ ‫الش َب َ‬
‫‪َ )9‬و َجدَ َأ ْه ُل َم َّك َة آ َبا َء ُه ْم َي ْع ُبدُ ْو َن ْ َ‬
‫اْل ْصن ََام‬
‫الل َْل ُت ْش ِرك ُْو َن بِ ِه َش ْیئًا‬ ‫ِ ِ‬
‫الل إِ َلی ْاْلَ ْنبِ َیاء َأن ا ْع ُبدُ ْوا َ‬ ‫َأ ْو َحی ُ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫ور ِه ْم َْل َي ْملِ ُك َب ْع ُض ُه ْم لِب ْعض َش ْیئًا‬ ‫َّاس َي ْو َم ا ْل ِق َیا َم ِة مِ ْن ُق ُب ِ‬
‫الل الن َ‬ ‫َي ْح ُش ُر ُ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫ب َي ْأ ُك ُل ْو َن ا ْل َع َشا َء َم َع َأ ْهلِ ِه ْم‬‫َّاس فِي ُب ُی ْوتِ ِه ْم َب ْعدَ َص ََّل ِة ا ْل َمغ ِْر ِ‬ ‫َج َل َس الن ُ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫الص ِغ ْی َر َة َأ ُخ ْو َها َأ ْح َمدُ َف َذ َه َب ْت إِ َلی ُأ ِّم ِه َما َت ْبكِ ْي َو َت ْشتَكِ ْی ِه إِ َل ْی َها‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َض َر َب َفاط َم َة َّ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫َان ُط ََّّلب ٰه ِذ ِه ا ْلمدْ رس ِة يجلِسو َن فِي ال َّلی ِل ي ْقر ُأو َن ُك ُتبهم ويح َف ُظو َن دروسهم ل ِ َّْلمتِح ِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫ك َ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫َُ ْ ََ ْ ْ ُُ ْ َ ُ ْ ْ َ‬ ‫ْ َ َ ْ‬ ‫َ َ َ َ ْ ُ ْ‬ ‫ُ‬
‫ِ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫إِ َّن ا ْلمسلِ ِمین ص َّلوا ص ََّل َة ا ْل َفج ِر فِي مس ِ ِ‬
‫الر ُس ْول ﷺ ُم ْجتَمع ْی َن ُث َّم َج َل ُس ْوا َب ْعدَ َها َي ْذك ُُر ْو َن َ‬
‫الل‬ ‫جد َّ‬ ‫َ ْ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫ُ ْ ْ َ َ ْ َ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫َن الصر ِ‬
‫اط‬ ‫‪َ )7‬أ ْه ُل َم َّك َة َو َجدُ ْوا آ َبائ َُه ْم َي ْع ُبدُ ْو َن ْاْلَ ْصنَا َم َو َي ْس ُجدُ ْو َن َل َها َو َي ْذ َب ُح ْو َن َل َها َفا َّت َب ُع ْو ُه ْم َف َض ُّل ْوا ع ِ ِّ َ‬
‫ا ْل ُم ْست َِق ْی ِم‬
‫‪َ )8‬ي ْو َم ْاْلَ َح ِد َذ َه ْب ُت إِ َلی ا ْل َح ِد ْي َق ِة َم َع َأبِي َو ُأ ِّمي َو َأ ِخي َو َأ َخ َواتِي ال َّث ََّل َث ِة َف َج َل ْسنَا آكِلِ ْی َن َش ِ‬
‫اربِ ْی َن َننْ ُظ ُر إِ َلی‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫ْ‬
‫س َتغ ُْر ُب‬‫الش ْم ِ‬ ‫َّ‬
‫‪434‬‬
The ‫ َحال‬as a ‫ ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة‬with a ‫فِ ْعل َماض‬
If the ‫ َحال‬occurs as a sentence with a ‫فِ ْعل َماض‬, it comes after the
main sentence.
The particle ‫ َو‬must be added before the ‫ َحال‬. This ‫ َواو‬is known as ‫َواو‬
‫ َحال ِ َّیة‬. This is often followed by the particle ْ‫ َقد‬.
This type of ‫ َحال‬can have two meanings:
1. A state prior to the occurrence of the main verb.
This can be translated as but, already or after.
ُ ‫ِجئ‬
‫ْت َو َقدْ َخ َر ْج َت‬
I came but you had already left.
I came after you had left.
You had already left when I came.
In this example, ‫ َخ َر ْج َت‬occurred prior to ‫ ِجئ ُْت‬.
2. A contrast to the meaning in the main sentence. This can be
translated as even though, although, whereas, etc.
‫ل ِ َم َل ْم ُت َص ِّل َو َقدْ َأ َم ْر ُت َك‬
Why did you not pray even though I instructed you to?
Why did you not pray although I instructed you to?
‫َحال‬ ‫ف َت ْح ِق ْیق‬
ُ ‫َح ْر‬ ‫َواو َحال ِ َّیة‬ )‫(ت‬ ِ ‫فِعل و َف‬
‫َخ َر ْج َت‬ ْ‫َقد‬ ‫َو‬ ُ ‫ِجئ‬

‫ْت‬

َ ‫اعل‬ َ ْ
Note
A ‫ َحال‬with a negative past tense meaning is comprised of a ‫فِ ْعل ُم َض ِارع‬
with ‫ َل ْم‬.
ِْ ‫ت‬
ُ‫اإل َما ُم َب ْعد‬ ِ ‫اِجتَمع النَّاس و َلم ي ْأ‬
َ ْ َ ُ َ َ ْ
The people have gathered but
the imam has not come yet.
435
‫الل َم ًاْل َو ِص َّح ًة؟‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ف ُت َص ِّل ْي َو َل ْم َت َت َو َّض ْأ؟‬
‫ل َم َل ْم َت ُح َّج َو َقدْ َرزَ َق َك ُ‬ ‫‪)10‬‬ ‫‪َ )1‬ك ْی َ‬
‫الصن َُم إِ ٰل ًها َو َقدْ َصنَ َع ْو ُه بِ َأ ْي ِد ْي ِه ْم‬
‫ف َي ُك ْو ُن َّ‬ ‫َك ْی َ‬ ‫‪)11‬‬ ‫‪َْ )2‬ل آ َمن َُك َو َقدْ َخدَ ْعتَن ِ ْي مِ َر ًارا‬
‫الش ْم ُس َب ْعدُ‬ ‫ب َّ‬ ‫الصائِ ُم َو َل ْم َتغ ُْر ِ‬
‫َأك ََل ال ِّط ْف ُل َّ‬ ‫‪)12‬‬ ‫اس؟‬ ‫ِ ِ‬
‫‪ )3‬ل َم َتص ْی ُح ْو َن َو َقدْ َقا َم النَّ ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫اج إِ َلی ا ْل ُب ُی ْوت َو َقدْ َغ َف َر ُ‬
‫الل َل ُه ْم‬ ‫َر َج َع ا ْل ُح َّج ُ‬ ‫‪)13‬‬ ‫َْل َت ْأ ُخ ْذ ٰه َذا َو َل ْم َي ْأ َذ ْن َل َك َأ ُب ْو َك‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫الل َأ َّو َل َم َّرة‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )14‬ي َت َع َّج ُب ا ْل َكاف ُر م َن ا ْل َب ْعث َو َقدْ َخ َل َق ُه ُ‬ ‫ب َو َقدْ ُق ْل ُت َل َك ا ْل َح َّق؟‬ ‫ل َم َتغ َْض ُ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫ف ِد ْينَار َو َقدْ َأ ْن َف َق َأ ْم ِ‬
‫س َأ ْل َف ْی ِن‬ ‫‪َ )15‬ا ْل َی ْو َم َأ ْن َف َق ا ْلغَنِ ُّي َأ ْل َ‬ ‫ف َيدْ ُخ ُل ا ْل َجنَّ َة َو َقدْ َك َف َر بِاللِ؟‬ ‫َك ْی َ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫ف َتنْجح فِي اْلمتِح ِ‬ ‫الل ا ْل َك ِذ َب؟‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ان َو ُكن َْت ُت َض ِّی ُع َو ْقت ََك‬ ‫ْ َ‬ ‫‪َ )16‬ك ْی َ َ ُ‬ ‫ل َم َت ْكذبِ ْی َن َو َقدْ َح َّر َم ُ‬ ‫‪)7‬‬
‫الص ِائ َم ِة َو َقدْ ن ََه ْت ُه ُأ ُّم ُه عَ ْن ٰذلِ َك‬ ‫ِِ‬
‫كَل زَ ْيد َأ َم َام ُأ ْخته َّ‬
‫‪َ )17‬أ َ‬ ‫‪َ )8‬جا َء زَ ْيد َي ْأك ُُل َو َجا َء َأ ْح َمدُ َو َقدْ َأك ََل‬
‫ل ْصنَا ِم َو َقدْ َصنَ ُع ْو َها بِ َأ ْي ِد ْي ِه ْم؟‬ ‫‪ )18‬ل ِ َم َي ْس ُجدُ ْو َن ل ِ ْ َ‬ ‫الر ُس َل َو َق َت ُل ْو ُه ْم؟‬ ‫‪َ )9‬ك ْی َ ِ‬
‫ف ُي ْفل ُح ْو َن َو َقدْ َك َّذ ُبوا ُّ‬
‫‪َ .‬حال ‪Join the following sentences by making the second sentence a‬‬
‫‪َ as necessary.‬قدْ ‪َ and/or‬واو َحال ِ َّیة ‪Add‬‬
‫الش ْم ُس‬ ‫ت َّ‬ ‫‪ )4‬لِم َْل َت ْأك ُُل الصائِم ُة ‪ /‬غَرب ِ‬ ‫‪َ )1‬نبدَ ُأ الدَّ رس ‪َ /‬ن ُقو ُل بِس ِم اللِ‬
‫ََ‬ ‫َّ َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ْ ْ‬ ‫ْ َ‬ ‫ْ‬
‫ج َب ِ‬ ‫‪ )5‬ن َْم ِشي فِي ا ْل َح ِد ْي َق ِة ‪َ /‬ننْ ُظ ُر إِ َلی ا ْل ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ )2‬ل َم َْل َن َّتبِ ُع ُّ‬
‫ال‬ ‫ْ ْ‬ ‫الر ُس َل ‪َ /‬هدَ ُاه ْم ُ‬
‫الل‬
‫اإل َما ُم ل ِ ْل ُخ ْط َب ِة‬
‫ج ِد ‪َ /‬قا َم ْ ِ‬ ‫‪َ )6‬و َص ْلنَا إِ َلی ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬ ‫ت َّ‬
‫الش ْم ُس‬ ‫ف ي ْأك ُُل الصائِم ‪َ /‬ط َلع ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫َّ ُ‬ ‫‪َ )3‬ك ْی َ َ‬
‫‪436‬‬
‫ َحال‬as ‫اس ِم َّیة‬
When the ‫ َحال‬is a ‫ ُج ْم َلة ْاس ِم َّیة‬, it will be preceded by a ‫ َواو َحال ِ َّیة‬.
This type of ‫ َحال‬can have two meanings:
1. A state which occurs simultaneously with the main verb. This
can be translated as whilst.
‫ِجئ ُْت َو َأن َْت نَائِم‬
I came whilst you were sleeping.
2. A contrast to the meaning in the previous sentence. This can be
translated as whilst, even though, although, whereas, etc.
‫َي ْع ُبدُ ْو َن ْاْلَ ْصنَا َم َو ِه َي ِح َج َارة‬
They worship idols even though they are stones.
‫َحال‬ ‫َو َاو َحالِیَّة‬ )‫(ت‬ ِ ‫فِعل و َف‬
‫نَائِم‬ ‫َأن َْت‬ ‫َو‬ ُ ‫ِجئ‬

‫ْت‬
If the main sentence is negative, the ‫ َحال‬can be translated as as

long as.
‫َْل َتنَا ُم ْاْلُ ُّم َوال ِّط ْف ُل َي ْبكِ ْي‬
The mother does not sleep as long as the child is
crying.
Exercise 5
﴾‫الل ﴿ َو ُه ْم َي ْس َتغ ِْف ُر ْو َن‬ ُ ‫) َْل ُي َع ِّذ ُب ُه ُم‬7 ‫َأ ْش َرك ُْوا بِاللِ َو ُه َو َخ َل َق ُه ْم‬ )1
﴾‫) ﴿ َو َأغ َْر ْقنَا َآل فِ ْرع َْو َن َو َأ ْنت ُْم َتنْ ُظ ُر ْو َن‬8 َ ‫الل َو ُه َو َي َر‬
‫اك‬ َ ‫ف َت ْعصي‬
ِ َ ‫َكی‬
ْ )2
‫) َر َج َع ْاْلَ ْو َْل ُد مِ َن ا ْل َح ِد ْي َق ِة َو ُه ْم َم ْس ُر ْو ُر ْو َن‬9 ‫َي ْع ُبدُ ْو َن ْاْلَ ْصنَا َم َو ِه َي ِح َج َارة‬ )3
‫) َْل َن ْع ُبدُ ْاْلَ ْنبِ َیا َء َو ْاْلَ ْول ِ َیا َء َو ُه ْم ِع َباد َأ ْم َثا ُلنَا‬10 ‫الر ُس َل َو ُه ْم ُّم ْه َتدُ ْو َن‬ ِ
ُّ ‫ل َم َْل َت َّتبِ ُع‬ )4
‫اس َأ ْصنَا ًما آل ِ َه ًة َو ِه َي ِح َج َارة‬ ِ َّ‫خ ُذ َب ْع ُض الن‬ ِ ‫) ي َّت‬11
َ ‫اج ْو َن َخائِ ُف ْو َن‬ ُ ‫الل َو َن ْح ُن َر‬
َ ُ‫َن ْع ُبد‬ )5
‫ب ا ْل ُع َل َما َء َو ُه ْم َأ َساتِ َذ ُت ُه ْم‬ ِ ‫) َْل َي ْح َت ِر ُم َب ْع ُض ال ُّط ََّّل‬12 ﴾‫اب َو ُه ْم َظال ِ ُم ْون‬ ُ ‫﴿ َأ َخ َذ ُه ُم ا ْل َع َذ‬ )6
437
‫‪Summary‬‬
‫َحال‬
‫ُج ْم َلة‬ ‫اِ ْسم‬
‫ْ‬ ‫فِ ْعلِ َّیة‬
‫َماض‬ ‫ُم َض ِ‬
‫ارع‬
‫َج َل َس زَ ْيد‬ ‫َجا َء زَ ْيد‬ ‫َجاء زَ ْيد‬ ‫َجاء زَ ْيد‬

‫َّاس َقائِ ُم ْو َن‬
‫َوالن ُ‬ ‫َّاس‬ ‫َو َقدْ َذ َه َ‬
‫ب الن ُ‬ ‫َب‬
‫َي ْرك ُ‬ ‫َراكِ ًبا‬
‫‪Simultaneous‬‬
‫‪Prior state‬‬ ‫‪Simultaneous state‬‬
‫‪state‬‬
‫‪Contrast‬‬
‫‪Summary‬‬
‫َماض‬ ‫زَ ْيد َقا َم‬
‫َخ َبر‬
‫ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِیَّة‬ ‫زَ ْيد َي ُق ْو ُم‬
‫ُم َض ِ‬
‫ارع‬
‫)ك َ‬
‫َان( ‪With past tense‬‬ ‫َان زَ ْيد َي ُق ْو ُم‬
‫ك َ‬
‫َق َال َي ُق ْو ُل ُق ْل‪َ ،‬س َأ َل َي ْس َأ ُل ُسؤَ ًاْل‬ ‫َق َال زَ ْيد ُان ُْص ْرن ِ ْي‬
‫‪Other Verbs‬‬ ‫نَا َدی زَ ْيد َأ ِن ُان ُْص ْرن ِ ْي‬
‫ُم َض ِ‬
‫ارع‬ ‫‪Simultaneous‬‬ ‫َب‬‫ِجئ ُْت َأ ْرك ُ‬
‫ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِیَّة‬ ‫ِجئ ُْت َو َقدْ َخ َر ْج َت‬
‫َماض‬ ‫‪Prior‬‬
‫َحال‬ ‫‪Contrast‬‬ ‫ل ِ َم ِجئ َْت َو َقدْ َمنَ ْعت َُك‬
‫ْت نَائِم‬ ‫ِجئ ُْت َو َأن َ‬
‫اس ِمیَّة‬
‫‪Contrast‬‬ ‫ِجئ َْت َوا ْل َم َط ُر َين ِْز ُل‬
‫‪438‬‬
‫ُج ْم َلة ُص ْغ َری ‪َ as a‬م ْع ُط ْوف ‪Part 4:‬‬
‫‪ُ .‬ج ْم َلة ُصغ َْری ‪َ is a‬م ْع ُط ْوف َع َل ْی ِه ‪ُ if the‬ج ْم َلة ُصغ َْری ‪َ can occur as a‬م ْع ُط ْوف ‪The‬‬
‫زَ ْيد َجا َء َو َذ َه َ‬
‫ب‬
‫‪Zaid came and went.‬‬
‫‪َ , as follows:‬م ْع ُط ْوف ‪َ and‬م ْع ُط ْوف َع َل ْی ِه ‪The sentences will be labelled as‬‬
‫َذ َه َ‬
‫ب‬ ‫َو‬ ‫َجا َء‬ ‫زَ ْيد‬
‫(ه َو)‬ ‫فِعل و َف ِ‬

‫اعل ُ‬ ‫(ه َو)‬ ‫فِعل و َف ِ‬
‫اعل ُ‬
‫ْ َ‬ ‫ْ َ‬

‫َح ْر ُ‬ ‫َم ْع ُط ْوف َع َلیْ ِه‬
‫‪َ is an independent sentence, not‬ح ْر ُف َع ْطف ‪If the sentence before the‬‬
‫‪ُ , both sentences will be independent i.e. they will not‬ج ْم َلة ُصغ َْری ‪a‬‬
‫‪come together to form a single slot.‬‬
‫َجا َء زَ ْيد َو َذ َه َ‬
‫ب‬
‫‪Zaid came and went.‬‬
‫(ه َو)‬ ‫فِعل و َف ِ‬
‫اعل ُ‬ ‫ف َع ْطف‬
‫َح ْر ُ‬ ‫َف ِ‬
‫ْ َ‬
‫َذ َه َ‬
‫ب‬ ‫َو‬ ‫زَ ْيد‬ ‫َجا َء‬
‫‪Translate the following sentences and state whether the sentence‬‬
‫‪َ .‬م ْع ُط ْوف ‪َ is independent or if it becomes‬و ‪after‬‬
‫ف َجا ُء ْوا َو َذ َه ُب ْوا‬
‫‪ُّ )8‬‬ ‫الل َو ُي ِم ْی ُت‬
‫‪ُ )1‬ي ْحیِي ُ‬
‫ف َو َد َخ ُلوا ا ْل َب ْی َت‬ ‫‪َ )9‬و َص َل ُّ‬
‫الض ُی ْو ُ‬ ‫الل ُي ْحیِ ْي َو ُي ِم ْی ُت‬
‫‪ُ )2‬‬
‫‪َ )10‬ا ْْلَ ْنبِ َیا ُء َي ْصدُ ُق ْو َن َو َْل َي ْك ِذ ُب ْو َن‬ ‫الل َي ْه ِد ْي َو ُي ِض ُّل‬
‫‪ )11‬إِ َّن ٰهؤُ َْل ِء َص َب ُر ْوا َو َل ْم َي ْجزَ ع ُْوا‬ ‫‪َ )4‬ص َّلی ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن َو َصا ُم ْوا‬
‫س‬ ‫ت ا ْل َی ْو َم َوغَا َب ْت َأ ْم ِ‬ ‫‪َ )12‬فاطِم ُة ح َضر ِ‬ ‫‪ )5‬كَا ُن ْوا ُي ْذنِ ُب ْو َن ُث َّم َي ْس َتغ ِْف ُر ْو َن‬
‫َ َ َ‬
‫س‬ ‫ت َفاطِ َم ُة َوغَا َب ْت َأ ْم ِ‬ ‫‪َ )13‬ا ْل َی ْو َم َح َض َر ْ‬ ‫الر ُس ِل َو َن َّتبِ ُع ُه ْم‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ُ )6‬نؤْ م ُن بِ ُّ‬
‫ج ِد َو َل ْم َي ْر َك ُب ْوا‬ ‫َّاس إِ َلی ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬‫‪َ )14‬م َشی الن ُ‬ ‫‪َ )7‬ن ْح ُن آ َمنَّا بِ ُّ‬
‫الر ُس ِل َوا َّت َب ْعنَ ُ‬
‫اه ْم‬
‫‪439‬‬
‫ُج ْم َلة ُص ْغ َری ‪َ as a‬بدَ ل ‪Part 5:‬‬
‫‪ُ . This will be punctuated by a‬ج ْم َلة ُصغ َْری ‪َ can occur as a‬بدَ ل ‪The‬‬
‫‪semicolon.‬‬
‫الل َأ ْن َع َم َع َل ْی َك َج َع َل َك ُمؤْ مِنًا‬
‫إِ َّن َ‬
‫‪Indeed, Allah bestowed his favour‬‬
‫‪upon you; he made you a believer.‬‬
‫َخ َب ُر َّ‬
‫إن‬ ‫اِ ْس ُم إِ َّن‬ ‫َح ْرف ُم َش َّبه بِا ْل ِف ْع ِل‬
‫ُمؤْ مِنًا‬ ‫َج َع َل َك‬ ‫عَ َل ْی َك‬ ‫َأ ْن َع َم‬ ‫الل‬

‫َ‬ ‫إِ َّن‬
‫اعل‬ ‫ْ َ‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه َثان‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ ‫(ه َو)‬ ‫فِعل و َف ِ‬
‫(ه َو)‪َ ،‬و َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬
‫ُ‬
‫َبدَ ل‬ ‫ُمبْدَ ل مِنْ ُه‬
‫‪440‬‬
Part 6: ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬as a ‫ُج ْم َلة ُص ْغ َری‬
The ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬can occur as a ‫ ُج ْم َلة ُصغ َْری‬. The ‫ ُم َضاف‬of these sentences
are of two types:
1. Regular adverbs of time
2. Special adverbs of time
‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬as a Sentence with Regular Adverbs
The ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬of regular adverbs of time such as ‫ َي ْوم‬, ‫ َسنَة‬, ‫ ِح ْین‬, etc. can
occur as a ‫ ُج ْم َلة ُصغ َْری‬.
These adverbs are translated by placing the word the before the
adverb of time, followed by the ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬.
‫َي ْو َم َما َت ْت ُأ ُّم ُه‬
the day his mother died
‫ُأ ُّم ُه‬ ‫َما َت ْت‬ ‫َي ْو َم‬ ‫الر ُج ُل‬

َّ ‫َب َكی‬
ِ ‫َف‬
Note
‫ ِح ْی َن‬and its ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬can be translated as either the time or when.
‫ِح ْی َن َر َج َع َو َلدُ ُه‬
the time/when his son returned
Exercise 1
Translate the following and write out the tarkib.
‫الس ْو ِق‬ ِ َ ‫ َسنَ َة َم‬... )1
ُّ ‫ َم َسا َء َر َج ْعنَا م َن‬... )5 ‫ات َجدُّ ُه‬
َ ‫ َل ْی َل َة َر َأ ْينَا ِه ََّل َل َر َم َض‬.... )6 ِ
‫ان‬ َ ‫ ح ْی َن َي َر ْو َن ا ْل َع َذ‬... )2
‫اب‬
‫ َي ْو َم َتا ُب ْوا مِ ْن َج ِم ْی ِع ُذن ُْوبِ ِه ْم‬... )7 ‫ف‬ ُّ ‫ َسا َع َة َجا َء‬... )3
‫ ُأ ْس ُب ْو َع َل ْم َت ْح ُض ِر الدَّ ْر َس ل ِ َم َر ِض َك‬... )8 ‫اح ن َُسافِ ُر إِ َلی َم َّك َة‬
َ ‫ َص َب‬... )4
441
‫‪Vocab‬‬
‫‪to get married‬‬ ‫‪َ to see‬تزَ َّو َج َيتَزَ َّو ُج َتزَ َّو ًجا‬ ‫َأ ْب َص َر ُي ْب ِص ُر إِ ْب َص ًارا‬
‫)‪َ : die‬م ْج ُه ْول( ‪to take (life),‬‬ ‫َت َو َّفی َيت ََو َّفی َت َو ِّف ًیا‬ ‫‪to burn‬‬ ‫اِ ْحت ََر َق َي ْحت َِر ُق اِ ْحتِ َرا ًقا‬
‫‪to narrate, relate‬‬ ‫ث َت ْح ِد ْي ًثا‬

‫ث ُي َحدِّ ُ‬
‫َحدَّ َ‬ ‫‪to disgrace‬‬ ‫َأ ْخزَ ی ُي ْخ ِز ْي إِ ْخزَ ا ًء‬
‫‪to uncover, remove‬‬ ‫ف َي ْك ِش ُ‬

‫ف ك َْش ًفا‬ ‫ك ََش َ‬ ‫‪to save‬‬ ‫َأن َْجی ُين ِ‬
‫ْج ْي إِن َْجا ًء‬
‫‪Translate the following and write out the tarkib.‬‬
‫ُب َل ْی ًَّل ِح ْی َن َينَا ُم ْاْلَ ْو َْل ُد‬‫‪َ )1‬ت ْق َر ُأ ْاْلُ ُّم ا ْل ُكت َ‬
‫ِ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َان َر ُس ْو ُل الل ﷺ َي ْبتَس ُم ح ْی َن َي ْل َقی الن َ‬
‫َّاس‬ ‫‪ )2‬ك َ‬
‫الص ََّل ِة َأ ِو الدَّ ْر ِ‬
‫س‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ب َجدُّ نَا ح ْی َن َن َت َأ َّخ ُر َع ِن َّ‬ ‫‪َ )3‬يغ َْض ُ‬
‫ات َر ُس ْو ُل الل ﷺ‬ ‫الص َحا َب ُة ُك ُّل ُه ْم ﭫ ِح ْی َن َم َ‬ ‫‪َ )4‬ح ِز َن َّ‬
‫َار َي ْو َم ا ْل ِع ْی ِد ِح ْی َن َي ْل َب ُس ْو َن ثِ َیا َب ُه ُم ا ْل َج ِد ْيدَ َة‬
‫الصغ ُ‬ ‫‪َ )5‬ي ْف َر ُح ْاْلَ ْو َْل ُد ِّ‬
‫َّاس َو َْل ُي ْس ِر ُع ِح ْی َن َي ْت ُلو ا ْل ُق ْر َ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ ِ‬
‫آن‬ ‫‪َ )6‬أ ُب ْو َع ْبد الل ُي ْس ِر ُع ح ْی َن ُي َك ِّل ُم الن َ‬
‫َان الصحاب ُة ﭫ ي َّتبِعو َن الرسو َل ﷺ ِحین ي ْأمرهم بِ َأمر مِن اللِ‬
‫ْ َ َ ُُ ُ ْ ْ َ‬ ‫َ ُ ْ َّ ُ ْ‬ ‫‪ )7‬ك َ َّ َ َ‬
‫الر ُس ْو ِل ﷺ ِح ْی َن َم ِر َض‬ ‫جد َّ‬
‫َّاس فِي مس ِ ِ‬
‫َ ْ‬ ‫‪ )8‬ص َّلی َس ِّیدُ نَا َأ ُب ْو َب ْكر ﭬ بِالن ِ‬
‫ب‬ ‫ات َو َي ْش َر ُب ْو َن ا ْل َما َء ِح ْی َن َي ْس َم ُع ْو َن َأ َذ َ‬

‫ان ا ْل َمغ ِْر ِ‬ ‫‪ )9‬الصائِمو َن ي ْأ ُك ُلو َن التَّمر ِ‬
‫ََ‬ ‫َّ ُ ْ َ ْ‬
‫الص ِغ ْی ُر َو ُه َو ا ْب ُن َسنَ َت ْی ِن‬‫ات ا ْبن َُها َّ‬ ‫َت ُأ ُّم َفاطِ َم َة ُحزْ نًا َش ِد ْيدً ا ِح ْی َن َم َ‬ ‫‪َ )10‬ل َقدْ َح ِزن ْ‬
‫ُون﴾‬‫ون َي ْو َم َْل َينْ َف ُع َمال َو َْل َبن َ‬ ‫اه ْی ُم ڠ‪َ ﴿ :‬و َْل ُت ْخ ِزنِي َي ْو َم ُي ْب َع ُث َ‬ ‫‪ )11‬دعَا سیدُ نَا إِبر ِ‬
‫َ َ ِّ ْ َ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ ِِ‬ ‫ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ‬ ‫ِ ِ‬
‫اب﴾‬ ‫‪َ )12‬ق َال َنبِ ُّي الل إِ ْب َراه ْی ُم ڠ﴿اغْف ْر ل ْي َول َوالدَ َّي َول ْل ُمؤْ من ْی َن َي ْو َم َي ُق ْو ُم ا ْلح َس ُ‬
‫ات ِح ْی َن َي َر ْو َن ال ُّط ََّّل َب ُي َض ِّی ُع ْو َن َح َیا َت ُه ْم‬ ‫ات َوا ْل ُم َع ِّل ُم ْو َن وا ْل ُم َع ِّل َم ُ‬ ‫‪َ )13‬ي ْحزَ ُن ْاْل َبا ُء َو ْاْلُ َّم َه ُ‬
‫الر ْح َم ِة َوا ْل َب َرك َِة‬ ‫ِ ِ‬
‫آن َر َجا َء ا ْل َمغْف َرة َو َّ‬ ‫اج ِد َل ْی َل َة َي ْختِ ُم ْاْلَئِ َّم ُة ا ْل ُق ْر َ‬ ‫‪َ )14‬ي ْجت َِم ُع ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن فِي ا ْل َم َس ِ‬
‫ب َأ ُخ ْو ُه فِي ا ْل َح ِد ْي َق ِة َم َع َأ ْص ِد َقائِ ِه‬ ‫ِ ِ‬ ‫ِِ‬ ‫ِ‬

‫ب ا ْل ُم ْجت َِهدُ في غ ُْر َفته َم َع َأبِ ْیه ح ْی َن َي ْل َع ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )15‬يدْ ُر ُس ٰه َذا ال َّطال ُ‬
‫ِ ِ‬ ‫ِِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِِ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َب‬
‫الصغ ْی َرة زَ ْين َ‬ ‫الر ُج َل َسا َف َر إِ َلی َم َّك َة َم َع زَ ْو َجته ل ْل َح ِّج َسنَ َة َتزَ َّو َج َصد ْي ُق ُه َخالد بِ ُأ ْخته َّ‬ ‫‪ )16‬إِ َّن َذل َك َّ‬
‫‪442‬‬
‫‪Notes‬‬
‫‪َ . However, they can‬م ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه ‪1. These structures usually become the‬‬
‫‪also occur in other slots.‬‬
‫اف ا ْل ُمؤْ مِن ُْو َن َي ْو َم َي ُق ْو ُم ْو َن َأ َما َم َر ِّب ا ْل َعا َل ِم ْی َن‬
‫َي َخ ُ‬
‫‪The believers fear the Day they will‬‬
‫‪stand in front of the Lord of the worlds.‬‬
‫‪َ of the verb, i.e. it is‬م ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه ‪َ is the‬ي ْو َم ‪In this sentence, the word‬‬
‫‪the thing they fear.‬‬
‫‪ُ to a sentence, it can be:‬م َضاف ‪2. When an adverb is‬‬
‫ُم ْع َرب )‪a‬‬
‫َمن ُْص ْوب )‪b‬‬
‫َذل ِ َك َي ْو ُم ‪َ /‬ي ْو َم َرأ ْيت َُك ِْلَ َّو ِل َم َّرة‬
‫‪That was the day I saw you for the first time.‬‬
‫‪ُ . However,‬ا ْذك ُْر ‪َ of‬م ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه ‪ُ commonly become the‬م َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪َ and its‬ي ْو َم ‪3.‬‬
‫‪it is common for the verb to be removed.‬‬
‫َي ْو َم َي ْح ُش ُر ُه ْم َج ِم ْی ًعا‬
‫‪(Remember) the day he will gather them all.‬‬
‫‪َ )8‬ل ْن َأن َْسی ِح ْی َن َر َأ ْي ُت ا ْل َك ْع َب َة ِْلَ َّو ِل َم َّرة‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )1‬ذل َك ا ْل َی ْو ُم ح ْی َن َينْدَ ُم الن ُ‬
‫َّاس‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ت اللِ ا ْل َح َرا ِم‬ ‫‪َ )9‬أ ْنتَظِر يوم نُسافِر إِ َلی بی ِ‬

‫َْ‬ ‫ُ َْ َ َ ُ‬ ‫‪َ )2‬أ ْن َتظِ ُر َل ْی َل َة َن َرى ِه ََّل َل َر َم َض َ‬
‫ان‬
‫الص ْو ِر‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫الل َج ِم ْی ًعا‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ )10‬ن َْح ُش ُر ا ْل ُم ْج ِرم ْی َن َي ْو َم ُينْ َف ُخ في ُّ‬ ‫‪ )3‬ا ْلق َیا َم ُة َي ْو َم َي ْح ُش ُر ُه ُم ُ‬
‫اج ِد‬ ‫ب َل َیال ِي َي ُق ْو ُم ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن فِي ا ْل َم َس ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪ُ )11‬أح ُّ‬ ‫‪َ )4‬أ ْذك ُُر َي ْو َم َر َأ ْي ُت ا ْل َك ْع َب َة ِْلَ َّو ِل َم َّرة‬
‫‪َ )12‬ه ْل َن ِس ْی َت َش ْه َر َم َض ْینَا فِ ْي َم َّك َة َوا ْل َم ِد ْينَ ِة‬ ‫اب‬ ‫ح َس ِ‬ ‫اف يوم يح ُشر النَّاس ل ِ ْل ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫َخ ُ َ ْ َ َ ْ ُ‬ ‫‪ )5‬ن َ‬
‫َان َي ْو ُم ُولِدَ َر ُس ْو ُل اللِ ﷺ َخ ْی َر َأ َّيا ِم الدُّ ْن َیا‬ ‫‪ )13‬ك َ‬ ‫اب﴾‬ ‫یه ُم ا ْل َع َذ ُ‬ ‫َّاس َي ْو َم َي ْأتِ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ ﴿ )6‬و َأنْذ ِر الن َ‬
‫ادقِ ْی َن ِصدْ ُق ُه ْم﴾‬ ‫‪َ ﴿ )14‬ق َال الل َه َذا يوم ينْ َفع الص ِ‬
‫َ ْ ُ َ ُ َّ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫َان ذل ِ َك ا ْل َیو ُم َي ْو َم َر َج ْعنَا مِ َن ا ْل َق ْر َي ِة‬
‫‪ )7‬ك َ‬
‫‪443‬‬
‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬as a Sentence with Special Adverbs
There are some special adverbs which are always ‫ ُم َضاف‬to the
subsequent sentence. Along with their ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬, they become the
‫ َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه‬of the main sentence.
These adverbs are of two types:
1. Special adverbs of time
2. Special adverbs of place
Special Adverbs of Time
There are six special adverbs of time:
1. ‫َل َّما‬
2. ‫ُك َّل َما‬
3. ‫إِ ْذ‬
4. ‫إِ َذا‬
5. ‫ُم ْذ‬
6. ‫ُمن ُْذ‬
Special Adverbs of Place
There is one special adverb of place:
1. ‫َح ْی ُث‬
444
‫‪Special Adverbs of Time‬‬
‫َل َّما‬
‫‪. The verb of the‬فِ ْعل َماض ‪ُ consisting of a‬ج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة ‪َ is a‬ل َّما ‪ُ of‬م َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪The‬‬
‫‪. This is translated as when with‬فِ ْعل َماض ‪main sentence will also be a‬‬
‫‪a past tense meaning.‬‬
‫َص َّل ْی ُت َل َّما َس ِم ْع ُت ْاْلَ َذ َ‬
‫ان‬
‫‪I prayed when I heard the athan.‬‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِیْ ِه‬ ‫(ت)‬ ‫فِعل و َف ِ‬
‫ْاْلَ َذ َ‬
‫ان‬ ‫َس ِم ْع ُت‬ ‫َل َّما‬ ‫َص َّل ْی ُت‬

‫‪Note‬‬
‫‪َ can come both before and after the main verb.‬ل َّما ‪َ with‬م ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه ‪The‬‬
‫ج ِد‬ ‫َل َّما َس ِم ْع ُت ْاْلَ َذ َ‬
‫ان َذ َه ْب ُت إِ َلی ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬
‫‪When I heard the athan, I went to the masjid.‬‬

‫َاه ْم َل َّما َظ َل ُم ْوا﴾‬‫‪َ ﴿ )9‬وتِ ْل َك ا ْل ُق َرى َأ ْه َل ْكن ُ‬ ‫ب َع َل َّي‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ت َق َل َم ُه َغض َ‬ ‫َل َّما َأ َخ ْذ ُ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫الصائِ ُم ْو َن‬
‫الش ْم ُس َأك ََل َّ‬ ‫ت َّ‬ ‫‪َ )10‬لما َغرب ِ‬
‫َّ َ َ‬ ‫﴿ك ََّذ ُب ْوا بِا ْل َح ِّق َل َّما َجا َء ُه ْم﴾‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫ت َف ِر َح ال ِّط ْف ُل َف َر ًحا‬ ‫ت ْاْلُم إِ َلى ا ْلبی ِ‬ ‫‪َ )11‬لما رجع ِ‬ ‫﴿آمنَّا بِآي ِ‬
‫ات َر ِّبنَا َل َّما َجا َء ْتنَا﴾‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫َْ‬ ‫ُّ‬ ‫َّ َ َ َ‬ ‫َ َ‬
‫اجت ََم َع ْ َ‬
‫اْل ْو َْل ُد َح ْو َل ُه‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫﴿ َل َّما َس ِم ْعنَا ا ْل ُهدَ ى آ َمنَّا بِ ِه﴾‬
‫‪َ )12‬ل َّما َج َل َس ا ْل َجدُّ عَ َلى ا ْل ُك ْرس ِّي ْ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫‪َ )13‬ل َّما َدعَا َر ُس ْو ُل الل ﷺ َق ْو َم ُه إِلی ِع َبا َد ِة اللِ ك ََّذ ُب ْو ُه‬ ‫‪َ )5‬أك ََل ِّ‬
‫الر َج ُال ا ْل َغدَ ا َء َل َّما َر َج ُع ْوا‬
‫جدً ا َج ِم ْی ًَّل َل َّما َأ َقا ُم ْوا فِي ٰه َذا ا ْل َب َل ِد‬ ‫‪ )14‬ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن َبن َْوا َم ْس ِ‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ل َّما َد َخ َل ْاْلَ ُب ا ْل َب ْی َت َر َأى ا ْبنَ ُه َباكِ ًیا‬
‫الل َي ْع ُق ْو َب َو َأ ُّي ْو َب ڽ َص َب َرا َص ْب ًرا َج ِم ْی ًَّل‬ ‫‪َ )15‬ل َّما ا ْب َت َلى ُ‬ ‫‪َ )7‬ق َال ْاْلُ ْستَا ُذ بِ ْس ِم اللِ َل َّما َبدَ َأ الدَّ ْر َس‬
‫ب ْاْلُ ْس َتا ُذ َع َل ْی ِه ْم‬ ‫‪َ )16‬لما َت َأ َّخر ال ُّط ََّّلب َع ِن الدَّ ر ِ ِ‬ ‫‪َ )8‬ل َّما َبدَ َأ ا ْل ُم َع ِّل ُم الدَّ ْر َس َس َك َت ال ُّط ََّّل ُب‬
‫س َغض َ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َّ‬
‫‪445‬‬
‫ُك َّل َما‬
‫‪. This is translated as‬فِ ْعل َماض ‪ُ with a‬ج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة ‪ُ is a‬ك َّل َما ‪ُ of‬م َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪The‬‬
‫‪whenever and can denote past, present, or future tense. Context‬‬
‫‪will help determine the tense.‬‬
‫َس ِّل ْم َع َلی َوالِدَ ْي َك ُك َّل َما َد َخ ْل َت ا ْل َب ْی َت‬
‫‪Greet your parents whenever you enter the house.‬‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِیْ ِه‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه َغیْ ُر َص ِر ْيح‬ ‫فِعل و َف ِ‬
‫اعل ( َأن َْت)‬ ‫ْ َ‬
‫ا ْل َب ْی َت‬ ‫َد َخ ْل َت‬ ‫ُك َّل َما‬ ‫َوالِدَ ْي َك‬ ‫عَ َلی‬ ‫َس ِّل ْم‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ ‫(ه َو)‬ ‫فِعل و َف ِ‬

‫الل بِ َها َد َر َج ًة‬ ‫‪ُ )10‬ك َّل َما َس َج َّ‬
‫دت َس ْجدَ ًة ر َف َع َك ُ‬ ‫ت َأبِ ْي َدع َْو ُ‬
‫ت َل ُه‬ ‫‪ُ )1‬ك َّل َما َذك َْر ُ‬
‫‪ُ )11‬ك َّل َما َق َر َأ ا ْل ُق َّرا ُء آ َي َة َر ْح َمة َس َأ ُل ْوا َ‬

‫الل َر ْح َم َت ُه‬ ‫‪ُ )2‬ك َّل َما ازْ َد ْدنَا ِع ْل ًما ِز ْدنَا َج ْه ًَّل‬
‫ِ‬ ‫‪ُ )3‬ك َّلما َأصاب ْتنَا م ِصیبة ُق ْلنَا إِنَّا للِ‬
‫‪ُ )12‬ك َّل َما ْاشت ََر ْي ُت َش ْیئًا َجد ْيدً ا َس َأ ْل ُت َ‬
‫الل َخ ْی َر ُه‬ ‫َ َ َ ُ َْ‬
‫‪ُ )13‬ك َّلما َأك ِْسب م ًاْل ُأن ِْف ُق َشیئًا مِنْه فِي سبِی ِل اللِ‬ ‫‪ُ )4‬ك َّل َما ُت ْب َت إِ َلی اللِ َغ َف َر َل َك ُذن ُْو َب َك‬
‫َ ْ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫ُ َ‬ ‫َ‬
‫الل َل َك َأ ْج ًرا‬ ‫ت آي ًة مِن كِت ِ ِ‬ ‫ت لِنَ ْف ِس ْي‬
‫‪َ )5‬أ ْدع ُْو ل ِ َوالِدَ َّي ُك َّل َما َدع َْو ُ‬
‫َب ُ‬ ‫َاب الل َكت َ‬ ‫‪ُ )14‬ك َّل َما َق َر ْأ َ َ ْ‬
‫ج ِد رفِع ْت درجا ُت َك ِعنْدَ اللِ‬ ‫ت بِاس ِم اللِ‬
‫‪ُ )15‬ك َّل َما َم َش ْی َت إِ َلی ا ْل َم ْس ِ ُ َ َ َ َ‬ ‫‪ُ )6‬ك َّل َما َك َت ْب ُت الدَّ ْر َس َبدَ ْأ ُ ْ‬
‫الل َع َلی نِ ْع َمتِ ِه‬‫ت َ‬ ‫‪ُ )16‬ك َّل َما َش ِر ْب ُت َما ًء َأو َأ َك ْل ُت َط َعا ًما َش َك ْر ُ‬ ‫اك ا ْبت ََس َم فِي َو ْج ِه ْي‬
‫‪ُ )7‬ك َّل َما َل ِق ْی ُت َأ َخ َ‬
‫اض ْت َأ ْع ُین ُُه َّن ُد ُم ْوعًا‬ ‫الل َف َ‬
‫َات َيدْ ع ُْو َن َ‬ ‫ت ا ْل ُمؤْ مِن ُ‬ ‫‪ُ )17‬ك َّلما َقام ِ‬
‫َ َ‬ ‫‪ُ ﴿ )8‬ك َّل َما َجا َء ُه ْم َر ُسول ‪ ...‬ك ََّذ ُب ْوا﴾‬
‫عَو ُت ُه ْم ‪َ ...‬ج َع ُل ْوا َأ َصا ِب َع ُه ْم ِفي آ َذ ِان ِه ْم﴾‬
‫‪َ )18‬ق َال ن ُْوح ﴿كُ َّل َما َد ْ‬ ‫‪ُ ﴿ )9‬ك َّل َما َجا َءك ُْم َر ُسول ‪ْ ...‬‬
‫اس َت ْك َب ْر ُت ْم﴾‬
‫‪446‬‬
‫إِ ْذ‬
‫‪ُ . This is translated as‬ج ْم َلة ْاس ِم َّیة ‪ُ or a‬ج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة ‪ can be a‬إِ ْذ ‪ُ of‬م َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪The‬‬
‫‪when.‬‬
‫الل النَّبِ َّي ﷺ إِ ْذ َأ ْخ َر َج ُه َق ْو ُم ُه‬
‫ن ََص َر ُ‬
‫‪Allah assisted the Prophet when his people expelled him.‬‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِیْ ِه‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ ‫َف ِ‬
‫َق ْو ُم ُه‬ ‫َأ ْخ َر َج ُه‬ ‫إِ ْذ‬ ‫النَّبِ َّي‬ ‫الل‬

‫ُ‬ ‫ن ََص َر‬
‫َف ِ‬
‫اعل‬ ‫فِ ْعل َو َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬
‫‪Vocab‬‬
‫‪jail‬‬ ‫‪ِ body‬س ْجن ج ُس ُج ْون‬ ‫َج َسد ج َأ ْج َساد‬
‫‪doctor‬‬ ‫َطبِ ْیب ج َأطِ َّبا ُء‬ ‫‪news‬‬ ‫َخ َبر ج َأ ْخ َبار‬
‫‪crescent‬‬ ‫ِه ََّلل ج َأ ِه َّلة‬ ‫‪medicine‬‬ ‫َد َواء ج َأ ْد ِو َية‬
‫الصدْ ِق إِ ْذ َجا َء ُه﴾‬ ‫﴿ َوك ََّذ َب بِ ِّ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫إِ َّن ُه َقدْ ن ََص َرنِ ْي ن َْص ًرا إِ ْذ ُكن ُْت َف ِق ْی ًرا‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫َض َر َبن ِ ْي زَ ْيد إِ ْذ َأغ َْض ْب ُت ُه إِغ َْضا ًبا‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َان َر ُس ْو ُل الل ﷺ ا ْب َن َأ ْر َبع ْی َن َسنَ ًة إِ ْذ َب َع َث ُه ُ‬
‫الل‬ ‫ك َ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫ار َس َف ِر ِه‬‫َن َأ ْخ َب ِ‬ ‫ثع ْ‬ ‫َان ُي َحدِّ ُ‬ ‫َه ْل َس ِم ْع َت َأ ْح َمدَ إِ ْذ ك َ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫َان ع ُُم ُر َها َخ ْم ًسا َّو ِع ْش ِر ْي َن َسنَ ًة‬ ‫َب إِ ْذ ك َ‬ ‫َتزَ َّو َج ْت زَ ْين ُ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫َان َر ُس ْو ُل اللِ ﷺ طِ ْف ًَّل َص ِغ ْی ًرا إِ ْذ ُت ُو ِّف َی ْت ُأ ُّم ُه آمِنَ ُة‬ ‫ك َ‬ ‫‪)7‬‬
‫ت ْاْلَ ْر ُض ِز ْلزَ ًاْل َش ِد ْيدً ا‬ ‫َان النَّاس فِي بیوتِ ِهم و َأسواقِ ِهم إِ ْذ زُ ْل ِز َل ِ‬
‫ُُْ ْ َ ْ َ ْ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫ك َ‬ ‫‪)8‬‬
‫ِ ِ‬
‫الس ْج ِن﴾‬ ‫الل ﴿ َقدْ َأ ْح َس َن بِي إِ ْذ َأ ْخ َر َجني م َن ِّ‬ ‫ف ڠ إِ َّن َ‬ ‫َق َال ُي ْو ُس ُ‬ ‫‪)9‬‬
‫‪447‬‬
‫‪Notes‬‬
‫‪َ . However, they can‬م ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه ‪ُ usually occur as the‬م َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪ and its‬إِ ْذ ‪1.‬‬
‫‪َ .‬بدَ ل ‪َ and‬م ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه ‪also come in other slots, such as the‬‬
‫ِ ِ ِ‬
‫َّاس ُك ُّل ُه ْم‬ ‫َْل َأن َْسی َي ْو َم ا ْلع ْید إِذ ْ‬
‫اجت ََم َع الن ُ‬
‫‪I will not forget the day of Eid, when all the people gathered.‬‬
‫‪َ .‬م ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه ‪َ of the‬بدَ ل ‪ُ become the‬م َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪ and its‬إِ ْذ ‪In this sentence,‬‬
‫‪َ of‬م ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه ‪ُ commonly become the‬م َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪ and its‬إِ ْذ ‪2. In the Quran,‬‬
‫‪ُ .‬ا ْذك ُْر‬
‫﴿ َوا ْذك ُُر ْوا إِ ْذ ُكنْت ُْم َقلِ ْی ًَّل﴾‬
‫‪Remember when (the time) you were few.‬‬
‫‪.‬إِ ْذ ‪ُ to be removed before‬ا ْذك ُْر ‪It is common for the verb of‬‬
‫اس ُجدُ ْوا ِْل َد َم﴾‬ ‫ِ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫﴿ َوإِ ْذ ُق ْلنَا ل ْل َم ََّلئ َكة ْ‬
‫‪And (remember) when we said to‬‬
‫‪the angels: Prostrate to Adam.‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫َاب﴾‬‫وسى ا ْلكت َ‬ ‫﴿ َوإِ ْذ آ َت ْینَا ُم َ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫آل فِ ْرع َْو َن﴾‬ ‫﴿ َوإِ ْذ ن ََّج ْینَاك ُْم مِ ْن ِ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫ان ِْل ْبن ِ ِه ‪َْ ...‬ل ُت ْش ِر ْك بِاللِ﴾‬ ‫﴿ َوإِ ْذ َق َال ُل ْق َم ُ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫َّخ ُذ َأ ْصنَا ًما آل ِ َه ًة﴾‬‫اهیم ِْلَبِی ِه آزَ ر َأ َتت ِ‬‫ِ‬
‫﴿ َوإِ ْذ َق َال إِ ْب َر ُ ْ َ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫ین َق ْو َم فِ ْرع َْو َن﴾‬ ‫ِِ‬ ‫ِ ِ‬
‫وسى َأن ائْت ا ْل َق ْو َم ال َّظالم َ‬ ‫﴿ َوإِ ْذ نَا َدى َر ُّب َك ُم َ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫َق َال ُم ْو َسی ل ِ َق ْومِ ِه ﴿ا ْذك ُُروا نِ ْع َم َة اللِ َع َل ْی ُك ْم إِ ْذ َج َع َل فِی ُك ْم َأ ْنبِ َیا َء﴾‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫وسى ل ِ َق ْومِ ِه ا ْذك ُُروا نِ ْع َم َة اللِ َع َل ْی ُك ْم إِ ْذ َأن َْجاك ُْم مِ ْن ِ‬
‫آل فِ ْرع َْو َن﴾‬ ‫﴿إِ ْذ َق َال ُم َ‬ ‫‪)7‬‬
‫‪448‬‬
‫َتن ِْو ْي ُن ا ْل ِع َو ِ‬
‫ض‬
‫َتنْ ِو ْي ُن ‪ُ which occurs as a sentence can be replaced by a‬م َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪The‬‬
‫ض‬‫‪َ (that day) and‬ي ْو َمئِذ ‪. This is quite common with words such as‬ا ْل ِع َو ِ‬
‫‪ِ (that time).‬ح ْینَئِذ‬
‫‪ُ .‬م َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪ُ as a‬ج ْم َلة ‪This was originally two words followed by a‬‬
‫إِذ‬ ‫َي ْو َم‬ ‫َذ َه ْب ُت‬ ‫إِ ْذ‬ ‫َي ْو َم‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬ ‫ُم َضاف‬ ‫ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬ ‫ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬ ‫ُم َضاف‬
‫اب الن َِّار الن ََّار‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫َل ْی َلتَئِذ َر َأ ْينَا ا ْل ِه ََّل َل‬
‫اب ا ْل َجنَّة ا ْل َج َّن َة َو َأ ْص َح ُ‬
‫‪َ )8‬ي ْو َمئذ َيدْ ُخ ُل َأ ْص َح ُ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫الص ْو ِر َو ِح ْینَئِذ َي ْخ ُر ُج ْو َن مِ ْن ُق ُب ْو ِر ِه ْم‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ُ )9‬ينْ َف ُخ في ُّ‬ ‫َل ُی ْس َأ َل َّن ا ْل ِع َبا ُد َي ْو َمئِذ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫َي ْأتِ ْي ك َُّل إِن َْسان َم ْو ُت ُه َو ِح ْینَئِذ َْل َينْ َف ُع َد َواء َو َْل َطبِ ْیب‬ ‫‪)10‬‬ ‫َي ْو َمئِذ َي ْخ َس ُر ال َّظال ِ ُم ْو َن‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫َّاس َي ْو َم ا ْل ِق َیا َم ِة َو ِح ْینَئِذ َْل َينْ َف ُع َمال َو َْل َبن ُْو َن‬
‫ُي ْح َش ُر الن ُ‬ ‫‪)11‬‬ ‫َّاس َج ِم ْی ًعا‬ ‫ح ْینَئذ َينْدَ ُم الن ُ‬
‫ِ ِ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫َل ْم َأ ْف َه ِم الدَّ ْر َس ا ْل َی ْو َم َو َأ ْس َأ ُل ْاْلُ ْستَا َذ َغدً ا َو ِح ْینَئِذ َأ ْف َه ُم ُه‬ ‫‪)12‬‬ ‫اإل َما َم َقائِ ًما‬
‫َسا َعتَئِذ َر َأ ْي ُت ْ ِ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫ات ُم َص ِّل ْی َن‬ ‫ُيؤَ ِّذ ُن ا ْل ُمؤَ ِّذ ُن َو ِح ْینَئِذ َي ُق ْو ُم ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن َوا ْل ُم ْسلِ َم ُ‬ ‫‪)13‬‬ ‫﴿ َي ْو َمئِذ َي ْف َر ُح ا ْل ُمؤْ مِن ُْو َن﴾‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫ث ْاْلَ ْر ُض َأ ْخ َب َار َها‬ ‫ُتزَ ْلزَ ُل ْاْلَ ْر ُض َي ْو َم ا ْل ِق َیا َم ِة َو َي ْو َمئِذ ُت َحدِّ ُ‬ ‫‪)14‬‬ ‫الش َفا َع ُة﴾‬‫﴿ َي ْو َمئِذ َْل َتنْ َف ُع َّ‬ ‫‪)7‬‬
‫‪Vocab‬‬
‫‪to face, turn towards‬‬ ‫‪ to emphasise‬اِ ْس َت ْق َب َل َي ْستَ ْقبِ ُل اِ ْستِ ْقبَ ًاْل‬ ‫َأكَّدَ ُيؤَ كِّدُ َت ْأكِیْدً ا‪َ ،‬ت ْوكِیْدً ا‬
‫‪to listen‬‬ ‫استِ َماعًا‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬

‫َم ْج ُر ْور ‪ to make‬ا ْست ََم َع َي ْستَم ُع ْ‬ ‫َج َّر َي ُج ُّر َج ًّرا‬
‫‪to scold‬‬ ‫زَ َج َر َيزْ ُج ُر زَ ْج ًرا‬ ‫َم ْجزُ ْوم ‪to make‬‬ ‫َجزَ َم َي ْج ِز ُم َجزْ ًما‬
‫‪to wish, desire‬‬ ‫َم ْر ُف ْوع ‪َ to make‬شا َء َي َشا ُء َم ِش ْی َئ ًة‬ ‫َر َف َع َي ْر َف ُع َر ْف ًعا‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪to sneeze‬‬ ‫َمن ُْص ْوب ‪َ to make‬ع َط َس َي ْعطـ ُُس ُع َط ً‬
‫اسا‬ ‫ب ن َْص ًبا‬ ‫ب َينْص ُ‬ ‫ن ََص َ‬
‫‪to pass‬‬ ‫َم َّر َي ُم ُّر ُم ُر ْو ًرا‬ ‫‪to negate‬‬ ‫َن َفی َين ِْف ْي َن ْف ًیا‬
‫‪to be dry‬‬ ‫َيبِ َس َي ْی َب ُس ُيـَ ْب ًسا‬ ‫‪to seek refuge‬‬ ‫اِ ْس َت َعا َذ َي ْست َِع ْی ُذ اِ ْستِ َعا َذ ًة‬
‫‪449‬‬
‫إِ َذا‬
‫‪. However, it‬فِ ْعل َماض ‪ُ , usually with a‬ج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة ‪ is a‬إِ َذا ‪ُ of‬م َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪The‬‬
‫‪denotes a present habitual or future tense meaning. This is‬‬
‫‪translated as when.‬‬
‫ج ِد‬ ‫إِ َذا َس ِم ْع ُت ْاْلَ َذ َ‬
‫ان َذ َه ْب ُت إِ َلی ا ْلمس ِ‬
‫َ ْ‬
‫‪When I hear the athan, I go to the masjid.‬‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِیْ ِه َغیْ ُر َص ِر ْيح‬ ‫ت)‬ ‫فِعل و َف ِ‬
‫اعل ( ُ‬ ‫ْ َ‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه‬
‫ج ِد‬
‫َ ْ‬ ‫إِلی‬ ‫َذ َه ْب ُت‬ ‫ْاْلَ َذ َ‬
‫ان‬ ‫َس ِم ْع ُت‬ ‫إِ َذا‬
‫َم ْج ُر ْور‬ ‫َجار‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ ‫(ت)‬ ‫ِفعل و َف ِ‬

‫‪ is negative, it comes with the negative‬إِ َذا ‪If the sentence after‬‬
‫‪َ .‬ل ْم ‪particle‬‬
‫إِ َذا َل ْم َي ْح ُض ِر ا ْل ُم َع ِّل ُم الدَّ ْر َس َر َ‬
‫اج ْعنَا الدُّ ُر ْو َس‬
‫‪When the teacher does not attend the class, we revise the lessons.‬‬
‫‪ )9‬إِ َذا َد َخ َل ْت إِ َّن َأ ْو َْل ُم اْل ْبتِدَ ِاء َع َلی ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة َأ َّكدَ ْت َها‬ ‫‪َ ﴿ )1‬وا ْذك ُْر َر َّب َك إِ َذا ن َِس ْی َت﴾‬
‫‪ )10‬إِ َذا َد َخ َل ْت َل ْم َع َلی ا ْل ُم َض ِ‬
‫ار ِع َجزَ َم ْت ُه َوإِ َذا َد َخ َل ْت ُه َأ ْن‬ ‫ب َق ْو ًما ا ْب َت ََّل ُه ْم‬‫الل إِ َذا َأ َح َّ‬
‫ن ََص َب ْت ُه‬ ‫الل َع َل ْی ِه‬
‫اب ُ‬ ‫‪ )3‬إِ َذا َت َ‬
‫اب ا ْل َع ْبدُ َت َ‬
‫‪ِ )11‬إ َذا َد َخ َل ْت َل ْم َأ ْو َْل َأ ْو َل ْن عَ َلی ا ْل ُم َض ِار ِع َن َف ْت ُه َو َج َع َل ْت ُه‬ ‫‪﴿ )4‬إِ َذا َأ َصا َبت ُْه ْم ُم ِص ْی َبة َقا ُل ْوا إِنَّا ل ِ َّل ِه﴾‬
‫َمن ِْف ًّیا‬ ‫ت َْل َينْ َف ُع َطبِ ْیب َو َْل َد َواء‬ ‫‪ )5‬إِ َذا َجا َء ا ْل َم ْو ُ‬
‫اب َي ْو َم ا ْل ِق َیا َم ِة َينْدَ ُم َو ِح ْین َِئذ َْل َت ْن َف ُع‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ِ )12‬إ َذا َر َأی ا ْل َكاف ُر ا ْل َع َذ َ‬ ‫كُسا َلى‬ ‫ِ‬
‫الص ََّلة َقا ُموا َ‬
‫ِِ‬
‫‪ِ )6‬إ َّن ا ْل ُمنَافق ْی َن ِإ َذا َقا ُم ْوا ِإ َلى َّ‬
‫النَّدَ ا َم ُة‬ ‫الص ََّل ِة إِ َذا َب َل ُغ ْوا َس ْب َع ِسن ِ ْی َن‬
‫‪ُ )7‬م ُر ْوا َأ ْو َْل َدك ُْم بِ َّ‬
‫الضم ُة مِن ِ‬
‫آخ ِر‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ ِ‬ ‫‪ )13‬إِ َذا َد َخ َل ْت ن ُ‬ ‫اج ِد‬
‫ان ازْ َدا َد ا ْل ُم َص ُّل ْو َن ِفي ا ْل َم َس ِ‬‫‪ِ )8‬إ َذا َجا َء َر َم َض ُ‬
‫ْ‬ ‫ُون ال َّت ْأك ْید َس َق َطت َّ َّ‬
‫ار ِع‬‫ا ْل ُم َض ِ‬
‫‪450‬‬
‫الش ْم ُس َخ َر َج َو ْق ُت ا ْل َف ْج ِر َوإ َذا‬
‫ت َّ‬‫‪ )14‬إِ َذا َط َلع ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫غ ََر َب ْت َد َخ َل َو ْق ُت ا ْل َمغ ِْر ِ‬
‫ب‬
‫َفاء َرابِ َطة‬

‫‪ُ come at the beginning of the sentence, the‬م َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪ and its‬إِ َذا ‪If‬‬
‫‪َ is usually added to the sentence after it. This is most‬ف ‪particle‬‬
‫‪َ is not translated.‬ف ‪َ . The‬أ ْمر ‪common when the verb is an‬‬
‫إِ َذا َس َأ ْل َت َف ْ‬
‫اس َئ ِل َ‬
‫الل‬
‫‪When you (need to) ask anyone, ask Allah.‬‬
‫‪َ to‬م ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه ‪َ which joins the‬فاء ‪َ , the‬فاء َرابِ َطة ‪In tarkib, this is labelled as‬‬
‫‪the rest of the sentence.‬‬
‫اعل ( َأنْت)‬ ‫ْ َ‬ ‫َرابِ َطة‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه‬
‫الل‬
‫َ‬ ‫اس َئ ِل‬
‫ْ‬ ‫َف‬ ‫َس َأ ْل َت‬ ‫إِ َذا‬
‫است َِم ْع إِ َلی ا ْل ُم َع ِّل ِم‬
‫س َف ْ‬ ‫‪ )6‬إِ َذا َج َل ْس َت فِي الدَّ ْر ِ‬ ‫الل‬ ‫ِ‬
‫اح َمد َ‬ ‫‪ )1‬إِ َذا َع َط ْس َت َف ْ‬
‫آخ َر َف ََّل َت ْجلِ ْس َم َع ُه‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪ )2‬إِ َذا اس َتعن َْت َفاست َِعن بِاللِ‬
‫َاب َ‬ ‫‪ )7‬إِ َذا َسم ْع َت َأ َحدً ا َي ْغت ُ‬ ‫ْ ْ‬ ‫ْ َ‬
‫َّاس َفاغ ِْس ْل َيدَ َك مِنْ ُه‬ ‫‪ )8‬إِ َذا َر َأ ْي َت َأ َحدً ا َي ْظلِ ُم الن َ‬ ‫است َِم ُعوا َل ُه﴾‬ ‫‪َ ﴿ )3‬وإِ َذا ُق ِرئَ ا ْل ُق ْر ُ‬
‫آن َف ْ‬
‫واس َت ْقبِ ِل ا ْل ِق ْب َل َة‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪ )9‬إِ َذا َأر َّ ِ‬
‫دت ت ََّل َو َة ا ْل ُق ْرآن َفت ََو َّض ْأ ْ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫اح َمدْ ُه‬ ‫ْت َف ْ‬‫الل َوإِ َذا َف َرغ َ‬ ‫‪ )4‬إِ َذا َأ َك ْل َت َف َس ِّم َ‬
‫الر ِج ْی ِم﴾‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫الل ِم َن َّ‬‫آن َفاست َِع ْذ ِب ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪ )5‬إِ َذا نِ ْم َت ع ِ‬
‫الش ْی َطان َّ‬ ‫‪ِ ﴿ )10‬إ َذا َق َر ْأ َت ا ْل ُق ْر َ ْ‬ ‫الص ََّلة َف َص ِّل َها إِ َذا ْ‬
‫اس َت ْی َق ْظ َت‬ ‫َن َّ‬
‫الص َلة‬
‫َما ِّ‬
‫الص َلة ‪َ . This is known as‬ما ‪ is followed by the particle‬إِ َذا ‪Sometimes‬‬
‫‪َ ,‬ما ِّ‬
‫‪َ which creates emphasis but does not affect the grammar.‬ما ‪the‬‬
‫إِ َذا َما َم َّر َي ْوم َذ َه َ‬
‫ب َب ْع ُض َك‬
‫‪When a day passes, a part of you passes.‬‬
‫‪451‬‬
‫ إِ َذا ا ْل ُف َجائِ َّی ُة‬and ‫إِ ْذ ا ْل ُف َجائِ َّی ُة‬
A sentence may be followed by another which shows an
unexpected event.
I left the house one sunny morning,
and suddenly, a few hours later it was pouring.
In Arabic, either of the following words are used to create this
meaning.
1. ‫إِ َذا ا ْل ُف َجائِ َّی ُة‬
2. ‫إِ ْذ ا ْل ُف َجائِ َّی ُة‬
‫إِ َذا ا ْل ُف َجائِ َّی ُة‬
The word ‫ إِ َذا‬can be used to show an unexpected or surprising
event. This is translated as suddenly, when suddenly, lo, or simply
when.
This ‫ إِ َذا‬is preceded by a ‫ َف‬and is followed by a ‫ ُج ْم َلة ْاس ِم َّیة‬.
ْ ‫ُج ْم َلة‬ ‫إِ َذا‬ ‫َفـ‬ ‫ُج ْملة‬
‫َصا ُه َفـإِ َذا ِه َي ُث ْع َبان‬
َ ‫َأ ْل َقی ُم ْو َسی ع‬
Musa threw his staff and lo, it was a serpent.
In tarkib, the ‫ َف‬is labelled as a ‫ َح ْر ُف َع ْطف‬, and the ‫ إِ َذا‬is labelled as ‫إِ َذا‬
‫ا ْل ُف َجائِ َّی ُة‬. The sentence after it becomes a new sentence.
‫َخبَر‬ ‫ُمبْتَدَ أ‬ ‫ا ْل ُف َجائِیَّ ُة‬ ‫ف َع ْطف‬
ُ ‫َح ْر‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ ِ ‫َف‬
‫ُث ْع َبان‬ ‫ِه َي‬ ‫إِ َذا‬ ‫ف‬

َ ‫عَ َصا ُه‬ ‫ُم ْو َسی‬ ‫َأ ْل َقی‬
452
‫‪Notes‬‬
‫‪ِ .‬ب ‪َ of‬ح ْر ُف ِص َلة ‪ can be preceded by a‬إِ َذا ا ْل ُف َجائِ َّی ُة ‪ُ after‬م ْبتَدَ أ ‪1. The‬‬
‫َد َخ ْلنَا ا ْل َف ْص َل َفـإِ َذا بِزَ ْيد َجالِس‬
‫‪We entered the class and there was Zaid sitting.‬‬
‫‪.‬نَكِ َرة ‪ can also occur as a‬إِ َذا ا ْل ُف َجائِ َّی ُة ‪ُ after‬م ْبتَدَ أ ‪2. The‬‬
‫َّان َفـإِ َذا طِ ْفل ِعنْدَ ا ْل َب ِ‬
‫اب‬ ‫َخرج ُت مِن الدُّ ك ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫َ ْ‬
‫‪I came out of the shop and lo, there was a child at the‬‬
‫‪door.‬‬
‫اك يربیانِ َك ص ِغیرا ويح ِسن ِ‬
‫َان إِ َل ْی َك َفإِ َذا َأن َْت َت ُع ُّق ُه َما‬ ‫َ ًْ َ ُ ْ‬ ‫َأ َب َو َ ُ َ ِّ َ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫ُكنَّا َنم ِشي فِي ا ْلح ِدي َق ِة إِ ْذ َن َظرنَا إِ َلی السم ِ‬
‫اء َفإِ َذا ا ْل ِه ََّل ُل َأ َما َمنَا‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫َّ َ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫َ ْ‬ ‫ْ ْ‬
‫ُب ُد ُر ْو ِس ْي َو َأ ْح َف ُظ َها َفإِ َذا َدم َي ِس ْی ُل َع َلی ُأ ْص ُب ِعي‬ ‫ار َح َة ُكن ُْت َأ ْجلِ ُس َأ ْكت ُ‬ ‫ا ْل َب ِ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫الل َفإِ َذا ُه ْم َي ْك ُف ُر ْو َن‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫الل إِ َل ٰى َث ُمو َد َأ َخ ُ‬
‫اه ْم َصال ًحا ڠ َأن ا ْع ُبدُ وا َ‬ ‫َل َقدْ َأ ْر َس َل ُ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫ات َي ْض َح ُك ْو َن‬ ‫جاء ا ْل َكافِ ِرين رس ُلهم بِآيات بینَات مِن اللِ َفإِ َذا ُهم مِن ْاْلي ِ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫ْ َ َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ْ َ ُ ُ ُ ْ َ َ ِّ‬ ‫َ َ‬
‫كَان ُْوا ُي ْخ ِر ُج ْو َن ا ْل َما َء مِ َن ا ْلبِئ ِْر ك َُّل َي ْوم َف َذ َه ُب ْوا إ َل ْی َها َي ْو ًما َفإِ َذا ِه َي َيابِ َسة َل ْی َس فِ ْی َها َماء‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫اب ُدكَّانِ ِه َو َد َخ َل ُه َفإِ َذا ْاْلَ ْش َیا ُء ُك ُّل َها َع َلی ْاْلَ ْر ِ‬
‫ض‬ ‫الس ْو ِق َو َفت ََح َب َ‬ ‫ب الت ِ‬
‫َّاج ُر إِ َلی ُّ‬ ‫س َذ َه َ‬ ‫َأ ْم ِ‬ ‫‪)7‬‬
‫الل َعن ُْه ْم َفإِ َذا ُه ْم بِ َر ِّب ِه ْم َي ْك ُف ُر ْو َن‬
‫ف ُ‬ ‫الل َف َی ْك ِش ُ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َّاس ُمص ْی َبة بِ ُذن ُْوبِ ِه ْم َف َیدْ ع ُْو َن َ‬ ‫ب الن َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َقدْ ُتص ْی ُ‬ ‫‪)8‬‬
‫َات َو َغ ْی ُر ُه َما‬ ‫َاها َفإِ َذا ْاْلَ ْث َم ُار الت ُُّم ْو ُر ُّ‬
‫والر َّمان ُ‬ ‫ت إِ ْذ َس ِم ْعنَا َص ْو ًتا مِ َن ا ْلغ ُْر َف ِة َف َأ ْس َر ْعنَا إِ َل ْی َها َو َد َخ ْلن َ‬
‫ُكنَّا فِي ا ْلبی ِ‬
‫َْ‬ ‫‪)9‬‬
‫َع َلی ْاْلَ ْر ِ‬
‫ض‬
‫ض َنبا ًتا و َأنْزَ َل َل ُكم مِن السم ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫اء َما ًء َو َس َق َ‬
‫اك َما ًء‬ ‫ْ َ َّ َ‬ ‫الش ْم َس َوا ْل َق َم َر َو َأ ْخ َر َج َل ُك ْم م َن ْاْلَ ْر ِ َ َ‬
‫الل َس َّخ َر َل ُك ُم َّ‬ ‫‪ )10‬إِ َّن َ‬
‫ع َْذ ًبا َفإِ َذا َأ ْنت ُْم َت ْع ُص ْو َن ُه‬
‫‪453‬‬
‫إِ ْذ ا ْل ُف َجائِ َّی ُة‬
‫‪ can also be used to show an unexpected event.‬إِ ْذ ‪, the word‬إِ َذا ‪Like‬‬
‫‪َ (whilst) which is‬ب ْین ََما ‪This is preceded by a sentence with the adverb‬‬
‫‪ُ .‬ج ْم َلة ْاس ِم َّیة ‪followed by a‬‬
‫ُج ْملة‬ ‫إِ ْذ‬ ‫اس ِم َّیة‬
‫ُج ْم َلة ْ‬ ‫َب ْین ََما‬
‫‪Look at the example below:‬‬
‫مع الدَّ ْر َس إِ ْذ َس ِم ْعنَا َص ْو ًتا‬
‫َب ْین ََما ن َْح ُن ن َْس ُ‬
‫‪Whilst we were listening to the lesson, we suddenly heard a sound.‬‬
‫‪We were listening to the lesson when we suddenly heard a sound.‬‬
‫‪:‬إِ ْذ ا ْل ُف َجائِ َّی ُة ‪In tarkib, this is labelled as‬‬
‫َو َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ ‫فِعل و َف ِ‬
‫اعل‬ ‫ْ َ‬ ‫ا ْل ُف َجائِیَّ ُة‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِیْ ِه‬
‫َص ْو ًتا‬ ‫َس ِم ْعنَا‬ ‫إِ ْذ‬ ‫مع الدَّ ْر َس‬

‫ن َْس ُ‬ ‫ن َْح ُن‬ ‫َب ْین ََما‬
‫اعل َو َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬

‫ْ َ‬
‫آن إِ ْذ َب َكی َو َب َكی الن ُ‬
‫َّاس‬ ‫َب ْین ََما ْ ِ‬
‫اإل َما ُم َي ْت ُلو ا ْل ُق ْر َ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫َب ْین ََما ْاْلَ ْو َْل ُد َي ْل َع ُب ْو َن فِي ا ْل َح ِد ْي َق ِة إِ ْذ نَزَ َل ا ْل َم َط ُر‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫يح فِ ْي غ ُْر َفتِ ْي إِ ْذ نَا َد ْتن ِ ْي ُأ ِّم ْي َأ ِن ان ُْص ْرنِ ْي‬ ‫َب ْین ََما َأنَا َأ ْست َِر ُ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫بینَما ال ُّط ََّّلب ي َطالِعو َن ُك ُتبهم إِ ْذ ر َأوا َنارا مِن الدُّ َّك ِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫َُ ْ َ ْ ً َ‬ ‫ُ ُ ُْ‬ ‫َْ َ‬
‫‪َ )5‬ب ْین ََما ٰه َذا ا ْل َو َلدُ َي ْض ِر ُب ُأ ْخ َت ُه إِ ْذ َد َخ َل َأ ُب ْو ُه َما َو ُأ ُّم ُه َما ا ْلغ ُْر َف َة َف َمنَ َعا ُه‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ب ْین ََما َأ َنا َو َفاطِ َم ُة َن َت َحدَّ ُ‬
‫اح ْت‬ ‫ث إِ ْذ َغض َب ْت َع َل َّي َغ ْض َب ًة َشد ْيدَ ًة َو َص َ‬
‫ت ْاْلَ ْر ُض ِز ْلزَ ًاْل َش ِد ْيدً ا‬ ‫‪ )7‬بینَما النَّاس فِي بیوتِ ِهم ود َكاكِین ِ ِهم ومدَ ِار ِس ِهم إِ ْذ زُ ْل ِز َل ِ‬
‫ْ‬ ‫ُ ْ ُُْ ْ َ َ ْ ْ َ َ‬ ‫َْ َ‬
‫ات ا ْل ُك ْف ِر و ِعباد ِة ْاْلَصنَا ِم إِ ْذ َأرس َل الل َنبِیا َف َأ ْخرجهم مِن ِت ْل َك ال ُّظ ُلم ِ‬
‫ات إِ َلی ن ُْو ِر ْ ِ‬
‫اإل ْس ََّل ِم‬ ‫‪ )8‬بینَما النَّاس فِي ُظ ُلم ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫َ َ ُ ْ‬ ‫ُ ًّ‬ ‫ْ َ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫َ َ َ‬ ‫ُ ْ َ‬ ‫َْ َ‬
‫‪454‬‬
‫ُمن ُْذ ‪ُ and‬م ْذ‬
‫‪ُ are adverbs which can be followed by:‬من ُْذ ‪ُ and‬م ْذ‬
‫ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة ‪1. A‬‬
‫اِ ْسم ‪2. An‬‬
‫ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة ‪ُ Followed by a‬من ُْذ ‪ُ and‬م ْذ‬
‫‪ُ . The‬م َضاف ‪ُ , they become‬ج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة ‪ُ are followed by a‬من ُْذ ‪ُ and‬م ْذ ‪When‬‬
‫‪ and the sentence before‬فِ ْعل َماض ‪ُ is usually comprised of a‬م َضاف إِ َل ْیه‬
‫‪them is usually negative.‬‬
‫ُج ْملة فِ ْعلِ َّیة‬ ‫ُم ْذ ‪ُ /‬من ُْذ‬ ‫ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة ( َماض)‬
‫‪These are translated as since.‬‬
‫َما َر َأ ْي ُت ُه ُم ْذ َل ِق ْی ُت ُه فِ ْي َب ْیتِ َك‬
‫‪I have not seen him since I met him at your house.‬‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِیْ ِه‬ ‫اعل َو َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬
‫ْ َ‬ ‫رف نَ ْفي‬
‫َح ُ‬
‫فِ ْي َب ْیتِ َك‬ ‫َل ِق ْی ُت ُه‬ ‫ُم ْذ‬ ‫َر َأ ْي ُت ُه‬ ‫َما‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح‬ ‫اعل َو َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬

‫ْ َ‬
‫َت ع ََش َر ِسن ِ ْی َن‬
‫َت َفاطِ َم ُة َص ََّل ًة ُم ْذ َب َلغ ْ‬
‫‪َ )8‬ما َت َرك ْ‬ ‫ْت َأ َحدً ا ُمن ُْذ َوعَد ُّت َك‬
‫‪َ )1‬ما َخدَ ع ُ‬
‫‪َ )9‬ل ْم َي َت َأ َّخ ْر ُم ْص َعب َو ُأ ْخ ُت ُه ُم ْذ زَ َج َر ْت ُه َما ا ْل ُم َع ِّل َم ُة‬ ‫الش ْم ُس‬‫ت َّ‬ ‫‪ )2‬ما َأك ََل َأحد من ُْذ غَرب ِ‬
‫ََ‬ ‫َ ُ‬ ‫َ‬
‫الر ُج ُل َع َلی زَ ْو َجتِ ِه ُم ْذ َتزَ َّو َج َها‬ ‫ب ٰه َذا َّ‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )10‬ما غَض َ‬ ‫الر ُج ُل َح ِز ْينًا ُم ْذ ُت ُو ِّف َی ْت زَ ْو َج ُت ُه‬ ‫‪ )3‬ك َ‬
‫َان َّ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪َ )4‬ل ْم َي ْك ِذ ْب ٰذل ِ َك ا ْل َو َلدُ ُم ْذ زَ َج َر ُه َوالِدُ ُه‬
‫‪َ )11‬ما غ َِر َق َأ َحد في ٰه َذا الن َّْه ِر ُمن ُْذ ن ََهی اْلَم ْی ُر الن َ‬
‫َّاس‬
‫َات ُمن ُْذ َم ِر َض َأ ُخ ْو ُه َّن ا ْل َكبِ ْی ُر‬ ‫ت ٰهؤُ َْل ِء ا ْل َبن ُ‬ ‫‪َ )12‬ما َسا َف َر ْ‬ ‫اجت ََم َع َأ ْه ُل َأ ْح َمدَ ُمن ُْذ ُت ُو ِّف َي َأ ُب ْو ُه ْم‬
‫‪َ )5‬ما ْ‬
‫آم َن ُة ِم َن ا ْل َمدْ َر َس ِة ُم ْذ غَا َب ْت َي ْو َم ُت ُو ِّف َي َجدُّ َها‬
‫‪َ )13‬لم َت ِغب ِ‬
‫ْ ْ‬ ‫اب مِن َْها‬ ‫الر ُج ُل َخ ْم ًرا ُم ْذ َت َ‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ل ْم َي ْش َر ْب ٰه َذا َّ‬
‫‪َ )7‬لم ينْس ال ُّط ََّّلب ٰه ِذ ِه ا ْل َق ِ‬
‫اعدَ َة ُم ْذ عَلِ ُم ْو َها‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫ْ َ َ‬
‫‪455‬‬
‫اسم ‪ُ Followed by an‬من ُْذ ‪ُ and‬م ْذ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪َ . In this‬ح ْرف َجار ‪, they become‬اِ ْسم ‪ُ are followed by an‬منْذ ‪ُ and‬مذ ‪When‬‬
‫ْ‬ ‫ُ‬
‫‪case, they are translated as for.‬‬
‫َما َر َأ ْي ُت ُه ُم ْذ َي ْو َم ْی ِن‬
‫‪I have not seen him for two days.‬‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِیْ ِه‬ ‫اعل َو َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬
‫ْ َ‬ ‫رف نَ ْفي‬
‫َح ُ‬
‫َي ْو َم ْی ِن‬ ‫ُم ْذ‬ ‫َر َأ ْي ُت ُه‬ ‫َما‬
‫‪ )11‬ما َل ِعبتُن فِي ا ْلح ِدي َق ِة م ْذ ا ْلیو ِم ال ُّث ََّل َث ِ‬
‫اء‬ ‫‪َ )1‬ما َر َأ ْيت َُك ُمن ُْذ تِ ْس َع ِة َأ َّيام‬
‫َ ْ ُ َْ‬ ‫َ ْ َّ‬
‫الخ ِم ْی ِ‬
‫س‬ ‫الس ْو َق ُم ْذ َي ْو ِم َ‬ ‫‪َ )12‬ما َد َخ َل الت ِ‬
‫َّاج ُر ُّ‬ ‫َما َأ َك ْل َت َل ْح ًما ُم ْذ َأ ْر َب َع ِة َأ َّيام‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫‪َ )13‬ما َج َل َس ال ُّط ََّّل ُب فِي ا ْل َف ْص ِل ُم ْذ ُأ ْس ُب ْوع‬ ‫ت ا ْل َم ِر ْي َض ُة ُم ْذ َش ْه َر ْي ِن‬ ‫ما صام ِ‬
‫َ َ َ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫الج ُم َع ِة‬
‫اج ْع َت ٰه َذا الدَّ ْر َس ُمن ُْذ َي ْو ِم ُ‬ ‫‪َ )14‬ه ْل َر َ‬ ‫َل ْم ن َْش َر ْب َما ًء ُم ْذ ِس ِّت َسا َعات‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫‪ )15‬ما َك َّلم ُت ص ِدي ِقي َذاكِرا من ُْذ يو ِم اْلَربِع ِ‬ ‫اب ُمن ُْذ َي ْو ِم ْاْلَ َح ِد‬
‫اء‬ ‫ْ َ‬ ‫ً ُ َْ‬ ‫َ ْ‬ ‫َ ْ‬ ‫َما غ ََس ُل ْو ال ِّث َی َ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫‪َ )16‬ما َر َأی ا ْل ُم َسافِ ُر ْو َن َأ ْه َل ُه ْم ُم ْذ زَ َمن َط ِو ْيل‬ ‫ت‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ه ْل َطا َلع َت ُك ُتب َك م ْذ يو ِم السب ِ‬
‫َ ُ َ ْ َّ ْ‬ ‫ْ‬
‫سج ِد ُم ْذ َي ْو ِم ا ْل ُج ُم َع ِة‬
‫‪َ )17‬ما َص َّلی ا ْل َم ِر ْي ُض فِي ا ْل َم ِ‬
‫ْ‬ ‫‪َ )7‬ل ْم ُأ َسافِ ْر ُم ْذ َث ََّل َث ِة َأ ْش ُهر َأ ْو َأ ْر َب َعة‬
‫ُب ال َّطالِ َب ُة ا ْل َك ْس َلی ُد ُر ْو َس َها ُم ْذ َخ ْم َسة َأ َّيام‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )18‬ل ْم َت ْكت ْ‬ ‫ارئَ ُم ْذ ِسن ِ ْی َن‬ ‫َّاس ٰه َذا ا ْل َق ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )8‬ما َسم َع الن ُ‬
‫المدْ َر َس َة ُمن ُْذ َي ْو ِم ا ْل ُج ُم َع ِة‬ ‫‪ )19‬ما ح َضر ْ ِ‬
‫ت َخد ْي َج ُة َ‬ ‫َ َ َ‬ ‫‪َ )9‬ما َسا َف ْرنَا إِ َلی َم َّك َة ُم ْذ َخ ْم َس َسن ََوات‬
‫اإل ْثنَ ْی ِن‬ ‫َات لِلدَّ ْر ِ‬
‫س ُم ْذ َي ْو ِم ْ ِ‬ ‫‪ )10‬ما َت َأ َّخر ِ‬
‫ت ا ْل َبن ُ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ‬
‫‪456‬‬
‫‪Special Adverbs of Place‬‬
‫َح ْی ُث‬
‫‪ُ . However, it sometimes‬ج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة ‪َ is usually a‬ح ْی ُث ‪ُ of‬م َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪The‬‬
‫‪ُ . This is translated as where or wherever.‬ج ْم َلة ْاس ِم َّیة ‪occurs as a‬‬
‫َج َل َس ْت َفاطِ َم ُة َح ْی ُث َج َل َس ْت ُأ ُّم َها‬
‫‪Fatima sat where her mother sat.‬‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِیْ ِه‬ ‫َف ِ‬
‫ُأ ُّم َها‬ ‫َج َل َس ْت‬ ‫َح ْی ُث‬ ‫َفاطِ َم ُة‬ ‫َج َل َس ْت‬
‫َف ِ‬
‫‪.‬مِ ْن ‪َ is often preceded by the particle‬ح ْی ُث ‪The word‬‬

‫الل ا ْل ِع َبا َد مِ ْن َح ْی ُث َْل َي ْع َل ُم ْو َن‬
‫َي ْرزُ ُق ُ‬
‫‪Allah provides servants from where they do not‬‬
‫‪know.‬‬
‫‪َ )8‬ي ْو َم ا ْل ُج ُم َع ِة َأ ْجلِ ُس َح ْی ُث َأ َری ْ ِ‬
‫اإل َما َم‬ ‫‪ُ ﴿ )1‬ك ُل ْوا مِن َْها َح ْی ُث ِش ْئت ُْم﴾‬
‫ات الن ِ‬
‫َّاس‬ ‫‪َ )9‬ندْ ُر ُس َح ْی ُث َْل َي ْب ُل ُغنَا َأ ْص َو ُ‬ ‫‪َ ﴿ )2‬وا ْم ُض ْوا َح ْی ُث ُتؤْ َم ُر َ‬
‫ون﴾‬
‫‪ )10‬نَدْ ُخ ُل ا ْلمس ِ ِ‬
‫جدَ م ْن َح ْی ُث َي ْخ ُر ُج الن ُ‬
‫َّاس‬ ‫َ ْ‬ ‫َْل َت ْجلِ ْس َح ْی ُث َي ُم ُّر الن ُ‬
‫َّاس‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫َّاس ل ِ ْل ِع ْل ِم‬ ‫ِ‬
‫الر ْح َم ُة َح ْی ُث َي ْجتَم ُع الن ُ‬ ‫‪َ )11‬تن ِْز ُل َّ‬ ‫َّاس َقائِ ُم ْو َن‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ن َْجتَم ُع َح ْی ُث الن ُ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫‪َ )12‬ت ُك ْو ُن ْاْلَ ْر ُض َيابِ َس ًة َح ْی ُث َْل َتن ِْز ُل ا ْل َم َط ُر‬ ‫ُكن ُْت َأ ْنتَظِ ُر َل َك َح ْی ُث َوعَد َّتن ِ ْي‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫‪َْ )13‬ل َت ُم ُّر ْوا َح ْی ُث ُي َص ِّلي الن ُ‬

‫َّاس َو َي ْس ُجدُ ْو َن‬ ‫َي ْرزُ ُق ُك ْم مِ ْن َح ْی ُث َْل َت ْحت َِس ُب ْو َن‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫اب ا ْلمس ِ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫جد َح ْی ُث َي ُم ُّر الن ُ‬
‫َّاس‬ ‫‪َْ )14‬ل ُت َص ُّل ْوا عنْدَ َب ِ َ ْ‬ ‫‪َ )7‬تن ِْز ُل ا ْل َب َر َك ُة َح ْی ُث ُي َص ِّلی الن ُ‬
‫َّاس‬
‫‪457‬‬
Summary of the Special Adverbs
Structure of Structure of the
Translation ‫ُم َضاف إِ َلیْ ِه‬ Main Sentence
Tense
‫َل َّما‬ When ‫ َماض‬:‫ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِیَّة‬ ‫َماض‬ Past
‫ُك َّل َما‬ Whenever ‫ َماض‬:‫ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِیَّة‬ ‫َماض‬ Present

Future
‫ َماض‬:‫ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِیَّة‬ ‫َماض‬ Past
‫إِ ْذ‬ When
ْ ‫ُج ْم َلة‬ ِ ‫ُم َض‬
‫ارع‬
Present
Future
‫إِ َذا‬ When ‫ َماض‬:‫ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِیَّة‬ ‫َماض‬ Future

‫ ُمن ُْذ‬/ ‫ُم ْذ‬ Since
‫اِ ْسم‬
Past
‫ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِیَّة‬

‫َح ْی ُث‬ Where
*
Wherever ‫اس ِمیَّة‬ْ ‫ُج ْم َلة‬
458
Part 7: ‫ َن ْعت‬as a ‫ُج ْم َلة ُص ْغ َری‬
The ‫ َن ْعت‬can occur as a ‫ ُج ْم َلة ُصغ َْری‬.
This is a man who came from the village.
In this example, the sentence came from the village along with the
relative pronoun who becomes the ‫ َن ْعت‬of the preceding ‫ نَكِ َرة‬word, a
man.
In Arabic, the sentence which becomes the ‫ َن ْعت‬of a ‫ َمنْ ُع ْوت‬which is
‫نَكِ َرة‬, does not have an equivalent to the relative pronoun who.
However, it must have an ‫عَائِد‬.
‫ٰه َذا َر َجل َجا َء مِ َن ا ْل َق ْر َي ِة‬
In this sentence, the ‫ عَائِد‬is the ‫ َض ِم ْیر ُم ْستَتِر‬within the verb ‫ َجا َء‬, i.e. ‫ ُه َو‬.
‫ا ْل َق ْر َي ِة‬ ‫مِ َن‬ ‫َجا َء‬ ‫َر َجل‬ ‫ٰه َذا‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه‬ )‫(ه َو‬ ِ ‫فِعل و َف‬

459
Translation of the ‫ َن ْعت‬Sentence
The translation of the ‫ َن ْعت‬sentence differs according to the slot the
‫ عَائِد‬occupies.
Here are some examples.
‫َر ُجل َيدُ ُه َو ِس َخة‬
‫َر ُجل َر َأ ْي ُت ُه‬ ‫َر ُجل َس َق َط‬
In these three examples, the ‫ نَكِ َرة‬word, ‫ َر ُجل‬, is followed by a ‫َن ْعت‬
sentence. However, each will be translated slightly differently,
because the ‫ عَائِد‬has a different grammatical role in each.
We are going to discuss the ‫ عَائِد‬which occurs within the ‫َن ْعت‬
sentence in the following slots:
1. ‫َفا ِعل‬
2. ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬
4. ‫ َم ْج ُر ْور‬or ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬of a ‫َظ ْرف‬
5. In a ‫َخ َبر ُم َقدَّ م‬
460
Translation of the ‫ عَائِد‬as the ‫اعل‬
ِ ‫َف‬
The ‫ عَائِد‬in the ‫ َن ْعت‬sentence can be a ‫اعل‬
ِ ‫ َف‬. The ‫اعل‬
ِ ‫ َف‬will either be a
person or a thing.
‫َق َلم َس َق َط‬ ‫َر ُجل َس َق َط‬
These phrases can be translated in the following four steps:
1. Translate the sentence ‫ َن ْعت‬on its own;
it fell he fell
2. If the ‫ عَائِد‬refers to a human being, add the word who or one
who before the sentence; if it refers to a thing, add the word
which or that;
that/which it fell who he fell
3. Remove the translation of the ‫;عَائد‬ ِ
that/which fell who fell
4. Add the translation of the ‫ َمنْ ُع ْوت‬.
a pen that fell a man who fell
a pen which fell
Exercise 1
Translate the following descriptive phrases into English.
َّ ‫ ُر َّمانَة َس َق َط ْت مِ َن‬... )9 َ ‫ َملِك َْل َي ْر َح ُم الن‬... )5
‫َّاس‬ ‫ َأ ْصنَام َْل َتنْ َف ُعنَا‬... )1
‫الر ُس ْو ِل‬ ِ ‫ َأ ْبنَاء ُيطِ ْی ُع ْو َن ُأ َّم َهاتِ ِه ْم‬... )6
َّ ‫ َص َحا ِبي آ َم َن بالل َو‬... )10 ‫ َسن ََوات َم َض ْت‬... )2
‫ض‬ِ ‫اْل ْر‬ َ ْ ‫ َش َج َرة َس َق َط ْت عَ َلی‬... )11 ‫ ِد ْين َي ْه ِد ْي َك إِ َلی ا ْل َجن َِّة‬... )7 َ ‫ َطال ِب َف‬... )3
‫اق َأ ْق َرا َن ُه‬
‫اج ُر ْو َن َت َرك ُْوا ِد َي َار ُه ْم‬
ِ ‫ ُم َه‬... )12 ‫ ِع ْلم َينْ َف ُع َك فِي الدُّ ْن َیا‬... )8 ‫ َأ َسد ُقتِ َل فِي ا ْل َق ْر َي ِة‬... )4
461
Translation of the ‫ عَائِد‬as the ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬
The ‫ عَائِد‬in the ‫ َن ْعت‬sentence can be a ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬. This can either be a
person or a thing.
‫َق َلم َر َأ ْي ُت ُه‬ ‫َر ُجل َر َأ ْي ُت ُه‬
1. Translate the ‫ َن ْعت‬sentence on its own;
I saw it I saw him
ِ
2. If the ‫ عَائد‬refers to a human being, add the word whom or who
before the sentence; if it refers to a thing, add the word which
or that;
that/which I saw it whom I saw him
that/which I saw whom I saw
a pen that I saw a man whom I saw
a pen which I saw
Exercise 2
Translate the following phrases into English.
‫ ِع ْلم َن ْط ُل ُب ُه إِ َلی َم ْوتِنَا‬... )7 ‫ َب َق َرة َذ َب ُح ْو َها‬... )1
‫الل‬
ُ ‫اها‬ َ ‫ َأع َْمال َْل َي ْر َض‬... )8 ‫ َي ْوم َلن َّنن َْسا ُه‬... )2
ِ
ُ ‫ َأ َساط ْی ُر ا ْفت ََرا َها الن‬... )9
‫َّاس‬ ُ‫ ُخ ْبز َأ َك َل ُه ا ْل َو َلد‬... )3
‫َاها ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن‬
َ ‫اجدُ َبن‬ِ ‫ َم َس‬... )10 ‫ ِر َجال َْل َن ْع ِر ُف ُه ْم‬... )4
‫ َك ْبش َو َجدْ نَا ُه فِي ا ْل َق ْر َي ِة‬... )11 ‫ َص َف َحات َل ْم َن ْق َر ْأ َها‬... )5
ِ‫ و ْقت َلم نَم ِض ِه فِي ِعباد ِة الل‬... )12 ‫ ُو ُج ْوه َل ْم ن ََر َها مِ ْن َق ْب ُل‬... )6
َ َ ْ ْ َ
462
Translation of the ‫ عَائِد‬as the ‫ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬
The ‫ عَائِد‬in the ‫ َن ْعت‬sentence can be the ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬. This can either be a
person or a thing.
‫َب ْیت َبا ُب ُه َم ْفت ُْوح‬ ‫َر ُجل َيدُ ُه َو ِس َخة‬
its door is open his hand is dirty
2. Add the word whose before the sentence;
whose its door is open whose his hand is dirty
whose door is open whose hand is dirty
4. Add the ‫ َمنْ ُع ْوت‬.
a house whose door is open a man whose hand is dirty
When the ‫ عَائِد‬is ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬, the translation is usually adjusted:
a house whose a house with an

door is open open door
Exercise 3
‫ َم َساكِ ْی ُن َما ُل ُه ْم َقلِ ْیل‬... )7 ‫ كِتَاب آ َيا ُت ُه َب ِّینَات‬... )1
‫ ُم َع ِّلم َْل َن ْف َه ُم َد ْر َس ُه‬... )8 ‫ َر ُجل َد ُار ُه َب ِع ْیدَ ة‬... )2
‫ َر ُس ْول َن ْعت َِص ُم بِ ُسنَّتِ ِه‬... )9 ‫ طِ ْفل َو ْج ُه ُه َج ِم ْیل‬... )3
‫ ُمؤْ مِن ُْو َن ُت ْق َب ُل َأع َْما ُل ُه ْم‬... )10 ‫ اِ ْم َر َأة َأ ْو َْل ُد َها َيتَا َمی‬... )4
‫ ُس ْو َرة َن ْق َر ُأ آ َياتِ َها ك َُّل َل ْی َلة‬... )11 ‫اج ُه َّن‬ ِ
ُ ‫ ن َساء ُقت َل َأزْ َو‬...
ِ )5
َّ ‫ َر ُجل َْل َيت ُْر ُك َو َلدُ ُه‬... )12

‫الص ََّل َة‬ ‫ َشاب إِ ْي َما ُن ُه َق ِوي‬... )6
463
Translation of the ‫ عَائِد‬as the ‫ َم ْج ُر ْور‬or ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬of a ‫َظ ْرف‬
The ‫ عَائِد‬in the ‫ َن ْعت‬sentence can be the ‫ َم ْج ُر ْور‬of a ‫ َح ْر ُف َجر‬or the ‫ُم َضاف‬
‫ إِ َل ْی ِه‬of a ‫ َظ ْرف‬. This can either be a person or a thing.
‫ت مِنْ ُه‬
ُ ‫كِتَاب َق َر ْأ‬ ُ ‫َر ُجل َق َر ْأ‬
‫ت َم َع ُه‬
I read from it I read with him
ِ
2. If the ‫ عَائد‬refers to a human being, add the word whom or who
before the sentence; if it refers to a thing, add the word which
or that;
that/which I read from it whom I read with him
that/which I read from whom I read with
a book which I read from a man whom I read with
a book that I read from
The translation of the ‫ َح ْرف َجار‬or ‫ َظ ْرف‬can also be brought before
the relative pronoun.
a book from which I read a man with whom I read
Note
When the ‫ َم ْج ُر ْور‬-‫ َجار‬become the ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح‬, they will be
translated as though the ‫ عَائِد‬is the ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬.
‫كِتَاب َك َف ُر ْوا بِ ِه‬ ‫َو َلد ن ََص ْح ُت َل ُه‬
a book that they rejected a boy whom I advised
Exercise 4
‫ َي ْوم ُي ْب َع ُث فِ ْی ِه ا ْل ِع َبا ُد‬... )9 ‫ تِ ََّل َوة َب َك ْینَا َب ْعدَ َها‬... )5 ‫ف بِ ِه‬
ُ ‫ َب ْیت َن ُط ْو‬... )1
‫ ُمدُ ن َل ْم ن َُسافِ ْر إِ َل ْی َها‬... )10 ‫ب مِن َْها‬ ُ ‫ َأ ْش َیا ُء َنغ َْض‬... )6 ‫ ُذن ُْوب ُت ْبنَا مِن َْها‬... )2
‫ ا ْمتِ َحان َل ْم َنن َْج ْح فِ ْی ِه‬... )11 ‫ َج َب ََّل ِن َننْ ُظ ُر إِ َل ْی ِه َما‬... )7 ‫ كِتَاب َن ْعت َِص ُم بِ ِه‬... )3
‫ َباب َد َخ ْلنَا ا ْل َب ْی َت مِنْ ُه‬... )12 ‫ َم َص ِائ ُب َص َب ْر َن عَ َل ْی َها‬... )8 ‫ َرب َْل ن ُْش ِر ُك بِ ِه‬... )4
464
Translation of the ‫ عَائِد‬in a ‫َخ َبر ُم َقدَّ م‬
The ‫ عَائِد‬in the ‫ َن ْعت‬sentence can occur within the ‫ َخ َبر ُم َقدَّ م‬.
‫كِتَاب فِ ْی ِه قِ َصص‬ ‫َر ُجل َع َل ْی ِه َد ْين‬
there are stories in it there is a loan on him
ِ
2. If the ‫ عَائد‬refers to a human being, add the word who before the
sentence; if it refers to a thing, add the word which or that;
which there are stories in it who there is a loan on him
3. Replace there is/are with has;
which has stories in it who has a loan on him
a book which has stories in it a man who has a loan on him
a book that has stories in it
The translation of the ‫ َح ْرف َجار‬or ‫ َظ ْرف‬can be brought before the
relative pronoun. In this case, the words there is/are will not be
replaced, and the relative pronoun whom will be used instead
of who.
a book in which there are a man on/upon whom there
stories is a loan
Exercise 5
‫ َد ْمع َت ْح َت ُه َخدْ ع‬... )5 ‫ َر ُجل َل ُه َمال كَثِ ْیر‬... )1
‫ َأ ْرض َف ْو َق َها ِج َبال‬... )6 ِ ‫ باب َأمامه كُر ِسی‬... )2
‫ان‬ َّ ْ ُ َ َ َ
ِ ‫ َشجر َت‬... )7
‫ان َب ْین َُه َما َأ َسد‬ ‫ َد ْرس َب ْعدَ ُه َص ََّلة‬... )3
ََ
‫ ُط ََّّلب َم َع ُه ْم ُكتُب كَثِ ْی َرة‬... )8 ‫ َرب َل ْی َس َل ُه َش ِر ْيك‬... )4
465
Summary
The table below summarises the translation of the ‫ َن ْعت‬sentence.
Non-Human Human
‫َق َلم َس َق َط‬ ‫َر ُجل َس َق َط‬ ِ ‫َف‬
‫اعل‬
a pen that/which fell a man who fell
‫َق َلم َر َأ ْيتُ ُه‬ ‫َر ُجل َر َأ ْيتُ ُه‬
a pen that/which I saw a man whom I saw
‫َب ْیت َبا ُب ُه َم ْفت ُْوح‬ ‫َر ُجل َيدُ ُه َو ِس َخة‬ ‫ُم َضاف‬
a house whose door is open a man whose hand is dirty ‫إِ َلیْ ِه‬
ُ ‫ِكتَاب َق َر ْأ‬ ُ ‫َر ُجل َق َر ْأ‬
‫َم ْج ُر ْور‬
a book that/which I read from a man with whom I read
‫ِكتَاب فِ ْی ِه قِ َصص‬ ‫َر ُجل َع َلیْ ِه َد ْين‬
‫َخبَر ُم َقدَّ م‬
a book in which there are stories a man on whom there is a loan
Vocab
to flow ‫ َس َال َي ِس ْی ُل َس َی ََّلنًا‬to abstain ‫اجتِنَا ًبا‬
ْ ‫ب‬
ِ
ُ ‫َب َي ْجتَن‬
ِ
َ ‫ا ْج َتن‬
to live ‫َاش َي ِع ْی ُش َع ْی ًشا‬

َ ‫ع‬ to be dutiful/obedient ‫َب َّر َي َب ُّر بِ ًّرا‬
(to parents)
to disobey (parents) ‫ ع ََّق َي ُع ُّق ُع ُق ْو ًقا‬to speak ‫َت َك َّل َم َي َت َك َّل ُم َت َك ُّل ًما‬
to grant ability ‫ َو َّف َق ُي َو ِّف ُق َت ْوفِ ْی ًقا‬to bury ‫َد َف َن َيدْ فِ ُن َد ْفنًا‬
Exercise 6
‫ َدم َي ِس ْی ُل َع َلی َو ْج ِه َك‬... )6 ‫ َو َلد َأ ُب ْو ُه َف ِق ْیر‬... )1
ِ ْ ‫ مِنْ َبر َي ْجلِ ُس َع َل ْی ِه‬... )7
‫اإل َما ُم‬ ‫ َو َلد ن ُْح ِس ُن إِ َل ْی ِه‬... )2
‫ َص ْوت َس ِم ْعنَا ُه مِ َن ا ْل َح ِد ْي َق ِة‬... )8 ِ ‫ و َلد ر َأينَاه فِي ا ْلبی‬... )3
‫ت‬ َْ ُ ْ َ َ
‫آن َو َف ِه َم ُه َوع َِم َل بِ ِه‬ َ ‫ َو َلد َح ِف َظ ا ْل ُق ْر‬... )9 ‫ ُت َراب نُدْ َف ُن َت ْح َت ُه‬... )4
ِ‫ ص َلحاء َت ِفی ُض َأ ْعینُهم دموعًا مِن َخ ْشی ِة الل‬... )10 ‫ َو َلد َأ َما َم ُه ُكتُب كَث ْی َرة‬... )5
َ ْ ُُْ ْ ُ ُ ْ ُ َ ُ
466
Using a ‫ َن ْعت‬Sentence in a Sentence
A ‫ َن ْعت‬sentence joins with its ‫ َمنْ ُع ْوت‬to become one of the main slots
of the sentence.
Notes
ِ ‫ َف‬, the ‫ َنعت‬can be
1. When the ‫ َمنْ ُع ْوت‬of a ‫ َن ْعت‬sentence is the ‫اعل‬ ْ
translated in two ways:
a) Immediately after the ‫ َمنْ ُع ْوت‬before the verb.
b) After the verb.
ِ ‫َان فِي ا ْلبی‬
‫ت‬ َ ‫اِ ْن َك َس َر ك ُْر ِسي ك‬
َْ
A chair which was in the house broke.
A chair broke which was in the house.
2. If one ‫ َمنْ ُع ْوت‬has two ‫ َن ْعت‬, one as a single word and the other as a
sentence, the single word is translated first before the ‫ َمنْ ُع ْوت‬. The
‫ َن ْعت‬sentence is then translated at the end.
﴾‫﴿ َه َذا ِذكْر ُم َب َارك َأنْزَ ْلنَا ُه‬
This is a blessed remembrance which we have revealed.
‫ُه‬ ‫َأنْزَ ْلنَا‬ ‫ُم َب َارك‬ ‫ِذكْر‬ ‫ٰه َذا‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ )‫(ه َو‬ ِ ‫فِعل و َف‬

‫َن ْعت‬ ‫َن ْعت‬ ‫َمنْ ُع ْوت‬
3. If the main sentence consists of a ‫فِ ْعل َماض‬, and the ‫ َن ْعت‬sentence
consists of a ‫ ُم َض ِارع‬, the ‫ ُم َض ِارع‬can be translated as the past
habitual or continuous tense.
ِ ِ
ُ ‫َك َس َر إِ ْب َراه ْی ُم ڠ َت َماث ْی َل َي ْع ُبدُ َها الن‬
‫َّاس‬
Ibrahim ‫ ڠ‬broke the idols that people used to worship.
467
‫الل بِ ِه ا ْل َجنَّ َة‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ )11‬ن َْر ُج ْو ع ََم ًَّل ُيدْ خ ُلنَا ُ‬ ‫ٰه َذا َد َواء َينْ َف ُع َك‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫الص ْب ُر ع ََمل َل ْی َس َل ُه َجزَ اء إِ َّْل ا ْل َجنَّ َة‬ ‫‪َّ )12‬‬ ‫َب َكی طِ ْفل غَا َب ْت ُأ ُّم ُه‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫ب‬‫َّان ال َّطبِ ْی ِ‬‫‪ٰ )13‬ه َذا دواء ْاشتَري ُته مِن دك ِ‬ ‫ٰه َذا َشاب َي ُع ُّق َوالِدَ ْي ِه‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫ُ‬ ‫َْ ُ‬ ‫ََ‬
‫‪َ )14‬ه ْل َت َری َس ِف ْینَ ًة ْل َت ْج ِر ْي َع َلی ا ْل َب ْح ِر‬ ‫ات زَ ْو ُج َها‬ ‫َت ا ْم َر َأة َم َ‬ ‫ح ِزن ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫‪﴿ )15‬إِ َّن فِ ْي ٰذل ِ َك َْليات ل ِ َق ْوم ُيؤْ مِن ُْو َن﴾‬ ‫ٰذل ِ َك َطبِ ْیب َد َوا ُء ُه َينْ َف ُع َك‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫‪َ )16‬ي ْو َم ا ْل ِع ْی ِد َس َأ ْل َب ُس َث ْو ًبا ْاشت ََرا ُه اِ ْبن ِ ْي ل ِ ْي‬ ‫جدً ا َل ُه مِ ْح َراب َكبِ ْیر‬ ‫َر َأ ْينَا َم ْس ِ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫‪ )17‬ه َْل ِء ِرجال َت ِفیض َأعینُهم مِن َخ ْشی ِة اللِ‬ ‫الل كِتَا ًبا فِ ْی ِه آ َيات َب ِّینَات‬
‫َ‬ ‫ُْ ُْ ُ ْ ْ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ٰ ؤُ‬ ‫‪َ )7‬أنْزَ َل ُ‬
‫اعدَ ة َح ِف ْظت َُها ُمن ُْذ َسن ََوات كَثِ ْی َرة َو َل ْم َأن َْس َها َق ُّط‬ ‫‪ٰ )18‬ه ِذ ِه َق ِ‬ ‫ْلء َق ْوم ْل ُيؤْ مِن ُْو َن﴾‬‫‪﴿ )8‬إِ َّن هؤُ ِ‬
‫ٰ‬
‫بالل ِم ْن ِع ْلم َْل َي ْن َف ُع و َن ْفس َْل َت ْش َب ُع و َق ْلب َْل َي ْخ َش ُع‬ ‫‪َ )19‬أعُ و ُذ ِ‬ ‫‪َ )9‬أع ُْو ُذ باللِ مِ ْن ك ُِّل ع ََمل ُي ْخ ِز ْين ِ ْي‬
‫ْ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ب َو َْل َي ْجزَ ع ُْو َن‬ ‫‪ُ )20‬ه ْم َأ ْو َْلد َصابِ ُر ْو َن َْل َي ْش َت ُك ْو َن ا ْل َم َصائ َ‬ ‫‪َ )10‬صا َم َو َلد ع ُُم ُر ُه َخ ْم ُس َسن ََوات‬
‫‪468‬‬
‫‪Summary‬‬
‫ُج ْم َلة ُص ْغ َری – ‪Directly Nested Sentences‬‬
‫‪Main Slots‬‬
‫َخ َبر‬ ‫َماض‬ ‫زَ ْيد َقا َم‬
‫ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِیَّة‬
‫ُم َض ِ‬
‫ارع‬ ‫‪Present Habitual/Continuous‬‬ ‫زَ ْيد َي ُق ْو ُم‬
‫َق َال َي ُق ْو ُل‪َ ،‬س َأ َل َي ْس َأ ُل‪،‬‬ ‫َق َال زَ ْيد‪ُ :‬ان ُْص ْرن ِ ْي‬
‫‪Other Verbs‬‬ ‫نَا َدی زَ ْيد َأ ِن ُان ُْص ْرن ِ ْي‬
‫ُم َض ِ‬
‫ارع‬ ‫‪Simultaneous‬‬ ‫َب‬‫ِجئ ُْت َأ ْرك ُ‬
‫ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِیَّة‬ ‫ِجئ ُْت َو َقدْ َخ َر ْج َت‬
‫َماض‬ ‫‪Prior‬‬
‫َحال‬ ‫‪Contrast‬‬ ‫ل ِ َم ِجئ َْت َو َقدْ َمنَ ْعت َُك‬
‫ْت نَائِم‬ ‫ِجئ ُْت َو َأن َ‬
‫‪Contrast‬‬ ‫ِجئ َْت َوا ْل َم َط ُر َين ِْز ُل‬
‫‪Phrases‬‬
‫َم ْع ُط ْوف‬ ‫َأ ْح َمدُ َجا َء َو َذ َه َ‬
‫ب‬
‫َبدَ ل‬ ‫َأ ْن َع َم ُ‬
‫الل َع َل ْی َك َهدَ اك‬
‫ُم َضاف ‪With regular‬‬ ‫َر َأ ْيت َُك َي ْو َم ِجئ َْت‬
‫َل َّما‬ ‫َر َأ ْيت َُك َل َّما ِجئ َْت‬
‫ُك َّل َما‬ ‫َر َأ ْيت َُك ُك َّل َما ِجئ َْت‬
‫ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬ ‫إِ ْذ‬ ‫َر َأ ْيت َُك إِ ْذ ِجئ َْت‬
‫ُم َضاف ‪With Special‬‬
‫إِ َذا‬ ‫َر َأ ْيت َُك إِ َذا ِجئ َْت‬
‫ُم ْذ‪ُ ،‬من ُْذ‬ ‫َما َر َأ ْيت َُك ُمن ُْذ ِجئ َْت‬
‫َح ْی ُث‬ ‫َر َأ ْي ُت َح ْی ُث َج َل ْس َت‬
‫َن ْعت‬ ‫َر َأ ْي ُت َر ُج ًَّل َجا َء‬
‫‪469‬‬
Summary
Key Terms
‫ َأ ْن‬used in quotations ‫َأ ْن ال َّت ْف ِس ْی ِر َّي ُة‬ subsentence ‫ُج ْم َلة ُصغ َْری‬
‫ َواو‬used before a sentence ‫َحال‬ ‫َواو َحال ِ َّیة‬ Pronoun within the ‫ ُصغْری‬that
‫عَائِد‬
refers to something before it
‫ف‬
َ on the main sentence with ‫إذَا‬ ‫َفاء َرابِ َطة‬ Anticipatory Pronoun ‫الش ْأ ِن‬
َّ ‫َض ِم ْی ُر‬
‫ َما‬placed after ‫إِ َذا‬ ‫الص َل ُة‬
ِّ ‫َما‬ Anticipatory Pronoun ‫َض ِم ْی ُر ا ْل ِق َّص ِة‬
Vocabulary
Verbs which require an ‫َأ ْن َت ْف ِس ْی ِر َّية‬
ِ ‫َأ ْر َس َل ُي ْر ِس ُل إِ ْر َس ًاْل‬
to write, enjoin ُ ‫َب َي ْكت‬
‫ُب كتَا َب ًة‬ َ ‫ َكت‬to send
ِ ‫نَادی ين‬
‫َاد ْي ُمنَا َدا ًة‬ ‫َأ ْو َحی ُي ْو ِح ْي إِ ْي َحا ًء‬
to call out ُ َ to inspire, reveal
to advise, order ‫ َو َّصی ُي َو ِّص ْي َت ْو ِص َی ًة‬to make a covenant ‫ع َِهدَ َي ْع َهدُ ع َْهدً ا‬
medicine ‫ َد َواء ج َأ ْد ِو َية‬name ‫اِ ْسم ج َأ ْس َماء‬
jail ‫ ِس ْجن ج ُس ُج ْون‬finger )‫إِ ْص َبع ج َأ َصابِ ُع (مث‬
misguided ‫َضال ج ْو َن‬ exam ‫ا ْمتِ َحان ج ات‬
doctor ‫ َطبِ ْیب ج َأطِ َّبا ُء‬people ‫َأ ْهل‬
evening ‫ِع َشاء‬ stomach ‫َب ْطن ج ُب ُط ْون‬
religion, creed ‫مِ َّلة ج مِ َلل‬ body ‫َج َسد ج َأ ْج َساد‬
crescent ‫ِه ََّلل ج َأ ِه َّلة‬ news ‫َخ َبر ج َأ ْخ َبار‬
470
‫‪to narrate, relate‬‬ ‫ث َت ْح ِد ْي ًثا‬ ‫ث ُي َحدِّ ُ‬
‫َحدَّ َ‬
‫‪to see‬‬ ‫َأ ْب َص َر ُي ْب ِص ُر إِ ْب َص ًارا‬
‫‪to be disgraced‬‬ ‫َخ ِز َي َي ْخزَ ی ِخزْ ًيا‬ ‫‪to abstain‬‬ ‫اجتِنَا ًبا‬
‫ب ْ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َب َي ْجتَن ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ا ْج َتن َ‬
‫‪to study‬‬ ‫َد َر َس َيدْ ُر ُس َد ْر ًسا‬ ‫‪to burn‬‬ ‫اِ ْحت ََرق َي ْحت َِر ُق اِ ْحتِ َرا ًقا‬
‫‪to bury‬‬ ‫َد َف َن َيدْ فِ ُن َد ْفنًا‬ ‫‪to take out‬‬ ‫َأ ْخ َر َج ُي ْخ ِر ُج إِ ْخ َر ً‬

‫اجا‬
‫َم ْر ُف ْوع ‪to make‬‬ ‫َر َف َع َي ْر َف ُع َر ْف ًعا‬ ‫اح ًة‬ ‫اِستَراح يست َِريح ِ‬
‫‪to rest‬‬ ‫است َر َ‬
‫ْ َ َ َْ ْ ُ ْ‬
‫‪to scold‬‬ ‫زَ َج َر َيزْ ُج ُر زَ ْج ًرا‬ ‫‪to seek refuge‬‬ ‫اِ ْس َت َعا َذ َي ْست َِع ْی ُذ اِ ْستِ َعا َذ ًة‬
‫‪to flow‬‬ ‫‪َ to face, turn towards‬س َال َي ِس ْی ُل َس َی ََّلنًا‬ ‫اِ ْس َت ْق َب َل َي ْستَ ْقبِ ُل اِ ْستِ ْقبَ ًاْل‬
‫‪to wish, desire‬‬ ‫‪َ to act proudly‬شا َء َي َشا ُء َم ِش ْی َئ ًة‬ ‫اِ ْس َت ْك َب َر َي ْست َْك ِب ُر ِا ْس ِت ْك َب ًارا‬
‫‪to read, study‬‬ ‫‪َ to listen‬طا َل َع ُي َطال ِ ُع ُم َطا َل َع ًة‬ ‫استِ َماعًا‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ا ْست ََم َع َي ْستَم ُع ْ‬
‫‪to clean‬‬ ‫َط َّه َر ُي َط ِّه ُر َت ْط ِه ْی ًرا‬ ‫‪to emphasise‬‬ ‫َأكَّدَ ُيؤَ كِّدُ َت ْأكِیْدً ا‪َ ،‬ت ْوكِیْدً ا‬
‫‪to live‬‬ ‫َاش َي ِع ْی ُش َع ْی ًشا‬

‫‪ to wait‬ع َ‬ ‫اِ ْن َت َظ َر َينْتَظِ ُر انْتِ َظ ًارا‬
‫ِ‬ ‫َأن َْجی ُين ِ‬
‫ْج ْي إِن َْجا ًء‬
‫‪to sneeze‬‬ ‫‪َ to save‬ع َط َس َي ْعطـ ُُس ُع َط ً‬
‫اسا‬
‫)‪to disobey (parents‬‬ ‫ع ََّق َي ُع ُّق ُع ُق ْو ًقا‬ ‫‪to be dutiful/obedient‬‬ ‫َب َّر َي َب ُّر بِ ًّرا‬
‫)‪(to parents‬‬
‫‪to uncover, remove‬‬ ‫ف َي ْك ِش ُ‬
‫ف ك َْش ًفا‬ ‫ك ََش َ‬ ‫‪to repent‬‬ ‫اب َيت ُْو ُب َت ْو َب ًة‬
‫َت َ‬
‫‪to pass‬‬ ‫َم َّر َي ُم ُّر ُم ُر ْو ًرا‬ ‫‪to get married‬‬ ‫َتزَ َّو َج َيتَزَ َّو ُج َتزَ َّو ًجا‬
‫َمن ُْص ْوب ‪to make‬‬ ‫ب ن َْص ًبا‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫َت َك َّل َم َي َت َك َّل ُم َت َك ُّل ًما‬
‫ب َينْص ُ‬
‫ن ََص َ‬ ‫‪to speak‬‬
‫‪to negate‬‬ ‫َن َفی َين ِْف ْي َن ْف ًیا‬ ‫)‪َ : die‬م ْج ُه ْول( ‪to take (life),‬‬ ‫َت َو َّفی َيت ََو َّفی َت َو ِّف ًیا‬
‫‪to grant ability‬‬ ‫َم ْج ُر ْور ‪َ to make‬و َّف َق ُي َو ِّف ُق َت ْوفِ ْی ًقا‬ ‫َج َّر َي ُج ُّر َج ًّرا‬
‫‪to be dry‬‬ ‫َيبِ َس َي ْی َب ُس ُيـَ ْب ًسا‬ ‫َم ْجزُ ْوم ‪to make‬‬ ‫َجزَ َم َي ْج ِز ُم َجزْ ًما‬
‫‪471‬‬
472
NESTED SENTENCES
Introduction: ‫ اِ ْسم ُم َؤ َّول‬with ‫اِ ْسم َم ْو ُص ْول‬
Part 1: ‫ اِ ْسم ُم َؤ َّول‬in Sentences
Part 2: ‫ اِ ْسم ُم َؤ َّول‬in Phrases
Supplement
Summary
473
Introduction: ‫ اِسم ُمؤَ َّول‬with ‫اِ ْسم َم ْو ُص ْول‬
A sentence may be indirectly nested into another sentence if it is
preceded by a relative pronoun. Let us review the following
scenario:
A student wrote a summary of a book. The teacher is pleased.
There are two aspects which may have pleased the teacher:
1. The summary presented by the student.
2. The action of summarisation.
To express pleasure at the summary, the teacher would say:
The summary that you wrote pleased me.
In this example, the relative pronoun that extracts the noun
meaning from the sentence, whilst allowing it to be nested into the
main sentence.
To express pleasure at the action, the teacher would say:
It pleased me that you summarised the book.
In this example, the relative pronoun that extracts the verb
meaning from the sentence, whilst allowing it to be nested into the
main sentence.
In Arabic, the relative pronoun is called ‫ َم ْو ُص ْول‬and the sentence
after it is called the ‫ ِص َلة‬. Together, these form an indirectly nested
sentence, an ‫اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول‬.
‫اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول‬
‫ُج ْم َلة‬ *
‫ِص َلة‬ ‫َم ْو ُص ْول‬
Types of ‫َم ْو ُص ْول‬

There are two types of ‫ َم ْو ُص ْول‬:
1. ‫اِ ْسم َم ْو ُص ْول‬: this is used to extract the noun meaning from the
sentence.
2. ‫ َح ْرف َم ْو ُص ْول‬: this is used to extract the verb meaning from the
sentence.
In this section we will discuss the ‫اِ ْسم َم ْو ُص ْول‬.
474
‫ اِ ْسم َم ْو ُص ْول‬and its ‫ِص َلة‬
‫اِ ْسم َم ْو ُص ْول‬

An ‫ اِ ْسم َم ْو ُص ْول‬is a relative pronoun which precedes a sentence and
extracts the noun meaning from it.
I read your letter.
I read what you wrote.
In this example, the phrase what you wrote takes the place of the
object. The word what allows the sentence to function as a single
slot in a meaning like the noun your letter.
Types of ‫اِ ْسم َم ْو ُص ْول‬
The ‫ اِ ْسم َم ْو ُص ْول‬are of two types:
1. Gender and number neutral
2. Gender and number specific
Gender and Number Neutral ‫اِ ْسم َم ْو ُص ْول‬
There are two ‫ اِ ْسم َم ْو ُص ْول‬which are gender and number neutral, i.e.
they do not have different forms because of their number or
gender.
1. ‫َم ْن‬
2. ‫َما‬
‫َم ْن‬
The ‫ اِ ْسم َم ْو ُص ْول‬of ‫ َم ْن‬is used to refer to people. This is translated as
who, or one who.
‫الل‬
َ ‫اف‬ُ ‫َم ْن َي َخ‬
who fears Allah
the one who fears Allah
‫َما‬
The ‫ اِ ْسم َم ْو ُص ْول‬of ‫ َما‬is used to refer to things. This is translated as
what.
ِ ‫ما َقا َل‬
‫ت ْاْلُ ُّم‬ َ
what the mother said
475
Gender and Number Specific ‫اِ ْسم َم ْو ُص ْول‬
The ‫ َأ ْس َماء َم ْو ُص ْو َلة‬which are gender and number specific are as
follows:
‫ْاْلَ ْس َما ُء ا ْل َم ْو ُص ْو َل ُة‬
‫ا َّل ِذ ْي‬ ‫ُم ْف َرد‬

ِ ‫ال َّل َذ‬
‫ان‬ ‫ُم َثنًّی‬ ‫َا ْل ُم َذك َُّر‬
‫َا َّل ِذ ْي َن‬ ‫َج ْمع‬
‫ا َّلتِ ْي‬ ‫ُم ْف َرد‬

ِ ‫ال َّلت‬
‫َان‬ ‫ُم َثنًّی‬ ُ ‫َا ْل ُمؤَ ن‬
‫َّث‬
‫الَّلئِ ْي‬
َّ / ‫الَّلتِ ْي‬
َّ ‫َج ْمع‬
These are used for both people and things. The context will help
determine the meaning.
‫ا َّل ِذ ْي َر َأ ْي ُت‬
who/what I saw
The ‫ إِع َْراب‬of the ‫ْاْلَ ْس َما ُء ا ْل َم ْو ُص ْو َل ُة‬
The ‫ ْاْلَ ْس َما ُء ا ْل َم ْو ُص ْو َل ُة‬are ‫ َم ْبن ِ ّي‬, except the ‫ ُم َثنًّی‬forms which are ‫ ُم ْع َرب‬and
change as normal ‫ ُم َثنًّی‬nouns:
‫َال َّل َت ْی ِن‬ َ ‫ال َّلت‬
‫َان‬ ‫ال َّل َذ ْي ِن‬ ِ ‫ال َّل َذ‬
‫ان‬
 
476
‫‪Summary‬‬
‫‪َ .‬أ ْس َماء َم ْو ُص ْو َلة ‪The table below summarises the‬‬
‫ْاْلَ ْس َما ُء ا ْل َم ْو ُص ْو َل ُة‬
‫‪Human‬‬ ‫‪Non-Human‬‬
‫َا َّل ِذ ْي‬ ‫ُم ْف َرد‬

‫َال َّل َذ ِ‬
‫َا َّل ِذ ْي َن‬ ‫َج ْمع‬

‫َم ْن‬ ‫َما‬
‫َا َّلتِ ْي‬ ‫ُم ْف َرد‬
‫ال َّلت ِ‬
‫َان‬ ‫ُم َثنًّی‬ ‫َا ْل ُمؤَ َّن ُث‬
‫لَّلئِ ْي‬
‫لَّلتِ ْي ‪َ /‬ا َّ‬
‫َا َّ‬ ‫َج ْمع‬
‫‪477‬‬
‫ِص َلة‬
Types of ‫ِص َلة‬

The ‫ ِص َلة‬of the ‫ اِ ْسم َم ْو ُص ْول‬can come in two forms:
1. A ‫ ُج ْم َلة‬, either ‫ اِ ْس ِم َّیة‬or ‫فِ ْعلِ َّیة‬.
2. A ‫ ِش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬.
‫ ِص َلة‬as a ‫ُج ْم َلة‬ ‫ ِص َلة‬as a ‫ِش ْب ُه ُج ْم َلة‬
‫َم ْن َر َأ ْي ُت ُه‬ ‫ت‬ِ ‫من فِي ا ْلبی‬
َْ ْ َ
‫ا َّل ِذ ْي َر َأ ْي ُت ُه‬ ِ ‫ا َّل ِذي فِي ا ْلبی‬
‫ت‬ َْ ْ
the one who I saw the one who is in the house
Rules of ‫ِص َلة‬
If the ‫ ِص َلة‬is a ‫ ُج ْم َلة‬, it must have an ‫ عَائِد‬which refers to the ‫اِ ْسم َم ْو ُص ْول‬.
This ‫ عَائِد‬can either be mentioned explicitly or omitted and
understood.
‫ عَائِد‬Mentioned Explicitly ‫ عَائِد‬Omitted
‫َم ْن َر َأ ْي ُت ُه‬ )‫َم ْن َر َأ ْي ُت (ـ ُه‬
If the ‫ ِص َلة‬is a ‫ ِش ْب ُه ُج ْم َلة‬, it does not have an ‫عَائِد‬.
The tarkib of the ‫ اِ ْسم َم ْو ُص ْول‬and its ‫ ِص َلة‬are written under the main
sentence, as follows:
...
‫َجا َء‬ ‫َم ْن‬
)‫(ه َو‬ ِ ‫فِعل و َف‬

478
‫ِص َلة ‪ْ and its‬اسم َم ْو ُص ْول ‪Translating the‬‬
‫‪ِ differ according to the‬ص َلة ‪ْ and its‬اسم َم ْو ُص ْول ‪The translation of the‬‬
‫‪ِ . All the rules applied in the‬ص َلة ‪ occupies within the‬عَائِد ‪slot the‬‬
‫)‪َ are also applied here. (see page 460‬ن ْعت ‪sentence‬‬
‫اعل ‪ as the‬عَائِد ‪Translation of the‬‬ ‫َف ِ‬
‫اعل ‪ becomes the‬عَائِد ‪If the‬‬
‫‪ will be translated as:‬اسم موصول ‪َ , the‬ف ِ‬
‫ْ َْ ُ ْ‬
‫‪1. Who or the one who if it refers to human being.‬‬
‫‪2. That or that which if it refers to a non-human being.‬‬
‫)‪(see page 461‬‬
‫َما َينْ َف ُع‬ ‫َم ْن َينْ َف ُع‬
‫‪that which benefits‬‬ ‫‪the one who benefits‬‬
‫‪ ...‬ا َّل ِذ ْي َيدْ ُر ُس ا ْل ُق ْر َ‬
‫آن‬ ‫‪)13‬‬ ‫‪ ... )7‬ا َّل ِذ ْي َْل َي ْخدَ ُع‬ ‫‪َ ... )1‬ما َْل َينْ َف ُع‬
‫ِ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ ...‬ال َّل َذ ْي ِن ُي َطال َعان ا ْل ُكت َ‬
‫ُب‬ ‫‪)14‬‬ ‫ت‬ ‫‪ ... )8‬ا َّلت ْي ْ‬
‫اس َت ْك َب َر ْ‬ ‫‪َ ... )2‬م ْن َّي ْغتَا ُبنَا‬
‫‪َ ...‬م ْن َْل ُي ْش ِر ُك بِاللِ َش ْیئًا‬ ‫‪)15‬‬ ‫‪ ... )9‬ا َّل ِذ ْي َن َْل َي ْغتَا ُب ْو َن‬ ‫‪َ ... )3‬ما َأ َصا َب ُك ْم‬
‫س‬‫‪ ...‬ال َّل َذ ْي ِن َل ِع َبا َم ِعي َأ ْم ِ‬ ‫‪)16‬‬ ‫‪ ... )10‬ا َّل ِذ ْي َن َي ْست َِر ْي ُح ْو َن‬ ‫الَّلتِ ْي َي ُت ْب َن‬
‫‪َّ ... )4‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫‪ ...‬ال َّلت ِ‬
‫َان َل ْم ُت َبدِّ َْل د ْين َُه َما‬ ‫‪)17‬‬ ‫َان َْل َت ْشتَكِی ِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫‪ ... )11‬ال َّلت ِ‬ ‫الَّلئِ ْي ا ْبتُلِ ْی َن‬
‫‪َّ ... )5‬‬
‫َ‬
‫‪ ...‬ا َّلتِ ْي َو َص َل ْت َق ْب َل َساعَة‬ ‫‪)18‬‬ ‫‪ ... )12‬ما يطِیر فِي السم ِ‬
‫اء‬ ‫‪َ ... )6‬م ْن َل ْم َي ْجزَ ْع‬
‫َّ َ‬ ‫َ َ ُْ‬
‫اعل ‪ in the following sentences which refers to the‬اِ ْسم َم ْو ُص ْول ‪Add an‬‬
‫‪َ .‬ف ِ‬
‫يبِستَا ‪ ‬ا َّلت ِ‬
‫َان َيبِ َستَا‬ ‫َ َ‬
‫‪َ )9‬حدَّ ْث َن َم َع ُك ْم‬ ‫‪َ )5‬ع َط َستَا ْاْل َن‬ ‫‪ )1‬ك ََش ُف ْوا‬
‫‪ )10‬يتَزَ وج ِ‬ ‫‪َ )2‬تنْتَظِ ُر ل ِ ْي‬
‫ان َغدً ا‬ ‫َ َّ َ‬ ‫الس ْج ِن‬‫‪َ )6‬م َّرا بِ ِّ‬
‫‪َ )11‬ي َب ُّر ْو َن َوالِدَ ْي ِه ْم‬ ‫‪َ )7‬ع َّق ْت َوالِدَ َت َها‬ ‫ان‬‫‪َ )3‬تس َت ْكبِر ِ‬
‫ْ َ‬
‫اد ْي‬‫‪ )12‬ي ِسی ُل فِي ا ْلو ِ‬ ‫‪َ )8‬س ُیدْ َف َّن ا ْل َی ْو َم‬ ‫‪ُ )4‬و ِّف َق ل ِ ْل َخ ْی ِر‬
‫َ‬ ‫َ ْ‬
‫‪479‬‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه ‪ as the‬عَائِد ‪Translation of the‬‬
‫‪ْ will be translated as:‬اسم َم ْو ُص ْول ‪َ , the‬م ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه ‪ becomes the‬عَائِد ‪If the‬‬
‫‪1. Whom or who if it refers to human being.‬‬
‫‪2. That, which or what if it refers to a non-human being.‬‬
‫)‪(see page 462‬‬
‫َما َك َت ْب ُت ُه‬ ‫َم ْن ن ََص ْر ُت ُه‬
‫‪what I wrote‬‬ ‫‪who/whom I helped‬‬
‫‪َ ...‬ما َذ َب ْحت ُْم َأ ْم ِ‬
‫س‬ ‫‪)13‬‬ ‫‪ ... )7‬ا َّل ِذ ْي َض َر ْب ُت ُه‬ ‫‪َ ... )1‬ما َتبِ ْی ِع ْی َن‬
‫‪ ...‬ا َّل ِذ ْي َن َت ْح ُسدُ ُه ْم‬ ‫‪)14‬‬ ‫الل‬
‫‪َ ... )8‬م ْن َهدَ ی ُ‬ ‫‪َ ... )2‬م ْن َس ِم ْعنَا‬
‫الَّلتِ ْي َش َك ْر ُت ُم ْو ُه َّن‬ ‫‪َّ ...‬‬ ‫‪)15‬‬ ‫‪ ... )9‬ال َّل َذ ْي ِن َر ِح ْم ُت‬ ‫‪َ ... )3‬ما َأ َك ْلت ُُم ْو ُه‬
‫‪ ...‬ال َّل َذ ْي ِن َأ َض َّل ُه َما ُ‬

‫الل‬ ‫‪)16‬‬ ‫ف‬‫‪ ... )10‬ا َّلتِ ْي َل ْم َن ْع ِر ْ‬ ‫‪ ... )4‬ال َّل َت ْی ِن َر َأ ْينَا‬
‫الل ا ْل َجنَّ َة‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫الَّلتِ ْي َظ َل ْم َت‬ ‫‪َ ... )5‬م ْن َأن َْذ ُر ْوا‬
‫‪ ...‬ا َّلذ ْي َن َوعَدَ ُ‬ ‫‪)17‬‬ ‫‪َّ ... )11‬‬
‫‪ ...‬ا َّلتِ ْي َع َّل َم ٰه َذا ا ْل ُم َع ِّل ُم‬ ‫‪)18‬‬ ‫‪ ... )12‬ال َّل َت ْی ِن ن ََص ْر ُت ْم‬ ‫‪ ... )6‬ا َّل ِذ ْي َت َر ْك َت ُه‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول ‪ in the following sentences which refers to the‬اِ ْسم َم ْو ُص ْول ‪Add an‬‬
‫‪ِ when it is the‬ص َلة ‪ is often omitted from the‬عَائِد ‪. Remember, the‬بِ ِه‬
‫‪َ .‬م ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬
‫َر َأ ْي ُت ُه ْم ‪َ ‬ا َّل ِذ ْي َن َر َأ ْي ُت ( ُـه ْم)‬
‫‪َ )9‬أن َْج ْیت ُُم ْو ُه َما‬ ‫‪ )5‬زَ َج ُر ْو ُه َّن‬ ‫‪َ )1‬قبِ َل َها‬
‫‪َ )10‬تزَ َّو َج َها َأ ْم ِ‬
‫س‬ ‫‪َ )6‬أغ َْر َق ُه ُ‬
‫الل‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ن َّتبِ ُع ُه َما‬
‫الل فِي الدُّ ْن َیا‬
‫‪َ )11‬أ ْخزَ ا ُه ُ‬ ‫‪َ )7‬ت ْأ ُم ُر ْون َُه َّن‬ ‫‪ )3‬ن َْجتَن ِ ُب ُه‬
‫الص ََّل ِة‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ )12‬ن َْس َت ْقبِ ُل َها في َّ‬ ‫‪َ )8‬أ ْخ َر ْجت ُُم ْو ُه ْم‬ ‫‪َ )4‬ض َّی ْع ُتن ََّها‬
‫‪480‬‬
‫ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪ as the‬عَائِد ‪Translation of the‬‬
‫‪ْ will be translated as:‬اسم َم ْو ُص ْول ‪ُ , the‬م َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪ becomes the‬عَائِد ‪If the‬‬
‫‪1. Whose or the one whose if it refers to human being.‬‬
‫‪2. That or that whose if it refers to a non-human being.‬‬
‫)‪(see page 463‬‬
‫ا َّل ِذ ْي َبا ُب ُه َم ْفت ُْوح‬
‫‪whose door is open‬‬
‫‪Translate the following sentences into English.‬‬
‫‪ ...‬ا َّلتِ ْي ُض ُی ْو ُف َها َصائِ ُم ْو َن‬ ‫‪)11‬‬ ‫‪ ... )6‬ا َّلتِ ْي ع ََم ُل َها َم ْق ُب ْول‬ ‫‪َ ...‬ما َبا ُب ُه ُم ْغ َلق‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫ِ‬ ‫الَّلتِ ْي َك ْل ُب ُه َّن َص ِغ ْیر‬ ‫‪َ ...‬م ْن َأ ُب ْو ُه َف ِق ْیر‬
‫‪ ...‬ال َّل َذان ْ‬
‫احت ََر َق َب ْیت ُُه َما‬ ‫‪)12‬‬ ‫‪َّ ... )7‬‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫َان َد َر َجا ُت ُه َما َرفِ ْی َعة‬ ‫‪ ...‬ال َّلت ِ‬ ‫‪)13‬‬ ‫‪َ ... )8‬ا َّل ِذ ْي َن ك َََّل ُم ُه ْم ُح ْلو‬ ‫اإل ْس ََّل ُم‬‫‪َ ...‬م ْن ِد ْينُ ُه ْ ِ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫الَّلتِ ْي َأ َخ َوا ُت ُه َّن َصال ِ َحات‬ ‫‪َّ ...‬‬ ‫‪)14‬‬ ‫ان َجدُّ ُه َما َجالِس‬ ‫‪ ... )9‬ال َّل َذ ِ‬ ‫‪ ...‬ا َّل ِذ ْي ُأ ُّم ُه َصابِ َرة‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫َان ُم َع ِّل ُم ْو ُه َما ُم ْجت َِهدُ ْو َن‬‫‪ ...‬ال َّلت ِ‬ ‫‪)15‬‬ ‫‪َ ... )10‬ا َّل ِذ ْي َن َخا َلت ُُه ْم َشاكِ َرة‬ ‫‪ ...‬ا َّل ِذ ْي ُدكَّا ُن ُه َكبِ ْیر‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫ُم َضاف ‪ in the following sentences which refers to the‬اِ ْسم َم ْو ُص ْول ‪Add an‬‬
‫‪.‬إِ َل ْی ِه‬
‫ُأ ْص ُب ُع َها َت ِس ْی ُل َد ًما ‪ ‬ا َّلتِ ْي ُأ ْص ُب ُع َها َت ِس ْی ُل َد ًما‬
‫الس ْج ِن‬ ‫ِ ِ‬ ‫‪ُ )5‬ب ُطون ُُه َما َكبِ ْی َرة‬ ‫‪ )1‬اِ ْحت ََر َق َب ْیت َُها‬
‫‪ )9‬ا ْبنَا ُه في ِّ‬
‫‪َ )10‬س ِّیدُ ُه َما عَاقِل‬ ‫‪ )6‬آ َبائ ُُه ْم َضا ُّل ْو َن‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ب َكی َو َلدُ َها‬
‫ادق‬‫‪ )11‬ح ِدي ُثهم ص ِ‬ ‫‪ )7‬مِ َّلت َُها مِ َّل ُة آ َبائِ َها‬ ‫‪َ )3‬د َوائ ُُه َّن نَافِع‬
‫َ ْ ُ ْ َ‬
‫‪َ )12‬صا َم ْت ُأ ْخت ُُه َّن‬ ‫‪َ )8‬أ ْج َسا ُد ُه َما َق ِو َّية‬ ‫‪َ )4‬أ ْه ُل ُه مِ ْن َم َّك َة‬
‫‪481‬‬
‫َظ ْرف ‪ُ of a‬م َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪َ or‬م ْج ُر ْور ‪ as the‬عَائِد ‪Translation of the‬‬
‫‪َ , the‬ظ ْرف ‪ُ of a‬م َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪َ or the‬ح ْر ُف َجر ‪َ of a‬م ْج ُر ْور ‪ becomes the‬عَائِد ‪If the‬‬
‫اسم َم ْو ُص ْول‬
‫‪ْ will be translated as:‬‬
‫‪1. Whom if it refers to a human being.‬‬
‫‪2. That or which if it refers to a non-human being.‬‬
‫)‪(see page 464‬‬
‫ا َّل ِذ ْي َق َر ْأ ُ‬ ‫ا َّل ِذ ْي َق َر ْأ ُ‬
‫‪which I read from‬‬ ‫‪whom I read with‬‬
‫‪from which I read‬‬ ‫‪with whom I read‬‬
‫َان ْاس َت َغ َف ْر ُت ْم ِمن ُْه َما‬
‫‪ ... )11‬ال َّلت ِ‬ ‫ان ن َُص ِّل ْي َم َع ُه َما‬‫‪ ... )6‬ال َّل َذ ِ‬ ‫‪ ...‬ا َّلتِ ْي َما ُلنَا ِعنْدَ َها‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫الل عَ َل ْی ِه َّن‬ ‫‪ِ َّ ... )12‬‬ ‫‪َ ... )7‬ا َّل ِذ ْي َن َْل ن َْس ُجدُ َل ُه ْم‬ ‫اإلنَا َء بِ ِه‬
‫ل ِْ‬
‫الَّلئ ْي َأ ْن َع َم ُ‬ ‫‪َ ...‬ما ن َْم َ ُ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫َان َد َخ ْل َنا ا ْل َب ْی َت َم َع ُه َما‬‫‪ ... )13‬ال َّلت ِ‬ ‫الَّلتِ ْي َم َ‬
‫ات َق ْب َل ُه َّن‬ ‫‪َّ ... )8‬‬ ‫ان َن ُع ْو ُذ مِن ُْه َما‬ ‫‪ ...‬ال َّل َذ ِ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫‪ ... )14‬ا َّل ِت ْي َط َل َب َأ ُب ْو َك ِمن َْها ا ْل َما َء‬ ‫ات‬ ‫‪ ... )9‬من ِبی ِد ِه م ْل ُك السماو ِ‬
‫َّ َ َ‬ ‫َ ْ َ ُ‬ ‫‪َ ...‬ا َّل ِذ ْي َن َذ َه ْبنَا إِ َل ْی ِه ْم‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫َاب ِب ِه‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ ... ... )15‬ا َّلذ ْي ْاشت ََر ْي ُت ا ْلكت َ‬ ‫اْل ُّم عَ َل ْی ِه َّن‬
‫َت ْ ُ‬ ‫‪ ... )10‬من ح ِزن ِ‬
‫َ ْ َ‬ ‫طت َع َل ْی ِه‬ ‫‪ ...‬ا َّل ِذ ْي َس َق ُّ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫ُم َضاف ‪ in the following sentences which refers to the‬اِ ْسم َم ْو ُص ْول ‪Add an‬‬
‫‪َ .‬م ْج ُر ْور ‪ or‬إِ َل ْی ِه‬
‫َت ُط ْوفِ ْی َن بِ َها ‪ ‬ا َّلتِ ْي َت ُط ْوفِ ْی َن بِ َها‬
‫‪َ )9‬ت ِع ْی ُش ْو َن َم َع ُه َما‬ ‫‪ُ )5‬أ ْخ ِر ْجنَا مِن َْها‬ ‫‪ُ )1‬ت ْبت ُْم مِنْ ُه‬
‫‪َ )10‬أن َْج ْینَاك ُْم مِن ُْه ْم‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ت ْست َِر ْي ُح ْو َن َع َل ْی ِه‬ ‫‪ُ )2‬و ِّف ْقنَا َل ُه‬
‫الل َع َل ْی ِه ُم ا ْل َح َّج‬
‫‪َ )11‬ف َر َض ُ‬ ‫‪َ )7‬ت ْست َِع ْی ِذ ْي َن مِن ُْه َما‬ ‫‪ِ )3‬ع ْشت ُْم فِ ْی ِه‬
‫الل َع َل ْی ِه ُم ا ْل َع َذ َ‬
‫اب‬ ‫‪َ )12‬أنْزَ َل ُ‬ ‫‪ُ )8‬ت ْح ِسن ُْو َن إِ َل ْی ِه َّن‬ ‫‪َ )4‬تنْ ُظ ْر َن إِ َل ْی َها‬
‫‪482‬‬
‫َخ َبر ُم َقدَّ م ‪ in a‬عَائِد ‪Translation of the‬‬
‫‪َ , it will be translated as:‬خ َبر ُم َقدَّ م ‪ occurs in the‬عَائِد ‪If the‬‬
‫‪1. Who has if it refers to a human being.‬‬
‫‪2. Which has if it refers to a thing.‬‬
‫)‪(see page 465‬‬
‫ا َّل ِذ ْي فِ ْیه قِ َصص‬ ‫ا َّل ِذ ْي َع َل ْی ِه َد ْين‬
‫‪which has stories in it‬‬ ‫‪who has a loan on him‬‬
‫‪in which there are stories‬‬ ‫‪on whom there is a loan‬‬
‫‪Translate the following phrases.‬‬
‫اإلنْس ِ‬ ‫ِ ِ‬ ‫‪َ ...‬ما َع َل ْی ِه َدم‬
‫ان‬ ‫‪ ... )9‬ا َّلت ْي من َْها َخ ْل ُق ْ ِ َ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫لَّلتِ ْي َل ُه َّن َو ْقت كَثِ ْیر‬ ‫‪َ ... )10‬ا َّ‬ ‫‪َ ...‬ما فِ ْی ِه َب َركَات‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫ان عَاقِ ََّل ِن‬ ‫َان َلهما و َلدَ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ ... )11‬ال َّلت ُ َ َ‬ ‫‪َ ...‬م ْن ِعنْدَ ُه َع ْقل‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫‪َ ... )12‬ا َّل ِذ ْي َن َف ْو َق ُه ْم ُش ُی ْوخ ُم َّت ُق ْو َن‬ ‫‪َ ...‬م ْن ِعنْدَ ُه ْم َمال‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫‪َ ... )13‬ا َّلتِ ْي فِ ْی َها َف َواكِ ُه َو َل ْح ُم َط ْیر‬ ‫‪َ ...‬ا َّل ِذ ْي َل ْی َس َق ْب َل ُه َش ْيء‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫َان َب ْعدَ ُه َما فِ ْتنَة عَظِ ْی َمة‬ ‫‪َ ... )14‬ال َّلت ِ‬ ‫‪َ ...‬ا َّل ِذ ْي فِ ْی ِه آ َيات َب ِّینَات‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫لَّلتِ ْي َخ ْل َف ُه َّن َأ ْو َْلد ِصغَار‬ ‫‪َ ... )15‬ا َّ‬ ‫ان ِعنْدَ ُه َما َباب َكبِ ْیر‬ ‫‪َ ...‬ال َّل َذ ِ‬ ‫‪)7‬‬
‫ح ُّب ْو َن‬‫‪َ ... )16‬ا َّل ِذين حو َلهم َأص ِد َقاء م ِ‬ ‫ان َم َع ُه َما َول ِ ُّی ُه َما‬
‫‪َ ...‬ال َّل َذ ِ‬ ‫‪)8‬‬
‫ْ َ َ ْ ُ ْ ْ ُ ُ‬
‫َخ َبر ‪ in the following sentences which refers to the‬اِ ْسم َم ْو ُص ْول ‪Add an‬‬
‫‪ُ .‬م َقدَّ م‬
‫‪ِ )9‬عنْدَ ُه ْم َك ْلب َأ ْس َو ُد‬ ‫َل َها غ ُْر َفة َكبِ ْی َرة‬ ‫‪)5‬‬ ‫َم َع ُه ْم َخ ْمر‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫َان زَ ر َقاو ِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫‪َ )10‬لها َعین ِ‬ ‫فِ ْی َها َأن َْهار كَثِ ْی َرة‬ ‫‪)6‬‬ ‫َل ْی َس َل ُه ِح َمار‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫ْ َ‬ ‫َ ْ‬
‫‪َ )11‬م َع ُه ْم َق َط َرات َقلِ ْی َلة‬ ‫َل ْی َس َع َل ْی ِه ُذ َباب‬ ‫‪)7‬‬ ‫فِ ْی ِه َأ َسد َأ ْص َف ُر‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫‪َ )12‬ع َل ْی َها َش َج َرة َخ ْض َرا ُء‬ ‫َل َها َص َف َحات كَثِ ْی َرة‬ ‫‪)8‬‬ ‫َل ُه َما فِ ْیل َأ ْب َی ُض‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫‪483‬‬
Part 1: ‫ اِ ْسم َمؤَ َّول‬in a Sentence
An ‫ ْاسم َم ْو ُص ْول‬and its ‫ ِص َلة‬occur in any slot in a sentence where a ‫َم ْع ِر َفة‬
noun can occur.
In a ‫ ُج ْم َلة ْاس ِم َّیة‬, these are:
1. ‫ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬
2. ‫َخ َبر‬
In a ‫ ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة‬, these are:
ِ ‫َف‬
1. ‫اعل‬
2. ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬
3. ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه َثان‬
4. ‫ُم ْس َت ْثنًی‬
‫ َم ْو ُص ْول‬and ‫ ِص َلة‬as a ‫ ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬and ‫َخ َبر‬

1. When an ‫ اِ ْسم َم ْو ُص ْول‬and its ‫ ِص َلة‬become the ‫ ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬or ‫ َخ َبر‬, it is common
for a ‫ َض ِم ْی ُر ا ْل َف ْص ِل‬to occur between them.
‫لل ُه َو ا َّل ِذ ْي َخ َل َقن ِ ْي‬
ُ ‫َا‬
ِ ِ
ُ ‫َا َّلذ ْي َخ َل َقن ْي ُه َو‬
‫الل‬
2. When the ‫ ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬is an ‫ اِ ْسم َم ْو ُص ْول‬and ‫ ِص َلة‬, the ‫ َخ َبر‬may be preceded by
a ‫ َفـ‬.
‫َا َّل ِذ ْي آ َم َن َف َل ُه َأ ْجر عَظِ ْیم‬
For the one who believes is a great reward.
‫َخ َبر‬ ‫زَ ائِدَ ة‬ ‫ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬
‫َأ ْجر‬ ‫َل ُه‬ ‫ف‬

َ ‫آ َم َن‬ ‫َا َّل ِذ ْي‬
‫ُمبْتَدَ أ ُمؤَ َّخر‬ ‫َخبَر ُم َقدَّ م‬ )‫(ه َو‬ ِ ‫فِعل و َف‬

‫ِص َلة‬ ‫اِ ْسم َم ْو ُص ْول‬
484
‫َف ِ‬
‫اعل ‪ِ as a‬ص َلة ‪َ and‬م ْو ُص ْول‬
‫‪ِ can be translated‬ص َلة ‪َ , the‬ف ِ‬
‫اعل ‪ِ occur as the‬ص َلة ‪َ and‬م ْو ُص ْول ‪When the‬‬
‫‪in two ways:‬‬
‫‪َ before the verb.‬م ْو ُص ْول ‪1. Immediately after the‬‬
‫‪2. After the verb.‬‬
‫َل ْم َي ْف َه ِم الدَّ ْر َس ا َّل ِذ ْي َن غَا ُب ْوا َأ ْم ِ‬
‫س‬
‫‪Those who were absent yesterday have not understood the lesson.‬‬
‫‪Those (students) have not understood the lesson who were absent yesterday.‬‬
‫‪َ occur in.‬م ْو ُص ْول – ِص َلة ‪Translate the following and state which slot the‬‬
‫الَّلتِ ْي ُظلِ ْم َن‬‫الر َج ُل ا ْل َك ِر ْي ُم َّ‬ ‫‪ )11‬ن ََص َر َّ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ )1‬ن ََج َحت ال َّلتَان ْ‬
‫اجت ََهدَ َتا‬
‫الس ْو ِق‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪َْ )2‬ل َين َْج ُح إِ َّْل َم ْن َّي ْصدُ ُق‬
‫‪َ )12‬أ ْح َمدُ ُه َو ا َّلذ ْي َر َأ ْي ُت ُه ف ْي ُّ‬
‫ج ِد ُه َو َأ ْح َمدُ‬ ‫‪َ )13‬ا َّل ِذ ْي َر َأ ْي ُت ُه فِي ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬
‫ْ‬ ‫ات ا َّل ِذ ْي َس َق َط مِ َن ا ْل َج َب ِل‬ ‫‪َ )3‬م َ‬
‫‪َ )14‬ه ْل َر َأ ْي َت ا َّل ِذ ْي َر َأ ْي ُت ُه فِ ْي ا ْل َح ِد ْي َق ِة؟‬ ‫‪َ )4‬ل ْم َي ْف َه ِم ا َّل ِذ ْي َن َقا ُل ْوا َف ِه ْمنَا‬
‫س‬‫‪َ )15‬ا ْل َی ْو َم َأ ْع َط ْی ُت َأ ْح َمدَ َما َأ ْع َط ْیتَنِي َأ ْم ِ‬ ‫ح ْك َم َة َم ْن َي َشا ُء﴾‬ ‫‪﴿ )5‬يؤْ تِي ا ْل ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪َ )16‬ا َّل ِذ ْي َي ْح َف ُظ الدَّ ْر َس ِح ْف ًظا ُه َو ُح َذ ْي َف ُة‬ ‫اجت ََم َع ا َّل ِذ ْي َن َجا ُء ْوا مِ َن ا ْل َب َل ِد‬ ‫‪ْ )6‬‬
‫َّاس إِ َّْل ا َّل ِذ ْي َر َأ ْي ُت ُه َم َع َخا َلتِ ْي‬ ‫‪َ )17‬و َص َل الن ُ‬ ‫الس ْو ِق‬ ‫‪َ )7‬ر َأ ْينَا ا َّل َذ ْي ِن َم َش َیا إِ َلی ُّ‬
‫ب َي ْو ًما َع ِن الدَّ ْر ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ ِ ِ‬ ‫‪﴿ )8‬إِن ََّك َْل َت ْه ِد ْي َم ْن َأ ْح َب ْب َت﴾‬
‫س‬ ‫‪َ )18‬فاط َم ُة ه َي ا َّلت ْي َل ْم َتغ ْ‬
‫یم َر ِّب َي ا َّل ِذي ُي ْحیِ ْي َو ُي ِم ْی ُت﴾‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ ﴿ )19‬ق َال إِ ْب َراه ُ‬ ‫‪ُ ﴿ )9‬ه َو ا َّل ِذ ْي َخ َل َق ُك ْم مِ ْن طِ ْین﴾‬
‫وْل بِا ْل َی ْو ِم ْاْل ِخ ِر‬ ‫‪َ )20‬ي ْس َت ْكبِ ُر ا َّل ِذ ْي َن َْل ُيؤْ مِن ُْو َن بِاللِ َ‬ ‫‪َ )10‬ع َّل َم ْاْلَ ْنبِ َیا ُء الن َ‬
‫َّاس َما َع َّل َم ُه ُم ُ‬
‫الل‬
‫‪485‬‬
Part 2: ‫ اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول‬in a Phrase
An ‫ ْاسم َم ْو ُص ْول‬and its ‫ ِص َلة‬occur in any slot in a phrase where a ‫َم ْع ِر َفة‬
noun can occur. These are:
1. ‫ ُم َشار إِ َل ْی ِه‬: it has been mentioned previously that the ‫ ُم َشار إِ َل ْی ِه‬must
have an ‫ َا ْل‬. However, a phrase with ‫ َا َّل ِذ ْي‬or its sisters can also
become the ‫ ُم َشار إِ َل ْی ِه‬.
3. ‫َم ْج ُر ْور‬
4. ‫ َن ْعت‬of a ‫ َم ْع ِر َفة‬word
Exercise 1
Translate the following and notice how the ‫ َم ْو ُص ْول‬and ‫ ِص َلة‬are used
as part of the phrases.
‫) َل ْی َس ٰه َذا مِ ْن ع ََم ِل ا َّل ِذ ْي َن َي ْط ُل ُب ْو َن ا ْل ِع ْل َم‬5 ‫) ٰذل ِ َك ا َّل ِذ ْي َت ْك َر ُه َينْ َف ُع َك‬1
‫ج ِد‬ ِ ‫) ُم ْص َعب َص ِد ْي ُق ا َّل ِذ ْي َر َأ ْي ُت فِي ا ْل َم ْس‬6
ْ ‫) تِ ْل َك ا َّلتِ ْي فِي ا ْلغ ُْر َف ِة ِه َي َل ُك ْم‬2
ِ ‫) َْل ينْ َفع ا َّل ِذين ي ْش ِركُو َن بِاللِ آلِهتُهم فِي ْا‬7
‫ْلخ َر ِة‬ ‫) ُأ ْح ِس ُن إِ َلی ا َّل ِذ ْي َْل ُي ْح ِس ُن إِ َل َّي‬3
ْ ُ َ ْ ُ َ ْ ُ َ
‫ات َأ ْجر َكبِ ْیر‬ ِ ‫) ل ِ َّل ِذين يؤْ مِنُو َن ويعم ُلو َن الصالِح‬8 ‫ج ِد ُهو َخالِد‬ ِ ‫) ٰه َذا ا َّل ِذ ْي َر َأ ْي ُت فِي ا ْل َم ْس‬4
َ َّ ْ َََْ ْ ُ َ ْ ْ
The ‫ َم ْو ُص ْول‬and ‫ ِص َلة‬as a ‫َن ْعت‬

If a ‫ َم ْع ِر َفة‬word is followed by a sentence which gives more
information regarding that word, it will become the ‫ َن ْعت‬.
the man who came from the village
In this example, the relative pronoun, who, and the sentence,
came from the village, become the ‫ َن ْعت‬of a ‫ َمنْ ُع ْوت‬which is ‫ َم ْع ِر َفة‬, the
man.
The ‫ َن ْعت‬sentence will become the ‫ ِص َلة‬, and it will be preceded by an
‫اِ ْسم َم ْو ُص ْول‬.
‫الر ُج ُل ا َّل ِذ ْي َجا َء مِ َن ا ْل َق ْر َي ِة‬
َّ
486
‫‪...‬‬
‫ا ْل َق ْر َي ِة‬ ‫مِ َن‬ ‫َجا َء‬ ‫ا َّل ِذ ْي‬ ‫الر ُج ُل‬

‫َّ‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه‬ ‫(ه َو)‬ ‫فِعل و َف ِ‬

‫‪Note‬‬
‫َما ‪َ and‬م ْن ‪َ . The words‬ن ْعت ‪ and its sisters can form part of a‬ا َّل ِذ ْي ‪Only‬‬
‫‪َ .‬ن ْعت ‪cannot form part of the‬‬
‫‪ ... )7‬الدُّ موع ا َّلتِي َت ِسی ُل مِن َخ ْشی ِة اللِ‬ ‫‪ ...‬ا ْل َو ْق ُت ا َّل ِذ ْي َم َضی‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫َ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫ُْ ُ ْ ْ‬
‫آن كَثِ ْی ًرا‬
‫ان ا ْل ُق ْر َ‬ ‫ان ي ْت ُلو ِ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫اإل َما َمان ال َّل َذ َ َ‬ ‫‪ِ ْ ... )8‬‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫الس ِّیدُ ا َّلذ ْي ُيط ْی ُع ُه الن ُ‬
‫َّاس‬ ‫‪َّ ...‬‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫الَّلتِي َت ُقمن ال َّلی َل بِا ْل ُقر ِ‬
‫آن‬ ‫الصال ِ َح ُ‬ ‫‪ ...‬ا ْل َیتَا َمی ا َّل ِذ ْي َن َم َ‬
‫ات َأ ُب ْو ُه ْم‬
‫ْ‬ ‫ات َّ ْ ْ َ ْ‬ ‫‪َّ ... )9‬‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫س‬‫الَّلئِي َل ْم َي ْح ُض ْر َن الدَّ ْر َس َأ ْم ِ‬ ‫‪ ... )10‬ا ْل َبن ُ‬ ‫الل َع َل ْینَا‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ ...‬النِّ ْع َم ُة ا َّلت ْي َأ ْن َع َم َها ُ‬
‫َات َّ ْ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫َاه َما مِ ْن َم َّك َة‬ ‫ان ال َّل َذ ِ‬
‫ان ْاشت ََر ْين ُ‬ ‫‪ ... )11‬ا ْلمصح َف ِ‬
‫ُ ْ َ‬ ‫َان َت ْس َم ِع ْی َن بِ ِه َما‬
‫َان ال َّلت ِ‬
‫‪ْ ...‬اْلُ ُذن ِ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫‪ ... )12‬ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن ا َّل ِذ ْي َن َْل َي ْس َت ْی ِق ُظ ْو َن ل ِ َص ََّل ِة ا ْل َف ْج ِر‬ ‫َان ال َّلت ِ‬
‫َان َأ َك َلت ُْه َما ا ْلبِن ُْت‬ ‫‪ ...‬ال ُّت َّفاحت ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫الر ُس ْو ِل ا َّل ِذ ْي َجا َء بِا ْل ُق ْرآ ِن‬
‫‪ )6‬آ َمنْ ُت بِ َّ‬ ‫َن ْس َت ِع ْی ُن بِاللِ ا َّل ِذ ْي َخ َل َقنَا‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫ان َي ْبكِ ْي َكثِ ْی ًرا‬‫‪َ )7‬س َك َت ا ْل َو َلدُ ا َّل ِذ ْي َك َ‬ ‫الل ا َّل ِذ ْي َأ ْن َع َم َع َل ْینَا‬
‫َن ْش ُك ُر َ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫الر ُج َل ا َّل ِذ ْي َي ْح ُسدُ نِ ْي‬ ‫ب ٰه َذا َّ‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪َْ )8‬ل ُأح ُّ‬ ‫الر ُج ُل ا َّل ِذ ْي َن َص َر َأ َخ َ‬
‫اك‬ ‫َجا َء َّ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫ب ٰه ِذ ِه ا ْل ُج ُم َع َة‬ ‫ِ‬
‫اإل َما َم ا َّلذ ْي َخ َط َ‬‫‪َ )9‬س ِم ْع ُت ْ ِ‬ ‫ب ا َّل ِذ ْي َي َخا ُف ُه َو ُيطِ ْی ُع ُه‬ ‫ِ‬
‫الل ُيح ُّ‬ ‫إِ َّن َ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫ين ِم ْن َق ْب ِل ُك ْم﴾‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪﴿ )10‬اعْ ُبدُ وا َر َّب ُك ُم ا َّلذي َخ َل َق ُك ْم َوا َّلذ َ‬ ‫َي ْس ُجدُ ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن للِ ا َّل ِذ ْي َخ َل َق ُه ْم‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫‪487‬‬
Sentence ‫ َن ْعت‬of ‫ نَكِ َرة‬and ‫ َم ْع ِر َفة‬Words
When a sentence occurs as a ‫ َن ْعت‬of a ‫ َم ْع ِر َفة‬word, it must be
preceded by an ‫اِ ْسم َم ْو ُص ْول‬.
When the sentence becomes the ‫ َن ْعت‬of a ‫ نَكِ َرة‬word, an ‫ اِ ْسم َم ْو ُص ْول‬is
not required.
‫كِتَاب َق َر ْأ ُت ُه‬ ‫َاب ا َّل ِذ ْي َق َر ْأ ُت ُه‬ ِ
ُ ‫ا ْلكت‬
A book that I read. The book that I read.
The table below explains this.
‫َن ْعت‬
Single Word Sentence
After a ‫ نَكِ َرة‬or ‫َم ْع ِر َفة‬ After a ‫نَكِ َرة‬ After a ‫َم ْع ِر َفة‬
Directly Via an ‫ْاسم َم ْو ُص ْول‬
Agree in DING Contains an ‫ عَائِد‬referring to the ‫َمنْ ُع ْوت‬
Translated before Translated with a relative pronoun

the ‫َمنْ ُع ْوت‬ Translated after the ‫َمنْ ُع ْوت‬
‫الر ُج ُل ا ْل ُمؤْ مِ ُن‬

َّ ‫َر ُجل ُمؤْ مِن‬ ‫َر ُجل آ َم َن‬ ‫الر ُج ُل ا َّل ِذ ْي آ َم َن‬
َّ
The believing A believing
man. man. A man who believes. The man who believes.
Exercise 4
Translate the following phrases. Notice the difference between the
sentence ‫ َن ْعت‬of a ‫ َم ْع ِر َفة‬word and a ‫ نَكِ َرة‬word.
ِ ِ ِ
ُ ‫ ُن ْور َي ْهد ْي بِه‬... )7
‫الل َمن َّي َشا ُء‬ ُ ‫ ُذن ُْوب َيغْف ُر َها‬...
‫الل‬ )1
ِ ‫الل إِ َلی الن‬ ِ ‫الل مِن َْها‬ ِ ِ
‫َّاس‬ ُ ‫ الن ُّْو ُر ا َّلذ ْي َأ ْر َس َل‬... )8 َ ‫الذن ُْو ُب ا َّلت ْي ن َْس َتغْف ُر‬ ُّ ... )2
ِ ِ ‫ َأ ْع ُین َْل ُي ْب ِص ُر ْو َن بِ َها‬...
‫الل َو َر ُس ْو َل ُه ﷺ‬ َ ‫ ا ْلع َبا ُد ا َّلذ ْي َن َْل َي ْع ِر ُف ْو َن‬... )9 )3
‫ ِع َباد َي ْع ِر ُف ْو َن َر َّب ُه ْم َو َر ُس ْو َل ُه َو ِد ْينَ ُه‬... )10 ‫ ا ْل ُع ُی ْو ُن ا َّلتِ ْي ُت ْب ِص ُر ْو َن بِ َها‬... )4
‫الص ََّل ِة‬ َّ ‫َاها في‬
ِ َ ‫ان َق َضین‬
ْ َ ‫ َل َیال ْي َر َم َض‬... )11
ِ ‫الل َو َر ُس ْو ُل ُه ﷺ‬ ِ
ُ ‫ ال َّش ْي ُء ا َّلذ ْي َح َّر َم ُه‬... )5
ِ ‫َاها َطائِ ِفین حو َل ا ْلبی‬ َ ‫ ال َّل ْی َل ُة ا َّلتِ ْي َق َض ْین‬... )12
‫ت‬ َْ ْ َ َ ْ ُ ‫ َأ ْش َیا ُء َأ َح َّل َها‬... )6
‫الل َو َل ْم ُي َح ِّر ْم َها‬
488
The ‫ َبدَ ل‬of ‫ َم ْن‬and ‫ َما‬and their ‫ِص َلة‬
The ‫ ْاسم َم ْو ُص ْول‬of ‫ َم ْن‬or ‫ َما‬and their ‫ ِص َلة‬may have a ‫ َبدَ ل‬in the form of a
‫ ِش ْب ُه ا ْل ُج ْم َل ِة‬with the ‫ َح ْرف َجار‬of ‫مِ ْن‬.
This ‫ مِ ْن‬is called ‫مِ ْن ا ْل َب َیانِ َّی ُة‬, the ‫ مِ ْن‬which clarifies the ‫اِ ْسم َم ْو ُص ْول‬.
The ‫ اِ ْسم َم ْو ُص ْول‬and the ‫ َم ْج ُر ْور‬are translated as follows:
the [‫ ] َم ْج ُر ْور‬who / that [‫] ِص َلة‬
‫الل مِ ْن َمال‬
ُ ‫ َما َرزَ َق َك‬...
the wealth that Allah granted you
‫َمال‬ ‫مِ ْن‬ ‫الل‬
ُ ‫َرزَ َق َك‬ ‫َما‬
‫َم ْج ُر ْور‬ ‫َجار‬ ِ ‫َف‬

‫اعل‬ ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬،‫فِ ْعل‬
489
‫‪Translate the following phrases.‬‬
‫‪ ... )6‬من َأرس َل الل مِن ْاْلَ ْنبِی ِ‬
‫اء‬ ‫‪َ ...‬ما َأ ْن َف ْقت ُْم مِ ْن َمال‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫َ‬ ‫ُ َ‬ ‫َ ْ َ َ‬
‫‪َ ... )7‬ما َي ْف َع ُل ْو َن مِ ْن َخ ْیر َأ ْو َشر‬ ‫َخ َس ُر مِ ْن َمال‬ ‫‪َ ...‬ما ن ْ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫‪َ ... )8‬ما ا َّت َخ ْذ ُت ْم آل ِ َه ًة مِ َن ْاْلَ ْصنَا ِم‬ ‫‪َ ...‬ما َت ْج َم ُع مِ َن ا ْل ِع ْل ِم‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫‪َ ... )9‬ما َيبِ ْی ُع ْو َن مِ ْن َط َعام َو َش َراب‬ ‫‪َ ...‬ما َأ َصا َبنَا مِ ْن ُم ِص ْی َبة‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫ال َو ْاْلَ ْو َْل ِد‬
‫‪َ ... )10‬ما َتت ُْرك ُْو َن فِي الدُّ ْن َیا مِ َن ْاْلَ ْم َو ِ‬ ‫ح ُّب ْو َن مِ ْن َمال َو َبن ِ ْی َن‬ ‫‪ ...‬ما ي ِ‬
‫َ ُ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫اب‬‫َن ُع ْو ُذ بِاللِ مِ َّما َأن َْذ َرنَا ْاْلَ ْنبِ َیا ُء ۏ مِ َن ا ْل َع َذ ِ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫َْل َي ْخ َفى َعلى اللِ َما َت ْع َم ُل ْو َن مِ ْن َس ِّی َئة َأ ْو َح َسنَة‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫الل ا ْل ُمؤْ مِن ِ ْی َن مِ َن ْاْلَ ْج ِر َوا ْل َم ْغ ِف َر ِة‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َأ ْب َتغ ْي َما َو َعدَ ُ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫الذ َّل ِة‬
‫اب َو ِّ‬ ‫الل َبن ِي إِ ْس َرائِ ْی َل مِ َّما َكا ُن ْوا فِ ْی ِه مِ َن ا ْل َع َذ ِ‬
‫َن َّجى ُ ْ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫الل َع َلى َما آ َتا ُك ْم مِ ْن ِص َّحة َوإِ ْي َمان َو َت ْوفِ ْیق َو َعافِ َیة‬ ‫ُا ْش ُك ُروا َ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫ات ا ْل َج ِد ْيدَ ِة‬ ‫اع ِد وا ْل َكلِم ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫َ‬
‫اب مِن ا ْل َقو ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َقدْ َحف ْظنَا َما في ٰه َذا ا ْلك َت ِ َ َ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫َْل ُي ْغن ِ ْى َعنْ ُه ْم َي ْو َم ا ْل ِق َیا َم ِة َما َي ْع ُبدُ ْو َن مِ ْن ُد ْو ِن اللِ مِ ْن َصنَم َأ ْو َح َجر َأ ْو َش َجر َأ ْو إِ ْن َسان‬ ‫‪)7‬‬
‫ب َو َغ ْی ِر ٰذل ِ َك‬
‫الش ْر ِك َو ُع ُق ْو ِق ا ْل َوال ِدَ ْي ِن َوا ْلبِدْ َع ِة َوا ْل ِغ ْی َب ِة َوالزِّ َنا َوا ْل َك ِذ ِ‬ ‫الل مِ َن ِّ‬ ‫ب َما َح َّر َم ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َأ ْج َتن ُ‬ ‫‪)8‬‬
‫‪490‬‬
Supplement: ‫َالنَّكِ َر ُة ا ْل َم ْو ُص ْو َف ُة‬
‫النَّكِ َر ُة ا ْل َم ْو ُص ْو َف ُة‬
The words ‫ َم ْن‬and ‫ َما‬usually have a ‫ َم ْع ِر َفة‬meaning, i.e. someone or
something known. However, they can also have a ‫ نَكِ َرة‬meaning, i.e.
someone or something unknown. In this case, ‫ َم ْن‬or ‫ َما‬will be
classified as a ‫ ;نَكِ َرة َم ْو ُص ْو َفة‬a noun which is followed by a ‫ َن ْعت‬.
ُ‫ب َمن َّي ْجت َِهد‬ ِ
ُّ ‫ُأح‬
In this example, ‫ َم ْن‬can be interpreted both ways: as a ‫ َم ْع ِر َفة‬or ‫نَكِ َرة‬. If
the one who works hard is referring to a particular person, ‫ َم ْن‬will
be ‫ َم ْع ِر َفة‬and be classified as an ‫ ْاسم َم ْو ُص ْول‬.
However, if one who works hard is referring generally to anyone
with that quality, ‫ َم ْن‬will be ‫نَكِ َرة َم ْو ُص ْو َفة‬, i.e. a ‫ َمنْ ُع ْوت‬.
The tarkib of the ‫ نَكِ َرة َم ْو ُص ْو َفة‬is written as follows:
‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ ِ ‫ َف‬،‫فِعل‬
)‫اعل ( َأنَا‬ ْ
ُ‫َي ْجت َِهد‬ ِ

‫َم ْن‬ ُّ ‫ُأح‬
‫ب‬
)‫(ه َو‬ ِ ‫ َف‬،‫فِعل‬

ُ ‫اعل‬ ْ
Exercise 1
Translate the following. Note the use of ‫ َم ْن‬and ‫ َما‬.
‫ل مِ ْیزَ ا َن ُه َح َسنَات‬ َ َ ‫) َل َقدْ َفازَ َم ْن َم‬7 ‫) َأن ِْف ْق مِ َّما ك ََس ْب َت‬1
ِ
ُ ‫) َقدْ َأ ْف َل َح َم ْن َرض َي بِ َما َرزَ َق ُه‬8
‫الل‬ ُ ‫) َن َّتبِ ُع َما َأنْزَ َل‬2
‫الل‬
‫) ُأ ْح ِس ُن إِ َلی َم ْن َأ ْح َس َن إِ َل َّي ا ْل َی ْو َم‬9 ‫) َأ ْع ُبدُ َم ْن َخ َل َقن ِ ْي‬3
‫ار َح َة‬ِ ‫) َه ْل َت ُف ْو َن بِ َما َوعَد ُّت ُم ْونِي ا ْل َب‬10
ْ ‫) ن َْست َِع ْی ُذ بِاللِ مِ َّما َي ُض ُّرنَا‬4
‫س‬ِ ‫) ا ْل َی ْو َم َض َر َب ا ْل َو َلدُ َم ْن َض َر َب ُه َأ ْم‬11 ُ ‫) َل َقدْ َض َّل َم ْن َأ َض َّل ُه‬5
‫الل‬
‫) َْل َأ ْس ُجدُ ل ِ َما َْل َينْ َف ُعن ِ ْي َو َْل َي ُض ُّرنِ ْي‬12 ‫الل َل ُه ْم‬
ُ ‫َب‬َ ‫) َأ َصا َب ُه ْم َما َكت‬6
491
‫‪Notes‬‬
‫‪َ are used to mean some. This occurs in two‬ما ‪َ and‬م ْن ‪Sometimes,‬‬
‫‪instances:‬‬
‫‪ُ .‬م ْبتَدَ أ ُمؤَ َّخر ‪َ become the‬ن ْعت ‪ِ or‬ص َلة ‪َ and their‬ما ‪َ and‬م ْن ‪1. When‬‬
‫‪َ .‬م ْج ُر ْور ‪ and a‬مِ ْن ‪َ is made up of‬خ َبر ُم َقدَّ م ‪2. When the‬‬
‫ِص َلة‬ ‫َم ْن ‪َ /‬ما‬ ‫َم ْج ُر ْور‬ ‫مِ ْن‬
‫‪Look at the example below.‬‬
‫﴿مِنْ ُك ْم َم ْن ُي ِريدُ الدُّ ْن َیا﴾‬
‫‪From amongst you, there are those who desire the world.‬‬
‫‪Some of you desire the world.‬‬
‫‪َ ﴿ )1‬ف ِمن ُْه ْم َم ْن آ َم َن َومِن ُْه ْم َم ْن َك َف َر﴾‬
‫َّاس َو َْل َي ْخدَ ع ُُه ْم‬ ‫ار َم ْن َي ْصدُ ُق الن َ‬ ‫‪ )2‬مِ َن الت َُّّج ِ‬
‫‪َ ﴿ )3‬ومِن ُْه ْم َم ْن ُيؤْ مِ ُن بِ ِه َومِن ُْه ْم َم ْن َْل ُيؤْ مِ ُن بِ ِه﴾‬

‫‪﴿ )4‬مِنْ ُك ْم َم ْن ُي ِر ْيدُ الدُّ ْن َیا َومِنْ ُك ْم َم ْن ُي ِر ْيدُ ْاْل ِخ َر َة﴾‬
‫الل َم ًاْل كَثِ ْی ًرا َومِن ُْه ْم َم ْن َْل َي ْملِ ُك َش ْیئًا‬ ‫اه ْم ُ‬ ‫‪ )5‬مِ َن الن ِ‬
‫َّاس َم ْن آ َت ُ‬
‫الل بِ ِه َومِن ُْه ْم َمن َّي ْجزَ ع ُْو َن‬ ‫َّاس َم ْن َّي ْصبِ ُر َع َلی َما ا ْبت َََّل ُه ُم ُ‬ ‫‪ )6‬مِ َن الن ِ‬
‫ول آ َمنَّا بِاللِ َوبِا ْل َی ْو ِم ْاْل ِخ ِر َو َما ُه ْم بِ ُمؤْ مِن ِ ْی َن﴾‬ ‫‪َ ﴿ )7‬ومِ َن الن ِ‬
‫َّاس َم ْن َي ُق ُ‬
‫الل َع َلی ُق ُل ْوبِ ِه ْم َف َل ْم ُيؤْ مِن ُْوا‬ ‫ِ‬
‫الل َومن ُْه ْم َم ْن َط َب َع ُ‬ ‫‪ )8‬م ْن َأ ْه ِل َم َّك َة َم ْن َهدَ ى ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ان َومِن ُْه ْم َم ْن َّي ُص ْو ُم َر َم َض َ‬

‫ان َو َغ ْی َر ُه‬ ‫‪ )9‬مِ َن ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ِم ْی َن َم ْن َْل َي ُص ْو ُم إِ َّْل َر َم َض َ‬
‫اج ُع الدُّ ُر ْو َس َو َي ْح َف ُظ َها َف َی ُف ْو ُق َأ ْق َرا َن ُه‬ ‫ب َمن ُي َض ِّی ُع َو ْق َت ُه َف َی ْخ َس ُر َومِن ُْه ْم َمن ُي َر ِ‬ ‫‪ )10‬مِ َن ال ُّط ََّّل ِ‬
‫‪ )11‬مِ َن ا ْل ُمؤْ مِن ِ ْی َن َم ْن َي ْختِ ُم ا ْل ُق ْرآن فِ ْي ك ُِّل َس ْب َع ِة َأ َّيام‪َ ،‬ومِن ُْه ْم َمن َّي ْختِ ُم فِي ك ُِّل َث ََّلثِ ْی َن َومِن ُْه ْم َمن َّي ْختِ ُم فِي َسنَة‬
‫َّاس‪َ ،‬ومِن ُْه ْم‬
‫الض َع َفا َء َو ُي ْط ِع ُم ا ْل َم َساكِ ْی َن َو ُين ِْف ُق َع َلی ا ْل َیتَا َمی‪ُ ،‬ه ْم ِخ َی ُار الن ِ‬ ‫َّاس‪َ :‬ين ُْص ُر ُّ‬ ‫َّاس َم ْن َينْ َف ُع الن َ‬ ‫‪ )12‬مِ َن الن ِ‬
‫َم ْن َْل َينْ َف ُع ُه ْم َو َْل َي ُض ُّر ُه ْم‪َ ،‬ومِن ُْه ْم َم ْن َْل َينْ َف ُع ُه ْم َب ْل َي ُض ُّر ُه ْم َو َي ْظلِ ُم ُه ْم‪ُ ،‬ه ْم ِش َر ُار الن ِ‬
‫َّاس‬
‫‪492‬‬
Summary: The Different Types of ‫َما‬
We have studied the following types of ‫ َما‬:
1. ‫ َما ا ْل ُم َش َّب َه ُة بِ َل ْی َس‬: this is followed by its ‫ ) َم ْر ُف ْوع( اِ ْسم‬and its ‫) َمن ُْص ْوب( َخ َبر‬.
ِ ‫ما ا ْلو َلدُ ك‬
‫َاذ ًبا‬ َ َ
The boy is not a liar.
2. ‫ َما النَّافِ َی ُة‬: this is followed by a ‫فِ ْعل‬, either ‫ َماض‬or ‫ ُم َض ِارع‬.
ُ‫َما ك ََذ َب ا ْل َو َلد‬ ُ‫َما َي ْك ِذ ُب ا ْل َو َلد‬
The boy did not lie. The boy does not lie.
3. ‫ َما ِاْل ْستِ ْف َهامِ َّی ُة‬: this is followed by either a single noun or a ‫ ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة‬.
‫َما َق َال ا ْل َو َلدُ ؟‬ ‫َما ا ْل َك ِذ ُب؟‬
What did the boy say? What is a lie?
These three types of ‫ َما‬always occur at the beginning of the
sentence.
4. ‫ َما ا ْل َم ْو ُص ْو َل ُة‬: this is followed by its ‫ ِص َلة‬. The ‫ ِص َلة‬-‫ َم ْو ُص ْول‬become a slot
of the main sentence. There will be other slots along with with
the sentence after it.
The following table summarises the different types of ‫ َما‬.
‫َما‬
‫ُم َش َّب َهة بِ َل ْی َس‬ ‫نَافِ َیة‬ ‫استِ ْف َهامِ َّیة‬
ْ ‫َم ْو ُص ْو َلة‬
Followed by a There are other
Followed by a ‫َم ْر ُف ْوع‬
Followed by a verb single noun or ‫ُج ْم َلة‬ slots along with the
and a ‫َمن ُْص ْوب‬
‫فِ ْعلِیَّة‬ sentence after it
‫َما ٰه َذا‬
‫َاب َكبِ ْی ًرا‬ ِ ِ ‫ما َك َتب َت ص‬
ُ ‫َما ا ْلكت‬ ‫َما َك َت ْب َت‬ ‫ح ْیح‬ َ ْ َ
‫َما َك َت ْب َت‬
What is this? What you wrote is
The book is not big. You did not write.
What did you write? correct.
493
‫‪َ is being used in‬ما ‪Translate the following. Explain which type of‬‬
‫‪each sentence.‬‬
‫‪َ )11‬ما َت ْع ُبدُ ْو َن؟‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ما َك َت ْب َت‬ ‫َما ِعنْدَ ال َّطال ِ َب ِة؟‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫‪َ )12‬ما ْاْلَ ْصنَا ُم آل ِ َه ًة‬ ‫‪َ )7‬ما َك َت ْب َت؟‬ ‫َما َت ْبت َِس ُم ال َّطال ِ َب ُة‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫‪َ )13‬ما َت ْع ُبدُ ْو َن ْاْلَ ْصنَا َم‬ ‫‪َ )8‬ما َت ْك ُت ُب ْو َن‬ ‫ت ال َّطال ِ َب ُة‬ ‫ما ابتَسم ِ‬
‫َ ْ َ َ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫‪َ )14‬ما َت ْع ُبدُ ْو َن َأ ْصنَام‬ ‫‪ )9‬ما َك َتب َت ص ِ‬
‫ح ْیح‬ ‫َما ال َّطال ِ َب ُة ُم ْبت َِس َم ًة‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫َ ْ َ‬
‫‪َ )15‬ما َت ْع ُبدُ ْو َن ِه َي َأ ْصنَام‬ ‫‪َ )10‬ق َر ْأ ُ‬
‫ت َما َك َت ْب َت‬ ‫َما ِعنْد ال َّطال ِ َب ِة َكبِ ْیر‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫‪494‬‬
Summary
Key Terms
sentence after ‫َم ْو ُص ْول‬ ‫ِص َلة‬ relative pronoun ‫َم ْو ُص ْول‬
‫ َم ْو ُص ْول‬and ‫ِص َلة‬ ‫اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول‬ relative pronoun ‫اِ ْسم َم ْو ُص ْول‬
‫ َم ْن‬and ‫ َما‬which become ‫َمنْ ُع ْوت‬ ‫نَكِ َرة َم ْو ُص ْو َفة‬ relative pronoun ‫َح ْرف َم ْو ُص ْول‬
495
496
‫‪NESTED SENTENCES‬‬
‫َح ْرف َم ْو ُص ْول ‪ with‬اِ ْسم ُم َؤ َّول ‪Introduction:‬‬
‫اِ ْسم ُم َؤ َّول ‪ُ as an‬م ْبتَدَ أ ُم َؤ َّخر ‪ُ and‬م ْبتَدَ أ ‪Part 1:‬‬
‫اِ ْسم ُم َؤ َّول ‪َ as an‬خ َبر ‪Part 2:‬‬
‫اعل ‪Part 3:‬‬ ‫اِسم م َؤول ‪َ as an‬ف ِ‬
‫ْ ُ َّ‬
‫اِ ْسم ُم َؤ َّول ‪َ as an‬م ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه ‪Part 4:‬‬
‫اِ ْسم ُم َؤ َّول ‪َ as an‬م ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه ‪Part 5:‬‬
‫اِ ْسم ُم َؤ َّول ‪َ as an‬م ْف ُع ْول َل ُه ‪Part 6:‬‬
‫اِ ْسم ُم َؤ َّول ‪َ as an‬م ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق ‪Part 7:‬‬
‫اِ ْسم ُم َؤ َّول ‪ُ as an‬م ْس َت ْثنًی ‪Part 8:‬‬
‫اِ ْسم ُم َؤ َّول ‪ُ as an‬م َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪Part 9:‬‬
‫‪Supplement: Verbal Phrases‬‬
‫‪Summary‬‬
‫‪497‬‬
Introduction: ‫ اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول‬with ‫َح ْرف َم ْو ُص ْول‬
The following table summarises the different types of nested
sentences.
Nested Sentences
Directly without a
With a ‫َم ْو ُص ْول‬
‫َم ْو ُص ْول‬
‫ُج ْم َلة ُصغ َْری‬ ‫اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول‬
With an ‫اِ ْسم َم ْو ُص ْول‬ With a ‫َح ْرف َم ْو ُص ْول‬

We have already discussed directly nested sentences and nested
sentences with an ‫اِ ْسم َم ْو ُص ْول‬.
In this section we will discuss nested sentences with a ‫ َح ْرف َم ْو ُص ْول‬.
The ‫ُح ُر ْوف َم ْو ُص ْو َلة‬

There are two types of ‫ َح ْرف َم ْو ُص ْول‬:
1. Unrestricted
2. Restricted
Unrestricted ‫َح ْرف َم ْو ُص ْول‬
There are three unrestricted ‫ َح ْرف َم ْو ُص ْول‬that can be used universally
in any slot:
1. ‫َأ َّن‬
2. ‫َما‬
3. ‫َأ ْن‬
Restricted ‫َح ْرف َم ْو ُص ْول‬
There is one restricted ‫ َح ْرف َم ْو ُص ْول‬that can only be used in a specific
slot:
1. ‫ك َْي‬
498
The Unrestricted ‫َح ْرف َم ْو ُص ْول‬
The ‫ َح ْرف َم ْو ُص ْول‬of ‫َأ َّن‬
‫ َأ َّن‬is used when the sentence after it is in the indicative mood: it
comprises of statements conveying facts, descriptions, scheduled
events, etc.
‫ا ْل َح ُّق َأ َّن َك َْل َت ْك ِذ ُب‬
The truth is that you do not lie.
In the above example, the sentence after ‫ ا ْل َح ُّق‬is factual, so it is
preceded by ‫ َأ َّن‬.
Grammar
‫ َأ َّن‬is a ‫ َح ْرف ُم َش َّبه بِا ْل ِف ْع ِل‬which is followed by its ‫ اِ ْسم‬and ‫ َخ َبر‬. Together,
these become one of the slots of the main sentence.
...
‫َْل َت ْك ِذ ُب‬ ‫ك‬ ‫َأ َّن‬

)‫اعل ( َأن َْت‬ َ ْ
‫َخبَ ُر َأ َّن‬ ‫اِ ْس ُم َأ َّن‬ ‫َح ْرف ُم َشبَّه بِا ْل ِف ْع ِل‬
‫ِص َلة‬ ‫َح ْرف َم ْو ُص ْول‬
Translation
The ‫ ْاسم ُمؤَ َّول‬with ‫ َأ َّن‬is translated as the word that.
‫َأ َّن َك َْل َت ْك ِذ ُب‬
that you do not lie
Exercise 1
Translate the following ‫ ْاسم ُمؤَ َّول‬into English.
َّ ‫ َأ َّن‬... )9
ُ‫الش ْم َس َل ْم َت ْط ُل ْع َب ْعد‬ ‫الل َأ َم َر َك بِ َه َذا‬
َ ‫ َأ َّن‬... )5 ‫ َأ َّننَا َْل ن َْجزَ ُع‬... )1
‫الل َْل َي ْش َف ُع ِعنْدَ ُه َأ َحد‬
َ ‫ َأ َّن‬... )10
ِ
َ ‫اس َت ْغ َف َرت‬
‫الل‬ ْ ‫ َأن ََّها‬... )6
ِ ‫ َأنَّنِي َلم َأ ْشت‬... )2
‫َك‬ ْ ْ
‫ َأن َُّه َّن َْل ُي َض ِّی ْع َن َأ ْو َقا َت ُه َّن‬... )11 َّ ‫ َأ َّن ُك ْم َت َّتبِ ُع ْو َن‬... )7
‫الر ُس ْو َل‬ ‫ َأ َّن ا ْل ِع ْل َم َينْ َف ُع‬... )3
ِ ‫َاب‬
‫الل‬ ِ ‫ان ِب ِكت‬ ِ ‫ َأنَّهما َتعت َِصم‬... )12 ‫ َأ َّن ال ُّط ََّّل َب َس َی ِص ُل ْو َن‬... )8 ‫ َأن َُّه ْم َْل َي ْغتَا ُب ْو َن‬... )4
َ ْ َُ
499
The ‫ َح ْرف َم ْو ُص ْول‬of ‫َما‬
‫ َما‬is also used when the sentence after it is in the indicative mood.
Grammar
The ‫ َح ْرف َم ْو ُص ْول‬of ‫ َما‬is ‫ َغ ْی ُر عَامِل‬. Along with its ‫ ِص َلة‬, it becomes one of
the slots of a sentence.
...
‫َت ْصدُ ُق‬ ‫َما‬

Translation
The ‫ ْاسم ُمؤَ َّول‬with ‫ َما‬can be translated in two different ways:
1. By adding that before the verb. The subject is mentioned before
the verb.
that you speak the truth
2. As a gerund (adding -ing after the verb). The subject can be
mentioned before the gerund in a possessive structure, or
omitted altogether.
your speaking the truth
speaking the truth
Exercise 2
Translate the following ‫ ْاسم ُمؤَ َّول‬.
‫ َما َت ْس َت ْقبِ ُل ْو َن ا ْل ِق ْب َل َة‬... )11 ‫ت ْاْلَ َّيا ُم‬ ِ ‫ ما َذ َهب‬... )6
َ َ ‫ َما َت ْبت َِس ُم‬... )1
ِ‫ ما َتست َِعی ُذو َن بِالل‬... )12 ‫ت‬ ِ ‫ ما َطا ُفوا بِا ْلبی‬... )7 ‫ َما زَ َج ْر َتن ِ ْي‬... )2
ْ ْ ْ َ َْ ْ َ
ِ ِ ‫ ما صام‬... )8 ‫ َما عَطِ ْشنَا‬... )3
‫ُب‬ َ ‫ َما ُي َطال ُع ْو َن ا ْل ُكت‬... )13 ‫ت ال ِّط ْف َل ُة‬ َ َ َ
‫ َما َتا ُب ْوا مِ ْن ُذن ُْوبِ ِه ْم‬... )14 ‫ت ا ْل َخا َل ُة‬ ِ ‫ ما صبر‬... )9
ََ َ َ ‫َّاس‬
ُ ‫ َما آ َم َن الن‬... )4
‫اس َت ْك َب ُر ْوا فِي َأ ْن ُف ِس ِه ْم‬ ْ ‫ َما‬... )15 ‫الش َج َر ُة‬ َّ ‫ت‬ ِ ‫ ما يبِس‬... )10
َ َ َ ‫ َما َس َق َط ال ِّط ْف ُل‬... )5
500
Differentiating between ‫ َما‬as an ‫ ْاسم َم ْو ُص ْول‬and as a ‫َح ْرف َم ْو ُص ْول‬
The particle ‫ َما‬can be used as either ‫ ْاسم َم ْو ُص ْول‬or ‫ َح ْرف َم ْو ُص ْول‬.
When ‫ َما‬is used as an ‫ ْاسم َم ْو ُص ْول‬, it will have a noun meaning.
When ‫ َما‬is used as a ‫ َح ْرف َم ْو ُص ْول‬, it will have a verb meaning.
ُ ‫ َما َت ْكت‬...
‫ُب‬ ‫ َما َت ْصدُ ُق‬...
‫اسم َم ْو ُص ْول‬
ْ what you write *
‫َح ْرف َم ْو ُص ْول‬ that you write that you speak the truth
In many cases, ‫ َما‬can be interpreted as both.
The following table explains how to differentiate between the two
structures based on the ‫عَائِد‬.
‫َما َم ْو ُص ْو َلة‬
‫ ِص َلة‬does not
‫ ِص َلة‬does not contain an ‫ َعائِد‬but a slot is contain an ‫ َعائِد‬and
‫ ِص َلة‬contains an ‫َعائِد‬
available for it no slot is available
for it
‫اِ ْسم َم ْو ُص ْول‬ ‫اِ ْسم َم ْو ُص ْول‬ or ‫َح ْرف َم ْو ُص ْول‬ ‫َح ْرف َم ْو ُص ْول‬
‫ َما َك َت ْب َت ُه‬... )‫ َما َك َت ْب َت (ـ ُه‬... ‫ َما َك َت ْب َت‬... ‫ َما َك َت ْب َت َج َوا ًبا‬...

that you wrote an
what you wrote what you wrote that you wrote
answer
1 2 3 4
In Example 2, a ‫ َض ِم ْیر‬is assumed to be hidden, therefore ‫ َما‬is an ‫اِ ْسم‬
‫ َم ْو ُص ْول‬.
In Example 3, there is no ‫ َض ِم ْیر‬assumed to be hidden, therefore ‫ َما‬is
a ‫ َح ْرف َم ْو ُص ْول‬.
Exercise 3
Translate the following sentences. Identify where the ‫ َم ْو ُص ْول‬is an
‫اِ ْسم‬, where it is a ‫ َح ْرف‬, and where it can be either.
َ ‫ َما نَدْ ُر ُس ا ْل ُكت‬... )9
‫ُب‬ ‫ َما ن َِس ْیت ُُم ْو ُه‬... )5 ‫ َما َو َض ْع َت‬... )1
‫ ما َت ْر ُج ْو َن‬... )10 ‫ َما ن َِس ْی َت ْاْل ِخ َر َة‬... )6 ‫ َما َو َض ْع َت ا ْل َق َل َم‬... )2
‫ َما َت ْر ُج ْو َن ُه‬... )11 ‫ َما َتدْ ُر ُس ْو َن‬... )7 ‫ َما َو َض ْع َت ُه‬... )3
َ ‫ َما َت ْر ُج ْو َن ال َّث َو‬... )12

‫اب‬ ‫ َما َيدْ ُر ُس ْو َن ُه‬... )8 ‫ َما ن َِس ْیت ُْم‬... )4
501
The ‫ َح ْرف َم ْو ُص ْول‬of ‫َأ ْن‬
‫ َأ ْن‬is used when the sentence after it is in the subjunctive mood: its
contents are subjective, conveying recommendations, doubts,
wishes, etc., i.e. things which are possible, but not certain.
‫َأ ْر ُج ْو َأ ْن َت ْصدُ َق‬
I hope that you speak the truth.
Grammar
The particle ‫ َأ ْن‬is ‫عَامِل‬: it causes the following ‫ فِ ْعل ُم َض ِارع‬to become
‫ َمن ُْص ْوب‬. The particle ‫ َأ ْن‬and its ‫ ِص َلة‬become one of the slots of the
main sentence.
....
‫َت ْصدُ َق‬ ‫َأ ْن‬

Translation
The ‫ ْاسم ُمؤَ َّول‬with ‫ َأ ْن‬can be translated in three different ways:
1. Adding that before the subject and verb.
that you speak the truth …
2. As a gerund (adding -ing after the verb). The subject of this can
be mentioned before the gerund in a possessive structure, or
omitted altogether.
speaking the truth
your speaking the truth
3. As an infinitive (adding to before the verb). The subject of this
can be mentioned if it is preceded by the word for, or it can be
omitted altogether.
to speak the truth
for you to speak the truth
502
Negating the ‫ ِص َلة‬after ‫َأ ْن‬
The ‫ ِص َلة‬of ‫ َأ ْن‬is made negative by adding the ‫ َح ْر ُف َن ْفي‬of ‫ َْل‬. The ‫ َأ ْن‬and
‫ َْل‬are written and pronounced as a single word.
‫َأ َّْل‬  ‫َأ ْن َْل‬
However, in tarkib, both are written separately, as follows:
...
‫َت ْك ِذ َب‬ ‫َْل‬ ‫َأ ْن‬

)‫اعل (أن َْت‬ ‫ف نَ ْفي‬
ُ ‫َح ْر‬
َ ْ
This can be translated in any of the following ways:

not lying
your not lying
not to lie
for you not to lie
that you do not lie
Exercise 4
Translate the following ‫ ُح ُر ْوف ُمؤَ َّو َلة‬and their ‫ ِص َلة‬into English. Try
practicing the different methods of translation.
‫ َأ ْن َت ِف ْی َض ُع ُی ْون ُُه َما ُد ُم ْوعًا‬... )11 ‫الل ا ْل َم ْو َتی‬ُ ‫ َأن ُّي ْحیِ َي‬... )6 ‫ َأ َّْل َيغ َْض ْب َن‬... )1
َ ‫ َأ ْن َت ْختِ َم ا ْل ُق ْر‬... ِ‫ َأ َّْل َت ْشتَكِي إِ َّْل إِ َلی الل‬... )7 ِ
‫آن ك َُّل َش ْهر‬ )12 ْ ُ ‫ َأن َّي ْبتَل َی َك‬...
‫الل‬ )2
‫ت اللِ ا ْل َح َرا ِم‬ ِ ‫ف بِبی‬
ْ َ َ ‫ َأ ْن َّن ُط ْو‬... )13 ِ‫ َأ ْن َّننْجح فِي ِاْلمتِحان‬... )8
َ ْ َ َ ‫َك‬ِ ‫ َأ ْن َت ُفوقِي َأ ْقران‬...
َ ْ ْ )3
‫الل فِي َر ْح َمتِ ِه‬ ِ ِ
ُ ‫ َأن ُّيدْ خ َلن َي‬... )14 ‫ َأ ْن َأ َت َأ َّد َب َم َع ا ْل ُم َع ِّل ِم ْی َن‬... )9 ‫ َأ ْن َتنْ ُظ َر إِ َلی َأ َب َو ْي َك‬... )4
‫اج ْع َن الدُّ ُر ْو َس ك َُّل َي ْوم‬ ِ ‫ َأن ُّي َر‬... )15 ‫ َأ ْن َّي ْفت َُر ْوا َع َلی اللِ ك َِذ ًبا‬... )10 ‫ َأن َّيغ ِْس َل َو ْج َه ُه َث ََّل ًثا‬... )5
503
The Restricted ‫َح ْرف َم ْو ُص ْول‬
The ‫ َح ْرف َم ْو ُص ْول‬of ‫ك َْي‬
‫ ك َْي‬is also used when the sentence after it is in the subjunctive
mood. The particle ‫ ك َْي‬and its ‫ ِص َلة‬become the ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول َل ُه‬.
Grammar
The particle ‫ ك َْي‬is ‫عَامِل‬: it causes the following ‫ فِ ْعل ُم َض ِارع‬to become
‫ َمن ُْص ْوب‬.
‫ َم ْف ُع ْول َل ُه‬...
‫َّاس‬
َ ‫الن‬ ‫َي ْهدُ وا‬ ‫ك َْي‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ ِ ِ

ْ ‫ف ْعل َو َفاعل‬
)‫(هم‬
Translation of ‫ك َْي‬
‫ ك َْي‬and its ‫ ِص َلة‬can be translated in two ways:
1. By adding so that before the subject, verb other parts of the
sentence.
so that they guide the people.
2. As an infinitive (adding to before the verb) without the subject.
to guide the people.
Exercise 5
Translate the following ‫ َأ ْس َماء ُمؤَ َّو َلة‬into English.
‫ ك َْي َْل َي ُج ْو َع ْاْلَ ْو َْل ُد‬... )7 ُ ‫ ك َْي َت ْش َب َع ا ْل َبن‬... )1
‫َات‬
ِ ‫ كَي ينْجحوا فِي اْلمتِح‬... )8
‫ان‬ ‫ ك َْي َينْ َف َع َك ِع ْل ُم َك‬... )2
َ ْ ْ ُ َ َ ْ
ِ ‫ كَي َْل ي ِسی َل ا ْلماء فِي ا ْلبی‬... )9
‫ت‬ ‫ ك َْي َْل ُت ِص ْی َبنَا ُم ِص ْی َبة‬... )3
َْ ُ َ ْ َ ْ
ُّ ‫ ك َْي َْل َي ْظلِ َم ْاْلَ ْق ِو َيا ُء‬... )10
‫الض َع َفا َء‬ ‫الل َع َل ْینَا‬
ُ ‫ب‬ َ ‫ ك َْي َْل َيغ َْض‬... )4
‫الل مِ َن ا ْل ُهدَ ی‬ ِ‫َاب الل‬ ِ ‫ كَي َن ْعت َِص َم بِكِت‬... )5
ُ ‫ ك َْي َن َّتبِ َع َما َأنْزَ َل‬... )11 ْ
‫الص ََّل َة َو ُيؤْ ُتوا الزَّ كَا َة‬ ِ ‫ ك َْي َْل ُي َض ِّی ُع ْو َن َأ ْو َقا َت ُه ْم‬... )6
َّ ‫ ك َْي ُيق ْی ُم ْوا‬... )12
504
‫‪Summary‬‬
‫‪ُ .‬ح ُر ْوف َم ْو ُص ْو َلة ‪The table below summarises the different‬‬
‫‪Indicative Mood‬‬ ‫‪Subjunctive Mood‬‬
‫َما‬ ‫َأ َّن‬ ‫َأ ْن‬ ‫ك َْي‬
‫‪Followed by‬‬ ‫‪Followed by‬‬

‫ُم َض ِارع ‪Followed by a‬‬
‫ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة ‪a‬‬ ‫َخ َبر ‪ and‬اِ ْسم‬
‫َغ ْی ُر عَامل‬ ‫عَامِل‬
‫اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول ‪Uses of an‬‬

‫‪ُ or in a phrase.‬ج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة ‪ُ , a‬ج ْم َلة ْاس ِم َّیة ‪ occurs in a‬اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول ‪An‬‬
‫‪ occurs as:‬اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول ‪ُ , an‬ج ْم َلة ْاس ِم َّیة ‪In a‬‬
‫ُم ْبتَدَ أ ‪1.‬‬
‫َخ َبر ‪2.‬‬
‫‪ occurs as:‬اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول ‪ُ , an‬ج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة ‪In a‬‬
‫َف ِ‬
‫اعل ‪1.‬‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه َثان ‪َ or‬م ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه ‪2.‬‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه ‪3.‬‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول َل ُه ‪4.‬‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق ‪5.‬‬
‫ُم ْس َت ْثنًی ‪6.‬‬
‫‪ occurs as:‬اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول ‪In a phrase, an‬‬
‫َم ْع ُط ْوف ‪1.‬‬
‫ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪2.‬‬
‫‪505‬‬
‫اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول ‪ُ as an‬م ْبتَدَ أ ُمؤَ َّخر ‪ُ and‬م ْبتَدَ أ ‪Part 1:‬‬
‫‪.‬اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول ‪ُ can occur as an‬م ْبتَدَ أ ُمؤَ َّخر ‪ُ or‬م ْبتَدَ أ ‪A‬‬
‫اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول ‪ُ as an‬م ْبتَدَ أ ‪A‬‬
‫َأن َت ُص ْو ُم ْوا َخ ْیر‬
‫َخ ْیر‬ ‫َت ُص ْو ُم ْوا‬ ‫َأ ْن‬

‫َأ ْن ‪ with‬اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول ‪ُ as an‬م ْبتَدَ أ ُمؤَ َّخر ‪A‬‬
‫السن َِّة َأ ْن َت ْأك َُل بِ َی ِم ْین ِ َك‬ ‫ِ‬
‫إِ َّن م َن ُّ‬
‫اِ ْس ُم إِ َّن ا ْل ُمؤَ َّخ ُر‬ ‫َخبَ ُر إِ َّن ا ْل ُم َقدَّ ُم‬ ‫َح ْرف ُم َشبَّه بِا ْل ِف ْع ِل‬
‫بِ َی ِم ْین ِ َك‬ ‫َت ْأك َُل‬ ‫َأ ْن‬ ‫السن َِّة‬
‫ُّ‬ ‫مِ َن‬ ‫إِ َّن‬
‫آلة‬ ‫فِعل و َف ِ‬
‫اعل‬ ‫َم ْج ُر ْور‬ ‫َجار‬
‫ْ َ‬
‫َأ َّن ‪ with‬اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول ‪ُ as an‬م ْبتَدَ أ ُمؤَ َّخر ‪A‬‬
‫مِن ع َِقیدَ ِة ا ْلمؤْ مِنِین َأ َّن الل و ِ‬
‫احد‬ ‫َ َ‬ ‫ُ ْ َ‬ ‫ْ ْ‬
‫و ِ‬
‫احد‬ ‫َ‬ ‫الل‬
‫َ‬ ‫َأ َّن‬ ‫ا ْل ُمؤْ مِن ِ ْی َن‬ ‫عَ ِق ْیدَ ِة‬ ‫مِ ْن‬
‫َخبَ ُر َأ َّن‬ ‫اِ ْس ُم َأ َّن‬ ‫َح ْرف ُم َشبَّه بِا ْل ِف ْع ِل‬ ‫َم ْج ُر ْور‬ ‫َجار‬
‫‪506‬‬
‫‪Translation‬‬
‫‪These can be translated in two ways:‬‬
‫‪َ .‬خ َبر ‪ُ first, followed by the‬م ْبتَدأ ُمؤَ َّخر ‪ُ or‬م ْبتَدَ أ ‪1. Translating the‬‬
‫‪Fasting/To fast/That you fast is better.‬‬
‫‪Eating/To eat/That you eat with your right hand is from the sunnah.‬‬
‫‪That Allah is One is a Muslim’s belief.‬‬
‫‪ُ .‬م ْبتَدَ أ ‪َ followed by the‬خ َبر ‪2. Placing an anticipatory it before the‬‬
‫‪It is better to fast/that you fast.‬‬
‫‪It is from the sunnah to eat/that you eat with your right hand.‬‬
‫‪It is a Muslim’s belief that Allah is one.‬‬
‫‪Vocab‬‬
‫‪major sin‬‬ ‫َكبِ ْی َرة ج َك َبائِ ُر‬ ‫‪manner, etiquette‬‬ ‫َأ َدب ج آ َداب‬
‫‪tongue‬‬ ‫ل ِ َسان ج َأ ْل ِسنَة‬ ‫‪lip‬‬ ‫َش َفة ج ِش َفاه‬
‫‪language‬‬ ‫ُلغَة ج ات‬ ‫‪intellect‬‬ ‫َع ْقل ج ُع ُق ْول‬
‫‪known‬‬ ‫َم ْع ُل ْوم‬ ‫‪sign‬‬ ‫ع َََّل َمة ج ات‬
‫ات َو ْاْلَ ْر َض‬ ‫ات اللِ َأ َّنه َخ َل َق السماو ِ‬ ‫‪ )9‬مِن آي ِ‬ ‫مِ َن ا ْل َك َبائِ ِر َأ ْن ُت ْش ِر َك بِاللِ َش ْی ًئا‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫َّ َ َ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫ْ َ‬
‫ات اللِ َأ َّن ُه َأ ْخ َر َج مِ َن ْاْلَ ْر ِ‬
‫ض َن َبا ًتا‬ ‫‪ )10‬إِ َّن مِن آي ِ‬
‫ْ َ‬ ‫ول َْل َأ ْع َل ُم‬‫إن مِ َن ا ْل ِع ْل ِم َأ ْن َت ُق َ‬‫َّ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫‪ )11‬إِ َّن مِ َن ا ْلبِ ِّر َأ ْن َتدْ ُع َو ل ِ َوال ِدَ ْي َك َب ْعدَ ك ُِّل َص ََّلة‬ ‫الص َحا َب َة‬ ‫ب َّ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫إِ َّن مِن ْ ِ ِ‬
‫اإل ْي َمان َأ ْن ُتح َّ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫ب ا ْل ِع ْل ِم َأ ْن ُت َو ِّق َر َأ َساتِ َذ َت َك َو ُك ُت َب َك‬‫‪ )12‬إِ َّن مِ ْن َأ َد ِ‬ ‫الر ُج ُل َأ َب َو ْي ِه‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫إِ َّن م َن ا ْل َك َبائ ِر َأن َّي ْل َع َن َّ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫اب ا ْل َوالِدَ ْي ِن َأ َّْل َت ْر َف َع َص ْو َت َك َف ْو َق َأ ْص َو ِات ِه ْم‬ ‫‪ِ )13‬م ْن آ َد ِ‬ ‫اق َأ ْن َي ْك ِذ َب ا ْل َم ْر ُء‬ ‫إِ َّن مِ ْن َع ََّلم ِة النِّ َف ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫ض ِج َب ًاْل َو َأن َْه ًارا‬ ‫ات اللِ َأ َّن ُه َج َع َل فِي ْاْلَ ْر ِ‬ ‫‪ )14‬مِن آي ِ‬
‫ْ َ‬ ‫اب ا ْل ِع ْل ِم َأ ْن َتت ََو َّض َأ َق ْب َل الدَّ ْر ِ‬
‫س‬ ‫‪ )6‬مِ ْن آ َد ِ‬
‫الل عَ َل ْی َك َأ َّن ُه َخ َل َق َك بِ ِل َسان َو َش َف َت ْی ِن‬ ‫‪ )15‬إِ َّن مِن نِعم ِة ِ‬ ‫آن َأ ْن َت ْس َت ْقبِ َل ا ْل ِق ْب َل َة‬
‫اب تِ ََّلو ِة ا ْل ُقر ِ‬‫‪ )7‬مِ ْن آ َد ِ‬
‫ْ َْ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫َ‬
‫آن َو ُل َغ ِت ِه‬ ‫الل عَ َلی ُكم َأ َّنه و َّف َق ُكم لِ ِع ْل ِم ا ْل ُقر ِ‬ ‫‪ِ )16‬إ َّن ِمن نِعم ِة ِ‬ ‫اب ا ْل َوال ِدَ ْي ِن َأ ْن َت ْم ِش َى َأ َما َم ُه ْم‬ ‫‪َ )8‬ل ْی َس مِ ْن آ َد ِ‬
‫ْ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫ْ ْ ُ َ‬ ‫ْ َْ‬
‫‪507‬‬
Notes
Different ‫ ُح ُر ْوف َج َّارة‬can occur within the ‫ َخ َبر ُم َقدَّ م‬of an ‫اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول‬. Some
have their own unique translations.
1. ‫ َع َلی‬: this is translated as responsibility, duty, etc.
‫َع َل ْی َك َأ ْن َت ْخ ِد َم َوالِدَ ْي َك‬
It is your duty to serve your parents.
2. ‫ ِل‬: this is translated as:
a) Right, allowed, can, etc. if it is preceded by an affirmative
sentence.
‫َل َك َأ ْن َت ْجلِ َس ُهنَا‬
You can sit here.
b) Has no right to, should not, or it does not befit if it is
preceded by a negative sentence.
‫َل ْی َس َل َك َأ ْن َت ْجلِ َس ُهنَا‬
You are not allowed to sit here.
Exercise 2
‫) َل ْی َس َل َك َأ ْن َت ُم َّر َب ْی َن َيدَ ْي َم ْن ُي َص ِّل ْي‬7 ِ
‫الل‬
ُ ‫ب َما َح َّر َم‬ َ ‫) َع َل ْی َك َأ ْن َت ْجتَن‬1
ِ ‫) َلیس َلنَا َأ ْن نَست َِريح إِ َّْل بعدَ اْلمتِح‬8
‫ان‬ ﴾‫ون َلنَا َأ ْن َن َت َك َّل َم بِ َه َذا‬
ُ ‫) ﴿ َما َي ُك‬2
َ ْ َْ َ ْ ْ َ ْ
﴾‫َان َلنَا َأ ْن ن ُْش ِر َك بِاللِ مِ ْن َش ْيء‬ َ ‫) ﴿ َما ك‬9 ﴾‫َّخ َذ مِ ْن َو َلد‬ ِ ‫َان ل ِ َّل ِه َأ ْن يت‬
َ َ ‫) ﴿ َما ك‬3
﴾ِ‫وت إِ َّْل بِإِ ْذ ِن الل‬َ ‫َان لِنَ ْفس َأ ْن َت ُم‬ َ ‫) ﴿ َو َما ك‬10 ﴾‫َان ل ِ ُمؤْ مِن َأ ْن َي ْقت َُل ُمؤْ مِنًا‬ َ ‫) ﴿ َما ك‬4
‫) َه ْل ِْلَ َحد َأن َّي ْك ُف َر بِاللِ َو ُه َو َي ِع ْی ُش َع َلی َأ ْر ِض ِه‬11 ‫یك َأ ْن َت َب َّر َأ َب َو ْي َك َو َأ َّْل َت ُع َّق ُه َما‬
َ ‫) َع َل‬5
ِِ َ ‫) ﴿ ُأو َلئِ َك َما ك‬12 ِ ‫) َع َل ْی ُك ْم َأ ْن ُت َر‬6
﴾‫ین‬َ ‫َان َل ُه ْم َأ ْن َيدْ ُخ ُل ْو َها إِ َّْل َخائف‬ ‫اج ُع ْوا ُد َر ْو َس ُك ْم ك َُّل َي ْوم‬
508
‫اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول ‪َ as an‬خ َبر ‪Part 2:‬‬
‫‪.‬اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول ‪َ can occur as an‬خ َبر ‪A‬‬
‫ا ْل َح ُّق َأ َّن َك َت ْجت َِهدُ‬
‫‪The truth is that you work hard.‬‬
‫َت ْجت َِهدُ‬ ‫َأن ََّك‬ ‫ا ْل َح ُّق‬

‫ِ‬
‫َخبَر‬ ‫(ك)‬ ‫َح ْرف ُم َشبَّه بِا ْلف ْع ِل َو ْ‬
‫اس ُم ُه َ‬
‫‪Vocab‬‬
‫‪futile activity‬‬ ‫‪َ soul‬ل ْهو‬ ‫ُر ْوح ج َأ ْر َواح‬
‫‪ruling‬‬ ‫َم ْس َأ َلة ج َم َسائِ ُل‬ ‫‪swift‬‬ ‫َس ِر ْيع ج ِس َراع‪ُ ،‬س ْرع ُ‬
‫َان‬
‫مع ِصیة ج مع ِ‬
‫اص ْي‬ ‫ع ُ‬
‫َاش ْو َرا ُء‬
‫‪disobedience‬‬ ‫ََ‬ ‫َْ َ‬ ‫)‪Ashura (10th Muharram‬‬
‫منْسك ج من ِ‬
‫َاس ُك‬ ‫ِع َقاب‬
‫‪ritual‬‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ َ‬ ‫‪punishment‬‬
‫الر ُس ْو َل فِ ْی َما َأ َم َرنَا‬
‫السنَّ ُة َأ ْن َت َّتبِ َع َّ‬
‫‪ُّ )4‬‬ ‫‪َ )1‬ا ْل َع ْق ُل َأ َّْل َت َت َك َّل َم بِ َما َي ُض ُّر َك‬
‫‪ )5‬ا ْلبِ ُّر َأ ْن ُتطِ ْی َع َأ َبا َك َو ُأ َّم َك َو َأ َّْل َت ُع َّق ُه َما‬ ‫أن َت ْع َم َل َْل َأ ْن َت ْح َف َط‬ ‫‪ )2‬ا ْل ِع ْل ُم ْ‬
‫الل ل ِ َطاعَتِ ِه‬ ‫‪ )6‬ا ْل َخ ْی ُر ك ُُّل ا ْل َخ ْی ِر َأن ُّي َو ِّف َق َك ُ‬ ‫اص َي‬ ‫‪ )3‬ال َّت ْقوی َأ ْن َتجتَنِب ا ْلمع ِ‬
‫ْ َ َ َ‬ ‫َ‬
‫‪509‬‬
ِ ‫ َف‬as an ‫اِسم مؤَ ول‬
Part 3: ‫اعل‬ َّ ُ ْ
ِ ‫ َف‬can occur as an ‫ اِسم مؤَ ول‬with ‫ َأ ْن‬or ‫ َأ َّن‬.
A ‫اعل‬ َّ ُ ْ
‫ب َع َل ْی َك َأ ْن َت ْصدُ َق‬ ِ ‫َي‬
ُ ‫ج‬
ِ ‫َف‬
‫اعل‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه َغیْ ُر َص ِر ْيح‬ ‫فِ ْعل‬
‫َت ْصدُ َق‬ ‫َأ ْن‬ ‫عَ َل ْی َك‬ ‫ب‬ ِ ‫َي‬

ُ ‫ج‬
)‫اعل ( َأن َْت‬ ‫ َم ْج ُر ْور‬- ‫َجار‬
َ ْ
This can be translated in two ways:

ِ ‫ َف‬first, followed by the main verb.
1. Translating the ‫اعل‬
Speaking the truth is incumbent upon you.
To speak the truth is incumbent upon you.
That you speak the truth is incumbent upon you.
2. Adding an anticipatory it before the main verb, followed by the
ِ ‫ َف‬.
‫اعل‬
It is incumbent upon you to speak the truth.
Notes
1. When an ‫ اِسم ُمؤَ َّول‬becomes the ‫اعل‬ِ ‫ َف‬, the verb will always be in the
masculine form.
2. The verb ‫ َينْ َب ِغ ْي‬can be translated by adding the word should
before the verb within the ‫اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول‬.
‫َينْ َب ِغ ْي َل َك َأن َت ْجت َِهدَ فِي ُد ُر ْو ِس َك‬
You should work hard in your lessons.
510
‫‪Vocab‬‬
‫ح َّل ي ِ‬ ‫ب ُي ْع ِ‬
‫‪to be permissible‬‬ ‫ح ُّل َح ََّل ًْل‬ ‫َ َ‬ ‫‪to please, delight‬‬ ‫ب إِع َ‬
‫ْجا ًبا‬ ‫ج ُ‬ ‫َأع َ‬
‫ْج َ‬
‫ب إِغ َْضا ًبا‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪to make happy‬‬ ‫‪َ to make angry‬س َّر َي ُس ُّر ُس ُر ْو ًرا‪َ ،‬م َس َّر ًة‬ ‫َأغ َْض َ‬
‫ب ُيغْض ُ‬
‫‪to become apparent‬‬ ‫َظ َه َر َي ْظ َه ُر ُظ ُه ْو ًرا‬ ‫‪to be possible‬‬ ‫َأ ْم َك َن ُي ْمكِ ُن إِ ْم َكانًا‬
‫‪to be compulsory‬‬ ‫ب ُو ُج ْو ًبا‬ ‫ب َي ِ‬

‫ج ُ‬ ‫َو َج َ‬
‫‪to‬‬ ‫‪be‬‬ ‫‪suitable,‬‬ ‫اِ ْن َبغَی َينْ َب ِغ ْي ا ْنبِغَا ًء‬
‫‪appropriate, necessary‬‬
‫ب ا ْل ِع ْل َم َحتَّی َم ْو ِت ِه‬‫ب َي ْط ُل ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )11‬ي ْظ َه ُر َأ َّن ٰه َذا ال َّطال َ‬ ‫ح ُّل ِْلَ ِحد َأن َّي ْق ُت َل َأ َحدً ا‬‫َْل ي ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫ِ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ ِ‬
‫الس ْو ِق ْاْل َن؟‬ ‫‪َ )12‬ه ْل ُي ْمك ُن َل َك َأ ْن َت ْأت َي َمع ْي إِ َلی ُّ‬ ‫اب َأ َخا ُه‬ ‫َْل َيح ُّل ل ُم ْسلِم َأن َّي ْغ َت َ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫اك َو ُأ َّم َك َأ ْح َسنَا ِإ َل ْی َك َص ِغ ْی ًرا؟‬ ‫غَاب عَ ن َْك َأ َّن َأ َب َ‬
‫‪َ )13‬ه ْل َ‬ ‫َْل َي ُج ْوزُ ل ِ ُم ْسلِم َأن َّي ْل َع َن َأ َحدً ا‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫ب ِع ْلم حصو َل ِر َضى ِ‬
‫الل‬ ‫‪َ )14‬ي ْن َب ِغي َأ ْن َت ُك ْو َن نِ َّی ُة َطالِ ِ‬ ‫ح ُّل ل ِ ُم ْسلِم َأن َّي ْش َر َب َخ ْم ًرا‬ ‫َْل ي ِ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫ُ ُ ْ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫َ‬
‫اذهِ‬
‫ب ِع ْلم َأن ي ُكو َن ِفي ا ْل َفص ِل َقب َل ُأس َت ِ‬ ‫‪َ )15‬ي ْن َب ِغي ل َطال ِ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫الل َع َلى نِ َع ِم ِه‬ ‫َي ِ‬
‫ْ ْ ْ‬ ‫َّ ْ ْ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫ب َع َل ْینَا َأن َّن ْش ُك َر َ‬ ‫ج ُ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫ب ِع ْلم َأن َّي ُك ْو َن َم َع ُه ِكتَاب ِفي َس ِائ ِر َأ ْو َق ِات ِه‬ ‫‪َ )16‬ي ْن َب ِغي لِ َطالِ ِ‬
‫ْ‬ ‫ب ِع ْلم َأن َّي ْع َم َل بِ ِع ْل ِم ِه‬ ‫َينْ َب ِغي ل ِ َطال ِ ِ‬
‫ْ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫ب فِي ال َّل ْی ِل َق ْب َل‬ ‫ِ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )17‬ي ُس ُّرن ْي َأ َّن ُك َما ُي َطال َعان ا ْل ُك ُت َ‬ ‫َْل َينْ َب ِغ ْي ِْلَ َحد َأن ُّي َض ِّی َع َو ْق َت ُه فِي ال َّل ْه ِو‬ ‫‪)7‬‬
‫الن َّْو ِم‬ ‫‪َ )8‬ي ُس ُّر ا ْل ُم َع ِّل َم َأ َّن ال ُّط ََّّل َب َي ْجت َِهدُ ْو َن كَثِ ْی ًرا‬
‫‪َ )18‬ب َل َغنَا َأ َّن النَّبِي ﷺ ك َ‬
‫َان َي ُص ْو ُم ع ُ‬
‫َاش ْو َرا َء َو َي ْو ًما‬ ‫َّ‬ ‫أخ َذ َم َال َغ ْی ِر ِه بِ َغ ْی ِر إِ ْذنِ ِه‬
‫ح ُّل ل ِ ُم ْسلِم َأن َّي ُ‬ ‫‪َْ )9‬ل ي ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َق ْب َل ُه َأ ْو َي ْو ًما َب ْعدَ ُه‬ ‫َان َي ْض ِر ُب ُأ ْخ َتنَا‬ ‫ب َأبِي َأ َّن َأ ِخي ك َ‬ ‫َ ِ‬
‫ْ‬ ‫‪ )10‬كَان ُيغْض ُ ْ‬
‫‪511‬‬
Part 4: ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬as an ‫اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول‬
A ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬can occur as an ‫اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول‬.
This can occur in two ways:
1. As an ‫ ْاسم ُمؤَ ّول‬with ‫َأ ْن‬
2. As an ‫ ْاسم ُمؤَ ّول‬with ‫َأ َّن‬
‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬with ‫َأ ْن‬
The ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬can occur as an ‫ اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول‬with ‫ َأ ْن‬.
‫الل ل ِ ْي‬ ِ
ُ ‫َأ ْر ُج ْو َأن َّيغْف َر‬
I hope that Allah forgives me.
)‫اعل ( َأنَا‬ َ ْ
‫لِي‬ ‫الل‬
ُ ‫َّي ْغ ِف َر‬ ‫َأن‬ ‫َأ ْر ُج ْو‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح‬ ِ ‫َف‬

The word that can also be removed from the translation.

‫الل ل ِ ْي‬ ِ
ُ ‫َأ ْر ُج ْو َأن َّيغْف َر‬
I hope Allah forgives me.
Vocab
to desire ‫َت َمنَّی َيت ََمنَّی َت َمنِّ ًیا‬ to refuse ‫َأ َبی َي ْأ َبی إِ َبا ًء‬
to know ‫َد َری َيدْ ِر ْي ِد َرا َي ًة‬ to intend ‫َأ َرا َد ُي ِر ْيدُ إِ َرا َد ًة‬
‫ َش ِهدَ َي ْش َهدُ َش َها َد ًة‬to be ashamed ‫استِ ْح َیا ًء‬ ِ
to testify, witness ْ ‫يست َْحیِ ْي‬
ْ ‫َح َیی‬
ْ ‫ا ْست‬
to be able to ‫ َقدَ َر َي ْق ِد ُر ُقدْ َر ًة‬to be able to ‫اع َي ْستَطِیْ ُع اِ ْستِ َطا َع ًة‬ ِ
َ ‫ا ْس َت َط‬
to dislike ‫ك َِر َه َي ْك َر ُه ك ََر َاه ًة‬ to make witness ‫َأ ْش َهدَ ُي ْش ِهدُ إِ ْش َها ًدا‬
to stop, prohibit, forbid ‫َمن ََع َي ْمن َُع َمنْ ًعا‬ to believe ‫اِ ْع َت َقدَ َي ْعت َِقدُ اعْتِ َقا ًدا‬
to prohibit ‫ن ََهی َين َْهی ن َْه ًیا‬ to give glad tidings ‫َب َّش َر ُي َب ِّش ُر َت ْب ِش ْی ًرا‬
512
‫اف َأ ْن ُّي َك ِّذ ُب ْو ِن﴾‬
‫‪َ )8‬ق َال ُم ْو َسی ڠ ﴿ ِإن ِّْي َأ َخ ُ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )1‬أ َْل ُتح ُّب ْو َن َأن َّيغْف َر ُ‬
‫الل َل ُك ْم‬
‫ب‬ ‫الل َلنَا َما َم َضی مِ َن ُّ‬
‫الذ ُن ْو ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )9‬ن ْر ُج ْو َأن َّي ْغف َر ُ‬ ‫‪ُ ﴿ )2‬ي ِريدُ ْو َن َأ ْن ُي َبدِّ ُل ْوا ك َََّل َم اللِ﴾‬
‫واْلَ ْح َج َار َو ْاْلَ ْش َج َار‬ ‫الل َأن َّن ْع ُبدَ ْاْلَ ْصنَا َم ْ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ )10‬ن ََهانَا ُ‬ ‫‪ )3‬ن َْر ُج ْو َأن َّيغْف َر ُ‬
‫الل َلنَا ُذن ُْو َبنَا ُك َّل َها‬
‫اْل ْو َْل ِد ُك ِّل ِه ْم َأن َي ْس َت ْی ِق ُظ ْوا َق ْب َل ا ْل َف ْج ِر‬
‫ب ْاْل ُّم ِم َن ْ َ‬ ‫‪َ )11‬ت ْط ُل ُ‬ ‫‪َ )4‬لن َّي ْق ِد َر َأ َحد َغ ْی ُر اللِ َأن َّي ْخ ُل َق َش ْیئًا‬
‫َّاس ِم ْن ِع َبا َد ِة ْ َ‬
‫اْل ْصنَا ِم‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )12‬أ َرا َد إ ْب َراه ْی ُم ڠ َأ ْن َي ْمن ََع الن َ‬ ‫س‬ ‫‪َ )5‬أ َم َرنَا ُأ ْستَا ُذنَا َأ َّْل َن َت َك َّل َم َأ ْثنَا َء الدَّ ْر ِ‬
‫اهیم َأ ْن ي ْذبح ابنَه إسم ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ب َأن َي َری نِ ْع َم َت ُه عَ َلی عَ ْب ِد ِه‬ ‫ِ‬
‫اع ْی َل ۏ‬ ‫الل َخل ْی َل ُه إِ ْب َر ْ َ َ َ َ ْ ُ ْ َ‬ ‫‪َ )13‬أ َم َر ُ‬ ‫الل ُيح ُّ‬‫‪ِ )6‬إ َّن َ‬
‫الل ُم َو َسی و َأ َخا ُه َه ُار ْو َن ۏ َأ ْن َّي ْذ َه َبا ِإلی ِف ْرعَ ْو َن‬
‫‪َ )14‬أ َم َر ُ‬ ‫الل ا ْل ُم ْس ِل ِم ْی َن َأ ْن َي ُح ُّج ْوا َب ْی َت ُه ا ْل َك ْع َب َة‬
‫‪َ )7‬أ َم َر ُ‬
‫‪Notes‬‬
‫‪َ is‬ح ْرف َجار ‪َ . In this case, the‬م ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح ‪ can occur as the‬اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول ‪An‬‬
‫‪commonly omitted.‬‬
‫‪َ , and the second occurs with‬م ْف ُع ْول ‪َ has two‬أ َم َر ‪For example, the verb‬‬
‫‪.‬ب ‪َ of‬ح ْرف َجار ‪the‬‬
‫الصدْ ِق‬
‫لل َي ْأ ُم ُرك ُْم بِـ ِّ‬
‫َا ُ‬
‫‪Allah commands you to speak the truth.‬‬
‫‪ is usually omitted.‬ب ‪, the‬اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول ‪However, when it occurs as an‬‬
‫لل َي ْأ ُم ُرك ُْم َأ ْن َت ْصدُ ُق ْوا‬
‫َا ُ‬
‫‪Allah commands you to speak the truth.‬‬
‫‪513‬‬
‫َأ َّن ‪َ with‬م ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬
‫‪َ .‬أ َّن ‪ with‬اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول ‪َ can occur as an‬م ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه ‪The‬‬
‫‪This is used with verbs which have a meaning of information or‬‬
‫‪َ is in the indicative mood.‬م ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه ‪knowledge, and whose‬‬
‫َي ْع َل ُم ْو َن َأ َّن َ‬
‫الل َر ُّب ُه ْم‬
‫‪They know that Allah is their Lord.‬‬
‫َر ُّب ُه ْم‬ ‫الل‬

‫َ‬ ‫َأ َّن‬ ‫َي ْع َل ُم ْو َن‬
‫َخ َب ُر َأ َّن‬ ‫اس ُم َأ َّن‬

‫ْ‬ ‫َح ْرف ُم َش َّبه بِا ْل ِف ْع ِل‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ب َي ْح ُض ُر الدُّ ُر ْو َس ك َُّل َي ْوم‬ ‫‪َ )7‬ر َأ ْي ُت َأ َّن ٰه َذا ال َّطال َ‬ ‫ور ُسو ُل ُه ﷺ‬ ‫‪َ )1‬أ ْش َهدُ َأ َّن ُم َح َّمدً ا عَبدُ الل َ‬
‫ان ا ْل ُم َب َار ُك‬ ‫الش ْه َر َش ْه ُر َر َم َض َ‬ ‫‪َ )8‬ه ْل ن َِس ْی َت َأ َّن ٰه َذا َّ‬ ‫الل َي ْق ِد ُر َع َلی ك ُِّل َش ْيء‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )2‬أ ْعتَقدُ َأ َّن َ‬
‫الل َع َلی َآْلئِ ِه‬ ‫َّاس َْل َي ْش ُك ُر ْو َن َ‬ ‫‪ )9‬ن ََری َأ َّن كَثِ ْی ًرا مِ َن الن ِ‬ ‫‪َ )3‬أ َْل َتدْ ُر ْو َن َأ َّن َ‬
‫الل َف َر َض َع َل ْی ُك ُم ا ْل َح َّج‬
‫‪َ )10‬س ِم ْعنَا َأ َّن َب ْع َض ا ْل ُع َل َم ِاء كَان ُْوا َْل َي ْق َرئ ُْو َن ا ْل ُكت َُب ِإ َّْل ُمت ََو ِّض ِئ ْی َن‬ ‫اب‬ ‫‪َ )4‬أ َْل َت ْع َل ُم ْو َن َأن ََّك َستُدْ َف ُن َت ْح َت الت َُّر ِ‬
‫‪َ )11‬ب ْین ََما َأ ْح َمدُ َو َأ ْص ِد َقا ُئ ُه ُي َسافِ ُر ْو َن إِ ْذ َعلِ َم َأ َّن ُأ َّم ُه َقدْ‬ ‫الس ْو ِق‬ ‫ِ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )5‬ذك ََر ْت ل ْي ُأ ِّم ْي َأن ََّها َر َأ ْت ُم َع ِّل َمت ْي في ُّ‬
‫َم ِر َض ْت َش ِد ْيدً ا َف َأ َرا َد َأن َّي ْر ِج َع إِ َلی َب ْیتِ ِه‬ ‫ب فِ ْی َها‬ ‫َّاس َأ َّن َّ‬
‫السا َع َة َْل َر ْي َ‬ ‫ف الن ُ‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ي ْو َمئِذ َي ْع ِر ُ‬
‫َر َوی ‪Quotation with‬‬

‫‪َ (to narrate) can be followed‬ر َوی َي ْر ِو ْي ِر َوا َي ًة ‪The quotation of the verb‬‬
‫‪َ , which becomes its quotation.‬أ َّن ‪ْ with‬اسم ُمؤَ َّول ‪by an‬‬
‫‪.‬ع َْن ‪The person from whom the narration is transmitted comes with‬‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫اإل َما ُم ُم ْسلِم َع ْن َأبِ ْي َمالك َأ َّن َر ُس ْو َل الل ﷺ َق َال‪َّ « :‬‬
‫الص ََّل ُة نُور»‬ ‫َر َوی ْ ِ‬
‫‪Imam Muslim narrates from Abu Malik that the‬‬

‫‪ said: Salah is light.‬ﷺ ‪Messenger of Allah‬‬
‫‪It is common for the verb and subject to be removed.‬‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َع ْن َأبِ ْي َمالك َأ َّن َر ُس ْو َل الل ﷺ َق َال‪َّ « :‬‬
‫الص ََّل ُة نُور»‬
‫‪(It is narrated) from Abu Malik that the‬‬
‫‪ said: Salah is light.‬ﷺ ‪Messenger of Allah‬‬
‫‪514‬‬
Summary
The table below summarises the ‫ اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول‬as a ‫ َم ُف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬.
‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬with an ‫اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول‬
With ‫َأ ْن‬ With ‫َأ َّن‬

‫ َأ ْن َيغ ِْف َر ل ِ ْي‬... ُّ ‫ َأ َّن ُه َيغ ِْف ُر‬...
‫الذن ُْو َب‬
Differentiating Between ‫ َأ ْن ال َّت ْف ِس ْی ِر َّي ُة‬and ‫َأ ْن ا ْل َم ْو ُص ْو َل ُة‬

‫ َأ ْن ال َّت ْف ِس ْی ِر َّي ُة‬differs from the ‫ َح ْرف َم ْو ُص ْول‬of ‫ َأ ْن‬in a few ways:
a) ‫ َأ ْن ال َّت ْف ِس ْی ِر َّي ُة‬is ‫ َغ ْی ُر عَامِل‬and can precede a ‫فِ ْعل َماض‬, a ‫ فِ ْع ُل َأ ْمر‬or a ‫ ُج ْم َلة ِاس ِم َّیة‬.
‫ َأ ْن ا ْل َم ْو ُص ْو َل ُة‬is ‫ ;عَامِل‬it changes the following ‫ارع‬ ِ ‫ فِ ْعل ُم َض‬to the ‫َمن ُْص ْوب‬
state.
b) ‫ َأ ْن ال َّت ْف ِس ْی ِر َّي ُة‬is not translated.
‫ َأ ْن ا ْل َم ْصدَ ِر َّي ُة‬is translated as an infinitive or gerund.
ِ ‫َأراد‬
ُ‫ت ْاْلُ ُّم َأن َّي ْصدُ َق ا ْل َو َلد‬ ِ ِ
َ َ ْ ‫نَا َدت ْاْلُ ُّم َأن‬
‫اصدُ ْق‬
The mother wanted the The mother called out:
child to speak the truth. Speak the truth.
The following table explains the difference between the two ‫ َأ ْن‬.
‫َت ْف ِس ْی ِر َّية‬ ‫َم ْو ُص ْو َلة‬
Gerund
Translation (Omitted)
Infinitive
‫ُج ْم َلة اِ ْس ِم َّیة‬
Following ِ ‫فِ ْعل ُم َض‬
‫ارع‬
Sentence ‫ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِیَّة‬
Governance ‫َغیْ ُر عَامِل‬ ‫عَامِل‬
Exercise 3
Translate the following. Identify the different uses of ‫ َأ ْن‬.
‫) نَا َدی ْاْلَ ْنبِ َیا ُء ۏ َأن َّْل َت ْك ِذ ُب ْوا‬4 ‫اء ۏ ا ْع ُبدُ ْونِ ْي‬ ِ ‫ل ْنبِی‬ ِ ‫) َق َال‬1
َ َ ْ ‫الل ل‬
ُ
‫َّاس َْل َت ْك ِذ ُب ْوا‬
ِ ‫) َق َال ْاْلَ ْنبِ َیا ُء ۏ لِلن‬5 ‫الل ْاْلَ ْنبِ َیا َء ۏ َأن َّي ْع ُبدُ ْو ُه‬ ُ ‫) َأ َم َر‬2
‫َّاس َأن َي ْك ِذ ُب ْوا‬ ‫اء ۏ َأ ِن ا ْع ُبدُ ْونِ ْي‬ ِ ‫) َأوحی الل إِ َلی ْاْلَ ْنبِی‬3
َ ‫) ن ََهی ْاْلَ ْنبِ َیا ُء ۏ الن‬6 َ ُ َ ْ
515
Part 5: ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه‬as an ‫اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول‬
A ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه‬can occur as an ‫ اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول‬in two ways:
1. As a ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه‬directly
2. As part of a ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح‬.
‫ َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه‬as an ‫اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول‬
When an ‫ اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول‬becomes the ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه‬directly, the ‫ َح ْرف َم ْو ُص ْول‬of ‫ َما‬is
used. This is known as ‫ َما ال َّظ ْرفِ َّی ُة‬. This is used in two ways:
1. On its own
2. With the ‫ فِ ْعل نَاقِص‬of ‫َدا َم‬
‫ َما ال َّظ ْرفِ َّی ُة‬on its Own
The ‫ ِص َلة‬of ‫ َما ال َّظ ْرفِ َّی ُة‬is a ‫ ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة‬comprised of a ‫فِ ْعل َماض‬.
‫َج َل ْس ُت َما ُق ْم َت‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه‬ ِ ‫فِعل و َف‬
‫َج َل ْس َت‬ ‫َما‬ ‫َأ ْجلِ ُس‬

Translation of ‫َما ال َّظ ْرفِ َّی ُة‬

This is translated as as long as.
The tense of the ‫ ِص َلة‬is dictated by the main verb.
I sat as long as you stood.
In this example, the main verb, ‫ َج َل ْس ُت‬, is a ‫ ;فِ ْعل َماض‬therefore, the
verb in the ‫ ِص َلة‬is translated as the past tense.
‫َأ ْجلِ ُس َما ُق ْم َت‬
I will sit as long as you stand.
In this example, the main verb, ‫ َأ ْجلِ ُس‬, is a ‫ ;فِ ْعل ُم َض ِارع‬therefore, the
verb in the ‫ ِص َلة‬is translated in the future tense.
516
‫ُج ْم َلة ْاس ِم َّیة ‪َ as a‬ما ال َّظ ْرفِ َّی ُة ‪ِ of‬ص َلة ‪The‬‬
‫َان ‪ of‬فِ ْعل نَاقِص ‪ُ it will occur with the‬ج ْم َلة اِ ْس ِم َّیة ‪َ is a‬ما ال َّظ ْرفِ َّی ُة ‪ِ of‬ص َلة ‪If the‬‬
‫‪.‬ك َ‬
‫َْل آك ُُل َما ُكن َْت َصائِ ًما‬
‫‪I will not eat as long as you are fasting.‬‬
‫َما ال َّظ ْرفِ َّی ُة ‪ِ of‬ص َلة ‪Negating the‬‬
‫‪َ . This can‬ل ْم ‪ preceded by‬فِ ْعل ُم َض ِارع ‪َ is negated by a‬ما ال َّظ ْرفِ َّی ُة ‪ِ of‬ص َلة ‪The‬‬
‫‪be translated as as long as or until.‬‬
‫َْل َتن َْج ُح َما َل ْم َت ْجت َِهدْ‬
‫‪You will not be successful as long as you do not work hard.‬‬
‫‪َْ )9‬ل َي ُج ْوزُ َل َك َأ ْن َت ْأك َُل َما ُكن َْت َصائِ ًما‬ ‫‪َ )1‬أ ْصدُ ُق َما ِع ْش ُت‬
‫‪َ )10‬تنْتَظِ ُر ُأ ِّمي ل ِ ْي َما َل ْم َأعُدْ مِ َن ا ْل َمدْ َر َس ِة‬ ‫ت َن ْف َس َك‬‫ن َُو ِّق ُر َك َما َو َّق ْر َ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫‪َ )11‬لن ُّيؤْ تِ َی َك ا ْل ِع ْل ُم َب ْع َض ُه َما َل ْم ُتؤْ تِ ِه ُك َّل َك‬ ‫َْل َأ ُص ْو ُم َما ُكن ُْت ُم َسافِ ًرا‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫اج ُع ٰه ِذ ِه الدُّ ُر ْو َس َما َل ْم َأ ْف َه ْم َها َف ْه ًما‬ ‫‪ُ )12‬أ َر ِ‬ ‫الل ُذن ُْو َب َك َما ُت ْب َت إِ َل ْی ِه‬
‫َيغْف ُر ُ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫لص ََّل ِة‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ب ْاْلَ ْو َْل ُد َما َل ْم ُيؤَ ِّذن ا ْل ُمؤَ ِّذ ُن ل َّ‬ ‫‪َ )13‬ي ْل َع ُ‬ ‫َأ ْجلِ ُس َم َع َأبِ ْي َو ُأ ِّم ْي َما َأ َرا َدا‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫َان فِي ٰه َذا ا ْل َب َل ِد‬ ‫‪ُ )14‬كن ُْت َأنَا َو ُه َو َص ِد ْي َق ْی ِن َما ك َ‬ ‫َل ْن َأ ْف َع َل ٰه َذا َأ َبدً ا َما ن ََه ْیتَن ِ ْي َعنْ ُه‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫الس ِّك ْی ُن َع َل ْی ِه‬ ‫َان ِّ‬ ‫َب َما ك َ‬ ‫‪َْ )15‬ل َت ْل َعبِي ِعنْدَ ا ْل َم ْكت ِ‬
‫ْ‬
‫اس َت ْی َق ْظ ُت َما َل ْم َأ ْس َم ِع ْاْلَ َذ َ‬
‫ان‬ ‫َما ْ‬ ‫‪)7‬‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َاب الل َو ُسنَّة َر ُس ْوله ﷺ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )16‬ل ْن َت ِض ُّل ْوا َما اعْ ت ََص ْمت ُْم ِبكت ِ‬ ‫‪َْ )8‬ل َت ْش َر ْب ٰه َذا ال َّل َب َن َما ك َ‬
‫َان َح ًّارا‬
‫‪َ . Ensure you adjust the‬ما ال َّظ ْرفِ َّی ُة ‪Join the sentences together using‬‬
‫‪ِ .‬ص َلة ‪tense of the verb in the‬‬
‫َينْتَظِ ُر َل َك َص ِد ْي ُق َك ‪َْ /‬ل َت ْح ُض ُر‬ ‫‪)5‬‬ ‫َْل َت ْأك ُْل ‪َْ /‬ل َت ُج ْو ُع‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫الل ُدعَا َئ ُك ْم ‪َ /‬تدْ ع ُْو َن ُه‬
‫ب ُ‬ ‫َج ْی ُ‬‫َي ْست ِ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬ ‫َأ ْجلِ ُس ‪َ /‬ت ْجلِ ُس ْو َن‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫ُا ْط ُل ُبوا ا ْل ِع ْل َم ‪َ /‬أ ْنت ُْم َأ ْق ِو َيا ُء َأ ِص َّحا ُء‬ ‫‪)7‬‬ ‫َأ ْخ ِد ُم َوالِدَ َّي ‪َ /‬أ ْستَطِ ْی ُع‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫َأ ْجلِ ُس ِعنْدَ َك ‪َ /‬أن َْت َم ِر ْيض‬
‫الل َق ْو ًما ‪َ /‬ي ْس َتغْف ُر ْو َن َ‬
‫الل‬ ‫َلن ُّي ْهل َك ُ‬ ‫‪)8‬‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫‪517‬‬
‫ َما ال َّظ ْرفِ َّی ُة‬with the ‫ فِ ْعل نَاقِص‬of ‫َدا َم‬
‫ َما ال َّظ ْرفِ َّی ُة‬may be followed by the ‫ فِ ْعل نَاقِص‬of ‫ َدا َم‬to form ‫ َما َدا َم‬. Along with
the ‫ ْاسم‬and ‫ َخ َبر‬, the word ‫ َما َدا َم‬becomes the ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه‬of the main
sentence. This is translated as as long as.
ِ ‫َأصوم ما دم ُت ص‬
‫ح ْی ًحا‬ َ ُْ َ ُ ْ ُ
I will fast as long as I am healthy.
‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِیْ ِه‬ ِ ‫فِعل و َف‬
ِ ‫ص‬
‫ح ْی ًحا‬ ‫ُد ْم ُت‬ ‫َما‬ ‫َأ ُص ْو ُم‬
َ
‫َخبَ ُر َما َدا َم‬ )‫اسم ( َأنَا‬ ِ ِ
ْ ‫ف ْعل نَاقص َو‬
Vocab
to recompense ‫َجزَ ی َي ْج ِز ْي َجزَ ا ًء‬ to fulfil, complete ‫ َأ َدا ًء‬،ً‫َأ َّدی ُيؤَ ِّد ْي َت ْأ ِد َية‬
‫ب إِ ْذنَا ًبا‬ ِ
to push, repel ‫َد َف َع َيدْ َف ُع َد ْف ًعا‬ to sin َ ‫َأ ْذن‬
ُ ‫َب ُي ْذن‬
‫َر َّبی ُي َر ِّب ْي َت ْربِ َی ًة‬ ‫ار َي ْست َِشیْ ُر اِ ْستِ َش َار ًة‬ ِ
َ ‫ا ْست ََش‬
to seek advice or
to raise, nurture counsel
to visit ‫زَ َار َيزُ ْو ُر ِز َي َار ًة‬ to lengthen ‫َأ َط َال ُيطِ ْی ُل إِ َطا َل ًة‬
to rest, reside ‫ َس َك َن َي ْس ُك ُن ُس ُك ْونًا‬to acknowledge ‫ف اِعْتِ َرا ًفا‬ َ ‫اِ ْعت ََر‬
ُ ‫ف َي ْعت َِر‬
to explain ‫ َش َر َح َي ْش َر ُح َش ْر ًحا‬to do abundantly ‫َأ ْك َث َر ُي ْكثِ ُر إِ ْك َث ًارا‬
to understand ‫ َع َق َل َي ْع ِق ُل َع ْق ًَّل‬to finish, complete ‫ا ْنت ََهی َينْت َِه ْي انْتِ َها ًء‬
to meet ‫ َل ِق َي َي ْل َقی ل ِ َقا ًء‬to be tired ‫ب َت َع ًبا‬ ِ

َ ‫َتع‬
ُ ‫ب َي ْت َع‬
to regret ‫ نَدَ ًما‬،ً‫ ن َِد َم َينْدَ ُم نَدَ ا َمة‬to flow ‫َج َری َي ْج ِر ْي َج َر َيانًا‬
518
‫‪َْ )7‬ل َت ْن َج ُح َما ُد ْم َت َت ْم ِض ْي َو ْقت ََك ِفي ال َّل ْه ِو‬ ‫ك ما دم ِ‬
‫ت َم ِر ْي َض ًة‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ُ )1‬أق ْی ُم َم َع َ ُ ْ‬
‫اك ِت ْی َن ما َدام ْ ِ‬
‫اإل َم ُام َي ْخ ُط ُب‬ ‫‪ )8‬يج ِلس النَّاس س ِ‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ت ُف ْو ُق َأ ْق َرا َن َك َما ُد ْم َت َت ْج َت ِهدُ‬
‫َ َ‬ ‫ُ َ‬ ‫َ ْ ُ‬
‫ح ْی ًحا‬ ‫‪َْ )9‬ل َأ ْتر ُك الص ََّل َة مع ا ْلجما َع ِة ما دم ُت ص ِ‬ ‫ح ْی ًحا‬‫‪َ )3‬أح ُضر الدُّ روس ما دم ُت ص ِ‬
‫َ ُْ َ‬ ‫َ َ َ َ‬ ‫َّ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫ْ ُ ُ ْ َ َ ُْ َ‬
‫الل َق ْو ًما َما َدا ُم ْوا َي ْس َت ْغ ِف ُر ْو َن ل ِ ُذ ُن ْوبِ ِه ْم‬
‫‪َْ )10‬ل ُي َع ِّذ ُب ُ‬ ‫ت َما َدا َم ا ْل َم َط ُر ن ِ‬
‫َاز ًْل‬ ‫‪َ )4‬نب َقی فِي ا ْلبی ِ‬
‫َْ‬ ‫ْ‬
‫ب بِ َی ِد ْي‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫اس َما ُد ْم ُت َأ ْس َتط ْی ُع َأ ْن َأ ْكس َ‬ ‫‪َْ )11‬ل َأ ْس َئ ُل النَّ َ‬ ‫‪ )5‬اِ ْست َِش ْر َأ َب َو ْي َك َوا ْلكِ َب َار َما َدا ُم ْوا َأ ْح َیا ًء‬
‫‪َْ )12‬ل َت ْخ ُر ْج َأن َْت َو َأ ُخ ْو َك ِم ْن َب ْی ِت ُك َما َما ُد ْمت َُما َم ِر ْي َض ْی ِن‬ ‫‪َْ )6‬ل َت َت َك َّل ْم َما َدا َم ا ْل ُم َع ِّل ُم َي ْش َر ُح الدَّ ْر َس‬
‫‪َ .‬دا َم ‪َ and‬ما ال َّظ ْرفِ َّی ُة ‪Join the sentences together using‬‬
‫الض َع َفا ُء َخ ْل َف ُك ْم‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪َ )1‬نبر َأبانَا و ُأمنَا ‪ُ /‬هما حی ِ‬
‫الص ََّل َة ‪ُّ /‬‬ ‫‪َْ )7‬ل ُتط ْی ُلوا َّ‬ ‫ان‬ ‫َ َ َّ‬ ‫َ ُّ َ َ َّ‬
‫‪َْ )8‬ل َت َت َك َّل ِم ْي ‪ /‬ا ْل ُم َع ِّل َم ُة َت ْش َر ُح الدَّ ْر َس‬ ‫الل َي ْق َب ُل الت َّْو َب َة ‪َ /‬أن َْت َحي‬
‫ُ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫ف َع َل ْی ِه‬ ‫الس ْی ُ‬
‫َب ‪َّ /‬‬ ‫ب ِعنْدَ ا ْل َم ْكت ِ‬ ‫‪َْ )9‬ل َت ْل َع ْ‬ ‫ْت ُم ْخلِص‬ ‫َّاس ‪َ /‬أن َ‬ ‫ُيح ُّب َك الن ُ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫جب الزَّ كَا ُة َع َلی ُكما ‪َ /‬أ ْنتُما َف ِقیر ِ‬ ‫الر ْو ُح فِي ا ْل َج َس ِد‬
‫ان‬ ‫َ َْ‬ ‫ْ َ‬ ‫‪َْ )10‬ل َت ِ ُ‬ ‫الل ‪ُّ /‬‬ ‫ُا ْع ُبدُ ْوا َ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫الص ََّل َة َم َع ا ْل َج َما َع ِة ‪َ /‬أ ْنت ُْم َأ ِص َّحا ُء‬ ‫‪َ )11‬ص ُّل ْوا َّ‬ ‫َْل َتدْ ُخ ِل ا ْلغ ُْر َف َة ‪ /‬ال ِّط ْف ُل َنائِم‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫جدَ ‪َ /‬با ُب ُه ُم ْغ َلق‬ ‫‪َْ )12‬ل ن َْستَطِ ْی ُع َأ ْن نَدْ ُخ َل ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬ ‫ْت فِي َم َّك َة‬ ‫اف ‪َ /‬أن ِ‬ ‫َأكْثِ ِري مِن ال َّطو ِ‬
‫ْ َ َ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫‪519‬‬
‫اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول ‪َ as an‬م ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح‬
‫‪َ .‬م ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح ‪َ of the‬م ْج ُر ْور ‪َ can become the‬أ ْن ‪ with‬اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول ‪An‬‬
‫ب ا ْل ِع ْل َم إِ َلی َأ ْن َأ ُم ْو َ‬
‫ت‬ ‫َأ ْط ُل ُ‬
‫‪I will seek knowledge until I die.‬‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِیْ ِه َغیْ ُر َص ِر ْيح‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ ‫فِعل و َف ِ‬
‫اعل ( َأنَا)‬ ‫ْ َ‬
‫َأ ُم ْو َت‬ ‫َأ ْن‬ ‫إِ َلی‬ ‫ا ْل ِع ْل َم‬ ‫َأ ْط ُل ُ‬

‫ب‬
‫اعل ( َأنَا)‬ ‫ْ َ‬
‫‪َ .‬حتَّی ‪َ is usually omitted after‬أ ْن ‪The particle‬‬

‫الصائِ ُم ْو َن َحتَّی َتغ ُْر َب َّ‬
‫الش ْم ُس‬ ‫َْل َي ْأك ُُل َّ‬
‫‪Those fasting will not eat until the sun sets.‬‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه فِ ْی ِه َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح‬ ‫َف ِ‬
‫َح ْر ُ‬
‫َّ‬
‫الش ْم ُس‬ ‫َت ْغ ُر َب‬ ‫( َأ ْن)‬ ‫َحتَّی‬ ‫الصائِ ُم ْو َن‬
‫َّ‬ ‫َي ْأك ُُل‬ ‫َْل‬
‫َف ِ‬
‫‪520‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪ )1‬نَدْ ُر ُس في ال َّل ْی ِل َحتَّی َن ْت َع َ‬
‫ب‬
‫ج ِد‬
‫‪َ )2‬أ ْنتَظِر َل َك َحتَّی َتر ِج َع مِ َن ا ْلمس ِ‬
‫َ ْ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫ُ‬
‫َأ ْست َِر ْي ُح َق ْب َل ال ُّظ ْه ِر َحتَّی َأ ْس َم َع ْاْلَ َذ َ‬
‫ان‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫ب َحتَّی َتزْ ُج َر ُه ْم‬ ‫َْل َينْت َُه ْو َن مِ َن ا ْل َك ِذ ِ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫ت‬‫َأ َتب َقی ُت ْذنِب حتَّی ي ْأتِی َك م َل ُك ا ْلمو ِ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫َْ‬ ‫ُ َ َ َ َ‬ ‫ْ‬
‫َْل ُت َص ِّل َحتَّی ُت َط ِّه َر ثِ َیا َب َك َو َج َسدَ َك‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫اج ُع ْو َها مِ َر ًارا‬‫اعدَ َحتَّی ُت َر ِ‬ ‫َْل َتح َف ُظو َن ا ْل َقو ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫ْ ْ‬ ‫‪)7‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪َْ )8‬ل َت ْستَط ْی ُع َأ ْن َت ْف َع َل َش ْیئًا َحتَّی ُي َو ِّف َق َك ُ‬
‫الل‬
‫‪ )9‬ا ْل ُم َع ِّل َم ُة َت ْش َر ُح الدَّ ْر َس إِ َلی َأن َّي ْف َه َم ال ُّط ََّّل ُب‬
‫ب‬‫الل َما ن َْح ُن فِ ْی ِه مِ َن ا ْل َم َصائِ ِ‬ ‫ف ُ‬ ‫‪ )10‬ن َْصبِ ُر َحتَّی َي ْك ِش َ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ )11‬ع ََّذ َب ف ْر َع ْو ُن َبن ْي إِ ْس َرائ ْی َل إِ َلی َأ ْن َأ ْغ َر َق ُه ُ‬
‫الل َو ُجنُ ْو َد ُه‬
‫الر ْو ُح مِ َن ا ْل َج َس ِد‬ ‫ِ‬
‫اب الت َّْو َبة إِ َلی َأن َّي ْخ ُر َج ُّ‬ ‫‪َْ )12‬ل ُي ْغ َل ُق َب ُ‬
‫ج ِد إِ َلی َأن َّي ْخ ُر َج ا ْل ُم َص ُّل ْو َن ُك ُّل ُه ْم‬ ‫اب ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬
‫‪َْ )13‬ل ُت ْغ َل ُق َأ ْب َو ُ‬
‫اإل َما ُم مِ ْن ُخ ْط َبتِ ِه‬ ‫الم َص ُّل ْو َن َي ْجلِ ُس ْو َن ُم ْس َت ِم ِع ْی َن إِ َلی َأن َّينْ َت ِهي ْ ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫‪ُ )14‬‬
‫‪Summary‬‬
‫اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول ‪َ as an‬م ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه‬
‫‪Direct Slot‬‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِیْ ِه َغیْ ُر َص ِر ْيح ‪Part of a‬‬

‫َما‬ ‫َما َدا َم‬ ‫َأ ْن ‪With Apparent‬‬ ‫َأ ْن ‪With Hidden‬‬
‫‪َ ...‬ما َج َل ْس َت‬ ‫‪َ ...‬ما ُد ْم َت َجال ِ ًسا‬ ‫‪ ...‬إِ َلی َأ ْن َت ْجلِ َس‬ ‫‪َ ...‬حتَّی َت ْجلِ َس‬
‫‪As long as‬‬ ‫‪Until‬‬
‫‪521‬‬
Part 6: ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول َل ُه‬as an ‫اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول‬
An ‫ اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول‬can occur as the ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول َل ُه‬.
I went to the market to buy some dates.
In this example, to buy some dates is the ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول َل ُه‬.
An ‫ اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول‬can occur in the ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول َل ُه‬slot in two ways:
1. Directly
2. As a ‫َم ْف ُع ْول َل ُه َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح‬
‫ َم ْف ُع ْول َل ُه‬as an ‫اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول‬
An ‫ اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول‬with the ‫ َح ْرف َم ْو ُص ْول‬of ‫ ك َْي‬becomes the ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول َل ُه‬directly.
If the subject of the ‫ ِص َلة‬is mentioned in the main sentence, ‫ ك َْي‬is
translated using the word to.
َ ‫الل ْاْلَ ْنبِ َیا َء ك َْي َي ْهدُ وا الن‬
‫َّاس‬ ُ ‫َأ ْر َس َل‬
Allah sent messengers to
guide people.
In this example, the subject of the ‫ ِص َلة‬is mentioned in the main
sentence, so the word to is used.
If the subject of the ‫ ِص َلة‬is not mentioned, ‫ ك َْي‬is translated using the
words so that.
ِ
ُ ‫الل ْاْلَ ْنبِ َیا َء ك َْي َي ْه َتد َي الن‬
‫َّاس‬ ُ ‫َأ ْر َس َل‬
Allah sent messengers so that
people are guided.
In this example, the subject of the ‫ ِص َلة‬is not mentioned in the main
sentence, so the words so that is used.
‫َم ْف ُع ْول َل ُه‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ ِ ‫َف‬
‫َّاس‬
َ ‫الن‬ ‫َي ْهدُ ْوا‬ ‫ك َْي‬ ‫ْاْلَ ْنبِ َیا َء‬ ‫الل‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ ِ ِ

ْ ‫ف ْعل َو َفاعل‬
)‫(هم‬
522
‫‪Note‬‬
‫‪َْ .‬ل ‪ِ or followed by‬ل ‪ can be preceded by‬ك َْي‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫الل ْاْلَ ْنبِ َیا َء ل َك ْي َْل َيض َّل الن ُ‬
‫َّاس‬ ‫َأ ْر َس َل ُ‬ ‫الل ْاْلَ ْنبِ َیا َء ل َك ْي َي ْهدُ وا الن َ‬
‫َّاس‬ ‫َأ ْر َس َل ُ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫‪َ )1‬م َش ْینَا َس ِر ْي ًعا كَي َْل َن َت َأ َّخ َر ع ِ‬
‫َن الدَّ ْر ِ‬
‫الل َع َل ْینَا َون َْجتَن ُ‬
‫ب َما َح َّر َم ك َْي َن ُف ْوزَ‬ ‫‪ُ )9‬نؤَ ِّدي َما َف َر َض ُ‬ ‫س‬ ‫ْ‬
‫ان َنت ََو َّض ُأ كَي ن َُص ِّل َي َونُؤَ ِّد َي‬ ‫‪ُ )10‬ك ّل َما ن َْس َم ُع ْاْلَ َذ َ‬ ‫الل ك َْي َت ْش ُك ُر ْو ُه َو َت ْح َمدُ ْو ُه‬‫َرزَ َق ُك ُم ُ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫َف َرائِ َضنَا‬ ‫س ك َْي َي ْف َه ُم ْو ُه‬ ‫َي ْجت َِهدُ ْو َن فِي الدَّ ْر ِ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫الر ُس ْو ِل ﷺ ك َْي‬ ‫‪َ )11‬أ َت َمنَّی َأ ْن َأ ْس ُك َن فِي َم ِد ْينَ ِة ا ْل َحبِ ْی ِ‬
‫ب َّ‬ ‫َّاس ك َْي َي ْر َف َع َد َر َجاتِ ِه ْم‬ ‫الل الن َ‬ ‫َي ْبتَلي ُ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫ِ‬ ‫َس َی ْذ َب ُح ْو َن َب َق َر ًة ك َْي ُي ْط ِع ُموا ا ْل ُف َق َرا َء َل ْح َم َها‬
‫ت َو ُأ ْد َف َن ف َ‬
‫یها‬ ‫َأ ُم ْو َ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫‪َ )12‬ن ْع َل ُم َأ َّن زَ ْيدً ا ُي َسافِ ُر َغدً ا إِ َلی ا ْل َق ْر َي ِة ك َْي َيزُ ْو َر ُأ َّم ُه‬ ‫ت َك ْلبِ ِه ك َْي َْل َي ْحزَ َن‬ ‫ت ْاْلُم ابنَها بِمو ِ‬
‫ُّ ْ َ َ ْ‬
‫ما َأ ْخبر ِ‬
‫َ ََ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫َو َجدَّ َت ُه‬ ‫ت َأ ْس َما ُء َق َل ًما َجد ْيدً ا ك َْي َت ْكت َ‬
‫ُب ُد ُر ْو َس َها‬ ‫ْاشت ََر ْ‬ ‫‪)7‬‬
‫الس ْو ِق ك َْي َأ ْشت َِر َي َت ْم ًرا و َل َبنًا إِ ِذ‬
‫ب إِ َلی ُّ‬
‫‪ُ )13‬كن ُْت َأ ْذ َه ُ‬ ‫َختِ َم ُه فِي‬ ‫‪ )8‬ك َُّل يوم َن ْقر ُأ جزْ ءا مِن ا ْل ُق ِ‬
‫رآن كَي ن ْ‬
‫ْ‬ ‫َ ُ ً َ‬ ‫َْ‬
‫ا ْل َم َط ُر َين ِْز ُل‬ ‫َش ْهر‬
‫‪. Where necessary adjust the‬ك َْي ‪Join the sentences together using‬‬
‫‪ِ negative.‬ص َلة ‪irab and pronouns and make the‬‬
‫‪ُ )6‬ي َسافِ ُر ا ْل ُع َل َما ُء إِ َلی بِ ََّلد كَثِ ْیرة ‪َ /‬ي ْح ُص ُل ْو َن ا ْل ِع ْل َم‬ ‫الر ِح ْی َم ‪ /‬نَدْ ُخ ُل ا ْل َجنَّ َة‬‫الل َر َّبنَا َّ‬
‫َن ْع ُبدُ َ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫‪ُ )7‬ي ِض ُّل َّ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َّاس الن ََّار َم َع ُه‬‫َّاس ‪َ /‬يدْ ُخ ُل الن ُ‬ ‫ان الن َ‬ ‫الش ْی َط ُ‬ ‫َّاس‬‫َْل ُأ ْس ِر ُع ف ْي ك َََّلم ْي ‪َ /‬ي ْف َه ُم ُه الن ُ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫‪ْ/‬ل َت ُج ْو ُع فِي الن ََّه ِ‬ ‫ِ ِ‬ ‫اء زَ ْمزَ َم ‪َ /‬أ ْس ِق ْی ِه َأ ْص ِد َقائِ ْي‬‫ت ْاإلنَاء بِم ِ‬
‫ار‬ ‫الص َباحِ َ‬ ‫‪َ )8‬ت ْأك ُُل ا ْلبِن ُْت كَث ْی ًرا في َّ‬ ‫َ َ‬ ‫َم َ ْ‬
‫ل ُ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫ان ‪َ /‬ي ْح ُص ُل ْو َن َع َلی ْاْلَ ْج ِر‬ ‫‪َ )9‬ي ُص ْو ُم ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن َر َم َض َ‬ ‫ُب إِ َلی ْاْلُ َم ِم ‪َ /‬ت ْهت َِدي ْاْلُ َم ُم‬ ‫َأنْزَ َل ُ‬
‫الل ا ْل ُكت َ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫َّاس ا ْل َم َال ‪ُ /‬ي ْط ِع ُم ْو َن َأ ْه َل ُه ْم َو َي ْك ُس ْون َُهم‬
‫ب الن ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )10‬ي ْكس ُ‬ ‫َّاس َو ُي َص ُّل ْو َن‬‫جد ‪َ /‬يدْ ُخ ُل الن ُ‬
‫ُت ْفتَح َأبواب ا ْلمس ِ ِ‬
‫ُ َْ ُ َ ْ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫‪523‬‬
‫ َم ْف ُع ْول َل ُه َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح‬with an ‫اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول‬
An ‫ اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول‬can become ‫ َم ْج ُر ْور‬in a ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول َل ُه َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح‬.
The type of ‫ َح ْرف َم ْو ُص ْول‬in the ‫ اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول‬depends on whether the verb
within the ‫ ِص َلة‬is in the subjunctive or indicative mood.
‫ ِص َلة‬in the Subjunctive Mood
When the ‫ ِص َلة‬is in the subjunctive mood the ‫ َح ْرف َم ْو ُص ْول‬of ‫ َأ ْن‬is used.
However, it is usually omitted.
‫ج ِد ل ِ ُت َص ُّل ْوا‬
ِ ‫َذ َه ْبت ُْم إِ َلی ا ْل َم ْس‬
You went to the masjid to perform Salah.

The subjunctive mood is usually used to indicate the objective or
goal of the main verb.
In the above example, to perform Salah demonstrates the
objective for the main verb.
Notes
1. The ‫ َح ْرف َجار‬of ‫ َحتَّی‬can be used in a ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول َل ُه َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح‬.
‫ف َر ُس ْو َل اللِ ﷺ‬
َ ‫الس ْی َر ِة َحتَّی َأع ِْر‬ ِ ِ
ِّ ‫الحد ْيث َو‬
َ ‫ُب‬َ ‫َأ ْق َر ُأ ُكت‬
I read books of Hadith and Seerah so I can
recognize the Messenger of Allah.
2. The ‫ فِ ْعل ُم َض ِارع‬after ‫ َأ ْن‬is still ‫ َمن ُْص ْوب‬even though it has been
removed.
‫َم ْف ُع ْول َل ُه َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح‬ ِ ‫و َف‬
‫اعل‬ َ
‫ُت َص ُّل ْوا‬ )‫( َأ ْن‬ ‫ِل‬ ‫ج ِد‬

ْ َ ‫إِ َلی‬ ‫َذ َه ْب ُت ْم‬
)‫فعل وفاعل ( َو‬ ‫َم ْج ُر ْور‬ ‫َجار‬
3. If the ‫ فِ ْعل ُم َض ِارع‬in the ‫ ْاسم ُمؤَ َّول‬is negative ‫ َأ ْن‬cannot be omitted.
This can be translated as so … doesn’t/lest.
‫ج ِد ل ِئ َََّّل َي ُف ْو َتن ِ ْي َأ ْج ُر ا ْل َج َماع َِة‬
ِ ‫َذ َه ْب ُت إِ َلی ا ْل َم ْس‬
I went to the masjid, so I don’t /lest I miss
524
‫‪out on the reward of congregation.‬‬
‫‪ْ is often removed if it can be‬اسم ُمؤَ َّول ‪َْ from the negative‬ل ‪4. The‬‬
‫‪understood from the context.‬‬
‫ج ِد َأن َّي ُف ْو َتن ِ ْي َأ ْج ُر ا ْل َج َماع َِة‬
‫َذ َه ْب ُت إِ َلی ا ْلمس ِ‬
‫َ ْ‬
‫‪I went to the masjid, so I don’t /lest I‬‬
‫‪miss out on the reward of congregation.‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪ )1‬ا َّت ِق َ‬
‫الل َحتَّی َتدْ ُخ َل ا ْل َجنَّ َة‬
‫السنَّ َة لِئ َََّّل َت ِض ُّل ْوا‬ ‫‪ )2‬اِ َّتبِ ُع ْوا ا ْل ُق َ‬
‫رآن َو ُّ‬
‫َن َت َع َّل ُم ا ْل َع َربِ َّی َة َحتَّی َن ْف َه َم ا ْل ُق ْر َ‬
‫آن‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫آن لِئ َََّّل ن َِض َّل‬‫َنعت َِصم بِحب ِل اللِ ا ْل ُقر ِ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫ْ‬ ‫ْ ُ َْ‬
‫َأ ْست َِش ْی ُر ا ْل ُع َق ََّل َء فِي ُأ ُم ْو ِر ْي لِئ َََّّل َأنْدَ َم‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫َّاس لِئ َََّّل َت ِض ْی َع َح َسنَا ُت ُك ْم‬ ‫َْل َت ْغتَا ُبوا الن َ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫ت إِ َلی ٰذل ِ َك ا ْل َب َل ِد ِْلَ ْل َقی ا ْل ُع َل َما َء‬ ‫َسا َف ْر ُ‬ ‫‪)7‬‬
‫ول َيدْ ع ُْوك ُْم لِتُؤْ مِنُوا بِ َر ِّب ُك ْم﴾‬ ‫الر ُس ُ‬ ‫‪َ ﴿ )8‬و َّ‬
‫س َحتَّی َت ْف َه َم ُه َف ْه ًما‬ ‫‪ )9‬اِ ْست َِم ْع إِ َلی ا ْل ُم َع ِّل ِم فِي الدَّ ْر ِ‬
‫اها‬‫اج ُع الدُّ ُر ْو َس ك َُّل َي ْوم َأ ْو َي ْو َم ْی ِن لِئ َََّّل َأن َْس َ‬ ‫‪ُ )10‬أ َر ِ‬
‫اب ك َْي َْل َيدْ ُخ ُلوا الن ََّار‬ ‫َأن َْذ َر ْاْلَ ْنبِ َیا ُء الن َ‬
‫َّاس ا ْل َع َذ َ‬ ‫‪)11‬‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َْل َأ ْخدَ ُع َأ َحدً ا لئ َََّّل َأك ُْو َن م َن ا ْل َكاذبِ ْی َن ا َّلذ ْي َن َل َعن َُه ُم ُ‬
‫الل‬ ‫‪)12‬‬
‫ُخ ِرج النَّاس مِن ال ُّظ ُلم ِ‬
‫ات إِ َلى الن ُّْو ِر‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫َ َ‬ ‫الل كتَا ًبا إِ َل ْی َك لت ْ َ‬ ‫َأنْزَ َل ُ‬ ‫‪)13‬‬
‫الس ُح ْو ِر ك َْي َْل َي ْع َط َش فِي ا ْل َی ْو ِم‬ ‫ِ ِ‬
‫َش ِر َب َأ ْح َمدُ َما ًء كَث ْی ًرا ف ْي ُّ‬ ‫‪)14‬‬
‫ُي َح ِّذ ُر ْاْلَ ْو َْل َد آ َبائ ُُه ْم َو ُأ َّم َها ُت ُه ْم مِ َن ا ْل َك َس ِل لِئ َََّّل ُي َض ِّی ُع ْوا َح َیا َت ُه ْم‬ ‫‪)15‬‬
‫س فِي ال َّل ْی ِل‬ ‫ب فِي الدُّ ُر ْو ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َأ ْست َِر ْي ُح َقلِ ْی ًَّل ك َُّل َي ْوم َب ْعدَ ال ُّظ ْه ِر لئ َََّّل َأ ْت َع َ‬ ‫‪)16‬‬
‫‪525‬‬
‫‪ِ in the Indicative Mood‬ص َلة‬
‫‪َ is‬ما ‪َ or‬أ َّن ‪َ of‬ح ْرف َم ْو ُص ْول ‪ِ is in the indicative mood the‬ص َلة ‪When the‬‬
‫‪used.‬‬
‫الل ِْلَ َّن ُه َخ َل َقن ِ ْي‬
‫َأ ْع ُبدُ َ‬ ‫دت‬ ‫َف ِر َح َأ ُب ْو َك بِ َما ْ‬
‫اجت ََه َّ‬
‫‪I worship Allah‬‬ ‫‪Your father was happy‬‬
‫‪because He created me.‬‬ ‫‪because you worked hard.‬‬
‫‪The indicative mood is usually used to indicate the cause of the‬‬
‫‪main verb.‬‬
‫‪In the above examples, He created me and you worked hard‬‬
‫‪demonstrate the cause for the main verb.‬‬
‫‪َ )1‬غدً ا َس َأ ْل َب ُس َث ْو ًبا َج ِد ْيدً ا ِْلَ َّن ُه َي ْو ُم ِع ْید‬
‫ح َم َار ِْلَ َّن ُه َم ِر ْيض ِجدًّ ا‬ ‫‪َْ )2‬ل َتر َكبوا ٰه َذا ا ْل ِ‬
‫ْ ُْ‬
‫‪ُ )3‬أ َسافِ ُر إِ َلی ٰه َذا ا ْل َب َل ِد ِْلَ َّن َص ِد ْي ِق ْي َي ْس ُك ُن فِ ْی ِه‬
‫‪َ )4‬أ ْس ِرع ُْوا إِ َلی ا ْل َمدْ َر َس ِة ِْلَ َّن الدَّ ْر َس َس َی ْبدَ ُأ َب ْعدَ َقلِ ْیل‬
‫لص ََّل ِة‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫الس ْو ِق ْاْل َن ْلَ َّن ا ْل ُمؤَ ِّذ َن َس ُیؤَ ِّذ َن ل َّ‬ ‫‪َْ )5‬ل َت ْذ َه َبا إِ َلی ُّ‬
‫الل ا ْل ُم ْح ِسن ِ ْی َن َجنَّ ًة َو َح ِر ًيرا بِ َما كَان ُْوا َي ْصبِ ُر ْو َن‬ ‫‪َ )6‬س َی ْج ِزي ُ‬
‫اب بِ َما ُكنْت ُْم َت ْك ُف ُر َ‬ ‫ِ ِ‬
‫ون﴾‬ ‫الل َي ْو َم ا ْلق َیا َمة ﴿ ُذ ْو ُقوا ا ْل َع َذ َ‬ ‫‪َ )7‬ي ُق ْو ُل ُ‬
‫ان و َأولِیائِ ِه ِْلَنَّهم ي ِض ُّلو َننَا عَن سبِی ِل اللِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪َْ )8‬ل َن َّتبِ ُع َسبِ ْی َل َّ‬
‫ْ َ ْ‬ ‫ُ ْ ُ ْ‬ ‫الش ْی َط َ ْ َ‬
‫الل‬
‫ت َ‬ ‫اس َت ْی َق ْظ َت فِي ال َّل ْی ِل َو َص َّل ْی َت َر ْك َع َت ْی ِن َو َدع َْو َ‬ ‫‪َ )9‬ف ِر َح َأ ُب ْو َك بِ َما ْ‬
‫اس ُب ُك ْم َع َلی ك ُِّل َما َف َع ْلت ُْم مِ ْن َخ ْیر َأ ْو َشر‬ ‫‪َْ )10‬ل َت ْظلِموا النَّاس ِْلَ َّن الل سیح ِ‬
‫َ َ ُ َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ُْ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪َ )11‬أ َت َمنَّی َأ ْن َأ ْس ُك َن فِي َم ِد ْينَ ِة ا ْل َحبِ ْی ِ‬
‫ب َب َلدَ ُه‬‫الر ُس ْو ِل ﷺ ْلَن ِّْي ُأح ُّب ُه ﷺ َو ُأح ُّ‬ ‫ب َّ‬
‫‪526‬‬
Notes
The examples below explain the difference between the ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول َل ُه‬in
the two moods.
‫َأ ْت ُلو ا ْل ُق ْرآ َن ِْلَ ْح ُص َل َع َلی ْاْلَ ْج ِر‬
I recite the Quran …
… so that I acquire reward.
In this example, the main verb is I recite the Quran.
The sentence so that I acquire reward occurs after the main verb,
therefore the subjunctive mood is used.
ِ ‫َأ ْت ُلو ا ْل ُقرآ َن لِما س ِمع ُت مِن َف َضائِ ِل ا ْل ُقر‬
‫آن‬ ْ ْ ْ َ َ ْ
I recite the Quran …
… because of the virtues of the Quran I heard.
In this example, the main verb is I recite the Quran.
The sentence because of the virtues of the Quran I heard occurs
before the main verb, therefore the indicative mood is used.
527
‫اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول ‪َ as an‬م ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق ‪Part 7:‬‬
‫‪َ .‬م ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح ‪ can occur as the‬اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول ‪An‬‬
‫‪They recite as the reciters recite.‬‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق ‪In this example, the phrase as the reciters recite is the‬‬
‫‪because it describes the verb.‬‬
‫َما ‪َ of‬ح ْرف َم ْو ُص ْول ‪ with the‬اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول ‪َ can occur as an‬م ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح ‪The‬‬
‫‪in one of the following two structures:‬‬
‫‪.‬مِ ْث َل ‪ُ will usually be‬م َضاف ‪ُ : the‬م َضاف‪ُ -‬م َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪1.‬‬
‫َي ْق َر ُء ْو َن مِ ْث َل َما َي ْق َر ُأ ا ْل ُق َّرا ُء‬
‫‪َ .‬ك ‪َ will usually be‬جار ‪َ : the‬جار‪َ -‬م ْج ُر ْور ‪2.‬‬
‫َي ْق َر ُء ْو َن ك ََما َي ْق َر ُأ ا ْل ُق َّرا ُء‬
‫‪This is translated as like, the way, or as.‬‬
‫‪They recite as the reciters recite.‬‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول ُم ْط َلق َغیْ ُر َص ِر ْيح‬ ‫فِعل و َف ِ‬
‫ا ْل ُق َّرا ُء‬ ‫َي ْق َر ُأ‬ ‫َما‬ ‫َك‬ ‫َي ْق َر ُء ْو َن‬

‫َف ِ‬
‫اهلِ ْی َن‬ ‫‪َ )7‬أ ْشركُوا بِاللِ جه ًَّل كَما َأ ْشر َك آبائُهم ج ِ‬ ‫اس َت ْك َب َر فِ ْرع َْو ُن‬
‫َ َ َ ُ ْ َ‬ ‫َ ْ‬ ‫َ ْ‬ ‫َْل َت ْس َت ْكبِ ْر ك ََما ْ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫الل َع َلی نِ َع ِم ِه ك ََما َينْ َب ِغ ْي‬‫ف ب َأ َّننَا َْل ن َْح َمدُ َ‬ ‫‪َ )8‬ن ْعت َِر ُ‬ ‫الل إِ َل ْی َك﴾‬‫﴿ َو َأ ْحس ْن ك ََما َأ ْح َس َن ُ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ ِ ِ‬ ‫‪ )9‬ن ْ ِ‬ ‫ن َُو ِّق ُر َأ َساتِ َذ َتنَا ك ََما ن َُو ِّق ُر آ َبا َئنَا َو ُأ َّم َهاتِنَا‬
‫َخد ُم َأ َب َو ْينَا في ك َب ِره َما ك ََما َأ ْح َسنَا إِ َل ْینَا صغ ً‬
‫َارا‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫َخ َشا ُه‬‫اف مِ َن ْاْلَ َس ِد َب ْل ن ْ‬ ‫الل ك ََما َن َخ ُ‬ ‫اف َ‬ ‫َخ ُ‬‫‪َْ )10‬ل ن َ‬ ‫ب ُك ِّل َها ك ََما َأ َم َرنَا َر ُّبنَا‬ ‫َنت ُْو ُب مِ َن ُّ‬
‫الذن ُْو ِ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫اْل ْر َض َب ْعدَ َم ْو ِت َها‬ ‫كَما ُي ْح ِیي ْ َ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ُ )11‬ي ْح ِیي ُ‬
‫الل ا ْل َم ْو َتی َب ْعدَ َم ْوت ِه ْم َ‬ ‫اه ُل ْو َن‬ ‫َْل َن ْغتَاب النَّاس كَما ي ْغتَاب ا ْلج ِ‬
‫َ َ َ ُ َ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫عَو ُن ِب ُم ْو َسی ڠ‬ ‫كَذب ْت ُقريش ِبمحمد ﷺ كَما َّ ِ‬ ‫ُي َطال ِ ُع ال ُّط ََّّل ُب ُك ُت َب ُه ْم ك ََما ُي َطال ِ ُع َأ َساتِ َذ ُت ُه ْم‬
‫كَذ َب ف ْر ْ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫‪َّ َ ُ ْ َ َ َّ )12‬‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫‪528‬‬
‫اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول ‪ُ as an‬م ْس َت ْثنًی ‪Part 8:‬‬
‫‪َ .‬أ ْن ‪ with‬اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول ‪ُ can occur as an‬م ْس َت ْثنًی ‪The‬‬
‫‪This is translated as except or unless.‬‬
‫َي ْح ُض ُر َأ ْح َمدُ الدَّ ْر َس إِ َّْل َأن َّي ُك ْو َن َم ِر ْي ًضا‬
‫)‪Ahmad attends lesson (in all conditions‬‬
‫‪unless he is ill.‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪َ , omitted.‬م ْح ُذ ْوف ‪َ which will be‬حال ‪ُ of this will usually be a‬م ْس َت ْثنًی منْ ُه ‪The‬‬
‫ال ا ْلمح ُذو ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫استِثْنَاء‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ ‫َف ِ‬ ‫فِ ْعل‬
‫ف‬ ‫ُم ْستَثْنًی م َن ا ْل َح ِ َ ْ ْ‬ ‫ف ْ‬‫َح ْر ُ‬ ‫اعل‬
‫َم ِر ْي ًضا‬ ‫َّي ُك ْو َن‬ ‫َأن‬ ‫إِ َّْل‬ ‫الدَّ ْر َس‬ ‫َأ ْح َمدُ‬ ‫َي ْح ُض ُر‬
‫َان‬ ‫(ه َو)‬ ‫اس ُم ك َ‬
‫َان ُ‬ ‫ك َ‬
‫َان َو ْ‬
‫اج ُع ْو َها مِ َر ًارا‬ ‫اعدَ إِ َّْل َأ ْن َت ْك ُت ُب ْو َها َو ُت َر ِ‬ ‫‪ )1‬س َتنْسو َن ا ْل َقو ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫َ َ ْ‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )2‬سن َُساف ُر إِ َلی َم َّك َة ٰه َذا ا ْل َعا َم َم َع َأ َب َو ْينَا إِ َّْل َأن َّي َشا َء ُ‬
‫الل‬
‫‪َ )3‬ن ْف َه ُم الدَّ ْر َس ِح ْی َن َي ْش َر ُح َها ا ْل ُم َع ِّل ُم إِ َّْل َأن َّي َت َك َّل َم َس ِر ْي ًعا‬
‫اإل َما ُم بِالنَّاس‬ ‫ف ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن َل ْی ًَّل َون ََه ًارا إِ َّْل َأن ُّي َص ِّلي ْ ِ‬ ‫‪َ )4‬ي ُط ْو ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫اك إِ َّْل َأن َّي ْأ ُم َر َك بِ َم ْع ِص َیة‬ ‫اك َو ُأ َّم َك فِي ك ُِّل َما َأ َم َر َ‬ ‫‪ )5‬ا ْلبِ ُّر َأ ْن ُتطِ ْی َع َأ َب َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫اس ِم اللِ َر ِّبنَا ك ََما َأ َم َرنَا َر ُس ْو ُل اللِ ﷺ إِ َّْل َأن َّنن َْسی‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ن ْبدَ ُأ ك َُّل َش ْيء بِ ْ‬
‫قة ا ْل َب َل ِد َم َع إِ ْخ َوتِنَا َو َأ َخ َواتِنَا إِ َّْل َأن َّين ِْز َل ا ْل َم َط ُر‬ ‫‪ )7‬سنَم ِضي ٰذل ِ َك ا ْلیوم فِي ح ِدي ِ‬
‫َ ْ‬ ‫َْ َ‬ ‫َ ْ ْ‬
‫‪َْ )8‬ل َي ْمنُ ُع َك ْاْلَ َب َوا ِن َأ ِو ْاْلَ َساتِ َذ ُة َأ ِو ا ْلكِ َب ُار مِ ْن َش ْيء ُت ِر ْيدُ ُه إِ َّْل َأن َّي َر ْوا َأ َّن فِ ْی ِه َض َر ًرا‬
‫اج ِد لِن َْح ُص َل َع َلی َأ ْج ِر ا ْل َج َماع َِة إِ َّْل َأن َّن ُك ْو َن ُم َسافِ ِر ْي َن َأ ْو َم ْر ٰضی‬ ‫‪ )9‬ن َُص ِّلي فِي ا ْل َم َس ِ‬
‫ْ‬
‫الل ال َّظال ِ ِم ْی َن ع ََذا ًبا َش ِد ْيدً ا َي ْو َم َي ْج َم ُع ال َّظال ِ َم َوا ْل َم ْظ ُل ْو َم َم ًعا إِ َّْل َأن َّيت ُْو ُب ْوا‬ ‫‪َ )10‬س ُی َع ِّذ ُب ُ‬
‫‪529‬‬
‫‪ for Emphasis‬إِ َّْل ‪ after‬اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول ‪An‬‬
‫‪ will be‬إِ َّْل ‪, this‬اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول ‪ is followed by an‬إِ َّْل ‪In a negative sentence, if‬‬
‫‪َ .‬ح ْر ُف ْاستِ ْثنَاء ‪َ , not a‬ح ْر ُف َح ْصر ‪a‬‬
‫‪This can be translated by adding phrases like only, the only thing,‬‬
‫‪all that etc. at the beginning of the sentence.‬‬
‫الل ل ِ ْي‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َْل َأ ْر ُج ْو إِ َّْل َأن َّيغْف َر ُ‬
‫‪The only thing I hope for is for Allah to forgive me.‬‬
‫‪I only hope for Allah to forgive me.‬‬
‫َح ْر ُ‬ ‫فِعل و َف ِ‬
‫اعل ( َأنَا)‬ ‫ْ َ‬ ‫ف نَ ْفي‬
‫َح ْر ُ‬
‫الل ل ِ ْي‬ ‫ِ‬

‫َّي ْغف َر ُ‬ ‫َأن‬ ‫إِ َّْل‬ ‫َأ ْر ُج ْو‬ ‫َْل‬
‫اعل َو‪....‬‬ ‫ْ َ‬
‫َا ْْل َن َْل َأ ْستَطِ ْی ُع إِ َّْل َأ ْن ُأن ِْف َق تِ ْس َع َة ُجنَ ْیه‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫َْل َي ْأ ُم ُرك ُْم َأ ُب ْوك ُْم إِ َّْل َأ ْن َت ُك ْون ُْوا ُم ْح ِسن ِ ْی َن‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫َْل ُي ِر ْيدُ ال ِّط ْف ُل ا َّل ِذ ْي َي ْبكِ ْي إِ َّْل َأن َّي َری ُأ َّم ُه‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫َْل َي ُض ُّر َك َأ َحد َو َْل َينْ َف ُع َك إِ َّْل َأن َّي َشا َء ُ‬

‫الل‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫الش ْی ُخ إِ َّْل َأن َّي ُح َّج َأ ْو َي ْعت َِم َر‬
‫َْل ُي َسافِ ُر ٰه َذا َّ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫ب ا ْل ُم َع ِّل َم إِ َّْل َأ َّْل ن َْس َم َع فِي الدَّ ْر ِ‬
‫س‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َْل ُيغْض ُ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫َْل َي ُس ُّر َأبِ ْي َو ُأ ِّم ْي إِ َّْل َأ ْن َأ ْجت َِهدَ فِي ُد ُر ْو ِس ْي‬ ‫‪)7‬‬
‫َان َر ُس ْو ُل اللِ ﷺ َي ْأك ُُل إِ َّْل ك ََما َي ْأك ُُل ا ْل َع ْبدُ‬ ‫َما ك َ‬ ‫‪)8‬‬
‫َْل َت ْف َع ْل َش ْیئًا إِ َّْل َأن َّينْ َف َع َك فِي الدُّ ْن َیا َأ ِو ْاْل ِخ َر ِة‬ ‫‪)9‬‬
‫الل إِ َّْل ك َْي َيغ ِْف َر ل ِ ْي ُذن ُْوبِ ْي َو ُيدْ ِخ َلن ِ ْي ا ْل َجنَّ َة‬
‫‪َْ )10‬ل َأ ْع ُبدُ َ‬
‫‪َْ )11‬ل َتن َْج ُح ْو َن فِي الدُّ ْن َیا َو َْل فِي ْاْل ِخ َر ِة إِ َّْل َأ ْن َت ْجت َِهدُ ْوا‬
‫الل ل ِ ْي َو ُيدْ ِخ َلن ِ ْي َجنَّ َت ُه َم َع َحبِ ْیبِنَا ﷺ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َْ )12‬ل َأ َت َمنَّی إِ َّْل َأن َّيغْف َر ُ‬
‫‪530‬‬
Part 9: ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬as an ‫اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول‬
A ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬of a ‫ َظ ْرف‬can be an ‫اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول‬. The ‫ َح ْرف َم ْو ُص ْول‬can be either ‫َأ ْن‬
or ‫ َما‬.
‫الصائِ ُم ْو َن َق ْب َل َأ ْن َت ْط ُل َع ا ْل َف ْج ُر‬
َّ ‫َي ْأك ُُل‬
Those fasting eat before the dawn rises.
‫ا ْل َف ْج ُر‬ ‫َت ْط ُل َع‬ ‫َأ ْن‬ ‫َق ْب َل‬ ‫الصائِ ُم ْو َن‬

َّ ‫َي ْأك ُُل‬
ِ ‫َف‬
The following adverbs and ‫ َح ْرف َم ْو ُص ْول‬are commonly used together.

when, whilst ‫ َب ْین ََما‬before ‫َق ْب َل َأ ْن‬
when, while ‫ِح ْین ََما‬ after ‫ َب ْعدَ َأ ْن‬،‫َب ْعدَ َما‬
while, as long as ‫َر ْي َث َما‬ when, whilst ‫ِعنْدَ َما‬
Note
Usually, the ‫ ِص َلة‬after ‫ َأ ْن‬is comprised of a ‫فِ ْعل ُم َض ِارع‬. However, the ‫ِص َلة‬
after ‫ َق ْب َل َأ ْن‬and ‫ َب ْعدَ َأ ْن‬can comprise of a ‫فِ ْعل َماض‬.
ِ ‫رجع ا ْلحجاج بعدَ َأ ْن َأدوا من‬
‫َاس َك ُه ْم‬ َ ْ َّ ْ َ ُ َّ ُ َ َ َ
The Hujjaj returned after they fulfilled their
rituals.
531
‫‪ )1‬اِ ْف َه ُموا الدَّ ْر َس َق ْب َل َأ ْن َت ْح َف ُظ ْو َها‬
‫ب َت ْف ُسدُ ْاْلَع َْم ُال‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ )2‬عنْدَ َما َي ْف ُسدُ ا ْل َق ْل ُ‬
‫ب ْاْلَ ْط َف ُال َت ْق َر ُأ ا ْل ُم َع ِّل َم ُة‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ )3‬عنْدَ َما َي ْل َع ُ‬
‫ان َأ ْص ِد َقا َئ ُه ِع ْل ًما َب ْعدَ َأ ِن ا ْج َت َهدَ‬ ‫اق ُع ْث َم ُ‬ ‫‪َ )4‬ف َ‬
‫‪ )5‬اِ ْق َر ْأ ُك َّل َل ْی َلة َص ْف َح ًة َأ ْو َص ْف َح َت ْی ِن َق ْب َل َأ ْن َتنَا َم‬
‫ُب ُد ُر ْو ِس ْي‬ ‫آن َب ْین ََما ُكن ُْت َأ ْكت ُ‬ ‫ان َأبِي َي ْت ُلو ا ْل ُق ْر َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪َ )6‬ك َ‬
‫ت َق ْب َل َأن َّي ْأ َذ َن ل ِ ْي َأبِ ْي َأ ْو ُأ ِّم ْي‬ ‫‪َْ )7‬ل َأ ْخرج مِن ا ْلبی ِ‬
‫ُ ُ َ َْ‬
‫اج َر مِ ْن َم َّك َة‬ ‫ِ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )8‬أ َقا َم َر ُس ْو ُل الل ﷺ بِا ْل َمد ْينَة َب ْعدَ َأ ْن َه َ‬
‫رآن َب ْعدَ َأ ْن َجا َء ُه ْم‬ ‫َن ا ْل ُق ِ‬ ‫َّاس ع ِ‬ ‫الش ْی َط ُ‬ ‫‪َ )9‬ل َقدْ َأ َض َّل َّ‬
‫ان الن َ‬
‫اج ِد َب ْعدَ َأن ُّيؤَ ِّذ َن ا ْل ُمؤَ ِّذ ُن‬ ‫لص ََّل ِة فِي ا ْل َم َس ِ‬ ‫اس ل َّ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )10‬ي ْج َتم ُع النَّ ُ‬
‫اإلسر ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪َْ )11‬ل ُأس ِر ُ ِ‬
‫اف‬ ‫الل َقدْ َن َهى َع ِن ْ ِ ْ َ‬ ‫ف َمال ْي َب ْعدَ َأ ْن َسم ْع ُت َأ َّن َ‬ ‫ْ‬
‫الص ََّل ِة َم َع ا ْل َج َما َع ِة َب ْعدَ َأ ْن َس ِم َع َف ِض ْی َل َت َها‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )12‬عزَ َم َع ْبدُ الل َع َلى َّ‬
‫اح َب َها فِي ْاْل ِخ َر ِة‬ ‫‪َْ )13‬ل َأ ْغ َتاب َأحدً ا بعدَ ما عَلِم ُت ا ْل ِغیب َة َت ُضر ص ِ‬
‫ُّ َ‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫ُ َ َْ َ‬
‫اجت ََهدَ ٰه َذا ا ْل َو َلدُ َق ْب َل َأ ْن ن ََص َح ُه َأ ُب ْو ُه ن ُْص ًحا َو َْل َب ْعدَ َأ ْن ن ََص َح ُه‬
‫‪ )14‬ما ْ‬
‫ت زَ ْم َع َة َب ْعدَ َأ ْن ُت ُو ِّف َی ْت َخ ِد ْي َج ُة بِنْ ُت ُخ َو ْيلِد ڤ‬ ‫‪َ )15‬تزَ وج رسو ُل اللِ بِسود َة بِنْ ِ‬
‫َ ْ َ‬ ‫َّ َ َ ُ ْ‬
‫‪ُ )16‬ي َص ِّلي ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن َص ََّل َة ا ْل َف ْج ِر َق ْب َل َأ ْن َت ْط ُل َع َّ‬
‫الش ْم ُس َو َص ََّل َة ا ْل َم ْغ ِر ِ‬
‫ب َب ْعدَ َأ ْن َت ْغ ُر َب‬
‫‪532‬‬
‫‪Summary‬‬
‫‪ within a‬اِ ْسم ُمؤَ َّول ‪The table below summarises the use of an‬‬
‫‪Example‬‬ ‫‪Slot‬‬
‫َأن َت ُص ْو ُم ْوا َخ ْیر‬ ‫ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬
‫السن َِّة َأ ْن َت ْأك َُل بِیَ ِمیْن ِ َك‬ ‫ِ‬

‫إ َّن م َن ُّ‬
‫ُمبْتَدَ أ ُمؤَ َّخر‬
‫مِن ع َِقیدَ ِة ا ْلمؤْ مِنِین َأ َّن الل و ِ‬
‫احد‬ ‫َ َ‬ ‫ُ ْ َ‬ ‫ْ ْ‬
‫ا ْل َح ُّق َأنَّ َك َت ْجتَ ِهدُ‬ ‫َخبَر‬
‫ب َع َلیْ َك َأ ْن َت ْصدُ َق‬ ‫َي ِ‬

‫ج ُ‬ ‫َف ِ‬
‫اعل‬
‫َظ َه َر َأنَّ َك َصدَ ْق َت‬
‫الل لِ ْي‬ ‫ِ‬

‫َأ ْر ُج ْو َأن َّيغْف َر ُ‬
‫َي ْع َل ُم ْو َن َأ َّن َ‬
‫الل َربُّ ُه ْم‬

‫حیْ ًحا‬ ‫َأصوم ما دم ُت ص ِ‬
‫ُ ْ ُ َ ُْ َ‬
‫ب ا ْل ِع ْل َم إِ َلی َأ ْن َأ ُم ْو َ‬
‫ت‬ ‫َأ ْط ُل ُ‬
‫َْل َي ْأ ُك ُل ْو َن َحتَّی َتغ ُْر َب َّ‬
‫الش ْم ُس‬
‫الل ْاْلَنْبِیَا َء ك َْي َي ْهدُ وا الن َ‬

‫َّاس‬ ‫َأ ْر َس َل ُ‬
‫ج ِد ل ِتُ َص ُّل ْوا‬
‫َذ َهبْت ُْم إِ َلی ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول َل ُه‬
‫دت‬‫اجتَ َه َّ‬ ‫َف ِر َح َأ ُب ْو َك بِ َما ْ‬
‫الل ِْلَنَّ ُه َخ َل َقن ِ ْي‬
‫َأ ْعبُدُ َ‬
‫َي ْق َر ُء ْو َن مِثْ َل َما َي ْق َر ُأ ا ْل ُق َّرا ُء‬
‫َي ْق َر ُء ْو َن ك ََما َي ْق َر ُأ ا ْل ُق َّرا ُء‬
‫َي ْح ُض ُر الدَّ ْر َس إِ َّْل َأن َّي ُك ْو َن َم ِر ْي ًضا‬ ‫ُم ْستَثْنًی‬
‫َي ْأك ُُل َق ْب َل َأ ْن َت ْط ُل َع ا ْل َف ْج ُر‬ ‫ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬
‫‪533‬‬
Supplement: Verbal Phrases
Introduction
We previously studied that both the ‫ َم ْصدَ ر‬and the ‫ ُم ْش َت َّقات‬can occur
in the meaning of a noun, an adjective, or a verb. (see page 48)
When the ‫ َم ْصدَ ر‬and the ‫ ُم ْش َت َّقات‬convey verbal meanings, they can
become part of a phrase. These are known as verbal phrases.
These phrases are comprised of a ‫اعل‬ ِ ‫ َف‬, ‫ م ْفعول بِ ِه‬and other slots of a
ُْ َ
verbal sentence.
‫اج ُع ْو َن مِ ْن ع ََر َف َة ْاْل َن‬
ِ ‫اج َر‬
ُ ‫َا ْل ُح َّج‬
The pilgrims are returning from Arafah now.
ِ ‫اِسم ا ْل َف‬, i.e. ‫اجعو َن‬ ِ ِ ِ
In this sentence, the ‫اع ِل‬ ُ ْ ْ ُ ِ ‫ َر‬, has its own ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول ف ْیه‬, i.e. ‫م ْن‬
‫ ع ََر َف َة‬and ‫ ْاْل َن‬. Together, these form a verbal phrase which becomes
the ‫ َخ َبر‬of the ‫ ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬, i.e ‫الح َّج ُاج‬
ُ .
‫ْاْل َن‬ ‫عَ َر َف َة‬ ‫مِ ْن‬ ِ ‫ر‬

‫اج ُع ْو َن‬ َ ُ ‫ا ْل ُح َّج‬
‫اج‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِیْ ِه‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِیْ ِه َغیْ ُر َص ِر ْيح‬ ِ ‫اِسم َف‬
‫اعل‬ ُ ْ
Types of Verbal Phrases

There are five types of verbal phrases:
1. The ‫ َم ْصدَ ر‬verbal phrase
2. The ‫اع ِل‬ِ ‫ اِسم ا ْل َف‬verbal phrase
ُ ْ
ِ
3. The ‫ ال ِّص َف ُة ا ْل ُم َش َّب َه ُة بِ ْاس ِم ا ْل َفاع ِل‬verbal phrase
4. The ‫ اِ ْس ُم ا ْل َم ْف ُع ْو ِل‬verbal phrase
5. The ‫ اِ ْس ُم ال َّت ْف ِض ْی ِل‬verbal phrase
534
The ‫ َم ْصدَ ر‬Verbal Phrase
In this section we are going to discuss:
1. Construction of a ‫ َم ْصدَ ر‬verbal phrase.
2. Usage of a ‫ َم ْصدَ ر‬verbal phrase in a sentence.
Construction of a ‫ َم ْصدَ ر‬Verbal Phrase
A ‫ َم ْصدَ ر‬verbal phrase consists of essential and non-essential slots.
There is one essential slot found in every ‫ َم ْصدَ ر‬verbal phrase:
1. A ‫ َم ْصدَ ر‬slot
There are two non-essential slots in a ‫ َم ْصدَ ر‬verbal phrase:

1. A ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬slot
2. ‫ َمن ُْص ْوب‬or ‫ َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح‬slot(s)
A ‫ َم ْصدَ ر‬verbal phrase consists of one or more of these two.
The table below summarises the parts of a ‫ َم ْصدَ ر‬verbal phrase.

‫ َم ْصدَ ر‬Verbal Phrase
‫َمنْ ُص ْوب‬
‫ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬ ‫َم ْصدَ ر‬
‫َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح‬
535
The ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬Slot
The ‫ َم ْصدَ ر‬is commonly followed by a ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬. Even though the noun
ِ ‫ َف‬,
will be ‫ َم ْج ُر ْور‬, it has an ‫إِع َْراب َم َح ِّلي‬, i.e. it gives the meaning of a ‫اعل‬
‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬or ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه‬.
The ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬of the ‫ َم ْصدَ ر‬as the ‫اعل‬
ِ ‫َف‬
ِ ِ ‫َف ْه ُم ال َّطال‬
‫ب‬
the student’s understanding
ِ ِ ‫ال َّطال‬
‫ب‬ ‫َف ْه ُم‬

ِ ‫َف‬
‫اعل‬ ‫َم ْصدَ ر‬
The ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬of the ‫ َم ْصدَ ر‬as the ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬
ِ ‫َف ْه ُم الدَّ ْر‬
‫س‬
the understanding of the lesson
ِ ‫الدَّ ْر‬
‫س‬ ‫َف ْه ُم‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ ‫َم ْصدَ ر‬
The ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬of the ‫ َم ْصدَ ر‬as the ‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه‬
‫قِ َیا ُم ال َّل ْی ِل‬
standing during the night
‫ام‬ ِ
‫ال َّل ْی ِل‬ ُ ‫ق َی‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِیْ ِه‬ ‫َم ْصدَ ر‬
536
‫َم ْصدَ ر ‪Summary of a Verbal Phrase With a‬‬
‫ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪The table below summarises the different functions of the‬‬
‫‪َ .‬م ْصدَ ر ‪of the‬‬
‫ُم َضاف إِ َلیْ ِه‬ ‫َم ْصدَ ر‬
‫ا ْل َع ْب ِد‬ ‫ُد َعا ُء‬

‫اعل‬ ‫َف ِ‬
‫َر ِّب ِه‬ ‫ُد َعا ُء‬

‫ال َّل ْی ِل‬ ‫ُد َعا ُء‬

‫‪Translate the following verbal phrases. Identify the different‬‬
‫‪ُ .‬م َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪functions of the‬‬
‫‪ُ )15‬ش ْر ُب ا ْل َخ ْم ِر‬ ‫‪َ )8‬ت َمنِّي ا ْل َجن َِّة‬ ‫‪َ )1‬تربِ َی ُة ْاْلَ ْو َْل ِد‬
‫الص ََّل ِة‬
‫‪َ )16‬ت ْر ُك َّ‬
‫العب ِ‬
‫اد‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )9‬ت َمنِّي َ‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ت ْربِ َی ُة ْاْلَ َب َو ْي ِن‬
‫‪َ )17‬أداء الزَّ ك ِ‬
‫َاة‬ ‫‪َ )10‬ب ْی ُع ال ِّث َی ِ‬
‫اب‬ ‫اف ا ْل َع ْب ِد‬
‫‪ )3‬اِعْتِ َر ُ‬
‫َ ُ‬
‫‪ُ )18‬س ُج ْو ُد ال َّل ْی ِل‬ ‫‪ُ )11‬ج ْو ُع ا ْل ُف َق َر ِاء‬ ‫الذن ُْو ِ‬
‫ب‬ ‫اف ُّ‬ ‫‪ )4‬اِعْتِ َر ُ‬
‫‪ )19‬اِحتِرام ا ْلع َلم ِ‬
‫اء‬ ‫‪َ )12‬ج ْم ُع ْاْلَ ْم َو ِ‬
‫ال‬ ‫‪َ )5‬ش ْر ُح ا ْل ُم َع ِّل ِم‬
‫ْ َ ُ ُ َ‬
‫ان‬‫‪َ )20‬ص ْو ُم َر َم َض َ‬ ‫احتِ َرا ُم ا ْلكِ َب ِ‬
‫ار‬ ‫‪ْ )13‬‬ ‫س‬‫‪َ )6‬ش ْر ُح الدُّ ُر ْو ِ‬
‫‪ )21‬نَدَ ا َم ُة َي ْو ِم ا ْل ِق َیا َم ِة‬ ‫‪ )14‬إِ ْط َعا ُم الن ِ‬

‫َّاس‬ ‫‪ )7‬نَدَ ا َم ُة ا ْل َكافِ ِر ْي َن‬
‫‪Note‬‬
‫اعل ‪ُ can be taken to be either‬م َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪In some cases, the‬‬
‫‪.‬م ْفعول بِ ِه ‪َ or‬ف ِ‬
‫َ ُْ‬
‫اِحتِرام ا ْلع َلم ِ‬
‫اء‬ ‫ْ َ ُ ُ َ‬
‫اعل ‪ can be the‬ا ْل ُع َل َماء ‪In this example,‬‬ ‫‪َ , i.e. the ones who are‬ف ِ‬
‫‪َ , i.e. the ones who are being‬م ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه ‪honouring, or it can be the‬‬
‫‪honoured.‬‬
‫‪537‬‬
The ‫ َمن ُْص ْوب‬and ‫ َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح‬Slots
The ‫ َم ْصدَ ر‬can have regular ‫ َمن ُْص ْوب‬and ‫ َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح‬slots.
These slots may occur in two ways:
1. After the ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬.
ِ ِ ‫َف ْه ُم ال َّطال‬
‫ب الدَّ ْر َس‬
the student’s understanding of the lesson
‫الدَّ ْر َس‬ ِ ِ ‫ال َّطال‬
‫ب‬ ‫َف ْه ُم‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِه‬ ِ ‫َف‬

‫اعل‬ ‫َم ْصدَ ر‬
2. Immediately after the ‫ َم ْصدَ ر‬.

‫َط َلب ل ِ ْل ِع ْل ِم‬
seeking knowledge
‫ل ِ ْل ِع ْل ِم‬ ‫َط َلب‬
‫َجار َو َم ْج ُر ْور‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِه َغیْ ُر َص ِر ْيح‬ ‫َم ْصدَ ر‬
Note
The ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح‬in a verbal phrase is commonly formed with the
‫ َح ْرف َجار‬of ‫ ِل‬.
ِ ‫ب لِلدَّ ْر‬
‫س‬ ِ ِ ‫َف ْه ُم ال َّطال‬
the student’s understanding of the lesson
538
‫‪Note‬‬
‫‪َ can be made negative by adding the‬م ْصدَ ر ‪A verbal phrase with a‬‬
‫‪ before it.‬عَدَ م ‪word‬‬
‫عَدَ ُم ا ْل َف ْه ِم ل ِلدَّ ْر ِ‬
‫س‬
‫‪not understanding the lesson‬‬
‫‪Translate the following verbal phrases and identify the different‬‬
‫‪slots.‬‬
‫َوعْدُ اللِ ا ْل ُم ْح ِسن ِ ْی َن ا ْل َجنَّ َة‬ ‫‪)21‬‬ ‫َّاس‬ ‫ِ‬
‫إِن َْذ ُار ْاْلَ ْنبِ َیاء الن َ‬ ‫‪)11‬‬ ‫‪َ )1‬د ْف ُع ا ْل ِفت َِن‬
‫نَدَ ا َم ُة ا ْل َكافِ ِر ْي َن َي ْو َم ا ْل ِق َیا َم ِة‬ ‫ِ ِ‬ ‫‪ )2‬إِ َرا َد ُة ا ْل َخ ْی ِر‬
‫‪)22‬‬ ‫قرا َء‬‫ُظ ْل ُم ْاْلَغْن َیاء ا ْل ُف َ‬ ‫‪)12‬‬
‫اف ا ْل ُم ْذنِبِ ْی َن بِ ُذن ُْوبِ ِه ْم‬‫اِعْتِ َر ُ‬ ‫‪)23‬‬ ‫ب الدَّ ْر َس‬ ‫كِتَا َب ُة ال ُّط ََّّل ِ‬ ‫‪)13‬‬ ‫الص ََّل ِة‬
‫‪ )3‬إِ َقا َم ُة َّ‬
‫ب‬ ‫ب ا ْل ُم َع ِّل ِم َع َلی ال َّطال ِ ِ‬ ‫غ ََض ُ‬ ‫‪)24‬‬ ‫َم َر ُض ا ْل َجدِّ َق ْب َل َم ْوتِ ِه‬ ‫‪)14‬‬ ‫‪َ )4‬ش ْر ُح الدَّ ْر ِ‬
‫س‬
‫لص ََّل ِة‬ ‫عَدَ م استِ ْقب ِ ِ ِ ِ‬
‫ال ا ْلق ْب َلة ل َّ‬ ‫ُ ْ َ‬ ‫‪)25‬‬ ‫الص ََّل ِة‬ ‫َّاس َب ْعدَ َّ‬ ‫ل ِ َقا ُء الن ِ‬ ‫‪)15‬‬ ‫‪َ )5‬جزَ ا ُء ال َّظال ِ ِم ْی َن‬
‫الر ُس َل ل ِ ِهدَ ا َي ِة الن ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫نَومِ ْي َق ْب َل َص ََّل ِة ال ُّظ ْه ِر‬ ‫ك ا ْل َح ِّج‬ ‫َاس ِ‬ ‫‪َ )6‬أداء من ِ‬
‫َّاس‬ ‫َب ْع ُث الل ُّ‬ ‫‪)26‬‬ ‫‪)16‬‬ ‫َ ُ َ‬
‫الصائِ ِم ْی َن َأ َّيا َم َر َم َض َ‬
‫ان‬ ‫َع َط ُش َّ‬ ‫‪)27‬‬ ‫ك‬ ‫ك فِي وج ِه َأبِی ِ‬
‫َ ْ ْ‬
‫ابتِسام ِ‬
‫ْ َ ُ‬ ‫‪)17‬‬ ‫‪ )7‬اِ ْستِ َش َار ُة َذ ِو ْي ِع ْلم‬
‫الر ُس ْو ِل ﷺ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫إِنْزَ ُال ا ْل ُق ْرآن زَ َم َن َّ‬ ‫‪)28‬‬ ‫ان لِلن ِ‬
‫َّاس‬ ‫الشی َط ِ‬
‫إِ ْض ََّل ُل َّ ْ‬ ‫‪)18‬‬ ‫ب ا ْل َم ْر ِء ِْلَ ْهلِ ِه‬ ‫‪ )8‬ك َْس ُ‬
‫‪ُ )29‬حزْ ُن ْاْلُ ِّم َع َلی ُأ ِّم َها َب ْعدَ َم ْوتِ َها‬ ‫ُظ ُه ْو ُر ا ْل ِفت َِن َق ْب َل ا ْل ِق َیا َم ِة‬ ‫َّاس لِنِع ِم اللِ‬
‫‪)19‬‬ ‫‪ُ )9‬ك ْف ُر الن ِ َ‬
‫ب ِْلَ َساتِ َذتِ ِه ْم‬ ‫احتِ َرا ِم ال ُّط َََّّّٓل ِ‬
‫‪ )30‬عَدَ ُم ْ‬ ‫َت ْربِ َی ُة ْاْلَ َب َو ْي ِن ِْلَ ْو َْل ِد ِه ْم‬ ‫‪)20‬‬ ‫َاة ل ِ ْل ُف َق َر ِاء‬
‫‪ )10‬إِيتَاء الزَّ ك ِ‬
‫ْ ُ‬
‫‪539‬‬
‫‪َ Verbal Phrase in a Sentence‬م ْصدَ ر ‪Usage of a‬‬
‫‪َ verbal phrase occurs as one of the main slots of a sentence.‬م ْصدَ ر ‪A‬‬
‫ُش ْر ُب ا ْل َخ ْم ِر َح َرام‬
‫‪Drinking alcohol is forbidden.‬‬
‫َح َرام‬ ‫ا ْل َخ ْم ِر‬ ‫ُش ْر ُب‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ ‫َم ْصدَ ر‬
‫‪ )8‬ما ُلب ُثنَا فِي الدُّ ْنیا إِ َّْل كَساعَة و ِ‬ ‫الس ْو ِق‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫احدَ ة‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ ْ‬ ‫َس َأ ْنتَظ ُر ُر ُج ْو َع َك م َن ُّ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫ب‬ ‫الل بِ َص ْب ِر ِه ْم ِعنْدَ ا ْل َم َصائِ ِ‬ ‫‪َ )9‬ي ْج ِز ْي ِه ُم ُ‬ ‫ا ْل ِغ ْی َب ُة ِذك ُْر َك َأ َخ َ‬
‫اك بِ َما َي ْك َر ُه‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫ب ا ْل َو ْج ِه‬ ‫َن َض ْر ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫إِ َّن َك ْثر َة ا ْل َك ََّل ِم َت ْضیِیع ل ِ ْلو ْق ِ‬
‫‪ )10‬ن ََهی َر ُس ْو ُل الل ﷺ ع ْ‬ ‫ت‬ ‫ْ َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫ب ِْلَ َساتِ َذتِ ِه ْم‬ ‫احتِ َرا ِم ال ُّط ََّّل ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )11‬أغ َْض َبن ْي عَدَ ُم ْ‬ ‫ُك ل ِ ْل َك ََّل ِم ُي ْف ِسدُ الدَّ ْر َس‬
‫إِ ْس َراع َ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫‪ )12‬عَزَ م ْاْلَب و ْاْلُم َع َلی َتس ِمی ِة ابن ِ ِهما َعبدَ اللِ‬ ‫‪ )5‬مِن السن َِّة بدْ ُأ ك ُِّل َشيء بِاس ِم اللِ‬
‫ْ َ ْ َ ْ‬ ‫ُ َ ُّ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫َ ُّ َ‬
‫‪َ )13‬ل َقدْ َر َأی َبن ُْو إِ ْس َرائِ ْی َل إِغ َْر َاق فِ ْر َع ْو َن بِ َأ ْع ُین ِ ِه ْم‬ ‫َج ْیب‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ج ْه ُل َك ل ِ ٰه ِذ ِه ا ْل َم َسائِ ِل َأ ْمر ع ِ‬
‫الص َحا َب ِة إِ ْخ َوان َُه ْم َع َلی َأ ْن ُف ِس ِه ْم‬ ‫‪َ )14‬ل َقدْ َأع ِ‬
‫ْج َبن ْي إِ ْي َث ُار َّ‬
‫َ‬ ‫س َل ْی ًَّل‬‫‪َ )7‬أ َم َر ْتنَا ا ْل ُم َع ِّل َم ُة بِكِتَا َب ِة الدُّ ُر ْو ِ‬
‫‪540‬‬
The ‫اع ِل‬ ِ ‫ اِسم ا ْل َف‬Verbal Phrase
ُ ْ
1. Construction of a ‫اع ِل‬ ِ ‫ اِسم ا ْل َف‬verbal phrase.
ُ ْ
ِ ِ
2. Usage of an ‫ ا ْس ُم ا ْل َفاع ِل‬verbal phrase in a sentence.
Construction of an ‫اع ِل‬ ِ ‫ اِسم ا ْل َف‬Verbal Phrase
ُ ْ
ِ ِ
An ‫ ا ْس ُم ا ْل َفاع ِل‬verbal phrase consists of essential and non-essential
slots.
There are two essential slots found in an ‫اع ِل‬ ِ ‫ اِسم ا ْل َف‬verbal phrase.
ُ ْ
ِ ِ
1. An ‫ ا ْس ُم ا ْل َفاع ِل‬slot
2. A ‫اعل‬ِ ‫ َف‬slot
There are two non-essential slots in an ‫اع ِل‬ِ ‫ اِسم ا ْل َف‬verbal phrase.
ُ ْ
ِ
1. A ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْیه‬slot
2. ‫ َمن ُْص ْوب‬or ‫ َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح‬slot(s)
ِ ‫ اِسم ا ْل َف‬verbal phrase.

The table below summarises the slots of an ‫اع ِل‬ ُ ْ
ِ ‫ اِسم ا ْل َف‬Verbal Phrase
‫ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬ ِ ‫َف‬
‫اعل‬ ِ ‫اِسم َف‬
‫اعل‬ ُ ْ
541
ِ ‫ َف‬Slot
The ‫اعل‬
ِ ‫ اسم ا ْل َف‬must have a ‫اعل‬
The ‫اعل‬ ِ ‫ َف‬. This can occur in two ways:
ُ ْ
1. As a ‫ ِض ِم ْیر ُم ْستَتِر‬.
‫الر ُج ُل َسامِع‬
َّ
The man is listening.
‫َسامِع‬ ‫الر ُج ُل‬

َّ
ِ ‫اعل وا ْل َف‬
)‫اع ُل ( ُه َو‬ ِ ‫اِسم َف‬
َ ُ ْ
2. As a regular ‫ َم ْر ُف ْوع‬noun.
‫الر ُج ُل َسامِع َو َلدُ ُه‬
َّ
The man’s son is listening.
‫َو َلدُ ُه‬ ‫َسامِع‬ ‫الر ُج ُل‬

َّ
ِ ‫َف‬
‫اعل‬ ُ ْ
Note
This ‫اع ِل‬ ِ ‫ اِسم ا ْل َف‬verbal phrase is translated like a ‫ جم َلة اِس ِمیة‬whose ‫ َخبر‬is a
ُ ْ َّ ْ ْ ُ َ
ِ ِ
‫ ُج ْم َلة ف ْعل َّیة‬. (see page 423)
The man’s son is listening. ✓
The man his son is listening. 
542
‫‪ُ Slot‬م َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬
‫اعل ‪When the‬‬ ‫اع ِل ‪َ of the‬ف ِ‬
‫‪َ , it can be followed by a‬ض ِمیر مستَتِر ‪ is a‬اِسم ا ْل َف ِ‬
‫ْ ُ‬ ‫ْ ُ ْ‬
‫‪.‬م ْفعول فِی ِه ‪ or‬م ْفعول بِ ِه ‪. This will be either the‬م َضاف إِ َلیهِ‬
‫ْ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫َ ُْ‬ ‫َ ُْ ْ‬
‫اع ِل ‪ُ of the‬م َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪The‬‬
‫م ْفعول بِ ِه ‪ as the‬اِسم ا ْل َف ِ‬
‫ْ ُ‬ ‫َ ُْ‬
‫ك ُُّل َن ْفس َذائِ َق ُة ا ْلمو ِ‬
‫ت‬ ‫َْ‬
‫‪Every soul is going to taste death.‬‬
‫ا ْلمو ِ‬
‫ت‬ ‫َذائِ َق ُة‬ ‫ك ُُّل َن ْفس‬
‫َْ‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ ‫اعل وا ْل َف ِ‬

‫اع ُل ِ‬
‫(ه َي)‬ ‫َ‬
‫اِسم َف ِ‬
‫ْ ُ‬
‫اع ِل ‪ُ of the‬م َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪The‬‬

‫م ْفعول فِی ِه ‪ as the‬اِسم ا ْل َف ِ‬
‫ْ ُ‬ ‫َ ُْ ْ‬
‫ُه َو َقائِ ُم ال َّل ْی ِل‬
‫‪He stands at night.‬‬
‫ال َّل ْی ِل‬ ‫َقائِ ُم‬ ‫ُه َو‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِیْ ِه‬ ‫اعل وا ْل َف ِ‬

‫اع ُل ُ‬
‫(ه َو)‬ ‫َ‬
‫ْ ُ‬
‫‪َ Slots‬غ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح ‪َ and‬من ُْص ْوب ‪The‬‬

‫‪َ slots.‬غیر ص ِريح ‪ and‬منْصوب ‪ can have regular‬اِسم ا ْل َف ِ‬
‫اع ِل ‪The‬‬ ‫ْ ُ‬ ‫َ ُ ْ‬ ‫ُْ َ ْ‬
‫َخالِد ُم َسافِر إِ َلی َم َّك َة َغدً ا‬
‫‪Khalid is travelling to Makkah tomorrow.‬‬
‫َغدً ا‬ ‫إِ َلی َم َّك َة‬ ‫ُم َسافِر‬ ‫َخالِد‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِیْ ِه‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِیْ ِه َغیْ ُر َص ِر ْيح‬ ‫اعل وا ْل َف ِ‬
‫اع ُل ُ‬
‫(ه َو)‬ ‫اِسم َف ِ‬
‫ْ ُ‬
‫‪543‬‬
Usage of an ‫اع ِل‬ ِ ‫ اِسم ا ْل َف‬Verbal Phrase in a Sentence
ُ ْ
ِ
The ‫ ْاس ُم ا ْل َفاع ِل‬in a verbal phrase can occur in two ways:
1. Without an ‫َا ْل‬
2. With an ‫َا ْل‬
ِ ‫ اِسم ا ْل َف‬without an ‫َا ْل‬
When the ‫اع ِل‬ ِ ‫ اسم ا ْل َف‬occurs without an ‫ َا ْل‬, it can occur in three slots:
ُ ْ
1. ‫خ َبر‬ َ
ِ ‫ُه َو َقائِم ِعنْدَ ا ْل َب‬
‫اب‬
He is standing by the door.
2. ‫َحال‬
ِ ‫َر َأ ْي ُت ُه َقائِ ًما ِعنْدَ ا ْل َب‬
‫اب‬
I saw him standing by the door.
3. As its own slot if it occurs after a ‫ َما ا ْل ُم َش َّب ُه ُة بِ َل ْی َس‬or ‫ َه ْمزَ ُة ِاْل ْستِ ْف َها ِم‬.
ِ ‫ما ك‬
ِ ‫َاذب الت‬
‫َّاج ُر‬ َ
The merchant is not lying.
ِ ‫َف‬
‫اعل‬ ‫َما ا ْل ُم َشبَّ ُه ُة بِ َلیْ َس‬
ُ ْ
ِ ‫الت‬
‫َّاج ُر‬ ِ ‫ك‬
‫َاذب‬ ‫َما‬
In this case, the ‫ َما ا ْل ُم َش َّب ُه ُة بِ َل ْی َس‬does not have an ‫ اِ ْسم‬and ‫ َخ َبر‬.
544
‫اعل ‪Translate the following. Notice the similarities between the‬‬ ‫ْ ُ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪.‬ف ْعل ُم َضارع ‪and the‬‬
‫َاد ُم ْو َن َع َلی َما َف َع ُل ْوا‬ ‫‪ُ )6‬هم ن ِ‬ ‫ِه َي َت ْأك ُُل َت ْم َر ًة‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫َاص ًرا َف ِق ْی ًرا‬
‫‪ )7‬ر َأی زُ بیر َأ َخاه ن ِ‬
‫ُ‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َما ُه َو آكِ ًَّل ْاْل َن‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫‪َ )8‬ر َأی زُ َب ْیر َأ َخا ُه َين ُْص ُر َف ِق ْی ًرا‬ ‫ادر َع َلی ك ُِّل َش ْيء‬ ‫الل َق ِ‬
‫ُ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫الل َجاز ك َُّل َن ْفس بِ َما ك ََس َب ْت‬
‫‪ُ )9‬‬ ‫َه ْل َأ ْنت ُْم َت ْق ِد ُر ْو َن َع َلی ٰذل ِ َك‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫‪َ )10‬ي ْج ِزي ُ‬

‫الل ك َُّل َن ْفس بِ َما ك ََس َب ْت‬ ‫‪ُ )5‬ه ْم َينْدَ ُم ْو َن َع َلی ُذن ُْوبِ ِه ْم‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ ِ‬ ‫َأ َق ِ‬ ‫‪َ )1‬ما َأ َنا بِ َعابِد َّما َع َبد ُّت ْم‬
‫اب َغدً ا؟‬ ‫ار َئة َأ ْنت َذل َك ا ْلك َت َ‬ ‫‪)11‬‬
‫َن ْح ُن َغائِ ُب ْو َن َع ِن ا ْل َمدْ َر َس ِة ْاْل َن‬ ‫‪)12‬‬ ‫‪َ )2‬أ َنائِ َمة َفاطِ َم ُة َب ْعدَ َقلِ ْیل؟‬
‫اس َي ْو َم ا ْل ِق َیا َم ِة‬
‫الل َجامِ ُع النَّ ِ‬
‫إِ َّن َ‬ ‫‪)13‬‬ ‫‪ْ )3‬اْلَ ْنبِ َیا ُء ُم ْهتَدُ ْو َن ُأ َّمت ُُه ْم‬
‫اجد للِ‬ ‫الر ُج ُل َو ُه َو َس ِ‬ ‫م َ ِ‬ ‫‪ )4‬ما َأ َنا بِبائِع بیتِي بِ َأ ْل ِ‬
‫ات ٰذل َك َّ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫‪)14‬‬ ‫ف ُجنَ ْیه‬ ‫َ َْ ْ‬ ‫َ‬
‫اس ُم ْج َت ِم ُع ْو َن ا ْل َی ْو َم فِي ا ْل َح ِد ْي َق ِة‬
‫النَّ ُ‬ ‫‪)15‬‬ ‫الل ُم ْب َتلِ ْی ُك ْم بِ َخ ْیر َوفِ ْتنَة‬
‫َه ْل َأ ْن َت ُم ْش َتر َك ْب ًشا ل ِ ِع ْی ِد ْاْلَ ْض َحى‬ ‫‪)16‬‬ ‫اضر ٰه َذا الدَّ ْر َس َغدً ا‬ ‫‪َ )6‬أ َنا ح ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫الل َأن َّي َت َو َّفانِ ْي َو ُه َو َراض َعنِّي‬ ‫َأ ْس َأ ُل َ‬ ‫‪)17‬‬ ‫الل َغافِ ًَّل َع َّما َي ْع َم ُل ْو َن‬
‫‪َ )7‬ل ْی َس ُ‬
‫ب‬ ‫َو َجد ُّت ُه َصابِ ًرا َع َلى َما َأ َصا َب ُه مِ َن ا ْل َم َصائِ ِ‬ ‫‪)18‬‬ ‫‪ْ )8‬اْلَ ُب َجالِس َأ ُخ ْو ُه ِعنْدَ ا ْل ِمنْ َب ِر‬
‫َأ َنا َْلبِس ٰه َذا ال َّث ْو َب َي ْو َم ا ْل ُج ُم َع ِة ِْلَ َّن ُه َج ِم ْیل‬ ‫‪)19‬‬ ‫‪ )9‬ا ْل َم ْر َأ ُة َصائِ َمة َغدً ا َم َع َأ ْو َْل ِد َها‬
‫ف‬ ‫َان ال ِّط ْف ُل نَائِ ًما فِي ا ْلغ ُْر َف ِة َق ْب َل َأ ْن َجا َء ُّ‬
‫الض ُی ْو ُ‬ ‫ك َ‬ ‫‪)20‬‬ ‫الس َف ِر ا ْل َی ْو َم‬ ‫ِ‬
‫اج ُع ْو َن م َن َّ‬
‫‪َ )10‬أ ُه ْم َر ِ‬
‫‪545‬‬
‫ال ‪ with an‬اِسم ا ْل َف ِ‬
‫اع ِل‬ ‫ْ ُ‬
‫اع ِل ‪When the‬‬ ‫‪,‬اِسم موصول ‪َ functions as an‬ا ْل ‪َ , the‬ا ْل ‪ occurs with an‬اسم ا ْل َف ِ‬
‫ْ ُ‬ ‫ْ َْ ُ ْ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪.‬ص َلة ‪ takes the place of the‬ا ْس ُم ا ْل ََّٓفاع ِل ‪and the‬‬ ‫ِ‬
‫اب ُه َو َص ِد ْي ِق ْي‬
‫ا ْل َقائِ ُم ِعنْدَ ا ْل َب ِ‬
‫‪The one standing by the door is my friend.‬‬
‫‪َ can occur in any slot in a sentence.‬ا ْل ‪ with an‬اِسم ا ْل َف ِ‬
‫اع ِل ‪The‬‬ ‫ْ ُ‬
‫َخ َبر‬ ‫َض ِم ْی ُر ا ْل َف ْص ِل‬ ‫ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬
‫َص ِد ْي ِق ْي‬ ‫ُه َو‬ ‫ِعنْدَ ا ْل َب ِ‬

‫اب‬ ‫ـ َقائِ ُم‬ ‫َا ْلـ‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه‬ ‫اِسم َف ِ‬

‫اعل‬ ‫ْ ُ‬
‫اِسم ا ْل َف ِ‬
‫اع ِل ‪Translate the following. Notice the similarities between the‬‬ ‫ْ ُ‬
‫ْ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪.‬صلة ‪ and its‬ا ْسم َم ْو ُص ْول ‪ and the‬ال ‪with‬‬
‫حب ا ْلمع ِّلم ُة ا ْلمجت َِهدَ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫َر َأ ْي ُت ا َّل ِذ ْي َي ْجلِ ُس‬
‫ات‬ ‫‪ُ )6‬ت ُّ ُ َ َ ُ ْ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫ت ا ْلبِن ُْت إِ َلی ال َّل َت ْی ِن َح َض َر َتا الدَّ ْر َس‬ ‫‪َ )7‬ن َظر ِ‬ ‫َر َأ ْي ُت ا ْل َجال ِ َس‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫َ‬
‫اض َر َت ْی ِن الدَّ ْر َس‬‫ت ا ْلبِن ُْت إِ َلی ا ْلح ِ‬ ‫‪َ )8‬ن َظر ِ‬ ‫َر َأ ْي ُت ا َّل ِذ ْي َي ْجلِ ُس َأ ُخ ْو ُه‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫َ‬ ‫َ‬
‫‪ )9‬ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن ُه ُم ا َّل ِذ ْي َن ُيؤْ مِن ُْو َن بِاللِ َو َر ُس ْول ِ ِه‬ ‫َر َأ ْي ُت ا ْل َجال ِ َس َأ ُخ ْو ُه‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫‪ )10‬ا ْل ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َن ُه ُم ا ْل ُمؤْ مِن ُْو َن بِاللِ َو َر ُس ْول ِ ِه‬ ‫الَّلتِ ْي َي ْجت َِهدْ َن‬ ‫ب ا ْل ُم َع ِّل َم ُة َّ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ُتح ُّ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫ار ْي بِا ْل َق ْر َي ِة‬ ‫الج ِ‬ ‫ات ِّ ِ‬
‫والش َیا ُه م َن الن َّْه ِر َ‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ت ْش َر ُب ا ْل َب َق َر ُ‬ ‫َل َی ْخ َس َر َّن ا ْل ُم َض ِّی ُع ْو َن ل ِ َو ْقتِ ِه ْم‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫َه ْل َأ َّد ْيت ُُم الزَّ كَا َة ا ْل َو ِ‬
‫‪َ )7‬ا ْْلك ُل ْو َن َأ ْم َو َال ا ْل َی َتا َمى َس َی ْأ ُك ُل ْو َن ف ْي ُب ُط ْون ِه ْم ً‬
‫نارا‬ ‫اج َب َة َع َلی ُك ْم‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫اج ْی َن ل ِ ْل َق ُب ْو ِل‬‫الر ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫الل ا ْل ُم ْع َجبِ ْی َن بِ َأع َْمال ِه ْم َب ِل َّ‬
‫ب ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪َْ )8‬ل ُيح ُّ‬ ‫الل التَّائِبِ ْی َن ا ْل ُم ْس َتغ ِْف ِر ْي َن ل ِ ُذن ُْوبِ ِه ْم‬
‫ب ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُيح ُّ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫ْج َبن ِ ْي َط َل ُب ُه ْم َل ُه‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪ )9‬ر َأي ُت بع َض ال ُّط ََّّل ِ ِ‬
‫ب َطالبِ ْی َن ا ْلع ْل َم َف َأع َ‬ ‫َ ْ َْ‬ ‫َّاز ِل َع َلی ال َّظال ِ ِم ْی َن‬ ‫َن ُع ْو ُذ بِاللِ مِ ْن عَذابِ ِه الن ِ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ ِ‬ ‫الل لِ ْل ُم ْش ِر ِك ْی َن ِب ِه َأ ْصنَا ًما َْل ُتغْنِ ْي َش ْیئًا‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )10‬ي ْو َم ا ْلق َیا َمة َس َینْدَ ُم ا ْل ُم ْس ِر ُف ْو َن َأ ْم َوا َل ُه ُم ا َّلت ْي َرزَ َق ُه ُم ُ‬
‫الل‬ ‫‪َْ )5‬ل َيغْف ُر ُ‬
‫‪546‬‬
Notes
ِ ‫ اِسم ا ْل َف‬verbal phrase may have an ‫ َا ْل‬.
1. The ‫ ُم َضاف‬in an ‫اعل‬ ُ ْ
‫الص ََّل ِة‬ ِ ِ
َّ ‫ا ْل ُمق ْیمي‬
ِ ‫ اِسم ا ْل َف‬can have either
2. The ‫ َم ْو ُص ْول‬in the form of an ‫ َا ْل‬before the ‫اع ِل‬ ُ ْ
a specific or general meaning.
‫ا ْل ُم ْجت َِهدُ ْو َن ُه ُم ا ْل َفائِزُ ْو َن‬
Those who work hard are successful.
In this example, the word ‫ ُم ْجت َِهدُ ْو َن‬can be referring to a specific
group of people who are hardworking, or it can be referring to
all hardworking people.
ِ ‫ اسم ا ْل َف‬occurs as the ‫ َخبر‬of ‫َان‬
3. If the ‫اع ِل‬ َ ‫ك‬, it will have the past
ُ ْ َ
continuous tense.
ِ ‫َان َقائِ ًما ِعنْدَ ا ْل َب‬
‫اب‬ َ ‫ك‬
He was standing by the door.
547
The ‫اع ِل‬ ِ ‫ الص َف ُة ا ْلم َشبه ُة بِاس ِم ا ْل َف‬Verbal Phrase
ْ َ َّ ُ ِّ
1. Construction of a ‫اع ِل‬ ِ ‫ ِص َفة م َشبهة بِاس ِم ا ْل َف‬verbal phrase.
ْ َ َّ ُ
ِ
2. Usage of a ‫ ِص َفة ُم َش َّب َهة بِ ْاس ِم ا ْل َفاع ِل‬verbal phrase in a sentence.
Construction of a ‫اع ِل‬ ِ ‫ ِص َفة م َشبهة بِاس ِم ا ْل َف‬Verbal Phrase
ْ َ َّ ُ
There are two essential slots in a ‫اع ِل‬ ِ ‫ ِص َفة م َشبهة بِاس ِم ا ْل َف‬verbal phrase:
ْ َ َّ ُ
ِ ِ
1. A ‫ ص َفة ُم َش َّب َهة بِ ْاس ِم ا ْل َفاع ِل‬slot
2. A ‫اعل‬ ِ ‫ َف‬slot
The table below summarises the parts of a ‫اع ِل‬ ِ ‫ ِص َفة م َشبهة بِاس ِم ا ْل َف‬verbal
ْ َ َّ ُ
phrase.
ِ ‫ ِص َفة م َشبهة بِاس ِم ا ْل َف‬Verbal Phrase
‫اع ِل‬ ْ َ َّ ُ
ِ ‫َف‬
‫اعل‬ ِ ‫ِص َفة م َشبهة بِاس ِم ا ْل َف‬
‫اع ِل‬ ْ َ َّ ُ
The ‫اعل‬ ِ ‫ َف‬Slot

ِ ‫ ِص َفة م َشبهة بِاس ِم ا ْل َف‬must have a ‫اعل‬
The ‫اع ِل‬ ِ ‫ َف‬. This can occur in three ways:
ْ َ َّ ُ
1. As a ‫ ِض ِم ْیر ُم ْستَتِر‬.
‫الل َغ ُف ْور‬
ُ
Allah is Forgiving.
‫َغ ُف ْور‬ ‫الل‬

ُ
)‫(ه َو‬ ِ ‫ِص َفة م َشبهة و َف‬
ُ ‫اعل‬ َ َ َّ ُ
2. As a regular noun in the ‫ َم ْر ُف ْوع‬state.
‫الل َس ِر ْيع ِح َسا ُب ُه‬
ُ
Allah’s reckoning is swift.
‫ِح َسا ُب ُه‬ ‫َس ِر ْيع‬ ‫الل‬

ُ
ِ ‫َف‬
‫اعل‬ ‫ِص َفة ُم َشبَّ َهة‬
548
3. As a ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬.
ِ ‫الل س ِريع ا ْل‬
ِ ‫ح َس‬
‫اب‬ ُ ْ َ ُ
ِ ‫ا ْل‬
ِ ‫ح َس‬
‫اب‬ ‫َس ِر ْي ُع‬ ‫الل‬
ُ
ِ ‫َف‬
‫اعل‬ ‫ِص َفة ُم َش َّب َهة‬
The ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َلیْ ِه‬, i.e. ‫اب‬ ِ ِ

ُ ‫ا ْلح َس‬, was originally the ‫ َفاعل‬with a pronoun.
‫الل َس ِر ْيع ِح َسا ُب ُه‬
ُ
However, for brevity it is expressed in a possessive phrase.
This structure can be translated in different ways:
Allah’s reckoning is swift.
Allah is swift in reckoning.
Notes
1. This ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬-‫ ُم َضاف‬structure is simply for ease of pronunciation; it
does not have a meaning of ownership.
2. When the ‫اع ِل‬ ِ ‫ اِسم ا ْل َف‬is in the meaning of a ‫اع ِل‬
ِ ‫ ِص َفة م َشبهة بِاس ِم ا ْل َف‬, i.e. it
ُ ْ ْ َ َّ ُ
ِ
portrays a long-term meaning, its ‫ َفاعل‬can also occur as a ‫ُم َضاف‬
‫إِ َل ْی ِه‬.
ِ
َّ ‫الر ُج ُل َدائ ُم‬
‫الص ْو ِم‬ َّ
The man’s fasting is continuous.
‫الص ْو ِم‬
َّ ‫َدائِ ُم‬ ‫الر ُج ُل‬
َّ
ِ ‫َف‬
‫اعل‬ ُ ْ
The ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َلیْ ِه‬i.e. ‫الص ْو ِم‬ ِ
َّ was originally the ‫ َفاعل‬with a pronoun.
‫الر ُج ُل َدائِم َص ْو ُم ُه‬
َّ
549
‫اع ِل ‪Usage of a‬‬ ‫‪ِ Verbal Phrase in a Sentence‬ص َفة م َشبهة بِاس ِم ا ْل َف ِ‬
‫ُ َّ َ ْ‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪ِ verbal phrase usually occurs as:‬ص َفة ُم َش َّب َهة بِ ْاس ِم ا ْل َفاع ِل ‪The‬‬
‫َخ َبر ‪1.‬‬
‫َن ْعت ‪2.‬‬
‫َت ُأ ُّم َأ ْح َمدَ كَثِ ْی َر َة الت ََِّّل َو ِة‬‫‪ )7‬كَان ْ‬ ‫تِ ْل َك َب َق َرة كَثِ ْی َر ُة ال َّل َب ِن‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫‪ )8‬تِ ْل َك ا ْل َح ِد ْي َق ُة كَثِ ْی َر ُة ْاْلَ ْش َج ِ‬
‫ار‬ ‫الص ْو ِم‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َب َدائ ُم َّ‬ ‫َأ ُبو زَ ْين َ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫الر ْح َم ِة‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َت َجدَّ ت ْي َشد ْيدَ َة َّ‬ ‫‪ )9‬كَان ْ‬ ‫اب﴾‬ ‫ح َس ِ‬ ‫﴿الل س ِريع ا ْل ِ‬
‫ُ َ ْ ُ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫الص ْب ِر َقلِ ْی َل ا ْل َجزَ ِع‬ ‫‪ )10‬إِ َّنه ك َ ِ‬ ‫الل َش ِد ْيدُ ا ْل ِع َق ِ‬
‫َان َشد ْيدَ َّ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫اب﴾‬ ‫﴿إِ َّن َ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫َان َق ْو ُم َصالِح َث ُم ْو ُد َش ِد ْيدَ ا ْل ُق َّو ِة‬ ‫‪ )11‬ك َ‬ ‫ان َش ْهر كَثِ ْی ُر ا ْل َب َرك َِة‬‫‪َ )5‬ر َم َض ُ‬
‫َان َر ُس ْو ُل اللِ ﷺ َط ِو ْي َل ا ْل ِق َیا ِم بِال َّل ْی ِل‬ ‫‪ )12‬ك َ‬ ‫‪ )6‬ه ِذ ِه ْاْلَر ُض َطیب ُة ا ْلم ِ‬
‫اء‬ ‫ِّ َ َ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫ٰ‬
‫‪Note‬‬
‫ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪َ , and the‬ن ْعت ‪ُ can be the‬م َضاف ‪In a possessive structure, the‬‬
‫‪َ .‬منْ ُع ْوت ‪be the‬‬
‫َي َت َق َّب ُل الل َصال ِ َح ْاْلَع َْم ِ‬
‫ال‬ ‫ُ‬
‫‪Allah accepts good deeds.‬‬
‫ْاْلَعْ م ِ‬
‫ال‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َصال ِ َح‬ ‫الل‬
‫ُ‬ ‫َي َت َق َّب ُل‬
‫َمنْ ُع ْوت‬ ‫نَ ْعت‬
‫‪550‬‬
‫‪ Verbal Phrase‬اِ ْس ُم ا ْل َم ْف ُع ْو ِل ‪The‬‬
‫‪ِ verbal phrase is constructed in the same manner as‬اس ُم ا ْل َم ْف ُع ْو ِل ‪An‬‬
‫اع ِل ‪the‬‬‫اعل ‪. However, instead of having a‬اِسم ا ْل َف ِ‬ ‫‪َ as an essential part,‬ف ِ‬
‫ْ ُ‬
‫اع ِل ‪it has a‬‬ ‫‪.‬نَائِب ا ْل َف ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ب َم ْق ُب ْو َلة َت ْو َب ُت ُه‬ ‫ِ‬
‫التّائ ُ‬
‫‪The repentance of the one who‬‬
‫‪repents is going to be accepted.‬‬
‫َت ْو َب ُت ُه‬ ‫َم ْق ُب ْو َلة‬ ‫ب‬ ‫ِ‬

‫التّائ ُ‬
‫نَائِب ا ْل َف ِ‬
‫اع ِل‬ ‫اس ُم ُم ْف ُع ْول‬
‫ُ‬ ‫ْ‬
‫‪ِ .‬شبه ا ْلجم َل ِة ‪ may also occur as a‬اِسم م ْفعول ‪ of an‬نَائِب ا ْل َف ِ‬
‫اع ِل ‪The‬‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫ْ ُ َ ُْ‬ ‫ُْ ُ ْ‬
‫اج َم ْغ ُف ْور َل ُه ْم‬
‫ا ْل ُح َّج ُ‬
‫‪The pilgrims are forgiven.‬‬
‫‪Note‬‬
‫‪ will‬اِسم ا ْلم ْفعو ِل ‪َ , the‬غیر ص ِريح ‪ is‬اِسم ا ْلم ْفعو ِل ‪ of the‬نَائِب ا ْل َف ِ‬
‫اع ِل ‪When the‬‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫ْ ُ َ ُْ‬ ‫ُْ َ ْ‬ ‫ْ ُ َ ُْ‬
‫‪remain masculine and singular in all cases.‬‬
‫ا ْل ِغ ْی َب ُة َمن ِْهي َعن َْها‬
‫‪Backbiting is prohibited.‬‬
‫‪ُ )8‬م َح َّمد ﷺ َر ُس ْول َم ْر ُح ْوم ُأ َّم ُت ُه‬ ‫الل َع ِن ا ْل ِغ ْی َب ِة‬ ‫‪ )1‬ن ََهی ُ‬
‫‪ )9‬إِ َّن ا ْل ُمنَافِ ِق ْی َن َم ْط ُب ْوع َع َلی ُق ُل ْوبِ ِه ْم‬ ‫َن ا ْل ِغ ْی َب ِة‬
‫‪ )2‬ن ُِهي ع ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫الر َج ُال َم ْك ُر ْو َهة َأ ْخ ََّل ُق ُه ْم‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪َ )3‬ا ْل ِغ ْی َب ُة َمن ِْهي َعن َْها‬
‫‪ٰ )10‬هؤُ َْلء ِّ‬
‫‪َ )11‬أ ُب ْو َب َكر ﭬ مِ َن ا ْل َع َش َر ِة ا ْل ُم َب َّش َر ِة بِا ْل َجن َِّة‬ ‫اع ُل ُه‬‫‪َ )4‬ا ْل ِفع ُل مر ُفوع َف ِ‬
‫ْ َْ ْ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫اس ُم ُه َو َمنْ ُص ْوب َخ َب ُر ُه‬ ‫ص َم ْر ُف ْوع ْ‬ ‫‪َ )12‬ا ْلف ْع ُل النَّاق ُ‬ ‫اف َم ْج ُر ْور َما َب ْعدَ ُه‬ ‫‪َ )5‬ا ْل ُم َض ُ‬
‫الش ْی ُخ ُه َو ا ْل ُم ْست ََش ُار فِي ْاْلُ ُم ْو ِر ا ْل َعظِ ْی َم ِة‬ ‫‪ٰ )13‬ه َذا َّ‬ ‫َّاس َم ْج ِز ُّي ْو َن بِ َأع َْمال ِ ِه ْم‬
‫‪َ )6‬الن ُ‬
‫اع ُله و ٰذل ِ َك فِعل مجهول َف ِ‬
‫اع ُل ُه‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪َ )7‬ا ْل ُم ْخلِ ُص ْو َن َم َق ُب ْول ع ََم ُل ُه ْم‬
‫ْ َ ْ ُْ‬ ‫‪ٰ )14‬ه َذا ف ْعل َم ْع ُل ْوم َف ُ َ‬
‫‪551‬‬
The ‫ اِ ْس ُم ال َّت ْف ِض ْی ِل‬Verbal Phrase
1. Conjugation of the ‫اِ ْس ُم ال َّت ْف ِض ْی ِل‬.
2. Construction of an ‫ اِ ْس ُم ال َّت ْف ِض ْی ِل‬verbal phrase.
3. Usage of a ‫ اِ ْس ُم ال َّت ْف ِض ْی ِل‬verbal phrase in a sentence.
Conjugation of ‫اِ ْس ُم التَّ ْف ِض ْی ِل‬
The pattern and meaning of ‫ اِ ْس ُم ال َّت ْف ِض ْی ِل‬has been discussed
previously. (see page 54)
The complete conjugation of the ‫ اِ ْس ُم ال َّت ْف ِض ْی ِل‬is as follows:
‫اِ ْس ُم ال َّت ْف ِض ْی ِل‬
‫َأ ْك َب ُر‬ ‫ُم ْف َرد‬

ِ ‫َأ ْكبر‬
ََ
‫ َأكَابِ ُر‬،‫َأ ْك َب ُر ْو َن‬ ‫َج ْمع‬
‫ُك ْب َری‬ ‫ُم ْف َرد‬

ِ ‫ُكبري‬
‫ان‬ ‫ُم َثنًّی‬ ُ ‫َا ْل ُمؤَ ن‬
‫َّث‬
َ َْ
‫ ُك َبر‬،‫ُك ْب َر َيات‬ ‫َج ْمع‬
552
Construction of an ‫ اِ ْس ُم ال َّت ْف ِض ْی ِل‬Verbal Phrase
The ‫ اِ ْس ُم ال َّت ْف ِض ْی ِل‬verbal phrase consists of essential and non-essential
slots.
There are two essential slots found in an ‫ اِ ْس ُم ال َّت ْف ِض ْی ِل‬verbal phrase:
1. The ‫ اِ ْس ُم ال َّت ْف ِض ْی ِل‬slot
2. The ‫اعل‬ ِ ‫ َف‬slot
There are two non-essential slots in an ‫ اِ ْس ُم ال َّت ْف ِض ْی ِل‬verbal phrase.

1. The ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬slot
2. ‫ َمن ُْص ْوب‬or ‫ َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح‬slot (s)
The table below summarises the slots of an ‫ اِ ْس ُم ال َّت ْف ِض ْی ِل‬verbal phrase.

ِ ‫ اِسم ا ْل َف‬Verbal Phrase
‫اعل‬ ‫اِ ْس ُم ال َّت ْف ِض ْی ِل‬
ِ ‫ َف‬Slot
The ‫اعل‬
ِ ‫ َف‬of the ‫ اِسم ال َّت ْف ِضی ِل‬is always a ‫ َض ِمیر مستَتِر‬.
The ‫اعل‬ ْ ُ ْ ْ ُ ْ
ِ ‫َأسماء َأ ْطو ُل بن‬
َ‫َات َأ ْح َمد‬ َ َ ُ َ ْ
Asma is the tallest daughter of Ahmad.
ِ ‫ َف‬of ‫ َأ ْطو ُل‬is a ‫ َض ِمیر مستَتِر‬i.e ‫ ِهي‬.
In this example, the ‫اعل‬ َ ْ ُ ْ َ
553
The ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬Slot
The ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬of the ‫ اِ ْس ُم ال َّت ْف ِض ْی ِل‬can occur in two ways:
1. As a ‫ ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬.
ِ ‫الن‬
‫َّاس‬ ‫َأ ْصدَ ُق‬ ‫ُم َح َّمد‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ )‫(ه َو‬ ِ ‫اِسم التَّ ْف ِضی ِل و َف‬

ُ ‫اعل‬ َ ْ ُ ْ
2. As a ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح‬with ‫مِ ْن‬.
‫َخ ِد ْي َج َة‬ ‫مِ ْن‬ ‫َأ ْط َو ُل‬ ‫َفاطِ َم ُة‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه َغیْ ُر َص ِريح‬ )‫(ه َي‬ ِ ‫اِسم التَّ ْف ِضی ِل و َف‬
ِ ‫اعل‬ َ ْ ُ ْ
Translation of the ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬of the ‫اِ ْس ُم ال َّت ْف ِضیْ ِل‬

1. When the ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬of the ‫ اِ ْس ُم ال َّت ْف ِض ْی ِل‬is mentioned, it has a
comparative meaning. This is translated as -er or more.
‫َفاطِ َم ُة ڤ َأ ْط َو ُل مِ ْن َخ ِد ْي َج َة‬
Fatima is taller than Khadeejah.
2. When the ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬of the ‫ اِ ْس ُم ال َّت ْف ِض ْی ِل‬is not mentioned, it has a
superlative meaning. This is translated as -est or most.
‫الص ََّل ُة َأ ْف َض ُل ع ََمل‬
َّ
Salah is the most virtuous deed.
Salah is the most virtuous of deeds.
554
‫‪َ Slots‬غ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح ‪َ and‬من ُْص ْوب ‪The‬‬
‫‪َ slots.‬غ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح ‪َ and‬من ُْص ْوب ‪ can have other‬اِ ْس ُم ال َّت ْف ِض ْی ِل ‪The‬‬
‫َات بِ ُأ ِّم َها ِعنْدَ كِ َب ِر َها‬
‫َفاطِم ُة َأبر ا ْلبن ِ‬
‫َ َ ُّ َ‬
‫‪Fatima is the most dutiful of the girls to her mother‬‬
‫‪in her old age.‬‬
‫‪The tarkib of this will be written as follows:‬‬
‫ِعنْدَ كِ َب ِر َها‬ ‫بِ ُأ ِّم َها‬ ‫ا ْلبن ِ‬

‫َات‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َأ َب ُّر‬ ‫َفاطِ َم ُة‬
‫ُم َضاف – ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬ ‫َجار ‪َ -‬م ْج ُر ْور‬ ‫ُم َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه‬ ‫ُم َضاف‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول فِیْ ِه‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه َثان َغیْ ُر َص ِر ْيح‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ ‫(ه َي)‬ ‫اِسم التَّ ْف ِضی ِل و َف ِ‬
‫اعل ِ‬
‫ْ َ‬ ‫ْ ُ‬
‫‪َ when it is a word like‬ت ْمیِ ْیز ‪ to have a‬اِ ْس ُم ال َّت ْف ِض ْی ِل ‪It is common for the‬‬
‫‪َ , etc.‬أ َشدُّ ‪َ ,‬أ ْح َس ُن ‪َ ,‬أ َق ُّل ‪َ ,‬أ ْك َث ُر‬
‫اج ًة‬ ‫ُه ْم َأ ْك َث ُر الن ِ‬
‫َّاس َح َ‬
‫‪They are the neediest people.‬‬
‫‪The tarkib of this will be as follows:‬‬
‫اج ًة‬
‫َح َ‬ ‫الن ِ‬
‫َّاس‬ ‫َأ ْك َث ُر‬ ‫ُه ْم‬
‫َت ْمیِ ْیز‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ ‫(ه ْم)‬ ‫اِسم التَّ ْف ِضی ِل و َف ِ‬
‫اعل ُ‬ ‫ْ َ‬ ‫ْ ُ‬
‫‪555‬‬
‫‪ Verbal Phrase in a Sentence‬اِ ْس ُم ال َّت ْف ِض ْی ِل ‪Usage of an‬‬
‫‪ in a verbal phrase can occur in two ways:‬اِ ْس ُم ال َّت ْف ِض ْی ِل ‪The‬‬
‫َا ْل ‪1. Without an‬‬
‫َا ْل ‪2. With an‬‬
‫َا ْل ‪ without an‬اِ ْس ُم ال َّت ْف ِض ْی ِل ‪The‬‬
‫‪َ , it is usually masculine and‬ا ْل ‪ does not have an‬اِ ْس ُم ال َّت ْف ِض ْی ِل ‪When the‬‬
‫‪singular.‬‬
‫اإليم ِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫الص ََّل ُة َأ ْف َض ُل ع ََمل َب ْعدَ ْ ِ ْ َ‬
‫َّ‬
‫‪Salah is the most virtuous deed after faith.‬‬
‫‪َ , remains masculine even‬أ ْف َض ُل ‪, i.e.‬اِ ْس ُم ال َّت ْف ِض ْی ِل ‪In this example, the‬‬
‫الص ََّل ُة ‪though it is referring to‬‬
‫‪َّ which is feminine.‬‬
‫‪ changes to agree with the‬اِ ْس ُم ال َّت ْف ِض ْی ِل ‪In some cases, however, the‬‬
‫‪item it is describing.‬‬
‫الصحاب ُة َأح ِ‬
‫اس ُن الن ِ‬
‫َّاس‬ ‫الص َحا َب ُة َأ ْح َس ُن الن ِ‬
‫َّاس‬
‫َّ َ َ َ‬ ‫َّ‬
‫‪The Sahaba are the best of people.‬‬
‫‪َ becomes plural to agree with‬أ َح ِاس ُن ‪ i.e.‬اِ ْس ُم ال َّت ْف ِض ْی ِل ‪In this example, the‬‬
‫الص َحا َب ُة‬
‫‪َّ .‬‬
‫‪.‬مِ ْن ‪َ with‬م ْج ُر ْور ‪ُ and as a‬م َضاف إِ َل ْی ِه ‪َ as a‬م ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه ‪translation of‬‬
‫ب‬ ‫َّاس للِ َأ ْب َعدُ ُه ْم مِ َن ُّ‬
‫الذن ُْو ِ‬ ‫‪َ )9‬أ ْع َبدُ الن ِ‬ ‫‪َ )1‬ال َّلبن َأبرد مِن ا ْلم ِ‬
‫اء‬ ‫َ ُ َْ ُ َ َ‬
‫‪َ )10‬ا ْل ُم ْجت َِهدُ ْو َن َأ ْك َث ُر مِ َن ا ْل ُك َسا َلی عَدَ ًدا‬ ‫‪ )2‬نُسیب ُة َأبر ا ْلبن ِ‬
‫َات بِ ُأ ِّم َها‬ ‫َ ْ َ َ ُّ َ‬
‫جد فِي الدُّ ْن َیا‬ ‫جدُ ا ْل َح َرا ُم َأ ْك َب ُر َم ْس ِ‬
‫‪َ )11‬ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬ ‫َّاس بِاللِ‬
‫ف الن ِ‬ ‫َا ْل ُع َل َما ُء َأع َْر ُ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫الر ُس ْو ِل ﷺ َأ ْت َق ُ‬ ‫مصعب َأ ْقوی مِن إبر ِ‬
‫اه ْم‬ ‫َّاس إِ َلی َّ‬
‫َأ ْق َر ُب الن ِ‬ ‫‪)12‬‬ ‫اه ْی َم‬ ‫ْ َْ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ُ ْ َ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫َا ْل ُخ ُل ُق ا ْلحسن َأ ْث َق ُل َشيء فِي ا ْل ِمیزَ ِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫‪)13‬‬ ‫ٰه ِذ ِه ْاْلَ ْر ُض َأ ْي َب ُس مِ ْن تِ ْل َك‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫ْ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫َ َ ُ‬
‫السن َِّة‬ ‫ِ‬
‫الر ُس ْو ِل ﷺ َأ ْب َعدُ ُه ْم م َن ُّ‬
‫َأبعدُ النَّ ِ ِ‬
‫اس م َن َّ‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫‪)14‬‬ ‫آن؟‬‫َأي كِتَاب َأصدَ ُق مِن ا ْل ُقر ِ‬
‫َ ْ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫ُّ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫اط ا ْل ُم ْست َِق ْی ِم‬‫َن الصر ِ‬
‫َّاس ع ِ ِّ َ‬
‫َا ْلج ِ‬
‫اه ُل ْو َن َأ َض ُّل الن ِ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫‪)15‬‬ ‫َّاس ِخ َی ُار ُه ْم ِْلَ ْهلِ ِه ْم‬
‫ِخ َی ُار الن ِ‬ ‫‪)7‬‬
‫َاب اللِ‬ ‫الص َحا َب ِة لِكِت ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫إِ َّن ا ْل ُق ْر َ‬
‫َان ُأ َب ُّي ْب ُن َك ْعب ﭬ َأ ْق َر َء َّ‬ ‫ك َ‬ ‫‪)16‬‬ ‫آن َأ ْع َظ ُم كتَاب َأنْزَ َل ُه ُ‬
‫الل‬ ‫‪)8‬‬
‫‪556‬‬
‫َا ْل ‪ with an‬اِ ْس ُم ال َّت ْف ِض ْی ِل ‪The‬‬
‫‪َ .‬منْ ُع ْوت ‪ُ or‬م ْبتَدأ ‪َ , it agrees with its‬ا ْل ‪ has an‬اِ ْس ُم ال َّت ْف ِض ْی ِل ‪When the‬‬
‫ا ْل َو َلدُ ْاْلَ ْك َب ُر‬
‫‪the eldest boy‬‬
‫‪َ )5‬ا ْ ِ‬
‫إل ْس ََّل ُم ُه َو الدِّ ْي ُن ْاْلَ ْح َس ُن‬ ‫َا ْل ُم َّت ُق ْو َن ُه ُم ْاْلَ َق ُّل ْو َن‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫‪ )6‬ن َُار ْاْل ِخ َر ِة ِه َي الن َُّار ا ْل ُك ْب َری‬ ‫ت‬ ‫َا ْلبِن ُْت ا ْل ُكبری فِي ا ْلبی ِ‬
‫َْ‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫ْب ْاْلَ ْك َب ُر‬‫الذن ُ‬‫اك باللِ ُه َو َّ‬ ‫‪َ )7‬ا ْ ِ‬
‫إل ْش َر ُ‬ ‫َا ْل ُمنَافِ ُق ْو َن ُه ُم ْاْلَ َض ُّل ْو َن‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫ان ُهما ْاْلَنْجح ِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫َا ْلمجت َِهدَ ِ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫َ َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ُ ْ‬
‫‪557‬‬
Summary
Key Terms
‫( َم ْو ُص ْول‬time) ‫َما ال َّظ ْرفِ َّی ُة‬ ‫( َم ْو ُص ْول‬indicative) ‫َأ َّن‬
‫( َم ْو ُص ْول‬time) ‫َما َدا َم‬ ‫( َم ْو ُص ْول‬indicative) ‫َما‬
‫ َأ ْن‬before quotation ‫َأ ْن ال َّت ْف ِس ْی ِر َّي ُة‬ ‫( َم ْو ُص ْول‬subjunctive) ‫َأ ْن‬
Verbal Phrase ‫( َم ْو ُص ْول‬subjunctive) ‫ك َْي‬
558
Vocabulary
major sin ‫َكبِ ْی َرة ج َك َبائِ ُر‬ manner, etiquette ‫َأ َدب ج آ َداب‬
tongue ‫ل ِ َسان ج َأ ْل ِسنَة‬ soul ‫ُر ْوح ج َأ ْر َواح‬
language ‫ُلغَة ج ات‬ swift ُ ‫ ُس ْرع‬،‫َس ِر ْيع ج ِس َراع‬

‫َان‬
futile activity ‫َل ْهو‬ lip ‫َش َفة ج ِش َفاه‬
ruling ‫َم ْس َأ َلة ج َم َسائِ ُل‬ Ashura (10th Muharram) ُ ‫ع‬

‫َاش ْو َرا ُء‬
disobedience ‫َم ْع ِص َیة ج َم َعاص‬ punishment ‫ِع َقاب‬
known ‫َم ْع ُل ْوم‬ intellect ‫َع ْقل ج ُع ُق ْول‬

ِ ‫منْسك ج من‬
‫َاس ُك‬ ‫ع َََّل َمة ج ات‬
ritual َ َ َ sign
559
‫‪to recompense‬‬ ‫َجزَ ی َي ْج ِز ْي َجزَ ا ًء‬ ‫‪to refuse‬‬ ‫َأ َبی َي ْأ َبی إِ َبا ًء‬
‫ح ُّل َح ََّل ًْل‬‫ح َّل ي ِ‬ ‫َأ َّدی ُيؤَ ِّد ْي َت ْأ ِد َيةً‪َ ،‬أ َدا ًء‬
‫‪to be permissible‬‬ ‫َ َ‬ ‫‪to fulfil, complete‬‬
‫‪to know‬‬ ‫َد َری َيدْ ِر ْي ِد َرا َي ًة‬ ‫‪to sin‬‬ ‫ب إِ ْذنَا ًبا‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َب ُي ْذن ُ‬ ‫َأ ْذن َ‬
‫‪to push, repel‬‬ ‫َد َف َع َيدْ َف ُع َد ْف ًعا‬ ‫‪to intend‬‬ ‫َأ َرا َد ُي ِر ْيدُ إِ َرا َد ًة‬
‫َر َّبی ُي َر ِّب ْي َت ْربِ َی ًة‬ ‫استِ ْحیَا ًء‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪to raise, rear, nurture‬‬ ‫‪to be ashamed‬‬ ‫يست َْحیِ ْي ْ‬
‫َح َیی ْ‬
‫ا ْست ْ‬
‫زَ َار َيزُ ْو ُر ِز َي َار ًة‬ ‫ار َي ْست َِشیْ ُر اِ ْستِ َش َار ًة‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ا ْست ََش َ‬
‫‪to seek‬‬ ‫‪advice‬‬ ‫‪or‬‬
‫‪to visit‬‬ ‫‪counsel‬‬
‫اع َي ْستَطِیْ ُع اِ ْستِ َطا َع ًة‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪to make happy‬‬ ‫‪َ to be able to‬س َّر َي ُس ُّر ُس ُر ْو ًرا‪َ ،‬م َس َّر ًة‬ ‫ا ْس َت َط َ‬
‫‪to rest, reside‬‬ ‫‪َ to make witness‬س َك َن َي ْس ُك ُن ُس ُك ْونًا‬ ‫َأ ْش َهدَ ُي ْش ِهدُ إِ ْش َها ًدا‬
‫‪to explain‬‬ ‫‪َ to acknowledge‬ش َر َح َي ْش َر ُح َش ْر ًحا‬ ‫ف اِعْتِ َرا ًفا‬ ‫اِ ْعت ََر َ‬
‫ف َي ْعت َِر ُ‬
‫‪to testify, witness‬‬ ‫‪َ to believe‬ش ِهدَ َي ْش َهدُ َش َها َد ًة‬ ‫اِ ْع َت َقدَ َي ْعت َِقدُ اعْتِ َقا ًدا‬
‫‪to become apparent‬‬ ‫َظ َه َر َي ْظ َه ُر ُظ ُه ْو ًرا‬ ‫‪to please, delight‬‬ ‫ب إِع َ‬

‫ْجا ًبا‬ ‫ب ُي ْع ِ‬
‫ج ُ‬ ‫َأع َ‬
‫ْج َ‬
‫‪to understand‬‬ ‫‪َ to make angry‬ع َق َل َي ْع ِق ُل ع ً‬

‫َقَّل‬ ‫ب إِغ َْضا ًبا‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َأغ َْض َ‬
‫ب ُيغْض ُ‬
‫‪to be able to‬‬ ‫‪َ to be possible‬قدَ َر َي ْق ِد ُر ُقدْ َر ًة‬ ‫َأ ْم َك َن ُي ْمكِ ُن إِ ْم َكانًا‬
‫‪to dislike‬‬ ‫ك َِر َه َي ْك َر ُه ك ََر َاه ًة‬ ‫‪to‬‬ ‫‪be‬‬ ‫‪suitable,‬‬ ‫اِ ْن َبغَی َينْ َب ِغ ْي ا ْنبِغَا ًء‬
‫‪appropriate, necessary‬‬
‫‪to meet‬‬ ‫َل ِق َي َي ْل َقی ل ِ َقا ًء‬ ‫‪to finish, complete‬‬ ‫ا ْنت ََهی َينْت َِه ْي انْتِ َها ًء‬
‫‪to stop, prohibit, forbid‬‬ ‫َمن ََع َي ْمن َُع َمنْ ًعا‬ ‫‪to give glad tidings‬‬ ‫َب َّش َر ُي َب ِّش ُر َت ْب ِش ْی ًرا‬
‫‪to regret‬‬ ‫ن َِد َم َينْدَ ُم نَدَ ا َمةً‪ ،‬نَدَ ًما‬ ‫‪to be tired‬‬ ‫ب َت َع ًبا‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َتع َ‬
‫ب َي ْت َع ُ‬
‫‪to prohibit‬‬ ‫ن ََهی َين َْهی ن َْه ًیا‬ ‫‪to desire‬‬ ‫َت َمنَّی َيت ََمنَّی َت َمنِّ ًیا‬
‫‪to be compulsory‬‬ ‫ب ُو ُج ْو ًبا‬ ‫ب َي ِ‬

‫ج ُ‬ ‫‪َ to flow‬و َج َ‬ ‫َج َری َي ْج ِر ْي َج َر َيانًا‬
‫‪560‬‬
Joining Sentences Together
Introduction: Joining Sentences Together
Part 1: Vocative Expressions
Part 2: Oaths
Part 3: Conditional Sentences
Part 4: Sentences after ‫ َا ْْلَ ْم ُر‬and ‫َالن َّْه ُي‬
Part 5: ‫ُج ْم َلة َت ْعلِ ْیلِ َّیة‬
Part 6: ‫ُج ْم َلة ْاستِدْ َراكِ َّیة‬
Summary
561
Introduction: Joining Sentences Together
In a passage of text, sentences are logically sequenced.
Some sentences are nested within another sentence, i.e. they
become a slot within the main sentence.
Some sentences are not nested within another sentence, even
though they are linked in meaning.
Your parents looked after you when you were young.
Now that they are elderly, be good to them.
In the passage above, there are two sentences; the second is
grammatically independent of the first sentence, i.e. it is not
nested within it.
However, despite being independent, the sentences have a logical
connection; the statement in the first sentence is the reason for
the command in the second.
Types of Connections Between Sentences
In this unit, we will study six connections between sentences:
1. Vocative Expressions
2. Oaths
3. Conditions and Results
4. Sentences After ‫ َا ْْلَ ْم ُر‬and ‫َالن َّْه ُي‬
5. ‫ُج ْم َلة َت ْعلِ ْیلِ َّیة‬
6. ‫ُج ْم َلة ْاستِدْ َراكِ َّیة‬
562
Part 1: Vocative Expressions
To address or call out to someone, a vocative expression is used.
In Arabic, the vocative expression is comprised of two parts:
1. ‫نِدَ اء‬: the phrase to call someone.
2. ‫اب النِّدَ ِاء‬
ُ ‫ َج َو‬: the sentence after the ‫ندَ اء‬.
ِ
Zaid, stand up.
In the above example, Zaid is the ‫نِدَ اء‬, the sentence used to call, and
stand up is the ‫اب النِّدَ ِاء‬ ِ
ُ ‫ َج َو‬, the sentence after the ‫ ندَ اء‬used to convey
information to the addressee.
‫نِدَ اء‬
In Arabic, the ‫ نِدَ اء‬is constructed using a vocative particle, ‫ َح ْر ُف النِّدَ ِاء‬,
followed by the person being called, ‫ ُمنَا ًدی‬.
ُ‫َيا زَ ْيد‬
In this example, the particle ‫ َيا‬is the ‫ ; َح ْر ُف النِّدَ ِاء‬and the word ُ‫ زَ ْيد‬is the
‫ ُمنَا ًدی‬.
Rules of ‫َح ْر ُف النِّدَ ِاء‬
The most common particle of ‫ نِدَ اء‬is ‫ َيا‬.
The ‫ َح ْر ُف النِّدَ ِاء‬is translated as O, or it is left untranslated.
O Zaid.
Zaid.
Rules of ‫َا ْل ُمنَا َدی‬
‫ َا ْل ُمنَا َدی‬can come in two forms:
1. In a possessive phrase: in this case, the ‫ ُم َضاف‬will be ‫ َمن ُْص ْوب‬.
ِ‫يا َعبدَ الل‬
ْ َ
2. Outside a possessive phrase: in this case, it will have one ‫ َض َّمة‬.
563
‫اب النِّدَ ِاء‬
‫َج َو ُ‬ ‫نِدَ اء‬
‫فِع ُل َأمر و َف ِ‬
‫اعل ( َأن َْت)‬ ‫ْ ْ َ‬ ‫ُمنَا ًدی‬ ‫ف النِّدَ ِاء‬
‫َح ْر ُ‬
‫ُق ْم‬ ‫زَ ْيدُ‬ ‫َيا‬

‫‪The name of each sentence is written at the very top.‬‬
‫‪َ )8‬يا َش ْی ُخ‪َ ،‬ه ْل ُت ِر ْيدُ َأ ْن َأن ُْص َر َك؟‬ ‫‪َ )1‬يا َصبِ ُّي‪َ ،‬أ ْي َن ُأ ُّم َك؟‬
‫س‬‫‪َ )9‬يا ُس َم َّیةُ‪َْ ،‬ل َت َت َأ َّخ ِر ْي َع ِن الدَّ ْر ِ‬ ‫الس ِّك ْی ِن‬‫ب بِ ِّ‬ ‫َيا َو َلدُ ‪َْ ،‬ل َت ْل َع ْ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫ب إِ َلی فِ ْر َع ْو َن﴾‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫يا ِعباد اللِ‪َْ ،‬ل ُت ْش ِركُوا باللِ‬
‫‪َ )10‬يا ُم ْو َسی﴿ا ْذ َه ْ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫َ َ َ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫اس ُك ْن َأن َْت َوزَ ْو ُج َك ا ْل َجنَّةَ﴾‬ ‫﴿ َيا آ َد ُم ْ‬ ‫‪)11‬‬ ‫َيا َو َل ِد ْي‪َ ،‬ه ْل َأ َم ْر ُت َك بِ َه َذا؟‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫َيا عَابِ ِد ْي ْاْلَ ْصنَا ِم‪َ ،‬ه ْل َتنْ َف ُع ُك ْم َأ ْصنَا ُم ُك ْم؟‬ ‫‪)12‬‬ ‫َيا َض ْی ِف ْي‪َ ،‬ه ْل َأ َك ْل َت ا ْل َع َشا َء؟‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫﴿ َيا َبن ِ ْي إِ ْس َرائِ َیل ا ْذك ُُر ْوا نِ ْع َمتِ َي ا َّلتِ ْي َأ ْن َع ْم ُت َع َل ْی ُك ْم﴾‬ ‫‪)13‬‬ ‫َيا بِنْتِ ْي‪َ ،‬م ْن َت َّتبِ ِع ْی َن فِي ُأ ُم ْو ِر ِك؟‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫﴿ َق َال ُم ْو َسى َيا فِ ْرع َْو ُن إِن ِّْي َر ُس ْول مِن َر ِّب ا ْل َعا َل ِم ْی َن﴾‬ ‫‪)14‬‬ ‫ك و َأب ِ‬
‫اك‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ ِ‬
‫َيا َفاط َمةُ‪ ،‬ا ْحت َِرم ْي ُأ َّم َ َ‬ ‫‪)7‬‬
‫‪564‬‬
Additional Information Regarding ‫َح ْر ُف النِّدَ ِاء‬
‫ َأ ُّي َها‬and ‫َأ َّيت َُها‬
If the ‫ ُمنَا ًدی‬has ‫ال‬, ‫ َأ ُّي َها‬is used for a masculine ‫ ُمنَا ًدی‬, and ‫ َأ َّيت َُها‬for a
feminine one.
‫َأ َّيت َُها ا ْلبِن ُْت‬ ُ‫َأ ُّي َها ا ْل َو َلد‬
These can also be preceded by a ‫ َيا‬.
‫َيا َأ َّيت َُها البِن ُْت‬ ُ‫َيا َأ ُّي َها ا ْل َو َلد‬
The Word ‫َال ّٰل ُه َّم‬

‫ َال ّٰل ُه َّم‬on its own means O Allah. It does not have a ‫ف النِّدَ ِاء‬
ُ ‫ َح ْر‬before it.
‫َال ّٰل ُه َّم‬
O Allah
Dropping the ‫َح ْر ُف النِّدَ ِاء‬
The ‫ َح ْر ُف النِّدَ ِاء‬may be dropped if it can be understood from the
context.
‫َر َّبنَا‬  ‫َيا َر َّبنَا‬
O Our Lord
Dropping the ‫ ي‬from the ‫ُمنَا ًدی‬
If the ‫ ُمنَا ًدی‬is ‫ ُم َضاف‬to the possessive pronoun ‫ي‬, the ‫ ي‬may be
dropped. The ‫ ُم َضاف‬will keep its ‫ك َْس َرة‬.
‫َيا َق ْو ِم‬ ِ
 ‫َيا َق ْوم ْي‬
‫َر ِّب‬  ‫َر ِّب ْي‬
565
‫‪Vocab‬‬
‫‪to criticise‬‬ ‫‪َ to dislike, hate‬ذ َّم َي ُذ ُّم َذ ًما‬ ‫َأ ْبغ ََض ُي ْب ِغ ُض إ ْبغ ً‬
‫َاضا‬
‫‪to be safe‬‬ ‫‪َ to fear‬سلِ َم َي ْس َل ُم َس ََّل َم ًة‬ ‫اِ َّت َقی َيت َِّقي اِ ِّت َقا ًء‬
‫‪to live‬‬ ‫َاش َي ِع ْی ُش َع ْی ًشا‬ ‫‪ to reward‬ع َ‬ ‫َأ َج َر َي ْأ ُج ُر َأ ْج ًرا‬
‫‪to deal‬‬ ‫‪ to inform‬عَا َم َل ُي َعامِ ُل ُم َعا َم َل ًة‬ ‫َأ ْخ َب َر ُي ْخبِ ُر إِ ْخ َب ًارا‬
‫‪to protect‬‬ ‫َص َم َي ْع ِص ُم ِع ْص َم ًة‬ ‫‪ to please‬ع َ‬ ‫َأ ْر َضی ُي ْر ِض ْي إِ ْر َضا ًء‬
‫‪to praise‬‬ ‫َمدَ َح َي ْمدَ ُح َمدْ ًحا‬ ‫‪to bless‬‬ ‫َب َار َك ُي َب ِ‬
‫ار ُك ُم َب َار َك ًة‬
‫‪to advice‬‬ ‫َظ َي ِع ُظ َو ْع ًظا‬

‫‪َ to make sad‬وع َ‬ ‫َحزَ َن َي ْحزُ ُن ُحزْ نًا‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ول﴾‬ ‫الر ُس َ‬ ‫الل َو َأط ْی ُعوا َّ‬‫‪َ ﴿ )12‬يا َأ ُّي َها ا َّلذ ْي َن آ َمن ُْوا َأط ْی ُعوا َ‬ ‫﴿ر َّبنَا َظ َل ْمنَا َأ ْن ُف َسنَا﴾‬ ‫َ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫آخ َر ُه َو َخ ْی َر َأ َّيامِ ْى َي ْو َم‬
‫‪َ )13‬ال ّٰلهم اجع ْل َخیر عَملِي ِ‬
‫َْ َ ْ‬ ‫ُ َّ ْ َ‬ ‫ص ْاْلَع َْم ِ‬
‫ال‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َال ّٰل ُه َّم ْارزُ ْقنَا َخال َ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫اك‬‫َأ ْل َق َ‬ ‫َال ّٰل ُه َّم ْاه ِدنَا ل ِ َصالِحِ ْاْلَ ْخ ََّل ِق‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫‪َ )14‬ال ّٰلهم إِنِّي َأس َأ ُل َك حب َك‪ ،‬وحب من ي ِ‬
‫ح ُّب َك‪،‬‬ ‫َ ُ َّ َ ْ ُ‬ ‫ُ َّ‬ ‫ُ َّ ْ ْ‬ ‫﴿ َيا َق ْو ِم ا ْذك ُُروا نِ ْع َم َة اللِ َع َل ْی ُك ْم﴾‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫َوا ْل َع َم َل ا َّل ِذ ْي ُي َب ِّلغُن ِ ْي ُح َّب َك‬ ‫﴿ َيا َأ ُّي َها ا َّل ِذ ْي َن آ َمن ُْوا ُت ْو ُب ْوا إِ َلى اللِ﴾‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫َّاس ا َّت ُقوا َر َّب ُك ُم ا َّل ِذ ْي َخ َل َق ُك ْم مِ ْن َن ْفس‬ ‫‪َ ﴿ )15‬يا َأ ُّي َها الن ُ‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ال ّٰل ُه َّم َْل َت ْح ِر ْمني َب َر َك َة َما َأ ْع َط ْیتَن ِ ْي‬
‫احدَ ة َو َخ َل َق مِن َْها زَ ْو َج َها﴾‬ ‫و ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫یما َب ِق َي مِ ْن ع ُُم ِر ْي‬ ‫ِ ِ ِ‬
‫‪َ )7‬ال ّٰل ُه َّم اعْص ْمني ف َ‬
‫‪َ )16‬ال ّٰل ُه َّم إِن ِّْي َأ ْس َأ ُل َك ا ْل َجنَّ َة َو َما َق َّر َب إِ َل ْی َها مِ ْن َق ْول َأ ْو‬ ‫‪َ )8‬ال ّٰل ُه َّم اغ ِْف ْر ل ِ ْي َج ِم ْی َع َما َم َضى مِ ْن ُذنُوبِ ْي‬
‫َّار َو َما َق َّر َب إِ َل ْی َها مِ ْن َق ْول َأ ْو‬
‫ع ََمل‪َ ،‬و َأعُو ُذ بِ َك مِ َن الن ِ‬ ‫‪ُ ﴿ )9‬ق ْل َيا َأ ُّي َها ا ْل َكافِ ُر ْو َن َْل َأ ْع ُبدُ َما َت ْع ُبدُ ْو َن﴾‬
‫ع ََمل‬ ‫َّاس ا ْع ُبدُ ْوا َر َّب ُك ُم ا َّل ِذ ْي َخ َل َق ُك ْم﴾‬ ‫‪َ ﴿ )10‬يا َأ ُّي َها الن ُ‬
‫‪َ )11‬ال ّٰل ُه َّم َْل َت ْح ِر ْمنَا َخ ْی َر َما ِعنْدَ َك بِـ َش ِّر َما ِعنْدَ َنا‬
‫‪566‬‬
‫‪Summary‬‬
‫‪Joining Sentences Together‬‬
‫‪Vocative Expressions‬‬
‫ف النِدَ ِاء‬
‫َح ْر ُ‬ ‫ال َّل ُه َم‬ ‫َأ َّيت َُها ا ْلبِن ُْت‬ ‫َأ ُّي َها َّ‬
‫الر ُج ُل‬ ‫َيا َر ُج ُل‬
‫نِدَ اء‬ ‫َض َّمة ‪ُ :‬م َضاف‪Non-‬‬ ‫َيا َر ُج ُل‬
‫ُمنَا ًدی‬
‫َفت َْحة ‪ُ :‬م َضاف‬ ‫يا عبدَ اللِ‬
‫َ َْ‬
‫اب النِّدَ ِاء‬
‫َج َو ُ‬ ‫َيا َع ْبدَ اللِ‪ُ ،‬ق ْم‬
‫‪567‬‬
Part 2: Oaths
An oath can be brought before a sentence to create emphasis.
In Arabic, an oath is called ‫ َق َسم‬. A sentence with an oath is made up
of two sentences:
1. ‫ َق َسم‬: the sentence comprised of the oath.
2. ‫اب ا ْل َق َس ِم‬
ُ ‫ َج َو‬: the sentence being emphasised.
By Allah, I did not lie.
In the above example, By Allah is the ‫ َق َسم‬and I did not lie is the ‫اب‬
ُ ‫َج َو‬
‫ا ْل َق َس ِم‬.
Rules of ‫َا ْل َق َس ُم‬
‫ ا ْل َق َس ُم‬is made up of two parts:
1. The verb (‫ ُأ ْق ِس ُم‬, I swear). This is usually hidden.
2. That upon which the oath is taken. This becomes the ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه َغ ْی ُر‬
‫ َص ِر ْيح‬of the verb.
The following ‫ ُح ُر ْوف َج َّارة‬are used in the ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح‬of verbs of
oath.
a) ‫ َو‬: this is the most common particle for an oath.
‫َوا ْل َع ْص ِر‬
by time
b) ‫ ِب‬:
ِ‫بِـالل‬
by Allah
c) ‫ َت‬: This is only used with the word Allah and is seldom used.
ِ‫َتـالل‬
by Allah
568
‫اب ا ْل َق َس ِم ‪Rules of‬‬
‫َج َو ُ‬
‫اب ا ْل َق َس ِم ‪In most cases, the‬‬
‫‪َ will consist of some form of emphasis.‬ج َو ُ‬
‫ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة‬ ‫اس ِم َّیة‬
‫‪Future‬‬ ‫‪Present‬‬ ‫‪Past‬‬
‫َواللِ َلت َْصدُ َق َّن‬ ‫َواللِ َل َی ْصدُ ُق‬ ‫واللِ َل َقدْ َصدَ َق‬ ‫واللِ إِ ِّنه َلص ِ‬
‫ادق‬ ‫ُ َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ُم ْث َبت‬
‫َواللِ َل ْن َأك ِْذ َب‬ ‫َواللِ َما َي ْك ِذ ُب‬ ‫َواللِ َما ك ََذ َب‬ ‫ِ‬
‫الل ما ُهو ِب َك ِ‬
‫اذب‬ ‫َو َ َ‬ ‫َمن ِْفي‬
‫‪The tarkib of a sentence with an oath is written as follows:‬‬
‫اب ا ْل َق َس ِم‬
‫َج َو ُ‬ ‫َق َسم‬
‫(ت)‬ ‫فِعل‪َ ،‬ف ِ‬

‫اعل ُ‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح ل ِ ِف ْعل َم ْح ُذ ْوف ( ُأ ْق ِس ُم)‬
‫ْ‬
‫َما ك ََذ ْب ُت‬ ‫اللِ‬ ‫َو‬
‫‪َ )6‬تاللِ‪َ ،‬ل َی ْحزُ نُن ِ ْي عَدَ ُم َأ َدائِ َك ل ِ َف ِر ْي َض ِة ا ْل َح ِّج‬ ‫َواللِ إِن ََّك َقدْ َأ َّد ْي َت َما َع َل ْی َك‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫الل ِز َي َار َة َب ْیتِ ِه ا ْل َح َرا َم‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫َواللِ َما َأ ْخ َب ْر ُت َك إِ َّْل بِ َما عَلِ ْم ُت‬
‫‪َ )7‬والل‪ ،‬إِن ِّْي َْلَ َت َمنَّی َأن َي ْرزُ َقن َي ُ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫الر ْو ُح ِم َن ا ْل َج َس ِد‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ْسان َل ِفي ُخ ْسر﴾‬ ‫﴿ َوا ْل َع ْص ِر إِ َّن ْ ِ‬
‫‪َ )8‬والل ِإ َّن َر َّب َك َل َی ْق َب ُل الت َّْو َب َة َحتَّی َت ْخ ُر َج ُّ‬ ‫اإلن َ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫ِ‬ ‫اد ُق ‪َ )9‬ت ِ‬
‫واللِ إِ َّن محمدً ا ﷺ رسو ُل اللِ الص ِ‬
‫َّاس َف َیدْ ُخ ُلوا الن ََّار َم َع ُه‬ ‫ان ِإ َّْل َأن ُيض َّل الن َ‬ ‫الش ْی َط ُ‬‫الل‪َْ ،‬ل ُي ِر ْيدُ َّ‬ ‫َّ‬ ‫َ ُ ْ‬ ‫ُ َ َّ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫الل َو َر ُس ْو َل َه ﷺ‬ ‫ان ب ْل س ِبی َل ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫الل َلن َأ َّت ِبع ُخ ُطو ِ‬ ‫واللِ‪َ ،‬ل َقدْ َأعْجبنِي احتِرام َك ِْلَساتِ َذتِ َك ‪ )10‬و ِ‬
‫الش ْی َط َ َ ْ‬ ‫ات َّ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ْ َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ََ ْ ْ َ ُ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫‪569‬‬
Notes
1. Sometimes, the verb for the oath is mentioned explicitly.
ِ‫ُأ ْق ِسم بِـالل‬
ُ
I swear by Allah.
2. The negative particle ‫ َْل‬often precedes the explicit verb of the
oath. This creates emphasis, not a negative meaning.
﴾‫﴿ َْل ُأ ْق ِس ُم بِـ َی ْو ِم ا ْل ِق َیا َم ِة‬
I swear by the day of reckoning.
3. ‫ َو ُاو ال َق َس ِم‬comes at the beginning of a sentence and is translated as
by. It is ‫ ;عَامِل‬the following word is ‫ َم ْج ُر ْور‬.
‫ف‬ ِ ‫ واو ا ْلع ْط‬comes between two nouns or sentences and is
َ ُ َ
translated as and. It is ‫ َغ ْی ُر عَامِل‬.
ِ ‫واللِ إِ َّنه ص‬
‫ادق َو َصالِح‬ َ ُ َ
Summary
Joining Sentences Together
Oaths
Verb ‫ُأ ْق ِس ُم‬
‫َق ْسم‬
‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه َغ ْی ُر َص ِر ْيح‬ ِ‫ َتالل‬،ِ‫ بِالل‬،ِ‫والل‬
َ
‫اب ا ْل َق َس ِم‬
ُ ‫َج َو‬
570
Part 3: Conditional Sentences
A conditional sentence is comprised of a conditional conjunction,
words like if, when, whenever, whoever, etc., and two clauses: a
condition clause and a result clause.
In Arabic, the conditional conjunction is called ‫الش ْر ِط‬ َّ ‫ َأ َدا ُة‬, the
condition clause is called the ‫ َش ْرط‬and the result clause is called the
ِ ‫الشر‬
‫ط‬ ْ َّ ‫اب‬
ُ ‫ َج َو‬.
If you work hard, you will be successful.
In the above example, If is the conditional conjunction, you work
hard is the ‫ َش ْرط‬and you will be successful is the ‫الش ْر ِط‬
َّ ‫اب‬
The table below illustrates the construction of a conditional
sentence.
ِ ‫الشر‬ ِ ‫الشر‬
ُ ‫َج َو‬ ‫َش ْرط‬ ‫ط‬ ْ َّ ‫َأ َدا ُة‬
Conditional Conjunctions
There are two types of conditional conjunctions: nouns, ‫الش ْر ِط‬ َّ ‫اِ ْس ُم‬
and particles, ‫الش ْر ِط‬
َّ ‫ف‬ ِ ‫الشر‬
ُ ‫ َح ْر‬. The term ‫ط‬ ْ َّ ‫ َأ َدا ُة‬is used to refer to both
types.
ِ ‫الشر‬
‫ط‬ ْ َّ ‫َأ َدا ُة‬
Conditional Conjunctions
ِ ‫الشر‬ ِ ‫الشر‬ ِ
‫ط‬ ْ َّ ‫ف‬
ُ ‫َح ْر‬ ‫ط‬ ْ َّ ‫ا ْس ُم‬
Particle conditional conjunctions Noun conditional conjunctions
ِ ‫الشر‬
‫ط‬ ْ َّ ‫َأ ْس َما ُء‬
There are nine ‫الش ْر ِط‬
َّ ‫ َأ ْس َما ُء‬. These nouns are also used as ‫اْلستِ ْف َها ِم‬
ْ ‫ َأ ْس َما ُء‬.
however َ ‫ َك ْی‬whoever
‫ف‬ ‫َم ْن‬
from wherever, ‫َأنَّی‬ whatever ‫َما‬
however
however many ‫ك َْم‬ wherever ‫َأ ْي َن‬
whichever ‫َأي‬ whenever ‫َمتَی‬
whenever َ ‫َأ َّي‬

‫ان‬
571
The ‫الش ْر ِط‬
َّ ‫ َأ ْس َما ُء‬are ‫ ;عَامِل‬they render the ‫ارع‬
ِ ‫ ُم َض‬in both the condition
and result to be in the ‫ َم ْجزُ ْوم‬state.
ِ ‫الشر‬
ُ ‫َح ْر‬
There are three ‫الش ْر ِط‬
َّ ‫ف‬ُ ‫ ُح ُر ْو‬.
if ‫ َل ْو َْل‬if ‫إِ ْن‬
if ‫َل ْو‬
The particle ‫ إِ ْن‬is ‫ ;عَامِل‬it renders the ‫ ُم َض ِارع‬in both the condition and
result to be in the ‫ َم ْجزُ ْوم‬state.
The particles ‫ َل ْو‬and ‫ َل ْو َْل‬are ‫ َغ ْی ُر عَامِل‬.
Types of Conditional Sentences
There are two types of conditional sentences:
1. Real conditionals: conditions which may met.
2. Unreal conditionals: conditions which cannot be met.
572
‫‪Real Conditionals‬‬
‫‪Constructing Real Conditions‬‬
‫َأ َدا ُة ‪Real conditionals are constructed using either of the following‬‬
‫الشر ِ‬
‫ط‬ ‫‪ْ َّ :‬‬
‫الش ْر ِط ‪1. The‬‬
‫‪َ .‬أ ْس َما ُء َّ‬
‫َم ْن َي ْجت َِهدْ َينْ َج ْح‬
‫‪َ . (see‬أ ْس َما ُء ِاْل ْستِ ْف َها ِم ‪َ , will be the same as‬أ ْس َما ُء َّ‬
‫الش ْر ِط ‪The tarkib of the‬‬
‫)‪page 428‬‬
‫الشر ِ‬
‫ط‬ ‫اب َّ ْ‬
‫َج َو ُ‬ ‫َش ْرط‬
‫اعل ( َأن َْت)‬ ‫َخبَر‬ ‫ُمبْتَدَ أ‬
‫ْ َ‬
‫َين َْج ْح‬ ‫َي ْجت َِهدْ‬ ‫َم ْن‬

‫اعل ( ُه َو)‬ ‫ْ َ‬
‫الش ْر ِط ‪2. The‬‬

‫ف َّ‬‫‪.‬إِ ْن ‪َ of‬ح ْر ُ‬
‫إِ ْن َت ْجت َِهدْ َتن َْج ْح‬
‫‪ is not labelled.‬إِ ْن ‪In tarkib,‬‬
‫الشر ِ‬
‫ط‬ ‫اب َّ ْ‬
‫اعل ( َأن َْت)‬ ‫فِعل و َف ِ‬
‫اعل ( َأن َْت)‬ ‫ف َش ْرط‬
‫َح ْر ُ‬
‫ْ َ‬ ‫ْ َ‬
‫َتن َْج ْح‬ ‫َت ْجت َِهدْ‬ ‫ْ‬

‫إن‬
‫‪573‬‬
Translation of Real Conditionals
There are two types of real conditionals:
1. Zero conditional
2. First conditional
Zero Conditionals
General truths and situations that occur all the time are
represented by zero conditionals.
The present tense is used in both the condition and result clause.
If you work hard, you are successful.
First Conditionals
Future situations which may occur in the future are represented by
first conditionals.
The present tense is used in the condition clause and the future
tense with the infinitive in the result clause.
Notes
If the condition clause is mentioned first, a comma is placed
between the two clauses.
If the result clause is mentioned first, the comma will be omitted.
You will be successful if you work hard.
Summary
The following table summarises the zero and first conditional.
‫َش ْرط‬ ِ ‫الشر‬
ُ ‫َج َو‬
Condition Result
Zero If , you are successful.
(General Truths) you work hard (Present)
First If (Present) , you will be successful.
(Future Possible) (Future)
The context will help determine the meaning of the Arabic
sentence.
574
‫‪َ )14‬أ َّي ِع ْلم مِ ْن ُع ُل ْو ِم ْ ِ‬
‫ب َينْ َف ْع َك‬ ‫اإل ْس ََّل ِم َت ْط ُل ْ‬ ‫إِ ْن َت ْش ُك ُروا َ‬
‫الل َي ِز ْد ُك ْم‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫َب َو ُتؤْ َج ِر ْي َع َل ْی ِه‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِِ ِ‬ ‫َأ َّنی َت ُك ْن َي ْأتِ َك ا ْل َم ْو ُ‬
‫‪َ )15‬ما ُتنْفق ْي في َسبِ ْی ِل الل ُي ْكت ْ‬ ‫ت‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫َّاس‬‫الل َي ْو َم َي ْح ُش ُر الن َ‬ ‫َّاس ُي َع ِّذ ْب َك ُ‬ ‫‪ )16‬إِ ْن َت ْظلِ ِم الن َ‬ ‫إِ ْن ُتؤْ مِ ْن بِاللِ َتدْ ُخ ِل ا ْل َجنَّ َة‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫َاب اللِ َو ُسن َِّة َر ُس ْول ِ ِه ﷺ َت ْهتَدُ ْوا‬ ‫‪ )17‬إِ ْن َت ْعت َِص ُم ْوا بِكِت ِ‬ ‫َك‬ ‫ب ُدعَائ َ‬ ‫َج ْ‬ ‫إِ ْن َتدْ ُع الل َيست ِ‬
‫َ ْ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫الل َي ْر َض عَ َل ْی َك‬ ‫ِ‬
‫غْض ْب عَ َل ْی َك َو ِإ ْن َت ْس َأل َ‬ ‫َّاس َي َ‬ ‫‪ِ )18‬إ ْن َت ْس َأ ِل الن َ‬ ‫واللِ إِ ْن َت ْح َف ْظ ل ِ َسان ََك َت ْس َل ْم‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫اس ُي َعامِ ُل ْو ُك ْم‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ِ )19‬إ ْن ُتؤْ من ُْوا بالل َو َر ُس ْوله َو َت ْع َم ُل ْوا َصال ًحا َتدْ ُخ ُلوا َ‬
‫الج َّن َة‬ ‫ف ُت َعام ُلوا النَّ َ‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ك ْی َ‬
‫اس ُب ْوا َع َلی ك ُِّل َما َف َع ُل ْو ُه مِ ْن‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ان ُي ْب َع ُث ْوا م َن ا ْل ُق ُب ْو ِر ُي َح َ‬
‫‪َ )20‬أ َّي َ‬ ‫الل َيغ ِْف ْر َل َك ُذن ُْو َب َك‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ )7‬إِ ْن َت ْس َتغْف ِر َ‬
‫َخ ْیر َو َشر‬ ‫اس ْب َك بِ ِه‬ ‫‪َ )8‬أين َتعم ْل ي ْك ُتبه الل ويح ِ‬
‫ْ َ َْ َ ُْ ُ َُ َ‬
‫الل مِ ْن َف ْضلِ ِه َْل‬ ‫َّاس َع َلی َما آ َت ُ‬
‫اه ُم ُ‬ ‫‪َ )21‬م َتی َت ْح ُسدُ وا الن َ‬ ‫‪ )9‬ك َْم آ َي ًة َي ْح َف ْظ َطالِب َي ْس َم ْع ُه ا ْل ُم َع ِّل ُم‬
‫َت ْش ُك ُر ْو ُه َع َلی َما آ َت َ‬
‫اك‬ ‫الل فِ ْی َك‬ ‫‪ )10‬واللِ إِ ْن َتصدُ ِق النَّاس يب ِ ِ‬
‫ارك ُ‬ ‫َ َُ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫َ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ب َي ْهلِ ْك إِ َّْل َما ُتن ِْف ُق فِي ا ْل َخ ْی ِر‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )22‬و َم ْن ُيؤْ م ْن بِالل َو َي ْع َم ْل َصال ًحا ُيدْ خ ْل ُه ُ‬
‫الل َجنَّات‬ ‫‪َ )11‬ما َت ْكس ْ‬
‫َت ْج ِري مِ ْن َت ْحتِ َها ْاْلَن َْه ُار‬ ‫‪﴿ )12‬إِ ْن َي َش ْأ َي ْر َح ْم ُك ْم َأ ْو إِ ْن َي َش ْأ ُي َع ِّذ ْب ُك ْم﴾‬
‫‪َ ﴿ )13‬وإِ ْن َتدْ ع ُْو ُه ْم إِ َلى ا ْل ُهدى َْل َي ْس َم ُع ْوا﴾‬
‫‪575‬‬
Additional Rules of the Condition and Result Clauses
Non-‫ ُم َض ِارع‬Verbs in the ‫ َش ْرط‬and ‫الش ْر ِط‬
َّ ‫اب‬
ُ ‫َج َو‬
ِ
The ‫ َش ْرط‬and ‫الش ْرط‬
َّ ‫اب‬ ِ ‫فِ ْعل ُم َض‬.
ُ ‫ َج َو‬may also be sentences without a ‫ارع‬
The Verb of the Condition Clause

The verb in the ‫ َش ْرط‬is primarily a ‫ فِ ْعل ُم َض ِارع‬which is ‫ َم ْجزُ ْوم‬.
‫إِ ْن َت ْصدُ ْق‬
If you speak the truth
However, it can also be:
1. A ‫فِ ْعل َماض‬
‫إِ ْن َصدَ ْق َت‬
If you speak the truth
This is translated as a ‫فِ ْعل ُم َض ِارع‬.
2. The ‫ فِ ْعل نَاقِص‬of ‫َان‬
َ ‫ك‬
ِ ‫إِ ْن ُكن َْت ص‬
‫اد ًقا‬ َ
If you are truthful
َ ‫ ك‬is not translated as was/were.
This ‫َان‬
The table below summarises the different forms of the ‫ َش ْرط‬.
‫َش ْرط‬
َ ‫ك‬
‫َان‬ ‫َماض‬ ِ ‫ُم َض‬
‫ارع‬
ِ ‫من كَان َف‬
... ‫اع ًَّل‬ ... ‫َمن َف َع َل‬ ... ‫َمن َّي ْف َع ْل‬
ْ َ
576
The Verb of the Result Clause
The ‫الش ْر ِط‬
َّ ‫اب‬ ُ ‫ َج َو‬is primarily:
1. A ‫ ُج ْم َلة ف ْعل َّیة‬with a ‫ فِ ْعل ُم َض ِارع‬in the ‫ َم ْجزُ ْوم‬state without any additions
ِ ِ
like ‫ َس‬, ‫ َل ْن‬, etc.
2. A ‫ فِ ْعل َماض‬with a ‫ ُم َض ِارع‬meaning.
ِ
‫دت ن ََج ْح َت‬ ْ ‫إِن‬
َّ ‫اجت ََه‬ ‫إِ ْن َت ْجت َِهدْ َتن َْج ْح‬
If you work hard, If you work hard,
you are successful. you are successful.
ِ َّ ‫اب‬
If, however, the ‫الش ْرط‬ ُ ‫ َج َو‬is neither of the above two, it will be
preceded by a ‫ َف‬.
‫إِ ْن َي ْض ِر ْب َك زَ ْيد َف ََّل َت ْض ِر ْب ُه‬
If Zaid hits you, do not hit him.
This ‫ ف‬is not translated, and in tarkib it is labelled as ‫ ; َرابِ َطة‬the ‫َف‬
used to join the ‫ َش ْرط‬with the ‫ َج َواب‬.
‫اب َش ْرط‬
ُ ‫َج َو‬ ‫َرابِ َطة‬ ‫َش ْرط‬
‫اعل ( َأن َْت) َم ْف ُع ْول ِب ِه‬

ِ ‫ِفعل و َف‬
َ ْ ِ ‫َف‬
‫اعل‬ ‫فِ ْعل َو َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ ‫ف َش ْرط‬
ُ ‫َح ْر‬
‫َْل َت ْض ِر ْب ُه‬ ‫َفـ‬ ‫زَ ْيد‬ ‫َي ْض ِر ْب َك‬ ‫إِ ْن‬

The table below summarises the different forms of the ‫اب َش ْرط‬
ُ ‫َج َو‬
Other ‫َماض‬ ِ ‫ُم َض‬
‫ارع َم ْجزُ ْوم‬
(Preceded by ‫ف‬
َ ) With ‫ ُم َض ِارع‬meaning Without additions
ِ ‫َف ُه ْو ن‬
... ،‫ َف َس َین َْج ُح‬،‫َاجح‬ ‫ن ََج َح‬ ‫َين َْج ْح‬
577
‫الش ْر ِط ‪Translate the following. Identify the‬‬
‫اب َّ‬
‫‪َ and explain why it is‬ج َو ُ‬
‫‪َ .‬فاء َرابِ َطة ‪or isn’t preceded by a‬‬
‫الل َفا َّتبِ ُع ْونِي﴾‬
‫ون َ‬
‫‪﴿ )1‬إِ ْن ُكنْتُم ُت ِ‬
‫ح ُّب َ‬ ‫ْ‬
‫‪َ )2‬م ْن َس َّر ُه َمدْ ُح الن ِ‬
‫َّاس َل ُه َحزَ َن ُه َذ ُّم ُه ْم َل ُه‬
‫‪َ ﴿ )3‬وإِ ْن ك ََّذ ُب ْو َك َف ُق ْل لِي ع ََملِ ْي َو َل ُك ْم ع ََم ُل ُك ْم﴾‬
‫‪ )4‬إِ ْن َأغ َْض ْبت َُك ا ْل َی ْو َم َف َقدْ َأ ْغ َض ْبتَن ِ ْي مِ َر ًارا مِ ْن َق ْب ُل‬
‫ت‬ ‫الل َحي َْل َي ُم ْو ُ‬ ‫ات النَّبِ ُّي ُم َح َّمد ﷺ َفإِ َّن َ‬ ‫إِ ْن َم َ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫َان ِعنْدَ ُه َمال كَثِ ْیر َف َقدْ َو َج َب ْت َع َل ْی ِه الزَّ كَا ُة‬‫َم ْن ك َ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫الل َأ ْج ًرا عَظِ ْی ًما‬ ‫إِ ْن َتصبِروا و َت َّت ُقوا َفسو َ ِ‬
‫ف ُيؤْ ت ْی ُك ُم ُ‬ ‫ْ ُ ْ َ ْ َ ْ‬ ‫‪)7‬‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ ِ ِ‬
‫ض﴾‬‫ماوات َو ْاْلَ ْر ِ‬ ‫﴿ َوإِ ْن َت ْك ُف ُر ْوا َفإِ َّن ل َّله َما في َّ‬
‫الس‬ ‫‪)8‬‬
‫َاص َر َل ُكم‬ ‫اء َف ََّل ن ِ‬ ‫إِ ْن ين ِْز ِل الل َع َلی ُكم ع ََذابا مِن السم ِ‬ ‫‪)9‬‬
‫ً َ َّ َ‬ ‫ُ ْ ْ‬ ‫ُّ‬
‫ِ‬
‫الصابِ ِر ْي َن‬
‫الل َم َع َّ‬ ‫‪ )10‬إِ ْن َأ َصا َب ْت َك ُمص ْی َبة َفا ْصبِ ْر َوا ْع َل ْم َأ َّن َ‬
‫ان َف ْل َی ُص ْم فِي َغ ْی ِر َر َم َض َ‬
‫ان‬ ‫َان َم ِر ْي ًضا فِي َش ْه ِر َر َم َض َ‬
‫‪َ )11‬م ْن ك َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫الل بِ ُم ِص ْی َبة َف َك ْم مِ ْن نِ ْع َمة َأ ْن َع َم بِ َها َع َل ْی َك مِ ْن َق ْب ُل‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ )12‬إِن ا ْبت َََّل َك ُ‬
‫‪578‬‬
‫‪Negating the Verb in the Condition Clause‬‬
‫‪َ .‬ل ْم ‪َ is made negative by adding the particle‬ش ْرط ‪The verb of the‬‬
‫الش ْر ِط ‪The verb of the‬‬ ‫‪َْ .‬ل ‪َ or‬ما ‪َ is made negative by adding a‬ج َو ُ‬
‫اب َّ‬
‫إِ ْن َل ْم َت ْجت َِهدْ َْل َتن َْج ْح‬
‫‪If you do not work hard, you will not be successful.‬‬
‫‪The negative verb in a conditional can be translated as unless.‬‬
‫‪Unless you work hard, you will not be successful.‬‬
‫‪ )7‬إِ ْن َل ْم َت ْش َر َبا َما ًء َت ْع َط َشا َوإِ ْن َل ْم َت ْأك ََُّل َت ُج ْوعَا‬ ‫إِ ْن َل ْم َت ْجت َِهدْ َْل َت ُفزْ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫‪ )8‬إِ ْن َل ْم َي ْح ُض ْر َن الدُّ ُر ْو َس ك َُّل َي ْوم َْل َي ْف َه ْمن ََها َف ْه ًما‬ ‫إِ ْن َل ْم ُتطِ ْع َن َأ َب َو ْي ُك َّن َي ْحزَ نَا‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫ب ن َْر ِج ْع إِ َلی ُب ُی ْوتِنَا‬ ‫ف َق ْب َل ا ْل َمغ ِْر ِ‬ ‫‪ )9‬إِ ْن َل ْم َي ْب ُل ِغ ُّ‬
‫الض ُی ْو ُ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫إِ ْن َل ْم َت ْصدُ ق ْي َْل ُي ْحبِ ْبك الن ُ‬
‫َّاس‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫ِ‬ ‫إِ ْن َلم ُتس ِرع ي ُكن جواب َك ص ِ‬
‫ب َع َل ْی َك‬ ‫‪ )10‬إِ ْن َل ْم َت ُك ْن َأ ْج ِو َبت َُك َصح ْی َح ًة َْل َيغ َْض ْ‬ ‫ح ْی ًحا‬ ‫ْ ْ ْ َ ْ َ َ ُ َ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫ُأ ْستَا ُذ َك َب ْل َين ُْص ْر َك‬ ‫ف َر َّب َك َت ِع ْش ِع ْی َش َة ا ْل َب َهائِ ِم‬ ‫إِ ْن َل ْم َت ْع ِر ْ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫اهلِ ْی َن‬‫إِ ْن َلم َت ْط ُلبوا ا ْل ِع ْلم ِصغَارا َتب َقوا ج ِ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫ً ْ ْ َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ْ ُ‬
‫‪579‬‬
‫َج َواب ُم َقدَّ م ‪The‬‬
‫‪َ may precede the‬ج َواب ‪Sometimes, in a conditional sentence, the‬‬
‫الشر ِ‬
‫ط ‪َ . In this case, the‬ش ْرط‬ ‫‪َ .‬م ْجزُ ْوم ‪َ to be‬ج َواب ‪َ will not cause the‬أ َدا ُة َّ ْ‬
‫ِ‬
‫دت‬ ‫َأ ْجت َِهدُ إِن ْ‬
‫‪I will work hard if you work‬‬
‫‪hard.‬‬
‫َش ْرط ُمؤَ َّخر‬ ‫اب َش ْرط ُم َقدَّ م‬
‫َج َو ُ‬
‫فِعل و َف ِ‬ ‫فِعل و َف ِ‬
‫اعل ( َأنَا)‬
‫(ت)‬
‫اعل َ‬ ‫ْ َ‬ ‫ف َش ْرط‬
‫َح ْر ُ‬ ‫ْ َ‬
‫دت‬
‫ْ‬ ‫إِ ْن‬ ‫َأ ْجت َِهدُ‬
‫ب إِ َلی ا ْل َمدْ َر َس ِة إِ ْن ُكن َْت َم ِر ْي ًضا‬
‫‪َْ )5‬ل َت ْذ َه ْ‬ ‫‪ )1‬ك ُْل إِ ْن ُكن َْت َجائِ ًعا‬
‫ون﴾‬ ‫الذك ِْر إِ ْن ُكنْت ُْم َْل َت ْع َل ُم َ‬ ‫اس َأ ُل ْوا َأ ْه َل ِّ‬
‫‪َ ﴿ )6‬ف ْ‬ ‫‪َْ )2‬ل َت ُص ْم إِ ْن ُكن َْت َم ِر ْي ًضا‬
‫‪َ ﴿ )7‬و ْاش ُك ُر ْوا نِ ْع َم َت اللِ إِ ْن ُكنْت ُْم إِ َّيا ُه َت ْع ُبدُ ْو َن﴾‬ ‫الل إِ ْن ُكنْت ُْم ُمؤْ مِن ِ ْی َن﴾‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪﴿ )3‬ا َّت ُق ْوا َ‬
‫الل َوال َی ْو َم ْاْل ِخ َر‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ )8‬اع َْم ْل َصال ًحا إِ ْن ُكن َْت َت ْر ُجو َ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫َان ِعنْدَ َك َمال‬
‫‪ُ )4‬ان ُْص ِر ا ْل ُف َق َرا َء َوا ْل َم َساكِ ْی َن إِ ْن ك َ‬
‫‪580‬‬
‫إِ ْن ‪ and‬إِ َذا ‪Comparing‬‬
‫‪ is used for events which are certain to occur, i.e. in the meaning‬إِ َذا‬
‫)‪of when. (see page 450‬‬
‫‪ is used for uncertain events, i.e. in the meaning of if.‬إِ ْن‬
‫إِ ْن َت ْذ َه ْ‬
‫ب‬ ‫إِ َذا َذ َه ْب َت‬
‫‪If you go‬‬ ‫‪When you go‬‬
‫‪َ and‬ش ْرط ‪Translate the following. Notice the difference between the‬‬
‫‪َ .‬م ْف ُع ْول فِ ْی ِه ‪the sentence‬‬
‫اك َف َس ِّل ْم َع َل ْی ِه مِن ِّْي‬‫‪ )6‬إِ َذا َر َأ ْي َت َأ َخ َ‬ ‫‪ )1‬إِ ْن َتن ُْص ِر َ‬
‫الل َين ُْص ْر َك‬
‫‪ )7‬إِ ْن َت َر ا ْل َك ْع َب َة بِ َع ْینَ ْی َك ُي ْع ِ‬ ‫إِ َذا ْ‬
‫ج ْب َك ُح ْسن َُها‬ ‫اس َت ْی َق ْظ َت َفا ْذك ُِر َ‬
‫الل‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫اء َينْ َف ْع َك ِع ْل ُم ُه ْم‬ ‫‪ )8‬إِ ْن َتجلِس مع ا ْلع َلم ِ‬ ‫إِ ْن َت ْس َت ْی ِق ْظ َق ْبلِ ْي َف َأ ْي ِق ْظن ِ ْي‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫ْ ْ َ َ ُ َ‬
‫اصدُ ْق َو َْل َت ْك ِذ ْب‬ ‫‪ )9‬إِ ْن َي ْس َأ ْل َك ْاْلُ ْس َتا ُذ َف ْ‬ ‫اش ُك ُروا َ‬
‫الل‬ ‫إِ َذا َجا َء ن َْص ُر اللِ َف ْ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫س َفاست َِمع إِ َلی ْاْلُست ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫اصدُ ْق َو َْل َت ْك ِذ ْب‬
‫َاذ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫‪ )10‬إِ َذا َج َل ْس َت في الدَّ ْر ِ ْ ْ‬ ‫إِ َذا َت َك َّل ْم َت َف ْ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫‪581‬‬
Unreal Conditionals
Unreal conditionals relate to circumstances in which the results are
unlikely to be occur or cannot be changed.
Translation of Unreal Conditionals
There are two types of unreal conditionals:
1. Second conditional
2. Third conditional
Second Conditional
Conditions which are possible but unlikely to be met are
represented by the second conditional.
These are expressed using the past tense in the condition clause
and would, should, could, might, etc. in the result clause.
If you worked hard, you would be successful.
This can also be translated by placing were at the beginning of the
sentence, followed by the infinitive.
Were you to work hard, you would be successful.
Note
The condition clause is translated using the past tense, even
though it gives a future meaning to indicate distance from reality,
not past events.
Third Conditional
Past situations which cannot be changed are represented by the
third conditional.
These are expressed using the past tense with had in the condition
clause and would have, should have, could have, might have, etc.
in the result clause, followed by the past participle.
If you had worked hard, you would have been successful.
This can also be translated by placing had at the beginning of the
sentence, followed by the past tense.
Had you worked hard, you would have been successful.
582
The following table summarises the four different conditionals.
‫َش ْرط‬ ِ ‫الشر‬
ُ ‫َج َو‬
Condition Result
Zero , you are successful.
If
(General Truths) you work hard (Present)
First (Present) , you will be successful.
If
(Future: Possible) (Future)
Second you worked hard , you would be successful.
If
(Future: Possible, Unlikely) (Past) (Would + Infinitive)
Third you had worked hard , you would have been successful.
If
(Past, Unchangeable) (Had + past) (Would have + Past participle)
Constructing Unreal Conditions

The unreal conditional is constructed by adding one of the
following ‫الش ْر ِط‬ َّ ‫ف‬
ُ ‫ َح ْر‬:
1. ‫َل ْو‬
2. ‫َل ْو َْل‬
The ‫الش ْر ِط‬ ُ ‫ َح ْر‬used in unreal conditionals are ‫ َغ ْی ُر عَامِل‬.
َّ ‫ف‬
‫َل ْو‬
‫ َل ْو‬can be followed by a:
1. ‫ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة‬
2. ‫ُج ْم َلة اِ ْس ِم َّیة‬
‫ َل ْو‬with a ‫ُج ْم َلة فِ ْعلِ َّیة‬
‫ َل ْو‬is usually followed by a ‫ فِ ْعل َماض‬in both ‫ط‬ ُ ‫الش ْر‬ ِ ‫الشر‬
َّ and ‫ط‬ ْ َّ ‫واب‬
ُ ‫ َج‬.
ِ
The ‫ َج َواب‬of ‫ َل ْو‬is often preceded by a ‫ َْلم‬, known as ‫ َْل ُم ا ْل َج َواب‬.
‫دت َلن ََج ْح َت‬ ْ ‫َل ِو‬
َّ ‫اجت ََه‬
If you worked hard, you would be successful.
If you had worked hard, you would have been successful.
ُ ‫َج َو‬ ‫َش ْرط‬
ِ ‫فِعل و َف‬ ِ ‫َْل ُم ا ْل َج َو‬ ِ ‫فِعل و َف‬
)‫(ت‬
َ ‫اعل‬ َ ْ ‫اب‬ )‫(ت‬
َ ‫اعل‬ َ ْ ‫ف َش ْرط‬
ُ ‫َح ْر‬
‫ن ََج ْح َت‬ ‫َل‬ ‫دت‬

َّ ‫اجت ََه‬
ْ ‫َل ْو‬
583
‫‪َ )1‬ل ْو َأ ْذ َن ْبت ُْم َل ُح ِر ْمت ُْم كَثِ ْی ًرا مِن ِّرزْ قِ ُك ْم‬
‫ِ‬
‫اجت ََها ًدا ل َفا َق ْت َأ ْق َران ََها‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ل ِو ْا َجت ََهدَ ت ْ‬
‫ف َل َما َأ ْخ َط ْأ َ‬ ‫ت مِن ا ْلمصح ِ‬
‫ت‬ ‫‪َ )3‬ل ْو َق َر ْأ َ َ ُ ْ َ‬
‫ات ا ْل َم ْكت ُْو َب َة‬ ‫ان َلما َتركُوا الص َلو ِ‬ ‫‪َ )4‬لو َذا ُقوا ح ََّلو َة ْ ِ ِ‬
‫اإل ْي َم َ َ ْ َّ َ‬ ‫ْ ْ َ َ‬
‫احت َْجت ُْم إِ َل ْی َها‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )5‬ل ْو َو َض ْعت ُُم ْاْلَ ْش َیا َء في َم َواضع َها َل َو َجد ُّت ُم ْو َها ح ْی َن ْ‬
‫ار َم َّك َة َل َما آ َمن ُْوا َب ْل زَ ا ُد ْوا ُك ْف ًرا َو ُط ْغ َیانًا َو َت ْك ِذ ْي ًبا‬ ‫الل ك َُّل آ َية ل ِ ُك َّف ِ‬
‫‪َ )6‬ل ْو َأنْزَ َل ُ‬
‫ض َوفِ ْي َأن ِْف ِس ِه ْم َن ْظ َر فِ ْكر َل َع َر ُف ْوا َأ َّن َل ُه َما َخال ِ ًقا َي ِق ْینًا‬ ‫اء َو ْاْلَ ْر ِ‬ ‫‪َ )7‬لو َن َظروا إِ َلی السم ِ‬
‫َّ َ‬ ‫ْ ُ ْ‬
‫َظ َجال ِ ًسا َع َل ْی ِه‬‫ج ِد مِنْ َبر َل َوع َ‬ ‫َان فِي ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬ ‫َّاس َجال ِ ًسا َع َلی ٰذل ِ َك ا ْل ُك ْر ِسي‪ ،‬و َل ْو ك َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ِ‬
‫إل َما ُم َيع ُظ الن َ‬ ‫‪َ )8‬ا ْ ِ‬
‫استِ َماعًا َل َف ِه ْم َت الدَّ ْر َس َف ْه ًما‬ ‫است ََم ْع َت إِ َلی ا ْل ُم َع ِّل ِم ْ‬

‫ِ‬
‫الض ْح َك َوا ْل َك ََّل َم في ا ْل َف ْص ِل َو ْ‬ ‫ْت ِّ‬ ‫‪َ )9‬ل ْو َت َرك َ‬
‫ب َع َلی َما َف َع َل َل َما آ َث َر ْاْلَغْن ِ َیا َء َو ْاْلُ َم َرا َء َع َلی ا ْل ُف َق َر ِاء‬ ‫ِ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫اس ُ‬ ‫‪َ )10‬ل ْو عَل َم ا ْل َقاض ْي َأ َّن ُه َس َی ُق ْو ُم لل َي ْو َم ا ْلق َیا َمة َو ُي َح َ‬
‫الضع َف ِ‬
‫اء‬ ‫َو ُّ َ‬
‫‪584‬‬
‫اس ِم َّیة ‪َ with a‬ل ْو‬
‫اس ِم َّیة ‪َ can also be followed by a‬ل ْو‬ ‫‪ُ . This occurs in two ways:‬ج ْم َلة ْ‬
‫َان ‪ of‬فِ ْعل نَاقِص ‪ُ is preceded by the‬ج ْم َلة ْاسم َّیة ‪1. The‬‬
‫ِ‬ ‫‪.‬ك َ‬
‫َان ا ْلمع ِّلم ص ِ‬
‫ح ْی ًحا َل َح َض َر الدَّ ْر َس‬ ‫َلو ك َ ُ َ ُ َ‬
‫‪Had the teacher been healthy, he would have attended the‬‬
‫‪lesson.‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪َ .‬م ْح ُذ ْوف ‪َ is hidden,‬خ َبر ‪َ and the‬أ َّن ‪ with‬ا ْسم ُمؤَ َّول ‪ُ is an‬م ْبتَدَ أ ‪2. The‬‬
‫دت ‪َ ...‬لن ََج ْح َت‬ ‫َلو َأن ََّك ْ‬
‫‪If you worked hard, you would be successful.‬‬
‫‪If you had worked hard, you would have been successful.‬‬
‫فِعل و َف ِ‬ ‫َْل ُم ا ْل َج َو ِ‬
‫(ت)‬
‫اعل َ‬ ‫ْ َ‬ ‫اب‬ ‫َخبَر‬ ‫ُمبْتَدَ أ‬ ‫ف َش ْرط‬
‫َح ْر ُ‬
‫ن ََج ْح َت‬ ‫َل‬ ‫( َم ْح ُذ ْوف)‬ ‫دت‬

‫ْ‬ ‫َك‬ ‫َأ َّنـ‬ ‫َل ْو‬
‫اعل َ‬ ‫ْ َ‬
‫َخ َب ُر َأ َّن‬ ‫اِ ْس ُم َأ َّن‬ ‫َح ْرف ُم َش َّبه بِا ْل ِف ْع ِل‬
‫الل َما َع َبدُ ْوا ْاْلَ ْصنَا َم‬‫‪َ )7‬ل ْو َأ َّن ُه ْم ع ََر ُف ْوا َ‬ ‫َصا ُه‬ ‫الل َل َما ع َ‬ ‫اف َ‬ ‫‪َ )1‬ل ْو ك َ‬
‫َان َي َخ ُ‬
‫‪َ )8‬ل ْو كَان ُْوا ُع َق ََّل َء َما َف َع ُل ْوا َأش َیا َء مِ ْث َل ٰه ِذ ِه‬ ‫َان ال َّثوب َط ِ‬
‫اه ًرا َل َلبِ ْس ُت ُه‬ ‫‪َ )2‬ل ْو ك َ ْ ُ‬
‫اإل َما ُم فِ ْی ِه‬‫ج ِد مِ ْح َراب َل َقا َم ْ ِ‬ ‫َان ل ِ ْل َم ْس ِ‬
‫‪َ )9‬ل ْو ك َ‬ ‫س َماء َل َش ِر ْب ُت ُه‬ ‫َان فِي ا ْل َك ْأ ِ‬
‫‪َ )3‬ل ْو ك َ‬
‫َان ِعنْدَ َها َماء َلغ ََس َل ْت َيدَ َها ا ْل َو ِس َخ َة‬ ‫‪َ )10‬ل ْو ك َ‬ ‫اب َم ْفت ُْو ًحا َلدَ َخ ْل ُت‬ ‫َان ا ْل َب ُ‬
‫‪َ )4‬ل ْو ك َ‬
‫َان ِعن ِْد ْي َمال َل َذ َه ْب ُت إِ َلی َم َّك َة ِْلَ ُح َّج‬ ‫‪َ )11‬ل ْو ك َ‬ ‫َت ْاْلَ ْصنَا ُم آل ِ َه ًة َلنَ َف َع ْت ُه ْم‬ ‫‪َ )5‬لو كَان ِ‬
‫ْ‬
‫لص ََّل ِة‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ ِ‬ ‫‪َ )6‬ل ْو ُكن َْت َت ْس َم ُع الدَّ ْر َس َل َف ِه ْم َت ُه‬
‫‪َ )12‬ل ْو َأ َّن ا ْل َو َلدَ نَا َم َب ْعدَ ا ْلع َشاء َْل ْس َت ْی َق َظ ل َّ‬
‫‪585‬‬
‫َل ْو َْل‬
‫اس ِم َّیة ‪َ is followed by a‬ل ْو َْل‬
‫‪َ .‬م ْح ُذ ْوف ‪َ is‬خ َبر ‪ُ in which the‬ج ْم َلة ْ‬
‫‪This is translated as were it not for or had it not been for. This is‬‬
‫‪used for third conditionals.‬‬
‫َل ْو َْل ْاْلَ ْنبِ َیا ُء َل َض َّل الن ُ‬
‫َّاس‬
‫‪Were it not for the Prophets, people would have been misguided.‬‬
‫‪Had it not been for the Prophets, people would have been misguided.‬‬
‫‪َْ .‬ل ُم ا ْل َج َو ِ‬
‫اب ‪َ is often preceded by‬ل ْو َْل ‪َ of‬ج َواب ‪The‬‬
‫َف ِ‬ ‫فِ ْعل‬ ‫َْل ُم ا ْل َج َو ِ‬
‫اعل‬ ‫اب‬ ‫َخ َبر‬ ‫ُم ْبتَدَ أ‬ ‫ف َش ْرط‬
‫َح ْر ُ‬
‫َّاس‬
‫الن ُ‬ ‫َض َّل‬ ‫َل‬ ‫( َم ْح ُذ ْوف)‬ ‫ْاْلَ ْنبِ َیا ُء‬ ‫َل ْو َْل‬
‫ج ِد ُم ْغ َلق َل َص َّل ْینَا فِ ْی ِه‬
‫اب ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬
‫‪َ )7‬ل ْو َْل َأ َّن َب َ‬ ‫ب َل َما ع ََر ْفنَا النِّ َع َم‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َل ْو َْل ا ْل َم َصائ ُ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫‪َ )8‬ل ْو َْل َم َر ُض َجدِّ ْي َل َصا َم َي ْو َم ْی ِن ك َُّل ُأ ْس ُب ْوع‬ ‫اع ا ْل ِع ْل ُم‬
‫َاب َل َض َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َل ْو َْل ا ْل َق َل ُم َوا ْلكت ُ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫آن كَثِ ْیر مِ َن الن ِ‬
‫َّاس‬ ‫ان َل َما َت ََّل ا ْل ُق ْر َ‬
‫‪َ )9‬ل ْو َْل َر َم َض ُ‬ ‫َل ْو َْل تِ ْل َك ا ْل َع ََّل َم ُة َل َما ع ََر ْفنَا َب ْیت ََك‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫آن وا ْلح ِدي ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ف َلما َأ َقمنَا فِي ا ْلبی ِ‬
‫ث‬ ‫‪َ )10‬ل ْو َْل ا ْل ُع َل َما ُء َل َما َو َص َل إ َل ْینَا ع ْل ُم ا ْل ُق ْر َ َ ْ‬ ‫ت‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫الض ُی ْو ُ َ ْ‬ ‫َل ْو َْل ُّ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫ات‬‫اش النَّاس ِعی َش َة ْاْلُس ِد وا ْلب َقر ِ‬ ‫‪َ )11‬ل ْو َْل ْاْلَ َد ُب َل َع َ‬ ‫َل ْو َْل َأ َّن الدَّ ْر َس فِي ال َّل ْی ِل َل َح َض ْر ُت ُه‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫ُ َ َ َ‬ ‫ُ ْ‬
‫‪َ )12‬لو َْل ا ْل ِعباد ُة و َط َلب ا ْل ِع ْل ِم ما ُذ ْق ُت ح ََّلو َة ا ْلحی ِ‬ ‫َّاس إِ َلی َم َّك َة‬
‫اة‬ ‫َ َ ََ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ َ َ ُ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫َل ْو َْل ا ْل َك ْع َب ُة َل َما َسا َف َر الن ُ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫‪586‬‬
‫َل ْو ‪ and‬إِ ْن ‪Additional Rules of‬‬
‫َحال ‪َ as a‬و َل ْو ‪َ and‬وإِ ْن‬
‫‪َ to‬واو َحال ِ َّیة ‪َ can be preceded by a‬ل ْو ‪ and‬إِ ْن ‪The conditional particles‬‬
‫‪give the meaning of even though or even if.‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫َأنْص ُف ْوا الن َ‬
‫َّاس َو َل ْو َظ َل ُم ْو َك‬
‫‪Be fair to people‬‬
‫‪even though they wronged you.‬‬
‫الش ْر ِط ‪َ , and the‬حال ‪َ becomes the‬و َل ْو ‪The sentence after‬‬ ‫‪َ .‬م ْح ُذ ْوف ‪َ is‬ج َو ُ‬
‫اب َّ‬
‫َحال‬ ‫َواو َحال ِ َّیة‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ ‫فِعل و َف ِ‬
‫اعل (و)‬ ‫ْ َ‬ ‫ف َش ْرط‬
‫َح ْر ُ‬
‫وم ْفعول بِهِ‬
‫َ َ ُْ‬
‫َظ َل ُم ْوك ُْم‬ ‫َل ْو‬ ‫َّاس‬ ‫َأ ِ‬

‫نص ُف ْوا‬
‫( َم ْح ُذ ْوف)‬ ‫َو‬ ‫الن َ‬
‫َْل َت ْظلِ ِم الن َ‬
‫َّاس َو َل ْو َظ َل ُم ْو َك‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫َأ َت َو َّض ُأ ل ِ ُك ِّل َص ََّلة َوإِ ْن ُكن ُْت ُمت ََو ِّض ًأ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫َلن ُي ْفلِ َح ال َّظال ِ ُم َوإِ ْن َج َم َع َج َب ًَّل مِ ْن َذ َهب‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫َْل َت ْس ُجدُ ْوا ِْلَ َحد َغ ْی ِر اللِ َوإِ ْن َق َط ُع ْوا َر ْأ َس ُك ْم‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫َت َقا َل ْت ل ِ ْي‪َ :‬يا ُبنَ َّي! َأ ْدع ُْو َل َك َدائِ ًما‬ ‫َدائِ ًما َأ ْس َأ ُل ُأ ِّم ْي َأن َتدْ ع َُو ل ِ ْي َو َل ْو كَان ْ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫ج ِد َوإِ ْن ك َ‬
‫َان َم ِر ْي ًضا‬ ‫ات ُك َّل َها فِي ا ْل َم ْس ِ‬ ‫ان يص ِّلي الص َلو ِ‬
‫َان َجدُّ َأ ْح َمدَ ُس َل ْی َم ُ ُ َ ْ َّ َ‬ ‫ك َ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫‪587‬‬
‫ َل ْو‬for Requests
The conditional particle ‫ َل ْو‬can be used to make a request. The
sentence after ‫ َل ْو‬will be a ‫فِ ْعل َماض‬. In this case the ‫الش ْر ِط‬ ُ ‫ َج َو‬is ‫ َم ْح ُذ ْوف‬.
َّ ‫اب‬
This is translated as why don’t you or could you kindly.
َ ‫َل ْو َج َل ْس َت ُهن‬
‫َاك‬
Could you kindly sit over there.
‫ َل ْو‬for Wishes
The particle ‫ َل ْو‬can also be used to express a wish. In this case, the
ِ ‫الشر‬
ُ ‫ َج َو‬is omitted.
‫َل ْو َل ْم أ َض ِّی ْع َو ْقتِ ْي‬
If only I did not waste my time.
588
‫َالن َّْه ُي ‪َ and‬ا ْْلَ ْم ُر ‪Part 4: Sentences after‬‬
‫‪ is sometimes followed‬فِ ْع ُل َن ْهي ‪ or a‬فِ ْع ُل َأ ْمر ‪A sentence comprised of a‬‬
‫‪by another sentence which shows the result of adhering or not‬‬
‫‪.‬ن َْهي ‪َ or‬أ ْمر ‪adhering to the‬‬
‫اب ْاْلَ ْم ِر ‪This second sentence is called‬‬
‫اب الن َّْه ِي ‪َ or‬ج َو ُ‬
‫‪َ .‬ج َو ُ‬
‫اب ْاْلَ ْم ِر‬

‫َج َو ُ‬
‫اب ْاْلَ ْم ِر ‪The‬‬
‫‪َ shows the result of adhering to the command.‬ج َو ُ‬
‫واب ْاْلَ ْم ِر ‪The verb of the‬‬ ‫‪َ state.‬م ْجزُ ْوم ‪ in the‬فِ ْعل ُم َض ِ‬
‫ارع ‪َ is a‬ج ُ‬
‫‪In translation, these sentences can be separated by a comma or‬‬
‫‪can be joined with the word and.‬‬
‫الل َتدْ ُخ ِل ا ْل َجنَّ َة‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ُا ْع ُبد َ‬
‫‪Worship Allah, you will enter Jannah.‬‬
‫‪Worship Allah and you will enter Jannah.‬‬
‫اب َأ ْمر‬
‫َج َو ُ‬ ‫َأ ْمر‬

‫اعل ( َأن َْت)‬ ‫ْ َ‬ ‫َم ْف ُع ْول بِ ِه‬ ‫فِعل و َف ِ‬
‫ا ْل َجنَّ َة‬ ‫َتدْ ُخ ِل‬ ‫الل‬

‫َ‬ ‫ُاعْ ُب ِد‬
‫‪ )9‬اِ ْس َأ ِل ْاْلُ ْستَا َذ َي ْش َر ْح َل َك الدَّ ْر َس َحتَّی َت ْف َه َم‬ ‫ُص ْو ُم ْوا َت ِص ُّح ْوا‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫الل‬
‫َّاس َين ُْص ْرك َُما ُ‬ ‫َب‪ُ ،‬ان ُْص َرا الن َ‬ ‫‪َ )10‬يا َأ ْح َمدُ َوزَ ْين ُ‬ ‫﴿ َفا ْذك ُُر ْونِي َأ ْذك ُْرك ُْم﴾‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫استِ َماعًا َت ْف َه ِمي الدَّ ْر َس‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ ِ ِ‬
‫‪ )11‬ا ْستَمع ْي إِ َلی ا ْل ُم َع ِّل َمة ْ‬
‫َّاس ي ِ‬
‫ح ُّب ْو َك‬ ‫َأ ْحس ْن إِ َلی الن ِ ُ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫‪ )12‬يا ِبن ِْتي‪ِ ،‬اص ِب ِري عَ َلی ما َأصاب ِك يؤْ ِت ِك الل َأجرا ِ‬ ‫الل مِن َْك‬ ‫اِ ْق َب ْل مِ َن الن ِ‬
‫عَظ ْی ًما‬ ‫ُ ًْ‬ ‫َ َ َ ُ‬ ‫َ ْ ْ ْ‬ ‫َّاس َي ْق َب ِل ُ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫الل ل ِ ُذن ُْوبِ ُك ْم‪َ ،‬يغ ِْف ْر‬ ‫ِ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )13‬يا َأ ُّي َها ا َّلذ ْي َن آ َمن ُْوا‪ ،‬ا ْس َتغْف ُروا َ‬ ‫الل فِ ْی َها‬
‫ارك ُ‬
‫َأدوا زَ كَا َة َأموال ِ ُكم يب ِ ِ‬
‫ْ َ ْ َُ‬ ‫ُّ ْ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫َل َك ْم ُذن ُْو َب ُك ْم‬ ‫آمِن ُْوا بِاللِ َو َر ُس ْول ِ ِه َت ُف ْوزُ ْوا َف ْوزً ا َعظِ ْی ًما‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫َّاس كَ ِب ْی َر ُه ْم َو َص ِغ ْی َر ُه ْم َق ِو َّي ُه ْم َو َض ِع ْی َف ُه ْم‬
‫‪ )14‬ا ْر َح ُم ْوا الن َ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫َّاس َي ْحت َِر ُم ْو ُك ْم‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َيا َأ ُّي َها ْاْلَ ْو َْل ُد‪ ،‬ا ْحت َِر ُم ْوا الن َ‬ ‫‪)7‬‬
‫َي ْر َح ُم ْوكُ ْم َو َي ْر َح ْم ُك ُم ُ‬
‫الل‬ ‫الل َع َلی َما َرزَ َق َك ْم مِ َن النِّ َع ِم َي ِز ْد َك ْم‬ ‫ُا ْش ُك ُروا َ‬ ‫‪)8‬‬
‫‪589‬‬
ِ‫اب الن َّْهي‬
ُ ‫َج َو‬
The ‫اب الن َّْه ِي‬
ُ ‫ َج َو‬shows the result of adhering or not adhering to the
command. It can occur in two ways:
1. Without a ‫ َف‬before it
2. With a ‫ َف‬before it
The ‫اب الن َّْه ِي‬
ُ ‫ َج َو‬Without a ‫ف‬ َ
The ‫اب الن َّْه ِي‬ُ ‫ َج َو‬without a ‫ف‬ َ shows the result of adhering to the
prohibition.
The verb of the ‫واب الن َّْه ِي‬ ِ ‫ فِ ْعل ُم َض‬in the ‫ َم ْجزُ ْوم‬state.
ُ ‫ َج‬is a ‫ارع‬
In translation, these sentences can be separated by a comma or
can be joined with the word and.
‫َْل َت ْك ُف ْر َتدْ ُخ ِل ا ْل َجنَّ َة‬
Do not disbelieve, you will enter Jannah.
Do not disbelieve and you will enter Jannah.
ُ ‫َج َو‬ ‫ن َْهي‬

ِ ‫فِع ُل نَهي و َف‬
)‫اعل ( َأن َْت‬ َ ْ ْ
‫ا ْل َجنَّ َة‬ ‫َتدْ ُخ ِل‬ ‫َْل َت ْك ُف ْر‬
Exercise 2
Translate the following sentences.
ِ ‫اإليم‬ ِ
‫ان‬ َ ْ ِ ْ ‫ب َت ُذ ْق َح ََّل َو َة‬ ْ ‫) َْل ُت ْذن‬6 ‫) َْل َت ْك َس ْل َتن َْج ْح‬1
ِ ‫َّاس ي‬ ِ ‫) َْل َت ْط َم ْع فِي َم‬7
‫ح ُّب ْو َك‬ ُ ِ ‫ال الن‬ َ ‫) َْل َتن َْس‬2
‫الل َْل َين َْس َك‬
‫اس ِم اللِ ُي َب َار ْك فِ ْی َك‬ ْ ‫) َْل َت ْبدَ ْأ َأ ْم ًرا بِ َغ ْی ِر‬8
ِ
ُ ‫) َْل َت ْس َت ْكبِ ْر ُيح َّب َك الن‬3
‫َّاس‬
ِ ‫) َْل ُت َضیع و ْقت ََك َتنْجح فِي اْلمتِح‬9
‫ان‬ ‫ان َت ْهتَدُ ْوا‬ َّ ‫) َْل َت َّتبِ ُعوا‬4
َ ‫الش ْی َط‬
َ ْ ْ َ َ ْ ِّ
‫ب َم َع َق َل ِم َك َت ْف َه ِم الدَّ ْر َس َف ْه ًما‬ ْ ‫) َْل َت ْل َع‬10 ‫) َْل َت ُق ْو ُل ْوا إِ َّْل ا ْل َح َّق َت ْس َل ُم ْوا‬5
590
‫اب الن َّْه ِي ‪The‬‬
‫ف ‪َ with a‬ج َو ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫اب الن َّْه ِي ‪The‬‬‫ف ‪َ with a‬ج َو ُ‬
‫‪َ shows the result of not adhering to the‬‬
‫‪prohibition.‬‬
‫‪َ state.‬من ُْص ْوب ‪ in the‬فِ ْعل ُم َض ِارع ‪This is comprised of a‬‬
‫‪This can be translated as lest, otherwise, or, etc.‬‬
‫َْل َت ْك َس ْل َف َتنْدَ َم‬
‫‪Do not be lazy, lest you regret (it).‬‬
‫‪Do not be lazy, or you will regret (it).‬‬
‫‪Do not be lazy, otherwise you will regret (it).‬‬
‫الس َب ِب ‪َ is labelled as‬ف ‪In tarkib, the‬‬
‫‪َ .‬فا ُء َّ‬
‫َج َو ُ‬ ‫ن َْهي‬
‫اعل ( َأن َْت)‬ ‫الس َب ِ‬ ‫فِع ُل نَهي و َف ِ‬
‫اعل ( َأن َْت)‬
‫ْ َ‬ ‫ب‬ ‫َفا ُء َّ‬ ‫ْ ْ َ‬
‫َتنْدَ َم‬ ‫ف‬

‫َ‬ ‫َْل َت ْك َس ْل‬
‫الص ََّل َة َف َت ْبكِ َي َي ْو َم ا ْل ِق َیا َم ِة نَدَ ا َم ًة‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َْ )6‬ل َتت ُْرك َّ‬ ‫َّاس َف ُی ْب ِغ ُض ْو َك‬
‫‪َْ )1‬ل َت ْخدَ ِع الن َ‬
‫الل ع ََذا ًبا َش ِد ْيدً ا‬ ‫َّاس َف ُی َع ِّذ َب َك ُ‬ ‫‪َْ )7‬ل َت ْظلِ ِم الن َ‬ ‫ب َف َی ْملِ َك َك َّ‬
‫ان‬ ‫‪َْ )2‬ل َتغ َْض ْ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪َْ )8‬ل ُت ْس ِر ْ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َخ َس َر‬ ‫ف َما َل َك ف ْی َما َْل ُي ْرضي َ‬
‫الل َفت ْ‬ ‫‪َْ )3‬ل َت ْض َح ْك َع َلی َأ َحد َف َی ْبتَل َی َك ُ‬
‫الل‬
‫‪َْ )9‬ل َتدْ ُخ ْل َب ْی َت َأ َحد بِ َغ ْی ِر إِ ْذن َفت ََری َما َْل َينْ َب ِغ ْي‬ ‫الل َع َل ْی َك‬
‫ب ُ‬ ‫‪َْ )4‬ل َت ُع َّق َأ َب َو ْي َك َف َی ْحزَ نَا َو َيغ َْض َ‬
‫ِ ِ‬
‫الل َع َل ْی َك م ْن ن َعم َف ُی َع ِّذ َب َك ُ‬
‫الل‬ ‫‪َْ )10‬ل َت ْك ُف ْر بِ َما َأ ْن َع َم ُ‬ ‫َخ َس ُر ْوا ُأ ُج ْو َرك ُْم َو َتنْدَ ُم ْوا‬
‫َّاس َفت ْ‬
‫‪َْ )5‬ل َت ْغتَا ُب ْوا الن َ‬
‫‪591‬‬
Summary of ‫اب ْاْلَ ْم ِر‬
ُ ‫ َج َو‬and ِ‫اب الن َّْهي‬
ُ ‫َج َو‬
Type of Verb in Irab of the Verb
Meaning of the Example and
the Main in the Following
Following Sentence Translation
Sentence Sentence
‫اجت َِهدْ َتن َْج ْح‬
ْ
Result of adhering
‫ْاْلَ ْم ُر‬ to the command ‫َم ْجزُ ْوم‬ Work hard and
you will be
successful.
‫َْل َت ْك َس ْل َتن َْج ْح‬
Result of adhering
to the prohibition ‫َم ْجزُ ْوم‬ Do not be lazy
and you will be
successful.
‫الن َّْه ُي‬
‫َْل َت ْك َس ْل َف َتنْدَ َم‬
Result of not
adhering to the ‫ َمن ُْص ْوب‬+ ‫َفـ‬ Do not be lazy
prohibition otherwise you
will regret (it).
Exercise 4
Join the following sentences together. Make changes where
necessary.
‫ َت ْهت َِد ْي َن‬/ ِ‫َاب الل‬ ِ ‫) اِ ْعت َِص ْم َن بِكِت‬6 ‫ َت ْظ َه ُر ا ْل َب َر َك ُة فِي َح َیاتِ ُك ْم‬/ ‫ُا ْصدُ ُق ْوا‬ )1
‫ َتدْ ُخ ُل ا ْل َجنَّ َة‬/ ‫اص َي‬ ِ ‫) اِجتَنِبن ا ْلمع‬7 ‫ َت ْظ َه ُر ا ْل َب َر َك ُة فِي َح َیاتِ َك‬/ ‫َْل َت ْك ِذ ْب‬ )2
َ َ َ ْ ْ
‫ َت ْخ َس ُر ْو َن‬/ ‫) َْل ُتض ِّی ُع ْوا َو ْق َت ُك ْم‬8 ‫ ُت ْح َر ُم ا ْل َب َر َك َة‬/ ‫َْل َت ْك ِذ ْب‬ )3
ِ ‫ان فِي اْلمتِح‬ ِ ‫ َتنْجح‬/ ‫اجعا الدُّ روس‬ ِ
‫ان‬ َ ْ َ َ َ ْ ُ َ ِ ‫) َر‬9 ُ ‫ ُي ْبغ ُض َك‬/ ‫َْل َت ْس َت ْكبِ ْر‬
‫الل‬ )4
‫ َت َر ْو َن َما َْل َينْ َب ِغ ْي‬/ ‫) َْل َتدْ ُخ ُل ْوا ُب ُی ْو ًتا َغ ْی َر ُب ُی ْوتِ ُك ْم‬10 ‫ ُت ْق َب ُل َت ْو َب ُت ُك ْم‬/ ِ‫ُت ُو ُب ْوا إِ َلی الل‬ )5
592
Part 5: ‫ُج ْم َلة َت ْعلِ ْیلِ َّیة‬
Sometimes, an independent sentence may show the cause or
reason of the previous sentence, like a ‫ َم ْف ُع ْول َل ُه‬. This is called ‫ُج ْم َلة‬
‫ َت ْعلِ ْیلِ َّیة‬.
A ‫ ُج ْم َلة َت ْعلِ ْیلِ َّیة‬is translated by adding for, because, so that or perhaps
between the two sentences. Sometimes, no additions are made.
Be good to your parents because they
looked after you when you were young.
Types of ‫ُج ْم َلة َت ْعلِ ْیلِ َّیة‬
There are three types of ‫ ُج ْم َلة َت ْعلِ ْیلِ َّیة‬:
1. A ‫ ُج ْم َلة َت ْعلِ ْیلِ َّیة‬with no additions
2. A ‫ ُج ْم َلة َت ْعلِ ْیلِ َّیة‬with the ‫ َح ْر ُف َع ْطف‬of ‫َف‬
3. A ‫ ُج ْم َلة َت ْعلِ ْیلِ َّیة‬with the ‫ َحرف ُم َش َّبه بِا ْل ِف ْع ِل‬of ‫َل َع َّل‬
593
‫‪ُ with no Additions‬ج ْم َلة َت ْعلِ ْیلِ َّیة ‪A‬‬
‫‪ُ can occur without any additions to it.‬ج ْم َلة َت ْعلِ ْیلِ َّیة ‪A‬‬
‫ب ا ْل ُم ْح ِسن ِ ْی َن‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َأ ْحسن ُْوا إِ َّن َ‬
‫الل ُيح ُّ‬
‫‪Do good, for verily Allah‬‬
‫‪loves those who do good.‬‬
‫‪In this text, the second sentence, Allah loves those who do good,‬‬
‫‪shows the reason for the command in the first, be good.‬‬
‫‪Reason  Action‬‬
‫‪Vocab‬‬
‫‪form, picture‬‬ ‫‪ُ footsteps‬ص ْو َرة ج ُص َور‬ ‫ُخ ْط َوة ج ُخ ُط َوات‬
‫‪time‬‬ ‫ُص ْور‬

‫َصر ج ع ُ‬
‫‪ body‬ع ْ‬ ‫ِج ْسم ج َأ ْج َسام‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ب ا ْل ِع ْل َم إِ َّن ا ْل ِع ْل َم َينْ َف ُع‬
‫یما﴾‬‫ورا َرح ً‬ ‫َان َغ ُف ً‬
‫الل ك َ‬‫الل إِ َّن َ‬
‫اس َتغْف ِر َ‬ ‫‪َ ﴿ )6‬و ْ‬ ‫ُا ْط ُل ِ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫ض إِ َّن فِ ْی ِه َما َْل َيات‬ ‫‪ )7‬ا ْن ُظروا إِ َلی السم ِ‬
‫اء َو ْاْلَ ْر ِ‬ ‫اِغ ِْس ْل يدَ ي َك إِنَّهما و ِس َخت ِ‬
‫َان‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫َّ َ‬ ‫ُ ْ‬ ‫ُ َ َ‬ ‫َ ْ‬
‫الصا ِب ِر َ‬
‫ين﴾‬ ‫الل َم َع َّ‬
‫ِ‬
‫الص ََّلة ِإ َّن َ‬
‫الص ْب ِر َو َّ‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪ْ ﴿ )8‬استَعینُوا ِب َّ‬ ‫الش ْر َك َل ُظ ْلم َعظِ ْیم‬ ‫َْل ُت ْش ِرك ُْوا بِاللِ إِ َّن ِّ‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫ان ِإ َّن ُه َل ُك ْم عَدُ و ُم ِبین﴾‬ ‫الشی َط ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫َْل َأك ِْذ ُب إِ َّن ا ْلكِ ْذ َب َي ْه ِد ْي إِ َلی الن ِ‬
‫‪َْ ﴿ )9‬ل َت َّت ِب ُعوا ُخ ُط َوات َّ ْ‬ ‫َّار‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫الل َْل ُي ِح ُّب ا ْل ُم ْس ِر ِف ْی َن‬
‫‪ )10‬كُ ُل ْوا َو ْاش َر ُب ْوا َو َْل ُت ْس ِر ُف ْوا ِإ َّن َ‬ ‫الل َغ ُفور َر ِحیم﴾‬ ‫الل إِ َّن َ‬ ‫اس َتغْف ُروا َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫﴿ َو ْ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫‪594‬‬
‫َل َع َّل ‪ُ with‬ج ْم َلة َت ْعلِ ْیلِ َّیة ‪A‬‬
‫‪َ .‬ل َع َّل ‪َ of‬ح ْرف ُم َش َّبه بِا ْل ِف ْع ِل ‪ُ can occur with the‬ج ْم َلة َت ْعلِ ْیلِ َّیة ‪A‬‬
‫الل َل َع َّل ُك ْم ُت ْفلِ ُح ْو َن﴾‬ ‫ِ‬
‫﴿ا َّت ُق ْوا َ‬
‫‪Fear Allah so that you may be successful.‬‬
‫‪In this text, the second sentence, you may be successful, shows the‬‬
‫‪reason for the command in the first, Fear Allah.‬‬
‫‪َ is written as follows:‬ل َع َّل ‪The tarkib of a sentence with‬‬
‫َخ َب ُر َل َع َّل‬ ‫اس ُم َل َع َّل‬
‫ْ‬ ‫َح ْرف ُم َش َّبه بِا ْل ِف ْع ِل‬
‫ُت ْفلِ ُح ْو َن‬ ‫ك ُْم‬ ‫َل َع َّل‬

‫َاب َل َع َّل ُه ْم َي ْهتَدُ َ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪ُ ﴿ )1‬ي ِر ْي ُك ْم آ َياتِ ِه َل َع َّل ُك ْم َت ْع ِق ُل ْو َن﴾‬
‫ون﴾‬ ‫وسى ا ْلكت َ‬ ‫﴿ َو َل َقدْ آ َت ْینَا ُم َ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫ان ل ِ ْي‬
‫ان َعنِّي ويدْ عُو ِ‬
‫ْ ََ َ‬
‫ُأطِیع والِدَ ي َلع َّلهما ير َضی ِ‬
‫ْ ُ َ َّ َ ُ َ َ ْ َ‬ ‫‪)7‬‬ ‫‪ُ ﴿ )2‬ا ْع ُبدُ ْوا َر َّب ُك ُم ‪َ ...‬ل َع َّل ُك ْم َت َّت ُق ْو َن﴾‬
‫الس ْم َع َو ْاْلَ ْب َص َار َل َع َّل ُك ْم َت ْش ُك ُر ْو َن‬
‫الل َج َع َل َل ُك ُم َّ‬ ‫إِ َّن َ‬ ‫‪)8‬‬ ‫‪َ ﴿ )3‬فا ْذك ُُر ْوا َآْل َء اللِ َل َع َّل ُك ْم ُت ْفلِ ُح ْو َن﴾‬
‫ِ‬ ‫‪﴿ )4‬إِنَّا َج َع ْلنَا ُه ُق ْرآنًا ع ََربِ ًّیا َل َع َّل ُك ْم َت ْع ِق ُل ْو َن﴾‬
‫اس ُجدُ ْوا َوا ْع ُبدُ ْوا َر َّب ُك ْم‬ ‫ين آ َمن ُْوا ْار َك ُع ْوا َو ْ‬ ‫﴿ َيا َأ ُّي َها ا َّلذ َ‬ ‫‪)9‬‬
‫َوا ْف َع ُلوا ا ْل َخ ْی َر َل َع َّل ُك ْم ُت ْفلِ ُح ْو َن﴾‬ ‫ات َل َع َّل ُك ْم َت ْش ُك ُر ْو َن﴾‬‫‪﴿ )5‬ورزَ َق ُكم مِن ال َّطیب ِ‬
‫ْ َ ِّ َ‬ ‫ََ‬
‫‪595‬‬
‫َف ‪َ of‬ح ْر ُف َع ْطف ‪ُ with the‬ج ْم َلة َت ْعلِ ْیلِ َّیة ‪A‬‬
‫َفاء ‪َ which is known as‬ف ‪َ of‬ح ْر ُف َع ْطف ‪ُ can occur after the‬ج ْم َلة َت ْعلِ ْیلِ َّیة ‪A‬‬
‫‪َ .‬س َببِ َّیة‬
‫الل َفإِ َّن ُه َخ َل َق َك‬
‫ُا ْع ُبدُ ْوا َ‬
‫‪Worship Allah because he created you.‬‬
‫‪In this text, the second sentence, he created you, shows the‬‬
‫‪reason for the command in the first, Worship Allah.‬‬
‫‪The reason can also come before the action.‬‬
‫الل َر ِّبي َو َر ُّب ُك ْم َفا ْع ُبدُ ْو ُه﴾‬
‫﴿ ُ‬
‫‪Allah is my Lord and your Lord, so worship him.‬‬
‫‪In this text, the first sentence, Allah is my Lord and your Lord, is‬‬
‫‪the reason for the command in the second sentence, worship him.‬‬
‫‪Action  Reason‬‬
‫‪ُ )10‬توبوا إِ َلی اللِ َفإِ َّن الل ي ْقب ُل التَّوب َة عَن ِعب ِ‬
‫اد ِه‬ ‫‪ )1‬ا ْل َخ ْم ُر َح َرام َف ََّل َت ْش َر ُب ْو َها‬
‫َْ ْ َ‬ ‫ََ َ‬ ‫ُْْ‬
‫ل ْصنَا ِم َفإِن ََّها َْل َت ُض ُّر َو َْل َتنْ َف ُع‬ ‫‪َْ )11‬ل َت ْس ُجدُ ْوا ل ِ ْ َ‬ ‫الل َح َّر َم َها‬ ‫‪َْ )2‬ل َت ْش َر ُب ْوا ا ْل َخ ْم َر َفإِ َّن َ‬
‫ِ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫﴿ر َّبنَا آ َمنَّا َفاغ ِْف ْر َلنَا َو ْار َح ْمنَا﴾‬
‫ین﴾‬ ‫یع َأ ْج َر ا ْل ُم ْحسن َ‬ ‫الل َْل ُيض ُ‬ ‫اصبِ ْر َفإِ َّن َ‬ ‫‪َ ﴿ )12‬و ْ‬ ‫‪َ )3‬‬
‫‪ )13‬اِ ْح َف ْظ ل ِ َسان ََك َفإِن ََّك َم ْسئ ُْول َعن َْها َي ْو َم ا ْل ِق َیا َم ِة‬ ‫ات‬‫َجیب الدَّ عَو ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫الل َفإِ َّن ُه َي ْست ِ ْ ُ‬
‫‪ُ )4‬ا ْدعُوا َ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫الصدَ َق ِة فِ َّ‬ ‫ِ ِ‬ ‫َجیب الدَّ عَو ِ‬
‫ب‬‫الصدَ َق َة َتدْ َف ُع ا ْل َم َصائ َ‬ ‫إن َّ‬ ‫‪َ )14‬أكْث ُر ْوا م َن َّ‬ ‫ات َفا ْدع ُْو ُه‬ ‫َ‬ ‫الل َي ْست ِ ْ ُ‬ ‫‪ )5‬إِ َّن َ‬
‫الل َر ِّبي َو َر ُّب ُك ْم َفا ْع ُبدُ ْو ُه ٰه َذا ِص َراط ُم ْست َِقیم﴾‬ ‫‪﴿ )15‬إِ َّن َ‬ ‫الصابِ ِر ْي َن﴾‬ ‫الل َم َع َّ‬ ‫إن َ‬ ‫‪﴿ )6‬اِ ْصبِ ُر ْوا َف َّ‬
‫اس ُب َك َي ْو َم ا ْل ِق َیا َم ِة‬
‫اجر‪َْ ،‬ل َت ْخدَ ِع النَّاس َفإِ َّن الل يح ِ‬
‫َُ َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫‪َ )16‬يا َت ِ ُ‬ ‫الشاكِ ِر ْي َن‬ ‫ب َّ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫الل َفإِ َّن َ‬
‫الل ُيح ُّ‬ ‫‪ُ )7‬ا ْش ُك ُروا َ‬
‫اب ا ْل ِع ْل ِم‬ ‫س إِ َّْل ُمت ََو ِّض ًأ َفإِن ََّها مِ ْن آ َد ِ‬
‫‪َْ )17‬ل َأ ْجلِ ُس فِي الدَّ ْر ِ‬ ‫الصدْ َق َي ْه ِد ْي إِ َلی ا ْل َجن َِّة‬
‫‪ُ )8‬ا ْصدُ ُق ْوا َفإِ َّن ِّ‬
‫‪َْ )18‬ل َأ ْستَطِ ْی ُع َأ ْن َأ ْح َف َظ ٰه َذا الدَّ ْر َس ُك َّل َها َفإِ َّن ُه َط ِو ْيل ِجدًّ ا‬ ‫‪َ )9‬ت َأ َّد ُب ْوا َفإِ َّن ا ْل ِع ْل َم َْل ُي ْح َص ُل إِ َّْل بِ ْاْلَ َد ِ‬
‫ب‬
‫‪596‬‬
‫‪َ .‬ف ‪Join the following sentences together using‬‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ ِ‬
‫ب ا ْل َعدْ َل‬ ‫‪ )1‬اعْد ُل ْوا ‪ /‬إِ َّن َ‬
‫َْل َتدْ ُخ ُل ْوا الغ ُْر َف َة ‪ /‬إِ َّن ُأ َّم ُك ْم نَائِ َمة فِ ْی َها‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫اِجت َِهدْ ‪ /‬إِ َّن ا ْل َف ْض َل َْل يحص ُل إِ َّْل بِاْلجتِه ِ‬
‫اد‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫ْ َ‬ ‫ُ ْ َ‬ ‫ْ‬
‫ل ْصنَا ِم ‪ /‬إِن ََّها َْل َت ُض ُّر َو َْل َتنْ َف ُع‬ ‫َْل َت ْس ُجدُ ْوا ل ِ ْ َ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫الشهر َشهر ا ْل ُقر ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ ِ‬
‫آن‬ ‫َأكْث ُر ْوا م َن الت ََِّّل َوة ‪ /‬إِ َّن ٰه َذا َّ ْ َ ْ ُ ْ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫الل َْل َي ْق َب ُل إِ َّْل ْاْلَع َْم َال ا ْل َخال ِ َص َة‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َأ ْخل ُص ْوا في ْاْلَع َْمال ‪ /‬إِ َّن َ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫‪Summary‬‬
‫ُج ْم َلة َت ْعلِ ْیلِ َّیة‬
‫‪Without Additions‬‬ ‫‪Action – Reason‬‬ ‫ب ا ْل ُم ْح ِسن ِ ْی َن‬ ‫ِ‬

‫ِ‬
‫َأ ْحسن ُْوا إِ َّن َ‬
‫َل َع َّل ‪With‬‬ ‫الل َل َع َّل ُك ْم ُت ْفلِ ُح ْو َن‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪Action – Reason‬‬ ‫ا َّت ُق ْوا َ‬
‫‪Action – Reason‬‬ ‫الل َفإِ َّن ُه َخ َل َق َك‬
‫ُا ْع ُبدُ ْوا َ‬
‫َف ‪With‬‬
‫‪Reason – Action‬‬ ‫الل َر ِّبي َو َر ُّب ُك ْم َفا ْع ُبدُ ْو ُه‬
‫ُ‬
‫‪597‬‬
Part 6: ‫ُج ْم َلة ْاستِدْ َراكِ َّیة‬
Sometimes, an independent sentence may be used to remove a
presumption arising from the previous sentence.
This is called ‫ ُج ْم َلة ْاستِدْ َراكِ َّیة‬.
A ‫ ُج ْم َلة ْاستِدْ َراكِ َّیة‬is translated by adding but or however before it.
Types of ‫ُج ْم َلة ْاستِدْ َراكِ َّیة‬
There are two types of ‫ ُج ْم َلة ْاستِدْ َراكِ َّیة‬:
1. A ‫ ُج ْم َلة ْاستِدْ َراكِ َّیة‬with ‫ٰلكِ َّن‬
2. A ‫ ُج ْم َلة ْاستِدْ َراكِ َّیة‬with ‫ٰلكِ ْن‬
‫لكِ َّن‬
A ‫ ُج ْم َلة ْاستِدْ َراكِ َّیة‬can occur with the ‫ َح ْرف ُم َش َّبه بِا ْل ِف ْع ِل‬of ‫ ٰلكِ َّن‬.
‫َب ٰلكِ َّن َفاطِ َم َة َما َصا َم ْت‬
ُ ‫َصا َم ْت زَ ْين‬
Zainab fasted, but Fatima did not fast.
‫َخبَ ُر ٰلكِ َّن‬ ‫اِ ْس ُم ٰلكِ َّن‬ ‫َح ْرف ُم َشبَّه بِا ْل ِف ْع ِل‬
‫َما َصا َم ْت‬ ‫َفاطِ َم َة‬ ‫ٰلكِ َّن‬

‫اعل‬ َ ْ
ِ ‫ف ا ْلع ْط‬ ِ
The ‫ف‬ َ ُ ‫ َح ْر‬of ‫ َو‬can precede ‫ ٰلك َّن‬.
‫َب َو ٰلكِ َّن َفاطِ َم َة َما َصا َم ْت‬
ُ ‫َصا َم ْت زَ ْين‬
Zainab fasted, but Fatima did not fast.
598
‫ُه َو َي ُذ ُّم َك َو َلكِن ََّك َْل َت ُذ ُّم ُه‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫الل َي ْه ِد ْي ِه ْم‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َّاس َو ٰلك َّن َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َْل ن َْهدي الن َ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫ُن َعامِ ُل ُه ْم بِ َخ ْیر َو ٰلكِن َُّه ْم ُي َعامِ ُل ْو َننَا بِ َشر‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫ون﴾‬ ‫﴿ ِهي فِ ْتنَة َو َلكِ َّن َأ ْك َث َر ُه ْم َْل َي ْع َل ُم َ‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫َ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫﴿إِ َّن َوعْدَ الل َحق َو َلك َّن َأ ْك َث َر ُه ْم َْل َي ْع َل ُم ْو َن﴾‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫الل َْل ُي َبا ِر ُك َل َك فِ ْی ِه‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َّاس َو َت ْكذ ْب ُه ْم َي ِز ْد َما ُل َك َو ٰلك َّن َ‬ ‫إِ ْن َت ْخدَ ِع الن َ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫الل بِ ِه مِن َف َرائِ َض َو َْل‬ ‫ِ‬
‫الجنَّ َة َو ٰلكن َُّه ْم َْل َي ْف َع ُل ْو َن َما َأ َم َر ُه ُم ُ‬ ‫اس ُي ِر ْيدُ ْو َن َب ْل َيت ََمن َّْو َن َأن َّيدْ ُخ ُلوا َ‬ ‫َب ْع ُض النَّ ِ‬ ‫‪)7‬‬
‫اص ْي‬‫ب وا ْلمع ِ‬
‫الذن ُْو ِ َ َ َ‬ ‫الل َع َل ْی ِه ْم مِ َن ُّ‬ ‫َيت ُْرك ُْو َن َما َح َّر َم ُ‬
‫‪599‬‬
‫ٰلكِ ْن‬
‫‪َ .‬و ٰلكِ ْن ‪ٰ or‬لكِ ْن ‪َ of‬ح ْر ُف َع ْطف ‪ُ can occur with the‬ج ْم َلة ْاستِدْ َراكِ َّیة ‪A‬‬
‫َب ٰلكِ ْن َما َصا َم ْت َفاطِ َم ُة‬
‫َصا َم ْت زَ ْين ُ‬
‫َب َو ٰلكِ ْن َما َصا َم ْت َفاطِ َم ُة‬
‫َصا َم ْت زَ ْين ُ‬
‫‪Zainab fasted, but Fatima did not fast.‬‬
‫َاه ْم َو َلكِ ْن كَان ُْوا ُه ُم ال َّظال ِ ِم ْی َن﴾‬ ‫﴿ َو َما َظ َل ْمن ُ‬ ‫‪)1‬‬
‫َْل ن ُْش ِر ُك بِاللِ مِ ْن َش ْيء َو ٰلكِ ْن نُؤْ مِ ُن بِ ِه َوبِ َر ُس ْول ِ ِه ﷺ‬ ‫‪)2‬‬
‫َل ْی َس ٰهؤُ َْل ِء َع ٰلی ُهدً ی َو ٰلكِ ْن ُه ْم فِ ْي َض ََّلل ُمبِ ْین‬ ‫‪)3‬‬
‫َأ َما َح ِف ْظ َت الدَّ ْر َس؟ َب َلی! َح ِف ْظ ُت ُه َو ٰلكِ ْن ن َِس ْی ُت َأ ْك َث َر َما َح ِف ْظ ُت‬ ‫‪)4‬‬
‫ات َو ٰلكِ ْن ُي َح ِّر ُم ا ْل َخ َبائِ َث َو َما َي ُض ُّرنَا َو َْل َينْ َف ُعنَا‬ ‫َْل يحرم الل ال َّطیب ِ‬
‫ُ َ ِّ ُ ُ ِّ َ‬ ‫‪)5‬‬
‫ب ا ْل ِع ْل َم َو َلكِ ْن َْل َت ْجت َِهدُ َو ٰذل ِ َك َي ْحزُ نُن ِ ْي‬ ‫ِ‬
‫إِن ََّك َشاب َق ِوي َي ْستَط ْی ُع َأ ْن َي ْط ُل َ‬ ‫‪)6‬‬
‫الل ْل َينْ ُظ ُر إِ َلى َأ ْج َسامِ ُك ْم‪َ ،‬و َْل إِ َلى ُص َو ِرك ُْم‪َ ،‬و َلكِ ْن َينْ ُظ ُر إِ َلى ُق ُلوبِ ُك ْم»‬ ‫«إِ َّن َ‬ ‫‪)7‬‬
‫الس ُج ْو ِد‬
‫الرك ُْو ِع َو ُّ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫الص َل َوات ا ْل َخ ْم َس ُك َّل َها َو ٰلك ْن ُي ْس ِر ُع في ُّ‬
‫ِ‬
‫اب ُي َص ِّلي َّ‬ ‫الش ُّ‬ ‫ٰه َذا َ‬ ‫‪)8‬‬
‫ِ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َ )9‬دعَا النَّبِ َّیان ُم ْو َسی َو َه ُار ْو ُن ڽ ف ْرع َْو َن إِ َلی الل َولك ْن َما آ َم َن َب ِل ْ‬
‫اس َت ْك َب َر َو َق َال َأنَا َر ُّب ُك ْم‬
‫‪َ )10‬أ ْع َطینَا ا ْل َف ِقیر م ًاْل لِی ْشت َِري بِ ِه َطعاما و ٰلكِن َأبی و َق َال ُأ ِريدُ َأ ْن َأك ِْسب ا ْلم َال بِیدَ ي وآك َُل مِن َطیب ِ‬
‫ات َما‬ ‫ْ ِّ َ‬ ‫َ َّ‬ ‫َ َ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫َ ً َ ْ َ َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َْ َ‬ ‫ْ‬
‫ك ََس ْب ُت‬
‫‪Summary‬‬
‫استِدْ َراكِ َّیة‬
‫‪/‬و ٰلكِ َّن‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ٰلك َّن َ‬ ‫َح ْرف ُم َش َّبه بِا ْل ِف ْع ِل‬
‫‪/‬و ٰلكِ ْن‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ٰلك ْن َ‬ ‫ف َع ْطف‬
‫َح ْر ُ‬
‫‪600‬‬
Summary
Key Terms
‫ف‬ ِ ‫الشر‬
َ added to ‫ط‬ ْ َّ ‫اب‬
ُ ‫َج َو‬ ‫َفاء َرابِ َطة‬ Vocative Sentence ‫نِدَ اء‬
ِ ‫الشر‬
‫ َل‬added to ‫ط‬ ْ َّ ‫اب‬
ُ ‫َج َو‬ ِ ‫َْل ُم ا ْل َج َو‬
‫اب‬ Sentence After Vocative ‫اب النِّدَ ِاء‬ ُ ‫َج َو‬
Sentence
Sentence After an ‫َأ ْمر‬ ‫اب ْاْلَ ْم ِر‬
ُ ‫َج َو‬ Particle of Vocation ‫ف النِّدَ ِاء‬ُ ‫َح ْر‬
Sentence After an ‫ن َْهي‬ ‫اب الن َّْه ِي‬
ُ ‫َج َو‬ Oath ‫َق َسم‬
Sentence that shows ‫ُج ْم َلة َت ْعلِ ْیلِ َّیة‬ Sentence After Oath ‫اب ا ْل َق َس ِم‬
ُ ‫َج َو‬
reason
Sentence that removes ‫استِدْ َراكِ َّیة‬
ْ ‫ُج ْم َلة‬ Conditional Conjunction
ِ ‫الشر‬
‫ط‬ ْ َّ ‫َأ َدا ُة‬
a presumption
‫ َح ْرف ُم َش َّبه بِا ْل ِف ْع ِل‬, so that ‫َل َع َّل‬ Condition Clause ‫َش ْرط‬
‫ َح ْرف ُم َش َّبه بِا ْل ِف ْع ِل‬, however ‫ٰلكِ َّن‬ Result Clause
ِ ‫الشر‬
ُ ‫َج َو‬
Vocabulary
ِ ‫الشر‬
‫ط‬ ْ َّ ‫َأ ْس َما ُء‬
however َ ‫ َك ْی‬whoever
‫ف‬ ‫َم ْن‬
from wherever, ‫َأنَّی‬ whatever ‫َما‬
however
however many ‫ك َْم‬ wherever ‫َأ ْي َن‬
whichever ‫َأي‬ whenever ‫َمتَی‬
whenever َ ‫َأ َّي‬

‫ان‬
ِ ‫الشر‬
ُ ‫َح ُر ْو‬
if ‫ َل ْو َْل‬if ‫إِ ْن‬
if ‫َل ْو‬
601
‫أس َماء‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪form, picture‬‬ ‫‪ُ footsteps‬ص ْو َرة ج ُص َور‬ ‫ُخ ْط َوة ج ُخ ُط َوات‬
‫‪time‬‬ ‫ُص ْور‬

‫َصر ج ع ُ‬
‫‪ body‬ع ْ‬ ‫ِج ْسم ج َأ ْج َسام‬
‫‪to criticise‬‬ ‫‪َ to dislike, hate‬ذ َّم َي ُذ ُّم َذ ًما‬ ‫َأ ْبغ ََض ُي ْب ِغ ُض إ ْبغ ً‬
‫َاضا‬
‫‪to be safe‬‬ ‫‪َ to fear‬سلِ َم َي ْس َل ُم َس ََّل َم ًة‬ ‫اِ َّت َقی َيت َِّقي اِ ِّت َقا ًء‬
‫‪to live‬‬ ‫َاش َي ِع ْی ُش َع ْی ًشا‬ ‫‪ to reward‬ع َ‬ ‫َأ َج َر َي ْأ ُج ُر َأ ْج ًرا‬
‫‪to deal‬‬ ‫‪ to inform‬عَا َم َل ُي َعامِ ُل ُم َعا َم َل ًة‬ ‫َأ ْخ َب َر ُي ْخبِ ُر إِ ْخ َب ًارا‬
‫‪to protect‬‬ ‫َص َم َي ْع ِص ُم ِع ْص َم ًة‬ ‫‪ to please‬ع َ‬ ‫َأ ْر َضی ُي ْر ِض ْي إِ ْر َضا ًء‬
‫‪to praise‬‬ ‫َمدَ َح َي ْمدَ ُح َمدْ ًحا‬ ‫‪to bless‬‬ ‫َب َار َك ُي َب ِ‬
‫ار ُك ُم َب َار َك ًة‬
‫‪to advice‬‬ ‫َظ َي ِع ُظ َو ْع ًظا‬

‫‪َ to make sad‬وع َ‬ ‫َحزَ َن َي ْحزُ ُن ُحزْ نًا‬
‫‪602‬‬
Other Publications
Written specifically for English Fundamental in understanding

speakers in an easy-to- the Quran. First Steps to
understand style, First Steps to Understanding Balagah is a basic
Understanding Nahw is a introduction to the subject,
simplified, brief introduction to providing a brief overview of
the Arabic Language with a fresh essential concepts.
approach.
Suitable for non-native speakers, Designed with a focus on reading

even those without Urdu or its only, First Steps to Reading Urdu
sister languages. A new, user- is an entry-level text. Rules are
friendly textbook teaching taught with lessons, exercises,
grammar rules and vocabulary, and English examples to relate
reinforced using exercises. pronunciation to English words.
603
Other Publications
A brief Arabic introduction to the

basic concepts of Nahw, based on
the Awamil of al-Jurjani and al-
Birkwi, and others.
Structured with clear headings
and the use of colour for ease of
navigation. Self-explanatory
tables at the end of the book to
make key concepts accessible.
604

FSTU Arabic

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

FSTU Arabic

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

FSTU Arabic

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

First Steps to Understanding

Compiler Hashim Mohamed

Contact: Al-Qalam Institute

If you see any mistakes in this book, have any comments or

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be

All praise is due to Allah ▐, without whose help nothing is

particle ‫َح ْرف ج ُح ُر ْوف‬ noun ‫اِ ْسم ج َأ ْس َماء‬

Characteristic 1: Definite and Indefinite

Translation of ‫َا ْل‬

pen ‫ َق َلم ج َأ ْق ََّلم‬woman ‫ نِ ْس َوة‬،‫اِ ْم َرأة ج نِ َساء‬

book ‫كِتَاب ج ُكتُب‬ garden, heaven ‫َجنَّة ج َجنَّات‬

teacher (female) ‫ ُم َع ِّل َمة ج ُم َع ِّل َمات‬messenger ‫َر ُس ْول ج ُر ُسل‬

hand )‫ َأ َياد (مث‬،‫َيد ج َأ ْيد‬ sky َ ‫َس َماء ج َس َم‬

child ‫طِ ْف َلة ج َأ ْط َفال‬ daughter ‫بِنْت ج َبنَات‬

uncle (father’s brother) ‫ عَم ج َأع َْمام‬grandfather ‫َجد ج َأ ْجدَ اد‬

night ‫ َل ْیل ج َل َیال‬،‫َل ْی َلة‬ grandmother ‫َجدَّ ة ج َجدَّ ات‬

Natural Gender ‫ُأم‬

Feminine ‫ُمؤَ نَّث‬ Grammatical Sign ‫َجنَّة‬

Arab Usage ‫َأ ْرض‬

‫‪sincere‬‬ ‫ُم ْخلِص ج ْو َن‬ ‫‪patient‬‬ ‫َصابِر ج ْو َن‬

‫‪believer‬‬ ‫ُمؤْ مِن ج ْو َن‬ ‫‪pious‬‬ ‫َصالِح ج ْو َن‬

nation ‫َق ْوم ج َأ ْق َوام‬ brother ‫ إِ ْخ َوة‬،‫َأخ ج إِ ْخ َوان‬

people ‫نَاس ج ُأنَاس‬ mountain ‫َج َبل ج ِج َبال‬

star ‫ن َْجم ج ن ُُج ْوم‬ chapter ‫ُس ْو َرة ج ُس َور‬

child, son ‫ َو َلد ج َأ ْو َْلد‬guest ‫َض ْیف ج ُض ُی ْوف‬

‫َض َّمة‬ ‫َفت َْحة‬ ‫ك َْس َرة‬

‫َض َّمة ( ـَـات )‬ ‫ك َْس َرة ( ـَـات )‬

‫َض َّمة‬ ‫َفت َْحة‬

Feminine ‫ُمؤَ نَّث‬ Grammatical Sign (‫)ة‬ ‫َجنَّة‬

‫َم ْر ُف ْوع‬ ‫ـــــ‬ ‫ـــــ‬ ِ ‫ـ‬

‫‪to fall‬‬ ‫‪َ to believe‬س َق َط َي ْس ُق ُط ُس ُق ْو ًطا‬ ‫آ َم َن ُيؤْ مِ ُن إِ ْي َمانًا‬

‫‪to fast‬‬ ‫ص ْو ُم َص ْو ًما‪ِ ،‬صیَا ًما‬

‫‪to stand‬‬ ‫َقا َم َي ُق ْو ُم قِ َیا ًما‬ ‫‪to come‬‬ ‫جي ُء َم ِ‬

Irab of ‫فِ ْع ُل ْاْلَ ْم ِر‬

Irab Table of Verbs

‫َض َّمة‬ ‫َفت َْحة‬ ‫ُس ُك ْون‬

‫‪to hear, listen‬‬ ‫‪َ to make‬س ِم َع َي ْس َم ُع َس ْم ًعا‬ ‫َج َع َل َي ْج َع ُل َج ْع ًَّل‬

‫‪to die‬‬ ‫ت َم ْو ًتا‬

to read ‫ َق َر َأ َي ْق َر ُأ قِ َرا َء ًة‬to create ‫َخ َل َق َي ْخ ُل ُق َخ ْل ًقا‬

‫ُا ْس ُتغ ِْف َر‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫است ْغ ِف َر‬

‫َي ْس َتغ ِْف ُر‬

water ‫َماء ج مِ َیاه‬ food ‫َط َعام ج َأ ْط ِع َمة‬

king ‫َملِك ج ُم ُل ْوك‬ destitute ‫َف ِق ْیر ج ُف َق َرا ُء‬

ُ ‫) َلن ُّي ْظ َل َم الن‬16

‫‪Present Habitual‬‬ ‫‪Zaid goes‬‬ ‫َي ْذ َه ُ‬

‫‪Future‬‬ ‫‪Zaid will go‬‬ ‫َي ْذ َه ُ‬

‫َح ْرف عَامِل‬

‫َح ْرف َغ ْی ُر عَامِل‬

‫َم ْرزُ ْوق‬ ‫ُمنْ َذر‬

Adjective hardworking rich

‫‪to be thirsty‬‬ ‫‪ to hasten‬عَطِ َش َي ْع َط ُش َع َط ًشا‬ ‫َأ ْس َر َع ُي ْس ِر ُع إِ ْس َراعًا‬

‫‪to be abundant‬‬ ‫َك ُث َر َي ْك ُث ُر َك ْث َر ًة‬ ‫‪to attend‬‬ ‫َح َض َر َي ْح ُض ُر ُح ُض ْو ًرا‬

‫‪to be sick‬‬ ‫َم ِر َض َي ْم َر ُض َم َر ًضا‬ ‫‪to thank‬‬ ‫َش َك َر َي ْش ُك ُر ُش ْك ًرا‬

Three-Letter ‫َر ِازق‬

Three-Letter ‫َم ْرزُ ْوق‬

‫اِ ْس ُم ال َّت ْف ِض ْی ِل‬ Comparative -er ‫َأ ْف َع ُل‬

a state of a verb ‫َم ْجزُ ْوم‬ ‫ف‬ ِ ‫َم ْع ِر َفة ج َم َع‬

non-governing particle ‫َغ ْی ُر عَامِل‬

‫‪chapter‬‬ ‫‪ُ brother‬س ْو َرة ج ُس َور‬ ‫َأخ ج إِ ْخ َوان‪ ،‬إِ ْخ َوة‬